Building Automation Controls Catalog 2006 - Trane

Model Number Index Pages A2-A6 

TEMPERATURE 

Pages 1-74 

Thermistors, RTDs, Transmitters, Infrared, Accessories 

HUMIDITY 

Pages 75-108 

RH, Dew Point, Wet Bulb, Enthalpy, Room, Duct, OSA, 

Calibrators 

POWER MONITORING 

Pages 109-142 

Current & Potential Transformers, Current Switches, 

Current, Voltage, Phase Loss, Power Factor, Frequency 

Transducers, Power Monitors 

PRESSURE 

Pages 143-200 

Transmitters, Display Transmitters, Switches, Gauges, 

Room Pressure Monitor, Bypass Valve Assembly, 

Snubbers 

FLOW 

Pages 201-232 

Transmitters, Sensors, Switches, BTU Meters 

SPECIALTY SENSORS 

Pages 233-292 

Carbon Dioxide, Carbon Monoxide, Conductivity, pH, 

Refrigerant, Toxic & Combustible Gas, IAQ, Damper 

Position, Weather Instruments 

TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION 

Pages 293-308 

Digital Displays, Alarm Stations, Signal Generators, 

Temperature Meters, Humidity Meters, Carbon Dioxide 

Meters, Multimeters, Data Loggers, Calibration Devices 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS 

Pages 309-358 

Isolation, Multiplexers, Pneumatic, Resistance, 

Sequencers, Voltage & Current Conversion, Set Point 

Controllers, Square Root Extractors 

LIGHTING CONTROLS 

Pages 359-390 

Lighting Control Panels, Occupancy Sensors, Light 

Level Transmitters & Switches, Contactors, Relays 

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS 

Pages 391-414 

Firestats, Freezestats, Smoke Detectors, Surge Protectors, 

Thermostat Guards, Time Clocks, Time Switches 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

PSI 

HVAC CONTROLS 

Pages 415-468 

Thermostats, Electronic Controls, Pneumatic Controls, 

Set Point Controllers 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS 

Pages 469-510 

Dampers, Direct Coupled Actuators, Foot-Mount Motors, 

Pneumatic Damper Actuators 

CONTROL VALVES 

Pages 511-576 

Ball, Butterfly, Solenoid, Globe, Zone, Rotary 

ENCLOSURES 

Pages 577-598 

General Purpose, NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4, & 4X, Perforated 

& Solid Panels 

POWER SUPPLIES 

Pages 599-618 

Control Transformers, Linear, Switching, DIN Rail, 

DC Power Supplies 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS 

Pages 619-656 

Plug-In, Power, Multi-Voltage, Time Delay, Alternating & 

Contactors 

PANEL & INSTALLATION 

Pages 657-696 

Fuses, Switches, Terminal Blocks, Pilot Lights, Strobes, 

Horns, Pneumatic Fittings, Tubing, Wire, Wire Duct, Wire 

Ties, Bridle Rings, J-Hooks, Beam Clamps 

NETWORK & WIRELESS 

Pages 697-728 

Wireless Sensors, Transmitters, Receivers, Repeaters & 

Gateways, LON Sensors, Actuators & Controls, N2 

Sensors 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

Pages 729-772 

Controls, Explosionproof Enclosures, Intrinsic Safety 

Barriers, Intrinsically Safe & Explosionproof Sensors, 

Transmitters, Switches, Strobes 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE 

Pages 773-802 

Product Selection Guides, Conversion Tables, Technical 

Articles, Quick Tips, Calculations, Rating System 

70°

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX 

Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page 

1 

105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765 

189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 

104ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 

106EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765 

116EXMST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765 

13F142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

140T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .749, 750 

140T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279, 280 

14121-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 

1500 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 

1550 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 216 

160 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 

1900-5-MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 

190XSUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

1910 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 

1950G SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .738 

2 

21F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 

22/07-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 

23F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 

24-013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190 

24-014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189, 190 

25 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 

200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 

200-IS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .754 

201A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 131 

209 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 176 

209PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 

220B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 

220SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 

225B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 

226B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 

226SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 

228B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 

228C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 

228PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 

228SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 

250B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 

251 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 

260 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 154 

269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 

2000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 196 

21121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460 

2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 224 

2200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 

20307 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 

3 

3PT3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

3W15US.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526 

30-3003D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .761, 762 

33 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 

35A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 

310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 

340 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 218 

355 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 

356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 462 

357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 462 

360-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 

392-SVSR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 

3000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 

3100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 224 

4 

4BRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 

4CMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124 

4CTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121, 122 

4GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 250 

41F SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 

460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 

468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

47B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

47S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

438USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652 

438USA-INT . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 652 

475-FM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 

490 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 

4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 

500T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 

501T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 

550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 278 

550-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747, 748 

5530M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765 

51012218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 

6H38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 

6M30 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 

6W30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 

600T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 

601T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 

603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 

603D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 

691 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 

691-U100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 

694 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 

626600A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227, 228 

70-781D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 

70-782D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 

70-783D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 

70-784D-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 

A2 

747B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

747S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

781 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628 

782 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628 

783 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628 

784 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628 

7001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 

711271 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239, 240 

89STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 

860D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 

868 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 

868STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 

869 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 

869STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 

878EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765 

879EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765 

880D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 

885D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 

8001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248 

8002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248 

8003 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248 

8205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 274 

8210 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 530 

821TD10H . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656 

8238 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 532 

8225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 276 

5 9 

6 

7 

9002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 106 

93000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 

93000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 

A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680 

A11 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 

A15 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526 

A19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448 

A19AUC-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757 

A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 

A-300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

A319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448 

A350 . . . . . . . . . . .449, 450, 451, 452 

A419 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .447, 448 

A70 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 

A70 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 282 

ABB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 

ABW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 

AC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 

AC1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 

ACI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 34 

ACI/RH SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 94 

ACK6F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 

AF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 500 

8 

A



AFS-222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184 

AFS-262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184 

AFS-460 . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 184, 185 

AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 

AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 

ALD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498 

AM-401 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .760 

AMP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 

AOW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 

APB-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 

APW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 

AQS00660 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 

AQS00661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 

ASG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 

ASW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 

AT-1100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 

AT140A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 

AT150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 

AT150F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 

AT175F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 

AT87A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 

AVS-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 

B 

B SERIES FITTINGS . . . . . .689, 690 

B120E-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372 

B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540 

B230E-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372 

B277E-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372 

B3 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540 

B347D-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 372 

BA PROBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 38 

BA ROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 36 

BA/HSERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 96 

BAM-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 

BKA/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 

BKT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 

BKT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 

BLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 

BVA-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 

C 

C SERIES FITTINGS . .691, 692, 693 

C500 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 

C7232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243, 244 

CAT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 

CBL SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 

CD-420 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 

CD50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 

CD-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242 

CI-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 368 

CI-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 

CLC-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 

CN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .647, 648 

CONCEPT SERIES . . . . . . .592, 593 

CS1150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116 

CS1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116 

CTW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378 

CX-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 368 

CXJ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766 

D 

D-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 

D-4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 

DCP-1.5-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 

DCP-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 

DCP-524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 

DCPA-1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 

DDN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 

DH100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .395, 396 

DIGI-42 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 

DIN-3F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 

DN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 

DP3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 104 

DPA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 144 

DPW-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 

DPW-692 SERIES . . . . . . . .165, 166 

DRS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 

DS-2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283, 284 

DT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339, 340 

DTFXL Series . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222 

DTK SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 

DURADRIVE SERIES . . . . .557, 558 

E 

E100E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 

E150E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 

E300E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 

E500E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 

EASYCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 

EHRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 

EJB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763, 764 

E-LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 

ELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751, 752 

EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 

EN3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 104 

EP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 

EPETD8S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .758 

ES-1051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

ET SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 

EVSI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 534 

EYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767 

F 

F01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 

F01A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768 

F-1000 SERIES . . . . . .690, 694, 695 

F2B-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 

A3 

F2N-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 

F2S-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 

F61 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 232 

F7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 

FAS-TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 

FC/FCS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 

FILN05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 

FLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

FLQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

FS1-6 229, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 

G 

G2R SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 624 

G7L SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 

GBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490 

GCA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492 

GDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490 

GEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490 

GF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

GIB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490 

GLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 490 

GM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498 

GMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491, 492 

GMD20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 246 

GMT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .253, 254 

GMT XP SERIES . . . . . . . . . .745, 746 

GMT200 SERIES . . . . . . . . .245, 246 

GMW21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 246 

GRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767 

GUBB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .763, 764 

H 

H_10K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 

H_1K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 

H_30K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 

H_31K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 84 

H08 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 

H3B SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737 

HC SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 

HC-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 

HC-201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 

HCT-859-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 

HCT-881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733 

HD1K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 

HD20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 88 

HD30K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 

HF20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86 

HGM300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262 

HGM-SZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 

HHT2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 

HHT2-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 

HHT2-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 

HL600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742 

HM_ 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 

HM_ 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98



HM34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 

HMW 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 

HMW 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 

HO20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 88 

HRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

HSP-121BT1RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 

HT2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 

HT2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 

HT2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 

HT829 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 102 

HT839 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 102 

HT880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735, 736 

HTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733 

HW10K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 

HW20K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86 

HW-76B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 

HZLIM SERIES . . . . . . . . . .755, 756 

I 

ISPL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 

ISPR2 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .743, 744 

IXLdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739, 740 

J 

JMP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 

K 

K1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741 

K235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

K-332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 

K-337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

K-339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

K-383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

K-384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

K-387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

KA-175 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .475, 476 

KA-35 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .473, 474 

KAS-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 

KAS-44 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 

KAS-88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 

KBV SERIES 571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 

576 

KCO SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234 

KE375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645, 646 

KE900 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .645, 646 

KEL71/120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 

KEL72/120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 

KHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78 

KHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78 

KHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 78 

KIP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 

KLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

KMS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 

KT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 

KT600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 424 

KTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30 

KTEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 426 

KTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30 

KTR* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 28 

KTW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 30 

KV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 

KVA-24-NO/NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 

KVC SERIES . . . . . . . .513, 517, 518 

KVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 

KZ SERIES . . . . . . . . .511, 512, †514 

L 

L4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 

L4-CN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753 

LD1-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 

LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 500 

L-KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 

LM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498 

LP-2800 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 

LP-3500 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .359, 360 

LPI-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 

LPI-1C-A, -G, -R . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 

LPI-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 

LPI-3C-A, -G, -R . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 

LPI-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 

LPI-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 

LPI-5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 

LP-KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 

LP-PK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 

LS45M91B11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 

LU SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285, 286 

LVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 134 

LY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 624 

M 

M SERIES FITINGS . . . . . . .694, 695 

M10/16SFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 

M100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .503, 504 

M230 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168 

M230-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 

M-2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

M264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 146 

M267MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 158 

M30/40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 150 

M4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 

M4/6SNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 

M4/8SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 

M4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502 

M6/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 

M6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502 

M7000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502 

M8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 502 

M9000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .501, 502 

M9000-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 

A4 

M9100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .479, 480 

M9200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .481, 482 

MA6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760 

MK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623, 624 

MK-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 

MK-7100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .506 

MK7-B SERIES . . . . . . . . . .373, 374 

ML SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 

ML SERIES DCA . . . . . . . . .483, 484 

MOB-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410 

MOB-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410 

MP6 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760 

MP8000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .563, 564 

MPA-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 

MPM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 

MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 160 

MR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 642 

MR-604/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410 

MR-608/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409, 410 

MRH SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 92 

MS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 

MTL5000 SERIES 769, 770, 771, 772 

MTL7000 . . . . . . .769, 770, 771, 772 

MX40-6 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .493, 494 

MX40-7 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .495, 496 

MX8001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 

N 

N SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 

NEMA 1 LARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 

NEMA 1 MEDIUM . . . . . . . . . . . .585 

NEMA 1 SMALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 

NEMA 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 

NEMA 3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 

NEMA 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 

NEMA 4X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 

NF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 500 

NG2DW1500B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 

NM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498 

NVF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548 

NVS ERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550 

O 

OS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252 

OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 62 

OSA* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 

P 

P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 

P10 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 

P2RF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626 

P32 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 

P352 . . . . . . . . . . .449, 450, 451, 452 

P51 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 174 

P74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191



PAM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 

PAM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 

PC642C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 

PCM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 164 

PDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 

PERF PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 

PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626 

PG SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 

PIL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387, 388 

PIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 

PLG50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767 

PN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378 

PN-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 

PN-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 

PN-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 

PQ-1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271, 272 

PRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 

PS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 

PS5R SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .615, 616 

PSM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 

PSR-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 376 

PSR-1-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375, 376 

PSS2 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .177, 178 

PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

PT-9000 SERIES .137, 138, 139, 140 

PTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625, 626 

PT-NT4-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 

PT-NT4-N2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 

PT-NTL-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 

PTX1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .179, 180 

PV600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

PVI-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172 

PVI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172 

PVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 134 

PW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 

PWA SERIES . . . .331, 332, 333, 334 

PXZ4 . . . . . . . . . . .343, 344, 455, 456 

Q 

Q674 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 428 

QZ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 

R 

R353 SERIES . . . .449, 450, 451, 452 

R-3710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 

R-3710 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 

RAD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 

RCB-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385, 386 

RCD40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 

RDI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707, 708 

RDM800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 

RDO-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711, 712 

RES-1 . . . . . . . . . .327, 328, 329, 330 

RET SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 

RFS-4001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 

RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 620 

RH2LB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 

RH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 182 

RH-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 182 

RI-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709, 710 

RI-4-K4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717, 718 

RIB . . . . . . . . . . . .633, 634, 635, 636 

RIB M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .637, 638 

RIB TR SERIES . . . . . . . . . .607, 608 

RIB01BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 

RIB01SBDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 

RIB02BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 

RIB02SBDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 

RIB21CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 

RIBT PILOT SERIES . . . . . .633, 634 

RIBT POWER SERIES . . . . .635, 636 

RIBX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 118 

RIBXG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 

RIBXK SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 

RIBX-V SERIES . . . . . . . . . .119, 120 

RJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 

RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 

RLD-134A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 268 

RLD-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265, 266 

RO-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713, 714 

RPM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 162 

RPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

RPT-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721, 722 

RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715, 716 

RR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 620 

RR-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 384 

RR-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 384 

RSSDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649, 650 

RST-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719, 720 

RTC-2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442 

RTE SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .653, 654 

RT-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701, 702 

RT-R-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717, 718 

RT-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705, 706 

RT-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703, 704 

RT-U-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717 

RUT-G . . . . . . . . . .723, 724, 725, 726 

S 

S SERIES ACTUATORS . . .487, 488 

S SERIES FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . .696 

S101144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 

S-120/277/347E-P . . . . . . . .371, 372 

S15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526 

S241HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 

S469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 

S60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526 

SAK4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 

SAK6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 

A5 

SC SERIES ENCLOSURES . . . . .583 

SC SERIES HORNS . . . . . . . . . . .672 

SCS1.5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116 

SCS1150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116 

SCT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 

SD-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

SD-1300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 

SD-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 

SDI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 

SENTRY 100 SERIES . . . . . . . . .125 

SENTRY 200 SERIES . . . . . . . . .126 

SENTRY 200-A SERIES . . . . . . .127 

SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622 

SH17 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 

SLS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 

SM-501 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .391, 392 

SR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622 

SS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 380 

SSPL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 

SSS-1000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .205 

ST120 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 

ST20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 

ST-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 

ST-A* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 

ST-AV81H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 

ST-AV81R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42 

ST-AV85H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 

ST-AV85R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42 

ST-AV91H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 

ST-AV91R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42 

STB, STB-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 

ST-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 

ST-D* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 

ST-FZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 18 

ST-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 22 

ST-R* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 

ST-R*S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 

ST-R*SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 

ST-R� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 

ST-R�R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 

ST-R�S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 

ST-R�SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 

ST-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 

ST-S* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 

ST-S*E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 4 

ST-S*EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 3, 4 

ST-S*K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 6 

ST-S*P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 8 

ST-S�E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 

ST-T90EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52 

ST-T90K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52 

ST-T91E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54 

ST-T91K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54 

ST-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 

ST-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 20



ST-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 

T 

T1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 

T-100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .687, 688 

T-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 

T-141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687, 688 

T155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 438 

T158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 

T167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 438 

T168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 

T168 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 

T170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 436 

T25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434 

T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434 

T30/40 SERIES . . . . . . . . . .149, 150 

T4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .457, 458 

T46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 434 

T5U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 

T6051B1006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .758 

T63U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 

T6570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 

T6575 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 

T6984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443, 444 

T7300F2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 420 

T7984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 446 

T81U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 

T8570 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 

T8575 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 

T85U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 

T874 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 428 

T90U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 52 

T91H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56 

T91L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56 

T91U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56 

TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378 

TB8220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 422 

TC-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 

TC-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 

TC-1100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 

TCC-111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 

TCC-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 

TDRSOXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656 

TDRSRXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656 

TE-6300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 

TE-63xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 

TF142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400 

TG500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 

TH8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 422 

THERA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 

TK-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460 

TK-5000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 

TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377, 378 

TM99A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 

TP1-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235, 236 

T-PB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 

TR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 390 

TR10K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

TRANSZORB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 

TS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 

TS-200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 

TS-200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 

TS-470 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 

TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 400 

TT111H-0800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 

TT211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731, 732 

TT-801 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64 

TT-807 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64 

TT-809 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 66 

TT859 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 

TT881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733, 734 

TWS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 

TY7321A1009 . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 72 

U 

U3889 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 

UAT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335, 336 

UAT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335, 336 

UCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 

UCM-420A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453, 454 

UCM-420A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345, 346 

UCO-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319, 320 

UCO-44T OPTION . . . . . . . .319, 320 

UCP-242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 312 

UCP-322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313, 314 

UCP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315, 316 

UCP-522 . . . . . . . .321, 322, 323, 324 

UCP-622 . . . . . . . .321, 322, 323, 324 

UCS-121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347, 348 

UCS-221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 350 

UCS-421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352 

UCS-621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 354 

UFT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 220 

UMM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 342 

UMM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 342 

UMX-4 . . . . . . . . . .355, 356, 357, 358 

UMX-8 . . . . . . . . . .355, 356, 357, 358 

US* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 

US� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 

V 

V SERIES 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570 

V11 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .465, 466 

V200, V300 . . . . . .513, 514, 515, 516 

V-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563, 564 

V5011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541, 542 

V5013 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .541, 542 

V5860 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .523, 524 

VA301C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260 

VA301EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 258 

A6 

VA-7000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .561, 562 

VASQN8X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 

VB SERIES .551, 552, 553, 554, 555, 

556 

VB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 536 

VB3 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 536 

V-BAR 700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 

VD-1300 SERIES . . . . . . . . .507, 508 

VERSA-CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 

VG1000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .537, 538 

VG7000 SERIES . . . . . . . . .559, 560 

VGF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .543, 544 

VM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 522 

VPI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 

VT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 520 

VTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 338 

W 

W30 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 170 

W30-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 

W351 . . . . . . . . . .449, 450, 451, 452 

W92S SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 

W9AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 

WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 

WB3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 

WB3A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 

WCO-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 238 

WD-1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 

WD-2-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 

WEL-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 

WEL-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 

WMB-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

WMB-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

WPS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 

WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 

WS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .369, 370 

X 

XLdp SERIES . . . . . . . . . . .147, 148 

Y 

Y63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 

Y65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 

Y66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 

Z 

ZGR01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 

ZPS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 156 

ZS-260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .759

TEMPERATURE

PRODUCTS 

Check out the NEW 

ACI Series BAS/HVAC 

Temperature Sensor on 

page 33! 

Executive 

Space 

Surface-Mount 

Space 

Stainless Steel 

Flush 

TEMPERATURE 

10,000 

2252 

ST-S3E ST-S21E 

S85E ST-S91E 

ST-S3P ST-S21 

S85P ST-S91 

ST-S3 ST-S2 

ST-S91 

SERVICES 

See our helpful Sensor 

Resistance Chart on 

page 1! 

ST- 

SOLUTIONS 

We offer the variety of 

temperature products you 

need to meet most temperature 

sensing applications. 

MODEL/SERIES PAGE 

Sensor Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 

THERMISTORS AND RTD SENSORS 

ACI Series — Room, Duct, OSA, Immersion Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 

AS — Platinum RTD Temerparture Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 

BAPI Series — Room, Duct, OSA, Immersion Sensors and Transmitters . . . . . . . . . .35, 37 

KTR* — Low Cost Decorator Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 

KTD*, KTO*, KTW* — Low Cost Duct, Immersion, OSA Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 

S101144, S469 — Thermal Ribbon RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 

S241HC — High Temperature Smoke Stack and Boiler RTD Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 

ST-A* — All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 

ST-AV*H — Flexible RTD Duct Averaging Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 40 

ST-AV*R — Rigid RTD Duct Averaging Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 

ST-D* — Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 44 

ST-FZ* — Averaging Thermistor Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 

ST-O* — Outdoor Air Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21,44 

ST-R*/ST-R*R — Encapsulated Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 

ST-R*S/ST-R*SC — Encapsulated Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 

ST-S* — Stainless Steel Flush Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 

ST-S*E — Executive Decorator Zone Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,43 

ST-S*K — New Elegant Decorator Zone Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 

ST-S*P — Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 

ST-U* — Universal Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 44 

ST-W* — Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 44 

TE-6300 — Nickel Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 

US* — Universal Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 

RTD TRANSMITTERS 

OSA* — Outside Air Thermistor and RTD Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 

ST-T90E — Fixed Range Room Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 

ST-T91E — Room Sensor/Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 

T5U, T63U, T85U — 1000� Rangeable Transmitters Balco, Nickel, Platinum . . . . . . . . . .58 

T81U — Rangeable Transmitter for 100� 385 Curve RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 

T90U — Fixed Range Duct, Immmersion, OSA Temperature Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 

T91 — Rangeable Transmitter for 1000� 375 Curve RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 

TT111 — High Temperature RTD Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 

TT-801/TT-807 — Transmitters for Platinum RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 

TT-809 — Transmitter for 1000� RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 

TT859 — Space Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 

INFRARED TRANSMITTERS 

TY-7321A1009 — Infrared Radiant Room Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47-50 

Sensor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45-47 

Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 74 

Indicates New Products

TEMPERATURE 

SENSOR SELECTION CHART 

INSTALLATION 

APPLICATION 

Decorative 

space 

Executive 

space 

Surface-mount 

space 

Stainless steel 

flush 

Universal mount 

and accessories 

All-purpose 

mount 

Duct mount 

Averaging flex 

averaging rigid 

Immersion 

(with well) 

Outside air 

Stainless 

sheath 

Encapsulated 

sensor 

Low-cost 

room sensor 

Low-cost 

universal mount 

Low-cost plastic 

outside air 

Low-cost 

metal duct 

Low-cost 

metal immersion 

Low-cost 

metal OSA 

10,000Ω Type III 

2252Ω Type II 

3000Ω Type II 

THERMISTORS 

10,000Ω Type II 

100,000Ω Type II 

20,000Ω Type IV 

100Ω Platinum 385 

PLATINUM RTDs 


ST-S3K ST-S21K ST-S22K ST-S24K ST-S27K ST-S42K ST-S81K ST-S85K ST-S91K 

ST-S3E ST-S21E ST-S22E ST-S24E ST-S27E ST-S42E ST-S81E ST-S85E ST-S91E 

ST-S3P ST-S21P ST-S22P ST-S24P ST-S27P ST-S42P ST-S81P ST-S85P ST-S91P 

ST-S3 ST-S21 ST-S22 ST-S24 ST-S27 ST-S42 ST-S81 ST-S85 ST-S91 

ST-U3 ST-U21 ST-U22 ST-U24 ST-U27 ST-U42 ST-U81 ST-U85 ST-U91 

ST-A3 ST-A21 ST-A22 ST-A24 ST-A27 ST-A42 ST-A81 ST-A85 ST-A91 

ST-D3 ST-D21 ST-D22 ST-D24 ST-D27 ST-D42 ST-D81 ST-D85 ST-D91 

ST-FZ3 ST-FZ21 ST-FZ22 ST-FZ24 ST-FZ27 ST-FZ42 ST-AV81H ST-AV85H ST-AV91H 

ST-AV81R ST-AV85R ST-AV91R 

ST-W3 ST-W21 ST-W22 ST-W24 ST-W27 ST-W42 ST-W81 ST-W85 ST-W91 

ST-O3 ST-O21 ST-O22 ST-O24 ST-O27 ST-O42 ST-O81 ST-O85 ST-O91 

ST-R3S ST-R21S ST-R22S ST-R24S ST-R27S ST-R42S ST-R81S ST-R85S ST-R91S 

ST-R3 ST-R21 ST-R22 ST-R24 ST-R27 ST-R42 ST-R81 ST-R85 ST-R91 

KT-R3R KT-R21R KT-R22R KT-R24R KT-R27R KT-R42R KT-R81R KT-R85R KT-R91R 

US-3 US-21 US-22 US-24 US-27 US-42 US-81 US-85 US-91 

OSA-3 OSA-21 OSA-22 OSA-24 OSA-27 OSA-42 OSA-81 OSA-85 OSA-91 

KTD3 KTD21 KTD22 KTD24 KTD27 KTD42 KTD81 KTD85 KTD91 

KTW3 KTW21 KTW22 KTW24 KTW27 KTW42 KTW81 KTW85 KTW91 

KTO3 KTO21 KTO22 KTO24 KTO27 KTO42 KTO81 KTO85 KTO91 


SENSOR TYPE TEMPERATURE SENSOR DESCRIPTION TYPICAL SENSOR USER 

3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77˚F, Type III material AET, American Automatrix, Andover, Carrier, Delta, Invensys, 

(Siebe), Teletrol, York 

21 2252Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material Anderson Cornelius, JCI (A319) 

22 3000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material Alerton, ASI, ATS, Snyder General 

24 10,000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material Alerton, Automated Logic, T.A.C. (CSI), Triangle Microsystems, Trane 

27 100,000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type II material Siemens (Landis and Staefa) 

42 20,000Ω thermistor @77˚F, Type IV material Honeywell (XL) 

81 100Ω platinum RTD @ 32˚F, 385 curve Transmitter available for any user 

85 1000Ω platinum RTD @ 32˚F, 385 curve JCI, Siemens, Trane (transmitter available for any user) 

91 1000Ω platinum RTD @ 32˚F, 375 curve JCI, Siemens (transmitter available for any user) 

5 1000Ω Balco RTD @ 70˚F Invensys (Siebe) (transmitter available for any user) 

1 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

2 

TEMPERATURE 

EXECUTIVE ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-S*E and ST-S*EW Series Executive 

Room Sensors provide precision room temperature 

sensing for building automation systems. The active 

sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision 

thermistor material or platinum RTD. 

FEATURES 

• Lifetime warranty 

• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) thermistor accuracy 

• ±1°F (±0.53°C) RTD accuracy 

• Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves 

• Vented housing for quick temperature response 

• Adaptable with many options 

• Traditional beige or white covers 

• Durable plastic housing and base plate 

• Easy to mount to wall or back box 

APPLICATION 

The executive enclosure is designed to be wall-mounted 

indoors where appearance is important. The separate 

base plate may be mounted directly to the drywall 

or on a standard electrical outlet box without adapters. 

The cover is secured with tamper-resistant hex screws. 

Where moisture is a concern, the moistureproof XB 

option is required. 

SPECIFICATIONS 

Sensing element Thermistor (thermal resistor) 

RTD (resistance temperature device) 

Accuracy 

Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C) 

RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 

Sensor types available 

Thermistor 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k, 20 k, 100 k� 

RTD Platinum 100�, 385 curve 

Platinum 1000�, 385 curve 


Temp range 35° to 140°F (2° to 60°C) 

Temp response 

Thermistor Negative temperature coefficient 

RTD Positive temperature coefficient 

Sensitivity See Sensor Resistance Charts 

in the “Technical Reference” 

section 

OPTIONS 

ST-S*E-XA-XME-XPL-XTD 

ST-S*EW 

• Custom logos 

• Setpoint adjustment (400�, 3 k�, 20 k�) 

• Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead 

• Gray decorator faceplate 

• External communication jack 

• Internal RJ11 communication jack 

• Membrane momentary switch 

• Analog temperature display (ST-S3E) 

• Digital temperature display (ST-S3E) 

• NIST traceable 

• LED status lamp 

TM 

A Division of Kele, Inc. 

Stability 

Thermistor 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years 

RTD

TEMPERATURE 



DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.37 

(6.02) 

0.88 

(2.22) 

WIRING/OPTIONS 

Communication 

Bus Terminal 

For XJ 

Option 

XJ2 Internal 

RJ11 Jack 

XA Setpoint Adjust 

Potentiometer 

1.43 

(3.63) 

Cover Hooks 

0.75 

(1.90) 

Mounting Holes 

typical 

Board Hooks 

Wire-Way 

Hole 

Cover Securing Screws 

OUT 

IN 

P S 

1.87 

(4.76) 

Make electrical connections to the sensor using the terminal block provided in accordance with the installation wiring 

diagram for the job and with national and local electrical codes. Though the sensor itself does not require shielded cable, 

some controllers and microprocessors do; check with the controller supplier. 

LED 

POT 

SENSOR 

+ 

- 

COMP EXT 

SENS SENS 

Sensor 

Mounted to 

Cover 

0.63 

(1.58) 

3.31 

(8.40) 

Option Board Terminations 

(multiple options shown) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

XJ1 External Jack 

Setpoint Adjust 

Sensor Terminals 

LED Terminals 24 VAC/VDC 

Jumper Pins for momentary 

pushbutton option allow 

locating the N.O. contacts 

across the (S) sensor or 

the setpoint (P) pot 

Controller Temp 

Sensor (standard) 

Option XB (8'/2.4m lead) – do not terminate inside the enclosure. 

Internal 

Option 

Wiring 

Sensor 

Mounted to Cover 

Standard 

Terminations 

ST-S*E 

Note: The above drawing shows all options. The actual configuration will vary depending on the options selected. 

See Sensor Options in this section for option wiring pin-out connections. 

3.23 

(8.20) 

Front View 

3.23 

(8.20) 

Bottom View 

1.20 

(3.05) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

2.75 (6.99) 

Front View 

2.75 (6.99) 

Bottom View 

ST-S*E ST-S*EW 

1.20 

(3.05) 

3 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

4 

TEMPERATURE 



TYPICAL MOUNTING 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is 

not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical 

outlet boxes. 

Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two 

#6-32 screws for handibox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall 

mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head. 

White 

Faceplate 

(standard) 

Plate 

Mounting 

Screws 

Wire Access 

Hole 

Cover 

Mounting 

1/16 Allen Screws 

Optional Customer- 

Supplied Handibox 

The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor, 

on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices. 

XJ2 

Internal 

Communication 

Jack 

under the 

cover 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS 

DEC 

XK 

Custom Logo 

(your company logo) 

MODEL DESCRIPTION 

ST-S3 10,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-S21 2252Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-S22 3000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-S24 10,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-S27 100,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-S42 20,000Ω executive thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-S81 100Ω executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-S85 1000Ω executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-S91 1000Ω executive RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

E Executive beige enclosure with wide back plate 

EW Executive white enclosure with narrow back plate 

OPTIONS (See page 37 for option details) 

XA* Setpoint adjustment with 10 kΩ to 30 kΩ, resistance input 

XA10K* Setpoint adjustment with 1 kΩ to 3 kΩ, resistance input 

XA2K* Setpoint adjustment with 1kΩ to 1.4 kΩ, resistance input 

XB Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead, no terminal block provided 

XGR Gray decorator faceplate (tan faceplate standard) 

XJ1* External communication jack (related adapter CC-RJ11AD) 

XJ2* † Internal RJ11 communication jack 

XK Custom logo 

XM** Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block (N.C. available) 

XME Membrane momentary switch wired only N.O. to terminal block, tan faceplate only 

XPL* Red LED lamp externally powered 24 VAC/VDC 

XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point, 32°F (0°C) 

XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points, 32°/158°F (0°/70°C) 

XTA Analog temperature display, 50° to 90°F ±1°F 

XTC Digital temperature display, 15° to 32°C ±1°C, battery powered (one year nominal) 

XTD Digital temperature display, 60° to 90°F ±1°F, battery powered (one year nominal) 

XZ Three-wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) 

ST-S3 E XB XGR Example: ST-S3-E-XB-XGR 10,000Ω Type III moistureproof executive sensor zone with 

gray faceplate and an executive beige enclosure with wide back plate 

* Circuit board option 

** Cannot be mounted in conjunction with *options 

† XJ2 option may not be combined with the XTD or XTC option 

RELATED PRODUCTS 

CC-RJ11AD Adapter cable for XJ1 option with female RJ11 8-pin connector 

79-1 Replacement battery for XTD and XTC option 

KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" Allen key 

10-531 Wall adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (for ST-S*EW) 

F 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

INC 

XJ1 

External Communication 

Jack for use with handheld 

terminals, requires adapter 

cable. CC-RJ11AD 

XTA (ST-S*E only) 

Analog Temperature Display 

50° to 90°F 

XTD (ST-S*E only) 

(not shown) 

Liquid Crystal Temperature 

Indication 60° to 90°F (15° to 32°C) ±1°F 

XM 

Exposed Momentary Push 

Button (cannot be used with 

XA, XJ1, or XJ2 options) 

XME 

Concealed Membrane 

Momentary Push Button 

XPL 

Red LED Indicator Lamp 

XA 

Setpoint Adjust to provide a 

10 kΩ to 30 kΩ resistance 

input 

(1-3 kΩ and 1-1.4 kΩ available)

TEMPERATURE 

DECORATOR ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD 

ST-S * K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The ST-S*K Series Room Temperature Sensor is a 

cost-effective room temperature sensor. The thermistor 

is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers 

the reliability needed in control systems. The platinum 

RTD comes in 100� and 1000� and is compatible with 

most HVAC systems. 

FEATURES 


• Attractive new design 

• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy 

• ±1.0°F (0.53°C) RTD accuracy 

• Durable housing 

• White color 

• Thermistor or RTD 

• Locking cover screws 

OPTIONS 

• Setpoint slide adjust 

• Momentary override switch 

• RJ11 communication jack 

• NIST certificate 

• 24V LED lamp 

• OEM models available 


APPLICATION 

The ST-S*K Series is designed to be wall mounted 

indoors where appearance and accuracy are important. 

The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or 

on standard electrical boxes. It comes in all common 

thermistors or RTDs. Options may be mixed and 

matched for each application. 


Sensing elements Thermistor (thermal resistor) 


Accuracy ±0.5°F (0.28°C) 

Sensor types 

Thermistor @ 77°F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k� 

RTD @ 32°F Platinum 100�, 385 curve 




Temp response NTC - Thermistors, PTC - RTDs 

Sensitivity See Sensor Resistance Charts in 

the “Technical Reference” section 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

TEMPERATURE 

DECORATOR ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD 

ST-S * K SERIES 

MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where 

back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting 

directly to electrical outlet boxes. 

Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, 

two #6-32 screws for handibox-mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws 

for direct wall-mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" 

Allen key head, installed as needed. 

Wire Access 

Hole 

Mounting Back Plate 

Mounting 

Screws 

Option Board Clip 

6 

Self-Latching 

Cover 

ST-S3K XN1 

Cover 

Locking 

1/16" Allen Screws 

Installed as needed 

To BAS 

Controller 

The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, 

on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling 

generating devices. 

Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate. 

WIRING 

Communication 

Bus Terminal 

XJ2 Internal 

RJ11 Jack 

XA Setpoint 

Adjust 

Potentiometer 


Out 



10-531 Sensor adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" 

In 

P S 

Pot 

Sensor 

LED 

Comp 

Sens 

Ext 

Sens 

Sensor Mounted 

to Cover 


Sensor Terminals 

LED Terminals 

24 VAC/VDC 

Jumper Pins for 

Momentary Pushbutton 

Option allow locating 

the N.O. contacts 

across the sensor 

(S) or the setpoint (P) 

Controller Temp 

Sensor (standard) 

Optional Board Terminations 

(multiple options shown) 


ST-S3K 10,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-S21K 2252Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-S22K 3000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-S24K 10,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-S27K 100,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-S42K 20,000Ω decorator thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-S81K 100Ω decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-S85K 1000Ω decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-S91K 1000Ω decorator RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS (See page 37 for option details) 

XA* Setpoint adjustment (10 kΩ to 30 kΩ, resistance input, tan faceplate only) 

XA10K* Setpoint adjustment (1 kΩ to 3 kΩ, resistance input, tan faceplate only) 

XA2K* Setpoint adjustment (1 kΩ to 1.4 kΩ, resistance input, tan faceplate only) 

XB Moistureproof with 8' (2.44m) lead (no terminal block provided) 

XJ2* Internal RJ11 communication jack 


XM Momentary switch wired normally open to terminal block (N.C. available) 

XPL* Red LED lamp (externally powered 24 VAC/VDC) 

XN1 NIST traceable for one-point certification 32°F (0°C) 

XN2 NIST traceable for two-point certification 32°/158°F (0°/70°C) 


Example: ST-S3K-XN1 10,000Ω Type III decorator sensor with NIST certificate 

* Circuit board option

TEMPERATURE 

SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-S* P SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-S*P Series Surface-Mount Room 

Sensors provide precision room temperature sensing 

for building automation systems. The active sensing 

element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor 

material or platinum RTD. 

FEATURES 





• Vented housing for quick temperature response 


• Traditional tan cover with aluminum faceplate 

• Durable plastic housing and base plate 


APPLICATION 

The wall-mounted enclosure is designed to be mounted 

indoors vertically or horizontally. The separate base 

plate may be mounted directly to the drywall or a standard 

electrical outlet box with adapters. The cover is 

secured with tamper-resistant hex screws. Where 

moisture is a concern, the moistureproofing XB option 

is required. 




Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 


Thermistor 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k� 





Temp response 





section 

OPTIONS 


• Setpoint adjustment 


• Momentary switch override 


Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

8 

TEMPERATURE 

SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-S* P SERIES 

MOUNTING TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit 

is not required. Adapters are required when mounting directly to electrical 

outlet boxes. 

Basic model comes with base plate, cover, brushed aluminum faceplate, 

18" (45.7 cm) of 24 AWG wire, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall 

mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" allen key head. 

Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended. 

Cover 

Mounting 


Adapter plate 

ISPL-1 or SSPL-1 

Accessory Mounting 

Bracket BKT-1 

Base Plate 



The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor, 


XM 

Momentary 

Switch 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


1.75 

(4.45) 


ST-S3P 10,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-S21P 2252Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-S22P 3000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-S24P 10,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-S27P 100,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-S42P 20,000Ω surface-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-S81P 100Ω surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-S85P 1000Ω surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-S91P 1000Ω surface-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS (see page 37 for option details) 

XA Setpoint adjustment (0 kΩ to 10 kΩ standard, 0Ω to 1500Ω optional XA-1500) 

XB Moistureproof with 8' (2.4m) lead 


XM Momentary switch, wired normally open, 18" (45.7 cm) leads 

XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C) 

XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C) 


ST-S27P XB Example: ST-S27P-XB 100,000Ω Type II surface-mount zone sensor 

thermistor with moisture-proofing 

0 

1 

-1 

2 

-2 

3 

-3 

3.13 

(7.94) 


UR Moisture resistant three-wire butt splice 

BKT-1 Handibox mounting bracket for wall sensor 

ISPL-1 Plastic ivory switch plate cover for handibox mounting 

SSPL-1 Stainless steel switch plate cover for handibox mounting 

KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 

XA 


provides a 0Ω to 10 kΩ 

resistance input 

2.13 

(5.4)

TEMPERATURE 

STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-S* SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-S* Series Stainless Steel Flush- 

Mount Sensors provide precision room temperature 

sensing for building automation systems. The active 

sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision 

thermistor material or platinum RTD. This design provides 

moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to a 304 

stainless steel plate. The back is insulated to reduce 

interior wall temperature influence. This sensor is 

intended for interior use only. 

FEATURES 





• Insulated backing for room temperature response 

• Vandal-resistant flush mounting 


• 304 stainless steel finish 


• Standard size plate to cover mounting holes 

APPLICATION 

The ST-S* Series sensors are designed to be mounted 

on indoor walls. They are ideal for use in schools or 

cold storage lockers, where vandalism or fork lifts can 

damage ordinary wall sensors. The sensors have an 

insulated back that reduces the conductive influences 

of wall temperatures, yet allows significant convective 

influences to be sensed. Security screws (XS option) 

are available where tamper proofing is required. 




Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 






Temp range -30° to 100°F (-34° to 38°C) 

Temp response 





section 

OPTIONS 


• Setpoint adjustment 

• Momentary switch override 

• Security screws 


TM 


Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

10 

TEMPERATURE 

STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-S* SERIES 

MOUNTING TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit 

is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical 

outlet boxes. Tighten mounting screws, crushing foam gasketing until plate 

edges lightly touch the wall. Insulate or seal all interior holes to prevent drafts 

from affecting the temperature readings. Terminate with butt splices or 

soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended. 

Basic model comes with screws for stainless steel faceplate, two #6-32 

screws for handibox mounting, and 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire. Security 

screws (XS Option) are #6-32 with a spanner head. 



The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor, 



OVERRIDE 

DN 0 

-1 

-2 

1 

-3 3 

2 

UP 

XS 

Security Screws 

XM 

Momentary 

Push Button 

XA 

Setpoint Adjust provides a 

0Ω to 10 kΩ ± 3% resistance input 


ST-S3 10,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-S21 2252Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-S22 3000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-S24 10,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-S27 100,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-S42 20,000Ω flush-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-S81 100Ω flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-S85 1000Ω flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-S91 1000Ω flush-mount RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS 

XA Setpoint adjustment (±3° range, 0 kΩ to 10 kΩ standard, 0Ω to 1500Ω optional XA-1500) 


XM Momentary switch wired normally open, 18" (45.7 cm) leads 



XS Security screws (SD-6 spanner screwdriver required) 


ST-S27 

XM 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

Example: ST-S27-XM 100,000Ω Type II stainless steel flush-mount sensor 

with momentary switch 

2.75 

(6.99) 




SD-6 Security spanner screwdriver (required for XS option) 

3.25 

(8.25)

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-U* Series Universal-Mount Sensors provide 

precision remote temperature sensing in multiple applications 

such as duct, OSA, and immersion installations for building 

automation systems. The active sensing element is a highly 

stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. 

The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive 

compound in a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) long stainless steel probe 

and is attached to a 2.5" (6.35 cm) square enclosure. The tabs 

on the enclosure provide mounting ears for direct duct mounting 

and are easily removable if they are not needed. This multipurpose 

enclosure minimizes the number of stock parts 

required to handle multiple applications. 

FEATURES 




• Flame retardant, Plenum rated 


• Adaptable with many mounting options 

• 304 stainless steel probes 

• Easy to mount to duct, well, or wall 

• Waterproof probe 

• Paintable plastic 

• NEMA 3R, IP11 

OPTIONS 

• Probe lengths up to 36" (91.44 cm) 

• Matched sensor pairs 

• Dual sensor probes 

• Weather-resistant gasket 

• 25' (7.62m) cable 

• NIST traceable certificate 


TEMPERATURE 

UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-U * SERIES 



Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 



RTD @ 32F Platinum 100�, 385 curve 



Temp range 

Thermistor -30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C) 

RTD -67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C) 

Temp response 



Probe sheath 304 stainless steel 

WEL-B 

WEL-S 

PROBE APPLICATIONS 

ST-U* 

TM 


OSAB 

• The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct 

mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point 

sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) insertion 

depth. The XL option is available for custom lengths up to 

36" (91.44 cm). 

• The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be 

threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well. The wells are available 

in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion 

using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet ®). 

• The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall bracket 

with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain, 

snow, or other weather-related influences. This rugged enclosure 

and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather 

conditions. 

Sensitivity See Sensor Resistance Chart 


section 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

12 

TEMPERATURE 

UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-U * SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

MOUNTING 

2.3 

(5.83) 

1/8 NPT 

3.25 (8.26) 

2.5 (6.35) 

0.88 (2.24) 

4.87 

(12.38) 

Mounting 

Tabs 

0.25 

(0.63) 

ST-U* 

Duct/Multipurpose Sensor 

1/2" NPT 

2.5 (6.35) 

0.75 

(1.91) 

5.13 

(13.03) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

ST-U*B and ST-U*S 

Well Sensor 

Duct: Drill a 9/16" (1.43 cm) hole for insertion into the duct. Attach 

probe snug to the duct with self tapping screws. 

Well Insertion: Install the well into the customer-supplied 1/2" saddle 

(Thredolet ® ), then thread the sensor into the well. For better heat 

transfer you may apply thermal compound to the tip of the sensor before 

insertion. Mounting tabs may be removed. 

OSA: Insert the shield into the bracket and thread the ST-U* through 

the gasket to the shield. Secure the assembly to the wall using the 

appropriate hardware for the wall surface. The ideal orientation of the 

sensor is horizontal with the knockout facing down and located on an 

outside wall with a shaded exposure. Mounting tabs may be removed. 

The sensor and shield may be painted to the architect’s specifications. 

Well 

1/2" 

Conduit Hole 

Gasket 


8.38 

(21.28) 

0.75 (1.91) 

Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor 

Shaded 

Exposure 

ST-U*O 

Sensor for OSA 

When choosing location for any outdoor air temperature sensors: 

1. Do not mount above building openings (windows, doors) 

2. Keep sensor out of direct sunlight 


ST-U3 10,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-U21 2252Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-U22 3000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-U24 10,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-U27 100,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-U42 20,000Ω universal-mount thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-U81 100Ω universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-U85 1000Ω universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-U91 1000Ω universal-mount RTD @32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS 

B Kit with WEL-B brass well for immersion mounting 

S Kit with WEL-S 304 SS well for immersion mounting 

O Kit with OSAB weather shield, gasket, and bracket for wall mount 

XD Dual sensor in one probe 

XL Custom length 2" to 60" (5 to 152 cm), specify length 



XP Matched sensor pairs matched to ±0.1°F, 0.055°C (must order two sensors) 

X25 25' (7.62m) 24 AWG twin lead 

XC25 25' (7.62m) jacketed cable 


ST-U3 B Example: ST-U3B 10 kΩ Type III immersion sensor with brass well 

4.75 

(12.07) 

5.5 

(13.97) 

Do not mount sensor 

in vertical position with the 

weather shield pointing up. 

UNIVERSAL-MOUNT SENSOR ACCESSORIES 

WEL-B Brass well OSAB OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket 

WEL-S 304 stainless steel well TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 

F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-A* Series All-Purpose Sensors provide 

precision remote temperature sensing for building 

automation systems and mechanical equipment room 

instrumentation. The active sensing element is made 

of a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum 

RTDs. 

The ST-A* Series sensors are rugged, point-sensitive 

waterproof sensors featuring a 9" (22.8 cm) 304 stainless 

steel probe and brass fitting. The brass fitting has 

a 1/2" NPT male thread. The sensors are supplied with 

two 1/2" locknuts for easy installation in handiboxes (or 

other enclosures with 1/2" knockouts). 

FEATURES 





• Tip sensitive for precise temperature response 


• All metal construction with 304 stainless steel 

probes 

• Easy to mount to duct, wall, or back box 



TEMPERATURE 

ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-A* SERIES 



Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 





Platinum 1000�, 375curve 

Temp range 


RTD -67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C) 

Temp response 



OPTIONS 

• Custom lengths up to 9' (2.74m) 


• Dual sensor probe 


APPLICATION 

TM 


The ST-A* Series sensors are waterproof and can be 

used where it is possible for the sensed temperature to 

fall below the ambient dew point, causing condensation 

to occur on the sensor. However, it is important that the 

field connection be made as far as possible from the 

sensed media. The sensing element is sealed with a 

thermally conductive compound in a versatile 9" long 

stainless steel tube with a brass electrical fitting. The 

all-purpose probe is suitable for plenum mounting, duct 

mounting, immersion wells, or outside air. 


in the “Technical Reference” section 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

14 

TEMPERATURE 

ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-A* SERIES 

MOUNTING 

Locknuts provide direct mounting and can be used where conduit 

is not required. Mount directly to electrical outlet boxes as shown below. 

Basic model comes with two locknuts for mounting to a variety of 

box options. 

All-Purpose Sensor with 

Customer-Supplied Handibox 

Hole 

1-1/16"(2.7 cm) 

Secure sensor to handibox with locknuts. 

Secure handibox to duct with screws. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.0 0.83 

(2.06) 

(2.54) 


1.5 

(3.81) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

Typical Insertion 

9.25 

(23.51) 

8.25 

(20.96) 

1/2" NPT Thread 

Use the full 8' (2.4m) lead length provided to avoid 

moisture migration at the field connection. 


ST-A3 10,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-A21 2252Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-A22 3000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-A24 10,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-A27 100,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-A42 20,000Ω all-purpose thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-A81 100Ω all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-A85 1000Ω all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-A91 1000Ω all-purpose RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS (see Sensor Options page for option details) 

XCO 1/2" LB conduit fitting 

XD Dual sensors in one probe 

XH Handibox housing (factory installed) 

XHP Non-metallic handibox housing (factory installed) 

XL Custom probe length, available 2" to 9' (5.08 cm to 2.74m) in 1" (2.5 cm) increments 

XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) 



XP Matched sensor pair (shipped in pairs, matched to ±0.1°F/0.06°C, must order two sensors) 

XW Weatherproof housing (factory installed) 

X25 25' (7.62m) lead length 


ST-A24 XP Example: ST-A24-XP 10,000Ω Type II all-purpose temperature sensor with matched sensor 


UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 

0.25 

(0.64)

TEMPERATURE 

DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-D * SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-D* Series Duct Sensors provide precision 

remote temperature sensing for building automation 

systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. 

The active sensing element is highly stable 

precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. 

The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive 

compound in a 9" (22.8 cm) long 304 stainless steel 

tube attached to a 4" (10 cm) electrical strap. The slots 

in the mounting bracket form mounting ears for direct 

duct mounting and standard electrical boxes. The grommet 

on the tube fitting seals a 9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion 

hole. 

FEATURES 


• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) thermistor accuracy 

• ±1°F (0.53°C) RTD accuracy 




• 304 stainless steel probe 

• Easy to mount to duct or back box 


OPTIONS 

• Custom lengths up to 9' (2.74m) 

• Matched sensor pair 

• Many mounting options: handibox, greenfield 

fitting, non-metallic box, weatherproof box 

• Dual sensor probes 





Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 


Thermistor @ 77˚F 2.252k, 3k, 10k, 20k, 100 k� 

RTD @ 32˚F Platinum 100�, 385 curve 



Temp range 


RTD -67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C) 

Temp response 



ST-D3 

APPLICATION 



Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

16 

TEMPERATURE 

DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-D * SERIES 

MOUNTING 

Direct duct-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters 

are not required when mounting directly to outlet boxes. Install grommet in the 

9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole. Use full 8' (2.4m) lead length provided to avoid 

moisture migration at the field connection. 

Basic model comes with 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 9" (22.86 cm) probe with T-bar, 

grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting. 

(XH) Handibox Option 

Duct Temperature Sensor installed 

with handibox option (XH) 

Duct temperature sensor with 

Greenfield fitting option (XG) 

Greenfield Fitting 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


Insertion Hole is 9/16" (1.43 cm) 

3.88 

(9.89) 

1/2" NPT 

1/2" NPT 

Vinyl Grommet 


ST-D3 10,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-D21 2252Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-D22 3000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-D24 10,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-D27 100,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-D42 20,000Ω duct thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-D81 100Ω duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-D85 1000Ω duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-D91 1000Ω duct RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 




XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) 



XL Custom length insertion probe, available 2" to 9' (5.08 cm to 2.74m) 

XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) 

XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic male close nipple 

XNB 1/2" MNPT brass male close nipple 


XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°/70°C) 

XP Matched sensor pair matched to ±0.1°F/0.055°C (must order two sensors) 

XW Weatherproof housing (factory installed) 



ST-D3 XG Example: ST-D3-XG 10,000Ω Type III duct temperature sensor 

with Greenfield fitting 




Basic Installation 

Vinyl Grommet 

9.0 

(22.86) 

Standard 

0.25 

(0.64)

TEMPERATURE 

AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSOR 

ST-FZ* SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-FZ* Series Averaging Thermistor 

Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing 

for building automation systems and mechanical equipment 

room instrumentation. The active sensing elements 

are constructed of highly stable precision thermistor 

materials accurate to within ±0.36°F (0.2°C). 

The sensing elements are sealed in a 3/16" (0.48 cm) 

soft-drawn copper-coiled tube attached to a standard 

handibox with mounting bracket attached. 

FEATURES 


• ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) accuracy 

• Wide selection of thermistor curves 

• Adaptable to most duct sizes 

• Easy to mount to duct wall 

• 3/16" (0.48 cm) soft copper sensor 

• Copper facilitates quick average temperature 

response 

OPTIONS 

• 8' (2.4m) long element for very small ducts 

• 12.5' (3.8m) long element for small ducts 

• 25' (7.6m) long element for larger ducts 

• Weatherproof handibox 







Temp response Negative temperature coefficient 



section 

APPLICATION 

The ST-FZ* Series is designed for direct mounting to 

sheet metal for average duct temperature sensing. The 

sensor is multipoint sensitive through the length of the 

temperature conductive tubing. 

The 8' (2.4m) and 12.5' (3.8m) models contain four 

sensing elements, and the 25' (7.6m) model has nine 

sensing elements. The thermistors are configured in a 

series/parallel method, which creates an end result of 

total average resistance, equal to the same span as a 

standard thermistor, with a temperature range of 

32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C). 

Stability 0.24°F (0.13°C) over five years 

Heat dissipation 

constant 2.7 mW/°C (power needed to 

raise the temperature by 1°C) 

Connection 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 

pigtails prestripped 

TM 


Mounting Directly to duct with back box, 

clips available for serpentine 

mounting 

17 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

18 

TEMPERATURE 

AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSOR 

ST-FZ* SERIES 

MOUNTING / WIRING 

Mounting 

Drill a 5/8" (1.6 cm) hole for probe insertion and serpentine 

the sensor across the duct, turning at each end using the 

Model M-648 end clip and Model M-633 mid-duct support. 

Avoid kinking the tube as this could cause a short circuit. 

Using the provided #6 screws, secure the box to the duct 

either with the mounting ears or through the box holes. 

CC-IG 

Capillary 

Supports 

5/8" (1.6 cm) hole 

Wiring 

Terminate with butt splices or soldering. (Wire nuts 

are not recommended.) Use the full 8' (2.4m) lead length 

provided to avoid moisture migration from the field connection. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.25 

(10.80) 


2.25 

(5.72) 

Front View Side View 


ST-FZ3 10,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-FZ21 2252Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-FZ22 3000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-FZ24 10,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-FZ27 100,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-FZ42 20,000Ω averaging thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

SENSING ELEMENT 

8 8' (2.44m) probe length, four elements total 

12 12.5' (3.81m) probe length, four elements total 

25 25' (7.62m) probe length, nine elements total 

XW Weatherproof housing option 

ST-FZ3 25 

Example: ST-FZ3-25 10 kΩ Type III averaging thermistor sensor 

with 25' (7.62m) probe and nine sensing elements 



M-648 Copper-plated capillary mounting end clip 

M-633 Copper-plated capillary mounting mid-duct support 

CC-IG Plastic capillary mounting clip 

8, 12.5, or 25' 

(2.44, 3.81, or 7.62m) 

3/16" (0.47) Tubing

TEMPERATURE 

IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-W* SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-W* Series Immersion Sensors provide 



instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly 


The sensing element is sealed with a temperature conductive 

compound in a 4-7/8" (12.4 cm) stainless steel 

tube and brass fitting. A brass thermowell is the standard 

well provided with each sensor. A Greenfield connector 

is factory installed for flexible connection. The sensor 

probe assembly is removable from the thermowell for 

replacement without draining the system. 

FEATURES 





• Brass thermowell for quick temperature response 


• Easy to mount and remove from thermowell 

• Waterproof stainless steel probe 

APPLICATION 

The ST-W* Series sensors are waterproof and feature a 

304 stainless steel probe and brass fitting. The fitting has 

1/2" NPSM female threads to accept the standard 

Greenfield fitting. It also has 1/8" NPSM male threads for 

installing into a furnished Model WEL-B thermowell. 




Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 






Temp range 

Thermistor 10° to 230°F (-12° to 110°C) 

RTD -67° to 240°F (-55° to 115°C) 

Temp response 



WEL-B ST-W24 

The thermowells are designed with close tolerances, 

eliminating the need for thermal grease under normal 

conditions. Each well is designed so that the sensor 

assembly can be easily removed after installation. The 

well screws into a 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet ® fitting) 

furnished by the installing contractor. 

OPTIONS 

• 304 stainless steel well 

max temp 900°F (482°C) 

max pressure 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) 

• Handibox enclosure 

• Custom lengths (wells available) 

• 1/2" LB conduit fitting 

• Liquid-tight fitting 

• Weatherproof box 

• Matched pairs used for BTU measurement 


Sensitivity See Sensor Resistance Charts in the 

“Technical Reference” section 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

20 

TEMPERATURE 

IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-W* SERIES 

MOUNTING/WIRING 

Mounting 

Install well into customer-supplied 1/2" FNPTsaddle (or 

Thredolet ® ). Screw sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPSM 

brass fitting. 

Wiring 

Terminate with butt splice or soldering. Wire nuts are not 

recommended. Use full 8' (2.44m) lead length provided to 

avoid moisture migration up the wire. 

Install the wells as shown to obtain 

optimum well strength. 

Flow 

Flow 

Angle must not allow end of well 

to contact the other side of pipe. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.37 

(3.49) 

1/8" NPSM 


4.87 

(12.38) 

Greenfield 

Fitting 

5.13 

(13.03) 3.25 

(8.26) 

0.25 

(0.63) 

Sensor Sensor in Well 


ST-W3 10,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-W21 2252Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-W22 3000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-W24 10,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-W27 100,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-W42 20,000Ω immersion thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-W81 100Ω immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-W85 1000Ω immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-W91 1000Ω immersion RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

WELL DESIGNATION 

– Sensor with standard brass well 

E Sensor without well 

S Sensor with stainless steel well 900°F (482°C) max temp, 3000 psig (20.7 kPa) max pressure 





NG No Greenfield fitting (1/2" NPSM threads) 



XL Custom length insertion probe, available 2" to 60" (specify E without well) 

XLT Liquid-tight fitting 


XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°/70°C) 

XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic close nipple 

XNB 1/2" MNPT brass close nipple 

XP Matched sensor pair, matched to ±0.1°F, 0.05°C (must order two sensors) 

XW Weatherproof housing 


ST-W3 S XP 

Example: ST-W3-S-XP 10 kΩ Type III immersion sensor with a matched 

10,000Ω Type III immersion sensor and stainless steel well 



TCC-12 Single application thermal compound 

TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 

1/2" NPT

TEMPERATURE 

OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-O* SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon ST-O* Series Outdoor Air Thermistor 

Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing 

for building automation systems and mechanical equipment 

room instrumentation. The active sensing element 

is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum 

RTD. 

The temperature-sensitive element is sheathed in a stainless 

steel tube and mounted inside a ventilated, treated, 

white PVC shield to minimize radiant energy and weather 

related effects. The weather shield is mounted on a 

weatherproof outlet box for easy installation on an outdoor 

surface. This rugged enclosure will assure a long 

life, even under extreme weather conditions. 

FEATURES 





• Vented weather shield for quick response 

• 2" x 4" (5.08 x 10.16 cm) weatherproof box 

• Easy to mount to outside wall 


OPTIONS 

• Moistureproof with 25' (7.62m) cable 

• Dual-mounted sensors 

• 25' (7.62m) leads 




RTD (resistance temperature 

device) 

Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 






Temp range 


RTD -67° to 140°F (-55° to 60°C) 

Temp response 



APPLICATION 

TM 


The outdoor air temperature assembly should be located 

in the shade, away from all devices (such as an exhaust 

fan) that would disturb the normal outdoor environment. 

A preferred location would be below the eaves, one foot 

down from the top of a wall, in a permanently shaded 

spot. 

The sensor should be mounted horizontally with the element 

to the right or left of the handibox. The weather 

shield assembly features a tapered fitting which allows 

the shield to be rotated by hand. Air vents on the shield 

should face downward. Internal mounting knockouts provide 

for direct wall mounting using screws or toggle bolts. 



section 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

22 

TEMPERATURE 

OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-O * SERIES 


Mounting 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall mount screws can be used for 

outside mounting. For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads 

are available in the back and side. 

Wiring 

Terminate using the full 8' (2.44m) lead length provided to 

avoid moisture migration from the field connection. Solder the 

leads where possible or use crimp-type butt splice. Wire nuts 

are not recommended. 

3/4" NPT 

Side & Rear 

(Use AD-2 

for 1/2" 

application) 

Do Not mount sensor 

in vertical position with the 

sun shield pointing up. 

Correct Position for 

Mounting Outdoor 

Air Sensor. 

Shaded side of building 

Preferred Mounting Location 

for Outdoor Air Sensor 

For best results do not mount above doors, windows, air 

intakes, or exhausts. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 


4.63 

(11.75) 

5.5 

(13.97) 

Foam Gasket 


ST-O3 10,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-O21 2252Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (green leads) 

ST-O22 3000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-O24 10,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-O27 100,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-O42 20,000Ω outdoor air thermistor @ 77°F (25°C) Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-O81 100Ω outdoor RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-O85 1000Ω outdoor RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-O91 1000Ω outdoor RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS 

XC25 25' (7.62m) 22 AWG cable 

XD Dual sensors in one probe (not available with XC25 option) 

XMT Mounting tabs 



XTB Terminal block 

X25 25' (7.62m) leads 

XZ Three-wire RTD connection (Type 81 only) 

ST-O24 XC25 Example: ST-O24-XC25 10 kΩ Type II outdoor air sensor 

with 25' (7.62m) cable 



AD-2 3/4" to 1/2" adapter for 1/2" pipe 

Stainless 

Sheathed 

Sensor 

1.5 

(3.81)

TEMPERATURE 

STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Precon Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors provide 



instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly 


The sensing element is rugged and sealed with a thermally 

conductive compound in a versatile 3" (7.6 cm)long 

stainless steel tube. The probe is waterproof, and 

the sensor is ideal for use in refrigeration cases or as a 

strap-on sensor for pipes. 

ST-R*S 

The ST-R*S Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors are suitable 

for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or 

hot water measurement. They are also used for freezer 

cases where moisture protection is important. These 

rugged strap-on sensors come with 8' (2.4m), 24-gauge 

zipcord leads. 

ST-R*SC 

The ST-R*SC Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors come 

with a rugged, 25' (7.6m) cable that allows for termination 

away from areas of condensation. It is an ideal 

choice for freezer case applications. 

OPTIONS 


• 25' (7.6m) PVC-covered cable 


• Custom length probe 




Accuracy 


RTD ±1°F (0.53°C) 






Temp range 


RTD -68° to 240°F (-55° to 60°C) 

APPLICATION 

ST-R*SC 

ST-R*S 

TM 


Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install 

immersion wells, the Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors 

may be strapped to the pipe. The -C option provides a 25' 

(7.6m) rugged cable that may be strapped on the outside 

of the pipe insulation. Pipe strap accessory (APB-28) provides 

a bracket under the insulation to hold the sensor 

securely in place. 

FEATURES 






• Durable 304 stainless steel casing 

• Easy to mount to wall, box, or pipe 


Temp response 





section 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

24 

TEMPERATURE 

STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES 


Mounting 

Secure to wall or pipe using cable ties, clips, or brackets. 

Wiring 

Terminate with butt splices or solder connections. Wire 

nuts are not recommended. Use the full length cable to 

avoid moisture migration from the field connection. 

Tie Rap or 

Adjustable 

Pipe Bracket 

When used as a strap-on sensor, best results are obtained when 

conductive compound (TCC-12) is applied between the sensor and the pipe. 

In addition, the sensor should be inserted under insulation with at least 

2' (0.61m) on each side of the sensor. Adjustable pipe bracket APB-28 

is available for use with this sensor. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.25 

(0.64) 


3.0 

(7.62) 

Stainless Tube 


ST-R3S 10,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-R21S 2252Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-R22S 3000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-R24S 10,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-R27S 100,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-R42S 20,000Ω stainless steel thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-R81S 100Ω stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-R85S 1000Ω stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-R91S 1000Ω stainless steel RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS 

C 25' (7.6m) 22 AWG cable 

XD Dual sensors in one probe (not available with -C option) 


XL Custom length probe, available 2" to 60" (5 to 152 cm) 


XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°F) 


ST-R3S C XP Example: ST-R3SC-XP 10,000Ω stainless steel sheath thermistor 

with 25' (7.6m) cable shipped in a matched pair 



APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2" to 8" (5.1 to 20.3 cm) 

TCC-12 Single application thermal conductive compound 


PN-46 Aluminum mounting clip 

#20 Strap-on sensor self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54cm) wide 

Polyolefin Sheath

TEMPERATURE 

ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Precon Encapsulated Sensors provide precision remote 

temperature sensing for building automation systems and 

mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active 

sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor 

material or platinum RTD. 

The sensor is encapsulated with a low mass, high-conductivity 

compound for good heat transfer characteristics. 

It is enclosed in a tough, miniature cylinder, 0.17" (0.43 

cm) in diameter, which is small enough to be installed in 

most HVAC thermostat enclosures. 

FEATURES 





• Adaptable miniature sensor 

• High heat dissipation constant 

• Easy to mount with clips 

• Pre-aged, highly stable thermistor material 

OPTIONS 

• 25' (7.6m) of 24 AWG zipcord 


• Dual sensor probe 

• Rugged sensor coating 

• Wide temperature range -30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C) 





Accuracy 


RTD ±0.1°F (0.53°C) 


Thermistor 2.252 k�, 3 k�, 10 k�, 20 k�, 100 k� 

RTD Platinum 100�, 385-degree curve 

Platinum 1000�, 385-degree curve 

Platinum 1000�, 375-degree curve 


R option (Thermistor) -30° to 230°F (-34° to 110°C) 

R option (RTD) -68° to 240°F (-55° to 60°C) 

Temp response 



ST-R* 

ST-R*R 

TM 


APPLICATION 

ST-R* 

The ST-R* Series Encapsulated Sensor (white) is 

intended for indoor use only, in areas not subject to 

moisture or condensation. The sensor may be installed 

under the cover of an existing pneumatic thermostat. 

Caution should be exercised when applying the sensor 

to existing electric thermostats. Heat is often generated 

by anticipators or other electronics that will affect the 

sensor reading. The sensor operating range is 35° to 

140°F (2° to 60°C). Do not use in conditions below 35°F 

(2°C) or where condensation could occur. 

ST-R*R 

The ST-R*R Series Ruggedized Encapsulated 

Sensor (red) is suitable for temperature extremes and 

is immune to the effects of moisture and condensation. 

Precon uses a three-stage, rugged coating process to 

moistureproof any sensor which is to be used below 

ambient dewpoint. The sensor operating range is -30° 

to 230°F (-34° to 110°C). 



Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

MOUNTING 

Mounting 

Secure to enclosure or wall using cable ties, clips, or brackets. To obtain 

optimum performance, the sensor enclosure/assembly must be highly 

conductive. Any sensor element surrounded by insulating media will not 

perform properly at all temperatures or with the proper temperature 

response times. An accurate room sensor must have good ventilation and a 

high thermal-conducting metal which is in direct contact with the sensor. 

The enclosure must be insulated from the building mounting surface to limit 

wall temperature influence on the sensor. 

Wiring 

Terminate using butt splices or solder connections (wire nuts are not 

recommended). Use the full length wire lead to avoid condensation or 

moisture migration from the field connection. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.17 

(0.43) 

TEMPERATURE 

ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES 

26 

0.5 

(1.27) 

24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire 

ST-R * 

ST-R3 R X25 

0.18 

(0.46) 


Vents 

0.5 

(1.27) 

Rear View 

24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire 

3.5 

(8.89) 

R Option Rugged Coating 

ST-R * R 

Example: ST-R3R-X25 10,000Ω Type III thermistor with 3.5" rugged coating 

and 25' (7.6m) cable length 



WMB-1 Vented wall enclosure 

WMB-2 Vented executive wall enclosure 

PN-46 Aluminum mounting clip 

Customer-Supplied 

Enclosure 

Aluminum Mounting 

Clip Accessory PN-46 


ST-R3 10,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-R21 2252Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-R22 3000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-R24 10,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-R27 100,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-R42 20,000Ω encapsulated thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-R81 100Ω encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

ST-R85 1000Ω encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

ST-R91 1000Ω encapsulated RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

OPTIONS 

R Rugged (3.5" moistureproof coating; adding a # following the R extends the coating in feet) 





XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°F/158°F (0°/70°C)

TEMPERATURE 

KELE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD 

KTR * SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The KTR* Room Temperature Sensor is a cost-effective 

room temperature sensor with an accuracy of 

±0.5°F (0.28°C). The thermistor is made of a very stable, 

pre-aged material that offers the reliability needed 

in control systems. The platinum RTD comes in 100� 

and 1000� and is compatible with most HVAC systems. 

All sensors come with a three-year warranty. 

FEATURES 

• Economical 

• Attractive new design 

• Three-year warranty 

• ±0.5°F (0.28°C) accuracy 

• Durable housing 

• White color 

• Thermistor or RTD 

• Locking cover screws 

OPTIONS 

• Setpoint slide adjust 

• Momentary override switch 

• RJ11 communication jack 

• NIST certificate 

• 24V LED lamp 

• OEM models available 


APPLICATION 

The KTR* Series is designed to be wall mounted 

indoors where appearance and accuracy are important. 

The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or 

on standard electrical boxes. It comes in all the most 

common thermistors or RTDs. Options may be mixed 

and matched for each application. 



RTD (platinum) 


Sensor types 

Thermistor @ 77°F 2.252 k�, 3 k�, 10 k�, 20 k�, 

100 k� 



Platinum 1000� 375 curve 



Sensitivity See Sensor Resistance Charts in 

the “Technical Reference” section 

Stability 


RTD 100% (no drift platinum) 

DIMENSIONS 

3.31 

(8.40) 

in 

(cm) 

.5 

(1.27) 

Wire Way 

Back Plate 

0.94 

(2.38) 

KTR* KTR*-A10K-J1-LED-MD 

1.31 

(2.54) 

2.64 

(6.7) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

0.33 

(.85) 

Adjust 

Tab 

LED 

Typical logo 

location 

2.75 (6.98) 

Front 

Side 

0.18 

(.47) 

Connection Terminals 

Mounting Directly to wall or customer-supplied 

back box, no adapters needed for 

standard outlet boxes 

Color White plastic 

Options 

Override button N.O. form A contact in parallel with 

pot or sensor with jumper 

Setpoint adjust 400�, 10 k�, 20 k�, or 100 k� slide pot 

Comm. jack RJ11, four-conductor connection 

NIST One- or two-point accuracy certificate 

Lamp indicator 24 VAC/VDC LED (externally powered) 

Custom logo Custom printing; one-, two-, 

or three-color 

Locking cover 1/16" Allen key head 

Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 

MB 

27 

4.5 

(11.43) 

1.5 

(3.8) 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

28 

TEMPERATURE 

KELE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR, THERMISTOR AND RTD 

KTR * SERIES 

MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where 

back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting 

directly to electrical outlet boxes. 

Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, 

two #6-32 screws for handibox-mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws 

for direct wall-mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" 

Allen key head, installed as needed. 

Wire Access 

Hole 


Mounting 

Screws 


Self-Latching 

Cover 

Cover 

Locking 



To BAS 

Controller 

The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, 

on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling 

generating devices. 

Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate. 

2 

1 

JP1 

Push button will short out the 

pot or sensor momentarily 

LED 

Axxx Pot to BAS Controller 

TB4 for MB only 

JP2 

Pot Action 

Communication Wiring 

J1 or J2 

C 

MB 

Button Jumper 

8 1-2 Pot 

7 3-4 Pot 

5-6 Sensor 

7-8 Sensor 

Customer Contact 

24V (AC/DC) 

Sensor to BAS Controller 

Sensor 

DA RA 

Shipped DA 

Left to right 

Low to high resistance 



KTR Kele room sensor housing 

SENSOR SELECTION 

3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material 

21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material 

22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material 

24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material 



81 100Ω RTD, 385 platinum curve 



ROOM SENSOR OPTIONS (Options to be listed alphabetically with dashes) 

A400 Setpoint adjust with 400Ω span (R5 for offset), Patone 431C 

A10K Setpoint adjust with 10,000Ω span (R5 for offset), Patone 431C 



CL1 Custom logo option one color, (CL2 = two color, CL3 = three color) 

J1 RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD) 

J2 RJ11 internal communication jack 

LED LED lamp indicator, standard 24 VAC/VDC voltage 

MB Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1) 

N1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C) 

N2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/158°F (0°/70°C) 

TB4 Separate termination for MB option 

WIRING TYPICAL COVER OPTIONS 


10-531 Wall adapter plate 7" x 5.25" 

RJ11 plug 

SW3 

RT1 

IN JP1 

1 

+ 

- 

- 

OUT 

+ 

J3 

POT 

J4 

R4 

R5 

R2 

- 

LED 

+ 

2 

1 

J1 

SENSOR 

JP2 

R6 

K 

R3 

A 

K 

D2 

MB 

Button 

A 

8 

7 

8 

7 

D3 

RJ11 plug with cover off; 

for J2 option 

SW2 

Axxx 

6 

LED 

1 

J2 

J7 

SW1 SW4 

SETPOINT ADJUST 

COVER ON 

CCRJ11AD accessory; 

required for J1 option 

DA Low to high resistance 

RA High to low resistance 

Sample Order 

KTR3 Kele room sensor 

with 10K Type III thermistor 

KTR85-A400-MB Kele room sensor 

with 1000Ω 385 RTD 

with 400Ω adjust pot 

and momentary switch 

KTR24-N1-LED Kele room sensor 

with 10K Type II thermistor 

with NIST and LED lamp 

Accessories 

CCRJ11AD J1 option adaptor 

KT-1 Cover mouting screwdriver 

1/16" Allen/standard/philips 

Logo Color Chart 

Pantone 485 

Pantone 356 

Pantone 492C 

Pantone 124C 

Pantone 300 

Pantone 431C 

Pantone 299 

Pantone 6C 

Other Pantone colors available upon request. 

RT2

TEMPERATURE 

KELE DUCT, IMMERSION, AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

KTD, KTW, KTO SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele KTD* Duct, KTW* Immersion, and KTO* 

OSA sensors are designed to be cost-effective with 

accuracies of ±0.5˚F (0.28˚C). Each uses metal enclosures 

and is constructed for easy installation with any 

building automation system (BAS). The thermistor is 

made of very stable, pre-aged material that offers longlife 

reliability for HVAC control. The platinum RTD 

comes in 100� and 1000� versions. All sensors come 

with a three-year warranty. 

FEATURES 


• Metal enclosures with SS probes 


• ±0.5˚F (±0.28˚C) accuracy 

• Thermistor or RTD sensor selections 

• Simple traditional mounting 

OPTIONS 

• NIST certification 

• Weatherproof enclosures 

• Liquid tight 

• Greenfield fittings 

• Dual sensors in one probe 



RTD (platinum) 




RTD @ 32°F Platinum 100�, 1000� 385 curve 

Platinum 1000� 375 curve 

Temp range -30˚ to 230˚F (-34˚ to 110˚C) 


Stability 


RTD 100% (no drift platinum) 

Connections 8', 22 AWG wire leads 

Mounting Tabs with 1/2" conduit fittings 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.0 

(10.2) 

1.70 

(4.3) 

3.88 

(9.89) 

Mounting T-Bar 

Vinyl Grommet 

4.87 

(12.38) 

KTD* 

0.25 

(0.64) 

1.70 

(4.3) 

0.25 

(0.63) 

4.0 

(10.2) 

4.87 

(12.38) 

KTW* 

KTW3 

KTO3 

Enclosure Metal NEMA 1, 

weatherproof for OSA standard 

Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 

1/4" OD 


Options 

D Dual sensors in one probe 

GF Greenfield fitting 

LT Liquid-tight fitting 

NB No back box with 1/2" MNPT 

Nx NIST for 1 or 2 reference points 

W Weatherproof enclosure 

(duct, immersion) 

Warranty Three years 

WEL-B 

KTDNB3 

1/2" NPT 

5.13 

(13.03) 3.25 

(8.26) 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

KTD3 

4.63 

(11.75) 

KTWNB3 

KTD3-GF 

KTWNB3-LT 

KTD3-W KTW3-W 

6.13 

(15.56) 

Foam Gasket 

KTO* 

1.5 

(3.81) 

Stainless 

Sheathed 

Sensor 

29 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

30 

TEMPERATURE 

KELE DUCT, IMMERSION, AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

KTD, KTW, KTO SERIES 


Wiring 

Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended. 

Mounting KTD* 

Drill a 5/8" (1.6 cm) hole for probe insertion. 

Using the provided #6 screws, secure the 

box to the duct either with the T-bar mounting 

ears or through the box holes. 

Mounting T-bar 

5/8" (1/6 cm) hole 

Mounting KTW* 

Install the well into customer-supplied 

1/2" NPT saddle (or Thredolet ®). Screw 

the sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPT 

brass fitting. 

Install the wells as shown to 

obtain optimum well strength 

Flow 

Flow 

Angle must not allow end of well 

to contact the other side of pipe. 

Order wells separately 


Mounting KTO* 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall mount 

screws can be used for outside mounting. 

For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads 

are available in the back and side. 

3/4" NPT 

Side and rear 

Use AD-2 

adaptor 

for 1/2" NPT 

applications 

Correct position for mounting 

outdoor air sensor 

Shaded side of building 

Preferred mounting location 

for outdoor air sensor 


KTD Duct temperature sensor 

KTW Well immersion temperature sensor (order wells separately) 

KTO OSA temperature sensor (weatherproof standard) 

KTDNB Duct temperature sensor with no box 

KTWNB Well immersion temperature sensor with no box (order wells separately) 

SENSOR SELECTION 

3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III 

21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

27 100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV 

81 100Ω RTD, 385 platinum 



OPTIONS 

D Dual sensors in one probe 

GF Greenfield fitting 

LT Liquid-tight fitting 

N1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32°F (0°C) 

N2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32°/160°F (0°/77°C) 

W Weatherproof housing 

KTD 3 N1 

Do Not mount 

sensor in vertical 

position with 

the weather 

shield pointing up. 

For best results, do not mount above doors, windows, 

air intakes, or exhausts. 

Example: KTD-3-N1 Duct sensor with 10,000Ω thermistor and NIST certificate 



TCC-12 Single application thermal compound tube 


AD-2 3/4" to 1/2" NPT adaptor 

WEL-B Brass well for 1/4" probe, 1/2" Thredolet ® 

WEL-S Stainless steel well for 1/4" probe, 1/2" Thredolet ®

TEMPERATURE 

DUCT, IMMERSION, AND OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

US * , OSA * SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

US*/OSA* Series Duct, Immersion, and OSA 

Temperature Sensors are very economical and, with 

accuracies of ±0.5°F (0.28°C), are specifically designed 

for HVAC applications. The mounting styles are based 

on proven techniques for installation efficiency and use 

stainless steel probes for durability. The sensor comes 

with a three-year warranty and is made with the highestquality 

material that offers the reliability needed in 

HVAC systems. 

FEATURES 


• Proven mounting designs 




• NEMA 3R enclosure 

PROBE TYPES 

The US* Series Sensors use a proven universal style 

enclosure for duct and immersion applications. The 

direct-mount design incorporates a 2.5" x 2.5" (6.4 x 6.4 

cm) termination box with a 4.87" (12.4 cm) stainless 

steel probe. The probe may be inserted into a duct with 

0.4" (1 cm) hole or immersion using a Model WEL-B or a 

WEL-S. 










Temp range 


RTD -68° to 240°F (-55° to 60°C) 

Temp response 



US* 

OSA* 

The OSA* Series Sensors are used for outside air temperature 

sensing. The design allows for two-point 

mounting. The weather shield protects the encapsulated 

sensor probe from the effects of rain, sleet, and 

snow. 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

32 

TEMPERATURE 

DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA, THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS 

US * , OSA * SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.3 

(5.84) 

1/8" NPT 

0.25 

(0.63) 

3.25 (8.26) 

2.5 (6.35) 

0.88 (2.24) 

4.87 

(12.38) 

Mounting 

Tabs 

US* 

Multipurpose 

Duct and Immersion Sensor 

Removeable 

Sensor Cover 

1.30 (3.30) 

1/2" Conduit Hole* 

(face down) 

Mounting Box 


3.20 (8.12) 

4.10 (10.4) 

2.50 (6.35) 

3.30 

(8.38) 

OSA* 

Outside Air Sensor 


US Universal-mount sensor, duct and immersion (order wells separately) 

OSA OSA sensor 

THERMISTOR SENSOR TYPE 

3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material 





42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material 

81 100Ω RTD@ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 

85 1,000Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 

91 1,000Ω RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) 

US 3 Example: US-3 10,000Ω Type III universal mount thermistor sensor 


WEL-B Brass well for US sensors 

WEL-S Stainless steel well for US sensors 

TCC-12 Single application thermal compound 

TCC-111 Thermal compound 111 ml tub 

2.50 

(6.35) 

Mounting Tabs (2) 

1/2" Conduit Hole* 

(face down) 

*Must face down 

to maintain watertight 

integrity

TEMPERATURE 

BAS/HVAC TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

ACI SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ACI Series sensors are designed specifically for HVAC system 

temperature control. The room, duct, immersion, and OSA sensors 

come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with 

most BAS systems available today. 

Room sensors are vented for indoor use with options that 

include set point adjust, push-button override, communication 

jacks and custom logos. Duct sensors come with a foam-backed 

handy box and 8" probe. Averaging sensors come with a foambacked 

handy box and in 12' (3.7m) or 24' (7.3) lengths. 

Immersion sensors come with a handy box and are 4" (10.1 cm) 

long. The 1/4" probes fit tightly into the separately ordered stainless 

steel or brass well (WELB-H or WELS-H). Strap-on sensors 

come with a handy box and stainless steel strap for 5" (12.7 cm) 

pipes. The 1.5" (3.8 cm) copper plate with foam-backed pad 

offers excellent continuous pipe contact. OSA sensors mount in 

a NEMA 4 box with weather shield and easy-mount tabs. 

FEATURES 

• ±0.36°F (0.2°C) accuracy 


• Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves 

• Stainless steel probes 

• Special lengths available 

• Delta-style room enclosure 


PROBE APPLICATIONS 

The ACI/*R Room Sensor should be mounted approximately 

5' (12.7 cm) above the floor. It can be mounted to a standard 

back box or directly to the wall using appropriate anchors for 

the wall covering. 

The ACI/*D Duct Sensor should be mounted close to the 

center of the duct and penetrate through any duct insulation at 

least 1" (2.5 cm) into the airflow. The probes are sensitive 

within 1" of the tip and insert through a 3/8" (1 cm) hole. Use 

standard metal screws to secure to the duct. 

The ACI/*A Averaging Duct Sensor should be mounted 

across a duct in a serpentine fashion with bends in a smooth 

ark using an M-648 clip. The RTD probe is sensitive for the 

entire length, while the thermistor is sensitive at nine evenly 

spaced sensor locations. Use standard metal screws to 

secure to the duct. 

The ACI/*O OSA Sensor should be located on an outside 

wall facing north in the northern hemisphere. Using the tabs 

on the box, mount to the exterior wall using screws appropriate 

for the wall construction. 


Sensing element Thermistor (TH), NTC, 

RTD, PTC, 385 �/�/°C 

Accuracy Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C), 

RTD ±0.28°F (0.15°C) ±0.06%, 

RTD averaging ±0.5°F (0.4°C) 


Thermistor 2252 2,252� @ 77°F (25°C) 

3K 3,000� @ 77°F (25°C) 

5K 5 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

20K 20 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

CP 10 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

AN 10 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

100K 100K @ 77°F (25°C) 

RTD 100-2 100� @ 32°F (0°C) 385 platinum curve 

1000-2 1 k� @ 32°F (0°C) 385 platinum curve 

ACI/AN-O 

ACI/AN-R 

ACI/AN-I4 ACI/AN-D 

ACI/AN-BP 

ACI/AN-AV 

ACI/AN-S 

The ACI/*I Immersion Sensor threads into a separately purchased 

1/2" (1.27 cm) well (WELB-H or WELS-H), which is 

secured into the pipe to a customer-supplied 1/2" saddle or 

Thredolet®. The probe is tight fitting for accurate readings. 

Faster response can be achieved by using TCC-12 thermal 

conductive compound at the bottom of the well. 

The ACI/*S Strap-On Sensor mounts directly to a 2" to 5" 

(5.1 to 12.7 cm) pipe. Be sure to clean off any insulation or 

rust to promote solid contact of the copper plate to the pipe. 

Wrap and tighten the strap around the pipe and compress the 

foam fully for a firm mount. Faster response can be achieved 

by using TCC-12 thermal conductive compound. 

The ACI/*BP Stainless Steel Sensor is for under-insulation 

mounting and direct contact to the pipe. Be sure to clean off 

any insulation or rust to promote solid contact, and secure 

with tie raps so the probe is parallel to the pipe. 

All field wiring is terminated to a terminal block or UR moisture-resistant 

butt slice connectors or soldering. 

* Sensor type 

Stability 


RTD

TEMPERATURE 

34 

TEMPERATURE 

BAS/HVAC TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

ACI SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.25 

(5.7) 

2.75 

(7.0) 

ACI/*R 

Room 

* Sensor Type 

3.84 

(9.8) 

1.15 

(2.9) 

0.89 

(2.3) 

0.60 

(1.5) 

0.92 

(2.3) 

4.51 

(10.4) 

Worm 

Gear 

1.5 x 1.5 

(3.8 x 3.8) 

Foam Pad 

0.90 

(2.3) 

5.0 

(12.7) 

ACI/*-S 

Strap-On 

1.70 

(4.3) 

D 8" (20.3 cm) 

A12 12' (3.6 m) 

A24 24' (7.3 m) 

0.125 (0.3) 

Foam 

Insulation 

4.0 

0.76 (1.9) (10.2) 

ACI/*-D/AV 

Duct/Averaging 

1.7 (4.3) 

24" Leads 

1" Long x 

0.250" O.D. 

Bullet Probe 

ACI/*-BP 

Stainless Steel Probe 

2.77 

(7.0) 


1/2 NPT 

Top & Back 

4.5 

(11.53) 

1.6 

(3.0) 

4.81 

(12.2) 

ACI/*-O 

Outside Air 

MODEL DESCRIPTION (choose one) 

ACI/AN Thermistor 10 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/10AN) 3 

ACI/CP Thermistor 10 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/10CP) 2 

ACI/20K Thermistor 20 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/20K) 

ACI/100K Thermistor 100 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) (ACI/100K) 

ACI/100-2 RTD 100Ω, two-wire 385 curve, @ 32°F (0°C) 

ACI/1000-2 RTD 1000Ω, two-wire 385 curve, @ 32°F (0°C) 

MOUNTING CONFIGURATION (choose one) 

R Room mounted 

RS Room with set point (choose pot and indication below) 

RO Room with override button 

RSO Room with set point and override button (choose pot and indication below) 

SP Room stainless steel flush mount 

D8 Duct mount with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion 

A12 Averaging with 12' (3.6m) length 

A24 Averaging with 24' (7.3m) length 

I4 Immersion with 4" (10.1 cm) pipe insertion 

S Strap on with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter stainless steel strap 

O Outside air mounting 

BP Stainless steel bullet probe 

OPTION LIST (multiple selection) 

RJ4 Four-pin RJ11 (R type sensors only) 

RJ6 Six-pin RJ11 (R type sensors only) 

400 Adjust pot 0-400Ω (RS and RSO type sensors only) [direct acting] 

1K Adjust pot 0-1 kΩ (RS and RSO type sensors only) [reverse acting] 

10K Adjust pot 0-10 kΩ (RS and RSO type sensors only) [reverse acting] 

CW Adjust indication warm/cool (RS and RSO type sensors only) 

F Adjust indication 55° to 85°F (RS and RSO type sensors only) 

C Adjust indication 10° to 30°C (RS and RSO type sensors only) 

XK Custom logo (customer supplied artwork GIF, TIF, EPS, PSD, or JPEG) 

XK1 Custom logo (>100 sensors, with customer supplied art work) 

4.50 

(11.4) 

2.75 

(7.0) 

4.0 

(10.2) 

ACI/*-SP 

Stainless Plate 

Choose only 1. 

1.70 

(4.3) 

2.15 

(5.5) 

ACI/*I4 

Immersion 

0.125 (0.3) 

Foam 

Insulation 

Pad 

5.5 

(14.0) 

1/2" Male 

NPT Threads 

1/2" Conduit 

Knockouts 

1/2" Male NPT 

Nylon Fitting 

Choose only 1 for RS or RSO. 

Choose one for RS or RSO. 

Choose only 1. 

ACI/AN RS RJ4-10K-F Example: ACI/AN-RS-RJ4-10K-F ACI room 10 kΩ thermistor sensor with four-pin RJ11 

and 10 kΩ set point and 55° to 85°F adjust indication 


UR Moisture resistant three-wire butt splice TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 

WELB-H Brass immersion well TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound tub, 11 ml 

WELS-H Stainless steel immersion well 

0.25 (0.64)

TEMPERATURE 

BAPI BAS ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS 

BA ROOM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The BA Series room sensors and transmitters are 

designed specifically for HVAC systems. The room 

sensors come in a variety of enclosure styles, including 

Delta, Precon, SS plate, and BAPIstat II. They are 

available in eight thermistor, three RTD, and two semiconductor 

sensors, which makes the BA sensors compatible 

with every BAS system in use today. The transmitters 

come in 4-20 mA with optional icepoint calibration. 

FEATURES 


• ±0.216°F (±0.12°C) RTD accuracy 

• ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) semiconductor accuracy 

• 4-20 mA transmitter with icepoint option 

• Lifetime limited sensor warranty 

• Wide selection of thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor 

curves 

• Wide selection of enclosure designs 

OPTIONS 

• Setpoint (multiple legends available) 

• Standard or flush override buttons 

• RJ11, RJ12, RJ46, and phone 

communication jacks 

• Bimetal and digital display 

• Customer or contractor logos 


Sensor Thermistor, NTC 

RTD, PTC, 385 or 375 �/�/°C 

Semiconductor 0.556 mA/°F (1 µA°C) 

Accuracy 


RTD ±0.216°F (0.12°C), ±0.12% 

RTD avg ±0.93°F (0.52°C) 

Semiconductor (SC) ±2.7°F (1.5°C) 


Thermistor @ 77°F 1.8 k�, 3 k�, 3.3 k�, 10 k� Type 2, 

(25°C) 10 k� Type 3, 20 k�, 

50 k�, 100 k� 

RTD @ 32°F (O°C) 100� 385, 1 k� 385, 1 k� 375 

SC, AD592 @ -25°C 247 µA 

SC, LM334 @ 25°C 398 µA 

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS 

Sensor 1 k� 385 platinum RTD 

Supply voltage 7-40 VDC 

Output 4-20 mA 

Load impedance 850� @ 24 VDC 

Accuracy ±0.1% of span 

BA/*-B 

BA/*-R 

BA/*-B-84LG-N 

BA/*-R-84LG- 

N-BM5090 

BA/*-RSZ 

BA/*-SP 

BA/*-RSZ- 

BM5090 

BA/*-SP- 

C40-02-N 

Stability 

Thermistor

TEMPERATURE 

36 

TEMPERATURE 

BAPI BAS ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS 

BA ROOM SERIES 



BA/ Room temperature sensor surface mount 

REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE (differential inputs available upon request) 

1.8K Thermistor 1.8 kΩ @ 77°F (25°C) 

3K Thermistor 3000Ω @ 77°F (25°C) 


10K2 Thermistor 10,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C), Type 2 


20K Thermistor 20,000Ω @ 77°F (25°C) 



100 RTD 100Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve 

1K8 RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve 

1K7 RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 375 curve 

334 LM334 semiconductor 

592 AD592 semiconductor (each unit provided with error and offset data) 

T1K (0/100°F) 4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve or custom range 

T1KM (0/100°F) 4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve matched @0°C or custom range 

REQUIRED ROOM ENCLOSURE 

R Delta style enclosure 

B BAPIstat II style enclosure 

RSZ Precon executive style enclosure 

SP Stainless steel plate style enclosure 

SETPOINT OPTION LIST (other Ω values and legends available) 

40L2 Adjust 0Ω-1000Ω, 55° to 85°F legend (R and B only) 

40L6 Adjust 0Ω-1000Ω, cool/warm legend (R and B only) 

25L2 Adjust 800Ω-1200Ω, 55° to 85°F legend (R and B only) 

25L6 Adjust 800Ω-1200Ω, cool/warm legend (R and B only) 

84L2 Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, 55° to 85°F legend (R and B only) 

84L6 Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, cool/warm legend (R and B only) 

+ Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, cool/warm legend, sensor override button, RJ11 jack (RSZ only) 

C40 Adjust 0-1000Ω, 50° to 90°F legend (SP only) 

Z40 Adjust 0-1000Ω, +/- legend (SP only) 

C84 Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, 50° to 90°F legend (SP only) 

Z84 Adjust 10,000Ω-30,000Ω, +/- legend (SP only) 

OVERRIDE SWITCH (not available in RSZ enclosure) 

J Override as a separate input termination (R and B only, not for T1K transmitters) 

N Override parallel with sensor (R and B only) 

P Override parallel with setpoint adjust POT (R and B only) 

O-N Standard override push button, parallel with sensor (SP only) 

O2-N Low profile override push button, parallel with sensor (SP only, not for T1K) 

K-N Key switch override, momentary N.O., parallel with sensor (SP only) 

COMMUNICATION JACK (not available on RSZ enclosure) 

C35 3.5 mm phone jack (not available for T1K transmitters) 

C11 RJ11 (4 pin) jack (R and B only, not available for T1K transmitters) 



TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SECURITY OPTIONS 

BM5090 Bimetal thermometer 50° to 90°F (R and RSZ only) 

BM1030 Bimetal thermometer 10° to 30°C (R and RSZ only) 

SEC1 Security screws (SP only) 

BA/ 10K3 R 40L2 N C11 BM5090 

BAPI STAT II WITH DIGITAL DISPLAY (Special order, call Trane) 

BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 

BA/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 

BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 


Example: BA/10K3-R-40L2-N-C11-BM5090 Delta room 10 kΩ thermistor 

sensor with 1000Ω, adjust POT 55° to 85°F legend, button, jack, 

and temperature indication 

BA/Foamback White foam back insulator 

BA/Foamback-Gray Gray foam back insulator 

UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice

TEMPERATURE 

BAPI BAS IMMERSION AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND 

TRANSMITTERS 

BA PROBE SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The BA Probe Series duct, immersion, and OSA 

probe sensors and transmitters are designed specifically 

for HVAC systems. The probes are available in a 

variety of easy-to-mount installation types, and they 

come in eight thermistor, three RTD, and two semiconductor 

sensors. The BA probe sensors are compatible 

with every BAS system in use today. The transmitters 

come in 4-20 mA and optional icepoint calibration. 

FEATURES 


• ±0.216°F (±0.12°C) RTD accuracy 

• ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) semiconductor accuracy 

• 4-20 mA transmitter with icepoint accuracy 

• Lifetime limited sensor warranty 

• Wide selection of thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor 

curves 

• Wide selection of mounting styles 

OPTIONS 

• Weatherproof enclosures 

• UV-rated plastic enclosures 

• Variable lengths 

• Flexible and rigid averaging probes 

• Strap-on sensor designs 


Sensor Thermistor, NTC, 

RTD, PTC, 385 or 375 �/�/°C 

Semiconductor 0.556 mA/°F (1 µA°C) 

Accuracy 


RTD ±0.216°F (0.12°C), ±0.12% 

RTD avg ±0.93°F (0.52°C) 

Semiconductor (SC) ±2.7°F (1.5°C) 


Thermistor @ 77°F 1.8 k�, 3 k�, 3.3 k�, 10 k� Type 2, 

(25°C) 10 k� Type 3, 20 k�, 50 k�, 

100 k� 

RTD @ 32°F (0°C) 100� 385, 1 k� 385, 1 k� 375 

SC, AD592 @-13°F (-25°C) 248 µA 

SC, LM334 @ 77°F (25°C) 398 µA 

TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS 

Sensor 1 k� 385 platinum RTD 





BA/*-STP-JB 

BA/*-D8-WP 

BA/*-I4-WP 

BA/*-RPP-NB 

BA/*-S-JB 

BA/*-PP18-NB 

BA/*-A8-EU 

BA/*-RA12-JB 

BA/*-O-EUO 

Stability 

Thermistor

TEMPERATURE 

38 

TEMPERATURE 

BAPI BAS IMMERSION AND OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND 

TRANSMITTERS 

BA PROBE SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(mm) 

3.875 

(98.6) 

1.99 

(50.5) 

2.31 

(58.7) 

4.19 

(106.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

Medical-grade 

Closed Cell Foam 

Insulating Pad 

4, 8, 12, or 18 

(101.6, 203.2, 304.8, or 457.2) 

or averaging 12" to 24' 

(JB) Duct Probe 

4.10 

(104.4) 

3.80 

(96.5) 



BA/ Probe temperature sensor 

REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE (differential inputs available upon request) 


3K Thermistor 3000Ω @ 77°F (25°C) 







100 RTD 100Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve 

1K8 RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve 

1K7 RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 375 curve 


592 AD592 semiconductor (each unit provided with error and offset data; not available in averaging sensor) 

T1K (0/100°F) 4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve or custom range 

T1KM (0/100°F) 4-20 mA transmitter (0/100°F) with 1000Ω RTD, 385 curve matched @0°C or custom range 

REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH 

D8 Duct mount with 8" probe (other lengths available 4", 12", 18") 

A8 Flexible averaging probe 8' long (AD592 sensor not available) 



RA12 Rigid averaging probe 12" long (AD592 sensor not available) 



I2 Immersion probe 2" long, 1/2" well thread 

I4 Immersion probe 4" long, 1/2" well thread (other lengths available as specified) 

S SS clamp-on sensor for 2" to 4.5" diameter pipe and 1.25" copper plate pad 

STP Spring extended strap-on sensor for 5" to 14.5" diameter pipe and 1.25" extended copper plate pad 

O OSA probe 5" long 

PP-18" Encapsulated sensor probe plenum-rated with 18" leads (other lengths available as specified) 

RPP-18" Stainless steel remote probe plenum-rated sensor with 18" leads (other lengths available as specified) 

REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE (JB is standard for D, A, RA, I, S, and STP sensors) 

JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts (D, A, RA, I, S, and STP sensors only) 

NB No box with 18" leads (D, PP, A, RA, and RPP sensors only) 

WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure (D, A, RA, I, O, PP, and RPP sensors only) 

EU Weathertight IP66 ABS plastic enclosure (D, A, RA, I, PP, and RPP sensors only) 

EUO Weathertight IP66 UV-rated enclosure (D, A, RA, I, O, PP, and RPP sensors only) 

BA/ 10K3 D8 JB 

4, 8, 12, or 18 

(101.6, 203.2, 304.8, or 457.2) 

or averaging 12" to 24' 

2.13 

(54.1) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

Medical-grade 




WS2.5 304 SS immersion well for an I2 sensor 

3.51, 5.76, or 8.76 

(89.2, 146.3, or 222.5) 

4.19 

(106.4) 

1.99 

(50.5) 

Example: BA/10K3-D8-JB BAPI 8" duct 10,000Ω thermistor sensor with JB box 


2.16 

(54.9) 

1/2" NPT 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

Medical-grade 



2.75 

(69.9) 

1/2" NPT 

Typical 

4.50 

(114.3) 

Vented 

Sensor 

Guard 

2.16 

(54.9) 

Weathertight Enclosure (EU/EUO) 

Duct Probe (JB) Immersion Probe 

(WP) OSA Probe 

WS4 304 SS immersion well for an I4 sensor 

WS9 304 SS immersion well for an I8 sensor 

0.25 

(6.4) 

Medical-grade 

Closed Cell 

Foam 


5.0 

(127.0)

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM AVERAGING SENSORS 

ST-AV91H SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The continuous resistance element ST-AV91H Series 

1000� 375 Platinum Averaging Sensors provide accurate 

sensing of duct temperatures when a large area 

must be covered. Temperatures are averaged over the 

entire length and terminate in a weatherproof housing. 

The ST-AV91H Series uses an element that closely 

matches platinum resistance/temperature characteristics 

over the specified range. 

The sensors have a copper case bendable to a radius of 

4" (10.2 cm), and they can crisscross a duct or plenum to 

average out temperature stratification. 

SPECIFICATIONS TYPICAL APPLICATION 

Sensing element 1000� ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C) 

TCR 0.00375 �/�/°C platinum 

curve 


Approx sensitivity 2.1�/°F @ 32°F (0°C) 

Element length 24' (7.3m) or 12' (3.7m) 

50' (15.2m) 

Element casing Copper 0.187" dia (0.475 cm) 

Housing Weatherproof 

CC-IG 

Capillary 

Mounting Clip 


ST-AV91H 


ST-AV91H Platinum averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m) 

ST-AV91H12 Platinum averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m) 

ST-AV91H50 Platinum averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m) 

Transmitter can be mounted 

in the electrical box. 


T91U 4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 1000� platinum sensors 

TT-807 4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 1000� platinum sensors 


39 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

40 

TEMPERATURE 

100 AND 1000 OHM 385 PLATINUM AVERAGING SENSORS 

ST-AV81H, ST-AV85H SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The continuous-resistance element 100� and 1000� 

Platinum Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing 

of duct temperatures when a large area must be 

covered. They average temperatures over their entire 

length and terminate in a weatherproof housing. The 

averaging sensors use elements that closely match platinum 

resistance/temperature characteristics over the 

specified range. The sensors have copper cases that 

are bendable to a radius of 4" (10.2 cm), and they can 

crisscross a duct or plenum to average out temperature 

stratification. 


Sensing element TCR 0.00385 �/�/°C 

Type 81 100� ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C) 

Type 85 1000� ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C) 

Sensor range -40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C) 

Approx sensitivity 

Type 81 0.217�/°F @ 32°F (0°C) 

Type 85 2.17�/°F @ 32°F (0°C) 

Lead wires 22 AWG, teflon insulated 

Element length 12' (3.7m) 

24' (7.3m) 

50' (15.24m) 

Element casing Copper 0.19" dia (0.48 cm) 

Housing Weatherproof 

CC-IG 

Capillary 

Mounting Clip 


ST-AV85H 

TYPICAL APPLICATION 


ST-AV81H 100Ω averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve 

ST-AV81H12 100Ω averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve 

ST-AV81H50 100Ω averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve 

ST-AV85H 1000Ω averaging sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve 

ST-AV85H12 1000Ω averaging sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve 

ST-AV85H50 1000Ω averaging sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve 

XZ Three-wire option (use TT-801), (100Ω sensor only) 

ST-AV81H Example: ST-AV81H 100Ω 385 Platinum averaging duct 

sensor with 24' (7.3m) element 




T81U 4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter for type 81 sensors 

T85U 4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter for type 85 sensors 

TT-801 4-20 mA temperature transmitter for two- or three-wire application for Type 81 sensors 

CC-IG Plastic capillary mounting clip

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS 

ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Continuous resistance element Platinum Curve Rigid 

Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct 

temperatures when a small, inaccessible area must be 

covered. They average temperatures over their entire 

length and terminate in a weather-resistant housing. 

They are available in 12", 18", 24", and 36" (30.5, 45.7, 

61, and 91.4 cm) lengths. The sensor uses an element 

that closely matches platinum resistance/temperature 

characteristics over the specified range. It is available in 

100� and 1000� 385 curve and 1000� 375 curve. The 

sensors have a brass case that is rigid for easy singlepoint 

mounting. 

FEATURES 

• Continuous averaging 

• Rigid sensor 

• 12", 18", 24", 36" (30.5, 45.7, 61, and 91.4 cm) 

lengths 

• 100� and 1000� 385 curve 

• 1000� 375 curve 

• Weather-resistant box 


Sensing element 1000� ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C); 

100� ±0.25% @ 32°F (0°C) 

TCR 375 or 385 


Approx sensitivity 

100� 0.21�/°F @ 32°F (0°C) 

1000� 2.1�/°F @ 32°F (0°C) 

Lead wires 22 AWG teflon insulated, 

white/black 

MOUNTING / DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

1/2" 

NPT 

4.5 

(11.43) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

1.38 

(3.49) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

12 (30.5) 

18 (45.7) 

24 (61.0) 

36 (91.4) 

Brass Averaging 

Probe 

356-090K 

APPLICATION 

• Small ducts without access 

• Mixed air chambers 

• Hot/Cold deck discharge 

• Face/Bypass discharge 

• Unit vents 

ST-AV91R-18 

Element 

Length 12" (30 cm) or 18" (45 cm); 

24" (61 cm) or 36" (91 cm) 

Casing Brass 

Diameter 0.188" (4.8 mm) 

Housing Weather resistant 

0.188 

(4.8 mm) 

0.25 

(0.635) 

Swivel Flange 

Accessory 

(356-090K) 

36 (91) 

maximum 

41 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

42 

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS 

ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R SERIES 

WIRING 

(white) 

(black) 

TYPICAL MOUNTING 

Supports typically 

not required 



ST-AV81R 100Ω 385 rigid averaging duct probe 



INSERTION LENGTH 

12 12" length 

18* 18" length 

24* 24" length 

36 36" length 

* Normally stocked items 





TT-807 4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 1000� platinum sensors 




TT801 4-20 mA temperature transmitter for 100� platinum sensors 

356-090K Swivel flange bracket with compression adapter 

356-090K 

Swivel Flange Bracket 

for angle mounting 

as needed

TEMPERATURE 

NICKEL-IRON BALCO RTD ROOM SENSORS 

TYPE 5, 77, 78 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Wirewound Nickel-Iron RTD Balco Room Sensors are 

used to provide reliable, accurate temperature readings 

in surface-mount room environments. The room sensors 

feature a stainless steel insulated plate, a standard plastic 

ventilated enclosure, or a deluxe executive enclosure 

design. The stainless steel plate is ideal for areas of 

vandalism or where the sensor can be easily knocked 

off the wall. The sensors are designed for interior use 

only in the temperature range of -30° to 140°F (-34° to 

60°C). 


Balco sensing element 

Type 5 1000� ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C) 


two black wires 

Type 77 1000� ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C) 


two red wires 

Type 78 2000� ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C) 


two gray wires 


ST-S5E 


ST-S Surface-mount room sensor 

RTD SENSOR TYPE 

5 1000Ω nickel-iron, Balco sensor 



ENCLOSURE 

P Plastic ventilated room enclosure 

E Executive-style room enclosure with tan faceplate 

– Stainless steel plate 

K Decorator-style room enclosure 

ST-S 5 E 

ST-S5K 

Example: ST-S5E Executive style 1000Ω nickel-iron room 

sensor with tan faceplate 


KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16 allen key 


T5U 4-20 mA nickel-iron transmitter for Type 5 sensors 

ST-S5 

ST-S5P 

43 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

44 

TEMPERATURE 

NICKEL-IRON BALCO RTD IMMERSION, DUCT AND OUTDOOR SENSORS 

TYPE 5, 77, 78 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Wirewound Nickel-Iron Balco RTD Sensors are 

installed in rugged housings to measure the most important 

HVAC applications. The Duct and Immersion 

Sensors all have 304 stainless steel probes for use in 

almost any area. 

• The Immersion Probe comes with a standard brass 

or an optional stainless steel thermowell. 

• The Duct Sensor has mounting tabs for direct 

mounting on a duct or installation in a handibox. 

• The Outdoor Sensor, rated for outdoor temperatures, 

is equipped with a sun shield and weatherproof 

box for mounting under the eaves or another 

sheltered area. 

• The Type 78 and 77 Raw Sensors are mounted in a 

2" (5 cm) long aluminum case with teflon-insulated 

lead wires. This sensor can be used for strap-on applications. 

The Type 5 raw sensor is mounted in a 

2.5" (6.35 cm) PVC case. 

• The Universal Sensor may be used for duct, immersion, 

and OSA temperature sensing. 


Temp range (all probes) -30° to 240°F (34° to 115°C) 

Balco sensing element 

Type 5 1000� ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C) 


two black wires 


ST-R Raw sensor 

ST-U Universal duct, immersion, or OSA sensor 

ST-D Duct sensor 

ST-W Immersion sensor with brass well 

ST-O Outdoor air sensor 

RTD SENSOR TYPE 




OPTIONS 

XW Weatherproof housing (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only) 

XH Handibox (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only) 

E Immersion sensor without well (ST-W only) 

S Stainless steel thermowell (ST-W and ST-U only) 

O Kit with OSAB weather shield (ST-U only) 

B WEL-B brass well (ST-U only) 

ST-D 5 XW 

ST-R5 

(77, 78) 


ST-U5 

Type 77 1000� ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C) 


two red wires 

Type 78 2000� ±0.12% @ 70°F (21°C) 


two gray wires 

Example: ST-D5-XW 1000Ω Balco duct sensor 

with a weatherproof housing 

ST-D5 

ST-O5 

ST-W5 

UNIVERSAL-MOUNT SENSOR ACCESSORIES 

WEL-B Brass well OSAB OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket 

WEL-S 304 stainless steel well TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 

F-1000-331 Nylon bushing for open wiring 

WEL-B

TEMPERATURE 

OPTIONS 

SENSOR OPTIONS 

SETPOINT OPTION FOR FLUSH SENSOR 

Two-wire with resistance from 0� to 10 k� (0� to 1500� 

optional XA1500), flush enclosure with pigtails for the 

connection 

in 

(cm) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

1/2" NPT 

4.625 

(11.75) 

4.0 

(10.2) 

ST-S*-XA 

SETPOINT OPTION FOR EXECUTIVE SENSOR 

Two-wire with resistance from 10 k� to 30 k�, (1 k� to 

3 k�, opt. XA10K),(1 k� to 1.4 k�, opt. XA2K) 

ST-S*EW ST-S*E-XA 

SETPOINT OPTION FOR SPACE SENSOR 

Two-wire with resistance from 0� to 10 k� (0� to 1500� 

optional XA1500), space enclosure with pigtails for the 

connection 

ST-S*P-XA 

1/2" STANDARD SERVICE CONDUIT (LB) FITTING 

Available for the ST-A all-purpose and ST-W immersion 

sensors 

1/2" 

NPT 

XCO 

GREENFIELD FITTING (factory installed) 

Option available with ST-D sensor 

HANDIBOX HOUSING (factory installed) 

Equipped with eleven 1/2" knockouts, option available 

with ST-A, ST-D, and ST-W sensors 

in 

(cm) 

2.13 

1.88 

2.95 

(7.5) 

4" 

PLASTIC EUROPEAN-TYPE HANDIBOX 

Complete with four 3/4" cutouts, two open cable cutouts 

and snap-on cover, option available on all ST-A, ST-W, 

and ST-D sensors 

�� 

�� 

1.65 

(4.2) 

XG 

2.95 

(7.5) 

1/2" SEALTITE STRAIGHT FITTING 

Used for liquid-tight connection, available for the ST-W 

immersion sensors 

XLT 

XH 

XHP 

45 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

46 

TEMPERATURE 

OPTIONS 

SENSOR OPTIONS 

CUSTOM LOGO 

Any logo or wording added to the space or executive 

enclosure, minimum order and customer artwork 

required 

MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON 

Wired N.O. with pigtails, N.C. available upon request for 

flush and executive enclosures 

Executive 

XK 

XME 

RED LED INDICATOR LAMP 

Powered externally with 24 VAC/VDC and connected 

via a terminal block 

Red Indicator 

Lamp 

SECURITY SCREWS 

For use with ST-S* sensors, see SD-6 spanner screwdriver 

on page 51 

in 

(cm) 

ANALOG BIMETAL THERMOMETER 

Measures 50° to 90°F for ST-S*E sensors XTA 

Measures 13° to 29°C for ST-S*E sensors XTAC 

CLM-20 

Limits the output of any 4-20 mA transmitter to a factory 

set 20 mA, wired in series, and adds 125� of effective 

load to the transmitter 

in 

(cm) 

1.0 

(2.5) 

Adjust Pot 

(18-22 mA) 

(red) 

5.0 

(12.70) 

+ 

XTA 

0.25 

(0.63) 

Decorator 

XM Space 

XTA/XTAC 

MOMENTARY MEMBRANE PUSH BUTTON 

Wired N.O. with pigtails or to terminals when used with 

options requiring circuit cards, available with executive 

room enclosures only 

XME 

XS 

DIGITAL THERMOMETER OPTION 

3-1/2 digit display readout from 60° to 80°F ±1°F or 15° 

to 32°C with one-year battery, 3/8" high, display updates 

every 10 seconds 

XTD / XTC 

XTD/XTC 

1.75 

(4.44) 

XPL CLM-20 

– (black) 

5.0 

(12.70) 

0.5 

(1.27)

TEMPERATURE 

OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 

SENSOR OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 

EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK 

MODEL XJ1 

For use with handheld terminals, requires adapter 

cable CCRJ11AD 

XJ1 External Jack 

(see pinout below) 

Top View 

Pin Numbers 

1 2 3 4 

X 6 7 8 

CABLE ACCESSORY FOR XJ1 

MODEL CC-RJ11AD 

The CC-RJ11AD is used to interface to the XJ1 option on the ST-S*E sensor. The CC-RJ11AD is 6" (15.24 cm) long 

with an 8-pin (4 pins used) connector for the XJ1 side and a female RJ11 connector on the other. 

TERMINAL COMMUNICATIONS PINOUT/CONNECTIONS 

Inter-Sensor 

Communications 

XJ1 Pinout XJ2 Pinout 

8-Pin Connector Termination RJ11 Connector 

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . .OUT + . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .OUT – . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 

3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN – . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 

6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN + . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 

1 W - not used 

2 Y 

3 BK 

4 G 

5 R 

6 BL - not used 

Female 

RJ11 

OUT 

POT 

IN 

SENSOR 

P S 

COMP EXT 

SENS SENS 

Pinout 

CC-RJ11AD 

not used 

plug 

8 

7 

6 

5 

Y 

BL G 

R W 

BK 

4 

3 

2 

1 

XJ1 

INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK 

MODEL XJ2 

For use with handheld terminals 

Top Down 

Pin Numbers 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Handheld 

Terminal 

(customersupplied) 

Customer- 

Supplied 

Telephone 

Extension 

XJ2 

Internal Jack 

OUT 

POT 

IN 

SENSOR 

OUT 

IN 

P S 

POT 

SENSOR 

CC-RJ11AD 

COMP EXT 

SENS SENS 

XJ1 

External 

Jack 

PLATE PAL ROOM TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 

11,000, 12,000 SERIES 

The Plate Pal is a room temperature indicator, built into a switch plate, for either °F or °C and % RH. Replaceable 

battery life is approximately one year. Colors are available in white or dark ivory. 


11100 Single gang white paddle, °F/°C 

11101 Single gang white paddle, °F/°C and % RH 

11200 Single gang ivory paddle, °F/°C 

12100 Single gang white toggle, °F/°C 

12101 Single gang white toggle, °F/°C and % RH 

12200 Single gang ivory toggle, °F/°C 

12201 Single gang ivory toggle, °F/°C and % RH 

21100 Dual white paddle, °F/°C 

21101 Dual white paddle, °F/°C and % RH 

22100 Dual gang white toggle, °F/°C 

22101 Dual gang white toggle, °F/°C and % RH 

22200 Dual gang ivory toggle, °F/°C 

22201 Dual gang ivory toggle, °F/°C and % RH 

GPA76 Battery included 

11101 

12100 

XJ2 Internal 

RJ11 Jack 

P S 

COMP EXT 

SENS SENS 

Standard 

toggle switch 

Standard 

paddle switch 

XJ2 

(under cover) 

Two-digit, 0.5" LCD display 

2.4 

(6.1) 

75°F 

1.31 (3.3) 

3.125 

(7.9) 

5.44 

(13.8) 

3.81 

(9.7) 

47 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

48 

TEMPERATURE 

ACCESSORIES 

MODELS APB-28, BKT-1, BKT-2, ISPL-1, SSPL-1, KT-1 

ADJUSTABLE PIPE BRACKET 

MODEL APB-28 

The Model APB-28 is used with Model ST-R*SC or ST- 

R*S sensors. The bracket can be used on pipe sizes 

from 2" to 8" (5.08 to 20.32 cm) outside diameter. 

Precon TCC-12 thermal conducting compound should 

be used with the bracket to improve heat transfer 

between the pipe and the temperature sensor. Insulate 

approximately 2' (61m) on each side of the probe for 

best results. 

ADAPTER BRACKET 

MODEL BKT-1 

The Model BKT-1 can be used with Models WMB-1 or 

ST-S*P to mount directly on a standard electrical box. 

Mounting screws are provided. 

DRYWALL ADAPTER BRACKET 

MODEL BKT-2 

The Model BKT-2 is used to mount wall sensors directly 

to drywall quickly and securely. Simply cut a hole and 

bend the ears over the back of the drywall. Then, secure 

with supplied dry wall screws. 

ADAPTER PLATE 

MODEL ISPL-1, SSPL-1 

The ISPL-1 ivory model and the SSPL-1 stainless steel 

model are standard light switch plates that can be used 

with the Model BKT-1 as attractive mounting plates for 

installing a Model WMB-1 or ST-S*P on a standard electrical 

box. Mounting screws are provided. 

SENSOR ADAPTER PLATE 

MODEL 10-531 

The Model 10-531 plate is ideal for cover mounting 

holes from old sensors. For the KTR*, ST-S*EW, ST- 

T90EW. 

SENSOR COVER REMOVER TOOL 1/16" 

MODEL KT-1 

The Model KT-1 tool fits Kele and most Invensys, 

Johnson Controls, and Siemens covers. The tool has a 

1/16" hex top and a reversible blade (flat and Phillips). 

in 

(cm) 

in 

(cm) 

in 

(cm) 

5.25" 

4.25 

(8.25) 

Adjustable for 

2" to 8" pipe 

(5-20 cm) 

4.25 

(10.80) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

2.5 

(6.35) 

7" 

4.25 

(10.80) 

in 

(cm) 2.25 

1.0 

(5.72) (2.54) 

Exposed Insert 

APB-28 

BKT-1 

BKT-2 

Rear View (not actual size) 10-531 

KT-1 

SSPL-1 ISPL-1 

2.65 

(6.73) 

TM 

0.37 

(0.95)

TEMPERATURE 

ACCESSORIES 

MODELS PN-10, PN-26, PN-46, SD-6, TCC-12, TCC-111 

BRUSHED ALUMINUM FACEPLATE 

MODEL PN-10 

The PN-10 is a blank Brushed Aluminum Faceplate 

for use with the WMB-1 enclosure. Customized logos 

are available. 

DECORATIVE FACEPLATE 

MODELS PN-26, PN-32 

The gray PN-26 or tan PN-32 Decorative Faceplates 

are available for use with the WMB-2 enclosure. 

Customized logos are available. 

RAW SENSOR CLIP 

MODEL PN-46 

The PN-46 is used where an aluminum clip is desired to 

mount a raw sensor into an existing enclosure. The PN- 

46 includes adhesive backing for easy installation. 

SPANNER DRIVER 

MODEL SD-6 

The SD-6 Spanner Driver is used to install the security 

screws (XS option) for the ST-S* sensor. 

THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND 

MODEL TCC-12 

The TCC-12 Thermal Conducting Compound is a 

metal oxide-filled, dielectric, silicone-based compound 

that facilitates heat transfer by filling voids and gaps 

between mating surfaces. The operating temperature 

range is -65° to 400°F (-54° to 204°C). The compound is 

packaged in convenient, single application, 0.13 fl oz 

(12 gram) tubes. 

THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND 

MODEL TCC-111 

The TCC-111 Thermal Conducting Compound consists 

of an aluminum powder in a barium grease-based 

compound. It facilitates heat transfer by filling voids and 

gaps between mating surfaces. The operating temperature 

limit is 300°F (148°C). The compound is packaged 

in a convenient 3.75 fl oz (111 mL) tub. 

in 

(cm) Shown with 

custom logo 

in 

(cm) 

in 

(cm) 

in 

(cm) 

1.63 

(4.13) 

1.38 

(3.49) 

0.31 

(0.8) 

2.63 

(6.67) 

Shown with 

custom logo 

1.75 

(4.45) 

0.63 

(1.59) 

3.88 

(9.84) 

PN-10 

PN-26 

PN-46 

XS Option Screw Head 

SD-6 

TCC-12 

TCC-111 

49 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

50 

TEMPERATURE 

ACCESSORIES 

MODELS M-2500, 13F142, ZGR01, TR10K, WMB-1, WMB-2, ES-1051 

SOLAR COMPENSATOR 

MODEL M-2500 

The Model M-2500 Solar Compensator is a non-directional 

device used to compensate for the solar effects 

on buildings. Mount outside in sunlight to measure the 

solar gain experienced by the building envelope. Any 

1/4" probe may be inserted into the solar chamber. This 

device is ideal for tuning perimeter hot water reset to 

each building’s requirements. 

PRECISION RESISTORS 

MODEL 13F142, ZGR01, TR10K 

The Model 13F142 is a 250�, 3 watt, 1% resistor packaged 

with instructions to convert a 4-20 mA signal to a 1-5V 

signal. 

The Model ZGR01 is a 500�, 1/2 watt, 1.2% resistor. 

The Model TR10K is a 10 k�, 1/4 watt, 0.1% resistor 

with alligator clips for static testing of Type 3 or 24 thermistors 

at 77°F. 

TEMPERATURE BUTTON ENCLOSURE 

MODEL TB 

The Model TB-B brass, TB-S stainless steel, and TB-A 

aluminum sensor enclosures are ideal for discretely 

placed sensors on decorative walls. The Model TB can 

be fitted with any Precon thermistor or RTD sensor. It 

inserts into a 5/8'' hole and is glued in place. 

WALL SENSOR ENCLOSURE 

MODEL WMB 

The Model WMB is a vented, plastic wall enclosure. A 

raw sensor can be snapped directly in contact with the 

aluminum faceplate. The Model WMB can be mounted 

directly to sheet rock, block walls using the screws provided. 

NON-CFC FREEZE SPRAY 

MODEL ES-1051 

The Model ES-1051 is ideal for quick point-to-point sensor 

wiring verification and freezestat operability. Freeze 

each sensor in order, check the trend printout, and 

rework the terminations as needed. Each contains 8 fl 

oz (235 mL). 

in 

(cm) 

0.625 

(1.6) 

Insulating 

Wall Housing 

0.9 

(2.3) 

wall 

0.50 

(1.3) 

M-2500 

0.32 

(0.8) 

in 

(cm) 

Sensor 

Housing 

4.25 

(10.8) 

Probe 

Insert 

0.80 

(2.0) 0.875 

(2.2) 

1.75 

(4.45) 

4.31 

(10.95) 

0.31 

(0.79) 

1/2 EMT 

Conduit Nut 

3.75 (9.53) 

13F142 TR10K 

WMB-1 WMB-2 

ES-1051 

5.86 

(14.88) 

7.13 

(18.11) 

TB-S TB-B TB-A 

U.S. Patent No. 5, 022, 766

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

T90U, ST-T90EW, ST-T90K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The T90U is a fixed-range, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD 

transmitter used with Type 91 1000� platinum RTD sensors. 

The transmitter is available in six standard ranges 

for temperature control and building automation. 

The ST-T90EW or ST-T90K are fixed-range, 1000�, 

375 platinum room temperature transmitters that provide 

stable, accurate room sensing for temperature control 

and building automation systems. The attractive white 

vented housing mounts easily and is constructed of a 

durable plenum-rated plastic with a white enameled aluminum 

faceplate. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• High accuracy 

• No-drift platinum RTD sensors 

• Panel mount, duct, immersion, OSA, and room 

• UL 94V-0 plenum-rated housing 

• 18-month warranty 

• Used with Type 91 sensors 

RANGE SELECTION 

• 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

• -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

• 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38° C) 

• 20° to 120°F (-6° to 49°C) 

• 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) 

• -30° to 45°C (-22° to 113°F) 

• 0° to 100°C (32° to 212°F) 

• 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) 

• 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) 


Sensor input 1000� platinum (Type 91) 

TCR 0.00375 �/�/°C 

Configuration Two-wire, loop-powered 

Rangeability limits Fixed per model 

Agency UL 94V-0 plastic 


Output limit 25 mA (sensor leads open) 

Supply voltage 10.5-45 VDC (one power supply 

may power multiple units) 

Max impedance 675� @ 24 VDC 

Transmitter accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span 

Probe accuracy Type 91 ±0.2% of 1000 @ 0°C 

ST-T90K 

APPLICATIONS 

ST-T90EW T90U 

• The Room Temperature application uses a vented room 

enclosure designed to minimize self-heating for accurate 

room measurement. 

• The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct 

mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is 

point sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 

cm) insertion depth. Averaging probes come in 24' (7.3m) 

lengths and mount in a weather-resistant metal box. 

• The Immersion Temperature application is designed to 

be threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well with a 3-1/4" (8.2 

cm) insertion. The wells are available in brass or 304 

stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 

1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet ® ). 

• The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall 

bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the 

effect of rain or snow. This rugged enclosure and bracket 

will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions. 

Ambient temp 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) 

Ambient humidity 0% to 95% noncondensing 

Dimensions 

T90U 1"H x 1.8"W x 2.25"L 

(2.5 x 4.6 x 5.7 cm) 

ST-T90EW, ST-T90K 1.2"D x 2.75"W x 4.5"L 

(3.05 x 6.99 x 11.43 cm) 

Weight

TEMPERATURE 

52 

1/8" NPT 

0.25 

(0.63) 

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

T90U, ST-T90EW, ST-T90K SERIES 

DIMENSIONS / MOUNTING 

in 

(cm) 

2.28 

(5.8) 

WIRING 

3.25 

(8.26) 

2.5 

(6.35) 

4.87 

(12.7) 

ST-U91 

Duct/Multipurpose Sensor 

Snap 

Track 

2.25 

(5.72) 

Height 

1.0 

(2.54) 

0.88 

(2.2) 

Mounting 

Tabs 

1/2" NPT 

MODEL T90U 

2.5 

6.35 

4.81 

(13) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

ST-U91 

Sensor in Well 

1.8 

(4.57) 

LOOP 

LOOP 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

T90 Universal Transmitter 

T90U 2 D 

1/2" 

Conduit Hole 

Pointing Down 

Gasket 

White 

Faceplate 

(standard) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Power Supply 

10.5-45 VDC 

Type 91 

1000Ω 375 Platinum 

RTD Sensor 

(sold separately) 

0.75 

(1.9) 

8.38 

(21.2) 

4.75 

(12) 

5.5 

(14) 

Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor. 

ST-U91 

OSA Sensor 

Optional Customer- Supplied Handibox 

Plate 

Wire Access 

Hole 

Mounting 

Screws 

Cover 

Mounting 


ST-T90E 

Room Sensor 


3.31 

(8.40) 

in 

(cm) 

Do Not mount 

sensor in vertical 

position with 

the weather 

shield pointing up. 

.5 

(1.27) 

0.94 

(2.38) 

MODEL ST-T90E 

Wire Way 

Back Plate 


ST-T90K Decorator room temperature transmitter 

ST-T90EW White executive room temperature transmitter 

T90U 4-20 mA RTD Transmitter 

RANGE 

0 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) room transmitter only 

1 20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C) all mounting types 

2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) OSA, duct, or immersion 

3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) all mounting types 

4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) OSA, duct, or immersion 

11 0° to 35°C (32° to 97°F) all mounting types 

12 -30° to 45°C (-22° to 113°F) OSA, duct, or immersion 

13 0° to 100°C (32° to 212°F) OSA, duct, or immersion 

14 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) all mounting types 

SENSOR TYPE 

— Transmitter only snap track mounting or ST-T90E or ST-T90K 

D ST-U91 duct or immersion sensor (includes sensor mounted and wired) 

W ST-U91-B immersion sensor with brass well (includes sensor mounted and wired) 

WS ST-U91-S immersion sensor with stainless steel well (includes sensor mounted and wired) 

O ST-U91-O outside air sensor (includes sensor mounted and wired) 

AV ST-AV91H averaging sensor 24' (7.3m) (includes sensor mounted and wired) 

1.31 

(2.54) 

Example: T90U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) mounted and 

wired in duct sensor enclosure 

0.33 

(.85) 

ST-T90K 

Room Sensor 


ST-_91 All 1000� 375 platinum RTDs (for use with T90U) 

10-531 Decorator wall adapter plate 7" x 5.25" (for use with ST-T90K) 

JP1 

SENSOR 

Typical logo 

location 

2.75 (6.98) 

Front 

Power Supply 

10.5-45 VDC 

ST-T90 Room Transmitter 

Side 

4.5 

(11.43) 

1.5 

(3.8) 

4-20 MA 

Signal

TEMPERATURE 

RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

ST-T91E, ST-T91K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The ST-T91 Rangeable Platinum Room Temperature 

Transmitter Series provides stable, accurate room 

sensing for temperature control and building automation 

systems, and it is CE approved for level-one applications. 

The attractive vented housing mounts easily and 

is constructed of a durable plastic with a tan enameled 

aluminum faceplate. 

The ST-T91 Series has a loop-powered 4-20 mA output 

with a standard temperature range of 40° to 90°F (4° to 

32°C), although other ranges can be field calibrated 

between -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C). To adjust the 

ST-T91 Series, set the DIP switches to match the 

desired range, and use the zero and span pots to fine 

tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box 

are required. 

The ST-T91 Series has a special 20 mA loop calibration 

test signal to provide easy system verification. Simply 

move the bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the 

transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The loop up 

LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output. 

FEATURES 

• High accuracy 

• No-drift platinum 

• Loop calibration test signal 

• Low cost 

• Decorative enclosure 

• Loop-powered LED indication 

• CE approved (commercial and industrial) 


• Conformal coated 


Sensing element 1000� thin film platinum 

TCR 0.00375�/�/°C 


Standard range 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C) 

Max 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) 

Rangeability limits -30° to 250°F (34° to 121°C) 

Min span of 40°F (22°C) 

Agency CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1) 

Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-2) 

Industrial RF/EM hardened 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

ST-T91E 

3.23 

(8.20) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

1.5 

(3.8) 

ST-T91K 

2.75 (6.98) 



Loop calibration output 20 mA ±0.2% 

Supply voltage 10.5-45 VDC 



Humidity 0% to 95% noncondensing 

Transmitter accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span 

Sensor accuracy ±0.2% of 1000� at 0°C 

Approximate sensitivity 2.1�/°F @ 32°F 

53 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

54 

TEMPERATURE 

RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

ST-T91E, ST-T91K SERIES 

MOUNTING 

Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can 

be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are 

not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet 

boxes. 

The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) 

above the floor, on an interior wall, and away from any 

heating or cooling generating devices. 

Tan 

Faceplate 

Standard 

Plate 

Mounting 

Screws 

Wire Access 

Hole 

Cover 

Mounting 




Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be 

used where back box is not required. Adapters are not 

required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes. 

The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) 

above the floor, on an interior wall, out of the sun, and 

away from any heating or cooling generating devices. 

Self-Latching 

Cover 

Mounting 

Screws 

Wire Access 

Hole 


Cover 

Locking 



Basic model comes with screw terminal block, tan Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32 

decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handibox screws for handibox-mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for 

mounting, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall mount- direct wall-mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with 

ing. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head. a 1/16"Allen key head, installed as needed. 

ST-T91E ST-T91K 





WIRING 

MODEL ST-T91E,K 

NORM 20 5 4 3 2 1 

O 

N 

SENSOR 

1 2 3 4 5 

ZERO 

JP1 

SPAN 

Norm = Normal operation 

20 = Forced 20 mA output 

Loop LED indicates proper loop 

and power connections 


ST-T91K Designer room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

ST-T91E Executive room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

CE CERTIFICATION 

– Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1) 

EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2) 

OPTIONS 

XGR Gray decorator faceplate (ST-T91E only) 

XK Customization (logo or special feature), consult Kele 

XME Membrane override switch (tan faceplate only) (ST-T91E only) 

XR Custom range (specific range) 

XR1 Range option = 20° to 120°F (-6.7° to 48.8°C) 



XR11 Range option = 32° to 97°F (0° to 35°C) 

XR14 Range option = 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Loop Power LED 

ST-T91E XR1 Example: ST-T91E-XR1 Rangeable platinum room temperature transmitter 

with calibration 20° to 120°F 

Power Supply 

10.5-45 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER 

T91U, T91H, T91L SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The T91U is a field-rangeable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD 

transmitter used with Type 91 1000� platinum RTD sensors. 

The transmitter is available in six standard ranges, 

or it can be set for any range between -30° to 250°F (- 

34° to 121°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C). 

To adjust the T91U, set the DIP switches to match the 

desired range, and use the zero and span pots to fine 

tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box 

are required. 

The T91U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal 

to provide easy system verification. Simply move the 

bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter 

will output a constant 20 mA. The loop-up LED provides 

power indication for the 4-20 mA output. 

The T91H and T91L are specialty units for very high 

temperature and very low temperatures respectively. 

Both units are rangeable within their specialty limits. 

FEATURES 

• DIP switch rangeable 


• Low cost 

• Snap-track mounting 


• Fits into card slot of ST-U91 housing 

• Very high-range and low-range models 


• CE approved (commercial and industrial) 


Sensor input 1000� platinum 

TCR 0.00375 �/�/°C 


Rangeability limits 

T91U Zero -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C) 

Span 40° to 280°F (22° to 156°C) 

T91H Zero 200° to 960°F (93° to 515°C) 

Span 40° to 500°F (22° to 278°C) 

T91L Zero -300° to -8°F (-184° to -22°C) 

Span 40° to 332°F (22° to 184°C) 

Agency CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1) 

Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-2) 

Industrial RF/EM Hardened 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

T91U 

2.25 

(5.72) 

MODEL T91U 

NORMAL 20 

1.8 

(4.57) 

1 2 3 4 5 

LOOP UP 

LOOP 

LOOP 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

Height: 1.0 

(2.54) 




Supply voltage 10.5-45 VDC (one power supply 

may power multiple units) 

Max impedance 675� @ 24 VDC/375� with display 



Accuracy 0.1°F or 0.2% of span 

Dimensions 1"H x 1.8"W x 2.25"L 

(2.5 x 4.6 x 5.7 cm) 

Display option (XTD) 3-1/2 digit LCD, NEMA 4 (IP65) 

ZERO 

O 

N 

T91U-13-W-XTD 

SPAN 

55 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

56 

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER 

T91U, T91H, T91L SERIES 

WIRING 

MODEL T91U 

NORMAL 20 

1 2 3 4 5 

ZERO 

O 

N 

LOOP UP 

SPAN 

LOOP 

LOOP 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

Loop Power 

LED 


4-20 mA 

Signal 

Power Supply 

10.5-45 VDC 

1000Ω 375 Platinum 

RTD Sensor 



T91U 4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter standard rangeability 

T91H 4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter high temperature rangeability(XR range only) 

T91L 4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter low temperature rangeability(XR range only) 

CE CERTIFICATION 

– Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1) 

EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2) 

RANGE 

2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) (T91U only) 

3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) (T91U only) 

4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) (T91U only) 

12 -22° to 113°F (-30° to 45°C) (T91U only) 

13 32° to 212°F (0° to 100°C) (T91U only) 

14 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) (T91U only) 

XR † Special Range (See previous page for rangeability limits) 

SENSOR TYPE 

— Transmitter only 

D ST-D91-XW duct sensor* 

O ST-O91 outside air sensor* 

W ST-W91-XW immersion sensor* with brass well 

WE ST-W91-E-XW immersion sensor* without well 

WS ST-W91-S-XW immersion sensor* with stainless steel well 

AV ST-AV91H averaging sensor* 

XTD Digital display option for (D) duct or (W) immersion sensors 

XWM Single gang weather resistant box (Mounted without sensor) 

T91U 2 D Example: T91U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure 

† Indicate at time of order 

*Includes sensor mounted and wired. Check temperature limits in the catalog for each probe. 


S241HC High temperature probe, limited to 932°F (500°C) 

AS2PW055P000XX1 Low temperature probe, limited to -300°F (-184°C)

TEMPERATURE 

100 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL T81U 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model T81U Platinum RTD Rangeable 

Transmitter is a two-wire, 4-20 mA transmitter designed 

for use with Type 81 100� platinum RTD sensors. The 

transmitter is available in three standard ranges, or it 

can be set for any range between -30° to 250°F (-34° to 

121°C) with a minimum span of 40°F (22°C). 

To adjust the Model T81U, set the DIP switches to 

match the desired range and use the zero and span 

pots to fine tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and 

decade box are required. 

The Model T81U has a special 20 mA loop calibration 

test signal to provide easy system verification. Simply 

move the bottle plug jumper from NORM to 20, and the 

transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The Loop Up 

LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output. 

FEATURES 

• Dip switch rangeable 






Sensor input 100� platinum 

TCR 0.00385 �/�/°C 

Output 4-20 mA, loop-powered 

Rangeability limits -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C) 

Span min 40°F (22°C) 



DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.25 

(5.72) 


NORM 

20 

1.8 

(4.58) 

LOOP 

LOOP 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

Height: 1.0 

(2.54) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Power Supply 

10.5-45 VDC 

100� 

RTD Sensor 






Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H 

(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm) 

Approvals CE 


T81U 4-20 mA rangeable RTD transmitter 

RANGE 

2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) 

4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) 

XR † Special Range 

SENSOR TYPE 

— Transmitter only 

D ST-D81-XW duct sensor* 

O ST-O81 outside air sensor* 

W ST-W81-XW immersion sensor* with well 

AV ST-AV81H averaging sensor* 

XWM Single gang weather resistant box (mounted without sensor) 

T81U 2 D Example: T81U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F 

(-29° to 60°C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure 

† Indicate at time of order 

*Includes sensor mounted and wired 

57 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

58 

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER 

MODELS T5U, T63U, T85U 

DESCRIPTION 

The Models T5U, T63U, and T85U Rangeable 

Transmitters are field rangeable, two-wire, 4-20 mA 

RTD transmitters designed for use with Type 5 nickeliron 

sensors, Type TE63xx nickel sensors, and Type 85 

platinum sensors. 

To adjust the temperature transmitter, set the DIP 

switches to match the desired range, and use the zero 

and span pots to fine tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter 

and decade box are required. 

FEATURES 

• Dip switch rangeable 


• Low cost 




APPLICATION 

• Transmitter for Invensys 1000� Nickel-Iron RTD’s 

• Transmitter for Johnson Controls 1000� 

Nickel RTD’s 

• Transmitter for 1000� Platinum 385 RTD’s 


Sensor 1000� RTD 


Rangeability limits -30° to 250°F (-34° to121°C) 

Minimum span 40°F (22°C) 



T85U 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.25 

(5.72) 


NORM 

20 

1.8 

(4.58) 

LOOP 

LOOP 

TEMP 

SENSOR 

TEMP 

SENSOR 


T5U 4-20 mA rangeable 1000Ω nickel-iron RTD transmitter 

T63U 4-20 mA rangeable 1000Ω nickel RTD transmitter 

T85U 4-20 mA rangeable 1000Ω 385 platinum RTD transmitter 

RANGE 

2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) 

4 30° to 240°F (-1° to 116°C) 

XR† Special range (see specifications for rangeability limits) 

T63U 2 Example: T63U-2 Transmiter for 1000Ω nickel RTD with range of 

-20° to 140°F 

†Indicate at time of order 

Height: 1.0 

(2.54) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Power Supply 

10.5-45 VDC 

100� 

RTD Sensor 




RTD current 650 µA 

Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H 

(4.6 x 5.7 x 2.54 cm) 

Approvals CE (T85U)

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM RANGEABLE SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT859 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model TT859 Platinum 1000� Space 

Temperature Transmitter is DIP switch rangeable. 

Non-interacting multiturn pots provide a constant finetune 

adjustment. Gold-plated DIP switches ensure stable, 

overlapping, incremental selections between 

-10° to 60°F (-23° to 15°C) for zero and 35° to 150°F 

(2° to 66°C) for span. 

The well-ventilated housing allows quick and accurate 

temperature sensing and effective heat dissipation from 

the circuit. 

Repeatability is excellent because the Model TT859 

uses a platinum RTD as the sensing element. 

Calibrated system accuracy of the Model TT859 is typically 

0.25°F (.14°C) with optional sensor matching. 

Once installed, the Model TT859 can be field calibrated 

or re-ranged through coarse switch adjustments and 

fine tune multiturn zero and span pots. The two-wire termination 

points are insensitive to power supply polarity. 

This prevents reversed hook-ups and simplifies installation. 


Sensing element 1000� platinum RTD, 375 curve or 

1000� platinum RTD, 385 curve 

System accuracy ±0.5°F (0.3°C) @ room temp or 

±0.8% of span operating @ 24 VDC 

Rangeability limits 

Zero -10° to 60°F (-23° to 15°C) 

Span 35° to 150°F (2° to 66°C) 

Output 4-20 mA, two-wire 

Transmitter linearity ±0.1% of span (negligible) 

Sensor stability Better than 0.09°F (0.05°C) per year 

Installation 

Transmitter housing Plastic housing w/aluminum faceplate 

4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.58"D 

(11.43 x 6.98 x 4.01 cm) 

FEATURES 

TT859PW 

• Substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters 

• 4-20 mA signal 

• Optimum flow-through ventilation 

• Easy zero and span ranging (non-interacting) 

• On-line calibration 

• Nonpolar connections 

Ambient temp -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) 

Storage temp -67° to 212°F (-55° to 100°C) 


Max load (Supply voltage - 9.4 VDC) / 0.02A 

Impedance 250� ±0.1% @ 11.4 VDC nominal 

500� ±0.1% @ 19.4 VDC nominal 

730� ±0.1% @ 24.0 VDC nominal 

Connections Screw terminals, nonpolar, connect 

either way 

Serviceability 

Zero and span adjust Noninteracting 

Resolution Constant and independent of DIP switch 

range selection, adjust zero only for 

on-site trim calibration 

59 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

60 

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM RANGEABLE SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT859 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.75 

(6.98) 

Transmitter mounted in cover 

4.50 

(11.43) 

1.58 

(4.01) 

Housing Top View Housing Side View 

TT859 

Decorative Wall-Mount 

Temperature Transmitter 

1 

2 

3 

4 

WIRING 

24 VDC 



* TT859 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs 

PF 1000Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve 

* PW 1000Ω 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve 

1 4-20mA DC output 

* S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) (-18°/38°C) 

* H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) (4°/32°C) 

-- Fill in range code per Minco catalog range letters 

SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyy, i.e., -10°F min zero, 150°F max span 

* 1 No calibration data, Sensor or Transmitter 

* 2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST 

3 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°, 100°, and 260°C with NIST 

TT859 PW 1 S 1 Example: TT859PW1S1 Room transmitter, 375 curve platinum RTD, 

ranged for 0°/100°F 

*Normally-stocked items 

+ 

– 

4-20mA – 

Signal + 

ON 

1 2 3 4 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

RTD 

TT859 

SPAN 

ADJ. 

ZERO 

ADJ.

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

MODELS AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, & IMMERSION 

DESCRIPTION 

Minco Room, Duct, Outside Air, and Immersion 

Temperature Sensors have thin film platinum elements 

for fast, accurate point measurement. They are 

designed for energy and environmental control applications. 

The Model AS_ _ _ S industrial room-mount housing 

provides an accurate, professional appearance. This 

housing can either direct mount or mount to a standard 

handibox or wire mold. 

The Model AS_ _ _ D duct-mount sensor features a 

rugged, stainless steel probe mounted in a standard 

handibox, making installation quick and easy with selftapping 

screws. The Model AS_ _ _ E uses a weatherresistant 

box. 

The Model AS_ _ _ O outside air sensor features a nonheat 

conductive, solar-reflecting noncorrosive shield. 

This configuration is completely sealed against moisture 

in weather conditions. The slotted shield allows air to 

flow freely to the stainless steel probe to provide accurate 

measurement. Installation is easy with 1/2" female 

threads. 

The Model AS_ _ _ Q immersion probes are designed 

with a 1/2" tapered thread for easy installation in 

thermowells and a handibox with 1/2" knockouts. The 

Model AS_ _ _ P uses a weather-resistant box. 


Temp range 

Room "S" -58° to 150°F (-50° to 65°C) 

Duct "D" or "E" -58° to 500°F (-50° to 260°C) 

Outside air "O" or "W" -58° to 175°F (-50° to 80°C) 

Immersion "P" or "Q" -320° to 500°F (-200° to 

260°C) 

Sensing element 1000� platinum two-wire 

0.00375 or 0.00385 �/�/°C, 

100� platinum three-wire 

0.00385 �/�/°C 

Ice point 

resistance (R o ) 1000� ±2.0� (±0.2%), 

100� ±0.2� (±0.2%) 

Interchangeability ±0.5°C or ±0.2% R o trim 

AS2PW055Q 

AS2PW040O 

AS2PW080D 

FEATURES 

• Replacement for discontinued Hy-Cal 

transmitters with sensors 

• Low cost, easy installation 

• Rugged design 

• Platinum RTDs 

• Interchangeable sensors 

• NIST certification available 

AS2PW000S 

Stability Better than 0.05°C per year 

Probe material 

Room 0.187" diameter aluminum 

Duct 0.25" diameter stainless steel 

OSA 0.187" diameter stainless steel 

Immersion 0.25" diameter stainless steel 

Probe limits 2" to 48" long 

Housing material 

Room Plastic with aluminum faceplate 

Duct, immersion Electro zinc-plated box 

with 1/2" knockout 

OSA White polyvinyl with weatherresistant 

box 

Lead wire material 22 AWG silver-plated stranded 

copper, Teflon ® insulated 

61 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

62 

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

MODELS AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, & IMMERSION 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

* 

‡ 

1.88 

(4.76) 

1/2" Knockouts 

1/2" NPT Typical 

both sides 

1.0 

(2.54) 


Probe 

LLL 

5.5 

(13.97) 

AS___055Q Immersion Probe 

Mounted in Handibox 

0.25 

(0.64) 

dia 

2.75 

(6.98) 

1.58 

(4.01) 

Housing Bottom View 

4.50 

(11.43) 

Housing Top View 

AS___000S 

Room-Mount Sensor 



WB-6 Brass well for AS_ _ _ (P, Q), for 5.5" probes TCC-12 Single application thermal compound 

WS-6 Stainless steel well for AS_ _ _ (P, Q), for 5.5" probes TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml 

4.0 

(10.16) 

1/2" FNPT 


AS2 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs 

AS3 Assembly probe for three-wire RTDs (PD sensors only) 

‡ PD 100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

PF 1KΩ 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

* PW 1KΩ 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

LLL Length LLL in .1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", .000 for all space sensors “S” 

‡ * 

‡ * 

‡ * 

‡ * 

* Normally-stocked items 

‡ Normally-stocked for “PD” 

100Ω RTDs 

D Duct mount, handibox 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 8.0" 

E Duct mount, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 8.0" 

O Outside air, weatherproof box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0" 

Q Immersion, handibox 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion 

P Immersion, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion 

S Space, indoor room, wall-mount housing, LLL = 000 

W Wall mount, outside, weatherproof box, LLL typically 4.0" 

‡ * 000 No transmitter 

801 TT-801, 2- or 3-wire fixed range, 100Ω, 385 curve, PD sensor only 

807 TT-807, 2-wire fixed range, 1000Ω, 375 curve, PW or PF sensor only 

111 TT-111, 2-wire fixed range, for PD, PF, or PW RTD sensors 

216 TT-216, 2- or 3-wire rangeable, 385 curve, PD, PF, or PW sensors only 

XX No transmitter 

EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C) 

S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) 

A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C) 

BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C) 

KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/180°F) or (-1°/82°C) 

BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/240°F) or (-1°/116°C) 

N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C) 

H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C) 

M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50°/50°C) 

C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°C) 

BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/250°C) 

JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/500°C) 

- - Fill in range code per Minco catalog range letters for 111 or 216 

- - Fill in range code per Minco catalog range letters for 801 or 807 

SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -100°/-50°F 

‡ * 

1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter 

2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST 


1.88 

(4.76) 

1/2" Knockouts 

Foam Gasket 


Probe 

LLL 

8.0 

(20.32) 

AS___080D Duct-Mount Sensor 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

4.63 

(11.75) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

dia 

5.5 

(13.97) 

AS___040O Outside Air Sensor 

Sample order: 

AS3PD080D000XX1 8" Duct probe 

with three-wire 100Ω, 

385 curve platinum RTD 

AS2PW055Q000XX1 5.5" Immersion probe 

with two-wire 1000Ω, 

375 curve RTD 

1.5 

(3.81)

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODELS TT801, TT807 

DESCRIPTION 

Model TT801 and TT807 two-wire, 4-20 mA temperature 

transmitters connect to platinum 100� and 1000� 

RTDs. Model TT-800’s are custom calibrated for those 

tough high and low temperature application ranges. 

These compact transmitters are extremely rugged and 

have excellent performance specifications. 

The Model TT801 accepts a two-wire or three-wire 

100� RTD input, and the Model TT807 accepts a twowire 

1000� input. The 4-20 mA signal is factory calibrated 

over the full range of the user-specified temperature 

span to provide excellent performance for either thin film 

or wire-wound platinum RTDs. 

FEATURES 

• 4-20 mA signal transmitter 

• 1000/100� RTD input 

• Wide high and low calibration ranges 

• Standard handibox mounting 

• Two and three-wire RTD wiring optional 

• Factory calibrated 

• Functional equivalent to HCT-801 and HCT-807 

• 100% substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters 


Output 4-20 mA, (750� @ 24 VDC) 

Transmitter/Sensor type 

TT801 Three-wire, 100� 

385 platinum RTD 

(accepts two-wire input also) 

TT807 Two-wire, 1000� 

375 or 385 platinum RTD 

RTD current 1 mA nominal, TT801 

0.2 mA nominal, TT807 

Linearity ±0.1% of span 


Calibration range 

Min span 35°F (19°C) 

Max span 1112°F (600°C) 

Zero Limited by the sensor used 

TT801 

TABLE 1. 

RECOMMENDED TWO-WIRE SENSOR CABLE LENGTHS 

-1°F OFFSET FOR CABLE LENGTHS BELOW 

WIRE GAUGE 1000� 100� 

(AWG) ft (m) ft (m) 

12 1200 (365) 120 (36) 

14 800 (244) 80 (24) 

16 500 (152) 50 (15) 

18 310 (94) 31 (9.4) 

20 200 (60) 20 (6) 

22 124 (38) 12 (3.8) 

Values provided are for two-wire stranded copper and are for 

reference only. Terminations may also affect the offset. 

Power requirement 8.5-35 VDC 

Max load (Supply voltage - 8.5) / 0.02A 

Impedance 250� max @ 14 VDC 

750� max @ 24 VDC 

Zero adjust ±5% typical, factory-set, 

noninteracting 

Span adjust ±5% typical, factory-set, 

noninteracting 

Polarity protection Diode protected 

Mounting Handibox 



63 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

64 

TEMPERATURE 

PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODELS TT801, TT807 

DIMENSIONS / WIRING 

in 

(cm) 

1/4" dia, two places 

(for #8 mtg screw) 

2.5 

(6.35) 

3.75 

(9.52) 

3.28 

(8.33) 

MINCO 

1.75 

(4.45) 

0.7 

(1.78) 



and Cover 

Note: Three-wire transmitters have two white wires and one black wire. Connect the white wires to the two common sensor 

leads and black to the other lead. If the sensor has only two leads, short the two transmitter white wires together and 

connect to one side of the sensor. Connect the black to the other side. See Table 1 on previous page. 

* 

* 


1000 

Platinum 

RTD Sensor 

Optional Field Wiring 

100 

Platinum 

RTD Sensor 

(white) 

(black) 

(white) 

(white) 

(black) 


TT801 Transmitter for two- or three-wire PT100 RTDs (must use a PD sensor curve) 

TT807 Transmitter for two-wire PT1000 RTDs (must use a PW, PF sensor curve) 

* 

* 

PD 100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

PF 1000Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

PW 1000Ω 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

1 4-20 mA DC Output 

*Normally-stocked items 

* 

* 

* 

TT807 PW 1 A 

TT807 

TT801 

EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C), Former B2 code 

S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) 




BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/240°F) or (-1°/116°C), Former B1 code 

N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C), Former B3 code 


M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50°/50°C) 


BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/250°C) 

JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/500°C) 

-- Range codes per Minco letter ranges 

SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e. -100°/50°F) 

Example: TT807PW1A PT1000 transmitter for 1000Ω, 375 curve platinum RTD, 


Power Supply 

(red) 

(black) 

Power Supply 

(red) 

(black) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

4-20 mA 

Signal

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT809 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model TT809 is a 1000� Platinum RTD 

Rangeable Temperature Transmitter. Zero setting can 

range anywhere from -50° to 212°F (-45° to 100°C) and 

span from 30° to 320°F (17° to 180°C). The Model 

TT809 comes factory calibrated, and once installed, it 

can be field calibrated with a high precision DVM and 

decade box. The Model TT809 is easily calibrated by 

adjusting the zero pot to match the calibration reference. 

The gasketed cast-metal housing provides excellent 

weather resistance. The screw terminal connections on 

the transmitter circuit, 1/2" NPT threaded connection, 

and adjustable mounting brackets simplify installation. 

Several varieties of precision 1000� platinum RTD 

probes are easily mated with the transmitter housing. 

FEATURES 

• Switch-set rangeable with zero and span 

• One-point field calibration 

• Nonpolar loop connections 

• Weatherproof sensor interface housing 

• Noninteracting zero/span adjustment 

• Functional equivalent to Hy-Cal HCT-809 

• Substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters 


Sensing element 1000� platinum RTD, two-wire 

Sensor coefficient 0.00375 �/�/°C TCR 

0.00385 �/�/°C TCR 

Calibrated accuracy ±0.1% of span 

Rangeability 

Zero -50° to 212°F (-45° to 100°C) 

Span 30° to 320°F (17° to 180°C) 

Output 4-20 mA, two-wire 

Input voltage 9.4-35 VDC 

Transmitter linearity ±0.1% of span 

RTD current 0.5 mA low value virtually 

eliminates sensor self-heating 

Max load (Supply voltage - 9.4) / 0.02A 

Impedance 250� ±0.1% @ 14.4 VDC min 

730� ±0.1% @ 24 VDC min 

Operating environment -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) 

Connections Screw terminals; nonpolar, for 

connections either way 

Housing 4.5"L x 2.75"W x 2.25"D 

(11.43 x 6.99 x 5.72 cm) 

OSA 

(O) 

Immersion 

(P) 

Duct 

(G) 

Mated Probe Selection 

TT-809-A 

Transmitter only 

(W) 

Averaging 

(V) 

Construction Cast aluminum moisture-resistant 

1/2" FNPT and gasketed cover, 

suitable for outdoor use, UL #459L 

Sensors 

RTD 1000� @32°F (0°C) platinum 

TCR 375 or 385 curve 

Accuracy ±0.12% 

Probe 

Immersion Stainless steel, 1/4" (6.35 mm), 

2" to 48" long 

Averaging Copper, 3/16" (4.76 mm), 

12', 24', and 50' only 

Wiring 4" (10 cm) 22 AWG leads 

Range Ambient Probe only 

Duct -58° to 500°F (-50° to 260°C) 

Immersion -320° to 500°F (-200° to 260°C) 

OSA -58° to 175°F (-50° to 80°C) 

Averaging -40° to 240°F (-40° to 115°C) 

65 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

66 

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT809 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1/2" FNPT 

4.5 

(11.43) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

TT809PW000W Enclosure Only 

5.5 

(13.97) 

2.0 

6.5 

(5.08) (16.5) 

TT809PW055P Immersion 

2.0 

(5.08) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

4.63 

(11.75) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

Foam Gasket 

8.0 (20.32) (E) 

or 

24' (7.31m) 

Coiled Copper (V) 

TT809PW080E Duct 

TT809PW288V Averaging 

5.5 

(13.97) 

TT809PW040O Outdoor 

1/2" 

NPT 

0.25 

(0.64) 

0.25 

(0.635) 

1.5 

(3.81) 

WIRING 


Power Connection Sensor Correction 

8.5 -35V 

Power 

Supply 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Span Pot 1 2 3 4 

- 

+ 

Span and Zero 

Adjustments 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

1000 RTD 

375 Platinum 

or 

385 Platinum 

Zero Pot 

The Model TT809 has range switch adjustments and noninteracting 

zero and span pots. The weatherproof box is standard 

and provides easy accessibility for installation and service. 

TT809 

Temperature Transmitter 

MODEL DESCRIPTION Sample order: 


TT809PW080E1S1 Transmitter with 8" Duct probe, 


375 curve platinum RTD, 

* PW 1000Ω 0.0375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 


LLL 

* 

* 

* 

* 

Length LLL in .1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", .000 for “W” without sensors 

E Duct mount, weather resistant box, LLL typically = 8.0" 

V Duct averaging, weather resistant box, LLL must be = 144", 288", or 600" 

O Outside air, weather resistant box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0" 

P Immersion, weather resistant box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion 

W Wall mount, weather resistant box, LLL typically 4.0" or 000 for no probe" 

* 1 4-20 mA DC Output 

TT809PW055P1BI2 

TT809PW000W1N1 

Transmitter with 5.5" Immersion 

probe, 375 curve RTD, with NIST 

at 0°C, ranged for 30°/130°F 

Transmitter only for two-wire 

1000Ω, 375 curve RTD, ranged 

for 32°/122°F 

* BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) 

Common range codes: 

*Normally-stocked 

item 

-- 

SX 

* 

Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog 

Special Range on next item line, -xxx/-yyy, i.e., -50°/270°F 

1 No calibration data, Sensor or Transmitter 

2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST 


BI 

S 

H 

N 

EN 

30°/130°F (-1°/54°C) 

0°/100°F (-18°/38°C) 

40°/90°F (4°/32°C) 

32°/122°F (0°/50°C) 

-20°/140°F (-29°/60°C) 


WB-6 Brass well AS2PA080E000XX1 1000� duct probe 

WS-6 Stainless steel well AS2PA050P000XX1 1000� immersion probe 

ST-AV91H 1000� averaging probe AS2PA040O000XX1 1000� OSA probe 

- 

+

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD, ROOM, DUCT, OSA 

TE-6300 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Johnson Controls Room, Duct, and OSA 1000� Nickel 

RTDs are specifically designed for HVAC and BAS systems. 

The active element is a nickel-based sensor that 

has been proven to be very stable and robust with many 

years of service life. The sensors come complete and 

ready to install for their specific applications. 

FEATURES 

• Easy to mount 

• Proven long performance 

• Many mounting styles 

• Single assembly ordering 

• PVC enclosure 

• Stainless steel insertion probe 

COMMON SPECIFICATIONS 

Element 1000� nickel @ 70°F (21°C) 

Sensitivity Approx 3�/°F (5.4 �/°C) 

Accuracy ± 0.34°F (± 0.18°C) 

±3°F averaging probe 


Enclosure ambient temp -50° to 122°F (-46° to 50°C) 

INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS 

MODEL TE-6300 TE-6311 TE-6312 TE-6313 TE-6314 TE-6316 

Type Strap-on Duct Immersion OSA Wall Averaging 

Probe length 3" (7.62 cm) 8" (20.32 cm) 8" (20.32 cm) 4" (10.16 cm) Thin film 17' (5.18m) 

Accessories APB-28 N/A WB-6 N/A N/A M-648 

PN-46 TCC-111 

PERFORMANCE CHARTS 

TEMPERATURE TE-63xx 

°F °C RESISTANCE Ω 

-50 -46 674 

-40 -40 699 

-30 -34 725 

-20 -29 751 

-10 -23 777 

0 -18 803 

10 -12 830 

20 -7 858 

30 -1 885 

40 4 914 

50 10 942 

60 16 971 

70 21 1000 

80 27 1030 

90 32 1060 

100 38 1090 

TE-6312 

TE-6313 

TE-6316 

TE-6300 

TE-6311 

TE-6314 

Wire 6" (15.24 cm) of 22 AWG 

Probe 0.25" (0.64 cm) stainless steel (duct, OSA, 

strap-on), 0.093" (0.24 cm) copper (averaging), 

thin film on circuit board with coating (wall) 

Enclosure PVC conduit box 

TEMPERATURE TE-63xx 

°F °C RESISTANCE Ω 

110 43 1121 

120 49 1152 

130 54 1184 

140 60 1216 

150 66 1248 

160 71 1281 

170 77 1314 

180 82 1348 

190 88 1382 

200 93 1417 

210 99 1452 

220 104 1487 

230 110 1524 

240 116 1560 

250 121 1597 

67 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

68 

TEMPERATURE 

1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD, ROOM, DUCT, OSA 

TE-6300 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.47 

(11.35) 

0.67 

(1.70) 

2.13 

(5.41) 

CROSS REFERENCES 

4.46 

(11.33) 

45˚ 

2.75 

(6.99) 

1.72 

(4.37) 

3.13 

(7.95) 

3.47 

(8.81) 

TE-6313 Outdoor Air Sensor 

7.5 max 

(19.05) 

4.47 

(11.35) 

0.25 (0.63) 

Mounting Plate 

TE-6311 Duct Probe Sensor 

TE-6314 Wall-Mount Sensor 

1.81 

(4.60) 


TE-6300-603 Strap-on 1000� nickel RTD 

TE-6311P-1 Duct-mount 1000� nickel RTD 

TE-6312P-1 Immersion 1000� nickel RTD 

6.0 max 

(15.24) 

4.47 

(11.35) 


2.75 

(6.99) 0.09 

(0.24) 

1.72 

(4.37) 

Mounting Plate 

TE-6316 Duct Averaging Sensor 

2.75 

(6.99) 

7.5 max 

(19.05) 

1/2" NPT 

4.5 (11.43) 

1.72 

WB-6 or WS-6 

(4.37) 

TE-6312 Well Insertion Sensor 

3 (7.62) 

TE-6300 Strap-On Sensor 

0.25 (0.63) 

0.25 

(0.63) 

May be used to replace 1 k� (ni) RTDs (TE-1100, TE-1300, TE-1700, TE-1800, TE-6000) 


TE-6313P-1 OSA-mount 1000� nickel RTD 

TE-6314P-1 Wall-mount 1000� nickel RTD 

TE-6316P-1 Duct averaging 1000� nickel RTD 


APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2" to 8" (5.08 to 20.32 cm) M-648 Copper-plated mounting end clip 

WB-6 6" (15.24 cm) brass well with 1/2" NPT T63U 4-20 mA nickel probe transmitter 

TCC-111 Thermal conductive compound

TEMPERATURE 

HIGH TEMPERATURE SMOKE STACK SENSOR AND TRANSMITTER 

MODELS S241HC, TT111H-0800 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model S241HC High Temperature Sensor is directly 

inserted to monitor the temperature of boiler stacks, steam 

lines, and other applications where the temperature may rise 

above the operating range of standard sensors. When used 

with the Model TT111H-0800 Transmitter, a 4-20 mA output 

is provided that is linear from 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C). 

FEATURES 

• All stainless steel probe 

• 24" high temperature leads 

• Small transmitter size 

• Well available (WS-6) 

• High temperature span (0° to 800°F) 


S241HC Sensor 

Resistance 1000� ±0.1% @ 32°F (0°C) 

Temp coefficient 0.00375 �/�/°C 

Range -58° to 932°F (-50° to 500°C) 

Leads Two-wire nickel coated stranded 

copper, 24" long 22 AWG fiberglass 

insulated 

Working pressure 3000 psig (20.7 mPa) max 

Probe material 304 stainless steel 

Well WS-6 304 stainless steel 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

1.1 

(2.79) 

1.53 

(3.89) 

5.5 

(13.97) 

S241HC Probe 

0.51 

(1.30) 

1 2 3 4 

1/2" Pipe Thread (typical both sides) 

zero span 

TT111H-0800 Transmitter 

2.0 

(5.10) 

Mounting Hole 

0.141" dia (0.36) 

0.14 

(0.36) 

0.91 

(2.31) 

24.0 

(60.94) 

TT111H-0800 Fixed Transmitter 

Input 1000� platinum 0.00375 �/�/°C 

Output range 4-20 mA, 0° to 800°F (-18° to 427°C) 

Operating temp -58° to 160°F (-50° to 70°C) 

Supply voltage 8.5-30 VDC unregulated 

Calibration accuracy ±0.05% of span 

Impedance 750� ± 0.1% @ 24 VDC min 

T91H Rangeable Transmitter 

Rangeable 200° to 1000°F (93.3° to 537.7°C) 

Specifications See T91H catalog page in the 

“Temperature” section 

WIRING 

S241HC 

Sensor 

S241HC 

TT111 

GFF-50 

Accessory 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

S241HC Direct insertion high temperature sensor 

TT111H-0800 High temperature transmitter 0° to 800°F 

GFF-50 1/2" galvanized floor flange 


WS-6 304 stainless steel well 5.5" element length 

T91H High temperature rangeable transmitter 

4 3 2 1 

TT111H-0800 

Transmitter 

GFF-50 

+ 

– 

+ – 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

69 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

70 

TEMPERATURE 

THERMAL RIBBON RTD 

MODELS S101144, S469 

DESCRIPTION 

Model S101144 and S469 self-adhesive, flexible ribbons feature 

imbedded RTDs to sense temperature. The platinum 

1000� RTD sensor is inserted and used with a transmitter or 

directly into a BAS system. The self-adhesive backing makes 

installation easy, and it adheres to all types of surfaces. The 

flexible thin ribbon maximizes contact to the measured surface 

which makes response time very fast. The accuracy is the 

same as immersion sensors 

APPLICATION 

The Model S469 precision sensor measures surface temperature 

and is ideal for strapping on water pipes. 

The Model S101144 is very small and unobtrusive and is used in 

stealthy locations, such as windows and museum displays. 

FEATURES 

• Small, flexible, and thin 

• Platinum accuracy 

• Fast response 

• Easy mounting 

• Self-adhesive backing 

• Pliable 


Sensor 1000� platinum RTD 

TCR 0.00375 �/�/°C (385 available) 

Accuracy ±0.12% @ 0°C 

Time constant 1 sec 


Stability

TEMPERATURE 

RADIANT ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TY7321A1009 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model TY-7321A1009 is a noncontact infrared (IR) 

radiant room temperature transmitter. IR energy is one 

of the main components of the perceived temperature in 

a space. The Model TY-7321A1009 has a wide 52° 

fixed viewing angle that averages the heat energy of the 

office environment and offers a 1-5 VDC signal for temperature. 

It mounts conveniently to any ceiling or wall 

via back box or directly to ceiling tiles or plaster. The 

lens coverage is adjustable and points horizontally up to 

344° and vertically up to 65°. 

APPLICATION 

The Model TY-7321A1009 is used when mounting a 

physical sensor is not possible in room applications. The 

thermopile senses the background heat radiation over 

an open-air environment and averages the energy into a 

1-5V temperature signal. It is ideal in open office environments 

when the cubical walls prevent sensor mounting. 

Museums or marble entrance halls also are useful 

ceiling applications. When directed at a sun-drenched 

outdoor window, the unit measures the effects from the 

sun so the supply air can be increased to compensate 

for thermal loading. 


Power 24 VAC/DC ±15% (50/60 Hz), 

0.3 VA 

Signal 1-5 VDC, 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Accuracy ±2°C 

Response 10 sec 

Emissivity 0.95 

Sensing 

distance Unlimited (without obstructions) 

View angle 52°, distance to sensing = 1:1 

Sensor pivot Adjustable 

(344° horizontal/65° vertical) 

Ambient temp 59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C) 

Ambient RH 10% to 90% RH noncondensing 

Housing Fire-resistant plastic (white) 

Agency Equivalent to UL V-0 


FEATURES 

• Noncontact with 52° view angle 

• 1-5V, 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

• 10-second response 

• 344° swivel coverage 

• Ceiling or wall mount 

• Attractive white base and cover 

WIRING 

� 

� � 

� 

� 

� � 

� 

�� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

71 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

72 

TEMPERATURE 

RADIANT ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TY7321A1009 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

5.5 (13.97) 

MOUNTING 

Spring 

Mounting Bracket 

Base 

Mounting Screw 

Wiring 

Square Hole 

VIEW 

3.4 (8.64) 

Base Mounting Screw 

Terminal Cover 

Spring Mounting 

Bracket 

Washer 

2.9 

(7.37) 

9.0 

(2.39) 

0.35 

(0.90) 

2.2 (5.59) 

3.5 1.8 

(8.89) (4.57) 

Boxless Type Box Type 

Turn the Base 

Mounting Screw two 

or three times to 

attach loosely. 

Terminal Cover 

Mounting 

Base 

2.25 

(5.72) 

Push the Mounting Base 

into hole. Turn the Base 

Mounting Screw until spring 

brackets are firmly engaged 

above ceiling. 

Base Assembly Base Installation Sensor Installation 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 



TY7321A1009 Infrared room temperature transmitter, ceiling mount 

Sensing 

Window 

Mounting Base 

to Back Box 

Mounting 

Base 

Sensor 

2.6 

(6.60) 

Align the small slot on 

the Sensor with the 

triangle on the Mounting 

Base. Turn the Sensor 

until it clicks. 

�� 

�� 

��

DESCRIPTION 

Models WEL-B and WEL-S Sensor Wells are used with standard 

length Precon thermistors, Precon RTDs, and Model 

T102 solid-state sensors. These wells may also be used with 

5.5" (13.97 cm) Minco immersion sensors by using the H 

option adapter. The well is designed to be installed into a standard 

1/2" saddle or Thredolet ® . 

The WEL-B Brass Thermowell is the standard thermowell for 

inserting into noncorrosive liquid lines. It will withstand a maximum 

temperature of 400°F (204°C) and a maximum static 

pressure of 1000 psig (6.9 MPa). 

The WEL-S 304 Stainless Steel Thermowell is inserted into 

corrosive liquid pipe lines. It will withstand a maximum temperature 

of 1000°F (538°C) and a maximum static pressure of 

4500 psig (31 MPa). 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

TEMPERATURE 

SENSOR THERMOWELLS AND WELL ADAPTERS 

MODELS WEL-B, WEL-S, F2N-B, F2B-D, F2S-D 

1/8-27 NPSM Internal Thread 

1/2" NPT 

4.94 

(12.54) 

5.13 

(13.03) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

WEL-B Brass Well or 

WEL-S Stainless Steel Well 

0.5 

(1.27) 


The F2S-D Stainless Steel, F2N-D Nylon, or the F2B-D Brass 

Well Adapter allows a 1/4" (0.64 cm) diameter sensor probe with 

a 1/2" national pipe straight machined (NPSM) fitting to be used 

with a standard WEL-B or WEL-S Thermowell. 

1/2" NPSM Female Thread 

0.69 

(1.75) 

1.31 

(3.33) 

0.63 

(1.58) 

1/8" NPSM 

Male Fitting 

F2B-D Brass 

F2S-D Stainless Steel 

F2N-D 

1/2" NPSM Female Thread 

F2N-D Nylon 

(insertion length add 0.31" (0.97)) 

Well Adapters 


WEL Bulb wells 

B Brass bulb well 

S 304 Stainless steel bulb well 

OPTIONAL ADAPTER 

H F2B-D* Brass adapter for use with WEL-B 

F2S-D* Stainless steel adapter for use with WEL-S 

WEL B H 

F2B-D 

Example: WEL-B Brass bulb well with F2B-D brass adapter 

* For use with Minco sensor probe length LLL=5.5" 

WEL-B 

WEL-S 

1/8" NPSM 

Male Fitting 


F2S-D Stainless steel adapter 1/8" NPS x 1/2" NPSM 

F2B-D Brass adapter 1/8" NPSM x 1/2" NPSM 

F2N-D Nylon adapter 1/8" NPSM x 1/2" NPSM 

TCC-12/TCC-111 Thermal conducting compound single application, 3.75 fl oz (111 mL) tub 

F2S-D 

73 

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE 

74 

TEMPERATURE 

BULB WELLS 

MODELS WB, WS 

DESCRIPTION 

Models WB and WS Bulb Wells are used with standard or custom 

length Precon thermistors and Type 81 and 91 RTD sensors 

by using the Model FB-3 adapter. These wells are also used 

directly with Minco immersion sensors and are designed to install 

into a standard 1/2" saddle or Thredolet ® . 

Model WB Brass Wells are inserted into noncorrosive liquid 

lines. They will withstand a maximum temperature of 400°F 

(204°C) at a static pressure of 1000 psi (6.9 MPa). 

The Model WS 304 Stainless Steel Wells are inserted into 

corrosive or noncorrosive liquid lines. These will withstand a 

maximum temperature of 1000°F (538°C) at a static pressure 

of 4500 psi (31 MPa). 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

0.26 

(0.66) 

B 

External Dimensions 

D 

A 

Internal Dimensions 

C 

1/2" NPT 

0.75 

(1.91) 

1.75* 

(4.44) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

1.13 

(2.86) 

1/2" NPT 

C 

B A 

D 

FB-3 

FS-3 

1/8" NPSM 

0.88 

(2.22) 

NOTE: Inside threads are 1/2" NPSM; outside threads are 1/2" NPT. 

MODEL 

WB 

WBF 

WS 

WSF 

FB-3 

FS-3 

WBF 

DESCRIPTION 

LENGTH DESIGNATION (well only) 

2.5 

4 

6 

9 

XX 

FS-3 

FB-3 ADAPTER 

*For WB-2.5 and WS-2.5 the head dimension is 1.5" long 


Brass well 

Brass well with FB-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter 

304 stainless steel well 

304 stainless steel well with FS-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter 

1/2" to 1/8" brass well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors 

1/2" to 1/8" stainless steel well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors 

– 9 

2.5" element length 

4.0" element length 

6.0" element element length 

9.0" Element length 

Specify custom length (12", 15", 18", or 24") 


F2B-D Brass adapter 1/2" NPT to 1/8" NPS adapter 

TCC-12 Thermal conducting compound single application 

TCC-111 Thermal conducting compound 111 mL tub 

WS-4 WB-6 

MODEL ELEMENT INSERTION SHANK DIA OVERALL 

LENGTH A LENGTH B LENGTH C LENGTH D 

WB-2.5 2.5 (6.35) 1.4 (3.56) N/A 2.75 (6.99) 

WS-2.5 2.5 (6.35) 1.4 (3.56) N/A 2.75 (6.99) 

WB-4 4.0 (10.16) 2.5 (6.35) N/A 4.3 (10.92) 

WS-4 4.0 (10.16) 2.5 (6.35) N/A 4.3 (10.92) 

WB-6 6.0 (15.24) 4.5 (11.43) 0.625 (1.59) 6.3 (16.00) 

WS-6 6.0 (15.24) 4.5 (11.43) 0.625 (1.59) 6.3 (16.00) 

WB-9 9.0 (22.86) 7.5 (19.05) 0.625 (1.59) 9.3 (23.62) 

WS-9 9.0 (22.86) 7.5 (19.05) 0.625 (1.59) 9.3 (23.62) 

FB-3 0.44 (1.12) 0.31 (0.79) 0.5 (1.27) 0.75 (1.91) 

Precon 

XL-probe length 

in (cm) in (cm) 

2.5 (6.35) 

4 (10.16) 

6 (15.24) 

9 (22.86) 

12-24 

Example: WBF-9 Brass well with 9" element length and FB-3 adapter 

Minco 

probe length 

2 (5.08) 

3.5 (8.89) 

5.5 (13.97) 

8.5 (20.40) 

0.5

HC-101 

HC-201 Invensys 5 

HW10K Kele 3% 

HW30K Kele 3% 

HW31K Kele 3% 

ACI-3-R Kele 3% 

MRH-3-S GE 3% 

HD10K Kele 3% 

HD30K Kele 3% 

HD31K Kele 3% 

ACI-3-D Kele 3% 

GE 3% 

3% 

HUMIDITY

PRODUCTS 

See the NEW ACI Series 

BAS/HVAC Humidity 

Sensor on page 93! 

HUMIDITY 

HC-101 

HC-201 Invensys 5 

HW10K Kele 3% 

HW30K Kele 3% 

HW31K Kele 3% 

ACI-3-R Kele 3% 

MRH-3-S GE 3% 

HD10K Kele 3% 

HD30K Kele 3% 

HD31K Kele 3% 

ACI-3-D Kele 3% 

GE 3% 

3% 

SERVICES 

Check out our handy 

Humidity Selection 

Chart on page 75! 

SOLUTIONS 

You’ll find a product at 

Trane to Meet Any 

Humidity Measurement. 


Humidity Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 

DEWPOINT 

9002 — VaporStat Infrared Dew Point and Grains Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 

A21 — Aspirated Enclosure for Air Sampling with Space Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 

DP3A — Dew Point Enthalpy and Wet Bulb Transmitter for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . .103 

EN3A — Enthalpy Transmitter for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 

WB3A — Wet Bulb Transmitter for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 

RH 

ACI/RH Series — BAS/HVAC RH Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 

BA/H Series — BAPI RH Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 

EASYCAL — General Eastern Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 

EHRH — Waterproof/Wash Down Humidity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 

HC-101, HC-201 — Humidistat for Wall or Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 

HD1K — 1% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 

HD10K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 



HD31K — 3 % Accuracy, 4-20 mA for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 

HF20K — Flush mount 2% Humidity for Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 

HMD60U — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 

HMD70U — 2% Accuracy, 0-5V or 0-10V Transmitter for Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 

HMK41K — Vaisala Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 

HMW60U — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 

HMW70U — 2% Accuracy, 0-5V or 0-10V Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 

HO1K — 1% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 

HO20K — 2% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 

HO30K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 

HO31K — 3 % Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 

HT2 — Minco 2% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 

HT829, HT839 — Minco1% & 2% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . .101 

HW1K — 1% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 

HW10K — 3% Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 



HW31K — 3 % Accuracy, 4-20 mA Transmitter for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 

KH — Kele 2% & 3% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 

MRH — 2% & 3% Accuracy Transmitters for Wall/Duct/OSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 

W43 — Humidistat for Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 


HUMIDITY 

HUMIDITY SELECTION CHART 

PRODUCT MNFR ACCURACY MOUNTING SIGNAL MOISTURE ATTRIBUTES APPLICATION 

W43A-14 JCI 4% diff. Wall SPDT RH Accuracy Limit control 

HC-101 Invensys 5% diff. Wall SPDT RH Aesthetics Limit control 

HC-201 Invensys 5% diff. Duct SPDT RH Duct Limit control 

GEH5S GE 5% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

GEH5D GE 5% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

GEH5O GE 5% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

KHR3 Kele 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

HW10K Kele 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

HW30K Kele 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Executive housing Monitoring 

HW31K Kele 3% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional White executive housing Monitoring 

ACI-3-R ACI 3% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Delta housing Monitoring 

MRH-3-S GE 3% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional GE housing Monitoring 

BA/H300-B BAPI 3% Wall 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional BAPI housing Monitoring 

KHD3 Kele 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

HD10K Kele 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

HD30K Kele 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure Monitoring 

HD31K Kele 3% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Universal enclosure Monitoring 

ACI-3-D ACI 3% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V Monitoring 

MRH-3-D GE 3% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V Monitoring 

BA/H300-D BAPI 3% Duct 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V Monitoring 

KHO3 Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

HD10K+WMK20 Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH Replaceable sensor Monitoring 

HO30K Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure Monitoring 

HO31K Kele 3% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Universal enclosure Monitoring 

ACI-3-O ACI 3% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V Monitoring 

MRH-3O GE 3% OSA 0-10VDC RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V Monitoring 

BA/H300-O BAPI 3% OSA 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V Monitoring 

HT-880 Minco 2.50% Wall/Duct 4-20 mA RH Explosionproof RH control 

KHR2 Kele 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control 

HW20K Kele 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Executive housing RH control 

ACI-2-R ACI 2% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Delta housing RH control 

MRH-2-S GE 2% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional GE housing RH control 

GEH2S GE 2% Wall 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control 

EHRH GE 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Wash-down housing RH control, pool 

HT2-S Minco 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Minco housing RH control 

HT829-S, HT839-S Minco 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH, RH/T One-point calibration RH control 

HMW-60U Vaisala 2% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Vaisala housing RH control 

HMW-70U Vaisala 2% Wall 0-5 VDC RH/T optional Voltage output RH control 

BA/H200-B BAPI 2% Wall 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional BAPI housing RH control 

KHD2 Kele 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control 

HD20K Kele 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control 

ACI-2-D ACI 2% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V RH control 

MRH-2-D GE 2% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V RH control 

GEH2D GE 2% Duct 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control 

HT2D Minco 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control 

HT829-D, HT839-D Minco 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH, RH/T One-point calibration RH control 

HMD-60U Vaisala 2% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control 

HMD-70U Vaisala 2% Duct 0-5 VDC RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control 

BA/H200-D BAPI 2% Duct 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V RH control 

KHO2 Kele 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control 

HO20K Kele 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control 

ACI-2-O ACI 2% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V RH control 

MRH-2O GE 2% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-10V RH control 

GEH2O GE 2% OSA 4-20/0-10 RH/T optional Replaceable sensor RH control 

HT2O Minco 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure RH control 

HT829-O, HT839-O Minco 2% OSA 4-20 mA RH, RH/T One-point calibration RH control 

BA/H200-O BAPI 2% OSA 4-20/0-5 RH/T optional 4-20 mA and 0-5V RH control 

HW1K Kele 1% Wall 4-20 mA RH/T optional Executive housing Clean room control 

HT829-S1N1 Minco 1% Wall 4-20 mA RH Minco housing Clean room control 

HD1K Kele 1% Duct 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure Clean room control 

HT829-D1N1 Minco 1% Duct 4-20 mA RH One-point calibration Clean room control 

HO1K Kele 1% OSA 4-20 mA RH/T optional Metal enclosure Calculation input 

HT829-O1N1 Minco 1% OSA 4-20 mA RH One-point calibration Calculation input 

9002 Telair 1.8F Wall/Duct 4-20 mA DP/T IR measurement Condensation control 

RH Relative Humidity is the ratio of actual water vapor in the air vs. the water vapor that the air can hold at saturation. 

DB Dry bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a dry sensor without any effect from evaporative cooling. 

WB Wet bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a wet sensor, which measures the cooling effect from evaporation. 

DP Dew Point temperature is the temperature at which water vapor begins to condense into water liquid, which is at 100% RH. 

EN Enthalpy is the measure of the heat energy in the air. 

75 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

76 

HUMIDITY 

HUMIDISTATS 

MODELS HC-101, HC-201 

DESCRIPTION 

Models HC-101 and HC-201 Humidistats are used for low or 

line voltage on/off single-stage control of humidifiers, dehumidifiers, 

valves, solenoids, compressors, relays, and other electrical 

equipment. 

MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS 

VAC FLA LRA RESISTIVE PILOT DUTY 

MODEL 50/60 Hz AMPS VA 

HC-101 24 — — 8 60 

HC-201 120 7.2 43.2 8 345 

SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION 

MODEL 

HC-101 

HC-201 

DESCRIPTION 

Room 

Duct 

SCALE 

RANGE 

10% to 90% 

15% to 95% 

HUMIDISTATS 

MODEL W43A-14 

DIFF 

RH 5% 

RH 5% 

AMBIENT LIMITS °F (°C) 

Operating 

40 to 125 

(4 to 52) 

40 to 125 

(4 to 52) 

DESCRIPTION 

The SPDT contact action of the Model W43A-14 Humidistat 

provides control of humidifying or dehumidifying equipment. A 

flush-mounting bracket that fits a standard outlet box is supplied. 

The Model W43A-14 features field-adjustable high and 

low stops. Stops can be set for locked setting. 

ACCESSORIES 

The Model W43A-14 includes a faceplate for horizontal mounting. 

The plate is for on-the-job installation over a vertical plate. 

It can be field-converted to concealed adjustment. Specify plate 

kit PLT333-12R (vertical) or PLT333-9R (horizontal). 

MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS 

MOTOR RATINGS SHIP 

VAC 120 208 240 lb (kg) 

AC full load amp 6.0 3.5 3.0 0.6 (0.3 kg) 

AC locked rotor amp 36.0 21.0 18.0 0.9 (0.4 kg) 

Pilot Duty - 125 VA, 24-277 VAC 

Shipping & 

Storage 

-40 to 140 

(-40 to 60) 

-40 to 140 

(-40 to 60) 

WIRING 

(red) N.C. 

CONNECTION WEIGHT COVER DIMENSIONS 

in (cm) 

6" (15.0 cm) 

Color-coded leads 

Coded screw 

terminals 

(brown) N.O. 

Brown makes on drop in humidity. 

All units provided with green 

grounding lead ( ). 

W43A 

HC-101 HC-201 

1.0 lb 

(0.45 kg) 

1.5 lb 

(0.68 kg) 

Beige 

plastic 

Metal 

Drop in RH 

WIRING 

(orange) 

Common 


4.38 x 2.88 x 1.63 

(11.13 x 7.32 x 4.14) 

4.38 x 6.50 x 2.25 

(11.13 x 16.51 x 5.72) 

MODEL SWITCH RANGE DIFF % RH VOLTAGE 

ACTION Approx 

W43A-14 SPDT 0% to 70% RH 4% RH Low or line 

H 

L 

C 

Action on increase 

of humidity

HUMIDITY 

2% AND 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

MODELS KHR, KHD, KHO 

DESCRIPTION 

Model KHR, KHD, and KHO Humidity Transmitters are specifically 

designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure 

relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 

mA output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control. 

The RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD temperature 

sensors. They come in room (KHR), duct (KHD), and OSA (KHO) 

mounting styles. 

OPERATION 

The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal with 

the latest microprocessor capacitive design. Multi-point factory-automated 

calibration improves accuracy and repeatability. The optional 

temperature sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to 

most automation systems. 

FEATURES 

• Calibration-free interchangeable sensors 

• Twelve-point computerized calibration 

• ±2% or ±3% accuracy (5% to 95% RH) 

• Replaceable sensor probe (no re-calibration) 

• No need to remove box to replace sensor probe 

• Attractive room enclosure design 

• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output, 0% to 100% RH 


Sensing element Precon HS-2000 capacitive sensor 

Accuracy ±2% or ±3% RH from 0° to 70°C, 5% to 

95% RH noncondensing 

Temp effect Temperature compensated with 

HUMIDITY 

78 

HUMIDITY 

2% AND 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

MODELS KHR, KHD, KHO 

WIRING — KHR 

2 

1 

JP1 

LED 

MB 

Button Jumper 

8 1-2 Pot 

7 3-4 Pot 

5-6 Sensor 

7-8 Sensor 

Push button will short out the 

pot or sensor momentarily 

Communication 

Wiring 

J1 or J2 

Customer 

Contact 

C 

24 VAC/VDC 

Txx Sensor to 

BAS Controller 

Pot not available 

at this time 

Sensor 

SW3 

RT1 

RJ11 

plug 

IN JP1 

1 

+ 

- 

- 

OUT 

+ 

J3 

R4 

R5 

R2 

- 

LED 

+ 

POT 

J4 

2 

1 

J1 

SENSOR 

JP2 

R6 

LED 

A 

K 

MB 

Button 

D2 

K 

R3 

A 

8 

7 

8 

7 

D3 

COVER ON 

CCRJ11AD accessory; 

required for J1 option 

RJ11 plug with cover off; 

for J2 option 

SW1 

6 

+V 

RH 

LOOP 

1 

J2 

J5 

12-28 

VDC 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

4-20mA 

RH 

Signal 


WIRING — KHD and KHO 

4-20mA 

RH Signal 

Optional 

Temperature 

Sensor to 

Controller 


KHR Room relative humidity transmitter 

KHD Duct relative humidity transmitter 

KHO OSA relative humidity transmitter 

RELATIVE HUMIDITY ACCURACY 

2 2% accuracy 

3 3% accuracy 

TEMPERATURE SENSOR and TRANSMITTER OPTIONS 

-- No temperature sensor 

CL1 KHR custom logo, 1 color (CL2 = 2 color, CL3 = 3 color) 

J1 RJ11 externally accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD) 

J2 RJ11 internal communication jack 

LED LED lamp indicator, standard 24V (AC/DC) voltage 

MB Momentary push button switch, jumpered across sensor/pot (JP1) 

T3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III 

T21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

T22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

T24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

T27 100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II 

T42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV 

T81 100Ω RTD, 385 platinum curve 



WP KHD duct in weatherproof metal box 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

12-28 

VDC 

V+ TT 

RH THRM THRM 

J3 1 

6 

J4 1 

J1 

4 

PRECON BASE BOARD 4 

130-0174-00 

J5 

Sample orders: 

KHD2 2% RH duct transmitter 

KHR3T3 3% RH room transmitter 

with 10kΩ Type III thermistor 

Custom Logo Color Chart 

Pantone 485 

Pantone 492C 

Pantone 300 

Pantone 299 

J2 

Passive 

Temperature 

Sensor Plug 

Replaceable 

RH Sensor 

Plug 

Pantone 356 

Pantone 124C 

Pantone 431C 

Pantone 6C 

Other Pantone colors available on request. 

ACCESSORIES 

HSR Room replacement sensor HSD* Duct replacement sensor 

HSO* OSA replacement sensor HSD-WP* Duct replacement sensor for WP (metal box) 

Note: All replacement sensors are 2% accuracy. 

*If a temperature sensor is included with an HS sensor, the temperature suffix must be added (T3, T21, T22, T24, T27, T42, T81, T85, or T91). 

3 

6 

1 

4

4.50 

(11.43) 

HUMIDITY 

3% WALL AND DUCT MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

H_10K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

H_10K Series Humidity Transmitters are used in 

HVAC/BAS applications. These units measure humidity 

from 0% to 100% RH and temperature (optional) from 

32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C). H_10K Series utilizes the 

completely interchangeable INTERCAP sensing element 

for fast response and long-term stability. The interchangeable 

feature means field service is accomplished 

quickly and simply with no calibration ever required. 

FEATURES 

• 0% to 100% RH measurement 

• ±3% accuracy (0% to 90% RH) 

• Completely interchangeable RH sensors 

• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output 


Input voltage 24 VDC ± 20% 

Output signal 4-20 mA (500� max load) 

Output range 0% to 100% RH 

Connections Screw terminals (20-16 AWG) 

Sensor Capacitive INTERCAP, 

plug-in sensor (no calibration 

required) 

Sensor protection 0.5 micron membrane filter 

Accuracy @ 20°C ±3% @ 0% to 90% RH 

±4% @ 90% to 100% RH 

Stability ±1% RH/year 

Temp coefficient ±0.04% RH/°C 

(temperature compensated) 

DIMENSIONS 

3.23 

(8.2) 

in 

(cm) 

2.36 

(6.00) 

3/4" Conduit Hole 

Cover Screw 

Typical 

Duct-Mount 

Screw Typical 

7.00 

(17.78) 

0.59 

(1.50) 

3.94 

(10.0) 

HW10K HD10K 

9.17 

(23.29) 

2.17 

(5.52) 

0.47 

(1.19) 

3.94 

(10.0) 

HW10K 

0.56 

(1.43) 

Diameter 

0.42 

(1.04) 

Mounting 

Bracket 

Side View 

2.50 

(6.35) 

Outside Wall 

(northern exposure) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

3.50 

(8.89) 

Weather Shield 

10.0 

(25.40) 

HD10K 

• Excellent long-term stability 

• Room, duct, and OSA mounting 

• Optional thermistor temperature sensor 

• Beige room enclosure 

Response time 90% in 5 sec 

Measuring range 0% to 100% RH 

(noncondensing) 

Temp range, room 24° to 132°F (-5° to 55°C) 

Temp range, duct -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C) 

Optional room temp sensor 

Range 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C) 

Accuracy ±0.36°F (±0.2°C) 

Stability ±0.24°F (±0.13°C) over 

5 years 

Weight 

Room 0.18 lb (0.08 kg) 

Duct 2.1 lb (0.95 kg) 

HD10K with WMK-20 

End View into Sensor 

1.75 

(4.45) 

79 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

80 

HUMIDITY 

3% WALL AND DUCT MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

H_10K SERIES 

MOUNTING 

The HW10K is designed to be wall mounted in rooms where appearance is important. It may be mounted directly on 

dry wall or on any single-gang electrical outlet box with no adapters required. Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount 

screws can be used where conduit is not required. The HW10K includes a detachable mounting plate and is secured 

with tamper-resistant hex screws. The HD10K is designed for duct or OSA mounting. Use the through holes in the 

corners of the box to secure to the duct or WMK-20 wall bracket. 

WIRING 

TH 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Thermistor Temperature 

Sensor Controller Input 

(optional feature) 

Optional Thermistor 

Solder Connector Pads 

HW10K Model EL3K Replaceable Element 



HW10K 3% Wall-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HD10K 3% Duct humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

OPTIONS FOR HW10K ROOM TRANSMITTER 


T3 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III 

T21 2252Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 


T24 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 


T42 20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV 

T81 100Ω 385 Platinum RTD 



HW10K 

T3 

HD10K 

Example: HW10K-T3 Wall-mount humidity transmitter 

with 10,000Ω, type III temperature sensor 

RELATED PRODUCT 

EL3K Replaceable humidity element 

WMK-20 OSA weather shield and will kit for HD10K 

+ 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

+ 

+ 

4-20 mA 

Signal

HUMIDITY 

3% ROOM / DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

H_30K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Models HW30K Room, HD30K Duct, and HO30K 

Outside Air Humidity Transmitters have been specifically 

designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These 

instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. 

The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost 

duct and outside air monitoring for building control. Both 

duct and OSA RH transmitters are available with thermistor 

or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA rangeable 

temperature transmitter. 

OPERATION 

The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 

mA signal with 3% accuracy. The optional temperature 

sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to 

most automation systems. The optional, rangeable temperature 

transmitter offers a 4-20 mA signal and is rangeable 

from -20° to 250°F (-29° to 121°C). 


Sensing element Capacitive sensor 

Accuracy ±3% RH @ 77°F (25°C), 

5% to 95% RH 


less than 0.005% RH per °F 

(0.01% per °C) 

Long term stability Less than ±1% drift per year, typical 

Output humidity Two-wire, loop powered, 

4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH linear 

Opt. Output temp 

(Duct and OSA) Two-wire, loop powered, 4-20 mA 

Range limits -30° to 250°F (-34° to 121°C), 

min span of 40°F (22°C) 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

3.23 

(8.20) 

HW30K 

2.25 

(5.72) 

9.0 

(22.86) 

0.375 

(0.95) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

FEATURES 



• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output RH 

• Optional temperature thermistor 

• Optional temperature RTD 

• Optional temperature 4-20 mA 

2.75 

(6.99) 

HW30K 

2.88 

(7.31) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

4.625 

(11.75) 

HD30K 

Foam Gasket 

HO30K 

Operating range 0% to100% RH, 4-20 mA 



Max load impedance (Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02 i.e., 

700� @ 24 VDC 

Connections Screw terminals for loop 

termination 

Enclosure Single-gang, pressure-cast 

aluminum, weatherproof 

box with gasketed cover; room is 

beige plastic 


Optional temp 

Thermistor Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27,42 

RTD Type 81, 85, 91 

Transmitter 

(Duct and OSA) 4-20 mA, 675� @ 24V 

HD30K HO30K 

6.0 

(15.24) 

1.5 

(3.81) 

81 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

82 

HUMIDITY 


H_30K SERIES 

MOUNTING DUCT SENSOR MOUNTING OSA SENSOR 

The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm) 

probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be 

mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils, 

and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative 

humidity. It should be mounted in a location that will 

receive adequate air flow for proper operation. The unit may be 

mounted horizontally or vertically. 

H 

H 

T 

T 

LOOP 

SEN 

HW30K 

HD30K 

HO30K 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

Humidity 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Optional 

Temperature 

Sensor 

T3 through T91 

H 

H 

T 

T 

HD30K 

HO30K 

HD30K 

HO30K 


The transmitter should be mounted in a sheltered area, preferably 

on the north side of a building under the eave. This location 

will prevent the RH at the sensor from being affected by 

sun-heated air rising up the side of the building. The transmitter 

should be mounted horizontally with the sensor slots pointing 

down so that water does not collect in the sensor cavity. 

Mounting Position 

Incorrect Correct 

WIRING FOR RH ONLY AND “T”TEMPERATURE OPTION WIRING FOR RH AND “TT”TEMPERATURE OPTION 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

(Duct and OSA only) 


HW30K 3% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HD30K 3% Duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HO30K 3 % OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

OPTIONS (Temperature Sensors or Transmitters) 


T3 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III 





T42 20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV 




TT-XR Rangeable temperature transmitter (specify range) (duct and OSA only) 

TT-2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) 

TT-3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) 

XMH Membrane momentary switch (HW30K only) wired N.O. to T3 and T4 

HD30K T3 Example: HD30K-T3 Duct-mount humidity sensor with 10 kΩ type III 

temperature sensor 

North 

Humidity 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Temperature 

4-20 mA 

Signal

HUMIDITY 

3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

H_31K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Models HW31K, HD31K, and HO31K 3% Humidity 

Transmitters are specifically designed for use in 

HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative 

humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 

4-20 mA output provides low cost humidity monitoring for 

building control. The RH transmitters are available with 

thermistor or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA 

rangeable temperature transmitter. They are available in 

room, duct, and OSA mounting styles. 

OPERATION 


mA signal with 3% accuracy. The optional temperature 

sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to 

most automation systems. The optional rangeable temperature 

transmitter offers a 4-20 mA signal and is rangeable 

from -20° to 250°F (-29° to 121°C). 

FEATURES 




• White plastic design 


Sensing element Capacitive sensor 

Accuracy ±3% RH @ 77°F (25°C), 

5% to 95% RH 


HUMIDITY 

84 

HUMIDITY 

3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

H_31K SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Cover Hooks 

0.75 

(1.90) 

Cover Securing Screws 

and Back Plate 

Board 

Hooks 

4.50 

(11.43) 

Wire-Way 

Hole 

2.75 

(7.0) 

Front View 

1.20 

(3.05) 

Side View 

MOUNTING WIRING FOR RH AND “T” OPTION WIRING FOR RH AND “TT” OPTION 

H 

H 

T 

T 

2.3 

(5.84) 

1/8" NPT 



HW31K 3% Room-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 


HO31K 3% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

OPTIONS (temperature sensor or transmitter) 


T3 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III 

T21 2252Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 


T24 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 


T42 20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV 

T81 100Ω 385 Platinum RTD 



TT-XR Rangeable temperature transmitter (specify range) (duct and OSA only) 

TT-2 -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) 

TT-3 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) Transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) 

4.87 

(12.38) 

HD31K T3 Example: HD31K-T3 Duct-mount humidity transmitter with 

10 kΩ type III temperature sensor 

0.25 

(0.63) 

3.25 (8.26) 

2.5 (6.35) 

0.88 (2.24) 

H 

H 

T 

T 

Mounting 

Tabs 

H31K 

1/2" 

Conduit Hole 

Gasket 

0.75 (1.91) 

Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor 

HW31K HD31K 

HO31K 

H31K 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

Humidity 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Optional 

Temperature 

Sensor 

T3 through T91 

HW31K, HD31K, HO31K 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

HD31K, HO31K 

Duct and OSA Only 

8.38 

(21.29) 

4.75 

(12.07) 

5.5 

(13.98) 

Humidity 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Temperature 

4-20 mA 

Signal

HUMIDITY 

2% WALL-MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS HW20K, HF20K 

DESCRIPTION 

Model HW20K and HF20K Wall-Mount Humidity 

Transmitters are used in HVAC/BAS applications. These 

units measure humidity from 0% to 100% RH and temperature 

(optional) from 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C). The 

sensor exhibits fast response and long-term stability. 

When an accuracy adjustment is necessary, calibration 

of the transmitter can be done with a simple-to-use handheld 

calibration tool that plugs into the top of the transmitter. 

Model HF20K has a unique low-profile design. It is perfect 

for museums and institutions or other architecturally 

challenging locations where low profile is a must. The 

button may be removed from the plate for the most discreet 

placement. 

FEATURES 


• ±2% accuracy (20% to 95% RH) 

• State-of-the-art RH sensor technology 

• One-point calibration with calibrator 



• Continuous measurement 

• Executive decorator-style enclosure with tan 

faceplate 

• Optional temperature sensor 

• Optional momentary switch 

• Temperature compensated 

• Surface or flush styles 


Sensing element Resistance change of bulk polymer 

sensor 

Accuracy ±2% RH @ 77°F (25°C), 

20% to 95% RH including 

hysteresis, linearity, and 

repeatability 



less than 0.06% per °F 

(0.11% per °C) 

Sensitivity 0.4% RH 

Repeatability 0.5% 

Hysteresis Less than 1% 

Long-term stability Less than 1% drift per year, typical 

Output Two-wire, loop-powered, 4-20 mA, 

0% to 100% linear 


in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

HW20K 

DIMENSIONS 

3.23 

(8.20) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

1 

(2.5) 

HF20K 

0.62 

(1.57) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Removable Plate 

85 

0.44 

(1.18) 

Adjustments One point with calibrator 

Operating range 0% to 100% RH, 4-20 mA 



Max load (Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02 

i.e., 700� @ 24 VDC 

Connections Screw terminals for loop termination 

marked “+” and “-”, screw 

terminals for optional temperature 

sensor and momentary membrane 

switch, connector for single-point 

calibration tool 


Optional temp 

Thermistor Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42 

RTD Type 81, 85, 91 

Transmitter 4-20 mA, 675� @ 24V 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

Terminals for 

Thermistor/RTD 

and/or Membrane 

Switch Option 

(N.O. only) 

Switch Pins for 

Membrane 

Switch Option 

Optional 

Thermistor/RTD 

Soldering 

Connector Pins 

86 

HUMIDITY 

2% WALL-MOUNT HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS HW20K, HF20K 

INSTALLATION 

The HW20K is designed to be wall mounted in rooms where appearance is important. It may be mounted directly on 

dry wall or on any single-gang electrical outlet box with no adapters required. Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount 

screws can be used where conduit is not required. The HW20K includes a detachable mounting plate, and is secured 

with tamper-resistant hex screws. The HF sensor button may be removed from the wall plate and inserted directly into 

the drywall through a 5/8" hole. The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, on an interior 

wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices. Plug the wireway hole to prevent false readings by air 

drafts within the wall. 

WIRING 

Calibration Tool 

Connector (CC-RJ11AD) 

(order separately) 

V IN 

TH 

S T 

Humidity Sensing 

Element 

HW20K 

Connect to Device Under Test (DUT) 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC 

4-20 mA 

RH Signal 

Opt. temp. 

sensor 

INC 

DEC 

% RH 

DUT 52.2 

REF 50.0 

EASYCAL 



HW20K 2% Wall-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HF20K 2% Flush-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

OPTIONS 


T3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III 

T21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T27 100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV 

T81 100Ω 385 platinum RTD 



XMH Membrane momentary switch for HW20K 

(wired N.O. to terminal block) 

HW20K T3 XMH 

Temperature 

Sensor 

(optional) 

VR2 VR1 

Example: HW20K-T3-XMH 2% Wall-mount humidity 

transmitter with type III 10 kΩ temperature 

sensor and membrane switch 


EASYCAL Handheld calibrator for HW20K and HF20K transmitters 

CC-RJ11AD Required interface cable for EASYCAL and HW20K 

8' 

6" 

+ 

– 

HF20K 

Calibration Pot 

for single point 

calibration 

(unit is factory-calibrated) 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Humidity Sensing Element

HUMIDITY 

2% DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS HD20K, HO20K 

DESCRIPTION 

Models HD20K Duct and HO20K Outside Air 2% 

Humidity Transmitters have been specifically designed 

for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments 

measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard 

two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost duct 

and outside air monitoring for building control. When 

accuracy adjustment is necessary, the transmitter can be 

calibrated with a simple-to-use, handheld calibration tool 

that plugs into the transmitter board. Both duct and OSA 

RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD 

temperature sensors. 

OPERATION 


mA signal. The unit has a microprocessor that is based 

on 10-point calibration from the factory. The microprocessor 

maintains both high accuracy and low cost with a 

wide humidity and operational temperature span. 


Sensing element Resistive bulk polymer sensor 

Accuracy ±2% RH @ 77°F (25°C), 

20% to 95% RH 


less than 0.06% per °F 

(0.11% per °C) 


Repeatability 0.5% 

Hysteresis Less than 1% 

Long-term stability Less than 1% drift per year 

Output Two-wire, 4-20 mA 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.25 

(5.72) 

9.0 

(22.86) 

HD20K 

0.8 

(2.04) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

FEATURES 


• ±2% accuracy (20% to 95% RH) 

• One-point calibration with calibration meter 



• Optional thermistor or RTD sensor 






Connections Screw terminals 

Enclosure Aluminum single gang 

with gasketed cover 


Optional temp 

Thermistor Type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42 

RTD Type 81, 85, 91 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

HO20K HD20K 

4.63 

(11.75) 

HO20K 

4.35 

(11.05) 

Foam Gasket 

1.25 

(3.18) 

87 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

88 

HUMIDITY 

2% DUCT / OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS HD20K, HO20K 

MOUNTING DUCT SENSOR MOUNTING OSA SENSOR 








WIRING 

INC 

DEC 

% RH 

DUT 52.2 

REF 50.0 

EASYCAL 

Connect to Device 

Under Test (DUT) 

T 

T 

HO20K or 

HD20K 




will prevent RH at the sensor from being affected by sun-heated 

air rising up the side of the building. The transmitter should be 

mounted horizontally with the sensor slots pointing down so that 

water does not collect in the sensor cavity. 



Calibration tool connector (CC-RJ11AD) 


Power Supply 

24 VDC 

Optional 

Temperature 

Sensor 



HO20K 2% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

OPTIONS 


T3 10,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III 





T42 20,000Ω Thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV 




HD20K 

T3 

4-20 mA 

RH Signal 

Example: HD20K-T3 Duct-mount humidity transmitter with 

10,000Ω type III temperature sensor 


EASYCAL Handheld calibrator loop powered 

CC-RJ11AD Required interface cable for EASYCAL 

North

in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

HUMIDITY 


H_1K SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Models HW1K Room, HD1K Duct, and HO1K Outside 

Air Humidity Transmitters have been specifically 

designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications where high 

accuracy is required. These instruments measure relative 

humidity from 0% to 100%. The two-wire, 4-20 mA 

output provides low-cost duct and outside air monitoring 

for building control. When accuracy adjustment is necessary, 

the transmitter can be calibrated with a simple-touse, 

handheld calibration tool that plugs into the transmitter 

board. 

FEATURES 

• ±1% accuracy (10% to 80% RH) 

• State-of-the-art RH sensor technology 

• One-point calibration with EASYCAL calibrator 


• 10-point calibration 

• Humidity NIST certificate included 


• Optional momentary switch (HW1K) 


Sensing element Capacitive 

Accuracy ±1% RH @ 77°F (25°C), 

10% to 80% RH including 

hysteresis, linearity, and 

repeatability; 10-point factory 

calibration 


less than ±0.06% per °F 

(±0.11% per °C) 

Long-term stability Less than ±1% drift per year 

Output Two-wire, loop powered 

4-20 mA, 0% to 100% RH 


DIMENSIONS 

3.23 

(8.20) 

HW1K 

2.25 

(5.72) 

6.0 

(15.24) 

1.0 4.5 

(2.54) (11.43) 

OPERATION 

The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 

4-20 mA signal. The unit has a microprocessor that maintains 

10-point calibration from the factory. The microprocessor 

maintains both high accuracy and low cost 

with wide humidity and operational temperature. 



Operating temp -13° to 122°F (-25°to 50°C) 

Load impedance (Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02 

i.e., 700� @ 24 VDC 

Connections Screw terminals 

Enclosure 

Duct / OSA Aluminum single gang 

with gasketed cover 

Room Executive beige plastic enclosure 


Optional temp Thermistor type 3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42 

sensor RTD type 81, 85, 91 

-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

HW1K 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

HO1K HD1K 

4.63 

(11.75) 

HD1K HO1K 

Gasket 

3.25 

(8.26) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

89 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

90 

HUMIDITY 


H_1K SERIES 

MOUNTING DUCT TRANSMITTER MOUNTING OSA TRANSMITTER 








MOUNTING ROOM TRANSMITTER 

Basic model comes with screw terminal block, tan decorator 

faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handibox-mounting, and two 

#6 x 1" screws for direct 

wall-mounting. Cover 

screws are #6-32 

with a 1/16" allen key 

head. 

Tan Faceplate 

(standard) 

Optional Customer-Supplied Handibox 

Plate 

Mounting 

Screws 

Wire Access 

Hole 

Cover Mounting 1/16" Allen Screws 




will prevent RH at the sensor from being affected by sunheated 

air rising up the side of the building. The transmitter 

should be mounted vertically with the sensor pointing down so 

that water does not collect in the sensor cavity. 

INC 

DEC 



WIRING 

% RH 

DUT 52.2 

REF 50.0 

EASYCAL 

Connect to Device 

Under Test (DUT) 


HW1K 1% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HD1K 1% Duct humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HO1K 1% OSA humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

OPTIONS 


T3 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type III 

T21 2252Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T22 3000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T24 10,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T27 100,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type II 

T42 20,000Ω thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), type IV 

T81 100Ω 385 platinum RTD 



XMH Membrane momentary switch (HW1K only) 

(wired to terminal block) 

HD1K T3 Example: HD1K-T3 1% RH duct-mount transmitter with a 

type III 10 kΩ temperature sensor 


EASYCAL Handheld calibrator (2% accuracy only) 

CC-RJ11AD Required interface cable for EASYCAL 

T 

T 

HO1K or HD1K 

Calibration Tool 

Connector (CC-RJ11AD) 


Power Supply 

24 VDC 

Optional 

Temperature 

Sensor 

North 

4-20 mA 

Signal

HUMIDITY 

2% AND 3% RH ROOM / DUCT / OSA TRANSMITTERS 

MRH SERIES, EASYCAL 

DESCRIPTION 

The Microline MRH Series humidity transmitters have 

been designed for room, duct, and OSA applications. A 

microprocessor maintains ten points of calibration for 

superior accuracy through the range of operation. The 

transmitter can be easily field calibrated with a handheld, 

single-point calibration tool (EASYCAL). The 

transmitter uses a proven bulk polymer resistive sensor 

for excellent sensing range and is not affected by surface 

contamination in dirty environments. 

FEATURES 

• 2% and 3% accuracy available 

• Multi-output 0-5V, 0-10V, 4-20 mA 

• Space, duct, or OSA mounting 

• Microprocessor-controlled 

• Easy field calibration 

• Ten-point factory calibration accuracy 


• Two-year warranty on electronics 

• Available with optional temperature transmitter 


Sensing element Bulk polymer resistive 

Accuracy 2% & 3% RH @ 77°F (25°C), 

20% to 95% 


Connections Terminal screws 

EASYCAL 2.5% calibration accuracy 

Power 18-36 VDC 

RH output 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC 

Impedance 700� @ 24 VDC (4-20 mA) 

Adjustments Zero with calibrator 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.9 

(12.45) 

3.1 (7.87) 

Cover Base 

1.0 

(2.54) 

3.3 (8.38) 

Mounting 

Holes on 

Center Line 

Wiring 

Access 

1/2" (1.27) 

Conduit 

Knockout 

(2 places) 

4.5 (11.43) 

3.5 (8.89) 

EASYCAL 


Enclosure ABS plastic flame retardant 

Probe Duct stainless steel, OSA aluminum 

Optional temp 4-20 mA only 

Transmitter 

range -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

(special ranges available) 

Max load 700� @ 24 VDC 

Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg), space 0.2 lb (0.9 kg) 

3.5 4.0 

(8.89) (10.16) 

1.7 

(4.32) 

MRH-2-S 

2.95 

(7.49) 

3.5 

(8.89) 

2.1 

(5.33) 

Cover Base 

4.5 (11.43) 

Terminal 

Block 

0.5 

(1.27) 

2.25 (5.72) 

3.5 (8.89) 

Base 

Room Outside Air Duct 

MRH-2-D 

1/2" (1.27) 

Conduit 

Knockout 

Probe 

7.2 (18.29) 

Insertion 

MRH-2-O 

1/2" (1.27) 

Conduit 

Knockout 

(3 places) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

91 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

92 

HUMIDITY 

2% AND 3% RH ROOM / DUCT / OSA TRANSMITTERS 

MRH SERIES, EASYCAL 

CALIBRATION 

To calibrate the MRH: 

1. Insert the calibration tool connector into the RJ11 jack on 

the transmitter board. 

2. Insert the probe into the air stream that the transmitter is 

monitoring. 

3. Adjust the arrow buttons on the side of the tool until the 

two displays match. 

4. Remove the jack and probe. 

Note: There is no need to remove the cover on 

duct or room models. OSA sensors have 

a protected internal jack. 

WIRING 

MRH-2 Transmitter 

GENERAL EASTERN 

Terminal Block Power Supply 

Terminal Block 

5 

VIN 18-36 VDC 

Humidity 5 

VIN 18-36 VDC 

Power 

4 

4-20 mA 

4 N/C 

Supply 

3 

2 

N/C 

VIN 18-36 VDC 

Power Supply 

Temperature 

3 

2 

Signal common 

0-10V Signal 

1 

4-20 mA 

1 

0-5V Signal 

Optional (temperature transmitter wiring ---) 

Current Output 

Voltage Output 

(RH output units only) 

Note: When wiring for the transmitter, use a twisted, shielded pair of 16-22 AWG. Use only copper conductors. Do not run 

transmitter wires and AC power wires together in the same conduit or wire bundle. 



MRH-2 2% RH multi-output transmitter 

MRH-3 3% RH multi-output transmitter 

S Wall-mounted housing for indoor use 

O Wall-mounted housing for outdoor use 

D Duct-mounted housing with stainless steel probe 

T Temperature transmitter -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

(current output only) 

MRH-2 

S T 

DUT 

(Device Under Test) 

Related Product 

EASYCAL Handheld 2% calibrator and cable for MRH transmitters with NIST 

INC 

DEC 

Example: MRH-2-S-T Indoor wall-mounted 2% relative humidity 

transmitter with optional temperature transmittter 

% RH 

DUT 52.2 

REF 50.0 

EASYCAL

HUMIDITY 

BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS 

ACI/RH SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Model ACI/RH relative humidity transmitters provide 

accurate RH reading in 2%, 3%, and 5% accuracies 

using a ceramic resistive sensor offering a 20% to 95% 

operating range. The transmitters come in wall, duct, and 

OSA mounting styles. They have multiple field-selectable 

outputs, including 4-20 mA, 0-10V, and 0-5V signals. The 

supply power is also selectable in 24 VDC or 24 VAC. The 

duct and OSA mounts are housed in NEMA 4 rated 

boxes with twist-off caps (no cover screws). 

FEATURES 

• Popular room housing 

• Accuracies of 2%, 3%, or 5% 


• Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing 

• 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (field-selectable) 

• 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (field-selectable) 

• Field-calibratable 


• Optional digital display 


Sensor Resistive with ceramic substrate 

Accuracy 2%, 3%, or 5% @ 77°F (25°C) 

Outputs RH 0% to 100%, field-selectable 

4-20 mA 2-wire; 4-20 mA 3-wire; 

0-5 VDC 3-wire; 0-10 VDC 3-wire 

Optional temp 

Thermistor 10K, 20K, 100K� @ 77°F 

RTD 100�/1000� 385 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.25 

(5.7) 

2.75 

(7.0) 

0.89 

(2.3) 

0.79 

(2.0) 

3.84 

(9.8) 

0.60 

(1.5) 

0.92 

(2.3) 

3.84 

(9.8) 

4.51 

(11.5) 

2.25 

(5.7) 

7.15 

(18.2) 

1.07 

(2.7) 

0.65 (1.7) 

0.75 (1.9) 

80 Micron Sintered 

Stainless Steel Filter 

0.58 

(1.5) 

0.18 

(0.5) 

O.D. Ref 

0.46 

(1.2) 

Stainless 

Plate 

1.00 

(2.5) 

6.10 

(15.5) 

Supply voltage 18-36 VDC selectable, 24 VAC 

Load impedance 4-20 mA-250� @ 24V 

Ambient temp -10° to 160°F (23° to 71°C) 

RH 0% to 99% noncondensing 

Temp effect

HUMIDITY 

94 

HUMIDITY 

BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS 

ACI/RH SERIES 

WIRING 

0-5 or 0-10 VDC 

RH Output to 

DDC Controller 

Ground or Signal 

Common (for AC 4-20 mA 

Ground or Signal 

Common (for AC 4-20 mA 

and Voltage Output 

Transmitters only) 

Mounting Hole 

and voltage output 

transmitters only) 

(+) +18 to 35 VDC 

(+) +18-35 VDC 

Output Selection Switches (SW3) or 24 VAC Supply Voltage 

or 24 VAC 

Supply Voltage 

(–) 4-20 mA Current 

Loop Output to 


IO Vin Gnd VO SW3 

4 3 2 1 

On 

AC Power 

4-20 mA Out 

4 3 2 1 

On 

DC Power 

4-20 mA Out 

AC/DC Power 

0-5 VDC Out 

4 3 2 1 

On 

AC/DC Power 

0-10 VDC Out 

(–) 4-20 mA 

Current Loop 

Output to 

DDC Controller SW3 

4 3 2 1 

4-20 VAC Gnd 0-5 

mA or or 

VDC 0-10 

4 3 2 1 

4 3 2 1 

On 

Wire 

Access 

Hole 

Relative 

Humidity 

Sensor 

Mounting Hole 

SW2 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

• = Designates all connections to be made 

to the RH Transmitter 

Room 

On 

Test & Calibration Switches Settings (SW2) 

0% RH Output 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

50% RH Output 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

100% RH Output 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

Normal Operating 

Condition 

6 5 4 3 2 1 


Relative 

Humidity 

Sensor 

(Polarized Male 

Connector) 


ACI/RH ACI relative humidity transmitter 

ACCURACY (choose one) 

2 2% (20% to 95% RH) 

3 3% (20% to 95% RH) 

5 5% (20% to 95% RH) 

MOUNTING TYPE (choose one) 

R Room surface-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output 

SP Surface wall plate-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output 

D Duct-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output 

O OSA-mount RH transmitter 4-20 mA/0-10V/0-5V output 

OPTION (as needed) 

AN 10 kΩ thermistor, 3 

CP 10 kΩ thermistor, 2 

100K 100 kΩ thermistor 

20K 20 kΩ thermistor 

100-2 100Ω 385 platinum RTD 

1000-2 1 kΩ 385 platinum RTD 

LCDR 3.5-digit RH display, 24 VDC required (Room only) 

ACI/RH 2 R AN Example: ACI/RH-2-R-AN ACI 2% room humidity transmitter 

with 10 kΩ thermistor 

On 

Increment RH Output 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

Decrement RH Output 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

Reset to Original Calibration 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

On 

SW2 

6 5 4 3 2 1 

On 

Duct/OSA 

0-5 or 0-10 VDC 

RH Output to 


Span Adjust 

Potentiometer 

Zero 

Adjust 

Potentiometer

HUMIDITY 

BAPI 2% AND 3% ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

BA/H SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The BA/H Series 2% and 3% accuracy humidity transmitters 

are designed specifically for HVAC systems. The 

room transmitters use Delta and BAPI-Stat II enclosures 

with optional displays and communication jacks. All duct 

and OSA units come in weatherproof enclosures selectable 

for NEMA 3R or IP66 applications. All the BA/H 

transmitters have optional temperature sensors or transmitters. 

Transmitter outputs include 4-20 mA, 0-5V and 

0-10V with replaceable sensors. 

FEATURES 

• ±2% or 3% accuracies 

• 4-20 mA / 0-5V / 0-10V models 

• Optional digital room RH display 

• Two-year warranty 

• Optional selection of thermistor, RTD, and 

semiconductor curves 

• Two room enclosure designs 

• Three duct and OSA enclosure designs 


• Replaceable RH sensors 


Sensor Resistive with ceramic substrate 

Accuracy 2% or 3%, from 20% to 95% RH 

Optional Temperature Sensors available 

(DC power recommended) 

Thermistor 1.8 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

3 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

3.3 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

10 k� Type 2 @ 77°F (25°C) 

10 k� Type 3 @ 77°F (25°C) 

20 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

50 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

100 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

RTD 100� 385 @ 32°F (0°C) 

1 k� 385 @ 32°F (0°C) 

1 k� 375 @ 32°F (0°C) 

SC AD592 247 µA @ -13°F (-25°C) 

SC LM334 298 µA @ 77°F (25°C) 

Wiring Four wire, 16 to 22 AWG terminals 

Optional display 2.5 digit LCD; adjustable between 

RH and temperature 

Delta-Style 

Enclosure 

Weather 

Tight (EU) 

Duct Unit 

BAPI-Stat II 

Enclosure 

Weather Tight 

(EUO) Outside Air Unit 

Weatherproof 

(WP) 

Duct Unit 

Enclosure Material 

Room ABS Plastic, UL94V-0 

Duct/OSA 

WP NEMA 3R, Cast aluminum 

EU IP66, ABS plastic, UL94V-0 

EUO IP66, UV resistant plastic 

Supply voltage 15-26 VAC/VDC 

Output 0-100% = 4-20mA / 0-5V, DC power 

0-100% = 0-10V, AC/DC power 

Load Impedance 

4-20 mA 700� maximum @24 VDC 

0-5/0-10V 10 k� minimum 

Ambient RH 

Room 0-100%, non-condensing 

Duct/OSA 0-100% 

Ambient Temp. 

Room 32° to 122°F (0° to -50°C) 

Duct/OSA -22° to 158°F (-30° to 70°C) 

Filter 

Room Gore-Tex ® 

Duct/OSA 100 micron sintered stainless steel 

Agency CE 

95 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

96 

HUMIDITY 

BAPI 2% AND 3% ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

BA/H SERIES 

WIRING 

J1 

J6 

GND 

POT 1 

V OUT 

V+ 

RH ZERO 

– 

% RH ADJUST 

J2 

1 2 

Display Cycle 

in Seconds 

Room Humidity Circuit Board 

F/C 

TEMP 

RTH1 RTH2 

3 

T 

TEMP + 

POT 2 

10 

H 

ON DEG F 

OFF DEG C 

J7 

20 



BA/ Humidity transmitter 

OPTIONAL SENSOR TYPE 

No temperature needed 

1.8K Thermistor 1.8 kΩ @77°F (25°C) 

3K Thermistor 3 kΩ @77°F (25°C) 

3.3K Thermistor 3.3 kΩ @77°F (25°C) 

10K2 Thermistor 10 kΩ @77°F (25°C), Type 2 

10K3 Thermistor 10 kΩ @77°F (25°C), Type 3 




100 RTD 100Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve 

1K8 RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 385 curve 

1K7 RTD 1000Ω @32°F (0°C), 375 curve 


592 AD592 semiconductor (comes with error and offset values) 

REQUIRED HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER (T10K(range) temperature range follows the RH selection) 

H200 ±2% Humidity transmitter, four-wire, 4-20 mA or 0-5V output 



H310 ±3% Humidity transmitter, four-wire, 0-10V output 

REQUIRED RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE 

R Room type, Delta style enclosure 

B Room type, BAPI-Stat II style enclosure 

D-WP Duct type, NEMA 3R, weatherproof metal enclosure 

D-EU Duct type, Weather tight IP66 ABS plastic enclosure 

D-EUO Duct type, Weather tight IP66, UV resistant enclosure 

O-WP OSA type, NEMA 3R, Weatherproof metal enclosure 

O-EUO OSA type, Weather tight IP66, UV resistant enclosure 

DIGITAL DISPLAY 

D LCD RH Digital Display (R-Delta style only) 

BA/ 10K3 - H200 - R - D 

4 TO 20 mA TERMINATION 

Terminal Legend Function 

GND........... 4 to 20 mA signal 

(to analog input of controller) 

V+............. +15 to +26 VDC 

TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor 


0 TO 5 VDC TERMINATION 

Terminal Legend Function 

GND........... To controller ground 

t(GND or common) 

V+............. +15 to +26 VAC/VDC 

V OUT.......... 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10V signal 

(to analog input of controller) 



Example: BA/10K3-H200-R-D BAPI 4-20 mA room 2% RH and 10KΩ thermistor 

sensor with LCD indication 


BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 

BA/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 

BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate 

BA/Foamback White foam back insulator 

BA/Foamback-Gray Gray foam back insulator 

UR Moisture resistant 3 wire butt splice 

Humidity Transmitter 

Module 

YELLOW 

YELLOW 

BLUE 

BLUE 

WHITE or GREEN 

BLACK 

RED 

Duct and OSA 

Blue wire (3%); 

Blue with Black stripe (2%) 

Optional Temperature 

Sensor Wires 

Sintered 

Sensor Tip 

Voltage Output: 0-5V (white) or 

0 to 10V (green) 

Ground: 4-20 mA output (two-wire loop) 

to controller or voltage output 

ground 

Power: 15 to 26 VDC 

BA/H2S 2% Room replacement sensor 

BA/H3S 3% Room replacement sensor 

BA/* H2P-S-D 2% Duct probe replacement 

BA/* H3P-S-D 3% Duct probe replacement 

BA/* H2P-S-O 2% OSA probe replacement 

BA/* H3P-S-O 3% OSA probe replacement 

*Temperature sensor as needed

HUMIDITY 

2% WALL- AND DUCT-MOUNT RELATIVE HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

HM_ 60, HM_ 70 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Vaisala’s Models HM_ 60 and 70 Wall/Duct-Mount 

Relative Humidity Transmitters have been specifically 

designed for use in HVAC/BAS and pharmaceutical 

applications. These instruments measure relative humidity 

from 0% to 100% RH. They are easily installed and 

meet the European CE standards. 

Five-minute field calibration is possible using the 

Model HMK 41K Humidity Calibrator. When accuracy 

adjustment or sensor replacement is necessary, the 

transmitter can be calibrated in seconds with a single 

potentiometer without disturbing operation. This saves 

hours of maintenance time and assures high accuracy. 

FEATURES 

• Comes with NIST certificate 

• Full 0% to 100% RH measurement 

• State-of-the-art replaceable sensor technology 

• ±2% RH accuracy 

• Electronic, on-site one-point calibration 

• Two-wire, 4-20 mA output (HMW 60) 

• Voltage output (HMW 70) 

• Easy installation with wall mounting 


• Optional built-in temperature transmitter 

• OSA mounting brackets available 


HM_ 60, HM_ 70 

Input voltage (60) 10-35 VDC (signal dependent) 

Input voltage (70) 14-24 VAC/VDC 

Output signal 

HM_ 60 4-20 mA, 700� @ 24 VDC 

HM_ 70 0-1, 0-5, 0-10V, 3000� min 

Electrical connections Screw terminals (20-16 AWG) 

Wall-mounted box ABS plastic 

Duct housing Cast aluminum NEMA 4 (IP55) 


Transmitter temp range 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C) 

Ambient tip temp range 4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C) 

Accuracy @ 68°F (20°C) ±2% RH (0% to 90% RH) 

±3% RH (90% to 100% RH) 

RH sensor Capacitive and replaceable 

Humicap ® 180 

Weight 

Room 0.32 lb (0.14 kg) 

Duct 1.68 lb (0.76 kg) 

Certification CE, NIST certificate 

HMD 60 

or 

HMD 70 

HMW 60 

or 

HMW 70 

HMK 41 

Operation Handheld, onsite calibrator 


Measuring range 0% to 100% RH, -40° to 140°F 

(-22° to 78°C) 

Reference probe 

accuracy ±1% RH (0% to 90% RH) 

±2% RH (90% to 100% RH) 


Temp coefficient +0.04% RH/°C typical 

Battery Four AA (LR6)(not included) 

RH sensor Capacitive and replaceable 


Certification CE, NIST certificate 

97 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

98 

HUMIDITY 

2% WALL- AND DUCT-MOUNT RELATIVE HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS 

HM_ 60, HM_ 70 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.3 

(3.30) 

WIRING 

Y Option 

4-20 mA 

Temp Signal 

4-20 mA 

RH Signal 

RH 

gain 

4.33 

(11.00) 

3.35 

(8.51) 

3.94 (10.01) 

3.23 (8.20) 

2.44 (6.20) 9.85 (25.01) 

3.23 3.94 

(8.20) (10.01) 

HMW 60/HMW 70 HMD 60/70 Duct RH WMK-20 Outside Air Bracket 

T 

gain 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

Wall Current Output 

RH 

offset 

T 

offset 

HMD 60U or HMD 60Y 

Power 

Supply 

Duct Current Output 

+RH -RH 

(dry) 

RH 

offset 

-T 

+T 

-RH 

+RH 

(wet) 

RH 

gain 

RH est 

X3 

UP 

HMW 60U or HMW 60Y 

T 

Test 

1 2 3 4 5 

+T -T 

Y Option 

4-20 mA 

Temp Signal 

4-20 mA 

RH Signal 



HMW 60U Wall mount, 4-20 mA output 

HMW 70U Wall mount, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs 

HMW 60Y Wall mount, humidity with 4-20 mA output, temperature with 4-20 mA output 

HMW 70Y Wall mount, humidity, and temperature, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs 

HMD 60U Duct RH transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HMD 70U Duct RH transmitter 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output 

HMD 60Y Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA output 

HMD 70Y Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output 

0.47 

(1.19) 

Y Option 

Voltage 

Temp Signal 

Voltage 

RH Signal 

T 

RH 

0-10V 

RH 

gain 

T 

gain 

Ouput Jumper 

T 

RH 

0-5V 


Side View 

2.50 

(6.35) 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

+ - 

T 

RH 

0-1V 

Wall Voltage Output 

RH 

offset 

T 

offset 

HMD 70U or HMD 70Y 

Output Selections 

0-1V 

T 

RH 

Power 

Supply 

0-5V T 

RH 

0-10V 

T 

RH Duct Voltage Output 

End View 

into Sensor 

3.50 (8.89) 

Sun/Rain Shield 

10.0 (25.40) 

(dry) 

RH 

offset 

Outside Wall 

Northern Exposure 

GND 

T out 

RH out 

Us 

(wet) 

RH 

gain 

4.50 

(11.43) 

T gain 

1.75 

(4.45) 

UP 

T offset 

HMW 70U or HMW 70Y 

Us RH 

out 

1 2 3 4 5 


HMK 41K 1% electronic calibrator with calibration cable 

16663HM Replaceable humidity sensor (replaces 0062HM) 

19165ZZ Calibration cable for use with HMK41K for old HM_-(20/30U) transmitters 

WMK-20 OSA/Wall-mount bracket 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

T 

out GND 

Y Option 

Voltage 

Temp Signal 

Voltage 

RH Signal

HUMIDITY 

2% HUMIDITY AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS HT2S, HT2O, HT2D 

DESCRIPTION 

Model HT relative humidity transmitters are full-range, 

high-accuracy building automation transmitters. Model 

HT covers 0% to 100% RH over a wide temperature. The 

standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost 

space, duct, and outdoor monitoring for building control. 

OPERATION 


mA signal. The HT transmitters have a microprocessor 

that performs the temperature compensation calculations 

from an onboard RTD. The microprocessor maintains 

both high accuracy and low cost with a wide humidity 

and operational temperature span. 

An added optional temperature output is available in the 

same enclosure. It comes with a 4-20 mA signal and a 

large selection of temperature ranges. 

The housing for the duct and OSA mount configurations 

are suitable for outdoor use. The aluminum cast box is 

gasketed to maintain a rain-tight environment for the 

transmitter. 


Humidity Transmitter 

Humidity output Two-wire, 4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH 

Calibration Factory calibrated with no 

field setting required 

Sensing element Hy-Cal capacitive monolithic IC 

Accuracy ±2% from 5% to 90% RH 

Transmitter ambient 

Room -10° to 150°F (-23° to 65°C) 


Time constant 50 sec in slow moving air 

Power requirement 9.4-35 VDC (24V nominal) 

Max load impedance (Power supply – 9.4V) / 0.02 = load 

i.e., (24V – 9.4V) / 0.02 = 730� 

Terminations Non polar terminals 

(22-14 AWG wire) 

Weight 

Duct and OSA 1.2 lb (0.55 kg) 

Room .2 lb (0.1 kg) 

FEATURES 

HT2D 

HT2O 

Temperature Transmitter Option 

HT2S 

• Honeywell Hy-Cal sensors 

• 100% replacement for discontinued Hy-Cal 

transmitters 

• Advanced wall-mount design 

• Weatherproof housing for duct and OSA use 

• Dual output option (humidity and temperature) 

Output 4-20 mA over calibrated range 

Transmitter range Factory preset ranges 

EN range -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 

S range 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) 

A range 20° to 120°F (-7° to 49°C) 

BI range 30° to 130°F (-1° to 54°C) 

KK range 30° to 180°F (-1° to 82°C) 

N range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

H range 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C) 

(other ranges available) 

Sensor Platinum 1000� RTD 385 curve 


Power requirement 9.4-35 VDC (24V Nominal) 

Load impedance (Power supply 9.4V) / 0.02 = load 

i.e., (24V – 9.4V) / 0.02 = 730� 

Terminations Non polar terminals 

(22-14 AWG wire) 

99 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

100 

HUMIDITY 

2% HUMIDITY AND OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS HT2S, HT2O, HT2D 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.75 

(6.98) 

1.58 

(4.01) 

WIRING 

Housing Bottom View 

Housing Top View 

HT2S 

4.50 

(11.43) 

4-20 mA 

Humidity 

Signal 

2.88 

(7.30) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

4.63 

(11.75) 

4-20 mA 

Optional 

Temperature 

Signal** 

HT2O 

Hum* 

Hum 

Temp* 

Temp 

Foam Gasket 

HT2S 

4.0 

(10.16) 


1.25 

(3.18) 

* Non-polar connection 

** Needs humidity connection 

to output temperature 

signal properly 


* HT2 2% Relative humidity transmitter 

* D Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe 

* O Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield 

* S Space room/office mounting 

W Wall mount, weather resistant box, 4" probe 

1 4-20 mA DC output 

* NT No temperature transmitter 

* EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C) 

* S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) 





* H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C) 

SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -20°/185°F 

HT2 D 1 NT 

* Normally-stocked Items 

Example: HT2D1NT 2% RH Duct Transmitter with 8" probe, 

no temperature output 

2.25 

(5.72) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

8.0 

(20.32) 

HT2D 

2.75 

(6.99) 

0.38 

(0.953)

HUMIDITY 

1% & 2% RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

MODEL HT829, HT839 

DESCRIPTION 

Advanced technology provides the Model HT829 

Relative Humidity Transmitter with unmatched accuracy 

specifications. The Model HT829 measures 0% to 

100% RH over a range of -10° to 185°F (-23° to 85°C). 

The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost 

space, duct, and outdoor monitoring for process and 

industrial building control. A temperature sensor built into 

the integrated circuit provides temperature compensation 

over the full temperature range. 

The HT839 Transmitter is designed with all the attributes 

of the HT829 Humidity Transmitter and High-Accuracy 

Temperature Transmitter. Both the HT829 and HT839 

are field-rangeable for field recalibration. 

FEATURES 

• HT829 RH only, 4-20mA 

• HT839 RH and temperature, 4-20mA 

• Temperature-compensated IC sensor 

• One-point field calibration, RH or temperature 

• Advanced wall-mount design 

• Weatherproof housing for OSA and duct 


HT829 – RH only 

Transmitter output Two-wire, 4-20 mA over 

0% to 100% RH 

Calibration One-point adjustment 

Sensing element Hy-Cal Capacitive Monolithic IC 

Accuracy @ 25°C 

HT829 (Standard) ±2% from 0% to 90% RH 

HT829 (N1) ±1% from 10% to 80% RH 

Time constant 50 sec in slow-moving air 

Washable sensor Wash with water and a stiff nylon 

brush 

Zero and span adjust Noninteracting, adjust zero only for 

field calibration 

Power requirement 9.4 VDC min to 35 VDC max 

Termination Terminals 

(22-14 Awg wire) Nonpolar, connect either way 


150°F (66°C) max for room 


(Power supply - 9.4) / 0.02 A = � 

Weight 

Room .19 lb (0.084 kg) 

Duct/OSA 1.2 lb (0.55 kg) 

Room 

Housing 

(S) 

Duct 

Housing 

(D) 

OSA / Wall 

Housing 

(O) 

• Honeywell Hy-Cal sensors 

• Rangeable temperature output (HT839) 

• Wall/Duct/OSA mount 

• 1% RH accuracy with NIST certificate 

• 2% RH accuracy standard 

• Sintered filter 

HT839 – RH & Temperature 

Transmitter output Two-wire, nonpolar, 4-20 mA 

(per specified range) 

Calibration One-point adjustment 

Rangeability limits (non-interconnecting) 

Zero -20° to 60°F (-28° to 15°C) 

Span 50° to 160°F (10° to 71°C) 

Accuracy @ 25°C ±0.5°F (0.27°C) or ±.8% of span 

Operating temp 

Room -10° to 150°F (-23° to 65°C) 


Power requirement 9.4 VDC min to 35 VDC max 


(Power supply - 9.4) / 0.02 A = � 

Weight 

Room .19 lb (0.084 kg) 

Duct/OSA 1.2 lb (0.55 kg) 

Enclosure 

Room Plastic/aluminum 

Duct/OSA Weather-resistant aluminum 

Filter 60 micron sintered stainless steel 

101 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

102 

HUMIDITY 

1% & 2% RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 

MODEL HT829, HT839 

DIMENSIONS 

1.58 

(4.01) 

Housing 

Top View 

4.50 

(11.43) 

2.75 

(6.98) 

Housing 

Bottom View 

HT829S and HT839S 

WIRING – HT829, RH ONLY 

RH 

4-20mA 

Signal 

+ 

– 

Z S 

Hum* 

Hum 

in 

(cm) 

1.25 

(3.18) 

24VDC 

+ - 

*Non-polar connections 

HT839 D 1 S2 A 

4.63 

(11.75) 

Foam Gasket 

4.0 

(10.16) 

Note: mount in a shaded area 

HT829O and HT839O 


2.25 (5.72) 

2.88 

(7.30) 

1/2" FNPT 

Example: HT839D1S2A 2% RH & T Duct Transmitter with 8" probe, 

temperature ranged for 20°/120°F 

2.25 

(5.72) 

1/2" FNPT 

* 


HT829 Relative humidity transmitter only 

* HT839 Relative humidity transmitter and temperature transmitter 

* D Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe 

* O Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield 

* S Space room/office mounting 

W Wall mount, weather resistant box, 4" probe 


* N1 1% RH from 10/80% @ 25°C, temperature matched at 0°C with NIST certificate 

N2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25°C, temperature matched at 0°C with NIST certificate 

* S2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25°C, no calibration data 

* EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C) (HT839 only) 

* S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) (HT839 only) 

A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20°/120°F) or (-7°/49°C) (HT839 only) 

BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30°/130°F) or (-1°/54°C) (HT839 only) 

N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32°/122°F) or (0°/50°C) (HT839 only) 

* H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40°/90°F) or (4°/32°C) (HT839 only) 

-- Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog (HT839 only) 

SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -20°/120°F (HT839 only) 

* Normally-stocked items 

RH Signal 

4-20mA 

**Temp Signal 

4-20mA 

4.5 

(11.43) 

Sintered filter 

8.0 

(20.32) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

HT829D and HT839D 

WIRING – HT839, RH AND TEMPERATURE 

– 

+ 

– 

+ 

24VDC 

+ - 

H T 

Z S Z S 

Hum* 

Hum 

Temp* 

Temp 

0.38 

(0.95) 

* Non-polar connections 

** Need humidity connection 

to output temperature 

signal properly

HUMIDITY 

DEW POINT, ENTHALPY, AND WET BULB TRANSMITTERS 

DP3A, EN3A, AND WB3A SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Models DP3 Dew Point, WB3 Wet Bulb, and EN3 Enthalpy 

Transmitters are rugged, compact, and ideally suited for monitoring 

dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy in building automation and process 

applications. Using a capacitive RH sensor and an RTD temperature 

sensor, the unit’s microprocessor computes the dew point, wet bulb, or 

enthalpy. Two linear outputs provide a 4-20 mA signal for dew point, wet 

bulb, or enthalpy and a 4-20 mA signal for dry bulb temperature. 

FEATURES 

• Dew point accuracy of ±1.8°F (±1°C) over the normal range 

• Enthalpy accuracy of ±2 BTU/lb over normal range 

• Wet bulb accuracy of ±3°F over the normal range 

• Two 4-20 mA output signals 

• Microprocessor-based signal processing 

• Weather resistant duct/OSA mounting 

• One-point RH calibration with EASYCAL 



Duct/OSA range 

Dew point -20° to 120°F (-28.8° to 49°C) 

Enthalpy 0-50 BTU/lb 

Wet bulb 0° to 100°F (-17.8° to 37.8°C) 

Dry bulb -20° to 120°F (-28.8° to 49°C) 

Room range 

Dew point 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

Enthalpy 0-50 BTU/lb 

Wet bulb 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

Dry bulb 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

Dual signals 4-20 mA (700� max load) 

Humidity and dry bulb temp 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.9 

(12.45) 

3.1 (7.87) 

Room 

Cover Base 

1.0 

(2.54) 

3.3 (8.38) 

Mounting 

Holes on 

Center Line 

Wiring 

Access 

1/2" (1.27) 

Conduit 

Knockout 

(2 places) 

EASYCAL 

DP3A-S 

EN3A-S 

WB3A-S 

DP3A-D 

EN3A-D 

WB3A-D 

APPLICATIONS 

• WB3 evaporative cooling decision potential 

• DP3 supply air setpoint (condensation prevention) 

• EN3 economizer efficiency 


Dimensions 

Room 4.9"H x 3.1"W x 1"D 

(12.4 x 7.9 x 2.5 cm) 

Duct/OSA 4.5"H x 4"W x 2.1"D 

(11.4 x 10.2 x 5.3 cm) 

Duct probe 9.0"L (22.86 cm) 

0.50"D (1.27 cm) 

OSA probe/shield 1.70"L (4.3 cm) 

1.25"D (3.17 cm) 


Sensor Capacitive (G-CAP ® ) 

4.5 (11.43) 

3.5 (8.89) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

Outside Air 

3.5 4.0 

(8.89) (10.16) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

2.95 

(7.49) 

2.1 

(5.33) 

Cover Base 

Terminal 

Block 

3.5 

(8.89) 1.0 

(2.54) 

4.5 (11.43) 

2.25 (5.72) 

3.5 (8.89) Base 

Duct 

DP3A-O 

EN3A-O 

WB3A-O 

1/2" (1.27) 

Conduit 

Knockout 

Probe 

6.0 (15.2) 

Insertion 

1/2" (1.27) 

Conduit 

Knockout 

(3 places) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

4.0 (10.16) 

103 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

104 

HUMIDITY 

DEW POINT, ENTHALPY, AND WET BULB TRANSMITTERS 

DP3A, EN3A, AND WB3A SERIES 

CALIBRATION 

To calibrate the RH sensor in the DP3A, EN3A, and WB3A : 

1. Insert the calibration tool connector into the RJ11 jack on 

the transmitter board. 

2. Insert the probe into the air stream that the transmitter is 

monitoring. 

3. Adjust the arrow buttons on the side of the tool until the 

two displays match. 

4. Remove the jack and probe. 

Note: There is no need to remove the cover on 

duct or room models. OSA sensors have 

a protected internal jack. 

WIRING 

Typical 

Transmitter 

Terminal 

Block 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

Power Supply 

DP3A-S Transmitter 

GENERAL EASTERN 

Note: Humidity signal must be wired (4, 5). 


DUT 

(Device Under Test) 


DP3A-S Room dew point and dry bulb transmitter 

DP3A-D Duct dew point and dry bulb transmitter 

DP3A-O OSA/Wall dew point and dry bulb transmitter 

EN3A-S Room enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter 

EN3A-D Duct enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter 

EN3A-O OSA enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter 

WB3A-S Room wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter 

WB3A-D Duct wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter 

WB3A-O OSA wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter 

EASYCAL 2% calibrator with NIST certificate 

INC 

DEC 

Humidity (DP, EN, WB) 

4-20 mA 

Dry Bulb 

Temperature 

% RH 

DUT 52.2 

REF 50.0 

EASYCAL

HUMIDITY 

VAPORSTAT INFRARED DEW POINT AND GRAINS TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 9002 

DESCRIPTION 

The VaporStat Model 9002 is a digital display and 

absolute humidity transmitter that measures grains of 

moisture per pound of dry air in an infrared chamber. The 

moisture level is then calculated as dew point and transmitted 

simultaneously as 0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA. A display 

and keyboard are incorporated for local indication 

and parameter adjustment. A contact closure is also 

incorporated with keyboard entries for set point and differential. 

The Model 9002 is wall mounted and available with 

accessories for duct and OSA applications. 

APPLICATION 

The Model 9002 sampling chamber measures the 

infrared light absorbed by the moisture in the air and 

processes it as dew point or grains of moisture per pound 

of dry air. The 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output ranges are 

selected at the keyboard and displayed on the LCD readout. 

A control contact energizes at the set point entered 

on the keyboard. The Model 9002 is ideally suited for 

local alarm and signaling for clean room controls, desiccant 

system controls, paper mill controls, and textile 

process controls, as well as condensation prevention. 


Power 24 VAC, ±25%, 2.75 VA 

Accuracy DP = ±1.8°F (1.0°C) 

plus 1% of reading 

±5 grains per lb @ 68°F dry air 

Sensing method Nondispersive infrared 

(dual channel) 

Altitude Corrected to 5,000' (1524m) 


Ambient RH 0% to 98% 

Sensor life 15 years 

Calibration In field with nitrogen gas 

9002 

FEATURES 

9002 and 

1508 Enclosure 

• Dew point accuracy ±1.8°F (±1°C) 

• Grains of moisture measured directly 

• 0-10V and 4-20 mA output 

• Digital display or blank cover 

• ±5 grains accuracy 

• ±1.8°F of (1.0°C) dew point accuracy 

• Patented infrared absorption platform 

• Gold-plated element for durability 

• Built-in keyboard for range adjust 

• Elevation correction via keyboard 

• Tamper-resistant keyboard cover 

• 10-minute field calibration with gas 

• NIST field calibration gas 

Output 0-10V @ 1000� min 

(simultaneous) 4-20 mA @ 500� max 

Output range adjust Within 0° to 100°F (-17 to 37°C), 

0-350 grains/lb of dry air 

Control SPDT, 2A @ 24 VAC 

Set point Adjustable, full range 

Differential Adjustable, full range 

Display Two line, 1/2" (1.27 cm) LCD 

Keyboard Four-key menu control 

105 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

106 

HUMIDITY 

VAPORSTAT INFRARED DEW POINT AND GRAINS TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 9002 

DIMENSIONS MOUNTING 

in 

(cm) 

SETUP 

5.63 

(14.30) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

FACTORY OUTPUT SETTINGS 

1.37 

(3.48) 

WIRING CONTROLS 

N L1 

24 VAC 

+ 

Input 

AC 

NC 

COM 


Use either or both 

outputs below 

0-10V Out 

Signal Common 

4-20 mA Out 

2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

Dew point, 0° to 80°F (-22° to 25°C) @ sea level 

Moisture = 0-140 grains per lb of dry air @ sea level 

Relay on @ 50°F (10°C), off @ 59°F (15°C) 

NO 

CHANGING SETTINGS 


clear set enter 

1. Press mode + clear at the same time for five sec to 

enter the adjust mode. 

2. Press mode key to display item to change: 

elevation, dew point, grains, relay. 

3. Use arrow keys to select ranges. 

4. Press enter to confirm selection. 

5. Press clear to finish and return to normal display. 


9002 Dew point and grains 0-10 VDC/4-20 mA transmitter and contact 


1508 Duct-mount accessory enclosure 1551 OSA-mount accessory enclosure 

UCK-1 Universal calibration kit GAS-N2-N Zero moisture calibration gas 

(order gas separately) 

2090 Graphing software with cable RJ45, nine-pin serial 

Clear 

Button 

Mode 

Button 

Arrow 

Button 

Enter 

Button 

Tamper Set Screw

HUMIDITY 

WATERPROOF / WASHDOWN HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER 

MODEL EHRH 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model EHRH is a humidity transmitter specifically 

made for washdown areas and condensing atmospheres. 

The Model EHRH measures relative humidity 

with a 2% resistive sensor. It is made to be surface 

mounted to a single-gang outlet box or mounted directly 

to the wall, and it has a rugged stainless steel cover. The 

Model EHRH is furnished with a waterproof case, connector, 

and stainless steel cover for termination inside 

the wall. 

FEATURES 

• Washdown waterproof design 

• 4-20 mA output 

• Easy one-point field calibration 

• Rugged metal cover 

• Type 3 thermistor 


Relative humidity 0% to 100% 

Sensor RH Bulk polymer resistive 

Accuracy RH 2% (30% to 95%) 


Zero adjust ±20% 

Power 24 VDC ±20% 

Output 4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

5.37 

(13.64) 

2.75 

(6.98) 

1.25 

(3.17) 

3.30 

(8.25) 

1.12 

(2.86) 

Shown with customersupplied 

back box 

2.75 

(6.98) 

Front view Side View Top View 

APPLICATION 

• Swimming pools 

• Gymnasium 

• Green houses 

• Hospital suites 

• Food processing 



EHRH Waterproof/Washdown 2% RH Transmitter 

Operating range -4° to 129°F (-20° to 54°C) 

Enclosure Epoxy-hardened waterproof case 

Cover Stainless steel 

Connections Flying leads 



Thermistor Type 3, 10 k� @ 77°F (25°C) 

WIRING 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Type 3 

Thermistor 

Power Supply 

(red/white) 

(green/yellow) 

(white/brown) 

(white/brown) 

O FFSET 

G AIN 

Z S 

107 

HUMIDITY

HUMIDITY 

108 

HUMIDITY 

OUTDOOR ASPIRATED HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE HOUSING 

MODEL A21 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model A21 Outdoor Aspirated Humidity/ 

Temperature Housing provides powered aspiration for 

outdoor monitoring of humidity and temperature. The 

NEMA 3R enclosure is painted white to reduce the effect 

of radiation, and the enclosure has a lockable latch for 

security. 

OPERATION 

The fan pulls air in from the lower vent intake and 

exhausts the air out the upper opposing vent of the enclosure. 

The 24 VDC power is supplied for both the fan and 

transmitters. The transmitter power is internally filtered 

from any fan motor noise that might affect the transmitter 

signal. 


Supply voltage 24 VDC @ 110 mA 

(add power requirements for the 

humidity/temperature transmitters) 

Impedance 47� added to the 4-20 mA transmitter 

Weight 6 lb (2.72 kg) 

Air filter Washable pocket foam filter 

WIRING 

A 

Do not use 

or terminate 

Dry Bulb Temperature 

B C D E F 

+ – + 

+ – 

Installed 

Transmitter 

A21 

To Controller 

Input 

- 

+ 

24VDC 

Power 

Supply 

Not used 

- 

+ 

* 

4-20 mA to 

Controller Input 

* Temperature 

sensors are directly 

wired to the controller. 

They do not wire to 

the terminal strip. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

Left Side 

Air Intake 

0.5" and 0.75" 

knockouts on 

centerline and 

height shown 



A21 Outdoor aspirated humidity/temperature housing 


(see Related Products below for 

added temperature requirements) 

Enclosure NEMA 3R with white enamel paint 

and latch for padlock 

Hinge Piano-type, left-hand side 

10.0 

(25.40) 

Front View 

7.0 (17.78) 

6.32 (16.05) 

Bottom View 

Air Exhaust 

Right Side 


HW30K 3% Wall-mount humidity sensor ST-R�R Precon thermistor 

HW20K 2% Wall-mount humidity sensor ST-R81 100� Platinum 385 

HW1K 1% Wall-mount humidity sensor ST-R91 1000� Platinum 375 

PN46 Mounting clip for temperature sensor ST-R85 1000� Platinum 385 

4TK2-48 Snap track for the HW30K and HW20K A21-FAN Replacement fan assembly 

1.64 

(4.15) 

0.20 

(0.50) 

3.0 (7.62) 

3.0 

(7.62) 

9.0 

(22.86) 

4.7 

(12.06) 

1.75 

(4.44) 

Terminal Strip 

(projected 

forward 

3.5 (8.89) for 

easy wiring) 

5.25 

(13.34) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

0.37 

(0.95) 

5.0 

(12.7) 

A B C DEF 

3.65 

(9.27) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

Fan 

Lower Back Plate* 

4.25"W x 4.25"H x 3"D 

Conduit Entry 

1/2" & 3/4" Knockouts 

*Estimated usable dimensions 

Mounting Interior 

1.0 

(2.54) 

1.0 (2.54) 

6.5 

(16.51) 

0.5 (1.27)

POWER MONITORING

PRODUCTS 

See the NEW RIBXK 

Current-Operated 

Switch & Transducer 

on page 120! 



CURRENT OPERATED SWITCHES 

CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, SCS1150A — Current-Operated Switches . . . . . .115 

RIBX Series — Current-Operated Switch & Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 

RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 Series — Current-Operated Switches 

and Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 

CURRENT, VOLTAGE, & POWER MONITORING TRANSDUCERS 

201A — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 

250A — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 

258 Series — Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 

269 Series — Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 

355 Series — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 

460 Series — MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 

4CMA — Current Transducer - Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 

4CTV — Current Transducer - Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 

MPA-2 — Meter Pulse-to-Analog Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 

PT-9000 — PowerTrak Power Monitoring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 

PT-NT4-M — Modbus Communication Module for PT-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 

PT-NT4-N2 — Metasys Communication Module for PT-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 

PT-NTL-10 — LonWorks Communication Module for PT-9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 

PVM , LVM — Three-Phase Voltage Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 

RIBX-V Series — Current Transducers & Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 

RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 Series —Current-Operated Switches 

and Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 

Sentry 100 Series — Current Transducers - Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 

Sentry 200 Series — Current Transducers - Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 

Sentry 200-A Series — High Current Transducer - Current Output . . . . . . . . . .127 

U3889 / 209PF — Voltage Disconnect / CT Shorting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 

POTENTIAL & CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 

189 — Isolation Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

190XSUM — Summing Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

3PT3 — 5 KV Potential Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

468 — Potential Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

500T, 501T — Split-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 

600T, 601T— Split-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 

603, 603D — Split-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 

AL, RL — Solid-Core Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 

CTW3 — 5 KV Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 

SCT Series — Current Transformers - Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 



SOLID-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 

MODELS AL, RL 

DESCRIPTION 

Models AL and RL Solid-Core Current Transformers 

provide a low-amperage current output proportional to 

line current and are for use in building automation and 

metering applications. These low-cost current transformers 

are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors, such 

as the Model PT-9500, and current transducers, such as 

Models 4CTV and 4CMA. 

FEATURES 

• 5A secondary 

• Flexible leads are UL 1015 105°C, CSA approved, 

#16 AWG, 24"L (61 cm) 

• UL recognized component, CSA certified 

CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed by 

a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended 

that the incoming power be de-energized before installation. 

The current transformer must have its secondary terminals 

short-circuited or the burden (load) connected before energizing 

the primary circuit. For indoor use only. Use on insulated 

conductor only. 

CURRENT 

RATIO 

CODE 

500 

750 

101 

151 

201 

251 

301 

401 

501 

601 

751 

801 

102 

122 

152 

162 

202 

252 

302 

402 

CURRENT 

RATIO 

MODEL 2AL 

Outer dia 2.74" (6.9 cm) 

Window dia 1.05" (2.67 cm) 

MODEL 5RL 

Outer dia 3.56'' (9.0 cm) 

Window dia 1.56'' (3.9 cm) 



Secondary 0-5A 

Insulation class 600V, 10 kV BIL 

Frequency 50-400 Hz 

Casing Plastic, UL94V1 

Wire Leads 24" (61 cm), 16 AWG 

Weight 

2AL 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 

5RL 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 

7RL 1.5 lb (0.63 kg) 

8RL 2.5 lb (1.2 kg) 

Approvals UL-recognized component, 

File #E93779; CSA certified, 

File #LR89403 

MODELS 

MODEL 7RL 

Outer dia 4.58" (11.6 cm) 

Window dia 2.50" (6.4 cm) 

MODEL 8RL 

Outer dia 5.73'' (14.6 cm) 

Window dia 3.25'' (8.3 cm) 

Accuracy % VA Accuracy % VA Accuracy % VA Accuracy % VA 

50:5 

±3 

2.0 

±2 1.0 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

75:5 

±2 

2.0 

±2 1.5 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

100:5 

±1 

2.0 

±2 2.0 

±2 

2.5 

-- 

-- 

150:5 

±1 

4.0 

±1 5.0 

±1 

5.0 

-- 

-- 

200:5 

±1 

4.0 

±1 5.0 

±1 

5.0 

±1 5.0 

250:5 ±1 

6.0 

±1 10.0 

±1 

5.0 

±1 7.5 

300:5 

±1 

8.0 

±1 12.5 

±1 12.5 

±1 15.0 

400:5 

-- 

-- 

±1 12.5 

±1 15.0 

±1 25.0 

500:5 

-- 

-- 

±1 20.0 

±1 25.0 

±1 35.0 

600:5 

-- 

-- 

±1 25.0 

±1 30.0 

±1 50.0 

750:5 

-- 

-- 

±1 25.0 

±1 30.0 

±1 50.0 

800:5 

-- 

-- 

±1 25.0 

±1 35.0 

±1 60.0 

1000:5 -- 

-- 

±1 25.0 

±1 35.0 

±1 75.0 

1200:5 -- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 35.0 

±1 75.0 

1500:5 -- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 40.0 

±1 90.0 

1600:5 -- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 45.0 

±1 100.0 

2000:5 -- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 120.0 

2500:5 -- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 50.0 

3000:5 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 60.0 

4000:5 -- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

±1 80.0 

5RL 201 Example: 5RL201 Model RL current transformer with 

Model Current 

1.56" (3.9 cm) window diameter and a 200:5 

Ratio Code 

current ratio 

Important! Shaded items in Ordering Information are available by special order and are not returnable for credit. 

RL 

AL 

109 

POWER MONITORING



SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 

MODELS 603, 603D 

DESCRIPTION 

Models 603 and 603D Split-Core Current 

Transformers provide a low-amperage current output 

proportional to line current. They are for use in building 

automation and metering applications. These low-cost 

transformers are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors 

like the Model PT-9100 and current transducers like 

Models 4CTV and 4CMA. 

These transformers are designed for assembly to an 

existing electrical installation without the need for dismantling 

the primary bus or cables. The transformers 

can also be disassembled and then reassembled 

around the conductors that require current monitoring. 

FEATURES 


• Split-core construction for easy installation 

• Flexible leads, UL 1015 105°C, CSA approved, 

#22 AWG, 24"L (61 cm) 

CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed 

by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended 

that the incoming power be de-energized 

before installation. The current transformer must have 

its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden 

(load) connected before energizing the primary circuit. 

For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductor only. 






Wire leads 24" (61 cm), 22 AWG 

Approx weight 

603 10 oz (0.28 kg) 

603D 12 oz (0.34 kg) 



File #LR89403 

110 

603 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.66 

(1.68) 

1.04 

(2.64) 

2.08 

(5.28) 



603 Split-core CT, 1" x 2" (2.5 x 5.1 cm) window, 1A secondary 

603D Split-core CT, 2" x 2" (5.1 x 5.1 cm) window, 1A secondary 

CURRENT RATIO 

101-1 100:1 

201-1 200:1 

301-1 300:1 

401-1 400:1 (Model 603D only) 

501-1 500:1 (Model 603D only) 

601-1 600:1 (Model 603D only) 

4.56 

(11.58) 

1.98 

(5.03) 

4.56 

(11.58) 

1.98 

(5.03) 

603 

603D 

603 101-1 Example: 603-101-1 Split-core current transformer with a 

current ratio of 100:1 and a window size of 1" x 2" 

2.31 

(5.87) 

0.85 

(2.16) 

3.40 

(8.64) 

0.85 

(2.16) 

X1 

X2 H1 

H2 

0.42 

(1.07) 

603D 

X1 

X2 H1 

H2 

0.42 

(1.07) 

4.05 

(10.29) 

4.05 

(10.29)

DESCRIPTION 

Models 600T and 601T Split-Core Current 

Transformers provide a low-amperage current output 

proportional to line current. They are for use in energy 

management control and metering applications and are 

ideal as inputs to power monitors like the Model PT- 

9500 and current transducers like Models 4CTV and 

4CMA. 

These transformers are designed to be assembled 

around an existing insulated conductor without the need 

for dismantling the primary bus or cables. The portion of 

the transformers marked “This End Removable” can be 

disassembled as shown and then reassembled around 

conductors that require current monitoring. 

FEATURES 

MODEL 600T - 2.0" x 5.5" (5.1 x 14 cm) Window 

MODEL CURRENT 

RATIO 

600T-401 

600T-501 

600T-601 

600T-801 

600T-102 

600T-122 

600T-152 

600T-162 

400:5 

500:5 

600:5 

800:5 

1000:5 

1200:5 

1500:5 

1600:5 

2000:5 

600T-202 

MULTI RATIO 

600T-122-801 



MODELS 600T, 601T 



• Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one flat washer, 

lockwasher, and regular nut 





Continuous thermal 1.33 @ 30°C (86°F) ambient 

current rating factor 1.0 @ 55°C (131°F) ambient 

Approx weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg) 

Window sizes 

600T 2.0" x 5.5" (5.08 x 13.97 cm) 

601T 4.5" x 4.5" (11.43 x 11.43 cm) 


Termination Brass stud terminals with nut, flat 

washer, lockwasher 


File #E93779; 

CSA certified, File #LR89403 

ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz 

B0.1 

2.5 VA 

2.4 

2.4 

2.4 

1.2 

1.2 

0.6 

0.6 

0.6 

0.6 

B0.2 

5 VA 

4.8 

4.8 

2.4 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

0.6 

0.6 

0.6 

CURRENT RATIO 

1200/800:5 

B0.5 

12.5 VA 

-- 

-- 

-- 

2.4 

2.4 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

0.6 

ACCURACY CLASS 

WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR 

± 1% @ 1.5 VA 

± 1% @ 2.0 VA 

± 1% @ 2.5 VA 

± 1% @ 5.0 VA 

± 1% @ 7.5 VA 

± 1% @ 15.0 VA 

± 1% @ 20.0 VA 

± 1% @ 20.0 VA 

± 1% @ 30.0 VA 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

A 

B 

MODEL 601T - 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 x 11.4 cm) Window 

MODEL CURRENT 

RATIO 

601T-301 

601T-401 

601T-501 

601T-601 

601T-801 

601T-102 

601T-122 

601T-152 

601T-162 

601T-202 

H1 









300:5 

400:5 

500:5 

600:5 

800:5 

1000:5 

1200:5 

1500:5 

1600:5 

2000:5 

MULTI RATIO 

601T-122-MR 

601T-122-1-MR 

D 

This End 

Removable 

X1 

C 

LABEL 

Two Mounting Holes 

0.19 (0.48) dia 

B0.1 

2.5 VA 

-- 

4.8 

4.8 

2.4 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

0.6 

601T 

(shown with end removed) 

B0.2 

5 VA 

-- 

-- 

4.8 

4.8 

2.4 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

0.6 

B0.5 

12.5 VA 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

4.8 

4.8 

2.4 

1.2 

1.2 

1.2 

CURRENT RATIO 

1200/800/400:5 

1200/800/400:1 

1.13 

(2.87) 

A 

B 

C 

D 

DIMENSIONS 

MODEL 

600 

7.75 (19.69) 

5.50 (13.97) 

2.00 (5.08) 

4.25 (10.80) 

0.44 

(1.12) 

ACCURACY CLASS 

WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR 

± 1% @ 0.5 VA 

± 1% @ 1.0 VA 

± 1% @ 1.5 VA 

± 1% @ 2.0 VA 

± 1% @ 2.5 VA 

± 1% @ 5.0 VA 

± 1% @ 10.0 VA 

± 1% @ 15.0 VA 

± 1% @ 15.0 VA 

± 1% @ 20.0 VA 

Example: 601T-102 Split-core current transformer with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window size of 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 X 11.4 cm) 

601 

6.75 (17.15) 

4.50 (11.43) 

4.50 (11.43) 

6.75 (17.15) 

111 

POWER MONITORING




MODELS 500T, 501T 

DESCRIPTION 

Models 500T and 501T Split-Core Current Transformers 

provide a low-amperage current output proportional to line current 

and are for use in energy management control and metering 

applications. These transformers are ideal for use as 

inputs to power monitors, such as the Model PT-9500, and 

current transducers, such as Models 4CTV and 4CMA. 

These transformers are designed to be assembled around an 

existing insulated conductor without the need for dismantling 

the primary bus or cables. The portion of the transformers 

marked “This End Removable” can be disassembled as shown 

and then reassembled around the conductors that require current 

monitoring. 

FEATURES 



• Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one flat washer, 

lockwasher, and regular nut 













Window sizes 

500T 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm) 

501T 4.1" x 11.7" (10.4 x 29.7 cm) 




ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz ACCURACY CLASS 

ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz ACCURACY CLASS 

MODEL CURRENT B0.1 B0.2 B0.5 WITH UNITY MODEL CURRENT B0.1 B0.2 B0.5 WITH UNITY 

RATIO 2.5 VA 5 VA 12.5 VA POWER FACTOR 

RATIO 2.5 VA 5 VA 12.5 VA POWER FACTOR 

500T-301 300:5 – – – ±5% @ 1.5 VA 501T-102 1000:5 2.4 4.8 – ±1% @ 7.5 VA 

500T-401 400:5 – – – ±3% @ 2.5 VA 501T-122 1200:5 1.2 2.4 – ±1% @ 10.0 VA 

500T-501 500:5 – – – ±2% @ 2.5 VA 501T-152 1500:5 1.2 1.2 2.4 ±1% @ 12.5 VA 

500T-601 600:5 4.8 – – ±1% @ 4.0 VA 501T-202 2000:5 0.6 1.2 2.4 ±1% @ 15.0 VA 

500T-751 750:5 4.8 – – ±1% @ 5.0 VA 501T-252 2500:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

500T-801 800:5 2.4 – – ±1% @ 5.0 VA 501T-302 3000:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

500T-102 1000:5 2.4 4.8 – ±1% @ 7.5 VA 501T-352 3500:5 0.6 0.6 0.6 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

500T-122 1200:5 1.2 2.4 – ±1% @ 10.0 VA 501T-402 4000:5 0.3 0.6 0.6 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

500T-152 1500:5 1.2 1.2 2.4 ±1% @ 12.5 VA 

500T-162 1600:5 1.2 1.2 2.4 ±1% @ 12.5 VA 

500T-202 2000:5 0.6 1.2 2.4 ±1% @ 15.0 VA Example: 500T-102 Split-core current transformer 

500T-252 2500:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window 

500T-302 3000:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

size of 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm) 

500T-402 4000:5 0.3 0.6 0.6 ±1% @ 25.0 VA 

112 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Four 

Mounting 

Holes 

0.31" (0.79) 

dia 

0.75 (1.91) 

H1 


500T 

(shown with end removed) 

LABEL 

A1 

THIS END REMOVABLE 

A2 

A3 

X1 

B2 

B1 

B3 

0.44 

(1.12) 

A1 

A2 

A3 

B1 

B2 

B3 

1.63 

(4.14) 

DIMENSIONS 

MODEL 

500T 

4.1 (10.4) 

6.4 (16.3) 

7.3 (18.5) 

7.1 (18.0) 

10.0 (25.4) 

10.9 (27.7) 

501T 

4.1 (10.4) 

6.4 (16.3) 

7.3 (18.5) 

11.7 (29.7) 

14.5 (36.8) 

15.4 (39.1) 

Continuous thermal 

current rating factor 1.33 @ 30°C ambient (86°F) 

1.0 @ 55°C ambient (131°F) 

Termination Brass stud terminal with nut, flat 

washer, lockwasher 

Approvals UL recognized component, 


File #LR89403


CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT 

SCT SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SCT Series of current transformers provides a lowvoltage 

(0-0.333V) output proportional to line current 

and is used in conjunction with the PowerTrak PT-9300 

to monitor electrical power systems. Often referred to as 

“Safe CTs,” the mV output of these current transformers 

eliminates the need for shorting switches, and their split 

core design makes them easy to install. 

FEATURES 

• Millivolt output 

(0-0.333V) 

• Split-core design 


Primary 5-1500A 

(see Ordering Information below) 

Secondary 0-0.333 VAC, 0% to 100% rated current 

Accuracy ±1%, 10% to 130% rated current 

Frequency 60 Hz 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Window { 

A 

E 

• Low cost 

• No need for 

shorting switches 

D B 

SCT-0750 

DIMENSIONS 

MODEL 

SCT-1250 SCT-2000 

A 2.00 (5.1) 3.25 (8.25) 4.75 (12.07) 

B 2.10 (5.3) 3.35 (8.51) 5.00 (12.70) 

C 0.61 (1.5) 1.00 (2.54) 1.20 (3.05) 

D 0.75 (1.9) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 

E 0.75 (1.9) 1.25 (3.18) 2.00 (5.08) 

C 

Insulation 600V 

Connections 8' (2.44m) twisted pair leads, 22 AWG 

Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg) max 


File #E96927 

WIRING 

L 

I 

N 

E 

L1 (AØ) 

L2 (BØ) 

L3 (CØ) 

SCT side marked 

Thi s side toward source” 

should face line side. 

X2 X1 

Neutral (if wye system) (black) (white) 

Recommended wiring 

is a twisted, shielded 

pair for each CT to 

avoid noise pick-up. 

Ground shield wire 

at PT-9300 ground 

lug only. 


SCT-1250 SCT-2000 

CTC 

X2 X1 

CTB 

X2 X1 

SCT 

SCT X2 X1 

(black) (white) 

SCT X2 X1 

(black) (white) 

CTA 

X2 X1 

CT Inputs 


NEUTRAL L3 L2 L1 

System Voltage 

Connections 

PowerTrak PT-9300 Power Monitor 


SCT-0750-005 Split-core current transformer, 5A:0.333 V 












PT-9300 Power monitor 

SCT-0750 

Neutral 

(If Wye 

System) 

L3 L2 L1 

L 

O 

A 

D 

113 

POWER MONITORING


114 


CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES AND TRANSDUCERS 

RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The RIBXK, RIBXG, and RIBXK420 Series include both current-operated 

switches and current transducers. Solid-core 

and split-core current-operated switch models have a solidstate 

switch that operates when the current level sensed by 

the internal current transformer exceeds a fixed or adjustable 

setpoint. Solid-core current transducer models output a 4-20 

mA signal proportional to the line current being monitored. 

FEATURES 

• Solid- and split-core switch models have fixed 

(Go/No go) or adjustable trip points 

• Solid-wire transducer models have a 4-20 mA output 

• Low cost 

• Ratcheting cam clamp to secure switch to wire 

• Removable mounting tab 


RIBXK, RIBXG SERIES 

Monitored AC current 

RIBXKF, RIBXKTF 0.25-150A 

RIBXKA, RIBXKTA 0.5-150A 

RIBXGF, RIBXGTF 0.35-150A 

RIBXGA, RIBXGTA 0.75-150A 

Switch trip point 

RIBXKF, RIBXKTF 0.25A, fixed 

RIBXKA, RIBXKTA 0.5-150A, adjustable 

RIBXGF, RIBXGTF 0.35A, fixed 

RIBXGFL, RIBXGTFL 0.75A, fixed 

RIBXGA, RIBXGTA 0.75-150A, adjustable 

Switch type Solid state, normally open 

Switch rating 30 VAC/VDC, 0.4A max 

Off-state leakage


CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES 

MODELS CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, SCS1150A 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Models CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, and 

SCS1150A are solid-state switches that operate when 

the AC current level sensed by the internal current 

transformer exceeds a fixed or adjustable trip point. 

Internal circuits are totally powered by induction from 

the conductor being monitored. There is zero off-state 

leakage current in the solid-state relay output that can 

switch AC or DC circuits. The smart LED indication 

option eliminates the need for meters when setting the 

adjustable trip point of the current switch. Solid-core and 

split-core models are available 

FEATURES 

• Models with fixed or adjustable trip point 

• Switch AC or DC circuits 

• Smart LED option 

• Applicable for VFD applications down to 6 Hz 

• Powered by monitored line 


Switch rating 1-135 VAC/VDC, 0.3A 

(SC250-NC model 0.2A) 

Switch type Normally open, solid state 

(SC250-NC is normally 

closed) 

Off-state leakage Zero 

Polarity Not polarity sensitive, 

switch AC or DC 

Monitored AC current* 

CS1A 0.75-250A (500A for 6 sec) 

SCS1.5A 1.25-250A (500A for 6 sec) 

CS1150A 1-150A (400A for 6 sec) 

SCS1150A, SC250-NC 1.75-150A (400A for 6 sec) 

Trip point 

CS1A Fixed, 0.75A 

SCS1.5A Fixed, 1.25A 

CS1150A 15-turn pot, adjustable 

1-150A 

SCS1150A, SC250-NC 4-turn pot, adjustable 

1.75-150A 

Monitored frequency 6-100 Hz 

* For loads with higher FLAs and for larger diameter 

conductors, use an external current transformer. 

SCS1150A 

SCS1.5A 

CS1150A 

CS1A 

C R US 

• Available in solid-core models or split-core 

models that clamp easily around cables 

• Five-year warranty 

• UL listed, CE certified 

Hysteresis 5% of setpoint 


Case ABS (meets UL flammability 

rating 94V-0) 

Insulation class 600V 


Approvals UL listed, File #E170092; 

CE certified 

Dimensions 

CS1A, CS1150A 

Unit 2.2"H x 2.4"W x 0.9"D 

(5.6 x 6.1 x 2.3 cm) 

Mounting base 3.5"L (8.9 cm) with 3.0" (7.6 cm) 

mounting centers 

Through-hole 0.75" (1.9 cm) dia, for up to 250 

MCM cable 

SCS1.5A, SCS1150A, SC250-NC 

Unit 2.5"H x 2.6"W x 1.15"D 

(6.4 x 6.6 x 2.9 cm) 

Mounting base 3.5"L (8.9 cm) with 3" (7.6 cm) 

mounting centers 

Through-hole 0.85" (2.2 cm) square aperture, 

for up to 350 MCM cable 

115 

POWER MONITORING



CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES 

MODELS CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A, SCS1150A 

WIRING 

116 

1-135V 

VAC/VDC max 

0.3A 

Terminals not 

polarity 

sensitive 

INSTALLATION / ADJUSTMENT 

Relay, Lamp, 

Small Contactor, 

or Similar AC 

or DC Load 

Terminals not 

polarity 

sensitive 

Monitored Conductor Monitored Conductor 

Digital 

Input 

Bldg Automation 

System, Energy 

Mgmt System, 

DDC, SCADA, etc. 

Sensors can be mounted in any position or hung directly on wires. For larger mounting screws, drill out mounting holes. Use up 

to #14 AWG copper wire to terminals. Tighten to 7 in-lb torque. 

Adjustment for CS1150A and SCS1150A 

1. With the sensor wired as shown, use a voltmeter across the sensor contacts. A full voltage across the contact confirms the 

switch is open. Turn on the motor or other load being monitored. 

2. The sensor is shipped with the multiturn adjustment set to the most sensitive position (CW). If the sensor now operates, turn 

the adjustment counter-clockwise (CCW) until the operation reverses. The meter will indicate this action. 

3. Now, turn the adjustment CW until the sensor just operates its controlled circuit. It is desirable to turn the adjustment slightly 

beyond this threshold point to provide a margin for normal current variations. 

4. The smart LED eliminates the need for a voltmeter. The LED will switch from rapid to slow flashing when going below the trip 

point. (Option –LED). 

Smart LED Indicator (Option–LED) 

The LED indicates three states: 

1. Rapid Flashing : Current has tripped the switch. 

2. Slow Flashing: Current is present but is below the trip point. 

3. No Flashing: Current is either OFF or below the bottom of the range. 

The smart LED indicator has zero off-state leakage. 

Application Notes 

1. Make sure that switched current (connected to terminals) is limited to 0.3A continuous. Switched voltage should be no higher 

than 135 VAC/VDC. 

2. Important! Monitoring excessive current and damage the sensor. Make sure monitored currents do not exceed maximum 

ratings. 

3. For proper operation of the split core model, make certain that the mating surfaces of the magnetic core are clean. 

Troubleshooting 

Problem Probable Causes and Corrections 

1. Sensor does not switch at all, Adjustment pot is probably backed off completely, which disables the sensor. 

regardless of current level. See Installation/Adjustment immediately above for instructions. 

Verify that mating surfaces of the split core are free of foreign particles. 

2. Adjustment has no stops. The multiturn adjustment pot has a slip-clutch that prevents damage at either end of its 

Keeps turning. rotation. To know where the adjustment is, turn the pot 15 turns CW (4 turns for 

SCS1150A); this sets it to the most sensitive position. 



CS1A Solid-core current switch, fixed 0.75A trip, normally open 

SCS1.5A Split-core current switch, fixed 1.25A trip, normally open 

CS1150A Solid-core current switch, adjustable, normally open 

SCS1150A Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally open 

CS1150A–LED Solid-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with smart LED 

SCS1150A–LED Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with smart LED 

SC250–NC Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally closed with smart LED


CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY 

RIBX SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Relay in a Box RIBX Series provides a unique 

and cost-effective solution to on/off motor control and 

current sensing status indication. Combined in a single, 

convenient junction box with high and low voltage 

separation are a control relay and a current sensing 

status switch. A three-position closed/open/auto switch 

is available to override the output of the relay. This versatile 

product allows both control and status sensing of 

electrical loads by a BAS, all in a self-contained, easyto-install 

housing. 

FEATURES 

• Cost-effective current sensing with a control 

relay 

• Self-contained housing with high and low 

voltage separation 

• LED indication of relay and current sensor trip 

• Optional relay contact override switch 

• Plenum-rated housing 

• UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy 

Management and UL 864 Fire 

APPLICATION 

Internal Current Sensing (for single-phase loads) 

Models with internal current sensing are great for direct 

control and current sensing of exhaust fans, pumps, and 

other single phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control 

relay contacts of these models wire directly in series with 

single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing 

through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current of the load is 

sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the 

controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter 

the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing 

through star bushings or conduit and are connected to 

screw terminals. 

Remote Current Sensing (for loads with motor starters) 

Models with remote current sensing are great for control 

and status sensing of electrical loads that require a motor 

starter. The control relay contacts of these models are 

wired in series with the motor starter coil using the two 

wires that exit the housing through the 1/2'' conduit hub. 

Currents up to 150A are sensed externally with a current 

sensing ring connected to the two gray wires that also exit 

through the 1/2'' conduit hub. Low-voltage wiring from the 

controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter 

the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing 

through star bushings or conduit and are connected to 

screw terminals. 


Status In 

Class 2 

Control Out 

On/Off 

120-277 VAC 

10 or 20A 

Three-Phase 

Power 

RIBX 

Current is sensed internally. 


Status In 

Control Out 

Optional Override Switch 

Closed/Open/Auto 

Internal Current Sensing 


Class 2 

On/Off 

Relay Switches Motor 

Starter Coil 

RIBX Solid-Core 

Remote Current 

Sensing 

RIBX 

Contactor 

Motor 

Starter 

RIBX Internal 

Current Sensing 

RIBX Split-Core 

Remote Current 

Sensing 

Current Sensor 

and Control Relay 

with Override Switch 

Single Phase 

Exhaust Fan 






Remote Remote Current Current Sensing 

C R US 

Toroid has no open 

circuit voltage eliminating 

electrical shock hazard. 

Three-Phase 

Motor 

117 

POWER MONITORING



CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY 

RIBX SERIES 


Enclosure size 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D with 1/2" NPT 

(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm), NEMA 1 



Life rating (all relays) 10 million cycles min mechanical 

Status indication 

LED#1 ON Relay activated 

LED#2 ON Current trip point exceeded 

Status switch 30 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A max 

Status switch 

Off-state leakage


CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY 

RIBX-V SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Relay in a Box RIBX-V Series provides a unique 

and cost-effective solution to on/off motor control 

and analog current sensing. Combined in a single, 

convenient junction box with high- and low-voltage 

separation are a control relay and a current sensing 

transducer that outputs 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC. A threeposition 

closed/open/auto switch is available to override 

the output of the relay. This versatile product allows 

both control and analog current sensing of electrical 

loads by a BAS, all in a self-contained, easy-to-install 

housing. 

FEATURES 

• Cost-effective analog current sensing with a 

control relay 

• Self-contained housing with high- and lowvoltage 

separation 

• LED indication of relay 

• Optional relay contact override switch 

• Plenum-rated housing 

• UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy 

Management and UL 864 Fire 

APPLICATION 


The RIBX-V Series with internal current sensing is great for direct control and analog current sensing of exhaust 

fans, pumps, and other single-phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control relay contacts of these models wire 

directly in series with single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current 

of the load is sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and analog 

current signal enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and 

are connected to screw terminals. 

BAS Contoller 

Analog In 

Control Out 

120-277 VAC 

5, 10, 20, or 30A 

0-5 or 0-10 VDC 

Class 2 

On/Off 

Current is sensed internally. 



RIBX-V 


RIBX-V 

Analog Current Sensor 



Single Phase 

Exhaust Fan 

C R US 

119 

POWER MONITORING


120 


CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY 

RIBX-V SERIES 


Enclosure size 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D with 1/2" NPT 

(10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm), NEMA 1 



Life rating (all relays) 10 million cycles min 

mechanical 

Analog output 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC, proportional 

to current sensing range 

Output load 30 kΩ min 

Accuracy ±1% FS 

Relay coil frequency 50/60 Hz 

Status indication LED on = relay activated 

MODEL CURRENT 

SENSING 

RIBXLCEV 

RIBXLSEV 

RIBXLCV 

RIBXLSV 

RIBX24BV 

RIBX24SBV 

RIBXV 

Internal 

Internal 

Internal 

Internal 

CURRENT SENSING 

RANGE (amps) 

0-5 

0-10 

0-20 

0-30 

OVER 

SW 

RIBX243PV Internal 

0-20 – 

Note: 

– 

Yes 

– 


Yes 

– 

Yes 

– 

Relay coil pull-in/drop-out 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

Pull-in 9 VAC, 10 VDC 

Drop-out 2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC 

24 VAC/VDC 

Pull-in 18 VAC, 22 VDC 

Drop-out 3 VAC, 3.8 VDC 

Wire length 16" (40.6 cm) 

Weight Approx 1 lb (0.45 kg) 

Approvals UL listed: UL 916 Energy 

Management, UL 864 Fire, 

UL and ULC listed Canada 

RELAY CONTACT 

RATINGS 

5A resistive 277 VAC 

345 VA pilot duty 120/240 VAC N.O. 

211 VA pilot duty 120/240 VAC N.C. 

268 VA pilot duty 277 VAC N.O. 

175 VA pilot duty 277 VAC N.C. 

1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC 

1/4 hp for N.O. 277 VAC 

1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VAC 

10A resistive 120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC 

480 VA pilot duty 240/277 VAC 

480 VA ballast 277 VAC 

600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O 

240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C. 

1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC 




1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC 

240W tungsten N.C. 120 VAC 


1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 277 VAC 

20A ballast N.O. 277 VAC 

10A ballast N.C. 277 VAC 

10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC 


20A resistive 28 VDC 


1 hp 120 VAC, 1 Ph 

2 hp 240-277 VAC, 1 Ph 

3 hp 480-600 VAC, 1 Ph 

5 hp 240 VAC, 3 Ph 

7.5 hp 480 VAC, 3 Ph 

20A ballast 277-480 VAC 

Current transducer only, 0-30A 

RELAY CONTACT 

WIRING 

RIBXLCEV, RIBXLCV 

1- SPDT Relay 

(blue) NC 

(yellow) COM 

(orange) NO 

RIBXLSEV, RIBXLSV 

1- SPST Relay 

(orange)* 

(orange)* 

1 

1- SPDT Relay 

(blue) 

NC 

(yellow) COM 

(orange) NO 

1- SPST Relay 

(orange) 

(orange) 

1 

(blue) 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(orange) 

2 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

*Gray wire on RIBXLSEV 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

NO 

NO 

NO 


Wiring 

Current 

Sensor 

(purple) 

(purple) 

RELAY COIL AND 

ANALOG OUTPUT 

Relay Input Current 

30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 

32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 

42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 

50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC 

Relay Coil Wiring 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

Common} 

Analog Out Wiring 

0-10 VDC 

0-5 VDC 

Common 

} 


75 mA @ 24 VAC, 32 mA @ 24 VDC 


24 VAC/VDC 

Common} 


0-10 VDC 

0-5 VDC} 

Common 


190 mA @ 24 VAC 


24 VAC/VDC 

Common} 


0-10 VDC 

Common 

} 


0-10 VDC 

0-5 VDC} 

Common 

1 Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N.O. or N.C. 2 Order N.C. by adding -NC after model number.


CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT 

MODEL 4CTV 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 4CTV is a unique AC amperage to DC voltage 

transducer that can be used to directly monitor loads 

of up to 20A. For loads of 20-5000A, an external current 

transformer can be used with the Model 4CTV. 

Developed for building automation and energy management, 

the Model 4CTV converts an AC current to a DC 

voltage that can be monitored by any processor that will 

accept analog DC voltages. 

FEATURES 

• No external AC or DC power supply required 

• Rugged design to withstand momentary 

AC inrushes of 120A (6x rating) 

• Easy to install, only two connections 

• 50/60 Hz operation 

APPLICATIONS 

• AC current input to DC voltage output 

• Monitoring of AC current of motors, lighting, 

heating, industrial processes, etc. 

• Monitoring of chiller loads using existing 

current transformers 

TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS 

Note: 

Output (VDC) 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

25 50 75 100 

% of Rated Primary Current 

The Model 4CTV senses the average value 

of current. The output is then calibrated for 

the equivalent rms value. Calibration is done 

based on a true sine wave. A nonsinusoidal 

waveform as a result of harmonic distortion 

may affect stated accuracy. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4 Slots 

0.25 x 0.31 

(0.63 x 0.78) 

1.40 

(3.56) 

0.93 dia 

(2.36) 


4CTV 

1.69 

(4.29) 

2.69 

(6.83) 

2.14 

(5.44) 

2.00 

(5.08) 

2.36 

(5.99) 

#10 - 32 Brass Screws 

0.15 

(0.38) 

1.41 

(3.58) 

2.75 

(6.98) 

Accuracy ±3% 

Ripple ±2% 


Power supply None required 

Input 0-20A, up to 5000A with a CT 

Output 0-5 VDC 

Min load resistance 30 k� 


Weight 8 oz (0.23 kg) 

121 

POWER MONITORING


122 


CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT 

MODEL 4CTV 

WIRING 

APPLICATION #1. Monitoring Loads Under 20A 

IL Conductor 

Formula: 

I L (load amps) = 

20 V 

x o ( ) 

turns 5 

V o = VDC from 4CTV 

turns= number of times conductor 

passes through 4CTV 

Note: If I L is always below 10A, multiple passes of the 

conductor will improve scaling. The sum of these 

amperages must remain below 20A. 

APPLICATION #2. Monitoring Loads Over 20A with a Current Transformer 

IL Current 

Transformer 

Conductor 

0-5 AMPS 

Formula: 

I L (load amps) = 

APPLICATION #3. Monitoring and Summing Multiple Loads 

4CTV 

LOAD #1 

I L1 

4CTV 

4CTV 

4 turns for CTs with 5A secondaries 

20 turns for CTs with 1A secondaries 

4CTV 4CTV 4CTV 

LOAD #2 

I L2 

LOAD #3 

I L3 

V o = VDC from 4CTV 

CT primary 

rating 

Vo 5 

x ( ) 

Note: If the CT is oversized, multiple conductor passes or 

more secondary turns through the 4CTV will improve 

scaling. The CT output should not exceed 5A or the 

CT secondary turns should not total more than 20A. 

Formula: For loads under 20 amps 

ILT (load amps) = 20 x N 

turns 

V 

x o 

( 5 x N) 

Formula: For loads over 20 amps 

CT primary 

rating total 

Vo 5 x N 

I LT (load amps) = x ( ) 

V o = VDC from 4CTVs 

turns = number of times conductor passes 

through 4CTV 

N = number of loads monitored 

Note: If the loads are from secondaries of current transformers, 

the CT ratios and the turns on the 4CTVs must all be the same. 

If CTs are used, the CT primary amps would be the total for 

all CTs used. 



4CTV Current transducer, 0-5 VDC voltage output 


AL/RL Solid-core CTs 500T/501T Split-core CTs 

603/603D Split-core CTs 600T/601T Split-core CTs


CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT 

MODEL 4CMA 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 4CMA is a unique AC amperage-to-DC current 

transducer that can be used to directly monitor 

loads of up to 20A. For loads of 20-5000A, an external 

current transformer can be used with the Model 4CMA. 

Developed for building automation and energy management, 

the Model 4CMA converts AC amperage to a 4-20 

mA current that can be monitored by any processor that 

will accept an analog current signal. 

FEATURES 

• Rugged design to withstand momentary AC 

inrushes of 120A (6x rating) 

• Reverse polarity protection 

• Easy to install, only two connections 

• 50/60 Hz operation 

APPLICATION 

• AC amperage input to mA output 

• Monitoring of AC current of motors, lighting, 

heating, industrial processes, etc. 

• Monitoring chiller loads using existing current 

transformers 

TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS 

Output (mA DC) 

24 

20 

16 

12 

8 

4 

0 

25 50 75 100 125 

% of Rated Primary Current 

Note: The Model 4CMA senses the average value 

of current. The output is then calibrated for 

the equivalent rms value. Calibration is done 

based on a true sine wave. A nonsinusoidal 

waveform as a result of harmonic distortion 

may affect stated accuracy. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4 Slots 

0.25 x 0.31 

(0.63 x 0.78) 

1.40 

(3.56) 

0.93 dia 

(2.36) 


4CMA 

1.69 

(4.29) 

2.69 

(6.83) 

2.14 

(5.44) 

2.00 

(5.08) 

2.36 

(5.99) 

#10 - 32 Brass Screws 

0.15 

(0.38) 

1.41 

(3.58) 

2.75 

(6.98) 

Accuracy ±0.5% (24 VDC @ 25°C) 

Ripple ±1% or less 


Power supply 24 VDC ±10% 

Input 0-20A, up to 5000A with a CT 


Max output 30 mA 

Max loop resistance 600� 




File #E155343 

123 

POWER MONITORING


124 


CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT 

MODEL 4CMA 

WIRING 

APPLICATION #1. Monitoring Loads Under 20A 

Conductor 

I L 

4CMA 

I O (4-20 mA) 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC ± 10% 

I O (4-20 mA) 

Formula: 

IL (load amps) = 20 Io - 4 

turns 16 

x( ) 

I o = mA DC from 4CMA 

turns= number of times conductor 

passes through 4CMA 

Note: If I L is always below 10A, multiple passes of the conductor will 

improve scaling. The sum of these amperages must remain below 20A. 

APPLICATION #2. Monitoring Loads Over 20A with a Current Transformer 

Current 

Transformer 

Conductor 

I L 

4CMA 

4 turns for CTs with 5 amp secondaries 

20 turns for CTs with 1 amp secondaries 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC ± 10% 

APPLICATION #3. Monitoring and Summing Multiple Loads 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC ± 10% 

4CMA 4CMA 4CMA 

LOAD #1 

IL 1 

0-5A 

LOAD #2 

IL 2 

I LT = I L1 + I L2 + I L3 

Current 

Output 

4-20 mA 

Current 

Output 

600Ω 

Max 

Load 

600Ω 

Max 

Formula: 

IL (load amps) = CT primary x 

rating 

Io = mA DC from 4CMA 

N= number of loads monitored 

I o = mA from UMM 

( ) 

Io - 4 

16 

Note: If the CT is oversized, multiple conductor passes or more secondary 

turns through the 4CMA will improve scaling. The CT output should not 

exceed 5A, or the CT secondary turns should not total more than 20A. 

LOAD #3 

IL 3 

I O 

SIG OUT 

COM 

24 PWR 

IN 1 

IN 2 

IN 3 UMM 

Universal Math 

Module 

Formula: 

ILT (load amps) = 20 x N I For loads under 20 amps 

x o - 4 

turns ( 16 ) 

Formula: For loads over 20 amps 

CT Primary 

ILT (load amps) = 

Io - 4 

16 

rating total x( ) 

turns = number of times conductor passes 

through 4CMA 

Note: If the loads are from secondaries of current transformers, 

the CT ratios and the turns on the 4CMAs must all be the same. 

If CTs are used, the CT primary amps would be the total for 

all CTs used. 



4CMA Current transducer, 4-20 mA current output 


AL/RL Solid-core CTs 500T/501T Split-core CTs 

603/603D Split-core CTs 600T/601T Split-core CTs 

UMM Universal math module


AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT 

SENTRY 100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Sentry 100 Series AC Current Transducers with 

Voltage Output can be used to directly monitor up to 

200A and output a 0-5 or 0-10 VDC signal. The 100 

Series is available in a split-core design that allows for 

easy installation of the transducer on existing wiring or 

in a lower-cost solid-core version. 

FEATURES 

• May eliminate the need for a current transformer 

• Small size 

• No power supply needed 

• Easily installed over existing cable with split-core 

model 



MAX MAX FOR MAX FOR 

MODEL RANGE OUTPUT JUMPER CONT 6 SEC 1 SEC 

(amps) 

(amps) 

100-1L 0-10 None 80 125 250 

SC100-1L 0-20 0-5 VDC Mid 110 150 300 

0-50 High 175 215 400 

100-2L 0-100 None 200 300 600 

SC100-2L 0-150 0-5 VDC Mid 300 450 800 

0-200 High 400 500 1000 

100-3L 0-10 None 80 125 250 

SC100-3L 0-20 0-10 VDC Mid 110 150 300 

0-50 High 175 215 400 

100-4L 0-100 None 200 300 600 

SC100-4L 0-150 0-10 VDC Mid 300 450 800 

0-200 High 400 500 1000 

Output 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC 

Accuracy ±1% FS over 5-100% of range 

Loading 1 MΩ required for rated accuracy 

100 kΩ load add 1.3% error 

Power supply None required 


Isolation UL listed to 1270 VAC 

Response time 100 ms, 0-90% 


Case Thermoplastic (meets UL flammability rating 

94V-0) 


Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E129625 

Note: The Sentry 100 Series is average responding and not suitable for use on 

the load side of VFDs. Refer to the Sentry 200 Series to monitor VFDs. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.85 

(2.18) 

WIRING 



100-1L Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output 




SC100-1L Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output 




+ - 

SC100-1L 

3.53 

(8.97) 

2.40 

(6.10) 

3.04 

(7.73) 

Split-Core 

0.85 

(2.18) 

0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Load* 

Sentry 100 

2.25 

(5.72) 

Monitored Conductor 

1.20 

(3.05) 

0.75 

(1.9) 

1.0 

(2.5) 

0.95 

(2.4) 

+ 

– 

100-1L 

3.54 

(9.0) 

2.4 

(6.0) 

1.5 

(3.9) 3.08 

(7.8) 

C R US 

Solid-Core 

2.16 

(5.5) 

* 1 MΩ required for rated accuracy 

100 kΩ load add 1.3% error 

0.17 

(0.45) 

0.6 

(1.5) 

125 

POWER MONITORING


126 


AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH CURRENT OUTPUT 

SENTRY 200 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 200 Series AC Current Transducers can be used 

to directly monitor up to 200 amps and output a 4-20 mA 

signal. The 200 Series is available in a split-core design 

that allows for easy installation of the transducer on 

existing wiring or in a lower cost solid-core version. 

FEATURES 

• May eliminate the need for a current transformer 


• Loop powered 

• Easily installed over existing cable with split-core 

design 



MODEL RANGE JUMPER MAX CONT MAX FOR MAX FOR 

(amps) 6 SEC 1 SEC 

(amps) 

200-05 0-2 Low 40 60 100 

SC200-05 0-5 High 100 124 250 

200-1 0-10 None 80 125 250 

SC200-1 0-20 Mid 110 150 300 

0-50 High 175 215 400 

200-2 0-100 None 200 300 600 

SC200-2 0-150 Mid 300 450 800 

0-200 High 400 500 1000 


Output 4-20 mA DC 

Output load 950Ω max @ 24 VDC or 

R max = (VSupply - 5)/0.020 

Accuracy ±0.5% FS 

Response time 300 ms, 0-90% 

Overrange limit Sensor self-limits output to 40 mA 

Internal protection Reverse voltage protection 

Frequency 20-100 Hz, (V models 10-400 Hz) 


Case Thermoplastic (meets UL flammability 

rating 94V-0) 


Isolation UL listed to 1270 VAC 


Note: The standard models are average responding. 

Also available are variable frequency integration 

models for monitoring the load side of a VFD. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.85 

(2.18) 

WIRING 


3.53 

(8.97) 

2.40 

(6.10) 

3.04 

(7.73) 

Split-Core 

+ - 

Sentry 200 

SC200-1 

0.85 

(2.18) 


2.25 

(5.72) 

1.20 

(3.05) 


200-05 Solid-core current transducer, 0-5A, 4-20 mA output 



SC200-05 Split-core current transducer, 0-5A, 4-20 mA output 



Add -V at the end of the model number if monitoring the load side of a VFD. 

0.75 

(1.9) 

1 

(2.5) 

4-20 mA 

0.95 

(2.4) 

3.54 

(9.0) 

2.4 

(6.0) 

1.5 

(3.9) 3.08 

(7.8) 

Solid-Core 

+ 

200-1 

Power 

Supply 

– 

– 

+ 

C R US 

Load 

2.16 

(5.5) 

0.17 

(0.45) 

0.6 

(1.5) 

24 VDC 

Typical 

950Ω max 

@24 VDC


HIGH AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT 

SENTRY 200-A SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Sentry 200-A Series High AC Current 

Transducers with Current Ouput can be used to directly 

monitor up to 2000A without requiring an additional 

current transformer. The output from these transducers 

is a 4-20 mA signal. 

FEATURES 

• Eliminates the need for a current transformer 

• Large aperture to accommodate large conductors 

or wire bundles 

• Loop-powered 4-20 mA output 

• Multirange input eliminates zero and span adjustments 

• Easy installation with integral mounting brackets 


MODEL RANGE SWITCH MAX CONT MAX FOR MAX FOR 

POSITION 6 SEC 1 SEC 

(amps) 

200-3-A 0-375 375 750 1500 3750 

0-500 500 

0-750 750 

200-4-A 0-1000 1000 2000 4000 10,000 

0-1333 1333 

0-2000 2000 



Output load 600Ω max @ 24 VDC 

Rmax = (V supply-12)/0.020 

Accuracy 1.0% FS 

Frequency 50-60 Hz, (V models 10-400 Hz) 

Response time 500 ms to 90% of step change 

Case UL 94 flammability rated thermoplastic 


Approvals UL and ULC listed, File # E129625, 

CE certified 

Insulation class 600 VAC 

Overrange limit Sensor self-limits to 25 mA output 

Termination Screw terminals 

Note: The standard models are average responding. Also 

available are variable frequency integration models 

for monitoring the load side of a VFD. 

in 

(cm) 

200-3-A 

DIMENSIONS 

WIRING 


4.22 

(10.7) 

Sentry 

200-A 



200-3-A Solid-core high current transducer, 0-750A, 4-20 mA output 

200-4-A Solid-core high current transducer, 0-2000A, 4-20 mA output 

Add -V at the end of the model number if monitoring the load side of a VFD. 

+ - 

4.5 

(11.43) 

Aperture 

3 

(7.63) 

4-20 mA 

+ 

Power 

Supply 

– 

– 

+ 

Load 

1.9 

(4.83) 

Depth 

C R US 

24 VDC 

Typical 

600Ω 

max @ 

24 VDC 

127 

POWER MONITORING


128 


THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITORS 

MODELS 258, 269 

DESCRIPTION 

Models 258 and 269 continuously monitor three-phase 

power lines for phase loss, phase reversal, and low voltage. 

Model 269 also monitors for high voltage. Models 

258 and 269 do not require a neutral connection and 

can be used with any Wye or Delta system. When correct 

voltage and phase rotation are applied, the internal 

relay will energize. A fault condition will de-energize the 

relay. When the fault is corrected, the monitor will automatically 

reset. 


B258B 258B A258B A269 B269 C269 

Nominal AC voltage (VAC phase to phase) 120 208/240 480 120 208/240 480 

Adjustment range (VAC) 85-120 160-240 380-480 110-145 210-280 400-540 

80-115 170-240 380-460 

Frequency (Hz) 60 60 60 60 60 60 

Power consumption (W) 0.75 1.5 4.5 1.5 3.0 6.0 

Response time 50ms 50ms 50ms Adj. 1-10 sec Adj. 1-10 sec Adj. 1-10 sec 

Reset time 50ms 50ms 50ms 0.25 sec 0.25 sec 0.25 sec 

Mounting RB08-PC RB08-PC RB08-PC Surface Surface Surface 

Weight oz (g) 5 (141.7) 5 (141.7) 5 (141.7) 9 (255.1) 9 (255.1) 9 (255.1) 

Approvals UR, CSA UR, CSA UR*, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA 

Repeat accuracy ±0.1% of setpoint (fixed conditions) 

Reset type Automatic 

Deadband Approx 2% 

Output contacts SPDT 

Contact rating 10A @ 240 VAC, resistive 

*Condition of acceptability: A258B must be used with the 

RB08-PC socket. 

WIRING 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Control 

Voltage 

3 4 5 

Model 

258 

1 

M 

M 

M 

M 

2 

Stop 

Start 

8 

M 

shown de-energized 

258 

Motor 


258 269 


Humidity 97% noncondensing 

Dimensions 

258 1.95"H x 1.95"W x 3.25"D 

(4.96 x 4.96 x 8.25 cm) 

RB08-PC 2.25"H x 2.0"W x 0.625"D 

(5.7 x 5.1 x 1.6 cm) 

269 6.06"H x 3.88"W x 2.82"D 

(15.4 x 9.9 x 7.1 cm) 


A258B Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC 

258B Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC 

B258B Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer) 

RB08-PC 600V/10A Socket (required with each 258 voltage monitor) 

A269 Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer) 

B269 Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC 

C269 Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Control 

Voltage 

A B C 

Model 269 

Optional Alarm Indicator 

M 

M 

M 

Start 

Stop 

M 

M 


269 

Motor


MOTORSAVER THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR 

MODEL 201A 

DESCRIPTION 

The MotorSaver Model 201A Three-Phase Voltage 

Monitor is an autoranging plug-in voltage monitor 

designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of 

size. It is used on 190-480 VAC, 50/60 Hz motors to 

prevent damage caused by single phasing, low voltage, 

phase reversal, or voltage unbalance. To detect harmful 

power line conditions, the unique microprocessor-based 

voltage and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors 

the three-phase voltages. When a harmful condition is 

detected, the Model 201A MotorSaver’s output relay is 

deactivated after a fixed trip-delay time period. The output 

relay reactivates after power line conditions return to 

an acceptable level for a fixed restart delay time. The 

trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating 

power line conditions. 

FEATURES 

• Protection of three-phase motors against single 

phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, and voltage 

unbalance 

• DIN rail- or surface-mounted socket 

• UL and ULC listed, CE certified 

• Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions 

• Single-phase condition detection regardless of 

regenerated voltages 

WIRING 

L1 

L2 

L3 

LED INDICATOR 

Run Green 

Restart Delay Green 

Reverse Phase Red 

Unbalance/Single Phase Red 

High/Low Voltage Red 

Control 

Voltage 

240 VAC max 

L1 

L2 L3 

3 4 5 

201A 2 

M 

M 

M 


Model 201A 

1 

8 

OL 

OL 

OL 

OL 

M 

Motor 

Hand 

Start 

Stop 

Off M 

Auto Pilot 



Line voltage Three-phase, 190-480 VAC, 

adjustable 

Frequency 

Low voltage 

50* or 60 Hz 

Trip 90% of setpoint 

Reset 93% of setpoint 

Voltage unbalance (NEMA) 

Trip 6% 

Reset 

Trip delay time 

4.5% 

Low voltage 

Unbalance and 

4 sec 

phasing faults 

Restart delay time 

2 sec 

After a fault 

After a complete 

2 sec 

power loss 

Output contact rating 

2 sec 

SPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @ 240 VAC 

General-purpose 10A @ 240 VAC 

Transient protection 2500V for 10 ms 

Power consumption 5W 

Dimensions 1.75"H x 2.37"W x 4.25"L 

(4.4 x 6.0 x 10.8 cm) 


Approvals UL and ULC listed, 

File #E68520, CE certified 

*50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%. 


201A MotorSaver three-phase voltage monitor 

OT08 Socket, 600 VAC, DIN rail or surface mount 

OT08 

201A 

C R US 

129 

POWER MONITORING


130 



MODEL 460 

DESCRIPTION 

The MotorSaver Model 460 microcontroller-based voltage 

and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors the threephase 

voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. 

When a harmful condition is detected, the Model 460 output 

relay is deactivated after an adjustable trip delay time. 

The output relay reactivates after power line conditions 

return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay 

time. If equipped with the manual reset option, an external 

normally open momentary reset switch must be pressed to 

reactivate the output relay. The trip and restart delays prevent 

nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line 

conditions. 

The Model 460 automatically senses whether it is connected 

to a 190-240V 60 Hz system, a 440-480V 60 Hz system, 

or a 350-416V 50 Hz system. An adjustment is provided 

to set the nominal line voltage from 190-240 or 380-480 

VAC. Other adjustments include a 1-30 second trip delay, a 

1-500 second restart delay, and a 2% to 8% voltage-unbalance 

trip point adjustment. 

FEATURES 

• Protection of three-phase motors from loss of any 

phase, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, 

and high voltage 

• Adjustable trip delay and restart delay 

• Optional manual reset 

• Adjustable voltage-unbalance trip point 

• Diagnostic LEDs for indication of trip status 



• Surface or DIN rail mounting 


Three-phase line voltage 190-480 

Frequency 50*/60 Hz 

Low voltage 

Trip 90% of setpoint (±1%) 

Reset 93% of setpoint (±1%) 

High voltage 




Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable 

Reset Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%) 

Trip setting minus 0.5% (2-4%) 


Low, high, unbalanced 1-30 sec adjustable 

Single phasing 1 sec fixed 


After a fault 1-500 sec adjustable 

After a complete power loss 1-500 sec adjustable 

WIRING 

Input 

Power 

External 

Normally Open 

Momentary Manual 

Reset Switch 

(customer 

supplied) 

Model 460 


SPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @ 240 VAC 


Transient protection IEC 1000-4-5, ANSI/IEEE 

C62.41, UL508 

Power consumption 6W max 

Dimensions 3.5"H x 2.1"W x 2.4"D 

(8.9 x 5.3 x 6.1 cm) 



Enclosure Polycarbonate 

Wire type Stranded or solid, 12-20 AWG, 

one per terminal 



File #E68520, CE 

Terminal torque 6 in-lbs (0.7 N-m) 


MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

460 Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC 

460-MR Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC with manual reset 

L1 

L2 

L3 

460 

L1 L2 L3 

1 2 3 

Magnetic 

Contactor 

OL 

OL 

OL 

Motor 

Manual Reset 

on 460-MR only. 

LED INDICATOR 

4 5 6 

OL 

Control Power 

24-240 VAC 

Manual Stop 

Off 


Auto 

Pilot Contact 

Start 

M 

M 

C R US 

Run Green 





Manual Reset Required* Red and Green 

*460-MR only



MODEL 250A 

DESCRIPTION 

The MotorSaver Model 250A Three-Phase Voltage 

Monitor is an autoranging voltage monitor designed to 

protect three-phase motors regardless of size. It is used 

on 190-480 VAC, 50/60 Hz motors to prevent damage 

caused by single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, 

voltage unbalance, and high voltage. Added features 

include DPDT contacts and an adjustable restart timedelay 

setting. The unique microprocessor-based voltage 

and phase sensing-circuit constantly monitors the threephase 

voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. 

When a harmful condition is detected, the Model 

250A’s output relays are deactivated after a fixed tripdelay 

time period. The output relay reactivates after 

power line conditions return to an acceptable level for 

an adjustable restart delay time. The trip and reset 

delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating 

power line conditions. 

FEATURES 

• Protection of three-phase motors from single 

phasing, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage 

unbalance, and high voltage 

• Adjustable restart delay 

• DPDT contacts 

• UL and ULC listed 

• Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions 

• Detection of single-phase conditions regardless 

of regenerated voltages 

WIRING 

L1 

Input 

Power 

L2 

L3 

LED INDICATOR 

Run Green 





Control 

Power 

Alarm 

Power 

L1 

M 

M 

M 

OL 

OL 

OL 

L2 L3 M 

OL 

250A 


Motor Protection with Local Alarm 

Motor 

Hand 

Start 

Stop 

Off 

M 

Auto Pilot 

Alarm 

250A 


Three-phase line 

voltage 190-480 VAC, adjustable 

Frequency 50* or 60 Hz 

Low voltage 



High voltage 




Trip 6% 

Reset 4.5% 


Low voltage, 

High voltage 4 sec 

Unbalance and 

phasing faults 2 sec 


After a fault Manual or 2-300 sec 


power loss Manual or 2-300 sec 


DPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @ 240 VAC 


Transient protection IEC 1000-4-5 



(7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm) 

Weight 14 oz (435.6g) 


File #E68520 




250A MotorSaver three-phase 

voltage monitor 

C R US 

131 

POWER MONITORING


132 



355 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

MotorSaver 355 Series Three-Phase Voltage 

Monitors are designed to protect three-phase motors 

regardless of size. The 355-200 model monitors 190-240 

VAC input voltages, the 355-400 model monitors 380-480 

VAC input voltages, and the 355-600 model monitors 575- 

600 VAC input voltages. The unique microprocessorbased 

voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors 

the three-phase voltages to detect harmful power line 

conditions, including single phasing, low voltage, phase 

reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage. When a 

harmful condition is detected, the 355 Series output relays 

are deactivated after an adjustable trip-delay time period. 

The output relay reactivates after power line conditions 

return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart 

delay time. The trip and reset delays prevent nuisance 

tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. 

FEATURES 

• Protection of three-phase motors from single 

phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, voltage 

unbalance, and high voltage 

• Adjustable restart delay 

• Adjustable trip delay 

• Adjustable voltage-unbalance trip point 

• Four diagnostic LEDs show overvoltage, undervoltage, 

voltage unbalance, reverse-phase, and 

normal conditions 





Three-phase 

line voltage 190-240, 380-480, or 

575-600 VAC 

Frequency 50*/60 Hz 

Low voltage 



High voltage 




Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable 

Reset Trip setting minus 1% 


Low and high voltage, 

unbalance 2-30 sec, adjustable 

Single phasing 0.5 sec 

WIRING 


After a fault Manual or 2-300 sec 


power loss Manual or 2-300 sec 


SPDT, pilot duty 470 VA @ 600 VAC (400 or 

600V range) 

General-purpose 10A @ 240 VAC (200V range) 

Transient protection 2500V for 10 ms 



(7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm) 




MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

355-200 Three-phase power monitor, 190-240 VAC 



L1 

L2 

L3 

Control 

Voltage 

L1 

M 

M 

M 

OL 

OL 

OL 

L2 L3 M 

OL 

355 Series 


355-400 

Motor 

Hand 

Start 

Stop 

Off M 

Auto Pilot 

C R US


THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS 

MODELS PVM, LVM 

DESCRIPTION 

Model PVM voltage transducers monitor the line-to-line 

voltage of three- and four-wire, three-phase electrical systems. 

The Model LVM monitors the phase-to-neutral voltage 

of four-wire electrical systems. Models PMV and LVM 

are used to monitor three-phase voltages of 120, 208, 240, 

277, and 480V. They provide three separate 4-20 mA 

outputs, which are proportional to the three-phase input 

voltages. The high accuracy, solid-state circuitry of these 

transducers is average responding calibrated to read 

RMS. 

FEATURES 

• For 120, 208, 240, or 480V three-phase systems 

• Line-to-line and phase-to-neutral voltage monitoring 

• Usable on 50 or 60 Hz systems 

• Three 4-20 mA outputs for monitoring each input 

voltage separately 


Voltage input range 

PVM-480 (line-to-line) 

Low range 180-300V 

High range 360-600V 

PVM-120 (line-to-line) 90-150V (for 

3Ø P.T. secondaries) 

LVM-120 (phase-to-neutral) 90-150V 

(for 208 and 240V 

3Ø systems) 

LVM-240 (phase-to-neutral) 180-300V 

(for 480V 3Ø systems) 

Input burden 0.1 VA max 

Frequency 50/60 Hz 

Continuous overload 600V max 

Power supply voltage 24 VDC ±10% 

Power supply current 150 mA max 

Output 4-20 mA DC 

Max loop resistance 600�/output 

Accuracy 0.5% of full scale 

Output ripple 250 µA 

Response time


134 


THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS 

MODELS PVM, LVM 

WIRING 

APPLICATION 

• Line-to-line voltage monitoring 

• Voltage in (PVM-480 high range) 

= 15 x (mA out) + 300 

• Voltage in (PVM-480 low range) 

= 7.5 x (mA out) + 150 

• Voltage in (PVM-120) 

= 3.75 x (mA out) + 75 

Recommended Accessory 

KLK-PAK Fuse Package 

(locate near PVM) L1-L2 

Output L2-L3 

Output 

L1-L3 

Output 

Notes: 

1. Wiring shown is for high range voltage input (360-600V). For low range 

voltage (180-300V), wire to terminals 2, 4, and 6, instead of 1, 3, and 5. 

2. PVM-120: Wire to terminals 2, 4, and 6. 

3. The installation must conform to all national and local codes and regulations. 

PVM 

Wiring for 480V/3Ø/60 Hz 

(see Notes above for other voltages) 

Recommended Accessory 

KLK-PAK Fuse Package 

(locate near LVM) 

Neutral 

APPLICATION 

• Phase-to-neutral voltage monitoring 

• Voltage in (LVM-120) = 3.75 x (mA out) + 75 

• Voltage in (LVM-240) = 7.5 x (mA out) + 150 

Notes: 

1. The installation must conform to all national and local codes 

and regulations. 

2. The LVM is suitable for single-phase (line-to-neutral) voltage 

monitoring. 

LVM 


RL 

RL 

RL 

Typical 4-20 mA inputs to processor. 

Max loop resistance is 600Ω/output, 

including processor load (R L ) 

and conductor. 

L1-N 

Output L2-N Output 

RL 

RL 

L3-N 

Output 

RL 

24 VDC 

Supply 

(±10%) 

Typical 4-20 mA inputs to processor. 

Max loop resistance is 600Ω/output, 

including processor load (R L ) 

and conductor. 


PVM-480 Line-to-line voltage monitor, 180-300/360-600V (208, 240, or 480V systems) 

PVM-120 Line-to-line voltage monitor, 90-150V (3Ø potential transformer secondaries) 

LVM-120 Phase-to-neutral voltage monitor, 90-150V (208 or 240V systems) 

LVM-240 Phase-to-neutral voltage monitor, 180-300V (480V systems) 


KLK-PAK Fuse package 

24 VDC 

Supply 

(±10%)


VOLTAGE DISCONNECT SWITCH BLOCK, CT SHORTING SWITCHES 

MODELS U3889, 209PF 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model U3889 Voltage Disconnect Switch Block 

provides a disconnecting means for power monitoring 

equipment. It provides isolation from line voltage and 

will short out and disconnect current transformer secondaries, 

preventing transformer damage that may occur 

when the circuit is opened under load. One side of the 

switch is connected to the circuits being measured; the 

other side of the switch is connected to the power monitoring 

equipment. The black plastic cover (209PF) is 

constructed so that all switches must be in the closed 

position before the cover can be sealed. 

FEATURES 

• Provides voltage disconnect and CT shorting/ 

disconnect for power instrumentation 

• Available in convenient metal screw cover 

enclosure 

• Color coded switch handles 

• UL recognized 


Voltage rating 600V 

Current rating 30A 

Dimensions 

Switch 9.5"L x 3.5"W x 2.75"D 

(24.1 x 8.9 x 7 cm) 

Cover (209PF) 10.1"L x 4.6"W x 3.1"D 

(25.7 x 11.7 x 7.9 cm) 

Optional enclosure Metal screw cover box, NEMA 1 

12"L x 10"W x 4"D 

(30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm) 


3.5 lb (1.5 kg) with cover 

11 lb (5 kg) with enclosure 


File #E109317 

209PF 

WIRING 

To Phase 

Voltage 


To Power Monitoring 

Equipment 

To CT 

Secondary 

U3889 

Notes: 

1. Red switch pulled up disconnects voltage 

2. Black switch pair pulled up shorts CT secondary 

and disconnects load from CT 


U3889-E Switch block mounted in a 12" x 10" x 4" metal screw cover box 

U3889 Switch block 

209PF Switch cover (not for use with U3889-E) 

U3889-E 

135 

POWER MONITORING


136 


METER PULSE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCER 

MODEL MPA-2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model MPA-2 Meter Pulse-to-Analog 

Transducer accepts kWh totalizer pulses from a utility 

meter and calculates kW demand using a 5-, 15-, or 

30-minute sliding window averaging scheme. The 

average kW demand value is output as a milliamp or 

voltage signal, which can be read by a BAS. The average 

kW demand can also be displayed using panel 

meter indicators such as the LPI Series. 

FEATURES 

• Converts kWh pulses to an analog kW signal 

• Both milliamp and VDC signals available 

• 5-, 15-, or 30-minute sliding window selection 

• 24 VAC/VDC power 

• Adjustable zero and span 

• Snap-track mounted 

• Furnished with complete instructions 

OPERATION 

The Model MPA-2 accumulates all the input pulses for 

the previous sliding window time period (i.e.,15 min.). It 

calculates an average kW value over this time period and 

outputs an analog signal representing this kW. The sliding 

window pulse count is updated on one-second intervals 

with the input from the oldest interval constantly 

being replaced by the input pulses from the most recent 

interval. 


Power supply 24 VAC ±10% @ 120 mA max 

24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA max 

Input signal 24 VAC/VDC switched through 

electronic or mechanical contact closure 

Input current 15 mA non-inductive at 24V 

Max pulse rate 10 pulses/sec 

Output signal 4-20 mA factory set, adjustable 0-20 mA 

zero and span; 2-10 VDC factory set, 

adjustable 0-18 VDC (both outputs can 

be used simultaneously) 

Output 

impedance Max output resistance 650Ω for mA output; 

max current available from voltage 

and current outputs combined is 25 mA 

MPA-2 

WIRING 

Voltage 

Signal 

mA 

Signal 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power 

VOLTS OUT 

mA OUT 

COM 

24 V PWR 

SIG + 

SIG – 

MPA-2 

Meter Pulse 

Contacts 

Notes: 

1. Meter pulse contact can switch either negative or positive signal 

connection. 

2. Any 24V power supply may be used to power the signal input from 

the meter pulse contacts, including the MPA-2 power supply as 

shown. 

User options Sliding window size is DIP switch-selectable 

for 5-, 15-, or 30-min. periods; kWh pulses to 

produce full-scale output are DIP switchselectable 

from 10 pulses per period to 

18,000 pulses per period 

Indicators Green status LED 

Steady green = normal 

Slow flashing green = cal mode 

Rapid flashing green = kW demand overflow 

Red signal LED = contact closure on the 

utility meter kWh contacts (LED is off when 

contacts open) 

Mounting 3.25" (8.3 cm) snap track (supplied with unit) 

Dimensions 3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1"D (8.3 x 11.7 x 2.54 cm) 


MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

MPA-2 Meter pulse-to-analog transducer


POWERTRAK POWER MONITORING INTERFACE 

PT-9000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele PT-9000 Series PowerTrak Power Monitoring 

Interface monitors numerous power system parameters for 

local display and/or remote connection to a BAS or other 

data acquisition equipment. Any three- or single-phase 

50/60 Hz electrical system from 120-600V can be monitored 

by the PT-9000 Series without the need for potential transformers. 

Higher voltage systems such as 5 kV or 15 kV services 

can also be monitored using potential transformers. 

The PT-9000 Series is available for use with 1A, 5A, or 

0.333V current transformers. Options include a current 

transformer shorting assembly, a digital LCD display, and a 

NEMA 3R enclosure. 

Furnished in a NEMA 1 hinged cover enclosure with external 

mounting feet and conduit knockouts on all sides, the 

PT-9000 Series is simple to install. Setup of the PT-9000 

Series is easily accomplished with a selector switch and 

DIP switches. A truly unique feature of the PT-9000 Series 

is its ability to identify and electronically correct wiring problems 

such as reversed CT polarities or improper phasing of 

voltages with CTs. 

FEATURES 

• Auto-corrects for wiring errors 

• Three-phase (Wye or Delta) or single-phase systems 

• Voltage selector switch (120-600V) 

• Accepts 1A, 5A, or 0.333V CTs 

• Low-voltage alarm contact 

• Two 4-20 mA outputs 

• Pulse output for KWH with selectable pulse rate 

• Optional two-line LCD display 

• Optional unique CT shorting assembly 

• Easily installed enclosure with external mounting feet 

• Optional LonWorks, Modbus, and Metasys communications 


Inputs 

System type Three-phase (Wye or Delta), or 

single-phase 

Input voltage 120-600 VAC 


Input current 0-5A, 0-1A, or 0-0.333V 

CT burden 0.75 VA max (1A or 5A inputs) 

CT primary 5, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 

500, 600, 750, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 

1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 5000, 

or 6000 

PT burden 4.8 VA max 

Internal fusing 0.5A, 600V (KLK-0.5) 

Outputs 

Pulse output Pulsed contact closure for KWH solid-state 

relay, 50 VAC/VDC max, 100 mA max 

Pulse rate Four selectable KWH per pulse rates, 50% 

duty cycle 

Max pulse rate Five pulses per second 

Contact output Maintained contact closure for low voltage 

alarm; 50 VAC/VDC, 100 mA max 

PT-9500-D 

(shown with optional display) 

C R US 

APPLICATION 

Remote (Outputs) and Local (Display) Monitoring 

KWH Total KW 

Window KW Peak window KW 

Total KVA Total power factor (PF) 

True RMS voltage True RMS current 

Local (Display) Monitoring - Each Phase 

True RMS voltage 

True RMS current 

KW (Wye systems) 

KVA (Wye systems) 

Power factor (Wye systems) 

All parameters can be monitored over a single pair of wires 

with a communications module installed. 

Analog outputs Two externally powered 4-20 mA 

signals selectable for total KW, window 

KW, peak window KW, total power factor, 

total KVA, RMS current*, or RMS voltage* 

Max load 725Ω each output @ 24 VDC 

Power External 24 VDC @ 60 mA max 

Accuracy 0.75% of F.S. (kW, kVA, V, A) 

± 0.03 PF (0.4 to 1.0 PF) 

Operating temp 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 


Display option** LCD, two lines, 16 characters/line 

Dimensions 12"H x 10"W x 4"D (30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm) 

NEMA 3R 20" H x 16"W x 6"D (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2 cm) 

Weight 12 lb (5.5 kg), NEMA 3R: 43 lb (20 kg) 


Certified to LonMark Interoperability 

Guidelines version 3.1 

* Voltage and current outputs are the average of the three-phase true 

RMS values. 

**When using potential transformers for voltages above 600V, some 

displayed values must be multiplied by the PT ratio. 

137 

POWER MONITORING


138 




CONFIGURATION 

DIP Switches 

Setting the DIP switches according to system requirements is suggested before applying power to the PT-9000 Series. 

However, it is not necessary to remove power from the PT-9000 Series in order to make changes to the DIP switch settings. 

A1 - A2: Define the power system type. Set these switches to match the type of system that is to be monitored. Select from 

three-phase Wye or Delta and single-phase two- or three-wire systems. 

A3 - A8: Define the low voltage alarm threshold. Select an appropriate value for the system voltage that is monitored. 

For Delta systems, low voltage is measured line-to-line. For Wye and single-phase systems, low voltage is measured 

line-to-neutral. Select from alarm threshold values ranging from 51-540V. 

B1 - B2: Define the KWH per pulse value. Set these switches to obtain an optimum pulse rate that can be read by the BAS 

controller or data acquisition equipment. Select from 10, 1, 0.1, and 0.01 KWH per pulse values. 

B3 - B5: Define mA loop #2 signal type. Set these switches for the power parameter to be represented by this 

4-20 mA output. Select from seven different parameters: Total KW, Window KW, Peak Window KW, Total KVA, 

Total Power Factor, True RMS Voltage*, True RMS Current*. 

B6 - B8: Define mA loop #1 signal type. Set these switches for the power parameter to be represented by this 

4-20 mA output. Select from seven different parameters: Total KW, Window KW, Peak Window KW, Total KVA, 

Total Power Factor, True RMS Voltage*, True RMS Current*. 

C1 - C5: Define the current transformer ratio. Set switches to match the primary current rating of the current transformers connected 

to the PT-9000 Series. Select from CT primaries ranging from 50 to 6000. 

* Voltage and current outputs are the average of the three-phase true RMS values. 

System Voltage Select Switch 

Set the SYSTEM VOLTAGE SELECT switch to the correct line-to-line system voltage (or potential transformer secondary voltage, 

if used) connected to the PT-9000 Series. If the actual system voltage is greater than the selector switch setting, the over 

voltage LED will flash, and the PT-9000 Series will cycle on and off to protect itself from over voltage. If this occurs, turn the 

selector switch to the correct system voltage setting. 

Auto-Configuration 

After all wiring connections are completed, the DIP switches are set correctly, the voltage selector switch is set to the correct system 

voltage, and the electrical system is energized, the PT-9000 Series can be auto-configured. To initiate the auto-configuring system, 

press the AUTO-CONFIG button. The PT-9000 Series will examine the current and voltage waveforms for correct phasing and CT 

polarity. During the auto-configuring process, the Volts/Amps phasing LEDs and CT reverse polarity LEDs will light in sequence. 

When the process is completed only one of the Volts/Amps phasing LEDs will be lighted, indicating the actual phasing between the 

voltage and current inputs to the PT-9000 Series. A lighted CT polarity LED indicates that the corresponding CT is installed or wired 

backwards giving a reverse polarity. A correctly wired PT-9000 Series will be indicated by all CT polarity LEDs extinguished and the 

left most Volts/Amps phasing LED lighted. Should any of the other phasing or CT polarity LEDs be lighted, the PT-9000 Series will 

electronically fix the wiring errors and provide correct and accurate outputs. No time consuming troubleshooting or wire swapping is 

required. 

Manual Configuration 

If the auto-configuring system is unable to determine the correct wiring configuration, the PT-9000 Series will enter the manual configuration 

mode and the manual config yellow LED will light. If this occurs, try initiating the auto-configuring system again, otherwise proceed 

with manual configuration. The electrical system load should be relatively constant during the manual configuration procedure. To manually 

configure the PT-9000 Series, set the DIP switches so that one of the 4-20 mA outputs represents Total KW. Connect a meter set to 

read DC milliamps to this output, or if the PT-9000 Series has the LCD display option, set one of the display lines to read Total KW. Next, 

press the manual config CT polarity button (CT POL) to scan through the different CT polarity combinations. Each time record the reading 

of the Total KW display or mA output. Allow the reading to stabilize before recording it. After reviewing all of the CT polarity combinations, 

press the manual config V-A MATCH button and repeat the process of scanning through the CT polarity combinations. After trying all 

possible combinations of V-A match and CT polarity, the correct configuration is the one producing the highest value of kW on the display 

or the highest mA reading on the meter. Manually set the PT-9000 Series to the correct configuration using the CT POL and VA 

MATCH push buttons.




WIRING - THREE-PHASE POWERTRAK APPLICATION 

CAUTION: Lethal voltages 

may be present across the 

secondary terminals of all 

current transformers. Keep 

these terminals shorted or 

connected to the transducer. 

1 

CT shorting assembly pins 

secured to PT-9000 CT Inputs 


CTC 

X2 X1 

CTB 

X2 X1 

CTA 

X2 X1 

MAKE CT CONNECTIONS 

TO THESE TERMINALS 

CTC CTB CTA 

X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 

C 

NORM 

SHORT 

B 

NORM 

SHORT 

A 

NORM 

SHORT 

Optional CT Shorting 

Assembly Detail 

CT shorting jumpers shown 

in the normal position 

L 

I 

N 

E 

Optional Cover-Mounted 

LCD Display Detail* 

L1 (AØ) 

L2 (BØ) 

L3 (CØ) 

*Manually scroll individual lines of display using the 

cover-mounted push buttons, to select different 

power system parameters. 

When using the SCT Series current 

transformers with the PT-9300, 

recommended wiring is a twisted 

shielded pair for each CT to avoid 

noise pick-up. Ground shield wire at 

PT-9300 ground lug only. 

Neutral (if Wye system) 

A 

B 

C 

Fuse per N.E.C. 

for conductor 

size & type. 

L-1 

L-2 

L-3 

CTC 

X2 X1 

DIPSWITCH A 

DIPSWITCH B 

DIPSWITCH C 

VOLTS 1 2 3 

CT H1 should face 

line side 

CT 

H1 

X2 X1 

CTB 

X2 X1 

CT Inputs 


PWR SYS 

TYPE 

LOW 

VOLTS 

THRESHOLD 

KWH/PULSE 

mA OUT 2 

SIGNAL 

SELECT 

mA OUT 1 

SIGNAL 

SELECT 

CT RATIO 

SELECT 

1 2 3 

1 2 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 

CTA 

X2 X1 

1 2 3 

CLEAR 

PEAK 

KW 

CT 

H1 

X2 X1 

1 2 3 

1 2 3 

AMPS A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C 

H-1 

1 

AUTO 

CONFIG 

CT 

H1 

X2 X1 

MANUAL 

CONFIG 

V-A MATCH CT POL 

CLEAR 

KWH 

COUNT 



Connections 

CT CT CT 

A B C 

REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE 

POLARITY POLARITY POLARITY 

SYS VOLTS OK KWH PULSE LOOP 2 UP LOOP 1 UP 

SYS VOLTS OK KWH PULSE MA OUT 2 MA OUT 1 

Low Voltage 

Alarm Output 

(closes on alarm) 

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 

X-1 

H-2 

X-2 

H-3 

X-3 

KWH Pulse 

Output 

L 

O 

A 

D 

PT Wiring Option 

(for systems greater than 600V) 

Connection option using one open 

Delta 3PT3 three-phase potential 

transformer with 120 VAC secondary. 

1 

1 

Input 

Voltage 

Fusing 

(2) KLK-0.5 

4-20 mA 

Output #2 

4-20 mA 

Output #1 

Neutral 

(if Wye 

system) 

L3 L2 L1 

Optional Potential Transformer 

For Voltages Above 600V (see PT Wiring Option) 

OVER VOLTS 

LED 


Select Switch 

120-144V 

190-277V 

346-415V 

440-480V 

OFF 

PT-9000 

SERIES 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

600V 

Location 

of 

Optional 

Communications 

Module 

L 

O 

A 

D 

139 

POWER MONITORING


140 




WIRING - SINGLE-PHASE POWERTRAK APPLICATIONS 

1 

1 

* 

When using the SCT Series 

current transformers with the 

PT-9300, recommended wiring 

is a twisted shielded pair for 

each CT to avoid noise pick-up. 

Ground shield wire at 


Make CT connections 

to terminal strip on optional 

CT shorting assembly if 

present. See Wiring - 

Three-Phase PowerTrak 

Application. 

When using the SCT Series 

current transformers with the 

PT-9300, recommended wiring 

is a twisted shielded pair for 

each CT to avoid noise pick-up. 

Ground shield wire at 


* 

Make CT connections 

to terminal strip on optional 

CT shorting assembly if 

present. See Wiring - 

Three-Phase PowerTrak 

Application. 

L 

I 

N 

E 

L 

I 

N 

E 

PT-9500 D S 

L 

N 

L1 

L2 

N 

X2 X1 



PT-9500 PowerTrak power monitoring interface, 5A CT input 

PT-9300 PowerTrak power monitoring interface, 0.333V CT input 

PT-9100 PowerTrak power monitoring interface, 1A CT input 

OPTIONS 

D LCD display, cover-mounted for local monitoring 

S CT shorting assembly (not necessary for PT-9300) 

3R PowerTrak mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure 

CT 

H1 


line side 

No No 

Connection Connection 

CTC 

X2 X1 

No 

Connection 

CTB 

X2 X1 

CT Inputs 


line side 

CTC 

X2 X1 

CT 

H1 

X2 X1 

CTB 

X2 X1 

CTA 

X2 X1 

CT 

H1 

X2 X1 

CT Inputs 

* 

CTA 

X2 X1 

Example: PT-9500-D-S PowerTrak with LCD display and 

CT shorting assembly 


PT-NTL-10 LonWorks communications module 

PT-NT4-N2 Metasys ® communications module 

PT-NT4-M Modbus communications module 

AL12AR Cylinder lock kit 

U3889-E External shorting/disconnect assembly 

N 

Jumper 

L 



Connections 

Single-Phase Two-Wire Systems 

* * 

1 

1 

N 

L2 

L1 



Connections 

Single-Phase Three-Wire Systems 

No 

Connection 

No 

Connection 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L 

O 

A 

D


COMMUNICATION MODULES FOR PT-9000 

MODELS PT-NTL-10, PT-NT4-N2, PT-NT4-M 

DESCRIPTION 

Models PT-NTL-10 (LonWorks), PT-NT4-N2 (Metasys), 

and PT-NT4-M (Modbus) are communication modules 

for the PowerTrak PT-9000 power monitoring interface. 

They read data from the PT-9000’s main processor, format 

it, and transmit the data to a network. They allow all 

of the power system parameters measured by the PT- 

9000 to be monitored over a single pair of wires. 

FEATURES 

• Monitoring of all PT-9000 parameters over a single 

pair of wires 

• Remote reset with time stamp of kWh and peak 

kW parameters 

• Optically isolated RS-485 for elimination of network 

grounding concerns on the PT-NT4-M and -N2 

• FTT-10 transceiver on the PT-NTL-10 

• Standard Network Variable Types (SNVT) are used 

to meet LonMark Interoperability Guidelines on 

the PT-NTL-10 

• Pluggable field-wiring screw terminals 

• Status LED indication 

• Factory or field installation to any PT-9000 


Power supply None required, powered by PT-9000 

Network 

PT-NTL-10 LonWorks FTT-10 transceiver 

PT-NT4-N2 Metasys N2 protocol, RS-485, halfduplex, 

9600 baud 

PT-NT4-M Modbus protocol, RS-485, halfduplex, 

9600 baud 

Field wiring Pluggable screw terminals 

Dimensions 4.5''H x 2.6''W x 1.7''D 

(11.4 x 6.6 x 4.3 cm) 




Approvals UL listed, File #E161500 

PT-NTL-10 Certified to LonMark Interoperability 

Guidelines v 3.1 

PT-NT4-N2 Complies with Metasys guidelines 

WIRING 



PT-NTL-10 LonWorks communication module for the PT-9000 

PT-NT4-N2 Metasys communication module for the PT-9000 

PT-NT4-M Modbus communication module for the PT-9000 

Note: Module can be factory or field installed. Specify factory installation when ordering the PT-9000. 

Ribbon 

Cable 

Status 

LED 

PT-9000 

Series 

PT-NTL-10 

FTT-10 

CONTROL 

MODULE 

FT-10 NWK 

To LonWorks 

FT-10 Network 

Communication Module 

Service Button 

Service LED 

Not Polarity 

Sensitive 

Ribbon 

Cable 

DIP Switch D 

(device address) 

DIP Switch E 

(comm options) 

PT-9000 

C R US 

PT-9000 

Series 

PT-NT4-N2 

PT-NT4-M 

Status 

LED 

4 3 2 1 

REF N2- N2+ 

(NWKB) (NWKA) 

For complete installation and operating instructions call Trane. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

141 

POWER MONITORING


142 


MISCELLANEOUS TRANSFORMERS 

MODELS 189, 190XSUM, 3PT3, CTW3, 468 

MODEL 189 ISOLATION CURRENT TRANSFORMER 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 189-005 is a wound primary current transformer that provides isolation 

in a current transformer (CT) circuit. This is useful in systems using a common CT 

return wire or when connecting into existing CT circuits. 

MODEL 190XSUM SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 190XSUM is an auxiliary transformer for use in the secondary of 

main current transformers to totalize the outputs of two to five current transformers 

and provide a single 0-5A output. 

MODEL 3PT3 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 3PT3 is specifically designed to monitor voltage of three-phase systems 

up to 5 kV for use in energy management control and metering applications. 

With the primary wired line-to-line, this transformer will step-down medium 

voltage three-phase circuits to 120 VAC for input to power monitors (PT-9500) 

and voltage monitors (PVM-120). Three primary fuses are provided. 

MODEL CTW3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model CTW3 provides a low-amperage current output (5A) proportional to 

line current on applications requiring a current transformer with an insulation 

class of 5 kV. The Model CTW3 primary is wired in series with the line being 

measured, and the secondary is connected to power monitors (PT-9500) or current 

monitors (4CTV). 

MODEL 468 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 468 is designed for power monitoring or metering applications. It is 

operated line-to-line but also may be operated line-to-ground or line-to-neutral at 

reduced voltage (58% of rated volts). The Model 468 is ideal for use as an input 

to the CLE Series of power monitoring transducers. 


For complete specifications and ordering information on these products, 

call a Trane Representative. 

189 

190XSUM 

3PT3 

CTW3 

468

PRESSURE

PRODUCTS 

Try the Kele DPA Series 

Differential Pressure 

Transmitter on page 

143! 

SERVICES 

We Calibrate and Ship 

the same day! 

SOLUTIONS 

Our Pressure section offers 

choices that meet your 

International needs. 

PRESSURE 


DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 

1900-5-MR — Manual Reset Air Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 

1910 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 

24-013/24-014 — Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 

3000 Series — Photohelic Differential Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 

AFS-222/AFS-262 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 

AFS-460/AFS-460-DSS — Manual Reset Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 

P32 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 

P74 — Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 

RFS-4001 — Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 

RH-3/RH-3-2 — Air Sensing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

260 Series — Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 

860D,880D,885D — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 

DPA Series — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 

DPW-692 — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 

M230 — Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 

M264 — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 

M267MR — Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 

M30 — NEMA 4 Differential Pressure Transmitter, Loop Powered . . . . . . . . . . .149 

M40 — NEMA 4 Differential Pressure Transmitter, AC Powered . . . . . . . . . . . .149 

MPM — Modus Microprocessor-Based Panel-Mount Pressure Transmitter . . . .152 

MR — Multirange Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 

PCM — Pressure Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 

RPM-1 — Room Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 

T30 — Differential Pressure Transmitter, Loop Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 

T40 — Differential Pressure Transmitter, AC Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 

W30 — Stainless Steel Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . .169 

XLdp Series — Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 

ZPS Series — BAPI Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 

PRESSURE SWITCHES 

25 — Pressure-Electric Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 

P10 — Pressure-Electric Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 

PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

209 — Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 

P51 Series — Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 

PSS2 — Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 

PTX1 — Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 

PVI-1/PVI-2 — Pneumatic Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 

GAUGES AND ACCESSORIES 

21121 — Air Duct Impact Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

2000 Series — Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 

3VLV — Three-Valve Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 

47B/47S — Piston Snubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

747 Series — Porous Snubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

A-300 Series — Air Pressure Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

BVA-5 — Bypass Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 

PG Series — Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 

PT — Steam Pigtail Syphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 

RPS — Room Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 

SD-015/SD-030 — Surge Dampener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 


PSI PRESSURE 

KELE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

DPA SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele DPA Series Differential Pressure 

Transmitter is a very cost-effective, low-range differential 

air pressure transmitter for duct pressure applications 

where measurement of pressure differentials up to 10" 

W.C. is required. The DPA Series incorporates a 

piezoresistive, silicon micromachined sensing element 

and integrated temperature compensation for excellent 

performance and accuracy. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• 4-20 mA output standard or 1-5/2-10 VDC outputs 

• 24 VAC or 24 VDC power 

• Brass barb fittings for 1/4" tubing 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


4.3 

(10.8) 

Output 

Ground 

Up Up 

HI LO 

3.4 

(8.5) 

1/4" 

Barbed 

Fitting 

1.4 

(3.4) 


Supply voltage 24 VAC, 24-36 VDC 

Power 0.75 VA 


Compensated 

temp range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Full scale shift ±2% full-scale output, 0° to 50°C 

Compatible media Dry air or inert non-conductive 

gases 

Output signal Two-wire 4-20 mA (550� max) or 

three-wire 1-5 or 2-10 VDC 

(100 k� min) 

DPA-1-20 

Note: The unit should be 

mounted on a vertical 

surface (see up 

arrows). If the surface 

is not vertical, see the 

installation instructions 

for necessary 

adjustments. 

Input range 0-1" W.C. to 0-10" W.C. 

Proof pressure 100" W.C. 

Accuracy ±1% full-scale output, includes 

non-linearity, hysteresis, and nonrepeatability 

Repeatability ±0.3% full-scale output, nominal 

Weight 5.1 oz (144g) 

143 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

144 

PRESSURE 

KELE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

DPA SERIES 

WIRING 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

4-20 mA 2-10 VDC 

Output 

Ground 

DPA-X-20 DPA-X-10 

Two-Wire 4-20 mA 

with 24 VDC Power Supply 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

2-10 VDC 4-20 mA 

Output 

Ground 



DPA Differential pressure transmitter 

INPUT RANGE ("W.C.) 

1 0-1 

2 0-2 

3 0-3 

5 0-5 

10 0-10 

OUTPUT SIGNAL 

20 4-20 mA 

10 2-10 VDC 

5 1-5 VDC 

Output 

Ground 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Three-Wire 2-10 VDC 

with 24 VAC Transformer 

Note: Same wiring for 1-5 VDC models 

DPA-X-10 DPA-X-20 

Three-Wire 2-10 VDC 

with 24 VDC Power Supply 

Note: Same wiring for 1-5 VDC models 

Output 

Ground 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Three-Wire 4-20 mA 

with 24 VAC Transformer 

DPA 10 5 Example: DPA-10-5 Differential pressure transmitter with 

input range of 0-10" W.C. and 1-5 VDC output signal

PRESSURE 

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL M264 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model M264 Differential Pressure Transmitter is 

a low-air pressure transmitter able to sense differential 

pressure in both negative and positive ranges. The 

Model M264 incorporates a tensioned stainless steel 

diaphragm to form a variable capacitor that will produce 

variation in the output signal. The Model M264’s durable 

design will tolerate an overpressure of 10 psig (68.95 

kPa) and has an unconditional three-year warranty. 

FEATURES 

• 4-20 mA output signal 

• Voltage output signal optional 

• 10 psig (68.70 kPa) overpressure 

• Three-year unconditional warranty 

• 1% accuracy 

• Reverse wiring protected 

• Stainless steel diaphragm 

• Ideal for air and non-conducting gases 


Supply voltage 

Current models Based on circuit resistance 

Min 9 + (0.02 x circuit 

resistance) 

Max 32 + (0.004 x circuit 

resistance) 

Voltage models 9-30 VDC 

Power 0.7 VA 

Accuracy 

RSS (at constant temp) ±1% FS 

Non-linearity ±0.96% FS 

Non-repeatability 0.1% FS 

Hysteresis 0.2% FS 

Thermal effects 

Compensated range 0° to 150°F (-18° to 65°C) 

Zero/Span shift 0.033°F (0.018°C) 

Analog output 

Voltage (three-wire) 0-5 VDC 

Input impedance �5000� 

Current (two-wire) 4-20 mA 

Max load 800� 

Overpressure ±10 psig (68.95 kPa) 

APPLICATIONS 

• HVAC building automation 

• Variable air volume control 

• Environmental pollution control 

• Lab and fume hood control 

• Filter monitoring 

• Medical instrumentation 

• Velocity pressure measurement 

Temp ratings 

Operating 0° to 175°F (-18° to 79°C) 

Storage -65° to 250°F (-54° to 121°C) 

Enclosure Fire retardant, glass-filled 

polyester 

Approvals CE certified 

Connections 3/16" OD barbed brass 


(14.00 x 7.62 x 4.85 cm) 

Weight 

Position Effect 

0.55 lb (0.25 kg) 

(Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with 

diaphragm vertical) 

Range (in) Zero offset (%FS/G) 

0-10 0.12 

0-5 0.14 

0-1.0 0.22 

0-0.1 2.10 

145 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

146 

PRESSURE 


MODEL M264 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Low 

High 

Zero Span 

4.56 

(11.59) 

Model M264 

5.06 

(12.86) 

4-20 mA Output 

M264 - 2R5WB - C 

High 

Low 

Power 

Supply 

9-30 VDC 

4-20 mA 

1.66 

(4.22) 

Power 

Supply 

9-30 VDC 

COM EXC OUT 

2.38 

(6.03) 

0-5 VDC 

0-5 VDC Output 

High Low 

Example: M264-2R5WB-C Differential pressure transmitter 

with a 4-20 mA output proportional to a range of 

-2.5" to 2.5" W.C. (622 Pa) 

TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE 

RANGE 

PRESSURE RANGE RANGE SPECIFYING PRESSURE RANGE 

CODE "W.C. Pa CODE 

"W.C. Pa 

0R1WD 

R25WD 

0R5WD 

001WD 

2R5WD 

005WD 

010WD 

025WD 

050WD 

100WD 

0-0.10 0-24.9 

0-0.25 0-62.3 

0-0.50 0-124 

0-1.00 0-249 

0-2.50 0-622 

0-5.00 0-1245 

0-10.0 0-2491 

0-25.0 0-6227 

0-50.0 0-12455 

0-100.0 0-24910 



M264 Differential pressure transmitter 

XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below) 

C 4-20 mA output (stocked at Kele) 

V 0-5 VDC output (call Kele for availability) 

0R1WB 

R25WB 

0R5WB 

001WB 

2R5WB 

005WB 

010WB 

025WB 


264-A1 Conduit housing for M264 

±0.1 ±24.9 

±0.25 ±62.3 

±0.5 ±124 

±1.0 ±249 

±2.5 ±622 

±5.0 ±1245 

±10.0 ±2491 

±25.0 ±6227

PRESSURE 


XLdp SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Ashcroft XLdp Series Differential Pressure 

Transmitters are an industrial-quality differential air 

pressure transmitter family for use with air and other noncorrossive 

gases. The XLdp models are available in 

ranges from 0.1" to 25" W.C and can withstand up to 10 

psid overpressure with no damage to the unit. The allstainless 

steel XLdp models are available in either 

±0.25% or ±0.5% accuracy and come standard with 

NIST certification. The compact RXLdp models are stainless 

steel and Lexan construction, with 1% accuracy. The 

CXLdp models have the same technology as the XLdp 

and RXLdp models but are designed to be lower cost. 

They are ABS construction, 0.8% accuracy, and can be 

DIN rail mounted. 

FEATURES 

• Choices in accuracy 

• Reliable, stable capacitance sensor 

• Low-range models down to ±0.05" W.C. 

• Positive or bidirectional ranges available 

• Reverse polarity protected 

• High proof pressure 

• Calibration curve supplied with XLdp models 

• DIN rail mount CXLdp models 

• Power LED on CXLdp models 



Accuracy 

XLdp 0.25% or 0.5% 

RXLdp 1% 

CXLdp 0.8% 

Stability ±0.5% FS/yr 

Output 

XLdp 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC 

RXLdp 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 

CXLdp 4-20 mA 

Max mA load 545� @ 24 VDC, up to 

1045� @ 36 VDC (1091� for 

CXLdp) 

Overpressure 

Proof 10 psid (69 kPa) 

CXLdp RXLdp 

XLdp 

Burst 25 psig (172 kPa) 

Operating Temp Range 

XLdp -20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C) 

RXLdp, CXLdp 0° to 160°F (-18° to 71°C) 

Compensated Temp Range 

XLdp 35° to 135°F (2° to 57°C) 

RXLdp 40° to 125°F (4° to 52°C) 

CXLdp 35° to 130°F (2° to 54°C) 

Operating humidity 10% to 95% RH noncondensing 

Weight 

XLdp 14.0 oz (0.4 kg) 

RXLdp 4.5 oz (0.13 kg) 

CXLdp 2.5 oz (0.07 kg) 

Response time 250 ms 

147 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

148 

PRESSURE 


XLdp SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

1.45 

(3.7) 

POWER 

HI LO 

+ - 

- 

+ 

ZERO SPAN 

1.89 

(4.8) 

– + 

4-20 mA 

3.33 

2.90 

(8.5) 

(7.4) 

1-5 

VDC 

0.35 (0.89) 

1.32 

(3.3) 

OUT V– V+ 

4.2 

(10.7) 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

4.8 

(12.2) 1.9 

(4.8) 

1.7 

(4.3) 

1.3 

(3.3) 

0.20 

(0.53) 

1.1 

(2.8) 

2.3 (5.8) 

2.2 

(5.6) 

3.3 

(8.4) 

0.6 

1.7 (1.5) 

1.1 (4.3) 

(2.8) 0.14 

2.8 (7.1) 

(0.4) 

CXLdp XLdp RXLdp 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

Voltage 

4-20 mA 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 


0-10 

or 

1-5 VDC 


XL XLdp differential pressure transmitter 

RX RXLdp differential pressure transmitter 

CX CXLdp differential pressure transmitter 

3 0.25% accuracy (XL only) 

5 0.50% accuracy (XL only) 

7 1% accuracy (RX only) 

8 0.80% accuracy (CX only) 

MB2 1/4" barbed stainless steel fittings 

F01 1/8" FNPT (CX only) 

42 4-20 mA signal output 

15 1-5 VDC signal output (XL and RX only) 

10 0-10 VDC signal output (RX only) 

ST Electrical termination (XL and RX only) 

PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. 

P1IW 0-0.1 *P05IWL ±0.05 

P25IW 0-0.25 P1IWL ±0.1 

P5IW 0-0.5 P25IWL ±0.25 

1IW 0-1.0 P5IWL ±0.5 

2IW 0-2.0 1IWL ±1.0 

2P5IW 0-2.5 2IWL ±2.0 

3IW 0-3.0 2P5IWL ±2.5 

5IW 0-5.0 3IWL ±3.0 

10IW 0-10.0 5IWL ±5.0 

10IWL ±10.0 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

CXLdp XLdp RXLdp 

XL 3 MB2 42 ST P1IWL Example: XL-3-MB2-42-ST-P1IWL Differential 

pressure transmitter with 0.25% accuracy 

that measures from -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. with a 4-20 mA output 

3.7 

(9.4) 

*Not a valid range for CXLdp 


101A213-01 1/2" Conduit/Plenum kit for CXLdp transmitter 

0.4 

(1.0) 

0.9 (2.3) 

1.6 

(4.1) 

4-20 mA 

0.6 

(1.5) 

3.8 

(9.7) 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply

PSI PRESSURE 


M30/40, T30/40 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Modus M30/40 and T30/40 Series Differential 

Pressure Transmitters are reliable, stable, low air pressure 

transmitters with 4-20 mA outputs. The M30 and 

T30 Series are DC-powered, while the M40 and T40 

Series are AC-powered. Ranges up to 2" W.C. utilize a 

differential capacitance cell for pressure measurement. 

Higher ranges utilize piezoresistive sensors. Ranges are 

available from 0" to 0.1" W.C. to 0" to 10" W.C. 

All models may be furnished in bidirectional ranges, 

which will measure both positive and negative pressure 

differentials. Models M30 and M40 are for NEMA 4 

applications or applications that require CE-approved 

products. 

FEATURES 

• Position insensitive 

• No moving parts to wear out 

• Compact size 

• Fast response time due to low internal volume 

• Solid-state circuitry for long life 

• Low-power consumption 

• NEMA 4 enclosure and CE certified 

(Models M30/40) 



M30, T30 11-32 VDC (protected against reversal 

of polarity) 

M40, T40 19-32 VAC (24 VAC nominal); 100-140 

VAC (120 VAC nominal) 

Power 

M30, T30 0.9 VA 

M40, T40 1 VA 

Accuracy 1% of range (including non-linearity and 

hysteresis) 


Zero ±0.05%/°C 

Span ±0.02%/°C 


Max load 

M30, T30 700� @ 24 VDC (= 50 x VDC – 500) 

M40, T40 750� 

Max overpressure See Figure 1 in “Ordering” 

Temp ratings 

Operating 32° to 115°F (0° to 45°C) 


NEMA/IP ratings 

T40, M40 NEMA 4 (IP65) 

T30, M30 None 

APPLICATION 

M30 

• General automation 

• Medical and analytical instruments 

• Leak detection 

• HVAC monitoring of the following: 

• Filter differential pressures 

• Clean room pressures 

• Variable air volume systems 

• Velocity pressures 

T30 

Approvals 

M30, M40 CE certified 

Connections 

Pressure 3/16" dia suitable for 1/8" or 5/32" 

ID (1/4" OD) Tygon or polyurethane 

tubing; integral filters at both ports 

Electrical 3/8" terminals, #6 screws 

Weight 

M30 1.27 lb (0.58 kg) 

M40 1.2 lb (0.55 kg) 

T30 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) 

T40 0.57 lb (0.26 kg) 

Case 

M30, M40 NEMA 4, aluminum alloy #A380 

T30, T40 Flame retardant, glass-reinforced 

NORYL 

Vibration resistance 5G to 50 Hz 

Zero/Span adjustments 

Noninteractive adjustments by means 

of 20-turn potentiometers for fine 

resolution 

149 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

150 

PRESSURE 


M30/40, T30/40 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Two Holes 

0.19 dia (0.5) 

3/8" Terminal Strip 

with #6 Screws 

0.66 

(1.68) 

WIRING 

Span Zero 

IN 

120 VAC – + 

5.15 

(13.08) 

4.7 

(12.07) 

4.25 

(10.80) 

Side View 

24 VAC or 

120 VAC Power 

T30 

Transmitter 

+ 

- 

Pressure 

Lo Hi 

1.50 

(3.81) 

3.00 

(7.62) 

3/16 OD Pressure Fittings 

1.48 

1.13(3.76) 

(2.87) 

0.13 

(0.33) 

4.54 

(11.53) 

Side View 

T40 M30/M40 

MA 

IN OUT 

AC – + 

4-20 mA 

Signal 


T30 Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 1 case 

T40 Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 1 case 

M40 Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 4 case, CE certified 

M30 Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 4 case, CE certified 

XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 to the right) 

POWER SUPPLY (T40, M40 only) 

C 24 VAC power 

D 120 VAC power 

OPTIONS (leave blank for standard unit) 

B Bidirectional (12 mA @ zero pressure) 

3.00 

(7.62) 

2.18 

(5.54) 

T40 002 C B 

Example: T40-002-C-B Differential pressure transmitter 4 mA @ -0.2" W.C., 

12 mA @ 0" W.C., and 20 mA @ + 0.2" W.C., 24 VAC power 

Note: NIST certification options available, consult Trane 

Two Holes 

0.19 dia (0.5) 

3/8" Terminal Strip 

with #6 Screws 

0.66 

(1.68) 

TABLE 1. RANGE 

RANGE 

CODE 

001 

002 

003 

005 

010 

020 

030 

050 

100 

Span Zero 

T40 M40 

Power Supply 

11-32 VDC 

T30 

4-20 mA Signal 

}Power Supply 

24, 120 VAC 

Enclosure Ground 

1 

NC 2 

3 

4 

J1 


Enclosure 

Ground 

+ 

- 

- + 

GE 

MODEL 

01E 

02E 

03E 

04E 

05E 

06E 

07E 

08E 

09E 

5.15 

(13.08) 

4.7 

(11.94) 

4.25 

(10.80) 

T30 

PRESSURE RANGE* 

"W.C. Overpressure 

0-0.1 

0-0.2 

0-0.3 

0-0.5 

0-1.0 

0-2.0 

0-3.0 

0-5.0 

0-10.0 

Pressure 

Lo Hi 

Side View 

Signal 

Out 

AC IN – 

5 4 3 2 1 

Wire 

Wire 

Power Supply 

11-32 VDC 

+ – 

M30 

5" W.C. 

5" W.C. 

5" W.C. 

5" W.C. 

20" W.C. 

20" W.C. 

20" W.C. 

5 psid 

5 psid 

* Call Trane for higher pressure ranges or metric ranges 

J2 

4-20 mA 

Signal 


1.50 

(3.81) 

3.00 

(7.62) 

3/16" OD Pressure Fittings 

1.48 

1.13 

(3.76) 

(2.87) 

0.13 

(0.33)

PRESSURE 


MODELS 860D, 880D, 885D 

DESCRIPTION 

Models 860D, 880D, 885D Differential Pressure Transmitters 

from Auto Tran are cost effective and 1% accurate, which make 

these units ideal for a variety of air pressure applications. The 

Model 860D comes standard with a three-wire 4-20 mA output 

and is also available with 1-5, 1-6, or 1-10 VDC output. The 

Model 880D has a two-wire 4-20 mA output. The Model 885D 

is the same as the 880D except with display. The plug-in terminal 

blocks ensure simple and quick wiring. 

FEATURES 

• Two- or three-wire 4-20 mA models standard 

• 1-5, 1-6, or 1-10 VDC models available 

• 20 psig (137.9 kPa) overpressure 

• Pluggable terminal block 




860D 18-24 VAC/VDC, < 10 mA 

880D, 885D 14-36 VDC 

Output signal 

860D Three-wire 4-20 mA (std), 1-5, 1-6, 

1-10 VDC (optional) 

880D, 885D Two-wire 4-20 mA 

Load 

860D 2000� min (voltage), 500� max 

(current) 

880D, 885D (Vs-14) x 50� max (500� at 

24 VDC) 

Accuracy ±1% FS 

DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

WIRING 

Power Supply 

14-36 VDC 

Stability

PRESSURE 

152 

PRESSURE 

MODUS PANEL-MOUNT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

MPM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The MPM Series is a programmable, microprocessor-based, 

panel-mounted air differential pressure transmitter with a 3-1/2" 

LCD digital display. The MPM-1 is the base model with display 

and push-button zero. The MPM-2 features high/low status 

LEDs, an analog output, 2A or 7A relays, or any combination of 

one analog output and one relay contact. The MPM Series is 

packaged in a compact 1/8" DIN enclosure and features an 

easy-to-use menu face to control the setpoints and the zero 

adjustments. The MPM Series is available in several ranges up 

to ±20" W.C. or ±5 kPa and includes a gasket for NEMA 4 

applications. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• High/Low LEDs 

• Large 3-1/2" LCD digital display 

• Compact 1/8" DIN enclosure 

• Easy-to-use menu pad 

• Zero calibration button 

• Optional analog outputs 

• Optional relay outputs 

• Bidirectional 



MPM-1 5-36 VDC 

MPM-2 11-32 VDC 

Power 30 mA without relays 

100 mA with analog output or relays 

200 mA with analog outputs and relays 

Accuracy ±0.5% of range 

Zero ±0.05% FS/°C 

Span ±0.02% FS/°C 

Output 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC 

MPM-2 Dual contacts, SPDT 2A 

Dual contacts, SPDT 7A 

Warm-up time Three min. to rated accuracy 

Proof pressure Three x range 

in 

(cm) 

1.90 

(4.83) 


3.75 

(9.53) 

MPM-2 

DIMENSIONS WIRING 


MPM Modus panel-mount differential pressure transmitter 

1 Base model 

2 Enhanced model 

06EB 2.0" W.C. 

08EB 5.0" W.C 

09EB 10.0" W.C. 

11EB 20.0" W.C. 

09PB 2 kPaD 

11PB 5 kPaD 

OPTIONS (MPM-2 only) 

R2 2 SPDT 2A relays 

R7 2 SPDT 7A relays 

AO 4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC analog output 

R2AO Combination of R2 and AO output options 

R7AO Combination of R7 and AO output options 

MODUS mpm-2 

High 

Zero 

Mode 

1.56 

(3.96) 

Low Signal Power 

Inches H 2 O 

3/16" Barbed 

Connection 

Ports 

Power 

Supply 

(see specs) 

(–) 

(+) 

Temp 



Relative humidity 10% to 90% RH 

Connections 

Electrical Power: screw terminal, 14-26 AWG 

Output: screw terminal, 16-28 AWG 

Pressure Two 3/16" barbs for 1/8" ID tubing 

Dimensions 1/8" DIN, 1.56"D 

Outside 1.90"H x 3.75"W x 1.56"D 

(4.83 x 9.53 x 6.35 cm) 

Cutout (required) 1.77"H x 3.62"D (4.5 x 9.19 cm) 


Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP65) 

MPM 2 06EB R2 Example: MPM-2-06EB-R2 enhanced modus panel-mount 

pressure meter with range of 2.0" W.C. and 2 SPDT 2A relays

PRESSURE 

MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY 

260 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 260 Series Multirange Differential Pressure 

Transmitter with Display incorporates many powerful, 

attractive and easy to use features as standard in a 

multi-configurable package. One model with very low 

selectable differential pressure ranges is perfect for 

measuring space static pressure and duct airflow velocity 

pressure. A second model with higher selectable 

ranges is used for sensing duct static pressure. Two similar 

models, with Pascal engineering units instead of 

inches of water, are also available. The 260 Series 

comes standard with a wide variety of selectable output 

signals, 1-5 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, making 

it compatible with virtually any building automation 

controller. 

FEATURES 

• Standard LCD on all models 

• Slide-switches for configuration 

• Selectable analog output 

• Designed for AC/DC unregulated power supplies 

• Display feedback of configuration selection 

• LCD flashes when out of range 

• Push button zero 

• Optional integral duct static probe 

• Models with ranges in Pascal units 

• 11-point NIST certification available 



Current models 12-30 VDC 

Voltage models 24 VAC/VDC, 3.9 mA 

Output Voltage 

(three-wire) 0-5, 1-5, and 0-10 VDC, 

500� min output impedance 

Current (two-wire) 4-20 mA, 800 ohms max 

@ 30 VDC 

Accuracy ±1.0% FS at constant temp 





Compensated 

range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Zero/Span shift 0.02% FS/°F (0.036% FS/°C) 

APPLICATIONS 

• Space Static Pressure 

• Duct Static Pressure 

• Duct Airflow 

• Clean Room Pressure 

• Air Lock/Isolation Rooms 

• Air Filter Monitoring 

Maximum pressure 10 psig (69 kPa) 

Media compatibility 

Temp range 

Air or non-conducting gases 


Storage 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C) 

Approvals Meets CE standards, 

UL94V-0 flame resistant 

enclosure plenum rated 

Connections 3/16" OD barbed brass 

Weight 

Position Effect* 

8 oz (227g) 

Range (in) Zero offset (% FS/G) 

0 to 1.0 0.17 

0 to 10.0 0.10 

*Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with diaphragm vertical 

153 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

154 

PRESSURE 

MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY 

260 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(mm) 

.59 

(14.9) 

1.50 

(38.1) 

4.75 

(120.7) 

4.25 

(108) 

1.03 

(26.3) 

.87 

(22) 

4.15 

(105.4) 

150° 

Ø.86 

(21.9) 

1.35 

(34.3) 

.63 

(15.9) 

SELECTABLE RANGES PER MODEL 

2601 MS1 S 

1.3 

(31.83) 

Model Unidirectional ranges Bi-directional ranges 

MS1 0" to 0.1" WC -0.05" to 0.05" WC 

0" to 0.25" WC -0.125' to 0.125" WC 

0" to 0.5" WC -0.25" to 0.25" WC 

0" to 1.0" WC -0.25" to 0.25" WC 

MS2 0" to 1.0" WC -0.5" to 0.5" WC 

0" to 2.5" WC -01.25' to 01.25" WC 

0" to 5.0" WC -2.5" to 2.5" WC 

0" to 10.0" WC -5.0" to 5.0" WC 

MS3 0 to 25 Pa, -12.5 to 12.5 Pa, 

0 to 50 Pa, -25 to 25 Pa, 

0 to 100 Pa, -50 to 50 Pa, 

0 to 250 Pa -125 to 125 Pa 

MS4 0 to 250 Pa, -125 to 125 Pa, 

0 to 500 Pa, -250 to 250 Pa, 

0 to 1000 Pa, -500 to 500 Pa, 

0 to 2500 Pa -1250 to 1250 Pa 

LOW 

WIRING 


.63 

(15.9) 

.63 

(15.9) 

24V AC/DC 

Nominal Excitation 

+ 

Power Supply 

13 - 30V - 


2601 Multirange differential pressure transmitter with display 

RANGES 

MS1 0-0.1" to 0-1.0" WC ranges, wall mount 

MS2 0-1.0" to 0-10" WC ranges, wall mount 

MS3 0-25 to 0-250 Pa ranges, wall mount 

MS4 0-250 to 0-2500 Pa ranges, wall mount 

PROBE OPTION 

S Static pressure probe 

NIST OPTION 

NIST 11-point calibration certificate included 

Knockout for 

1/2" conduit 

Optional Static 

Probe Diagram 

Example: 2061MS1S Model 260 transducer 0 to 1.0 WC" 

range with optional static pressure probe. 


RPS, SPS Room pressure sensors 

A-301, A-302, A-345 Duct static pressure sensors 

160-xxxm, SSS-1000 Duct pitot tubes 

EXC COM OUT 

+ 

- 

+ 

LOW 

Voltage - 3-Wire, 1-5, 0-5, 0-10 VDC Configuration 

24V (DC Only) 

Nominal Excitation 

+ 

Power Supply 

13 - 30V - 

EXC COM OUT 

+ 

- 

X 

+ 

- 

+ 

- 

Current - 2-Wire, 4-20 mA Configuration 

9.20 

(233.7) 

7.61 

(193.2) 

Voltage 

Monitor 

Current 

Monitor

PRESSURE 

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FROM BAPI 

ZPS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The BAPI ZPS Series Differential Pressure 

Transmitter is an accurate, rugged, and economical 

solution for measuring and reporting duct/building static 

pressure, room-to-room differential pressure or air flow 

velocities/volumes. The ZPS Series micro-machined silicon 

piezoresistive pressure sensor is specifically developed 

for low differential pressure. The sensor’s custom 

Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) provides 

five-point error correction over the compensated temperature 

range for excellent accuracy, repeatability, and stability. 

FEATURES 

• Field-selectable ranges and output signals 

• Five direct and five bidirectional standard ranges 

• 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output signal 

• Inches of water or Pascal engineering units 

• Models with large LCD display 

• Microprocessor controlled auto-zero 

• Rugged IP66 (NEMA 4) housing 

• Short-circuit proof and polarity protected 



Power 

4-20 mA output 8.5 to 45 VDC 

0-5 VDC output 8.5 to 45 VDC or 8.5 to 32 VAC 

0-10 VDC output 13 to 45 VDC or 13 to 32 VAC 

Load resistance 

VDC output 1 k� minimum 

mA output 500� maximum 

Output signal Two-wire, 4-20 mA or 

three-wire, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC 

Power consumption 0.53 VA maximum 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(mm) 

3.80 

(96.5) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

4.10 

(104.4) 

Compensated temp 

range 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C) 

Stability ±2% full scale per year 

Media compatibility Dry air or inert nonconductive 

gases 

Tubing connections 1/8" ID or 1/4" ID tubing 

Input range 0 to 0.1" W.C. to 0 to 5" W.C. 

Over pressure 5 psi proof pressure, 10 psi burst 

Accuracy ±0.5% (±1% on 0 to 0.1" W.C. 

and ±0.1" W.C. range models) 

155 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

156 

PRESSURE 

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FROM BAPI 

ZPS SERIES 

WIRING 

POWER – 

SUPPLY + 


– 

+ 

BLK 

RED 

X 

WHT 

4-20 mA Wiring 

(See Specifications for 

power supply information) 


ZPS Differential pressure transmitter 

OUTPUT RANGE 

20 4-20 mA (8.5 to 45 VDC supply only) 

05 0-5 VDC (8.5 to 45 VDC supply or 8.5 to 32 VAC supply) 

10 0-10 VDC (13 to 45 VDC supply or 13 to 32 VAC supply) 

PRESSURE RANGE 

SR Standard pressure ranges - replace range with option # shown below 

Option Range (inches W.C.) Option Range (Pascals) 

01 0 to 0.10 11 0 to 25 

02 0 to 0.25 12 0 to 50 

03 0 to 1.00 13 0 to 300 

04 0 to 2.50 14 0 to 500 

05 0 to 5.00 15 0 to 1000 

06 -0.10 to 0.10 16 -25 to 25 

07 -0.25 to 0.25 17 -50 to 50 

08 -1.00 to 1.00 18 -300 to 300 

09 -2.50 to 2.50 19 -500 to 500 

10 -5.00 to 5.00 20 -1000 to 1000 

Custom Range (W.C.) Custom Range (Pascals) 

CI [x.xx to y.yy]* CP [xxxx to yyyy]* 

ACCESSORY OPTIONS 

NT No tube or probe included 

ST Static pressure measurement probe 

PRESSURE PORT FITTING SIZE 

125 Port accepts 1/8" ID tubing 

250 Port accepts 1/4" ID tubing 

LCD DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) 

D LCD Display 

MOUNTING KITS (OPTIONAL) 

FMK Field mounting kit 

FM 1/2" conduit adaptor only 

PM Panel mount 

ZPS 20 SR01 NT 125 D FMK 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

OR 

TRANSFORMER 


*Contact Trane for custom range information and related products. 

VDC Signal 

Example: ZPS-20-SR01-NT-125-D-FMK Differential 

pressure transmitter with 4-20 mA output range, standard 

0 to 0.10 pressure range, no tube or probe, 1/8" ID tubing, 

with LCD display and a field mounting kit. 

– 

+ 

BLK 

RED 

L H 

L H 

WHT 

0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Wiring 

(See Specifications for 

power supply information)

PSI PRESSURE 

MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL M267-MR 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model M267-MR Multirange Differential Pressure 

Transmitter is a multirangeable, low-air differential 

pressure transmitter. One Model M267-MR replaces six 

single-range pressure transmitters and is ideal for stocking. 

Each Model M267-MR is factory calibrated for its 

highest range but can easily be recalibrated. The rugged 

poly-carbonate NEMA 4 case protects the internal electronics 

from the environment. 

FEATURES 

• Measure six ranges with one unit 

(three positive and three bidirectional ranges) 

• 1% accuracy in each range 

• 10 psig (68.70 kPa) maximum overpressure 

• Rugged IP65/NEMA 4 case 

• Available in current or voltage outputs 

• Available in ranges up to 30'' W.C. (7.473 kPa) 

• Easily reranged with dip switches 



Current models 

Min VDC 9 + (0.02 x circuit resistance) 

Max VDC 32 + (0.004 x circuit 

resistance) 

Voltage models 12-30 VAC or 12-40 VDC 

Power 0.8 VA 

Accuracy ±1.0% FS at constant temp 





Compensated range 40° to 150°F (5° to 65°C) 

Zero/Span shift 0.033 %FS/°F (0.018%FS/°C) 

Output 

Voltage (three-wire) 0-5 VDC and 0-10 VDC 


Current (two-wire) 4-20 mA 


Overpressure ±10 psig (68.95 kPa) 

APPLICATION 

• HVAC building automation 

• Static duct pressure 

• Clean room pressure 

• Environmental pollution control 

• Filter monitoring 

Temp 



Operating humidity 35% to 95% noncondensing 

NEMA/IP ratings NEMA 4 (IP65) 

Approvals CE certified 

Connections 3/16" OD barbed brass, for 

1/8" ID tubing 


(15.25 x 6.81 x 5.90 cm) 

Weight 9 oz (280g) 

Position Effect 

(Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with 

diaphragm vertical) 

Range (in) Zero offset (%FS/G) 

0-30 0.06 

0-5 0.14 

0-1.0 0.22 

0-0.1 2.10 

157 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

158 

PRESSURE 


MODEL M267-MR 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

2.68 

(6.81) 

1.34 

(3.40) 

Power 

Supply 

6.20 

(15.75) 

ON 

5.60 

(14.22) 

0.50 

(1.27) 

0.18 

(0.46) 

0.75 

(1.91) 

0.93 

(2.36) 

3/16'' OD Pressure Fitting 

for 1/4'' Push-On Tubing 

7/8 

1.73 

(4.39) 


M267 Multirange differential pressure transmitter 

XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below) 

C 4-20 mA output 

V 0-5 or 0-10 VDC field selectable output 

0.80 

(2.03) 

High Low 

M267 MR2 C Example: M267-MR2-C Pressure transmitter with 1'' W.C. multirange 

differential pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA output. 

TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE 

RANGE 

CODE 

MR1* 

MR2 

MR3 

MR4 

1 2 3 4 


Power 

Supply 


"W.C. Pa "W.C. Pa 

0-0.1 24.91 0.05 12.46 

0-0.25 62.03 0.125 31.14 

0-0.5 124.55 0.25 62.03 

0-1.0 249.10 0.50 124.55 

0-1.25 311.38 0.625 155.69 

0-2.5 622.75 1.25 311.38 

0-5.0 1245.50 2.5 622.75 

0-7.5 1868.25 3.75 934.13 

0-15 3736.50 7.5 1868.25 

0-30 7473.00 15.0 3736.50 

* MR1 is available only with 0-0.1" W.C. and 0.05" W.C. 

EXC COM SIG 

Current Voltage 


( ) 

Voltage Signal 

( ) 

1.18 

(3.0) 

1.29 

(3.28)

PSI PRESSURE 


MODEL MR 

DESCRIPTION 

The Modus Model MR Multirange Differential Pressure 

Transmitter provides the versatility of selectable ranges and 

the dependability of a microprocessor-based product. Units are 

available in psig or kPa. Each unit features three unidirectional 

ranges and three bidirectional ranges. The Model MR is available 

with current or voltage output and with optional NEMA 4 

housing. 

FEATURES 


• Jumper-selectable ranges 

• Bidirectional and unidirectional ranges 

• Optional NEMA 4 rating 

• Easily accessible zero adjustment 


Supply voltage 11-32 VDC (0-5 VDC and 4-20 mA 

outputs), 14.5-32 VAC non-isolated 

(for 0-10 VDC units) 

Power 0.33W max (voltage output) 

0.64W max (current output) 



Zero ±0.02%/°C 

Span ±0.05%/°C 

Output 

Current 4-20 mA 

Max load 50� @ 11V, 1100� @ 32V 

Voltage 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 

Input impedance 2000� @ 11V, 3200� @ 32V 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.8 (7.1) 

3.45 

(8.8) 

0.25 (0.6) 

0.50 (1.3) 

2.1 

(5.3) 

2.95 

(7.5) 

Cover Base 

4.5 

(11.4) 

3.5 

(8.9) 

Knockout 

1/2" 

Conduit 

0.20 dia 

four places 

Knockout 

1/2" 

Conduit 

three places 

4.0 (10.2) 

Overpressure Three x range 

Temp 



Medium Air and inert gases 

Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP65) optional 

Approvals CE (except 0.1" and 1.0" models) 

Connections 

Pressure 3/16" brass-barbed fittings 

Electrical Screw terminal (14-24 AWG) 


(11.4 x 10.2 x 6.0 cm) 


WIRING 

Vout 

V– 

V+ 

V– 

V+ 

0-5 or 0-10 VDC 

0-5 VDC or 

0-10 VDC 

Power Supply 

(see Specifications 

above) 

4-20 mA 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

(see Specifications 

above) 

4-20 mA 

159 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

160 

PRESSURE 


MODEL MR 

CONFIGURATION 

The Model MR is configured by means of jumpers 

installed on the circuit board. Jumpers are installed by 

connecting two adjacent pins on the header. Unused 

jumpers are stored on a single pin (halfway off the header), 

as shown in Figure 1. 

Factory Default Jumper Settings 

The output range jumpers are shown in their default 

positions. The +10 output option and the BIPOLAR 

option are disabled, and the HIGH input range is 

enabled. 

Unipolar Configuration 

The default operating mode of all units is unipolar. 

Absolute pressure is measured by the HI input port, and 

the LO input port is left open. For accurate measurements 

made with respect to ambient pressure, a return 

line should be run from the LO port to the measurement 

point rather than simply leaving that port open to the 

atmosphere. 

Bipolar Configuration 

Bipolar mode is selected by installing a jumper in the BI 

ENABLE position. Differential pressure can then be 

measured using both ports. When the HI port has a positive 

pressure relative to the LO port, the output indicates 

positive pressure. When the HI pressure is lower than 

the LO port pressure, the output indicates negative pressure. 

Measurement Range 

The default measurement range is set to HIGH. To 

select a different range, move the jumper to the MID to 

LOW position. 

FIGURE 1. CONFIGURATION JUMPER PINS 

(shown in factory configuration) 

+10V enable 

BI enable 

Hi range 

Mid range 

Low range 


MR Modus multirange pressure transmitter 

RANGE 

01E 0" to 0.1" W.C., 0.05" W.C. 

05E 0" to 0.25" W.C., 0.5" W.C., 1.0" W.C.; 0.125" W.C., 0.25" W.C., 0.5" W.C. 

08E* 0" to 1.25" W.C., 2.5" W.C., 5.0" W.C.; 0.625" W.C., 1.25" W.C., 2.5" W.C. 



01P 25 Pa, 12.5 Pa 

05P 0-62.5, 125, 250 Pa; 31.25, 62.5, 125 Pa 

08P* 0-312.5, 625, 1250 Pa; 156.25, 312.5, 625.0 Pa 

09P* 0-625, 1250, 2500 Pa; 312.5, 625.0, 1250.0 Pa 

12P* 0-1.875, 3.750, 7.500 kPa; 0.9375, 1.875, 3.750 kPa 

OUTPUT 

C 4-20 mA analog output 

V 0-5 or 0-10 VDC analog output (jumper selectable) 

OPTIONS 

N NEMA 4 enclosure (optional) 

MR 01E V N 

* CE approved 


shown 

disabled 

enabled 

Example: MR-01E-V-N Multirange pressure transmitter with 0" to 0.1" W.C. 

range and 0-5 analog output in a NEMA 4 enclosure

PSI PRESSURE 

ROOM AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MONITOR 

MODEL RPM-1 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RPM-1 Room Air Differential Pressure 

Monitor provides a wall-mounted display of room pressure, 

positive or negative, with a resolution of up to 

0.001'' W.C. (or 0.1 Pa). A red LED and green LED alert 

personnel of the status of the room pressure, and a 

SPDT relay is provided for a remote alarm when the correct 

pressure is not maintained. Three analog output signals 

are provided for remote room pressure display or to 

interface with a BAS. The optional AN-1 Annunciator 

provides a visual and audible warning of an alarm condition 

at a remote location. 

The Model RPM-1 is housed in a tough polycarbonate 

NEMA 13 enclosure with rear or bottom knockouts for 

electrical and pressure connections. Models are available 

for 120/240 VAC or 24 VAC. 

FEATURES 

• Positive and negative pressure monitoring 

• Red and green room status LEDs 

• SPDT alarm relay 

• Three analog signals (0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 

4-20 mA) 

• Polycarbonate NEMA 13 enclosure 

• Dependable solid-state design 

• Cost effective and easy to install 

• Optional remote annunciator 


Supply voltage 19.5-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

95-135 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

190-270 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Power 5W 

Accuracy 

Reading ±1% FS 

Thermal effects ±0.027%/°F (±0.05%/°C) 

Alarm output ±1% of setpoint (lights and relay) 

Output 

Analog 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

Max load 580� (for mA output) 

Min load 3000� (for VDC output) 

Alarm output SPDT relay 

Contact rating 5A @ 30 VDC, 4A @ 24 VAC, 

5A @ 120 VAC 

Overpressure ±6.0" W.C. (±1.5 kPa) (momentary) 

Temp 



Operating humidity 10% to 90% RH 

Medium Air or noncorrosive, nonexplosive gas 


Body Glass-filled polycarbonate, flammability 

rating of UL94-V1 

RPM-1 AN-1 

APPLICATION 

A typical application for the Model RPM-1 is monitoring 

hospital rooms such as operating rooms and isolation 

rooms for housing contagious patients. Other applications 

requiring differential pressure monitoring include 

the following: fume hoods, clean rooms, computer 

rooms, asbestos abatement projects, etc. This sensor is 

extremely sensitive and performs reliably at very low 

room pressures. 

Cover Clear polycarbonate, flammability 

rating of UL94-V2 


(24.1 x 18.5 x 11.6 cm) 


Analog outputs 0-5 VDC, 2.5V @ zero pressure 

0-10 VDC, 5V @ zero pressure 

4-20 mA sourcing, 12 mA @ zero 

pressure 

Deadband Preset @ 5% of range, field 

adjustable from 1% to 20% 

Panel indicator lights One red and one green LED 

Display LCD, three digits, 0.5" digit height 

Electrical connections 3/4" terminal strip with #6 screws 

Enclosure 

Color Light gray 

Knockouts 0.85" dia (2.2 cm) on lower front 

and back of enclosure 

Hinges Removable, allow hinging from 

either side, open 180° 

Mounting Three-point mounting 

161 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

162 

PRESSURE 

ROOM AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MONITOR 

MODEL RPM-1 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.93 

7.40 (12.52) 

(18.80) 

WIRING / PIPING 

Optional AN-1 

Supply 1 

COM 2 

SIG 3 

9.10 

(23.11) 

8.40 

(21.34) 

Clear 

Window 

Cover 

4.45 

(11.30) 

3.75 

(9.53) 

1.95 

(4.95) 

Knockouts for electrical 

and pressure connections 

are located on the back 

and bottom of the housing. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

NO NC COM COM + + + - 

Power 

Supply 

Relay Out 

0-10V 4-20mA 

Pressure Connections: Connect the air line from the room to be monitored to the fitting labeled 

"room pressure" and the air line from the reference area to the fitting labeled "reference." Three 

sets of barb fittings accomodate plastic tubing sizes from 1/8" to 7/32" ID (3 to 6 mm). DO NOT 

OVER TIGHTEN THE FITTINGS. 

RPM-1 



RPM-1 Room pressure monitor 

VOLTAGE 

A 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

B 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

RANGE CODE 

01E -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. (-25 to 25 Pa), resolution 0.001" W.C. (0.1 Pa) 



Example: RPM-1-B-O1E Room pressure monitor, 24 VAC 

RPM-1 B 01E 

powered with a range of -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. 


AN-1 Remote annunciator 

0-5V 

J1

PSI PRESSURE 

PRESSURE CONTROLLER 

PCM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The PCM Series Pressure Controller is a low-air pressure 

transducer combined with a microprocessor-based 

Proportional or Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller. 

The compact size and ease of installation and setup 

makes this unit ideal for standard HVAC applications. 

Ranges are available from 0-2'', 3'', or 5'' W.C. The setpoint 

adjustment knob is clearly marked with the appropriate 

scale for ease of use. All setup and tuning is easily 

accomplished by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers. 

Mounting is a snap with the convenient mounting tabs or 

a DIN rail mount option. Remote setpoint is also possible 

with voltage or milliamp signals. The PCM Series can be 

configured for direct or reverse acting control. 

FEATURES 

• Proportional or PI control 

• Easy setup 

• DIP switch/jumper setup and tuning 

• Selectable proportional band 

• Selectable integral reset rate 

• Direct or reverse acting 

• Optional DIN rail mounting 


• Position insensitive 

APPLICATIONS 

• Controlling duct pressures 

• Isolation rooms 

• VAV systems 

• Inlet guide vanes and VFDs 

• Paint booths 

• Relief damper control 

• Pressure bypass damper control 


Supply voltage 24 VDC +15%, -10% @ 

75 mA max 

Accuracy ±2% of range including 

non-linearity and hysteresis 

Output 4-20 mA sourcing 

Output resolution 255 steps 

Output burden 650� max 

Port connections 3/16'' dia suitable for 

1/4'' OD polyethylene tubing 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Setpoint Knob 

0.7 

(1.78) 

Mounting Slots 

for Optional 

DIN Rail 

Adapter 

High Pressure Port 

Low Pressure Port 

4.8 

(12.19) 

Pressure Ports 

2.75 

(6.99) 

2.9 

(7.37) 

1.5 

(3.81) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

3.4 

(8.64) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

4.6 

(11.68) 

Max overpressure 800% of the pressure range 

Temp 


Humidity 

Limit 0% to 90% noncondensing 

Local setpoint input Built-in three-wire potentiometer 

Remote setpoint input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC 


163 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

164 

PRESSURE 

PRESSURE CONTROLLER 

PCM SERIES 

WIRING 

PCM DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 

1=ON 0=OFF 

Local Set Point Remote Set Point 

A1 0 1 

A2 1 0 

Reverse Acting Direct Acting 

A3 0 1 

This Unit's 

Reset Per Minute Rate Range Is: 

Off 0.5 1.0 2.0 0-2 "W.C. 

A4 0 0 1 1 0-3 "W.C. 

0-5 "W.C. 

Proportional Throttling Range Settings 

10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90% 100% 

A6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 

A7 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 

A8 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 

A5 0 1 0 1 PWM 

PCM JUMPER POSITIONS 

All B switches should be in the off position 

Local Set Point Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11 

For Remote Set Point: 

Voltage Input Jumper Positions 2, 8, 11 

Current Input Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11 

ON 

ON 

FEEDBACK LOCAL REMOTE 

SET POINT 

A 

SET POINT B 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

1. Switch A1 off and switch A2 on. 

2. Set jumper positions to 1, 8, and 11. 

3. Set switch A3 in the on position for direct acting control 

and in the off position for reverse acting control. 

4. Set switches A4 and A5 in the off position. 

5. Set switches A6, A7, and A8 in the on position. This 

will set the proportional band at 100%. 

6. Set all B switches to the off position. 

11 

12 

INPUT 

PWM 

INPUT 

REM SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT + 

LOC SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT – 

FEEDBK 

INPUT 

24 PWR 

COMMON 

MA SIG 

OUTPUT 

SETUP FOR LOCAL SETPOINT OPERATION (FACTORY SETTINGS) 


Remote Set Point Input 

+ 

4-20 mA or 1-5V 

– Remote Set Point 

Common 

Optional Remote Set Point Wiring 

4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC 

– 

+ 24 VDC Power 

– 

+ 

4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to 

Controlled Device 

7. All systems will require a fine-tuning process. Start the 

tuning process by decreasing the proportional band in 

increments through switches A6 through A8 until the 

system becomes unstable. Then, return to the DIP 

switch settings before the system started to hunt. 

8. Switches A4 and A5 are used to select the integral 

reset rate. This feature corrects the offset that is inherent 

with proportional-only controllers. If it is determined 

that the integral reset is needed, increase the 

rate until this offset is corrected and still maintains stability. 


PCM Pressure setpoint controller 


020 0-2" W.C. 

030 0-3" W.C. 

050 0-5" W.C. 

OPTIONS 

47 DIN rail mounting (must be factory installed) 

PCM — 020 — 47 Example: PCM-020-47 Pressure controller for a 

0-2" W.C. range with DIN rail mounting

PRESSURE 


DPW-692 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The DPW-692 Series Differential Pressure 

Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and piping 

differential pressures in HVAC and process 

systems. The DPW-692 Series incorporates proven 

ceramic sensor technology, and the stainless steel housing 

is compatible with a wide variety of liquid or gas 

media. The convenient DIN 43650-A wiring connector 

makes installation easy and provides NEMA 4 (IP65) 

environmental protection. 

FEATURES 

• Competitively priced 

• Very high quality 

• Short circuit proof 

• Protection from reverse polarity 

• Compact heavy duty housing 

• True differential pressure sensing 

• 1/2" NPT conduit connector 

• NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating 

• Mounting bracket included 



Output signal Two-wire, 4-20 mA 

Impedance 800� at 24 VDC 

Accuracy < ±0.5% FS (includes linearity, 

hysteresis, and repeatability) 

Wiring connections DIN 43650-A connector 

with terminal blocks 

Response time < 5 ms 

Temperature effects 

Max differential 

< 0.1% FS/°C 

port-to-port � 0-100 psid ranges, 174 psid 

0-200 psid range, 464 psi on HI, 

174 psi on LO 

Max system pressure 60 psid range and below; 

362 psig (2500 kPa) 

100 psid range and above; 

725 psig (5000 kPa) 

Rupture pressure 1.5 x max system pressure 

Piping Connections 1/8" FNPT 

Ambient and media 

temp rating 4° to 176°F (-15° to 80°C) 

Wetted parts 303 stainless, FPM (Viton®) 

seals 

NEMA ratings NEMA 4 (IP65) 

Approvals CE 


Note: The DPW-692 can be calibrated ±10%; see installation instructions for this procedure. However, due to the 

very small recessed calibration screws, field calibration is difficult and not recommended. Trane can provide 

factory custom calibration; allow two weeks for delivery. 

CAUTION: Not for use with ammonia. 

DPW-692-100-KIT 

165 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

166 

PRESSURE 


DPW-692 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(mm) 

3.74 

(95) 

.83 

(21) 

.20 

Ø(5) 

.47 (12) 

1/8" NPT 

.59 

(15) 

.78 (20) 

1.18 

(30) 

Low 

Port 

Ø 1.57 

(40) 

High 

Port 

Bracket 

1/2" 

NPT 

1.73 (44) 

5.12 

(130) 

Wiring/ 

Conduit 

Connector 

WIRING - 4–20 mA 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

DIN connector 

terminal block 

with screw 

terminals 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

DPW-692-25-KIT 0–25 psid, 4–20 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector 





Notes: To order a DPW-692 pre-assembled in a five-valve bypass enclosure, replace -KIT with -BVA suffix. To order a 

DPW-692 pre-assembled with a three-valve manifold, replace -KIT with -3VLV suffix. 

To order a DPW-692 with factory custom range, add -C suffix to complete model number. 

To order a DPW-692 for use with refrigerants, add -R suffix after -KIT. A neoprene seal is used in place of 

Viton®. Not applicable with -BVA or -3VLV assembiles. 


101999 DPW-692 Series replacement mounting bracket w/screws 

G5100-1101000 DIN 43650-A Replacement conduit connector w/gasket 

+ 

– 

2 

1 

Flathead 

Screwdriver 

1 

Conduit Connector Assembly 

2 

3 

+ 

– 

4–20 mA

PSI PRESSURE 


M230 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The M230 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is 

a highly accurate differential pressure transmitter that 

incorporates a capacitive technology to produce a linear 

electronic signal proportional to the differential pressure. 

It will measure differential pressure in unidirectional 

applications as much as 100 psig and bidirectional applications 

as much as 50 psig. The stainless steel wetted 

parts and elastomer seals make this unit ideal for both 

liquids and gases. The NEMA 4 (IP65) case keeps the 

internal electronics protected from the environment. 

FEATURES 

• 0.25% accuracy 

• NEMA 4 (IP65) protection 

• Stainless steel wetted parts 

• Elastomer seals 

• High proof pressure 

• Current or voltage outputs 

• Mounting bracket included 



Current 

Min 9 VDC + (0.02 X R); 

R = circuit resistance 

Max 30 VDC + (0.004 X R); 

R = circuit resistance 

Voltage 9-30 VDC (0-5 VDC output) 

13-30 VDC (0-10 VDC output) 

Max line pressure 250 psig (1723.8 kPa) 

Max overpressure See Table 1 below 

PROOF PRESSURE 

Range Proof Range Proof 

psid kPa psid kPa psid kPa psid kPa 

0-1 6.89 20 137.9 0.5 124.55 20 137.9 

0-2 13.79 40 275.8 1 6.89 40 275.8 

0-5 34.47 100 689.5 2.5 13.79 100 689.5 

0-10 68.95 100 689.5 5 34.47 100 689.5 

0-25 172.4 250 1723.7 10 68.95 200 1379.2 

0-50 344.7 250 1723.7 25 172.4 250 1723.7 

0-100 689.5 250 1723.7 50 344.7 250 1723.7 




Nonrepeatability 0.05% FS 


Zero/Span shift 2.0%FS/°F (1.8%FS/°C) 




Voltage 0-5 VDC and 0-10 VDC 


Temp 

Compensated 30° to 150°F (-1° to 65°C) 



Wetted parts 17-4 PH stainless, 300 Series 

stainless steel, viton, silicon 

rings 


Approvals CE 

Connections 1/4-18 FNPT 

Weight 14.4 oz (0.41 kg) 

167 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

168 

PRESSURE 


M230 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3.05 

(7.75) 

1/4-18 NPT 

High Pressure 

Port 

3.01 

(7.65) 

2.44 

(6.20) 

2.15 

(5.46) 

1.94 

(4.93) 

Bleed 

Screws 1.00 

(2.54) 

2.00 

(5.08) 

1.00 

(2.54) 


M230 Differential pressure transmitter 

PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa) 

001PD 

002PD 

005PD 

010PD 

025PD 

050PD 

100PD 

0R5PB 

001PB 

2R5PB 

005PB 

010PB 

025PB 

050PB 

M230 010PD C 

1.50 

(3.81) 

0.875 (2.2) 

Opening for 

1/2" Conduit 

1/4-18 NPT 

Low Pressure 

Port 

WIRING 


Power 

Supply 

Power 

Supply 

EXC OUT COM 

Span Zero 

(*red) (*brown) 

Current 

EXC OUT COM 

(*yellow) 

(*red) (*brown) 

Voltage 

Conduit 

Opening 

0-1.0 (6.90) 

0-2.0 (13.79) 

0-5.0 (34.48) 

0-10.0 (68.95) 

0-25.0 (172.38) 

0-50.0 (344.75) 

0-100.0 (689.50) 

0.5 (3.45) 

1.0 (6.90) 

2.5 (17.24) 

5.0 (34.48) 

10.0 (68.95) 

25.0 (172.38) 

50.0 (344.75) 

OUTPUT 

C 4-20 mA (stocked at Kele) 

V5 0-5 VDC 

V10 0-10 VDC 

OPTIONS 

BVA Bypass valve assembly 

3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly 

Example: M230-10PD-C Differential pressure 

transmitter ranging from 0-10 psid with a 

4-20 mA output 

* Wire colors when 

mounted in a BVA 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

* Wire colors when 

mounted in a BVA 

Voltage 

Signal

PSI PRESSURE 


W30 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

W30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters measure 

differential pressure in liquids and gases compatible 

with 316 stainless steel. They are an excellent choice for 

HVAC and process applications, including measurement 

of differential pressure across flow elements, heat 

exchangers, pumps, filters, coils, and liquid level monitoring. 

W30 Series transmitters are housed in a compact, 

heavy-duty cast aluminum case designed to NEMA 4 

(IP65) standards. Their rugged design allows them to 

withstand high overpressure without damaging the unit 

or affecting calibration. They are ±0.5% accurate and 

available in eight ranges up to 200 psig differential. The 

W30 Series is a 4-20 mA, two wire, loop-powered 

device that operates on nominal 24 VDC. 

FEATURES 

• 316 stainless steel wetted parts 

• 4-20 mA two wire output 

• Operates on nominal 24 VDC 

• NEMA 4 cast aluminum enclosure 

• Accuracy of ±0.5% 

• Ranges to 200 psig (1379 kPa) differential 


Accuracy ±0.5% of differential pressure 

range, including non-linearity and 

hysteresis, or ±1.0% for 0-6 psid 

(0-41.4 kPa) range 

Output 4-20 mA, 600� max impedance at 

24 VDC 

Effect of static 

pressure Less than 0.25% for static pressure 

change from 0% to 100%, or 0.60% 

for 0-6 psid (0-41.4 kPa) range 

Thermal effect 

Zero ±0.05% per °C 

Span ±0.03% per °C 

Temp 



DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.36 (6.0) 

Mounting 

Holes 

0.60 

(1.52) 

0.26 

(0.65) 

2 Mounting Holes for 

#8 (4 mm) max screw 

4.02 (10.2) 


4.54 

(11.53) 

Front View 

1/8-28 Female NPT 

2 Ports 

High 2.18 

3.56 (5.5) 1.37 

(9.04) (3.48) 

Low 

1/2'' Conduit Connection 

1.35 

(3.43) 

4.92 

(12.50) 

Bottom View 

Humidity 

Operating 10% to 90% RH noncondensing 

Wetted parts 316 stainless steel 

Enclosure 

material Aluminum alloy #A380 with black 

epoxy paint finish and stainless 

steel cover screws 

Connections 

Pressure 1/8'' FNPT 

Electrical 14-26 AWG pluggable terminal 

block 


169 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

WIRING 

170 

PRESSURE 


W30 SERIES 

Enclosure 

Ground 

N/C 

+ 

- 

W30 

INSTALLATION 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

+ - 

- 

+ 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Loop Resistance (Ohms)* 

1500 

1000 

500 

0 

MAXIMUM RESISTANCE 

OPERATING 

REGION 

0 10 20 30 40 VDC 

Power Supply Voltage 

*Loop resistance = Wire resistance + Receiver resistance 

The W30 Series transmitter should be mounted on a stable surface, free of vibration and pipe strain. A Model PT 

steam syphon is recommended to protect the transmitter on steam applications. Another device that might be 

required to protect the transmitter is the Model 47 pressure snubber to protect from pressure pulses. 


W30 Liquid differential pressure transmitter 

RANGE (call Kele for metric ranges) 

RANGE 

31E 

32E 

33E 

34E 

35E 

36E 

37E 

38E 

W30 36E 

DIFFERENTIAL 


psid (kPa) 

6 

10 

15 

30 

60 

100 

150 

200 


(41.4) 

(69.0) 

(103.4) 

(206.8) 

(413.6) 

(689.5) 

(1034.4) 

(1379.2) 

MAX OPERATING 

STATIC PRESSURE* 

psig (kPa) 

100 

(690) 

300 

(2069) 

OPTIONS (leave blank for standard unit) 

B Bidirectional (12 mA at zero differential pressure) 

BVA Bypass valve assembly 

3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly 

Example: W30-36E Stainless steel liquid differential pressure 

transmitter with a range of 0-100 psig (689.5 kPa) 


47B, 47S Snubbers (brass or stainless steel) 

Model PT Steam pigtail syphon 

* The maximum safe 

momentary 

over-pressure at any 

port is two times the 

maximum operating 

static pressure.

PSI PRESSURE 

ADJUSTABLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS PVI-1, PVI-2 

DESCRIPTION 

Model PVI-1 and PVI-2 Pressure Transmitters are 

designed to provide economical monitoring of control air 

pressure in HVAC applications. Model PVI-1 is furnished 

in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel 

space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail 

mounting adapter. Model PVI-2 is a snap-track mounted 

version with identical operation. Both versions are available 

with an optional pressure indication gauge. 

Both units have LED indication for power and for output 

overrange when input pressure exceeds maximum calibrated 

pressure. The output signal is limited to 110% of 

normal full scale (20 mA, 5/10/15V). 

FEATURES 

• AC or DC power 

• 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) input pressure range 

• 4-20 mA and voltage outputs available 

simultaneously 


• LED indication of power and output overrange 

• Optional pressure indicating gauge 

APPLICATION 

Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 convert an input pressure to a 

4-20 mA current sourcing and a jumper-selectable 1-5, 

2-10, or 3-15 VDC output signal that is directly proportional 

to the input pressure. The zero and span potentiometers 

allow for adjustment if the output signal 

required is different from the standard calibration. 


Supply voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 80 mA 

24 VDC ±10% @ 35 mA 

Accuracy ±0.1 psig @ 77°F(25°C) 

Outputs 

Current 4-20 mA current sourcing 

(max load 650�) 

Voltage 

(jumper-selectable) 1-5 VDC (1250� min load) 

2-10 VDC (2500� min load) 

3-15 VDC (3750� min load) 


Dimensions 

PVI-1 4.9"W x 3.4"H* x 2"D 

(12.4 x 8.6 x 5.1 cm) 

PVI-1 

PVI-2 with Optional Gauge 

PVI-2 3.25"W x 3.25"H* x 1.75"D 

(8.26 x 8.26 x 4.45 cm) 

Pressure connection 1/4" barb 

Input pressure 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) factory 

setting 

Zero adjustable 0-17 psig (0-117.2 kPa) 

Span adjustable 3-20 psig (20.7-137.9 kPa) 

Weight 

PVI-1 0.78 lb (0.35 kg) 

PVI-2 0.41 lb (0.19 kg) 

* Add 0.6"H (1.5 cm) each for mounting tabs and 

2.3"H (5.8 cm) for gauge option. 

171 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

172 

PRESSURE 

ADJUSTABLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

MODELS PVI-1, PVI-2 

WIRING 

Voltage Output Jumper 

(Shown in 1-5V Position) 

Voltage output and 4-20 mA 

outputs are simultaneously active. 

650Ω 

max 

24 VAC or DC 

Power Supply 

Zero and Span 

Selection Dip 

Switches 



MODEL 

PVI-1 

MODEL 

PVI-2 

Zero and Span 

Pressure 

Zero Range 

Pressure 

Span Range 

5V 

10V 15V 

Output 

Voltage 

Range 

Voltage Out 

mA Out 

COM 

24V Power 

Zero 

Span 

PVI-1 (enclosed) 

PVI-2 (track mount) 

Power 

Out 

Over 

CALIBRATION 


Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 are factory calibrated for 0-20 

psig (0-137.9 kPa). If another pressure range is 

required, first select the pressure zero range from Table 

1 and set SW1 and SW2 accordingly. Then, select the 

pressure span range (high pressure minus low pressure) 

required from Table 2 and set SW3 and SW4. 

Apply the low end pressure and adjust the zero pot for 

the desired output. Apply the high end pressure and 

adjust the span pot. Repeat as required. 

Example: To monitor a 8-13 psig signal, the pressure 

zero range is 8, so set SW1 ON and SW2 OFF. The 

pressure span range is 5 (13-8 = 5), so set SW3 OFF 

and SW4 OFF. 

TABLE 1. PRESSURE ZERO RANGE 

ZERO SW1 SW2 

0.00-4.25 psig (0-29.3 kPa) ON ON 

4.25-8.50 psig (29.3-58.6 kPa) ON OFF 

8.50-12.75 psig (58.6-87.9 kPa) OFF ON 

12.75-17.00 psig (87.9 kPa-117.2 kPa) OFF OFF 

TABLE 2. PRESSURE SPAN RANGE 

SPAN SW3 SW4 

3.00-7.25 psig (20.7-50.0 kPa) OFF OFF 

7.25-11.50 psig (50.0-79.3 kPa) OFF ON 

11.50-15.75 psig (79.3-108.6 kPa) ON OFF 

15.75-20.00 psig (108.6-137.9 kPa) ON ON 

DESCRIPTION 

Pressure transmitter 

OPTIONS (must be factory installed) 

43 Pressure indication gauge 

47 DIN rail mounting 

C Special calibration (specify range when ordering) 

Example: PVI-1-43-47 Enclosed pressure transmitter with 

pressure indication gauge and DIN rail mounting 

DESCRIPTION 

Track-mounted pressure transmitter 

OPTIONS (must be factory installed) 

G Pressure indication gauge 

C Special calibration (specify range when ordering) 

Example: PVI-2-G Track-mounted pressure transmitter with 

pressure gauge

PRESSURE 

STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

P51 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The compact and robust P51 Series Stainless Steel 

Pressure Transmitter is designed for use with a wide 

variety of liquid or gas media and for industrial, process 

or commercial applications. The 304L and 316L stainless 

steel wetted parts makes the transmitter ideally suited 

for media such as water, glycol, refrigerants, and 

ammonia. 

The P51 Series is available in models with a 4-20 mA 

output or with 1-5 VDC output and come standard with a 

3' cable. It is very competitively priced and can be 

ordered in an optional enclosure assembly, or enclosed 

with a gauge for local pressure indication. 

FEATURES 

• Robust compact package 

• Laser welded stainless steel design 

• Reverse polarity protection 

• 3' cable standard 

• Optional enclosure and gauge assembly 



Output signals 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC 

Supply current < 5 mA (1-5 VDC models) 

Output current 0.45 mA Max (sink or source, 

1-5 VDC models) 

Accuracy < 0.5% full scale includes nonlinearity, 

repeatability, and hysteresis 

(< 1% on models with range 

< 50 psig) 

Thermal error < 0.5% full scale (-40°C to 105°C) 

(< 1% on models with range 

< 50 psig) 

WIRING 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

– – 

+ 

Red White 

+ 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

P51 with optional 

enclosure and gauge 

APPLICATIONS 

• Hot/chilled water • Pneumatics 

• Refrigeration • Compressors 

• Hydraulics • Agriculture 

• Process control • Flow 

Stability < 0.25% full scale per year typical 

Response time < 1ms 

Pressure ranges 0-15 psi to 0-500 psi 

Proof pressure 3x rated pressure 

Burst pressure 5x rated pressure 

Temp rating -40°to 221°F (-40°to 105°C) 

Wetted parts 304L and 316L stainless steel 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

– – 

Black 

Red White 

+ + 

1-5 VDC 

P51 

1-5 VDC 

Signal 

173 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

174 

PRESSURE 


P51 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(mm) 

Cable length 

36 (914.4) 

P51 100 20 

Ø .86 

(22.0) 

2.36 

(60.0) 

.85 (21.5) 

.51 (13) 

1/8 - 27 NPT 


0.86 

(22.0) 

HEX 

Ø 

0.16 

(4.0) 


P51 Pressure transmitter 

RANGE psig (kPa) 

15 0-15 (0-103) 

50 0-50 (0-345) 

100 0-100 (0-690) 

200 0-200 (0-1379) 

300 0-300 (0-2069) 

500 0-500 (0-3448) 

OUTPUT SIGNAL 

20 4-20 mA output 

5 1-5 VDC output 

OPTIONS 

E Transmitter in watertight enclosure with stainless steel fittings 

E-G Transmitter in enclosure with a pressure gauge, brass fittings 

Example: P51-100-20 0-100 psi transmitter with 4-20 mA output, 

no options 


Model PT Pigtail siphon for steam applications 

47B, 47S Snubbers (brass or stainless) 

ZG-R01 4-20 mA resistor kit (500�) for 2-10 VDC

PSI PRESSURE 

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

209 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Setra 209 Series Pressure Transmitter is specifically 

designed for industrial applications with high performance 

and low cost requirements. It measures gauge 

pressure and can be used with gases or liquids compatible 

with 17-4 PH stainless steel. The 209 Series is packaged 

in a rugged, stainless steel/velox housing, which is 

small and lightweight. The stainless steel capacitance 

sensing element and high level output IC-based circuit 

assures excellent stability. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Highly accurate 

• Current output 

• Lightweight 

• Compatible with most common applications 

• Stainless steel construction 

• Conduit adapter standard 

• Optional voltage output available 

APPLICATIONS 

• HVAC/R equipment 

• Industrial equipment 

• Compressor control 

• Hydraulic systems 

• Process and refrigeration systems 



Voltage output 9-30 VDC 

Current output Min VDC = 9 + (0.020 x L R *) 

Max VDC = 30 + (0.004 x L R *) 

*L R = circuit load resistance 

Accuracy ±0.25% FS (determined by RSS 

at constant temp) 




Stability 0.5% FS/year 


Zero 2.0%FS/100°F (±1.8%FS/°50°C) 

Span 1.5%FS/100°F (±1.3%FS/50°C) 

Output 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

GND 

COM OUT 

1.62 

(4.1) 

EXC 

3.63 

(9.2) 


Voltage 0.5-5.5 VDC 


Max overpressure See Ordering Information 

Temp 

Operating -40° to 260°F (-40° to 127°C) 


Compensated -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C) 

Compatible medium All fluids compatible with 17-4 PH 

stainless steel (not recommended 

for use with hydrogen) 

Connections 

Pressure 1/4"18 NPT 

Electrical Screw terminals 


175 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

176 

PRESSURE 

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

209 SERIES 

WIRING 

4-20 

mA 

LR 

GND 

COM OUT EXC 

4-20 mA 0.5-5.5 VDC 


209 Pressure transmitter PROOF BURST 

RANGE psig (kPa) PRESSURE (psig) PRESSURE (psig) 

001P 0-1 (0-7) 2 250 

002P 0-2 (0-14) 4 250 

005P 0-5 (0-34) 10 250 

010P 0-10 (0-69) 20 500 

025P 0-25 (0-172) 50 500 

050P 0-50 (0-345) 100 750 

100P 0-100 (0-690) 200 1000 

200P 0-200 (0-1379) 400 2000 

250P 0-250 (0-1724) 500 2000 

500P 0-500 (0-3448) 1000 3000 

10CP 0-1000 (0-6895) 2000 5000 

20CP 0-2000 (13790) 3000 6500 

OUTPUT 

G2M11 4-20 mA analog 

G2M24 0.5-5.5 VDC analog 

CONNECTION 

A1 Threaded conduit connection 

209 050P G2M11 A1 

24 VDC* 

Power Supply 

0.5-5.5 

VDC 

LR 


GND 

COM OUT EXC 

24 VDC* 

Power Supply 

* See "Specifications" on previous page for power supply requirements. 

Example: 209-050P-G2M11-A1 0-50 psig transmitter with 4-20 mA 

output and conduit connection

PSI PRESSURE 


PSS2 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele PSS2 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter 

is highly accurate and compact, which makes it ideal for HVAC, 

building automation, and process gauge pressure applications. 

A splash-proof Packard-type electrical connector is provided for 

ease of installation. Eleven standard ranges are available for a 

wide variety of applications. 

FEATURES 

• Splash-proof plug-in electrical connector 

• For steam, water, glycol, refrigerant, etc. 


• 304L / 316L stainless steel wetted parts 

• Wide range of pressures 

• High overpressure capability 



Accuracy 

Models > 75 psi

PRESSURE 

178 

PRESSURE 


PSS2 SERIES 

INSTALLATION 

Mount the PSS2 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT 

steam pigtail syphon must be installed in all applications where steam is to be monitored. When monitoring the pressure of a 

medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of 

tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400°F (204°C) can be tolerated. See the 

Technical Reference section for information on Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection. 

If the PSS2 Series is to be subjected to fluid hammer, pressure surges, or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is recommended. 

CAUTION: Not for use with Ammonia. The PSS2 can be used with media that is compatible with 304L and 

316L stainless steel. 



PSS2 Stainless steel 4-20 mA pressure transmitter 

PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa) 

15 0-15 (0-103.4) 

30 0-30 (0-206.9) 

50 0-50 (0-344.8) 

75 0-75 (0-517.1) 

100 0-100 (0-689.5) 

150 0-150 (0-1034) 

200 0-200 (0-1379) 

300 0-300 (0-2068) 

500 0-500 (0-3497) 

750 0-750 (0-5171) 

1000 0-1000 (0-6895) 

OPTIONS (leave blank for no options) 

E Watertight enclosure (with stainless steel bulkhead fitting) 

G* Enclosed with pressure gauge (watertight with transparent cover, brass fittings) 

LCD* Model LPI-1C LCD display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings) 

RED* Model LPI-1CR red digital display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings) 

PSS2 100 G Example: PSS2-100-G Stainless steel pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA 

output over the range of 0-100 psig, with pressure gauge, installed 

in a watertight enclosure with a transparent cover 

* Brass wetted parts option is only for those mediums compatible with brass. 


47B, 47S Snubbers (brass or stainless steel) 

Model PT Steam pigtail syphon

PSI PRESSURE 


PTX1 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The PTX1 Series Stainless Steel Pressure 

Transmitter utilizes a thin film strain-gauge bridge and 

stainless steel diaphragm to provide a highly accurate, 

stable means of measuring gauge pressures up to 2000 

psig (13.79 MPa). Splash-proof cable connections protect 

the wiring, allowing the PTX1 Series to be mounted 

near the medium being measured. Optional indication is 

available as a digital display or as a 2'' (5.1 cm) gauge. 

FEATURES 

• For steam, water, glycol, ammonia, refrigerants, etc. 

• 1% full scale accuracy 

• 200% proof pressure 

• Wide range of pressures 


• Reverse polarity protected 

• Plug-in, splash-proof connector with 6' cable 

• Stainless steel wetted parts 

• Stainless steel case 

• Optional watertight polystyrene enclosure 

• Optional LCD/red digital indication 

• Optional gauge available for mediums compatible 

with brass 


Supply voltage 10-30 VDC @ 25 mA 

Accuracy ±1% FS (full scale) 

Thermal effects* ±0.04%FS/°F zero and span 



Overpressure 

Proof 200% 

Burst 800% 

Temp 




Case materials 304 stainless steel 

INSTALLATION 

Connections 1/8" NPT male 316 stainless steel 

Enclosure 1/8" FNPT 

Enclosure dimensions 7.09" x 4.33" x 3.54" 

(18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm) 

Diaphragm 17-4 PH stainless steel 

Zero/Span Factory adjustable ±10% 

Weight 

PTX1-xx 0.45 lb (0.20 kg) 

PTX1EG-xx 2.05 lb (0.93 kg) 

* Multiply temperature coefficient by 300% on range numbers 01, 03, 

and 04 and by 150% on range numbers 02 and 05. See “Ordering 

Information” on next page for range numbers. 

Mount the PTX1 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT 

steam pigtail syphon must be installed on all applications where steam is to be monitored. When monitoring the pressure of 

medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of 

tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400°F (204°C) can be tolerated. See the 

“Technical Reference” section in the Trane catalog for information on “Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection.” 

If the PTX1 Series is to be subjected to fluid hammer, pressure surges or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is recommended. 

PTX1 

PTX1-E-G 

179 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

180 

PRESSURE 


PTX1 SERIES 

WIRING 

in 

(cm) 

Splash-proof 

Hirschman 

Connector 

2.73 

(6.92) 

72.0 Cable 

(182.88) 

0.63 Hex 

(1.59) 

1/8" NPT 

male 

01 

02 

03 

04 

05 

06 

07 

08 

09 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14* 

15 

16 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

(white) 

(black) 

4-20 mA 



PTX1 Pressure transmitter with cable 

PTX1E Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, SS fittings 

PTX1E-G** Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, with gauge, brass fittings 

PTX1E-LCD** Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with LCD, brass fittings 

PTX1E-RED** Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with red LCD, brass fittings 

PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa) 

30" Hg VAC to 0 (-101.6-0) 

30" Hg VAC to 15 (-101.6-103.4) 

0-15 (0-130.4) 

3-15 (20.7-103.4) 

0-30 (0-206.9) 

0-60 (0-413.7) 

0-100 (0-689.5) 

0-150 (0-1034.3) 

0-200 (0-1379.0) 

0-300 (0-2068.5) 

0-500 (0-3447.5) 

0-750 (0-5171.3) 

0-1000 (0-6895.0) 

0-2000 (0-13790.0) 

30'' Hg VAC to 30 (-101.6 VAC to 206.9) 

30'' Hg VAC to 60 (-101.6 VAC to 413.7) 

PTX1E-LCD 07 Example: PTX1 Stainless steel pressure transmitter with 100 psig 

pressure range in enclosure with LCD indication 

* Enclosed models not available in pressure ranges above 1000 psig 

** Brass wetted parts; do not use with mediums that are not compatible with brass 

Note: NIST certificate available; contact Trane. 

Loop Resistance (Ω) 

909 

750 

500 

250 

0 

0 10 20 30 

Loop Supply Voltage (VDC) 

Vmin = 10V + [0.022A*(R )] 

Loop 

Load Limitations 4-20 mA Output 


47B, 47S Pressure snubbers (brass or stainless steel) 

PT Steam pigtail syphon

PSI PRESSURE 

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 

MODELS RH-3, RH-3-2 

DESCRIPTION 

Model RH-3 and RH-3-2 Differential Pressure 

Switches monitor low-air pressure, vacuum, or differentials 

of air pressure. These switches are commonly used 

to prove blower operation, sense dirty filters, and monitor 

pressure drop across coils. 

Models RH-3 and RH-3-2 are shipped with 1/4" compression 

fittings, suitable for use with 1/4" OD copper or 

plastic tubing, and a 12" (30.48 cm) length of 1/4" plastic 

tubing. 

OPERATION 

When pressure is applied to the high side of the air flow 

switch or vacuum is applied to the low side, an internal 

diaphragm moves against and operates the lever of the 

snap-switch. When the air flow switch is at rest (not 

operating), the snap-switch N.C. (normally closed) contact 

is made to the common terminal. When an increase 

in differential pressure operates the snap-switch, the 

N.O. (normally open) contact is made to the common terminal. 

The action of the diaphragm on the snap-switch is 

the same whether pressure or vacuum is being sensed. 

The wiring from the air sensing switch to other devices 

depends upon the application. 


Setpoint range 

RH-3 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. 

(12.5 to 2989 Pa) 

RH-3-2 0.05" to 5.0" W.C. 

(12.5 to 1244 Pa) 

Switch differential 0.02" (5.0 Pa) W.C. @ min 

setting, 0.8" (199 Pa) 

W.C. @ max setting 

Contacts SPDT 

Electrical rating 300 VA pilot duty @ 125-277 VAC 

15A resistive @ 125 VAC 

1/4 hp @ 125 VAC 

1/2 hp @ 250 VAC 

2.4A @ 24 VAC 

0.5A @ 24-125 VDC 

Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) 


Mounting position Any vertical plane 

Pressure connection 1/4" compression, suitable for 

use with 1/4" OD copper or 

plastic tubing 

Approval UL listed, CSA 


181 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

182 

PRESSURE 


MODELS RH-3, RH-3-2 

INSTALLATION 

Mounting 

The RH-3 and RH-3-2 may be used to sense pressure, vacuum, or differentials of pressure and vacuum. Using sheet metal 

screws, mount the control vertically on the duct or equipment. Avoid areas of high vibration. Connect the 1/4" tubing to the air 

flow switch using 1/4" compression fittings. Insert the other end of the tubing into area to be sensed. See Ordering Information for 

static pressure tips and duct impact (total pressure) tubes for use with RH-3 and RH-3-2 switches. 

Adjustment 

The adjusting screw located in the junction box may be used to change the operating point. The operating range is 0.05" to 12.0" 

W.C. for the RH-3, and 0.05" to 5.0" W.C. for the RH-3-2. The differential is 0.02" rising to 0.8" at highest setting. The switch will 

operate at 0.05" and reset before 0.03" on the low end. It will operate at 12.0" and reset before 11.2" on the high end. Rotate 

adjusting screw clockwise to increase setting. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

6.13 

(15.7) 

2.81 

(7.14) 

1.94 

(4.93) 

3.88 

(9.85) 

1.63 

(4.10) 

3.25 

(8.25) 

3/16 dia 

2 Mounting 

Holes 

2 #6 Sheet Metal, 

slotted pan head 

(mounting screws 

provided) 

3.38 

(8.58) 

High Pressure Inlet 

0.44 

(1.11) 

0.78 

(1.98) 


1.31 

(3.33) 

C 

NO 

NC 

1.38 

(3.50) 

MODEL RANGE 

RH-3 0.05-12.0" W.C. (12.5-2989 kPa) 

RH-3-C Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint) 

RH-3-2 0.05-5.0" W.C. (12.5-1244 kPa) 

RH-3-2-C Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint) 


#21121 Duct impact tube 

A-301, A-302 Static pressure tip 

Low Pressure Inlet 

6/32 Terminals 

with Screws and 

Cup Washers 

3.75 

(9.53) 

Junction Box 

& Cover 

Contact 

Designations 

Scale Plate 

0.671 

(1.70) 

Adjustment Screw (turn clockwise 

to increase set point) 

(Connector with nut and ferrule, 

will accept 1/4" O.D. tubing 

of copper, aluminum, or plastic 

0.71 - both inlets, typical) 

(1.80)

PSI PRESSURE 


MODELS AFS-222, AFS-262, AFS-460 

DESCRIPTION 

Model AFS-222, AFS-262, and AFS-460 Differential 

Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airflow-proving 

switches designed for HVAC and building automation 

applications. They may be used to sense positive, negative, 

or differential air pressure. The AFS-460 models 

have a manual reset pushbutton; the NC switch will open 

upon pressure rise to setpoint but will not close until the 

reset button is pushed. 

The plated housing contains a diaphragm, calibration 

spring, and snap-acting SPDT switch. The sample connections 

located on each side of the diaphragm accept 

1/4'' OD tubing via the integral compression ferrule and 

nut. An enclosure cover guards against accidental contact 

with the live switch terminal screws and the setpoint 

adjusting screw. The enclosure will accept a 1/2'' conduit 

connection. 

FEATURES 


• SPDT contacts 

• Adjustable setpoint 

• For static or differential pressure 

• UL, CSA, FM approved 

• Manual reset, Model AFS-460 



AFS-222 0.05'' to 12.0'' W.C. 

(12.5 to 2989 Pa) 

AFS-262 0.05'' to 2.0'' W.C. 

(12.5 to 498 Pa) 

AFS-460 0.04'' to 12.0'' W.C. 

(10.0 to 2989 Pa) 

AFS-460-DSS 2.0'' to 12.0'' W.C. 

(498 to 2989 Pa) 

Switch differential, 

AFS-222, 202 only Progressive, increasing from 

approximately 0.02'' W.C. 

(5.0 Pa) @ min setpoint to 

approximately 0.8'' W.C. 

(199 Pa) @ max setpoint 

Contacts 

AFS-222, -202 SPDT 

AFS-460 SPST NC 

AFS-460 2 SPST NC 

APPLICATIONS 

AFS-460 

• Proving fan status 

• Monitoring filter for excess pressure drop 

• Monitoring duct static pressure 

• Proving air flow 

• Monitoring damper status 

AFS-222 

Electrical rating 300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277 VAC 

AFS-222, -202 15A noninductive, 277 VAC, 60 Hz 

24 VAC @ 2.4A 

AFS-460 15A @ 125-277 VAC 

1/4 HP @ 125 VAC 

1/2 HP @ 250 VAC 

1/2A @ 125 VDC 

Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) 


Pressure 

connections Ferrule and nut compression type 

connectors will accept 1/4" OD 

tubing 

Connections Screw-top terminals with cup 

washers 

Approval/ 

Recognition UL listed, FM, CSA, CE 


Life 

AFS-222, -202 100,000 cycles min @ 0.5 psig 

(3.5 kPa) max pressure each cycle 

and at max electrical load 

AFS-460 6,000 cycles 

FM 

APPROVED 

183 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

184 

PRESSURE 


MODELS AFS-222, AFS-262, AFS-460 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

OPERATION 

3.25 

(8.23) 

1.63 

(4.14) 

2.81 

(7.14) 

Two Mounting Holes 

3/16 required 

6.13 

(15.57) 

1.94 

(4.93) 

Select a mounting location that is free from vibration. The switch 

must be mounted with the diaphragm in any vertical plane in order to 

obtain the lowest specified operating setpoint. Avoid mounting with 

the sample line connections in the up position. Surface mount via 

the two 3/16'' diameter holes in the integral mounting bracket. 

The Model AFS-460-DSS has a lead switch (A) and a lag switch (B). 

The lead switch trips according to the setpoint knob and the lag 

switch trips after the lead switch. If dual-switch simultaneous operation 

is required order (not stock at Trane) AFS-460-136 (120 VAC 

power) or AFS-460-137 (24 VAC power). 

Locate sampling probe a minimum of 1-1/2 duct diameters downstream 

from the air source. Install the sampling probe as close to the 

center of the airstream as possible. 

WIRING 

C 

NO 

NC 

Action on a rise in differential pressure 

C 

3.88 

(9.86) 

3.25 

(8.23) 

1.38 

(3.50) 

0.44 

(1.12) 

C NO NC 

Low Pressure Inlet (B) 

High Pressure Inlet (A) 

0.78 

(1.98) 

0.710 

(1.80) 

Refer to the Dimensions drawing to identify the high pressure inlet 

(A) and the low pressure inlet (B), and connect the sample lines as 

follows: 

Positive Pressure Only 

Connect the sample line to (A); 

(B) remains open to the atmosphere. 

Negative Pressure Only 

Connect the sample line to (B); 

(A) remains open to the atmosphere. 

Two Negative Samples 

Connect the higher negative sample to (B); 

Connect the lower negative sample to (A). 

Two Positive Samples 

Connect the higher positive sample to (A); 

Connect the lower positive sample to (B). 

One Positive and One Negative Sample 

Connect the positive sample to (A); 

Connect the negative sample to (B). 

AFS-222, -262 AFS-460 AFS-460-DSS 



AFS-222 0.05-12" W.C. (12.5-2989 Pa) 

AFS-222-C Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint) 

AFS-262 0.05-2" W.C. (12.5-498 Pa) 


AFS-460 Manual reset differential pressure switch 


AFS-460-DSS Manual reset differential pressure switch with two SPST switches 

AFS-400-DSS-C Calibrated for your application (specify setpoint) 

NC 

Opens on a rise in differential pressure 




Opens on a 

rise in 

differential 

pressure 

C 

C 

NC 

NC 

A 

Lead 

B 

Lag

PSI PRESSURE 


MODELS RFS-4001 

DESCRIPTION 

Models RFS-4001-025 and RFS-4001-031 Differential 

Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airflow-proving 

switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications. 

They may be used to sense positive, negative, or 

differential air pressure. 

The plated housing contains a diaphragm, calibration spring 

and snap-acting switch. The Model RFS-4001-025 pressure 

connections located on each side of the diaphragm, 

accept copper or flexible 1/4'' OD tubing. The Model RFS- 

4001-031 has tri-barb connectors that accept 1/8", 1/4", and 

5/16" ID flexible tubing. An enclosure cover guards against 

accidental contact with the live-switch terminal screws and 

the setpoint-adjusting screw. The enclosure will accept a 

1/2'' conduit connection. 

FEATURES 



• Knockout for 1/2" conduit 

• Enclosed terminals 

• Compression or barb fittings 


Setpoint range 0.15'' to 5.0'' W.C. 

(37.3 to 1245 Pa) 

Differential Progressive, increasing from 

0.05" WC at minimum setpoint to 

0.3" WC at maximum setpoint 

Mounting position Diaphragm in any vertical plane, 

avoid upward pressure connections 

Media compatibility Air or gases that will not degrade 

silicone 

Contacts SPDT 

Electrical rating 300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277 

VAC, 15A non-inductive to 277 

VAC 

Electrical 

connections Screw teminals with cup washers 

Pressure connections 

RFS-4001-025 1/4'' compression, suitable for use 

with 1/4'' copper or plastic tubing 

RFS-4001-031 Tri-barb connectors for 1/8", 1/4" 

and 5/16" ID tubing 

Max overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) 

Operating temp -40° to 180°F 

(-40° to 82°C) 

Weight 14 oz. (0.4 kg) 

Approval C-UR-US, CSA 

Life 100,000 cycles minimum @ max 

pressure and at max rated load 

DIMENSIONS 

0.173 (4) 

0.798 (20) 

4.625 

(117) 

3.75 (95) 

4.125 (105) 

ORDERIN INFORMATION 

1.365 (35) 

1.421 (36) 

1.00 

(25) 

4.098 (104) 

2.959 (75) 


RFS-4001-025 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., comp. fittings 

RFS-4001-031 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., tri-barb fittings 

Note: Add -C suffix for custom calibration 




US 

185 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

Model 

P32AC-1 

P32AC-2* 

P32AF-1 

P32AF-2* 

186 

PRESSURE 


P32 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The P32 Series Differential Pressure Switch is used to 

detect differential pressure or low positive gauge pressure 

by using only the high pressure connection and 

leaving the low pressure connector open. It can also 

detect vacuum by using only the low pressure connection 

and leaving the high pressure connector open to 

ambient pressure. 

The P32 Series is factory set at the bottom of its operating 

range with the diaphragm in a vertical plane. The setting 

will change if mounted in other positions. 

The P32AF has a close differential, and the P32AC has 

a standard differential. 

FEATURES 

• Easy-to-read setpoint scale 

• Versatile mounting options 

• Durable construction 

• setpoint switching repeatability 


Ambient temp -40°F (-40°C) min, 165°F (75°C) max 

Y 

Connector High pressure: metal 1/8" FNPT inside x 1/2" NPSM outside; low pressure: molded 1/8" FNPT 

Overpressure 1 psig (6.9 kPa) 

B 

Mounting Direct or with mounting bracket (supplied) 

Shipping weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) with fittings 

R 

Electrical ratings Type P32AF Close Differential, 1/4 hp Type P32AC Standard Differential, 1/2 hp 

Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 

AC full load amp 5.8 3.35 2.9 AC full load amp 9.8 5.65 4.9 

AC locked rotor amp 34.8 20.1 17.4 AC locked rotor amp 58.8 33.9 29.4 

Noninductive or resistive load 10A, 24-277 VAC Noninductive or Resistive Load 10A, 24-277 VAC 

Contact 

Action 

SPDT 

SPDT 

SPDT 

SPDT 

Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC 

360 VA, 120-277 VAC 

Range 

"W.C. (Pa) 

0.15-12 (37.4-2990) 

0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 

0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 

0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 

APPLICATION 

Differential 

"W.C. (Pa) 

Min Set Point Max Setpoint 

0.07 (17.4) 0.6 (149.5) 

0.04 (10.0) 0.20 (49.8) 

0.025 (6.2) 0.11 (27.4) 

0.025 (6.2) 0.11 (27.4) 

Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC 

360 VA, 120-277 VAC 

Setpoint 

Adjustable 

Adjustable 

Adjustable 

Adjustable 

*Supplied with 1/4" compression fitting, 4" extension tube, 2 mounting screws, gasket, angle barb fitting installed 


Specify model number as shown in Specifications above. 

Add a -C to the end of the model number to request specific calibration. 

P32 Switch 

with L Bracket 

• Air proving with electric duct heaters, humidifiers, 

etc. 

• Maximum air flow controller for variable volume 

systems 

• Reheat duct-powered systems 

• Clogged filter detection 

• Detection of icing of air conditioning coils and 

initiation of defrost cycle 

Scale 

Plate 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

P32 Series 

Action on Increase 

of Pressure 

Bracket 

L 

U 

L 

U

PSI PRESSURE 

DIFFERENTIAL AND MANUAL RESET PRESSURE SWITCHES 

1910 SERIES, MODEL 1900-5-MR 

DESCRIPTION 

1910 Series Differential Pressure Switches are 

designed to monitor the differential pressure of air in 

HVAC applications. These automatic reset switches are 

available in ranges from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4-4982.0 

Pa) and have SPDT screw-type electrical connections. 

The optional Model A-602 air filter kit includes two static 

pressure tips and aluminum tubing and fittings, and it 

allows the 1910 Series to monitor filter pressure drop. 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 1900-5-MR Manual Reset Pressure Switch 

is designed to monitor duct static and shutdown the 

blower when excess pressure occurs. The switch must 

be manually reset before the system can start again. 

Switch contacts are SPDT with solder-type connections. 

The Model 1900-5-MR measures static pressure only, 

not differential pressure. Order the Model A-399 duct 

pressure kit separately if needed. 

DIMENSIONS 


MODEL OPERATING APPROXIMATE 

RANGE DEADBAND 

"W.C. at Min at Max 

(Pa) Set Point Set Point 

1910-00 0.07-0.15 

(17.4-37.4) 

0.04 (10.0) 0.05 (12.5) 

1910-0 0.15-0.5 

(37.4-124.6) 

0.10 (24.9) 0.15 (37.4) 

1910-1 0.4-1.6 

(99.6-398.6) 

0.15 (37.4) 0.20 (49.8) 

1910-5 1.4-5.5 

(378.7-1370.0) 

0.3 (74.7) 0.4 (99.6) 

1910-10 3.0-11.0 

(747.3-2740.1) 

0.4 (99.6) 0.5 (124.6) 

1910-20 4.0-20.0 

(996.4-4982.0) 

0.4 (99.6) 0.6 (149.5) 

Add a -C at the end of the model number to request 

specific calibration 

3-1/2" dia x 2-1/2" depth (8.9 x 6.4 cm) 

DIMENSIONS 


1910-5 

3-1/2" dia x 2-1/2" depth (8.9 x 6.4 cm) 


1900-5-MR Manual reset pressure switch 

Add a -C at the end of the model number to request specific calibration. 


A-602 Mounting kit for air filter applications 

A-399 Duct pressure kit for 1900-5-MR 

1900-5-MR 

187 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

188 

PRESSURE 

PHOTOHELIC ® DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH / GAUGE 

3000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 3000 Series Photohelic ® Differential Pressure 

Switch/Gauge combines two versatile, precise pressure 

switches with a time-proven Magnehelic ® pressure 

gauge. The gauge reading is unaffected by switch operation. 

External knobs are used to adjust the two DPDT 

switch setpoints. Switch setpoints (indicated by red 

pointers) and system pressure are fully visible at all 

times. Ranges are available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 

10'' W.C. full scale. The 3000 Series may be ordered 

with the switch assembly remote-mounted to facilitate 

panel mounting. 

FEATURES 

• Two DPDT switches, externally adjustable 

• Dependable Magnehelic ® 

pressure indication 

• 2% F.S. accuracy 

• Visible switch setpoints and pressure indication 


• 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read white dial 

• Optional manual reset 

• Optional remote mounting of switch assembly 

• UL/CSA, CE approvals standard 


Power required 110V, 50/60 Hz 

Accuracy photohelic ±2% of full scale @ 70°F (21°C) 

(3% on -0, 4% on -00 models) 

Gauge connections 1/8" FNPT 

Electrical rating 

of relays 10A @ 120 VAC, 60 Hz resistive 

Overpressure 20" Hg to 25 psig (172 kPa) total 

pressure on either side of 

diaphragm 

APPLICATION 


The 3000 Series may be used for applications requiring 

one or two stages of pressure alarm or control, as well 

as continuous pressure indication. Both high and low 

pressure relays can be wired to latch and remain energized 

by using an optional auxiliary manual reset switch. 

The 3000 Series may also be used to control tri-state 

(floating) actuators for inlet vane or damper control of 

duct pressure. 


Conduit opening 3/4" conduit 

Finish Baked case exterior, dark gray 

hammerloid 

Cutout required 4.75" (12.06 cm) dia 

Depth required 7.63" (19.37 cm) 


Note: For use with air or compatible gases only 

MODEL RANGE "W.C. MINOR DIVISION 

MODEL 

RANGE "W.C. MINOR DIVISION 

A3000-00 

0-0.25 

0.005 

A3004 

0-4.0 

0.10 

A3000-0 

0-0.50 

0.01 

A3005 

0-5.0 

0.10 

A3001 

0-1.0 

0.02 

A3006 

0-6.0 

0.20 

A3002 

0-2.0 

0.05 

A3008 

0-8.0 

0.20 

A3003 

0-3.0 

0.10 

A3010 

0-10 

0.20 

RMR 

OPTIONS 

Remote mounting gauge and separate relay assembly with 5' (12.7 cm) interconnecting cable 

(additional cable available in 5' increments) 

Contact Trane for pressure ranges other 

TAMP Tamper-proof knobs 

than those shown (metric ranges, air 

A-601 Manual reset switch (one required for each circuit) 

velocity scales, etc.) 


A-301, A-302 Static pressure tips 

A3002

PSI PRESSURE 

NEMA 4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 

MODELS 24-013, 24-014 

DESCRIPTION 

Delta-Pro Model 24-013 and 24-014 NEMA 4 

Differential Pressure Switches offer a unique blend of 

small size, excellent performance, environmental protection, 

and attractive price. They can be used with liquids 

or gases. 

The precision snap-acting switch and sensitive opposing 

diaphragms combine to provide a narrow deadband and 

repeatability of approximately ±1% of span. Mechanical 

contact life is 10 million cycles, and actual switch life can 

be very long with typical pilot duty loads. 

The Delta-Pro NEMA 4 enclosure is small, yet it can still 

accommodate a 1/2" NPT conduit connection and terminal 

block wiring. The Delta-Pro is not only lightweight but 

also strong and durable. The adjustment screw is externally 

accessible for convenience and multiturn for good 

setting resolution. The Delta-Pro’s force-balance design 

provides excellent vibration resistance. 

FEATURES 

• SPDT switch with screw terminals 

• Gasketed zinc-plated steel cover 

• Strong, corrosion-resistant polyester enclosure 

• External multiturn adjusting screw for excellent 

resolution 

• 7/8" hole for 1/2" NPT conduit connection 

• Corrosion-resistant brass port 

• Clearance holes for surface mounting 

• NEMA 4 enclosure 


Temp 



Max media 200°F (93°C) @ 100 psig (689.5 kPa) 

working pressure 

Wetted parts Polyurethane diaphragm, ethylene 

propylene, polysulphone, brass 

Enclosure Reinforced nylon body, zinc-plated steel 

cover with neoprene gasket, NEMA 4 

Switch life SPDT precision snap-acting design with 

mechanical contact life, 10 million cycles 

(actual life depends on load and cycle frequency) 

Approvals UL listed, File #E42272; CSA 22.2 

approval 

Ratings 5A resistive and 5A inductive @ 125 VAC 

and 250 VAC, 1/4 hp; 5A resistive and 3A 

inductive @ 30 VDC; 0.5A resistive and 

0.25A inductive @ 125 VDC; gold clad silver 

contacts for min loads of 5 mA @ 6 VDC, 

2 mA @ 12 VDC, and 1 mA @ 24 VDC 

24-013 

APPLICATION 

Models 24-013 and 24-014 are used typically to sense 

differential pressure across devices such as oil or water 

filters, pumps, heat exchangers, chillers, coils, etc. They 

normally provide an alarm or shutdown function in applications 

where there is insufficient flow in a system or 

when excessive pressure differential indicates a problem. 

They may also be used to indicate pump status. 

Wiring 7/8" hole for 1/2" conduit connector 

(not provided), three screw terminals 

16 AWG max wire size 

Vibration MIL STD 810C, 2.5G, 5-500 CPS 

Shock 15G, 10 ms duration 

System operating 

pressure 0-150 psig (0-1034.3 kPa) up to 160°F 

(71°C) air temp 

Differential proof 

pressure 150 psid (1034.3 kPa) with surges up 

to 160°F (71°C) air temp, without loss of 

adjustability 

Adjustment Multiturn screw, accessible from outside 

enclosure 

Pressure port 1/4 NPTF brass 

Mounting Surface mount with two screws through 

clearance holes or mount by ports 

Repeatability Typically ±1% of span 

Weight 6.5 oz (184.3g) 

189 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

190 

PRESSURE 

NEMA 4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 

MODELS 24-013, 24-014 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

MODEL* 

24-013 

24-014 

2.375 

(6.03) 

INSTALLATION 

NC NO COM 

Top View 

Mounting 

Mount unit in any position. Locate where shock and 

vibration are minimal and ambient temperature is below 

160°F (71°C). 

Surface Mounting 

Insert two #6 screws through holes on 2" (5.08 cm) centers 

(recommended mounting for maximum vibration 

resistance). 

Suspended Unit Mounting 

Mount unit from its two ports. Always hold a wrench on 

the pressure port when making pressure connection. 

Making Pressure Connection 

Connect the high side pressure to the port labeled high. 

Use a wrench on the pressure port and hold the unit 

steady. Then, thread a 1/4 NPTM fitting into the port. 

PERFORMANCE CHART 

0.91 

(2.31) 

1.84 

(4.68) 

0.875 

3.5 dia 

(8.89) 

Clear 

for #6 

Screw 

ADJUSTABLE SETTING RANGE psid (kPa) 

On Fall 

On Rise 

Min 

Max 

Min 

Max 

1.0 (6.895 kPa) 9.0 (62.1 kPa) 2.0 (13.8 kPa) 10.0 (69.0 kPa) 

4.0 (27.6 kPa) 43.5 (299.9 kPa) 5.5 (37.9 kPa) 45.0 (310.3 kPa) 

* Add the suffix -C to have the unit precalibrated. Please specify the set point. 


Factory adjustment only, do not change 

2.65 

(6.75) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

3.13 

(7.94) 

PORT 

1/4 NPTF 

Brass 

2.37 

(6.03) 

SWITCH 

5A 

5A 

Setting 

Adjustment 

CAUTION: Never tighten by turning the switch 

body into the fitting. 

Wiring 

Back out the screw terminal just enough to put stripped 

wire under this terminal block clamp. Maximum wire size 

is 16 AWG. 

Setpoint Adjustment 

Use a screwdriver to turn the external adjusting screw. 

Turn “in” (clockwise) to increase differential pressure 

setting. For best setting accuracy, set the switch using 

the actual working pressures encountered in the application. 

The switch will make on a differential pressure rise 

to setpoint and break on a fall below setpoint minus the 

deadband (subtractive deadband). 

Specify model number as shown in Performance Chart above. 

DEADBAND 

psig (kPa) 

0.75 (5.2) 

1.0 (6.9)

PSI PRESSURE 


P74 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model P74 Differential Pressure Switch measures 

the difference in pressure exerted upon its two sensing 

elements and operates an SPDT switch at the differential 

pressure setpoint. The setpoint may be adjusted 

without removing the cover and is visible on a calibrated 

scale. 

FEATURES 

• Brass bellows 

• Completely enclosed contact mechanism 

• Externally adjustable with visual setpoint scale 

• Universal mounting bracket supplied 

• Heavy-duty elements withstand high overrun 

pressure 

• For air, oil, or other liquids 

APPLICATIONS 

These differential pressure controls are used as operating controls and/or alarm controls. They are available for 

applications sensing air, oil, or liquid. Typical applications include proof-of-flow across a chiller or water-cooled condenser, 

proof-of-flow in a heating system, and lube oil pressure sensing on refrigeration compressors. In the water 

chiller application, the control provides low temperature protection. On proof-of-flow applications, the control measures 

pressure drop across two different points in either a closed water circulating system or a city water supply system. 

On a proof-of-flow application in a water chiller system, the control activates an alarm or signal light to warn the 

operator if a loss of water flow occurs. 


MODEL* 

P74FA-1 

P74FA-5 

P74JA-2 

P74EA-8 

PRESSURE 

DIFFERENTIAL RANGE 

psid (kPa) 

8-60 

(55-414) 

2-30 

(14-207) 

CONNECTOR 

SIZE 

1/4" Male 

Flare 

1/4" FNPT 

1/4" Male 

Flare 

36" Capillary 

with 1/4" Flare 

Nut 

SWITCH 

ACTION 

SPDT 

Snap-Acting 

SPDT 

Snap-Acting 

SPDT 

Floating 

SPDT 

Snap-Acting 

ELECTRICAL 

RATING 

6A 

120V, 50/60 Hz 

6A 

120V, 50/60 Hz 

1A 

24V, 50/60 Hz 

16A 

120V, 50/60 Hz 

SWITCH 

DIFFERENTIAL 

psig (kPa) 

* Add -C to the end of the model number to request specific calibration. Please specify the set point. 



1.5 

(10) 

2.5 

(17) 

P74FA-1 

MAX OVERRUN 

PRESSURE 

psig (kPa) 

180 

(1241) 

191 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

PSI PRESSURE 

PRESSURE SWITCHES 

P10 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

P10 Series Pressure Switches use changes in control 

air pressure to open or close an electrical circuit. The 

common terminal is red. The red to yellow terminals 

close an electrical circuit on a rise in pressure; the red to 

blue terminals close a circuit on a drop in pressure. 

APPLICATION 

Typical applications include pressure-electric switches in 

pneumatic systems, control of pumps or small air compressors, 

and pressure-electric interlock of fluid flow systems. 

FEATURES 

• Easily accessible screw terminals for field wiring 

• Snap-acting contacts in a dust-tight enclosure 

• Visible calibration scale 

• Field adjustment possible with cover on or removed 

• Gas and oil resistant nylon-reinforced diaphragm 


Electrical Ratings 

P10BC, P10FC 

Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 277 

AC full load amp 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.0 

AC locked rotor amp 96.0 55.2 48.0 42.0 

Non-inductive amp 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 

Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC 

Max Allowable Pressure: 150 psig (1034 kPa) 

Model 

P10BC-7 

P10FC-4 

192 

Number 

of 

Stages 

1 

2 

Contact 

Action 

SPDT 

2-SPDT 

Range 

psig 

(kPa) 

3-20 

(21-138) 

P10BG-3 1 SPDT 2-20 

(15-138) 

*Includes 1/4" barb fitting installed 

psig 

(kPa) 

12 (83) (R-Y cut-in) 

(R-Y cut-out) 

Low stage 

8 (55) 

12 (83) 

(R-Y cut-in) 

WIRING 

P10BG 

Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 

AC full load amp 6.0 3.4 3.0 

AC locked rotor amp 36.0 20.4 18.0 

Non-inductive amp 6.0 3.4 3.0 

Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC 

Factory Setting 

(R-Y cut-in) 

High stage 

12 (82) 


P10BC-7 

Switch Diff 

psig (kPa) 

2 (14) 

Low High 

stage stage 

2 (14) 2 (14) 

0.2 (1.4) 


B 

Y 

R 

Action on Increase 

of Pressure 

Pressure 

Connector 

NPT* 

1/8" 

1/8" 

1/8" 

277 

__ 

__ 

2.6 

Weight 

lb 

(kg) 

1.0 (0.45) 

1.5 (0.68) 

1.0 (0.45)

PRESSURE 

PRESSURE-ELECTRIC SWITCH 

25 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 25 Series Pressure-Electric Switch uses 

changes in operating pressure to open or close an electrical 

circuit. Features include adjustable setpoint, models 

with adjustable differential, 20A contacts, high pressure 

protection, and mounting tabs. The 25 Series is 

available in three ranges, up to 475 psig (3275 kPa) for 

almost any wet or dry application compatible with 

brass. Available ranges, as well as setpoint differential 

ranges, are shown below. The 25 Series is UL listed, is 

repeatable within 1%, has a burst pressure of 600 psig 

(4137 kPa), and comes in a metal NEMA 1 enclosure. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• All metal enclosure 


• Optional adjustable setpoint differential 

• Easily accessible screw terminals 

• 20A contact rating 

• UL, ULC, and CE approved 

• For use with steam, air, and water 


Setpoint repeatability 1% of span 

Electrical rating 20A @ 480 VAC resistive 

Operating ambient temp 0° to 160°F (-17° to 71°C) 

Max media temp 200°F (93°C) 


Diaphragm material Buna-N 

Approvals UL and ULC listed, CE 

Enclosure Zinc-plated steel with bright 

chromate finish 

Switch output One SPDT, snap-acting switch 

MODEL 4 

SET POINT RANGE 1 

Low End of Range High End of Range 

on Fall on Rise 


Connection 

Pressure 1/8" FNPT brass 

Electrical 7/8" hole for 1/2" conduit 

connector 

Enclosure NEMA 1 

Mounting Surface-mount with two #10 

screws or by pressure connection 


Dimensions 2-1/4"W x 3-3/4"H x 3-3/8"D 

(5.7 x 9.4 x 8.6 cm) 

DIFFERENTIAL RANGE 

2, 3 

Min Max 

25B1E2A 

• Wide range of applications 

• Pressures up to 475 psig (3275 kPa) 

• Convenient mounting tabs 

C R US 

BURST 

PRESSURE 

psig kPa psig kPa psig kPa psig kPa psig kPa 

25A1E2A 3 20.7 30 206.7 5 34.5 11 75.9 600 4137 

25B1E2A 20 137.9 200 1379.0 20 137.9 70 482.7 600 4137 

25C1E2A 25 172.4 475 3275.1 35 241.3 140 965.3 600 4137 

25A1E2F 3 20.7 30 206.7 2 13.8 5 34.5 600 4137 

25B1E2F 20 137.9 200 1379.0 4 27.6 10 69.0 600 4137 

25C1E2F 25 172.4 475 3275.1 10 69.0 25 172.4 600 4137 

1. Value indicated on the dial is set point on falling pressure. 

2. Differential represents the reset point above the dial indicated set point. Dial setting plus set point differential 

must not exceed adjustable range. 

3. Minimum and maximum set point differential ranges on fixed units indicates the variance between units based on adjusted set point. 

4. Model numbers "...A" have adjustable differential; model numbers "...F" have fixed differential. 

193 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

194 

PRESSURE 

AIR PRESSURE SENSORS, SURGE DAMPENERS 

A-300 SERIES, RPS, 21121, SD-01 

DESCRIPTION 

Static Pressure Sensors 

A-300 Series sensors are used with pressure transmitters 

and pressure switches to sense duct pressures. Two sensors 

are required to monitor pressure across coils, filters, 

blowers, etc. A-301 and A-302 have four radial sensing 

holes and a 4" (10.2 cm) insertion depth. The A-308 should 

be used only where accuracy is not critical. All mount in a 

3/8" hole in the duct. If the interior of the duct is not accessible, 

an optional A-345 flange mounting kit may be used. 

Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor 

The A-306 Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor provides an 

outdoor pressure signal for reference in building pressurization 

applications. The A-306 includes the sensor, 50' 

(15.24m) of vinyl tubing, mounting bracket, and hardware. 

Room Static Pressure Sensors 

Model RPS is a stainless steel room static pressure sensor. 

It mounts directly to the wall or to a ceiling using a standard 

electrical box. Model RPS-W is the same as the RPS 

except with a white plastic wall plate. RPS-I (ivory) is also 

available. 

Total Pressure Sensor 

Model 21121 sensor is used primarily for proving air flow in 

ducts. The opening in the tip of the 4" (10.2 cm) aluminum 

tube faces upstream and senses impact (total) pressure. 

Surge Dampener 

Surge dampeners absorb rapid pressure fluctuations in 

order to steady a pressure signal. Each surge dampener 

has two independent channels – one for the low pressure 

tubing and one for the high pressure tubing. Surge dampeners 

are typically used with outdoor pressure sensors, which 

are subject to wind gusts, isolation rooms, clean rooms, or 

operating rooms where opening or closing doors creates 

sudden pressure changes. 

A-302 

RPS-W 


A-301 

A-306 

MODEL DUCT STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS 

A-301 Static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 

A-302 Static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 

A-308 Static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb 

A-345 Flange mounting kit 

OUTDOOR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR 

A-306 Outdoor air static pressure kit 

DUCT TOTAL PRESSURE SENSOR 

21121 4" aluminum impact tube for 3/8" OD plastic tubing 

B-137 1/4'' barb adapter for #21121 (standard pack-100) 

ROOM STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR 

RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4'' barb 

RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4'' barb 

SURGE DAMPENERS 

SD-01 Surge dampener 

FILTER KIT 


21121 

RPS 

A-308 

A-345 

SD-01

PSI PRESSURE 

MAGNEHELIC ® DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES 

2000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

2000 Series Magnehelic ® Differential Pressure 

Gauges provide an accurate, economical indication of 

positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The gauge 

includes a 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read dial and frictionless 

magnetic movement in a cast aluminum housing and is 

resistant to shock, vibration, and overpressure. The 

2000 Series has both back and side connections so that 

it may be either surface- or flush-mounted. Ranges are 

available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 10'' W.C. 

FEATURES 

• 2% FS accuracy 

• Easy-to-read 4" (10.16 cm) white dial and 

red-tipped pointer 

• Flush or surface mounting 


• Corrosion-resistant cast aluminum housing 

• Back and side connections 

APPLICATIONS 

The 2000 Series is ideal for monitoring fan and blower 

pressures, filter resistance, air velocity, and pressure 

drop across coils. It may be used to measure positive, 

negative, or differential pressures of air or compatible 

gases. 


Accuracy + 2% of full scale (3% on -0 and 4% 

on -00 ranges) throughout range @ 

70°F (21°C) 

Overpressure Relief plug designed to open at 

25 psig (172 kPa) 


Rated total 

pressure -20" Hg to 15 psig (103 kPa) 

Connections 1/8" NPT female high and low 

pressure taps, duplicated-one pair 

side and one pair back 

Housing Die-cast aluminum, case and 

aluminum parts Iridite-dipped to 

withstand 168-hour salt spray test, 

baked dark gray hammerloid 

exterior finish 

Standard 

accessories Two 1/8" NPT plugs for duplicate 

pressure taps, two 1/8" pipe thread 

to rubber tubing adapters, and 

three flush mounting adapters 

with screws 

Weight 1.0 lb (2.0 oz) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Pressure 

0 

.20 

4.75 

(12.06) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

0.69 

(1.75) 

2001 

.40 .60 

MAGNEHELIC® 

Zero Set 

1.69 

(4.29) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

Pressure 

Suction 

0.48 

(1.11) 

.80 

0.5 

(1.27) 

1.25 

(3.17) 

4.5 Hole 

(11.43) 

1.0 

Suction 

Note: Dimensions are slightly different on medium 

and high pressure models. 

195 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

196 

PRESSURE 

MAGNEHELIC® DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES 

2000 SERIES 

INSTALLATION 

Mount the Series 2000 Magnehelic ® Gauge with the dial in a vertical position in a location free of excessive vibration 

or pulsating pressures. Sensing lines may be run any distance necessary, but long tubing lengths will increase 

response time slightly. If the pointer is not exactly on the zero mark with both the high and low pressure connections 

open to the atmosphere, adjust with the external zero adjust screw. 

To monitor positive pressure, connect tubing from the source of pressure to either of the two high pressure ports. 

Plug the other high pressure port, and vent one or both low pressure ports to atmosphere. 

To monitor negative pressure, connect tubing from the source of negative pressure to either of the two low pressure 

ports. Plug the other low pressure port, and vent one or both high pressure ports to atmosphere. 

To monitor differential pressure, connect tubing from the source of the higher pressure to either of the two high pressure 

ports. Connect tubing from the source of the lower pressure to either of the low pressure ports. Plug both 

unused ports. 

MODEL 

2000-00* 

2000-0* 

2001 

2002 

2003 

2004 

2005 

2006 

2008 

2010 

RANGE 

"W.C. 

0-0.25 

0-0.50 

0-1.0 

0-2.0 

0-3.0 

0-4.0 

0-5.0 

0-6.0 

0-8.0 

0-10 


MINOR 

DIV. 

0.005 

0.01 

0.02 

0.05 

0.10 

0.10 

0.10 

0.20 

0.20 

0.20 

MODEL 

2300-0* 

2301 

2302 

RANGE ZERO 

CENTER 

"W.C. 

0.25-0-0.25 

0.5-0-0.5 

1-0-1 

*These ranges are calibrated 

for vertical scale position 

Order by model number from selection chart above. Contact Trane for pressure ranges, 

metric ranges, and air velocity scales other than those shown. 


A-368 Surface mounting plate 

A-301 Static pressure tip, compression fitting 

A-302 Static pressure tip, barb fitting 


MINOR 

DIV. 

0.01 

0.02 

0.05

PRESSURE 

PRESSURE GAUGES 

PG SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The PG Series Pressure Gauges are durable, costeffective, 

general-purpose gauges for use in a wide 

variety of HVAC controls applications. All gauges are 

compatible with air, oil, and water and have a steel 

case, bronze bourdon tube, acrylic lens, and dual unit 

psi/kPa scale. The PG Series (except model PG-05) 

has a screw-on lens and recalibrator screw. A wide 

variety of models, options, and accessories are available, 

including panel-mount models, specialty gauges, 

diaphragm seals, etc. 


Pressure ranges 30" to 0" Hg (760 mm) vacuum 

to 0-600 psig 

Accuracy 2%-1%-2% ANSI/ASME 

Grade A; 3%-2%-3% 

ANSI/ASME Grade B 

(PG-05 only) 

Connection 1/8" NPT or 1/4" NPT, depend 

ing on model (LM = lower mount, 

CBM = center back mount) 

Window Acrylic 

DIAL SIZE 

CONNECTION 


30" Hg VAC/kPa 

30" Hg VAC-30psig 

0-15 psig/kPa 

0-30 psig/kPa 

0-60 psig/kPa 

0-100 psig/kPa 






ECONOMY 

1-1/2" 

1/8" CBM 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

PG-05* 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

1-1/2" 

1/8" LM 

PG-15-30-0-8L 

N/A 

PG-15-0-15-8L 

PG-15-0-30-8L* 

PG-15-0-60-8L* 

PG-15-0-100-8L* 

PG-15-0-160-8L* 

PG-15-0-200-8L* 

PG-15-0-300-8L* 

PG-15-0-400-8L* 

PG-15-0-600-8L* 

1-1/2" 

1/8" CBM 

PG-15-30-0-8C 

N/A 

PG-15-0-15-8C 

PG-15-0-30-8C* 

PG-15-0-60-8C* 

PG-15-0-100-8C* 

PG-15-0-160-8C* 

PG-15-0-200-8C* 

PG-15-0-300-8C* 

PG-15-0-400-8C* 

PG-15-0-600-8C* 


2" 

1/4" CBM 

PG-20-30-0-4C 

N/A 

PG-20-0-15-4C 

PG-20-0-30-4C 

PG-20-0-60-4C 

PG-20-0-100-4C 

PG-20-0-160-4C 

PG-20-0-200-4C 

PG-20-0-300-4C 

PG-20-0-400-4C 

PG-20-0-600-4C 

GAUGE TYPE 

PG-20-0-60-4L 

* Indicates models that are normally stocked 

Many other range and connection configurations are available. 

Related products such as liquid filled gauges, diaphragm seals, snubbers, etc., are also available. Contact Kele. 

Case Black painted steel (stainless 

steel on contractor gauges) 

Socket Brass 

Bourdon tube Phosphor bronze 

Movement Brass (flutterless) 

Overpressure limit 25% of full scale valve 


Panel cut-out dimensions 

2" gauge 2.11" (5.4 cm) 

2-1/2" gauge 2.66" (6.8 cm) 

QUALITY 

2" 

1/4" LM 

PG-20-30-0-4L 

N/A 

PG-20-0-15-4L 

PG-20-0-30-4L* 

PG-20-0-60-4L* 

PG-20-0-100-4L* 

PG-20-0-160-4L* 

PG-20-0-200-4L* 

PG-20-0-300-4L* 

PG-20-0-400-4L* 

PG-20-0-600-4L* 

2" 

1/4" PM 

PG-20-30-0-4P 

N/A 

PG-20-0-15-4P 

PG-20-0-30-4P 

PG-20-0-60-4P 

PG-20-0-100-4P 

PG-20-0-160-4P 

PG-20-0-200-4P 

PG-20-0-300-4P 

PG-20-0-400-4P 

PG-20-0-600-4P 

2-1/2" 

1/4" LM 

PG-25-30-0-4L 

PG-25-30-30-4L 

PG-25-0-15-4L 

PG-25-0-30-4L* 

PG-25-0-60-4L* 

PG-25-0-100-4L* 

PG-25-0-160-4L* 

PG-25-0-200-4L* 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

PG-45-0-100-4L 

2-1/2" 

1/4" PM 

PG-25-30-0-4P 

N/A 

PG-25-0-15-4P 

PG-25-0-30-4P 

PG-25-0-60-4P 

PG-25-0-100-4P 

PG-25-0-160-4P 

PG-25-0-200-4P 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

CONTRACTOR 

4-1/2" 

1/4" LM 

PG-45-30-0-4L 

PG-45-30-30-4L 

PG-45-0-15-4L 

PG-45-0-30-4L* 

PG-45-0-60-4L* 

PG-45-0-100-4L* 

PG-45-0-160-4L* 

PG-45-0-200-4L* 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

197 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

198 

PRESSURE 

THREE-VALVE MANIFOLDS 

MODELS DPW-3VLV, M230-3VLV, W30-3VLV, 360-3VLV 

DESCRIPTION 

These Three-Valve Manifolds, machined from brass, 

are perfect for differential pressure applications up to 

200°F (93°C) and 250 psig (1724 kPa). The manifolds 

can be ordered pre-assembled with a Model DPW-692, 

M230, 360C, or W30 differential pressure transmitter 

(see transmitter catalog page). Each transmitter ordered 

with a manifold is assembled before shipping. 

FEATURES 

• High temperature tolerance 

• High pressure tolerance 

• Brass construction 

• Easy to install 

• Easy to operate 


Max pressure 250 psig (1724 kPa) 

Max temperature 200°F (93°C) 

Pressure connections 1/4" FNPT 

Dimensions (including mounted transmitter) 

DPW-3VLV 9-3/4" x 7-1/4" 

(24.8 x 18.4 cm) 

M230-3VLV 7-7/8" x 7-1/4" 

(20 x 18.4 cm) 

W30-3VLV 11-1/8" x 7-1/4" 

(28.3 x 18.4 cm) 

360-3VLV 11-1/8" x 7-1/4" 

(28.3 x 18.4 cm) 


DPW-3VLV 

(shown with transmitter) 

W30-3VLV 



DPW-3VLV Three-valve manifold for Kele DPW-692 (not included) 

M230-3VLV Three-valve manifold for Setra M230 (not included) 

W30-3VLV Three-valve manifold for Modus W30 (not included) 

360-3VLV Three-valve manifold for Kele 360C (not included) 


DPW-692 Kele differential pressure transmitter 

M230 Setra differential pressure transmitter 

W30 Modus differential pressure transmitter 

360C Kele differential pressure transmitter 

M230-3VLV 


360-3VLV 

(shown with transmitter)

PRESSURE 

BYPASS VALVE ASSEMBLY 

MODEL BVA-5 

DESCRIPTION 

Differential pressure transmitters are often installed in 

systems with pressures much higher than the differential 

pressure being monitored. During installation, start-up, or 

shutdown, the pressure differential may exceed the 

transmitter differential pressure rating, resulting in severe 

damage to the transmitter. A Model BVA-5 Bypass 

Valve Assembly will minimize this possibility. When it is 

purchased with a transmitter, the transmitter is assembled 

in a NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure with two isolation 

valves, an equalizing valve, and two vent valves 

mounted and piped. Optional pressure snubbers are also 

available mounted on the Model BVA-5. 

OPERATION 

To Place Transmitter in Service: 

1. Open V-3. 

2. Open V-4 and V-5. 

3. Slowly open V-1 and V-2 to bleed the lines of air. 

4. Close V-4 and V-5. 

5. Open V-1 and V-2 fully. 

6. Close V-3 to read differential pressure. 

To Take Transmitter Out of Service: 

1. Open V-3. This will equalize the pressure at the 

transmitter. 

2. Close V-1 and V-2. 

3. Open V-4 and V-5 to release pressure. 


360C, M230 

Dimensions 12"H x 10"W x 4"D 

(30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm) 


W30 

Dimensions 18"H x 12"W x 4"D 

(46.7 x 30.5 x 10.2 cm) 

Weight 15.5 lb (7 kg) 

SCHEMATIC 

NEMA 1 

Enclosure 


CAUTION: A BVA-5 Bypass Valve Assembly is for use 

on systems with a maximum pressure of 150 psig 

(1034.3 kPa) at 150°F (65°C) max. 

Vent Transmitter Vent 

V-4 

V-1 

1/8" FNPT Low 

Pressure Port 

V-3 

BVA-5 for 360C 

V-5 

V-2 

1/8" FNPT High 

Pressure Port 

To order BVA-5: Add the suffix BVA after the differential pressure transmitter model number. 

Example: 360C-P210-BVA: 360C Differential pressure transmitter 0-100# with NEMA 1 BVA-5-R 

To order 3R enclosure: Add suffix BVA-3R after the differential pressure transmitter model number. 

Example: M230-050PD-C-BVA: M230 0-50# Differential Pressure Transmitter with NEMA 3R BVA-5-R 

All Model BVA-5 bypass systems include mounting and piping of transmitter in a NEMA 1 or 

NEMA 3R enclosure. 

199 

PRESSURE

PRESSURE 

200 

PRESSURE 

SNUBBERS / PIGTAIL 

MODELS 47B, 47S, 747B, 747S, PT 

DESCRIPTION 

Snubbers will stop shocks and pulsations that damage pressure 

instruments, thus cutting costs of maintenance, calibration, 

and repair. They will also assure accuracy of the instruments 

and the readings, increase life of instruments three to 

six times, and prevent false operation of control equipment. 

Trane offers two types of pressure snubbers; piston and 

porous. 

Model 47 Snubbers 

Model 47 incorporates a piston that can move up and down 

inside of an internal tube within the snubber. This movement of 

the piston, caused by the shocks and pulsations of the fluid, 

dampens the effect of these pulsations. 

Model 47 comes with three piston sizes: #02, #2, and #3. 

Piston #2 is installed in the factory in the snubber. It is used for 

most applications, such as water, air, and steam. The #3 piston 

is used for a greater snubbing effect, while the #02 piston is 

used for relatively thick fluids. 

Model 747 Snubbers 

Model 747 is a porous snubber and a low-cost alternative to 

piston snubbers. There are no moving parts in the snubber, 

and it uses a porous material to dampen the effect of shocks 

and pulsations. The Model 747 is available in stainless steel 

and brass and is ordered based on whether the application is 

for gases or liquids. 

Model PT 

In steam pressure monitoring, the temperature of the steam is 

higher than the maximum operating temperature of most pressure 

transmitters. A Model PT steam pigtail syphon will protect 

a pressure transmitter applied to steam systems. See the 

“Technical Reference” section in the Trane catalog for more 

detailed information. 

The Model PT is constructed of steel and is suitable for steam 

pressure to 250 psig (1724 kPa) 400°F (121°C). Each is furnished 

with two 1/4" FPT x 1/8" FPT couplings and one 1/8" 

MPT x 1/8" MPT nipple for convenient installation. 


Model PT 

Material Steel 


Max temp 400°F (204°C) 

Size 1/4" NPT (1/8" fittings furnished) 

Length 5.5" (14 cm) 


Model 47S 

mounted to 

PTX1 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.2 

(3.05) 

0.688 

(1.75) 

Instrument 

Connection 

Pressure 

Source 

Model 747 

1/8" FNPT 

1/8" MNPT 

1.5 

(3.81) 

0.688 

(1.75) 

Instrument 

Connection 

Pressure 

Source 

Model 47 

1/8" FNPT 

1/8" MNPT 

Maximum Pressure 

747B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) 47B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) 

747S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa) 47S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa) 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

47B Brass piston style snubber 

47S Stainless steel piston style snubber 

747BE Brass porous style snubber for light oil and water 

747SE Stainless steel porous style snubber for light oil and water 

747BG Brass porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases 

747SG Stainless steel porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases 

PT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 

PT 

Model 

747BE

FLOW

FLOW 

PRODUCTS 

See the NEW 626600A 

Flow Switch on page 

227! 

SERVICES 

Did you know our 

Calibration Shop programs 

for Flow Measurement? 

SOLUTIONS 

We offer Non-Invasive 

Solutions for Flow 

mesaurement, such as the 

DTFXL. 


1500 Series — Flow Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 

1550 Series — BTU Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 

160 Series — Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 

2200,3100 Series — Vortex Flow Meter for Liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 

220B/220SS — Brass and Stainless Steel Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 

225B/226B/226SS — Hot Tap Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 

228B/228C/228SS — Tee-Mounted Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 

228PV — PVC Tee Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 

250B — Tee-Mounted Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 

310 — Programmable Analog Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 

340 Series — BTU Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 

4000 Series — Flow Sensors for Small PVC Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 

DTFXL — Ultrasonic Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 

AMP Series — Air Velocity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 

AVS-200 — Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 

626600A — Caleffi Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 

F61 Series — Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 

FS1-6 — Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 

KIP Series — Fan Inlet Airflow Measuring Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 

KMS Series — Airflow Measuring Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 

KV/KVS — Target Type Flow Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 

SDI — Flow Sensor with Integral Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 

SSS-1000 Series — Differential Pressure Airflow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 

UFT-1 — Universal Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 

V-Bar-700 Series — Vortex Flow Meter for Steam, Gases and Liquids . . . . . . .225 


DESCRIPTION 

The KMS Series Airflow Measuring Station utilizes 

multiple averaging sensors for static pressure measurements 

and a bullet-nose probe for total pressure. The 

sensors are distributed across the flow stream to conform 

to the industry standard rules for equal-area averaging 

(the standard pitot traverse). The standard unit 

includes a 16-gauge galvanized casing with flanged duct 

connection, 3/8" hexagon-celled aluminum flow straightening 

vanes, and internal copper sensors constructed to 

ASTM B88. Instrument connections are 1/2" FNPT. 

Other configurations are available on request. 

APPLICATIONS 

When used with a differential pressure transmitter, the 

KMS Series provides an accurate, repeatable airflow 

signal for building automation and HVAC applications. Air 

velocity may be determined by the formula: Velocity (fpm) 

= 4004 �P, where �P is differential pressure in "W.C. 

Flow rate may then be determined by the formula: CFM 

= AV, where A is the area of the flow measuring station in 

square feet, and V is the velocity obtained above. The 

proper range for a differential pressure transmitter to use 

with the KMS Series airflow measuring station may be 

determined by the formula: �P = (Max Velocity/4004) 2 . 


FLOW 

AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION 

KMS SERIES 

Accuracy ±2% to 6000 fpm 

(±0.5% @ 2000 fpm) 

Temp 400°F (240°C) max operating 

Pressure 6" W.C. max operating 

Pressure drop

FLOW 

FLOW 

FAN INLET AIRFLOW MEASURING PROBE 

KIP SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The KIP Series Fan Inlet Airflow Measuring Probe 

provides a reliable and economical means to measure 

airflow at fan inlets. Similar to air flow stations, the probe 

measures velocity pressure with multiple averaging pickups 

for total and static pressure. Rugged, lightweight, 

and easy to install, it is used with industry-standard differential 

pressure transmitters, gauges, or manometers. 

KIP Series probes install easily at the fan inlet and do 

not require straight duct runs. They are particularly 

applicable for jobs where fitting a flow measuring station 

is difficult or impossible. 

FEATURES 

• Easy and quick to install 

• Accurate and repeatable 


• Lightweight and rugged 

• No straight duct runs required 

• High velocity, high differential 

• Standard airflow calculations 


Accuracy ±2% 

Max temp 400°F (204°C) 

Min design flow 400 fpm (122 mpm) 

Max design flow 12,000 fpm (3658 mpm) 

Pitot/Static sensors Aluminum with anodized 

finish 

Pressure connections 1/4" barb 

APPLICATION 

202 

FIGURE 1. FAN INLET 

KIP 

Probes 

Mounting 

Flanges 

(attach to fan 

inlet with screws) 

X 

Y Y 

Fan 


Dimension X is the 

fan inlet depth; this 

dimension must be 

specified when ordering. 

Dimension Y is the 

smallest fan inlet 

diameter. The probes 

will be built for proper 

spacing using this 

dimension, which is 

required for ordering. 

The fan inlet diameter dimension (Y), and the fan inlet depth dimension (X), shown in Figure 1 above, must be correctly determined 

and specified. Each set of probes is made to order and cannot be returned for credit if the dimensions are incorrectly 

specified. 

If the fan inlet depth specified is 3.5" (8.9 cm) or greater, each KIP Series probe will have both static (low) and total (high) pressure 

pickup barbs. “Tee” the high pressure pickups together and the low pickups together. If the fan inlet depth is less than 3.5" 

(8.9 cm), one KIP Series probe will have a single static (low) pressure pickup barb, and the other probe will have a single total 

(high) pressure pickup barb. 

Determining the differential (velocity) pressure for a KIP Series probe is the same as for a pitot tube or flow measuring station 

(see KMS Series catalog page for formulas). Since the KIP Series probe is mounted at a high velocity location, differential pressures 

are typically higher and may allow the use of a lower-price, higher-range differential pressure transmitter. 


KIP for Fan Inlet 

Depth �3.5" 

KIP-Y-X Y = Inlet diameter range 6.00" to 96.00" (15.24 to 243.84 cm) 

X = Inlet depth minimum 0.5" (1.27 cm) 

Note: One KIP includes a pair of pickup probes for measuring airflow at a fan inlet. 

For dual inlet fans, two KIPs must be ordered. 

KIP for Fan Inlet 

Depth 0.5" to 3.5"

FLOW 

STAINLESS STEEL PITOT TUBES 

160 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

160 Series Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes are designed for use 

with differential pressure transmitters, manometers, and air 

velocity gauges to measure air flow in ducts. See Measuring 

Air Flow in the Technical Reference section for complete application 

information. The 160 Series is designed per ASME and 

meets AMCA and ASHRAE standards. Insertion depth is 

stamped on the side of the pitot tubes, and the static pressure 

port is parallel to the sensing tube to allow easy alignment with 

air flow. A Model A-158 split flange mounting kit allows for simple, 

leak-free mounting of the 160 Series. 

FEATURES 

• 304 stainless steel construction 

• ASME design 

• Accurate even with up to 15° misalignment 

• Insertion depth markings stamped on tube 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

5.0 

(12.7) 

2.66 

(6.75) 

8.0 (20.32), 12.0 (30.48), 18.0 (45.72), 24.0 (60.96), 

36.0 (91.44) or 48.0 (121.92) 

0.31 

(0.79) 

Static Pressure 

8 - 0.040 dia holes 

(0.10) equally spaced 

Total Pressure 

0.125 dia hole 

(0.32) (face into air flow) 

3.63 

(9.21) 


Connection 

0.5 (1.27) 

Total Pressure 

Connection 

0.25 (Fits 3/8'' O.D. 

(0.64) Poly Tubing, 

Model T-110) 

0.25 (Fits 3/8'' O.D. 

(0.64) Poly Tubing, 

Model T-110) 



160 Stainless steel pitot tube 

LENGTH 

XX Length (inches) - 8, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 

160 Series 

A-158 

• Air velocity calculator, flow charts, and 

instructions included 

• 1/4" tubing connections 

• Optional A-158 split flange mounting kit 

160 18 Example: 160-18 Pitot tube with 18" insertion length 


A-158 Optional mounting kit (order separately) 

M30/40, T30/40 Modus differential pressure transmitter 


XLdp Ashcroft differential pressure transmitter 

Note: See “Measuring Air Flow” in 

the “Technical Reference” 

section for application of 160 

Series pitot pubes for flow 

measurement. 

203 

FLOW

FLOW 

FLOW 

AMPLIFLOW AIR VELOCITY SENSOR 

AMP SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The AMP Series Ampliflow Air Velocity Sensor is 

designed to measure high or low velocity air flow in duct 

systems. The design of the AMP Series allows it to 

amplify the velocity pressure by a factor of three, which 

allows very low air flow velocities to be accurately measured. 

Sensing holes along the length of the tube yield 

an average velocity pressure reading for greater accuracy. 

The simple design of the AMP Series allows quick, 

easy installation in new or existing ductwork. 

FEATURES 

• Multipoint readings for average velocity pressure 

• Simple installation 

• Rugged, extruded aluminum construction 

• Double taps allow field check connections 

• Three-to-one ratio pressure signals 

• Adaptable to round, square, or oval ducts 

• 1/4" nipples for 3/8" OD tubing 

INSTALLATION 

Mount the AMP Series at least three duct diameters 

downstream of coils, dampers, elbows, etc., and 

through the width of the duct for best results. Cut a 

hole 0.75"H x 0.88"W (1.9 x 2.3 cm) in the duct. Drill 

holes in the opposite side of the duct to allow the field 

pressure taps to protrude through the duct. Remove 

the rubber caps from the field pressure taps and insert 

the AMP Series into the duct so that the field pressure 

taps protrude. Attach the AMP Series to the duct with 

sheet metal screws and replace the rubber caps on the 

field pressure taps. 

204 



M30/40, T30/T40 Modus differential pressure transmitter 



Air Velocity (fpm) 


AMP Ampliflow air velocity sensor 

WIDTH 

XX Duct width (up to 30")* 

PERFORMANCE CHART 

5000 

4000 

3000 

2000 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

300 

Note: The Ampliflow will be constructed so that the field pressure taps 

in the end of the sensing tube protrude through the duct 

*Lengths 30'' to 96'' available by special order. 

Provide field-constructed support for sensors >30''. 

Nailor Ind. U.S. Patent No. 4,735,100 

200 

100 

AMPLIFLOW SENSOR CALIBRATION CURVE 

.01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06.07.08 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8.91.0 1.5 2.0 

∆P Pressure Drop ("W.C.) 

Velocity (fpm) = 2213 ∆P 

Velocity (mps) = 11.242 ∆P 

AMPLIFLOW 

VELOCITY PRESSURE

FLOW 

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW SENSORS 

SSS-1000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SSS-1000 Series of economical air flow sensors 

sense differential (velocity) pressure of VAV units and 

other locations in main or branch ducts. Four different 

lengths allow selection of the sensor to yield accurate 

readings on terminal box inlet diameters from 4" to 20" 

(10.16 to 51.80 cm). 


Mounting Integral flange with gasket 

Connections 1/4" (6.4 mm) nipples for 3/8" 

(9.5 mm) OD polyethylene tubing 

Weight 1.0 oz (31g) without packaging 

Ambient limits 


Shipping -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) 

INSTALLATION 

The SSS-1000 Series sensor requires a 7/8" (2.22 cm) 

diameter cutout for the insertion portion and two pilot 

holes for sheet metal screws or rivets to hold the flange 

against ductwork. 

Sensors should be installed as level as possible to 

ensure accurate velocity pressure readings. 

When connecting 3/8" (9.5 mm) OD polyethylene tubing, 

care should be taken to assure that sharp bends 

are not made at the sensor connection. This can cause 

leakage as tubing ages and stretches. 

PERFORMANCE 

∆P Inches "W.C. 

1000 2000 

Velocity (fpm) 

SSS-1002 Velocity = 3450 ∆P 




DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.1875 (0.477) dia 

Mounting Holes (2) 

Push-On 

Connections 

for 3/8'' O.D. Poly 

Tubing Model T-110 

3.5 

(8.89) 

H L 

Flow 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Foam Gasket 

0.25 thick 

(0.635) 

A 

(below) 

1.25 

(3.18) 

MODEL DIMENSION A SENSING POINTS 

SSS-1002 3.16 (8.01) 1 SET 

SSS-1003 5.41 (13.73) 2 SETS 

SSS-1004 7.66 (19.44) 3 SETS 

SSS-1005 9.91 (25.16) 4 SETS 

MODEL 

SSS-1002 


DESCRIPTION 

Flow sensor, 3.16" insertion 

SSS-1003 Flow sensor, 5.41" insertion 




M30/40, T30/40 Modus differential pressure transmitter 



205 

FLOW

FLOW 

FLOW 

AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTER 

MODEL AVS-200 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model AVS-200 is an electronic air velocity transmitter for 

use in HVAC systems, laboratories, and industrial applications. 

It features three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges and two 

analog outputs. The Model AVS-200 also has a selectable 

time constant (the time it takes to register 63.2% of a velocity 

change) of three or ten seconds. The sensing probe has an 

adjustable insertion length of up to 8" (20.3 cm) and a 4.5' 

(1.37m) cable. The Model AVS-200 is powered by 24 VAC. 

FEATURES 

• Three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges 

• Two analog outputs 

• Selectable time constant 

• 24 VAC power 

• Dust- and splash-proof (IP44) enclosure 


Power supply 24 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz 

Power consumption 5 VA 

Velocity ranges (selectable 

with DIP switches) 0-1000 fpm (0-5.08 m/s) 

0-2000 fpm (0-10.16 m/s) 

0-3000 fpm (0-15.24 m/s) 

Outputs 0-10 VDC (min 1000�) 

0-20 mA (max 600�) 

4-20 mA (max 600�) 

Deviation by temp Max 0.1%/°C 

Time constant (selectable) 

= 63.2% for 3 or 10 sec 

WIRING 

206 

AVS-200 Internal Connection 

1 2 

- 

+ 

24 VAC 

3 4 5 

0-20 mA 

or 

4-20 mA 

0-10 VDC 

Ground 

Note: Any device sharing a transformer with the AVS-200 

must have a common power “-” and signal “-” terminal, 

and polarity must be observed. Otherwise, a separate 

transformer must be used with the AVS-200. 

Repeatability 0.5% of measuring range 

Accuracy ±5% of measured value + 0.5% 

of measuring range 

Ambient temp 

Sensor -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C) 

Electronics 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Enclosure Dust and splash proof (IP44) 

Material of enclosure Polycarbonate plastic 

Cable length 4.5' (1.37m) 

Sensing probe length 1" to 8" (25 to 20.3 cm) 

adjustable 


INSTALLATION 



AVS-200 Air velocity transmitter 

The sensing probe must be installed through a 5/8" (16 

mm) hole in the duct with the arrow on the mounting flange 

pointing in the direction of the air flow. The tab on the 

mounting flange should be aligned with the line on the 

probe to ensure proper airflow measurement. The insertion 

length is adjustable. Loosen the set screw, and move the 

probe to the selected position. The scale on the probe 

shows the insertion length. 

Always install the sensing probe downstream of filters and 

coils. Avoid placement directly in the outside air stream. 

For best accuracy, locate the sensing probe a minimum of 

three duct diameters (or widths) upstream of any obstruction 

and a minimum of five duct diameters downstream.

FLOW 

FLOW SENSORS 

200 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

200 Series Flow Sensors feature a six- bladed 

design with a proprietary nonmagnetic sensing 

mechanism. The forward-swept impeller shape 

provides higher, more constant torque than fourbladed 

impeller designs and is less prone to be 

fouled by water-borne debris. The forward curveshape 

coupled with the absence of magnetic drag 

provides improved operation and repeatability at 

lower flow rates. This is especially true where the 

impeller is exposed to metallic or rust particles 

found in steel or iron pipes. As the liquid flow turns 

the impeller, a low impedance signal is transmitted 

with a frequency proportional to the flow rate. This 

signal can travel up to 2,000' (610m) between the 

sensor and the transmitter without the need for 

amplification. All sensors are supplied with 20' 

(6.10m) of Belden type 9320 (two-conductor 

shielded) cable. Standard construction of the 200 

Series sensors consists of EPDM O-rings, tungsten 

carbide shaft, nylon impeller, and UHMWPE 

bearings. A complete line of flow transmitters is 

available for use with these flow sensors. 

See following pages for details on each model in 

the 200 Series. 

SELECTION CHART 

226B 

MODEL DESCRIPTION PIPE SIZE in (cm) 

220B 

220SS 

225B 

226B 

226SS 

228C-2 

228B-2 

228SS-2 

250B 

228PV 

4000 Series 

Brass, insertion type 

Stainless steel, insertion type 

Brass, retractable with gate valve 

Brass, retractable with ball valve 

Stainless steel, retractable with ball valve 

Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron tee 

Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) brass tee 

Stainless steel sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) 

stainless steel tee 

Removable sensor in a cast bronze tee 

Removable sensor in a PVC tee 

PVC 

2-1/2 (6.35) and up 

2-1/2 (6.35) and up 

2-1/2 (6.35) and up 

2-1/2 (6.35) and up 

2-1/2 (6.35) and up 

2 (5.08) 

2 (5.08) 

2 (5.08) 

228B 

250B 

225B 

1/2 (1.27) , 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54), 1-1/4 (3.18), 

1-1/2 (3.81) 

1-1/2 to 4 (3.81 to 10.16) PVC 

1/2 (1.27), 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54) PVC 

220B 

207 

FLOW

FLOW 

208 

FLOW 

BRASS AND STAINLESS STEEL FLOW SENSOR 

MODELS 220B, 220SS 

DESCRIPTION 

Models 220B Brass and 220SS Stainless Steel Flow 

Sensors are used in most general flow measuring applications 

in metallic or large PVC pipes. The sensor 

mounts in a 2" NPT pipe saddle or Thredolet ® for installation 

in pipe sizes from 2-1/2" to over 40" (6.35 to 

101.60 cm). Positioning nuts on the three threaded 

retaining rods allow the sensor to be accurately positioned 

to a standard insertion depth of 1-1/2" (3.81 cm) 

into the pipe. When this insertion depth is maintained, 

and there are at least 10 upstream and 5 downstream 

diameters of straight uninterrupted flow, an accuracy of 

+1% of actual flow rate can be obtained between flow 

velocities of 0.5 to 30 fps. The standard Model 200 is 

rated for water temperatures to 221°F (105°C). For higher 

temperature applications, use the SDI Series sensor. 


Accuracy +1% of full scale 

Linearity +0.7% 

Repeatability +0.7% 

Rangeability 60:1 

Flow rate 0.5-30 fps 

Max pressure 400 psig (2758 kPa) max @ 

100°F (37.8°C) 

Max temp 221°F (105°C) 

Wetted materials Standard unit 

Impeller Glass-reinforced nylon 

Bearing Pennlon ® (UHMWPE) 


220B 

Shaft Tungsten carbide 

Housing Glass-reinforced PPS 

O-rings Ethylene propylene (EPDM) 

Sleeve 

220B Admiralty brass UNS C44300 

220SS 300 series stainless steel and hex 

adapter 

Dimensions 7.13" x 3" dia (18.1 x 7.6 cm) 

Pipe connection 2" MNPT 



220B Brass flow sensor 

220SS Stainless steel flow sensor 

230FRK Repair kit for 220 Series flow sensors 

(includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring) 

ACCESSORIES 

2X2.5-3THD 2" Thredolet ® for 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 

2X4-6THD 2" Thredolet ® for 4" to 6" pipe 



UFT-1A Flow transmitter 

310 Programmable flow transmitter

FLOW 

HOT TAP FLOW SENSOR 

MODELS 225B, 226B, 226SS 

DESCRIPTION 

These Hot Tap Flow Sensors feature an elongated 

sensor, special mounting adapter, pipe nipple, and isolation 

valve to allow the nonmagnetic impeller sensor to 

be installed into a pressurized pipe while the pipe is in 

service. This is accomplished by first attaching a 2" saddle 

or Thredolet ® onto the pipe and screwing the nipple 

and isolation valve into the saddle or Thredolet fitting. A 

hole is then drilled through the pipe using a commercial 

tapping machine. When complete, the tapping apparatus 

is removed, the isolation valve is closed, and the 

sensor is installed. 

The Hot Tap Flow Sensor is also recommended for any 

application where it would be difficult to shut down or 

drain the pipeline to remove the sensor for service. The 

overall length of the sensor tube is 18" (46 cm); however, 

a clearance height of 36" (91 cm) should be allowed 

for the fully extended length of the insertion tool. 


Accuracy +1% of full scale 



Rangeability 60:1 

Flow rate 0.5-30 fps 

Max pressure 

226B 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C) 

225B 300 psig (2069 kPa) @ 100°F (37.8°C) 

Max temp 221°F (105°C) 

Weight 

225B 17.5 lb (7.9 kg) 

226B 13.0 lb (5.9 kg) 

HTT 12.0 lb (5.4 kg) 

Model 225B 

Model 226B 

Wetted materials 




Housing Glass-reinforced PPS 


Sleeves 

225B/226B Admiralty brass UNS C44300 

226SS 300 series stainless steel and 

hex adapter 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

225B Brass hot tap flow sensor with gate-type isolation valve 

226B Brass hot tap flow sensor with ball-type isolation valve 

226SS Stainless steel hot tap flow sensor with ball-type isolation valve 

ACCESSORIES 

813144-1211 Replacement sensor for 225B, 226B 

HTT Insertion tool 

230FRK Repair kit for 225, 226 Series (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring) 

8132030 Ball valve, 2" 

71873 Gate valve, 2" 

2X2.5-3THD 2" Thredolet ® for 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 




UFT-1A Flow transmitter 

310 Programmable flow transmitter 

Model HTT 

209 

FLOW

FLOW 

210 

FLOW 

TEE-MOUNTED FLOW SENSORS 

MODELS 228B, 228C, 228SS, 250B 

228 

DESCRIPTION 

Model 228 Flow Sensors consist of either a 220B Brass or 

220SS Stainless Steel Flow Sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 

cm) brass tee, cast iron tee, or a stainless steel tee. 


Model 228 

Accuracy +1% full scale 



Flow range 0.5-30 fps 

Max pressure @ 100°F 

228B 200 psig (1379 kPa) 

228C 175 psig (1207 kPa) 

228SS 400 psg (2758 kPa) 

Max temp 

Standard 221°F (105°C) 

Wetted materials Standard units 




Housing Ryton ® glass-reinforced PPS 


228C/228B sleeve Admiralty brass UNS C44300 

Hex adapter Bronze UNS C83600 

228SS sleeve 300 Series stainless steel 

Hex adapter 300 Series stainless steel 


DESCRIPTION 

Model 250B Flow Sensors consist of a removable flow sensor 

mounted in a cast bronze housing. They are available for 

1/2" to 1-1/2" (1.27 to 3.8 cm) pipe sizes. 

Model 250B 

Accuracy +1% full scale 

Linearity +0.7% full scale 

Repeatability +0.7% full scale 

Flow range 0.5 to 15 fps 

Max temp 

Standard 221°F (105°C) 

Max pressure @ 100°F 400 psig (2758 kPa) 

Wetted materials Standard units 




Housing Glass-reinforced 

polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) 



228B-2 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) bronze tee (copper solder couplings included) 

228C-2 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron pipe tee 

228SS-2 Stainless steel flow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) stainless steel pipe tee 

250B-0.5, -0.75, -1, -1.25, -1.5 Brass flow sensor mounted in a 1/2" (1.27 cm), 3/4" (1.91 cm), 1" (2.54 cm), 1-1/4" (3.18 cm), 

or 1-1/2" (3.81 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee 

230FRK Repair kit for 228 Series (includes impeller, shaft, bearing and O-ring) 

230PRK Repair kit for 250 Series (includes impeller, shaft, bearing and O-ring) 


UFT-1A Flow transmitters 

310 Programmable flow transmitter 

250B

FLOW 

PVC TEE AND IN-LINE FLOW SENSORS 

MODEL 228PV, 4000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

228PV 

DESCRIPTION 

4000 Series 

Model 228PV Flow Sensors are designed to measure 4000 Series Flow Sensors are designed to measure 

water flow in PVC pipes. These sensors consist of a flow in small PVC pipes. They consist of a nonmagnetic 

removable, nonmagnetic sensor in a schedule 80 PVC flow sensor with schedule 80 PVC tail pieces (plain end 

tee with solvent-weld socket end connections. They are pipe). They are available in 1/2" (1.27 cm), 3/4" (1.91 

available in 1-1/2" to 4" (3.81 to 10.16 cm) sizes. 

cm), and 1" (2.54 cm) sizes. An optional integral 4-20 

mA loop-powered transmitter is available. 


Piping Schedule 80 PVC 

Flow velocity range 

228PV 0.5-30 fps 

40xx 0-30 fps (1.0-20 recommended) 

41xx 0-10 fps (0.25-8 recommended) 

Accuracy ±1.0% full scale in recommended range 

Repeatability 

228PV ±0.3% full scale in recommended range 

40/41 ±0.5% full scale in recommended range 

Linearity ±0.2% full scale in recommended range 

Max temp 140°F (60°C) 

Max pressure 350 psig @ 73°F, 75 psig @ 140°F 


Output pulse 

frequency 3.2-200 Hz 

Output pulse width 5 ms ±25% 

Pulse power 9-20 VDC, 2 mA max 

Pulse signal 5V CMOS and LSTTL compatible 

Analog power 10-35 VDC, 2-wire 4-20 mA 

(4xxx10 models only) 

Cable 

228PV 20' of 2-conductor 20 AWG shielded ULtype 

PTLC wire (standard electronics) 

40/41 3' of 2-conductor 20 AWG for integral 

4-20 mA, 20' 3-conductor for pulse 

output 


228PV1505-1211 Flow sensor in 1-1/2" PVC tee 

228PV2005-1211 Flow sensor in 2" PVC tee 



400200-0021 In-line flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces 

400210-0021 In-line flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA 

410200-0021 In-line low flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces 

410210-0021 In-line low flow sensor with 1/2" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA 

401200-0021 In-line flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces 

401210-0021 In-line flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA 

411200-0021 In-line low flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces 

411210-0021 In-line low flow sensor with 3/4" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA 

402200-0021 In-line flow sensor with 1" PVC tail pieces 

402210-0021 In-line flow sensor with 1" PVC tail pieces, integral 4-20 mA 


UFT-1 Universal flow transmitter 

A-4000 Programming kit 

310 Series Programmable flow transmitter 

1500 Series Flow monitor 

211 

FLOW

FLOW 

212 

FLOW 

FLOW SENSOR WITH INTEGRAL FLOW TRANSMITTER 

SDI SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SDI Series Flow Sensor with Integral Flow 

Transmitter is Data Industrial’s latest product in their 

dependable line of flow meters for liquids. The direct insertion 

models are available in either brass or stainless steel 

material and can be installed or removed in piping systems 

that are not pressurized. The hot tap stainless steel models 

include isolation valve and mounting hardware which 

enables flowmeter installation and removal while the piping 

system is pressurized; system shutdown is unnecessary. Hot 

tap stainless steel models are also available for bidirectional 

flow measurement. 

The four-blade impeller is rugged and non-fouling and 

requires no custom calibration. The SDI Series is available 

with a frequency output, analog output, and scaled-pulse 

output and the display is optional. Stainless steel models are 

available with a PEEK (polyetheretherketone) tip for high (up 

to 300°F) fluid temperatures. 

FEATURES 

• Direct insertion or hot tap installation 

• Fits pipe sizes 1.5" to 36"+ (3.8 to 91+ cm) 

• Mounts in 1" NPT tap, weld-on or pipe saddle 


• Low pressure drop 

• Optional 8 character 3/8" (0.95 cm) LCD 

• NEMA 4X enclosure standard 

• Bidirectional models available 

• Field programmable with optional software 


Operating Voltage 8-35 VDC 

Accuracy ±1% of flow rate 

Max pressure 

Stainless steel 1000 psig (6895 kPa) 

Brass 600 psig (4137 kPa) 

Max fluid temp 300°F (149°C) (PEEK tip) 

180°F (82°C) (PPS tip) 

Ambient temp range 14° to150°F (20° to 65°C) 

Design flow range 0.3 to 20 fps (.09 to 6.1 mps) 

Display One-line eight-character 3/8" 

(0.95 cm) LCD 

Pressure drop 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less 

Enclosure NEMA 4X, polypropylene with 

Viton-sealed dacrylic cover 

Electrical connection Screw terminals with 1/2" 

(1.27 cm) conduit connection 

O-Ring Viton (standard) 

Shaft Tungsten carbide (standard) 

Impeller Stainless steel (standard) 

Bearing Torlon (standard) 



SDI Flow sensor with integral transmitter 

MATERIAL 

0D1N SS insertion w/PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 

0D2N SS insertion w/PPS tip for 12"" to 36" pipes 

0D3N SS insertion w/PPS tip for 36"+ pipes 

1D1N Brass insertion w/PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 

1D2N Brass insertion w/PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes 

1D3N Brass insertion w/PPS tip for 36"+ pipes 

2D1N SS insertion w/PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 

2D2N SS insertion w/PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes 

2D3N SS insertion w/PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes 

0H1N SS hot tap w/PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 

0H2N SS hot tap w/PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes 

0H3N SS hot tap w/PPS tip for 36"+ pipes 

2H1N SS hot tap w/PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 

2H2N SS hot tap w/PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes 

2H3N SS hot tap w/PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes 

OUTPUT 

0 Standard frequency pulse 

1 4-20 mA 

2 Scaled pulse 

5 Bidirectional, 4-20 mA + direction (hot tap, PPS tip only) 

6 Bidirectional, scaled pulse (hot tap, PPS tip only) 

DISPLAY 

0 No display 

1 LCD option (not available with output option 0) 

CONSTRUCTION 

0200 Viton O-ring, Carbide shaft, SS impeller, 

Torlon bearing (std) 

1200 EPDM O-ring, Carbide shaft, SS impeller, 

Torlon bearing 

SDI 2D1N 1 1 0200 

SDI Insertion 

Example: SDI2D1N11200 Flow sensor with 

integral transmitter, SS insertion 

with PEEK tip, 4-20 mA output, 

display, standard construction 


A-SDI Programming kit 

A-1027 Hot tap adapter nipple

FLOW 

PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FLOW TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 310 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 310 Programmable Analog Flow 

Transmitter is a loop-powered device that converts the 

signal from a 200 or 4000 Series flow sensor into a linear 

4-20 mA signal. An integral, adjustable electronic filter 

dampens the analog output for smooth, stable operation. 

The microprocessor-based Model 310 is configured from 

a computer, allowing it to be ordered pre-configured, or it 

can be field-configured. One Model A301-20 programming 

kit will configure all Model 310 transmitters. 

FEATURES 

• 4-20 mA loop powered 


• Computer programmable 

• Electronic signal dampening 


Power requirements 

Loop input voltage 9-35 VDC 

Max loop resistance 750� @ 24 VDC 

Accuracy 0.1% of full scale 

Input frequency 0-1 kHz 

Output response time Varies with filter, typically 

1 sec 10% to 90% step 

response 



(4.4 x 9.3 x 2.5 cm) 

WIRING 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

4-20 mA 

Signal 



310 Programmable analog flow transmitter 

MOUNTING 

00 Transmitter only 

01 Transmitter in NEMA 4X enclosure 

02 Transmitter in metal enclosure 

03 Transmitter in plastic enclosure 

04 Transmitter with DIN rail mount 

OPTIONS 

XR Pre-configured option 

310 

00 XR 

_ 

+ 

+ 

_ 

310-00 

4-20 mA loop (-) 

4-20 mA loop (+) 

Shield Ground 

Signal (-) 

Signal (+) 

Power (4000 only) 

Sensor Inputs 

Shield (if applicable) 

(black) 

(red) 

Model 310 

Example: 310-00-XR Preconfigured programmable 

analog flow transmitter for field mounting 

For preconfigured flow sensors, specify pipe size, schedule, 

and maximum flow rate at time of order. 


A301-20 Programming kit (cable and software) 

200 Series 

Flow Sensor 

Calibration 

Port 

FLOW 

NOTE: Call Kele for 

4000 Series wiring. 

213 

FLOW

FLOW 

214 

FLOW 

FLOW MONITOR 

1500 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 1500 Series is an economical, full-featured digital flow 

monitor. The two-line, eight-character alphanumeric display 

can be user-configured to display flow rate and flow total separately 

or simultaneously. The 1500 Series is easily field-calibrated 

for use with any Data Industrial flow sensor. It may also 

be calibrated for a pulse, sine wave, or optional 4-20 mA analog 

flow signal. 

The 1500 Series provides two TTL pulse outputs: one for flow 

rate alarm and one for flow total. The resolution of these pulse 

outputs may be user programmed. An optional analog output 

is also available for flow rate, and optional mechanical relay 

outputs are available for flow rate alarm and totalization. The 

front panel includes one LED for power status and one LED for 

impeller status, totalizer status, or alarm status. All calibration 

information, units of measure, and flow totals are stored in 

nonvolatile memory that does not require battery back-up for 

data retention. 

Programming is menu driven. All data is entered using the 

password-protected LCD and keypad on the face of the unit. 

1500 Series software contains eight engineering units for indicating 

flow rate and four for indicating flow total. The 1500 

Series is available in either a NEMA 4X panel-mount or a 

NEMA 4 wall-mount version. 



Consumption 3W max 

Display Eight characters by two lines, 

alphanumeric, dot matrix 

LCD display 


Dimensions 

Panel mount 3.78"W x 3.78"H x 3.23"D 

(9.6 x 9.6 x 8.2 cm) 

Wall mount 4.80W" x 4.72"H x 3.55"D 

(12.2 x 12.0 x 9.0 cm) 

Pulse output •Two open-collector transistor pulse outputs, 

one for rate and one for total, userconfigured 

to any units 

•Adjustable 100 ms to 5.0 sec pulse output 

width in 100 ms increments (totalizer 

only) 

•Max sinking current: 

300 mA @ 24 VDC 

FEATURES 


• Field calibrated 

• Menu-driven programming 

• Flow rate and flow total display 

• Password protected calibration data 

• Wall mount or panel mount 


1500 Flow monitor with LCD display 

INPUTS/OUTPUTS 

0 No analog output 

3 0-10 VDC input for flow meter with analog output 

5 4-20 mA analog output 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

0 Standard - 2 TTL pulse outputs 

1 Two mechanical relays (1 - flow rate alarm, 1 - totalizer) 

MOUNTING 

0 Panel mount, NEMA 4X front panel 

1 Wall mount, NEMA 4 

1500 5 0 1 Example: 1500-5-0-1 Flow monitor with 4-20 mA 

analog output, NEMA 4 wall-mount 

Options 

Relays Two optional relays: 1 operates from rate 

and 1 from totalizer 

SPST contacts, 3A @ 250 VAC or 30 

VDC max resistive load 

Rate • High rate and low rate alarm functions 

• Adjustable 0-120 sec delay (in 10-sec 

increments) for activation of alarm 

functions 

• Latched feature 

Totalizer • User-configurable output to any units 

Analog output • Current sinking, isolated 4-20 mA 

Min voltage 7 VDC 

Max voltage 30 VDC 

Order Data Industrial 

flow sensor separately

FLOW 

BTU MONITOR 

1550 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 1550 Series BTU Monitor is an economical, fullfeatured, 

microprocessor-based unit designed for submetering 

applications. It accepts the inputs of one flow 

sensor and two Precon Type 24 temperature sensors 

and calculates the energy being produced or consumed. 

The flow sensor input may be from any 200 or 4000 

Series flow sensor or any other pulse or sine wave signal 

flow sensor. 

The 1550 Series provides a display of energy rate, temperature, 

energy total, or flow rate on an alphanumeric 

display with two lines of eight characters each. The 

energy rate may be displayed in kBtu/hr or kW, the energy 

total in Btu or kWh, and flow rate in gpm or lpm. The 

user programs the units from the four-button front panel 

by following a simple menu. A password lockout feature 

is included. A 100 ms pulse output for energy total is 

standard. A variety of pulse and analog outputs are 

optional. 

FEATURES 

• Field calibrated with simple menu-driven 

programming 

• Energy rate, energy total, or flow rate display 


Power supply 15-24 VDC @ 60 mA 

(basic unit) 

Analog output option Add 30 mA 

Relay output option Add 40 mA 

Opto-isolated output Add 10 mA 

Display Eight characters by two lines, 

alphanumeric 


Flow sensor Any 200, 4000 Series or SDI 

flow sensor [Call Trane for 

application with other pulse or 

sine wave type flow sensors] 

Temp sensor Precon Type 24 thermistor, 

two required (XP option recommended) 

(matched ±0.1°F) 

Totalizer range 0.000001 to 9,999,999 

1550-001 BTU monitor shown 

with 220B flow sensor and 

ST-U24B-XP temperature sensors 


• Password protection 

• NEMA 4X wall or panel mount 

• A variety of flow sensor inputs accepted 

Pulse output Open collector transistor 

(energy total) pulse, user configurable to any 

units 100 ms pulse width 

Max sinking current 150 mA @ 24 VDC 

Units of measure 

Energy total User selectable as kBtu or kWh 

with one pulse set to 0.000001 

to 9,999,999 (rolls over to zero) 

Energy rate User selectable as Btu/Hr or kW 

Flow rate User selectable as GPM or LPM 

Temp User selectable as °F or °C 

Options 

Relay SPST 3.0A @ 250 VAC 

Analog 4-20 mA; loop powered, 24 

VDC nominal, 850� max 

impedance, 0-10 VDC; nonisolated 

Weight 

Panel mount 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 

Wall mount 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) 

215 

FLOW

FLOW 

216 

FLOW 

BTU MONITOR 

1550 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3.49 

(8.86) 

Top 

3.78 

(9.60) 

Front 

3.62 

(9.19) 

2.21 

(5.8) 

3.78 

(9.60) 

Panel Mount 

4.72 

(11.99) 

Wall Mount 

3.57 - 3.60 

(9.06 - 9.14) 

Panel 

Cutout 

3.23 

(8.20) 

1550 1 1 0 

Side 

3.49 

(8.86) 

4.80 

(12.19) 

3.57 - 3.60 

(9.06 - 9.14) 

WIRING 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 



1550 BTU monitor with display 

ANALOG OUTPUTS 

0 No analog output 

1 Isolated 4-20 mA loop 

2 Nonisolated 0-10 VDC 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

0 Standard open collector pulse 

1 SPST relay pulse 

MOUNTING 

0 Panel mount, NEMA 4X front panel 

1 Wall mount, NEMA 4X 

OUTPUTS TEMP SENSOR 

15-24 VDC 

POWER 

24V Max 

Counter 

Order flow sensor 

and temperature 

sensors separately. 

Example: 1550-1-1-0 BTU Monitor with 4-20 mA output for BTU/Hr rate, SPST relay 

pulse output for BTU, and panel-mount housing with NEMA 4X front 


200/4000 Series Flow sensors 

ST-U24B-XP Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, brass wells 

ST-U24S-XP Temperature sensors, matched ±0.1°F, stainless wells 

1 

1/4 AMP Fast 

Acting Fuse 

1 

2 

4 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

3 

2 

1 

1550 Series 

TEMP2 

ST-U24B-XP 

Temp 

Sensors 

2 

COM 

TEMP1 

Bare 

COM 

Black 

Red 

POWER 

SIGNAL 

- 

+ 

200 Series 

Flow Sensor 

The same power supply may power the 1550 and 

the outputs. 

Wiring shown is for open collector transistor pulse 

output (standard). An optional SPST relay pulse 

output is also available. 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

See Note 1

FLOW 

BTU TRANSMITTER 

340 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Data Industrial 340 Series is an inexpensive and 

easy-to-apply BTU transmitter. It is software-driven and 

field-configurable, measuring energy usage based on 

liquid flow rate and two 10 k� thermistor inputs. The 

onboard microcontroller and digital circuitry provide precise 

measurements and produce accurate drift-free outputs. 

Configuration is accomplished with a windowsbased 

software programming kit. The 340 Series is 

available with a standard pulse output or with on-board 

communication technology for LonWorks networks or 

the Johnson Controls N2 Metasys system. 

FEATURES 

• AC or DC powered 

• Field programmable 

• Available in various mounting platforms 

• Microprocessor based 

• Small footprint 

• Uses two 10 k� thermistors 

• Used with Data Industrial flow sensors 


Power 12-24 VAC ±5% 

12-24 VDC ±10% 

Current draw 60 mA @ 24 VDC 



Flow sensor input 

All sensors Excitation voltage three-wire 

sensors, 7.9-11.4 VDC 270� 

source impedance 

Pulse-type sensors 

Signal amplitude 2.5 VDC threshold 

Signal limits Vin

FLOW 

218 

FLOW 

BTU TRANSMITTER 

340 SERIES 

WIRING 

AC/DC 

Power + 

Supply – 

Flow 

Sensor 

Shield 

(if applicable) 

Temperature 

Sensors 

(red) 

(black) 

AC L or DC+ 

AC C or DC– 

Power Out 

Signal (+) 

Signal (–) 

Shield 

Temp 1 

Temp 2 

Pulse – 

Output + 

* Network communications terminals 

vary slightly per model 

Pulse Input 

Device 

(–) (+) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 



340 BTU meter 

OUTPUT 

- Transmitter with standard pulse output 

LW Transmitter for use with LonWorks networks 

N2 Transmitter for use with Johnson Metasys networks 

ENCLOSURE 

00 Transmitter only 

02 Transmitter with metal enclosure 

03 Transmitter with plastic enclosure 

04 Transmitter with DIN rail mounting clips 

340 

_ 

– 

_ 

02 Example: 340 Series BTU meter with standard pulse output 

and metal enclosure 


A301-20 Programming kit for the Model 340 and 340-LW 

A302-20 Programming kit for the Model 340-N2 

200/4000 Series Flow sensors 

ST-U24B-XP Temperature sensor, matched, brass well 

ST-U24S-XP Temperature sensor, matched, stainless steel well 

See the “Temperature” section in the Trane catalog for applicable temperature sensors. 

See the “Flow” section in the Trane catalog for applicable flow sensors 

1.6 

(4.1) 

2.95 

(7.5) 

3.65 

(9.3) 

0.88 

(2.2) 

0.6 

(1.5)

FLOW 

UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER 

MODEL UFT-1 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UFT-1 Universal Flow Transmitter is a 

solid-state, digital signal converter designed to operate 

with Data Industrial 200 Series flow sensors. Both analog 

(4-20 mA) and pulse outputs are available. The 

Model UFT-1 may be mounted in an optional NEMA 4X 

enclosure or with digital display of gpm or totalized flow 

(in a non-watertight enclosure). 

FEATURES 

• Analog and pulse outputs 

• Optional watertight (NEMA 4X) enclosure 

• Optional displays for flow rate and totalization 

• Low cost 

• Excitation voltage for flow sensors 

• LED indication of pulse activity 

APPLICATION 

Analog Output (rate) 

The Model UFT-1 analog transmitter converts a Data 

Industrial digital flow signal into a precalibrated 4-20 mA 

signal. It must be calibrated for each Data Industrial flow 

sensor installation. The pipe type, size, and maximum 

flow rate must be specified at the time of order if 4-20 

mA output is to be used. 

Pulse Output (totalization) 

The Model UFT-1 pulse output divides the Data 

Industrial digital flow signal by a jumper-selectable 10 or 

100 position to provide a more usable digital pulse. The 

pulse output is normally used where flow totalization is 

required. A simple conversion formula, using the flow 

factors for Data Industrial flow sensors on the next page, 

can convert the digital pulses to totalized gallons. 

The pulse output is an optoisolated transistor switch that 

can be wired to source or sink pulses to totalizer equipment. 

Note: This unit is not intended for field setup or 

field calibration. 


Supply voltage 24 VDC @ 60 mA 



Output 4-20 mA and solid-state switch 

Input 15-150 Hz full scale 

(dry or electronic contact) 

in 

(cm) 

UFT-1 

DIMENSIONS 

3.25 

(8.25) 

UFT-1E-1 

Pulse 

Out + 

Pulse 

Out – 

mA Signal 

Out 

XDCR 

Signal In 

24 VDC 

Power 

Common 

Max loop resistance 4-20 mA output 750� @ 

24 VDC 

Output switch rating 40 VDC @ 200 mA 


Step response 5 sec from 10% to 90% 

2.19 

(5.56) 

219 

FLOW

FLOW 

220 

FLOW 

UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER 

MODEL UFT-1 

WIRING 

Output Pulse Divider 

Selection Jumper 

(10 or 100) 100 

XDCR 

Sig In 

10 

Pulse 

Out 

Pulse 

Out + 

Pulse 

Out – 

mA Signal 

Out 

XDCR 

Signal In 

24 VDC 

Power 

PWR Common 

Transducer Power Option Jumper 

(Leave on for Data Industrial flow sensors. 

Remove for devices with their own power supply.) 

INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION 

The UFT-1 transmitter can be mounted in any position. The 

optional watertight enclosure provides a watertight seal 

against contaminants. While field calibration is not required 

with the UFT-1, flow conversion must be accomplished at the 

monitoring computer. The information below is provided for 

making the conversion calculations. 

FLOW RATE 

Flow (gpm) = (mA measured - 4 mA) x Maximum gpm 

16 

Maximum gpm is the flow rate at 20 mA output on the transmitter 

and must be specified at the time the UFT-1 is ordered 

for proper calibration. 

TOTALIZED FLOW 

Totalized Gallons = (Flow Factor) x (Output Divider) x (Total 

Pulses) 

For totalized m3 , multiply the above by 0.00379. 

Output Divider = 10 or 100 depending on jumper-selection. 

Flow factors per pulse are shown in the table at the right. 

(red) + Flow 

Sensor 

(black) – 

+ – 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 



UFT-1 Universal flow transmitter pulse output only 

UFT-1A Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output* 

UFT-1E Universal flow transmitter pulse output in NEMA 4X enclosure 

UFT-1AE Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output* in NEMA 4X enclosure 

DISPLAY OPTION (enclosed models only) 

1 Flow totalization only 

2 Flow rate only 

3 Flow totalization and flow rate ** 

UFT-1 1 Example: UFT-1A-E-2 Basic transmitter with calibrated 4-20 mA flow rate 

output (4 mA = no flow 20 mA = max flow), enclosed with LCD 

flow rate indication 

Totalize 

+ 

– Power 

+ 

– 

4-20 mA 

Output 

* Pipe size and schedule and 

maximum flow rate must be 

specified at time of order. 

Typical 

Totalizer 

Hookup 

TABLE 1. FLOW FACTORS FOR DATA INDUSTRIAL 

FLOW SENSORS 

MODEL PIPE SIZE FLOW GALLONS/PULSE 

in (cm) FACTOR JUMPER IN JUMPER IN 

10 POSITION 100 POSITION 

228PV-1.5 1-1/2 (3.81) 0.03118 0.3118 3.118 

228PV-2 2 (5.08) 0.04611 0.4611 4.611 

228B-2 2 (5.08) 0.04579 0.4579 4.579 

228C-2 2 (5.08) 0.04731 0.4731 4.731 

250B-0.5 1/2 (1.27) 0.005646 0.05646 0.5646 

250B-0.75 3/4 (1.91) 0.007514 0.07514 0.7514 

250B-1 1 (2.54) 0.007015 0.07015 0.7015 

250B-1.25 1-1/4 (3.18) 0.01280 0.1280 1.280 

250B-1.5 1-1/2 (3.81) 0.01780 0.1780 1.780 

220B-2.5 2-1/2 (6.35) 0.03800 0.3800 3.800 

220B 3 (7.62) 0.07280 0.7280 7.280 

220B 4 (10.16) 0.1396 1.396 13.96 

220B 5 (12.7) 0.2457 2.457 24.57 

220B 6 (15.24) 0.3611 3.611 36.11 

220B 8 (20.32) 0.6710 6.710 67.10 

220B 10 (25.40) 1.080 10.80 108.0 

220B 12 (30.48) 1.630 16.30 163.0 

220B 14 (35.56) 1.944 19.44 194.4 

220B 16 (40.64) 2.502 25.02 250.2 

220B 18 (45.72) 3.158 31.58 315.8 

Notes 

1. Flow factors for a Model 225 and 226 are the same as Model 220. 

*2. Flow factor for Model 228S is the same as 228C. 

3. PV Series is sized for SCH 80 PVC pipe. 

All other series are sized for SCH 40 black iron pipe. 

** When a UFT-1AE3 is ordered 

the UFT-1A will be in one enclosure 

and the Totalizer and Rate Display 

will be in a separate enclosure.

FLOW 

ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER 

DTFXL SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The DTFXL Series Ultrasonic Flowmeter measures 

water flow in a wide variety of pipe sizes and pipe materials, 

using clamp-on sensors that attach to the outside 

of the pipe. This non-invasive, non-contact flowmeter 

provides instantaneous flow rate and accumulated flow 

and provides a 4-20 mA output as well as pulse outputs. 

The DTFXL Series Flowmeter is easy to install, has a 

large bi-directional flow range, and comes with or without 

a display. Configuration, monitoring, and calibration 

of the DTXFL is accomplished with an easy to use software 

package via a cable connection from a PC to the 

flowmeter. 

FEATURES 

• Transit-time technology 

• Immune to suspended solids and gas pockets 

• Bi-directional flow range 

• Multiple totalizers for forward, reverse, net 

• Models with or without display 

• Selectable standard or metric engineering units 

• Integral or remote transducers for < 2" pipes 

• Remote transducers for pipes up to 100" 

• Non-invasive, no system down time to install 

• 4-20 mA output plus choice of pulse outputs 

• Optional armored cable 

• High temperature transducers available 


Supply voltage 11-30 VDC @ 0.25 A 

Liquid types Most clean liquids or liquids with 

some suspended solids or aeration 

(up to 40%) 

Liquid velocity range 0.1 to 40 FPS (0.03 to 12.4 

MPS) bidirectional 

Outputs 

4-20 mA 900 ohms max, source power 

can share common with power 

supply 

Turbine or TTL 0-1,000 Hz, switch selectable; 

Turbine = non-ground ref AC, 

100 mV pp min.; TTL = 5 VDC 

pp ground ref square wave 

Display 2 line x 8 character LCD 

Accuracy ±1.0% of reading above 1 FPS 

(0.3 MPS) velocity, ±0.01% of 

reading below 1 FPS 

Response time 0.3 to 30 seconds, adjustable 

Pipe size range 1/2" to 100" (1.2 cm to 254 cm) 

APPLICATIONS 

The DTFXL Series is available in 3 basic transmitter/transducer 

arrangements for installation and application 

flexibility. The transmitters are available with or 

without display. 

Models with integral transducers are available for pipe 

sizes 1/2" to 2"; the transmitter is attached to the transducers 

which clamp on to the pipe, for a local mount 

arrangement. 

Models with remote small-pipe (1/2" to 2") clamp-on 

transducers allow the transmitter to be wall or panel 

mounted away from the pipe. 

Models with remote large-pipe (2 1/2" to 100") strap-on 

transducers require the transmitter to be wall or panel 

mounted away from the pipe. 

Pipe materials Carbon steel, stainless steel, 

copper, plastic 

Temperature range 

Transmitter -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) 

Transducer (integral) -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) 

Transducer (std. remote) -40° to 250°F (-40° to 121°C) 

Transducer (high temp.) -40° to 400°F (-40° to 200°C) 

Transmitter enclosure NEMA 4X, if a liquid-tight 

conduit connection is used 

Conduit connection 1/2" conduit knockout (7/8", 

2.2 cm) 

Approvals Gen. Req. ANSI/ISA 582.01; 

Haz. Loc. ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 

Class 1 Div 2, Groups C & D; 

CSA C22.2 No. 213, E79-15- 

95 

Transducer cable lengths 20' (6.1 m), 50' (15 m), or 

100' (30 m) 

Warranty 1 year from date of shipment 

221 

FLOW

FLOW 

222 

FLOW 

ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER 

DTFXL SERIES 

DIMENSIONS - INTEGRAL MODEL 

in (mm) 

3.17 

(80.5) 


WIRING 

Note: Power ground and 

4-20 mA common are 

connected internally. 

Transducer 

Connections 

6.66 

(169.2) 

TRANSIT TIME FLOWMETER 

NOTE: Dimensions A, B, C, and D vary by pipe size. 

See Dynasonics literature for details. 


DTFXL1 Transmitter without display 

DTFXL2 Transmitter with display 

DTFXL3 Transmitter without display, UL enclosure 

DTFXL4 Transmitter with display, UL enclosure 

PIPE SIZE 

A 1/2" ANSI carbon steel 

B 3/4" ANSI carbon steel 

C 1" ANSI carbon steel 

D 1 1/4" ANSI carbon steel 

E 1 1/2" ANSI carbon steel 

F 2" ANSI carbon steel 

G 1/2" copper 

H 3/4" copper 

I 1" copper 

J 1 1/4" copper 

K 1 1/2" copper 

L 2" copper 

M 1/2" tubing (plastic) 

N 3/4" tubing (plastic) 

P 1" tubing (plastic) 

Q 1 1/4" tubing (plastic) 

R 1 1/2" tubing (plastic) 

S 2" tubing 

X Remote transducers (see right) 

CONNECTOR OPTIONS 

N 1/2" conduit knockout 

OUTPUT SIGNALS 

1-NN 4-20 mA and pulse 

– 

4-20 mA output 

+ 

Turbine or TTL output 

Power 

PC cable 

connection 

Turbine or TTL Pulse 

+ – 

4-20 mA 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

Note: Integral model transmitters have conduit knock out connection on the right 

side of the enclosure. Remote models have two conduit holes on the bottom 

side of the enclosure. 

– 

+ 

Remote Transducers For Small Pipes (with “X” Pipe Size) 


DTTS Remote transducers for 1/2" to 2" pipes 

PIPE SIZE 

D 1/2" 

F 3/4" 

G 1" 

H 1 1/4" 

J 1 1/2" 

L 2" 

PIPE TYPE 

P ANSI carbon steel 

C Copper 

T Tubing 

CABLE LENGTH 

020 20 feet (6.1 m) 

050 50 feet (15 m) 

100 100 feet (30 m) 

CABLE ARMOR OPTION 

N No armor 

A Flexible armor 

CABLE ARMOR LENGTH 

000 No armor 

020 20 feet (6.1 m) 

050 50 feet (15 m) 

100 100 feet (30 m) 

– 

+ 

2.57 

(65.3) 

B 

C 

.875 (22.2) DIA 

CONDUIT HOLE 

Remote Transducers for Large Pipes (with “X” Pipe Size) 


DTTN Standard temperature remote transducers for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes 

DTTH High temperature remote transducers for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes 

CABLE LENGTH 

020 20 feet (6.1 m) 

050 50 feet (15 m) 

100 100 feet (30 m) 

CABLE ARMOR OPTION 

N No armor 

A Flexible armor 

CABLE ARMOR LENGTH 

000 No armor 

020 20 feet (6.1 m) 

050 50 feet (15 m) 

100 100 feet (30 m) 

OPTIONS 

N Normal area rating 

NOTE: Add "-C"suffix to transmitter model number for 

factory-configured transmitter and fill out the 

Application Data Sheet. The UltraLink software 

is required to reset the DTFXL totalizer and to 

field configure, monitor and diagnose the 

DTFXL. The PC cable is required to connect a 

PC to the DTFXL and the software is available 

on CD or free from www.dynasonics.com. 



D010-0204-001 PC to transmitter cable 

D005-083-104 UltraLink software CD 

D010-2102-010 Mounting track assembly (for 

DTTN/H transducers) for 2 1/2" to 

10" pipes only. 

D002-2007-001 Additional 36" stainless hoseclamps 

for DTTN/H transducers 

(two pairs included standard with 

remote transducers) 

DCP-1.5-W 24 VAC / 24 VDC power supply 

DCP-1.2 120 VAC / 24 VDC power supply 

D 

A

FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER 

2200, 3100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 2200 Series Fixed Insertion, and 3100 Series 

Retractable Vortex Flowmeters are used to measure 

the flow rate of water, water/glycol mixtures, and condensate 

in 2" to 20" pipes. Each flowmeter is factory calibrated 

and scaled to provide precise output signals. No 

complex field adjustments or confusing measurement 

routines are required to install the flowmeters. Simple 

design, easy installation, reliable performance, and low 

cost make these flowmeters an excellent choice for 

commercial HVAC applications. 

FEATURES 

• No moving parts 


• Reliable and robust design 

• Wide flow range – 15:1 turndown ratio 

• Microprocessor based piezo resistive sensor 

technology 

• Optional integral display 

• Two year warranty 

WIRING 

Vs 

(10 to 32 VDC) 

FLOW RANGES 

2200 

Series 

3100 

Series 

FLOW 

*R load 

4-20 mA wiring 

* R load maximum = 50 (Vs - 10) 

2200 Series 

with Optional 

Display 

OPERATION 

As flow passes a bluff body in the flow stream, vortices are alternately 

formed on either side of the bluff body (Figure 1). 

According to well proven physical laws, the frequency at which 

vortices are alternately formed is directly proportional to the 

average flow velocity. The vortices create low and high pressure 

zones behind the bluff body. A vortex flowmeter has a sensing 

element that detects these low and high pressure zones and the 

frequency at which they are created to measure flow. 

The fluttering of a flag (Figure 2) is one example of how vortices 

are created. The flag pole acts as a bluff body to the blowing 

wind as the flag waves from the force of the vortices alternately 

created. 

FIGURE 1. VORTICES CREATED BY 

A BLUFF BODY 

Pipe Size in (mm) 2” (50) 3” (80) 4” (100) 6” (150) 8” (200) 10” (250) 12” (300) 14” (350) 16” (400) 18” (450) 20” (500) 

Minimum Flow 

gpm (m3/h) 10.6 (2.4) 23.4 (5.4) 40 (9.2) 100 (23) 167 (38) 267 (61) 368 (83) 418 (95) 568 (129) 734 (167) 934 (212) 

Maximum Flow 

gpm (m3/h) 160 (36.3) 350 (79.5) 600 (136) 1500 (341) 2500 (557) 4000 (909) 5500 (1249) 6250 (1420) 8500 (1931) 11000 (2498) 14000 (3180) 

Minimum Flow 

gpm (m3/h) na 26.6 (6.0) 40 (9.0) 100 (23) 167 (38) 267 (61) 366 (83) 417 (95) 567 (129) 733 (167) 933 (212) 

Maximum Flow 

gpm (m3/h) na 400 (90.8) 600 (136) 1500 (341) 2500 (557) 4000 (909) 5500 (1249) 6250 (1420) 8500 (1931) 11000 (2498) 14000 (3180) 

Bluff 

Body 

FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF 

VORTEX EFFECT 

Bluff 

Body 

223

FLOW 

224 

FLOW 

FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER 

2200, 3100 SERIES 


Pipe sizes 

Model 2200 2" to 20" (50 mm to 500 mm) 

Model 3100 3" to 20" (75 mm to 500 mm) 

Pipe connection 

Model 2200 1-1/2" NPT male 

Model 3100 2" NPT male 

Pressure rating 

Threadolet mount 400 psig (2759 kPa) 

Saddle mount 300 psig (2069 kPa) 

Tee mount 150 psig (1035 kPa) 

Flow range 1.0 fps (0.3 mps) min, 

15.0 fps (4.5 mps) max 

Fluid temp range 32° to 160°F (0° to 71°C) 

Wetted parts 

Vortex sensor Ultem® (plastic) 

Shedder bar 316 stainless steel 


Stem Stainless steel 

O-rings EPDM 

Compression 

Fitting Brass 


Output Pulse or 4-20 mA loop 

powered 

Max load Rload = 50 (V s-10) 

Display (optional) LCD alternates between four 

digit rate and eight digit total 

Accuracy ±1.0% of full scale (combined 

linearity and repeatability) 

Enclosure Reinforced polycarbonate 

NEMA 6 

Ambient temp range -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 


2200 Fixed insertion vortex flow meter 

3100 Retractable insertion vortex flow meter 

PIPE SIZE DESCRIPTION 

02 2" Pipe (fixed insertion only) 

03 3" Pipe 

04 4" Pipe 

06 6" Pipe 

08 8" Pipe 

10 10" Pipe 

12 12" Pipe 

14 14" Pipe 

16 16" Pipe 

18 18" Pipe 

20 20" Pipe 

MOUNTING DESCRIPTION 

1 Threadolet 

4 Tee (2" size only) 

OUTPUT, DISPLAY OPTIONS DESCRIPTION 

2-1-1 4-20 mA output, no display 

2-2-1 4-20 mA output, display, English units 

2200 06 1 2-1-1 Example: 2200-06-1-2-1-1 Fixed insertion flow meter, 

6" pipe, Threadolet mount, 4-20 mA, no display 

Notes: Other options and configurations available. Separately ordered configuration software 

also available for field configuration. Consult Trane.

FLOW 

INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER 

MODEL V-BAR 700 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model V-Bar 700 Insertion Vortex Flow Meter can 

be used to measure the flow rates of most liquids, 

gases, and steam. The same Model V-Bar 700 will fit in 

lines from 3" to 80" (7.62 to 203.2 cm). This unit features 

no moving parts and an accuracy of ±1.5% for 

steam and gases (liquids are ±1.0%). Each unit comes 

with an easily programmable integral local flow rate indicator 

and totalizer. Each Model V-Bar 700 carries the 

CE mark. 

FEATURES 

• Measures flow rates of liquids, gases, or steam 

• 2000 psig (13,790 kPa) pressure rating 

• 500°F temperature rating 


• Integral transmitter with local display 


• One meter for applications from 3" to 80" 

(7.62 to 203.2 cm) 

• Stainless steel construction 


Accuracy ±1.5% of flow rate for gas or 

steam 

±1.0% of flow rate for liquids 

Repeatability ±0.15% of flow rate 

Enclosure NEMA 4X 



Isolated 18-40 VDC, 35 mA max 

Output 4-20 mA, two-wire system/pulse 

Min flow 1.5 fps 

Wetted parts 316L Stainless steel or the cast 

equivalent 

Mounting 2" NPT 

Pressure tap 1/4" NPT pipe nipple 

OPERATION 


Please call Trane for specific application and prices. 

The following information is required: 

Vortex flow meters are devices that measure the frequency 

of vortices created in the flow stream. Vortices are like tiny 

eddies produced by an obstruction (called a bluff body) in the 

flow and are actually areas of low pressure. These vortices 

travel with the flow downstream until they run out of energy. 

Inserting a bluff body (Figure 1) into the stream creates 

these vortices that alternate from side to side. The frequency 

of these vortices or pressure pulses can be measured and 

are directly proportional to the average flow rate. A flag waving 

in the wind is an example of this vortex effect (Figure 2). 

The flagpole is the bluff body, and the high and low pressure 

areas are seen as high and low ridges in the flag. These 

ridges alternate as they travel across the flag and cause the 

flag to appear to be waving. 

FIGURE 1. VORTICES CREATED BY 

A BLUFF BODY 

Bluff 

Body 

FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF 

VORTEX EFFECT 

1. Pipe size and schedule 4. Maximum flow rate (btu/h, lb/hr, scfm) 

2. Type of gas or liquid 5. Temperature 

3. Operating pressure 6. Constant or varying pressure 

Bluff 

Body 

225 

FLOW

FLOW 

226 

FLOW 

TARGET FLOW METERS 

MODELS KVS (Steam), KV (Other Gases & Liquids) 

DESCRIPTION 

Model KVS and KV Target Flow Meters are highly 

durable and reliable flow meters for steam, liquids, and 

gases. With no moving parts, they measure flow with a 

strain gauge bridge circuit (outside the fluid) on a shaft 

attached to a stainless steel target in the pipe. The signal 

from the strain gauge circuit is converted to an analog 

signal by a transmitter mounted in an integral explosionproof 

housing. The transmitter, which provides an 

analog signal linear to flow, is standard. Instrumentation 

is also available to provide local or remote indication of 

flow rate, totalization, or pressure/temperature compensated 

mass flow. 

FEATURES 

• 0.5% accuracy through 8" (20.32 cm), 1-2% 

above 8" 


• Long life with two-year warranty 

• Integral linear analog transmitter 

• Bidirectional (optional) 

• Explosionproof housing standard 

• Mass flow computer (optional) 

• -65°F to 425°F (218°C) standard temperature 

rating 

• Stainless steel construction standard 

• Flow measurement of the following: 

Steam Acids 

Water Gases 

Chemicals Air 



KV Insertion target flowmeter, integral transmitter, for water 

KVS Insertion target flowmeter, integral transmitter, for steam 

LINE SIZE (inches) DESCRIPTION 

4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, etc. Select pipe size (larger insertion and smaller in-line models also available) 

MOUNTING DESCRIPTION 

M 2" RF Flange 

P 4" RF Flange 

FLANGE RATING DESCRIPTION 

1 150 # RF ANSI 

2 300 # RF ANSI 

BODY, ELEMENT DESCRIPTION 

S1K 303/304 SS Body, 1,000 psi, 425 DF rating 

KV 6 M 1 S1K 

Example: KV-6-M-1-S1K Insertion target flowmeter 

for water, 6" pipe size, 2" RF 150 # mounting 

flange, 303/304 SS body, 1,000 psi, 425 DF 

rating 

NOTES: The following information is required. Each flowmeter is factory-configured for a specific application. 

1) Type of fluid or gas 

2) Operation pressure and temperature 

3) Maximum flow rate (gpm, lb/hr, scfm, etc.) 

4) Transmitter output required (4-20 mA, pulse, mass flow, batch relay control, etc.) 

Smaller pipe size in-line target flowmeters (1/2" - 3") also available. Remote transmitters, retractable type flowmeters, 

and many other options also available. Consult Trane.

FLOW 

CALEFFI FLOW SWITCH 

MODEL 626600A 

DESCRIPTION 

Model 626600A Flow Switch from Caleffi is used to 

prove liquid flow in 1" to 8" pipes containing water, glycol 

solutions, or other liquids that are compatible with stainless 

steel, brass, and EPDM. It is designed for use in 

HVAC systems, heat exchangers, pumping systems, 

water treatment, and process systems in general. 

The high quality of Model 626600A makes it ideal for 

controlling pumps, burners, compressors, refrigerators, 

motorized valves, or for activation of signaling units or 

warning devices. 

FEATURES 

• AISI 316L stainless steel bellows for durability 

and long life 

• NEMA 4 (IP54) environmental rating for use in 

humid or dusty environments 

• Six stainless steel blades to fit 1" through 

8" pipes 

• Insulated cover over microswitch contacts 

for safety 

• Large, easily-accessible calibration screw with 

locking nut to maintain setpoint 


Pipe connection 1" MNPT 

Pipe sizes 1" to 8" (25 mm to 200 mm) 

Maximum liquid 

pressure 150 psi (10 bar) 

Maximum liquid 

temperature 250°F (120°C) 

Minimum liquid 

temperature -20°F (-30°C) 

Maximum ambient 

temperature 130°F (55°C) 

Wetted parts construction 

Body P-Cu Zn40 Pb2 brass 

Bellows AISI 316L stainless steel 

O-ring EPDM 

Model 626600A 

WIRING 

1 

COMMON 

3 

NO 

2 

NC 

Shown in no-flow, normal position 

Housing cover Class V-O self-extinguishing 

polycarbonate 

Contact rating 

Resistive/Inductive 15A at 240 VAC max 

Lamp load 

(N.C. contact) 3A at 125 VAC 

Lamp load 

(N.O. contact) 1.5A at 125 VAC 

Motor load 

(N.C. contact) 5A, 1/4 HP at 125 VAC 

Motor load 

(N.O. contact) 2.5A, 1/8 HP at 125 VAC 

Approvals CE 

227 

FLOW

FLOW 

228 

FLOW 

CALEFFI FLOW SWITCH 

MODEL 626600A 

INSTALLATION/DIMENSIONS 

Operating flow rates: 

gpm 

(lpm) 

$ 

5"-DN125 

1" 

1.25" 

6"-DN150 

1.5" 

DN 175 

2" 

2.5" 

8"-DN200 

Select the blade marked with the diameter of the pipe in which the switch will be installed. For pipe sizes 1"-2.5", remove all extra pre-fitted 

blades. For pipes 3" and above, leave all pre-fitted blades installed and add the long blade, trimming as shown for pipe size. Install the switch 

in the pipe, observing the flow direction arrows shown on the body casting and housing cover. The distance between the top of the pipe and 

the upper surface of the brass housing should be 3.1" (80mm). 

The switch can be installed in a horizontal or vertical pipe, but avoid installing the switch below horizontal; dirt and deposits may collect in the 

switching mechanism and affect operation. 

CALIBRATION 

A 

B 

OPERATION 

C 

3"-DN 80 

4"-DN100 

Diameter of Pipe 

Minimum calibration 

Operating flow rate with 

increasing flow 

Minimum calibration 


decreasing flow 

Maximum calibration 


increasing flow 

Maximum calibration 


decreasing flow 

1" 1.25" 1.5" 2" 2.5" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8" 

5.7 

(21.7) 

4.0 

(15.0) 

12.3 

(46.8) 

11.9 

(45.1) 

7.5 

(28.4) 

5.5 

(20.9) 

16.7 

(63.5) 

16.3 

(61.8) 

in 

(mm) 

1/2" FNPT 

conduit 

connection 

11.4 

(43.4) 

8.4 

(31.7) 

26.0 

(98.5) 

25.5 

(96.9) 

13.2 

(50.1) 

9.7 

(36.7) 

29.5 

(112) 

29.0 

(110) 

3.4 

(112) 

22.0 

(83.5) 

16.3 

(61.8) 

51.5 

(195) 

50.6 

(192) 

29.9 

(113) 

22.9 

(86, 8) 

69.5 

(264) 

68.6 

(260) 

44.0 

(167) 

37.4 

(142) 

94.6 

(359) 

92.4 

(351) 

5.5 

(140) 

If the required operating flow rate differs from that given in the table below, the necessary correction 

should be carried out as follows: turn the calibration screw (A) in a clockwise direction for the contacts 

to close at higher flow rate values or in a counterclockwise direction for lower flow rate values. When the 

adjustment has been made, lock the screw (A) with the locking ring nut (B). Avoid all contact with the 

presetting screw (C). An incorrect setting would seriously impair the operation of the switch. 



626600A Paddle flow switch, 1" to 8" pipes, NEMA 4 

3.1 

(80) 

61.1 

(232) 

51.5 

(197) 

136 

(518) 

127 

(484) 

72.6 

(275) 

63.8 

(242) 

189 

(718) 

158 

(601) 

162 

(618) 

145 

(551) 

334 

(1269) 

308 

(1169)

FLOW 

FLOW SWITCH 

MODEL FS1-6 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model FS1-6 Flow Switch is designed to prove 

liquid flow in a wide variety of HVAC and industrial 

applications. The corrosion-resistant flow switch is 

mounted in a weather-resistant box for simple wiring 

connections. The polyphenylene sulfide plastic vane is 

field trimmable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes, and it 

is magnetically coupled to the SPDT switch to prevent 

liquid from entering the switch housing. 

FEATURES 

• Weather-resistant construction 


• Leak-proof magnetic switch operation 

• Field adjustable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes 

• SPDT snap-acting switch 


Piping connection 1" NPT 

Operating pressures 150 psig (1034 kPa) 

Operating temp 212°F (100°C) max 

Wetted materials Polyphenylene sulfide, 

ceramic 8 magnet, 

316 SS spring and pin 

Vane Field trimmable for 

pipes 1" (2.54 cm) and larger 

Electrical rating SPDT snap-acting switch 

5A, 125/250 VAC 

Electrical connection 18-AWG leads, 

18" (46 cm) long 


WIRING 

Black Common 

Red Normally open (no flow) 

Blue Normally closed (no flow) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 

1" NPT 

Pipe Connection 

5.00* 

(12.70) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

13.25* 

(33.66) 

2.25 

(5.72) 

1.00 

(2.54) 

*Dimension with vane full length for 6" and larger pipe installation 

229 

FLOW

FLOW 

PIPE 

SIZE 

1 

1.25 

1.5 

2 

3 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12 

230 

FLOW 

FLOW SWITCH 

MODEL FS1-6 

INSTALLATION 

1. Carefully unpack switch, making sure to remove any packing from the lower housing. Adjust the actuation or 

deactuation point by trimming the vane to the length desired. If using a pipe with weld-o-let, cond-o-let, or plastic 

PVC fittings, use graduations indicated on the vane. If using standard 125 or 250 lb (57 or 113 kg) bronze, iron, 

or steel fittings, trim the vane 0.125" (0.32 cm) above the marking provided. Because of the great variation in 

fittings and process connections, it is recommended the unit be checked when installed to ensure proper operation 

and that there is no interference between the vane and the fittings. For pipes larger than 6" (15.24 cm), 

leave the vane full length. 

2. This flow switch is intended to be used in clean process media where particles, scale, and debris are not 

present. Buildup of such materials may cause inaccurate signals. 

3. The switch must be indexed during installation in the line with the flow arrow on the side of the switch pointing in 

the direction of the flow. Pipe sealant is required at the 1" NPT thread connection. It is important to not get the 

sealant in the vane assembly as it may prevent proper operation and cause misleading signals. When installing 

the unit, be certain not to over-torque the housing. Damage may occur if excessive force is used. 

4. Connect the switch wires in accordance with local electrical codes. The FS1-6 is not intended to be a loadcarrying 

conduit connection. Loads may damage the switch and stop operation. 

PERFORMANCE 

ACTUATION 

gpm (lpm) 

10.7 (40.5) 

9.5 (36.0) 

8.1 (30.7) 

9.8 (37.1) 

12.4 (46.9) 

20.2 (76.5) 

43.0 (163) 

74.2 (281) 

116.7 (442) 

167.1 (632) 

DEACTUATION 

gpm (lpm) 

9.3 

7.7 

6.3 

8.5 

8.9 

12.7 

32.8 

56.6 

89.0 

127.4 

(35.2) 

(29.1) 

(23.9) 

(32.2) 

(33.7) 

(48.1) 

(124) 

(214) 

(337) 

(482) 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

FS1-6 Weather-resistant flow switch 

When the flow increases to the actuation gpm (lpm), 

the switch makes. 

When the flow decreases to the deactuation gpm (lpm), 

the switch breaks. 

Flow rates are approximate and are based on 60°F 

water.

FLOW 

GENERAL-PURPOSE FLOW SWITCH 

F61 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The F61 Series General-Purpose Flow Switches are 

used to prove flow on liquid lines using water, ethylene 

glycol solutions, or other liquids compatible with brass 

and phosphor bronze parts. The SPDT contact switch is 

activated by liquid flow through the pipe. The set point is 

adjustable. 

The F61KD (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MD (NEMA 

3R enclosure) are available for 1/2" NPT and 3/4" NPT 

pipe. The F61KB-11 (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MB-1 

(NEMA 3R enclosure) are for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger 

pipes. They are furnished with a stainless steel paddle 

in three segments for pipes 1" to 3" in diameter (2.54 to 

7.62 cm). Paddle segments may be removed or trimmed 

as needed. A 6" (15.24 cm) paddle is also furnished for 

4" (10.16 cm) diameter pipes and larger. 


Pipe connections 

F61KB-11, F61MB-1 1" NPT 

F61KD-3, F61MD-1 1/2" x 1/2" NPT 

F61KD-4, F61MD-2 3/4" x 3/4" NPT 

Max liquid pressure 150 psig (1034 kPa) 

Max liquid temp 250°F (121°C) 

Min liquid temp 

F61KB-11, F61KD-3, F61KD-4 32°F (0°C) 

F61MB-1, F61MD-1, F61MD-2 -20°F (-29°C) 

Enclosure 

F61KB-11, F61KD-3, F61KD-4 NEMA 1 

F61MB-1, F61MD-1, F61MD-2 NEMA 3R 

WIRING 

ELECTRICAL RATINGS 

MOTOR RATINGS 

Horsepower 

AC Full Load Amps 

AC Locked Rotor Amps 

120V 

1 

16 

96 

208V 

1 

8.8 

52.8 

240V 

1 

8 

48 

277V 

– 

– 

– 

Noninductive or 

Resistance Load Amps 16 16 16 16 

Pilot Duty – 125 VA 24/277 VAC 

F61KB-11 F61KD-3 

Dimensions 

F61KB-11 8.37"H (3" paddle) x 4"W x 2.81"D 

(21.27 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm) 

F61MB-1 8.69"H (3" paddle) x 4.80"W x 2.81"D 

(22.06 x 12.18 x 7.14 cm) 

F61KD-3 5.03"H x 4"W x 2.81"D 

(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm) 

F61KD-4 5.03" H x 4" W x 2.81" D 

(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm) 

F61MD-1 5.03"H x 4"W x 2.81"D 

(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm) 

F61MD-2 5.03"H x 4"W x 2.81"D 

(12.77 x 10.16 x 7.14 cm) 

�� 

�� 

� 

� 

� 

�� 

231 

FLOW

FLOW 

232 

FLOW 

GENERAL PURPOSE FLOW SWITCH 

F61 SERIES 

ADJUSTMENTS: TYPICAL FLOW RATES — gpm (m3/hr) 

MODEL 

F61KB-11 

F61MB-1 Min 

adj 

LINE PIPE SIZE (in) 1 

Max 

adj 

Flow 

Increases 

R to Y 

Closes 

Flow 

Decreases 

R to B 

Closes 

Flow 

Increases 

R to Y 

Closes 

Flow 

Decreases 

R to B 

Closes 

4.2 

(1.0) 

2.50 

(0.6) 

8.80 

(2.0) 

8.50 

(1.9) 

1-1/4 1-1/2 

5.8 

(1.3) 

3.70 

(0.8) 

13.30 

(3.0) 

12.50 

(2.8) 

7.5 

(1.7) 

5.00 

(1.1) 

19.20 

(4.4) 

18.00 

(4.1) 

2 2-1/2 3 4* 5* 6* 8* 

13.7 

(3.1) 

9.50 

(2.2) 

29.00 

(6.6) 

27.00 

(6.1) 

18.0 

(4.1) 

12.50 

(2.8) 

34.50 

(7.8) 

32.00 

(7.3) 

27.5 

(6.2) 

19.00 

(4.3) 

53.00 

(12.0) 

50.00 

(11.4) 

65.0 

(14.8) 

37.0† 

(8.4) 

50.0 

(11.4) 

27.0† 

(6.1) 

128.0 

(29.1) 

81.0† 

(13.4) 

122.0 

(27.7) 

76.0† 

(17.3) 

125.0 

(28.4) 

57.0† 

(12.9) 

101.0 

(22.9) 

41.0† 

(9.3) 

245.0 

(55.6) 

118.0† 

(26.8) 

235.0 

(53.4) 

111.0† 

(25.2) 

*Flow rates for these sizes are calculated. 

† These gpm figures are for switch with 6" paddle. For 4" and 5" line pipe the paddle is trimmed. 

MODEL 

F61KD-3 

F61KD-4 

F61MD-1 

F61MD-2 

INLET/OUTLET 

SIZE 

(Female NPT) 

1/2" x 1/2" 

3/4" x 3/4" 

1/2" x 1/2" 

3/4" x 3/4" 

NEMA 

Enclosure 

1 

1 

3R 

3R 


190.0 

(43.1) 

74.0† 

(16.8) 

158.0 

(35.9) 

54.0† 

(12.3) 

375.0 

(85.2) 

144.0† 

(32.7) 

360.0 

(81.8) 

135.0† 

(30.7) 

ADJUSTMENT RANGE – gpm (m 3 /hr) 

R to Y Closes 

Flow Increase 

Min 0.6 (0.14) 

Max 1.1 (0.25) 


F61KD-3 Flow switch 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 1 

F61MD-1 Flow switch 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 3R 

F61KD-4 Flow switch 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 1 

F61MD-2 Flow switch 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 3R 

F61KB-11 Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 1 

F61MB-1 Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 3R 

R to Y Opens 

Flow Decrease 

Min 0.3 (0.07) 

Max 0.9 (0.2) 

375.0 

(85.2) 

205.0† 

(46.6) 

320.0 

(72.7) 

170.0† 

(38.6) 

760.0 

(172.6) 

415.0† 

(94.2) 

730.0 

(165.8) 

400.0† 

(90.8)

SPECIALTY SENSORS

PRODUCTS 


Model 711271 Airox 

IAQ Sensors on 

page 239! 

SERVICES 

Tell us what you need to 

sense, and we will help 

you select the best product 

for your On-Off or 

Analog Reading. 

SOLUTIONS 

Whether you need to 

Sense, Detect, Monitor, 

or Control, we can meet 

your requirements. 



CALIBRATION 

UCK— Universal Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 

CARBON MONOXIDE 

KCO Series — Carbon Monoxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 

TP1-M — Carbon Monoxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 

WCO-1B — Carbon Monoxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 

CO2 / IAQ 

4GS — Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 

711271 — Airox IAQ Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 

8001, 8002, 8003 Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 

C7232 — Carbon Dioxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 

CD-A — Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 

GM Series — Carbon Dioxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 

DAMPER POSITION 

LS45M — Whisker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 

PQ-1001 — Damper Position Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 

TS-470 — Damper Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 

GASES 

CD-420 Series — Toxic Gas Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 

GMT Series — Gas Monitor/Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 

OS-1 — Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 

VA-301 — Gas Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257,259 

VA301M — Stand Alone Dual Gas Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 

VASQN8X — Multipoint Sample Draw Gas Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 

LIQUID LEVEL 

F7 — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 

JMP — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 

L8 — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 

NG2DW1500B — Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 

LU Series — Ultrasonic Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 

PH / CONDUCTIVITY 

8205 — PH Transmitter/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 

8225 — Conductivity Transmitter/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 

REFRIGERANTS 

HGM-LON,N2 — HGM 300 Communications Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 

HGM-SZ — Multigas Refrigerant Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 

HGM300 — Refrigerant Gas Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 

RDM800 — Remote Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 

RLD-134A — Refrigerant Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 

RLD-5 — Refrigerant Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 

VIBRATION 

140T — Vibration Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 

550 — Vibration Transmitter/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 

WATER DETECTION 

AQS — Water Sensor/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 

LD1-24 — Water Sensor/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 

WD-1B — Water Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 

WD-2-T — Water Detector (Tape Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 

WEATHER 

A70 Series — Weather Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 

DS-2B — Rain/Snow Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 



CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORS 

KCO SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensors are available 

in analog or relay versions. The sensors are provided in 

heavy-duty steel enclosures, and the sensors use lowtemperature 

components that are ideal for open parking 

garages in cold climates. 

FEATURES 

• Two-stage alarming (KCO-R) 

• 0-200 ppm 4-20 mA output (KCO-A) 

• Microprocessor controlled recalibration (KCO-A) 

• Heavy-duty enclosures 

• Operating temperature down to -4°F (-20°C) 

• Low-temperature option available -20°F (-29°C) 

• Temperature and humidity compensated 


KCO-R 

Power 24 VAC/VDC ±20%, 125 mA 

Power with LT option 1.125A 

Indicators 

Amber Warning 

Red Alarm 

Flashing green/red Power on, microprocessor 

operating 

Warning stage delay 30 sec 

Range 0-250 ppm 

Response time Under 30 sec 

Relay contacts 120 VAC, 2A resistive 

Set points Warning 50 ppm, alarm 100 ppm 

adjustable (reset 5-10ppm 

change) (25/50 ppm optional) 

INSTALLATION 

KCO-R-S 

KCO-A-H 

Note: Front covers are blank 

KCO-A 

Output signal 4-20 mA into 500 ohms max 

Scale 0-200 ppm carbon monoxide 

Power 24 VAC ±20%, 10 VA 

Power with LT Option 34 VA 

Analog resolution 

KCO-R, KCO-A 

12 bit 


Sensor type Solid-state metal oxide semiconductor 

Humidity 

Enclosure dimensions 

5% to 95% noncondensing 

S (screw cover) 4.81"L x 4.81"H x 2.25"D 

(12.2 x 12.2 x 5.7 cm) 

H (hinged cover) 6.125"L x 6.25"H x 3"D 

(15.6 x 15.9 x 7.6 cm) 

Accuracy ±5% 

Sensor drift ±10% 2 years 

Sensor life 10 years 

KCO-R 

The KCO-R is a two-stage carbon monoxide sensor with a relay output for each stage. If the CO level rises above 

the warning stage setpoint for over 30 seconds, the warning relay, amber warning LED, and a three-minute minimum 

"on" timer will activate. Once below the setpoint, the relay and LED will reset. If the concentration continues to 

rise and exceeds the alarm stage setpoint for ten minutes, the alarm stage relay and red LED will activate. 

KCO-A 

The KCO-A is a microprocessor-controlled sensor with a 4-20 mA analog output based on a 0-200 ppm sensing 

range. The microprocessor controls the heating of the sensor and subsequent reading of the CO level. The microprocessor 

compensates for any drift in the sensor over time. The microprocessor system includes self-diagnostic, 

self-restarting, and remote failure reporting. The output signal will drop below 4 mA if a fault is discovered. If power 

problems cause the unit to malfunction, the unit will self-check and restart. Calibration of the unit requires the application 

of a hydrated test gas, and the push of a button performs the recalibration. 

233 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORS 

KCO SERIES 

INSTALLATION 

234 


The KCO Series senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft 2 (465m 2 ) of coverage if there is normal air circulation within 

the area. Mount on a wall or column approximately 5' (1.52m) above the floor. They should not be mounted in 

corners where air flow could be restricted. 

WIRING 

T 3 

L1 (+) L2 (–) 

24 VAC/DC 

MODEL 

KCO 

Relay 

R2 

Relay 

R1 

T 2 

T 1 

KCO-R 

N.O. Alarm 

N.C. Relay 

N.O. Warning 

N.C. Relay 

Factory setting 

100 ppm 

(50 optional) 

Factory setting 

50 ppm 

(25 optional) 


L 1 

L 2 

– 

+ 

24 VAC 

4-20 mA SIG OUT 

KCO-A 

DESCRIPTION 

R Relay output carbon monoxide sensor 

A Analog output carbon monoxide sensor 

S Screw-cover enclosure (KCO-R only) 

H Hinged-cover enclosure 

LT Low-temperature option (-RH, -AH only) -20F (-29C) 

25 ppm 25/50 ppm relay settings (KCO-R only) 

KCO R S Example: KCO-RS Carbon monoxide sensor with 

relay output and screw cover enclosure.

CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR 

MODEL TP1-M 

DESCRIPTION 


The Model TP1-M Carbon Monoxide Sensor features 

a two-wire, 4-20 mA output signal and two alarm outputs. 

It is the first available zero-maintenance CO gas 

monitor with an electrochemical sensor. The Model 

TP1-M has a low initial cost and installs quickly and easily 

into a standard single-gang electrical box. It has a 

three-year operational life and never needs calibration. 

LOCATION 

The Model TP1-M senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft 2 

(465 m 2) of coverage, if there is normal air circulation within 

the area. The sensor mounts on a wall or column 3' to 5' 

(0.91 to 1.52m) above the floor. It should not be mounted 

in corners where air flow could be restricted. 

OPERATION 

The sensor measures 0-500 ppm of CO and outputs a 

linear 4-20 mA in a two-wire, loop-powered wiring installation. 

Two alarm outputs (one low and one high alarm) 

rated at 250 mA at 24 VDC drive relays, strobes, etc. The 

alarm setpoints are factory set at 25 and 200 ppm. Both 

alarm setpoints activate if the sensor experiences a fault. 

Once installed, the sensor never needs calibration or 

maintenance, and it lasts approximately three years. The 

LED is continuously on when the sensor is functioning 

normally. If a self-diagnosis failure occurs, it will flash fast 

(one flash every 0.5 seconds). One month before the 

sensor needs to be replaced, the LED will begin to flash 

slowly (one flash every 2.0 seconds). If the sensor is 

powered and the LED is off, the sensor is expired and 

must be replaced. 


Power supply 10-28 VDC, 50 mA 

Power consumption Max 24 mA, nominal 4 mA @ 

24 VDC 

Loop resistance 650� max 

Measurement range 0-500 ppm CO 

Output signal Two-wire, 4-20 mA 

Terminals/Wire size 18-22 AWG 

Output signal fail modes 

Self-test fail 2 mA 

Sensor expired 2 mA 

Overrange gas alarm 24 mA 

Alarm outputs 250 mA @ 24 VDC max 

(transistor switch) 

LED indicator 

Power on On 

No power Off 

FEATURES 

TP1-M 

• 0-500 ppm CO range (non-adjustable) 

• High accuracy (0.5% of range) electrochemical 

industrial sensor 

• Two alarm levels (25 and 200 ppm) 

• Two-wire, loop-powered 4-20 mA analog output 

• LED status/diagnostic indicator 

• Low power consumption, only 50 mA 

• Fits standard single-gang outlet box 

• Automatic, full-function self-test performed daily 

• Unobtrusive design with rugged stainless steel 

screen 

• Three-year operational life 

Self-test fail Fast flash (1 per 0.5 sec) 

Life ending Slow flash (1 per 2.0 sec) 

provides one-month warning 

Life ended Off 

Life expectancy Three years (plus one-year 

shelf life) 




Approvals/Ratings CSA 

IEC No. 1010 

ANSI/ISA S82.01 

CSEC C22.2 No. 1010 

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC 

Warranty Two years 

235 

SPECIALTY SENSORS



MODEL TP1-M 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

3.0 

(7.62) 

ALARM OUTPUTS INSTALLATION 

236 


Alarm Outputs: 24 VDC output, 

250 mA max 

M: TP-M 

S: XXXXX 

24 VDC 

20 mA 

2.80 

(7.11) 

TOXY POINT 

4.60 

(11.68) 

Single-Gang 

Electrical Box 

(field-supplied) 

O/P1 

24 VDC 

4-20 mA 

O/P2 

• • 

24 VDC 

Relay 

Transistor switches 

close on alarm 

O/P1 

O/P2 

24 VDC Alarm AC Fan 

M: TP-M 

S: XXXXX 

24 VDC 

20 mA 

TOXY POINT 

O/P1 

24 VDC 

4-20 mA 

TP1-M 


TWO-WIRE INSTALLATION 

O/P2 

• • 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Note: If only relay output is used, 

4-20 mA terminal must be 

connected to the power 

supply (–). 


TP1-M Carbon monoxide sensor 

TP1-M-C Carbon monoxide sensor with special high alarm setpoint 

(0-225 ppm range; low alarm cannot be changed) 


Consult Trane for a wide array of devices that can be activated by the TP1-M alarm outputs, 

such as RIB Series relays and AIS alarm indication stations. 

4-20 mA 

Signal



MODEL WCO-1B 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model WCO-1B Carbon Monoxide Sensor is comprised 

of a carbon monoxide meter and a 4-20 mA transmitter. 

It is an all-electronic system that utilizes a microprocessor 

to measure carbon monoxide (CO), calculate 

various calibration factors, and provide a digital display and 

analog output. A Model UCS-121 may be used with the 

Model WCO-1B to provide a digital output for remote 

alarm. A three-digit LED display on the Model WCO-1B 

shows the current level of CO between 0-200 ppm. It averages 

samples over a time period and updates the display 

and output every 2-1/2 minutes. It is intended to be used in 

enclosed parking garages, where it provides CO data to 

building automation computers or controllers. A UL knockout 

box houses the Model WCO-1B and provides an easyto-mount, 

sturdy housing for the system. If duct mounting is 

required, refer to the GMT line of gas sensors. 

FEATURES 

• Digital display of the CO level from 0-200 ppm 

• Analog output of 4-20 mA 

• Low voltage operation of 24 VAC/VDC 

• Test switch to provide mode for system self-test 

• Automatic calibration with optional Model CM-FCK 

• Overrange indication 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

6.25 

(15.88) 


6.125 

(15.56) 

3.0 

(7.62) 

Power 24 VAC/VDC @ 220 mA 

Color Gray 

Measurement range 0-200 ppm of CO 

(4-20 mA, 1000� max) 

Sensor maintenance Not required 

Electrical class General-purpose, 

nonhazardous 

Sensor life 7-10 years typical 

Warranty One year 

Operating temp 0° to 125°F (-18° to 52°C) 

Shipping weight 3 lbs (1.4 kg) 

• Start-up mode to step display and output through 

test ranges 

• Operating range within OSHA range for CO 

exposure 

• Solid-state sensor with life expectancy of 7-10 

years 

• Only one power supply needed to power multiple 

sensors 

WIRING 

120 VAC 

Transformer 

or Power Supply 

(6 VA or larger) 

EXPOSURE 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Output 

D C B A 

– + 

No polarity preference 

WCO-1B Note: The WCO-1B 

sources 4-20 mA to the 

controller or computer. 

WCO-1B Wiring 

(+) 

(–) 

TIME OF EXPOSURE 

PPM CO UL 2034 OSHA 

400 15 min No spec 

200 35 min 15 min 

100 90 min No spec 

50 No STD 8 hr TWA 

35 No STD 8 hr TWA 

4-20 mA 

Output Signal 

237 

SPECIALTY SENSORS



MODEL WCO-1B 

OPERATION 

238 


Detector Location 

A WCO-1B can cover up to 5000 square feet if there is 

normal air circulation within the facility. Locations should 

be specified by a qualified engineer. Extra detectors 

may be needed near occupied work areas. Mount the 

detectors on walls or columns about 5' (12.7m) above 

the floor, where people breathe. Do not mount in corners 

where air flow could be restricted. 

WCO-1B Power-Up 

When power is first applied to the WCO-1B, it will go 

through a 2-1/2 minute start-up cycle. The internal ppm 

meter will step through a 0-150 reading at a rate of one 

count per second. The output will move through a range 

of 4-16 mA as the meter counts from 0 to 150. 

At the count of 150, the WCO-1B finishes the test cycle, 

takes the first sample of air, displays this reading, and 

sets the 4-20 mA output to the appropriate current. It is 

not unusual for the display to read near zero or zero. 

This and future readings will hold for 2-1/2 minutes. This 

reading will not change during each 2-1/2 minute accumulation 

cycle. 

GENERAL INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE 

• Place at least one sensor for every 5000 square feet 

with adequate air movement. 

• Sensors mount on walls or columns about 5' (12.7m) 

above the floor. 

• Space sensors evenly. Do not put in corners or directly 

in front of air inlets (i.e., doors, windows, open ramps, 

dampers, etc.). 

• Each sensor must have a cable directly to the control 

panel. 

• One system of sensors, panel, and fan per floor is 

preferred. 

• Refer to installation instructions for more complete 

data. 



WCO-1B Carbon monoxide sensor with 4-20 mA output 

CM-FCK Field calibration kit (includes 50 ppm test gas) 


UCS-121 Alarm relay module 

GMT-CO-S1-DT CO sensor for duct applications 

WCO-1B Operation 

Normally, the cover of the case is closed so there is no 

visible external indication of operation. Only the 4-20 

mA output indicates proper operation. The BAS computer 

can be set to alarm at any point in the 4-20 mA out 

(0-200 ppm). 

The WCO-1B continuously monitors various internal 

parameters. If a problem is discovered, the internal display 

will indicate E1 to E6, and the output will switch to 

0 mA. Interrupt the power to reset the WCO-1B. It will 

restart by stepping through the warm-up cycle. If a second 

E error occurs, consult Trane. The internal pushbutton 

switch is used to set the unit for calibration with the 

optional Model CM-FCK field calibration kit. 

Error Codes 

E1 = Microcontroller failure 

E2 – E4 = High or low current to sensor 

E6 = Low temperature 

Analog Output (mA) 

20 

16 

12 

8 

4 

0 50 100 150 200 

Carbon Monoxide (ppm) 

WARNING: Not for diesel fume applications. 

Not to be used as a life safety device.


MSA AIROX IAQ MONITOR 

MODEL 711271 

DESCRIPTION 

The MSA Airox Model 711271 indoor air quality (IAQ) 

monitor continually monitors the levels of carbon dioxide 

(CO2) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) for an 

overall indication of IAQ. The monitor can be used to 

monitor only the CO2 level, or a VOC component can be 

added to the CO2 level for an IAQ output. The combined 

output is the result of a patented, advanced algorithm 

designed to indicate information about the quality of the 

air. 

FEATURES 

• Patented photoacoustic infrared technology 

• No calibration required 

• Outputs CO2 or IAQ (CO2 + VOC) 

• Patented IAQ advanced algorithm 


Range 

CO2 0-2000 ppm 

IAQ 0-2000 IAQ (CO2 +VOC) 

Accuracy 

Repeatability ±2% FS 

Linearity ±3% FS 

Drift ±5% lifetime (7-10 years) 

Temp 59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C) 


Warm-up 30 min. 

OPERATION 

The Model 711271 uses patented photoacoustic 

infrared technology to measure the ambient CO2 (usually 

400-1100 ppm, unoccupied to occupied). A separate 

sensor is used to monitor VOCs from such things 

as vehicle exhaust, cigarette smoke, cologne, paint, 

carpet glue, adhesives, copier machines, and any 

other substance that has an odor. This collective VOC 

measurement is added to the output based on a maximum 

of 400 ppm CO2 equivalent via a patented algorithm. 

As this output is used to increase the free air 

intake, building occupants are more comfortable. 

Sensing distance 25' radius 

Power 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 10VA 

Output 4-20mA or 0-10 VDC,CO2 or 

IAQ, jumper selectable 

Mounting 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) junction 

box 

Duct mount Min air velocity 600 fpm (3 m/s) 

Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.25"W x 1"D 

(11.5 x 7 x 2.6 cm) 

Weight 12.0 oz (0.012 kg) 

OUTPUT 

VDC 

10 

9 

20 

8 

7 

6 

16 

5 

4 

12 4-20 mA 

3 

2 

1 

8 

0 4 

0 400 800 1000 1600 2000 

Output with Maximum VOCs 

Model 711271 

Output with Minimum VOCs 

IAQ (CO2 + VDC) UNITS 

239 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


MSA AIROX IAQ MONITOR 

MODEL 711271 

INSTALLATION 

Proper location of the Model 711271 monitor is important to ensure accurate measurement of representative air 

samples. Generally, the monitor should be placed in an area of the room where there is a free circulation of air. It 

should be mounted on a flat interior surface approximately 54"(1.4m) from the floor. Avoid areas with vibration, heat 

sources, diffuser air, outside walls, or dead spots with minimal air circulation. 

240 


USER CONFIGURATION OPTIONS 

Signal Power 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

WIRING INFORMATION JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS 

Current Mode Voltage Mode 

4-20, CO 2 or IAQ 

Not Used 

GND 

24 VAC GND 

24 VAC 

IAQ 

CO 2 

GND 

24 VAC GND 

24 VAC 

Notes: 

1. A VOC-only output is not available. 

2. Pin 1 of P3 is located nearest the terminal block. 

3. 4-20 mA current sourcing 

4. Do not change jumpers with power on. 



711271 Airox IAQ monitor 


1508-IAQ Duct aspiration kit 

P1 P3 P4 P5 Output 

OUT 2-3 IN IN ANALOG 0-10V 

OUT 2-3 IN OUT ALARM 800 ppm 

OUT 2-3 OUT OUT ALARM 1000 ppm 

OUT 2-3 OUT IN ALARM 1200 ppm 

IN 1-2 IN OUT 4-20mA CO2 IN 1-2 OUT IN 4-20mA IAQ 

VOC 

Sensor 

P3 

3 2 1 

P1 

P2 (not used) 

TB1 

Wiring 

Opening 

P4 P5 

0V Normal 

10V at Alarm 

0V Normal 

10V at Alarm 

0V Normal 

10V at Alarm 

IR 

Sensor

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Model CD-A represents a new level of economy 

in reliable, non-dispersive infrared carbon dioxide 

sensors. It measures environmental carbon dioxide levels 

for use in demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality 

monitoring, and other HVAC applications in accordance 

with ASHRAE standards. 

Fully floating analog outputs and a convenient center 

wiring terminal make installation both simple and trouble-free. 

The analog output is jumper-selectable, 4-20 

mA or 0-10 VDC, over the industry standard 0-2000 

ppm CO 2 range. Models are also available with an 

optional LCD display and/or control relay with adjustable 

setpoint. 

FEATURES 


• 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA analog output, 

jumper selectable 

• 0-2000 ppm CO 2 range 

• Wall-mount and duct-sampling versions 

• Isolation of output and power 

• Compact, attractive enclosure 



CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR 

MODEL CD-A 

Power requirements 20-30 VAC, 18-30 VDC 

Power consumption Less than 2.5W @ 24 VAC 

Operating principle Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) 

Measuring range 0-2000 ppm CO 2 

Max drift (per year) ±75 ppm 

Accuracy ±5% of reading or ±75 ppm, 

whichever is greater 

Repeatability ±20 ppm 

Recommended 

calibration interval Three years 

Response time Less than 1 min. 




Calibration adjustments Span only (automatic electronic 

zero adjustment) 

CD-AW-LCD 

CD-AD 

Duct Probe Assembly 

(included) 

• Optional control relay with adjustable setpoint 

• Simple single-point calibration 

• Optional LCD display 


Calibration verification 

procedure time 10 min. typical 

Analog output 0-10 VDC (factory setting) 

4-20 mA (field selectable), 500� max 

Warm-up time 3 min. 


Optional digital display 0.35" LCD (0.88 cm), 4 digit 

High limit alarm relay (optional) 

Factory setpoint 1000 ppm (field adjustable 

700-1300 ppm) 

Deadband 50 ppm 

Contact polarity N.O. (N.C. field selectable) 

Contact rating 2A @ 24 VAC 

CD-AD-LCD 

Operating life 

expectancy 10 years typical 

Duct sampling option Includes duct inlet and outlet ports, 

filter, tubing, and hardware 

241 

SPECIALTY SENSORS



MODEL CD-A 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

242 


3.5 

(8.89) 

5.25 

(13.34) 

**Signal 

4-20 mA 

or 0-10 VDC 

*Optional Control Relay 

Contacts 2A@ 

24 VAC/VDC 

1.38 

(3.08) 

Analog 

Selector 

* Relay contacts are field-selectable N.O. or N.C. JP5 open - NC 

closed - NO (factory setting) 

** Output signal is field-selectable 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, 

fully isolated. 

Voltage - outboard and middle pin jumpered 

Current - inboard and middle pin jumpered 

JP5 

INSTALLATION 

The wall-mounted CD-AW must be placed in an area 

that is representative of the entire conditioned space. 

Recommended mounting height is 4' to 6' (1.21 to 

1.83m) above the floor. Avoid drafts for locations 

where occupants may routinely breathe toward the 

sensor. 

The duct-sampling style CD-AD requires a minimum 

air velocity of 400 fpm (3 m/s). Complete installation 

and configuration instructions are included with each 

unit shipped. 

Sensing Cell 


Optional LCD 

Display 


CD-A CO2 sensor with analog output 

MOUNTING 

W Wall mount 

D Sampling version for duct applications 

RELAY OPTION 

R Optional control relay 

DISPLAY OPTION 

LCD Optional LCD display 

CD-A D R LCD 

24 VAC/VDC 

No Polarity 

Example: CD-AD-R-LCD Duct-sampling CO2 transmitter with a 

output, control relay, and LCD display 


UCK-1 Universal calibration kit 

GAS-CO2-1000 Calibration gas (1000 ppm CO2), 17L bottle


MODEL C7232 

DESCRIPTION 


Used with HVAC control systems to control building 

ventilation, the Honeywell Model C7232 Carbon 

Dioxide Sensor measures CO 2 concentration in a ventilated 

space or duct. These easy-to-install sensors provide 

long term CO 2 monitoring at a low cost, and they 

are compact in size with selectable ranges. They have 

an analog and a relay output, use non-dispersive 

infrared (NDIR) technology, and feature a unique corrosion-free 

sensing chamber for accurate, stable CO 2 

sensing. Models are available for wall- and duct-mount 

applications, with or without an LCD display, and with or 

without the Honeywell logo. 

FEATURES 

• Available with LCD to provide sensor readings 

and status information 

• NDIR technology to measure carbon dioxide gas 

• Gold-plated sensor for long-term calibration stability 

• Analog and relay outputs based on CO 2 levels 

• Automatic Background Calibration (ABC) 

algorithm based on long-term evaluation to 

reduce required maintenance 


Power 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz (Class 2) 

3W max power consumption 

600 mA peak current (at 20 ms) 

Range 0-2000 ppm ±5% and ±50 ppm 

Response time 2 min. 

Annual drift 20 ppm (nominal) 

Calibration interval Five years 

CO 2 pressure 

dependence 1.4% change in reading 

per 0.15 psig (1.0 kPa) deviation 

from 14.5 psig (1000 kPa) 

Relay output Shipped N.O., close at 800 ppm 

(selectable) 

Contact rating 1A @ 50 VAC/24 VDC 

Min load 1mA @ 5 VDC 

C7232A 

C7232B 

Analog output 0-10 or 2-10 VDC, (jumper 

selectable), resistive load 

>5000�; 0-20 or 4-20 mA, 

(jumper selectable), resistive 

load


CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS 

MODEL C7232 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.0 

(2.52) 

5.06 

(12.85) 

WIRING 

244 

3.16 

(8.03) 

C7232 

INSTALLATION 


Knockouts 

for European 

Applications 

24V 

Analog 

Out 

+ 

_ 

2.38 

(6.05) 

2.38 

(6.05) 

Standard Utility 

Conduit Box 

(2 x 4) 

Mounting 

Holes 

3.31 

(8.41) 

5.63 

(14.30) 

1.81 

(4.60) 

1.63 

(4.14) 

C7232A C7232B 

(red) 

(black) 

(yellow) 

(brown) 

(orange) 

(green) 

L1 

(HOT) 

L2 

Note: Provide disconnect means 

and overload protection to 

power supply as required. 

Order transformer separately. 

8.0 

(20.32) 

WIRE COLOR DESIGNATION FUNCTION 

Red 

G+ 

24 VAC Hot 

Black G0 

24 VAC Common 

Yellow OUT1 Analog Output Signal 

Brown M 

Analog Output Common 

Orange NO 

Relay Output Normally Open 

Green COM Relay Output Common 

The wall-mount C7232A must be installed in a ventilated place where it will not be affected directly by air from ducts, drafts, or in 

dead spots behind doors or in corners. 

The duct-mount C7232B mounts to the outside of the air duct, and its sampling tube installs through a 1" (2.54 cm) hole. 

Leakage into the duct or the sensor box cover will skew the sensor readings, so the box cover and duct must be completely 

sealed. 



C7232A1016 Wall-mount CO 2 sensor, analog and relay output 

C7232A1008 Wall-mount CO 2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display 

C7232A1032 Wall-mount CO 2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo 

C7232B1014 Duct-mount CO 2 sensor, analog and relay output 

C7232B1006 Duct-mount CO 2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display 

C7232B1030 Duct-mount CO 2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo



GMW21, GMD20, GMT200 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Vaisala GMW21 and GMD20 Series Carbon 

Dioxide Sensors are specially designed for demandcontrolled 

ventilation. The transmitters use the siliconbased 

CARBOCAP sensor. The simple structure and 

reference measurement capabilities make these singlebeam, 

dual-wavelength NDIR sensors extremely stable 

and reliable. The temperature and flow dependence is 

negligible. Models are available with a temperature output 

and/or a Lonworks module. GMT200 Series harsh 

environment models are available for industrial applications 

measuring low or high concentrations. 

FEATURES 

• Silicon-based NDIR sensor 


• Negligible temperature dependence 

• Easy installation 

• Five-year recommended calibration interval 

• Duct sensor measurement in the duct 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.52 

(6.4) 

3.15 

(8.0) 

min 3.15 (8.0) 

max 5.51 (14.0) 

1.65 

(4.2) 

0.87 

(2.2) 

GMD20, GMD20D 

2.36 

(6.0) 

4.27 

(10.8) 

3.26 

(8.3) 

GMW21, GMW21D 

1.65 

(4.2) 

2.36 

(6.0) 

2.62 

(6.67) 

0.59 

(1.5) 

3.26 

(8.3) 

GMW21 

GMT220 

GMD20 


Range 0-2000 ppm CO2 Accuracy @77°F (25°C) 2% of reading ±30 ppm 

Linearity ±1% FS 

Stability



GMW21, GMD20, GMT200 SERIES 

INSTALLATION 

246 


The wall-mount GMW21 Series must be placed in an area representative of the entire conditioned space. 

Recommended mounting height is 5' (1.5m), and the unit may be mounted onto a wall box or surface mounted. 

The duct-mount GMD20 Series mounts directly to the duct. The duct probe insertion depth is adjustable using the 

mounting plate. Since the CO 2 level is sensed in the duct, there are no minimum airflow requirements. 

CALIBRATION 

The GM Series is factory calibrated. A recalibration is recommended every five years. A field check can be done 

with a calibration gas and multimeter. A calibration adjustment requires the Model 19222 GM calibration software. 

WIRING 

Serial Com 

Power Supply 

Analog Outputs 

0/mA 

V7 V10 



GMW21 Wall-mount CO2 transmitter 

GMW21D Wall-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display 

GMD20 Duct-mount CO2 transmitter 

GMD20D Duct-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display 

OPTIONS/ACCESSORIES 

GMA20T Analog temperature option (GMW21 only) 

GMR20 Relay option (GMW21 or GMD20 only) 

GML20 LonWorks module with CO2 signal (not for GMD20D) 

GML20T LonWorks module with CO2 and temperature signals (GMW21 only) 

19222GM Calibration software kit (includes disk and serial adapter) 

HARSH ENVIRONMENT 

*GMT221 Series Harsh environment CO2 transmitter for high concentrations (up to 20% in air) 

*GMT222 Series Harsh environment CO2 transmitter for low concentrations 

(0-2000/10,000 ppm) 

*GML220 LonWorks module with CO2 signal for GMT221/222 

* Contact Trane for multiple ranges, probes, and options. 

mA V 0 

4-20 mA Standard 

(remove jumper for 0-20 mA) 

Steady Red 

for Fault 

24V Power 

Common 

0-10 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Blinks Green 

Normally



8001, 8002, 8003 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 8001, 8002, and 8003 Series Carbon Dioxide 

Sensors are designed to monitor carbon dioxide levels 

for use in demand-controlled ventilation according to 

ASHRAE Standard 62. They come factory-configured for 

a linear analog output over a range of 0-2000 ppm of CO2. Depending on the model, other ranges, and adjustments, 

calibration may be accomplished with on-board push buttons 

and a built-in LCD display or through a serial interface 

and PC software. LCD display versions include a 

blank cover for use in areas where a display is not 

desired. For duct applications, pitot style sampling tube 

versions are available, as well as aspiration box versions. 

FEATURES 

• Analog output of 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA available 

• Programmable control relay available 

• Push-button output configuration available 

• LCD display with both blank and see-through 

covers available 

• Wiring terminations on separable mounting base 

sensor to snap in place after the wires are terminated 

• Locking screw to prevent tampering 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

5.63 

(14.30) 


3.25 

(8.26) 

8002 / 8001-K 

1.13 

(2.87) 

0.25 

(0.6) 

5.0 

(12.7) 

7.1 

(18.03) 

3.5 

(8.90) 

1.2 

(3.05) 

Power 18-36 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

18-42 VDC 

70 mA average, 100 mA peak 

Range 0-2000 ppm (factory setting), useradjustable 

from 0-10,000 ppm 

Accuracy ±40 ppm or ±3% of reading, 

whichever is higher 

Annual drift ±10 ppm with ABC Logic enabled 

±20 ppm with ABC Logic disabled 

Calibration interval None,if unit goes out of calibration, 

it will be recalibrated for life of 

sensor 

4.31 

(10.95) 

8002-K 

(cover included) 

5.56 

(14.12) 

3.5 

(8.90) 

0.7 

(1.88) 

1.77 

(4.50) 

3.5 

(8.90) 

4 Mounting Holes 

0.25 (0.64) dia 

8001-KA 

1551 

(outdoor) 

3.54 

(8.99) 

7.75 

(19.69) 

8002-KA 

• ABC Logic automatic calibration firmware to 

compensate for sensor drift 

• Non-dispersive infrared technology 

1.19 

(3.02) 

Analog output 4-20 mA (500Ω max load) 

0-10 VDC (100Ω output 

impedance) outputs available 

simultaneously 

Control relay Form C (SPDT), 2A @ 24 VAC/VDC 

factory set 1000 ppm, 50 ppm 

hysteresis, user adjustable 

0-9999 ppm 

Operating temp 60° to 90°F (15.5° to 20°C), with 

1551 -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C) 


Weight 

8002, 8001-K 0.65 lb (0.3 kg) 

8007, 8008 0.8 lb (0.4 kg) 

8003 0.6 lb (0.2 kg) 

Certification FCC Part 15, Class B 

247 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


248 



8001, 8002, 8003 SERIES 

WIRING 

H G 24 VAC 

or 

+ - 24 VDC 

2 1 

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

8001-K, 8002, 8001 

+ 0-10 VDC 

- SIG COM 

+ 4-20 mA 

NC Alarm 

COM 

NO 

Relay 

Contacts 

INSTALLATION 


MODEL 

Wall-mount sensors 

DESCRIPTION 

8001-K Wall-mount sensor without display 

8002-K Wall-mount sensor with display 

8003 

Duct sensors 

Low-cost wall-mount sensor, 0-10V only 

8001-KA 8001-K in duct aspiration box 

8001B Black in-duct sensor without display 

8002-KA 8002-K in duct aspiration box 

8002B Black in-duct sensor with display 

8007 Pitot duct sensor without display 

8008 Pitot duct sensor with display 

8009 Low-cost pitot duct sensor, 0-10 VDC only 

The wall-mount 8001-K, 8002-K, and 8003 must be 

placed in an area that is representative of the entire 

conditioned space. Recommended mounting height is 

4' to 6' (1.23 to 1.83m) above the floor. Avoid drafts or 

locations where occupants may routinely breathe 

toward the sensor. 

The duct-mount 8001-KA and 8002-KA require a minimum 

air velocity of 600 fpm (3 m/s). All openings into 

the enclosure must be sealed, including the interior of 

the conduit if duct pressure is at or below ambient. 

The 8007, 8008, and 8009 pitot-style duct-sampling 

versions require a minimum of 400 fpm (2 m/s) air 

velocity. 

ACCESSORIES 

1508 Duct aspiration box for 8001-K, 8002-K (separate) 

1551 Outside air enclosure for 8001-K, 8002-K, includes controlled 

heater as low as -40°F (-40°C) (sensor not included) 

UIP-8000 User interface program for PC 

UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases 

(order gas separately) 

GAS-N2 Calibration gas (Nitrogen), 17L bottle 

GAS-CO2-1000 Calibration gas (1000 ppm CO 2 ), 17L bottle



MODEL 4GS 

DESCRIPTION 

The Texas Instruments Model 4GS Carbon Dioxide 

Sensors are dependable, economical devices designed 

to be used as inputs to Building Automation Systems for 

efficient control of ventilation. Using ambient CO 2 levels 

to adjust ventilation based on demand is recognized by 

ASHRAE as one of the few ways to comply with both 

the ventilation and energy standards. The Model 4GS 

provides an analog output of CO 2 concentration from a 

small, attractive wall-mount package. An optional relay 

output is available for direct control of equipment, and 

an optional LCD display may be used for local indication. 

For duct applications, the Model 4GS may be combined 

with an optional aspiration box. If the duct pressure is 

positive or neutral and air velocity exceeds 200 fpm (1.0 

m/s), a less expensive impact sampling tube may be 

used. 

FEATURES 

• Analog output of 4-20 mA, standard 

• Field-selectable 0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC output 


• Three-year calibration interval 

• Optional relay (programmable setpoint) 


Power 18-28 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

18-40 VDC, less than 3 VA 

Sensing method Nondispersive infrared (NDIR) 

Measuring range 0-2000 ppm standard, field 

adjustable from 0-300 ppm 

to 0-5000 ppm 

Accuracy ±75 ppm from 0-1500 ppm 

±5% above 1500 ppm 

Pressure effect 0.19% of reading per mm Hg 

Repeatability ±8 ppm 

Calibration interval 3 years recommended 

Operating condition 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

5% to 95% RH noncondensing 

4GS-22C-06 

with 4GS-DM-KIT 

• Optional LCD display 

• No initial calibration required 

• Small, attractive wall-mount enclosure 

• Optional duct-aspiration box or sampling tube kit 

Analog output 4-20 mA into 500� max 

load (standard), field convertible 

to 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC with 

1000� output impedance min 

Optional relay Normally open, 10-500 mA 

@ 24 VAC or 30 VDC; 

field-adjustable setpoint 

300-5000 ppm,100 ppm 

hysteresis below setpoint 

Storage condition -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C) 


Case ABS plastic, UL 94V-0 


4GS-22CD-06 

Agency approval FCC Part 15, Class A, CE 

249 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


250 



MODEL 4GS 


in 

(cm) 

1.12 

(0.62) 

5.12 

(13.01) 

MOUNTING 

5.12 

(13.01) 

3.84 

(9.75) 

2.5 

(6.35) 

3.84 

(9.75) 

4GS Sensor 

0.62 

(1.58) 

1.75 

(4.44) 

3.0 

(7.62) 

1.1 

(2.79) 

8 

(20.32) 

Duct Aspiration Box (optional) 

1.25 

(3.17) 

(I) (V) 


Output Select 

Jumper 

V M 

I R 

24 VAC/DC IN 

24 VAC/DC COMMON 

RELAY 

RELAY 

CO2 OUT 

CO2 COMMON 

- + 

Analog 

Output 

(R) (M) 

Run 

or 

Menu 

Mode Select 

Jumper 

Enter 

Select 

Note: CO 2 Common and 24 VAC/DC Common 

are connected internally. 

Display Models Only 

18-30 VAC or 

18-40 VDC (no polarity) 

Control Relay (optional) 

Contacts make on rise in CO 2 

The 4GS should be mounted in an area that is representative of the conditioned space to be monitored. Avoid drafty 

windows and doorways that might tend to dilute the atmosphere being controlled. Mounting height of 4-1/2' to 5' (1.2 

to 1.5m) is recommended but is not critical since carbon dioxide diffuses rapidly in air. 

The 4GS comes factory-configured for 4-20 mA analog output. If voltage output is required, moving the jumper on the 

back of the unit from I to V will change the output to 0-10 VDC. The voltage output may, in turn, be changed to 0-5 

VDC, the sensing range adjusted, and the (optional) relay setpoint changed by use of the programming keys on the 

back of the 4GS and its optional LCD display. Units with no display will require the CAL-B-KEY calibration keypad for 

adjustment. Refer to the programming manual supplied with the 4GS for configuration and calibration instructions. 



4GS-22C-06 Sensor with analog output only 

4GS-22CD-06 Sensor with analog output and display 

4GS-22CR-06 Sensor with analog output and relay 

4GS-22CDR-06 Sensor with analog output, display, and relay 

ACCESSORIES 

4GS-DM-KIT Duct-mount kit for 4GS sensor (order sensor separately) 

4GS-PT-KIT Impact sampling tube kit for 4GS sensor (order sensor 

separately) 

CAL-B-KEY Calibration keypad with cable and connector for 4GS sensor 


UCK-1 Universal calibration kit 

GAS-CO2-800 Calibration gas (800 ppm) 17L bottle

DESCRIPTION 

The Model OS-1 is a dependable, economical oxygen 

sensor designed to monitor oxygen levels in ambient air. 

It has a jumper-selectable analog output for interfacing 

with a BAS controller and an SPDT relay output to activate 

an alarm in the event of oxygen depletion due to a 

refrigerant leak. The units are powered by 24 VAC/VDC 

and are housed in a rugged polystyrene enclosure for 

dust and moisture protection. 

FEATURES 

• 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output, jumper 

selectable 

• SPDT alarm relay 


• 0% to 25% range 

• Rugged polystyrene enclosure 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.6 

(4.1) 


OXYGEN SENSOR 

MODEL OS-1 

5.11 

(13.0) 

1.13 

(2.9) 

2.95 

(7.5) 

5.11 

(13.0) 

OS-1 


Power 24 VAC/VDC @ 0.25A 

Analog output 

(jumper selectable) 4-20 mA (300� max) 

0-5 VDC (20 k� min) 

0-10 VDC (20 k� min) 

0% to 25% oxygen 

Relay output SPDT 24 VAC/VDC @ 0.5A, 

factory set @ 19.5% 

Response time Approx 12 sec 

Element type Galvanic cell 

Element life Approx five years @ 20°C 

in ambient air 

Accuracy ±1% 





251 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


252 


OXYGEN SENSOR 

MODEL OS-1 

WIRING 

INSTALLATION 

OFF 

OPR 

Setpoint 

Adjust 

NO 

R29 

Alarm 

Fuse 

COM 

Analog 

Output 

Select 

Jumper 

Setpoint Adjust Pot 

R8 

Offset Span 

J2 

4-20 MA 

0-5 VDC 

0-10 VDC 

Analog Out 

F2 F1 

NC 

SENS+ 

SENS- 

OUT+ 

R6 

OUT- 

Alarm (factory 

wired) 

Analog 

The OS-1 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible. 

Some recommended considerations are as follows: 

1. Mount the unit with the sensor pointing down. 

2. Mount the unit in a location with low vibration. Strong vibration may cause a change in the condition of the 

internal membrane. 

3. The sensor should be mounted 3' to 5' (0.9 to 1.5m) from the floor in equipment rooms or 1' (0.3m) above 

the floor in refrigeration pits. 

4. The OS-1 should cover about 1000-1500 square feet with adequate air movement. 

5. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from the exhaust fan. 

6. Verify operation yearly. 

AC 

DC 

PWR- 

J1 

Power 

Select 

Jumper 

Power 

Fuse 

Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes. 

CAUTION: Not to be used as a life safety device. 

PWR+ 



OS-1 Oxygen sensor, 0% to 25% range 


LPI-1C Black LCD display 

LPI-1CR Red digital display 

Note: AC power must be floating 

and may not be grounded. 

If AC power is grounded a 

separate transformer is 

required for each OS-1.

DESCRIPTION 


GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER 

GMT SERIES 

The GMT Series Gas Monitor/Transmitter is a microprocessor-based 

system for continuous, effective monitoring 

of toxic and combustible gases. The GMT Series 

provides a 4-20 mA output in proportion to the level of 

gas present and a factory-calibrated DPDT alarm relay. 

A 10-step LED display in the attractive case gives a 

visual indication of the gas level in the atmosphere. 

Two types of sensing elements are available for most 

gases monitored. The highly accurate and very stable 

S1 sensors include catalytic gas sensors for many 

flammable gases and vapor concentrations, electrochemical 

cells for toxic gases, and diffusion fuel cells 

for oxygen sensing. The S2 solid-state sensors provide 

highly effective solutions for a wide range of applications. 

FEATURES 

• Attractive, compact case design 

• 10-step LED indication 

• 4-20 mA and DPDT relay output 

• Wide variety of gases detected 

• Two types of sensing technology 

• Optional network controller for applications 

with multiple monitors 

• Optional duct-aspiration housing 



Diffusion fuel cell/ 

electrochemical sensor 17-27 VAC, 2.5W; 

24-38 VDC, 100 mA 

Solid-state/catalytic 

combustion sensors 17-27 VAC, 5W; 

24-38 VDC, 200 mA 

Analog output 4-20 mA, 1000� max, 

loop powered, or 

600� max self-powered 

Alarm contacts DPDT pilot duty, 

150 VA max inductive, 

5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC 

Audible alarm 65 dBA @ 3' (1m) 

Concentration display 10-step progressive LED 

Visual indicators Normal operation 

green LED 

Optional Explosionproof 

GMT 

(see “Hazardous 

Locations” section) 

• Gases detected 

Carbon monoxide 

Nitrogen dioxide (diesel exhaust) 

Hydrogen 

Chlorine 

• Combustibles 

Hydrogen sulfide 

Oxygen 

Sulfur dioxide 

GMT 

Sensing technology 

S1 Electrochemical for 

toxic gases 

Catalytic combustion for 

combustible gases 

Diffusion fuel cell for 

oxygen 

S2 Solid-state 


(21.3 x 13.2 x 5.7 cm) 



Calibration interval 6 months 

Average sensor life 

O2 2 years 

NO2, CL2, SO2 2-3 years 

Others 3-6 years 

Detection range 

CO, NO2 50', 10,000 ft2 Others 20', 1,600 ft2 253 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


254 


GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER 

GMT SERIES 

WIRING 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

- + 

S3 

J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 J2 – + J3 1 2 A B S 

2 

NC C NO NC C NO 

3 

4-20 MA VAC COMM 

Alarm Relay 4 

5 

6 

7 

GMT Gas Monitor / Transmitter 

DETECTION AND SET POINT LEVELS 

24 VAC / VDC 

No Polarity 

ORDER GAS DETECTION RANGE ACCURACY ALARM RELAY* MOUNTING 

CODE DETECTED S1 Sensor S2 Sensor S1 Sensor S2 Sensor SET POINT HEIGHT ft (m) 

CO Carbon monoxide 0-250 ppm 0-250 ppm 3% 5% 25 ppm 3-5 (1-1.5) from floor 

NO2 Nitrogen dioxide 0-10 ppm - 3% - 1 ppm 1-3 (0.3 to 1) from ceiling 

H2 Hydrogen 0% to 2.5% 0-2.5% 3% 5% 1% 1 (0.3) from ceiling 

CL2 Chlorine 0-15 ppm - 3% - 1 ppm 1 (0.3) from floor 

COMB** Combustibles 0% to 100% LEL 0% to 100% LEL 3% 5% 25% LEL Check gas density 

H2S Hydrogen sulfide 0-50 ppm - 3% - 10 ppm 1 (0.3) from floor 

O2 Oxygen 0% to 25% - 3% - 19.5% 3-5 (1-1.5) from floor 

SO2 Sulfur dioxide 0-10 ppm - 3% - 2 ppm 1 (0.3) from floor 

* These are factory-standard relay settings. For other set point levels, please specify at time of order. 

** Specify combustible gas to be monitored. Standard gases include methane, propane, butane, gasoline, 

alcohols, acetylene, and ethylene. Please call Kele for other applications. (LEL = Lower Explosive Limit) 


GMT Gas monitor/transmitter, 4-20 mA output and DPDT relay 

XXX ORDER CODE (for gas detected from chart above) 

SENSOR 

S1 Electrochemical sensor* 

S2 Solid state sensor** 

OPTIONS 

A Audible alarm 

DT Duct-aspiration box** 

GMT CL2 S1 

NET Network option (for use with VA301C) 

Example: GMT-CL2-S1 Gas monitor/transmitter 

with 4-20 mA output and DPDT alarm relay 

for 0-15 ppm chlorine 

Notes: 

1. A dedicated power source is required for each GMT. 

2. Communication terminals (A and B) are only used in networked 

applications using a VA-301C controller. See Model 

VA-301C catalog page for applications with multiple networked 

GMT gas monitors. 

3. Use separate power sources on the two SPDT alarm relay outputs. 

4. The GMT requires power but the 4-20 mA analog output can 

be configured as loop-powered or current sourcing. For 

loop-powered operation (factory setting), set jumpers on S3 on 

2-3, 4-5, 6-7; for current sourcing, set jumpers on S3 on 1-2, 

3-4, 5-6. 




UCK Universal connection kit GAS-xx-xx Test gas 

* S1 oxygen sensor is diffusion 

fuel cell; S1 combustible sensor 

is catalytic combustion type. 

** DT option not available with S2 

sensors. 

Optional explosionproof housing 

is available with GMT monitors, 

which include an electrochemical 

sensor. See Hazardous Location 

section. 

Call Kele for applications with 

multiple networked GMT gas 

monitors.


GAS DETECTOR / TRANSMITTER 

CD-420 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The CD-420 Series Gas Detector/Transmitter is a two-wire, 

4-20 mA transmitter with two alarm contacts (high/low) that 

provides continuous monitoring for toxic and oxygen gas hazards 

in ambient air. It is manufactured using industrial-grade 

components and technology, and it is virtually maintenance 

free. The Model CD-420 is fully tested and calibrated at the 

factory and shipped ready for installation. 

FEATURES 

• Reduced operating, maintenance, and installation costs 

• Accurate, reliable performance without false alarms 

• Modular plug-in components 

• Two-wire, loop-powered, linear 4-20 mA analog output 

• Electrochemical sensor 

• Low-power consumption, only 20 mA in operation 


Power supply 12-35 VDC, 50 mA 

Power consumption Nominal 20 mA @ 24 VDC 

Max loop resistance 600� 

Analog output Two-wire, 4-20 mA 

3.5 mA if in fault mode 

Signal transmission 

range 31,300' (9,600m), 18 AWG wire 

Electrochemical 

sensor Plug-in, industrial, gas specific 

Drift 

Zero Nominal 

Span


256 


MULTIPOINT SAMPLE DRAW GAS MONITOR 

VASQN8X 

DESCRIPTION 

The VASQN8X is a sample draw gas monitor. The standard 

unit has two sampling points and a three-relay output 

for different stages of alarm. The unit is ideal for MRI 

rooms as the sampling point tubing can be up to 1000’ from 

the monitor. The optional two-gas model will pick up both 

gases at each sampling point. 


Relay output rating 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC 

resistive 

Audible alarm 110 dBA at 3' (1 m) 

Number of sample 

points Two, 100' (30.43m) 1/8" polymer 

tubing inlcuded 

Outputs Three DPDT relays (three alarms) 

Humidity 0-95% RH, non-condensing 

Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C) 

Maximum sampling 

distance 1000' (335 m) 

Size 19"H x 11.75"W x 4.5"D 

(48.3 x 30 x 11.4 cm) 

Weight 22.4 lbs. (10.17 Kg) 

Power 120 VAC, 2A 

STAND ALONE DUAL GAS MONITOR 

VA301M 

DESCRIPTION 

The VA301M monitors CO plus one other gas. The second 

gas monitor is mounted remotely up to 100' away. 

There are high and low alarm level relays for each zone. 



resistive 

Alarm levels High and low 

Audible alarm 65 dBA at 3' (1 m) 

Outputs Two SPDT relays per zone 

Humidity 0-95% RH, non-condensing 

Temperature 32° to 110°F (0° to 45°C) 

Size 8.4"H x 5.3"W x 2.25"D 

(21.3 x 13.4 x 5.7 cm) 

Weight 0.86 lbs. (.35 Kg) 

Power 17-27 VAC, 24-38 VDC, 550 

mA at 24 VDC 

Display Two-line (gas, value) scrolls 

between sensors every 

three seconds 


VASQN82 Multipoint gas monitor with two sampling points 

G1* First target gas 

G2* Second target gas (optional) 

8XTL3 100' sampling distance (contact Kele for other lengths) 

VASQN82 CO NO2 

8XTL3 

Example: Two-zone sample draw monitor for CO and 

NO2 with two 100' sample tubes 

* Gases available: O2, R11, R12, R22, R123, R125, R134A, CO, NO2, combustibles 

VA301M 

VASQN8X 


Filter 

Remote Sensor 

VA301MQ2CO CO monitor 

VA301MQ2CO-DIS CO monitor with LCD display 

X Remote packages 

NO2, C3H8 (propane) 

VA301MQ2CO NO2 Example: CO sensor with 

remote sensor for 

NO2

EXPANSION MODULE 

MODEL VA301EM 

DESCRIPTION 

The VA301EM expansion module allows the monitoring 

of toxic and combustible gases and refrigerants. Up to 

four sensors can be placed 500' away for toxic and combustible 

gases, and 200' away for refrigerant gas monitoring. 

The transmitter is equipped with a backlight LCD 

display and keypad that can be placed in a safe area, 

remote from the sensors. Alarm relays and Modbus 

communication are standard. The unit is compatible with 

the VA301C controller. 

FEATURES 

• Sense one to four zones 

• Sensors available for toxic and combustible 

gases and refrigerants 

• RS-485 Modbus communication 

• Contact input for manual break-glass switches 

• Three 24 VDC outputs to activate horns 

and strobes 

• 4-20 mA output for each sensor 

• Four relay outputs 

• Easy-to-read LCD display 

• Explosionproof sensors for combustible 

and toxic gases 



Transmitter VA301EM 

Standard outputs Four DPDT relays, three 24 

VDC, four 4-20 mA, RS-485 

Modbus 

Audible alarm 65 dBA @ 3 ft (1m) 

Visual LED indicators G - Normal, R - Alarm 

ABC, Y - Fault, A - Tx 

Relay rating 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC 

Power 20-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 

29-38 VDC 2.0A max 


Humidity 0% to 95% RH 

(non-condensing) 

Enclosure ABS Polycarbonate 

Dimensions 7.99"H x 11.02"W x 

2.76"D (20.3 x 28 x 7 cm) 

Weight 2.26 lbs (1.02 kg) 

Recommended calibration Every six months 

Sensor VA301IRFS 

Refrigerants detected R-11, R-12, R-22, R-123, 

R-125, R-134a 

(other mixes available) 

Sensing Technology Dual infrared sensor 

VA301IRFS 

VA301EM 

S301D2 


Measurement range 0-1000 ppm 

Resolution 1 ppm 

Response time 60 seconds 

Cold to start 10 minutes 

Distance controller to sensor 200 ft max (60m) 


Humidity 0% to 95% (non-condensing) 

Enclosure ABS - Polycarbonate 


(10.2 x 28 x 6.3 cm) 

Weight 2.33 lbs (0.603 kg) 

Sensor S301D2 

Sensing technology Electrochemical (toxic), 

catalytic combustion 

(combustible), diffusion fuel 

cell (oxygen) 

Distance controller to sensor 500 ft max (160m) 

Operating temp Toxic -40° to 100°F (-40° to 

40°C), Combustible -40° to 

112°F (-40° to 50°C) 

Humidity 0% to 95% (non-condensing) 

Enclosure Class I, Div 1, Groups B,C,D 

257 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


258 



MODEL VA301EM 

WIRING 

POWER 



VA301EM Expansion module, three 24 VDC outputs, four relays, four 4-20 mA, Modbus 

OPTIONS 

RFSA Horn and red strobe light 

RFS Red strobe light 

SENSORS (order separately) 

VA301IRFS (R123, R22, R11, R12, R125, R134a) Refrigerant gas sensor 

S301D2 (CO, NO2, NO, CL2, COMB, H2S, O2, SO2, HCN, HCL, F2, O3, HF) Explosionproof gas sensor 

VA301EM RFS VA301IRFSR123 

Example: VA301EM-RFS with VA301IRFSR123 Expansion Module for four 

4-20 mA outputs with relays, 24 VDC outputs, red strobe, and one R123 

sensor 


UCK Universal calibration kit 

GAS-XX-XX Test gas 

ST120SN1 Break glass switches 

NC 

RELAY 3 NO 

NC 

RELAY 4 NO 

J8 J9 

J17 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 

+24 + 

J10 VDC 

J18 

( ) 

A B A B GDN 

NO NC NO NC 

SENSOR 

POWER 

SENSOR 

COMMUNICATION 

SHIELD 

NETWORK 

END OF LINE JUMPER 

NETWORK 

J16 

BREAK 

GLASS 

SWITCH 

INPUT 

24 VDC 

OUTPUT 4-20 mA 

OUTPUT


GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER 

MODEL VA301C 

DESCRIPTION 

The VA301C Gas Detection Controller provides continuous 

monitoring of up to 96 inputs/outputs, on three 

channels, at distances up to 2000'. Modbus communication 

channels are included, and a BACnet communication 

module is available. The VA301C is preprogrammed 

at the factory, but menu-driven changes can 

be made in the field. The VA301C allows monitoring of 

an entire network and will initiate an alarm or ventilation 

activation upon detection of a gas. One model is available 

with datalogging. 

FEATURES 

• Full array of visual indicators and audible alarm 

• Multiple fully programmable alarm levels 

• Programmable time delays 

• Failure indicator 

• Up to 96 transmitters and relay modules 

• Up to 768 events 

• Up to 128 zoning groups 

• Graphic 122 x 32 Dot Matrix display 

• Datalogging available 

• BACnet module available 



Power requirement 17-27 VAC, 24-38 VDC, 

500 mA 

User interface Dot Matrix display and 

keypad 

Communications channels Three 32 Modbus zones 

Visual indicators 

Blinking Green LED Normal operation 

Red LED Alarm Level 1, 2, and 3 

Blinking Amber LED Signal Tx 

Blinking Green LED Signal Rx 

Yellow LED Failure 

Audible alarm 65 dBA @ 3' (1m) 

Network capacity Up to 96 transmitters and 96 

relay modules 

Outputs 4 DPDT relays (alarms/fault), 

buzzer 


(resistive) 

Alarm levels Multiple with high and low 

setpoints 

Time delay 0, 30 sec, 45 sec, 1-99 min. 

before and after alarm 

VA301C 

VA-201R 


Humidity range 0% to 95% RH noncondensing 

Distance to transmitters 2000' (600m) max, 65 ft 

(20m) T-Tap, 130 ft (40m) 

total T-Tap 

Dimensions 7.99" H x 11.02" W x 2.76" D 

(20.3 x 28 x 7 cm) 


Enclosure NEMA 4X Polycarbonate - ABS 

VA201R Relay Module 

Power requirement 17-27 VAC, 24-38 VDC, 

250 mA 

Number of outputs 2, 4, or 8 DPDT relays 

Relay output rating 5A, resistive 30 VDC or 

250 VAC 

Max distance to controller 2000' (600m) max 

Humidity range 0% to 95% RH non-condensing 


(21.3 x 21.8 x 6.35 cm) 


259 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


260 


GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER 

MODEL VA301C 

WIRING 

24 AWG 

BELDEN 9841 

MAX 2000 (60 cm) 

32 SENSORS + 

32 RELAY MODULES 

PER CHANNEL 

VA301C CONTROLLER 

J23 

CH 2 

CH 1 

B1 

A1 

B2 

A2 

J24 

CH 3 

VA301IRFS VA301IRFS VA301IRFS 

SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR 



*VA301C Gas detection controller 

*VA301C-DLC Gas detection controller with datalogging 

VA-201R-2 Two relay module 

VA-201R-4 Four relay module 

VA-201R-8 Eight relay module 

VAC301BDCM BACnet communication module 

*Provide system layout for factory programming 

B3 

A3 

GMT-XXX-XX-NET 

SENSOR 

VA301EM 




GMT-XXX-XX-NET Gas Transmitter with networking option (See GMT catalog page) 

VA301EM Expansion module 

Fan 

S301D2 

SENSOR 

VA-201R 

RELAY MODULE 

Alarm


REFRIGERANT GAS MONITORING SYSTEM 

MODEL HGM300 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model HGM300 is a multiple refrigerant gas and 

multiple area monitoring system for low level continuous 

monitoring of CFC, HCFC, and HFC refrigerant gases 

used in most commercial refrigeration systems. System 

design supports compliance to the refrigerant monitoring 

requirements of ANSI/BSR ASHRAE 15-1994/2001. 

FEATURES 

• 24 different refrigerants monitored with one unit 

• 4 point standard, expandable to 16 points 

• Infrared, nondispersive detection 

• 3 SPDT alarm contacts 

• System fault alarm 

• 120 VAC power 

• RS232C communications 

• RS485 Modbus RTU protocol 

• Optional dual 4-20 mA outputs 

• Up to 500' (152m) from measuring point to monitor 

• Optional remote display module 

• Audible alarm 


Power 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 6A 

240 VAC, 50 Hz 

Coverage 4 point standard, 

expandable to 16 

Detector type Infrared nondispersive 

System gas library R11, R12, R113, R114, 

R502, R404a, R407c, 

R134a, R410a, R507, 

R508b, R22, R123, R124, 

R500, R503, R401a, R402a, 

R402b, R409a, R402a, 1301 

Sensitivity 1 ppm 

Measuring range 0-1000 ppm 

Accuracy ±10 ppm (0-100 ppm) 

±10% reading (100-1000 ppm) 

INSTALLATION 

Contact ratings 5A, 120 VAC 

Output signal Dual 4-20 mA 500� max 

(optional) 


Response time 5-120 sec 

Monitoring distance Up to 500' (152m) 


Humidity 5% to 90% (noncondensing) 

Dimensions 17"H x 12"D x 5.5"W 

(43 x 30 x 14 cm) 


Certification UL listed, File #3101-1; 

CE approved, File # EN613262 

and #EN61010-1 

Warranty Two years from date of shipment 

The Model HGM300 should be centrally located in the mechanical room and be readily accessible for easy visual 

monitoring and servicing. Air sample tubing may be run in lengths up to 500' (152m). The fresh air purge line should 

draw from an area that does not contain any refrigerant gas and cannot exceed 300' (91m) in length. The exhaust 

line should run to an outside location if possible. The length of the exhaust line cannot exceed 100' (30m). Ideally, 

two to three pickup points spaced around each chiller will provide sufficient coverage. It may be necessary to perform 

a smoke test of the mechanical room to determine the best locations for sample tubing. The smoke test would 

provide the pattern of air currents present in the mechanical room. 

261 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


262 


REFRIGERANT GAS MONITORING SYSTEM 

MODEL HGM300 

WIRING 

Tubing 

Ground Loop 2 

Ground Loop 1 

Loop 1 = ZONE 

Loop 2 = ppm 

Water 

Trap 

Purge 

1 

2 

3 

Note: Jumpers are installed across 

Loop 1 and Loop 2. Leave 

Loop 1 jumpered if only one 

zone is monitored. Remove 

Node 

Address 

Switch 

4 both jumpers if multiple zones 

are monitored. 

Internally Connected 

Dual 

4-20 mA 

Sourcing 

Outputs 

Alarm Relays 

(optional board) Leak Spill Evac Fault 

Exhaust 

RS-485 C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC 

B A Ground 



HGM300 Refrigerant gas monitoring system 

ZONES 

11 Four zones with metal tube fittings 

12 Eight zones with metal tube fittings 

13 12 zones with metal tube fittings 

14 16 zones with metal tube fittings 

VOLTAGE 

1 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

2 240 VAC, 50 Hz 

HGM300 11 1 Example: HGM300-11-1 Refrigerant gas 

monitoring system, four zones with 

metal tube fittings, 120 VAC, 60 Hz 

L N 

Aux 

120 VAC 

L N 

Main 

120 VAC 


M1110BQ Annual maintenance kit (one inline filter, one charcoal filter) 

M1110PQ Dual 4-20 mA output module 

RDM800 Remote display module 

HGM-LON Lonworks communication adapter 

HGM-N2 N2 communication adapter 

M1100LT Visual alarm 120 VAC 

M1100LU Audio alarm 120 VAC 

M1100LV Audio/visual alarm 120 VAC 

M1100AA Air sample tubing (250' roll) 

T-101 1/4" air sample tubing (250' roll) 

89, 868, 869 Strobes and horns 

On/Off 

Power 

Switch


MULTIGAS REFRIGERANT MONITOR 

MODEL HGM-SZ 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model HGM-SZ is a single refrigerant gas monitor 

for low-level continuous monitoring of CFC, HCFC, and 

HFC refrigerant gases used in most commercial refrigeration 

systems. The design supports compliance to the 

refrigerant monitoring requirements of ANSI/BSR 

ASHRAE 15-1994/2001. 

FEATURES 

• 24 different refrigerants monitored with one unit 

• Infrared, nondispersive detection 

• Three adjustable SPDT alarm contacts 

• System fault alarm 

• 120/240 VAC power 

• 4-20 mA output signal 

• 50-foot sampling tube and end filter included 


• Backlit LED display with navigation keys 

• Local alarm-silence button 

• Water trap included 


Power 100/120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Detector type Single pass, infrared non-dispersive 

System gas library R11, R12, R113, R114, R502, 

R404a, R407a, R407c, R134a, 

R410a, R507, R508b, R22, R123, 

R124, R500, R503, R401a, R402a, 

R408a, R409a, R23, 1301 

Output 3 alarm relays, 1 fault relay 

240 VAC, 5A, and 4-20 mA 500� 

(non-isolated) 

Sensitivity 1 ppm 

Measuring range 0-10,000 ppm 

Accuracy ±10 ppm (0-100 ppm) 

±10% reading (100-1000 ppm) 


Response time 12.2-22.5 sec 

Monitoring distance Up to 50' (15.2m) (sample tube and 

end filter included) 



Dimensions 12.37"H x 15"W x 3.5"D 

(19.3 x 38.1 x 8.9 cm), includes 

water trap and mounting flange 


Calibration Unit re-zeroes every 6 min., adjustment 

in software if needed 

Certification UL listed, CE approved 


INSTALLATION 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

HGM-SZ Multigas refrigerant monitor 

125-SS-2 Replacement charcoal filter 

M1104KF Line end filter 

The Model HGM-SZ should be centrally located in the 

mechanical room and readily accessible for easy visual 

monitoring and servicing. The air sample tube may 

be run up to 50' (15.2m) from the monitor. 

WIRING 

4-20 mA 

Output 

– + 

(MUST BE 

UNGROUNDED) 

Leak 

C NO NC 

Alarm Relays 

Spill Evac Fault 

C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC 

L N 

120/240 VAC 

263 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


264 


REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE 

MODEL RDM800 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RDM800 Remote Display Module provides 

remote programming, interrogation, and display functionality 

to support the Model HGM300 refrigerant monitor. 

System design supports compliance to the refrigerant monitoring 

requirements of ANSI/BSR ASHRAE 15-1994/2001. 

FEATURES 

• Communicates with up to four HGM300 monitors 

• Back lit LCD 

• Graphical display of ppm trend 

• Data logging 

• Automatic or manual sampling 

• Mountable up to 4000' (1219m) from the monitor 

• RS-485 and RS-232C communication 

• Two SPDT alarm relays 

• Programmable alarms for alarm, fault, or 

ready condition 



Power 120 VAC, 230 VAC 50/60 Hz 

Inputs Accepts 1-16 inputs from up to 

four HGM300 monitors 

Display Back lit LCD, display mode 

displays measured point in ppm 

Trend mode Selectable graphical display 

of ppm trend for any point 

Data logging 100 data entries per point 

Alarm indications Flashing channel display, 

flashing red light; alarm signal 

sent via RS-485 

Input fault indication LCD display indicates any 

input fault, yellow light flashes 

Power safety feature On power failure, module will 

record the time of the system 

fault and restart; no loss of 

programming or stored data 

Sampling mode Automatic or manual 

HGM300 

RS-485 

B A G 

BAS 

RS-485 

Alarm Relays 

C NO NC C NO NC 

B A G L N 

120 VAC 

Max distance from 

monitor 4000' (1219m) 

Communications Two-way communication 

through RS-485 to all monitors 

on the system; a second 

RS-485 output for communication 

to BAS system; 

RS-232C port standard 

Alarms Two SPDT 120 VAC alarm 

relays 


Dimensions 11"W x 10"H x 3"D 

(28 x 25 x 8 cm) 


Certification UL listed, File #3101-1; 

CE approved, File #EN513262 

and #EN61010-1 


WIRING ORDERING INFORMATION 


RDM800 Remote display module 

VOLTAGE 

1 120 VAC/60 Hz 

2 240 VAC/50 Hz 

3 100 VAC/50 Hz 

RDM800 1 Example: RDM800-1 Remote 

display module, 

120 VAC/60 Hz

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RLD-5 is a solid-state CFC refrigerant leak 

detector capable of detecting the presence of escaping 

refrigerants. It is field adjustable for five different CFC 

refrigerant types: R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502. 

An analog output is provided to allow interfacing to computer-monitoring 

equipment. An alarm relay is also provided 

with adjustable setpoint and jumper-selectable 

time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms. Four 

LEDs provide status indication for warm-up, ready, 

warning, and alarm. 

FEATURES 

• R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502 detection 


• LED status indication 

• Alarm relay output 

• Field-replaceable sensor 

• Refrigerant leak detection as described in 

ASHRAE 15-1994 

• Minimum time delay 15 minutes 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.5 

(1.27) 


REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR 

MODEL RLD-5 

0.5 

(1.27) Removable Mounting Brackets 

(included) 


RLD-5 

WARM-UP READY WARNING ALARM 

ALARM 

RESET 

CAL. 

4.5 

(11.43) 

8 

(20.32) 

2 

(5.08) 



Power consumption 

24 VAC/VDC ±10% 

AC 325 mA 

DC 250 mA 



Measuring range 

Analog output 

0-1000 ppm 

(jumper selectable) 

Loop resistance 

4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 

0-10 VDC, 1-6 VDC 

Current 300� max 

Voltage 5 k� min 

Alarm relay output SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC 


Alarm relay time delay 

Manual reset (latched) 

Auto reset (unlatched) 


Alarm relay setpoint 

15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr 

Adjustable 0-1000 ppm 

Factory set 500 ppm 

Accuracy ±5% 

Long term drift 8% 

265 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


266 



MODEL RLD-5 

WIRING 

Alarm 

Relay 

Fuse 

INSTALLATION / OPERATION 

15 min 

30 min 

J4 1 hr 

2 hrs 

Setpoint X 100 

R-22 

0 

10 

2 

8 

4 6 

S1 

Setpoint 

ADJ 

GND 

R-502 

R-133 

R-11 

Refrig 

Type 

R-12 

J6 

4-20 mA 

R-22 

GMA 1 AMP 

F2 

K1 

0-5 VDC 

0-10 VDC 

1-6 VDC 

J5 

Unlatched 

Latched 

J2 

TB3 

AC pwr 

DC pwr 

TB2 TB1 

NO COM NC 

Alarm 

GND 

Analog 

Output 

Power 

GMA 1 AMP 

F1 

24 VAC/VDC 

Time Delay Selector for Alarm 

Relay Output 

Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial 

(factory set at 500 ppm) 

Refrigerant Selector Dial 

Installation 

The RLD-5 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as 

possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows: 

1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from floor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the floor). 

2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airflow across sensing element will affect accuracy). 

3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above floor. 

Operation 

To test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should 

increase. 




Analog Output/Signal Selector 

Alarm Relay Output Selector 

AC/DC Selector 

Power Fuse 

Analog 

Output 


RLD-5 Refrigerant leak detector 

170-0830 Replacement sensing element



MODEL RLD-134A 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RLD-134A is a solid-state HFC refrigerant 

leak detector capable of detecting the presence of 

escaping refrigerant R-134a. 

An analog output is provided to allow interfacing to computer-monitoring 

equipment. An alarm relay is also provided 

with adjustable setpoint and jumper-selectable 

time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms. Four 

LEDs provide status indication for warm-up, ready, 

warning, and alarm. 

FEATURES 

• R-134a detection 



• Alarm relay output 

• Field-replaceable sensor 

• Wall-mounting kit 

• Refrigerant leak detection as described in 

ASHRAE 15-1994 

• Minimum time delay 15 minutes 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

0.5 

(1.27) Removable Mounting Brackets 

(included) 


RLD-134A 

WARM-UP READY WARNING ALARM 

ALARM 

RESET 

CAL. 

4.5 

(11.43) 

8 

(20.32) 

2 

(5.08) 


Supply voltage 24 VAC/VDC ±10% 


AC 325 mA 

DC 250 mA 



Measuring range 0-1000 ppm 

Analog output 

(jumper selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 

0-10 VDC, 1-6 VDC 

Loop resistance 


Voltage 5 k� min 

Alarm relay output 

(jumper selectable) SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC 

Manual reset (latched) 

Auto reset (unlatched) 

Alarm relay time delay 

(jumper selectable) 15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr 

Alarm relay setpoint 

Adjustable 0-1000 ppm 

Factory set 500 ppm 

Accuracy ±5% 

Long term drift 8% 

267 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


268 



MODEL RLD-134A 

WIRING 

Alarm 

Relay 

Fuse 

INSTALLATION / OPERATION 

GMA 1 AMP 

F2 

K1 

J4 

15 min 

30 min 

1 hr 

2 hrs 

Setpoint X 100 

0 

10 

2 8 

4 6 

4-20 mA 

0-5 VDC 

0-10 VDC 

1-6 VDC 

Unlatched 

Latched 

AC pwr 

DC pwr 

TB3 TB2 TB1 

NO COM NC GND - + 

Alarm Analog 

Output 

Power 

- + 

24 VAC/VDC 

GMA 1 AMP 

– 

+ 

F1 

Analog 

Output 

Time Delay Selector for Alarm 

Relay Output 

Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial 

(factory set at 500 ppm) 

Analog Output/Signal Selector 

Alarm Relay Output Selector 

AC/DC Selector 

Power Fuse 

Installation 

The RLD-134A is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as 

possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows: 

1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from floor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the floor). 

2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airflow across sensing element will affect accuracy). 

3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above floor. 

Operation 

To test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should 

increase. 





RLD-134A Refrigerant leak detector 

170-0832 Replacement sensing element


DAMPER POSITION SWITCHES 

TS-470 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The TS-470 Series Damper Position Switches consist 

of an encapsulated mercury switch mounted on a 1/2" 

(1.27 cm) damper crank arm. They can be mounted on 

a damper control shaft to give an indication of opened 

or closed damper position. The TS-470 Series switch 

contacts are normal when the cable end of the switch is 

horizontal or above. The switches make when the cable 

end drops more than 15 degrees below horizontal. The 

TS-470-2 has two SPDT switches, and the TS-470-P 

has plenum-rated cable and stainless steel housing. 

FEATURES 


• Maintenance free 

• Easily adjustable 

• 3' (0.91m) 18/3 cable 


Switch type Encapsulated mercury 

switch SPDT 

Switch rating 

TS-470, TS-470-2 2A @ 120 VAC 

1A @ 240 VAC 

TS-470-P 1A @ 120 VAC, 24 VAC/VDC 

Switch angle 15 degrees below horizontal 

the switch makes 

Mounting 1/2" (1.27 cm) damper 

crank arm 


Wiring 

TS-470, TS-470-2 Green - common 

Black - normally closed 

White - normally open 

TS-470-P Black - common 

Blue - normally closed 

Red - normally open 

Mercury content 0.03 cc 

in 

(cm) 


WIRING / DIMENSIONS 

0.5 dia 

(1.27) 

TS-470 

Cord 3' 

(91.4) 


TS-470 Damper position switch with SPDT switch 

TS-470-2 Damper position switch with two SPDT switches 

TS-470-P Damper position switch with SPDT switch, stainless 

steel housing, and plenum-rated cable 


CA-1 1" Crank arm for TS-470 mounting 

TS-470 

4.375 

(11.11) 

269 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


270 


WHISKER SWITCH 

LS45M91B11 

DESCRIPTION 

The LS45M91B11 “Whisker” Switch is a multidirectional 

metal limit switch. This spring-rod “whisker” version 

allows flexibility when applying to damper, valve, and 

other HVAC applications that need position sensing. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(mm) 

0.05 

(Ø 13) 

.275 

(Ø 7.0) 

5.12 

(130) 

7.87 

(200) 

.063 

(16) 


LS45M91B11 

Contacts One N.O. and one N.C. 

Switch rating 10A @ 24 VAC 

5A @ 120 VAC 

2.8A @ 24 VDC 


Certifications UL Listed, CE, CSA 



LS45M91B11 Whisker-style metal limit switch


DAMPER POSITION INDICATOR 

MODEL PQ-1001 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PQ-1001 Damper Position Indicator consists 

of a potentiometer (5 k�, 2W) mounted in a standard 

handibox and supplied with mounting hardware 

and linkage assembly. The indicator can be mounted on 

the inside or outside of a duct. The 5 k� potentiometer 

can be used as a voltage divider for voltage signals, or it 

can be coupled to a Model VTI-1 voltage to current converter 

for 4-20 mA current output. 

FEATURES 

• Resistance or 4-20 mA feedback signal 

• True mechanical position feedback 

• Inside or outside duct mounting 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.18 

(0.46) 


4 

(10.16) 3.81 

(9.68) 

0.18 

(0.46) 

3.5 

(8.89) 

3.12 

(7.92) 

4.56 

(11.58) 

#12-24 x 1/2" Large Panhead Screws 

Potentiometer 5 k�, 2W 

Power 

4-20 mA version only 24 VDC @ 50 mA 

Operating temp 30° to 160°F 

(-1° to 71°C) 

Swivels 

Crank Arms 

Push 

Rod 

1.75 

(4.45) 

PQ-1001-4 Installed 

PQ-1001-3 

Potentiometer 

3.87 

(9.83) 

2.12 

(5.38) 

Mounting 

PQ-1001-3 Outside of duct 

PQ-1001-4 Inside of duct 


271 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


272 


DAMPER POSITION INDICATOR 

MODEL PQ-1001 

MOUNTING 

The PQ-1001-3 mounts outside of a duct, and the PQ-1001-4 mounts on the damper frame inside a duct. When 

mounted on the outside of a duct, a crank arm (furnished) is attached to a damper blade pin extension. When 

mounted on the inside of a duct, a leaf connection (furnished) is attached to the damper blade using two 12-24 x 

1/2'' self-tapping screws (also furnished). Two additional 12-24 x 1/2'' screws are supplied with inside mounting 

models for securing the mounting bracket and handibox to the damper frame. Attach the connecting rod and other 

linkage according to the Adjusting Instructions below. 

WIRING 

The PQ-1001 is supplied with 6" (15.24 cm) pigtail leads of color-coded wire. Use wire nuts or other approved 

connectors to wire the damper position indicator into a system. All wiring must be in accordance with applicable 

electrical code requirements. 

(blue) 

(purple) 

(white/green) 

Standard 

Voltage/Resistive 

Configuration 

Damper 

ADJUSTING INSTRUCTIONS 

PQ-1001 

(blue) 

(white/green) 

(purple) 

V Sig IN 

+24 PWR 

COM 

REF V OUT 

MA OUT 

VTI-1 

24 VDC 

Supply 

Damper 

LOAD 

PQ-1001 PQ-1001-VTI 


PQ-1001 

UAD-R1 (blue) 

(white/green) 

(purple) 

4-20 mA 

Configuration 

with VTI-1 Option 

1. The PQ-1001 bracket should be mounted to the damper frame using the mounting screws provided. DO NOT 

ATTACH THE LINKAGE. 

2. Turn the shaft on the PQ-1001 fully clockwise (while facing the PQ-1001 shaft and pot). 

3. The resistance between the blue and purple wires should be approximately zero. The 4-20 mA output should be 4 mA. 

4. Close the damper blades. Depending upon whether the PQ-1001 is mounted inside or outside the duct, 

attach the linkage between the leaf connection, or damper blade pin extension, and the PQ-1001. 

5. Position and adjust the linkage to provide more than 90 angular degrees of rotation at the PQ-1001 shaft. 

6. Open the damper blades to the fully open position. 

7. The resistance read between the blue and purple wires represents the fully open damper. For 4-20 mA applications, 

adjust the span potentiometer to indicate 20 mA. 


PQ-1001-3 Resistance/Voltage divider unit, mounts outside of duct 

PQ-1001-4 Resistance/Voltage divider unit, mounts inside of duct 

PQ-1001-3-VTI-1 4-20 mA output unit, mounts outside of duct 

PQ-1001-4-VTI-1 4-20 mA output unit, mounts inside of duct

DESCRIPTION 


PH TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER 

MODEL 8205 

This intelligent pH monitoring system consists of a looppowered 

transmitter with LCD display, programming 

keypad, and pH electrode in a single compact package. 

The system provides a 4-20 mA output and digital display 

of the pH of aqueous solutions. Temperature compensation 

is accomplished with a platinum RTD built 

into the electrode for exceptional accuracy. 

While the compact all-in-one transmitter version of the 

Model 8205 is the most economical choice for pH monitoring 

and control with a BAS, a controller version is 

also available (24 VDC power required) that includes 

dual relays for alarming or direct control of valves or 

equipment. Both versions mount conveniently with the 

handy 1" NPT adapter tee. 

FEATURES 

• Compact all-in-one construction 

• Transmitter or transmitter/controller 

• Loop-powered (two-wire) 4-20 mA transmitter 

• Optional dual relay outputs (24 VDC power 

required) for setpoint control 

• 0.2% accuracy with temperature compensation 

• Eight-character LCD display 

• Menu-driven configuration and calibration 

APPLICATION 

Applications include water treatment, cooling tower 

water, swimming pools, chemical feed control, and 

many others. 



Power 0.2 VA transmitter 

2.0 VA transmitter/controller 

Range 0-14 pH 

Output 4-20 mA, 600� max @ 24 VDC 

Optional relays 2-SPST, menu-selectable N.O. 

or N.C., selectable trip and time 

delay 

Relay contacts 3A @ 230 VAC max 


Ambient humidity 99% noncondensing 

Fluid temp 32° to 194°F (0° to 90°C) 

OPERATION 

8205-T-K 

Each unit is delivered with complete installation/operation 

instructions. 

Note: Routine maintenance is required to maintain 

accuracy and response time of any pH electrode. 

Life expectancy of the electrode is 6 months to 1 

year, at which time electrode replacement is 

required. 

Fluid pressure limit 87 psig max (600 kPa) 

Probe Glass-encased zircon dioxide 

diaphragm with gel electrolyte 

reference 

Enclosure NEMA 4X (IP65) 

Tee 

Weight 

Schedule 80 PVC, 1" NPT 

Transmitter 

Transmitter/ 

1.4 lb (0.63 kg) 

Controller 1.6 lb (0.72 kg) 

Adapter tee 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) 

Buffer solution 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) 

273 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


274 


PH TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER 

MODEL 8205 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

An initial field calibration is required, as well as periodic cleaning and recalibration. Instructions are included with 

each shipment, and calibration buffer solutions are included in the complete installation kit (8205-T-K or 8205-C-K). 

Not Used 

3.44 

(8.7) 

CHECKOUT / CALIBRATION 

WIRING 

18-30 VDC 

1 2 3 4 

pH Electrode Connector 

RTD Connector 

8205-T 

3.44 

(8.7) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

8205-C Notes: 

1.5 

(3.8) 

1.88 

(4.8) 

1.44 

(3.7) 

1. Remove jumper from terminals 1 and 3, 

if using the 4-20 mA output on an 8205-C. 

2. A separate power supply (isolated) is 

strongly recommended for the 8205-C. 

If power supply is shared with another 

device (BAS, PLC, etc.), the 8205-C must 

be configured as current sourcing (switch1 

position A) or sinking (position B) for proper 

operation of the 4-20 mA output as shown 

in the instruction manual. 


1.25 

(3.2) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

A B 

Switch 1 

18-30 VDC 

1 2 3 4 

pH Electrode Connector 

RTD Connector 

5 6 7 8 

Relay2 

N.O. 

Contacts 

1.13 

(2.9) 

Relay1 

N.O. Contacts 

8205-C 

1.63 

(4.1) 


8205-T-K Compact pH transmitter with electrode, 1" NPT PVC adapter tee, and buffer solutions 

8205-C-K Compact pH transmitter/controller with electrode, 1" NPT PVC adapter tee, and 

buffer solutions 

8205-T Compact pH transmitter with electrode only 

8205-C Compact pH transmitter/controller with electrode only 

ACCESSORIES 

8205-E Replacement electrode for 8205-T or 8205-C 

8200-M1 1" NPT PVC mounting adapter tee 

8205-B Set of buffer solutions pH 4, 7, and 10, 8.45 oz (250 mL) 

428720C 1" NPT brass adapter tee 

428744G 1" NPT stainless steel adapter tee


CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER 

MODEL 8225 

DESCRIPTION 

This intelligent conductivity monitoring system consists 

of a loop-powered transmitter with LCD display, programming 

keypad, and conductivity electrode in a single 

compact package. The system provides a 4-20 mA output 

and digital display of the conductivity of aqueous 

solutions. Temperature compensation is accomplished 

with a platinum RTD built into the electrode for exceptional 

accuracy. 

While the compact all-in-one transmitter version of the 

Model 8225 is the most economical choice for conductivity 

monitoring and control with a BAS, a controller version 

is also available (24 VDC power required) that 

includes dual relays for alarming or direct control of 

valves or equipment. Both versions mount conveniently 

with the handy 1" NPT adapter tee. 

FEATURES 

• Compact all-in-one construction 

• Transmitter or transmitter/controller 

• Loop powered (two-wire) 4-20 mA transmitter 

• Optional dual relay outputs (24 VDC power 

required) for setpoint control 

• 3% typical accuracy with temperature compensation 

• Eight-character LCD display 

• Menu-driven configuration and calibration 

APPLICATION 

Applications include water treatment, cleaning water 

monitoring, cooling tower water monitoring, and a host 

of others in which aqueous conductivity must be monitored 

or controlled. 



Power 0.2 VA transmitter 

4.0 VA transmitter/controller 

Range 5 µS/cm to 10 mS/cm with 

standard (K=1.0) electrode 

(others available) 

Output 4-20 mA, 400� max @ 24 VDC 

Optional relays 2-SPST, menu-selectable N.O. 

or N.C., selectable trip and 

0-3 min. time delay 

Relay contacts 3A @ 230 VAC max 

Ambient temp 32° to 140°F (0° to 60° C) 

OPERATION 

8225-C-K 

Each unit is delivered with complete installation/operation 

instructions. Properly applied, the conductivity 

probe does not require maintenance. The unit must be 

mounted vertically. 

Ambient humidity 99% noncondensing 


248°F (120°C) with metal tee 

Fluid pressure limit 145 psig max (1000 kPa) 

Probe Graphite, K=1.0 standard 


Tee Sch. 80 PVC, 1" NPT 

Weight 

Transmitter 1.4 lb (0.63 kg) 

Transmitter/Controller 1.6 lb (0.72 kg) 

Adapter tee 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) 

275 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


276 


CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER / CONTROLLER 

MODEL 8225 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

Not Used 

3.44 

(8.74) 

1.5 

(3.81) 

18-30 VDC 

1 2 3 4 

Conductivity 

Electrode Connector 

RTD Connector 

8225-T 

3.44 

(8.74) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

8225-C Notes: 

1.44 

(3.66) 

1. Remove jumper from terminals 1 and 3, 

if using the 4-20 mA output on an 8225-C. 

2. A separate power supply (isolated) is 

strongly recommended for the 8225-C. 

If power supply is shared with another 

device (BAS, PLC, etc.), the 8225-C must 

be configured as current sourcing (switch1 

position A) or sinking (position B) for proper 

operation of the 4-20 mA output as shown 

in the instruction manual. 


1.25 

(3.18) 

1.88 

(4.78) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

1.13 

(2.87) 

A B 

Switch 1 

18-30 VDC 

1 2 3 4 

5 6 7 8 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Conductivity 

Electrode Connector 

RTD Connector 

Relay2 

N.O. 

Contacts 

8225-C 

Relay1 

N.O. 

Contacts 


8225-T-K Compact conductivity transmitter with electrode and 1" NPT PVC adapter tee 

8225-C-K Compact conductivity transmitter/controller with electrode and 1" NPT PVC 

adapter tee 

8225-T Compact conductivity transmitter with electrode only 

8225-C Compact conductivity transmitter/controller with electrode only 

ACCESSORIES 

8225-E Replacement electrode for 8225-T or 8225-C (K=1.0) 

8200-M1 1" NPT PVC mounting adapter tee 

428720C 1" NPT brass adapter tee 

428744G 1" NPT stainless steel adapter tee


VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH 

MODEL 550 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 550 Vibration Transmitter/Switch provides 

low cost, reliable vibration protection for rotating 

machinery operating within the range of 120-60,000 

rpm. The switch's vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular 

to the unit’s base, responds to the velocity (in/sec) 

signal and effects automatic shutdown or alarm when 

preset limits are exceeded. The unit may be mounted 

with the sensitive axis in any plane (horizontal, vertical 

or axial), even in an inverted position. Two limit setpoints 

are provided. One is set for the maximum allowable 

vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage 

of that setting, which trips the alarm relay when 

that percentage is reached. A built-in, adjustable time 

delay prevents triggering due to transient vibrations. The 

switch can be wired for automatic reset when vibration 

falls below setpoint, or it can be wired for latch and 

remote reset. The unit has a 4-20 mA output that may 

be used with a panel meter or data logger, permitting 

analysis of vibration trends. Once the switch has been 

installed and the limits set, it requires no attention. The 

Model 550 is enclosed in heavy, water-tight, cast-aluminum 

housing. Explosionproof housings are available. 

FEATURES 

• Reliable performance 

• Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output 




Input power 115 VAC 50/60 Hz 

Limits 

Limit #2 

(shutdown) Set at a velocity level in inches/sec 

Limit #1 (alarm) Set as a percent of Limit #2 

(shutdown) 

Velocity range 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) 

Frequency range 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm) 

Time delay 1-30 sec 

Limit output SPDT relay 

5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @ 28 VDC 

Analog output 4-20 mA DC 500� max load 

resistance 

Setting accuracy ±5% 

Vibration-sensitive 

axis Perpendicular to the base, 

omnidirectional mounting 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

6.75 

(17.1) 

0.38 

(1.0) 

0.38 (1.0) 

6.0 

(15.2) 


5/16" dia 

4.06 

(10.3) 

4.19 

(12.2) 

5.25 

(13.3) 

550-X 550 

1.0 

(2.5) 

3.44 (8.7) 

1.0 

(2.5) 

1.75 

(4.4) 


5/16" dia 

Remote reset Circuit closure between latch and 

common will reset both outputs 

Enclosure Rugged, water- and dust-tight 

cast aluminum NEMA 3, 4, and 12; 

optional explosionproof 

enclosures available 


Mounting 1/4" hardware, 3 mounting holes 

Terminals Accept #12 AWG wire 

Temp limits -30° to 165°F (-34° to 74°C) 

Dimensions 

550 3 .44"W x 5.937"H x 3.88"D 

(8.73 x 15.09 x 9.84 cm) 

550-X 4.81"W x 7.13"H x 4.5"D 

(12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm) 

277 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


278 



MODEL 550 

WIRING 

The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole 

on the side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to 

physical damage should be adequately protected. 

When installing electrical conduit, a short length (12") 

of flexible conduit must be used between the vibration 

switch and an associated junction box. This construction 

will provide some vibration isolation in the conduit 

line. Conduit and fittings should conform to the environment 

of the vibration switch location. In hazardous 

locations, the proper explosionproof fittings should be 

used. Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings should be 

used to protect the switch wiring from a humid or corrosive 

atmosphere. 

Note: Make all connections in accordance with national 

and local codes. 

OPERATION 

The 550 is a self-contained, vibration protection limit 

switch. It guards against destructive levels of vibration 

by tripping a relay that has a user-adjustable limit setpoint 

in terms of vibration velocity (in/sec). This relay 

output is connected to an alarm or control system to 

provide a warning or shutdown. It mounts at the monitoring 

point and is enclosed in a watertight, heavy castaluminum 

housing. Terminals are provided for remote 

or manual reset. A 4-20 mA output for recording or 

metering can connect to a remote readout panel meter 

or BAS controller. 

CAUTION: You must ensure that the switch is 

rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the 

proper "sensing" of the vibration. 

Reset (N.O.) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Jumper for 

Non-Latching 

Operation Form C Contacts 

to Alarm and 

Shutdown Circuits 


115 VAC 50/60 Hz 

TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS 

VS 

VS 

Centrifugal Compressor 

VS 

VS 

VS 

VS 

VS 

4-20mA 

Mute 

Latch 

Common 

C 

N/C 

N/O 

C 

N/C 

N/O 

L2 

L1 

VS 

VS 

Limit #1 

Alarm 

Limit #2 

Shutdown 

Reciprocating 

Compressor 

Y-Type Compressor Vertical Pump 

Engine Gear Compressor Cooling Tower Fan 

MODEL RANGE 

NUMBER 

OF LIMITS ENCLOSURE 

550 0.1 to 2.75 in/sec 2 NEMA 3, 4, 12 Aluminum 

550-X 0.1 to 2.75 in/sec 2 NEMA 7CD, 9EFG 

VS 

VS


VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 140T 

DESCRIPTION 

A low cost, highly accurate and rugged vibration transmitter, 

the Model 140T is ideal for use with all 

machines, even those that previously may have been 

considered uneconomical to monitor. 

The Model 140T easily mounts by use of a standard 

1/4-20 stud. It is a two-wire, loop-powered transmitter 

that can feed the vibration level of operating machinery 

to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control 

computer. Solid-state accelerometer and circuit design 

provide a 4-20 mA signal proportional to vibration velocity. 

Intrinsically safe, it can safely be used in hazardous 

environments when coupled with a Model MTL7206 

intrinsic safety barrier. 

FEATURES 



• 4-20 mA signal compatible with most BAS 

controllers 

• Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups 

A, B, C; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G 


APPLICATION 

Vibration monitoring can provide help in alerting for the 

destructive effects of vibration on mechanical system 

equipment, such as the following: 

• Air handler fans 

• Cooling tower fans 

• Pumps 

• Compressors 


Supply voltage (Vs) 12-50 VDC, black=negative, 

red=positive, with reverse 

voltage protection 

Output 4-20 mA, proportional to 

vibration level 

Range 

Model 140T-1 0-1 in/sec vibration 

Model 140T-2 0-2 in/sec vibration 

Frequency range 7-1300 Hz ±3% (420-78,000 rpm) 

Accuracy 5% to 10% of scale 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.38 (0.95) 

1.75 

(4.44) 

1.31 dia 

(3.33) 

1" NPT 

1.13 

(2.86) 

Mounting Connection 

1/4-20 0.38D (0.95) 

Isolation 500V, circuit-to-case 

Conduit connection 1" MNPT 

Max load 

resistance RL = 50 (Vs-12) ohms 

600� @ 24 VDC 


Environment rating NEMA 4, weatherproof 

Case Cadmium-plated steel 

Mounting 1/4''-20 stud 


279 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


280 


VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 140T 

INSTALLATION 

The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal definition 

or where there is a good transfer of the machine's (fan’s, pump’s, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary 

from machine to machine. The location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for 

the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the site with the aid of a vibration meter. 

WIRING 

Wiring subject to physical damage should be 

adequately protected. When installing electrical 

conduit, it is recommended that a short length 

(12") of flexible conduit be used between the 

transmitter and an associated junction box. This 

construction will provide some vibration isolation 

in the conduit line. Conduit and fittings should 

conform to the environment of the transmitter 

location. Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings 

should be used to protect the transmitter wiring 

from a humid or corrosive atmosphere. 

Note: Make all connections in accordance with 

national and local codes. 

140T 

Maximum Cable 

C=0.08 µF 

L= 4.0 mH 

Hazardous 

Area 

4-20 mA 

140T 

Safe 

Area 


MODEL RANGE 

140T-1 0-1 in/sec 

140T-2 0-2 in/sec 

6 

5 

4 

MTL7206 

IS Barrier 

1 

+ 

- 

- 

+ 

Ground Here Only 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

12-50 VDC 

Power 

Standard Wiring 

Intrinsically Safe Wiring 

2 

3 

20-35 VDC 

Power 

+ - 

Note:Each application should be evaluated on an individual basis. Consult equipment 

manufacturers for specific details concerning safe vibration levels. 

+ 

- 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

CAUTION: Ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of 

the vibration.


WEATHER INSTRUMENTS 

A70 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The A70 Series Weather Instruments with signal conditioning, 

provide a 4-20 mA output proportional to wind 

speed (A70-SL), wind direction (A70-DL), barometric 

pressure (A70-PL), or rainfall (A70-RL). The A70 

Series provides the user with weather information that 

can be used for monitoring purposes or as an input to 

control systems. 

FEATURES 

• Rugged construction 

• Reliable operation 

• Industry standard 4-20 mA output 

• Track-mounted transmitter 

APPLICATION 

Wind Speed (A70-SL) 

The wind speed is measured with a three-cup 

anemometer, and a 4-20 mA output signal proportional 

to 0-100 mph is generated. Accuracy from 3-9 

mph is ±1 mph; above 10 mph, accuracy is ±5% of 

reading. The A70-SL is supplied with 60' (18.28m) of 

cable and a 10" (25.40 cm) stub mast for mounting 

the anemometer. 

Wind Direction (A70-DL) 

Wind direction is measured with a precision potentiometric 

wind vane that produces a signal proportional 

to the azimuth of the wind. This signal is converted to 

a 4-20 mA output over 0° to 360°. The vane has a 4° 

deadband on either side of north. The A70-DL is provided 

with 60' (18.28m) of cable and an S mast for 

mounting. 

Barometric Pressure (A70-PL) 

The A70-PL senses barometric pressure by an integrated 

silicon, absolute pressure sensor with integral 

temperature compensation. It outputs a 4-20 mA signal 

over 27'' to 31'' Hg. Accuracy is ±0.05'' Hg. The 

sensor is mounted to the transmitter board, and 

3/16'' (0.48 cm) tube may be attached to the sensor 

to provide remote pressure sensing. 

Rainfall (A70-RL) 

The A70-RL utilizes tipping bucket technology to 

measure rainfall and outputs a 4-20 mA signal over a 

range of 0" to 1'' (0 to 2.5 cm). When the output 

reaches 20 mA (1''), it resets to 4 mA, and the cycle 

begins over again. Accuracy is ±4%. The sensor 

includes 50' (15.24m) of cable. 

ASSEMBLY 

A70-DL 

A70-RL 

A96 

Lightning Arrestor 

Tripod Mounting 

A76-T10 

A76-SD 

A70-SL 

281 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


282 


WEATHER INSTRUMENTS 

A70 SERIES 


Operating power 12-24 VDC, 30 mA max 


Max loop resistance (operating voltage -10) x 50� 

700� @ 24 VDC 

Signal conditioner accuracy ±1% 

WIRING 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

Wind Speed 

Anemometer 

1 2 3 4 X3 

A70-SL 

+ X1 

1 2 

A70-PL 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Wind Speed Wind Direction 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Barometric Pressure Rainfall 

+ 

- 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 


Red 

Dot 

Center 

Terminal 


A70-SL Wind speed transmitter 

A70-DL Wind direction transmitter 

A70-PL Barometric pressure transmitter 

A70-SDL Wind speed/direction transmitters 

A70-SDPL Wind speed/direction and barometric pressure transmitters 

A70-RL Rainfall transmitter 

Rain 

Gauge 

No 

Polarity 

X4 

2 

1 

X1 + 

1 

2 

Wind Direction 

Vane 

+ - 

X2 

1 2 3 4 5 

A70-DL 

A70-RL 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

ACCESSORIES 

A76-T10 Tripod tower with mast (10'/3m high total) for wind speed and direction sensors 

A76-SD Mounting bracket for wind speed and direction transmitters 

A96-100P Lighting arrestor for wind speed sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp) 

A96-200P Lighting arrestor for wind direction sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp)


RAIN / SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER 

MODEL DS-2B 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model DS-2B Rain/Snow Sensor Controller provides 

reliable rain and snow detection and control for 

commercial or residential applications. It detects rain to 

control motorized windows, roof vents, window wipers, 

etc., and detects snow to control snow melt and deicing 

systems for wheelchair ramps, stairways, driveways, 

loading docks, roofs, etc. The Model DS-2B is a low 

cost, easy-to-install, energy-saving alternative to thermostats, 

manual switches, or timer controls. It can be 

used stand-alone or in combination with building 

automation systems. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Full 30A @ 240 VAC N.O. load contact rating 

• UL listed and CE approved 

• Field strap for 100-120 or 200-240 VAC power 

• Replaceable precipitation sensor element 

• Override switch for manual-on, auto, 

standby/reset 

• Remote operation up to 1000' (305m) 

• Adjustable temperature trigger point 

• Adjustable delay-off time 

• Activate or disable low temperature cutout 

• Smart manual-on operates for one delay-off cycle 


Supply power 100-120/200-240 VAC, 

field selectable 

Peak power consumption 15W 

Contact ratings 

Load 30A @ 240 VAC 

Monitor 24 VAC/VDC, 400 mA, 

10W total 

Relay life expectancy Min 100,000 cycles 

Enclosure Two-gang PVC 

NEMA 3R 

Mounting 3/4" rigid conduit or 

Four mounting tabs 


(17.78 x 12.07 x 6.99 cm) 


Wiring 18" (45.72 cm) leads 

Power #14 AWG 

Load #10 AWG 

Remote control #22 AWG, five-wire cable 


Trigger temp 34°, 39°, or 44°F (1.1°, 3.9°, 

or 6.6°C), field selectable 

Delay-off 

Sensor 2 min. 

Controller 30-90 min., field selectable 

283 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


284 


RAIN / SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER 

MODEL DS-2B 

OPERATION 

The DS-2B senses precipitation and outdoor air temperature. It also provides on/off control for direct operation of 

rain or snow control loads and on/off status indication to a building automation system or other light load. It installs 

out in the open. Rain and snow will fall directly on the top of the enclosure where the sensing element is located. 

When precipitation is present, in the form of rain or snow, the load and monitor relay contacts close based on the 

adjustable settings for the trigger (setpoint). When precipitation stops, the contacts remain closed until the adjustable 

delay-off timer expires. 

Factory settings are 39°F (3.9°C) trigger point, and the delay-off timer is enabled and set for one hour. Also the low 

temperature cutout is disabled, so the trigger will switch even below 15°F (-9.4°C). 

A three-position toggle switch on the housing allows manual override. The manual-on position turns on the control 

(closes the relay outputs). The automatic position allows automatic control based on the adjustable settings. If 

switched to manual-on then back to automatic within two seconds, the control will execute one delay-off cycle. The 

toggle switch also has a standby/reset position, which turns off the control and resets the off timer. These manual 

override functions may also be accomplished remotely by wiring dry contacts to the remote control/monitoring cable 

(see Wiring below). 

WIRING 

Input L1 

Power L2 

GND 

Load 

Output 

(red) 

(red) 

(black) 

(white) 

(green) 

Load 

Contact 

30A 

@ 

240V 

N.O. 

DS-2B 

Monitor 

Contact 

400 mA max 

@ 24 VAC/DC 

(red) (orange) 

N.O. 


(black) 

(green) 

(white) 

(orange) 

(red) 

Monitor 

Contact 

Output 

Pilot Duty 


DS-2B Rain/Snow sensor controller with remote control/monitor cable 

MG-1 Precipitation grid replacement kit 

Remote 

Manual- 

On 

Remote 

Standby/ 

Reset


ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 

LU SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The LU Series Ultrasonic Level Transmitter provides 

non-contact measurement of fluid levels. Models 

are available in five distance ranges from 4' to 32' (1.2 

to 10m) and come in cable only or conduit connection 

models. The unit is easily calibrated in seconds using 

the calibration wire, a DC power supply, and a flat 

reflective target such as a wall.The cable-connected 

unit is rated NEMA 6X, and the conduit-connected unit 

is rated NEMA 4X. 

FEATURES 

• 4', 10', 16', 25', or 32' (1.2, 3, 5, 8, or 10m) ranges 

available 

• Digital infinity surface mapping for extreme accuracy 

and reliability 

• PC/ABS enclosure rated NEMA 4X or 6X 

• Minimal deadband optimizes the filling capacity 

of tanks and sumps 

• Fail-safe intelligence with diagnostic feedback for 

easy troubleshooting 

• 3" (7.6 cm) beam diameter for applications with 

restricted space 



Loop resistance 500� @ 24VDC 

Signal output 4-20 mA, two-wire 

Range 

LU05 2" to 4' (5 cm to 1.2m) 

LU11 4" to 16.4' (10 cm to 5m) 

LU12 4" to 9.8' (10 cm to 3m) 

LU13 8" to 26.2' (20 cm to 8m) 

LU14 12" to 32.8' (30 cm to 10m) 

Accuracy ±0.15% of span in air 

Resolution 0.039"(1 mm) 

Beam width 

LU05/12 2" (5.1 cm) dia. 

LU11/13/14 3" (7.6 cm) dia. 

Deadband (from sensor) 

LU05/11/12 4" (5 cm) 

LU13 8" (10 cm) 

LU14 12" (20 cm) 

LED indication Power, calibration, and 

diagnostics 

Memory Non-volatile 

Calibration Target, calibration wire 

LU11/LU13/LU14 

(cable 

connection) 

APPLICATIONS 

• Cooling tower sumps 

• Tanks 

• Wells 

• Ice storage 

• Water sumps 

• Process vessels 

LU05/LU12 

(conduit 

connection) 

Fail safety Reverts to 22 mA 

Electronics temp -40° to 160°F (-40° to 71°C) 

Temp compensation Automatic 

Pressure 30 psig (206.9 kPa) @ 25°C, 

derated @ 1.667 psig 

(11.5 kPa) per °C above 25°C 

Enclosure rating Cable connected type 

NEMA 6X (IP67); conduit 

type NEMA 4X (IP65) 

Enclosure material PC/ABS FR 

Transmitter material PVDF Kynar 

Cable jacket material Polypropylene 

Cable type Three-conductor shielded 

LU05 two-conductor shielded 

Cable length 10' (3m) 

Process mount 

LU05/12 1" NPT 

LU11/13/14 2" NPT 

Approvals CE compliance, 

EN 61326 EMC 

285 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


286 


ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 

LU SERIES 

DIMENSIONS CALIBRATION 

2" NPT 

1" NPT 

WIRING 

4.1" (105mm) 

4.1" (105mm) 

1.7" (44mm) 

0.7" 

(17mm) 

2.4" (61mm) 

0.5" (13mm) 

LU12 only 

2.9" (74mm) 

1.4" (37mm) 

2.4" (61mm) 

10' (3.0m) Cable 

LU11/LU13/LU14 

10' (3.0m) Cable 

LU05/LU12 

MODEL 

LU 


DESCRIPTION 

Ultrasonic level probe 

SENSOR RANGE 

05 4' (1.2m) range 

12 10' (3m) range 

11 

13 

14 

16' (5m) range 

25' (8m) range 

32' (10m) range 

OPTIONAL BRACKET 

5001 Cable type 

5101 Conduit connection 

– 

B 

(red) 

(black) 

(white) 

Shield 

(red) 

(black) 

(white) 

Shield 

(white - calibration wire) 

(black) 

(red) 

No bracket 

With mounting bracket 

4 mA Calibration (Empty Tank LU05/11/12/13) 

1. Power down the transmitter 

2. Position the transmitter from the target the exact distance 

for a 4 mA reading. 

3. Connect the white wire to the black wire. 

LU05-Reverse red and black wire. 

4. Add power to the transmitter. 

5. Wait until you see a flashing LED on the transmitter. 

6. Power down the transmitter. 

7. Disconnect the white wire. LU05-Return red and 

black wire to original polarity. 

8. Return power to the transmitter. 

20 mA Calibration (Full Tank LU05/11/12/13) 


2. Position the transmitter from the target the 

exact distance for a 20 mA reading. 

3. Connect the white wire to the red wire. 

4. Add power to the transmitter. 

5. Wait until you see a flashing LED on the 

transmitter. 


7. Disconnect the white wire. 

8. Return power to the transmitter. 

Note: LU05 20 mA fixed at deadband of 2". 

The LU Series requires 14-28 VDC power and a load that receives a 4-20 mA current input. Connect the red wire of 

the transmitter to the positive VDC terminal on the power supply. Connect the black wire on the transmitter to the (+) 

terminal on the load. Connect the (–) of the load to the (–) of the power supply. 

Shield 

LU Series 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

+ 4-20 mA 

Signal 

LU 12 5001 Example: LU12-5001 Ultrasonic level probe 

with 10' range, cable type connection 


LM50-1001-1 1" Bracket for LU05/12 

LM50-1001 2" Bracket for LU11/13/14


WATER DETECTOR 

MODEL WD-1B 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model WD-1B Water Detector features gold-plated 

probes and microchip technology for dependable detection of 

conductive liquids. The Model WD-1B can be operated from 

11-27 VAC/VDC. For application flexibility, SPDT contacts are 

provided to connect to a monitoring system. A heightadjustable, 

cast-aluminum, weatherproof enclosure is standard. 

A green LED visible outside the box indicates power. A red 

LED indicates water detected. The Model WD-1B is also available 

with an external tape style sensor, the Model WD-2-T. 

FEATURES 

• Weatherproof enclosure 


• SPDT alarm contacts 

• 11-27 VAC/VDC (50/60 Hz) 

• Reliable operation 

• LEDs for power and alarm indication (green, red) 

• Adjustable detection level 

OPERATION 

The Model WD-1B can be used with any contact-closure monitoring 

panel. The SPDT contacts may be wired normally open 

or normally closed, allowing wiring flexibility to handle most 

installations. 

MOUNTING 

Secure by applying a silicone adhesive to the mounting feet 

and placing the sensor in the area to be protected. For more 

permanent installations, fasten the sensor using the 0.19" 

(0.48 cm) holes provided in the mounting feet with #6 or #8 

screws. The legs are adjustable 1.5" (3.81 cm) for precise 

water level signaling. 


Power requirements 11-27 VAC/VDC (50/60 Hz) 


DC 10 mA typical, 30 mA max 

AC 30 mA typical, 70 mA max 


Enclosure Cast aluminum, weatherproof 

with adjustable legs 

Alarm output SPDT contacts rated, 

1A @ 24 VAC/VDC, 

1/2A @ 120 VAC 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.12 

(0.32) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

0.31 (0.79) 

max 

1.8 

(4.57) 

min 

0.20 

(0.51) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

3.75 

(9.53 ) 

Gasketed 

SS Cover 

1/2" FNPT 

Conduit 

Connection 

1.75 

(4.45) 

Probe height adjustable 0'' to 1.5" (0 to 3.8 cm) 

WIRING 

Input 

Voltage 

11-27 

VAC/DC 

(red) 

(white) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

Mounting Holes 0.187" dia (0.47) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(blue) 

LED 

Window 

The WD-1B is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in 

the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made to the color-coded 

wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should 

be 18 AWG or larger. 

If grounded AC power is used, the grounded power supply 

lead must be connected to the white lead on the WD-1B, 

or the unit may fail to operate. 



WD-1B Water detector 

WD-1B-C Water detector with normally energized relay (alarms when 

power is lost or water is detected) 


WD-2-T Water detector (tape style sensor) 

SPDT 

Alarm 

Contacts 

287 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


288 


TAPE STYLE WATER DETECTOR 

MODEL WD-2-T 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model WD-2-T Tape Style Water Detector uses a selfadhesive 

sensor tape with copper fiber electrodes and a durable 

netted cover for dependable detection of conductive liquids anywhere 

along the length of tape. The Model WD-2-T includes a 

tape integrity self-check feature, which activates a trouble output 

if the tape is unplugged, broken, or cut. Alarm relays may be 

independently jumpered to energize or de-energize upon water 

or trouble detection. 

FEATURES 


• Designed to minimize external noise pickup 

• SPDT alarm and trouble relay contacts 

• Relay action jumper selectable 

• Continuous tape integrity self check 

• Power/Alarm/Trouble status LED (green, red, green/red) 

• Sensor tape lengths of 10' (3.1m), 25' (7.6m), 

50' (15.2m), 100' (30.5m) 

• Floor or under-pipe mounting 

• Able to convert to two alarm relays 

OPERATION 

The Model WD-2-T can be used with any contact-closure monitoring 

device, wiring to either the normally open or normally 

closed contacts for flexibility. 


Power requirements 11-27 VAC/VDC 


DC 15 mA typical, 60 mA max 

AC 35 mA typical, 120 mA max 


Tape temp 32° to 180°F (0° to 82°C) 

Enclosure Cast aluminum, weatherproof 

Alarm and trouble 

outputs SPDT, 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC, 

1/2A @ 120 VAC 

Sensor tape 0.1"H x 1.5"W (0.25 x 3.81 cm) 

Sensor electrodes 3 mil copper fiber, 1/4" gap 

(0.08 mm, 0.64 cm gap) 

Weight 10'(1.8 lb/0.8 kg), 25' (2.2 lb/1.0 kg), 

50' (3.0 lb/1.4 kg),100' (4.6 lb/2.1 kg) 

INSTALLATION 

Floor Mounting 

Mount the Model WD-2-T box adjacent to the area to be protected. 

Unroll the sensor tape, remove vinyl release layer 

from the back, and hand press onto a surface that is dry and 

free of all debris and dust. Note 1: Once the sensor is activated 

(wet), the contacts will remain in alarm until the netted 

cover is completely dry. Note 2: To convert the tape integrity 

check relay to a second alarm relay, remove the jumper in 

the lower right corner of the circuit board. If the sensing tape 

is not used, install the jumper labeled “NO TBL CHK”. 



WD-2 Water detector without sensor tape 

WD-2-T-10 Water detector with 10' (3.1m) sensor tape 




WD-CLIP-5 Pack of 5 mounting clips (space 18"/45.7 cm for 

under-pipe installation) 

DIMENSIONS 

in (cm) 

0.12 

(0.32) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

WIRING 

Input 

Voltage 

11-27 

VAC/DC 

(red) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

(white) 

Gasketed 

SS Cover 

0.5 (1.27) 

FNPT 

Conduit 

Connection 

(violet) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(blue) 

4.5 

(11.43) 

0.31 (0.79) 

0.75 

1.8 

(1.91) 

(4.57) 3.75 

1.75 0.125 

(9.53 ) 

(4.45) (.32) 

Mounting Holes 0.187 (0.47) dia 

SPDT 

Alarm 

Contacts 

LED 

Window 

The Model WD-2-T is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection 

in the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made to 

the color-coded wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect 

wiring should be 18 AWG or larger. 

(gray) 

SPDT 

(brown) Trouble 

Contacts 

The Model WD-2-T tape includes a supervisory resistor mounted 

onthe far end for the tape integrity self-check. A self-check disable 

jumper is provided inside for use with older or cut-down tapes that 

do not have the supervisory resistor. 

STATUS INDICATOR 

• Green blink Normal 

• Red blink Water detected 

• Red/green alternating Tape sensor problem 

JUMPER POSITIONS 

• NO TBL CHK Install jumper to disable tape trouble check 

• OPT Remove jumper to convert trouble 

contacts to second set of alarm contacts 

• ALM (position D) De-energize relay on alarm 

(position E) Energize relay on alarm 

• TBL (position D) De-energize relay on trouble 

(position E) Energize relay on trouble


WATER SENSOR / SWITCH 

MODEL LD1-24, AQS00660, AQS00661 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model LD1-24 and the AQS models are small, 

electronic control relays for detecting a rising water 

level. Inside a waterproof enclosure, each model features 

a medium-power relay that is operated by water 

reaching the trip level and can be used to control alarms 

or other equipment. 

The relay is normally energized when the power supply 

is switched on and no water is present. When water 

rises up the side of the box to reach the switching level, 

the relay drops out. This sequence is failsafe, allowing 

each model to be used as a water spillage alarm switch 

or to turn off a valve or stop an air conditioning unit 

before the water overflows its containment. 

FEATURES 

• Small enough to be used in restricted spaces 

• Water detection with accurate switching level 

• All components safely encapsulated against 

moisture ingress 

• Switching capability 5A at 240 VAC 


Power supply 

LD1-24 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

AQS00660 95-254V 50/60 Hz 

AQS00661 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz 

Input power Approx. 1W 

Switch-off height 0.43'' (1.1 cm) nominal 

Switch-on (reset) level 0.31'' (0.8 cm) nominal 

Output relay rating 240V, 50/60 Hz, 5A 

24 VDC, 2.5A 

INSTALLATION / MOUNTING 

A piece of double-sided tape is fitted to the base of 

each model and can be used to fix it to the surface 

being protected. Clean the mounting surface thoroughly 

to ensure good adhesion. Pull off the protective 

paper covering and press the models down into position. 

The AQS models also have slots for mounting 

with #4 self-tapping screws. 

AQS 

WIRING 

Control 

Circuit 

AQS 

Note: Relay is energized to make black and yellow 

when powered-up and dry. 

(red) 

(red) 

Supply 

24 VAC 50/60 Hz 



LD1-24 24 VAC water sensor/switch 

AQS00661 24 VAC/VDC water sensor/switch 

AQS00660 95-254 VAC water sensor/switch 

(red) 

(blue) 

(black) 

(yellow) 

(white) 

AQS00660, AQS00661 

95-254V 50/60 Hz 

(24V 50/60 Hz or DC) 

(mauve) 

(pink) 

3A max Fuse 


(grey) 

Supply Neutral 

Isolated Switch Output 

Common 

Break on Water Rise 

Make on Water Rise 

Isolated 

Switch 

Output 

N/O 

N/C 

COM 

Note: Relay contacts shown in alarm (or power-off) condition. 

LD1-24 

LD1-24 

WARNING: Although the LD1-24 is totally encapsulated 

and resistant to water ingress when used 

as intended (to detect rising water levels), it 

should not be installed where the encapsulated 

surface is permanently under water. 

289 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


290 


MECHANICAL FLOAT SWITCH 

MODEL NG2DW1500B 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model NG2DW1500B is an economical mechanical float 

switch. The switch can be installed by tie-wrapping to a support 

structure or by adding an external weight to the cable. 

The unit is ultrasonically welded and potted for a complete 

seal. SPDT contacts are included so the unit can be used to 

empty or fill a tank or sump. 

FEATURES 

• SPDT mechanical switch 

• 10A contacts rated for 1/4 hp 

• Float suitable for sewage and high temperature 

• CPE-jacketed 15' (4.6m) cord 

• External cord weight available 

TYPICAL INSTALLATION 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model L8 is an excellent, low-cost, general-purpose float 

switch. It is magnetically actuated for long life and decreased 

maintenance with a high resistance to chemicals. 

FEATURES 

25° 

Horizontal 

10° 

PM-590 

External 

Weight 

• UL recognized component, CE approved 

• Polyphenylene sulfide float 

• Magnetically actuated 

• Good for specific gravities 0.6 and up 

• 1" NPT mounting 

Pumping 

Range 






L8 General-purpose float switch 

Float material ABS plastic 

Temp 221°F (105°C) 

Color Green 

Contact rating 10A 120/240 VAC, 1/4 hp 120/240 VAC 

Contact operation SPDT 

Operation angle 25° above, 10° below horizontal 

Dimensions 4.6"H x 2.6" dia. (11.75 x 6.67 cm) 

Cable 16/3 CPE jacketed, length 15' (4.6m) 

Approvals UL recognized component, File #E-93774 


Wiring 

Tank full Black-red closed 

Tank empty Black-white closed 


NG2DW1500B Mechanical float switch 

PM-590 External weight 1.27 lb (0.58 kg) 

GENERAL-PURPOSE FLOAT SWITCH 

MODEL L8 

Temp limits 212°F (100°C) 

Operating pressure 150 psig (1000 kPa) 

Electrical rating 5A@125/250 VAC 

Installation Horizontal 

Dimensions 8.31"L (21.1cm), 1" NPT 

Weight 6.4 lb (181g) 

Approvals UL recognized component, CE

FLOAT SWITCH 

F7 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 


The F7-BT and F7-SS are economical solutions to smaller 

vertical-mount float switch applications. The F7-BT includes a 

BUNA-N float, and the F7-SS includes a stainless steel float. 

They are shipped with normally open switch contacts that 

close on a liquid level rise but can be switched easily to normally 

closed in the field. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 


• Vertical 1/8" NPT mount 

• 18" leads 22 AWG 


F7-BT F7-SS 

Temp limits 220°F (105°C) 300°F (149°C) 

Operating pressure 150 psig (1000 kPa) 450 psig (3100 kPa) 


AC 25 VA, 1A, 200V 30W, 0.14A, 220V 

DC 0.28A/24V 10W, 1A, 200V 

Installation Vertical Vertical 

Dimensions 2.18"H x 1.18 dia. (5.54 x 30 cm) 2.06"H x 1" dia. (5.23 x 25.4 cm) 

Weight 1.6 oz (45g) 3.2 oz (91g) 

Approvals UL recognized component UL recognized component 

FLOAT SWITCH 

JMP SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

• Dependable 


• Hermetically sealed 

• SPST switch operation 

The JMP Series Float Switches provide the ultimate in costeffective 

solutions for applications such as condensate drip 

pan monitoring. The JMP-100-4CC features a spring clip and 

the JMP-100-4CC11 an L bracket for mounting. 

FEATURES 


• Low cost 

• UL recognized, CSA certified 

• SPDT contacts 



JMP-100-4CC Float switch with spring 

clip mount 

JMP-100-4CC11 Float switch with L bracket 

mount 


F7-BT 


F7-BT Float switch with BUNA-N float 

F7-SS Float switch with stainless steel float 


F7-SS 

TYPICAL INSTALLATION 

Float 

Elbow 

Pipe 


Electrical rating 5A @ 125 VAC 

3A @ 250 VAC 


Dimensions 3.5" (8.9 cm) clip to float 

Wiring 6" leads #18 AWG 


CSA certified 

291 

SPECIALTY SENSORS


292 


UNIVERSAL CALIBRATION KIT 

MODEL UCK 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCK Universal Calibration Kit contains everything 

needed to flow calibration gas through any gas-sensing 

device in the Trane Catalog. Adapters are included for the following: 

WCO, KCO Series carbon monoxide sensors; CD-1, 

CD-A, GM, 711271, 2001V, 8000, and 4GS carbon dioxide 

sensors; OS-1 oxygen depletion sensors; RLD-5, RLD-134a, 

and 301IRF, HGM refrigerant sensors; and GMT Series toxic 

and combustible gas sensors. The supplied adapters and tubing 

will also fit the majority of other gas detectors on the market 

today. With the Model UCK’s pressure gauge and restrictor 

assortment, any gas flow rate from 50 mL/min to 1000 mL/min 

may be achieved without the need for an expensive flow meter. 

Flow tables and instructions are included. 

FEATURES 

• Six assorted sizes of color-coded polyurethane 

tubing 

• Assorted barbed couplings and reducing couplings 

• Regulator (1.0 L/min) for 17L (non-corrosive), 58L 

(corrosive) gas cylinders, or both 

• Restrictors, 0.005"and 0.007" 

DIMENSIONS / WEIGHT 

Dimensions 16.4"W x 8.6"D x 7.5"H 

(41.6 x 21.9 x 19.0 cm) 


UCK-1 Kit with Regulator for Noncorrosive 

Gases (N 2 , CO 2 , CH 4 , H 2 , O 2 , CO, and 

refrigerants) 

UCK-2 Kit with Regulator for Corrosive 

Gases (NO 2 , H 2 S, SO 2 , NH 3 ) 

UCK-3 Kit with Both Regulators 

GAS-N2 Nitrogen (N 2 ), 17L 

GAS-CO2-2000 2000 ppm Carbon Dioxide (CO 2 ) 

in Nitrogen (N 2 ), 17L 





GAS-CO-200 200 ppm Carbon Monoxide (CO) 

in Air, 17L 


in Air, 17L 


in Air, 17L 


• Cup adapter for solid-state sensors 

(OS-1, WCO, RLD-5, RLD-134a, others) 

• Plug adapter for electrochemical sensors (GMT, others) 

• Tubing sized for insertion or barbed connectors 

(RLD-IR, 4GS, CD-1, others) 

• Rugged, high-density poly toolbox with accessory shelf 

and room for two gas cylinders of either size 

Weight 

UCK-1, UCK-2 4.3 lb (1.95 kg) 

UCK-3 5.0 lb (2.27 kg) 

Gas cylinders 1.6 lb (0.82 kg) each 


GAS-NO2-5 5 ppm Nitrogen Dioxide (NO 2 ) 

in Air, 58L 

GAS-CH4-2.5 2.5% Methane (CH 4 ) in Air, 17L 

GAS-H2-2 2.0% Hydrogen (H 2 ) in Air, 17L 

GAS-H2S-25 25 ppm Hydrogen Sulfide 

(H 2 S) in Air, 58L 

GAS-SO2-5 5 ppm Sulfur Dioxide (SO 2 ) in Air, 58L 

GAS-O2-18 18% Oxygen (O 2 ) in Nitrogen 

(N 2 ), 17L 

GAS-NH3-50 50 ppm Ammonia (NH 3 ) in 

Nitrogen (N 2 ), 58L 

GAS-R123-100 100 ppm R-123 in Air, 17L 



GAS-R134A-500 500 ppm R-134a in Air, 17L 



CAL-B-KEY Calibration keypad for 4GS carbon dioxide sensors without display 

CD-CAL Calibration kit for CD-1W and CD-1D without display

TEST EQUIPMENT/INDICATION

PRODUCTS 

Check out the NEW 475 

Handheld Digital 

Manometer on 

page 300! 

SERVICES 

Our Tech Reps will help 

you troubleshoot in the 

field. Just call! 

SOLUTIONS 

At Trane, you’ll find 

products to help Test, 

Measure, and Calibrate 

- all from one place! 



475-FM Series — Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 

490 Series — Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 

7001 — Handheld Digital CO 2/Temperature Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 

AIS — Stand-Alone Alarm Indication Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 

ALD-1 — Pulse or Run-Time Accumulator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 

ASG — Handheld Portable Analog Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 

CLC-100 — Current/Voltage Signal Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 

H08 Series HOBO — Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 

HM34 — Relative Humidity/Temperature Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 

HYGROMASTER — Handheld Digital Hygrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 

LPI-1C — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 

LPI-1C-A, G, R — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Amber/Green/Red Panel Display . . . . . . . . .304 

LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, G, R — 4-1/2 Digit Black, Amber, Green, Red Panel 

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 

LPI-4, LPI-4R, -4G, -4A — 3-1/2 Digit Large Black, Red, Green, Amber Panel 

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 

LPI-5 — 3-1/2 Digit Small Black, Red Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 

M9000-200 — Commissioning Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 

RAD-1 — Remote Alarm Indication Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 

ST20 — Infrared Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 

TM99A — Digital Probe Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 

VPI Series — 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 



HANDHELD PORTABLE ANALOG SIGNAL GENERATOR 

MODEL ASG 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model ASG is a handheld, battery- or plug-in power supply 

powered, pocket-size analog signal generator. It generates a 0- 

10 VDC signal in increments of 1V or a 0-20 mA signal in increments 

of 2 mA. The LED bar graph visually indicates analog signal 

level. The Model ASG can also continuously ramp to userdefined 

minimum or maximum values with userdefined ramptime 

settings. 

FEATURES 

• Powered by 9V battery or plug-in power supply 

• Pocket size 

• Bar graph LED for signal display 

• 0-20 mA (2 mA increments) 

• 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments) 

• Ramp function to minimum and maximum values 

• Variable ramp function timing 

• Low battery indication 

• User-defined auto shutoff times for battery conservation 

• Separate milliamp and voltage output jacks 

• 6' (1.83m) leads with alligator clips 

• Up to 30 hours continuous use on a single battery 

• Perfect for loop-powered circuits and externally powered 

circuits 


Power 9V battery or 120 VAC plug-in 

power supply 

Impedance 

Voltage 1000� min 


Resolution 

Current 2 mA 

Voltage 1 VDC 

Accuracy (72°F) 

Current ±0.5% FS or ±0.1 mA 

Voltage ±0.5% FS or ±0.05 VDC 


Weight 14 oz (0.4 kg) with accessories 


(11.9 x 6.1 x 2.2 cm) 

Output 0-20 mA (2 mA increments) 

0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments) 

Ramping time intervals 2-20 sec (2-sec increments) 

Auto shutoff times 2-20 min. (2-min. increments) 

Accessories included 9V battery, 120 VAC plug-in power 

supply, 6' (1.83m) wire leads, carrying 

case 

Top view 

APPLICATIONS 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

mA Source 

Output 

mA Two-Wire 

Transmitter 

Output 


4.7 

(11.9) 

2.4 

(6.1) 

ASG 

Programming 

Buttons 

External 

Power 

Voltage 

Output 


ASG mA/VDC handheld portable analog signal generator with accessories 

ASG with 

Carrying Case 

• Troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, and actuators 

• Calibrating transducers, digital displays, and other analog 

signal devices 

0.85 

(2.2) 

293 



DESCRIPTION 

The Model CLC-100 is a portable, multifunction instrument 

that provides the signal and measurement capabilities 

most often needed for calibrating, troubleshooting, 

and checking out electronic transducers and control 

devices. 

All wiring connections are made via a combination of 

banana jacks and binding posts. 

The Model CLC-100 may be ordered with an optional 

pulse generator (CLC-100-PW1) for testing pulse-width 

modulation devices. 

FEATURES 

• Powered by 120 VAC or batteries (included) 

• 24 VDC, 400 mA regulated power supply 

• 4-20 mA current generator 

• 0-20 VDC voltage generator 

• Digital meter for reading current or voltage 

• Sturdy carrying case 

• Optional pulse generator 

• 0.1-second pulse resolution 

• LCD display of time count and contact status 



CURRENT / VOLTAGE SIGNAL ANALYZER 

MODEL CLC-100 

Input range 4-50 mA/0-50 VDC 

Output range 4-20 mA/0-20 VDC 

Output power supply 24 VDC @ 400 mA 

24 VDC power supply fuse 1A fast blow 

Digital meter fuse 1/4A fast blow 

Battery operation Four 9V alkaline batteries 

Battery life 5.5 hours@ 20 mA output 

Accuracy ±1% 

Resolution 0.6% 

Impedance 

Voltage output 1500� min 

Current output 750� max 

Current input 300� nominal 



Pulse option (PW1) 

Output pulse 0.1-999 single shot 

(sec, min., or hours) 

Contact rating 5A @ 250 VAC 

5A @ 125 VDC 

Repeat accuracy ±0.1% 

Reset time 50 ms 

Operating temp 14° to 140°F 

(-10° to 60°C) 


294 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

10 

(25.40) 

CLC-100-PW1 

* 

1.88 

(4.76) 

PULSE GENERATOR 

PW1 

PULSE 

TIMER 

MODULE 

(optional) 

POWER 

ON 

OFF 

PULSE 

OUT 

PW1 Option 

CLC-100 

1.88 

(4.76) 

s 

12.25 

(31.11) 

CLC-100 



CLC-100 Current/Voltage signal analyzer 

CLC-100-PW1* Analyzer with pulse option 

*The Pulse option must be specified at time of 

ordering. It cannot be field installed.

DESCRIPTION 

The Model M9000-200 Commissioning Tool provides 

four control signals to drive resistive, proportional, and 

on/off outputs for checkout of actuators and electric 

valves. LEDs display feedback voltages and contact closure 

and indicate mode selection. The Model M9000- 

200 combines accurate and reliable technology in a userfriendly 

and economical package. It is small and lightweight 

so that making adjustments from ladders is easy. 

FEATURES 

• Small and lightweight 

• Multiple output types 

• Multiple input types 

• Plug-in terminations 

• Digital display 

• Carrying case 


COMMISSIONING TOOL 

MODEL M9000-200 



Commissioning tool 24 VAC nominal (20 to 30 VAC) 

@ 50/60 Hz, 3 VA, Class 2 

Plug-in transformer 120 VAC @ 60 Hz 

Input DC feedback 0 to 30 VDC 

Electrical connections Screw terminals for 24 to 12 AWG 

Transformer plug 0.08" (2.11 mm) dia pin, 

0.25" (6.35 mm) dia plug 

Input impedance 

Voltmeter 1 M� (nominal) 

Output signal 

AC power 24 VAC nominal (20 to 30 VAC), 

25VA max (Terminals 1 and 2) 

Output AC voltage is equivalent to 

the input AC voltage and frequency. 

Resistive 0 to 135� ±7%, 2W or 0 to 1k� 

±5%, 2W (Terminals 3, 4, and 5) 

Proportional, voltage 0 to 10 VDC (500� min); 0 to 20 VDC 

(6.8k� min) (Terminals 2 and 3) 

Proportional, current 0 to 20 mA (680� max) (Terminals 2 

and 3) 

Incremental 24 VAC nominal (20 to 30 VAC) 

25 VA max (Terminals 2, 3, and 4) 

Output AC voltage is equivalent to 

the input AC voltage and frequency. 

Bias 5 VDC with 330� series resistor 

(Terminal 6) 

M9000-200 

Carrying Case 



M9000-200 Multiple function commissioning tool 

M9000-200 

Accuracy ±2% FS @ 77°F (25°C) 

Resolution 0.1 VDC, 0.1 mA 

Auxiliary switch Provides 24 VAC at 4 mA to 

testing auxiliary switch contacts (dry 

contacts only) 

Response time 

Proportional, voltage 0 to 20 VDC in 20 sec 

Proportional, current 0 to 20 mA in 20 sec 

Ambient conditions 

Operating -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C), 

10% to 90% RH, noncondensing 

Storage -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C), 

5% to 95% RH, noncondensing 

Dimensions 

Commissioning tool 7.7"H x 4.5"W x 2.2"D 

(196 x 113 x 55 mm) 

Transformer 4.2"H x 3.0"W x 2.4"D 

(107 x 76 x 61 mm) 

Carrying case 10.4"H x 12.7"W x 4.2"D 

(263 x 322 x 107 mm) 

Weight 

Commissioning tool 0.9 lb (0.4 kg) 

Transformer 1.7 lb (0.8 kg) 

Carrying case 2.0 lb (0.9 kg) 

Total shipping 

weight 5.4 lb (2.5 kg) 

295 




DATA LOGGER 

HOBO H08 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Onset's H08-006-04 Data Logger monitors four different 4-20 

mA or 0-2.5 VDC signals simultaneously. This four-input logger 

reads and stores up to 32,520 samples divided among the 

number of inputs being recorded. The H08-002-02 has an internal 

temperature sensor as well as a single-point external input 

that will accept a 4-20 mA or a 0-2.5 VDC input. The H08-003- 

02 has both an internal temperature and humidity sensor. Each 

external input requires a CABLE-4-20MA, a CABLE-2.5- 

STEREO, or a TMC6-HA temperature probe. A BOXCAR or 

BOXCARPRO software kit is required to operate the H08 loggers. 

FEATURES 

• Mounting kit included with hook, magnet, and tape 

• User-selectable sampling intervals from 0.5 seconds 

to 9 hours 

• Drop proof to 5' (1.5m) 

• Nonvolatile EEPROM to retain memory 

• Blinking LED for operation verification 

• Programmable start time/date 

APPLICATIONS 

• Temperature monitoring 

• Pressure monitoring 


H08 

Sampling intervals 0.5 sec to 9 hours 

Capacity 7943 measurements; 

H08-006-04: 32,520 measurements 

Time accuracy ±1 min. per week @ 68°F (20°C) 

Memory modes Stop when full, wrap around when full 

Dimensions 2.4"H x 1.9"W x 0.8"D (6.1 x 4.8 x 2 cm) 


Internal Temp Sensor (if equipped) 

Range -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C) 

Accuracy ±1.27° @ 70°F (±0.7° @ 21°C) 

Resolution 0.7° @ 70°F (0.4° @ 21°C) 

Response time 15 min. to 90% in still air 

Replaceable RH Sensor (if equipped) 

Range 25% to 95% RH @ 80°F for intervals of 

�10 sec, noncondensing 

Accuracy ±5% 

Response time 10 min. in still air 


296 

• Humidity monitoring 

• Flow monitoring 


• Gas concentration monitoring 

• Troubleshooting of unusual applications 

TMC6-HA Temp Sensor 

Range -40° to 212°F (-40° to 100°C) in air 

Accuracy ±0.9° @ 68°F (±0.5° @ 20°C) 

Resolution 0.7° @ 68°F (0.41° @ 20°C) 

Response time 2.5 min. in air moving 3.2 fps 

Dimensions 0.2" (0.5 cm) dia sensor, 

6' (1.8m) cable 

CABLE-4-20MA 

Range 0-20.1 mA 

Accuracy ±0.1 mA, ±2.5% of reading 

Resolution 0.4% of full scale 

Dimensions 18" (46 cm) cable 

CABLE-2.5-STEREO 

Range 0-2.5 VDC 

Accuracy ±10 mV, ±3% of reading 

Resolution 10 mV 

Dimensions 6' (1.8m) cable 


H08-002-02 Data logger with one internal temperature and one analog signal port 

H08-006-04 Data logger with four external analog signal ports 

H08-003-02 Data logger with internal temperature and internal humidity sensing 

CABLE-4-20 MA 4-20 mA input cable (needed for mA signals) 

CABLE-2.5-STEREO 0-2.5 VDC input cable 

TMC6-HA Onset temperature sensor with 6' (1.8m) cable 

BOXCAR Basic software interface kit (software, cable, and manual) 

BOXCARPRO Professional software interface kit (software, cable, and manual) 

H08 

BOXCARPRO BOXCAR


DIGITAL PROBE AND INFRARED THERMOMETER 

MODELS TM99A, ST20 

DESCRIPTION 

This economical, all-purpose solid-state thermometer is perfect 

for field/factory use in a variety of applications in which a fast 

response is required. 

FEATURES 

• °F/°C switch selectable 

• Large, illuminated LCD display 

• Detachable thermistor probe included 


• Membrane keypad operation 

• One-year limited warranty 

• 9V alkaline battery included 

APPLICATIONS 

• HVAC for ambient air and duct temperatures, 

thermostat calibration 

• Laboratory for liquid, air, and semi-solid 

temperatures 

• Food service preparation, storage, and shipping 

• Electrical/electronic equipment servicing 


Range -40° to 300°F (-40° to 150°C) 

Resolution 0.1°F or °C 

Accuracy ±0.2°F or °C or ±0.2% of reading 

Ambient range 0° to 150°F max (-18° to 66°C), 0% to 90% RH 

Display Backlit 0.4" LCD 

Probe 10K thermistor, detachable (#1075) 

Power 9V alkaline battery, provided 


Temp range -25° to 750°F (-32 to 400°C) 

Distance to spot ratio 12:1 

Repeatability ±2°F (±1°C) or ±0.5% of reading, 




TM99A Digital probe thermometer 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model ST20 Infrared Thermometer makes non-contact 

measurements of surface temperatures that are difficult or dangerous 

to reach. It features Class 2 laser sighting, has an accuracy 

of 1%, and is powered by a 9V battery. 

FEATURES 

• Single-point laser sighting 

• Maximum temperature display 


• Backlit graphic display 



TM99A 

Size 9.5"H x 6.5"W x 2.5"D closed case 

(24.13 x 16.51 x 6.35 cm) 

Display segments Four digits, one decimal point, °F or °C 

Display warnings LO: temp below -40°F (-40°C) 

HI: temp above 300°F (150°C) 

LO-P: battery discharged 


ST20 with Carrying Case 

Accuracy @ 77°F (25°C) ambient 

Above 73°F (23°C) @ target ±1% of reading or ±2°F (±1°C), 


0° to 73°F (-18° to 23°C) @ target ±3°F (±2°C) 


ST20 1% accurate laser-sighted handheld infrared thermometer 

297 




RH / TEMPERATURE METER AND HANDHELD DIGITAL HYGROMETER 

MODELS HM34, HYGROMASTER 

DESCRIPTION 

The handheld, pocket-sized Model HM34 RH/Temperature 

Meter provides a fast and convenient way to accurately spotcheck 

relative humidity and temperature. 

FEATURES 


• Auto-off and hold 

• Measurement of humidity and temperature 

• 9V battery 

• 0.2 µm protective membrane filter 


• Retractable sensor probe 


Relative Humidity 

Range 0% to 100% RH 

Accuracy ±2% (0% to 90% RH) 

±3% (90% to 100% RH) 

Resolution 0.1% RH 

Sensor type HUMICAP ® H-Sensor, 

thin-film capacitive sensor 

Response time (90%) 15 sec with membrane filter 

Replacement sensor 16663 HM sensor 

DESCRIPTION 

The HYGROMASTER is an inexpensive, accurate handheld 

digital hygrometer that displays %RH, drybulb, and dew point 

temperatures (in °F and °C). The large three-digit display aids 

the easy-to-use two-button operation. The HYGROMASTER 

can be ordered with an NIST certificate. It also comes with a 

convenient carrying case and operates using two AA batteries. 


Power Two AA batteries 

Accuracy 1.5% @ 50% RH and 68°F (20°C) 

Temp operating range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Humidity range 20% to 99% 


(12.01 x 4.90 x 2.79 cm) 

298 


Temperature 

Range -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C) 

Accuracy ±0.5°F (±0.3°C) 

Resolution 0.1°F (0.1°C) 

Temp dependence ±0.02°C /°C 

Sensor Pt 100 1/3 DIN 43760B 

General 

Display 3-1/2 digit LCD 


Size 6.3"L x 2.2"W x 1.1"D 

(16.0 x 5.6 x 2.8 cm) 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

HM34C RH/Temperature meter with °C reading 

HM34F RH/Temperature meter with °F reading 

HM34 

HYGROMASTER with Carrying Case 


HYGROMASTER Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case 

HYGROMASTER-NIST Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case and NIST certificate 

H-CABLE 24" (60.96m) sensor extension cable

DESCRIPTION 

The Dwyer 475-FM Series Mark III handheld digital manometer is 

ideal for field-calibrating, monitoring, or troubleshooting HVAC systems, 

clean rooms, and a wide range of other low-pressure applications. 

This handy instrument measures positive, negative, or differential 

pressures of air and natural gases. The 475-FM Series is 

approved and intrinsically safe for hazardous locations, Class 1, 

Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and T4. 


Service Air and some combustible gases 

Accuracy ±0.5% FS, 60° to 78°F (15.6° to 

25.6°C); ±1.5% FS from 32° to 60°F 

(0° to 15.6°C) and 78° to 104°F 

(25.6° to 40°C) 

Temp limits 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C) 

Display 0.5" liquid crystal, 3-1/2 digits 

Pressure range/limit 

475-000-FM 0-1.000" W.C. (0-0.249 kPa)/ 

10" W.C. (2.5 kPa) max 

475-00-FM 0-4.00" W.C. (0-0.995 kPa)/5 psig 

(35 kPa) max 

DESCRIPTION 

The Dwyer 490 Series wet/wet digital manometers are versatile, 

handheld, and battery operated. Units are highly accurate 

(±0.5% FS) for positive or positive differential pressure measurement, 

and they can tolerate most liquid media compatible 

with 316L stainless steel. There are seven common English and 

metric pressure units (psi, "H 2 O, "Hg, mm Hg, kPa, Bar, or 

mBar), so conversions are not necessary. 



DESCRIPTION 

MODEL 475-FM Series 

Service Compatible, non-combustible gases 

and liquids 

Wetted materials Type 316L stainless steel 

Accuracy ±0.5% FS, 60° to 78°F (15.6° to 

25.6°C); ±1.5% FS from 32° to 60°F 

(0° to 15.6°C) and 78° to 104°F (25.6° 

to 40°C) 

Temp limits 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C) 

Pressure range/limit 

490-1 0-15.000 psid (0-100 kPa)/30 psig 

max (200 kPa) 

475-0-FM 0-10.00" W.C. (0-2.49 kPa)/5 psig 

(35 kPa) max 

475-1-FM 0-19.99" W.C. (0-4.97 kPa)/20 psig 

(138 kPa) max 

Power requirements 9V alkaline battery included 

Connections 2 barbed connections for use with 

1/8" (3.18 mm) or 3/16" (4.76 mm) 

I.D. tubing 

Agency approvals FM, CE 




475-000-FM Handheld digital manometer, 0-1.000" W.C. 




WET/WET HANDHELD DIGITAL MANOMETER 

490 SERIES 


490-2 0-30.00 psid (0-200 kPa)/60 psig 

(400 kPa) max 

490-3 0-50.00 psid (0-350 kPa)/120 psig 

(800 kPa) max 

Display 0.42" (10.6 mm), 4-1/2 digit LCD 

Power requirements 9V alkaline battery included 

Connections Two 1/8" (3.18 mm) female NPT 

Agency approvals CE 



490-1 Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-15 psid 



299 




HANDHELD DIGITAL CO 2 / TEMPERATURE METER 

MODEL 7001 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 7001 Handheld Digital CO2 /Temperature Meter 

features two analog voltage outputs for easy connection to a 

data logger like the HOBO H08 Series. The Model 7001 uses 

dual-beam infrared technology for accuracy and stability. 

Battery operation offers mobility, while the AC adapter (included) 

offers long-term data logging capability. Temperature is 

displayed in °F or °C. 


Display range 

CO2 From 0-10,000 ppm 

Temperature °F or °C, 32° to 99°F (0° to 37°C) 

Display 

Ambient 

Accuracy 

Four-digit 1/2" LCD, CO2 , and temperature 

32° to 122°F, 0% to 95% RH 

CO2 ±50 ppm or 5% of reading 

Temperature ±2°F (±1°C) 

Annual drift ±20 ppm 

Response time

REMOTE ALARM INDICATION STATION 

MODEL RAD-1 

DESCRIPTION 

The RAD-1 is a wall-mounted remote alarm indication station 

mounted on a stainless steel 2x4 plate. Any contact 

closure alarm initiating device that can switch 24 VAC or 

DC can be used with the RAD-1. 

When 24 VAC or DC is applied to the RAD-1 through an 

alarm-initiating device, the red alarm LED will light, the horn 

will sound, and the alarm status relay will energize. If an initial 

alarm delay has been set, when 24 VAC or DC is 

applied, the red alarm LED will blink until the delay period 

has expired when it will light continuously, the horn will 

sound continuously, and the relay will energize. 

During an alarm (24V applied to the RAD-1), the horn may 

be silenced by momentarily pressing the silence switch. 

The alarm LED will remain lighted, and the alarm status 

relay will remain energized when the horn is silenced until 

the alarm condition is cleared (24V removed). If an alarm 

repeat after silence time has been set, the horn will resound 

at the end of the repeat time. If the relay follows horn 

jumper is installed the alarm status relay will de-energize 

when the horn is silenced and re-energize when the horn 

sounds at the end of the repeat after silence time. 

If a pulsed (instead of continuous tone) horn is desired, the 

horn-pulsed jumper may be installed. If both the hornpulsed 

jumper and the relay-follow horn jumper are 

installed, the alarm status relay will energize and de-energize 

with the pulsed horn. 

FEATURES 

• Red alarm LED 

• Alarm horn, continuous-tone or pulsed 

• Alarm horn silence switch 

• Adjustable alarm delay time 

• Adjustable alarm repeat time 

• Alarm status SPDT relay 

• Relay operates with the alarm horn option 



Power 24 VAC @ 100mA or 24 VDC @ 35mA 

Alarm status relay SPDT, 0.5A @ 24 VAC, 1.0A @ 30 VDC 

Alarm horn Continuous tone or pulsed, 70 db min 

Alarm delay time None, or 1 to 31 seconds in 1-second 

increments, or 10 to 310 seconds in 

10-second increments 

Alarm repeat time None, or 1 to 7 minutes in 1-minute 

increments, or 10 to 70 minutes in 

10-minute increments 

WIRING 

ON OFF 

Alarm Repeat after 

Silence Time* 

SW6–SW8 OFF = No delay 

SW6 ON = 1 minute 

SW7 ON = 2 minutes 

SW8 ON = 4 minutes 

8 

7 

6 

4 Repeat 

Time in 

2 Minutes 

1 (Add) 

Initial Alarm Delay Time* 5 16 

SW1–SW5 OFF = No delay 

SW1 ON = 1 sec 





4 

3 

2 

8 

Repeat 

4 Time in 

Seconds 

2 

(Add) 

1 1 

Connections Screw terminals, 22-14 AWG wires 

Mounting Brushed stainless steel plate mounts to 

standard single junction box, 2 screws 

provided 

Dimensions 2.75"W x 4.5"H x 1.0"D 

(7.0 x 11.4 x 2.5 cm) 

Weight 3 oz (74 g) 


RAD-1 Remote alarm indication station 

HORN PULSED 

REPEAT TIME x10 

DLY TIME x10 

Relay 

Follows 

Horn 

24 

VAC/ 

VDC 

+ 

– 

NO 

Relay COM 

NC 

RAD-1 

No Jumper Jumper Installed 

• Continuous Horn • Pulsed Horn 

Alarm Repeat Alarm Repeat 

• after Silence • after Silence 

Time x1 Time x10 

• Inital Alarm • Inital Alarm 

Delay Time x1 Delay Time x10 

Alarm Initiating 

Device 

+ 

– 

NO 

COM 

*Times are additive; for example, with SW3 and SW5 both ON, 4 sec + 16 sec = 20 sec delay 

(or 200 sec if DLY TIME x10 jumper is installed) 

NC 

Alarm 

Relay 

301 




STAND-ALONE ALARM INDICATION STATION 

MODEL AIS 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model AIS Stand-Alone Alarm Indication Station 

features an indication light, alarm horn, and an alarm 

horn silence switch. Upon an alarm contact closure, the 

LED indicator will light and the horn will sound. The horn 

can be silenced through the alarm silence switch, while 

the visual indication will continue to be lit until the alarm 

condition has been corrected. 

FEATURES 

• Long lasting, red LED indication 

• Clear, distinct audible tone 

• Horn silence switch 

• Compact and attractive design 

• Available in 24 VDC, 24 VAC, or 110 VAC 

• Bright yellow panel face 

APPLICATIONS 

• Refrigerant leak alarm indication 

• Water level alarm indication 

• Pressure alarm indication 

• High/Low temperature limits 

• Gas leak indication 

• Humidity limit alarm indication 

• Vibration limit 

• Voltage/Current level limit 

• Any contact closure alarm application 


Power 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC, 100 mA (max) 

Controlling device contact rating 

AIS-24D 24 VDC, 70 mA min 

AIS-24A 24 VAC, 90 mA min 

AIS-120A 120 VAC, 50 mA min 

Case Polystyrene, impact resistant, knock-outs 

Horn 80 db 

Mounting Four screws through back 


(18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm) 

302 

WIRING 

Controlling 

Device 

(Alarm initiated by 

contact closure) 

Red LED Light 

Alarm horn, 80 db 

Alarm Horn 

Silence Switch 


4 3 2 1 

(–) (+) (+) (–) 


AIS Alarm indication station 

24D 24 VDC powered 

24A 24 VAC powered 

120A 120 VAC powered 

AIS 24A 

Example: AIS-24A 24 VAC powered alarm 

indication station 

L 

H 

S 

AIS 

Power Supply* 

* Power must be 

supplied to the AIS


3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY 

MODEL LPI-1C 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model LPI-1C is a loop-powered indicator featuring 

a large 3-1/2 digit LCD display with black digits. The 

Model LPI-1C displays engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %, 

or no engineering units if desired. It is directly powered by 

the 4-20 mA signal and scaled to specifications. 

FEATURES 

• Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale 

• 3-1/2 digit LCD display 

• Snap-in panel mounting 

• Easy-to-read digits 

• Enclosure options available 

• Precalibrated for desired range 

• Negative-to-positive indication 

• Jumper-selectable engineering unit display 

APPLICATION 

• Temperature 

• Humidity 

• Pressure 


• Differential or static pressure 

• Kilowatt demand 

• Gallons per minute 

Input 4-20 mA loop-powered 

Impedance 300� nominal @ 24 VDC 

Accuracy 0.1% of scale 

Digit size 0.5" (1.27 cm) 

Decimal point Three positions or none (1.0.0.0) 

Range -1999 to +1999 



Cutout required 1.00"H x 2.40"W 

(2.54 x 6.10 cm) 

Panel clearance 1.97" (5.00 cm) 

Enclosure options 

E (NEMA 1) 4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3.0"D 

(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.62 cm) 

WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D 

(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) 

Weight (display only) 2.3 oz (56.7g) 

* Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before 

shipping. 

Specify signal input scale, range, engineering units, 

and decimal location when ordering. 

Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided 

upon request at no charge. (2.00" x 0.75") 

Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F., 

GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C. 

WIRING 


LPI-1C-WMB 

LPI-1C 

(typical panel mount) 

LPI-1C-E 

LPI-1C-E-DBL 

• Voltage 

• Current 

• Many other 4-20 mA applications 

Sensor/ 

Transmitter 

Connect the LPI-1C 

indicator in series with 

the 4-20 mA current 

loop to be measured. 

Power 

Supply 

+ - 

+ - 

- 

4-20 mA 

+ 

BAS Input 

or Other 

4-20 mA Load 


LPI-1C 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with black digits* 

– No enclosure 

E 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with enclosure 

WMB 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure 

E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one enclosure 

LPI-1C E-DBL Example: LPI-1C-E-DBL Two LPI-1C displays mounted 

in a single enclosure 


GP3420 LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm) 


S 

P 

A 

N 

+ - 

SIG 

Board Unit 

Z 

E 

R 

O 

°F 

°C 

PSI 

% 

Back of Display Unit 

Factory Calibrated 

(no field calibration 

needed) 

Connector Pins Engineering Unit Jumpers 

Unit selected displays to 

the right of display reading. 

303



3-1/2 DIGIT LCD AMBER / GREEN / RED PANEL DISPLAY 

MODELS LPI-1C-A, -G, -R 

DESCRIPTION 

Models LPI-1C-A, G, and R are loop-powered 4-20 mA, 24 VDCpowered, 

brightly-lit 3-1/2 digit color LCD displays. Model LPI- 

1C is available with amber, green, or red digits. Models LPI- 

1C-A, G, and R also feature jumper-selectable, built-in engineering 

units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. The same 24 VDC 

power supply can be used to provide power to the 4-20 mA loop 

and the display. 

FEATURES 


• Bright 3-1/2 digit LCD display 

• Available in amber, green, and red 






• Jumper selectable engineering unit display 

APPLICATION 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 





Power (backlight) 24 VDC @ 35 mA 

Input 4-20 mA loop powered 


Accuracy 0.1% of scale 



Range -1999 to +1999 



Cutout required 1.00"H x 2.40"W 

(2.54 x 6.10 cm) 


Enclosure option 

E (NEMA 1) 4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3.0"D 

(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.62 cm) 

WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D 

(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) 


304 


shipping. 

Specify signal input scale, range, engineering units, and 

decimal location when ordering. 

Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided upon 

request at no charge. (2.00" x 0.75") 




LPI-1C-G-WMB 

LPI-1C-R-E 

• Voltage 

• Current 


WIRING 

Sensor/ 

Transmitter 


indicator in series with 

the 4-20 mA current 

loop to be measured. 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC 

+ - 

+ - 

4-20 mA 

- + 


LPI-1C-A 3-1/2 digit LCD with amber digits* 

LPI-1C-G 3-1/2 digit LCD with green digits* 

LPI-1C-R 3-1/2 digit LCD with red digits* 




E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one enclosure 

LPI-1C-A E-DBL Example: LPI-1C-A-E-DBL Two amber 3-1/2 digit 

LCD displays mounted in single enclosure 




S 

P 

A 

N 

+ - + - 

SIG B/L 

Board Unit 


Back of Display Unit 

LPI-1C-G 


LPI-1C-A-E-DBL 

BAS Input or 

Other 4-20 mA 

Load 

Z 

E 

R 

O 

°F 

°C 

PSI 

% 


(no field calibration needed) 

Engineering Unit Jumpers 

Unit selected displays 

to the right of display 

reading.


4-1/2 DIGIT BLACK / AMBER / GREEN / RED PANEL DISPLAY 

MODELS LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, -G, -R 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model LPI-3C is a 4-20 mA, brightly-lit 4-1/2 digit display. 

Along with the standard black digits, colors of amber, green, 

and red, powered by 24 VDC, are also available. The Model 

LPI-3C also features jumper-selectable, built-in engineering 

units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. For those units with colored 

digits, the same 24 VDC power supply can be used to provide 

power to the 4-20 mA loop and the display. 

FEATURES 


• Optional, bright 4-1/2 digit LCD colored display 

• Available in black, amber, green, or red digits 






• Jumper-selectable engineering unit display 

APPLICATION 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 





Power (backlight) 24 VDC @ 35 mA for colored digits 

Input signal Loop-powered 4-20 mA signal 


Accuracy 0.1% FS 

Digit size 0.5" (1.27 cm) LCD 

Decimal point Four positions or none (1.0.0.0.0) 

Range -19999 to +19999 



Cutout required 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm) 



E (NEMA 1) 4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3.0"D 

(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.62 cm) 

WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D 

(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) 


* Displays are custom calibrated at no 

charge before shipping. 

Specify signal input scale, range, 

engineering units, and decimal 

location when ordering. 

Aluminum engineering units plate 

will be provided upon request at no 

charge. (2.00" x 0.75") 

Available plates are % RH, AMPS, 

DEG C., DEG F., GPM, x10 GPM, 

KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C. 

WIRING 

LPI-3C-A-WMB 

Sensor/ 

Transmitter 


indicator in series 

with the 4-20 mA 

current loop to be 

measured. 


(no field calibration 

required) 


LPI-3C 


LPI-3C-G-E LPI-3C-R-E-DBL 

• Voltage 

• Current 


4-20 

mA 

SPAN 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

+ - + - 

SIG B/L 

Board Unit 


Display Unit 

BAS Input 

or Other 

4-20 mA Load 

Power connection only required 

for amber, green, or red display. 

ZERO 


LPI-3C 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display* 

4-1/2 digit display with black digits 

A 4-1/2 digit display with amber digits 

G 4-1/2 digit display with green digits 

R 4-1/2 digit display with red digits 




E-DBL Two 4-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in a single enclosure 

LPI-3C A E-DBL Example: LPI-3C-A-E-DBL Two amber 4-1/2 digit LCD 

displays mounted in a single enclosure. 




°F 

°C 

PSI 

% 

Engineering Unit Jumpers 

Unit selected displays to the 

right of display reading. 

305 




3-1/2 DIGIT LARGE BLACK / RED / GREEN / AMBER PANEL DISPLAY 

MODELS LPI-4, LPI-4R, LPI-4G, LPI-4A 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model LPI-4 loop-powered indicator features a large 1" 

(2.54 cm) 3-1/2 digit display. It is designed to display any 4-20 

mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-4 is powered directly 

from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so the black LCD display does 

not require a separate power supply. It is also available in a 24 

VDC-powered version with red, green, or amber digits. 

FEATURES 


• 3-1/2 digit LCD display 

• Large, easy-to-read digits 

• Available in either black, red, green, or amber digits 


• Snap-in panel mount with retainer 

• Negative range indicator 

• Includes weather-resistant seal 

• Optional jumper-selectable display units °F, °C, %, PSI 

APPLICATIONS 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 


Signal 4-20 mA 

Power 

Black Loop powered 

Red/Green/Amber 24 VDC, 35 mA max 

Impedance 300� 

Digit count 3-1/2 digits (1999 max) 

Digit size 1" (2.54 cm) 


Range -1999 to +1999 

Accuracy ±0.05% of scale plus one digit 

Ambient 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

95% noncondensing 

Cutout required 1.77" x 3.62" (4.5 x 9.2 cm) 

Dimensions 1.89"H 3.78"W x 1.8"D 

(4.8 x 9.6 x 4.6 cm) 


306 



• Voltage/current 

WIRING 

LPI-4 3-1/2 digit black panel display 

LPI-4R 3-1/2 digit red panel display 

LPI-4G 3-1/2 digit green panel display 

LPI-4A 3-1/2 digit amber panel display 

Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before shipping. Specify scale, range, and decimal location when ordering. 

Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided upon request at no charge (2.00" x 0.75" tag with 0.125" letters). 

Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F., GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C. 

LPI-4 

LPI-4G 

LPI-4R 

LPI-4A 


Power Supply 

24 VDC 

+ - 

Sensor/ + - BAS Input 

or Other 

Transmitter 

- + 4-20 mA Load 

+ - 

LPI-4 


GP5132 LPI-4 mounting plate, 5.13" x 3.25" (13.0 x 8.3 cm) 

SIG 

SPAN ZERO 

+ - 

SIG 

Power Supply 

24 VDC 

+ - 

Sensor/ + - BAS Input 

Transmitter 

or Other 

- + 4-20 mA Load 

+ - 

B/L 

SPAN ZERO 

LPI-4R, G, A


3-1/2 DIGIT SMALL BLACK / RED PANEL DISPLAY 

MODELS LPI-5, LPI-5R 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model LPI-5 loop-powered indicator features a small 0.37" 

(0.94 cm), 3-1/2 digit, black LCD or red LED display. The meter 

displays any 4-20 mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-5 

is powered directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so the black 

LCD display and red LED display do not require a separate 

power supply. 

FEATURES 


• Loop powered 

• 3-1/2 digit display 


• Small, easy-to-read display 


• Selectable decimal point location 

• Positive-to-negative indication (black LCD display) 

APPLICATION 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 


WIRING 


• GPM 

• Voltage/current 

Signal 4-20 mA 

Impedance 

Black 300� 

Red 380� 

Digit count 3-1/2 digits max 


Decimal Three positions or none 

Range 

Red 0 to 1999 

Black -1999 to 1999, min span 100 digit counts 

Accuracy ±0.1% of scale plus one digit 

Engineering units Black LCD only 

M�, k�, °C, m, V, °F, A, µ 

Sensor/ 

Transmitter 

24 VDC Power Supply 

+ - 

+ 

- 

4-20 mA 

- BAS Input 

or Other 

+ 4-20 mA Load 

SIG 

LPI-5 

or 

LPI-5R 


(No field calibration needed) 




Dimensions 

Red 1.28"H x 1.82"W x 1.6"D 

(3.25 x 4.64 x 4.0 cm) 

Black 0.95"H x 1.73"W x 1.1"D 

(2.4 x 4.4 x 2.8 cm) 

Cutout 

Red 0.8"H x 1.3"W (2.0 x 3.3 cm) 

Black 0.86"H x 1.57"W ( 2.2 x 4.0 cm) 



LPI-5 3-1/2 digit small black LCD panel display 

LPI-5R 3-1/2 digit small red LED panel display 

Displays are custom calibrated at no charge before shipping. Specify scale, range, and decimal location when ordering. 

Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided upon request at no charge. (2" x 0.75") 

Available plates are % RH, AMPS, DEG C., DEG F., GPM, x10 GPM, KW, KWH, PSIG, and "W.C. 

LPI-5 

LPI-5R 

307 




3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY 

VPI SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The VPI Series is a voltage-input, 24 VDC-powered, 3-1/2 digit 

display. Along with the standard black digits, colors of amber, 

green, and red, powered by 24 VDC, are also available. The 

VPI Series uses a voltage signal of 0-5 or 0-10 VDC that can 

be scaled to a span of 2000 digits within a range of -1999 to 

1999. This display also features jumper-selectable, built-in 

engineering units of °F, °C, PSI, %, or no units. The VPI-4 

offers large, easy-to-read 1" (2.54 cm) digits. 

FEATURES 

• 0-5 or 0-10 VDC signal input 

• 3-1/2 digit, easy-to-read LCD display 

• Voltage-input signal 

• Available in black, amber, green, and red digits 



• Precalibrated before shipping 

• Positive-to-negative indication 

• Jumper-selectable engineering unit display of °F, °C, PSI, % 

APPLICATION 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 


Power 

Colored digits 24 VDC @ 35 mA 

Black digits 24 VDC @ 10 mA 

Input signal 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC 

Impedance 400 k� 

Accuracy 0.1% of scale plus one digit 

Digit size 

VPI-1C 0.5" (1.27 cm) 

VPI-4 1.0" (2.54 cm) 

Decimal point Three positions or none 

Zero range -1999 to 1999 

Digit span 2000 digits 



Cutout required 

VPI-1C 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm) 

VPI-4 1.77"H x 3.62"W (4.5 x 9.2 cm) 


Enclosure option (VPI-1C only) 

E (NEMA 1) 4.75"H x 4.75"W x 3"D 

(12.07 x 12.07 x 7.6 cm) 

WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D 

(5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) 

Weight 2.3 oz (56.7g) 


shipping. 

Specify signal input (0-5V or 0-10V) scale, range, 

engineering units, and decimal location when ordering. 

Aluminum engineering units plate will be provided 

upon request at no charge. (2.00" x 0.75") 



308 




WIRING 

Voltage 

Input 

VPI-1C-WMB 

VPI-1C-G 


VPI-1C-R-E VPI-1C-A-E-DBL 

• Voltage 

• Many other voltage signal 

applications 

* PWR- and SIGmust 

be externally 

connected together 


Power Supply 

24 VDC 

+ - + - + - 

PWR SIG BL 

VPI 

Power connection only 

required for amber, green, 

or red display. 

5V 

10V 

OFFSET 


VPI-4 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 1'' (2.54 cm) digits 

VPI-1C 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 0.5'' (1.27 cm) digits 

– 3-1/2 digit display with black digits 

A 3-1/2 digit display with amber digits (VPI-1C only) 

G 3-1/2 digit display with green digits (VPI-1C only) 

R 3-1/2 digit display with red digits (VPI-1C only) 


E 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with enclosure (VPI-1C only) 

WMB 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure (VPI-1C only) 

E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one enclosure (VPI-1C only) 

VPI-1C A E-DBL Example: VPI-1C-A-E-DBL Two amber 3-1/2 digit 

displays mounted in a single enclosure 




5V Span Pot 

10V Span Pot 

Offset (ZERO) Pot

S TO 

SDUCERS 

S 

DUCERS 

NEUMATIC 

TANDARD 

CAPACITY 

PNEUMATIC 

HIGH 

CAPACITY 

PNEUMATIC 

INDUSTRIAL 

CAPACITY 

MILLIAMP VOLTAGE TRI-STATE PULSE- 

(FLOATING) WIDTH 

ANCE 

UCP-422 

UCP-242 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

T-1000 

22/07-16 

TRANSDUCER SELECTION 

UCP-322-R 

UCP-422-V UCP-422-44T UCP-422-44 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

T-1000 

UCP-322 

UCP-522T 

UCP-622T 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

PULSE- 

WIDTH WITH 

MULTIPLEXING 

INPUT 

CAPABILITIES 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

RES-1 RES-1 RES-1 RES-1 

WA-1T PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 

PNEUMATIC RESIS 

PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 


PVI-1 

PVI-2

PRODUCTS 

The DT-13 Isolated DCto-DC 

Transmitter eliminates 

ground loop wiring 

problems. 

SERVICES 

Tell us the signal you need. 

Our Tech Reps will find 

the right product for you. 

S TO 

SDUCERS 

S 

DUCERS 

NEUMATIC 

TANDARD 

CAPACITY 

PNEUMATIC 

HIGH 

CAPACITY 

MILLIAMP VOLTAGE TRI-STATE PULSE- 

(FLOATING) WIDTH 

UCP-422 

UCP-242 

PNEUMATIC 

INDUSTRIAL 

CAPACITY 

ANCE 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

T-1000 

22/07-16 


UCP-322-R 

UCP-422-V UCP-422-44T UCP-422-44 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

T-1000 

UCP-322 

UCP-522T 

UCP-622T 


UCP-522 

UCP-622 

PULSE- 

WIDTH WITH 

MULTIPLEXING 

INPUT 

CAPABILITIES 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 


WA-1T PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 

PNEUMATIC RESIS 

PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 

PVI-1 

PVI-2 

SOLUTIONS 

Match your inputs and outputs 

using the Transducer 

Selection Chart 

on page 309! 


Transducer Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 

ELECTRONIC TRANSDUCERS 

DT13 — Isolated DC-to-DC Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 

PWA — Pulse/Tri-state-to-Analog Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 

PXZ4 — Setpoint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 

RES-1 — Universal Resistance Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 

UAT-1, UAT-2 — Universal Analog Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 

UCM-420A — Setpoint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 

UMM-1, UMM-2 — Universal Math Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 

VTI — Voltage and Current Converter/Rescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 

MULTIPLEXERS 

UCS-121 — Sequencer Control Module - 1 Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 




UMX — Multi-function Input/Output Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 

PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS 

22/07-16 — Current/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 

T-1000 — Current/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 

UCP-242 — Current/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 

UCP-322 — Tri-state/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 

UCP-422 — Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 

UCP-422 Options — Options for UCP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317-319 

UCP-522 — Universal Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 

UCP-622 — Universal Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

INPUTS TO 

TRANSDUCERS 

OUTPUTS 

FROM 

TRANSDUCERS 

PNEUMATIC 

STANDARD 

CAPACITY 

PNEUMATIC 

HIGH 

CAPACITY 

PNEUMATIC 

INDUSTRIAL 

CAPACITY 

RESISTANCE 

ANALOG 

(MILLIAMP OR 

VOLTAGE) 

ISOLATED ANALOG 

(MILLIAMP OR 

VOLTAGE) 

DIGITAL 

ONE-STAGE 

DIGITAL 

TWO-STAGE 

DIGITAL 

FOUR-STAGE 

DIGITAL 

SIX-STAGE 

DIGITAL 

EIGHT-STAGE 

TRI-STATE 

(FLOATING) 

SETPOINT CONTROL 

(MILLIAMP 

OR VOLTAGE) 


TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART 

MILLIAMP VOLTAGE TRI-STATE 

(FLOATING) 

UCP-422 

UCP-242 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

T-1000 

22/07-16 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

PULSE- 

WIDTH 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 

PULSE- 

WIDTH WITH 

MULTIPLEXING 

INPUT 

CAPABILITIES 

UCP-522 

UCP-622 


VTI-1 

UAT 

VTI-1 

UAT 

DT-13 DT-13 

UMX-4 

UCS-221 

UMX-4 

UCS-421 

UMX-8 

UCS-621 

UMX-8 

VTI-2 

UMM 

PXZ4 

UCM-420A 

UCP-322-R 

UCP-422-V UCP-422-44T UCP-422-44 

T-1000 

UCS-121 UCS-121 

UCS-221 

UCS-421 

UCS-621 


UMX-4 

UCS-221 

UMX-4 

UCS-421 

UMX-8 

UCS-621 

UMX-8 

VTI-2 

UMM 

UCS-221 

UCS-421 

UCS-621 

PXZ4 

UCM-420A 

UCP-322 

UCP-522T 

UCP-622T 

PWA-1T 

PWA-2T 

PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 

UMX-4 

UMX-4 

UMX-4 

UMX-8 

UMX-8 

PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 

PNEUMATIC RESISTANCE 

PVI-1 

PVI-2 

VTI-1-XR1 

VTI-2-XR1 

UAT 

UCM-420A UCM-420A UCM-420A 

309 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



MULTIPLEXED PWM OPERATION 

FOR MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622, UCM-420A, PWA-1A, PWA-2A, AND RES-1 

DESCRIPTION 

The multiplexed pulse-width modulation (PWM) mode of control is a unique feature of some of the output transducers in this catalog. 

This mode of control allows a single pulse-width modulated output from a BAS controller to individually address and control 

up to eight transducers. Transducer Models RES-1, UCP-522, UCP-622, UCM-420A, PWA-1A, and PWA-2A are furnished standard 

with this feature, which can be enabled by DIP switches on the transducer. Refer to individual catalog pages for more details 

on configuring these transducers for this mode of control. 

OPERATION 

After enabling the multiplexed PWM control mode, each transducer 

is assigned an address (1-8) by DIP switches so that it 

may be independently controlled to produce the desired output 

(see Table 1). To change the output of a transducer, the 

controller must send three types of pulses (see Figure 1). 

Attention Pulse 

This is the first pulse in the sequence that initializes the transducers, 

putting them in the attention mode on stand-by to 

receive additional pulses. The attention pulse is one second 

longer than the maximum pulse for the PWM time base 

selected. (For example, the attention pulse for the 5.2-second 

time base would be 6.2 seconds.) 

Select Pulse 

This is one of eight possible pulses that chooses the transducer 

address to be updated (see Table 2 for the various time 

bases). The transducer receiving a select pulse that matches 

its address is put on stand-by to receive a control pulse. The 

transducers that have not been selected will not respond to 

the control pulse. 

Control Pulse 

This pulse controls the selected transducer. The selected 

transducer will adjust its output in proportion to the control 

pulse input. 

Important! To send a new control pulse, the controller must 

send the attention and select pulses again. 

TABLE 1. MULTIPLEX ADDRESS SETTINGS* 

MULTIPLEX 

ADDRESS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

310 

6 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

On 

On 

DIP SWITCH 

7 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

8 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

FIGURE 1. EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLEX OPERATION 


PWM Contact 


PWM Contact 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

Time Base: 5.2 sec 

Attention Pulse: 6.2 sec 

Select Pulse: 1.0 sec 

Control Pulse: 5.2 sec 

Transducer 

Transducer 

Transducer 

Attention Pulse 

Address #1 

Address #2 

Address #3 

Transducer 

Transducer 

Address #1 

Address #2 

Address #3 

30% Output 

100% Output 

Transducer 30% Output 

Address #1 and #3 have received the 1.0 sec select pulse that does not 

match their address. Therefore, they continue their previous output, 

ignoring any control pulse that follows. 

Address #2 has received the 1.0 sec select pulse matching its address 

and has responded to the 5.2 sec control pulse, increasing its output 

to 100%. 

2.65 sec** 

0.2 

0.6 

0.9 

1.2 

1.5 

1.9 

2.2 

2.5 

Select and Control Pulses 

30% Output 

30% Output 

30% Output 

Note: All addresses receive an attention pulse of 6.2 sec. 

TABLE 2. SELECT PULSE TIMES* 

TIME BASE 

5.2 sec 

0.4 

1.0 

1.7 

2.3 

3.0 

3.6 

4.3 

4.9 

*The values in Tables 1 and 2 apply to all transducers with the multiplex PWM control mode. 

** The 2.65-second time base is not recommended for multiplexed operation unless the BAS 

controller guarantees an accuracy of 0.05 seconds or better for its PWM output. 

12.85 sec 

0.9 

2.5 

4.1 

5.7 

7.3 

8.9 

10.5 

12.1 

25.6 sec 

1.6 

4.8 

8.0 

11.2 

14.4 

17.6 

20.9 

24.0


CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER 

MODEL UCP-242 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCP-242 Current/Pneumatic Transducer 

provides low cost pneumatic control of valves, dampers, 

or other pneumatic devices. The Model UCP-242 

comes with snap-track for easy mounting. Quick-disconnect 

terminals provide easy wiring removal for servicing. 

Barbed fittings for 1/4" plastic tubing and an inline filter 

are provided. 

OPERATION 

The Model UCP-242 accepts a 4-20 mA signal and outputs 

3-15 psig. The unit is loop-powered, requiring no 

power supply for controlling pneumatic devices. Upon a 

loss of signal, the Model UCP-242 will eventually bleed 

the pressure in the branch line. This transducer is wellsuited 

for the control of small to medium volume loads, 

such as small to medium pneumatic actuators. Large 

volume loads, such as large pneumatic actuators, or 

long tubing runs may also be controlled but will exhibit a 

slower response time. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Inline filter provided 


• 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors 

• Quick-disconnect terminals 

• Loop-powered control 

• Excellent linearity 

• Low hysteresis 



Supply voltage None, loop-powered 

Input impedance 500� nominal 

Max pressure 25 psig (172.4 kPa) 

Air consumption 0.008 scfm @ 20 psig 

(3.8 cm 3 /sec @ 137.9 kPa) 

Air capacity 515 scim @ 20 psig 

(135 cm 3 /sec @ 137.9 kPa) 

Temp 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Humidity 5% to 95% RH noncondensing 

DIMENSIONS / WIRING / PIPING 

in 

(cm) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

– 

+ 

COM 

SIG + 

4.63 

(11.75) 

Depth: 2 (5.1) 

Air Connections 

Main (Supply): black 

Branch (Output): white or clear 

Output 3-15 psig 

(20.7-103.4 kPa) 

Input 4-20 mA 

Linearity 2% of span 

Hysteresis 1% of span 


(8.3 x 11.75 x 5.08 cm) 


3.25 

(8.3) 

311 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS




MODEL UCP-242 

INSTALLATION / WIRING / CHECKOUT 

Installation 

Mount the UCP-242 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed fittings are provided for terminating 

1/4" (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-242 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrows on 

unit). For best results, the transducer should be mounted within five degrees of upright position. Wire terminations 

are marked for 4-20 mA operation. 

Wiring 

Make all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with local and national 

electrical codes. Wiring terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG + and COM. 

Checkout 

Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (137.9 kPa) 

main air is present. Be sure the UCP-242 is mounted in an upright position. 

To check transducer operation: 

1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA. Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103.4 kPa). 

2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA. Branch pressure should be 3 psig (20.7 kPa). 

Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-242 is a highly accurate device and laboratory 

quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration. 

CAUTION: The Model UCP-242 utilizes parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic 

compressor oil vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be 

used. Standard control air filtering practices should be observed: 

• Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and filtered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate filter, 

and a coalescing type filter. 

• The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are filtered 

out and that less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists. 

• At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-filter followed by a coalescing oil removal filter, such 

as the K-337 or K-339, is recommended. 

• Using a Model A-4000-120 oil-indicating device prior to installing any UCP-242 is also recommended. 

This oil-indicating device will provide an indication of the amount of oil being discharged from the air 

compressor. 

• At the UCP-242, installing the inline filter (Model FILN05 provided with the UCP-242) in the main 

air line is recommended. 

312 



UCP-242 Current/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA/3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) 


PG-05 Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa) 

B-373-1 Gauge tee with mounting tabs


TRI-STATE / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER 

MODEL UCP-322 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCP-322 Tri-state/Pneumatic Transducer 

is designed for direct digital control of pneumatic valves 

and dampers. Its low cost makes it ideal for applications 

on variable air volume terminal boxes. The transducer 

features low current, high cycle-rated, electro/pneumatic 

valves mounted in a sturdy plastic enclosure. For manual 

control of the output pressure, increase and decrease 

switches are furnished. LED visual status is provided to 

verify the correct air valve selection. Visual pressure indication 

is available using an optional top-mounted gauge. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Slim-line mounting to save panel space 

• Universal mounting tabs 

• No-bleed air consumption 

• Totally enclosed with 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tubing 

connectors 

• Momentary manual override for quick checkout 

• Valve status LEDs 

• AC/DC operation, low power draw 

• Quick-disconnect terminals for easy field service 

• Not position sensitive 

OPTIONS 

Restricted Output (R) - 0.007 restrictor for installation 

in the branch line; recommended for the control of 

small pneumatic volumes 

Feedback (F) - Allows remote electronic readout 

of the output pressure; standard calibration is for 4-20 mA 

3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) 

Pressure Gauge Indication (43) - Allows for local 

pressure indication without giving up valuable panel 

space 

DIN Rail Mounting Adapter (47) - Allows the UCP-322 

to be mounted with other devices on the same track 


Supply voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ ±10% 

Power rating 1.5W 

Output 0 to main air pressure 

Output capacity 

Restricted 46 scim @ 20 psig 

(12.6 cm 3 /sec @ 137.8 kPa) 

Unrestricted 1030 scim @ 20 psig 

(281.3 cm 3 /sec @ 137.8 kPa) 


Input Tri-state (floating) 

APPLICATION 

Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge 

The Model UCP-322 is controlled from two discrete contact 

closures or one tri-state output from a controlling computer. 

The increase or decrease air valves may be pulsed to vary 

the branch pressure. The Model UCP-322 does not contain 

internal control circuitry to maintain branch pressure after the 

control signal is removed. For this feature, Trane recommends 

the Model UCP-522-T. When controlling small volume 

loads, such as small pneumatic actuators, the restricted output 

option R is recommended to provide better control resolution. 

On a loss of power or with both computer contacts open, 

the increase and decrease air valves remain closed. 

The branch pressure can be manually controlled during 

checkout by pressing the increase or decrease momentary 

override push buttons located on the UCP-322. Note that 

the jumpers must be in manual position and power applied 

before the push buttons will work. For checkout situations 

where the pneumatic connections are complete but no control 

power is available, a portable battery pack may be used 

to provide power for manual valve positioning. 

Dimensions 3.4"H* x 2"W x 4.8"D 

(8.6 x 5.08 x 12.2 cm) 


Temp 32° to 110°F (0° to 43°C) 


Optional feedback 4-20 mA/3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa), 

650� max load 

0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) adjustable 

*Add 1.2'' (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs; add 2.3'' (5.8 cm) 

for optional gauge assembly. 

313 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



TRI-STATE / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER 

MODEL UCP-322 

INSTALLATION / WIRING / DIMENSIONS 

Mount the UCP-322 in a clean, dry environment, such as a NEMA 1 control panel. Barbed fittings are provided for 

terminating 1/4" OD (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The transducer is not position sensitive. Restrictor: If restricted air 

volume is desired, a 0.007 restrictor (R option) must be ordered to be field-installed in series with the branch output. 

in 

(cm) 

314 

Jumper (shown in 

manual position) 

PWR Connection 

(required for manual 

operation and 

feedback output only) 

Optional 4-20 mA 

Feedback Output 

24 VAC/VDC 

Supply 

BAS Computer 

Controlled 

Tri-State Contacts 

Removable 

Mounting Tabs 

Feedback Zero Pot 

Feedback Span Pot 

A 

A 

I 

N 

C 

D 

E 

C 

M 

M 

FBK 

PWR 

INC 

DEC 

COM 

INC 

DEC 

A/M 

INC 

DEC 

0.7 

(1.78) 

B 

M 

UCP-322 

Branch 

Main 

4.8 

(12.19) 


Optional 

Gauge Assembly 

(rotate 90 degrees for 

two-position display) 

Optional 

DIN Rail 

Adapter 

3.4 

(8.64) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

Removable 

Mounting Tabs 

6.3 

(16.00) 

4.6 

(11.68) 

For BAS computer operation, the jumpers must be in the automatic A position. The transducer is 24 

VAC/VDC powered. Manual operation and feedback output are only possible if 24V is wired to the PWR 

terminal. The jumpers must be in the manual M position before the push buttons will work. 

MODEL 

UCP-322 

UCP-322 R 43 

DESCRIPTION 

Tri-state/Pneumatic transducer, 24 VAC/VDC 

OPTIONS 

F Feedback – allows remote 4-20 mA electronic readout of the 

output pressure (factory-installed option only) 

R 

Restricted output – includes 0.007 restrictor for installation in the branch line, 

field-installed. Recommended for the control of small pneumatic volumes. 

43 UCO-43 pressure gauge indication (0-30 psig/0-200 kPa) – allows for local pressure 

indication without sacrificing valuable panel space (factory-installed option only) 

47 

UCO-47 DIN rail mounting adapter – allows the UCP-322 to be mounted along 

with other devices on the same rail (factory-installed option only) 

47 

Example: UCP-322-R-43-47 Tri-state/Pneumatic transducer with restricted 

output, pressure indication, and DIN rail mounting


ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER 

MODEL UCP-422 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCP-422 Electronic/Pneumatic 

Transducer provides low-cost pneumatic control of 

valves, dampers, or other pneumatic devices. The Model 

UCP-422 consists of a totally enclosed transducer with 

provisions for optional DIN rail or surface mounting in 

either of two planes. Externally-mounted pneumatic filters 

are not required. Quick-disconnect terminals provide 

easy wiring removal for servicing. When DIN rail 

mounting is used, this compact controller requires only 

a 4"H x 2"W (10.2 x 5.1 cm) mounting area, providing 

efficient use of panel space. 

OPERATION 

The Model UCP-422 accepts a 4-20 mA signal and 

outputs 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa). Used in its base 

configuration, it requires no power supply for controlling 

pneumatic devices. Upon a loss of signal or power, the 

Model UCP-422 will eventually bleed the pressure in the 

branch line. This transducer is well suited for the control 

of small to medium volume loads, such as small to medium 

pneumatic actuators. Large volume loads, such as 

large pneumatic actuators, or long tubing runs may also 

be controlled but will exhibit slower response time. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Slim-line mounting to 

save panel space 

• Universal mounting 

tabs 

• Totally enclosed 

• 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed 

tube connectors 

OPTIONS 

• DIN rail mounting 

• Pressure gauge 

• PWM input 

• Tri-state input 


• Quick-disconnect 

terminals 


(base model) 

• No external filter required 

• Excellent linearity 

• Low hysteresis 


• Feedback and limited 

span adjustment 

• Failsafe 

• Manual output 

adjustment 


UCP-422 without options None, loop-powered 

UCP-422 with internal options 24 VAC/VDC ±10% 

@ 180 mA max 


UCP-422 without options 500� nominal 


Air consumption 0.008 scfm @ 20 psig 

(3.8 cm 3 /sec @ 137.9 kPa) 

in 

(cm) 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

– 

+ 



Removable 

Mounting Tabs 

COM 

SIG IN + 

0.7 

(1.8) 

B 

M 

UCP-422 

Branch 

Main 

4.8 

(12.2) 

2.75 

(6.9) 

Optional 

DIN Rail 

Adapter 

Optional Gauge 

Assembly (rotate 90° 

for two-position display) 

2.0 

(5.0) 

3.4 

(8.6) 

4.0 

(10.1) 

Removable 

Mounting Tabs 


(141 cm 3 /sec @ 137.9 kPa) 

Temp 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 


Output 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) 

Input 4-20 mA 

Linearity 2% of span 

Hysteresis 1% of span 

Weight 1.4 lb max (0.64 kg) 

4.6 

(11.7) 

6.3 

(16) 

315 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER 

MODEL UCP-422 


Installation 

Mount the UCP-422 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed fittings are provided for terminating 1/4" 

(0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-422 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrow on unit). For best results, the transducer 

should be mounted within five degrees of the upright position. 

Wiring 

Make all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with national and local electrical codes. 

Wiring terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG IN + and COM. Other terminals are provided where options are specified 

(See options for UCP-422 on the following pages). 

Checkout 

Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (137.9 kPa) main air is present. 

Be sure the UCP-422 is mounted in the upright position. Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-422 is a highly 

accurate device, and laboratory quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration. 

To check transducer operation: 

1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA (or appropriate max DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103.4 kPa). 

2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA (or appropriate min DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 3 psig (20.7 kPa). 

CAUTION: The Model UCP-422 uses parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic compressor oil 

vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be used. Standard control air 

filtering practices should be observed: 

• Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and filtered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate filter and a coalescing 

type filter. 

• The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are filtered out and 

that less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists. 

• At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-filter followed by a coalescing oil removal filter, such as the K-337 

or K-339, is recommended. 

• Prior to the installation of any UCP-422, using a Model A-4000-120 oil-indicating device to determine the 

amount of oil being discharged from the air compressor is recommended. 

316 



UCP-422 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA / 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) 

OPTIONS (for more information on each option, see the following catalog pages) 

F 

Feedback loop control allows remote electronic readout of the output pressure. Units equipped with 

feedback loop control may be calibrated between 3 and 15 psig. Special input/output calibrations should 

be specified at time of order entry (i.e., 4-20 mA/8-13 psig). (factory-installed option only) 

M Loop-powered manual adjust 

Manual output adjust allows easy checkout and manual selection 

M2 24V-powered manual adjust 

of the output pressure (factory-installed option only) 

V# Voltage input V1: 1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V (factory-installed option only) 

43 UCO-43 Pressure gauge indication (0-30 psig/0-200 kPa) - allows for local pressure indication 

without giving up valuable panel space (factory-installed option only) 

44 

UCO-44 Pulse-width modulation - features selectable pulse-width time bases of 0.1-2.65, 

5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-2.93 sec (factory-installed option only) 

44T 

UCO-44T Tri-state input - allows variable pneumatic output control based on a selectable 

tri-state input time base (factory-installed option only) 

47 

UCO-47 DIN rail mounting adapter - allows the UCP-422 to be mounted along with other devices 

on the same rail (factory-installed option only) 

UCP-422 M 43 47 

Example: UCP-422-M-43-47 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA to 

3-15 psig, manual output adjust, pressure gauge, DIN rail 


EP3 Air valve (to allow a back-up device to assume control upon a system failure)


OPTIONS FOR MODEL UCP-422 

M OPTION 

DESCRIPTION 

The M Option Manual Output Adjust allows local adjustment of the Model UCP-422 output. This feature simplifies 

checkout and troubleshooting and is available in both loop-powered and 24V-powered configurations. The 24V-powered 

configuration is provided standard when the M Option is ordered with the Feedback (F), Voltage (V), Pulse 

Width (44), or Tri-state (44T) options for the Model UCP-422. 

UCP-422-M LOOP-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST 

DIS EN 

For normal operation, place jumper plug 

over two posts next to DIS (disable). 

DIS EN 

For manual override, place jumper plug 

over two posts next to EN (enable). 

Turn manual pot to adjust output 

pressure. 

Important! The UCP-422 is loop-powered. 

For manual override operation, the input signal 

must be at 20 mA, or 24 VDC may be 

applied to the input terminals. 

UCP-422-M2 24V-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST 

DIS EN 

For normal operation, place jumper plug 

over two posts next to DIS (disable). 

DIS EN 

For manual override, place jumper plug 

over two posts next to EN (enable). 

Turn manual pot to adjust output pressure. 

Important! For manual override operation, 

24V power must be applied to the +24 VDC 

and COM terminals. 24V power is not 

required for normal transducer operation, 

unless options F, V, 44, or 44T are ordered. 

Input 

Signal 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

Input 

Signal 


normal position) 

Manual Adjust 

Pot 


normal position) 

Manual Adjust 

Pot 


DIS EN 

M 

ANUAL 

COM 

SIG IN + 

B 

M 

Branch 

Main 

4-20 mA Loop-Powered UCP-422 only 

No 24V-Powered Options 

DIS EN 

M 

ANUAL 

AUX 

24 VDC 

FBK OUT 

SIG IN - Branch 

COM 

SIG IN + 


UCP-422-M Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with loop-powered manual output adjust option 

UCP-422-M2 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with 24V-powered manual output adjust option 

B 

M 

Main 

UCP-422-M2 with or without 

24V-Powered Options (F, V, 44, 44T) 

317 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS


DESCRIPTION 



F, V OPTIONS 

The Feedback Loop Control F Option outputs a current sourcing 4-20 mA signal representative 

of the branch output pressure. The standard range is 4-20 mA to 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa). 

F Option also allows for custom ranging the output (i.e., 4-20 mA to 8-13 psig). Any range from 

3-15 psig (with a minimum 5 psig span) can be field-calibrated. This option requires 24 VAC/VDC. 

RECALIBRATION 

1. Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as shown on the job diagrams, in 

compliance with national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. 

Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. 

2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line of the transducer. 

3. Move the jumper to the CAL position (see Wiring). 

4. Vary the input signal to the transducer until the gauge indicates the minimum branch 

pressure desired to output. If the transducer is equipped with the manual output adjust 

option, set the minimum branch pressure by putting the manual output adjust jumper in 

the ENABLE position and turning the manual pot. 

5. Adjust ZERO pot for 4 mA output from the transducer feedback terminals. 

6. Repeat step 4 to set the maximum branch pressure. If maximum pressure cannot be 

reached, adjust GAIN pot. 

7. Adjust the SPAN pot for 20 mA output from the transducer feedback terminals. 

8. Since SPAN and ZERO pots are interactive, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 until results are 

accurate. 

9. Move CAL jumper back to the normal position and move the manual output adjust jumper back to the disable position. 

10. Input the maximum input signal and adjust the GAIN pot until the desired maximum pressure is indicated on the gauge. 

11. The transducer is now recalibrated to the new output span. 

DESCRIPTION 

The Voltage Input V Option allows the Model UCP-422 to be controlled 

by any voltage signal with a 5:1 ratio span. For example, the 

voltage signal span could be 1-5V, 2-10V, or 3-15V. This option 

requires 24 VAC/VDC power. 

RECALIBRATION 

1. Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as shown 

on the job diagram, in compliance with national and local codes. 

Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could 

result in circuit board damage. 

2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line of 

the transducer. 

3. Apply the new input voltage desired for maximum pressure (limited 

to a range of 5-15 VDC). 

4. Adjust the GAIN pot until the pressure gauge shows a slight 

change in pressure. 

5. Now, adjust the GAIN pot until maximum pressure shows on the 

gauge. 

6. The transducer is now recalibrated to the new voltage input span 

(max to min 5:1 ratio). 

318 

MODEL 

UCP-422 

UCP-422 

WIRING 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

– 

Voltage Signal – 

Input + 

WIRING 

Field-Adjustable 

Voltage 

CAL 

CAL 

24 VAC or + 

24 VDC 

Power Supply – 

Feedback 

Load 

+ 

– 

Input – 

Signal + 

Normal 

jumper position 

Calibrate 

jumper position 

GAIN 

AUX 

24 VDC 

FBK OUT 

SIG IN - 

COM 

SIG IN + 

AUX 

24 VDC 

FBK OUT 

SIG IN - 

COM 

SIG IN + 

UCP-422-F 

Power LED 

Signal LED 

UCP-422-V 

Power Requirements 

Voltage Signal Input 

Voltage Option Only: 24 VAC @ 75 mA Impedance: 160 kΩ 

24 VDC @ 35 mA 

Voltage and Feedback Options: 

24 VAC @180 mA 

24 VDC @ 90 mA 


DESCRIPTION 

Electronic/Pneumatic transducer 

OPTIONS 

F Feedback loop control (4-20 mA/3-15 psig standard)* 

V# Voltage input V1:1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V 

*Special ranges must be specified at time of order entry. 

Important! Options cannot be field-installed. 

CAL 

GAIN 

ZERO 

SPAN 

Power Requirements: 24 VAC @ 180 mA 

24 VDC @ 90 mA 

Feedback Output: 4-20 mA, 800Ω max

DESCRIPTION 

The UCO-44 and UCO-44T Options are designed to 

be used with the Kele Model UCP-422 electronic/pneumatic 

transducer. The UCO-44 Option allows the 

Model UCP-422 to be controlled by a pulse-width modulated 

(PWM) signal. The UCO-44T Option allows the 

Model UCP-422 to be controlled by a tri-state input signal. 

These options are mounted in an expander ring 

attached to the Model UCP-422. 

FEATURES 

• Selectable PWM time base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 

0.59-2.93 sec 

• Selectable tri-state time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9, 

90.5, or 119.9 sec 

• 255-step resolution 

• Positive or negative input reference 

• AC/DC voltage 

• LED indication 

OPERATION 



UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS 

UCO-44 Option 

The UCO-44 Option accepts a pulse-width modulated input 

and produces an internal 4-20 mA current signal that controls 

the Model UCP-422. The standard time base is 25.6 seconds 

but is switch-selectable for any of the other four ranges. The 

UCO-44 Option responds to the elapsed time when the controlling 

computer closes the contacts wired in series with the 

signal SIG IN + or SIG IN - terminals. Each pulse received will 

produce a corresponding pressure output. The transducer will 

hold this signal until given a pulse with a different value. 

UCO-44T Option 

The UCO-44T Option is controlled from two discrete contact 

closures or one tri-state output from a controlling computer. 

Each signal given the transducer will ramp an internal 4-20 mA 

signal up or down to control the Model UCP-422. A contact closure 

wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will increase the 

output in proportion to the length of the signal given. A contact 

closure wired in series with the SIG IN - terminal will decrease 

the output in proportion to the length of the signal given. 

LED INDICATION 

PWR LED - On when 24V is present 

SIG LED - On only when an input signal is present 



24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA 

PWM time base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, factory-set 25.6, 

or 0.59-2.93 sec (internally DIP switch 

selectable) 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


AUX 

24 

VDC 

FBK 

OUT 

SIG 

– 

COM 

SIG 

+ 

UCP-422 Enclosure 

Side View 

UCO-44/UCO-44T 

Option 

Expander Ring 

4.8 

(12.2) 

4.8 

(12.2) 

UCP-422 

Enclosure 

Power LED 

Signal LED 

3.0 

(7.6) 

4.0 

(10.1) 

Tri-state time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 59.9, 90.5, 119.9, 

or factory-set 25.5 sec (internally DIP 

switch selectable) 



Humidity limit 5% to 95% noncondensing 

319 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS


PWM board is located 

in UCO-44 expander ring 

housing attached to the 

UCP-422 enclosure. 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power 

– 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power 

for 

Signal + 

– 

* 


PWM Contacts 



UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS 

WIRING 

CALIBRATION 

320 

AUX 

+24 

VDC 

FBK 

OUT 

SIG IN 

- 

COM 

SIG IN 

+ 

PWM Wiring 

Separate 24V Supplies 

for Power and Signal 

U 

P 

UCP-422 

ENCLOSURE 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power 

– 

Important! To change the time base, the transducer must be disassembled. A time base other than the factory setting may be 

specified at the time of order entry. 

Time Base Selection 

1. Remove two screws from the bottom 

plate of the enclosure. 

2. Carefully remove the PWM/Tri-state 

board and locate time base select 

switches. 

3. Set switches 3, 4, and 5 to desired time 

base as shown in table. Switches 1, 2, 6, 

7, and 8 are not used and should be in 

the off position. 

* 


PWM Contacts 

4. Carefully reassemble the transducer, ensuring that socket and pins are properly aligned. 

5. No other adjustment or calibration is required. 

MODEL 

UCP-422 

AUX 

+24 

VDC 

FBK 

OUT 

SIG IN 

- 

COM 

SIG IN 

+ 

* Signal input is optoisolated and polarity insensitive. 

PWM computer contact can switch either PWM wire lead. 

PWM Wiring 

Common 24V Supply for 

Power and Signal 

TABLE 1. TIME BASE SELECTION 

PWM TIME 

BASE (sec) 

0.1-2.65 

0.1-5.2 

0.1-12.85 

0.1-25.6 

(factory setting) 

0.59-2.93 


U 

P 

TRI-STATE 

TIME BASE (sec) 

2.55 

5.1 

12.75 

25.5 

(factory setting) 

59.9 

90.5 

119.9 

DESCRIPTION 

Electronic/Pneumatic transducer 

44 UCO-44 Pulse-width modulation option 

44T UCO-44T Tri-state option 

Tri-State board is located in UCO-44T 

expander ring housing attached to the 

UCP-422 enclosure. 

24 VAC or 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

+ 

– 

BAS controller 

Tri-State contacts 

UCP-422 44 

Example: UCP-422-44 Electronic/Pneumatic 

transducer with pulse-width option 

Note: These options must be factory-installed on the UCP-422. 

3 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

On 

decrease 

increase 

Tri-state Wiring 

SWITCH 

4 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

Off 

Off 

On 

AUX 

+24 

VDC 

FBK 

OUT 

SIG IN 

– 

COM 

SIG IN 

+ 

5 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

Off 

U 

P 

E

DESCRIPTION 

The Models UCP-522 and UCP-622 Universal 

Electronic/Pneumatic Transducers provide precision 

pneumatic control of valves, dampers, and other pneumatic 

devices. These transducers are well suited for the 

control of small and large volume loads, such as small 

and large pneumatic actuators. The Model UCP-522 is 

furnished in a unique slim-line design housing that 

saves panel space, and it can be ordered with an 

optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The Model UCP- 

622 is a snap-track mounted version of the universal 

electronic/pneumatic transducer. Its operation is identical 

to the Model UCP-522. 

OPERATION 

Models UCP-522 and UCP-622 convert a jumper-selectable 

analog, pulse-width modulated (PWM), or optional 

tri-state input to a 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) adjustable 

output. The transducers are powered with 24 VAC/VDC. 

Upon a loss of power, the UCP air valves will remain 

closed. A Model EP3 air valve may be used to exhaust 

branch pressure on a power loss. Models UCP-522 and 

UCP-622 may be operated in a multiplexed PWM mode 

so that one BAS output may control up to eight transducers 

individually. These units are not suitable for pilot 

positioning. 

FEATURES 


• Voltage, current, PWM universal inputs standard 

• Optional tri-state control 

• 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors 



UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS 

MODELS UCP-522, UCP-622 

Supply voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 225 mA max 

24 VDC ±10% @ 112 mA max 

Output Adjustable 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) 

Input 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 

0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 3-15 VDC, 

or PWM, jumper selectable or 

optional tri-state 

PWM time base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 

0.59-2.93 sec, DIP switch 

selectable 

Tri-state time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5 sec, 

(option) DIP switch selectable 

Input impedance 250� (current), 

49.9 k� min (voltage) 

Feedback signal 4-20 mA/0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) 

nonadjustable, 650� max load 

UCP-522 


UCP-622 


• Feedback 

• No position sensitivity 

• No air consumption 

• Manual control of output 

• Multiplex mode 

Max main air pressure 30 psig (206.8 kPa) 


(300 cm 3 /sec @ 137.9 kPa) 

Air consumption None in steady state 

Linearity 1% of span @ 77°F (25°C) 

Hysteresis 1% of span @ 77°F (25°C) 



Dimensions 

UCP-522 3.4"H* x 2"W x 4.8"D 

(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm) 

UCP-622 3.25"H x 6"W x 1.75"D** 

(8.3 x 15.2 x 4.4 cm) 


*Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs; add 2.3" (5.8 cm) for 

optional gauge assembly. 

**Add 1.25" (3.2 cm) to depth for optional gauge assembly. 

321 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS


JUMPER SETTINGS For current or voltage analog control, set jumpers for required input signal as shown below. 

JUMPER SETTINGS 

N 

O 

P 

A 

F 

R 

Jumpers shown 

for PWM input 




MANUAL CONTROL (ALL MODELS) 

For manual control of the output, the 24V power supply must be connected and the N/O jumper moved to the override 

O position. The manual adjustment potentiometer can then be used to vary the output. 

CURRENT OR VOLTAGE ANALOG CONTROL (ALL MODELS) 

Jumpers shown 

for 4-20 mA input 

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 

OPERATING MODE 


ANALOG CONTROL WIRING 


OPERATING SWITCH 

MODE 

Single Unit 

1 2 

PWM Control 

Multiplexed 

Off Off 

PWM Control Off On 

322 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

Feedback 

4-20 mA 

(If used) 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

Current or – 

Voltage Signal* + 

Desired Input Signal 

Set Jumpers On 

1 

Off 

N 

O 

P 

A 

MODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

TIME 

BASE MUX 

ADDR 

F 

R 

Zero Pot 

Span Pot 

UCP-522/622 

Manual Override 

Potentiometer 

15 

10 

24 V PWR STAT 

FBK OUT 

PWM 

PWM T-UP TS 

PWM T-DN 

PRES 

COM 

I-V SIG EXH 

For single unit PWM or multiplexed PWM control, set jumpers for N, P, F. All other jumpers are 

unused and ignored. 



PWM TIME BASE 

(sec) 

0.1-2.65 

0.1-5.2 

0.1-12.85 

0.1-25.6 

0.59-2.93 

PWM 

N, P, F 

3 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Off 

On 

Input Signal Notes: 

PWM AND MULTIPLEXED PWM CONTROL (UCP-522/UCP-622 ONLY) 

2 

Off 

0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-5V 1-5V 0-10V 2-10V 0-15V 3-15V 

N,A,F,I N,A,R,I N,A,F,5 N,A,R,5 N,A,F,10 N,A,R,10 N,A,F,15 N,A,R,15 

3 

Off 

4 

Off 

1. If the input is voltage, multiple UCP-522/UCP-622s 

may be powered from the same power supply or 

transformer. 

2. If the input signal is current from a current sourcing 

controller, multiple units may be powered from the 

same power supply or transformer. 

3. If the input is current from a current sinking controller, 

each UCP-522/UCP-622 must have a separate 

power supply or transformer. 

SWITCH 

4 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

Off 

SWITCH 

MUX PWM 

N, P, F 

5 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

Off 

5 

Off 

6 

Off 

OPERATING 

MODE 

Single Unit 

PWM Control 

Multiplexed 

PWM Control 

6 

Off 

7 

Off 

SWITCH 

7 

Off 

8 

Off 

8 

Off 

Refer to the “Multiplex PWM 

Operation” page at the beginning 

of the Output Transducers section.


N 

O 

P 

A 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

Feedback 

4-20 mA 

(if used) 

F 

R 

+ 

T - 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

Signal 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 



OPERATING MODE 

Tri-State (UCP-522T/ 

UCP-622T only) 




PWM CONTROL WIRING 


PWM Contacts* 

* 

For tri-state control, set jumpers for N, P, F. 

* Select T+ or T-, depending on the signal wiring connection, to the power 

supply. The other jumpers are unused and ignored. Note: Current and voltage 

inputs are also operational with the UCP-522T/UCP-622T. 

SWITCH 

1 2 

Off 

N 

O 

P 

A 

15 

10 

MODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

TIME 

BASE MUX 

ADDR 

F 

R 

24 V PWR 

FBK OUT 

PWM T-UP 

PWM T-DN 

COM 

I-V SIG 

Off 

Zero Pot 

Span Pot 

UCP-522/622 


Potentiometer 

STAT 

PWM 

TS 

PRES 

EXH 

Separate 24V Supplies 


TRI-STATE CONTROL (UCP-522T / UCP-622T ONLY) 

TRI-STATE CONTROL WIRING 

This connection can also be to 

the negative side of the power 

supply by moving jumper T to the 

"–" position. 

24 VAC/VDC + 


Feedback 

4-20 mA 

(if used) 

BAS 

Controller 

Tri-state 

Contacts* 

+ 

– 

Increase 

(T-UP) 

Decrease 

(T-DN) 

N 

O 

P 

A 

MODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

TIME 

BASE MUX 

ADDR 

F 

R 

Zero Pot 

Span Pot 

UCP-522T/ 

UCP-622T 

+ 

– 

15 

10 


Potentiometer 

24 V PWR STAT 

FBK OUT 

PWM T-UP 

PWM T-DN 

COM 

PWM 

TS 

PRES 

I-V SIG EXH 

T 

TRI-STATE 

TIME BASE (sec) 

2.55 

5.1 

12.75 

25.5 

Note: If triac outputs are used, resistors 

may be needed to shunt the leakage current. 

If the jumper is placed in T+, place 500Ω 1/2W 

resistors from T-UP to common and T-DN to 

common. If the jumper is placed in T-, place the 

resistor from T-UP to 24 V PWR and T-DN to 

24 V PWR. 


PWM Contacts* 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

Feedback 

4-20 mA 

(if used) 

3 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Off 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

Common 24V Supply 


SWITCH 

4 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

5 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

N 

O 

P 

A 

15 

10 

MODE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

TIME 

BASE MUX 

ADDR 

F 

R 

24 V PWR 

FBK OUT 

PWM T-UP 

PWM T-DN 

COM 

I-V SIG 

UCP-522/622 


Potentiometer 

6 

Off 

Zero Pot 

Span Pot 

STAT 

PWM 

TS 

PRES 

EXH 

*PWM signal input terminals are 

optoisolated and polarity insensitive. 

PWM computer contact can 

switch either PWM wire lead. 

SWITCH 

7 

The UCP-522T/UCP-622T provides a 0-20 psig (0-137.9 

kPa) output proportional to the length of time an increase 

or decrease signal is held. A contact closure wired in 

series with the T-UP terminal will increase the output signal 

(psig) proportional to the length of the signal given. A 

contact closure wired in series with the T-DN terminal 

will decrease the output signal (psig) proportional to the 

length of the signal given. 

Tri-state example: Using a standard UCP-522T/UCP- 

622T with a 25.5-sec time base and a 0-20 psig (0-137.9 

kPa) span with output currently at 0 psig, pulsing would 

operate as follows: 

1. A 5.1-sec increase pulse issued; output 

increases 20% to 4 psig (27.6 kPa). 

2. Another 5.1-sec increase pulse issued; 

output increases another 20% to 8 psig (55.2 kPa). 

3. A 5.1-sec decrease pulse issued; output 

decreases 20% to 4 psig (27.6 kPa). 

Off 

8 

Off 

323 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS





CHECKOUT / RECALIBRATION 

Tools required: multimeter, Model CLC-100-PW1 signal analyzer, pressure gauge 

Each UCP-522/UCP-622 is factory-calibrated for an output span of 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa). For a tighter span, 

adjust the zero and span potentiometers. The feedback signal will not change if the calibration is changed. The 

feedback signal is always 4-20 mA over 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa). 

1. Verify that 24 VAC/VDC is present at the 24V PWR and COM terminals. The green status LED will be on 

continuously (see Table 1 below). 

2. Verify that the input signal is present and that the input signal jumpers and DIP switches are set for the 

input signal being used. 

3. Verify that 20-30 psig (137.9-206.8 kPa) main air is present. Main air should be at least 3 psig (20.7 kPa) 

higher than the maximum required output. 

4. Apply minimum input signal. For tri-state models, apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base 

(such as 25.5 sec) to the T-DN terminal. Branch pressure should go to approximately 0 psig. 

Feedback signal should be approximately 4 mA. 

5. If another low pressure is needed, adjust the zero potentiometer until the desired output pressure is 

reached. 

6. Apply maximum input signal. For tri-state models, apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base 

(such as 25.5 sec) to the T-UP terminal. Branch pressure should go to approximately 20 psig (137.9 kPa). 

Feedback signal should be approximately 20 mA. 

7. If another high pressure is needed, adjust the span potentiometer until the desired output pressure is reached. 

8. Repeat as necessary to achieve accurate results. 

Note: This is a rough functional check. The UCP-522/622 is a highly accurate device, and laboratory-quality 

meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration. 

TABLE 1. LED INDICATION 

STAT (GREEN) PWM/TRI-STATE (YELLOW) PRESSURE (RED) EXHAUST (RED) 

Steady Green Steady Yellow Steady Red Steady Red 

Power on PWM or tri-state Increasing Exhausting 

signal present pressure in pressure in 

Slow Green Blink 

Attention mode 

(Multiplex mode) 

Rapid Green Blink 

Select mode 


branch line branch line 

324 



UCP-522 Universal electronic/pneumatic enclosed transducer 

UCP-622 Universal electronic/pneumatic snap-track mounted transducer 

OPTIONS 

T Tri-state input (current and voltage inputs also operational) 

43 Pressure gauge indication, 0-30 psig/0-200 kPa 

47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UCP-522, 522T only) 

C UCP-622 Factory calibration (specify input and pressure range) 

UCP-522 43 47 Example: UCP-522-43-47 Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer with 

pressure gauge indication and DIN rail mounting 


EP3 Air valve (to provide control from a back-up controller on loss of computer control or other failure) 

22-170 Volume tank (to increase branch line volume)

DESCRIPTION 

The Model T-1000 industrial-grade current/pneumatic transducer 

reduces a supply pressure to a regulated output pressure 

that is directly proportional to a 4-20 mA input signal. The 

Model T-1000 can accept a supply pressure between 18-100 

psig (125-700 kPa). An integral pneumatic volume booster is 

included in the design to provide high-flow capacity up to 

20,736 scim (20 m 3 /hr). 

FEATURES 

• High air flow capacity 

• Wide supply pressure range 


• Convenient external zero and span adjustments 

• Bracket included for panel or wall mounting 

APPLICATION 



MODEL T-1000 

The Model T-1000 is calibrated at the factory for direct-acting 

operation but may be used in the reverse-acting mode by 

reversing the polarity of the signal leads and recalibrating. 

When calibrated for reverse-acting applications, the Model 

T-1000 provides a minimum of its full-rated output pressure 

(i.e., 15 psig/103.4 kPa) upon input signal failure. 

The 4-20 mA input to 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) output can 

be recalibrated using zero and span adjustments to provide 

3-9 psig (20.7-62.1 kPa) or 9-15 psig (62.1-103.4 kPa) output 

for split ranging applications. 


Power supply None, loop-powered 

Input 4-20 mA 

Input impedance 180� nominal 


Supply pressure 

sensitivity




MODEL 22/07-16 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 22/07-16 Current/Pneumatic Transducer 

is a compact, high performance instrument providing 

many of the same characteristics that are found on 

industrial-grade transducers. This I/P transducer is 

designed for high air capacity HVAC applications where 

mounting space is limited and an industrial appearance 

is important. 

FEATURES 



• Mounting in any position 

• High air capacity 

• High repeatability 

• DIN rail mounting 

OPERATION 

The Model 22/07-16 converts a 4-20 mA signal to a 

3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) pressure signal using a 

unique converting system with a stationary coil and lowmass 

moving magnet that gives this unit high repeatability 

and reliability. The unit is not sensitive to vibrations 

and shock and can be mounted in any position without 

recalibration. The Model 22/07-16 is supplied with 

screw-type terminals for electric connection and 1/8" 

FNPT ports for pneumatic connections. A clip-on base is 

provided for DIN rail mounting. 


Power supply None, loop-powered 

Input 4-20 mA 

Input resistance 200� nominal 


Output characteristic Linear to input, direct acting 

Air 

Supply 20 psig (40 psig max) 

137.9 kPa (275.8 kPa) 

oil, water, and dust free 

Capacity 2764 scim (755 cm 3/sec) 

Consumption 0.08 scfm (37.8 cm 3/sec) 

326 


in 

(cm) 

Linearity +3% 

Hysteresis 0.3% 


(3.20 x 3.61 x 10.59 cm) 


Mounting DIN rail 

Connections 

Air 1/8" FNPT 

Electric Screw-type terminals 




22/07-16 Current/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa) output 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

1.42 

(3.61) 

1.26 

(3.2) 

4.17 

(10.59) 


DIN-3F, BAM-1000 DIN rail 

B-132 1/4'' Barb x 1/8'' MPT fitting 

PG-05 0-30 psi/0-200 kPa Pressure gauge 

B-373-1 1/4'' Barb gauge tee with mounting tabs 

+ 

_ 

S/Zul 

1.42 

(3.61) 

NPT 1/8" 

Main Air 

20 psig 

M 

Output Air 

B Signal 

3-15 psig 

1/8" FNPT 

Pressure 

Connections

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RES-1 Universal Resistance Transducer 

provides a precision resistance output for DDC control 

of electric actuators or other electronic devices that 

operate from a variable resistive circuit. Various jumperselectable 

analog and pulse-width modulated (PWM) 

inputs are available, and the transducer may be powered 

from 24 VAC/VDC. The Model RES-1 is furnished 

with snap-track for easy mounting and may be operated 

in a multiplexed PWM mode so that one BAS output 

may address up to eight Model RES-1s. 

FEATURES 


UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER 

MODEL RES-1 

• Ideal for controlling electric actuators 

• Replaces potentiometer or temperature sensor in 

boiler/chiller reset circuits 

• 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 

3-15 VDC, or PWM input signals, jumper-selectable 

• AC/DC powered 

• Replaces motorized slide-wire potentiometer 

controller 

• 0-135Ω, 0-270Ω, 0-500Ω, and 0-1000Ω standard, 

custom ranges available 


• Failsafe mode and signal loss feature 



Supply voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 220 mA (5.3 VA) 

24 VDC ±10% @ 100 mA 

Input signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 

0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 3-15 VDC 

or PWM, jumper selectable 


0.59-2.93 sec 

DIP switch selectable 


Current 250� 

Voltage 49.9 kΩ min 

Output ranges 0-135Ω, 0-270Ω, 0-500Ω, 

0-1000Ω, custom ranges 

available; min span 30Ω, 

max span 1 MΩ 

OPERATION 

The Model RES-1 simulates a three-wire potentiometer 

output proportional to an analog or PWM input signal. 

The resistance between output terminals B and R 

increases (W and R decreases) as the input signal 

increases. The resistance between output terminals B 

and R decreases (W and R increases) as the input signal 

decreases. 

When 24V power is interrupted at the Model RES-1 

power terminals, the failsafe mode internally connects 

the output terminals to the fallback pot terminals, allowing 

an alternate back-up controller or potentiometer to 

be used for control. 

Output resistors 1W 


Accuracy/ 

Repeatability ±1% of span 

Linearity ±1% of span 


LT Option -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C) 


Dimensions 3.25"H x 6.5"L x 1.25"D 

(8.3 x 16.5 x 3.2 cm) 


327 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS


JUMPER SETTINGS For current or voltage analog control, set jumpers for required input signal as shown below. 

NO 

MEM 

MEM 

PWM 

I-V 

OZ 

TZ 

10V 

15V 





MODEL RES-1 

CURRENT OR VOLTAGE ANALOG CONTROL 

MA 

5V 

Example: Jumpers shown at left are set for 4-20 mA input with memory feature* disabled. 

0-20 mA 

I-V,TZ,MA 

4-20 mA 

I-V,OZ,MA 

0-5V 

I-V,TZ,5V 

1-5V 

I-V,OZ,5V 

0-10V 

I-V,TZ,10V 

2-10V 0-15V 3-15V 

I-V,OZ,10V I-V,TZ,15V I-V,OZ,15V 

* Memory Feature 

If the MEM/NOMEM jumper is in the NOMEM position at power-up, the resistance between B and R goes to 

minimum until the first analog input is received. In the MEM position at power-up, the resistance returns to its last 

value when power was interrupted and remains there until a new input signal is received. The last resistance output 

value will be stored in memory for up to six hours after power loss. 


OPERATING 

SWITCH SWITCH 

MODE 

1 2 

3 4 5 

Analog Input, 

Any Analog 

No Sig Loss Hold** 

Analog Input with 

Off Off Input 

Off Off Off 

Sig Loss Hold** Off On 

* * Signal Loss Feature 

In the event of a loss of the input signal, the RES-1 can remember the last signal and continue to provide an output 

based on the last commanded signal. DIP switch 2 must be on to enable the Sig Loss Hold feature. The Sig Loss 

Hold feature cannot be used with any analog input signal range that starts at 0V or 0 mA and should be disabled by 

setting DIP switch 2 off. 

ANALOG CONTROL WIRING 

328 

(See Table 1 - LED Indication) 

L3 

L2 

L1 

Resistance Output 

to controlled device 

Status 

PWM signal 

Sig Loss Hold 

NO 

MEM 

MEM 

24 VAC/VDC Power + 

Notes: 

1. If the RES-1 input signal is voltage, multiple RES-1s may be – 

powered from the same power supply or transformer. 

2. If the RES-1 input signal is current from a current sourcing 

controller, multiple units may be powered from the same 

power supply or transformer. 

3. If input signal is current from a current sinking controller, 

each RES-1 must have a separate power supply or transformer. 

B R W B R W 

Res Output Fallback Pot 

B-R Resistance increases 

with signal increase 

W-R Resistance decreases 


Power "-" and 

signal "COM" are 

internally connected. 

PWM 

I-V 

signal Power COMSig 

+ – 

PWM OZ 

I-V TZ 

6 

Off 

7 

Off 

Optional Connection 

to back up thermostat 

or potentiometer 

8 

Off 

Mode Time Base MUX Addr 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

10V mA 

15V 5V 

+ Analog Current or 

– Voltage Input Signal

JUMPER SETTINGS For single-unit PWM or multiplexed PWM control, set jumpers to PWM and TZ. 

All other input jumpers are unused and ingnored. 

NO 

MEM 

MEM 

PWM 

I-V 



MODEL RES-1 

PWM / MULTIPLEXED PWM CONTROL 

OZ 

TZ 


OPERATING 

SWITCH 

MODE 

PWM Input, Single 

1 2 

RES-1 (No MUX) 

PWM Input 

On Off 

Multiplex Mode On On 

Example: Jumpers shown for PWM input with memory feature* disabled. 

* Memory Feature 

If the MEM/NOMEM jumper is in the NOMEM position at power-up, the resistance between B and R goes to 

minimum until the first analog input is received. In the MEM position at power-up, the resistance returns to its last 

value when power was interrupted and remains there until a new input signal is received. The last resistance output 

value will be stored in memory for up to six hours after power loss. 

PWM TIME 

BASE (sec) 

0.1-2.65 

0.1-5.2 

0.1-12.85 

0.1-25.6 

0.59-2.93 

3 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Off 

On 

SWITCH 

4 

Off 

Off 

On 

On 

Off 

5 

Off 

On 

Off 

On 

Off 

OPERATING 

MODE 

Single RES-1 

PWM Control 

Multiplexed 

PWM Control 

6 

Off 

SWITCH 

7 

Off 

8 

Off 



of the Output Transducers section. 

Signal Loss Feature: The signal loss hold feature is not available when the RES-1 is configured for PWM input. 

PWM CONTROL WIRING 



L3 

L2 

L1 

Status 

PWM signal 

Sig Loss Hold 

NO 

MEM 

MEM 

+ 

– 

B R W B R W 






Power "-" and 



PWM 

I-V 

signal Power COM Sig 

+ – 

PWM OZ 

I-V TZ 





1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

10V mA 

15V 5V 



(See Table 1 - LED Indication) (See Figure 1 - LED Indication) 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power for PWM 

Signal 

B R W B R W 






PWM 

I-V 

signal Power COM Sig 

+ – 

+ – 

24 VAC/VDC Power 24 VAC/VDC Power 

Separate 24V Supplies for Power and Signal Common 24V Supply for Power and Signal 


PWM Contacts** 

L3 

L2 

L1 

Status 

PWM signal 

Sig Loss Hold 


PWM Contacts** 

NO 

MEM 

MEM 

Power "-" and 



+ – 

**PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. 

PWM computer contacts can switch either PWM wire lead. 

PWM OZ 

I-V TZ 





1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

10V mA 

15V 5V 

329 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS




MODEL RES-1 

INSTALLATION 

Mount the device inside an enclosure near the controlled 

equipment, avoiding areas of temperature extremes, 

corrosive vapors, or electro-magnetic interference. Use 

track slots for screw attachment. Note: Protect circuit 

board from metal filings created during panel construction. 

CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE 

Tools required: Volt ohmmeter, Model CLC-100-PW1 

signal analyzer or other signal source. 

1. Verify that the input selector jumpers and switches 

are in the correct position for the input signal to be used. 

2. Verify that either 24 VAC or VDC is present at the 

power terminals. 

3. With the controlled device disconnected, connect an 

ohmmeter to the B and R terminals on the RES-1 

output. With no signal input, the resistance between 

B and R should be at minimum, and the resistance 

between W and R should be at maximum resistance. 

4. Apply the minimum input signal for the range selected 

to the input terminals. The RES-1 should output 

less than 2% of full range, the minimum resistance of 

the RES-1. Zero and full scale pots are factory set 

and should not be adjusted. 

5. Slowly increase the input signal. The resistance 

reading will increase linearly toward full range. If the 

resistance does not vary with the input signal, check 

the polarity of the input wiring. 

330 

CAUTION: Make all connections with power removed. 

Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. 



RES-1 Universal resistance transducer, 135Ω output 

OUTPUT (leave blank for standard 135Ω output) 

500 500Ω 

270 270Ω 

1000 1000Ω 

S Special range* (specify when ordering) 

LT Low temperature option 

*Contact Trane for special ranges 

Make all connections according to wiring diagram or as 

shown in the job diagram and in compliance with national 

and local codes. Use shielded #18 gauge cable for 

connections from the transducer to the controller. The 

unit comes precalibrated for easy application. 


L3 STATUS L2 PWM SIGNAL L1 SIGNAL LOSS 

(green) (yellow) HOLD (red) 

Steady Green Steady Yellow Steady Red 

Power on PWM signal Output held 

present due to loss 

Slow Green Blink of signal 



Rapid Green 

Blink 

Select mode 


RES-1 Example: RES-1 Universal resistance 

transducer, 135Ω output


PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS 

PWA SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PWA-1A Pulse-to-Analog Transducer converts 

a DIP switch selectable pulse-width modulation 

(PWM) input to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set 

for 1-5V and 4-20 mA). Using the multiplex mode, up to 

eight units can be controlled from one BAS controller 

output. The Model PWA-1A is furnished in a unique 

slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and 

can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting 

adapter. The Model PWA-2A is a snap-track mounted 

version of the pulse-to-analog transducer, and its operation 

is identical to the Model PWA-1A. 

The Model PWA-1T Tri-State-to-Analog Transducer 

converts two contact closure inputs (tri-state/floating 

control) to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set for 

1-5V and 4-20 mA). It is mounted in a unique slim-line 

design housing, which saves panel space, and can be 

ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The 

Model PWA-2T is the snap-track mounted version of 

the tri-state-to-analog transducer, and its operation is 

identical to the Model PWA-1T. 

On all models, the outputs are zero and span adjustable 

for a wide variety of ranges (factory set for 4-20 mA 

and 1-5V). Current and voltage outputs are active simultaneously. 

After a power failure, a memory feature 

on all models allows their outputs to return to their last 

values before power was interrupted and remain there 

until a new signal is received. (Memory feature may be 

disabled by user if desired.) 


Supply voltage 24 VAC ±10% @ 120 mA or 

24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA 

Input time base 

PWA-1A, -2A 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 

0.59-2.93 sec, 


PWA-1T, -2T 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9, 90.5, 

119.9 sec 


Output* 4-20 mA factory set, adjustable 

0-20 mA zero and span; 

1-5 VDC factory set, adjustable; 

0-18 VDC, max voltage adjustable 

(min voltage determined by ratio of 

mA max to mA min - refer to calibration 

section for details) 


Output burden* 650Ω max (4-20 mA) 

Accuracy ±1% of span 



Dimensions 

PWA-1A,-1T 3.4"H** X 2"W X 4.8"D 

(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm) 

PWA-2A, -2T 3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1.5"D 

(8.3 x 11.8 x 3.8 cm) 


*Voltage and current outputs are active simultaneously. 

Maximum current available from combined voltage and current 

outputs is 25 mA. 

**Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs. 

PWA-1A 

(PWA-1T) 

PWA-2A 

(PWA-2T) 

FEATURES 

• 255-step resolution in any range 


• Six-hour memory 

• Positive or negative input reference 

• 0-20 mA and 0-18 VDC outputs (field adjustable) 

• 4-20 mA and 1-5 VDC factory-set outputs 

• User-selectable time base 

• Jumper-selectable manual output 

• Multiplex mode 

331 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS




PWA SERIES 

PWA-1A / PWA-2A PWM AND MULTIPLEXED PWM-TO-ANALOG CONTROL 


MAN 

OVR 

Automatic 

Control 

– 

24 VAC/DC 

Power Supply + 

24 VAC/DC 

for Signal 


PWM Contacts* 

332 

MAN 

OVR 

Manual 

Control 

PWA-1A / PWA-2A WIRING 

+ 

– 

Manual Output Control 

The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the MAN OVR 

position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer 

can then be used to vary the output. 

Automatic Output Control 

Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins. 


Memory 

Mode* 

Switch 

1 

Operating 

Mode 

Switch 

2 

PWM Time 

Base (sec) 3 

No Memory Off Single Unit PWM Control Off 0.1-2.65 Off 

Memory On Multiplexed PWM Control On 0.1-5.2 Off 

0.1-12.85 Off 

0.1-25.6 Off 

0.59-2.93 On 

MODE TIME 

BASE MUX 

ADDR 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

VOLTS ADJ 

1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs 

are simultaneously active 

1-5V + 

Output – 

4-20 mA + 

Output – 

MAN 

OVR 

MA ZERO 

(track mounted) 

MA SPAN 

Manual Override Jumper 

(shown in manual position) 


Potentiometer 



1-5V 

Output 

4-20 mA 

Output 

VOLTS OUT 

MA OUT 

COM 

24V PWR 

SIG IN + 

SIG IN – 

STAT 

L2 

SIG 

L1 

PWA-1A 

(enclosed) 

PWA-2A 

See Table 1. 

LED Indication 

Switch Operating Switch 

4 5 Mode 6 7 8 

Off 

Off 

Off 

On 

Single Unit 

PWM Control 

Off Off Off 

On 

On 

Off 

Off 

On 

Off 

Multiplexed 

PWM Control 



of the Output Transducers section. 

*Memory Feature 

With DIP switch 1 on, after a power interruption the memory feature will allow the outputs to return to their last 

values when power was lost and remain there until a new input signal is received. The last output value will be 

stored in memory up to six hours after a power loss. With DIP switch 1 off, the outputs will go to their minimum 

values when power is first applied and remain there until a new input signal is received. 

24 VAC/DC + 

Power Supply 

– 


PWM Contacts* 

MAN 

OVR 

VOLTS ADJ 

MA ZERO 

MA SPAN 




Potentiometer 

VOLTS OUT 

MA OUT 

COM 

24V PWR 

SIG IN + 

SIG IN – 

STAT 

L2 

SIG 

L1 

See Figure 1 


Separate 24V Supplies for Power and Signal Common 24V Supply for Power and Signal 

* PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. PWM computer 

contacts can switch either positive or negative PWM wire lead. 

+ – 

+ 

– 

MODE TIME 

BASE MUX 

ADDR 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

PWA-1A 

(enclosed) 

PWA-2A 

(track mounted)



PWA SERIES 

PWA-1T / PWA-2T TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG CONTROL 


MAN 

OVR 

Automatic 

Control 

MAN 

OVR 

Manual 

Control 

Manual Output Control 

The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the “MAN OVR” 

position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer can 

then be used to vary the output. 

Automatic Output Control 

Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins. 


Memory 

Mode* 

Switch 

1 

Operating 

Mode 

Switch 

2 

Tri-state 

Time Base 3 

Switch 

4 5 

Operating 

Mode 6 

Switch 

7 8 

No Memory Off Tri-state control Off 2.55 sec Off Off Off Tri-state Control Off Off Off 

Memory On 

5.1 sec Off Off On 

12.75 sec Off On Off 

25.5 sec Off On On 

59.9 sec On Off Off 

90.5 sec On Off On 

119.9 sec On On Off 

*Memory Feature 

With DIP switch 1 on, after a power interruption, the memory feature will allow the outputs to return to their last 

values when power was lost and remain there until a new input signal is received. The last output value will be stored 

in memory up to six hours after a power loss. With DIP switch 1 off, the outputs will go to their minimum values 

when power is first applied and remain there until a new input signal is received. 

PWA-1T / PWA-2T WIRING 



1-5V 

Output 

4-20 mA 

Output 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

BAS 

Controller 

Tri-state 

Contacts 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

– 

+ 

Increase 

Decrease 

VOLTS ADJ 

MA ZERO PWA-1T (enclosed) 

MA SPAN 

PWA-2T (track mounted) 



MAN 

OVR Manual Override Potentiometer 

– + 

TS POL 

VOLTS 

OUT 

MA 

OUT STAT 

COM 

24 V L2 

PWR 

See Table 1. 

SIG IN 

+ SIG 

SIG IN 


– L1 

This connection can also be to 

the negative side of the power 

supply by moving jumper TS POL 

to the "–" position. 


The PWA-1T and PWA-2T provide a 4-20 mA current source and 1-5 VDC 

output proportional to the length of time an increase or decrease signal is 

held. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will 

increase the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given. 

A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN – terminal will decrease 

the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given. 

Tri-state example: Using a standard PWA-1T or PWA-2T with a 25.5second 

time base and a 4-20 mA and 1-5V span with output currently at 

4 mA and 1V, pulsing would operate as follows: 

1. 5.1-sec increase pulse issued 

2. Another 5.1-sec increase pulse issued 

3. 5.1-sec decrease pulse issued 

L2- STAT (green) L1- SIG (red) 

Steady Green Steady Red 

Power On PWM or tri-state 

Slow Green Blink signal present 


Multiplex mode 

Rapid Green Blink 

Select mode 

Multiplex mode 

Output increases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V 

Output increases another 20% to 10.4 mA, 2.6V 

Output decreases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V 

333 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS




PWA SERIES 

CALIBRATION 

Tools required: a multimeter and a signal generator such as the Model CLC-100-PW1 signal analyzer 

The PWA-1A, PWA-2A, PWA-1T, and PWA-2T outputs are factory set at 4-20 mA and 1-5V. To change the calibration, 

see the instructions below. After calibration, alternate between minimum and maximum input pulses and fine 

tune the mA and voltage potentiometers for desired mA or volt outputs (typically just one more pass is necessary). 

FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING CURRENT (mA) 

ONLY OR CURRENT (mA) AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT 

1. Using a signal generator: 

PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal. 

PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the 

selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal. 

2. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO 

potentiometer at desired minimum mA output. 


PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal. 

PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected 

time base to the SIG + terminal. 

4. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at desired maximum mA output. 

5. Calibration of mA output is complete. If voltage output is also 

required, proceed to step 6. 

6. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set maximum 

voltage output desired with the VOLT ADJ potentiometer. 

7. Determine the ratio of maximum mA output to minimum mA 

output. 

(i.e., 20 mA maximum output: 4 mA minimum output = 5:1) 

8. The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the ratio 

of maximum-to-minimum mA output. Using the example from 

step 7 above for the mA range and using a 10V maximum 

voltage output, the ratio remains the same. 

(i.e., 20 mA maximum: 4 mA minimum = 5:1 = 10V:2V) 

The minimum voltage output would be automatically set at 2V. 

Note: To change voltage output, repeat Steps 3, 6, 7, and 8. 

334 

MODEL 

PWA-1A 

PWA-2A 

PWA-1T 

PWA-2T 


FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING VOLTAGE 

OUTPUT ONLY 

1. Determine the minimum and maximum voltage output 

required (0-18V total range). 

2. Using the following formula, determine the minimum mA output: 

minimum mA output = 20 mA x desired minimum volts 

desired maximum volts 


PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal. 


selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal. 

4. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO 

potentiometer at calculated minimum mA output 

(from formula in step 2). 


PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal. 


selected time base to the SIG + terminal. 

6. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at 20 mA. 

7. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set the 

VOLT ADJ potentiometer to desired maximum voltage. 

The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the 

ratio of maximum-to-minimum mA output. 

DESCRIPTION 

Pulse-to-analog enclosed transducer 

Pulse-to-analog snap-track mount transducer 

Tri-state-to-analog enclosed transducer 

Tri-state-to-analog snap-track mount transducer 

OPTIONS 

47 DIN rail mounting adapter (For PWA-1A and PWA-1T only) 

C Factory calibrate for special output range (specify range when ordering) 

PWA-1A 47 Example: PWA-1A-47 Enclosed pulse-to-analog transducer with DIN rail mounting


UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS 

MODELS UAT-1, UAT-2 

DESCRIPTION 

Model UAT-1 and UAT-2 Universal Analog 

Transducers are used for analog signal conversion or 

signal scaling. They will accept a DC voltage, current, or 

resistive input signal and output a nonisolated voltage or 

current output. These transducers can be direct or 

reverse acting and are easily field calibrated to meet a 

wide variety of applications. 

The Model UAT-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line 

design housing that saves panel space, and it can be 

ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The 

Model UAT-2 is a snap-track mounted version, and its 

operation is identical to the Model UAT-1. 

FEATURES 

• DC voltage, current, or resistive input 

• Inputs from 0-20 VDC, 0-40 mA, or 0-10 k� 

• Input and output jumper selectable and easily 

field calibrated 

• Outputs from 0-18 VDC or 0-20 mA 

• Direct or reverse acting, jumper selectable 

• Reference voltage and current available to 

power an input device or sensor 


Power 24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA max 

24 VAC ±10% @100 mA max 

Signal inputs 

(jumper selectable, 

adjustable) 

Low range 0-1.09 VDC, 55 mV min span* 

0-2 VDC, 100 mV min span* 

0-4 mA, 0.22 mA min span* 

Normal range 0-10.9 VDC, 550 mV min span* 

0-20 VDC, 1V min span* 

0-40 mA, 2.2 mA min span* 

Three-wire 

potentiometer 0-100� min to 0-10 k� 

Two-wire variable 

resistance 0-100� min to 0-5 k� 

Input impedance 0-4 mA, 0-40 mA: 250� 

0-1.09V, 0-10.9V: 156 k� 

0-2V, 0-20V: 293 k� 

Signal outputs 0-18 VDC @ 20 mA max load 

(jumper selectable, 0-20 mA @ 650� max load 

adjustable) 

Action Direct or reverse acting 


UAT-2 

UAT-1 

Reference output for 

sensor excitation 


Voltage source 1.2 VDC @ 12 mA max (100� min), 

5 VDC @ 12 mA max (417� min), 

10 VDC @ 12 mA max (834� min) 

Current source 1.2 mA @ 5 k� max, 

5 mA @ 1.5 k� max, 

10 mA @ 750� max 

Output zero/span Adjustable from 0 to full scale 

Indication Power LED 

Linearity



UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS 

MODELS UAT-1, UAT-2 

WIRING 

0-18 VDC or 


Jumper-Selectable, 

Adjustable 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power Supply 

0-20 VDC or 

0-40 mA Input 

Jumper-Selectable, 

Adjustable 

(no connection required 

to REF OUT terminal) 

336 

COM SIG 

IN 

REF 

OUT 

Z1 

SPN 

Z2 

COM SIG IN COM SIG IN 

CALIBRATION 

NRM NRM 

HI LO 

HI LO 

ZERO 1 

ACT 

D R 

ZERO 2 

1.2 5 10 

REF 

MA V 

X1 ÷ 10 

INPUT 

MA 10V 20V 

SPAN 

OUT MA V 

SIG OUT 

24V PWR 

COM 

REF OUT 

SIG IN 

Power LED 

Three-Wire Potentiometer 

100Ω min to 10 kΩ max 

element 

UAT-1 

UAT-2 

REF OUT 

(VOLTS) COM SIG IN 

REF OUT 

(MA) 

Two-Wire Variable Resistance 

100Ω min to 5 kΩ max 

element 

1. Set output OUT jumper to V or MA as desired. 

2. Set INPUT jumpers for type and range of input signal present. 

See “Input Jumpers” table above. 

3. If using the reference output for sensor excitation, set the 

two REF jumpers for the proper output type and value. 

Choices are 1.2V, 5V, 10V, 1.2 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA. 

If not using the reference output, jumper as a voltage output. 

4. Set action ACT jumper to direct D or reverse R as desired. 

5. Set span jumper SPN to LO. Turn SPAN pot clockwise 25 

turns. 

6. Remove both Z1 jumpers. Trim ZERO 1 pot for minimum 

desired output value. Presence/absence of input signal 

has no effect on this adjustment. 

7. Reinstall both Z1 jumpers. Set Z2 jumper to LO position. 

INPUT JUMPERS 


8. Apply an input signal value that is to produce minimum 

output. Trim ZERO 2 pot for minimum output value (same 

value set in step 6). If desired value cannot be achieved, 

remove Z2 jumper and trim ZERO 2 pot again. If desired 

value is still not achieved, place Z2 jumper in HI position 

and trim ZERO 2 pot again. 

9. Apply input signal value that is to produce maximum 

output. Trim SPAN pot for maximum output value. If SPAN 

pot does not go high enough, move the SPN jumper from 

LO position to HI position. 

10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until both minimum and maximum 

output values are correct. Typically, just one more pass is 

sufficient. 

11. Apply a midpoint input signal. Verify that output goes to 

center of output range. 


UAT-1 Universal analog enclosed/field-calibrated transducer 

UAT-2 Universal analog snap-track mounted/field-calibrated transducer 

OPTIONS 

C Factory calibration (specify input and output when ordering) 

47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UAT-1 only) 

INPUT INPUT REF 

SIGNAL RANGE JUMPER POSITIONS JUMPERS 

0-1.09V, 55 mV min span ÷ 10 10V If REF output is 

0-2V, 100 mV min span ÷ 10 20V 

required for 

external sensor 

0-10.9V, 550 mV min span 

0-20V, 1V min span 

x 1 

x 1 

10V 

20V 

excitation, jumper 

for appropriate 

voltage or current 

0-4 mA, 0.22 mA min span ÷ 10 mA 

source.If not used, 

set jumpers to: 

0-40 mA, 2.2 mA min span x 1 mA V 10 


10V ref (834Ω min) 

x 1 (None) V 10 


5V ref (417Ω min) 

x 1 (None) V 5 


1.2V ref (100Ω min) 

x 1 (None) V 1.2 

Two-Wire Variable Resistance If (ref mA) x (max Ω) mA 10 

10 mA ref (750Ω max) 

≥1.09V 


5 mA ref (1.5 kΩ max) 


1.2 mA ref (5 kΩ max) 

x 1 (None) 

If (ref mA) x (max Ω) 

≤1.09V 

÷ 10 (None) 

mA 

mA 

5 

1.2 

UAT-1 C Example: UAT-1C Universal analog transducer with factory calibration 

RELATED PRODUCT UCM-SPA 0-10 k� Three-wire pot with stainless steel plate


VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER 

MODEL VTI 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model VTI Voltage and Current Converter/ 

Rescaler will convert voltage signals in the range of 

1-19V or current signals in the range of 1.33-76 mA 

into a 4-20 mA non-isolated signal. This current-source 

signal can be direct or reverse acting and can be used 

to drive grounded 4-20 mA loads utilizing a single power 

supply. The Model VTI also accepts an input from a 

resistive potentiometer. The Model VTI-1 is a singleinput, 

single-output device, and the Model VTI-2 

accepts a single input and provides dual outputs. 

FEATURES 

• Converts voltage, current, or potentiometer signal 

into 4-20 mA signal 


• 6 or 10 VDC output reference voltage 

available to power input device 

• Loss of input signal results in 0 mA output 

• LED indication of valid input signal (VTI-1) 

• Dual output model 

• Independently configurable outputs 


Power supply 22-27 VDC @ 50 mA (VTI-2:100 mA) 

(10V reference voltage output) 

15-27 VDC @ 50 mA (VTI-2:100 mA) 

(6V reference voltage output) 

Input ranges 1-19 VDC, 1V min span, 

VTI-1 301 k� input impedance 

VTI-2 150 k� input impedance 

4-76 mA, 4 mA min span, 

250� input impedance 

2-38 mA, 2 mA min span, 


1.33-25 mA, 1.33 mA min span, 


Input signal loss 

threshold 0.7 VDC 

Output range 4-20 mA 

Output load 850� max @ 24 VDC 

Rmax = Vsupply - 7 

20 mA 

Linearity



VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER 

MODEL VTI 

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS 

338 

Voltage or 

Current Signal 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 


(blue) 

(white) 

(black) 

(purple) 

(no connection) 

(yellow) 

4-20 mA 

VTI 

V SIG IN 

+ 24V PWR 

COM 

REF V OUT 

MA SIG OUT 

For signal reversal (20-4 mA OUT), specify reverse acting when ordering. 

Voltage to Current, 

Current to Current, and Signal Reversal 

Voltage 

or 

Current 

Signal 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

4-20 mA 

Output #1 

4-20 mA 

Output #2 

(blue) 

(white) 

(black) 

(purple) 


(yellow) 

(brown) 

VTI-2 

V SIG IN 

+ 24V PWR 

COM 

REF V OUT 

MA SIG OUT #1 

MA SIG OUT #2 

Example: One 4-20 mA input becomes two identical 4-20 mA outputs. 

Signal Duplication 

UCM-SPA or Potentiometer 

Sensor - any 

end-to-end value from 

100Ω to 10 kΩ. Specify 

pot range when 

ordering. 



VTI-1 Voltage and current converter/rescaler, single output 

VTI-2 Voltage and current converter/rescaler, dual output 

ENCLOSURE 

- Leave blank for snap-track mounting (VTI-1 only) 

H 1/2'' Threaded hub mount 

P Panel mount 

D DIN rail mount 

OPTIONS 

-XR1 Potentiometer to current converter 

(includes UAD-R1, potentiometer not included) 

Increase 

(red) UAD-R1 (black) 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

4-20 mA 

Output 

(blue) 

(white) 

(black) 

(purple) 

(yellow) 

Locate VTI close 

to potentiometer 

to minimize noise 

pickup. 

4-20 mA 

VTI with XR1 

V SIG IN 

+ 24V PWR 

Using a Potentiometer to Vary a 


Voltage 

or 

Current 

Signal 

Example: VTI-1-XR1 Potentiometer to current converter, snap-track mounted 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

4-20 mA 

Output #1 

4-20 mA 

Output #2 

(blue) 

(white) 

(black) 

(purple) 


(yellow) 

(brown) 

Signal Sequencing 

VTI-2 

V SIG IN 

+ 24V PWR 

COM 

REF V OUT 

COM 

REF V OUT 

MA SIG OUT 

MA SIG OUT #1 

MA SIG OUT #2 

Example: Output #1 is 4-20 mA over a 4-12 mA (1-3V) input. 

Output #2 is 4-20 mA over a 12-20 mA (3-5V) input. 


UCM-SPA 0-10 kΩ Three-wire pot with stainless steel plate 

Important! The VTI is 

not intended for field 

calibration and must be 

factory-calibrated. 

Please supply the 

fol-lowing information at 

time of order: input, 

output, and direct or 

reverse acting.


ISOLATED DC-TO-DC TRANSMITTER 

MODEL DT13 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model DT13 is a signal isolator that accepts a current 

or voltage input and provides a linearly transferred 

current or voltage output. The input and output are electrically 

isolated, making the Model DT13 useful for 

ground loop elimination, common-mode signal rejection, 

and noise pickup reduction. The Model DT13 is 

designed to function effectively in electrically noisy environments. 

The Model DT13 is compatible and can interface 

with recorders, data loggers, personal computers, 

programmable controllers, HVAC controllers, building 

automation controllers, variable speed drives, and other 

process monitoring and control systems. The Model 

DT13 is furnished with snap-track for easy mounting. 

FEATURES 

• Eliminates ground loop wiring problems 

• Multiple input/output ranges are jumper selectable 

• 24 and 120 VAC powered models 

• Snap-track mounting for easy installation 

• Low cost 

OPERATION 

The Model DT13 input-conditioning circuitry scales and 

filters the DC input and drives a precision isolator, which 

carries the signal across the isolation barrier. The output 

side of the isolator drives a circuit that reconverts the 

signal into a replica of the input, which is again scaled (if 

necessary) to meet the user’s requirement. 


Input/Output 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 

0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, or 

3-15 VDC jumper selectable 


Voltage 5 VDC: 49.9 k�; 10 VDC: 99.8 k�; 

15 VDC: 74.8 k� 

Current 20 mA: 250� max 

Output capability 

Voltage 15 VDC, 6 mA max 

current loading 

Current 20 mA DC, 1000� max load 

Output zero/span Up to 20% offset to the 

0-20 mA, 0-5V, 0-10V, and 

0-15V ranges 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

20 MA 5 

10 15 

PWR 2.25 

ISO ISO 

V MA 

10V 5V 15V 

Depth: 1.25'' (3.2) 

5 

(12.7) 

(5.7) 

Isolation 1000V (DC or AC peak) max 

Linearity Better than 0.1% of span 

Response time 70 ms typical 

Ambient operating 

temp 14° to 140°F (-10° to 60°C) 


Power 

DT13-24 24 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz, 12 VA 

DT13-120 120 VAC ±10% 50/60 Hz, 6 VA 

Dimensions 2.25" H x 5" W x 1.25"D 

(5.7 x 12.7 x 3.2 cm) 


339 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



ISOLATED DC-TO-DC TRANSMITTER 

MODEL DT13 

SETUP AND CALIBRATION 

Table 1 below shows the input and output configurations available 

with the DT13. Determine the signal requirements for the 

application, and set the input and output jumpers according to 

the table. The input jumpers are located on the DT13 near the 

SIG IN terminals. The output jumpers are located near the SIG 

OUT terminals. If CAL appears in the table for desired signals, 

the DT13 will also require field calibration of the zero and span 

pots. 

TABLE 1. INPUT AND OUTPUT CONFIGURATIONS 

INPUT 

SIGNAL 

0-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

0-5V 

1-5V 

0-10V 

2-10V 

0-15V 

3-15V 

WIRING 

340 

Input 

Signal 

mA or V 

Sourcing 

Output 

Signal 

mA or V 

+ 

– 

Input Jumpers 

Output Jumpers 

+ 

– 

SIG IN 

20 mA 

10V 

SIG OUT 

V mA 

Span Pot 

5V 

15V 

10V 5V 15V 

To field calibrate the DT13, apply the appropriate supply voltage 

to the AC power terminals. The red PWR LED will be on 

continuously. Apply the minimum input signal to the SIG IN terminals. 

Adjust the zero pot until desired minimum output is 

reached. Now apply the maximum input signal, and adjust the 

span pot until the desired maximum output is reached. Repeat 

this process as necessary until accurate results are achieved. 

OUTPUT SIGNAL 

JUMPERS 0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-5V 1-5V 0-10V 2-10V 0-15V 3-15V 

INPUT 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 

OUTPUT MA, MA MA, MA, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 15V V, V, 15V, CAL 

INPUT 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 20 MA 

OUTPUT MA, MA, CAL MA, MA V, V, 5V, CAL V, V, 5V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V V, V, 15V, CAL V, V, 15V 

INPUT 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 












Zero Pot 

PWR 

ISO ISO 

VOLTS 

OUT 

RANGE 


PWR LED lights when AC power is applied to the DT13 

AC Power 

VAC IN 

AC Power 


DT13-24 Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter 24 VAC 

DT13-120 Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 120 VAC 

–C Option: Factory set to specific input/output (specify when ordering)


UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE 

MODELS UMM-1, UMM-2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Universal Math Module is a unique multifunction microcomputer-based 

interface that can be utilized to solve a variety 

of signal selection and manipulation applications. The Model 

UMM-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line design housing, 

which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional 

DIN rail mounting adapter. The Model UMM-2 is a snap-track 

mounted version, and its operation is identical to the Model 

UMM-1. The UMM models accept up to four analog inputs, 

providing a single analog output according to the operating 

mode selected. This versatile product allows the user to select 

from many operating modes. 

USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES 

• Highest or lowest signal selection 

• Minimum or peak signal hold selection 

• Multiple signal averaging 

• High and low limit control 

• Action reversal 

• Square root extraction (SQ model) 

FEATURES 

• DIP switch-selectable operating modes 

• Voltage or milliamp input signals 


• User-selectable direct or reverse acting 


• Slim-line design housing or snap-track 

mounted models 

• Furnished with detailed setup instructions 


Power 24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA 

24 VAC ±10% @ 120 mA 

Inputs 4 analog: 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 

2-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA 


mA 250� 

V 70 kΩ 

Output 1 analog: 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 

2-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA 

Output loading range 

5 VDC 500Ω min 

10 VDC 1000Ω min 

20 mA 650Ω max 

Action Direct or reverse acting; 


UMM-1 

UMM-1-SQ 

UMM-2 

UMM-2-SQ 

Accuracy ±1% of full scale (except square root) 

Square root 1% FS @ 25% to 100% of range 

1.5% FS @ 10% to 25% of range 

2% FS @ 5% to 10% of range 

5% FS @ 0% to 5% of range 

Operating 

temp 32° to 158°F (0 to 70°C) 


Dimensions 

UMM-1 3.4"H* x 2"W x 4.8"D 

(8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm) 

UMM-2 3.25"H x 4.6"W x 1"D 

(8.3 x 11.8 x 2.54 cm) 


*Add 1.2" (3.0 cm) for mounting tabs 

341 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE 

MODELS UMM-1, UMM-2 

USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES 

High and Low Signal Selection 

The UMM configured for this mode will accept two, three, or four analog 

input signals and output the signal that is either the highest or lowest 

of the input signals. To increase the number of input signals, 

UMM’s may be cascaded by wiring the output of one UMM to the 

input of another UMM. Two UMMs wired in this fashion would allow 

up to 7 input signals. No calibration is required; however, high and low 

limits can be set on the output. 

Minimum and Peak Hold Signal Selection 

In the peak hold operating mode, up to three analog inputs are monitored. 

The highest (peak) input signal is remembered, passed to the 

output, and held until a higher input signal level occurs. In the minimum 

hold mode, up to three inputs are monitored. The lowest input 

signal is remembered, passed to the output, and held until a lower 

input signal level occurs. A contact closure will reset the output signal. 

Multiple Signal Averaging 

The UMM configured for this operating mode will accept two, three, or 

four analog input signals and output a signal that is the average of the 

input signals. To average up to seven inputs, the primary UMM 

accepts four inputs, and its output is wired to the first input of the secondary 

UMM. The output of the secondary UMM is the average of up 

to seven inputs. The sum can be derived by multiplying the signal 

average by the number of inputs. 

High/Low Limit Control and Signal Reversal 

The UMM may be used as a single input limit control, allowing the output 

to be limited to an adjustable upper and/or lower limit. When the 

input signal reaches the upper or lower limit setting, the output will 

remain at that particular limit setting. The high/low limit function can 

also be combined with other operating modes such as high/low signal 

selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging. The output 

of the UMM can be selected to increase as the input increases 

(direct action), or the output can be reversed to decrease as the input 

increases (reverse action). 

Square Root Extraction 

When the UMM is ordered with the optional square root function (SQ 

option), it may be used as a single input square root extractor, providing 

an output proportional to the square root of the input signal. The 

square root function can also be combined with other operating 

modes such as high/low signal selection, peak/minimum hold selection, 

or signal averaging. 

342 

MODEL 

UMM-1 

UMM-2 

WIRING (TYPICAL) 

24 VAC 

or VDC 

mA or V 

Signal 

mA or V 

Signal 

mA or V 

Signal 

mA or V 

Signal 


+ 

– 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

Signal Out 

– 

+ 

M 

O 

D 

E 

IN4 

IN3 

IN2 

IN1 

DIS MA V 

Mode 

DIP 

Switches 

Input 

Jumpers 

Output Jumper 

SIG OUT 

24V PWR 

COM 

SIG IN4 

SIG IN3 

SIG IN2 

SIG IN1 

UMM 

* In the minimum and peak hold operating modes, a 

normally open momentary switch is wired to SIG IN4 

and 24V PWR to allow reset of the output. 

APPLICATION NOTES 

• All input signals wired to the SIG IN terminals 

must be of the same type and range. 

OUT 

HI 

LIM 

LO 

LIM 

• The output signal from the SIG OUT terminal must 

be of the same type and range as the input signals. 

• Always disable (jumper to DIS position) any input 

that is not to be used. 

DESCRIPTION 

Universal math module enclosed in slim-line housing 

Universal math module snap-track mounted 

OPTIONS (factory installed only) 

SQ Square root extractor 

47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UMM-1 and UMM-1-SQ only) 

Example: UMM-1-SQ-47 Universal math module with square root option and DIN rail 

mounting adapter


SETPOINT CONTROLLER 

MODEL PXZ4 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PXZ4 Setpoint Controller is one of the most technically 

advanced instruments in the industrial and commercial 

markets today. It is also one of the least expensive controllers 

of its kind. Through the use of a specially designed Fuji microprocessor, 

the Model PXZ4 incorporates the latest technology 

for controlling applications. With simple, finger-tip programming 

from the front panel, the operator can tailor the operation 

of the controller quickly and easily. By automatically setting 

proportional band, integral (reset) time, and derivative (rate) 

time by means of the autotuning function, control parameter 

guesswork is eliminated. In addition, this controller employs 

Fuji's patented fuzzy logic algorithms. The Model PXZ4 can 

learn processes, using the PID parameters as a starting point. 

This intelligence allows the process to reach its setpoint in the 

shortest time possible while virtually eliminating overshoot. 

FEATURES 

• For use in almost any type single-loop control 

application 

• PID control or fuzzy logic control 

• Manual or autotuning 

• Programmable control action, reverse or direct 

• Four-digit, LED indication of the process variable 

and setpoint 

• Output status indication 

• Fault indication of input sensor 

• Selectable indication resolution 


Input 

Current 4-20 mA DC, impedance: 250� with 

external resistor 

Voltage 1-5 VDC, impedance: 450 k� min. 

Scaling range -1999 to 9999 

Sampling cycle 0.5 sec 

Filter 0-900.0 sec, in 0.1 sec steps 

Output 

Current 4-20 mA DC, 600� max 

Control type PID control or fuzzy logic control, 

manual or autotuning 

Proportional band 0% to 999.9% in 0.1% steps 

Integral time 0 to 3200 sec in 1 sec steps 

Derivative time 0% to 999.9 sec in 1 sec steps 

Action Direct or reverse, programmable 

Indication 

PV/SV display Process/setpoint variable, changeable 

(red LED display, four digits) 

Status display Control output 

Span of display -1999 to 9999 (programmable) 

• Digital filtering to suppress electrical noise 

• Two-level, menu-driven format for easy 

programming 

• Nonvolatile memory, no battery required 

• Input: 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC; Output: 4-20 mA 

• 1/16 DIN package 

• Attractive black plastic housing 

• NEMA 4X faceplate 

• 85-264 VAC power supply 

Indication accuracy ±0.5% full scale ±1 digit @ 73°F 

Setting Eight push buttons on front panel 

Setting accuracy 0.1% full scale 

Power supply 85-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Power consumption 10 VA @ 120 VAC 

Memory Nonvolatile, no battery required 

Diagnostics Monitored by watchdog timer 

Noise reduction Normal mode (50/60 Hz): 

50 dB or more 

Common mode (50/60 Hz): 

140 dB or more 

Enclosure ABS plastic, black, 1/16 DIN 

Front panel: NEMA 4X 

Mounting Flush panel or surface mount 

Termination 8-pin socket 



Ambient humidity 90% or less RH noncondensing 



File #E131280; CE certified 

343 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS




MODEL PXZ4 

APPLICATIONS 

Scalable 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC input 

allows monitoring of the following: 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 

• Air flow 

• Water flow 

• Any 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC transmitter 

within a range of -1999 to 9999 

INSTALLATION 

344 

4-20 mA output allows control 

of the following: 

• Valve actuators 

• Damper actuators 

• Variable speed drives 

• Resistance transducers 

• I/P transducers 

• Step controllers 

The controller should be installed as far away as possible from any device generating high frequency noise. Input signal and power 

cables connected to the instrument should be wired away from power line and load line to minimize inductive noise. The instrument 

power cable should be twisted to avoid noise. 

The following guidelines for location should also be observed: 

1. Do not install in a location with corrosive gases (sulfuric gas, ammonia, etc.). 

2. Do not install in a location subject to vibration, impact, water, or high temperatures. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.89 

(4.80) 

WIRING 

4-20 mA 

Transmitter 

1.89 

(4.80) 

C 

PV 

SV 

H L 

% 

PV/SV SEL DATA ENT 

+ 

– 

+ – 

PXZ-4 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

3 

0.28 

(0.71) 

250 Resistor (included) 

Install for 4-20 mA transmitter; 

remove for 1-5 VDC transmitter. 

4-20 mA 

Control Output 

– 

2 

+ 

1 

+ – 

4 5 

+ – 

8 

6 

7 

3.66 

(9.30) 2.8 

(7.15) 

Terminals 2 and 5 

are internally 

common 

Power Supply 

85-264 VAC 

50/60 HZ 

1.76 

(4.48) 


ENGINEERING LABELS INCLUDED 

°F 

°C 

%RH 

g/min 

psig 

in H2O 

feet 

ppm 

rpm 

Primary (Setpoint) Menu 

CFM 

ft 2 

cm 2 

mA 

Hz 

ohms 

mbar 

gal 

scfm 

Panel Cutout Dimensions 

1.77" square (4.50) 

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 

SV - Main setpoint 

P - Proportional band 

I - Integral (reset) time 

d - Derivative (rate) time 

AT - Autotuning command 

LoC - Parameter security lockout 


PXZ4 Setpoint controller 

SR2P-06 Eight-pin socket, DIN rail/surface mount 

ATXINS Hooded solder type socket for flush panel mounting 

VAC 

pH 

VDC 

g/h 

kg/h 

m/s 

m3 

bar 

and others 

Note: Bracket for flush 

panel mounting is 

included with 

PXZ4. Order 

ATXINS socket 

separately. 

Secondary (System) Menu 

P-n1 - Action, direct or reverse 

P-df - Input digital filter 

P-SL - Lower value of input range 

P-SU - Upper value of input range 

P-dP - Decimal point position 

PVOF - Input value offset 

FUZY - Fuzzy logic control switch 

dSP1-7 - Parameter mask



MODEL UCM-420A 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCM-420A is a low-cost microprocessor-based 

Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller that may be used for a 

wide variety of control applications. All setup and programming 

is done by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers on the Model 

UCM-420A. Setpoints may be local and/or remote. The output 

may be direct or reverse acting. 

FEATURES 

• PI control 

• DIP switch/jumper programming 

• Selectable throttling range 



• Setpoint potentiometer on unit 

• Six-hour memory on loss of power 


• Optional setpoint potentiometer with 

stainless steel wall plate (UCM-SPA) 

MODES OF OPERATION 

Setpoint Controller 

The UCM-420A input monitors the process being controlled. 

This input may be a 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC signal from a pressure 

sensor, flow transmitter, temperature sensor, etc., or 

an input from a Precon Type III temperature thermistor. 

Then, the UCM-420A provides a 4-20 mA PI output signal 

to control a valve, VFD, damper, etc., based on a setpoint 

as described below. 

1. Local setpoint controller – The potentiometer mounted 

on the unit may be used to control the setpoint. The 

local setpoint may also be a UCM-SPA setpoint potentiometer, 

the setpoint option of a Precon Model ST-S3E- 

XA temperature sensor - a 4-20 mA signal or a 1-5 VDC 

signal. 

2. Remote setpoint controller – In this mode, the setpoint 

signal may be a 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, or time-based 

pulse-width signal from a BAS controller. 

3. Remote setpoint controller with local adjustment – 

The UCM-420A accepts a remote setpoint signal as 

described above in #2. Then, a local setpoint signal, as 

described in #1, may be used to adjust the setpoint. The 

local setpoint will have authority to adjust the setpoint 

±12.5% of the input range. If the local setpoint is from a 

Precon ST-S3E-XA, it will have authority to adjust the 

setpoint ±9.4% of the input range. 



24 VDC +15%, -10% @ 65 mA max 

Remote setpoint input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, PWM or 

multiplexed PWM 

Local setpoint input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, three-wire 

potentiometer or Precon two-wire 

potentiometer (ST-S3E-XA) 


0.59-2.93 sec 



Output burden 650Ω max 

UCM-420A UCM-SPA 

4. Output expander – The UCM-420A may be operated in 

a multiplexed pulse-width modulation mode (PWM) so 

that one BAS output may control up to eight groups of 

UCM-420As, with each group able to have a different 

setpoint. Each UCM-420A may also have local setpoint 

adjustment as described in #3. 

Sample and Hold 

The UCM-420A may be used to monitor a 4-20 mA or 1-5V 

control signal. If the signal being monitored is lost, the 

UCM-420A will hold the last valid value for the signal until 

the signal returns. On a power loss, the value of the signal 

is remembered up to six hours. 

Pulse Width to 4-20 mA Converter (single or multiplexed) 

The UCM-420A may be used to convert a time-based 

pulse-width AC or DC signal to a 4-20 mA output. By using 

the multiplexed mode, multiple UCM-420As may be controlled 

by one BAS output. 

4-20 mA Signal Generator 

If the device to be controlled by the UCM-420A needs to be 

calibrated before the system is started up, the UCM-420A 

may be used to generate a 4-20 mA output in one mA 

increments. 

Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC or 

Precon Type III thermistor 

(Thermistor range 50° to 90°F) 

Input impedance 250Ω (mA), 10,000Ω (voltage) 

Accuracy ±1% 



Remote setpoint pot UCM-SPA 0-10 k� 

Weight 

UCM-420A 1.3 lb (0.61 kg) 

UCM-SPA 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) 

345 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS





WIRING 

346 

UCM-420A DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 

MUX 

B3 B4 B5 ADDR 

TIME 

B6 B7 B8 BASE 

PROP 

A6 A7 A8 T.R. 

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2.65 0 0 0 10% 

0 0 1 2 0 0 1 5.2 0 0 1 20% 

0 1 0 3 0 1 0 12.85 0 1 0 35% 

0 1 1 4 0 1 1 25.6 0 1 1 50% 

1 0 0 5 1 X X .59-2.93 1 0 0 65% 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

6 

7 

RESET 

A4 A5 PER MIN 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

80% 

90% 

1 1 1 8 0 0 OFF 1 1 1 100% 

"1" MEANS 

TURN SWITCH ON 

0 1 

1 0 

1 1 

0.5 

1 

2 

"0" MEANS 

TURN SWITCH OFF 

SWITCH OFF SWITCH ON 

A3 REVERSE ACTING 

DIRECT ACTING 

A2 BOTH OFF >> REMOTE SETPT LOCAL SETPT ENABLE 

A1 SAMPLE AND HOLD MODE REMOTE SETPT ENABLE 

B1 BOTH OFF >> ANALOG PWM REM SETPT SGLE UNIT 

B2 REMOTE SET POINT PWM REM SETPT MUX MODE 


SETPOINT SETPOINT 

LOCAL SETPOINT WIRING OPTIONS 

Local SPT Pot + 

Local SPT Input 

Local SPT Pot – 




Common 




Common 

(black) 

(green) 

(red) 

Increase 

Setpoint 

MODEL 

UCM-420A 

Increase 

Setpoint 

+ 

– 

A 

B 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

STATUS 

LED 

PWM 

INPUT 

PWM 

INPUT 

REM SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT + 

LOC SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT – 

FEEDBK 

INPUT 

24 PWR 

COMMON 

MA SIG 

OUTPUT 


(5K to 50K MAX) Local Setpoint 

(10K Factory Installed) 

Local Setpoint 

4-20 MA or 1-5V 

Two-Wire Potentiometer Local 

Setpoint 

(XA Option on Precon ST-S3E-XA 

Thermistor) 

SEE 

LOCAL 

SETPOINT 

WIRING 

BELOW 

in 

(cm) 


PWM Contacts 

+ 24 VAC/VDC PWM Signal from BAS 

– (only if remote setpoint is PWM) 

+ 4-20 mA or 1-5V Remote Setpoint Signal 

– (only if remote setpoint is analog signal) 

+ 

– 

4-20 mA, 1-5V or Thermistor Input Signal 

– 4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to 

+ Controlled Device 

+ 

– 

24 VAC/VDC Power 

DIMENSIONS 

Set Point Knob 

Side View 


DESCRIPTION 

Setpoint controller with local setpoint potentiometer 

OPTIONS 

47 DIN rail mount (must be factory installed) 

0.7 

(1.78) 

4.8 

(12.19) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Optional 

DIN Rail 

Adapter 

2.0 

(5.08) 

UCM-420A 47 Example: UCM-420A-47 Setpoint controller with DIN rail mounting 

Remote 

Setpoint 

(if used) 


UCM-SPA Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 kΩ, three-wire pot on S.S. plate for remote mounting 

PCM Air pressure controller 

3.4 

(8.64) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

4.6 

(11.68)

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCS-121 is a solid-state device used to control 

on/off type loads in HVAC and lighting systems from an 

analog current or voltage signal. The Model UCS-121 can 

be used to convert an analog current or voltage signal from 

a BAS controller or sensor/transmitter into a SPDT digital 

output. The Model UCS-121 is provided with a mounting 

track or in a hub-mount enclosure for easy installation. 

FEATURES 

• One stage of relay control, SPDT 

• Voltage or current input 


• LED indication of relay status 

• Adjustable relay setpoint 

• Adjustable relay differential 

• Snap-track or hub enclosure 

• Jumper-enabled time constant 

OPERATION 


SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE 

MODEL UCS-121 

The Model UCS-121 accepts a 0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15V input 

signal to produce a single-stage relay output. The relay has a 

single-turn potentiometer adjustment to set the trip point. The 

relay differential is factory set to 0.5 mA or 0.375V but can be 

easily adjusted in the field using the single-turn differential 

adjustment potentiometer on the Model UCS-121. With the 

action jumper in the Direct DIR position, the relay will energize 

when the input signal increases to the setting of the setpoint 

pot SPT and will de-energize when the input signal decreases 

below the setting of the differential pot DIF. With the action 

jumper in the Reverse REV position, the relay will de-energize 

when the input signal increases to the setting of the SPT and 

will energize when the input signal decreases below the setting 

of the DIF. To enable a 30-second time constant, place 

the T.C. jumper in the DLY position. The NODLY position 

removes the time constant. 


Supply voltage 24 VAC ± 10% @ 50 mA 

24 VDC ± 10% @ 25 mA 

Input signal 0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC 


Output One SPDT relay 

Relay rating 5A @ 120 VAC 

Accuracy/ 

Repeatability ±1% 

Setpoint 

adjustment Single-turn potentiometer 

Time constant 30 seconds, jumper enabled 

Input impedance 250� (mA input) 

10 k� (V input) 

WIRING 

UCS-121 Hub Enclosure UCS-121 

To 

Controlled 

Load 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC _ 

Signal + 

mA or V _ 

Action Jumper 

T.C. Jumper 

Input Jumper 

Relay N.O. 

Relay 

Common 

Relay N.C. 

DIR REV 

S 

P 

T 

D 

I 

F 

DLY NODLY 

mA V 

RLY 

NO 

RLY 

COM 

RLY 

NC 

24 V 

PWR 

COM 

SIG 

IN 

Relay ON 

LED 

Operating 

temp 32° to 158°F (0 to 70°C) 


Dimensions 

Track mount 3.25''H x 1.5''W x 1.25''D 

(8.24 x 3.8 x 3.2 cm) 

Hub enclosure 4''H x 2.25''W x 1.75''D 

(10.2 x 5.7 x 4.4 cm) 


Relay differential 0.5 mA or 0.375V, factory set- 

tings, adjustable by differential 

potentiometer, 0.2-2V or 0.25-3 mA 

347 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS


CALIBRATION 


SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE 

MODEL UCS-121 

Setup and Calibration 

The UCS-121 can be ordered preset to the application to save time during installation. Specify the -C option for 

factory setup and calibration. The UCS-121 can also be set up and calibrated in the field. 

Input Jumpers 

Set the input jumper for the type of input signal, mA or V, to be used. Set the action jumper for either direct DIR or 

reverse REV action. See Operation for a description of direct and reverse action. 

Setpoint Adjustment 

1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C. 

jumper placed in the NODLY position. 

2. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. 

To read a voltage input, 0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals. 

3. Turn the setpoint pot SPT fully counterclockwise to its minimum position. 

4. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay trip-point. 

5. Turn the setpoint pot clockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the action jumper is in the 

REV reverse position). 

6. Adjust the relay trip point by slowly turning the setpoint pot SPT counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED 

turns on (or turns off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 

7. The relay trip-point is now set. Verify setting by varying the input signal up and down and observing the 

RELAY ON LED. 

8. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant. 

Differential Adjustment 

The relay differential is factory set for 0.5 mA or 0.375V, which should be suitable for most applications without 

requiring any adjustment. If the relay differential must be adjusted, follow these steps: 

1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C. 

jumper placed in the NODLY position. 

2. The relay setpoint should be set prior to adjusting the relay differential. See instructions above. 

3. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. To read a 

voltage input, 0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals. 

4. Adjust the input signal to any value greater than the relay trip-point setting so that the RELAY ON LED turns 

on (or turns off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 

5. Turn the differential pot DIF fully clockwise to its maximum position. 

6. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay differential value. The relay differential value should be equal to the 

setpoint value minus the required relay differential. For example, if the relay setpoint is adjusted for 10V and a 

1V differential is required, the input signal should be adjusted for a differential value of 9V (10V - 1V = 9V). 

7. Turn the differential pot very slowly counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the 

action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 

8. The relay differential is now set. Verify settings by varying the input signal up and down and observing the 

RELAY ON LED. 

9. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant. 

348 



UCS-121 Sequencer control module, single stage 

UCS-121-H Sequencer control module, single stage, hub enclosure 

-C Factory-set custom relay settings (specify trip point, differential, time constant, 

and direct or reverse acting when ordering) 

Example: UCS-121-H-C Single-stage sequencer, hub enclosure, factory-set relay


SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE 

MODEL UCS-221 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCS-221 is a solid-state multistage device 

used for floating/tri-state control of motors, or multistage 

control in HVAC systems from a single analog signal. It 

can be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or 

current-producing sensor. In its base configuration, the 

Model UCS-221 has two relay outputs. Units may be 

daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, 

and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation. 

FEATURES 

• Two stages of relay control 




• Adjustable relay setpoints 

• Adjustable relay differentials 


OPERATION 

The Model UCS-221 accepts a 1-20 mA or 0.75-15V 

input signal to produce a two-stage relay output. Each 

relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to set the 

pull-in point. Relay A can be jumper selected to pull in 

on either a rise or fall in signal. Relay B always pulls in 

on a signal rise. The Model UCS-221 considers an input 

signal below 1 mA or 0.75V to be a loss of signal and 

both relays will de-energize. Multiple Model UCS-221s 

can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from 

one input signal, and any combination of UCS-221s and 

UCS-421s (maximum of eight slave units) can be daisy 

chained. The chain output on slave units produces a DC 

voltage output that can be used for control of electronic 

actuators. 



24 VDC ±10% @ 50 mA 

Input signal 1-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC 


Output 2 SPDT relays 


Accuracy/Repeatability ±1% 

Setpoint adjustment 25-turn potentiometers 

Input impedance 250� (mA input), 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

A 

B 

A B 

Depth: 1.375 

(3.49) 

MODE 

INPUT 

FLT SEQ 

TYPE 

J1 A 

J2 CH 

B 

SET A SET B 

3.5 

(8.89) 

24 V 

POWER 

COMMON 

SIGNAL 

INPUT 

CHAIN 

OUTPUT 

3.25 

(8.25) 


Humidity limit 5% to 95% RH noncondensing 


(8.25 x 8.89 x 3.49 cm) 


Optional enclosure B5 or B7 

Relay differential 0.5 mA or 0.375V 

(adjustable by plug-in 

differential resistors - see 

“Wiring” on next page) 

J3 

J4 

V 

MA 

349 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE 

MODEL UCS-221 

WIRING 

Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national 

and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use 

shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-221 to the controller, shield grounded at the controller. 

TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS 

Other Differential Resistors can be used 

(customer supplied) 

9.1 kΩ = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V 

36.5 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 

54.9 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 

73.2 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V 

24 VAC/VDC 

Signal 

(mA or V) 

350 

+ 

– 

– 

+ 

A 

A 

B 

SETUP / CALIBRATION 

MODE 

INPUT 

FLT SEQ 

TYPE 

J1 A 

J2 CH 

B 

B 

Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%) 

18.2 kΩ = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied) 

See Table 1 for other differentials. 

SET A SET B 

24V 

POWER 

COMMON 

J3 

J4 

SIGNAL 

INPUT 

CHAIN 

OUTPUT 

V 

MA 

A 

A 

B 

Factory Relay Settings 

Relay A: 16 mA, 12V 

Relay B: 12 mA, 9V 

MODE 

INPUT 

FLT SEQ 

TYPE 

J1 A 

J2 CH 

B 

B 

SET A SET B 

24V 

POWER 

COMMON 

Jumper J2 should be 

in chain (CH) position 

when using UCS-221 

as a slave unit. 

J3 

J4 

SIGNAL 

INPUT 

CHAIN 

OUTPUT 

V 

MA 

Note: Chain out is used to connect the 

master unit to the first slave. 

Additional slaves are connected 

from signal input to signal input. 

24V Power 

Terminal 

Common 

Terminal 

Signal Input 

Terminal 

A B 

CW CCW COM 

Relay Contact Wiring for 

Floating/Tri-state Control 

(set mode Jumper J1 in FLT position) 

Connections to 

UCS-221 or 

Slave Units 

(Max eight units) 

1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows: 

Mode jumper (J1) - In FLT position, relay A energizes on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, relay A energizes on an 

increase in signal. Relay B always energizes on an increase in signal. 

Input jumpers (J2, J3, J4) - Select J4 mA position for a 1-20 mA input, or J3 V position for a 0.75-15 VDC input. 

If the UCS-221 is used as a slave control, place the bottle plug jumper in the J2 chain position. 

2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 1-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a 

voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT (+) terminals. 

3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay A. 

4. If relay A’s LED is on, turn setpoint adjustment (SET A) clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay A has mode jumper J1 in FLT 

position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5. 

5. Adjust relay A pull-in point by turning the setpoint adjustment (SET A) counterclockwise (clockwise if relay A has mode 

jumper J1 in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (Setscrews A and B are 25-turn potentiometers.) 

6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relay B using setpoint adjustment (SET B). 

7. When using a 1-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0.7 to 12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal. 

This can be used to control electronic actuators with an impedance of 2 k� or larger. Connections should be made between 

CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON(-). If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input. 



UCS-221 Sequencer control module, two relay outputs, field calibrated 

UCS-221-C Sequencer control module, factory-set custom relay settings 

(Specify settings when ordering.)


SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE 

MODEL UCS-421 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCS-421 is a solid-state multistage device 

used for floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes or multistage 

control in HVAC systems from a single analog signal. 

The Model UCS-421 can be used to obtain a digital 

output from a voltage- or current-producing sensor. Four 

relay outputs are in its base configuration. Units may be 

daisy chained to provide additional stages of control and 

are supplied with mounting track for easy installation. 

FEATURES 

• Four stages of relay control 







OPERATION 

The Model UCS-421 accepts a 1-20 mA or 0.75-15V 

input signal to produce four stages of relay output. Each 

relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to set the 

pull-in point. Relays A and D can be jumper selected to 

pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. Relays B and C 

always pull in on a signal rise. The Model UCS-421 considers 

an input signal below 1 mA or 0.75V to be a loss 

of signal and all relays will de-energize. Multiple Model 

UCS-421s and can be daisy chained to operate additional 

stages from one input signal, and any combination of 

units (maximum of eight slave units) can be daisy 

chained. The chain output on slave units produces a DC 

voltage output that can be used for control of electronic 

actuators. 



24 VDC ±10% @ 100 mA 

Input signal 1-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC 


Output 4 SPDT relays 




Input impedance 250� (mA input), 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

MODE 

FLT SEQ 

Depth: 1.375 

(3.49) 

A B C D 

5.5 

(13.97) 

MODE 

FLT SEQ 

A B 

C 

D 

H3 CH 

H4 V 

H5 MA 

3.25 

(8.25) 




(8.25 x 13.97 x 3.49 cm) 


Optional enclosure B7 




"Wiring" on next page) 

24V 

POWER 

COMMON 

INPUT 

TYPE 

SIGNAL 

INPUT 

CHAIN 

OUTPUT 

351 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE 

MODEL UCS-421 

WIRING 

Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with 

national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit 

board damage. Use shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-421 to the controller, shield 

grounded at the controller. 

352 

TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS 

Other Differential Resistors can be used 

(customer-supplied): 

9.1 kΩ = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V 

36.5 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 

54.9 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 

73.2 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V 

Factory Relay Settings 

Relay A: 4 mA, 3V 

Relay B: 6.6 mA, 5V 

Relay C: 9.3 mA, 7V 

Relay D: 12 mA, 9V 

A(D) B(C) 

CW CCW COM 

Relay Contact Wiring 

for Floating/Tri-state 

Control (set mode 

Jumper H1 or H2 in FLT 

position) 


MODE 

FLT SEQ 

MODE 

FLT SEQ 

H1 B A 

C D H2 

A B C D 

A B C D 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 

– 

Signal – 

mA or V + 



See Table 1 for other differentials. 

SIG 

LOSS 

24V 

POWER 

INPUT 

TYPE 

H3 CH 

H4 V 

H5 mA 

COMMON 

SIGNAL 

INPUT 

CHAIN 

OUTPUT 


LED will illuminate upon 

signal loss. 

Jumper H3 should be in chain 

position (CH) when using UCS-421 

as a slave unit. 

Chain Output is used to connect the master 

unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are 

connected from signal input to signal input. 

24V Power Terminal 

Common Terminal 

Signal Input Terminal 


UCS-421 Sequencer control module - four relay outputs, field calibrated 

UCS-421-C Sequencer control module - factory set custom relay settings 

(Specify settings when ordering.) 

Connections to UCS-221 

or UCS-421 slave units 

(max eight units) 

1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows: 

Mode jumpers (H1, H2) - In FLT position, relays A and D energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, relays A and 

D energize on an increase in signal. relays B and C always energize on an increase in signal. 

Input jumpers (H3, H4, H5) - Select H5 mA position for a 1-20 mA input or H4 V position for a 0.75-15 VDC input. If the 

UCS-421 is used as a slave unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the H3 chain position. 

2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 1-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a 

voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals. 

3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay A. 

4. If relay A’s LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if relay A or D has mode jumper in FLT position) 

until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5. 

5. Adjust relay A pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay A or D has mode jumper in 

FLT position) until the relay energizes. (Setscrews A, B, C, and D are 25-turn potentiometers.) 

6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays B, C, and D using corresponding setpoint adjustments. 

7. When using a 1-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0.7-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal. 

This can be used to control electronic actuators with an impedance of 2 kΩ or larger. Connections should be made between 

CHAIN OUTPUT(+) and COMMON(-). If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.


SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE 

MODEL UCS-621 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCS-621 is a solid-state device used for 

multi-stage control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers 

or chillers, or floating/tri-state control of VAV boxes 

from a single analog signal. The Model UCS-621 can 

be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or current 

producing sensor, and it is supplied with mounting 

track for easy installation. 

FEATURES 

• Six stages of relay control 







OPERATION 

The Model UCS-621 accepts a 0.5-20 mA or 0.375-15 

VDC signal to produce up to six stages of relay output. 

Each relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to 

set the pull-in point. Each of the six relays is jumper 

selectable to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. 

Individual relay differential is easily adjusted by using 

different value plug-in differential resistors. 



24 VDC ±10% @ 150 mA 

Input signal 0.5-20 mA or 0.375-15 VDC 


Output Six SPDT relays 




Input impedance 250Ω (mA input), 

30 kΩ (V input) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

SIG 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Depth: 1.375 

(3.49) 

1 2 3 4 5 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

6.0 

(15.24) 

Operating temp range 32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C) 



(8.25 x 15.24 x 3.49 cm) 





“Wiring” on next page) 

V 

MA 

6 

3.25 

(8.25) 

353 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS



SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE 

MODEL UCS-621 

WIRING 

Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national and 

local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use shielded 

#18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-621 to the controller, shield grounded at the controller. 

To Controlled Devices 

354 

SIG 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

= Increase in Signal 

= Decrease in Signal 

Example: 

1-3 Set to energize 

on increase in signal; 

4-6 Set to energize 

on decrease in signal 


Set jumpers for relay to energize 

on a decrease or increase in signal 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Signal LED - on 

when signal is 

present 



See Table 1 for other differentials 

Table 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS 

Other differential resistors 

can be used (customer supplied) 

18.2 kΩ = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 

27.4 kΩ = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 

36.5 kΩ = 2.0 mA or 1.5V 

Signal 

mA or V 

V 

mA 

mA or V 

Input Jumper 

– 

+ 

SIG IN (+) 

COM (-) 

24V 

Relay LED - On when 

relay is energized - one 

LED per relay 

25-Turn Adjustment 

Pot - one for each relay 

factory set to 20 mA 

(all relays) 

+ 

– 

24 VAC/VDC 

Power 

Set jumpers to desired position as follows: 

1. SIG jumpers (1-6) - In the position, each relay energizes on a decrease in signal. In the position, each relay 

energizes on an increase in signal. 

Input jumpers (V, mA) - Select mA position for a 0.5-20 mA input or V position for a 0.375-15 VDC input. 

2. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN (+) terminal and the 0.5-20 mA (+) signal to read a current input. To 

read a voltage input, connect across the COM (-) and SIG IN (+) terminals. The SIG LED will illuminate when a 

signal is present. 

3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay 1. 

4. If relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if SIG jumper is set to “decrease in 

signal”) until it de-energizes. If Relay 1 LED is off, proceed to step 5. 

5. Adjust relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if relay SIG jumper is 

set to “decrease in signal”) until the relay energizes. (Setscrews 1-6 are 25-turn potentiometers.) 

6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays 2-6 using corresponding setpoint adjustments. 



UCS-621 Sequencer control module - six relay outputs, field calibrated 

UCS-621-C Sequencer control module - factory set custom relay settings 

(Specify settings when ordering.)


MULTIFUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER 

MODELS UMX-4, UMX-8 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model UMX-8 is a unique microcomputer-based 

multifunction interface that expands the input or output 

capability of building automation controllers. It has eight 

SPDT output relays that provide on/off control from a 

jumper-selectable PWM current or voltage input signal. 

The sequence of operation can be easily selected by 

DIP switches. A dual mode allows two Model UMX-8s 

to be controlled in sequence from a single input signal. 

HOA switches allow for manual override of each relay 

output. Feedback and LEDs provide status indication of 

the Model UMX-8. 

The Model UMX-4 provides four SPDT output relays. All 

jumper positions and DIP switch settings are identical to 

the Model UMX-8. The operation of the Model UMX-4 

is identical to relays 1-4 on the Model UMX-8. 

Feedback and LEDs provide status indication. 

STANDARD CONTROL SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS 

Multiplexed Relay Output Expander - Provides up to 

16 relay outputs expansion from one BAS output 

Multiplexed Input Expander - Provides up to 16 inputs 

expansion from one BAS output and one BAS input 

RTU or AHU Controller - Provides multistage heating 

and cooling sequences with economizer 

Sequencer - Up to 16 stages of sequential control 

Custom Sequences - Consult Trane for details 

APPLICATION 

The Model UMX is recommended for use only with BAS 

controllers programmable to issue discrete PWM, current, 

or voltage signal commands. For sequential relay 

control from a varying analog current or voltage signal, 

use a UCS sequencer module. 



UMX-4 24 VAC ±10% @ 210 mA max 

24 VDC ±10% @ 90 mA max 

UMX-8 24 VAC ±10% @ 350 mA max 

24 VDC ±10% @ 150 mA max 

Input signal PWM, 0-20 mA, 0-5V, 0-10V, 

0-15V, jumper selectable 


Current 250� 

Voltage 46.4 k� min 

Output relays 

UMX-4 4 SPDT, 5A @ 24 VAC/VDC 

UMX-8 8 SPDT, 5A @ 24 VAC/VDC 

FEATURES 

UMX-4 

UMX-8 

• Four or eight SPDT relay outputs 

• HOA switches 


• Field-selectable functions 

• Output status feedback 

• Override indication 

• Field-selectable PWM current or voltage 

inputs 

• Pull-apart terminal blocks 

Override output Transistor switch, 

status 30 VDC @ 100 mA max 

Status feedback 

UMX-4 One output, 1-5V for relays 1-4 

UMX-8 Two outputs, 1-5V for relays 

1-4 and 1-5V for relays 5-8 

Feedback load 

current 3 mA max per output 



Dimensions 

(UMX-4 & UMX-8) 3.25"H x 7"W x 1.56"D 

(8.25 x 17.78 x 3.96 cm) 


355 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS





OPERATION 

Single and Dual UMX Control 

The UMX can be operated in both a single and dual operating mode. In the single mode, one UMX is controlled from a single current/voltage 

or PWM signal. In the dual mode, two UMXs are controlled in sequence, providing up to 16 relay outputs from a single 

current/voltage or PWM input. This dual UMX control is not available with all control sequences. Refer to the control 

sequences in Tables 2 and 3 for availability. If single UMX control is used, refer to Table 2 for DIP switch settings. For dual UMX 

control, refer to Table 3. 

Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 

To control the UMX from a PWM signal, put the input selection jumper on the UMX in the PW position. Set the operating mode DIP 

switches (Tables 2 or 3) as required. Refer to the control sequence Tables 4-7 for time base and control sequence information. 

Current/Voltage Input (ANA) 

The UMX can be controlled from a current or voltage input. To 

operate in this mode, set the input selection jumpers on the UMX 

as shown in Table 1. 

Set the operating mode DIP switches (See Tables 2 or 3) as 

required. Refer to the Control Sequence Tables 4-7 for time base 

and control sequence information. 

OPERATING MODE (DIP SWITCHES 1, 2, 3, & 4) 

TABLE 2. SINGLE UNIT UMX CONTROL 

DIP SWITCHES 

PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT 1 2 3 4 

X 0 0 0 1 

X X X 0 1 0 0 

X X X 0 1 0 1 

X X X 0 1 1 0 

X X X 0 1 1 1 

PWM Pulse Width Modulated Input Signal 

ANA Current/Voltage Input Signal 

L1 Level 1 UMX (Dual UMX Mode) 

L2 Level 2 UMX (Dual UMX Mode) 

HSL Hold Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage) 

CSL Clear Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage) 

SVT Short Signal Validation Time (Current/Voltage) 

LVT Long Signal Validation Time ((Current/Voltage) 

L1, L2 - UMX Levels - Dual UMX Mode Only 

In the Dual UMX mode, two UMXs respond in sequence to a single input signal. Using the DIP switch settings shown in Table 3, 

assign the first UMX to Level 1 (L1) and the second UMX to Level 2 (L2). Dual UMX control is available in most current/voltage 

and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in Dual UMX mode. 

HSL, CSL - Signal Loss Hold - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only 

When using a current/voltage input, the UMX can be programmed to either hold all relays in their current state (HSL) or turn all 

relays off (CSL) upon a loss of the input signal. Use DIP switch settings shown in Table 2 or Table 3 to program this feature. 

SVT, LVT - Signal Validation Time - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only 

When varying a current/voltage input signal to the UMX, it is necessary for the input signal to remain at the desired value for a 

set length of time. This prevents other relays on the UMX from energizing while the input signal is changing values. This set 

length of time, or validation time, can be selected for either 1 second (SVT) or 3 seconds (LVT). Use the DIP switch settings in 

Table 2 or 3 to select the validation time. 

356 

TABLE 1. CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT JUMPERS 

Current/Voltage input 0-20 mA 0-5V 0-10V 0-15V 

AN MA 5V 10V 15V 

TABLE 3. DUAL UMX CONTROL 

DIP SWITCHES 

PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT 1 2 3 4 

X X 0 0 1 0 

X X 0 0 1 1 

X X X X 1 0 0 0 

X X X X 1 0 0 1 

X X X X 1 0 1 0 

X X X X 1 0 1 1 

X X X X 1 1 0 0 

X X X X 1 1 0 1 

X X X X 1 1 1 0 

X X X X 1 1 1 1 

DIP Switches 

0 Off 

1 On




CONTROL SEQUENCES (DIP SWITCHES 5, 6, 7, AND 8) 

Relay status 

0 = Command OFF 

1 = Command ON 

X = No change of state 

TABLE 4. 

OUTPUT 

EXPANDER 

(each relay 

indepen-dently 

controllable) 

For current/voltage 

signal, DIP switches 

5, 6, 7, and 8 are 

OFF, OFF, ON, OFF. 

For PWM signal, use 

OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF. 

TABLE 5. 

4 or 8 INPUT 

EXPANDER 



5, 6, 7, and 8 are 

OFF, ON, OFF, ON . 


OFF, OFF, ON, ON. 

TABLE 6. 

4 or 8 STAGE 

SEQUENCER 



5, 6, 7, and 8 are 

OFF, ON, OFF, OFF. 


OFF, OFF, ON, OFF. 

TABLE 7. 

RTU 

CONTROLLER 

3 HEAT, 3 COOL, 

FAN, ECONOMIZER 



5, 6, 7, and 8 are 

OFF, ON, ON, OFF 


OFF, ON, OFF, OFF. 

DISCRETE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE COMMANDS PWM (SEC) 

mA 5V 10V 15V 200 mSec Minimum 

Delay Between 

Pulses 

Note: Each input command may vary to approximately 

50% of the change to the next highest or lowest 

command and still be considered valid. 

Contact Trane for other available control sequences. 

SINGLE* UMX RELAYS 

U M X - 8 

UMX-4 

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

3.5 0.75 1.50 2.25 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.0 X X X X X X X 1 

5.0 1.25 2.50 3.75 1.5 X X X X X X X 0 

6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 2.0 X X X X X X 1 X 

7.0 1.75 3.50 5.25 2.5 X X X X X X 0 X 

8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 3.0 X X X X X 1 X X 

9.0 2.25 4.50 6.75 3.5 X X X X X 0 X X 

10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 4.0 X X X X 1 X X X 

11.0 2.75 5.50 8.25 4.5 X X X X 0 X X X 

12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 5.0 X X X 1 X X X X 

13.0 3.25 6.50 9.75 5.5 X X X 0 X X X X 

14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 6.0 X X 1 X X X X X 

15.0 3.75 7.50 11.25 6.5 X X 0 X X X X X 

16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 7.0 X 1 X X X X X X 

17.0 4.25 8.50 12.75 7.5 X 0 X X X X X X 

18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 8.0 1 X X X X X X X 

19.0 4.75 9.50 14.25 8.5 0 X X X X X X X 

20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 9.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

*Dual UMX control available in PWM mode only. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode. 

4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 

10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 3.0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 

12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 4.0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 

14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 5.0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 

16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 6.0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 

18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 7.0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 

20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 8.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

*Dual UMX control available in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in “Dual UMX” mode. 

4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 3.0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 

12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 4.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 

14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 5.0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 

16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 6.0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 

18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 7.0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 8.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 


4.0 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

6.0 1.50 3.00 4.50 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 

8.0 2.00 4.00 6.00 3.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 

10.0 2.50 5.00 7.50 4.0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 

12.0 3.00 6.00 9.00 5.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 

14.0 3.50 7.00 10.50 6.0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 

16.0 4.00 8.00 12.00 7.0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 

18.0 4.50 9.00 13.50 8.0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 

20.0 5.00 10.00 15.00 9.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 


357 

OUTPUT TRANSDUCERS





WIRING 

Override Switches: Apply 24V to the 

UMX for the override switches to 

function in the HAND position. 

FEEDBACK 

358 

LED Indication: 

Relay LEDs (red): 

on when relay is 

energized in Auto 

or Hand position 

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

HAND 

OVERRIDE 

OFF 

PWM 

AUTO 

POWER 

Input jumpers shown 

jumpered for 0-10V input 

LED Indication: 

Power (green): On when power is present 

PWM (yellow): On when PWM signal is present 

Override (red): On when any override switch is 

out of the Auto position 

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

UMX-8 

10V 

5V 

MA 

PW AN 15V 

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 

FBK2 

FBK1 

24V PWR 

COM 

PWM 

PWM 

ANA 

OVERRIDE 

24V 

Note: 


R 

V39ZA1 Varistor 

Any outputs driving an external relay or an inductive load 

should have a varistor installed at the relay as shown. 

Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 5-8 

Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 1-4 

24 VAC/VDC Power Supply 

PWM BAS Controller Contacts (if PWM is used) 

PWM terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. 

Contacts may be wired in series to either PWM terminal. 

Any 24V source can be used to power the PWM signal. 

Current or Voltage Signal (if used) 


UMX-4 Four-stage multifunction expander with HOA switches 

UMX-8 Eight-stage multifunction expander with HOA switches 

Override Output, Transistor Switch 30 VDC @ 100 mA max 

switch closes to common when any override switch is 

out of the Auto position. 

Note: If driving a DC relay, a reverse connection diode is 

recommended across the relay coil (such as 1N4004). 

The UMX-8 has two feedback voltage output circuits labeled FBK1 (relay outputs 1-4) and FBK2 (relay outputs 5-8). The UMX-4 

has one feedback voltage output circuit labeled FBK1 (relay outputs 1-4). When a relay output is energized, the following voltage 

is added to the feedback output: 

FBK1 - Feedback Circuit #1 

Relays 1,2,3,4 Off 1.0V 

Relay 1 On Add 0.27V 




FBK2 - Feedback Circuit #2 

Relays 5,6,7,8 Off 1.0V 





Example: If outputs 1 and 3 are energized and 2 and 4 are de-energized, the voltage output on FBK1 will be 2.34V 

(1V + 0.27V +1.07V = 2.34V). The same would be true for FBK2 if relay outputs 5 and 7 were energized, 

and 6 and 8 were de-energized.

LIGHTING CONTROLS

PRODUCTS 

Check out our NEW Photo 

Controls on page 375! 

SERVICES 

Create custom panels to 

your specs for your lighting 

controls. 

SOLUTIONS 

Use our selection to 

Expand Your Product 

Offering and Lower 

Your own lighting Costs! 



LIGHT SENSOR 

CW — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 

EM — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 

MK7-B — Ambient Light Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 

PN — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 

PSR-1/PSR-1-T — Photo Sensitive Resistor Light Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 

TB — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 

TL — Photo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 

LIGHTING CONTACTORS 

RR-7/RR-9 — Lighting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 

SH17 — Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 

TR Series — Retrofit Lighting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 

LIGHTING PANELS 

BLV – User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 

L28 — Mini-Lighting Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 

L3500 — Lighting Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 

L-KIT — Lighting Panel Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 

E-LINK — Communication Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 

LP-PK — Programmers Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 

PIL-1 — Pulse Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 

RCB-8 — Relay Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 

TI4500 Series — Telephone Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 

OCCUPANCY SENSORS 

B120-E-P — Power Pack, 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 



B347-D-P — Power Pack, 347 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 

CX-100/CI-200 — Occupancy Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 

CI-24 — Occupancy Sensor, Ceiling Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 

S-120/277/347-E — Slave Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 

WS Series — Occupancy Sensor, Wall Switch Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 

SWITCHES 

SS Series — Sentry Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 

DDN Series — Addressable Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 

LPSW-K — Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 

TIME SWITCH 

93000 Series/TS-200 series — Manual Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 



TRIATEK LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 

L3500 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The L3500 Series Lighting Control Panel provides the 

capability to control high voltage lighting circuits, as well 

as occupancy sensors, light level sensors, momentary 

override switches, and other input devices via a two-wire 

RS-485 network. The UL-listed L3500 Series integrates 

with most building automation systems and is easy to 

install, configure, and commission. 

FEATURES 

• Microprocessor-based controller 

• Up to 120 switch inputs per panel 

• Up to 60 relay outputs per panel 

• Up to 255 panels per network 

• LEDs for group, relay, and system status 

• Direct manual-override switch on each relay 

• Easy, intuitive installation with removable relays 

• Integrated with most BAS networks and open 

protocol networks or used as stand-alone lighting 

control panel 

• Windows ®-based software for easy setup and 

commissioning 

• Programmable inputs, output priorities, flash 

warning, relay energize time, output sequencing, 

and software grouping 

• EPROM and EEPROM diagnostics 

• Flush- or surface-mounted enclosure 

• Removable terminal blocks and electronics panel 


Panel power supply 115/277 VAC ±10%, 60 Hz, 30 VA 

Communications Network ready, two-wire RS-485 

Switch inputs 24 standard, expandable to 120 

dry contact or up to 24 VDC 

momentary or maintained 

Output relays 16, expandable to 60 

SPST mechanically latched 

20A, 120 VAC tungsten 

20A, 277 VAC ballast 

Relay life 2 million+ on/off cycles @ no load 

300,000 on/off cycles @ full load 

Output terminals #14-8 AWG solid or stranded wire 



APPLICATION 

The L3500 Series provides for a flexible, easy to install and 

configure, powerful lighting control system. Panels may 

stand alone, for control of up to 60 lighting circuits, or up to 

255 panels may be networked together for added capacity. 

The L3500 Series panels may also be fully integrated into 

most Building Automation Systems, including direct connect 

integration (no interface device needed) into Johnson 

Controls Metasys BAS systems. The Model E-LINK network 

interface device is required for integration into the following 

systems and protocols: Alerton Technologies, Andover 

Controls, Automated Logic, BACnet, Modbus, Delta 

Controls, Honeywell, Siemens Building Technologies, 

Teletrol Systems, and Trane Company. 

The Model LP-PK lighting control panel setup software is 

used to address the panel, build the lighting zones, and configure 

the inputs and outputs. The BLV BASnet ® LightView 

user interface tool can be used for scheduling, monitoring, 

and controlling the L3500 Series. 

System certification Complete system UL-916, CSA, 

CEC, ISO 9001, and New York City 

approved #37908 



16-relay 16"H x 14"W x 4"D* 

(40.6 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) 

32-relay 25"H x 14"W x 4"D* 

(63.5 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) 

48-relay 34"H x 14"W x 4"D* 

(86.4 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) 

60-relay 42"H x 14"W x 4"D* 

(106 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) 

*Add 1.5" to the H and W dimensions for flush-mount installation. 

359 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 

L3500 SERIES 

WIRING 

High Voltage Branch Circuits 

Connect branch circuits to the relay terminal blocks according to the wiring layout. 

Do not exceed 20A per circuit. In cases where dual high voltages are required, 

they may be isolated using the left and right high voltage compartments. 

360 

Off On On Off 

1 

2 

3 

5 

7 

9 

11 

13 

15 

RS485 

(-)(+)(G) 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12 

14 

16 

Transformer 

30 VA 

Fuse 

Ground 

(white) COM 

(black) 120 VAC 

(brown) 277 VAC 

To Circuit 

Breaker 

277V 

20A max 

Power Supply and Test 

The unit can be powered by either 120 or 277 VAC. It is factory-wired for 120 VAC. 

To power from 277V, disconnect the 120V transformer primary lead (black) from 

the fuseholder and connect the 277V transformer primary lead (brown) in its place. 

Keep the unused lead (120V or 277V) insulated from all other leads and the enclosure. 

When power is applied, the power-on LED should light after a few moments and remain 

lit. The over button may be used to toggle the relays on/off. The auto button will restore 

the relays to their pre-override state. 


L3516 Assembled lighting control panel, 16 relay max (LTR relays not included), 120/277 VAC 




LTR Relay for L3500 Series 

LP-PK Windows-based programmers kit – setup software 

PANEL COMPONENTS 

L3516-E Enclosure only for L3516 

L3516-I Interior only for L3516 







OPTIONAL COMPONENTS 

LDIV35 High voltage compartment divider for 120/277 VAC (one relay space required) 

LEXP1-L35 32 switch input expansion (factory installed) 



L28-DRC Distributed room controller (includes four LTR relays) 

N 

H 


Network Wiring (if used) 

Connect network wiring to the communications 

terminal block according to the "+" and "-" 

indications. When a shield wire is used, it may 

be connected to the S terminal. 

RS-485 

2 #18 

Shielded 

Switch 

Inputs 

RS-485 

G 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 G 

To On Input 

To Common 

Momentary 

On/Off 

Switch 

Low Voltage Inputs 

Connect one lead from each input to any one of the 

G terminals. Connect the other lead to an input 

(1-24) according to the wiring layout. Three-wire 

switches require two input terminals. Do not apply 

AC voltage to any of these terminals. 

Relay and Power Wiring Network and Switches Wiring


TRIATEK MINI-LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 

L28 

DESCRIPTION 

The L28 Mini-Lighting Control Panel is a cost-effective 

lighting control solution for any size building. It is 

available with up to eight relay outputs and 16 switch 

inputs. The L28 controls high-voltage lighting circuits via 

a two-wire RS-485 network, maintained or momentary 

contacts from override switches, motion sensors, or a 

touch-tone telephone. 

FEATURES 

• Up to 16 programmable switch inputs per panel 

• Up to eight relay outputs per panel 

• Programmable flash warning, on-time, and 

grouping 

• Integrate with most BAS networks and open 

protocol networks or stand alone 

• Windows ®-based software for easy setup and 

commissioning 

• EPROM and EEPROM diagnostics Panel power supply 115/277 VAC + 10%, 60 Hz, 30 VA 


WIRING 

RS485 

2 #18 

Shielded 

BAS 

Network 

Wiring 

(optional) 

RS-485 

G 1 2 etc. 

Typical 

Switch 

Input 

Up to 

Eight Relays 

To Lighting 

Circuit Breaker or 

Lighting Load 

120 or 277 VAC 

Line Voltage 



L28 

Programmable 

switch inputs Up to 16 dry or 24 VDC, 


Output relays Up to eight relays SPST maintained 

Lamp 20A ballast, 277 VAC; 20A 

tungsten, 277 VAC 

Resistive 20A, 277 VAC 



System certification Complete system UL-916 

CSA, New York City approved 

#37908, CEC-Title 24, ISO 9001 

Dimensions 

Enclosure 12.75"H x 13.5"W x 4"D 

(32.39 x 34.29 x 10.16 cm) 

Door 13.75"H x 14.5"W x 0.13"D 

(34.93 x 36.83 x 0.33 cm) 

Weight (with eight relays) 17 lb (7.71 kg) 


L28 Mini-lighting control panel (relays not included) 

LR-3 L28 latching relay, 20A, 277V 

LR-3F L28 latching relay, 20A, 277V with auxiliary contact 

for pilot light 

LP-PK Programmers kit 

AI-6 Optional light sensor input module (six inputs) 

361 

LIGHTING CONTROLS


362 


BACNET/MODBUS LIGHTING PANEL CONTROL MODULE 

MODEL E-LINK 

DESCRIPTION 

The E-LINK Control Module is a full-featured controller and 

translator that is designed to integrate Triatek lighting control 

systems into a BACnet or Modbus building automation system. 

A diverse set of ports enable communication with 

BACnet over IP, Ethernet, ARCNET 156K, MS/TP, PTP, or 

Modbus RTU or ASCII. 

The E-LINK is easy to install. The rugged aluminum cover 

protects the electronics from damage. The unit is pre-programmed 

at Triatek, so integration to the network is seamless. 

FEATURES 

• Rugged aluminum cover for protection and noise 

immunity 

• 10/100 Base-T Fast Ethernet provides high-speed 

communications to the controller 

• Protocol translator package serves as a gateway 

between BACnet or Modbus and the Triatek lighting 

network 

• SDRAM stores application programs and trends when 

power is lost 

WIRING APPLICATIONS 

BACnet over Ethernet 

or BACnet IP on Port E1 

BACnet over 

ARCNET156K on 

CMnet 

RCS1000 Programmable 

Circuit Breaker Panel 

TRIATEK Lighting 

Network on Port S2 

L28 

Lighting Panel 

(Example Lighting Panels) 

24 VAC 

L3500 

Lighting Panel 

BACnet over 

MS/TP or Modbus 

on Port S1 



E-LINK BACnet/Modbus lighting panel 

control module 

Note: E-LINK is programmed at the factory. 


E-LINK 

BACnet support Conforms to the BACnet Controller 

(B-BC) Standard Device as defined in 

BACnet 135-2001 Annex L 

Communication Ports available 

10/100 Base-T Ethernet RJ-45 port 

for BACnet /IP network or BACnet 

over Ethernet 

CMnet port for ARCNET 156 

EIA-232/EIA-485 configurable port for 

MS/TP or Modbus (EIA-485 is two- or 

four-wire selectable) 

EIA-232/EIA-485 port for Triatek 

Lighting or PTP 

Microprocessor 32-bit Motorola PowerPC microprocessor 

with cache memory, Fast 

Ethernet controller, high performance 

32-bit communication co-processor, 

ARCNET communication co-processor 

and I/O expansion CAN coprocessor 

Memory 16 MB non-volatile battery-backed 

SDRAM, 8 MB Flash memory, 

32-bit memory bus 

Real-time clock Battery backed real-time clock 

LED status indicators for EIA-232/485 

communication, Ethernet port communication, 

and low battery status 

Status indicators Seven segment status display for running, 

error, and power status 

Module addressing Rotary dip switches for intuitive network 

addressing of modules 

Protection Built-in surge and transient protection 

circuitry for power and communications 

Listing UL916, CE, FCC Part 15-Subpart B - 

Class A 

Power requirements 24 VAC ±10%, 50 to 60 Hz, 24 VA or 

24 VDC ±10%, 10W 

Operating temperature -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C) 10% to 

90% RH, non-condensing 


(19 x 28.7 x 3.5 cm) 

Weight 1.4 lb. (45.5 kg)


TRIATEK ACCESSORIES 

MODEL L-KIT 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model L-KIT Lighting Panel Upgrade Kit replaces 

old lighting controllers while reusing the existing switches, 

panel relays, and high voltage wiring. 

FEATURES 

• Contains all the features of a programmable panel 

• Provides a low-cost solution for upgrading 

existing lighting panels 

• Interfaces to existing GE RR7/RR9, Douglas 

WR6221/WR6321, Touch Plate, and Reliant 

2R7/2R9 relays 

• Reuses high-voltage wiring, low-voltage switch 

wiring, enclosure, and 24 VAC transformer 


L-KIT 

Power 24 VAC + 10%, 50H2, 30 VA 


Switch Inputs Up to 16 dry or up to 24 VDC, 


Outputs Relay outputs 

Temp 32° to 125°F (0° to 50°C) 


TRIATEK TELEPHONE OVERRIDE 

TI4500 SERIES 

MODEL 

L 

DESCRIPTION 

The TI4500 Series Telephone Override allows remote override of lighting 

controls. This override can be accomplished through land lines or cell 

phones. Password protection is standard. 

FEATURES 

• Uses existing telephone infrastructure 

• Password protection 

• Integrates into the building automation system 

• Handles up to 8891 users and passwords 

• UL listed 


L-KIT 


DESCRIPTION 

Lighting panel upgrade kit 

SYSTEM 

25 

26 

27 

29 

GE RR7 (32 relays) 

GE RR9 (32 relays) 

Douglas WR6221/6231 (32 relays) 

Touch Plate 3000 (30 relays) 

L 25 # relays K 

Example: L-2532-K Lighting panel upgrade kit 

for GE RR7 lighting panel for 32 relays 


TI4500 Tone control, voice prompt, binary-coded output, optically 

isolated outputs, includes TI-PK 

TI4580 Tone control, voice prompt, 80 dedicated outputs, optically 

isolated outputs, includes TI-PK 

TI4500NET Tone control, voice prompt, binary version with L controller 

for connection to Triatek ® network or can be read by multiple 

BAS systems, includes TI-PK 

020021 Battery pack 5C AA 6 VDC 

363 

LIGHTING CONTROLS


364 


TRIATEK SOFTWARE 

MODELS LP-PK, BLV 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model LP-PK Programmers Kit is the setup software 

used to address and program Models LP-2800, LP- 

3500, and LP-KIT control panels. The Model BLV 

BASnet ® LightView is a network communication module 

user’s tool that communicates with Microsoft Internet 

Explorer for scheduling, monitoring, and controlling 

Triatek lighting panels. 

FEATURES 

LP-PK 

• Easy-to-use, Windows-based programmers tool 

• Diskette and PC serial port cable provided 

• Direct connect PC to lighting panel 

• Used to assign panel address and configure 

inputs/outputs 

• Reads, writes, and stores lighting controller program 

BLV 

• Uses Microsoft Internet Explorer to monitor/control 

Triatek panels 

• PC LAN card, LAN connect, or Internet connect 

• Panel database upload, download, editing, backup 

• Controls up to 255 lighting control panels 

• 100 lighting areas, 1000 lighting groups 

• 100 scheduled events, 32 holiday events 

• User login and password 

• Transaction and control logs 


LP-PK IBM compatible 386sx or newer 

1 MB or more of RAM 

Mouse and unused serial port 

500K free hard drive space 

3.5 floppy drive 

DOS 5.0, Win 3.x or higher, 

95 or NT 

BLV Module 

Ethernet connection RJ45 female 

RS232 port On-board isolated, DTR pin 

required, DB9 female for setting 

initial IP address and password 



LP-PK Programmers kit 

BLV BASnet LightView module 

(Must specify number of lighting 

panels, additional costs associated 

with each additional panel.) 

LP-PK 

BLV 

RS-485 port Terminal block for 18 AWG 

twisted pair network to lighting 

panels 

Power 115 VAC/12 VDC, power 

adapter provided 

Battery backup Two years data retention 




(29.2 x 29.2 x 8.9 cm) 


Weight 1 lb (3.6 kg)

ADDRESSABLE LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHES 

DDN SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The DDN Series Digi-Touch Switches allow the creation 

of a switch network. This eliminates the need for a 

home run from the switch back to the lighting controller. 

Just connect to a four-conductor cable for communication 

from the switch to the controller. 

FEATURES 

• Addressable digital switch eliminates low voltage 

home runs 

• Switches reside on a single network 

• Bicolor LEDs indicate status 

• Up to 60 addressable digital switches per lighting 

panel 

• Control board factory-installed in the lighting 

panel 

KEY SWITCH 

LPSW-K 


DDN-SW1 

Digi-Touch two-button digital 

switch shown with wall plate 

DDN-L 

Digi-Touch Control Board 

DDN-SW1 

Digi-Touch one-button digital 

switch shown with wall plate 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

DDN-L Digi-Touch control board for L28 Series 

DDN-L35 Digi-Touch control board for L35 Series 

DDN-SW Digi-Touch switch two-button 

DDN-SW1 Digi-Touch switch one-button 

DESCRIPTION 

The LPSW-K Key Switch allows key operation 

of lighting controls. 



LPSW-K One key switch, removable key, 

stainless steel, maintained contact 

LPSW-K 

Key Switch shown with tamper-resistant 

face plate, screw chuck, and keys 

365 

LIGHTING CONTROLS


366 


OCCUPANCY SENSOR 

MODEL CI-24 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model CI-24 is a ceiling-mount passive infrared 

(PIR) occupancy sensor specifically designed to 

interface with building automation systems through an 

internal isolated relay. A user-adjustable time delay (30 

seconds to 30 minutes) on deactivation may be programmed 

through DIP switches to prevent unnecessary 

cycling. The Model CI-24 includes a built-in override 

switch, and two levels of sensitivity are selectable 

through DIP switches. The four-level patented Fresnel 

lens allows the Model CI-24 to cover up to 1200 ft 2 

(111.48m 2). 

FEATURES 

• Advanced PIR technology 

• Adjustable time delay 

• Adjustable sensitivity 

• Isolated relay for use with BAS and other control 

systems 

• Patented Fresnel lens 

• 360° coverage up to 1200 ft2 (111.48m2) • Red LED to indicate occupancy detection 


• Manual override switch 


Power supply 24 VAC/VDC 

Power consumption 37 mA 

Time-delay adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) for 

30 sec, 10 min., 

20 min., or 30 min. 

Coverage 360° up to 1200 ft 2 (111.48m 2) 

Color White 

Isolated contact rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 24 VAC 

1/2A @ 120 VAC 

Approvals UL and ULC listed 

Operating temp 32° to 98°F (0°to 36°C) 

Mounting 2.75" to 3" hole in ceiling 

Dimensions 3.3" dia x 2.2" deep 

(8.5 x 5.6 cm), extends approx. 

0.36" (0.91 cm) from ceiling 




CI-24 24 VAC/VDC ceiling-mount 

occupancy sensor with 

SPDT isolated contact 

OPERATION 

Powered by 24 VAC/VDC, the Model CI-24 uses 

advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. 

Detection occurs when the unit senses the difference 

between infrared emissions from a human body and the 

background space. When occupancy is detected, the 

Model CI-24 transfers an SPDT contact set. The contacts 

return to their normal state after a user-selectable 

time delay once the space is unoccupied. 

WIRING 

Isolated Relay 

Contacts 

24 VAC/VDC Supply 

Normally Closed Contact 

Common 

Normally Open Contact 

24 VAC/VDC Return 

ON 

1 2 3 4 

Cable 

Wires 

1-(red) 

2-(green) 

3-(orange) 

4-(yellow) 

5-(black) 

LED 

DIP Switch Control for Time 

Delay, Sensitivity, and Override 

DIP SWITCH # 

TIME DELAYS 

1 2 3 4 

30 sec X X 

10 min. X O 

20 min. O X 

30 min. 

SENSITIVITY 

O O 

Minimum O 

Maximum 

OVERRIDE 

X 

Normal O 

Override X 

X=on O=off



MODELS CX-100, CI-200 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model CX-100 wall-/corner-mount and Model 

CI-200 ceiling-mount devices are full-featured passive 

infrared (PIR) occupancy sensors that control lighting 

and HVAC equipment. Both units can control equipment 

directly through a power pack or through a BAS with the 

SPDT isolated relay built into the sensors. Both models 

have adjustable sensitivity and time delays. 

FEATURES 



• Adjustable unit sensitivity 

• Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other 

control systems 

• Fresnel lens with choice of three coverage 

patterns (CX-100) 

• 360° coverage (CI-200) 

• LED indicator 


OPERATION 

Models CX-100 and CI-200 use advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the units sense the difference 

between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. They are powered by 24 VDC either from a 

power pack or separate 24 VDC power supply. Both units operate by sending a low voltage signal to the power pack and energizing 

the SPDT relay when a person enters the controlled area. Both units have an adjustable time delay for turning the lights 

off when no occupancy is detected and both have an adjustable sensitivity setting. 

Each unit contains an adjustable light level sensor for controlling lighting based on ambient light level. This feature is wired differently 

than the occupancy-only output. The feature does not work with the SPDT-isolated relay. 


Power supply 24 VDC 


CX-100 20 mA 

CI-200 26 mA 

Time-delay adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) from 

30 sec to 30 min. 

Ambient light 

level adjust From 2.5 to 430 footcandles 

Coverage See patterns on next page 

Number of sensors 

per power pack Three 

CI-200 

CX-100 

Isolated contact rating 1A @ 24 VDC, 1/2A @ 

120 VAC, SPDT 



Dimensions 

CX-100 3.38"L x 3.35"W x 2.05"D 

(8.6 x 8.5 x 5.2 cm) 

CI-200 3.3" dia x 2.2" deep 

(8.5 x 5.6 cm), extends approximately 

0.36" from ceiling 


367 

LIGHTING CONTROLS




MODELS CX-100, CI-200 

COVERAGE PATTERNS 

18 

(5.49) 

10 

(3.05) 

WIRING 

368 

44 

(13.4) 

ft 

(m) 

Coverage shown is maximum and represents coverage for half-step walking motion. Under ideal 

conditions, with no barriers or obstacles, coverage can reach up to 1200 ft 2 for half-step walking 

motion and up to 500 ft 2 for hand motion (typical desktop level of activity). 

16 

(4.88) 

CI-200 

5 14 

(1.52) (4.27) 

28 48 

(8.53) (14.63) 

5 14 16 50 

(1.52) (4.27) (4.88) (15.24) 

80 90 

(24.38) (27.43) 

Dense Wide Angle (Standard) Long Range (CX-100-1) 

To Other Sensors 

(up to 50 sensors 

per P/S) 

+ - 

24 VAC IN 

DCP 1.5W 

Power Supply 

Not 

Used 

Building 

Automation 

System 

8 

(2.44) 

5 

(1.52) 

0 

(0.31) 

30 

(9.14) 

15 

(4.57) 

22 13 7 

(6.71) (3.96) (2.13) 

3 

(0.91) 

3 

(0.91) 

0 

7 

(2.13) 

(0.31) 

N.C. Contact 

Common 

N.O. Contact 

Control Output 24 VDC 

Control Return 

Light Level Output 24 VDC 

+24 VDC 

Common 

13 

(3.96) 

Cable 

Wires 

1-(brown) 

2-(red) 

3-(orange) 

4-(yellow) 

5-(green) 

6-(blue) 

7-(purple) 

8-(gray) 

Note: See power pack in this section for switching lighting loads or other line voltage loads 

For Digital Input to BAS 


67 

(20.42) 

38 

(11.58) 

33.5 

(10.21) 


CX-100 Dense wide-angle sensor with mounting bracket 

CX-100-1* Long-range sensor with mounting bracket 

CX-100-3* Aisle-way sensor with mounting bracket 

CI-200 Ceiling-mount sensor 

* Special order 


Model Description Voltage 

B120E-P Power pack 120 VAC 

B277E-P Power pack 277 VAC 

B230E-P Power pack 220-240 VAC 

B347D-P Power pack 347 VAC 

S-120/277/347E-P Slave pack 120/277/347 VAC 

DCP-1.5W Power supply 24 VAC/24 VDC 

21 

(6.40) 

10 

(3.05) 

0 

(0.31) 

10 

(3.05) 

22 

(6.71) 

21 

(6.40) 

ft 

(m) 

Aisle Way 

CX-100-3 

33.5 

(10.21) 

38 

(11.58) 

Coverages shown are maximum and represent coverage for half-step walking motion. For building spaces with lower levels of 

activity or with obstacles and barriers, coverage size may vary. 

CX-100 

CX-100 

or 

CI-200 

67 

(20.42)



WS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The WS Series Occupancy Sensor is a decorator style 

automatic wall switch with an attractive, low profile 

design. It replaces a standard wall switch to turn lighting 

on when a room is occupied and off when the room is 

vacant. The WS Series has advanced passive infrared 

(PIR) technology and a two-level lens to sense when a 

room is occupied. It also contains an adjustable lightlevel 

sensor to keep lights off when ambient light is adequate. 

FEATURES 



• Integrated light-level sensor 

• Adjustable unit sensitivity 

• No minimum load requirement 

• No leakage to load in off mode 

• Voltage drop protection 

• Compatible with all ballasts and 

incandescent lighting 


• Includes single-gang cover plate 

OPERATION 

The WS Series uses advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the unit senses the 

difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. The WS Series utilizes a 

custom-made Fresnel lens to achieve 180° detection coverage (up to 900 ft 2/83.61m 2) and automatically turns 

lights on each time the controlled area is entered. The WS Series features a built-in light-level sensor, adjustable 

from 2 to 200 footcandles, that holds lights off in the auto mode when natural light levels are above the preset 

light level. The WS Series has an adjustable time delay for turning the lights off when no occupancy is detected, 

and it also has an adjustable sensitivity setting. 


Electrical input 120/277 VAC 

Electrical loads Up to 800W incandescent @ 

120 VAC 

0-800W ballast @ 120 VAC 

0-1200W ballast @ 277 VAC 

Time-delay adjust Digital time delay from 

30 sec to 30 min. 

Ambient light 

level adjust From 2 to 200 fc 

Coverage 180°, max 900 ft 2 (83.61m 2) 

Switch positions Auto/Off (on/off during override) 




(4.8 x 4.3 x 6.6 cm) 


369 

LIGHTING CONTROLS




WS SERIES 

INSTALLATION 

Turn off the power at the circuit breaker before installing the sensor to prevent electrical shock or equipment damage. All wiring 

must comply with local codes and ordinances. 

1. Place the auto/off switch in the off position. 

2. Connect the existing wire leads to the appropriate WS Series with UL listed wire connectors. Red connects to the load, 

black to the line, and green to the ground. Do not allow bare wire to show below the connector. The ground wire must be 

tightly secured to ground for the unit to operate properly. 

3. Attach the sensor to the wall box with the two mounting screws provided, and install the cover. 

4. Set the auto/off switch to auto, and turn the circuit breaker on. After a 10-30 second delay, the lights will turn on. This delay 

is due to the initial power-up of the sensor and only occurs during installation. 

5. Make all time delay, ambient light, and sensitivity adjustments after a two-minute warm-up. 

Override Function: In the event it is necessary to leave the lights on or there is a unit failure, remove the blue Override pin. This 

will turn the auto/off switch to a standard on/off switch (functions like a standard toggle switch). 

WIRING 

Light Level 

Time Delay 

Fresnel Lens 

ft 

(m) 

370 

Auto-Off 

Switch 

Override 

Controls 

15 

(4.6) 

Coverage Pattern 

Sensitivity 

LED 

35 

(10.7) 

* Gray and black are special orders. 

Call Trane for 240 VAC or 347 VAC. 

Load 

Load 

Ground (green) 

Load 


(red) 

Neutral 

Hot (black) 

Manual Bi-level Lighting 

Load 

Ground 

Neutral 

Line 

Single-Level Lighting 


WS-200 120/277 VAC 0-800W ballast occupancy sensor 

COLOR 

I Ivory 

W White 

G Gray* 

B Black* 

WS-200 W 

Example: WS-200-W White occupancy sensor


POWER / SLAVE PACKS 

MODELS B120E-P, B277E-P, B230E-P, B347D-P, S-120/277/347E-P 

DESCRIPTION 

The Power Pack provides 24 VDC operating voltage for 

Models CX-100 and CI-200 occupancy sensors and is 

capable of switching up to 20A electrical load. The 

Slave Pack is similar to the Power Pack but has no 

transformer power supply, only an isolated relay. Power 

and Slave Packs can be combined to switch almost any 

lighting or HVAC load controlled by the CX-100 or CI- 

200. They can also be used for low voltage switching. 

FEATURES 

• Power Pack includes fully self-contained transformer 

and isolated relay; Slave Pack includes 

isolated relay only 

• Available in several AC voltage inputs 

• Attaches easily to standard 1/2" knockouts 

• Housed in ABS, UL-listed 94V-0 plastic enclosure 

• Can be used to switch low voltage control wiring 



OPERATION 

The Power Pack consists of a transformer and high-current relay combined in one small, powerful package. The 

transformer has a primary high voltage input and a secondary 24 VDC, 100 mA output. The secondary voltage provides 

operating power for Models CX-100 and CI-200. The Slave Pack contains a high current relay only and is 

controlled by Model CX-100 or CI-200. When occupancy is detected by the sensor (and inadequate ambient light is 

detected if this feature is used), the sensor electrically closes an internal circuit that sends 24 VDC back to the 

Power and/or Slave Packs, which switch the line voltage to control lighting or other equipment. 


Primary Voltage/Load Rating 

Model 

B120E-P 

B277E-P 

B230E-P 

B347D-P 

S-120/277/347E-P 

Type 

Power pack 

Power pack 

Power pack 

Power pack 

Slave pack 

Voltage (VAC) 

120 

277 

220-240 

347 

120-277 

347 

Secondary voltage 24 VDC, 100 mA 

Enclosure UL-rated 94V-0 plastic enclosure 

Number of sensors 

per power pack Three for CX-100, CI-200 

Approvals UL and ULC Listed 

LOAD RATINGS 

Ballast (A) 

20 

20 

20 

15 

20 

15 

S-120/277/347E-P B120E-P 

Incan. (A) 

13 

– 

13 

– 

– 

Motor (hp) 

1 

– 

1 

– 

– 

24 VDC Output (mA) 

100 

100 

100 

100 

– 



(4.1 x 7.0 x 4.1cm) with 1/2" 

snap-in nipple 


371 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



POWER / SLAVE PACKS 

MODELS B120E-P, B277E-P, B230E-P, B347D-P, S-120/277/347E-P 

INSTALLATION 

Note: All power packs should be installed in accordance with state, local, and national electrical codes and requirements. 

Power Packs are designed to attach to existing or new electrical enclosures with 1/2" knockouts. In plenum ceilings, install 

Power Packs in approved electrical enclosures. 

1. Disconnect power at the circuit breaker prior to doing any work. 

2. Connect the white wire to neutral and the black wire to the appropriate hot leg. 

3. Connect one red wire to the line side of the voltage to be controlled and the other red wire to the load to be controlled. 

4. Make all low voltage connections to the occupancy sensor (see Wiring below). 

5. Verify all connections are correct, and reset the circuit breaker. 

WIRING 

N 

Hot 

(red) 

(red) 

N 

Hot 

(white) Neutral 

(black) Hot 

(red) 

(red) 

372 

Slave 

Pack 

(white) 

(black) 

(white) 

(black) 

(blue) 

(black) 

(red) 

Power Pack 

(red) 

(black) 

Power Pack 

(black) 

(blue) 

(blue) 

(red) Line 

(red) Load 

(red) Line 

(red) Load 

Switch 

Load 

Switch 

Load 

N.C. Contact 

Common 

N.O. Contact 

Control Output 24VDC 



+24 VDC 

Common 

Power Pack and Slave Pack with Light Level Control on Slave Pack 

High Voltage Low Voltage 


N.C. Contact 

Common 

N.O. Contact 

Control Output 24 VDC 



+24 VDC 

Common 

Power Pack Only with Light Level Control 

(red) +24 VDC 

(black) COM 

(blue) +SW 

Cable 

Wires 

1-(brown) 

2-(red) 

3-(orange) 

4-(yellow) 

5-(green) 

6-(blue) 

7-(purple) 

8-(gray) 

Cable 

Wires 

1-(brown) 

2-(red) 

3-(orange) 

4-(yellow) 

5-(green) 

6-(blue) 

7-(purple) 

8-(gray) 

Power Pack 

High Voltage 

Connection Made 

Inside J-Box 

Wiring Connections for Power Pack Power Pack Installation 

MODEL TYPE VOLTAGE (VAC) 

B120E-P Power Pack 120 

B277E-P Power Pack 277 

B230E-P Power Pack 220-240 

B347D-P Power Pack 347 

S-120/277/347E-P Slave Pack 120/277/347 

�CX-100 

or 

CI-200 

�CX-100 

or 

CI-200


CELESTIAL SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR 

MK7-B SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The MK7-B Series Celestial Self-Contained Ambient 

Light Sensors develop a variable output voltage that corresponds 

to the amount of present ambient light. These 

precise ambient light level measurement units detect and 

transmit, via an analog signal, the amount of light present 

at their location to the remote analog input point of most 

building automation controllers. The sensors contain a precision 

photodiode-type cell that provides an exact, proportional 

output over a wide range of light levels, allowing for 

accurate lighting control. 

FEATURES 


• Analog voltage models 

• Wide range of light level monitoring 

• Compatible with most BAS controllers 

• Extremely accurate and reliable 

• Three basic models for monitoring: 

Indoor light levels (ceiling mount) 

Outdoor light levels (roof mount) 

Skylight light levels (skylight mount) 


OPERATION 

The sensor heads contain patented solid-state circuitry 

designed to be extremely accurate, adjustable, and flexible 

over a wide range of input and output voltages. The 

standard three-wire sensors operate from any input voltage 

between 12-24 VDC and give a return output signal 

of 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA using a Model 

VTI-1 (see Output Transducer section of this catalog). 

The sensors come factory calibrated. The sensor is 

equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration 

equipment, such as a foot-candle meter, 

would be required to change the range of the unit. 

Note: There is a charge for recalibration of the unit by 

the manufacturer. 


Accuracy 

Room temp ±1% 

100°F temp ±2.5% 

Sensor type Blue-enhanced photo-diode 

Power supply 12-24 VDC 

Power consumption 20 mA max 

(does not include VTI-1) 

Output 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 

1-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

Wiring (standard) Three-wire, 18-gauge, stranded 

MK7-B-CCF 

Indoor 

APPLICATION 

MK7-B-CR 

Outdoor 

MK7-B-CS 

Skylight 

Sensors allow most building automation controllers to 

become sophisticated lighting control computers to control 

any type of lighting at any light level based on the amount 

of ambient light available. There are three basic types of 

sensors: 

Indoor 

Designed to monitor the ambient light levels in offices, 

schools, etc., the sensor mounts in a 3/8" (0.95 cm) hole 

bored in a ceiling tile central to the electrical lighting being 

controlled. It features an adjustable maximum range from 

50-750 fc at the sensor face and a 60-degree field of view 

with special flat Fresnel lens configuration. 

Outdoor 

Designed to mount horizontally in a 1/2" conduit fitting to 

monitor the outside ambient light levels for parking 

garages, security lighting, sign lighting, etc., the sensor 

generally is mounted on the rooftop, facing the northern 

sky. It features an adjustable maximum range from 50- 

750 fc at the sensor face and is completely weathertight 

and temperature stable. At very low ambient temperatures 

(below 13°F), the sensor will still function but will 

lose some accuracy and light level sensitivity. 

Skylight 

Designed to mount vertically in a 1/2" conduit fitting to 

monitor the ambient light levels from inside a skylight well 

in warehouses, shopping malls, etc., the sensor features 

an adjustable maximum range from 1000-7500 fc at the 

sensor face. 

Monitoring ranges 

Indoor sensor 0 fc min, 50-750 fc adj max 

Factory calibration 0-100 fc 

Outdoor sensor 0 fc min, 50-750 fc adj max 


Skylight sensor 10 fc min, 1000-7500 fc 

adj max 



373 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



CELESTIAL AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS 

MK7-B SERIES 

WIRING / CALIBRATION 

The sensors come factory calibrated. Each sensor is equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration 

equipment, such as a foot-candle meter, would be required to change the range of the unit. Note: there is a charge 

for recalibration of the unit by the manufacturer. Rotating the potentiometer one way or the other causes the upper 

limit voltage that the sensor produces to correspond to lower or higher foot-candle readings. For example, with a 5V 

model at the minimum gain setting, the sensor will deliver 5 VDC at 750 fc; at the maximum setting, the sensor will 

deliver 5 VDC at 50 fc. The zero light level setting is fixed and will not change. The adjustment procedure allows for 

precise light level monitoring and can compensate for the physical light sensing location of the unit, which may differ 

from the actual light level present at the task level. Once the calibration procedure is completed, it will remain constant 

with no further adjustments. Complete installation instructions are provided with the unit. The lower end output 

(zero light level) and the upper end light level outputs can be custom-ordered for specific voltages. A range of the 

standard output voltages supplied are listed in Specifications. 

CAUTION: To prevent electrical shock and possible equipment damage, disconnect power coming from 

the controller prior to hookup. Wiring from the sensor to the controller should be with 18- or 22-gauge 

stranded wire. Do not run the low voltage wire with or near power wiring. For long wire runs or where there 

is excessive electrical noise, shielded cable or cable in conduit is required. Cable length should not 

exceed 500' (152m). Wire the sensor to the appropriate analog port of the controller according to the controller 

manufacturer’s instructions and the specific details of the particular sensor listed on this page. 

374 

POWER 

MK7-B COM 

SIGNAL 

(red) 

(black) 

24 VDC 

(yellow) 

Voltage 

Output 

Signal 

Power 

MK7-B Com 

Signal 

Wiring the MK7-B Wiring the MK7-B to VTI-1 

MODEL 

MK7-B 


DESCRIPTION 

Celestial ambient light sensor 

SENSOR LOCATION 

CCF Indoor 

CR Outdoor 

CS Skylight 

OUTPUT SIGNAL 

VTI 4-20 mA 

0/5 0-5 VDC 

1/5 1-5 VDC 

0/10 0-10 VDC 

1/10 1-10 VDC 

(red) 

(black) 

MK7-B CCF 1/5 Example: MK7-B-CCF-1/5 Light sensor, indoor 

housing, 1-5 VDC output signal 


RI-4 RF universal input transmitter 

24 VDC 

(yellow) 

V Sig In 

24V Power 

Com VTI-1 

Ref V Out 

mA Sig Out 

4-20 mA Signal


PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTORS 

MODELS PSR-1, PSR-1-T 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PSR-1 Photo-Sensitive Resistor may be 

used as an input to indicate the presence or absence 

of light at the sensor location. The Model PSR1-T is a 

PSR-1 coupled with a 4-20 mA transmitter. The sensor 

is designed to be mounted in the end of a weatherproof 

conduit box. 

FEATURES 

• Economical dark/light sensing 

• 4-20 mA output models 

• 1/2" NPT design 

• Track-mounted PSR-1-T transmitter 

APPLICATION 

The Model PSR-1 has a resistance in darkness in excess 

of 1 MΩ and a resistance in bright light of less than 1.5 kΩ. 

Models PSR-1 and PSR1-T indicate the presence or 

absence of light. They should not be used for foot-candle 

control of occupied spaces. The Model PSR-1-T is 

calibrated for 4 mA in bright light (>100 footcandles) and 

20 mA in darkness (< 0.1 footcandles). 

POWER DERATING CURVE 

Power Dissapation (mW) 

120 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

0 

25°C 50°C 75°C 

77°F 122°F 167°F 

Ambient Temperature 

Note: PSR-1 maximum power dissipation is 

50 mW @ 77°F (25°C). 


PSR-1-T 

PSR-1 

Output >1 MΩ in dark 



PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTORS 

MODELS PSR-1, PSR-1-T 

WIRING 

376 

1/2" NPT 

RESISTANCE CURVE 

(red) 

(black) 

Controller Input Terminals 

(Non-polarized resistance) 

PSR-1 

Typical Application Using ST-O(X) 

Outdoor Air Sensor with PSR-1 

Model AD-2 3/4" x 1/2" Adapter Required 

Resistance 

(ohms) 

1M 

100k 

10k 

1k 

100 

10 

in 

(cm) 

PSR-1 

2.25 

(5.72) 

5 4 3 2 1 

4-20 MA 

Transmitter 

Board 

0 0.1 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 50 100 

Illumination (fc) 


4 mA 

ADJ 

B420-P 

1.75 

(4.45) 

20 mA 

ADJ 

P2 

P1 

PSR-1-T 

4-20 mA 

Signal 


PSR-1 Photo-sensitive resistor 

PSR-1-T Photo-sensitive resistor with 4-20 mA output 

PSR-1-E Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure 

PSR-1-T-E Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure and 4-20 mA output 

AD-2 3/4" x 1/2" adapter 

24 VDC Power Supply


PHOTO CONTROLS 

MODELS CW, EM, PN, TL, TB 

DESCRIPTION 

Models CW, EM, PN, and TL Photo Controls are universally 

employed to control lighting loads in response 

to available natural light. Each will turn on at dusk and 

off at dawn, and each may be connected to directly 

switch loads up to its continuous rating or to switch larger 

loads through relays or contactors. Model EM 

requires 24 VAC power and switches a 1-amp relay 

contact. Models CW and EM come with a 1/2" pipe nipple 

and locknut for mounting to a weatherproof box or 

conduit body. It also has a manual slide to adjust the 

switching point by shading more or less of the sensor. 

Model PN mounts in the same manner, but it has a 

swivel for directional aiming. Model TL is a twist-lock 

type that fits the Model TB socket as well as standard 

sockets supplied by nearly all lighting fixture manufacturers. 

FEATURES 

• On at dusk, off at dawn operation 


• Simple installation and wiring 

• Heavy-duty switch to control loads directly 


Model 

CW201-00 

CW201S-00* 

CW201-71 

PN201-00* 

TL201-00 

TL201-71 

TB201-99 

* Features swivel for 

directional aiming 

Tungsten 

Amps 

16.5 

16.5 

7.2 

10.0 

8.3 

3.6 

Watts 

2000 

2000 

2000 

1200 

1000 

1000 

(base only) 

Amps VA 

15.8 

15.8 

6.8 

9.1 

15.0 

6.5 

1900 

1900 

1900 

1100 

1800 

1800 

PN 

TB 

CW201 

• Contacts remain closed in case of cell failure 

• Ideal for outdoor lighting, billboard lighting, 

security lighting 

• UL listed, CSA approved (except EM) 

TL 

On Off 

1.5 

1.5 

1.5 

3.0 

1.5 

1.5 

10.0 

10.0 

10.0 

10.0 

4.5 

4.5 

CW201S 

Ballast Volts Light (fc) Weight 

VAC 50/60 Hz 

120 

120 

208-277 

120 

120 

208-277 

120-277 

oz kg 

EM-24A2 1 amp 30 VAC/VDC relay contact 24 VAC power 1.0 15.0 3.1 0.09 

Connections 

CW, PN, TB 

(base only) 

EM 

Lead lengths 

TB, PN 

CW 

EM 

Pigtail leads, #14 AWG (CW, TB) and 

#18 AWG (PN) for line (black), load 

(red), and neutral (white) 

Pigtail leads, #20 AWG, black for 

24 VAC, red for relay output 

6" (15.24 cm) 

4" (10.16 cm) 

8" (20.32 cm) 

Approvals 

CW, PN, TL 

TB 

EM 

UL listed, CSA approved 

UL recognized 

Enclosures NEMA 3R, weatherproof 

8.0 

8.0 

8.0 

1.5 

3.0 

3.0 

9.5 

0.20 

0.20 

0.20 

0.04 

0.09 

0.09 

0.27 

377 

LIGHTING CONTROLS


in 

(cm) 

3.0 

(7.62) 

2.0 

(5.08) 


PHOTO CONTROLS 

MODELS CW, EM, PN, TL, TB 

DIMENSIONS 

WIRING 

1.38 

(3.5) 

2.5 

(6.35) 

1/2'' NPT 

2.5 

(6.35) 

3.5 

(8.90) 

5.25 

(13.35) 

CW TB TL 

PN 

(black) (red) 

Lamp 

Load 

378 

(white) 

120, 208, 240, or 277V 

Models CW, PN 

CW or PN 

Photo Control 

(yellow) 

(red or 

white) 

(black) 

(black) 

Line 

or 

Neutral 

Line 

Light Sensing 

Window 

INSTALLATION / MOUNTING / APPLICATION 

24 VAC 

BLK 

BLK 

When exposed to weather, mount Models CW, EM, PN, and TB 

to a weatherproof hub or conduit body via 1/2" threaded nipple. 

They may be mounted to a 1/2" knockout in a handibox in locations 

protected from weather, such as parking garages or 

beneath substantial overhangs. The TL plugs into a standard 

mating twist-lock socket supplied by lighting fixture manufacturers 

or the TB twist-lock base. 

Mount in a location facing north for normal outdoor light control 

application, and wire to switch the load directly or through a 

1.88 

(4.76) 

RED 

RED 

Model EM 

2.94(7.46) 

dia 

Sliding Window 

Aperture 

1/2" Thread Fitting 

N/O Relay Contacts 

1A @ 30 VAC/VDC 

(closes below dark 

setpoint) 


3.5 

(8.89) 

1/2" NPT 

2.64 

(6.71) 

1.89 

(4.8) 

EM 

1.57 

(3.99) 

lighting contactor. Switching level may be adjusted on CW and 

EM models by moving the slide to block more or less of the photocell 

window. Covering more of the window will cause lights to 

come on earlier in the evening (at a higher ambient light level). 

The PN model is more directional and may be aimed at darker 

areas to adjust the level at which lights come on, or it may be 

aimed toward another light source to provide coordination 

between multiple light groups. Aiming of the TL series is set by 

the position of the socket base. 


(See Specifications for complete model numbers) 

CW Photo control with 1/2" pipe nipple and locknut for 

mounting to weatherproof box or conduit body 

EM 24 VAC photo control with 1/2" pipe nipple and locknut for 

mounting to weatherproof box or conduit body 

PN Photo control with swivel for directional aiming 

TL Photo control with twist-lock type, fits Model TB base 


RIB Series Relays 

RH/RR Series Relays 

20307 Series Relays 

(black) (red) 

Lamp 

Load 

(white) 

120, 208, 240, or 277V 

Model TL 

Twist Lock 

Receptacle 

(white) 

(red or 

white) 

(black) 

(black) 

Line 

or 

Neutral 

Line


SENTRY SWITCH 

SS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SS Series Sentry Switch is a unique UL-listed 

replacement device for a 120V or 277V, standard or 

three-way wall switch. It provides the capability of centrally 

sweeping off overhead lighting automatically, then 

allowing local override at every switch location. 

The installed switches are centrally swept off by 

momentarily interrupting the supply voltage at the lighting 

circuit breaker panel to the controlled lighting 

circuits. 

The SS Series, installed in place of the standard wall 

switch, senses this momentary interruption (five seconds) 

of the power source and then physically unlatches, 

dropping to the off position. 

When in the off position, the switch toggles illuminate, 

allowing them to be easily identified for after-hours override 

of lights. This feature allows unnecessary lighting to 

be turned off after hours and behind janitorial and maintenance 

crews. 

Different schedules can be programmed for weekend 

occupancy. When used in place of conventional wall 

switches, the SS Series allows the building operator to 

control after-hours lighting automatically. 

OPERATION 

Although controlling the SS Series is very simple, the 

variations of implementation can be quite diverse. 

A contactor or low-voltage relay panel will be installed 

adjacent to the lighting circuit breaker panel to provide 

the five-second interruption to the lighting circuits. This 

panel will be interfaced to the BAS system to provide the 

automatic lighting control sweeps. A short off-sweep 

(less than three seconds) allows advance warning that 

the lights will be turned off. 

Normally closed contactors are recommended for these 

panels because they provide a mechanical failsafe to 

the on position. 

SS 20277 

SS 23277 

Tenant comfort and acceptance is assured by having 

override available at any time, from any switch, for only 

that particular area. Substantial power savings will be 

realized, not only from containing after-hours use, but 

also because lighting will not be turned on the following 

morning until that particular office or area is physically 

occupied. 

The SS 20277 replaces a standard 120V or 277V toggle 

wall switch with a minimum 1.5A and maximum 20A 

load. The low-current version, SS 05277, must be used 

on loads less than 1.5A, but it has a maximum capacity 

of 5A. 

The SS 23277 is a three-way emulation model. Although 

functionally equivalent to a three-way switch, there is an 

operational compromise. The lights cannot be off with 

both light switches in the up position. When switch #1 is 

in the up position, manually moving switch #2 to the up 

position will result in the lights coming back on within 

five seconds. The operator must then move switch #2 

back down to turn the lights off. 

379 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



SENTRY SWITCH 

SS SERIES 


Installation 

The SS Series is a direct mechanical replacement for standard wall toggle switches and utilizes standard single- and multi-ganged 

wall boxes, plaster rings, and switch plates. SS Series switches are spring-loaded to the off position. They are mechanically held in 

the on position. Be sure the mounting flange marked “top” is up and that the switch springs to the down position. On three-way 

switches, be sure the red and yellow wires are crossed red to yellow and yellow to red in conventional traveller manner. 

Standard 

Wall Plate 

Wiring 

The two-wire switches, SS 20277 and SS 05277, have conventional SPST switching contacts and are not polarity sensitive. 

The three-wire SS 23277 is a standard SPDT contact arrangement. Black connects to line or load, and red and yellow are connected 

as cross-over travellers in the conventional manner red to yellow - yellow to red. 

Checkout 

All SS Series switches are mechanically held on. When they release, the mechanism trips. Any time the power to any properly 

loaded SS Series switch is interrupted for more than five seconds, the switch will trip. To check a switch, observe the switch in 

the off position. The lever should be illuminated. Turn the switch on and make sure the appropriate lights turn on. Turn off the 

power to the circuit feeding the switch. After five seconds the mechanism trips, and the switch will move to the off position. If the 

SS Series fails to trip off, check the light circuit to make sure at least a 1.5A load is connected. If the load is less than 1.5A, 

replace the standard switch with a low current model. If the load is correct, replace the SS Series switch. For three-way switch 

applications, the minimum load allowed will be 1.5A. The individual three-way switches are checked as above. 

Note: Unlike conventional three-way switches, it is impossible to have the lights off with both three-way SS Series switches in 

the up position. If the lights are on and an attempt is made to turn them off by moving a switch to the up position, the 

lights will turn off. Within five seconds the switch that is not being operated will trip off, turning the lights back on. This is 

normal. It is then necessary to turn the switch that is not being operated back down to the off position. The normal off 

position for both three-way switches is down. If the lights are off and either three-way SS Series switch is in the up position, 

the switch is wired wrong and must be rewired. 

380 

Sentry 

Switch 

SS 20277, SS 05277 

Two-Wire Switches 

Wall Box 

Lighting 

Contractor 

(black) 

(red) 

(yellow) 


Line 

Line 

20A Circuit 

Load 

(black) 

(red) 

(yellow) 

Light 

SS 23277 

Three-Wire 

for Two-Switch Control 


SS 20277 Sentry switch for 1.5A-20A load, 120V or 277V 

SS 05277 Sentry switch for 1.5A loads or less (rated for up to 5A), 120V or 

277V (DO NOT EXCEED the maximum 5A current rating) 

SS 23277 Sentry switch for three-way switches, 120V or 277V


LIGHTING CONTACTORS 

SH17 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SH17 Series Lighting Contactors are electrically held 

and come in four-pole (normally closed or normally open) 

and eight-pole (normally open) styles. The 30A contacts are 

fully rated for general-purpose and ballast lighting loads. 

Compact size and two mounting methods make installation 

easy, and the use of the normally-closed style may eliminate 

the need for a more expensive latching contactor to keep 

lights on should the control circuit fail. 

FEATURES 

• DIN rail or surface mounting 

• Easy parts replacement 

• Normally closed (N.C.) or normally open 

(N.O.) four-pole style 

• Normally open (N.O.) eight-pole style 


Contacts Four (N.O. or N.C.) or 

eight (N.O. only) 

30A ballast 

30A general-purpose 

20A tungsten 

600 VAC 

Wiring #16-10 AWG 75°C copper only 

Mounting Surface or DIN rail 

Coil voltage 

Four-pole 24 VAC or 120 VAC 

Eight-pole 120 VAC 

(other voltages upon special 

request) 

Approvals UL listed, File #EQ642B 

CSA approved,CE 


Coil burden 55 VA inrush, 10 VA sealed 

Weight 

Four-pole 0.71 lb (0.33 kg) 

Eight-pole 0.84 lb (0.39 kg) 

CAUTION: As with all electrically held contactors and 

starters, the SH17 Series can emit a humming noise 

when the coil is energized. While this is not an issue in 

typical mechanical or utility rooms, sound baffling and 

vibration isolation should be considered if mounting 

near occupied spaces is required. 

SH17-40-A 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


1.77 

(4.50) 

3.07 

(7.80) 

2.90 

(7.37) 3.88 

(9.85) 

1.77 

(4.50) 

SH17-04-A/G 

SH17-40-A SH17-80-A 


SH17-04-A Four-pole N.C. 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil 

SH17-04-G Four-pole N.C. 30A contactor, 24 VAC coil 

SH17-40-A Four-pole N.O. 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil 

SH17-80-A Eight-pole N.O. 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil 

SH17-80-A 

3.07 

(7.80) 

381 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



MANUAL TIME SWITCHES 

93000, TS-200 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Marktime 93000 Series Wall-Box Manual Time Switch 

is a spring-wound, manually-set time switch for the control of 

electrical current. Interchangeable with standard toggle switches 

to turn circuits either off or on at the end of a preset time 

period, the 93000 Series is ideally suited for new installations 

and retrofit projects. 

FEATURES 

• White and ivory plates and knobs included with each 

time switch 

• Time ranges from minutes to 12 hours, all with ±5% 

accuracy 

• Easy-to-install two-wire design fits into standard 

single-gang wall box 

• Heavy motor loads without the need of contactors 

93000 SERIES 

ELECTRICAL RATING 

20A 125 VAC 1 hp 

10A 277 VAC 

7A 125 VAC tungsten 

DESCRIPTION 

The Watt Stopper ® InteliSwitch ® TS-200 Series is a digital 

time switch that automatically turns the load off after a preset 

amount of time. The load can be turned off anytime during the 

timer’s countdown by pushing the on/off button. The TS-200 

Series has four user-adjustable features: 

Time-out delay 

The timer can be adjusted to hold the load from five minutes 

to 12 hours. This is adjusted by setting the DIP switch located 

on the left side of the unit. 

Time scrolling 

In situations where the load needs to be held on for a different 

amount of time than the preset time-out period, time 

scrolling allows the user to manually and temporarily override 

the time-out period without adjusting the DIP switch. 

Flash option 

If this option is on, the load will flash once, one minute 

before the time-out period expires. Set this option on the 

DIP switch. 

Beeper option 

If this option is on, the timer will beep every five seconds 

during the last minute of the time-out period. Set this option 

on the DIP switch. 


382 

MODEL 

No Hold Previous 

93501C (90005/90539) 

93502C (90006/90032) 

93503C (90008/90024) 

93504C (90281/90540) 

93505C (90007/90017) 

93506C (90001/90015) 

93507C (90240/90547) 

TS-200 TS-200-24 

Voltage 120/277 VAC/60 Hz 24 VDC, 24 VAC/60 Hz 

Load rating 800W tungsten Isolated relay 

or ballast @ 120 VAC SPDT, 1A @ 30V 

1200W ballast @ 277 VAC 

Time adjust 

(both models) 5, 15, 30 min.; 1, 3, 6, 9, 12 hr 

• Rotary knob operation 

• Available to turn circuits off or on, with or 

without manual hold override feature 

• UL listed, CUL 


DESCRIPTION 

MODEL 

With Hold Previous 

93511C (90012/90543) 

93512C (90011/90037) 

93513C (90010/90038) 

DESCRIPTION 

0-15 min. N.O./N.C. 

0-15 min. N.O./N.C. (w/hold) 

0-30 min. N.O./N.C. 


0-60 min. N.O./N.C. 

0-120 min. N.O./N.C. 

0-6 hour N.O./N.C. 




93516C (90015/90014) 0-12 hour N.O./N.C. (w/hold) 

WIRING 

Neutral 

Ground 

Ground (capped) 

(black) Hot 

Load 

(red) 

+24 VDC or 

24 VAC 60Hz 

Return 

(red) 

(black) 

Important! 

120 VAC Ground - Green 

277 VAC Ground - Green/Yellow 


Weight: 0.4 lb (182g) 

TS-200 TS-200-24 


(green) Normally Closed 

(orange) Common 

(yellow) Normally Open 


TS-400-W Digital time switch, 120/277 VAC 

TS-400-24-W Digital time switch, 24 VAC/VDC


GE LIGHTING RELAYS 

MODELS RR-7, RR-9 

DESCRIPTION 

GE Models RR-7 and RR-9 Lighting Relays are 

mechanical latching-type units requiring only momentary 

24 VAC switch circuit pulses to open or close line voltage 

circuits. All GE low voltage relays may be used to 

full-rated capacity for tungsten filament, ballast, or resistive 

loads. The Model RR-9 includes an auxiliary contact 

on the low voltage side for status indication. 

CAUTION: The coil is designed to resist burnout 

if continuous voltage is applied, but coil life may 

be shortened with prolonged, continuous voltage. 


General information UL listed, CSA certified; mounts 

in standard 1/2" K.O. – 0.865" to 

0.875" (nominal 22 mm) dia – in 

14- or 16-gauge material; operates 

in any position 

Operating voltage 24-29 VAC (±10%) half or full 

wave rectified or pure, 30- 

38 VDC (±10%) filtered 

Min activating 50 ms 

pulse 

Coil impedance 75-85Ω @60 Hz unrectified 

55-60Ω DC resistance 

Coil inrush current 325 mA @ 24 VAC 

Contacts SPST maintained (mechanical 

latching) 


(6.03 x 3.5 x 4.29 cm) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.75 

(1.91) 

1.25 

(3.18) 

2.50 C 

(6.35) L 

2.50 

(6.35) 

C L 

1.54 

(3.91) 

C L 

6.13 

(15.57) 

1.54 

(3.91) 

Weight 

RR-7, RR-9 0.3 lb (0.12 kg) 

RR-BRACKET-4 0.5 lb (0.21 kg) 

Terminals Two terminals, two back wiring 

holes per terminal for use with 

#14-10 AWG solid or stranded 

wire (copper wire only) 

Lamp load 20A tungsten filament 125 VAC 

20A ballast 277 VAC 

Resistive load 30A 277 VAC 

Motor load 1/2 hp @ 110-125 VAC 

1/2 hp @ 220-277 VAC 

Pilot contact 1A, 24 VAC isolated (RR-9 only) 

Temp 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C) 

Relative humidity 10% to 95% RH noncondensing 

Endurance 50,000 cycles, full load 

100,000 cycles, no load 

Lead length 6" (15 cm) 

C L 

RR-BRACKET-4 

1.54 

(3.91) 

Optional Bracket 

for RR-7/RR-9 

C L 

0.75 

(1.91) 

0.60 

(1.52) 

0.72 

(1.83) 

RR-7 

383 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



GE LIGHTING RELAYS 

MODELS RR-7, RR-9 

OPERATION 

The relay employs a split low-voltage coil to move the line voltage contact armature to the on or off latched position. 

The on coil moves the armature to the on position when a 24 VAC control signal is impressed across its leads. This 

is analogous to a magnet attracting the handle of a standard single-pole switch to the on position when energized. 

The armature (handle) latches in the on position and will remain there until the off coil is energized, drawing the 

armature into the off position. 

This control operation provides several key control features: 

Positive action 

The relay always goes to the state commanded. For example, multiple off commands will simply keep the 

contacts in the off position. 

Stable operation 

Since the relay latches in the on or off position, power outages do not result in a change of state. 

Minimal power consumption 

Control power is only required when the relay changes state. 

Additive control functions 

Pulse control signals coupled with latching allow any number of switches or electronic control devices to 

operate the same relay. The relay position is always dictated by the last signal. 

WIRING 

Internal Wiring 

Important Considerations and Restrictions 

1. Relays connected 

in parallel - Two or 

more relays connected 

in parallel will operate 

together. 

2. Do not use these relays 

to switch DC loads. Doing 

so will damage the power 

contacts. 

3. For longer life, use half-wave 

rectified AC voltage for relay 

control. 

384 

On Coil 

20A, 277 VAC 

(line contacts) 

Off Coil 



RR-7 Three-wire low voltage leads 

RR-9 Five-wire low voltage leads with 

isolated pilot auxiliary contact 

RR-7-B RR-7 with banana plug connectors 

RR-BRACKET-4 Mounting bracket for RR-7 or RR-9 relays 

Line 

Off (black) 

24 VAC 

(blue) 

On (red) 

Armature 

(blue) 

Load 

Pilot 

Contacts 

(maintained 

contact) 

Power 

Contacts 

(maintained 

contact) 

(blue) 

(red) 

(yellow) 

RR-7 RR-9 

(black)


RELAY CONTROL BOARD 

MODEL RCB-8 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RCB-8 is a low-voltage lighting control relay interface 

board. It contains eight 120/277 VAC, 20A relays and 

eight digital on/off inputs. It is designed to interface with building 

automation systems or other controllers. Each digital input 

can control any of the eight lighting relays on the board. Inputs 

from one Model RCB-8 can be jumpered to other Model RCB-8s 

to control an unlimited number of relays. 

FEATURES 

• Eight SPST 120/277 VAC, 20A relays per board 

• Each output has MOV protection 

• Each output has on/off/auto switch 

• Red LED status indication per relay 

• Screw type #12 AWG output terminals 

• Eight maintained digital input contacts 

• Supplied with four stand-offs for mounting 

OPERATION 

Eight outputs from a BAS are used as inputs to the Model 

RCB-8. Each of these outputs represents a time schedule 

with its own on and off times. Each digital input can control 

any combination of relays. Each digital input is assigned to 

one or more relays via an eight-position DIP switch (DSW 1- 

8). Setting any of the eight switches on the DIP switch to the 

on position allows the corresponding digital output to energize 

when that digital input is closed. Each relay is energized 

either by the override switch or a corresponding digital input 

closure. The corresponding relay LED will light whenever the 

relay is energized. 

Inputs to one Model RCB-8 may be jumpered together with 

other Model RCB-8s to control an unlimited number of 

relays from the eight outputs of the automation system. 

The Model RCB-8 offers exceptional lighting control scheduling 

flexibility. This flexibility is a result of the ability to connect 

digital inputs to multiple controllers, combined with the 

ability to assign relays to one or more of the digital inputs. 


Input voltage 24 VAC 

Current draw 30 VA per RCB-8 

Inputs Eight digital maintained dry contact 

Input terminals Screw type #14 AWG 

Max input wire 

distance 3500' (1067m) 18/2 twisted 

Outputs Eight SPST 120/277 VAC 



10A tungsten 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

INPUTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PWR 24 VAC POWER 

(EACH INPUT-COM/HTD) 

C C C C C C C C C / HI 

R. E. TECHNOLOGIES 

For all 

switches, 

"on" position 

assigns relay 

to input as: 

INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 

O123 456 78 O 

ON 

123 456 78 

N 

N 

OFF 

ADD RELAY 1 

ADD RELAY 2 

ADD RELAY 3 

O123 456 78 O123 456 78 

N 

N 

O123 123 456 78 O123 456 78 O123 456 78 O123 456 78 

N 

N 

N 

N 

ADD RELAY 4 

ADD RELAY 5 

ADD RELAY 6 

ADD RELAY 7 

ADD RELAY 8 

RCB-8 

RELAY 1 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 2 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 3 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 4 

10.0 

(25.4) 

Output terminals Screw type #12 AWG 

Relay response time 15 ms max 

Status light One red LED per relay 

Relay override One three-position 

on/off/auto switch per relay 




ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 


RELAY 5 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 6 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 7 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 8 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

7.6 

(19.3) 

385 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



RELAY CONTROL BOARD 

MODEL RCB-8 


CAUTION: 

Disconnect all power prior to installation. 

1. Mount the RCB-8 in an enclosure. 

2. Connect the 24 VAC transformer (30 VA required per RCB- 

8) to the power terminals of the 18-pole terminal block 

located at the top of the board. 

3. Connect each digital output from the automation system or 

other controller to input terminals 1 through 8. Note that 

terminals labeled C (common) are connected internally. 

386 

FIGURE 1. DIP SWITCH ASSIGNMENT EXAMPLES 

For all 

switches, 

"on" position 

assigns relay 

to input as: 

ON 

OFF 

ADD RELAY 1 

ADD RELAY 2 

ADD RELAY 3 

ADD RELAY 4 

ADD RELAY 5 

ADD RELAY 6 

ADD RELAY 7 

ADD RELAY 8 

RELAY 1 

Load #2 

NO 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

EX #1: If Digital Input 1 is closed, 

Relays 1 and 4 will energize. 

NO 

From Maintained Dry 

IN 2 INPUT 

Digital Output of Controller 

From Maintained Dry IN 1 INPUT 

Digital Output of Controller 

Up to Eight Inputs to RCB-8 

INPUT 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PWR 24 

C C C C C C C C C / HI 

(EACH INPUT-COM/HTD) 

INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 

O123 

456 78 

N 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 2 

DIP Switch1 DIP Switch 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 


all eight Relays will energize. 

VAC POWER 

O 

O 

O 

O 

O 

O 

O 

123 456 78 

N 

123 456 78 

N 

123 456 78 

N 

123 456 78 

N 

123 456 78 

N 

123 456 78 

N 

123 456 78 

N 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 3 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 4 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 5 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 6 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

RELAY 7 

RCB-8 



FUSE Phase 

FUSE 

Load #6* 

Neutral 

RCB-8 

4. Connect each lighting load to the appropriate output terminals. 

Fusing of each output is recommended. 

5. Set each digital input DIP switch (DSW 1-8) to the desired 

array of digital outputs (see Figure 1 below for examples). 

6. Verify that all override switches are in the auto mode. 

7. Apply 24 VAC control power only to the RCB-8. Close 

each digital input to verify proper operation of the relays 

by checking the red LED status light of each relay. 

8. Apply lighting power to the relay contacts. 

24 VAC 

ON 

Phase 

Neutral 

OFF 

AUTO 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

RCB-8 Eight-relay control board 

NO 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 


Relays 1, 3, and 6 will energize. 

NO 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 


Relay 2 will energize. 

RELAY 8 

ON 

OFF 

AUTO 

*Up to Eight Loads 

per RCB-8 


SC12104P NEMA 1 screw cover enclosure with perf panel 

B-12-P Two-piece enclosure with perf panel


PULSE INITIATOR 

MODEL PIL-1 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PIL-1 Pulse Initiator is designed to provide 

pulses to latch and unlatch mechanically-held or magnetically-held 

lighting contactors (such as the Model RR-7, 

RR-9, or TR Series) from maintained contact outputs. 

FEATURES 

• LED indicators: 

Pulse out: unlatch/latch 

Command in: off/on 

• AC or DC operation 

• Selectable power-up (PUP) state 


OPERATION 

The Model PIL-1 is controlled by a single SPST N.C. 

or N.O. switch or relay. Closing the input contact 

causes the latch output to close momentarily for 100 

ms. Opening the input contact causes the unlatch 

output to close momentarily for 100 ms. A power-up 

feature allows the operator to select either an immediate 

pulse out (PUP position), depending on the present 

command of the controller, or a pulse out only 

when the controller input changes state. LEDs indicate 

input state and output latch or unlatch pulses. 

Typical control signals would be a digital output from 

a BAS panel, a light or toggle switch, or a contact on 

a timer. 


Power supply 24 VAC/VDC @ 50 mA 

Input required SPST switch or relay 

Output Two N.O. pulsed contacts rated 

120 VAC @ 5A 

Output pulse time 100 ms standard, 

others available on request 

(5 sec max) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

PUP 

3 

(7.62) 

PULSE OUT 

CMD IN 

OFF ON 

PWR PWR CMD 

IN 


(6.03 x 7.62 x 3.5 cm) 


PIL-1 

UL L 

2.38 

(6.03) 

387 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



PULSE INITIATOR 

MODEL PIL-1 

WIRING 

388 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 

- 

Command 

Contact 

PUP 

PULSE OUT 

UL L 

CMD IN 

OFF ON 

Power 

PWR 

PWR CMD 

IN 

Command 

Typical Wiring for Driving 

24V Lighting Contactors 

+ 

24 VAC/VDC 

- 

Command 

Contact 

PUP 

PULSE OUT 

UL L 

CMD IN 

OFF ON 

Power 

Power 

UL L 

Latch 

Common 

Unlatch 

Command 

Multiple PIL-1s may be controlled by 

the same command contact. Wiring 

polarity must be observed. 

RR-7 / RR-9 

Lighting Contactor 

(Up to 10 per PIL-1) 

PWR PWR CMD 

IN 

UL L 

Typical Wiring for Driving 

Loads other than 24V 


(black) 

(blue) 

(red) 

Latch 

Unlatch 

To Lighting 

Circuits 

Switch Leg 

to Latch Circuits 

Switch Leg 

to Unlatch Circuits 


PIL-1 Pulse initiator 

PIL-1-C Pulse initiator with factory-calibrated pulse duration 

(specify when ordering) 


RR-7 Lighting contactor 

RR-9 Lighting contactor


RETROFIT LIGHTING RELAY 

TR SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The TR Series Retrofit Lighting Relays are magnetically 

latching type devices with a built-in transformer for 

low-voltage control of lighting circuits. Designed to 

mount in existing junction or pull boxes, these units can 

be connected to provide master sweep-off and sweepon 

control of lighting while existing line voltage switches 

and wiring remain in place for local on/off and override 

functions. Low-voltage inputs require momentary contact 

closures (SPDT for on/off control, SPST for off control 

only) and may be combined up to 40 per phase within 

Class 2 wiring limits. Relay contacts are 20A normally 

open and can switch up to a 1 hp motor load. This 

unique technology, which allows a single coil to serve as 

both a transformer secondary and a relay operator, 

results in a compact and economical package for both 

retrofit and new installations. 

OPERATION 

The TR Series provides the capability of centrally sweeping off 

overhead lighting, then allowing local override at each relay 

location via a maintained contact switch rated for the voltage 

and current of the connected lighting circuit. 

Whenever power is applied to the TR Series, the contacts latch 

and the load is energized. A momentary contact closure 

between the off (black) and common (yellow) low-voltage leads 

toggles the contacts open, de-energizing the load. The load may 

be re-energized by toggling the local light switch off and on 

again or by using a momentary contact closure between the on 

(red) and common (yellow) low-voltage leads. Thus, a digital 

output from a building automation system (BAS) may be connected 

to sweep lights off by momentarily closing a set of contacts 

connected as the off input of a group of TR Series relays. 

Individual zones may be overridden back on after this event, or 

the entire group can be toggled back on by a second digital out- 


Power supply 120 VAC or 277 VAC, 60 HZ, 

3 VA max 

Contact inputs SPDT momentary only (one on, 

one off); 15 VAC open circuit, 

200 mA max switched current 

per relay 

Relay output SPST, magnetically latching 

(fails to on whenever power 

is applied to line lead) 

20A tungsten, 120 VAC, 60 HZ 

20A ballast, 120-277 VAC, 60 HZ 

1 hp, 120-277 VAC, 60 HZ 

FEATURES 

• 20A single-throw latching relay output 

• Momentary contact inputs: one on, one off 

• Low-voltage inputs (Class 2 for up to 40 per 

phase) 

• Existing line voltage switches used for override 

and local on/off control 

• Easy installation, transformer and relay in 

one package 

put connected as the on input. Controllers that cannot supply 

momentary contact closures may be interfaced with the Model 

PIL-1 pulse initiator to control up to 25 TR Series relays per 

phase. 

To implement a warning blink prior to turning lights off with the 

TR Series, simply program the SPDT momentary input controller 

to provide an off/on sweep sequence to produce a blink, 

followed by an appropriate time delay (five minutes is customary), 

and then a final off sweep. 

The TR Series may be connected in very large groups (up to 40 

per phase with 8A rated momentary contact inputs) while 

remaining within Class 2 wiring limits. In this fashion, a very 

large building’s entire lighting system may be controlled from a 

single set of BAS outputs, or it may be broken down into as 

many zones as needed. 

Connections 6" #14 AWG leads for line (black) 

and load (blue) 

6" #18 AWG lead for neutral 

(white or gray) 

6" #20 AWG leads for on (red), 

off (black), and common 

(yellow) 

Approvals UL and ULC Listed 

Enclosure Designed to be mounted within a 

standard depth 4" square outlet 

or junction box 


(6.4 x 6.4 x 2.7 cm) 

4 in3 displacement (66 cm3 ) 


389 

LIGHTING CONTROLS



RETROFIT LIGHTING RELAY 

TR SERIES 

WIRING 

120 or 277 VAC 

390 

SPDT Momentary 

Contact BAS 

Output or Switch 

Local 

Light Switch 


L 

N 

(yellow) Common 

(red) On 

(black) Off 

Line (black) (blue) Load 

(white or gray) 

Neutral 

TR-120R 

TR-277R 

To Other 

TR-XXXR 

(Up to 40 per phase 

for Class 2) 

To Lights 

Notes: 1. For sweep-off control only, 

red (on) low voltage 

connection may be omitted. 

2. All TR units on a momentary 

contact must be on the same 

phase. For more than one 

phase, use multiple contacts 

or call Kele for information on 

IFM modules. 

The TR Series is designed to be mounted in a standard depth 4" (10.2 cm) square outlet or junction box. The short 

nipple on the low voltage side of the relay snaps into a standard 1/2" (1.3 cm) knockout, leaving the line, load, and 

neutral connection inside the outlet or junction box and the low-voltage Class 2 wiring outside. A second junction box 

may be secured to the low voltage side if an unusual occupancy requires Class 2 wiring to be in raceway also. 



TR-120R 120 VAC retrofit lighting relay 

TR-277R 277 VAC retrofit lighting relay 


PIL-1 Pulse initiator module for interface with maintained contact devices

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS

PRODUCTS 

Try the NEW DRS Series 

DIN Rail Data Line 

Surge Protector on 

page 405! 

SERVICES 

If you don’t see the product 

you’re looking for, Call 

Us! We’ll find it for you. 



OVERRIDE CONTROL DEVICES 

93000 Series — Manual Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 

DIGI-42 — Electronic Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 

KEL71/120, KEL72/120 — Electronic Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 

MOB-4, MOB-8 — Manual Override Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 

MR-604/T, MR-608/T — Manual Override Board with Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 

TS-400 Series — Digital Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 

SAFETY DEVICES 

A11 Series — Low-Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 

A70 Series — Low and High Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 

AT-1100 — Thermostat Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 

DH100 Series — Innovair Duct Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 

DH100 Series Remote Accessories — Duct Smoke Detector Accessories . . .394 

MS Series — Smoke Detector Accessories for SM-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 

SM-501 Series — Duct Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 

TC-105, TC-100 — Duct High-Temperature Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 

TF142 — Low-Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 

TG500 — Thermostat Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 

TSA — Low-Temperature Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 

SURGE PROTECTION 

Surge Protection Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 

1.5KE56CA — Transzorb Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 

392-SVSR2 — Lightning Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 

DRS Series — DIN Rail Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 

DTK-2LVLPX, DTK-2LVLPLV — Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 

DTK-120HW — Power Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 

DTK-RJ11 — Phone Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 

FAS-TEL — Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 

HSP-121BT1RU — Power Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 

PC642C — Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 

SS64-036-2 — Remote-Mount Data Line Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 

V39ZA1 — MOV Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 

V47ZA1 — MOV Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 

V130LA1 — MOV Point Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 



DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS 

SM-501 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SM-501 Series Duct Smoke Detectors provide 

early detection of smoke and combustion products present 

in air moving through HVAC ducts. Air sampling is 

accomplished by intake sampling tubes, which are 

ordered separately. A standard length exhaust tube is 

provided with each detector. The SM-501 Series is 

designed to operate in duct widths from 12.0" to 10.0' 

(30.5 cm to 3.05m) with an air velocity from 500-4000 

fpm (2.5-20.3 mps.) Complete systems may be shut 

down in the event of smoke detection. 

OPERATION 

The SM-501 Series will operate on any one of four input 

voltages: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC. It 

uses either photoelectric or ionization smoke detectors. 

Each detector contains two alarm contacts, which transfer 

in the event of smoke, and one trouble contact, 

which supervises the presence of input power and 

removal of the detector head. A manual test/reset switch 

and visual indicators of pilot and alarm are provided on 

the front of the detector. Up to 30 SM-501 Series units 

may be wired to use a common test/reset function and 

to alarm simultaneously when a single unit alarms. If 

signal devices such as horns or strobes are used, up to 

15 detectors may be interconnected to operate with a 

single alarm. 



50/60 Hz (without 

accessories) 24 VAC @ 35 mA standby, 

74 mA alarm 

24 VDC @ 15 mA standby, 

56 mA alarm 

115 VAC @ 25 mA standby, 

32 mA alarm 

230 VAC @ 12 mA standby, 

16 mA alarm 

Relay contact rating 

Alarm (2) SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive 

Trouble (1) SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive 

Radioactive element For SM-501-N only 

Americium 241, 0.9 µCi 

Air velocity 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps) 

FEATURES 

SM-501 

CSFM Listed 

• Universal voltage: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 

230 VAC 

• Remote reset, alarm, and indication available 

• Two alarm contacts and one trouble contact 

• Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or 

ionization heads 

• Compatible with building automation and fire 

alarm systems 

• Dust filtering included in detector head 

• Interconnect up to 30 detectors for common 

functions 

Approvals 

UL 268A; UROX.S2829 

CSFM 3240-1004:108 

MEA 73-92-EX, Vol. 20 

Ambient temp 

SM-501-N 32° to 155°F (0° to 68°C) 

SM-501-P 32° to 100°F (0° to 38°C) 


Material 18-gauge steel back box, 

clear plastic cover 

Finish Gray paint with clear cover 


Mounting 7" (17.8 cm) exhaust tube, sampling 

tube end cap, template and mounting 

hardware supplied 


(23.19 x 18.42 x 5.72 cm) 

391 



392 



SM-501 SERIES 

MOUNTING 

Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template and 

four sheet metal screws. Detector must be mounted at least six 

duct widths from the fan or other sources of turbulence with airflow 

from 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps). The intake sampling 

tube has holes drilled the entire length of the tube and should 

extend the entire width of the duct. The holes must be facing 

into the air flow (see Figure 1 to the right). The exhaust tube is a 

piece of steel piping approximately 7"Long (17.8 cm). 

Intake Sampling Tube Lengths 

Model Duct Width 

STS-2.5 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m) 

STS-5.0 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) 

STS-10.0 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) 

Installation 

1. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length. 

2. Firmly insert the stopper (provided with the detector) 

in the end of the intake sampling tube. 

3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector. 

24 VAC 50/60 Hz 

0.2A max 

5 6 

Power 

Connections 

(see below) 

Alarm 

Contacts 

10A 

Alarm 

Contacts 

10A 

Trouble 

Contacts* 

10A 

See 

"Remote 

Accessories" 

(next page) 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

CAUTION: For terminals 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12, do not use looped 

wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of 

connections. 

24 VDC 

0.1A max 

115 VAC 50/60 Hz 

0.1A max 

+ _ G N H 

5 6 1 2 3 

Power Connections 

*Trouble contacts are shown 

in non-energized condition. 

Under normal operation 

contacts will be reversed. 

230 VAC 50/60 Hz 

0.1A max 

G H1 H2 1 2 4 

Entire Width 

of Duct 


FIGURE 1. TYPICAL DUCT INSTALLATION 

Unit #1 Unit #2 Unit #3 

16 

17 

18 


16 

17 

16 

17 

18 

16 

17 

18 18 18 

H H H 

19 -Black 19 -Black 19 -Black 

Stopper 

Intake 

Tube 

(order 

separately) 

Top of Detector 

16 

17 

18 

All Relays Operating 

with Single Alarm 

(30 detectors max) 

+Red 

+Red 

16 

17 

+Red 


with Single Alarm; 

All Horns/Strobes Operating 

with Single Alarm 


16 

17 

Air Flow 

16 

17 

Exhaust 

Tube 

(provided) 

Note: Sampling tubes over 3' (0.9m) must be supported on the opposite side 

of the duct from the detector. 

WIRING INTERCONNECTING WIRING 

N.O. 

Reset 

Switch 


20 

21 


+Red 

20 

21 

+Red 

16 

17 

20 

21 

Common Test/Reset 


+Red 

18 18 18 

H H H 

19 -Black 19 -Black 19 -Black 


with Single Alarm; 

Individual Horns/Strobes 

Operating on Alarmed Detector Only 



SM-501-N Ionization duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC 

SM-501-P Photoelectric duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC 

STS-2.5 Sampling tube for 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m) duct widths 

STS-5.0 Sampling tube for 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) duct widths 

STS-10.0 Sampling tube for 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) duct widths 

WP-1 NEMA type 3R enclosure 12.0" x 12.0" x 4.0" (30.48 x 30.48 x 10.16 cm) 

55000-250APO Replacement ionization smoke detector head only 

55000-350APO Replacement photoelectric smoke detector head only


REMOTE ACCESSORIES FOR SM-501 

MS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The MS Series remote accessories are used with the 

SM-501 Series duct smoke detectors to provide audible 

and visual indication as well as remote test/reset functions. 

All devices have a brushed stainless steel face plate. All 

devices are also designed to be mounted on a single- or 

double-gang back box. 

FEATURES 

• Remote indication for SM-501 smoke 

detectors 

• Available with alarm and pilot LEDs and alarm 

horn 

• Available with push button or key-operated 

test/reset switch 

• Mounts to standard single- or double-gang box 



Alarm LED 15 mA @ 24 VDC 

Pilot LED 15 mA @ 24 VDC 

Horn 20 mA @ 24 VDC 

Sound pressure 

Horn 78 db @ 10' (3.0m) 

Wiring 

LEDs/Horn 6" (15.2cm)/24 AWG pigtails 

Switches 6" (15.2cm)/22 AWG pigtails 

Dimensions 

Single-gang 2.75"W x 4.5"H (6.9 x 11.4 cm) 

Double-gang 4.5"W x 4.5"H (11.4 x 11.4 cm) 

Reset switch N.O. 

Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg) max 

Approvals 

UL URRQ.S7425 

CSFM 7300-1004:107 

MEA 73-92-E, Vol. 25 

WIRING 

(red) (black) 

Horn 

(red) (black) 

Red 

Alarm LED 

(black) 

Green 

Pilot LED 

Test/Reset 

Switch 

(red) 

Remote Accessory Wiring 

for SM-501 Duct Smoke Detector 

MS-RH/P/A 

SM-501 Terminal #19 






MS-RA Remote red alarm LED 

MS-RA/P Remote red alarm LED and green pilot LED 

MS-RA/R Remote red alarm LED and push button test/reset switch 

MS-RA/P/R Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and push button test/reset switch 

MS-KA/R Remote red alarm LED and key-operated test/reset switch 

MS-KA/P/R Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated test/reset switch 

MS-RH Remote alarm horn 

MS-RH/KA/P/R Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated 

test/reset switch 

MS-RH/P/A Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, and green pilot LED 

ALARM 

MS-RA MS-RA/P 

ALARM 

TEST/RESET 

MS-KA/R 


ALARM 

PILOT 

ALARM 

PILOT 

TEST/RESET 

MS-KA/P/R 

ALARM 

TEST/RESET 

MS-RA/R 

MS-RH 

ALARM 

PILOT 

TEST/RESET 

MS-RH/KA/P/R 

ALARM 

PILOT 

TEST/RESET 

MS-RA/P/R 

PILOT 

ALARM 

CSFM Listed 

393 



394 



DH100 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES 

DESCRIPTION 

System Sensor provides flexibility with a variety of accessories, 

including three remote test stations, and several 

different means of visible and audible system annunciation. 

All System Sensor accessories are UL listed. 


Accessory Current Loads @ 24 VDC 

Model Standby Trouble Alarm 

APA451 12.5 mA max - 30 mA max 

PA400R 0 mA - 15 mA max 

PA400R w/ PS24LO 0 mA - 40 mA max 

RA400Z 0 mA - 10 mA max 

RTS451/RTS451KEY 12 mA max - 7.5 mA max 

SSK451 5 mA 9 mA 30 mA max 

When a unit is powered at the 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC input, any combination 

of accessories may be used such that the given accessory loads are as follows: 

60 mA or less in the standby state 

110 mA or less in the alarm state 

WIRING 

DH100ACDC 

Alarm Signal 15 

Aux. Power + 19 

Sup. N. O. 14 

Sup. COM 3 

Aux. Power – 20 

Reset 2 

Test 11 

Interconnect + 12 

Interconnect – 1 

DH100ACDC 

12 

1 

RTS451/RTS451KEY 

1 (Red LED) Alarm 

6 (Green LED) Power 

(RTS451KEY only) 

2 

To Additional DH100ACDC 

Detectors (10 max) 

DH100ACDC to RTS451/RTS451KEY and 

Interconnect Feature 

Interconnect Notes: 

1. All interconnected units must be powered with the same 

independent power supply. 

2. Polarity must be maintained throughout the interconnect wiring. 

3. When using a remote reset accessory with interconnected 

detectors, each detector must have its own reset accessory. 

3 

4 

5 

DH100ACDC 



Sup. N. O. 14 

Sup. COM 3 


DH100ACDC 


Supervisory 3 

Contact. N. O. 

14 

Reset 2 

Test 11 



RA400Z 

Remote Annunciator 

(UL S2522) 

ALARM POWER 

APA451 

Piezo Annunciator 

(UL S4011) 

ALARM 

RESET 

RTS451 

Remote Testing Station 

(UL S2522) 

APA451 

2 Alarm 

3 Power 

DH100ACDC to APA451 

Field installed jumper 

1 Common 

Field-installed jumper 

for temporal pattern 

SSK451 

3 Common 

2 Temporal Select 

1 Alarm Signal 

4 Supervisory Signal 

7 Reset 

8 Test 

6 Power (-) 

5 Power (+) 

DH100ACDC to SSK451 


S 

M 

O 

K 

E 

PA400R and PS24LO 

Add-On Strobe 

(PS12/24SLENSW 

smoke lens option 

available) 

(UL S3593) 

DH100ACDC 

Alarm Signal + 15 


ALARM 

ON 

RESET TEST 

RTS451KEY 

Remote Testing Station 

with Key 

(UL S2522) 

SSK451 

Multi-Signaling Accessory 

(double-gang box) 

(UL Listed) 

RA400Z 

Remote (LED) 

Annuciator 

DH100ACDC to RA400Z 

DH100ACDC 

Alarm Signal + 15 


PA400R 

Audible Alert 

DH100ACDC to PA400R 


RA400Z Remote annunciator, red alarm LED 

APA451 Piezo annunciator with green power and red alarm LEDs 

RTS451 Magnetic remote test station, red alarm LED 

RTS451KEY Key-activated remote test/reset station with bi-color (green/red) power/alarm LED 

SSK451 Key-activated remote test/reset station with sounder and power, trouble, and alarm LEDs 

PA400R Mini-alert sounder, red 

PS24LO Mini-alert add-on strobe, red 

PS12/24SLENSW “Smoke” lens for mini-alert add-on strobe (wall mount) 

RED

DESCRIPTION 

As required by many building codes for commercial, industrial, 

and institutional air handling systems, the Innovair DH100 

Series Duct Smoke Detectors sample the air moving through 

a building's HVAC duct work, shutdown fans, blowers, and 

dampers to prevent the spread of dangerous smoke throughout 

the protected area. 

OPERATION 


INNOVAIR DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS 

DH100 SERIES 

The DH100 Series features the DH100ACDCLP photoelectric 

and DH100ACDCI ionization models. These four-wire duct 

smoke detectors can be powered at a voltage of 24 VAC, 24 

VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC and are compatible with a wide 

range of air system velocities. These models feature two Form 

C contacts (DPDT) for fan/damper control and one Form C 

supervisory trouble contact (SPDT). A reset button and highly 

visible power and alarm LEDs are conveniently located on the 

front cover. 

Air in the duct work is sampled by the use of either the plastic 

sampling tube, provided with each unit for use in small duct 

applications from 12" to 18"W (30.5 to 45.7 cm), or a metal 

sampling tube, which is ordered separately. 

The DH100 Series provides a built-in interconnect, which 

allows up to 10 four-wire units to be daisy-chained together to 

control multiple fans, blowers, and dampers. In the event 

smoke is detected, the DH100 Series will signal to the other 

interconnected detectors to initiate their alarm relays. Its 

patented cover-missing signal provides 7 minutes for testing 

and maintenance before sending a trouble signal, if the cover 

is still missing. 

The DH100 Series is compatible with a full line of UL listed 

accessories, including remote test stations and audible and 

visible annunciators. All are covered by a three-year limited 

warranty. 


Power requirements Voltage Current 

(using no accessories) 220/240 VAC @15 mA RMS* 

max standby 

50/60 Hz 25 mA RMS* 

max alarm 

120 VAC @25 mA RMS* 

max standby 

50/60 Hz 35 mA RMS* 

max alarm 

24 VAC @35 mA RMS 

max standby 

50/60 Hz 125 mA RMS 

max alarm 

24 VDC @15 mA 

max standby 

70 mA max alarm 

Relay contact rating 

Alarm initiation 

contacts SPST 2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC 

(resistive) 

Alarm auxiliary 

contacts DPDT 10A @ 30 VDC 

10A @ 250 VAC 

Note: Alarm auxiliary contacts must switch 100 mA minimum 

@ 5 VDC. 

FEATURES 

• Built-in interconnect to 

allow up to 10 four-wire 

units to be easily networked 

for multiple fan 

shutdown on alarm 

• Patented plastic 

sampling tube provided 

for 12" to 18" (30.5 to 

45.7 cm) duct width 

applications 

• Patented cover-missing 

trouble signal to ensure 

system integrity 

• Three-year limited 

warranty 

DH100 

ST-1.5 

FM 

• Continuous electronic 

monitoring to ensure 

sensor board is present, 

receiving power, and 

operating above its minimum 

sensitivity setting 

• High/Low voltage barrier 

for meeting NEC requirements 

• Convenient reset button 

on front cover 

• For mounting on round 

or rectangular ducts from 

1' to 12' (0.3 to 3.6m) 

without adapter bracket 

• Compatible with System 

Sensor's full line of UL 

listed accessories 

Trouble contacts SPDT 2.0A @ 30 VDC 

(resistive) 

Air velocity 

Ionization 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20 m/s) 

Photoelectric 100-4000 fpm (0.5-20 m/s) 


Ionization 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) 

Photoelectric 32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C) 


Housing cover NEMA1, LWP Model NEMA4 

Mounting Template and hardware provided 


Dimensions 14.38"L x 5.5"W x 2.75"D 

(37 x 14 x 7 cm) 

Approvals UL 268A, CSFM, MEA, FM, MSFM, 

City of LA 

Radioactive elements For DH100ACDCI; Americium 241, 

0.5 microcuries 

* When unit is powered at the 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC input, 

any combination of accessories may be used such that the 

given accessory loads are 60 mA or less in the standby state 

and 110 mA or less in the alarm state. 

395 



396 


INNOVAIR DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS 

DH100 SERIES 

MOUNTING 

Use the mounting template and screws provided with the unit to 

mount the DH100 Series to the outside of the ductwork. Per NFPA 

guidelines, the DH100 Series should be mounted at least six duct 

widths from bends, obstructions, return air inlets, fans, or dampers 

located in the ductwork. 

With the DH100 Series’ bidirectional sampling tube ports, the sampling 

tube should be installed in the port that first meets the air flow. 

The air sampling holes in the sampling tube must point into the 

direction of airflow as shown. Follow all instructions provided with 

the smoke detector. 

For small duct applications from 12" to 18" (30.5 to 45.7 cm), the 

plastic sampling tube provided with each unit can be used. Simply 

slide in the telescoping tube and set to the appropriate length with a 

screw. For duct widths greater than 18" (45.7 cm), please refer to 

Ordering Information below to order the correct metal sampling 

tube. 

WIRING 

9 10 A B C 

16 6 17 7 18 

8 

14 3 13 5 4 

24V 

AC/DC 

120 

VAC 

220/240 

VAC 

N.C. C. N.O. N.O. C. N.C. N.O. C. N.C. 

Power Input Alarm Auxiliary Contacts Supervisory 

for Fan Shutdown, etc. Trouble Contacts 

Alarm auxiliary contacts shown in Trouble contacts transfer as 

standby. Contacts transfer during indicated by the arrow in alarm 

alarm as indicated by the arrows. and standby. Contacts are as 

2 11 15 19 20 shown while detector head or power 

is removed or when tamper feature 

times out. Open contacts signal 

Remote Accessory Terminals 

See Remote Accessories page for wiring details 

trouble condition to panel. 

Alarm Initiation 

Contacts 

Contacts shown open 

in standby. Contacts 

close in alarm. 

Do not loop wire under terminals. Break wire runs to provide system supervision of connections. 


Air Flow 

Sampling 

Tube 

(order 

separately) 


DH100ACDCLP Four-wire photoelectric duct smoke detector 

DH100ACDCI Four-wire ionization duct smoke detector 

DH100ACDCLWP Four-wire photoelectric detector, NEMA4 

ST-1.5 Sampling tube for duct widths from 1' to 2' (0.3 to 0.6m) 

ST-3 Sampling tube for duct widths from 2' to 4' (0.6 to 1.2m) 



A5069 Replacement photoelectric sensor board for DH100ACDCLP 

A5052 Replacement ionization sensor board for DH100ACDCI 

A5064 Replacement four-wire power board for DH100ACDCLP or DH100ACDCI 

F36-09-11 Replacement air filters 

End Cap 

Exhaust 

Tube 

(provided) 

Detector 

1 12 

Interconnect 

Terminals 

Connect up to 10 

DH100 detectors


DUCT HIGH-TEMPERATURE LIMIT 

MODELS TC-105, TC-100 

DESCRIPTION 

Models TC-105 and TC-100 feature a helix bimetal element 

that senses rapid increases in duct temperature, 

such as in a fire, and operate an SPST switch that 

opens on a rise in temperature. A manual reset button 

will reactivate the models after the high-temperature 

condition has cleared. 


Contacts SPST N.C. mechanical latching 

Electrical capacity 9.8 full load amps @ 115 VAC 

4.9 full load amps @ 230 VAC 

Element length 5" (12.7 cm) or 11" (27.9 cm) 

Manual reset button External access 

Setpoint range 100° to 250°F (38° to 122°C) 

field adjustable, factory set @ 

125°F (51.6°C) 

Differential 25°F (13.8°C) fixed 

Approvals UL listed, File #MH7076 

Weight 

TC100 1 lb (0.48 kg) 

TC105 0.75 lb (0.36 kg) 

WIRING 

Factory Set 

@ 125°F 

N.C. Contact 

Screw Terminals 

(opens on 

temp rise) 

200 

250 

150 

100 

FEATURES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


3.16 

(8.03) 

2.19 

(5.56) 


TC-100-1A-3C Duct high-temperature limit with 11" (27.9 cm) element and adjustable setpoint 

TC-105-1A-3C Duct high-temperature limit with 5" (12.7 cm) element and sdjustable setpoint 

4.0 

(10.16) 

TC-105-1A-3C 

• Low-cost duct, high-temperature limit control 


• Manual reset 

• UL listed 

0.95 (2.42) 

0.42 

(1.07) 

1.9 (4.83) 

0.5 (1.27) 0.5 (1.27) 

Knockout Knockout 

2.75 (6.99) 

Bottom View 

0.23 (0.58) 

Mounting 

Hole 

0.75 (1.91) 

Duct Cut-Out 

Hole 

397 



398 


LOW-TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL 

A11 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The A11 Series Low-Temperature Limit Controls 

incorporate a 20' (6m) vapor-charged sensing element. 

The A11 Series reacts to the coldest 18" (47.5 cm) section 

of the control's sensing element. It is suitable for 

monitoring the trailing face of a coil for freeze protection. 

FEATURES 

• Snap-acting contacts 

• External temperature scale 

• Easy setpoint adjustment 

• Safe freeze adjustment (35°F/19.4°C minimum) 

APPLICATION 

• Low-temperature limit for coils and/or liquid 

sensing pipes 


Sensing element 20' (6 m) of 1/8 copper tube 

Capillary 4' (1.2 m) 

Switch SPST, N.C. 

Action N.C. opens on decrease in temp 

Switch rating 16A @ 120 VAC, 9.2A @ 208 VAC, 

8A @ 240 VAC, 

Pilot duty 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC 

Range 35° to 45°F (2° to 7°C) 

Setpoint adjust Slot screwdriver 

WIRING 

SPST - Normally closed 

opens on decrease 

in temperature 

2 

1 

A11 Series 

A11 

Series 


Differential 

A11A Manual reset 

A11B 8°F fixed 

Sensor R-134 vapor filled 

Max temp 

Element 250°F (121°C) 

Ambient 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) 

Dimensions 3"H x 5.4"W x 2.4"D (7.6 x 13.7 x 6 cm) 


INSTALLATION 

Top of Duct 

Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement. 

Typically mounted down stream of a coil with capillary 

exposed to all areas likely to encounter low temperatures 


A11A-1 Manual reset low-temperature limit control 

A11B-1 Auto reset low-temperature limit control 


M-648 Capillary mounting clip 

ES-1051 Freeze spray 

A11A

DESCRIPTION 

Models TSA and TF142 provide low-limit temperature 

control in operating dampers, valves, compressors, or 

fan motors in HVAC systems. Manual and automatic 

reset models are available with SPDT or DPDT switching 

action. 

FEATURES 


LOW-LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL 

MODELS TSA, TF142 

• SPDT and DPDT models 

• Manual and automatic reset 

models 

• Easy setpoint adjustment 

• 20' (6.10m) capillary 

element 

• Manual test lever 

OPERATION 

Models TSA and TF142 respond to the lowest temperature 

sensed along any 1' (0.3m) section of a 20' (6m) 

capillary element. The setpoint is visible through the 

front cover and is easily adjustable. There is a test lever 

for manual operation during checkout. Manual reset 

models cannot be reset until the sensed temperature is 

approximately 5°F (3°C) above setpoint. Automatic reset 

models automatically reset when the sensed temperature 

rises approximately 5°F (3°C) above set point. 


MODEL TSA-DOP TSA-COP 

Reset action 

Manual Automatic 


35° to 68°F (2° to 20°C) 

Differential 

4.5°F (2.5°C) fixed 

Switch action 

Electrical ratings 

SPDT, snap acting 

Inductive 

24 FLA, 144 LRA @ 120-240 VAC 

2 hp @ 120 VAC; 3 hp @ 240 VAC 

Pilot duty 

720 VA max @ 120-600 VAC 

144 VA max @ 24 VAC 

Sensing element 

Temp limits 

Vapor-filled copper capillary, tin-plated 

5/64'' (0.2 cm) x 20' (609.6 cm) 

Operating 

-60° to 160°F (-51° to 71°C) 


300°F (149°C) max 

Approvals 

UL and ULC listed, CE 

Accessories 

M-648 capillary mounting clip 


Weight 

1 lb (0.45 kg) 

TSA 

TF142 

TF142-SODP20 TF142-SOAP20 

Manual Automatic 

34° to 70°F (1° to 21°C) 

4.5°F (2.5°C) fixed 

DPDT, snap acting 

14 FLA, 84 LRA @ 120 VAC; 12 FLA, 72 LRA @ 240 VAC 

3/4 hp @ 120 VAC; 2 hp @ 240 VAC 

720 VA max @ 120-600 VAC 

144 VA max @ 24 VAC 

Vapor-filled copper capillary, tin-plated 

3/32'' (0.24 cm) x 20' (609.6 cm) 

-60° to 160°F (-51° to 71°C) 

300°F (149°C) max 

UL and ULC listed, CE 

M-648 capillary mounting clip 

(5 mounting clips supplied with each control) 

2.8 lb (1.3 kg) 

399 



400 


LOW-LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL 

MODELS TSA, TF142 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

External Set Point 

Adjustment 

20'L (6.10m) 

0.08 (0.20) dia 

INSTALLATION / WIRING 

3.34 

(8.48) 

1.56 

(3.56) 

Reset Button 

(DOP models only) 

0.50 (1.27) 

Conduit Opening 

2.94 

(7.47) 

TSA TF142 

1. Controller can be mounted in any position. Avoid locations subject 

to excessive vibration. 

2. On manual reset models, position the control to permit convenient 

access to the reset button. 

3. Use mounting holes in the rear of the case for flush mounting to the 

duct or other flat surface. 

4. Install capillary element in a horizontal serpentine pattern across the 

duct on the downstream side of the coil so it is exposed to areas 

where low temperatures will occur. Do not kink or apply excessive 

force to the capillary element. 

5. Fasten the capillary at sufficient points to prevent damage from air 

movement or vibration. 

6. Test operation with a built-in test lever or with ES-1051 freeze spray. 

Low 

Limit 

Capillary 

Duct 

Install capillary in 

horizontal pattern only 

20'L (6.10m) x 0.09 

(0.24) dia 


Internal Set Point 

Adjustment 


TSA-DOP Low-limit control, SPDT, manual reset 

TSA-COP Low-limit control, SPDT, automatic reset 

TF142-SODP20 Low-limit control, DPDT, manual reset 

TF142-SOAP20 Low-limit control, DPDT, automatic reset 


M-648 Capillary mounting clips 

ES-1051 Freeze spray 

5.50 

(13.97) 

2.63 

(6.67) 

Reset Button 

(SODP models only) 

0.50 (1.27) 

Conduit Opening 

2 4 

1 

TSA 

Switch action on 

decrease in temperature 

(Contact 1 to 4 Opens; 

Contact 1 to 2 Closes) 

22 24 12 14 

21 11 

TF142 

Switch action on 

decrease in temperature 

(Contacts 11-14 and 21-24 Open; 

Contacts 11-12 and 21-22 Close) 

3.63 

(9.21)


LOW AND HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROLS 

A70 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The A70 Series heavy-duty temperature limit controls 

incorporate a vapor-charged sensing element. The 

A70G, A70H, and A70K have a four-wire, two-circuit 

contact block that contains two isolated sets of contacts. 

The contacts are designed to transfer at set point so 

that when the main contact opens, the auxiliary contact 

closes simultaneously. 

FEATURES 

• Automatic or manual reset models 

• Long-life, snap-acting contacts 

• Easy setpoint adjust 

APPLICATIONS 

Typical applications include shutdown of a ventilation 

system and BAS alarm indication upon low or high temperature 

limit. 

WIRING 

Control 

Circuit 

Line Line 

M2 M1 

A70 Series 

Low Limit - Action on temperature decrease 

High Limit - Action on temperature increase 

MODEL 

A70GA-1* 

Low Limit 

A70HA-1* 

Low Limit 

A70HA-2* 

Low Limit 

A70KA-1* 

High Limit 

SWITCH 

ACTION 

(Main contacts) 

LINE-M2 

Open Low 15 to 55 

(-10 to 15) 

Open Low 

Open Low 

Open High 

TEMP 

RANGE 

˚F (˚C) 

15 to 55 

(-10 to 15) 

35 to 80 

(0 to 25) 

100 to 170 

(38 to 77) 

RESET 

˚F (˚C) 

Auto 

5 (2.8) 

Manual 

Reset 

Manual 

Reset 

Manual 

Reset 

BULB/ 

CAPILLARY 

20' of 1/8" 

(6m of 0.32 cm) 

O.D. tubing 

20' of 1/8" 

(6m of 0.32 cm) 

O.D. tubing 

3/8" x 3" 

(0.95 x 7.6 cm) 

6' (1.9m)cap 

3/8" x 10" 

(0.95 x 25.4 cm) 

6' (1.9m) cap 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

INSTALLATION 


Screwdriver 

Slot 

Screwdriver 

Slot 

Screwdriver 

Slot 

Screwdriver 

Slot 

M-648 

Capillary 

Supports 


AC Full Load 

Amp 

AC Non- 

Inductive Amp 

Pilot Duty 

A70HA-1 

Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement. 

Typically mounted down stream of a coil with capillary 

exposed to all areas likely to encounter low or high 

temperatures as required. 

MAX 

ELECTRICAL RATING (all A70's shown) 

BULB 

TEMP 

˚F (°C) 

RANGE 

ADJUSTER 

MOTOR 

RATINGS 

(VAC) 

LINE-M2 (Main) 

120 208 240 277 

LINE-M1 (Auxiliary) 

120 208 240 277 

400 

(260) 

400 

(260) 

250 

(121) 

240 

(116) 

16.0 9.2 8.0 – 6.0 3.3 3.0 – 

16.0 9.2 8.0 – 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 

125 VA, 24-600 VAC 

57.5 VA, 120-300 VDC 

*Shipped with set point at 35˚F (1.6˚C). Control responds to the coldest 12" (30.5 cm) section of the sensor. Average weight 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 

401 



Device Technology 

Fuse (F) Fuses are used to suppress high currents by failing open to the protected circuit if other 

surge devices fail. Response time is less than one second. 

LC Inductive/Capacitive LC passive filter @ 60 Hz. 

Thermal fuse Thermal fuses are used to cut out on high temperatures by failing open to the protected 

circuit. Response time is several seconds. 

Gas tube (GT) Gas tubes are used to shunt to ground very high voltages (>300V), such as lightning. 

Response time is about 150 milliseconds. 

MOV or Varistor Metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used to shunt to ground low to medium voltages 

(15-130V) at low current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds. 

Zener diode Zener diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground medium voltages (200V). Typical 

response time is less than one nanosecond. 

PTC Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors open the circuit during a surge and 

suppress low voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than one second. 

Avalanche diode (AD) Silicon avalanche suppression diodes (SASD) are used to clip and shunt to ground low 

or transorb to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than five nanoseconds. 

Types of Surges 

Lightning Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA 

Power fluctuations Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds. 

402 


SURGE PROTECTION 

SELECTION CHART AND TECHNOLOGIES 

SURGE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART 

SURGE PROTECTION POWER AC/DC DDC POINTS 

Device 

Technology Clamp 5V 12V 24V 120V DI AI/AO DO-24V 

1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage Level 

Fltg Ctrl 

HSP-121BT1RU MOV, F, LC, MOV 315V 

X 

FAS-TEL 

AD, F 

300V 

PC642C-008 GT, AD, PTC 8V 


X 


X 


X X 

392-SVSR2 

Dual GT 300-750V X X X X X X X 

DTK-RJ11 

MOV, F 184-224V 

DTK-2LVLP 

MOV 15V or 27V 

DTK-120HW 

MOV 

130V 

X 

V130LA1 

MOV 

130V 

X 

V39ZA1 

MOV 

25V 

X X X X 

1.5KE56CA Transzorb (AD) 56V 

X X X 

DRS-008 

GT, AD, PTC 8V 

DRS-015 


X 

DRS-030 


X X 

DRS-036 


X X 

SS64-036-2 


X X 

SURGE PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIES 

SURGE PROTECTION APPLICATION 

DO-120V 

X 

X 

X 

X 

RS 

232 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

RS 

422 

X 

X 

X 

X 

RS 

485 

X 

X 

X 

X 

COMMUNICATION 

Phone Ethernet Arcnet 

X-> (model dial in w/ring) 

X 

X X 

X 

X 

X-> (no ring direct connect) 

X X 

X 

X 

X 

Modem 

Short Haul 

1. Select a surge protector with a clamping voltage that is higher than the system voltage that is being protected. 

2. Apply the "Protection Zone Concept," and keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If 

different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression 

used. 

3. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground window. 

Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp 

voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors. 

X 

X 

X 

X

DESCRIPTION 

The Model HSP-121BT1RU is an advanced, three-stage 

hybrid, solid-state power line protector. It is an in-line style 

surge protector designed for mounting in an enclosure or control 

panel to protect sensitive electronic controls from noise, 

surges, and spikes that are present on the power lines. 

The Model FAS-TEL is an advanced two-stage hybrid, solidstate 

phone and data line surge protector. It is designed to 

protect electronic equipment from unwanted surges and transients 

that may be present on the phone line or communications 

data lines. 

FEATURES 


POWER AND DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR 

MODELS HSP-121BT1RU, FAS-TEL 

• Protection from overvoltage transients 

• Three-stage hybrid technology 

• Automatic recovery 

• Fast response time 


HSP-121BT1RU 

Operating voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz 

Operating current 15A 

Clamping category 330V L-N, 400V L-G ANSI/IEEE 

C62.41 1991-CAT.C1/B3 

Peak clamp voltage 315V L-N, 350V L-G 

Response time


404 


DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR 

MODEL PC642C 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PC642C surge suppressor is a dual-pair (fourwire) 

module implementing three-stage hybrid technology. 

This module addresses over-voltage transients with gas 

tubes and silicon avalanche components. In addition, 

sneak and fault currents are mitigated with automatic 

resetting fuses (PTCs). The PTCs increase resistance 

several orders of magnitude when overcurrents are present 

and return to normal when overcurrents are removed. 

The ability to self-restore in this manner significantly 

increases suppressor performance and survivability. 

FEATURES 

• Lightning protection for low voltage signal lines 

• Three-stage protection 

• Plug-in module 

• Automatic recovery 

• Nanosecond response time 

INSTALLATION 

The Model PC642C card edge module is gold-plated, 

double-sided, and designed to mate with the Model 

PCB1B gold-plated female terminal connector. When 

snapped together, the data circuits pass through the 

protector in a serial fashion from the four Field Side terminals 

to the four Electronic Side terminals. Terminals 1 

or 10 of the Model PCB1B must be attached to buildingapproved 

ground. 


Voltage clamp (±10%) 8, 12, 15, 20, or 30V 

Response time 100 occurrences @ 

2000A, 8 x 20 µs 

Series resistance 5� typical 

Capacitance 1500 pF average 

Dimensions 1.8"D x 1.0"W x 2.4"H 

PC642C, PCB1B (4.5 x 2.5 x 6.1 cm) 

WIRING 

Data Line In 

Unprotected 

Pair 2 

Unprotected 

Pair 1 

Pin 1 or 10 grounded 

to local building- 

approved ground 

Do not install your 

own ground rod. 


Odd Terminals 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

PCB1B 

Field Side Electronics Side 

PC642C on PCB1B 

Even Terminals 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

If a shield is used, then 

ground at one end only. 

Keying Pin 

MODEL CLAMP VOLTAGE* TYPICAL SIGNAL APPLICATION 

PC642C-008 8 RS 422, RS 485 (8V) 

PC642C-012 12 0-10 VDC analog/digital I/O 

PC642C-015 15 RS 485 (15V) 

PC642C-020 20 0-18 VDC analog/digital I/O 

PC642C-030 30 RS 232 (24V), 4-20 mA analog 

*Use the smallest clamp voltage that allows the signal to pass. 


PCB1B Connector base (required for each PC642C) 

PC642C 

Data Line Out 

Protected 

Pair 2 

Protected 

Pair 1 

Operational current max 150 mA @ clamp voltage 

Protector 

Primary Three-element gas tube 

Secondary Rugged solid-state 

avalanche diode 

Third Positive temp coefficient device 

(PTC) 

Approvals UL497B 

Temp -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) 

Weight 8 oz (0.23 kg)


DIN RAIL DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR 

DRS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The DRS Series is a DIN rail mountable, single-pair surge 

suppression module that implements three-stage hybrid technology. 

This module addresses over-voltage transients with 

gas tubes and silicon avalanche components. In addition, 

sneak currents are mitigated with resettable fuses (PTCs). The 

PTCs increase resistance several orders of magnitude when 

overcurrents exceed safe levels. A normal state resumes 

when overcurrents are removed. The ability to self-restore in 

this manner significantly increases suppressor performance 

and survivability. 

FEATURES 

• Low-voltage data surge protection 

• Three-stage hybrid protection 

• Sneak/Fault current protection with resettable fuses, 

PTCs 

• Easy installation 

• Fits standard 35 mm DIN rail 

• Fast response time 100 10 KA 1500 150 5Ω 

DRS-015 12 15 >100 10 KA 1500 150 5Ω 

DRS-030 24 30 >100 10 KA 1500 150 5Ω 

DRS-036 30 36 >100 10 KA 1500 150 5Ω 


Response time


406 


LIGHTNING ARRESTER 

MODEL 392-SVSR2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 392-SVSR2 is a two-pair gas tube lightning 

arrester in a plastic outdoor enclosure. It protects the 

communication lines that run between buildings against 

high voltage transients caused by motors, transmitters, 

lightning, etc. 

These transients can be harmful, even capable of 

destroying building automation systems. It is recommended 

that the Model 392-SVSR2 be used at all 

points where communication cables exit or enter a building. 

To protect low voltage communications inputs on 

building automation systems, this device should be used 

in conjunction with an appropriate voltage level surge 

protector such as a Model DTK-2LVLP. 


Impulse breakdown 

@100/V/µsec 300-750V 

DC holder 150 VDC extinguishing in 

less than 150 ms 

Insulation resistance 

(initial) >100 M� 

Capacitance 5 pF 

Impulse life specification 

rated heavy-duty 80% survival to 400 

surges of 500A 

AC discharge 

current 65A, 11 cycle, 60 Hz 

End-of-life limits 

Insulation resistance


SURGE PROTECTORS 

DTK SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The DTK Series products are general-purpose Metal 

Oxide Varistor (MOV) based power line, telephone 

line, and data line surge protectors. They are designed 

to protect electronic equipment from surges and spikes 

that may be present on power inputs, communications, 

or data lines. 

FEATURES 

• Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) technology 

• Self-restoring after each surge within ratings 

• Nanosecond response time 

• UL listed 


DTK-RJ11 Data/Phone Line Protection 

Service voltage 130 VRMS 

Let-through voltage 184-224 V 

Continuous current 150 mA 

Response time


408 


VOLTAGE TRANSIENT SUPPRESSORS 

METAL OXIDE VARISTOR, TRANSZORB 

DESCRIPTION 

Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) and Transzorb Voltage 

Transient Suppressors reduce high voltage spikes that could 

damage or confuse sensitive electronic circuits. Voltage 

spikes often will cause digital logic circuits to select an incorrect 

logic state or to lock up entirely. 

Causes of Voltage Spikes 

Voltage spikes appear in the user’s circuit in three main ways: 

1. Voltage spikes come in on the power distribution bus and 

are coupled to the user’s circuits by the winding-to-winding 

capacitance of the user’s power transformers. 

2. Voltage spikes are generated in the power transformer secondary 

when the power transformer primary is turned off 

and the transformer’s magnetic field collapses. 

3. Voltage spikes are generated within the user’s circuits 

when an inductive load is switched off and the load’s magnetic 

field collapses. Voltage noise is also generated at the 

switched contacts and is radiated to the wires leading to 

the user’s microprocessor. 

OPERATION 

When a voltage at or below the suppressor’s nominal voltage 

is applied, the suppressor acts essentially like an open circuit. 

When a high voltage spike appears across the suppressor, 

however, the suppressor conducts or turns on, shunting the 

excess energy to the circuit return path, thereby reducing the 

amplitude of the voltage spike. When the voltage spike subsides, 

the suppressor reverts back to its open circuit state. 

MOV suppressors are bidirectional and can be used to protect 

both AC and DC circuits. They provide a somewhat soft 

clamping action in that the amplitude of the reduced voltage 

spike rises noticeably with the amount of energy contained in 

the spike. Transzorb suppressors come in unidirectional and 

bidirectional versions. The unidirectional versions are polaritysensitive 

and can only be used in DC applications. The bidirectional 

versions may be used in both AC and DC circuits just 

like the MOV. Transzorbs have a faster response time and a 

much harder clamping action than MOVs because voltage 

spikes are clipped at a more consistent level independent of 

their energy content. The Transzorb sold by Trane is a bidirectional 

version. 

Note: Trane carries the Varistors and Transzorbs most often 

specified by the BAS manufacturers. They are generalpurpose 

in nature and should cover most applications at 

the recommended voltage. 

WIRING 

Power Transformer 

120 VAC 24 VAC 

120V 

24V 

MOV 

MOV 

Suppresses external voltage spikes coming from 

the power distribution bus and the spikes from 

switching the power transformer off. 

Transformer Installation 

Circuit Hot 

MOV 

(either place) 

Circuit Return 

V130LA1 

V39ZA1 

V47ZA1 

1.5KE56CA 

Inductive Load 

(relay, EP valve, etc.) 

Load Switch 

(mechanical or electrical) 

Reduces mechanical switch arcs and electronic 

switch over-voltage breakdown. MOV voltage 

should match load circuit voltage. 

Coil and Switch Installation 

Approvals 

V130LA1 UL recognized component, 

File #E75961 and E56529 

V39ZA1/V47ZA1 UL recognized component, 

File #E135010 

1.5KE56CA UL recognized component, 

File #116110 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

V130LA1 130 VAC/175 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor 

V39ZA1 25 VAC/31 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor 

V47ZA1 30 VAC/38 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor 

1.5KE56CA 24 VAC/VDC transzorb voltage transient suppressor* 

* 56V nominal breakdown voltage


MANUAL OVERRIDE BOARDS 

MODELS MOB-4, MOB-8, MR-604/T, MR-608/T 

DESCRIPTION 

Model MOB-4 and MOB-8 Manual Override Boards 

are designed to add hand/off/automatic operation to 

any group of controller outputs. They may also be used 

as stand-alone override switch banks. 

Model MR-604/T and MR-608/T Manual Override 

Boards with Relays are designed to add on/off/auto 

operation to any group of controller outputs. They can 

also be used as stand-alone override switch banks. 

The on-board relays allow direct switching of loads 

without the use of external pilot relays. 

FEATURES 

MOB-4, MOB-8 


• Ability to convert four or eight outputs to 

hand/off/auto operation 

• Wire-captive screw termination 


• Feedback monitoring of switch positions 


MR-604/T, MR-608/T 

• Direct load control without external relays 


• Ability to convert four or eight outputs to 

on/off/auto operation 

• Wire-captive screw termination 





MOB-4, MR-604/T 24 VAC/VDC @ 65 mA max 

MOB-8, MR-608/T 24 VAC/VDC @ 130 mA max 

Switching capability 

MOB-4, -8 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC 

MR-604, -608 10A @ 120VAC, 24 VAC/VDC 

Manual Controls 

MOB-4, -8 Hand/Off/Auto toggle switch 

MR-604, -608 On/Off/Auto slide switch 



Mounting Snap-track (furnished) 

MOB-8 

MOB-4 

MR-608/T 

MR-604/T 

Weight 

MOB-4, MR-604/T 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) 

MOB-8, MR-608/T 0.8 lb (0.4 kg) 

Dimensions 

MOB-4 3.75"W x 3.25"H x 1.6"D 

(9.5 x 8.3 x 4.1 cm) 

MOB-8 7.5"W x 3.25"H x 1.6"D 

(19.1 x 8.3 x 4.1 cm) 

MR-604/T 4.25"W x 3.25"H x 1.2"D 

(10.8 x 8.3 x 3.1 cm) 

MR-608/T 8.5"W x 3.25"H x 1.2"D 

(21.6 x 8.3 x 3.1 cm) 

409 



410 


MANUAL OVERRIDE BOARDS 

MODELS MOB-4, MOB-8, MR-604/T, MR-608/T 

OPERATION 

MOB-4, MOB-8 

Hand/Off/Auto mode can be selected individually for each channel (1-8 or 1-4) with a three-position toggle switch. 

Each channel's LED will light any time that output is commanded on from the hand or auto mode. 

24 VAC or DC must be applied to the module for the hand position to operate. The hand voltage source (hot terminal) 

and each auto IN voltage source can be separate sources as long as they all share a common return connection. 

The status contact is closed when all channel switches are in the auto position. Moving any switch to the off or hand 

position will cause the status contact to open. 

MR604/T, MR608/T 

On/Off/Auto mode can be selected individually with a three-position slide switch for each channel (1-4 or 1-8). Each 

channel's LED will light any time that output is commanded on from the on or auto mode. 

For the on position to operate, 24 VAC or DC must be applied to the sup and com terminals of one of the relays. 

The on voltage source (SUP terminal) and each CTL voltage source can be separate sources as long as they all 

can share a common return connection. 

In the auto position, the relay is under the control of the BAS, PLC, or other controller. In the on position, the relay is 

energized regardless of the controller signal. In the off position, the relay is de-energized regardless of the controller 

signal. 

WIRING 

Normally Closed to input of 

monitoring computer 

Contact opens if any switch 

is not in AUTO position. 

MOB-4 

STATUS 

HAND 

OFF 

AUTO 

RETURN HOT 

24 VAC / VDC 

1 2 3 4 

AUTO 

IN 

OUT 

AUTO 

IN 

OUT 

AUTO 

IN 

OUT 

1 2 3 4 

Pilot Relay 

24V 

OUT 

AUTO 

IN 

Digital Output from BAS, PLC, or 

Other Controller 

*See "Operation" above for 

power supply considerations 

120 VAC Motor or Motor 

typical 

Power Supply* 

L 

24VAC/DC 

Starter Coil 

Safeties 

MS 

N 

MOB-4 (typical for MOB-8) 

R 

10A @ 120 VAC, 

24 VAC, or 24 VDC Contact 

On LED 


Motor or Motor Starter Coil 

L MS N L 

MS N 

NC C NO 


MOB-4 Four-channel override board 

MOB-8 Eight-channel override board 

MR-604/T Four-channel override board with relays 

MR-608/T Eight-channel override board with relays 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

Safeties 

NC C NO 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

NC C NO 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

Motor or Motor Starter Coil 

Safeties 

NC C NO 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

SUP CTL COM SUP CTL COM SUP CTL COM SUP CTL COM 

+ 

24 VAC/DC* 

SUP and COM Terminals 

(common to all relays) 

Digital Outputs from BAS, 

PLC, or other controller 

MR-604/T (typical for MR-608/T) 

*See "Operation" above for 

power supply considerations


MANUAL AND DIGITAL TIME SWITCHES 

93000, TS-400 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Marktime 93000 Series Wall-Box Manual Time Switch 

is a spring-wound, manually-set time switch for the control of 

electrical current. Interchangeable with standard toggle switches 

to turn circuits either off or on at the end of a preset time 

period, the 93000 Series is ideally suited for new installations 

or retrofit projects. 

FEATURES 

• White and ivory plates and knobs included with each 

time switch 

• Time ranges from minutes to 12 hours, all with ±5% 

accuracy 

• Easy-to-install two-wire design to fit into standard 

single-gang wall box 

TABLE 1. 93000 SERIES 

ELECTRICAL RATING 

20A 125 VAC 1 hp 

10A 277 VAC 

7A 125 VAC tungsten 

DESCRIPTION 

The Watt Stopper ® InteliSwitch ® TS-200 Series is a digital 

time switch that automatically turns the load off after a preset 

amount of time. The load can be turned off anytime during the 

timer’s countdown by pushing the on/off button. The TS-200 

Series has four user-adjustable features: 

Time-out delay 

The timer can be adjusted to hold the load from five minutes 

to 12 hours. This is adjusted by setting the DIP switch located 

on the left side of the unit. 

Time scrolling 

In situations where the load needs to be held on for a different 

amount of time than the preset time-out period, time scrolling 

allows the user to manually and temporarily override the timeout 

period without adjusting the DIP switch. 

Flash option 

If this option is on, the load will flash once, one minute before 

the time-out period expires. Set this option on the DIP switch. 

Beeper option 

If this option is on, the timer will beep every five seconds during 

the last minute of the time-out period. Set this option on 

the DIP switch. 


MODEL 

No Hold Previous 

93501C (90005/90539) 

93502C (90006/90032) 

93503C (90008/90024) 

93504C (90281/90540) 

93505C (90007/90017) 

93506C (90001/90015) 

93507C (90240/90547) 

TS-400-W TS-400-24-W 

Voltage 120/277 VAC/60 Hz 24 VDC, 24 VAC/60 Hz 

Load rating 800W tungsten Isolated relay 

or ballast @ 120 VAC SPDT, 1A @ 30V 

1200W ballast @ 277 VAC 

Time adjust 5, 15, 30 min., 1,3, 6, 9, 12 hrs 

(both models) 

Color White White 

Weight 0.4 lb (182g) 0.4 lb (182g) 

• Heavy motor loads without the need of contactors 

• Rotary knob operation 

• Available to turn circuits off or on, with or 

without manual hold override feature 

• UL listed, CUL 


DESCRIPTION 

WIRING 

Neutral 

Ground 

Ground (capped) 

(black) Hot 

MODEL 

With Hold Previous 

93511C (90012/90543) 

93512C (90011/90037) 

93513C (90010/90038) 

Load 

(red) 

+24 VDC or 

24 VAC 60Hz 

Return 

(red) 

(black) 

Important! 

120 VAC Ground - Green 

277 VAC Ground - Green/Yellow 

DESCRIPTION 

0-15 min. N.O./N.C. 


0-30 min. N.O./N.C. 


0-60 min. N.O./N.C. 

0-120 min. N.O./N.C. 





93516C (90015/90014) 0-12 hour N.O./N.C. (w/hold) 

TS-400-W TS-400-24-W 


Weight: 0.4 lb (182g) 

TS-200 


(green) Normally Closed 

(orange) Common 

(yellow) Normally Open 


TS-400-W Digital time switch, 120/277 VAC 

TS-400-24-W Digital time switch, 24 VAC/VDC 

411 



412 


ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCKS 

MODELS KEL71/120, KEL72/120 

DESCRIPTION 

Models KEL71/120 and KEL72/120 are one- and twochannel 

electronic time clocks that provide simple, inexpensive 

control of lighting, HVAC equipment, or any 

electrical load with a time-of-day schedule. The control 

may be utilized as a 24-hour, 7-day, or 365-day clock. A 

simple keypad combined with a large LCD display make 

Models KEL71/120 and KEL72/120 easy to program. 

FEATURES 

• 24-hour, 7-day, or 365-day programming 

• 128 time events 

• Large LCD display and simple keypad 

• Holiday programming 

• Built-in capacitors for maintaining memory two 

days on loss of power 

• UL listed, CSA certified 

• NEMA 1 enclosure with knockouts 

• 12- or 24-hour display format 


Power 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4 VA 

Relay output 

KEL71/120 SPDT, single-channel maintained only 

KEL72/120 2-SPDT, two-channel maintained or 

single-channel momentary 

Relay ratings 

N.O. Contacts N.C. Contacts 

20A general-purpose @120-277 VAC 10A general-purpose @120-277 VAC 

1 hp @ 240 VAC 1/4 hp @ 120 VAC 

2 hp @ 208-240 VAC 1/2 hp @ 208-240 VAC 

20A ballast @ 120 VAC 3A ballast @ 120 VAC 

10A ballast @ 208-277 VAC 275 VA @ 120-240 VAC 

5A tungsten @ 120-277 VAC 

420 VA pilot duty @ 120-240 VAC 

Power outage 

carryover Program and time of day, 48 hours 


Relative humidity 10% to 90% RH noncondensing 

Enclosure NEMA1 painted metal with 

knockouts and lockable hasp 


(20 x 10.8 x 7.6 cm) 


Approvals UL listed, File #145941; 


WIRING 

Channel 1 

(or Momentary 

On Relay 

KEL72 only) 


REVIEW PROGRAM 

PREVIOUS 

NEXT 

RUN OVERRIDE 


KEL71/120 Single-channel time clock, 120 VAC 

KEL72/120 Two-channel time clock, 120 VAC 

– 

KEL72/120 

+ 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

T 

120 VAC 

Power 

Recessed 

Master Reset 

Channel 2 (or 

Momentary 

Off Relay 

KEL72 only) 

Wiring Terminals 

10-16 AWG


ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCKS 

DIGI-42 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The DIGI-42 Series Electronic Time Clocks are compact 

time controls providing 24-hour or 7-day timebased 

switching of HVAC control circuits, lighting, or 

machinery. The DIGI-42A is a single-circuit control and 

the DIGI-42/2 is a two-circuit control. They utilize heavyduty, 

16A, SPDT relay contacts suitable for low or line 

voltage loads. 

FEATURES 

• 24-hour or 7-day programming 

• 42 programs, up to 21 on and 21 off 

• 24 VAC or 120 VAC models 

• Automatic daylight time changeover 

• Large LCD display of day, time, and load status 

• Manual override of each circuit 

• Eighth-day holiday programming 

• Two-week battery backup 

• UL recognized, CE certified 


Power 24 VAC or 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 

4.4 max VA 

Relay output 

DIGI-42A SPDT 

DIGI-42/2 2-SPDT 

Relay ratings 16A, 277 VAC resistive; 

1000W tungsten, 240 VAC; 

500W tungsten, 120 VAC; 

1/2 hp, 120 VAC; 1 hp, 240 VAC 

Backup Automatic recharged battery, 2 weeks 

Shortest switch time 1 minute 

Accuracy ±4 minutes per year 

Connections Screw terminals, 12 AWG max 

Mounting Surface or DIN rail (DIGI-42/2 

requires MB-DIN adapter) 


Enclosure Plastic with terminal cover 

Dimensions 4"H x 2.8"W x 2.3"D 

(10.2 x 7.2 x 5.8 cm) 




WIRING 


1 2 

Input 

Power 


DIGI-42A-24 Single-circuit time clock, 24 VAC 

DIGI-42A-120 Single-circuit time clock,120 VAC 

DIGI-42/2-24 Two-circuit time clock, 24 VAC 

DIGI-42/2-120 Two-circuit time clock,120 VAC 

MB-DIN DIN rail mounting adapter for DIGI-42/2 

M 

M 

1 2 

DIGI-42 

NO NC 

3 4 5 

Input Isolated Contacts 

Power Output 

DIGI-42A 

Note: Screw terminals accept up to #12 AWG wire 

NO NC NO NC 

3 4 5 6 7 8 

Circuit 1 Circuit 2 

Isolated Contacts 

Output 

DIGI-42/2 

413 



414 


THERMOSTAT GUARDS 

TG500, AT-1100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The TG500 and AT-1100 Series Thermostat Guards 

are used to enclose and protect wall thermostats and 

sensors against tampering, damage, and unauthorized 

adjustment of thermostat settings. 

FEATURES 

• Patented, double-wall construction for TG500 to 

provide extra measure of tamper-resistance 

• Available in three sizes (small, medium, and large) 

to fit virtually all thermostats and sensors 

• Constructed of opaque plastic, clear plastic, 

off-white painted steel, wire, or cast aluminum 

• TG500 Series includes wall plate, plastic ring 

base, guard cover, lock, and two keys 

• Vertical or horizontal mounting 

• Vents in TG500 Series base allow airflow 

MODEL 

TG510A1001 

TG510B1009 

TG510D1005 

AT-1103 

AT-1104 

TG511A1000 

TG511B1008 

TG511D1004 

TG512A1009 

TG512B1007 

TG512D1003 

AT-1163 

SIZE COVER BASE 

Small 

Medium 

Large 

Clear 

Opaque 

Painted 

Steel 

(off-white) 

Wire 

Cast 

Aluminum 

Clear 

Opaque 

Painted 

Steel 

(off-white) 

Clear 

Opaque 

Painted 

Steel 

(off-white) 

Wire 

Clear 

Opaque 

Opaque 

– 

– 

Clear 

Opaque 

Opaque 

Clear 

Opaque 

Opaque 

– 


INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS 

WALL Height Width Depth Height Width Depth 

PLATE in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) 

Opaque 4.38 (11.13) 

Opaque 

Opaque 

4.38 (11.13) 2.25 (5.72) 5.88(14.94) 

5.88 (14.94) 2.50 (6.35) 

– 4.25 

4.25 

– 

Opaque 5.06 

Opaque 

Opaque 

Opaque 5.88 (14.94) 

Opaque 

Opaque 

8.38 (21.29) 3.0 (7.62) 7.25(18.42) 

9.75 (24.77) 3.38 (8.59) 

– 

TG510B 

AT-1103 

(10.80) 2.63 (6.66) 1.63 (4.12) 

(10.80) 2.75 (6.98) 1.63 (4.12) 

(12.85) 6.06 (15.39) 2.63 (6.68) 6.5 (16.51) 7.5 (19.05) 2.94 (7.47) 

6.50 (16.51) 6.38 (16.21) 3.0 (7.62) 

TG510A 

AT-1104

HVAC CONTROLS

PRODUCTS 


TH8000 Series 

Residential Programmable 

Thermostats 

on page 421! 

SERVICES 

You get Experienced 

control engineering Help 

at Trane. 

SOLUTIONS 

Let us be your source for 

Stand-Alone comfort 

control Solutions. 

HVAC CONTROLS 


ELECTRONIC CONTROLLERS 

A19, A319, A419 Series — Bulb Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 

350 System — JCI Electronic Controller System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 

PXZ4 — Fuji Single Loop PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 

UCM-420A — Kele Single Loop PI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 

PNEUMATIC CONTROL DEVICES 

2200 Series — Single Setpoint Room Pneumatic Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 

356/357 — Pneumatic Duct Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 

FILN05 — End Device Inline Pneumatic Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 

K332 — Pneumatic PRV Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 

K337/339 — Pneumatic Station Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

K-383/384/387 — Pneumatic Air Pressure Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

PV600 — Air and Water Two-way Isolation/Shutoff Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 

T4000 — JCI One-Pipe and Two-Pipe Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 

TK-1000 Series — Invensys One Pipe and Two Pipe Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . .459 

THERMOSTATS 

Thermostat Selection Chart,and Control Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416,418 

ET5, ETD5 — Two-Position Room Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 

UT8001 — Two-Position Room Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 

RTC-2P — Proportional Thermostat 1 Heat/1Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 

T155 — Line and Low Voltage Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 

T158 — Floating Output Modulating Thermostat with Digital Display . . . . . . . . .439 

T168 — Proportional 4-20 ma Output Thermostat with Digital Display . . . . . . . .439 

T25, T26 — Line and Low Voltage Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 

T46 — Line and Low Voltage Thermostat with Fan and System Switch . . . . . . .433 

T6575, T8575 Series — Digital Fan Coil Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 

T6984 — Floating Thermostat Single Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 

KT600 — Single/Multistage Programmable/NonProgrammable Thermostat . . . .423 

KTEC Series — Communicating Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 

T7300F2010 — Programmable Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 

T7984 — Proportional Thermostat Single and Dual Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 

T874, Q674 — Low-Voltage Thermostat and Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 

TC-1100 — Line and Low Voltage Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 

TH8000 — Vision Pro Touch Screen Programmable Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . .421 

T170 — Fan Coil H/C Thermostat w/Motion Occupancy input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 

TA167 — Proportional 0-10V H/C Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 

OTHER CONTROL DEVICES 

35A — Electric to Pneumatic Switch, 1 scfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 

EP-3 — Electric to Pneumatic Switch, 0.5 scfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 

V11 — JCI Electric to Pneumatic Switch, 1.5 scfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 


Trane supplies a wide selection of HVAC/BAS 

products, services, and solutions to you everyday. 

If you can’t find what you need in the Trane catalog, 

we can get it from theirs!

HVAC CONTROLS 

416 

HVAC CONTROLS 

NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT SELECTION TABLE 

MODEL 

~ indicates 

thermostat base 

ET5-S-1 

ET5D-S-1 

MX8001 

TC-1101 (55-85°F) 

TC-1102 (45-75°F) 

TC-1103 (75-105°F) 

T46SDA-1 

T46SAA-1 

T26S-18 

T26T-3 

T25A-1 

T25A-16 

T6575B1003 

T6575C1001 

T8575B2007 

T8575C2005 

KT600-HCN 

KT600-MSN 

KT600-MEN 

KT600-HPN 

TA170-001 

TB170-001 

TA155-043 

TB155-047 

TA158-100 

TB158-100 

TC158-100 

TH158-100 

TA167-006 

TA167-007 

TA168-100 

T7984A1057 

T7984C1053 

T6984A1059 

RTC-2P 

T874A1036 

T874B1019 

T874C1000 

T874D1165 

T874F1015 

T874G1246 

T874W1015 

~Q674A1019 

~Q674B1034 

~Q674B1075 

~Q674C1058 

~Q674D1040 

~Q674E1049 

~Q674F1212 

Floating 

X 

X 

4-20 mA/0-10V 

or 2-10V 

mix air 

dual 

dual 

dual 

single 

dual 

dual 

(heat pump) 

CONTROL OUTPUTS 

Two-position 

(Electric Heat) 

Stages 

H - heat, C - cool, 

P - heat pump, 

D - damper, F - fan 

Control Voltage 

Visual Indication 

RH - humidity 

SPST H Line 

SPDT H or C Line 

SPDT 1H, 1C Low Therm 

SPDT H or C Line Therm 







2-SPDT 2H or 2C Line Therm 

2-SPDT 1H, 1C Line Therm 

2-SPST 1H, 1C Line Digital 

2-SPST 1H, 1C Line Digital 

2-SPST 1H, 1C Low Digital 





5-SPST 2H, 2C,P Low Digital 

6-SPST 1H, 1C, 1D Line Digital 

6-SPST 1H, 1C, 1D Line Digital 

2-Triacs H or C Line 

2-Triacs 1H, 1C 

2-Triacs 1H, 1C Low Digital 

5-Triacs 2H,C,D,F Low Digital 

5-Triacs 2H, 2C,F Low Digital 

3-Triacs 1H,P,F Low Digital 

1H, 1C Low 

H or C Low 

1H, 1C Low Digital 

H or C Low 

1H, 1C Low 

2-Triacs H or C Low 

1H, 1C Low Digital 

2-SPST 1H, 1C Low Therm 




2-SPST 2H Low Therm 



THERMOSTAT 

CONTROLS 

Setpoint 

Dial 

Dial 

Slide 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Concealed 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Dial 

Dial 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Dial 

Dial 

Digital 

Dial 

Dial 

Dial 

Digital 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Slide 

Setback Local 

Setback Remote 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Remote Sensor 

SYSTEM 

SWITCHING 

Off/Auto 

X 

X 

Heat/Off/Cool/Auto 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Heat/Off/Cool 

None 

Automatic 

X 

X 

Heat/Auto/Cool 

Off/Low/Med/Hi 

Low/Med/Hi 

Off/On 

Auto/On 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

FAN 

SWITCHING POWER 

X 

X 

X 

X 

None None 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Auto 

Staging 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Required Power 

(VAC) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

120 

120 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24-277 

24-277 

24-277 

24-277 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

HVAC CONTROLS 

PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT SELECTION TABLE WITH 

BUILT-IN CLOCK 

MODEL 

~ indicates 

thermostat base 

KT600-HCP 

KT600-MSP 

KT600-MEP 

KT600-HPP 

T7350A1004 

T7350B1002 

T7350D1008 

T7350M1002 

TH8110U1003 

TH8320U1008 

TH8321U1006 

TH8220U1003 

Floating 

4-20 mA/0-10V 

or 2-10V 

mix air 

dual 

CONTROL OUTPUTS 

Two-position 

2-SPST 

4-SPST 

4-SPST 

5-SPST 

2-SPST 

4-SPST 

6-SPST 

SPST 

2-SPST 

4-SPST 

4-SPST 

4-SPST 

THERMOSTAT CONTROL TERMS 

Stages 

H - heat, C - cool, 

P - heat pump, 

D - damper, F - fan 

1H, 1C 

2H, 2C 

2H, 2C 

2H, 2C, P 

1H, 1C, P 

2H, 2C, P 

3H, 3C, P 

1H, 1C 

1H, 1C, P 

2H, 2C, P 

2H, 2C, P 

2H, 2C 


Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Visual Indication 

RH - humidity 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Dig, RH 

Dig, RH 

Digital 

Digital 

Dig, RH 

Digital 

THERMOSTAT 

CONTROLS 

Setpoint 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Digital 

Dig, RH 

Dig, RH 

Digital 

Digital 

Dig, RH 

Digital 

Setback Local 

Setback Remote 

Remote Sensor 

SYSTEM 

SWITCHING 

Off/Auto 

Heat/Off/Cool/Auto 

Heat/Off/Cool 


FAN 

SWITCHING POWER 

Auto Automatically controls without human intervention (i.e., auto changeover from heating setpoint control 

to cooling setpoint control). 

Changeover (C/O) The mode change from heating to cooling and back. Sometimes this also changes the setpoint 

according to the heating or cooling mode. 

Deadband (DB) The area between setpoints (Htg < DB < Clg) when no control signal is active and no energy is being 

used to control anything. Sometimes called zero energy band. 

Differential The overshoot of a control signal before turning off. Most often used in mechanical thermostats 

(i.e., cooling on (setpoint) at 75° but off at 73° so the differential is 2°). 

Floating Thermostat control of tri-state actuators. Old technology floated a switch wiper between two contacts 

to achieve a tri-state operation. On - Off - On operation around the setpoint. 

Heat pump A special AC unit that can be reversed from cooling to heating by using the O/B terminals. 

Occupied (Occ) Indicates when comfort setpoints for temperatures/ventilation/humidity/pressure should be used. Also 

commonly listed as Day or Home. 

Offset The difference between two values with the same engineering units (i.e., difference between the setpoint 

72° and the control point 70° value, so the offset is 2°). 

PI control Proportional-Integral control. This is the use of two techniques to achieve setpoint over a given time 

period with little overshoot. (Most often used in temperature control.) 

PID control Proportional-Integral-Derivative control. This is the use of all three techniques to achieve setpoint as 

fast as possible without overshoot. (Used mostly in industrial process control.) 

Proportional Band (PB) The area around the setpoint causing the controller to drive the output from 0 to 100%. Simillar to 

throttling range. 

Setback (NSB) Use of an alternate setpoint during unoccupied hours, usually at night (i.e., Night Setback “NSB,” 72° 

days (Occ) and 65° nights (Un-occ)). 

Setpoint (SP) The value the controller (thermostat) is trying to achieve. 

Stages of control The sequential on/off commands to multiple contacts based on a controller’s setpoint action. Often 

listed as two-stage heating and two-stage cooling (2H/2C). 

Throttling range (TR) The amount of change in the controlled variable to drive the actuators through its complete stroke 0 to 

100%. Similar to proportional band. 

Un-occupied (Un-occ) Indicates when dollar savings setpoints for temperatures/ventilation/humidity/pressure should be used. 

Also commonly listed as Night, Away, or Night Setback (NSB). 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Off/Low/Med/Hi 

Low/Med/Hi 

Off/On 

Auto/On 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Required Power 

(VAC) 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

417 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

HVAC CONTROLS 

HVAC CONTROL TERMS 

GENERAL CONTROL TERMS 

Analog Indicates a smooth transition from minimum to maximum, 0-100% control, or sensor action. 

Control agent The medium to be directly controlled by your control loop, such as cold or hot water. 

Control loop The loop refers to the sensor, controller, actuator, and controlled variable that loops back to the 

sensor feedback. 

Control point The actual value of the controlled variable (i.e., 72°F room temperature). 

Controlled variable (CV) The final element under control, such as room temperature, room humidity, or building pressure. 

Note: do not confuse CV with a valve flow characteristic Cv. 

Derivative The calculation and corrective action of how fast the controlled variable is changing and, thus, 

reaching setpoint as fast as possible. 

Direct acting Direct refers to the direct action of the controlled variable. Increasing causes the actuator output to 

increase (CV ...Output ) DA. 

Integral time The timed interval at which the controller corrects for the offset between the setpoint and the control 

point, eventually allowing the control point to reach setpoint. 

Hysteresis The linkage slop as an actuator or sensor as it reverses direction but affects no change in the control 

device or sensed medium. Many times confused with differential. 

Modulating Analog control from 0-100% from an open to closed condition. Proportional or tri-state. 

Proportional The analog reaction (gain) to the difference (offset) between the setpoint and controlled variable. The 

output is in porportion (0-100%) to the offset and thus always is having an offset from setpoint. The 0- 

100% offset that effects the 0-100% output of the controller is the proportional band or throttling band. 

Reverse acting Reverse refers to the reverse action of the controlled variable. Increasing causes the actuator output 

to decrease (CV ...Output ) RA. 

Tri-state Three power states: On (forward) - Off - On (backward). Used to modulate control actuators stoking 

out (CW) or stoking in (CCW). 

Two position Indicates an On/Off, or Open/Closed, control action or monitoring. 

ELECTRICAL CONTROL TERMS 

Dry contact An electrical contact with no voltage present on either terminal. 

Form A contact Single Pole Single Throw (SPST). Normally closed. 

Form B contact Single Pole Single Throw (SPST). Normally open. 

Form C contact Single Pole Double Throw (SPDT). One open/Wiper/One closed contact. 

Line voltage Any voltage greater than 50V. Typically 120 VAC in HVAC controls. 

Low voltage Any voltage below 50V. Typically 24 VAC in HVAC controls. 

Normally open (N.O.) Refers to the contact in its normal condition (relay coil without power) as an open contact. 

Normally closed (N.C.) Refers to the contact in its normal condition (relay coil without power) as a closed contact. 

SPDT Single Pole Double Throw. Same as Form C contact. 

SPST Single Pole Single Throw. Same as Form A or Form B contact. 

Triac A solid state device made to switch AC power for control. In an open circuit (without a load), the Triac 

output (open circuit) has a natural leakage current, which discharges supply voltage to the output. This 

leakage does not have enough power to control anything but is difficult and confusing to troubleshoot 

without a load on the output terminals. 

GENERAL BAS CONTROL TERMS 

AI Analog input from the field. Usually an RTD, thermistor, or analog 4-20 mA/0-10V field device. 

AO Analog output to the field. Usually a 4-20 mA/0-10V field actuator device. 

DI Digital input from the field. Usually requires a dry contact field device. 

DO Digital output to the field. Usually a relay or contactor field device. 

Com-line Communication wires between the MUXs and originates at the head end (home run or star). Types include 

RS485, LON, Ethernet, RS232, and many proprietary types. 

Head end Usually PC-based and refers to the master interface located in the building managment office. 

MUX Generic government term for a field point gathering panel. 

Points Individual input sensors or control outputs located throughout the building (DI, AI, DO, AO). 

Protocol Refers to the communication technique used between the MUXs and head end. Types include BACnet, LON, 

N2, Modbus, Field-bus, and many proprietary types. 

418

HVAC CONTROLS 

MULTISTAGE SEVEN-DAY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 

MODEL T7300F2010 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model T7300F2010 is a single or multistage seven-day 

programmable thermostat (°F or °C) for use with AHU control 

for both heating and cooling applications. It is designed for low 

voltage power and switching to control within 1°F (1.8°C) using 

Proportional Plus Integral (PI) algorithms, and it includes 

adjustable delays to prevent equipment short cycling. The 

Model T7300F2010 has both system and fan switching with an 

internal sensor or remote sensor capabilities. It also has a 

number of energy-saving programs such as a seven-day clock 

with two occupied and unoccupied periods per day, optimal 

start, single-button continuous unoccupied, and three-hour 

occupied override. The cover has an easy-to-read digital display 

for temperature, time, system status, and fan status and 

16 dedicated buttons for day-to-day control necessities. The 

temperature display can be disabled or offset to enhance occupant 

perceptions. 

FEATURES 


• Outputs up to three heat and three cool 

• Seven-day programming clock 

• Two occupied and unoccupied periods per day 

• Optimal start 

• Continuous unoccupied button 

• Occupied override button 

• Economizer occupied enable contact 

• Display in °F or °C 

• Remote sensor inputs 


Power 20-30 VAC @ 6 VA, 50/60Hz 

Clock 12 or 24 hour, accuracy one 

min/month 

Display LCD 1.75"W x 0.75"H 

(4.45 x 1.91 cm), ±1°F or ±0.5°C 

Enclosure Beige plastic 

Keyboard disable Switch setting on thermostat 

Annunciation Two user-defined LEDs 

(on most models) 

Relays 30 VAC max 

Running 1.6A H/C, 0.5A fan 

Inrush 3.5A heating, 7.5A cooling, 

3.5A fan 


(12.07 x 18.57 x 4.32 cm) 


Occ/Unocc Internal clock schedule or via 

keyboard 

Mounting Q7300 subbase with terminals 

INSTALLATION 

T7300F2010 

• Digital display with temperature disable 

• Temperature display offset 

• Setpoint range stops 

• Adjustable staging on/off times 

• Fan control 

• System control 

• Changeover manual or auto 

• Relay switching (no mercury) 

• CE listed 

• No battery backup required 




Control algorithm PI 

Setpoint adjust 

Heating 40° to 90°F (4° to 31°C) 

Cooling 45° to 99°F (7° to 37°C) 

Default setpoint Occ Unocc 

Heating 70°F (21°C) 55°F (13°C) 

Cooling 78°F (26°C) 90°F (32°C) 

Interstage control point 1° to 12°F (1° to 6°C), 0°F default 

Deadband adjust 2° to 10°F (1° to 5°C), 2°F default 

Fan switch Keyboard, On/Auto 

System switch Keyboard, H/O/C/Auto 

Staging on/off time On 0-2 min. (2 min. default) 

Off 0-5 min. (4 min. default) 

Power interrupt No battery required, infinite 

program memory, 48-hour clock 

Agency CE 

The thermostat mounts to a Q7300 subbase. The subbase mounts horizontally on a wall or a 2" x 4" (5.01 x 10.16 cm) outlet box with screws 

provided. No leveling is required. 

419 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

420 

HVAC CONTROLS 

MULTISTAGE SEVEN-DAY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 

MODEL T7300F2010 

THERMOSTAT DISPLAY / PROGRAMMING KEYS 

Run 

Program 

Temporary 

Occupied 

Continuous 

Occupied 

Occupied 

Start Time 

Set Current 

Day/Time 

11:32 

MON 

System 

Heat 

Set Program 

Unoccupied 

Start Time 

Clear 

Start Time 

AM 

Day 

Copy 

68˚ ROOM 

Fan 

Auto 

Set Temperature 

Occupied 

Temp 

Unoccupied 

Temp 

Heat/Cool 

Settings 

System Fan 

Change 

Time/Temp 

TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS 

Through holes for handibox 

or drywall mounting 

(W1) (N/A) 

A1 A3 W2 A2 Y2 

{E} 

(N/A) 

(E) Y3 

W3 (O) 

W1 Y1 G 

(Y1) (Y2) 

RC RH X1 X3 T T AS AS 

(R) 

{R} N/A X4 

N/A 

Terminal Designation Typical Connection Terminal Designation Typical Connection 

A1, A2, A3 Auxiliary relay (economizer) O Cooling damper motor; changeover valves 

AS, AS Discharge air sensor (L7046) RC Power connection to cooling transformer 

B Heating damper motor, changeover valve RH, R Power connection to heating transformer 

C1-C5 Remote override (T7147) T, T Remote sensor 

E Emergency heat relay X Common connection 

G Fan relay coil W1, W2, W3 Heat control stage 1, 2, 3 

O Cooling damper motor; changeover valves X1, X3, X4 User input LEDs 

Y1, Y2, Y3 Cooling control stage 1, 2, 3 

OPERATION 

WIRING 

Subbase for T7300F 

Wire way 

* Q7300A2008 

Q7300A2016 

Q7300A2040 

Q7300G2005 

(Q7300C2012) 

(B) C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 

* {Q7300D2002} 

Q7300 Subbase Terminations 



T7300F2010 Multistage digital thermostat (subbase Q7300 required) 

Q7300A2040 Subbase for T7300F, 2H/1C, no LEDs 

Q7300A2016 Subbase for T7300F, 2H/2C, two LEDs, aux contact for economizer 

Q7300G2005 Subbase for T7300F, 3H/3C, two LEDs, aux contact for economizer 

Q7300C2012 Subbase for T7300F, 3H/2C, two LEDs, heat pump, H/C changeover, economizer contact 


T7047C2007 Remote space sensor (1420� @ 75°F, NTC) 

T7022A1010 Return duct mount sensor (1420� @ 75°F, NTC) continuous fan required 

C7046C1000� Discharge air duct mount sensor (3 k� thermistor @ 77°F, NTC), continuous fan required 

T7147A2000 Remote space sensor with occupied button and LED indicator 

T7147A2018 Remote space sensor with occupied button and warmer/cooler buttons with LED indicator 

ST-D42 Clear plastic thermostat guard for T7300 

*Obsolete 

The thermostat uses a PI control algorithm to stage the heating or cooling as needed. The internal clock and program times are set for 

seven days, two occupied and unoccupied times per day. The system switch controls the selection of heat, off, cool, or auto. The fan 

switch is used for continuous-on or automatic for system control. The continuous unoccupied is used for holidays. Temporary occupied 

shifts back to occupied for a set time period. The optimal start program calculates start times based on a recovery of 5°F (2.7°C) per hour 

for cooling or heat pumps and 3°F (1.7°C) for conventional heating systems. Other special control settings are listed below. 

Special Control Settings 

°F or °C in 12- or 24-hour clock Temperature averaging (internal and remote) 

System key change (Auto), (H/O/C/Auto), (H/O/C) Temporary override times (1h, 3h, 8h, 12h) 

Fan key change (Auto), (On/Auto) Unoccupied temperatures and deadband adjust 

Temperature display disable Interstage control point adjust and H/C cycle rate 

Temperature display offset ±3°F (1.6°C) Fan operation (on/occupied), (on during call only) 

Termperature range stops (heat and cool) Minimum on/off-time adjust (H/C)

HVAC CONTROLS 

VISION PRO TOUCH SCREEN PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 

TH8000, TB8220 

DESCRIPTION 

The Vision Pro T_8000 Series is a 7-day scheduling or nonscheduling 

thermostat designed for universal system compatibility 

and is easy to program for precise comfort control. Setup 

is done using the large clear backlit display by just touching the 

screen and following the menu. The thermostat is configurable 

for system type (Conventional/Heat pump), system stages 

(1H/1C, 2H/2C and 3H/2C HP), Fan control (electric/gas), with 

some models offering humidity control features. The T_8000 is 

powered by 24VAC and/or 3 AAA batteries for time and program 

retention. 

OPERATION APPLICATION 

Designed specifically for low voltage control requiring time 

scheduled occupied-unoccupied control. Ideal for Roof Top 

Units (small business or retail), Homes, Condos, Cottages, and 

any packaged AHU operation. 

FEATURES 

• Five-year waranty 

• Scheduling or non-scheduling 

• Large backlit touch screen display 

• Menu touch screen interaction 

• Fan switching (touch screen) 

• System switching (touch screen) 

• Set point and configuration 

(touch screen) 

• 1H/1C or 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP 

• Heat pump O = on or B = on 

• Emergency heat (electric/gas) 

• De-humidification control models 

• Fahrenheit or Celsius operation 

• 24VAC and/or 3-AAA batteries 


Supply Voltage 20-30VAC, 50/60 Hz, and/or 

3-AAA batteries 

Max Current H/C - 1.0A, fan - 0.6A 

Memory 10 years, then 3-AAA required 

Sensor type 10K Thermistor built in 

Remote sensor Room or OSA (accessory required) 

Accuracy ±1°F (.5°C), System dependent 

Output control SPST relays 

Control Proportional plus Integral (PI) 

Dead-band Adjustable, 2°/9°F, (1.5°/5°C) 

Setpoint/Setback Adjustable with programmable limits, 

H-40/90°F (10/32°C) 

C-50/99°F (10/37°C) 

RH- 40% to 80%, (TH8321) 

Keypad lockout Unlocked, Locked completely, or 

Locked except Setpoint 

Display 3.5" x 2.5" backlit touch screen 

Temperature, Humidity (TH8321), 

System, Fan, Time, Day, Setpoint, 

Service reminders (TH), OSA temp if 

wired 

Display offset ±3°F (1.5°C), 

in 1°F (.5°C) increments 

• 10 year built in memory retention 

• Base included 

• Remote sensor option (room or OSA) 

• 7-day schedule or manual 

• 12 or 24 hour clock 

• 2 or 4 Occ/Un-occ periods per day 

• Adaptive intelligent recovery 

• Proportional + Integral control 

• Integral adjustment 

(Fast, Norm, Slow) 

• Minimum compressor off timer 

• Cycles/hour for Clg and Htg 

• OSA heat pump compressor lockout 

• Screen lockout (partial/total) 

ADA 

Compliant 

• Auto daylight savings time 

• Service reminders (TH) 

(Filter, UV lamp, Hum. pad) 

• 30 day low battery indication 

• Clean screen timer 

• Change over (manual or auto) 

• SP hold permanent or time out (TH) 

• Holiday and override (TB) 

• Individual set point range stops H/C 

• Extended fan run time 

• Temperature display offset ±3°F 

• Installer “test function” 

• Adjustable H/C deadband 

• Economizer/scheduled contact (TB) 

Touch screen controls 

Setpoints Up/Down 

System Heat/Off/Cool/Auto 

Fan control On/Auto/Circ (TH), On/Auto (TB) 

Schedule 7 day, 2 or 4 periods 

Hold (TH) Permanent or time out 

Holiday (TB) Time out by days 

Clock 12-hour or 24-hour, ±1 min./month 

Screen °F/°C, backlight 

Override Occ. time out 

Menu Service set up, ~41 parameters 

Enclosure White plastic, indoors only 

Mounting Horizontal w/base included 

Ambient 0°/120°F (-18°/49°C), 

90% RH non-condensing 

Agency UL, ULC, Title 24 (TB), Energy Star, 

and ADA compliant 

Warranty 5 year 

Termination Terminals for 18-AWG wire 

Dimensions 7.9"W x 9.56"H x 1.37"D, 

(20 x 14 x 3.5cm) 

Color Premier white 

Weight 1.1lb, 0.5kg 

421 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

422 

HVAC CONTROLS 

VISION PRO TOUCH SCREEN PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 

TH8000, TB8220 

WIRING 

(A) 

(W1) 

Y2 

L 

E 

AUX 

S1 

S2 

( ) TB8220 only 

Y2 

(A) 

W2 

S1 

S2 

Heat Pump 

Conventional 

RC 

R 

W 

Y 

G 

C 

Screw Terminals 

for 18 AWG 

TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS 

RC Jumper 

R supplied 

(remove as 

O/B needed) 

Y 

G 

C 

Designator Typical connection 

AUX Aux heat relay (heat pump TH) 

C Common connection 

E, (A) Emergency heat, (TOD or Economizer) 

G Fan relay 

L 24VAC LED light output (externally switched) 

O/B Changeover valve (heat pump) 

S1, S2 Indoor or Outside air sensor termination 

R 24VAC system or Heat transformer 

RC 24VAC cooling transformer 

W First stage heating 

W1 Second stage heating (heat pump TB) 

W2 Second stage heating 

Y First stage cooling 

Y2 Second stage cooling 

Note: Not all terminals shown are used on all models 

Be sure to use the conventional OR heat pump terminals, 

NOT both. 


The base plate is mounted directly to the wall or 2 x 4 horizontal 

or vertical back box. Use 18AWG wire and terminate 

as shown above. Position thermostat over the base plate and 

push onto pins. No leveling required. 



TH8110U1003 24V residential, 1H/1C or HP 7-day 

programmable thermostat w/system and 

fan switch 

TH8320U1008 24V residential, 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP 7-day 


fan switch 

TH8321U1006 24V residential, 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP 7-day 


fan switch and humidity 

TB8220U1003 24V commercial, 7-day programmable 

2H/2C or 3H/2C HP w/system and fan 

switch 

Note: Any thermostat may be set up for conventional or 

heat pump 

THERMOSTAT KEYS AND DISPLAY 

Current inside temperature 

SYSTEM 

Selects HEAT/OFF/COOL/AUTO 

FAN 

Selects ON/AUTO/CIRC (TH) 

Selects ON/AUTO(TB) 

Day of week 

FAN 

AUTO 

SYSTEM 

HEAT 

TUE 

Inside 

AM 

Set To 

Outside 

Air 

Screen Locked 

Cool ON 

Following 

Schedule 

DONE SCHED HOLD CLOCK SCREEN MORE OVERRIDE 

or 

(TB) 

HOLIDAY 

PROGRAM 

ENTER 

SCHED 

Enters 

Scheduling 

Mode 

HOLIDAY (TB) HOLD (TH) 

Sets Holiday Sets a Permanent Hold 

Un-Occ Time-Out and Activities Vacation Hold 

TIME 

Display current time of day, 

override hold time remaining, or 

number of vacation or holiday days 

remaining 

Heating, cooling, or anti-cycle wait status 

CLOCK 

Sets the 

time forward 

or back 

GENERAL CONTROL SEQUENCE 

Current set point temperature 

DOWN ARROW 

Lowers temperature setting 

UP ARROW 

Raises temperature setting 

Touch screen function/status 

LED lamp 

MORE 

Shows additional 

accessory and 

maintenance options 

SCREEN 

Locks out the screen 

to allow for cleaning 

FOLLOWING SCHEDULE 

Shows the thermostat is following 

the programmed schedule 

RECOVERY 

During occupied warm-up or cool-down 

The occupied status is time programmed to change the occupied 

and un-occupied set points. The thermostat control uses 

the set point as displayed using a PI control of single or multiple 

stages of heating and cooling equipment. The fan is controlled 

by demand in the AUTO mode for H/C, w/delay fan off 

as programmed by the installer. In the ON mode the fan is 

continuous on and in the CIRC mode (TH only) the fan runs 

by demand plus an additional random circulation amount up to 

35% of the scheduled occupied time. System control is selectable 

for Heat/Off/Cool/Auto. Automatic engages the H/C automatically 

with an adjustable dead-band between the H/C set 

points with control status displayed on the LCD as Heating On 

or Cooling On, and a wait indicator during anti-cycle control. 


C7189U1005 Remote room temperature sensor 

C7089U1006 OSA and duct temperature sensor 

209651A Wall adaptor plate 7.37" x 5.75" 

Remote room sensor can use any Type 42 thermistor 

L

HVAC CONTROLS 

SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AND NONPROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 

KT600 

DESCRIPTION 

The model KT600 is a digital display single or multistage 

seven-day programmable or nonprogrammable PI thermostat 

(°F or °C) for use with AHU controls and heat pumps for both 

heating and cooling applications. The KT600 has both system 

and fan switching with an internal sensor or remote sensor 

capabilities. Five buttons control a simplified menu for over 20 

configurable parameters. Room and OSA temperature can be 

calibrated. Other control features are listed below. 

FEATURES 

All Models 

• Fan switching (on/auto/smart) 

• System switching (off/auto/cool/heat) 

• Two-line, eight-digit backlit LCD display 

• Three status LEDs (Fan, Clg, Htg) 

• Five control keys 

• Remote sensor and OSA sensor 

• Two configurable DI inputs 


• Permanent program retention 

• Temporary setpoints 

• Proportional plus Integral control 

• Anti-cycle heating and cooling outputs 

• CPH for heating and cooling 

• Screen lockout (partial/total) 


Supply voltage 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA 

Display Two-line backlit LCD 

Controls Five menu push buttons 

up, down, menu, no, yes/scroll 

Thermostat type Seven-day programmable models 

Nonprogrammable models 

Optimal start Progressive recovery (enable/disable) 

Heat pump Hi/Lo OSA lockout (em htg/comp. htg) 

Stages available 1H/1C, 2H/2C, (3H/2C Heat pump) 

2H/2C + prop. mixed-air economizer 

Memory (schedule) Permanent EEPROM 

Clock (12 or 24 hour) Six-hour power fail retention 

System switching Off/Auto/Cool/Heat 

Fan switching On-continuous 

Auto-on demand 

Smart-on/occ, off/unocc 

Control accuracy ±0.9°F, (±1°C) @ 70°F (21°C) 

Setpoint range htg, 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C) 

clg, 54° to 100°F (12° to 37.5°C) 

Setpoint Hi/Lo limits Individually adjustable, H/C 

Remote sensor Opt. Two inputs auto detected 

(Room and OSA) 

Remote sensor MA Mixed-air input auto detected 

(economizer model) 

Remote sensors All use Type 3 thermistors 

Auxiliary inputs Two dry contact digital inputs 

Four types Service/status reminders 

Filter alarm 

Central NSB clock 

Remote occupied override timer 

All Models 

• Power fail start up delay 

• H/C changeover (manual or auto) 

• Adjustable deadband 

• Individual setpoint range stops H/C 

• Extended fan run time 

• Extended occupancy time 

• Frost low limit protection 

• OSA lockout H/C 

• No logo on thermostat cover 

• Room sensor calibration 

• OSA sensor calibration 

KT600MEP 

Programmable Models 

• Two or four events per day 

• Progressive recovery or none 

• 12- or 24-hour clock 

• Six-hour clock retention 

• Occ/Unocc aux contact out 

Economizer Models 

• Mixed-air (0-10V) control output 

• Mixed-air sensor input 

• Mixed-air setpoint (SP) 

• Economizer changeover temp. SP 

• OSA damper minimum position, % 

Heat Pump Models 

• Configurable heat pump O/B ctrl 

• OSA lockout for HP em/comp. htg 

Control output 1 amp relays 30 VAC, 3 amp surge max 

Aux contact out 1 amp relay 30 VAC, N.O./N.C. follows 

occupied schedule 

Mix air output Prop. 0-10VDC, 2k� minimum 

(Economizer model) 

Control type Proportional plus Integral 

Deadband Adjustable 2° to 4°F (1° to 2°C) 

OSA Lockout limits htg 15° to 120°F (26° to 49°C), 

five-degree increments 

clg -40° to 95°F (-40° to 35°C), 

five-degree increments 

Low limit protection Enable/disable, htg @ 47°F (5.5°C) 

Power up delay 10 to 120 seconds 

Keypad lockout Three levels, full, none, partial 

Cycles per hour Adjustable, htg 3-8 CPH, clg 3-4 CPH 

Display offset Adjustable ±5°F (2.5°C), 1°F increments 

LED Indicators Three green on (Fan, Clg, Htg) 

Enclosure ULFR1 Flame retardant plastic 

Mounting Standard vertical 2" x 4" back box 

Wiring 18 AWG max, 22 AWG recommended 


0 to 95% RH non-condensing 

Agency UL, cUL, CE, Energy Star 



(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) 

Weight 0.75 lb (0.34kg) 

Color White 

Cross references JCI, T600 models 

Viconics, T7600 models 

423 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

424 

HVAC CONTROLS 

SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AND NONPROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT 

KT600 SERIES 

WIRING 

TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION BY THERMOSTAT MODEL 

THERMOSTAT MODEL SUFFIX (KT600___) **Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat 

HCN MSN MEN HPN HCP MSP MEP HPP Terminal** Function** 

• • • • • • • • Y1 Energizes on a call for first stage cooling (first stage heating HP) 

• • • • • • Y2 Energizes on a call for second stage cooling (second stage heating HP) 

• • • • • • • • G Energizes fan in accordance with the selected fan mode 

• • • • • • • • RC 24 VAC from equipment transformer 

• • • • • • • • C 24 VAC (common) from equipment transformer 

• • • • • • • • RH 24 VAC for heating stages (jumper to RC for single power systems) 

• • • • • • • • W1 Energizes on a call for first stage heating (third stage heating HP) 

• • • • W2 Energizes on a call for second stage heating 

• • O/B HP reversing valve configurable (O = on or B = on) 

• • • • AUX Configurable auxiliary output (follows schedule) 

• • • • • • • • D1 Configurable digital input 


• • EC 0 - 10 VDC Economizer actuator output 

• • • • • • • • RS Remote room sensor 

• • • • • • • • Scom Sensor common 

• • • • • • • • OS Outdoor air sensor 

• • MS Mixed air sensor 

Y1 Y2 G RC C RH W1 W2 O/B AUX D1 D2 EC RS Scom OS MS 

Cool 1 Cool 2 

Fan 

Note: All outputs are 

24 VAC 

Note: Terminals are 

thermostat-dependent. 

See Table 1. 

KT 

Electronics 

* 

24V 24V 

* 

Heat 1 

T-1 

T-2 

24 VAC Thermostat Power 

(provided by installer) 

KT600 SERIES THERMOSTAT 

Heat 2 

* 

Rev. 

Vlv. 


MODEL NONPROGRAMMABLE 

KT600HCN-2 Heat/Cool nonprogrammable, 1H/1C thermostat w/fan and system switching 

KT600MSN-2 Multistage nonprogrammable, 2H/2C thermostat w/fan and system switching 

KT600MEN-V Multistage economizer nonprogrammable, 2H/2C/Mixed-air thermostat w/fan and system switching 

KT600HPN-2 Heat pump nonprogrammable, 3H/2C thermostat w/fan and system switching 

MODEL PROGRAMMABLE 

KT600HCP-2 Heat/Cool programmable, 1H/1C thermostat w/fan and system switching 

KT600MSP-2 Multistage programmable, 2H/2C thermostat w/fan and system switching 

KT600MEP-2 Multistage economizer programmable, 2H/2C/mixed-air thermostat w/fan and system switching 

KT600HPP-2 Heat pump programmable, 3H/2C thermostat w/fan and system switching 


KSEN-600-1 Remote room thermistor sensor ST-D3 Duct single point thermistor sensor, Type 3 

KSEN-600-4 Remote room thermistor sensor ST-FZ3 Averaging duct thermistor sensor,Type 3 

w/ override button and LED ST-O3 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 3 

KTR3 Remote room thermistor sensor COV-MULTI Conventional, no logo, cover 

KTR3-LED-MB-TB4 Remote room thermistor sensor COV-HPUMP Heat pump, no logo, cover 

w/ override button and LED COV-SEN No logo, sensor only, cover 

COV-SEN-0 No logo, sensor with override, cover 

0-10V 

Aux ACT. 

Internal relays and connections 

Thermistor 

Sensor Inputs 

Type 3 Type 3 Type 3 

* If using the same power source for the thermostat and heating loads, delete 

transformer T-2 and install a jumper across RC and RH, then wire W1 and W2 

common to T1 ( ). 

** Common device reference on BACnet and N2 networks as needed.

HVAC CONTROLS 

COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT, BACNET, LON, N2 

KTEC SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The KTEC Series thermostats are digital display single or 

multistage seven-day programmable or nonprogrammable PI 

thermostats (°F or °C) for use with AHU controls and heat 

pumps for both heating and cooling applications. The KTEC 

has both system and fan switching with an internal sensor or 

remote sensor capabilities. Five buttons control a simplified 

menu for over 20 configurable parameters. A communication 

card is added for multiple protocols including BACnet, LON, 

and N2. Other control features are listed below. 

FEATURES 

All models 

• No logo on thermostat cover 

• 1H/1C, 2H/2C (3H/2C heat pump) 

• Fan switching (on/auto/smart) 

• System switching (O/A/C/H) 

• Two-line, eight-digit backlit LCD display 

• Three status LEDs (Fan, Clg, Htg) 

• Five control keys 

• Configurable heat pump O/B ctrl 

• Remote sensor and OSA sensor 



All models 

• Permanent program retention 

• Two configurable DI inputs 


• Proportional + Integral control 

Economizer models 

• Mixed-air (0-10V) control output 

• Mixed-air sensor input 

• Mixed-air setpoint (SP) 

• Economizer changeover temp. SP 

• OSA damper minimum position, % 

Supply voltage 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 VA 

Display Two-line backlit LCD 

Controls Five menu-driven push buttons 

up, down, menu, no, yes/scroll 

Thermostat type Seven-day programmable models 

Nonprogrammable models 

Optimal start Progressive recovery (enable/disable) 

Heat pump Hi/Lo OSA lockout (em htg/comp. htg) 

Stages available 1H/1C, 2H/2C, (3H/2C heat pump) 

2H/2C + prop. mixed-air economizer 

Memory (schedule) Permanent EEPROM 

Clock (12 or 24 hour) Six-hour power fail retention 

System switching Off/Auto/Cool/Heat 

Fan switching On-continuous 

Auto-on demand 

Smart-on/occ, off/unocc 

Control accuracy ±0.9°F, (±1°C) @ 70°F (21°C) 

Setpoint range htg, 40° to 90°F (4.5° to 32°C) 

clg, 54° to 100°F (12° to 37.5°C) 

Setpoint Hi/Lo limits Individually adjustable, H/C 

Remote sensor opt. Two inputs auto detected, 

Room and OSA 

Remote sensor MA Mixed-air input auto detected 

(economizer model) 

Remote sensors All use Type 3 thermistors 

Auxiliary inputs Two dry contact digital inputs 

Four types Service/status reminders 

Filter alarm 

Central NSB clock 

Remote occupied override timer 

Control output One amp relays 30 VAC, 3 amp surge max 

KTEC 2603-2 

Programmable models 

• Two or four events per day 

• Progressive recovery or none 

• 12- or 24-hour clock 

• Six-hour clock retention 

• Occ/Unocc aux contact out 

Communication 

• BACnet – KTEC 2600 Series 

• LON – KTEC 2200 Series 

• N2 – KTEC 2100 Series 

METASYS N2 

Aux contact out One amp relay 30 VAC, 

N.O./N.C. follows occupied schedule 

Mixed air output Prop. 0-10VDC, 2k� minimum 

(Economizer model) 

Control type Proportional plus Integral 

Deadband Adjustable 2° to 4°F (1° to 2°C) 

OSA lockout limits htg 15° to 120°F (26° to 49°C), 

5°F increments 

clg -40° to 95°F (-40° to 35°C), 

5°F increments 

Low limit protection Enable/disable, heating @ 47°F (5.5°C) 

Power up delay 10 to 120 seconds 

Keypad lockout Three levels (full, none, partial) 

Cycles per hour Adjustable, htg 3-8 CPH, clg 3-4 CPH 

Display offset Adjustable ±5°F (2.5°C), 1°F increments 

LED Indicators Three green on (Fan, Clg, Htg) 

Enclosure ULFR1 flame retardant plastic 

Mounting Standard vertical 2" x 4" BB 

Wiring 18 AWG max, 22 AWG recommended 


0 to 95% RH non-condensing 

Agency UL, cUL, CE, Energy Star, LonMark 



(12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) 


Color White 

Cross reference JCI, TEC2100, 2200, and 2600 models 

Viconics, T7600 (E, B) models 

Communication BACnet, MS-TP; LON, TP1FT10; 

Metasys, N2 

425 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

426 

HVAC CONTROLS 

COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT, BACNET, LON, N2 

KTEC SERIES 

WIRING 

TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION BY THERMOSTAT MODEL 

THERMOSTAT MODEL SUFFIX (KTEC_ _ _ _ ) System 

Note: Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat 

2101 2103 2104 2102 

2201 2203 2204 2202 2261 2263 2264 2262 

N2 

LON 

Function 

2601 2603 2604 2602 2661 2663 2664 2662 BACNET 

• • • • • • • • Y1 Energizes on a call for first stage cooling (first stage heating HP) 

• • • • • • Y2 Energizes on a call for second stage cooling (second stage heating HP) 

• • • • • • • • G Energizes fan in accordance with the selected fan mode 

• • • • • • • • RC 24 VAC from equipment transformer 

• • • • • • • • C 24 VAC (common) from equipment transformer 

• • • • • • • • RH 24 VAC for heating stages (jumper to RC for single power systems) 

• • • • • • • • W1 Energizes on a call for first stage heating (third stage heating HP) 

• • • • W2 Energizes on a call for second stage heating 

• • O/B HP reversing valve configurable (O = on or B = on) 

• • • • AUX Configurable auxiliary output (follows schedule) 



• • EC 0 - 10 VDC economizer actuator output 

• • • • • • • • RS Remote room sensor 

• • • • • • • • Scom Sensor common 

• • • • • • • • OS Outdoor air sensor 

• • MS Mixed air sensor 

KT 

Electronics 

0-10V 

Thermistor 

Sensor Inputs 

Y1 Y2 G RC C RH W1 W2 O/B AUX D1 D2 EC RS Scom OS MS 

Cool 1 Cool 2 

Fan 

Note: All outputs are 

24 VAC 

Note: Terminals are 

thermostat-dependent. 

See Table 1. 

* 

24V 24V 

* 

Heat 1 

T-1 

T-2 

24 VAC Thermostat Power 

(provided by installer) 

KTEC SERIES THERMOSTAT 

Heat 2 

* 

Rev. 

Vlv. 

Aux ACT. 

Internal relays and connections 

Type 3 Type 3 Type 3 

* If using the same power source for the thermostat and heating loads, delete 

transformer T-2 and install a jumper across RC and RH. Then wire W1 and W2 

common to T1 ( ). 

** Common device reference on BACnet and N2 networks as needed. 


+ 

Network 

Card 

** 

– Ref 

To Network 

• BACnet 

• LonTalk 

• N2 

BACnet COMMUNICATING THERMOSTATS 


KTEC 2601 BACnet heat/cool nonprogrammable, 1H/1C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2603 BACnet multistage nonprogrammable, 2H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2604 BACnet multistage economizer nonprogrammable, 2H/2C/mixed-air thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2602 BACnet heat pump nonprogrammable, 3H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 


KTEC 2661 BACnet heat/cool programmable, 1H/1C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2663 BACnet multistage programmable, 2H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2664 BACnet multistage economizer programmable, 2H/2C/mixed-air thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2662 BACnet heat pump programmable, 3H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

ECHELON COMMUNICATING THERMOSTATS 


KTEC 2201 LonTalk heat/cool nonprogrammable, 1H/1C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2203 LonTalk multistage nonprogrammable, 2H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2204 LonTalk multistage ronomizer nonprogrammable, 2H/2C/mixed-air thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2202 LonTalk heat pump nonprogrammable, 3H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 


KTEC 2261 LonTalk heat/cool programmable, 1H/1C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2263 LonTalk multistage programmable, 2H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2264 LonTalk multistage economizer programmable, 2H/2C/mixed-air thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC 2262 LonTalk heat pump programmable, 3H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

N2 COMMUNICATING THERMOSTATS 


KTEC2101-2 N2 heat/cool nonprogrammable, 1H/1C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC2103-2 N2 multistage nonprogrammable, 2H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC2104-2 N2 multistage economizer nonprogrammable, 2H/2C/mixed-air thermostat with fan and system switching 

KTEC2102-2 N2 heat pump nonprogrammable, 3H/2C thermostat with fan and system switching

HVAC CONTROLS 

LOW-VOLTAGE MULTISTAGE THERMOSTAT 

MODELS T874, Q674 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model T874 thermostats provide low-voltage control 

of multistage heating and cooling systems, including 

heat pump systems. They mount using separately 

ordered Model Q674 subbases, which provide system 

switching as well as fan switching. 


Electrical rating 24-30 VAC, 1-1.5A switching 

depending on model 

Temp switching Bimetal with mercury 

switches 

Fan/System switching 2.5A @ 30 VAC (7.5A inrush) 

Temp adjustment Heating and cooling 


Thermometer range 42° to 88°F (6° to 31°C) 

Finish 

T874 Beige 

Q674 Dark brown 


ACCESSORIES 


194559R Locking cover and locking lever 

assembly with thermometer; 

includes cover, screws, allen wrench 

for locking cover, and self-tapping 

screws 

194559S Locking cover and locking lever 

assembly without thermometer; 

includes cover screws, wrench for 

locking cover, and self-tapping 

screws 

4074ECK Locking lever stops 

TG504A1025 Key lock cover with blank face and 

internal thermometer 

193121A Vertical-mount adapter assembly 

Changeover differential 4°F (2.2°C) min between 

heating and cooling 

(5°F/2.8°C on T874W), levers 

may be set apart for greater 

separation 

Operating differential 1.9°F (1°C) in heating or 

cooling 

Interstage differential 1°F (0.6°C) between heating 

or cooling stages 

Mounting Q674 subbase, ordered 

separately; provides wiring 

terminals, system switching, 

and fan switching 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

HEAT 

5.63 

(14.29) 

50 60 70 80 50 60 70 80 

50 60 70 80 

AUTO OFF 

T874 shown with Q674 base 

OFF FAN HEAT AUTO COOL 

COOL 

0.38 

(0.95) 

1.88 

(4.48) 

2.13 

(5.40) 

3.50 

(8.89) 

427 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

428 

HVAC CONTROLS 

LOW-VOLTAGE MULTISTAGE THERMOSTAT 

MODELS T874, Q674 

THERMOSTAT 

MODEL 

MODEL 

§ Q674A1019 

Q674B1018e § Q674B1034 

§ Q674B1075d Q674B1216 

Q674C1058 

§ Q674D1040 

§ Q674E1049 

§ Q674F1022 

Q674F1212 

SYSTEM STAGES 

Heat Cool Other 

1 1 – 


§ Normally stocked items THERMOSTAT Each T874 thermostat requires a Q674 subbase 

HEATING (ADJ) 

Stage 1 Stage 2 

0.1-1.2 – 

d Auto fan on both heat and cool for electric heat applications 

e 

With isolated fan 

COOLING (FIXED) 

Stage 1 Stage 2 

1.5 – 

§ T874A1036 

T874B1019 

T874C1000 

§ T874D1165 

T874F1015 

T874G1246 b 

1 2 – 

2 1 – 

2 2 – 

2 – – 

2 1 1 

T874W1015 

a 

3 c 0.1-1.2 – 

0.1-1.2 0.1-1.2 

0.1-1.2 0.1-1.0 

0.1-1.2 0.1-1.2 

0.1-1.0 

2 – 

c 

0.1-1.2 

0-1.2 c 

0-1.5 c 

REMARKS 

Includes 194559R locking cover 

and locking lever assembly 

1.2 1.0 Includes 194559R locking cover 


1.5 – Temp range 40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C) 

1.2 1.0 Heating scale range 42° to 84°F 

(5.6° to 28.9°C), cooling scale 

range 46° to 88°F (7.8° to 31.1°C); 

includes 194559R locking cover 


– – Includes 194559R locking cover 


– 1.2 Heat pump thermostat, 194559R 

locking cover and locking lever 

assembly; use with Q674F1212 

subbase 

1.2 1.0 Use with Q674B1216 only 

a 

Changeover cooling mode 

b 

Heat pump thermostat. For replacement of other special heat pump thermostats and subbases consult Trane. 

c 

Third stage of heating has anticipator range of 0-1.5A, fixed. 

§ Normally stocked items TERMINATION SUBBASE FOR T874 

SWITCH POSITIONS 

SYSTEM 


Heat/Off/Cool 

Heat/Off/Cool 

Heat/Off/Cool 

Heat/Off/Cool 

Off/Auto 

None (auto changeover model) 

Off/Heat/Auto/Cool 

Off/Em.Heat/Heat/Auto/Cool 

Off/Cool/Auto/Heat/Em.Heat 

ANTICIPATOR RANGES (A) 

FAN 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

None 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

Auto/On 

LED INDICATION 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

1 

2 

FOR USE WITH 

T874A-D 

T874A-D 

T874A-D 

T874A-D (electric heat) 

T874W1015 only 

T874A-F 

T874A-F 

T874A-D 

T874C,D 

T874G1246 only

HVAC CONTROLS 

DIGITAL FAN COIL THERMOSTAT 

T6575, T8575 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The T6575 and T8575 Series Digital Fan Coil 

Thermostats control two- or four-pipe heating or cooling 

applications with fan and system switch control. This 

thermostat features Proportional plus Integral (PI) control 

and may be configured for °F or °C display with push 

button setpoint adjustment. The fan control may be 

wired for continuous or on-demand operation. Both thermostats 

provide on/off control for fans, valves, compressors, 

auxiliary heat, and small air conditioners. 

FEATURES 

• Simple user controls 

• Digital display °F or °C 

• Heat/Cool display indication 

• System and fan switches 

• Setback input terminals 

• Horizontal mounting 

• No battery memory retainage 

• PI control algorithm 

• Adjustable cycle protection 

• Adjustable differential 


• Adjustable setback temperatures 

• 24 VAC through 277 VAC available 

• Two-pipe H/C with manual switchover 


Power 

T8575 24 VAC ±10%, 0.5 VA 

T6575 120 VAC (230, 277 VAC available) 

±10% 50/60Hz 

Output 1 or 2 SPDT, depending on model 

Switching 

Resistive 3.8A – H/C and fan 

Inductive 3.0A – H/C and fan 

Pilot duty 100 VA – H/C and fan 

Ambient 41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C), 

95% noncondensing 

Enclosure IP30, plastic 

Display LCD 3/8" (0.95cm) 

Approvals CE; CSA; C/US for Canada and 

USA 

Occ/Unocc Dry contact input

HVAC CONTROLS 

430 

HVAC CONTROLS 

DIGITAL FAN COIL THERMOSTAT 


WIRING 

Heat/Cool 

Electronics 

5 

6 

CHECKOUT/SETUP 

H 

C 

Fan 

Speed 

On/Off 3 

Lo 

Med 

Hi 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

Heat 

Valve 

Cool 

Valve 

EMS 

Night 

Setback 

Setup Procedure 

(See installation sheet for parameter details.) 

a. Press to show the lowest setpoint, 

and wait for the temperature to appear 

(~3 sec). 

b. Then, push both the and together 

until the identifier tS is displayed. 

c. Push until you get the value desired. 

d. Then, push to change the next parameter, 

and repeat C and D through all 

identifiers. 

e. When finished, push to the last parameter 

and then to the normal operation. 

L2 L1 

1 (Hot) 4 1 

Fan 

2 

Wiring four-pipe, heat/cool with manual heat/cool 

changeover switch, continuous fan 

T6575B, T8575C * 

2 

PARAMETERS 

Provide disconnect means and overload protection as required. 

Special service CO/ALR solderless connectors must be used 

when connecting with aluminum conductors. Otherwise a fire 

hazard may result. 

Jumper terminal 5-6 for continuous fan operation 

3 On/Off turns off all thermostat functions including LCD display 

4 Power to valves and fan are the same as L1 

5 

6 

Manual system switch models 

Two-pipe H/C requires a manual H/C thermostat and jumper 

terminals 3 and 4 (T8575B2007, T6575B1003) 

Note: 230, 277 VAC available 

* Low voltage 24 VAC 

Parameter ID °C Scale °F Scale 

Default Values Default Values 

Temperature scale tS Yes – No – 

Dead band db 2 2, 3, 4 4 3, 4, 5 

Heat or cool OP 0 0:cool 0 0:cool 

operating mode 1:heat 1:heat 

Unoccupied cooling setpoint uC 25 25 to 30 77 77 to 90 

Unoccupied heating setpoint uH 18 10 to 18 65 50 to 65 

Minimum cooling off time CO 0 0, 3, 4, 5 min. 0 0, 3, 4, 5 min. 

Minimum heating off time HO 0 0, 3, 4, 5 min. 0 0, 3, 4, 5 min. 

Minimum cooling setpoint 

(low limit) CL 10 10 to 30 50 50 to 90 

Maximum heating setpoint 

(high limit) HL 30 10 to 30 50 50 to 90 

Energy savings input ES 1 1:Closed contact 1 1:Closed contact 

configuration 0:Open contact 0:Open contact 

Display of room temperature rT 1 1:Room temp 1 1:Room temp 

0:Setpoint only 0: Setpoint only 



T8575B2007 24 VAC, on/off switch with manual H/C switch, three-speed fan switch 

T8575C2005 24 VAC, on/off switch with auto H/C, three-speed fan switch 

T6575B1003 120 VAC, on/off switch with manual H/C switch, three-speed fan switch 

T6575C1001 120 VAC, on/off switch with auto H/C, three-speed fan switch 


272878 Vertical mount single or double gang box plate adapter

HVAC CONTROLS 

TWO-POSITION ROOM THERMOSTATS 

ET SERIES, MODEL UT8001 

DESCRIPTION 

The ET Series and Model UT8001 Two-Position Room 

Thermostats are designed for on/off control with setpoints 

from 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C). The Model UT8001 has a 

bimetal element and magnetic reed switch and is designed for 

low-voltage control applications with a heat anticipator. The 

ET5-S-1S Series is a heating-only thermostat and uses a 

snap-acting switch for line- or low-voltage applications. The 

ETD5-S-1S Series is a heating/cooling thermostat and uses a 

snap-acting switch for line- or low-voltage applications. 

FEATURES 

• Line- or low-voltage ET5 heating 

• Line- or low-voltage ETD5 heating/cooling 

• Low-voltage UT8001 with fan and system switch 

Single or dual transformer with adjustable 

anticipator or mV operation and thermometer 

Vertical or horizontal mounting 


G Y RC W RH 

G/O E 

J1 

G/O = gas or oil (fan delay) 

E = electric (immediate fan) 

AUTO 

ON 

ETD5-S-1S 

Model Voltage/Current Differential Switch Contact Dimensions 

ET5-S-1S 24-277 VAC/22A Htg 2°F None SPST, snap acting 4.75"H x 2.75"W x 2.75"D (12.1 x 7.0 x 7.0 cm) 

ETD5-S-1S 24-277 VAC/22A Htg 2°F, Clg 4°F None SPDT, snap acting 4.75"H x 2.75"W x 2.75"D (12.1 x 7.0 x 7.0 cm) 

UT8001 24 VAC/1A Htg 3°F, Clg 3°F Fan and system SPDT, magnetic reed 4.75"H x 2.75"W x 1.5"D (12.1 x 7.0 x 3.8 cm) 

Set point range 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) Mounting 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) vertical switch box 

Control type Two-position, on/off Agency listings UL listed; CSA (ET5), 

Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) ULC (UT8001) 

Anticipator UT8001 only (0.1A to 2A) 

WIRING 

NC 

C 

Open on temp rise 

ET5-S-1S 

NC 

NO 

C 

C-N.C. open on temp rise 

C-N.O. close on temp rise 

ETD5-S-1S 


OFF 

Fan control (set up J1) 

Cooling control 

Transformer (cool if used) 

(remove J2) 

Heat control 

Transformer (heat) 

COOL 

OFF 

HEAT 


ET5-S-1S Line- or low-voltage heating thermostat 

ETD5-S-1S Line- or low-voltage heating or cooling thermostat 

UT8001 Low-voltage thermostat with fan and system switch 

4W 

J2 

J2 off = two transformers 

J2 on = one transformer 

UT8001 

UT8001 

431 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

432 

HVAC CONTROLS 

TWO-POSITION ROOM THERMOSTATS 

TC-1100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The TC-1100 Series two-position, single-pole doublethrow 

room thermostat is for single-stage heating or 

cooling. The TC-1100 Series comes in three set point 

spans to cover most any application: 55° to 85°F (13° to 

29°C), 45° to 75°F (7° to 24°C), and 75° to 105°F (24° to 

41°C). The TC-1100 Series comes standard with thermometer 

and setpoint as shown. It is also packaged 

with cover plates for setpoint only or for blank cover. 

FEATURES 

• High and low voltage 

• Thumbwheel setpoint 

• UL listing 

• Plates with setpoint or blank cover 

• Fits standard single-gang switch box TC-1101 


Control type Two-position, on/off 

Sensor Bimetal snap acting 

Differential 2°F (1°C) with anticipator 

Mounting Vertical, 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) 

switch box 


(7.26 x 11.13 x 4.14 cm) 

WIRING 

Orange-Brown makes on 

temperature drop 

Red Brown 

L1 

Orange 

TC-1100 Series Switch Action and Lead Identification 


Voltage 24-240 VAC 

Contacts SPDT 3.0A @ 24/120V, 1.5A @ 240V 

Pilot duty 40 VA @ 24V, 210 VA @ 120/240V 

Connections 6.0" (15.24 cm) leads, 14 AWG 

Range limits Dial stop pins 

Agency listings UL and CSA 

Temp 

Drop 



TC-1101 Multivoltage heating or cooling thermostat, setpoint 55° to 85°F 



TC-1001-116 Multivoltage heating or cooling thermostat, setpoint 13° to 29°C 

TC-1102-116 Multivoltage heating or cooling thermostat, setpoint 7° to 23°C 

TC-1103-116 Multivoltage heating or cooling thermostat, setpoint 21° to 39°C

HVAC CONTROLS 

LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT 

MODELS T25, T26, T46 

DESCRIPTION 

These thermostats are designed for line-voltage control 

of residential, commercial, or industrial heating or air conditioning. 

A liquid-charged temperature sensing element, 

highly efficient diaphragm, and lever provide precise temperature 

control. Anticipators are not required. 

Model T26 is a line-voltage thermostat for heating or 

cooling and includes horizontal-mounting faceplate kit. 

Model T25 is a line-voltage two-stage thermostat. 

Applications include two stages of heating or cooling or 

auto changeover control of heating and cooling. 

The Model T46 is a line-voltage, heating, cooling, or 

heating/cooling thermostat with integral system and fan 

switching. It is designed to control line-voltage fan coils or 

zone valves. 

FEATURES 

• Knob or concealed setpoint adjustment 

• Line- or low-voltage control 

• UL listing 

• Mounts on standard single- or double-gang box 

• Bimetal thermometer 

• Ideal for fan coil applications 


Thermostat range 

Mounting 


Thermometer 

Agency listing 

Weight 

ELECTRICAL RATINGS 

Pilot Duty Motor Ratings 

AC full load amp 

AC locked rotor amp 

AC non-inductive amp 

Motor Ratings 

AC full load amp 

AC locked rotor amp 

T25 

T46 

40° to 90°F (5° to 30°C) 

Separate mounting plate 

Liquid filled for positive trouble-free operation (anticipator not required) 

50° to 90°F (10° to 30°C), bimetal type may be field calibrated 

UL listed E6688/XAPX 

1.30 lb (0.59 kg) 

T25, T26, T46 Thermostats, (T26T-3) Heavy Duty Thermostat 

120V 

6.0 (8.0) 

34.8 (48) 

6.5 (10) 

120V 

12.0 

34.8 

208V 

3.5 (8.0) 

19.1 (48) 

6.5 (10) 

T46 System and Fan Switches 

208V 

6.9 

19.1 

240V 

3.0 (8.0) 

17 (48) 

6.5 (10) 

240V 

6.0 

17.4 

T26 

277V 

– 

– 

6.5 (10) [not T46] 

277V 

5.2 

14.4 

433 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

434 

HVAC CONTROLS 

LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT 

MODELS T25, T26, T46 

DIMENSIONS 

WIRING 

in 

(cm) 

1 

RH 

2.81 

(7.14) 

T25 

Action on increase in temperature 

High Stage Low Stage 

3 

YH 

3 

Y L 

2 

BH 

2 

B L 

1 

R L 

Comes with Jumper 

(remove as needed) 

5.21 

(13.23) 

2.96 

(7.52) 

T26 

4.71 

(11.96) 

2.96 

(7.52) 

T46 

4.84 

(12.29) 

1.86 

(4.72) 

4.71 

(11.96) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

1.5 

(3.81) 

1.16 

(2.95) 

2.34 

(5.94) 

0.60 

(1.52) 

1.2 (3.05) 

3.27 

(8.31) 

T25, T26, T46 

Single-Gang Back Box 

Two-Gang Back Box 

Front View Front View Side View 

Action on increase 

in temperature 

3 

2 

Heat 

1 

Cool 

Common 

L (hot) 

1 

neutral 

(gray) 

(black) 

(lt blue) 

(violet) 

(red) 

low (brown) 

To Heating 

(blue) 

To Cooling 

high (orange) 

med (yellow) 

Heat/Off/Cool Selector Switch with Fan 

Speed Control, Heating and Cooling 

To Fan 

(black) 

L 1 (hot) 

neutral 

(gray) 

(blue) Cool 

(red) Heat 

Manual or 

Automatic 

Changeover 

Switch DPDT 

H C H C 

high (orange) 

med (yellow) 

low (brown) 

Relay or 

Switch 

To Heating 

To Cooling 

To Fan 

Off/Auto Selector Switch with Fan Speed Control and 

Manual or Automatic Changeover Switch, Heating and Cooling 

T25 T26 T46SAA T46SDA 


MODEL ADJUSTMENT 

TYPE 

APPLICATION 

T46SDA-1 Knob 

Heating or Cooling 

SPDT 

T46SAA-1 Knob 

Heating and cooling 

SPDT 

T26S-18* Knob 

Heating or cooling 

SPDT 

T26T-3* Knob 

Heating or cooling 

SPDT, heavy-duty 

T25A-1 Knob Two-stage 2 SPDT switches 

two-stage heating, cooling, or one- 

T25A-16 Concealed stage heating and one-stage 

cooling 

SELECTOR 

SWITCH 

Off/Auto 

Low/Med/High 

Heat/Off/Cool 

Low/Med/High 

None 

None 

None 

DIFFERENTIAL ˚F (˚C) 

HEATING COOLING 

0.7 (0.4) 0.7 (0.4) 

0.7 (0.4) 

1.75 (1.0) 

3 (1.7) 

1.75 (1.0) 

0.7 (0.4) 

2.25 (1.3) 

3 to 4 

(1.7 to 2.2) 

2.25 (1.3) 

3 between stages (1.7) 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

1.3 

(0.59) 

1.3 

(0.59) 

1.0 

(0.45) 

1.0 

(0.45) 

1.5 

(0.68) 

1.5 

(0.68) 

*Includes faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation over a vertical plate. Field convert to other configurations. 

ACCESSORIES 

PLT333-12R T26 and T46 vertical plate with no adjust knob and no thermometer 

PLT333-3R T26 and T46 vertical plate with thermometer and no adjust knob 

PLT333-9R T26 and T46 horizontal plate with no adjust knob and no thermometer

HVAC CONTROLS 

FAN COIL THERMOSTAT W/ADA-COMPLIANT DIGITAL DISPLAY 

T170 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The T170 is specifically designed for 1H, 1C, on/off vent 

damper and multi speed fan control applications. The large 

ADA compliant backlit display shows temperature °F or °C with 

a simple push of a button and indicates fan and system status. 

The T170 is powered from 24-277 volts with direct-wired manual 

fan or auto-staging fan models. Remote temperature sensor, 

pipe change over sensor, clock setback input and occupancy 

motion sensor inputs are all-standard. 

OPERATION APPLICATION 

Designed specifically for direct high voltage wiring of fan coils 

used for heating, cooling, with fan and damper controls. Ideal 

for hotels, dormitories, retirement centers, resorts, condos, cottages, 

schools, vestibule entrances, and so on. 

FEATURES 

• 1H/1C and On-Off Vent damper 

• H/C/A/O System switching 

• Fan switch Auto/On/Off 

• L/M/H manual fan speed or Fan Staging models 

• 24-277VAC power 

• Large backlit ADA compliant display/buttons 

• Occupancy motion detector inputs 

• Door switch or setback input 

• Remote sensor and Service alert input 

• Change over sensor input 


Supply voltage 24-277 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz 

Supply current 45 mA 

Sensor type 10K Thermistor Type II built in 

Remote sensor 10K thermistor Type II, acc. required 

Output control 6-SPST relays 

H/C/Damper, Fan-L/M/H 

Output amps Voltage RES / LRA / FLA HP 

Each relay 24 VAC 6.0 / 34.8 / 5.8 NA 

120 VAC 6.0 / 34.8 / 5.8 1/4 

240 VAC 5.0 / 17.4 / 2.9 1/4 

277 VAC 4.2 / 14.4 / 2.4 1/4 

Note: Combined load not to exceed 

20 amps. 

Control Proportional plus Integral (PI) 

Dead-band 3°F, (1.6°C) 

Setpoint 50°/90°F (10°/32°C), adjustable 

Setback (H/C) 55°/90°F (13°/32°C), adjustable 

8°F (4.4°C) minimum separation 

Keypad lockout All button de-active except Setpoint 

Display 1" x 1.5" backlit digital display 

Room temp., set point, system and 

fan status 

Display offset ±9°F (5°C), in 1°F (.5°C) increments 

Button controls 

222-413 

SE200-001 

SA200-001 

T170-001 

• Keypad lockout 

• 2-pipe or 4-pipe operation 

• Setback from motion occupancy or clock 

• Temperature or Continuous set point display 

• Display temperature offset 

• Setpoint limits, H and C 

• Fan off delay 

• H/C Setback selection 

• Easy, occupant-switched ,°F or °C display 

SB200-001 

Up, down Temperature select 

System Heat/Cool/Auto/Off 

Fan control On/Off/Auto 

Fan speed Hi/Medium/Low, hold for °F/°C 

Adjustments Service menu set up, 9 parameters 

Enclosure Vinyl plastic for indoor use only 

Mounting Horizontal on wall. Screw direct or 

4" x 4" back box 

Ambient 50°/90°F (10°/32°C), 

98% RH non-condensing 

Agency UL, ULC and ADA compliant 

Switch cycles 100,000 cycles 

Warranty 1 year 

Termination 6" flying leads 18-14 AWG 


(14.7 x 11.2 x 3.5cm) 

Color White 

Weight 0.7lb (0.32kg) 

Optional hardware Remote temperature sensors 

Occupancy motion IR sensors 

Door and window contact sensors 

Condensate water sensors 

H/C change over sensors 

435 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

436 

HVAC CONTROLS 

FAN COIL THERMOSTAT W/ADA-COMPLIANT DIGITAL DISPLAY 

T170 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS / MOUNTING 

FAN ON 

AUTO 

5.8 

(14.73) 

F 

C 

SETPOINT 

SYSTEM 

AUTO 

COOL 

SETBACK 

LOWMEDHI OFF 

HEAT 

SYSTEM FAN SPEED 

HOLD F/C 

4.4 

(11.17) 

3.28 

(8.33) 

Wire 

Way 

1.50 

(3.81) 

Note: The cover snaps into place firmly, making occupant tampering difficult. Be sure to install jumpers, select 

voltage, and wire properly before snapping cover into place. 

INSTALLATION / JUMPERS 

WIRING 

LOW VOLTAGE 

LINE VOLTAGE FROM L1 

T170 

THERMOSTAT 

CONNECTIONS 

CAUTION: 

HIGH VOLTAGE - REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING 

SWITCH 

24V 110- 

277V 

CIRCUIT BOARD 

In Cover 

18 AWG 

6" pigtails 

White/Black 

White/Yellow 

White/Violet 

White/Blue 

White/Gray 

* 

JP4 

JP3 

JP1 

Setback Input, JP3 removed. 

Open = occupied, closed = unoccupied 

Door Switch, JP3 installed. 

Open when door is open. 

Remote Sensor Probe, JP1 removed. 

Also useable as service alarm. 

Service Alarm (Open = Normal), 

JP1 installed. Circuit Common 

JP4 JUMPER SELECTION 

This jumper selects between 2-pipe 

(jumper ON) and 4-pipe (jumper OFF) 

operation. (Shipped OFF) 


This jumper is shipped normally open. 

Placement of a jumper allows for 

Occupancy Detection and Door Switch 

Only Operation. (Shipped OFF) 


Removal of this jumper allows the 

sensor to be located in a remote 

location, or N.C. service alarm. 

(Shipped ON) 

VOLTAGE SELECTION SWITCH* 

This switch must be placed in the 

appropriate position prior to application 

of power. (Shipped at 110-277V) 

Pipe Sensor 

Occupancy Detector 

(Open = Occupied) 

Yellow L2 / NEUTRAL 

Blue 

Cool 

(Main Output) 

Red 

Heat 

(Secondary Output) 

White/Brown Fan Low 

White/Red 

White/Orange 

Brown 

Black,14 AWG 

T 

T 

Fan Medium 

Fan High 

Outside Air 

Damper 

T - Type 24 thermistor sensor 

Note: Unused wires must 

have their ends 

taped, as they may 

have live voltage 

on them from the 

thermostat. 

L1 

2/4 PIPE 

SELECTION 

2-PIPE 

JP4 ON 

4-PIPE 

JP4 OFF 

WATER 

TEMP 

Cold 

Hot 

Cold 

Hot 

1.25 

(3.175) 

OUTPUT OPERATION 

MAIN 

OUTPUT 

Cooling Only - DA 

The fan will not cycle on 

with a heat demand 

SECONDARY 

OUTPUT 

Disabled 

Heating Only - RA 

The fan will not cycle on Disabled 

with a cool demand 

Cooling - DA Heating - RA 

Heating Only - RA 

The fan will not cycle on Disabled 

with a cool demand 

*Switch selection is as follows: 

24V = 24 VAC; 110-277 V = 120, 240, or 277 VAC 



TA170-001 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat w/system, 

fan, and three-speed manual fan switch 

TB170-001 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat w/system, 

and fan switch with three-speed auto 

staging fan 


SB200-001 Wall occupancy/motion sensor, 110° view, 

24 VAC/VDC, Form C contact 

SA200-001 Ceiling 360° occupancy motion sensor, 

24 VAC/VDC, Form C contacts 

SE200-001 Ball plunger door switch, NC-SPST 

SE200-002 Magnetic door/window switch, NC-SPST 

ST-S24E Remote room temperature sensor 

ST-R24S Change over temperature sensor 

AQS00661 Condensate water detector switch SPDT, 

24V AC/DC 

680-243-6 Pipe-mounted changeover thermostat, 

Form C contact 

222-413 Clamp-style three-hole wire nut

HVAC CONTROLS 

PECO LINE AND LOW-VOLTAGE TWO-POSITION AND 

PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS 


DESCRIPTION 

The T155 Series is a general-purpose, electronic, twoposition 

line- and low-voltage thermostat. The T167 

Series is a 0 to 10 VDC proportional heating/cooling low 

voltage thermostat. Both are designed for a variety of 

two- and four-pipe, heating and cooling applications. 

Both manual and automatic changeover models include 

a provision for a remote thermistor sensor. 

FEATURES 

• Electronic design performance 

• Two-position and proportional models 

• Remote sensor capability 

• Fan and system switching models 

• °F scale standard 

• °C or warmer/cooler dials available 

• Setpoint stops available 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) Two Mounting Slots 

0.16 x 0.36 

(0.41 x 0.91) 

2.75 

(6.99) 


Opening 

for Wiring 

0.34 (0.86) 

2.1 (5.33) 

3.3 (8.38) 

4.5 (11.43) 

0.5 (1.27) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

General 

Fan/System 

switch rating 24 VA @ 24 VAC 

125 VA @ 120-277 VAC 

Set point 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) 


Construction Flame retardant PVC 

Color Cool gray 

Agency index UL listed, CE 


T155 

Power 24-277 VAC, 25 mA @ 24 VAC 

Output capacity 10 VA @ 24 VAC 

20 VA @ 120-277 VAC 

Control type Two position 

Differential 1°F (0.5°C) 

Deadband 4°F (2.2°C) (TB155 only) 

T167 

Power 24 VAC, 25 mA 

Control type Proportional 

Proportional band 2°F (1°C) 

Control output 0-10 VDC, 1 k� min 

Deadband 

0-10V actuator 0°F (possible H and C output ON) 

2-10V actuator 0.8°F (0.44°C) 

Heating 

Cooling 

{ 

{ 

Temp Inc 

Temp Dec 

Temp Dec 

Temp Inc 

Manual switchover 

Temp Inc 

Temp Dec 

Heat 

On 

Auto switchover 

10 VDC 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

TB155-047 

SEQUENCE GRAPHS 

Setpoint 

Heat 

Off 

Heat 

On 

TA155-043 

TB155-047 

Setpoint 

Heat 

Off 

1°F 1°F 

Cool 

Off 

1°F 2°F 

1°F 

Heating 

TB3-1 

4°F Deadband 

TA167 

Setpoint 

TA167-007 

Cool 

Off 

Cool 

On 

Cool 

On 

Cooling 

TB3-2 

1 

0 VDC 

0°F -3° -2° -1° 0.8°F 1° 2° 3° 

°F Temperature Increase 

437 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

438 

HVAC CONTROLS 

PECO LINE AND LOW-VOLTAGE TWO-POSITION AND 



T155 WIRING T167 WIRING 

CONNECTIONS 

TB3 

1 Heat 

2 Cool 

3 System Switched Output 

CONNECTIONS 

TB1 

4 L2 or Neutral 

(System and Fan) 

3 No Connection 

2 Remote Sensor 

1 Remote Sensor 

** Remote 

* Sensor 

* Remove JP1 

for remote 

sensor 

** Remote 

Sensor 

25' 

(7.6m) 

max 

1 

2 

3 

TB3 

TB1 

JP1* 

T155 

TB3 

TB2 

T155 Terminal Identification 

** Stat L1 voltage present on wiring 

** Stat L1 voltage present on wiring 

Htg 

Clg 

1 

2 

3 

HTG 

VLV 

All connections 

potentially Hi voltage 

CONNECTIONS 

TB2 

1 Stat & VLV L1 (Hot) 

2 High 

3 Med 

4 Low 

5 Fan L1 (Hot) 

* Remove JP1 

for remote 

sensor 

N.C. Valves 

Shown 

sys. 

off 

CLG 

VLV 

TB1 

4 

3 

2 

1 

TB2 

1 

2 

JP1* 

3 

4 

5 

System switch not off^ 

Stat and Valve L1 (24-277 VAC) 

Hi 

Med Fan L2 

Low Fan L1 

L2 or 

Neutral 

^Connect TB3-3 to TB2-5 for fan on during system on 

680-243-6 

Changeover Stat 

(pipe mount) 

Htg/Clg 

Vlv 

TB3 

25' Shown 

(7.6m) sys. 

max off 

TB2 

TB1 

1 

4 

2 

3 

2 

JP1* 

3 

4 

1 

5 

System switch not off^ 

Stat and Valve L1(24-277 VAC) 

Hi 

Med 

L2 

Low Fan L1 

N.C. Valve 

* Remove JP1 

for remote 

L2 or Neutral 

^Connect TB3-3 to TB2-5 for fan on during system on 

sensor 

TB155 (changeover) 

CONNECTIONS (Low voltage) 

TB1 

4 24 VAC, Hot 

3 24 VAC, Common 

2 Remote Probe 

1 Remote Probe 

CONNECTIONS (Low voltage) 

TB3 

2 Cool 

1 Heat 

24 VAC 

*Remote 

Sensor 

25' 

(7.6m) 

max 

* Remove JP1 

for remote 

sensor 

TB1 

4 

3 

2 

1 

TB3 

2 

1 

JP1* 

T167 Terminal Identification 

TB2 

1 

2 

3 

JP1* 4 

Hi 

Med 

Low 

HTG 

VLV 

TA167-007, H or C 

TA167-006 w/o TB2, H and C 

JP1* 

0-10 VDC 

0-10 VDC 

TA167-006 (changeover) 

CONNECTIONS (Hi voltage) 

TB2 

1 High 

2 Med 

3 Low 

4 L1 

* Remove JP1 

for remote 

sensor 

CLG 

VLV 

N.C. Valves 

Fan L2 (24-277 VAC) 

Fan L1 (24-277 VAC) 

680-243-6 

Changeover Stat 

24 VAC 

*Remote 

Sensor 

TB1 

4 

3 

2 

0-10 VDC (C) 

0-10 VDC (H) 

HTG/CLG 

VLV 

1 

N.C. Valve 

25' 

(7.6m) 

max 

* Remove JP1 

for remote 

sensor 

C 

H 


PART NUMBER CONTROL OUTPUTS USER CONTROL OPTIONAL SENSORS 

NEW OLD Kele On/Off Proportional FAN ^ SYSTEM MODE ^ TWO PIPE 

MODEL MODEL Triac 0-10 VDC SWITCHING SWITCHING CHANGEOVER 

TA155-043 

TB155-047 

TA167-006 

TA167-007 

All TA155 

All TB155 

-- 

-- 

1H or 1C 

1H and 1C 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

1H and 1C 

1H or 1C 

H/M/L* 

H/M/L* 

None 

H/M/L* 

Htg/Off/Clg** 

On/Off** 

None 

Htg/Off/Clg** 

None, manual only 

Yes, requires C/O^^ stat 

Yes, requires C/O^^ stat 

None, manual only 

^ Changing the cover on T155 and T167 thermostats may eliminate the fan and system switching (See accessories C155-_ _). 

^^ Must use a changeover thermostat such as the 680-243-6. 

* H/M/L = High/Medium/Low, 24-277 VAC fan contacts, Off is wired through the system switch and shuts down the thermostat. 

** Fan is off when system switch is Off, 24-277 VAC fan control. 

Note: All Triac outputs are 24-277 VAC with voltage potential in an open circuit. 


C155 Thermostat cover, w/o fan or system switch (043, 047, 007) 

C155-SNF Thermostat cover, w/ system On/Off switch and no fan switch (047) 

C155-FNF Thermostat cover, w/ fan On/Off switch and no system switch (043, 047, 007) 

C155-HOC Thermostat cover, w/ system H/O/C switch, no fan switch (043, 007) 

C155-HML-HOC Replacement thermostat cover, w/ fan H/M/L switch and system H/O/C switch (043, 007) 

C155-HML-SNF Replacement thermostat cover, w/ fan H/M/L switch and system On/Off switch (047) 

68-671 Remote sensor for T155 ST-U24 Remote duct sensor for TA167 

KTR24 Remote room sensor for TA167 680-243-6 Pipe mounted changeover (C/O) thermostat 

65170 Warmer/cooler setpoint dial 65410 10°-34°C setpoint dial 

65860 Setpoint range stop tabs, 2°F increments 65345 Thermostat base plate, 4.75" x 4.74" 

C 

H 

TB3 

2 

1

HVAC CONTROLS 

PECO FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS 


DESCRIPTION 

The T158 Series is a microprocessor-based floating or 

two-position low-voltage thermostat. The T168 Series is 

a microprocessor-based proportional 4-20 mA or 0-10V 

thermostat. Both series are designed for fan coil and air 

handler applications for both two- and four-pipe systems 

with remote sensor capability. These versatile thermostats 

have options for a variety of high voltage fan 

and low voltage system switching. Models are also available 

with an unoccupied setback input. 

FEATURES 

• Electronic Proportional plus Integral (PI) control 

• Two-position, floating, and proportional models 

• Remote sensor capability 

• Optional unoccupied control inputs 

• Fan and system switching 

• °F or °C digital display 

• Seasonal changeover models 

• Four selection service menu 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Two Mounting Slots 

0.16 x 0.36 

(0.41 x 0.91) 

Opening 

for Wiring 

0.34 (0.86) 

2.1 (5.33) 

3.3 (8.38) 

4.5 (11.43) 

TB-158-100 

0.5 (1.27) 

T158 T168 

Control type Two-position or floating Proportional 4-20 mA, 600� load, 0-10V, 1000� min 

Power 20-28 VAC, 25 mA @ 24 VAC 20-28 VAC, 25 mA @ 24 VAC 

Output capacity 10 VA @ 24 VAC (Triac) 10 VA @ 24 VAC (Triac) 

Stroke time 30-300 sec (120 sec default) 30-300 sec (120 sec default) 

Temperature offset ± 5°F (0° default) ± 5°F (0° default) 

Fan demand delay 0-10 min (0 default) 2-10 min (2 default) 

Cooling min. off 30-600 sec (120 sec default) 30-600 sec (120 sec default) 

Fan switching 24 VA @ 24 VAC 24 VA @ 24 VAC 

125 VA @ 120 VAC 125 VA @ 120 VAC 

Setpoint with setback 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) 

Proportional band 2°F (1°C) 2°F (1°C) 

Heat/Cool deadband 3°F (1.6°C) 3°F (1.6°C) 

Ambient temp 0° to 120°F (-18° to 49°C) 0° to 120°F (-18° to 49°C) 

Construction Flame retardant PVC, UV stabilized Flame retardant PVC, UV stabilized 

Color Cool gray Cool gray 

Agency index UL recognized component; CE UL recognized component; CE 

Display 0.36" (0.9) LCD (°F or °C) 0.36" (0.9) LCD (°F or °C) 

Weight 0.28 lb (0.13 kg) 0.28 lb (0.13 kg) 

T168 WIRING 

Line Voltage 

Connections 

Low Voltage 

Connections 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

TA168 

L1 (hot) 

Lo 

Med 

Hi 

Fan 

L2 or Neutral 

Setback Input 

Clg (DA) 

0-10 VDC 

or 4-20 mA 

Aux 

Heat 

Htg (RA) 

0-10 VDC 

or 4-20 mA 

On/Off 

Damper 

Optional Remote Probe 

Demand 

Output 

Optional Remote Changeover Probe 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Typical Wiring for Proportional Control 

T168 Program Jumpers and Switch Settings 

Off 

Dip Switch Switch Open 

#1: Not Used 

#2: Electric Heat (On at setpoint) 

#3: °C Display 

#4: 4-20 mA Output 

#5: Must be ON 

#6: Setback 

OFF ON Heating 60°F (15°C) 

Cooling 85°F (29°C) 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

Notes: 1. Units have a three-minute warm up. 

External Relay 

2. Cycle power after dip switches are 

changed. 

Remove JP1 

for Remote Sensor 

* 

* If the changeover probe is used 

on a cold pipe, the control is as 

shown above on the outputs. If the 

changeover probe is on a hot pipe, 

it reverses the action of the cooling 

output above. Heating is disabled. 

1.0 

(2.54) 

On 

Switch Closed 

Not Used 

Staged Heat (On at max output plus 1°F) 

°F Display 

0-10 VDC Output 

Normal operation 

Setback 

Heating 50°F (10°C) 

Cooling 90°F (32°C) 

Jumpers 

Jumpered I.D. Unjumpered 

Local Sensor JP1 Remote Sensor 

Two Pipe JP2 Four pipe 

Not Used JP3 Not Used 

Cooling 0-10 VDC JP4 Cooling 4-20 mA 

Heating 0-10 VDC JP5 Heating 4-20 mA 

JP 4 and 5 must both be the same 

Two pipe disables terminal 11 

439 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

440 

HVAC CONTROLS 

PECO FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS 


T158 WIRING 

Line Voltage 

Connections 

Low Voltage 

Connections 

Triac 

Control 

Line Voltage 

Connections 

Low Voltage 

Connections 

Triac 

Control 

All Low Voltage 

Connections 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

1 

2 

3 

4 

TA158 (1H/1C) TH158 (Heat Pump) 

L1 (hot) 

Lo 

Med 

Hi 

Fan 

L2 or Neutral 

Setback Input 

Heat 

Output 

Cool 

Output 


Optional Remote Changeover Probe 

Typical Wiring for On/Off Control 

TB158 (Floating) 

L1 (hot) 

Lo 

Med 

Hi 

Fan 

L2 or Neutral 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

External Relay or 

Spring Return Actuator 

Remove JP1 


*JP4 Installed = 2 pipe 

Uninstalled = 4 pipe 

5 

6 

7 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

Setback Input 

Open 

Cool 

Open 

^ Output 

Close 

Close 

Heat ^ 

Output 

On/Off 

Damper 


Optional Pipe Changeover Probe 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

^Tri-state 

Actuator 



Remove JP1 



Uninstalled = 4 pipe 

Typical Wiring for Three-Wire Floating Control 

Triac 

Triac 

Control 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

N/C 

N/C 

N/C 

N/C 

N/C 

Fan HI* 

Auto/ON 

Setback Input 

TC158 (2H/1C) 

Fan 

1st Heat 

Output 

2nd Heat 

N/C Output 

N/C 

Low voltage 

1st Cool 

Output 

Demand 

Output 



*HI fan speed required 

acc. cover C158FAOH 

24 VAC 

Transformer 



Remove JP1 


All Low Voltage 

Connections 

Line Voltage 

Connections 

Low Voltage 

Connections 

Triac 

Control 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

Triac 

Triac 

Control 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

N/C 

N/C 

Fan HI* 

Auto/ON Fan 

Low voltage 

*HI fan speed required 

acc. cover C158FAOH 

6 

7 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

Setback Input 

O-Cooling 

B-Heating Reversing Vlv 

Reversing Vlv Y1-Cooling 

W1-2nd Heat Comp. Output 

N/C Output 


N/C 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Remove JP1 



TB158 (Two-Position) 

L1 (hot) 

Lo 

Med 

Hi 

Fan 

L2 or Neutral 

Setback Input 

2nd Heat 

only Output 

1st Heat 

Output 

Cool 

Output 

Demand 

Output 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

External Relay 



On/Off 

Damper 

Remove JP1 




Optional Remote Changeover Probe Uninstalled = 4 pipe 


Off 

Switch Open On 

T158 Program Switch Settings 

Dip Switch 

Control 

Function 

Switch Closed 

#1: Heating Action DA (N.O.)** RA (N.C.)** (only used when #4 is off) 

#2: Cooling Action RA (N.O.)** DA (N.C.)** (only used when #5 is off) 

#3: Temp Display °C 

°F 

#4: Heating Signal ON/OFF MOD 3-Wire 

OFF ON 

#5: Cooling Signal ON/OFF 

#6: Unnoc. Setpoints 60/85°F 

(15/29°C) 

MOD 3-Wire 

50/90°F 

(10/32°C) 

Notes: 1. Units have a three-minute warm up. 

2. Cycle power after dip switches are 

changed. 

* If the changeover probe is used 

on a cold pipe, the control is as 

shown above on the outputs. If the 

changeover probe is on a hot pipe, 

it reverses the action of the cooling 

output above. Heating is disabled. 

** Refers to valve or damper position 

PART NUMBER CONTROL OUTPUTS USER CONTROL 2 PIPE / 4 PIPE 

NEW OLD Proportional Floating On/Off Heat Pump DAMPER Demand FAN^ SYSTEM MODE CHANGE-OVER 

MODEL MODEL 4-20 mA/0-10V Triac Triac Triac Occ/Unocc Output SWITCHING SWITCHING PROBE INPUT 

TA158-100^ -- 

-- -- 1H/1C -- -- 

-- O/H/M/L* Htg/Clg/Auto/Off Yes, 2 or 4 pipe 

TB158-100^ ALL TB158 -- 1H/1C [2H]/(1C)*** -- 1-Triac (1-Triac)*** O/H/M/L* Htg/Clg/Auto/Off Yes, 2 or 4 pipe 

TC158-100^ -- 

-- -- 2H/1C -- -- 1-Triac Auto/On** Htg/Clg/Auto/Off No, 4 pipe only 

TH158-100^ -- 

-- -- 1H/1C 1O/1B -- 1-Triac Auto/On** Htg/Clg/Auto/Off No, 4 pipe only 

TA168-100^ ALL TA168 1H/1C -- 2nd htg 

1-Triac 1-Triac O/H/M/L* Htg/Clg/Auto/Off Yes, 2 or 4 pipe 

^ Changing the cover on T158 and T168 thermostats may change or eliminate the fan switching (See accessories C158-_ _). 

* O/H/M/L = Off/High/Medium/Low, 24-277 volt fan contacts, Off shuts down the thermostat with no display. 

** Auto/On = Fan is automatically on during equipment demand or On always, 24 VAC low-voltage control. No O/H/M/L operation. 

*** Alternate outputs based on DIP switch [4 heating] and (5 cooling). Switches 4 and 5 are independent. See TB158 wiring diagrams above depending on switch settings 

Note: All Triac outputs are 24 VAC with 24 VAC potential on disconnected terminals (open circuit condition). 


65345 Thermostat base plate, 4.75" x 4.74" ST-R24S Pipe sensor 

C158 Thermostat cover, without fan switch (all stats) ST-U24 Remote duct sensor 

C158-FAO Thermostat cover, with fan, Auto/On switch (TC/TH) KTR24 Remote room sensor 

C158-FFN Thermostat cover, with fan, Off/On switch (TA/TB) 

C158-OHML Thermostat cover, with fan, Off/HI/MED/LO switch (TA/TB) 

C158-FAOH Thermostat cover, with fan, Auto/On/HI (TC/TH)

HVAC CONTROLS 

ROOM THERMOSTAT PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER 

MODEL RTC-2P 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RTC-2P Room Thermostat Proportional 

Controller features two proportional outputs (heating 

and cooling). The Proportional plus Integral (PI) control 

is suitable for pressure-dependent VAV box control, as 

well as fan coil, baseboard, or air handler applications. 

The occupant controls include a digital display and buttons 

for setpoint adjustment and night setback/setup 

override. The Model RTC-2P comes with a remote setback 

input for use with BAS systems and a changeover 

input for one-pipe system applications. Field setup is 

through push buttons with adjustments for setback temperatures, 

deadband, and °F or °C display. 

FEATURES 

• Digital display for °F or °C 

• Setpoint adjustment buttons 

• Night setback manual button or clock input 

• Remote sensor input 

• Changeover input 

• Two proportional outputs for heating and cooling 

• PI control algorithm 

• 0-10V or 2-10V outputs 


Voltage 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 

Power 3 VA 

Outputs Proportional, 0-10V, 2-10V 

selectable PI control algorithm 

Inputs 

Remote sensor 10 kΩ Type III thermistor 

Changeover Contact or thermistor, Type III 

Setback Isolated 24V contact 

Shutdown Isolated 24V contact 

Controls Setpoint buttons up/down 

40° to 90°F (4° to 32°C) 

Setback-enable button or 30-min. 

override 

APPLICATION 

RTC-2P 

The stand-alone Model RTC-2P is ideal for use when a 

central temperature control system may not be possible. 

Applications include any pressure-dependent VAV 

box control. The H/C output can also be used for modulating 

control of room-based discharge air, fan coil 

valves, or baseboard heat. 

Display 0.35" (0.89 cm), two-digit LCD 

Proportional band Cooling, 1.8°F (1.0°C) 

Heating, 2.7°F (1.5°C) 

Reset integral time 15 min. 

Changeover Contact or 80°F (26.6°C) 

with a Type III thermistor 

Deadband -1.8° to 9.0°F (-1.0° to 5.0°C) 


(12.45 x 10.16 x 3.05 cm) 

Weight 4 oz (140 g) 

441 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

442 

HVAC CONTROLS 

ROOM THERMOSTAT PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER 

MODEL RTC-2P 

WIRING 

** 


Separate 

transformer 

recommended Cooling 

** Actuator 

OPERATION 

Adjustable Parameters 

S.P. = Setpoint = 40° to 90°F (4° to 35°C) 

Deadband* (D.B.) = -1.8° to 9˚F (-1° to 5°C) 

Unoccupied = Htg = 50° to 90°F (10° to 30°C) 

Ctg = 50° to 90°F (10° to 30°C) 

Outputs = 0-10V or 2-10V 

Display = °F or °C 

Output 

Volts 

Heating 

Actuator 

External Clock Input L1 

assumes Night C 

J2 closed Setback 

Contact 

(open for NSB) 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

Deg F 

Yc 

Yh 

Yhc 

Unocc 

*Display reads with invisible decimal point. 

Example: 3.0 D.B. displays as 30 

TB1 TB2 

1 

2 

3 

5 

8 

9 

17 

16 

15 

14 

13 

12 

Yhc 

C Remote 

Shut-Down 

* 0-10V or 2-10V selectable 

L1 Contact 

** If one common transformer is used, the actuators 

Remote Sensor assumes 

J4 open, must use 1/2 wave rectified power, and polarity 

Type III J5 closed must be observed. All actuators in the Kele catalog 

10 kΩ Thermistor 

are 1/2 wave rectified. 

Changeover Contact 

(closed for heating) 

or 

Type III Thermistor 

above 80°F heating TERMINALS 

below 65°F cooling TB1-1 = Common TB2-17 = Common 

TB1-2 = Hot 24 VAC** TB2-16 = Remote shut off 

TB1-3 = Cooling 0-10V* TB2-15 = Remote space sensor 

TB1-5 = N/C 

TB2-14 = Remote space sensor 

TB1-8 = Heating 0-10V* TB2-13 = Heat/Cool changeover 

TB1-9 = Setback, remote TB2-12 = Heat/Cool changeover 

(TB1-1 and TB2-17 are connected internally) 

Example (factory default) 

S.P. = 72°F 

Deadband* (D.B.)= 1°F 

Unoccupied = Htg = 69°F 

Ctg = 76°F 

Outputs = 2-10V 

Display = °F 

Ych 

R.A. 

xxx 

Yhh 

S.P. 

66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 

D.B. 

Ycc 

D.A. 

Unoccupied 

Deadband 


Output* Signal Changeover Mode Action 

Ycc Cooling mode (c) D.A. 

Yhc Cooling mode (c) R.A. 

Ych Heating mode (h) R.A. 

Yhh XXX Heating mode (h) N/A 

minimum 

Ycc 

*Output type changeover 

Ycc 

Unocc 


RTC-2P Room temperature controller, two-output H/C proportional thermostat 


ST-U3 Universal duct and immersion sensor 10k� type III thermistor 

ST-R3S Pipe strap-on sensor 10kΩ type III thermistor 

ST-S3E Room sensor 10kΩ type III thermistor 

100% 

50% 

0% 

% Open

Opened 

100% 

50% 

Closed 

0% 

Device 

Closed 

Fully 

Temperature Increase 

HVAC CONTROLS 

FLOATING THERMOSTATS 

MODEL T6984 

DESCRIPTION 

Model T6984 microprocessor-based floating thermostats provide 

55° to 90°F (13° to 32°C) Proportional plus Integral (PI) 

control of valves or pressure dependent VAV dampers. Model 

T6984 comes with both vertical and horizontal mounting plates 

and has a floating output for use with tri-state actuators. 

FEATURES 


• White color and clean design 

• Large setpoint adjustment 

• Floating outputs 

• Vertical and horizontal mounting 

• Night setback LED T6984D1046 


Power 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 

Contacts 0.5A running, 1.1A inrush 

24 VAC with self-resetting fuse 

Setpoint 



Control PI 

Output SPDT floating 

D model SPST contact 

Agency UL 94-5V 


(12.07 x 8.00 x 3.94 cm) 

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SETPOINT DIAL DEFINITION 

Setpoint Dial 

Centered 

Output 1 Floating 

T6984A 

Cooling Mode 

Device 

Opened 

Fully 

Mode A (jumper not 

installed) 

Output 1 Floating in 

Cooling Mode 

Output 2 On/Off in 

Heating Mode 

Opened 

100% 

50% 

Closed 

0% 

Opened 

100% 

Mode B (jumper installed) 

Output 1 Floating in 

Heating Mode 50% 


Cooling Mode Closed 

0% 

End 

Device 

On 

°C 

End 

Device 

Opened 

°C 

Heating 

Setpoint 

Heating 

Setpoint 

T6984D1046 



Cover Locking with screws 

Mounting Vertical or horizontal 

(plates included) 

Setup DIP switch selectable 

Wiring Terminal block, 14 AWG 

LED T6984D1046 Night setback (NSB) 

operation 

Mode A 

Setpoint Centered 

in Zero Energy Band 

Device 

Off 

T6984D 

Device 

Closed 

Output 2 

On/Off 

Zero Energy Band 


Mode B 

Setpoint Centered 

in Zero Energy Band 

Device 

Closed 

Device 

Off 

Output 1 

Analog 



Cooling 

Setpoint 

Output 1 

Analog 

Cooling 

Setpoint 

Output 2 

On/Off 

Device 

Opened 

End 

Device 

On 

443 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

SETUP 

Motor Open 

Motor Close 

24 VAC 

444 

HVAC CONTROLS 

FLOATING THERMOSTATS 

MODEL T6984 

WIRING 

ON=1 

OFF=0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Output 2 Only 

Cycles/Hour S1 

7.5 min (8 cph) 1 

15 min (4 cph) 0 

DEADBAND 

ZEB S2 

5°F (3°C) 1 

3°F (1.5°C) 0 

SETPOINT DIAL DEFINITION & TEMPERATURE LIMITS 

S3 S4 

Setpoint centered no temperature limit 1 1 

Heating dial with 75° max setpoint 0 1 

Cooling dial with 75° min setpoint 1 0 

Setpoint centered with 75° H/C setpoint limits 0 0 

ACTUATOR MOTOR TIMING 

Seconds S5 S6 S7 

420 1 1 1 

240 0 1 1 

150 1 0 1 

120 0 0 0 

90 0 0 1 

60 1 1 0 

30 0 1 0 

20 1 0 0 

DAY/NIGHT SETBACK 

Heat setback Cool setup S8 

10°F (5°C) 20°F (10°C) 1 

Note: T6984A only uses 5°F (3°C) 5°F (3°C) 0 

switches S5, S6, S7. T6984 

24 VAC Valve or VAV 

Floating Actuator 

Open 

Close 

Common 

Remote 

Sensor 

Duct 

or 

Room 

Remove Jumper 

if Remote Sensor 

is used 

Output 1 Output 2 Mode Input 

Floating On/Off Jumper 

Cooling Heating Mode A (no jumper) 

Heating Cooling Mode B (jumper) 

Internal Sensor Output 2 

On/Off 

Sensor Input 

Motor Open 

Output 1 

Mode Input Motor Close 

24 VAC 

Mode B 

Jumper 

Outputs are Triac Control. 

T6984A 

NSB Contact * 

(from a central timer) 

* May share contacts 

with multiple thermostats 

(0 VAC) 24 VAC 

Power Supply 

NSB input* 

(0 VAC) 

T6984D 


24 VAC Valve or VAV 

Floating Actuator 

Open 

Close 

Common 

24 VAC On/Off 

Relay or Valve 

R 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

MODEL CONTROL SIGNAL (Mode B Jumper) REMOTE CHANGEOVER 

TYPE NSB OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SENSOR 

T6984A1059 Htg or Clg No Floating N/A N/A N/A 

T6984D1046 Clg and Htg Yes Floating cooling (heating) SPST heating (cooling) Yes Automatic @ 75°F 

ACCESSORIES 

272845 Remote room sensor, 47kΩ thermistor 

272847 Remote duct sensor, 47kΩ thermistor

HVAC CONTROLS 


MODEL T7984 

DESCRIPTION 

Model T7984 microprocessor-based proportional thermostats 

provide 55° to 90°F (13° to 32°C) Proportional plus Integral (PI) 

control of valves or pressure dependent VAV dampers. Model 

T7984 comes with both vertical and horizontal mounting plates 

and has a proportional output for use with 2-10V actuators. 

FEATURES 


• White color and clean design 

• Large setpoint adjustment 

• Proportional outputs 

• Vertical and horizontal mounting 

• Operation indication lights 

• Night setback button on B and C models 


Power 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 

Contacts 0.5A running, 1.1A inrush 

24 VAC with self-resetting fuse 

Setpoint 



Control PI 

Output 2-10V proportional, 

B model SPST contact 

Agency UL 94-5V 

Opened 

100% 

50% 

Closed 

0% 

End 

Device 

Opened 

10 VDC 

1.8°F 

(1°C) 

Heating 

Setpoint 

Dial 

Deadband is either 

0.9°F (0.5°C) or 

3.6°F (2.0°C) selectable 

Changeover input not active (open)-Output 1 (DA) 

Changeover input active (closed)-Output 1 (RA) 

Output 2 is not affected by changeover 

Output 2 

Analog 

Centered 

Setpoint Dial 

H/C 

End 

Device 

Closed 

2 VDC 

Temperature 

End 

Device 

Closed 

2 VDC 

3.6°F 0.9°F (0.5°C) 

(2.0°C) Deadband 

Cooling 

Setpoint 

Dial 

Output 1 

Analog 

End 

Device 

Opened 

10 VDC 

Mode A 

(jumper not 

installed) 

Output 1 Analog in 

Cooling 

Mode 


Heating 

Mode 

Mode B 


(12.07 x 8.00 x 3.94 cm) 



Cover Locking with screws 

Mounting Vertical or horizontal 

(plates included) 

Setup DIP switch selectable 

Wiring Terminal block, 14 AWG 

Button/LED Night setback (NSB) operation on 

T7984B and T7984C 

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SETPOINT DIAL DEFINITION 

(jumper installed) 

Output 1 Analog in 

Heating 

Mode 


Cooling 

Mode 

Opened 

100% 

End 

Device 

On 

Heating 

Setpoint 

T7984A, T7984C T7984B 

50% 

Closed 

0% 

Opened 

100% 

50% 

Closed 

0% 

Mode A 

Setpoint 

Centered in Zero 

Energy Band 

Cooling 

Setpoint End 

Device 

Opened 

10 VDC 

Device 

Off 

Device 

Closed 

2 VDC 

Output 2 

On/Off 



End Heating 

Device Setpoint 

Opened 

10 VDC 

Mode B 

Setpoint 

Centered in Zero 

Energy Band 

Device 

Closed 

2 VDC 

Device 

Off 

Output 1 

Analog 



T7984C1053 

Output 1 

Analog 

Cooling 

Setpoint 

Output 2 

On/Off 

End 

Device 

On 

445 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

446 

HVAC CONTROLS 


MODEL T7984 

SETUP 

WIRING 

Remote 

Sensor 

Duct 

or 

Room 

Setback Contact ** 

(from a central timer) 

S6=0 

* Not used on T7984A 

** May share contacts 

with multiple thermostats 

ON=1 

OFF=0 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Not Used 

*Output 2, 2-10 VDC 

Output 1, 2-10 VDC 

Changeover 

input for Out1 

Remote 

sensor input 

24 VAC 

(0 VAC) 

Power Supply 

NSB input* (0 VAC) 

Changeover OR Changeover 

Contact Sensor 

Changeover only affects Output 1 

Output 2 Only 

Cycles/Hour S1 

7.5 min (8 cph) 1 

15 min (4 cph) 0 

DEADBAND 

ZEB S2 

5°F (3°C) 1 

3°F (1.5°C) 0 

SENSOR SELECT 

S6 

Internal sensor 1 

Remote sensor 0 

T7984 

N/A on T7984A 

SETPOINT DIAL DEFINITION & TEMPERATURE LIMITS 

S3 S4 

Setpoint centered no temperature limit 1 1 

Heating dial with 75° max setpoint 0 1 

Cooling dial with 75° min setpoint 1 0 

Setpoint centered with 75° H/C setpoint limits 0 0 

DAY/NIGHT SETBACK 

Heat setback Cool setup S5 

10°F (5°C) 20°F (10°C) 1 

5°F (3°C) 5°F (3°C) 0 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

24 VAC 

Signal 2 

Signal 1 

Remote 

Sensor 

Duct 

or 

Room 

Setback 

Contact * 

(from a 

central timer) 

* May share contacts 

T7984B1055, T7984C1053 only 

Output 2 

On/Off 

Output 1 

2-10 VDC 

Remote Mode Input 

sensor input 

(0 VAC) 24 VAC 

NSB 

input* 

Power Supply 

(0 VAC) 

T7984A, T7984C with multiple thermostats T7984B 


Output 1 Output 2 Mode Input 

Floating On/Off Jumper 

Cooling Heating Mode A (no jumper) 

Heating Cooling Mode B (jumper) 

R 

24 VAC On/Off 

Relay or Valve 

2-10 VDC Valve or VAV 

Analog Actuator 

Input (2-10 VDC) 

24 VAC 

Common 

Mode B Jumper 

MODEL CONTROL SIGNAL (Mode B Jumper) REMOTE CHANGEOVER 

TYPE NSB OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SENSOR 

T7984A1057 Htg or Clg No 2-10 VDC N/A Yes Contact or sensor 

T7984B1055 Clg and Htg Yes 2-10 VDC cooling (heating) SPST heating (cooling) Yes Automatic @ 75°F 

T7984C1053 Htg and Clg Yes 2-10 VDC cooling (heating) 2-10 VDC (htg only) Yes Contact or sensor 

(for Output 1 only) 

ACCESSORIES 

272845 Remote room sensor, 47k� thermistor 

272847 Remote duct or changeover sensor, 47k� thermistor 

24 VAC

DESCRIPTION 

HVAC CONTROLS 

BULB THERMOSTATS 

A19, A319, A419 SERIES 

The A19 Series is a single-stage, heating or cooling, SPDT 

temperature control that uses a liquid-filled sensing element 

and capillary. The unit has an exposed or concealed set point 

dial with adjustable differential, and it will switch line voltages. 


temperature control that uses a Type 21 thermistor sensor. The 

unit has a set point dial and operates on 120 or 240 VAC with a 

wide adjustable differential. A separate LED indicates relay 

operation. 


temperature control that uses a PTC sensor. This unit features 

a digital display and buttons to adjust the set point differential, 

setback temperature, anti-short-cycle delay, and failsafe control. 

The unit operates on 120 or 240 VAC and features a 3/8" 

(0.95 cm) display with H/C, °F/°C, and setback indication. A 

separate LED indicates relay operation. 


Voltage 

Power 

Set point adjust 

Sensor 

Ambient temp 

Differential 

Weight 

Dimensions 

Agency 

WIRING 

2 

Y 

B 

R 

Action on increase of temperature 

Cutout 

Adjust 

Screw 

3 

1 

3 

2 

1 

Y 

B 

R 

A19 

heat 

X4 

X3 

X2 

Min 

Set Point Shaft 

with slot for knob 

or concealed 

with plug 

Differential 

Adjustment 

Multiplier 

(if min, diff = 3) 

(if X2, diff = 6) 

240 

COM 

120 

Probe 

included 

NC 

C 

NO 

1/2" Knockout 

Differential 

Potentiometer 

Relay Energized 

LED Indicator 

Jumper Block 

Position 

Heating 

Cooling 

A419 

A319 

A19DAC-1 

A19ABC-24 

A19 A319 A419 

120/208/240 VAC 50/60Hz 

1.8 VA 1.8 VA 

Dial Buttons & 3/8" display 

Thermistor PTC 

None required 

None required 

Screwdriver slot or knob (concealed available) 

Liquid-filled bulb and capillary 

Typical 140°F (60°C), strap-on 290°F (143°C) 

x2, x3, x4 multiplier from min differential 

1.2 lb (0.55 kg) 

4.5"H x 2.2"W x 2.0"D (11.43 x 5.59 x 5.08 cm) 

UL listed, CSA 

-30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C) 

1° to 30°F (0.5° to 17°C) 

1.75 lb (0.75 kg) 

5.0"H x 2.4"W x 2.4"D (12.70 x 6.10 x 6.10 cm) 

UL listed, CSA UL listed, CSA 

FUNCTION JUMPER SETTING JUMPER 

LABEL POSITION * 

Cooling/ P4-Heat Cooling* Removed 

Heating Heating Installed 

Set Point P4-Cut-out Cut-in* Removed 

Cut-out Installed 

Keypad Lock P5-Unlock Locked Removed 

Unlocked* Installed 

*Factory settings 

Keypad Heat/Cool 

Unlock Cut In/Out 

P5 P4 

(+) BIN 

(–) COM 

(+) SEN 

(All other settings are 

through the keyboard) 

AC 

240 

COM 

120 

NC 

C 

NO 

1/2" Knockout 

A319 A419 

Probe 

included 

447 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

448 

HVAC CONTROLS 

BULB THERMOSTATS 

A19, A319, A419 SERIES 

REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT 

Model Switch 

Action 

A19ABA-40 

A19ABC-4 

A19ABC-24 

A19ABC-36 

A19ACA-14 

SPST 

SPDT 

SPDT 

SPDT 

Range 

°F (°C) 

-30 to 100 

(-34 to 38) 

50 to 130 

(10 to 55) 

-30 to 100 

(-34 to 38) 

-30 to 100 

(-34 to 38) 

-30 to 100 

(-34 to 38) Manual 

Reset 

Diff °F (°C) Bulb and 

Adjustable Capillary 

3 to 12 

(1.7 to 6.7) 

3.5 to 14 

(1.9 to 8.0) 

3 to 12 

(1.7 to 6.7) 

3 to 12 

(1.7 to 6.7) 

Note: A19DAC-1 not for use as a limit control 


3/8" x 4" 

6' cap 

3/8" x 5" 

8' cap 

3/8" x 4" 

8' cap 

3/8" x 4" 

20' cap 

MANUAL RESET - REMOTE LIQUID BULB THERMOSTAT 

SPST 

Open 

Low 

3/8" x 4" 

6' cap 

CHANGEOVER STRAP-ON LIQUID BULB THERMOSTAT 

Model Switch 

Action 

A19DAC-1 

A319ABC24-1 SPST 

A319ABC12-1 SPST 

A419ABC-1C 

SPDT 

Model Switch 

Action 

SPDT 

Range 

°F (°C) 

100 to 240 

(38 to 116) 

Range 

°F (°C) 

-20 to 100 

(-30 to 38) 

100 to 220 

(38 to 105) 

-30 to 212 

(-34 to 100) 

Diff °F (°C) 

Fixed 

10 

(5.6) 

SOLID STATE SENSOR THERMOSTAT 

* Bulb well not supplied 

Diff °F (°C) 

Adjustable 

1 to 30 

(0.5 to 17.0) 

1 to 30 

(0.5 to 17.0) 

1 to 30 

(1.0 to 30.0) 

Bulb 

Well # * 

WEL14A-602R 

WEL14A-602R 

Range 

Adjuster 

Screwdriver 

Slot 

WEL14A-602R Convertible 

WEL14A-602R Convertible 

Screwdriver 

Slot 

Electrical Ranges 


AC Full Load Amp 16.0 9.2 8.0 

WEL14A-603R Knob AC Locked Rotor Amp 96.0 55.2 48.0 

Mounting to Coil 

Direct Clamp-On Strap 

Bulb and Capillary 

Type 21 Thermistor included 

8' (2.4 m) Lead 

Type 21 Thermistor included 

8' (2.4 m) Lead 

PTC Sensor included 

6.6' (2m) Lead 

Range 

Adjuster 

Knob 

Range 

Adjuster 

Knob 

Knob 

Buttons 

with Digital 

Display 

Noninductive or 

Resistance Load Amp 

(not lamp loads) 

22A 

120-277 VAC 


AC Locked Rotor Amp 96.0 55.2 48.0 


Motor Ratings VAC 120 240 

AC Full Load Amp 10.0 6.0 

AC Locked Rotor Amp 60.0 36.0 

Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24-600 VAC 




AC Locked Rotor Amp 96.0 55.0 48.0 

Noninductive 15.0 10.0 10.0 

Horsepower 1.0 1.0 0.5 

ACCESSORIES 

TE-6001-1 Holder for duct sensor TE-6001-2 Holder for OSA sensor (A319, A419) 

WEL14A Series Bulb wells for immersion (A19) Type 21 Sensor Sensor only (A319) 

SHL10A-603R OSA bulb weather shield or duct bulb support PLT3444-IR DIN rail end clips (A319, A419)

HVAC CONTROLS 

SYSTEM 350 SETPOINT CONTROLLERS 

A350, W351, P352, R353 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

System 350 Setpoint Controllers can be used in conjunction 

with plug-in accessory modules to control a wide 

variety of single or multistage and proportional control 

applications. Plug-in modules allow for sequencing, digital 

displays, and reset control applications. 

FEATURES 

• Proportional plus Integral (PI) control 

• Plug-in digital display 

• Models in °F or °C 

• Surface or DIN rail mounting 

• Electronic accuracy and repeatability 

• Slave modules for reset and sequence staging 

• Setpoint modules for alarm and control 

CONTROLLERS 

A350A is an on/off differential temperature controller with 

SPDT relay output and LED indication. This control comes with 

one temperature sensor. 

A350P is an electronic proportional or PI temperature control 

with proportional output of 0-10 VDC and 0-20 mA. This control 

comes with one temperature sensor. 

A350R is an electronic temperature reverse-reset controller 

with an SPST (N.O.) relay with LED indication, setback, and 

warm weather shutdown. The A350R raises or lowers (resets) 

the set point of the controlled variable (water or air) based on 

the OSA temperature. This controller comes with two temperature 

sensors. 

A350SS is an electronic temperature reset module and is used 

in conjunction with stage modules. The A350SS has both 

reverse-reset and direct-reset capability for water or air. This 

controller comes with two temperature sensors. 

W351AB is a humidity controller with an SPDT relay with LED 

status for control of humidification or dehumidification equipment. 

The W351AB may have a set point of 10% to 90% RH 

with an adjustable differential of 2% to 10% RH. 

W351PP is a proportional or PI humidity controller with proportional 

outputs of 0-10 VDC and 0-20 mA for control of humidification 

or dehumidification equipment. The W351PP may have 

a set point of 10% to 90% RH. 

P352AB is a pressure controller with an SPST relay LED status 

for control of compressor loading or pumps.The P352AB 

may have a set point of 90-250 psig (621-1724 kPa) with an 

adjustable differential of 10-100 psig (69-690 kPa) and can be 

direct or reverse acting. 

P352PQ is a pressure proportional or PI controller with proportional 

output of 0-10V or 0-20 mA for duct pressure fan control. 

It has a set point of 0.5" to 5" W.C., -0.25" to 0.25" W.C., or 

0.025" to 0.25" W.C., and it can be direct or reverse acting. 

in 

(cm) 

DIN Rail 

Clips 

A350PS-1C 

Temperature Control 

DIMENSIONS 

1.56 

(3.96) 

Back 

0.42 

(1.07) 

2.94 

(7.54) 

ADD-ON MODULES 

DIN Rail 

Mount 

2.40 

(6.10) 

W351AB-2C 

Humidity Control 

5.00 

(12.70) 

0.43 

(1.09) 

4.00 

(10.16) 

+ + 

Side Front 

+ 

1.20 

(3.09) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

Y350 is a power module required for use with all of the controllers. 

S350CC is an electronic slave module with its own concealed 

temperature set point and an SPDT relay with LED status for 

control. This module uses the sensor from the accompanying 

A350 controller. 

S350PQ is an electronic proportional or PI stage module with 

its own differential, offset, and analog control outputs. This 

module uses the sensor and set point from the accompanying 

A350 controller. 

S35xAA is an electronic stage module with an independent differential 

and offset adjust from set point. This sequencing module 

has an SPDT relay with LED status for control. 

D35x is a digital module with a button to display the set point. 

This module comes in many models, including temperature, 

humidity, and pressure. 

+ 

449 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

450 

HVAC CONTROLS 


A350, W351, P352, R353 SERIES 

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 

LOCKOUT BASE SYSTEM 

APPLICATION DEPENDENT 

Application 

Output 

Module 

Control from 

OSA Temp 

Power 

Basic 

Module 

Controller 

or 24 VAC 

(transformer) 

Stage Modules 

Control from Controlled 

Variable (CV) 

Display 

Module 

(button) 

Compatible 

Sensor 

Input 

Typically 

Required 

Accessories 


On-Off 

A350A Y350R S350AA,S350CC,S350PQ D350 A99BC-25C (TE6001-4 Bracket 

Strap-On T4000-2644 Cover) 

with SPDT 

RTD TE6001-2 OSA Encl. 

relay output 

120 VAC 

Up to nine stage modules 

(six with a S350P) 

Temperature 

(set point) 

included with 

controller 

WEL11A601R Well 

TE6001-1 Duct 

bracket 

Proportional 

A350P Y350R S350AA,S350CC,S350PQ D350 A99BC-25C (TE6001-4 Bracket 

Strap-On T4000-2644 Cover) 

with 0-10 VDC 

and 0-20 mA 

output 

120 VAC Up to four stage modules 

with Y350R (two with an S350P)* 

Temperature 

(set point) 

RTD 

included with 

controller 

TE6001-2 OSA Encl. 


TE6001-1 Duct 

bracket 

Reset 

reverse 

with SPDT 

relay output 

S350CC D350 

SPDT OAT 

(Set Point) 

A350R Y350R 

120 VAC 

S350AA,S350CC,S350PQ 


(six with an S350P) 

D350 

Temperature 

(calc. set point) 

2-A99BC-25C 

Strap-On 

RTD 

included with 

controller 

(TE6001-4 Bracket 

T4000-2644 Cover) 



TE6001-1 Duct 

bracket 

Reset 

requires stage 

modules for 

outputs 

S350CC D350 

SPDT OAT 

(Set Point) 

A350SS Y350R 

120 VAC 

S350AA,S350CC,S350PQ 


(six with an S350P) 

D350 

Temperature 

(calc. set point) 

2-A99BC-25C 

Strap-On 

RTD 

included with 

controller 

(TE6001-4 Bracket 

T4000-2644 Cover) 



TE6001-1 Duct 

bracket 

TEMPERATURE 

HUMIDITY 

PRESSURE 

SEQUENCING 

On-Off 

with SPDT 

relay output 

Proportional 

with 0-10 VDC 

and 0-20 mA 

output 

On-Off 

with SPDT 

relay output 

Proportional 

with 0-10 VDC 

and 0-20 mA 

output 

Sequencing 

with SPDT 

relay output 

W351 

W351P 

P352(A/P) 

P352PQ 

R353 

Y350R 

120 VAC 

Y350R 

120 VAC 

Y350R 

120 VAC 

Y350R 

120 VAC 

Y350R 

120 VAC 

S351 D351 

Up to five stage modules 

with Y350R* 

S351 D351 

Up to four stage modules 

with Y350R* 

S352 D352 

Up to five stage modules 

with Y350R* 

No additional stages 

MRH3S 

Room 

MRH3D 

Duct 

MRH3S 

Room 

MRH3D 

Duct 

P399 

Water Pipe 

order 

separately 

S353 Input Only 

0-10 VDC 

0-20 mA 

0-2 VDC 

Up to five stages with Y350R* 

Humidity 

(set point) 

Humidity 

(set point) 

Pressure 

(set point) 

D352 DPT-2640 

Air 

Duct 

Pressure 

(set point) 

* With a 24VAC/40 VA transformer, nine slave modules can be added (eight if an S350P is used). 

order 

separately 

order 

separately 

order 

separately 

135-10 kΩ 

Slidewire 

BAM-1000 DIN rail 

BAM End stop 


BAM End stop 


BAM End stop 


BAM End stop 


BAM End stop

HVAC CONTROLS 


A350, W351, P352, R353 SERIES 

WIRING 

PRESSURE HUMIDITY TEMPERATURE WITH RESET TEMPERATURE H, C, H/C 

COM 

Actuator 

0-20 mA 

or 

0-10V 

COM 

COM 

A350P Control A350 Control Y350R Power 

OR 

H/C 

V 

I 

SN 

VDC 

C 

24V 

DA/RA 

H/D 

DA/RA 

A99BC 

Temp Sensor 

24 VAC 

COM 

VDC (5V) 

SEN 

DA/RA 

Stage 1 120 VAC 

Stage 2 

DA/RA 


Stage 2 

S350 Sequencing 

A99BC Supply Sensor 

Master (O.A.) Sensor A99BC 

S350C Control D350 Display A350R 

Y350R Power S350A Sequencing 

NC 

C 

NO 

OSA 

Lockout 

Actuator 

0-20 mA 

or 

0-10V 

VFD or 

Actuator 

0-20 mA 

or 

0-10V 

W351P Control 

V 

I 

SN 

VDC 

C 

24V 

NC 

C 

NO 

OR 

MRH3 

Humidity 

Sensor 

OR 

240V 

C 

240V 

C 

120V 

120V 

24 VAC 

COM 

VDC (13V) 

SEN 

DA/RA DA/RA 

Y350R Power 

DA/RA 

S351 Sequencing 

DA/RA 


Stage 2 

24 VAC 

COM 

VDC (5V) 

SEN 

DA/RA 


Stage 2 

DA/RA 

DA/RA 

D350 Display 

P352P Control P352 Control Y350R Power S352 Sequencing D352 Display 

V 

I 

SN 

VDC 

C 

24V 

°F 

OSA 

Set Point 

5 3 2 

DPT2640 

Duct 

Static 

0-10V 

C E O 

SCO 

RESET 

CONTROL 

Acquire 

Locally 

N.O. 

CLOCK 

24 VAC 

+ 

47 µf 

- 

Capacitor 

Pressure 

Sensors 

B 

5 3 2 

+ 

- 47 µf 

Acquire 

Locally 

Capacitor 

R W 

P399 

0.5-4.5V 

W351 Control 

NC 

C 

NO 

NC 

C 

NO 

O D 

NC 

C 

NO 

O D 

NC 

C 

NO 

240 V 

C 

240V 

C 

120 V 

120V 

S350C Control 

NC 

C 

NO 

S350C Control 

Set Point 

Set Point 

NC 

C 

NO 

+ 

+ 

0-10 VDC 0-20 mA 

- 

- 

NC 

C 

NO 

NC 

C 

NO 

S350P Proportional 

S350P Proportional 

V 

C 

I 

V 

C 

I 

+ 

+ 

0-10 VDC 

- 

0-20 mA 

- 

Press For 

Set Point 

Press for 

Set Point 

D350 Display 

RH 

WC 

PSI 

D350 Display 

°F 

CV 

Set Point 

°F 

Press for 

Set Point 

451 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

452 

HVAC CONTROLS 


A350, W351, P352, R353 SERIES 

ORDERING INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS 

Each System 350 requires one control module and one power supply. Other modules may be selected per the application requirements. 

CONTROL CONTROL POWER RANGE DIFFERENTIAL THROTTLING INPUT OUTPUT 

MODULE (available in C°) RANGE (TR) SENSOR 

Y350R-1C System 350 Power Supply 120/240VAC 24 VAC @10 VA 50/60Hz 

A350AA-1C* Temp 24 VAC, 1.5 VA -30° to 130°F 1° to 30°F --------- Si RTD SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

A350AA-2C* Temp 24 VAC, 1.5 VA 90° to 250°F 1° to 30°F --------- Si RTD SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

A350EA-4C* Temp 24 VAC, 1.5 VA 10° to 65°F 1° to 30°F --------- Si RTD SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

A350PS-1C* Temp 24 VAC, 3.2 VA -30° to 130°F --------- 2° to 30°F Si RTD 0-10V, 0-20 mA@600Ω 

A350PS-2C* Temp 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 90° to 250°F --------- 2° to 30°F Si RTD 0-10V, 0-20 mA@600Ω 

A350RS-1C* R/Reset 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 50° to 160°F min with reset ratio adjust 1:5 to 3:1 2-Si RTDs SPDT, 4A (24V) 

A350SS-1C* D/R Reset 24 VAC, 2.5 VA 30° to 90°F min with reset ratio adjust 1:5 to 10:1 2-Si RTDs No Output (S. Mod. Req) 

A350SS-2C* D/R Reset 24 VAC, 2.5 VA 30° to 90°F min with reset ratio adjust 1:30 to 1:1 2-Si RTDs No Output (S. Mod. Req) 

W351AB-2C Humidity 24 VAC, 1.8 VA 10% to 90%RH 2% to 10% RH --------- 0-10V SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

W351PP-1C Humidity 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 10% to 90%RH ---------- 2% to 20% RH 0-10V 0-10V, 0-20 mA@600Ω 

P352AB-3C Pressure 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 90-240 psig 10-100 psig --------- Pipe 0.5-4.5V SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

P352PN2C Pressure 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 0-100 psig ---------- 5-50 psig Pipe 0.5-4.5V 0-10, 0-20 mA @600Ω 

P352PQ1C Pressure 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 0.5" to 5" W.C. ---------- 0.5" to 5" W.C. Duct 0.5-4.5V 0-10V, 0-20 mA@600Ω 

P352PQ2C Pressure 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 0.025" to 0.25" W.C. ---------- 0.025"-0.25"W.C. Duct 0.5-4.5V 0-10V, 0-20 mA@600Ω 

R353AA-1C Sequencer 24 VAC, 3.2 VA 0% to 75% 1% to 7% --------- VDC, mA, Ω SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

*Sensors are included with each temperature control module. 

STAGE MOD CONTROL POWER OFFSET DIFFERENTIAL ACTION (N.O.) INPUT OUTPUT 

S350AA-1C Temp 1VA 1° to 30°F 1° to 30°F DA or RA A350 SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

S350PQ-1C Temp 1VA 0° to 30°F 2° to 30°F (TR) DA or RA A350 0-10V, 0-20 mA @600Ω 

S350CC-1C Temp 1VA -30° to 130°F Set Pt. 1° to 30°F DA or RA A350 SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

S351AA-1C Humidity 1VA 2% to 30% RH 2% to 10% RH DA or RA W351 SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

S352AA-1C Pressure 1VA 1-60 psig 10% to 100 psig DA or RA P352 SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

S353AA-1C Sequencer 1VA 0% to 75% 1% to 7% DA or RA R353 SPDT, 10A (120/240V) 

DISPLAY MOD CONTROL DISPLAY DIGITS DISPLAY RANGE SET POINT RANGE INPUT DISPLAY/PUSH BUTTON 

D350AA-1C Temp °F 3.5 LCD -30° to 250°F -30° to 250°F A350 Control Variable/Set Point 

D351AA-1C Humidity %RH 3.5 LCD 10% to 90%RH 10% to 90%RH W351 Control Variable/Set Point 

D352AA-1C Pressure psig 3.5 LCD 90-250 psig 90-250 psig P352A Control Variable/Set Point 

D352CA-1C Pressure " W.C. 3.5 LCD 0" to 9.99" W.C. 0" to 9.99" W.C. P352P Control Variable/Set Point 

D352CA-2C Pressure " W.C. 3.5 LCD 0" to 0.999" W.C. 0" to 0.999" W.C. P352P Control Variable/Set Point 

SENSOR CONTROL CONTROLLER RANGE SIGNAL ACCURACY MOUNTING WIRING 

A99BC Temp A350 -30° to 250°F Resistive ±1% Raw/Strap on 2 Twist Shielded 

MRH3S Hum. Room W351 0% to 100% RH 0 to 10V ±3% Room 3 Twist Shielded 

MRH3D Hum. Duct W351 0% to 100% RH 0 to 10V ±3% Duct 3 Twist Shielded 

P399BAA-1C Pressure P352AB-3C 0-500 psig 0.5 to 4.5V ±1% Pipe Direct 3 Twist Shielded 

P399AAA1C Pressure P352(A/P) 0-100 psig 0.5 to 4.5V ±1.5% Pipe Direct 3 Twist Shielded 

DPT-2640-010D Diff. Pressure P352PQ-1C 0" to 10" W.C. 0 to 5V ±1% Duct,1/4 poly 3 Twist Shielded 

DPT-2640-0R5D Diff. Pressure P352PQ-2C 0" to 0.5" W.C. 0 to 5V ±1% Duct,1/4 poly 3 Twist Shielded 

ACCESSORY USED WITH DESCRIPTION APPLICATION 

BAM-1000 350 Module DIN Rail DIN Rail Mounting 

ADP11A-600R 350 Module EMT Conduit Adapter Conduit Specified 

TE-6001-4 

T-4000-2644 

A99BC (Si RTD) 

A99BC (Si RTD) 

Room Clip Plate (cover required) 

Room Cover (plate required) 

Room 

Room 

(both required per location) 

TE-6001-2 A99BC (Si RTD) Outside Air Housing OSA 

WEL11A-601R A99BC (Si RTD) Well and Connector Immersion 

TE-6001-1 A99BC (Si RTD) Holder for Duct Sensor Duct 

WHA29A-600R D35x Module 3' Cable for Remote Display Splice Cable for Remote Display

HVAC CONTROLS 



DESCRIPTION 

The Model UCM-420A is a low cost microprocessor-based 

Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller that may be used for 

a wide variety of control applications. All setup and programming 

is done by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers on the 

Model UCM-420A. Set points may be local and/or remote. 

The output may be direct or reverse acting. 

FEATURES 


• DIP switch/jumper programming 

• Selectable throttling range 



• Set point potentiometer on unit 

• Six-hour memory on loss of power 


• Optional set point potentiometer with 

stainless steel wall plate (UCM-SPA) 

MODES OF OPERATION 

Set Point Controller 

The UCM-420A input monitors the process being controlled. 

This input may be a 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC signal from a pressure 

sensor, flow transmitter, temperature sensor, etc., or 

an input from a Precon Type III temperature thermistor. 

Then, the UCM-420A provides a 4-20 mA PI output signal 

to control a valve, VFD, damper, etc., based on a set point 

as described below. 

1. Local set point controller - The potentiometer mounted 

on the unit may be used to control the set point. The 

local set point may also be a UCM-SPA set point potentiometer, 

the set point option of a Precon Model ST- 

S3E-XA temperature sensor - a 4-20 mA signal or a 1-5 

VDC signal. 

2. Remote set point controller - In this mode, the set 

point signal may be a 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, or time-based 

pulse-width signal from a BAS controller. 

3. Remote set point controller with local adjustment - 

The UCM-420A accepts a remote setpoint signal as 

described above in #2. Then, a local set point signal, as 

described in #1, may be used to adjust the set point. 

The local set point will have authority to adjust the set 

point ±12.5% of the input range. If the local set point is 

from a Precon ST-S3E-XA, it will have authority to 

adjust the set point ±9.4% of the input range. 



24 VDC +15%, -10% @ 65 mA max 

Remote set point input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, PWM or 

multiplexed PWM 

Local set point input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, three-wire 

potentiometer or Precon two-wire 

potentiometer (ST-S3E-XA) 


0.59-2.93 sec 



Output burden 650� max 

UCM-420A UCM-SPA 

4. Output expander - The UCM-420A may be operated in 

a multiplexed pulse-width modulation mode (PWM) so 

that one BAS output may control up to eight groups of 

UCM-420As, with each group able to have a different 

set point. Each UCM-420A may also have local set 

point adjustment as described in #3. 

Sample and Hold 

The UCM-420A may be used to monitor a 4-20 mA or 1-5V 

control signal. If the signal being monitored is lost, the 

UCM-420A will hold the last valid value for the signal until 

the signal returns. On a power loss, the value of the signal 

is remembered up to six hours. 

Pulse Width to 4-20 mA Converter (single or multiplexed) 

The UCM-420A may be used to convert a time-based 

pulse- width AC or DC signal to a 4-20 mA output. By using 

the multiplexed mode, multiple UCM-420As may be controlled 

by one BAS output. 

4-20 mA Signal Generator 

If the device to be controlled by the UCM-420A needs to be 

calibrated before the system is started up, the UCM-420A 

may be used to generate a 4-20 mA output in one mA 

increments. 

Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC or 

Precon Type III thermistor 

(Thermistor range 50° to 90°F) 

Input impedance 250� (mA), 10,000� (voltage) 

Accuracy ±1% 



Remote set point pot UCM-SPA 0-10 k� 

Weight 

UCM-420A 1.3 lb (0.61 kg) 

UCM-SPA 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) 

453 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

454 

HVAC CONTROLS 



WIRING 


MUX 

B3 B4 B5 ADDR 

TIME 

B6 B7 B8 BASE 

PROP 

A6 A7 A8 T.R. 

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2.65 0 0 0 10% 

0 0 1 2 0 0 1 5.2 0 0 1 20% 

0 1 0 3 0 1 0 12.85 0 1 0 35% 

0 1 1 4 0 1 1 25.6 0 1 1 50% 

1 0 0 5 1 X X .59-2.93 1 0 0 65% 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

6 

7 

RESET 

A4 A5 PER MIN 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

80% 

90% 

1 1 1 8 0 0 OFF 1 1 1 100% 

"1" MEANS 


0 1 

1 0 

1 1 

0.5 

1 

2 

"0" MEANS 



A3 REVERSE ACTING 

DIRECT ACTING 






SET POINT SET POINT 

LOCAL SET POINT WIRING OPTIONS 







Common 




Common 

(black) 

(green) 

(red) 

Increase 

Setpoint 

Increase 

Setpoint 

MODEL 

UCM-420A 

+ 

– 

A 

B 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

STATUS 

LED 

PWM 

INPUT 

PWM 

INPUT 

REM SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT + 

LOC SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT – 

FEEDBK 

INPUT 

24 PWR 

COMMON 

MA SIG 

OUTPUT 


(5K to 50K MAX) Local Setpoint 

(10K Factory Installed) 

Local Setpoint 

4-20 MA or 1-5V 

Two-Wire Potentiometer Local 

Setpoint 

(XA Option on Precon ST-S3E-XA 

Thermistor) 

SEE 

LOCAL 

SET POINT 

WIRING 

BELOW 

in 

(cm) 


PWM Contacts 

+ 24 VAC/DC PWM Signal from BAS 

– (only if remote set point is PWM) 

+ 4-20 mA or 1-5V Remote Set Point Signal 

– (only if remote set point is analog signal) 

+ 

– 

4-20 mA, 1-5V or Thermistor Input Signal 

– 4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to 

+ Controlled Device 

+ 

– 

24 VAC/DC Power 

DIMENSIONS 

Set Point Knob 

Side View 


0.7 

(1.78) 

DESCRIPTION 

Setpoint controller with local setpoint potentiometer 

OPTIONS 

47 DIN rail mount (must be factory installed) 

4.8 

(12.19) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

Optional 

DIN Rail 

Adapter 

2.0 

(5.08) 

UCM-420A 47 Example: UCM-420A-47 Set point controller with DIN rail mounting 

Remote 

Set Point 

(if used) 


UCM-SPA Set point potentiometer, 0-10 k�, three-wire pot on S.S. plate for remote mounting 

PCM Air pressure controller 

3.4 

(8.64) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

4.6 

(11.68)

HVAC CONTROLS 


MODEL PXZ4 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PXZ4 Setpoint Controller is one of the most technically 

advanced instruments in the industrial and commercial 

markets today. It is also one of the least expensive controllers 

of its kind. Through the use of a specially designed Fuji microprocessor, 

the Model PXZ4 incorporates the latest technology 

for controlling applications. With simple, finger-tip programming 

from the front panel, the operator can tailor the operation of the 

controller quickly and easily. By automatically setting proportional 

band, integral (reset) time, and derivative (rate) time by 

means of the autotuning function, control parameter guesswork 

is eliminated. In addition, this controller employs Fuji's patented 

fuzzy logic algorithms. The Model PXZ4 can learn processes, 

using the PID parameters as a starting point. This intelligence 

allows the process to reach its set point in the shortest time 

possible while virtually eliminating overshoot. 

FEATURES 

• For use in almost any type single-loop control 

application 

• PID control or fuzzy logic control 

• Manual or autotuning 

• Programmable control action, reverse or direct 

• Four-digit, LED indication of the process variable 

and set point 

• Output status indication 

• Fault indication of input sensor 

• Selectable indication resolution 


Input 

Current 4-20 mA DC, impedance: 250� with 

external resistor 

Voltage 1-5 VDC, impedance: 450 k� min. 

Scaling range -1999 to 9999 

Sampling cycle 0.5 sec 

Filter 0-900.0 sec, in 0.1 sec steps 

Output 

Current 4-20 mA DC, 600� max 

Control type PID control or fuzzy logic control, 

manual or autotuning 

Proportional band 0% to 999.9% in 0.1% steps 

Integral time 0 to 3200 sec in 1 sec steps 

Derivative time 0% to 999.9 sec in 1 sec steps 

Action Direct or reverse, programmable 

Indication 

PV/SV display Process/set point variable, changeable 

(red LED display, 4 digits) 

Status display Control output 

Span of display -1999 to 9999 (programmable) 

• Digital filtering to suppress electrical noise 

• Two-level, menu-driven format for easy programming 

• Nonvolatile memory, no battery required 

• Input: 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC; Output: 4-20 mA 

• 1/16 DIN package 

• Attractive black plastic housing 

• NEMA 4X faceplate 

• 85-264 VAC power supply 

Indication accuracy ±0.5% full scale ±1 digit @ 73°F 

Setting Eight push buttons on front panel 

Setting accuracy 0.1% full scale 

Power supply 85-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Power consumption 10 VA @ 120 VAC 

Memory Nonvolatile, no battery required 

Diagnostics Monitored by watchdog timer 

Noise reduction Normal mode (50/60 Hz): 

50 dB or more 

Common mode (50/60 Hz): 

140 dB or more 

Enclosure ABS plastic, black, 1/16 DIN 

Front panel: NEMA 4X 

Mounting Flush panel or surface mount 

Termination 8-pin socket 



Ambient humidity 90% or less RH noncondensing 




455 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

456 

HVAC CONTROLS 


MODEL PXZ4 

APPLICATIONS 

Scalable 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC input 

allows monitoring of the following: 


• Humidity 

• Pressure 

• Air flow 

• Water flow 

• Any 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC transmitter 

within a range of -1999 to 9999 

INSTALLATION 

4-20 mA output allows control 

of the following: 

• Valve actuators 

• Damper actuators 

• Variable speed drives 

• Resistance transducers 

• I/P transducers 

• Step controllers 

The controller should be installed as far away as possible from any device generating high frequency noise. Input signal and power 

cables connected to the instrument should be wired away from power line and load line to minimize inductive noise. The instrument 

power cable preferably should be twisted to avoid noise. 

The following guidelines for location should also be observed: 

1. Do not install in a location with corrosive gases (sulfuric gas, ammonia, etc.). 

2. Do not install in a location subject to vibration, impact, water, or high temperatures. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.89 

(4.80) 

WIRING 

4-20 mA 

Transmitter 

1.89 

(4.80) 

C 

PV 

SV 

H L 

% 

PV/SV SEL DATA ENT 

+ 

– 

PXZ-4 

24 VDC 

Power 

Supply 

+ – 

0.28 

(0.71) 

3 

250� Resistor (included) 

Install for 4-20 mA transmitter; 

remove for 1-5 VDC transmitter. 

4-20 mA 

Control Output 

– 

2 

+ 

1 

+ – 

4 5 

+ – 

8 

3.66 

(9.30) 2.8 

(7.15) 

6 

7 

Terminals 2 & 5 

are internally 

common 

Power Supply 

85-264 VAC 

50/60 HZ 

1.76 

(4.48) 


ENGINEERING LABELS INCLUDED 

°F 

°C 

%RH 

g/min 

psig 

in H2O 

feet 

ppm 

rpm 

Primary (Set Point) Menu 

SV - Main set point 

P - Proportional band 

I - Integral (reset) time 

d - Derivative (rate) time 

AT - Autotuning command 

LoC - Parameter security lockout 

CFM 

ft 2 

cm 2 

mA 

Hz 

ohms 

mbar 

gal 

scfm 

Panel Cutout Dimensions 

1.77" square (4.50) 

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 


PXZ4 Set Point Controller 

SR2P-06 8-pin Socket, DIN Rail/Surface Mount 

ATXINS Hooded Solder Type Socket for Flush Panel Mounting 

VAC 

pH 

VDC 

g/h 

kg/h 

m/s 

m3 

bar 

and others 

Note: Bracket for flush 

panel mounting is 

included with 

PXZ4. Order 

ATXINS socket 

separately. 

Secondary (System) Menu 

P-n1 - Action, direct or reverse 

P-df - Input digital filter 

P-SL - Lower value of input range 

P-SU - Upper value of input range 

P-dP - Decimal point position 

PVOF - Input value offset 

FUZY - Fuzzy logic control switch 

dSP1-7 - Parameter mask

HVAC CONTROLS 

SINGLE AND DUAL SETPOINT PNEUMATIC ROOM THERMOSTATS 

T4000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The T4000 Series Single and Dual Setpoint Pneumatic 

Room Thermostats provide individual space temperature control 

in all types of heating and cooling applications. By producing 

a proportional output signal, these thermostats modulate 

pneumatic valves and damper actuators in response to load 

changes in the space. A variety of high volume output and low 

volume output thermostats are available to meet the functional 

requirements of any control system. The T4000 Series is provided 

in one- and two-pipe, dual temperature, horizontal, and 

vertical configurations. 

FEATURES 

• Adjustable sensitivities and setpoints 

• Individual setpoints on dual temperature 

thermostats 

• Pneumatic feedback for greater accuracy 

• Vibration and shock resistant 

• Meets governmental and commercial requirements 

• Single and dual bimetal sensing elements 

• Optional all-metal covers 

TYPICAL PIPING 

S O 

Direct Acting 

(temperature up, output pressure up) 

S 

20 

N.O. 

Heating 

3-6 psig 

Two-Pipe, Dual Temp Stat (21-42 kPa) 

T-4054 


N.C. 

Cooling 

9-13 psig 

(63-91 kPa) 

Thermostat Proportional pneumatic type 

Sensing element Single or dual bimetal strips 

Control dial range 55° to 85°F 

Sensitivity 

T4002 Adjustable from 0.75-4 psig/°F 

(9-50 kPa/°C) 

T4054, T4100 Adjustable from 1-3 psig/°F 

(12-38 kPa/°C) 

Action See Ordering Information 

Ambient temp 

Shipping -20° to 150°F (-29° to 66°C) 


Supply air pressure Air supply must be clean, dry, 

and oil free 

Air connections Barbed fitting for 5/32" O.D. 

poly tubing 

S O 

S 

20 

Two-Pipe Stat 

T-4002 

T-4000-2141 

S 

20 

Restrictor 

0.005 

or 0.007 

Air consumption 

T4002 20 scim 5 mL/s) 

T4054 38 scim (10 mL/s) 

One-Pipe Stat (constant bleed) 

T-4100 

T4100 25 or 45 scim (7 or 12 mL/s) 

depending on restrictor 

Cover Beige plastic standard 

White, nickel, and brass optional 

Horizontal and vertical available 


(5.31 x 7.95 x 4.45 cm) 

Setpoint range 55° to 85°F (13° to 29°C) 


457 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

458 

HVAC CONTROLS 

SINGLE AND DUAL SETPOINT PNEUMATIC ROOM THERMOSTATS 

T4000 SERIES 

MODEL 

T4002-201* 

T4002-202* 

T4002-203* 

T4002-204* 

T4002-303 

retrofit kit 

T4002-304 

retrofit kit 

T4054-1* 

T4054-2* 

T4100-1 

T4100-2 

TYPE 

Single Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Single Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Single Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Single Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Single Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Single Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Dual Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Dual Temp 

Two-Pipe 

Single Temp 

One-Pipe 

Single Temp 

One-Pipe 

PROPORTIONAL 

ACTION 

Direct 

Reverse 

Direct 

Reverse 

Direct 

Reverse 

Direct 

Reverse 

Direct 

Reverse 

MOUNTING 

Horizontal 

Horizontal 

Vertical 

Vertical 

Horizontal 

Vertical 

Horizontal 

Vertical 

Horizontal 

Vertical 

Horizontal 

Vertical 

Vertical 

Vertical 

For other Johnson Control Pneumatic products, call Trane. 

REQUIRED ACCESSORIES 

BRACKET 

COVER 

T-4002-124 T4000-2141 

with set point 

T-4002-124 T4000-2141 


T-4002-124 T4000-2145 


T-4002-124 T4000-2145 


Included 

Included 

in kit 

in kit 

Included 

Included 

in kit 

in kit 

T4002-124 T4756-2141 

T4756-2145 

T4002-124 T4756-2141 

T4756-2145 

Included 

Included 

Included 

*Order T4000 Series cover and T4002-124 mounting bracket separately when ordering these Johnson thermostats. 

Call Kele for white, nickel, or brass covers. 

BRACKET 

T-4002-124 

OCCUPANT 

SET POINT 

& ADJ KNOB 

T-4002-5012 

T-4756-2145 T-4000-2145 

STAT GUARDS 

(metal) 

(wire) 

T-4002-3004 


T-4002-3000 

ACCESSORIES 

COVERS 

T-4756-2141 T-4000-2141 

SURFACED BRACKET FOR 

EXPOSED TUBING 

T-4002-125 

Included 

T-4000-2138 

Horizontal/Vertical 

RETROFIT COVER PLATE 

Included in T4002-303, 304

DESCRIPTION 

MODEL 

DESCRIPTION 

The Single Setpoint Room Pneumatic Thermostats 

are for proportional temperature control of pneumatically-actuated 

valves and damper actuators to maintain 

room air temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air 

conditioning systems. 

FEATURES 

HVAC CONTROLS 

• Attractive appearance 

• Setpoint and thermometer 

• Covers included with exposed setpoint 

and thermometer or blank cover 

• Bimetal sensing element 

• Adjustable throttling range models 

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Thermostat Pneumatic proportional 

Sensing element Bimetal 

Control dial range 55° to 85°F (13° to 29°C) 

Set point pressure 9 psig (62 kPa) 


Action Direct and reverse 

(See Ordering Information) 


Supply air Dry, clean, and oil free 

Mounting Upright position on wall 

TK-1000 Series, 2200 Series 

TKR-1000 (retrofit parts) 

Throttling range Adjustable 2° to 10°F (1.1° to 5.5°C), Adjustable 2° to 12°F (1.1° to 5.5°C), 

factory set @ 4°F (2.2°C) factory set @ 3°F (1.6°C) 

Supply pressure 15 or 20 psig (103 or 138 kPa), 20 psig (138 kPa), 30 psig (207 kPa) max 

30 psig (-207 kPa) max 

Connections 5/32" spring-reinforced plastic tube 3/16" spring-reinforced plastic tube 

Cover Beige plastic with setpoint White plastic with setpoint and 

and thermometer, blank cover thermometer, blank cover provided 

provided 

Dimensions 4.38"H x 2.75"W x 1.63"D 2.03"H x 2.03"W x 1.25"D 

(11.13 x 6.99 x 4.14 cm) (5.16 x 5.16 x 3.17 cm) 


TK-1001 2212-618 

Air consumption TK-100X, 100X (13.8/3.8) 2212-618, 619 (15.6/4.3) 

(scim/mL/s) TK-1XXX-600, 16XX (41.5/11.3) 2211-612, 613 (29.4/8.0) 

TKR-5X01 (41.5/11.3) 

459 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

460 

HVAC CONTROLS 

SINGLE SETPOINT ROOM PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS 

TK-1000 SERIES, 2200 SERIES 

APPLICATION THERMOSTAT 

TYPE 

Heating 

or 

cooling 

Heating 

or cooling 

with day or 

night 

Heating or 

cooling with 

day or night 

and 0/20# 

output line for 

PE switch 

Heating 

and 

cooling 

Heating 

or 

cooling 

Two-pipe 

One-pipe 

Two-pipe 

One-pipe 

Two- or threepipe 

with 

manual override 


with 



with 

manual 

override 

Two-pipe 

Two-pipe 

Two-pipe 

One-pipe 

One-pipe 


CONTROL ACTION* 

SUPPLY PRESSURE 

psig (kPa) 

Direct-acting 

15 or 20 

(103 or 138) 

Reverse-acting 

15 or 20 

(103 or 138) 

Direct-acting 

15 (103) day 

20 (138) night 


15 (103) day 

20 (138) night 

Direct-acting 

15 (103) day 

20 (138) night 


15 (103) day 

20 (138) night 

15 (103) Reverse-acting 

20 (138) Direct-acting 

15 (103) Direct-acting 

20 (138) Reverse-acting 

Direct-acting 20 (138) 

Reverse-acting 20 (138) 

Direct-acting 20 (138) 

Reverse-acting 20 (138) 

MODEL NUMBER 

Dial Markings† 

55° to 85°F 13° to 29°C 

TK-1001 TK-1001-116 

TKR-5001 

TK-1101 

TKR-5101 

TK-1301 

TK-1381 

TKR-1201 

TKR-1281 

2212-618 

2212-619 

2211-612 

2211-613 

TKR-5001-116 

TK-1101-116 

TK-1301-116 

TK-1601** TK-1601-116** 

TK-1681** 

* Direct acting increases output pressure on temperature rise. 

Reverse acting decreases output pressure on temperature rise. 

** Has second white plastic tube to pass full line pressure 20 psig (103 kPa) at night 

and 0 psig (7 kPa) at day. 

Used to actuate items such as pressure electric switches. 

† Dial stop pins included to limit dual range on all units. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

DESCRIPTION 

HVAC CONTROLS 

LIMITEM PNEUMATIC DUCT THERMOSTAT 

MODELS 356, 357 

The Limitem Models 356 and 357 are two-pipe pneumatic 

bulb thermostats designed for duct applications. 

They are available in multiple ranges and in direct and 

reverse acting models. 

APPLICATION 

These models are ideal for all pneumatic control systems, 

including unit ventilators, fan coils, AHU discharge 

air, return air, and mixed air control. The Model 356 bulb 

style mounts directly through the duct wall with an 18" 

probe and tilt flange mount for excellent cross-duct readings. 

The Model 357 averaging sensor uses either a 6.0' 

(1.83m) or 40.0' (12.19m) element for maximum coverage 

over the entire duct. The Model 357 remote bulb 

sensor is ideal for temperatures centered in large ducts. 

FEATURES 

• Adjustable set points 

• Adjustable sensitivity 

• Two-valve design 

• Liquid-filled sensor 

• Rapid temperature response 

• Bulb or averaging models 

• All-metal construction 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.50 

(3.81) 

1/8" NPT 


3.50 (8.89) 

Fixed 

Bracket 

2.70 

(6.89) 

18.0 

(45.72) 

Rigid Bulb 

Supply air 18-25 psig (124-172 kPa) 

Max air 30 psig (207 kPa) 

Bulb Liquid filled 

Response 0.5°F (0.9°C) 

Control action 

356 Direct or reverse 

357 Direct 

Set point Adjustable (under cover), 

7-8 psig (48-55 kPa) @ set point 

0.44 

(1.1) 

357-0004 

2.5 

(6.3) 

1.75 

(3.81) 

3.50 

(8.89) 

356 357 

356-0012 

357-0003 

356-090 163-172 

3/32 (0.24) dia 

Capiliary Length 

(by model) 

0.38 

(0.97) 

4.0 Bulb 

(10.16) 

Fixed 

Bracket 

Sensitivity Adjustable 0.25-2 psig/°F 

(3-25 kPa/°C) 

Factory set See Piping Table 1 on next page 

Ambient temp 

Case 200°F (93°C) 

Bulb 225°F (107°C) 

Mounting Bracket included 

Air connection 1/8" NPT 


461 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

462 

HVAC CONTROLS 

LIMITEM PNEUMATIC DUCT THERMOSTAT 

MODELS 356, 357 

PIPING 

Set Point Dial 

Under Cover 

MOUNTING 

356-090* 

Swivel Flange 

Accessory 

1/8" NPT 

356 

S 

18-25 

Air Supply 

Signal 

18" 

S 

R 

S R 

Two-Pipe Application 

* Not included 

7-8 psig @ set point 


Slot 

No Rigid 

Bulb 


356-0012 Direct-acting rigid-duct thermostat, range 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) 

356-0750 Direct-acting rigid-duct thermostat, range 20° to 180°F (-7° to 82°C) 

356-0013 Reverse-acting rigid-duct thermostat, range 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) 

356-1005 Reverse-acting rigid-duct thermostat, range 30° to 180°F (-1° to 82°C) 

356-0016 Reverse-acting rigid-duct thermostat, range 100° to 250°F (39° to 121°C) 

357-0004 Direct-acting 40.0' (12.19m) flexible averaging thermostat, range 35° to 145°F (2° to 63°C) 

357-0001 Direct-acting 6.0' (1.83m) flexible averaging thermostat, range 35° to 145°F (2° to 63°C) 

357-0003 Direct-acting 8.0' (2.44m) capillary remote bulb thermostat, range 20° to 100°F (-7° to 38°C) 

357-0005 Direct-acting 8.0' (2.44m) capillary remote bulb thermostat, range 120° to 230°F (49° to 110°C) 

357 

ACCESSORIES 

356-090 Swivel flange 

163-172 Capillary support duct flange 

356-115 Coil clip standoff 

M-648 Capillary cradle clip 

358-051 Limitem well 18" insertion (NPT to TIP) 

Table 1. Sensitivity 

Sensitivity psig/°F 

Remote 

Bulb 

Rmt Bulb 

40' Cap 

(12m) 

1 0.29 0.33 0.33 

2 0.44 0.60 0.54 

3 0.64 1.03 0.76 

4 0.89 1.39 0.97 

5 1.03 1.74 1.18 

6 1.22 2.09 1.40 

7 1.41 2.44 1.61 

8 1.61 2.79 1.82 

9 1.80 3.15 2.03 

10 2.0 3.5 2.29 

11 2.0 3.5 2.29 

163-172* 

Averaging 

Bulb 

Duct Flange 

Accessory

DESCRIPTION 

DESCRIPTION 


HVAC CONTROLS 

AIR COMPRESSOR - SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

MODELS PV600, K-337, K-339, K-383, K-384, K-387 

Model PV600 Air and Water Two-Way Isolation Valves are 

rated to 200 psig (1379 kPa) at -40° to 175°F (-40° to 79°C). 

They are useful in isolating transducers for removal or for 

bypass assemblies. They are constructed of a brass body with 

Celcon® valves. Fittings are NPT. 

DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 

Models K-337 and K-339 Air Filters both provide clean, oilfree 

air for pneumatic control systems. 

Dual filter station Five-micron absorbent pre-filter 

and coalescing 0.03-micron 

oil filter 

Drain Automatic 

Construction Aluminum 

Inlet pressure 250 psig (1728 kPa) 

Temp 150°F (65°C) 

DESCRIPTION 

Models K-383, K-384, and K-387 Pressure Regulators have 

a large flow capacity to reduce supply air pressure from the 

compressor to meet the requirements of the system. 


Construction 

Gauge port 1/8" FNPT 

Max input 400 psig (2758 kPa) 

Output range 0-50 psig (0-345 kPa) 


Mounting In-line 

ACCESSORIES 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

AL-322 Back-connected gauge, 2" (5.08 cm), 

0-30 psig (0-200 kPa) 

AL-327 Back-connected gauge, 2" (5.08 cm), 

0-100 psig (0-689 kPa) 

K-312 Safety pop-off valve, 1/2" NPT, 24 scfm, 

30 psig (200 kPa) 

PV608-2 PV607-2 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

K-383 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

K-384 

�� 

�� 

�� 

K-337-1 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� �� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 




�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

463 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

464 

HVAC CONTROLS 

PRV STATION AND PLUG VALVES, FILTER 

MODELS K-332, FILN05 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model K-332 PRV Station is a cartridge-style filter 

element that removes oil vapor, moisture, and dirt 

to one-micron size. Tools are not required to replace 

the Model WXU-220 filter element. The filter should be 

replaced when the white cellulose surface darkens. 

The Model K-332-B assembly includes a wall-mounting 

bracket, filter cartridge, and pressure-reducing 

valve (PRV). This complete PRV station is designed 

for air flow rates and pressure regulation up to 8 scfm 

and 30 psig (200 kPa). The regulator valve is 

adjustable up to 35 psig (241 kPa). 

FEATURES 

• Coalescent-type oil removal filter 

• Automatic drain trap 

• Pressure regulator 

• Safety relief 

• Maximum pressure 70 psig (12 cfm) 

DESCRIPTION 


�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

MODEL DESCRIPTION WEIGHT lb (kg) 

K-332 PRV station with filters 3.15 (1.43) 

K-332-B PRV station and bypass with three isolating plug valves 4.6 (2.1) 

WXU-220 Replacement filter 1.0 (0.45) 

The Model FILN05 is a final-device pneumatic air filter. 

The microfibre disposable filter unit (DFU) consists of a 

HEPA Microflex Filter Tube permanently bonded into 

a sealed nylon casting. 

DFUs are ideal for retrofit application for use as final filters 

to remove oil, water, and dirt from compressed air 

to protect air logic devices, transducers, and other contamination-sensitive 

equipment. As the Model FILN05 

transparent filter shows signs of contamination, simply 

remove and replace. 

NOTE: Not for use with synthetic lubricants. 


Connections 1/4" (0.64 cm) poly tube 

Dimensions 2.75"L x 1"D (6.99 x 2.54 cm) 


Filter HEPA Microflex 

DOP efficiency 99.99% @ 0.2 µm 

Construction Transparent nylon 

Flow 1.4 scfm @ 1.5 psid 

Max pressure 100 psig (690 kPa) @ 100°F (38°C) 

Barb fitting 35 psig (241 kPa) 

�� 

FILN05 

�� 



FILN05 Inline disposable air filter 

�� 

��

HVAC CONTROLS 

THREE-WAY SOLENOID AIR VALVE 

V11 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

V11 Series Three-Way Solenoid Air Valves are furnished 

for two-position action and have three identified 

connections: a normally open (N.O.) port with 1/8" FNPT 

connection; a normally closed (N.C.) port; and a common 

(COM) port with 1/4" barbed fittings. The posts in 

the die-cast aluminum valve body have No. 60 mesh 

(217 micron openings) monel screens to prevent foreign 

material from entering the valve ports. 

APPLICATION 

The V11 Series is used in applications where the operation 

of a pneumatic device is dependent upon an electrical 

circuit. The valves direct supply air to the pneumatic 

device when the coil is energized or de-energized, 

depending on the supply and exhaust air connections. 

All V11 Series valves are designed for use only as temperature 

control devices. Where system closure, 

improper flow, or loss of pressure due to valve failure 

can result in personal injury and/or loss of property, it is 

recommended that additional devices be added to 

accommodate proper system operation, such as using a 

whisker switch to monitor the blade position on smoke 

dampers. 


Product number Coil voltage 

V11HAA-100 110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HBA-100 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HCA-100 208 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HFA-100 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HDA-100 440/480 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HGA-100 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11PNA-105 24 VDC 


AC models 6W 

24 VDC models 9W 

Air connections 1/4" barb connections in common port 

and normally closed port, normally open 

port is 1/8" FNPT 

Wiring connections 18 AWG 18" wire leads 

Conduit opening 7/8" (0.88 cm) diameter 

Max pressure rating 30 psig (207 kPa) 

FEATURES 

• Three-port connection C, N.O., N.C. 

• Two-position operation 

• Positive air seal 

• Manual operation for testing and checkout of 

some models 

• Compact and lightweight 

• Mounted in any position 

• UL listed, File #MH5939 and CSA certified 

• Multiple voltages available 

Operating pressure 0-20 psig (0 to 138 kPa) 

Air capacity 1.5 scfm (2592 scim) 15 psig (105 kPa) air 

Finish 

Valve body Die-cast aluminum 

Cover and case Gray baked enamel 

Material 

Valve body Die-cast aluminum 

Cover and case Cold rolled steel 

Ambient temp 

AC models Min 32°F (0°C) 

Max 140°F (60°C) 

DC models Min 32°F (0°C) 

Max 104°F (40°C) 

Agency listings UL listed (all V11s) 

CSA (all except V11PNA) 


465 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

466 

HVAC CONTROLS 

THREE-WAY SOLENOID AIR VALVE 

V11 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

0.97 

(2.46) 

1.75 

(4.43) 

OPERATION 

COM 

ND 

0.88 

(2.24) 

1/4 Barb 

Connector 

1/8-27 NPT 

APPLICATION DIAGRAM 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

Dia Conduit 

Hole 

� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

1.75 

(4.45) 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

0.20 

(0.51) 

0.19 

(0.48) 

3.13 

(7.95) 

0.97 

(2.46) 

In a typical application, supply air is connected to the normally closed port, and the control device is connected to 

the common port. When the solenoid is energized, a magnetic field activates a plunger-type valve stem, and supply 

air is directed to the control device. When the solenoid is de-energized, the supply air connection is closed, and the 

normally open port exhausts air from the control device. Reverse action may be obtained by connecting the supply 

air to the normally open port, using the normally closed port for exhaust (see Application Diagram above). To manually 

operate, remove the access plug, and insert the Y99AA-4 key. The manual opener key is ordered separately. 

0.38 

(0.97) 

1/4 Barb 

Connector 


1.50 

(3.81) 

0.68 

(1.73) 

0.19 

(0.48) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

0.50 

(1.27) 

2.56 

(6.50) 

0.67 0.41 

(1.70) 

(1.04) 

MODEL DESCRIPTION MODEL DESCRIPTION 

V11HAA-100 110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz V11HFA-100 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HCA-100 208 VAC, 50/60 Hz V11HGA-100 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

V11HDA-100 440/480 VAC, 50/60 Hz V11PNA-105 24 VDC 

V11HBA-100 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Y99AA-4 Manual opener key 

NC 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� 

�� 

0.57 

(1.45) 

�� 

�� 

0.19 

0.5 

0.22 

(0.56) 

�� 

�� 

0.18 

(0.46) 

1.0 

(1.54) 

�� 

�� 

0.38 

(0.97) 

0.37 

(0.94)

HVAC CONTROLS 

ELECTRIC / PNEUMATIC THREE-WAY AIR VALVES 

MODEL EP3 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model EP3 is an industrial-quality, two-position, three-way 

solenoid air valve used in applications where the operation of a 

pneumatic device is dependent upon an electrical circuit. 

A momentary, manual-override push button provides operation 

without closing the electrical circuit. An LED provides visual 

indication of the air valve’s status. The valve can be mounted 

in any position with body mounting holes or with the mounting 

plate furnished with the valve. Each Model EP3 also comes 

with 16" (40.64 cm) lead wires and three barbed fittings for 1/4" 

(0.64 cm) plastic tubing. 

FEATURES 

• LED indication and mounting plate 

• Industrial quality 

• High capacity 

• Manual override 

• Universal porting 

• N.C., N.O., diverter, or selector determined by piping 


Pressure range 0-50 psig (0-345 kPa) 

Flow constant Cv 0.04 

Air capacity 500 scim (0.29 scfm) @ 15 psig (103 kPa) 

Media Clean air or inert gases 

Air connections Three barbed fittings (1/4" poly) 


Override Momentary button 

Indication Red LED on when energized 

Coil voltage/power 115V*/2.5W continuous duty, 20 mA 

24V*/2.5W continuous duty, 104 mA 

Inrush 157 mA, AC 

Voltage tolerance +15%, -10% of rated coil voltage 

Materials Electroless nickel, Buna N, stainless steel, 

anodized aluminum 

Wiring 16" (40.64 cm) lead wires with connector 


Agency UL-recognized component 

* Voltage can be AC (50/60 Hz) or DC. For AC operation, use 2587-7 AC lead 

wire included with 24 VAC and 120 VAC models. For DC operation, use cable 

2458-0 included with the 24 VDC model. 

BACK-UP APPLICATIONS 

Control Branch 

R 

N.O. 

Note: Energize EP for 

back-up control 

Controlled 

Device A C N.C. P Back-Up 

Control 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

2.39 

(6.07) 

R 


P 

1.5 

(3.81) 

LED 

Manual 

Override 

"P" Port #10-32 

"A" Port #10-32 on 

opposite side 


0.17" (0.44) dia 

through two places 

Ports 

(de-energized) 

A – Common 

P – Normally Closed 

R – Normally Open 

0.19 

(0.48) 

A – Common 


EP3-24VAC 24 VAC three-way air valve, includes 2587-7 lead wire 

EP3-24VDC 24 VDC three-way air valve, includes 2458-0 lead wire 

EP3-120VAC 120 VAC three-way air valve, includes 2587-7 lead wire 

2.2 

(5.59) 

P 

EP3-24 VAC 

0.37 

(0.94) 

red + black - 

2- +1 

0.38 

(0.97) 

LED 

0.63 

(1.59) 

R – N.O. 

P – N.C. 

Removable Lead 

Wire Connector 

Manual 

Override 

A 


0.13" (0.32) dia 

through two places 

467 

HVAC CONTROLS

HVAC CONTROLS 

468 

HVAC CONTROLS 

ELECTRIC / PNEUMATIC THREE-WAY AIR VALVES 

MODEL 35A 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 35A is an industrial-quality, two-position, 

three-way solenoid air valve used in applications where 

the operation of a pneumatic device is dependent upon 

an electrical circuit. 

A nonlocking, manual-override push button provides 

operation without closing the electrical circuit. Two 

mounting holes at the base of the valve body provide 

easy mounting to control panels. Each Model 35A 

comes with 18" (45.72 cm) lead wires and three barbed 

fittings for 1/4" OD plastic tubing. 

FEATURES 

• Industrial quality 

• High capacity 


• Universal porting 

• N.C., N.O., diverter, or selector determined 

by piping 


Pressure range 28" Hg vacuum to 120 psig (827 kPa) 

Flow constant Cv 0.18 

Air capacity 1728 scim (1 scfm) @ 20 psig 

(138 kPa), supply with 1 psig (7 kPa) 

pressure drop 

Media Clean air or inert gases 

Air connections 1/8" FPT and 1/4" barbed fitting 



Electrical Continuous duty, Class A coil 

35A-FW-120 VAC 120 VAC/60 Hz (110/50) 1.7W, 14 mA 

35A-FW-24 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 60 Hz (24/50) 1.8W, 

75 mA 

35A-24 VDC 24 VDC 5.4W, 225 mA 

Inrush 0.11 amps AC 

Wiring 22 AWG, 18" (45.72 cm) leads 

Agency UL listed; CSA 

Manual override Momentary push button (top) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.97 

(5.00) 

0.3 

(0.77) 

PIPING 

0.13 

(0.33) 

Universal Porting 


Manual Push Button 

2 

Ports 

0.43 

0.85 (1.08) 

(2.15) 

0.55 

(1.40) 

1.10 

(2.79) 

Ports (de-energized) 

1 - Normally Closed 

2 - Common 

3 - Normally Open 


35A-FW-24VAC 24 VAC or VDC three-way air valve (75 mA) 

35A-24VDC 24 VDC three-way air valve (225 mA) 

35A-FW-120VAC 120 VAC three-way air valve (1.7 VA) 

3 

1 

Two Mounting 

Holes 0.13 dia 

(0.34 cm) 

0.39 

(0.99) 

C 

2 

0.65 

(1.65) 

0.95 

(2.41) 

2 

3 

0.46 

(1.17) 

N.C. 

1 

N.O.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

PRODUCTS 

We’ve got the NEW 

Honeywell S Series 

Direct Coupled Spring 

Return Actuators! 

See page 487. 

SERVICES 

We’ve got your Damper 

Quotes here! 

SOLUTIONS 

We carry all the Brand 

Actuators you trust with 

specs you need. 



Direct Coupled Actuator Reference Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 

ACTUATORS 

D-3000 /D-4000 Series – Johnson Controls Pneumatic Damper Actuators . . . .505 

GDE / GLB / GEB / GBB / GIB Series – 

Siemens Direct Coupled Actuators, Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 

GMA / GCA Series – Siemens Direct Coupled Actuators, Spring Return . . . . . .491 

KA-35 Series – 

Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator, 35 in-lb Non-Spring Return . . . . .473 


Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator, 70 in-lb Non-Spring Return . . . . .473 


Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator, 175 in-lb Non-Spring Return . . . .475 


Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator, 301 in-lb Non-Spring Return . . . .475 

KAS-44 Series – 

Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator, 44 in-lb Spring Return . . . . . . . . .477 


Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator, 88 in-lb Spring Return . . . . . . . . .477 


Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuator,175 in-lb Spring Return . . . . . . . .477 

LM / NM / AM / GM Series – 

Belimo Direct Coupled Actuators, Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 

TF/LF / NF / AF Series – Belimo Direct Coupled Actuators, Spring Return . . . .499 

M100 Series – Johnson Controls Motor Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 

M4000/6000/7000/8000/9000 Series – Honeywell Modutrol Motor Actuators . . .501 

M9100 Series – 

Johnson Controls Direct Coupled Actuators, Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . .479 

M9200 Series – Johnson Controls Direct Coupled Actuators, Spring Return . . .481 

MK-3000 / MK-7100 Series – Invensys Pneumatic Damper Actuators . . . . . . . .510 

ML Series – Honeywell Low-Torque Direct Coupled Actuators, 

Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 

MX40-6 Series – Invensys Direct Coupled Actuators, Non-Spring Return . . . . .493 

MX40-7 Series – Invensys Direct Coupled Actuators, Spring Return . . . . . . . . .495 

N Series – Honeywell Direct Coupled Actuators, Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . .485 

S Series – Honeywell Direct Coupled Actuators, Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 

Actuator Accessories – Direct Coupled Actuator Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 

DAMPERS 

RCD40 / CD50 SERIES – Ruskin Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 

SD-1600 Series – Johnson Controls Smoke Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 

VD-1300 Series – Johnson Controls Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 



DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR REFERENCE CHART 

NON-SPRING RETURN 

MANUFACTURER 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

TORQUE 

in-lb 

(Nm) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

53 (6) 

44 (5) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

53 (6) 

44 (5) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

88 (10) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

88 (10) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

175 (20) 

175 (20) 

140 (16) 

132 (15) 

177 (20) 

133 (15) 

160 (18) 

175 (20) 

175 (20) 

140 (16) 

132 (15) 

177 (20) 

133 (15) 

160 (18) 

301 (34) 

300 (34) 

210 (24) 

280 (32) 

310 (35) 

300 (34) 

266 (30) 

301 (34) 

300 (34) 

210 (24) 

280 (32) 

310 (35) 

300 (34) 

266 (30) 

POWER 

(volts) 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

CONTROL INPUT 

Tri-State Proportional 

Floating 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

KA-35-2T/VAV 

ML6161D2006/B2024 

M9104-AGA2 

M9106-AGA2 

GDE131.1P/U 

MF40-6043 

LM24 

KA-35-P 

ML7161A2008 

M9104-GGA2 

M9106-GGA2 

GDE161.1P 

MS40-6043 

LM24-SR 

KA-70-2T 

ML6174D2009 

M9108-AGA 2 

GLB131.1P 

MF40-6083 

NM24 

KA-70-P 

ML7174A2001 

M9108-GGA2/HGA2 

GLB161.1P/U 

MS40-6083 

NM24-SR 

KA-175-2T 

N2024 

M9116-AGA2 

GEB131.1U 

GBB171.1P/U 

MF40-6153 

AM24 

KA-175-P 

N20010 


GEB161.1U 

GBB151/161.1P/U 

MS40-6153 

AM24-SR 

KA-301-2T 

N3424 

M9124-AGA2 

M9132-AGA2 

GIB171.1P/U 

MF40-6343 

GM24 

KA-301-P 

N34010 


M9132-GGA 

GIB151/161.1P/U 

MS40-6343 

GM24-SR 

4 in-lb/ft 2 

No seals 

8.8 

8.8 

8.8 

13.8 

11.0 

8.8 

8.8 

8.8 

8.8 

8.8 

13.8 

11.0 

8.8 

8.8 

17.5 

17.5 

17.5 

22.0 

17.5 

17.5 

17.5 

17.5 

17.5 

22.0 

17.5 

17.5 

44.0 

44.0 

35.0 

33.0 

44.0 

33.0 

40.0 

44.0 

44.0 

35.0 

33.0 

44.0 

33.0 

40.0 

75.0 

75.0 

52.5 

70.0 

77.0 

75.0 

66.5 

75.0 

75.0 

52.5 

70.0 

77.0 

75.0 

66.5 

DAMPER SIZE (ft 2 ) 

5 in-lb/ft 2 

Opposing w/seals 

7.0 

7.0 

7.0 

11.0 

9.5 

7.0 

7.0 

7.0 

7.0 

7.0 

11.0 

9.5 

7.0 

7.0 

14.0 

14.0 

14.0 

19.0 

14.0 

14.0 

14.0 

14.0 

14.0 

19.0 

14.0 

14.0 

38.0 

38.0 

28.0 

26.5 

38.0 

26.5 

32.0 

38.0 

38.0 

28.0 

26.5 

38.0 

26.5 

32.0 

60.0 

60.0 

42.0 

56.0 

62.0 

60.0 

53.2 

60.0 

60.0 

42.0 

56.0 

62.0 

60.0 

53.2 

6 in-lb/ft 2 

Parallel w/seals 

5.0 

5.0 

5.0 

7.9 

6.5 

5.0 

5.0 

5.0 

5.0 

5.0 

7.9 

6.5 

5.0 

5.0 

10.0 

10.0 

10.0 

13.0 

10.0 

10.0 

10.0 

10.0 

10.0 

13.0 

10.0 

10.0 

26.0 

26.0 

20.0 

19.0 

26.0 

19.0 

23.0 

26.0 

26.0 

20.0 

19.0 

26.0 

19.0 

23.0 

43.0 

43.0 

30.0 

40.0 

45.0 

43.0 

38.0 

43.0 

43.0 

30.0 

40.0 

45.0 

43.0 

38.0 

469 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


470 


DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR REFERENCE CHART 

SPRING RETURN 

MANUFACTURER 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Honeywell 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Johnson 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Invensys 

Belimo 

Kele 

Honeywell 

Siemens 

Invensys 

Invensys 

Belimo 

TORQUE 

in-lb 

(Nm) 

44 (5) 

44 (5) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

44 (5) 

44 (5) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

44 (5) 

44 (5) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

44 (5) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

88 (10) 

88 (10) 

53 (6) 

62 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

88 (10) 

88 (10) 

53 (6) 

62 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

88 (10) 

88 (10) 

53 (6) 

62 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

88 (10) 

88 (10) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

175 (20) 

175 (20) 

140 (16) 

142 (16) 

133 (15) 

150 (17) 

133 (15) 

175 (20) 

175 (20) 

140 (16) 

142 (16) 

133 (15) 

150 (17) 

133 (15) 

175 (20) 

175 (20) 

140 (16) 

142 (16) 

133 (15) 

150 (17) 

133 (15) 

175 (20) 

175 (20) 

142 (16) 

133 (15) 

150 (17) 

133 (15) 

POWER 

(volts) 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

120 

120 

120 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

On/Off 

CONTROL INPUT 

Tri-State Proportional 

Two-Position 

KAS-44-2 

S0524-2POS 

MA40-7043 

LF24 

S05120-2POS 

MA40-7040 

LF120 

KAS-88-2 

S1024-2POS 

M9206-BGA2 

GMA121.1P/U 

MA40-7073 

NF24 

KAS-88-120 

S10120-2POS 

GMA221.1U 

MA40-7070 

NF120 

KAS-175-2 

S2024-2POS 

M9216-BGA2 

GCA121.1P/U 

MA40-7153 

MA40-7173 

AF24 

KAS-175-120 

S20120-2POS 

GCA221.1U 

MA40-7150 

MA40-7170 

AF120 

Floating 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

KAS-44-M 

S05010 

MF40-7043 

LF24-3 

KAS-44-M 

S05010 

MS40-7043 

LF24-SR 

KAS-88-M 

S10010 

M9206-AGA2 

GMA131.1U 

MF40-7073 

NF24-3 

KAS-88-M 

S10010 

M9206-GGA2 

GMA161.1P/U 

MS40-7073 

NF24-SR 

KAS-175-M 

S20010 

M9216-AGA2 

GCA131.1P/U 

MF40-7153 

MF40-7173 

AF24-3 

KAS-175-M 

S20010 

M9216-HGA2 

GCA151/161.1P/U 

MS40-7153 

MS40-7173 

AF24-SR 

4 in-lb/ft 2 

No seals 

11.0 

11.0 

8.8 

8.8 

11.0 

11.0 

8.8 

8.8 

11.0 

11.0 

8.8 

8.8 

11.0 

8.8 

8.8 

22.0 

22.0 

13.8 

14.0 

15.0 

15.0 

22.0 

22.0 

13.8 

14.0 

15.0 

15.0 

22.0 

22.0 

13.8 

14.0 

15.0 

15.0 

22.0 

22.0 

15.0 

15.0 

15.0 

44.0 

44.0 

35.0 

35.5 

33.5 

37.5 

33.5 

44.0 

44.0 

35.0 

35.5 

33.5 

37.5 

33.5 

44.0 

44.0 

35.0 

35.5 

33.5 

37.5 

33.5 

44.0 

44.0 

35.5 

33.5 

37.5 

33.5 

DAMPER SIZE (ft 2 ) 

5 in-lb/ft 2 

Opposing w/seals 

9.5 

9.5 

7.0 

7.0 

9.5 

9.5 

7.0 

7.0 

9.5 

9.5 

7.0 

7.0 

9.5 

7.0 

7.0 

19.0 

19.0 

11.0 

11.0 

12.0 

12.0 

19.0 

19.0 

11.0 

11.0 

12.0 

12.0 

19.0 

19.0 

11.0 

11.0 

12.0 

12.0 

19.0 

19.0 

12.0 

12.0 

12.0 

38.0 

38.0 

28.0 

28.5 

26.5 

30.0 

26.5 

38.0 

38.0 

28.0 

28.5 

26.5 

30.0 

26.5 

38.0 

38.0 

28.0 

28.5 

26.5 

30.0 

26.5 

38.0 

38.0 

28.5 

26.5 

30.0 

26.5 

6 in-lb/ft 2 

Parallel w/seals 

6.5 

6.5 

5.0 

5.0 

6.5 

6.5 

5.0 

5.0 

6.5 

6.5 

5.0 

5.0 

6.5 

5.0 

5.0 

13.0 

13.0 

7.9 

8.0 

8.6 

8.6 

13.0 

13.0 

7.9 

8.0 

8.6 

8.6 

13.0 

13.0 

7.9 

8.0 

8.6 

8.6 

13.0 

13.0 

8.6 

8.6 

8.6 

26.0 

26.0 

20.0 

20.5 

19.0 

21.5 

19.0 

26.0 

26.0 

20.0 

20.5 

19.0 

21.5 

19.0 

26.0 

26.0 

20.0 

20.5 

19.0 

21.5 

19.0 

26.0 

26.0 

20.5 

19.0 

21.5 

19.0


DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES 

ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES 

DAMPER ACTUATOR WEATHER SHIELDS 

ZS-100 Galvanized metal weather shield for Belimo AM, 

GM, LF, NF, AF actuators 

ZS-150 Polycarbonate tinted weather shield for Belimo AM, 

GM, LF, NF, AF actuators 

KH-6 

ZS-150 

KH-8 

BJ-809 KG-8 

ZS-100 

DAMPER SHAFT CRANK ARM 

KH-6 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" crank arm for BJ-809 ball joints 

KH-8 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" crank arm for KG-8 ball joints 

ZG-NM4 Crank arm with universal shaft mounting kit 

CA-1 1" shaft, 3-1/2" crank arm for BJ-809 ball joints 

205830A Arm/Ball joints kit for Kele KA-35, KA-70 actuators 

KC-1403S 3/8" shaft, 2-7/8" crank arm for BJ-809 ball joints 

KC-1405L 1/2" shaft, 4-3/4" crank arm for BJ-809 ball joints 

205830A 

CA-1 

KC-1403S 

ZG-NM4 

KC-1405L 

BALL JOINTS 

BJ-809 5/16" straight ball joint 

KG-8 5/16" 90-degree angle ball joint for use with KH-8 

crank arm 

VALVE ACTUATOR WEATHER SHIELDS 

KOV-1, -2, -3 Weatherproof covers for globe valve actuators 

ZS-NV-10 Weather shield for Belimo NV actuators 

ZS-CCV-10 Weather shield for Belimo LR actuators 

ZS-CCV-20 Weather shield for Belimo LF actuators 

ZS-CCV-30 Weather shield for Belimo AF, NF, AM 

actuators 

ZS-CCV-40 Weather shield for Belimo NM actuators 

ZG-DC2 

KOV-2 

DMPR-KC008 

DMPR-KC003 (shaft only) 

ZS-NV-10 

DMPR-KC054 

ZG-NMSA-1 

DMPR-KC005 

PR-24 

PR-48 

ZS-CCV-10 

DAMPER BLADE CRANK ARM 

ZG-DC1 3-1/2" universal damper blade crank arm 

ZG-DC2 6" universal damper blade crank arm 

DMPR-KC054 Blade arm for a Johnson CD1300 damper 

ZG-DC1 

SHAFT EXTENSION 

AV10-18 9-1/2" extension for 3/8" to 9/16" shafts 

ZG-NMSA-1 2" extension for 1/2" shafts 

DMPR-KC008 7-1/2" extension and bracket for a Johnson 

damper 

DMPR-KC005 7" extension for 1/2" shafts with coupler 

DMPR-KC003 7-1/2" extension for 1/2" shafts 

AV10-18 

PUSH RODS 

PR-24 5/16" dia, 24" long zinc-plated steel push rod 

PR-48 5/16" dia, 48" long zinc-plated steel push rod 

471 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS



DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES 

ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES 

FLOOR-MOUNT BRACKETS 

50001194-001 Universal bracket for Kele KA-175/301, 

KAS-175 

ZG-103 Horizontal mount for Belimo GM, AM actuators 

ZG-104 Vertical mount for Belimo GM, AM actuators 

ZG-105 Vertical mount for Belimo NM actuators 

ZG-107 Vertical/Horizontal U-mount for Belimo AF, NF 

actuators 

ZG-108 Vertical/Horizontal mount for Belimo AF, NF 

actuators 

ZG-112 Vertical/Horizontal mount for Belimo LF 

actuators 

FLR-35-70 Floor/Surface bracket for Kele KA-35, KA-70 

actuators 

ZG-104 

FLR-35-70 

POWER / SIGNAL ACCESSORIES 

ZGR01 500�, 1/2W, 1% Resistor 

691-KOA 120/24 VAC, 40 VA Class 2 transformer 

691-U100 120/24 VAC, 96 VA Class 2 transformer 

M9000-103 120/24 VAC, 14 VA inline transformer 

691-KOA 

472 

50001194-001 

ZGR01 

M9000-103 

ZG-112 

ZG-103 

ZG-107 

691-U100 

ZG-108 

ZG-105 

DAMPER-MOUNT BRACKETS 

ZG-100 Damper corner/side-mount for Belimo AF, NF, 

AM actuators 

ZG-101 Damper bottom-mount for Belimo AF, NF, LF, 

AM, NM actuators 

ZG-102 Dual actuator-mount for Belimo AF, NF, LF, 

AM actuators 

DMPR-KC255 Actuator plate for internal-mount Johnson 

M9000 actuators 

ZG-101 

DAMPER POSITION SWITCHES AND FEEDBACK 

TS-470 1/2" shaft, SPDT switch 

201052A Auxiliary switches, dual SPDT Kele KA-35, 

KA-70 actuators 

PQ-1001-3 Position feedback potentiometer 5 k�, 

externally mounted 

PQ-1001-4 Position feedback potentiometer 5 k�, 

internally mounted 

LS45M91B11 Whisker switch 

TS-470 

201052A 

DMPR-KC255 

ZG-102 

PQ-1001-4 

PQ-1001-3 

ZG-100 

LS45M91B11

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Revolution KA-35 and KA-70 Series actuators 

are designed and tested to provide damper and valve actuation. 

They are non-spring return with a proven track record of 

long and trouble-free operation. The KA-35 and KA-70 are 

powered by 24 VAC and accept two-position, tri-state, and 

proportional control signals. They are especially adept at 

small VAV control damper and ball valve operations. 

FEATURES 

• Non-spring return 

• Declutch override 

• Two-position and tri-state 

• Proportional 2-10V or 4-20 mA 

• Magnetic motor clutch 

• Over 100,000 cycles nominal 

• Over 1.5 million repositions nominal 

• UL, CSA, CE 


OPERATION 

The KA-35 and KA-70 Series use a proven magnetic clutch 

that makes it impossible to stall the drive motor, and they 

provide constant torque as long as the signal is applied. 

Sticky drive applications will not burn out the motor. The 

hubs use twin-set screws for positive hub-to-shaft linking. 

The traditional anti-rotation straps are used for two-point 

mounting. Signals include two-position (three-wire), tri-state 

(floating), and proportional (2-10V or 4-20 mA). 



KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR 

35 AND 70 IN-LB NON-SPRING RETURN 

KA-35, KA-70 SERIES 

Power Consumption 

KA-35-VAV, -2T 1.8 VA 

KA-35-P 4.8 VA 

KA-70-2T 2.4 VA 

KA-70-P 5.4 VA 

Impedance 

2-10 VDC 100 k� min 

4-20 mA 500� max 

Torque 

KA-35 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 

KA-70 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 

Stall torque 

KA-35 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 

KA-70 130 in-lb (15 Nm) 

Rotation Adjustable stop 45, 60, or 

90 degrees 

KA-35-2T 

KA-70-P 

KA-35-VAV 

Direction By switch or wiring 



Sound 45 dBA 

Cycle nominal 100,000/1.5M repositions 

Approvals UL listed, CSA, CE, plenum rated 

Housing NEMA 1 (IP10) 

Conduit 1/2" or 3/4" 

Connection Terminals 

Shaft diameter 3/8" to 1/2" (0.95 to 1.27 cm) 

Min shaft length 1.75" (4.45 cm) 

Manual override Declutch lever 

Position indicator Built in 

Timing 90 sec 


473 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

WIRING 

CW 

COM 

0.47 

(1.19) 

L1 

L2 

CCW 



35 AND 70 IN-LB NON-SPRING RETURN 


Declutch 

1.68 

(4.32) 

3.37 

(8.64) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

4.88 

(12.34) 

4.25 6.0 

(10.81) (15.24) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

2.18 

(5.54) 

KA-35-2T, KA-35-VAV, KA-70-2T 

Floating Controller 

24 VAC 

KA-35-2T, KA-35-VAV, KA-70-2T 

Two-Position/Tri-State 

1.68 

(4.24) 

Declutch 

1.31 

(3.33) 

3.7 

(9.41) 

(KA-35-2T only) 

CW 

COM 

CCW 

0.47 

(1.19) 


3.37 

(8.64) 

1.68 

(4.32) 

4.25 

(10.81) 

4.88 

(12.34) 


KA-35-2T Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position or tri-state with enclosed terminals 

KA-35-P Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional 2-10V or 4-20 mA 

KA-35-VAV Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position or tri-state 

KA-70-2T Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position or tri-state 

KA-70-P Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), proportional 2-10V or 4-20 mA 

0.5 

(1.27) 

L1 

L-2 

(–) 

(4-20 mA) 

(2-10 VDC) 

Rotation 

24 VAC 

T1 

T-2 

– 

+ 

+ 

Declutch 

1.0 

(2.54) 

5.56 

(14.12) 

0.68 

(1.78) 

Rotation 

KA-35-P, KA-70-P 

Internal 

Connection 

T 1 

T 2 

- 

+ 

+ 

KA-35-P, KA-70-P 

2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA 

1.68 

(4.24) 

0.13 Declutch 

(0.32) 

1.31 

(3.28) 

2.88 

(7.32) 

24 VAC 

Common 

4-20 mA 

2-10 VDC 


4074EVK 2" shaft extension with small 

ZS-100 Weather shield, metal (unassembled) 

anti-rotation strap 

205830A Crank arm with ball joints 

4074ENY 3/8" shaft adapter 

PR-48 5/16" push rod, 48" long 

32003036-001 Weather shield, tinted clear CAB BJ-809 Ball joints for 5/16" rod 

plastic 

FLR-35-70 Floor-mount bracket 

201052B Auxiliary switches (dual SPDT) 

474



175, 301 IN-LB NON-SPRING RETURN 


DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Revolution KA-175 and KA-301 Series 

actuators are designed and tested to provide reliable 

non-spring return control for dampers and valves. The 

KA-175 and KA-301 Series are powered by 24 

VAC/VDC and accept floating/two-position and proportional 

control signals. 

FEATURES 



• Switchable drive direction 

• Service/Off switch (floating/two-position models) 

• Auto adapt switch (proportional models) 


• Self-centering, reversible hub 

• Mechanical rotation stops 

• Dual SPDT auxiliary switches available 

• NEMA 2 (IP54) protection standard 

• UL listed, CE, and plenum ratings 

• 60,000 cycles nominal 

• 1.5 million repositions nominal 



Power 24 VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz 

24 VDC -10% to 20% 

(KA-175-P only) 

Consumption 6 VA / 6W 

Control signals Floating/Two-position or Proportional 

(0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA) 


VDC 100 k� 

mA 500� 

Torque 175 in-lb (20 Nm), 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 

Rotation 95 ±3 degrees 



KA-175-P 

Sound


476 



175, 301 IN-LB NON-SPRING RETURN 


WIRING 

2 

3 

4 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

24 VAC 

KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T 

Two-position Control 

24 VAC 

0/2-10 VDC Feedback 

KA-175-P, KA-301-P 

Proportional Control 

24 VAC Power 

0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal 

S1 

S2 

S3 

S4 

S5 

S6 

Line 

Voltage 

Line 

Voltage 

0/2-10 VDC or 

4 

0/4-20 mA 5 

C 

N.C. 

N.O. 

C 

N.C. 

N.O. 

SW2 

Auxiliary Switch Kit 

ccw switch 

cw switch 

1 

2 

3 

2 

3 

4 


24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T 

Floating Control 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


KA-175-P, KA-301-P 


24 VDC Power 

0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal* 

* Switch for VDC/mA is under access cover 

+ 

– 

Line 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

Note: Auxiliary switches are adjustable between 

5 and 85 degrees, and can be field-installed 

on the actuators. Order SW2 auxiliary switch kit. 

Ratings: 230V max, 5A resistive, 3A inductive 


KA-175-2T Non-spring return 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position/tri-state (floating) 

KA-175-P Non-spring return 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional 

KA-301-2T Non-spring return 301 in-lb (34 Nm), two-position/tri-state (floating) 

KA-301-P Non-spring return 301 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional 


SW2 Auxiliary switch kit, dual SPDT 

50001194-001 Universal surface-mount bracket w/ crank arm 

32004254-001 Replacement shaft coupler for KA-175 

32004254-003 Replacement shaft coupler for KA-301 

50000407-001 Tandem mount bracket


KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 

44, 88, 175 IN-LB SPRING RETURN 

KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Revolution KAS-44, KAS-88, and KAS-175 

Series actuators are designed and tested to provide 

spring-return control for dampers and valves. They 

accept two-position (24 VAC) or modulating (floating and 

proportional in one actuator) control signals. 

FEATURES 

• Brushless DC motor with stall protection 

• Auto-adapt feature 

• Signal mode switch 


• Common external auxiliary switch 

• Two-position, floating/proportional 


• Self-centering hub 

• Built-in position indicator 

• 60,000 cycles nominal 

• 1.5 million repositions nominal 


• UL, ULC, CE, C-TICK, and plenum ratings C R US 


Power 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 

Control signal Two-position 24 VAC, 

modulating/floating 

Elect ratings 

KAS-44-2 25 VA 

KAS-44-M 13 VA 

KAS-88-2 30 VA 

KAS-88-M 14 VA 

KAS-88-120 45 VA 

KAS-175-2 40 VA 

KAS-175-M 16 VA 

KAS-175-120 60 VA 

Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm), 88 in-lb 

(10 Nm), 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 

Stall torque 100 in-lb (11.3 Nm), 200 in-lb 

(22.6 Nm), 350 in-lb (40 Nm) 


Spring return direction cw or ccw (turn over) 

Ambient temp rating -40° to 140° F (-40° to 60° C) 

Ambient humidity rating 5% to 95 % noncondensing 

Sound


478 


KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 

44, 88, 175 IN-LB SPRING RETURN 

KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 SERIES 

WIRING 

1 

2 

Relay Contact 

or Switch 

1 

2 

24 VAC 

Line 

Voltage 

24 VAC 

Line 

Voltage 

CW 

CCW 

3 

4 

Floating 

KAS-44-2, KAS-88-2 

Two-Position Control 

5 

Controller 

KAS-44-M, KAS-88-M, KAS-175-M 


S1 

S2 

S3 

S4 

S5 

S6 

C 

NC 

NO 

C 

NC 

NO 

SW2 


ccw switch 

cw switch 

Note: Auxiliary switches are adjustable 5 to 85 

degrees and field installed on the actuator. 

Order SW2 auxiliary switch kit. 



KAS-44-M, KAS-88-M, KAS-175-M 



KAS-44-2 Spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC 

KAS-44-M Spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating (floating/proportional) 








SW2 Auxiliary switch kit 

32004254-002 Self-centering shaft coupler (replacement) 

ZGR01 500�, 1/2W resistor 

50000407-001 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 

50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

24 VAC 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


*500Ω, 1/2W or greater resistor required 

when control signal is 4-20 mA 

Line 

Voltage


JOHNSON CONTROLS DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 


M9100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Johnson Controls M9100 Series non-spring return actuators 

are designed to position return air, exhaust air, or 

outside air dampers in HVAC systems. They produce 

35, 53, 70, 140, 210, and 280 in-lb (4, 6, 8, 16, 24, 32 

Nm) of torque. The control signals available are twoposition/tri-state, 

and proportional. 

FEATURES 


• Electronic stall detection 

• Two-position/tri-state 

• Proportional 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-20 mA, and 4-20 mA 

• Actuator travel indicator 


Wiring 

M9104 48" (1.2m) cable 

M9106 0.25" (6 mm) spade terminals 

M9108, 9116, 9124, 9132 Screw terminals, 22-14 AWG 

Ambient temp rating 

M9104 -4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C) 

M9106 -4° to 125°F (-20° to 52°C) 

M9108, 9116, 9124, 9132 -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C) 

Humidity rating 0-90% RH noncondensing 

Shaft diameter 

M9104 Up to 0.5" (13 mm) 


MODEL 

M9104-AGA-2S 

M9104-GGA-2S 

M9106-AGA-2 

M9106-GGA-2 

M9108-AGA-2 

M9108-GGA-2 

M9116-AGA-2 

M9116-GGA-2 

M9124-AGA-2 

M9124-GGA-2 

M9132-AGA-2 

M9132-GGA-2 

VOLTAGE 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

20-30 VAC 50/60 Hz or 

24 VDC 

POWER 

2.1 VA 

3.6 VA 

2.5 VA 

3.2 VA 

6.5 VA 

7.5 VA 

6.5 VA 

7.5 VA 

6.5 VA 

7.5 VA 

6.5 VA 

7.5 VA 

SIGNAL 

(IMPEDANCE) 

Tri-state 

Prop. 0 to 10 VDC (100 kΩ) 

or 0 to 20 mA (500Ω) 

Tri-state 


or 0 to 20 mA (500Ω) 

Tri-state 


or 0 to 20 mA (500Ω) 

Tri-state 


or 0 to 20 mA (500Ω) 

Tri-state 


or 0 to 20 mA (500Ω) 

Tri-state 


or 0 to 20 mA (500Ω) 

M9116 

M9106 0.38" to 0.5" (1.0 to 1.3 cm) 

M9108, 9116, 9124, 9132 0.38" to 0.75" (1.0 to 1.9 cm) 

Approvals 

M9104 UL, CSA, CE, C-Tick 

M9106, 9108, 9116, 

9124, 9132 UL, CSA, CE 

Enclosure ratings 

M9104, 9108, 9116, 

9124, 9132 NEMA 2, IP42 

M9106 NEMA 2, IP32 

TORQUE 

in-lb (Nm) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

53 (6) 

53 (6) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

140 (16) 

140 (16) 

210 (24) 

210 (24) 

280 (32) 

280 (32) 

FEEDBACK 

None 

0 to 10 VDC 

None 

None 

None 

0 to 10 VDC 

None 

0 to 10 VDC 

None 

0 to 10 VDC 

None 

0 to 10 VDC 

AUX SWITCH 

None 

None 

model -AGC- 

model-GGC- model-AGC- model-GGC- model-AGC- model-GGC- model -AGC- 

model -GGC- 

model-AGC- model -GGC- 

DRIVE TIME 

(sec) 

60 

60 

60 

60 

25-50 

25-50 

70-115 

70-115 

115-160 

115-160 

115-185 

115-185 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

1.0 (0.4) 

1.3 (0.6) 

2.5 (1.0) 

2.5 (1.0) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

2.9 (1.3) 

479 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


480 




M9100 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.8 

(20.0) 

4.1 

(104.0) 

WIRING 

1.3 

(32.0) 

1.4 

(36.0) 2.8 

(71.0) 

CW CCW 

COM 

BLK RED ORG 

24 VAC 

M9104-AGA-2S 

Tri-state 

Set screw 

radiance 

clearance 

5.2 

(131.0) 

M9104 

FB VDC 24V COM 

ORG GRY RED BLK 

24V 

0-10 VDC 

0-10 VDC 

M9104-GGA-2S 

Proportional 

1.1 

(28.0) 

CCW C CW 

CCW 

0.6 

(14.0) 

0.2 

(5.0) 

COM 

24 VAC 

4.3 

(10.9) 

CW 

M9106-AGA 

Tri-state 

2.0 

(5.1) 

FB + 24 

FB 

4.0 

(10.2) 

0.3 

(0.7) 

4.2 

(10.7) 

0-10V, 2-10V 

VDC 

mA COM 

0-10V 

0-20 mA 

24 VAC 

M9106-GGA 

Proportional 

5.9 

(15.0) 

M9106 

1.7 

(4.3) 

2.6 

(6.7) 

0-20 mA, 4-20 mA 

0-20V, 2-20V 

0-10V, 2-10V 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

COM N/C 

COM 

24 

VAC/VDC 

Cover 

Removal 

Terminal Description 

4 Current Input 

5 Voltage Input 

6 Feedback 


M9104-AGA-2S Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), tri-state control 

M9104-GGA-2S Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional control 

M9106-AGA-2 Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), tri-state control 

M9106-GGA-2 Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), proportional control 

M9108-AGA-2 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control 








FB 

M9108 

M9116, M9124, M9132 (GGA) 

Proportional 

1 2 3 

CW CCW 

* 

24 VAC/VDC 

* Provide constant power to terminal 2 

for two-position control. 

M9108 

M9116, M9124, M9132 (AGA) 

Tri-state/ 

Two-position 


M9000-100 Conduit adapter for enclosed actuators M9000-200 Bench test commissioning tool 

M9000-154 1" jackshaft coupler for M9100 Series M9000-151 Floor-mount linkage kit 

M9000-103 120/24V 14VA inline transformer ASG Analog signal commissioning tool 

1.0 

(2.6) 

1.2 

(3.0) 

2.6 

(6.7) 

0 

7.09 

(18.0) 

3.9 

(10.0) 

90 60 

30 

30 

0 

90 

60 

1.7 

(4.9) 

4.92 

(12.5) 

1.8 

(3.5) 

2.5 

(6.5) 

5.4 

(13.8) 

Cover 

Removal 

1.2 

(3.1) 

M9108, M9116, M9124, M9134 

1.4 

(3.5)



SPRING RETURN 

M9200 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Johnson Controls M9200 Series spring return actuators 

are designed for direct coupling to dampers. The actuators 

use 24 VAC/VDC power to produce 53 or 140 inlb 

(6 or 16 Nm) of torque. The control signals available 

are two-position, tri-state, and proportional. 

FEATURES 

• Spring return 53 or 140 in-lb (6 or 16 Nm) 

• Manual override (M9216) 

• Electronic stall detection 

• Two-position and tri-state 

• Proportional 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-20 mA, and 4-20 mA 

• Actuator travel indicator 

• Zero and span adjustments (HGA models) 

• Cycle test >60,000 


Voltage 24 VAC/VDC ±10%, 50/60 Hz 

Rotation 90 degrees 

Min shaft length 3.0" (7.62 cm) 

Manual override Crank M9216 only 

Stacking actuators No 

Wiring 

M9216 Terminals, 22-14 AWG 

M9206 Leads 

Spring return 15 sec 


MODEL 

M9206-BGA-2 

M9206-AGA-2 

M9206-GGA-2 

M9216-AGA-2 

M9216-HGA-2 

POWER 

(VA) 

2.0 

2.0 

2.0 

12 

12 

SIGNAL 

(impedance) 

Two-pos 

Two-pos, Tri-state 

Proportional 

0-10 VDC (100 kΩ) 

0-20 mA (500Ω) 

Two-pos, Tri-state 

Proportional 

0-10 VDC (100 kΩ) 

0-20 mA (500Ω) 

TORQUE 

in-lb (Nm) 

53 (6) 

53 (6) 

53 (6) 

140 (16) 

140 (16) 

Ambient temp 

M9216 -4° to 120°F (-20° to 50°C) 

M9206 -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) 


Shaft diameter 

M9216 0.38" to 0.75" (0.96 to 1.9 cm) 

M9206 0.38" to 0.5" (0.96 to 1.27 cm) 

Approval UL listed, CSA, CE, plenum rated 

Housing NEMA 2R, IP42 

Conduit Yes with adapter 

FEEDBACK 

N/A 

N/A 

0-10V 

2-10V 

N/A 

0-10V 

2-10V 

TIMING 

@ 60 Hz (sec) 

90 

90 

90 

70-130 

10-130 

M9206 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

3.3 (1.5) 

3.3 (1.5) 

3.3 (1.5) 

6.4 (2.9) 

6.4 (2.9) 

481 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


M9206-BGA/AGA 

Two-position 

482 



SPRING RETURN 

M9200 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

1.44 

(2.91) 

0.84 

(2.13) 

1.45 

(3.68) 

1.49 

(3.79) 

0.87 

(2.20) 

0.98 

(2.50) 

2.28 

(5.80) 

1.44 

(2.90) 

3.25 

(8.26) 

WHT/ YEL WHT/ 

WHT YEL* WHT YEL RED RED WHT BRN BRN 

M9206-GGA 

Proportional 

1.24 

(3.14) 

0.31 

(0.79) 

6.98 

(17.73) 

M9206-AGA 

Tri-state/ 

Two-position 

9.47 

(24.05) 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

COM COM 

COM COM 

24 

VAC/VDC 

24 

VAC/VDC 

4-20 mA 

6-9V, 2-10V, 4-20 mA 

CW CCW 24V 

AC/DC 

0-10V 

0-20 mA, 4-20 mA 

0-10V, 2-10V 

*For AGA models, 

this wire color is BRN. 

6-9V, 2-10V 

24 VAC/VDC 

0-10V, 2-10V 

TERMINAL DESCRIPTION 

3 Calibration Out 

4 Current Input 

5 Voltage Input 

6 Feedback 

M9216-HGA 

Proportional 


M9206-BGA-2 Spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), two-position two-wire control 

M9206-AGA-2 Spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm, two-position and tri-state control 

M9206-GGA-2 Spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), proportional control 

M9216-AGA-2 Spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position and tri-state control 

M9216-HGA-2 Spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), proportional control 

1 2 3 4 

COM 

CW CCW 

24 VAC/VDC 

*For two-position control, 

use only terminals 1 and 3, 

switching power to 3. 

* 

M9216-AGA 

Tri-state 

Two-position 


M9000-103 120/24V inline transformer M9000-154 1" jackshaft coupler 

M9000-100 Conduit adapter for enclosed actuators M9000-200 Bench test commissioning tool 

ASG Analog signal commissioning tool M9000-151 Floor-mount linkage kit 

0 

0.35 

(0.89) 

90 60 

4.57 

(11.61) 

30 

30 

1.97 

(5.00) 

60 

0 

90 

0.15 

(0.38) 

6.34 

(16.10) 

M9206 M9216 


1.83 

(4.65) 

3.47 

(8.81) 

Cover 

Removal 

7.32 

(18.59) 

1.52 

(3.87) 

2.15 

(5.45)


HONEYWELL LOW-TORQUE, DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 


ML SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Honeywell ML Series Low-Torque, Direct 

Coupled Non-Spring Return Actuators are designed 

for damper control and 1/2" to 2" ball valve assembly 

control. They are available in floating/two-position and 

2-10 VDC/4-20 mA. 

FEATURES 

• Non-spring return 35, 70 in-lb 

(4, 8 Nm) 

• Two-position, floating, 2-10 VDC, or 

4-20 mA control 


• UL, CSA 


• Selectable 45°, 60°, or 90° stroke 

• 0° to 30° minimum position 

• Field-addable auxiliary switches 

• 1.5 million repositions design life 


Power 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz 

Impedance 

2-10 VDC 45 k� min 

4-20 mA 536� max 

Rotation 95 degrees with indicator 

Direction By switch or wiring 

Manual override Disengage button 

Wiring 3' (91 cm), 18 AWG, plenum cable 

with 1/2" hub or terminals (see wiring) 


MODEL 

ML6161 

ML7161 

ML6174 

ML7174 

TORQUE 

in-lb (Nm) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

70 (8) 

70 (8) 

CONTROL 

SIGNAL 

Floating/Two-pos 

2-10V/4-20 mA 

Floating/Two-pos 

2-10V/4-20 mA 

FEED- 

BACK 

No 

No 

No 

No 

POWER 

(VA) 

1.8 

4.8 

2.4 

5.4 

ML6161B2024 

Stall torque 135% of operating torque 



Housing NEMA 1 

Mounting 3/8" to 1/2" (10 to 13 mm) round or 

square shaft 

Approval UL, CSA, plenum 

TIMING 90° 

@ 60 Hz (sec) 

90 

90 

90 

90 

DIMENSIONS 

L x W x D in (cm) 

5.6 x 3.4 x 2.4 (14.1 x 8.6 x 6.1) 

5.6 x 3.4 x 2.4 (14.1 x 8.6 x 6.1) 

5.6 x 3.4 x 2.5 (14.1 x 8.6 x 6.4) 

5.6 x 3.4 x 2.5 (14.1 x 8.6 x 6.4) 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

1.3 (0.59) 

1.3 (0.59) 

1.3 (0.59) 

1.3 (0.59) 

483 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


484 


HONEYWELL LOW-TORQUE DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 


ML SERIES 

WIRING 

L1 

L2 

L1 

L2 

Floating 

Controller 

24 VAC 

ML6161/ML6174 

Floating/Two-Position 

24 VAC 

Two-Position Switch* 

or Relay Contacts 

201052B 

Auxiliary Switch 

CW 

COM 

CCW 

*201052B Auxiliary switch can be used to de-energize 

the actuator at stroke end points for two-position control. 

ML6161/ML6174 

Two-Position 



ML6161B2024 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), floating/two-position 

ML7161A2008 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional 2-10V/4-20 mA 

ML6174B2019 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), floating/two-position 

ML7174A2001 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), proportional 2-10V/4-20 mA 


FLR-35-70 Floor-mount bracket 

201052A Auxiliary switch, 1 SPDT, 50 VA @ 24 VAC 

201052B Auxiliary switch, 2 SPDT, 50 VA @ 24 VAC 

200976A Auxiliary potentiometer 500� 

CW 

COM 

CCW 

L1 

L2 

L1 

L2 

24 VAC 

2-10 VDC 

24 VAC 

4-20 mA 

ML7161/ML7174 

2-10 VDC 

ML7161/ML7174 

4-20 mA 

T1 

T2 

- 

+ 

T1 

T2 

- 

Internal 

Connection 

2-10 VDC 

+ 4-20 mA 

Internal 

Connection


HONEYWELL DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 


N SERIES ACTUATORS 

DESCRIPTION 

The N Series actuators are non-spring return medium 

and high-torque direct coupled actuators from 

Honeywell. They are designed and tested to provide 

reliable non-spring return control for dampers and 

valves that require up to 300 in-lb (34 Nm) of torque. 

The N Series is powered by 24 VAC/VDC and has an 

excellent feature set that combines flexibility and simplicity. 

FEATURES 

• Self-centering shaft adapter 

• Adjustable mechanical range stops 

• Auto adapt on modulating models 

• Internal or field-installable auxiliary switches 

• Signal mode switch 


• Mechanical override declutch 

• Detachable wiring cover 

• Consistent wiring 

• Five-year standard Honeywell warranty 


Power 24 VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz 

24 VDC -10% to 20% 

(modulating models only) 


N20 6 VA/6W 

N34 9 VA/9W 

Proportional signal 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 


VDC 100 k� 

mA 500� 

Torque 

N20 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 

N34 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 




Sound


486 




N SERIES ACTUATORS 

WIRING 

2 

3 

4 

1 

2 

24 VAC 

N2024/N34024 


24 VAC 

3 

5 

+ 

– 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


*Switch for voltage/current control signal 

is under access cover. 

N20010/N34010 


24 VAC Power 


S1 

S2 

S3 

S4 

S5 

S6 

C 

N.C. 

N.O. 

C 

N.C. 

N.O. 

SW2 


Line 

Voltage 

Line 

Voltage 

ccw switch 

cw switch 

24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

N2024/N34024 


Line 

Voltage 



N2024 175 in-lb, two-position/floating (OS number MN6120A1002) 

N2024-SW2 175 in-lb, two-position/floating w/ integral auxiliary switch (OS number MN6120A1200) 

N20010 175 in-lb, modulating (OS number MN7220A2007) 

N20010-SW2 175 in-lb, modulating w/ integral auxiliary switch (OS number MN7220A2205) 

N3424 300 in-lb, two-position/floating (OS number MN6134A1003) 

N34010 300 in-lb, modulating (OS number MN7234A2008) 

2 

3 

4 

1 

2 

+ 

24 VDC 

– 

3 

5 

+ 

– 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


*Switch for voltage/current control signal 

is under access cover. 

N20010/N34010 


24 VDC Power 


Note: SW2 auxiliary switches are 

adjustable and field installed on 

the actuator. Order SW2 auxiliary 

switch kit. Some actuator models 

are available with factory installed 

integral auxiliary switches. 

See ordering information. 




32004254-001 Self-centering shaft coupler for N20 models 

32004254-003 Self-centering shaft coupler for N34 models 

50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket/crank arm 




SPRING RETURN 

S SERIES ACTUATORS 

DESCRIPTION 

S Series actuators high-performance spring return, 

medium and high torque, direct-coupled actuators from 

Honeywell are designed and tested to provide reliable 

spring return control for dampers and valves that require 

up to 175 in-lb (20 Nm) of torque. The S Series has an 

excellent feature set that combines flexibility and simplicity. 

FEATURES 

• Self-centering shaft adapter 

• Auto adapt on modulating models 

• Internal or field-installable auxiliary switches 

• Selector switch for modulating or floating 


• Mechanical override crank 

• Detachable wiring cover 

• Five-year standard Honeywell warranty 


Power 24 VAC ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 

120 VAC (two-position only) 

Control signal Two-position 24 VAC, 

Two-position 120 VAC, 

floating/proportional 


S05010 13 VA 

S10010 14 VA 

S20010 16 VA 

S0524-2POS 25 VA 

S1024-2POS 30 VA 

S2024-2POS 40 VA 

S05120-2POS 45 VA 

S10120-2POS 45 VA 

S20120-2POS 60 VA 

Torque 

S05 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 

S10 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 

S20 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 

Stall torque 

S05 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 

S10 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 

S20 350 in-lb (40 Nm) 


S10010 

C R US 

Spring return direction cw or ccw (flippable) 

Ambient temp rating -40° to 140°F (-40° to 60°C) 

Ambient humidity rating 5% to 95% noncondensing 

Sound


488 



SPRING RETURN 

S SERIES ACTUATORS 

WIRING 

CW 

CCW 

1 

2 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Relay Contact 

or Switch 

24 VAC 

Sxx24-2POS 


24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

Sxx010 


C 

NC 

NO 

C 

NC 

NO 

SW2 


Line 

Voltage 

Line 

Voltage 

CCW Switch 

CW Switch 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

1 

2 


Relay Contact 

or Switch 

Sxx120-2POS 


24 VAC 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


*500Ω, 1/2W or greater resistor required 


Sxx010 

Modulating Control 

120 VAC 

Note: SW2 auxiliary switches are 

adjustable and field installed on 

the actuator. Order SW2 auxiliary 

switch kit. Some actuator models 

are available with factory installed 

integral auxiliary switches. 

Consult Trane. 

Line 

Voltage 


S0524-2POS Spring return 44 in-lb, two-position, 24 VAC (OS number MS8105A1008) 


S05010 Spring return 44 in-lb, modulating/floating (OS number MS7505A2008) 


S1024-2POS-SW2 Spring return 88 in-lb, two-position, 24 VAC, int. aux. switch (OS number MS8110A1206) 


S10120-2POS-SW2 Spring return 88 in-lb, two-position, 120 VAC, int. aux. switch (OS number MS4110A1200) 


S10010-SW2 Spring return 88 in-lb, modulating/floating, int. aux. switch (OS number MS7510A2206) 


S2024-2POS-SW2 Spring return 175 in-lb, two-position, int. aux. switch (OS number MS8120A1205) 


S20120-2POS-SW2 Spring return 175 in-lb, two-position, int. aux. switch (OS number MS4120A1209) 


S20010-SW2 Spring return 175 in-lb, modulating/floating, int. aux. switch (OS number MS7520A2205) 



32004254-002 Self-centering shaft coupler for S Series (replacement) 

ZGR01 500� 1/2W resistor 

50001194-001 Universal surface mount bracket/crank arm 



SIEMENS DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 


GDE, GLB, GEB, GBB, GIB SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Siemens GDE, GLB, GEB, GBB, and GIB Series Direct 

Coupled, Non-Spring Return Actuators provide actuation 

for a complete range of HVAC non-spring return 

damper applications, from terminal units to inlet vane 

dampers and more. They range in torque from 44 in-lb (5 

Nm), handling approximately 11 sq ft of damper area, to 

310 in-lb (35 Nm), handling approximately 77 sq ft of 

damper area. These actuators are available in all standard 

control signal types and offer a wide variety of 

options and accessories. 

FEATURES 

• Non-spring return 44 to 310 in-lb (5 to 35 Nm) 

• Floating or proportional control signals 

• Self-centering shaft coupling 

• Brushless motor technology on all models 

• Rugged, lightweight housing 

• Manual override on all models 


Power 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Input signal 

Voltage 0-10 VDC, 100 k� 

Current 4-20 mA, 500� 


GDE, GLB 3.3 VA 

GEB, GBB 4 VA 

GIB 6 VA 

Max angular rotation 95 degrees 

Speed 

GDE 90 sec @ 60 Hz 

GLB, GEB 125 sec @ 60 Hz 

GBB, GIB 150 sec @ 60 Hz 

Equipment rating Class 2 per UL/CSA 

Housing 

GDE, GLB NEMA 2 (IP54) 

GEB NEMA 1 (IP10) 

GBB, GIB NEMA 2 (IP40) 

GBB151-1P GEB161-1U GDE131-1P 

C R US 


Ambient humidity Up to 95% RH noncondensing 

Dimensions 

GDE, GLB 5.4"H x 2.7"W x 2.4"D 

(13.7 x 7.0 x 6.1 cm) 

GEB 8.4"H x 3.3"W x 2.4"D 

(21.3 x 8.3 x 6.1 cm) 

GBB, GIB 11.8"H x 3.9"W x 2.7"D 

(30.0 x 10.0 x 6.8 cm) 

Weight 

GDE, GLB 1.06 lb (0.4 kg) 

GEB 2.85 lb (1.3 kg) 

GBB, GIB 4.85 lb (2.2 kg) 

Approvals 

GDE, GLB, GEB UL, ULC, CE 

GBB, GIB UL, ULC 

489 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


L1 

L2 

Earth Ground 

Isolation Class 2 

24 VAC Transformer 

490 




GDE, GLB, GEB, GBB, GIB SERIES 

WIRING 

L1 

L2 

Earth Ground 



24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

6 

1 

(violet) 

(red) 

7 (orange) 

GDE13x, GLB13x, GBB17x, GIB17x 


24 VAC 

+ 

– 

Analog 

Controller 

0-10 VDC 

Feedback 

1 

2 

(red) 

(black) 

Y1 

G 

Y2 

G 

GO 

8 (gray) Y 

9 (pink) U 

GDE16x, GLB16x, GBB16x, GIB16x 

0-10 VDC Control 

M 

M 



GDE131-1P Non-spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), floating, plenum rated 

GDE161-1P Non-spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, plenum rated 

GLB131-1P Non-spring return 88 in-lb (10 Nm), floating, plenum rated 

GLB161-1P Non-spring return 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, plenum rated 

GEB131-1U Non-spring return 132 in-lb (15 Nm), floating, non-plenum rated 

GEB161-1U Non-spring return 132 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, non-plenum rated 

GBB171-1P Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), floating, plenum rated 

GBB161-1P Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, plenum rated 

GBB151-1P Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional 4-20 mA, plenum rated 

GIB171-1P Non-spring return 310 in-lb (35 Nm), floating, plenum rated 

GIB161-1P Non-spring return 310 in-lb (35 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, plenum rated 

GIB151-1P Non-spring return 310 in-lb (35 Nm), proportional 4-20 mA, plenum rated 

L1 

L2 

Earth Ground 



L1 

L2 

Earth Ground 



24 VAC 

Variations and accessories also available. 

Contact Trane to order. 


ASK71-1U Floor-mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

ASK71-2U Frame-mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

ASK75-1U Weather shield for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

ASK75-3U Weather shield for GMA/GEB actuators 

ASK71-6 Universal mounting kit for GDE/GLB actuators 

ASK76-1 Conduit adapter for GDE/GLB actuators 

ASK71-11 Combined foot- and frame-mount kit for GMA/GEB actuators 

ASK71-4 Crank arm linear stroke kit for GMA/GEB actuators 

985036 1/2" conduit adapter for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

+ 

– 

Analog 

Controller 

24 VAC 

0-10 VDC 

Feedback 

1 

2 

GBB15x, GIB15x 

4-20 mA Control 

(red) 

(black) 

G 

GO 

8 (gray) Y 

9 (pink) U 

6 

1 

(violet) 

(red) 

7 (orange) 

Two-position Switch 

open = full clockwise 

closed = full counterclockwise 

GBB17x, GIB17x 

Two-position Control with 

Floating Control Actuator 

Y1 

G 

Y2 

M 

M



SPRING RETURN 

GMA, GCA SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Siemens GMA and GCA Series Direct Coupled 

Spring Return Actuators provide actuation for a complete 

range of HVAC spring return damper applications. 

They are available in either 62 in-lb (7 Nm) torque, handling 

approximately 16 sq ft of damper area, or 142 in-lb 

(16 Nm) torque, handling approximately 36 sq ft of 

damper area. These actuators are available in all standard 

control signal types and offer a wide variety of 

options and accessories. 

FEATURES 

• Spring return 

• Two-position, floating, or proportional control 

signals 

• Self-centering shaft coupling 

• Brushless DC motor technology on all models 

• Rugged, lightweight metal housing 


• Integral conduit connection 


Power 24 or 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 

24 VDC depending on model 

Input signal 

Voltage 0-10 VDC, 100 k� 

Current 4-20 mA, 500 


GMA 5 VA 

GCA 9 VA 

Max angular rotation 95 degrees 

Speed 90 sec run time 

15 sec spring return (typical) 

Equipment rating Class 2 per UL/CSA 

GCA151-1P GMA121-1P 

Housing 

GCA NEMA 2 (IP40) 

GMA NEMA 1 


Ambient humidity Up to 95% RH noncondensing 

Dimensions 

GCA 11.8"H x 3.9"W x 2.7"D 

(30.0 x 10.0 x 6.8 cm) 

GMA 8.4"H x 3.2"W x 2.4"D 

(21.2 x 8.3 x 6.0 cm) 

Weight 

GCA 4.8 lb (2.2 kg) 

GMA 2.9 lb (1.3 kg) 

Approvals UL, ULC 

C R US 

491 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


L1 

L2 

492 



SPRING RETURN 

GMA, GCA SERIES 

WIRING 

24 VAC 

1 

2 

(red) 

(black) 

Earth Ground 



GMA12x, GCA12x 

24 VAC Two-position Control 

L 

N 

L1 

L2 

120 VAC 

Earth Ground 



3 

4 

(black) 

(white) 


120 VAC Two-position Control 

24 VAC 

+ 

– 

Analog 

Controller 

0-10 VDC 

Feedback 

1 

2 



(red) 

(black) 

G 

GO 

L 

N 

G 

GO 

8 (gray) Y 

9 (pink) U 

M 

M 

M 



GMA121-1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, plenum rated 

GMA221-1U Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, non-plenum rated 

GMA131-1U Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), floating, 24 VAC/VDC, non-plenum rated 

GMA161-1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, 24 VAC/VDC, plenum rated 

GMA151-1P Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), proportional 4-20 mA, 24 VAC, plenum rated 

GCA121-1P Spring return 142 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, plenum rated 

GCA221-1U Spring return 142 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, non-plenum rated 

GCA131-1P Spring return 142 in-lb (16 Nm), floating, 24 VAC, plenum rated 

GCA161-1P Spring return 142 in-lb (16 Nm), proportional 0-10 VDC, 24 VAC, plenum rated 

GCA151-1P Spring return 142 in-lb (16 Nm), proportional 4-20 mA, 24 VAC, plenum rated 

L1 

L2 

Earth Ground 



L1 

L2 

Earth Ground 



Variations and accessories also available. 

Contact Trane to order. 

24 VAC 

24 VAC 

+ 

– 

Analog 

Controller 

0-10 VDC 

Feedback 

1 

2 



Floating 

Controller 

1 

2 



(red) 

(black) 

G 

GO 

8 (gray) Y 

9 (pink) U 

(red) 

(black) 

G 

GO 

6 (violet) Y1 

7 (orange) Y2 


ASK71-1U Floor-mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

ASK71-2U Frame-mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

ASK75-1U Weather shield for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

ASK75-3U Weather shield for GMA/GEB actuators 

ASK71-11 Combined foot-and frame-mount kit for GMA/GEB actuators 

ASK71-4 Crank arm linear stroke kit for GMA/GEB actuators 

985036 1/2" conduit adapter for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators 

M 

M

DESCRIPTION 


INVENSYS DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 


MX40-6 SERIES 

Invensys MX40-6 Series DuraDrive Direct Coupled, 

Non-Spring Return Actuators are designed to accept 

floating or proportional control signals from a DDC system 

or a thermostat for HVAC damper applications. 

Typical applications include air handling unit dampers 

and inlet vanes and unitary equipment. The actuators 

range in torque from 35-300 in-lb (4-34 Nm). 

FEATURES 

• Direct mount to round or square shaft 

• Floating or proportional control models 


• Minimum 100,000 open/close operations 


Power supply 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Equipment rating Class 2 

Housing 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

494 

Line 

Voltage 




MX40-6 SERIES 

WIRING (CONTINUED) 

4-20 mA DC 

Controller 

(+) 

(–) 

4-20 mA 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

0 10 VDC Control 

(white) 

(red) 

(black) 

(black) 

(black/blue) 

+In 

500Ω 

COM 

24H 

24G 

(green/yellow) Ground 

3 

MS40-6343 


(red) 500Ω 

(white) 

(black) 

(red) 500Ω 

(white) 

(black) 

MS40-6343 

2 

(+) In 

(–) Common 

MS40-6343 

2 

(+) In 

(–) Common 

MS40-6343 

(black) 

2 

(black/blue) 

Ground 

(black) 

(black/blue) 

Ground 

MS40-6343 

4-20 mA Control Using Multiple Actuators 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Line 

Voltage 

SPDT floating or switch/controller or 2 SPST 

Unused conduit port must remain plugged with a watertight pipe plug as shipped from factory to 

maintain NEMA 4 (IP56) rating. 

Ground wire may be green on some models. 

CW and CCW as looking at the top of the actuator. Connect 24V to brown if CW rotation on rising 

control signal is required. Connect 24V to black if CCW rotation on rising control signal is required. 

DA drives CW when control signal is increasing. 

RA drives CCW when control signal is increasing. 

2-10 VDC 

Controller 

Line 

Voltage 

(+) 

(–) 

24 VAC 

Transformer 


unused 

(wire nut) 

unused 

(wire nut) 

Floating 

Controller 

Multiple Actuators and One Transformer 

(red) 500Ω 

(white) 

(+) In 

2 (black) 

(black) (–) Common (black/blue) 

Ground 

MS40-6343 

(red) 500Ω 

(white) 

(+) In 

2 (black) 

(black) (–) Common (black/blue) 

Ground 

MS40-6343 

2-10 VDC Control Using Multiple Actuators 

(red) 

(violet) 

(orange) 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Line 

Voltage 

Analog 

Controller 

MF40-6043 

1 Supply 

6 

7 

MF40-6043/6083/6153 


(red) 

(black) 

(gray) 

MS40-6043 


(blue) 

(brown) 

(black) 

MS40-6043 

1 Supply 

2 Neutral 

8 0-10 VDC 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

Line 

Voltag 

MF40-6083/6153 

1 

2 

3 

MODEL TORQUE POWER POWER CONTROL TIMING MAX OPERATING DIMENSIONS 

in-lb (Nm) SUPPLY (VAC) USAGE (VA) SIGNAL (sec) STROKE TEMP °F (°C) L x W x H in (cm) 

MF40-6043 35 (4) 24 2 Floating 90 95° -25° to 130° 5.4 x 2.7 x 2.4 

(-32° to 55°) (13.72 x 6.86 x 6.10) 

MS40-6043 35 (4) 24 3 0-10 VDC 90 95° -25° to 130° 5.4 x 2.7 x 2.4 

100 kΩ (-32° to 55°) (13.72 x 6.86 x 6.10) 

MF40-6083 70 (8) 24 5.6 Floating 120 90° 20° to 131° 6.8 x 3.7 x 3.4 

(-7° to 55°) (17.27 x 9.40 x 8.64) 

MS40-6083 70 (8) 24 5.6 0-10 VDC or 120 90° 20° to 131° 6.8 x 3.7 x 3.4 

0-20 mA with (-7° to 55°) (17.27 x 9.40 x 8.64) 

500Ω resistor 

MF40-6153 133 (15) 24 5.8 Floating 120 90° 20° to 131° 6.8 x 3.7 x 3.4 

(-7° to 55°) (17.27 x 9.40 x 8.64) 

MS40-6153 133 (15) 24 5.8 0-10 VDC or 120 90° 20° to 131° 6.8 x 3.7 x 3.4 

0-20 mA with (-7° to 55°) (17.27 x 9.40 x 8.64) 

500Ω resistor 

MF40-6343 300 (34) 24 7.0 Floating 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 

(-32° to 60°) (27.43 x 10.16 x 10.16) 

MS40-6343 300 (34) 24 7.1 2-10 VDC or 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 

4-20 mA (integral (-32° to 60°) (27.43 x 10.16 x 10.16) 

500Ω resistor)



SPRING RETURN 

MX40-7 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Invensys MX40-7 Series DuraDrive Direct Coupled, 

Spring Return Actuators accept two-position, floating, 

or proportional control signals from a DDC control system 

or a thermostat for HVAC damper applications. 

Typical applications include air handling unit dampers. 

They range in torque from 35-150 in-lb (4-17 Nm). 

FEATURES 

• Direct mount to round or square shaft 


• Overload protection on all models 

• Minimum 100,000 open/close operations 


Power supply 24, 120, or 230/240 VAC 

depending on model, 50/60 Hz 

Equipment rating Class 2 

Housing 


3 

4 

5 

6 

496 



SPRING RETURN 

MX40-7 SERIES 


1 

Line 

Voltage 

Control 

Signal 

4-20 mA 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

(–) 

(+) 

W 

500Ω 

To other 

actuators 

4 

5 

(grey) 

(black) 

(red) 

(yellow/black) 

Common 

Common 


MS40-7043/7073/7153 


Hot 

MS40- 

7043/7073/ 

7153 

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required. 

Actuators may be wired in parallel. All black actuator wires are connected to the transformer common, and all red wires are connected to the hot lead. 

2 

Power consumption must be observed. 

If the controller uses a full-wave power supply and does not provide isolated outputs, a separate transformer is required. 

Up to four actuators (mounted on separate shafts) may be connected in parallel. With four actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor, a 2% shift will be noted. 

Adjust if possible. 

A 500Ω resistor converts the 4-20 mA DC control signal to 2-10 VDC. 

AI 

To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch. Both actuators must be set to operate in the same direction. 

2 

4 

Line 

Voltage 


– 

2-10 VDC 

+ 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

unused 

(wire nut) 

2 

(white) 

(red) 

(black) 

(black) 

(black/blue) 


+ IN 

500Ω 

Common 

24H 

24G 

Ground 

MS40-7173 


MODEL TORQUE POWER POWER CONTROL TIMING MAX OPERATING DIMENSIONS 

in-lb (Nm) SUPPLY (VAC) USAGE (VA) SIGNAL (sec) STROKE TEMP °F (°C) L x W x H in (cm) 

MA40-7043 35 (4) 24 4.2 Two-position, SPST 50 95° -22° to 122° 6.8 x 4.0 x 3.5 

±20% or Triac (500 mA rated) (-30° to 50°) (17.2 x 10.1 x 8.8) 

MA40-7040 35 (4) 120 4.3 Two-position, SPST 50 95° -22° to 122° 6.8 x 4.0 x 3.5 

±10% or triac (500 mA rated) (-30° to 50°) (17.2 x 10.1 x 8.8) 


±20% (-30° to 50°) (17.2 x 10.1 x 8.8) 

MS40-7043 35 (4) 24 4.3 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA 130 95° -22° to 122° 6.8 x 4.0 x 3.5 

±20% with 500Ω resistor (-30° to 50°) (17.2 x 10.1 x 8.8) 

MA40-7073 60 (7) 24 4.6 Two-position, SPST or 80 95° -22° to 122° 10.5 x 4.0 x 3.5 

±20% triac (500 mA rated) (-30° to 50°) (26.6 x 10.1 x 8.8) 




±20% (-30° to 50°) (26.6 x 10.1 x 8.8) 








±20% (-30° to 50°) (26.6 x 10.1 x 8.8) 



MA40-7173 150 (17) 24 9.6 Two-wire, SPST 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 

±20% or triacs (-32° to 60°) (27.4 x 10.1 x 10.1) 

MA40-7170 150 (17) 120 11.4 Two-wire, SPST 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 

±10% or triacs (-32° to 60°) (27.4 x 10.1 x 10.1) 

MF40-7173 150 (17) 24 10.0 Floating, 2 SPST, or 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 


MS40-7173 150 (17) 24 9.4 2-10 VDC (80 kΩ) or 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 

±20% 4-20 mA (500Ω) (-32° to 60°) (27.4 x 10.1 x 10.1) 

MS40-7170 150 (17) 120 11.1 2-10 VDC (80 kΩ) or 145 93° -25° to 140° 10.8 x 4.0 x 4.0 

±10% 4-20 mA (500Ω) (-32° to 60°) (27.4 x 10.1 x 10.1) 

MS40- 

7173


BELIMO DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN 

LM, NM, AM, GM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Belimo LM, NM, AM, and GM Series direct-coupled actuators 

provide control of dampers and valves for non-spring 

return applications. They come in two-position, tri-state, proportional, 

and new Multi-function Technology ® (MFT) models. 

All actuators include a manual release mechanism for manual 

override. 

FEATURES 

• Non-spring return 35, 70, 160, 266 in-lb 

(4, 8, 18, 30 Nm) 


• Reversing switch 

• UL, CSA, and CE approved 


• ISO 9001 

• Plenum-rated housing and cable connections 


Rotation 95-degree switch reversible 

with switch 

Position indication 0- to 95-degree indicator 

Manual override Disengage button 

Stacking actuators AM and GM only 

Wiring 3' (0.91m) 18 AWG, plenum cable 

Ambient temp 

LM, AM, GM -22° to 122°F (-30° to 50°C) 

NM -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50°C) 


Voltage 

Power 

Torque in-lb (Nm) 

Signal * 

Feedback 

Run time (sec) 

Shaft length in (cm) 

Shaft dia in (cm) 

Weight lb (kg) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


Noise 

LM, NM


498 


BELIMO DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN 

LM, NM, AM, GM SERIES 

WIRING 

Line 

Voltage 


4-20 mA 

(–) 

Control signal (+) 

2-10 VDC (–) 

Feedback signal (+) 

500 

LM24SR, NM24SR 

4-20 mA, 2-10 VDC 

1 Blk Common 

2 Red + Hot 

3 Wht Input 

4 Grn 2-10V Output 

L R 

*Resistor is 500Ω, 1/4 watt 

ZG-R01, required for 4-20 mA, leave out for 2-10 VDC 

* 

24 VAC/DC 

1 2 3 

COM ~ Y 

COM ~ Y 

5 

U 

24 VAC/VDC 

(–) (+) 

1 2 3 

COM 

2-10 VDC Feedback 

Wire Number 

Slave 

Signal Common 

2-10 VDC Signal 

AM24SR, GM24SR 

Modulating (2-10 VDC) with slave actuator 

AM24, GM24, LM24, NM24 

Two-position 



LM24 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), tri-state/two-position 

LM24SR Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA (with ZG-R01*) proportional 

NM24 Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), tri-state/two-position 

NM24SR Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA (with ZG-R01*) proportional 

AM24 Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), tri-state/two-position 

AM24SR Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA (with ZG-R01*) proportional 

GM24 Non-spring return 266 in-lb (30 Nm), tri-state/two-position 

GM24SR Non-spring return 266 in-lb (30 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA (with ZG-R01*) proportional 

+ + 

Control 

Switch 

Wire Number 

Parallel connection of four motors is possible. Power consumption must be observed. 

24 VAC/VDC 

(–) (+) 

1 2 3 

+ + 

Multi-Function Technology ® (MFT) models are also available throughout the Belimo line. 

Add -MFT to the base model number and specify the control signal input or Belimo P-code. 

Example: LM24-MFT-P30001. Call Trane for special requirements. 

*Order separately. 

ZG-R01 4-20 mA resistor kit (500�) 

ZG-LMSA 1.75" shaft extension for 1/2" shafts 

ZG-NM3 Remote linkage kit, includes one actuator 

crank arm and two ball joints (5/16" pushrod 

and damper crank arm not included) 

ZG-NMSA-1 1/2" shaft adapter for shafts shorter than 1.5" 

ZG-H2 Actuator operator handle 

ZG-105 Universal-mount bracket for NM actuator 

MFT-H Control signal calibration tool for AM24SR 


COM 

Tri-state 

Control 

Wire Number 

AM24, GM24, LM24, NM24 

Tri-state 

24 VAC/VDC 

500 * 

1 2 3 

COM + Y 

AM24SR, GM24SR 

Modulating (4-20 mA) 

– 

4-20 mA 

+ 


Wire Number 

*Resistor is 500Ω, 1/4 watt ZG-R01 

ZG-GM2 Remote linkage kit, includes one actuator 

crank arm, one actuator mounting bracket, 

two ball joints 

ZDB-GM Angle rotation limiter 

ZG-AM Remote mounting kit, includes 1 actuator 

crank arm, one actuator mounting bracket, 

two ball joints (damper crank arm not included) 

PR-48 5/16" pushrod 48" long 

KH-8 Damper crank arm 

K4-1 3/4" to 1" jackshaft clamp for AM24 

5 

U

Voltage 

Power 


Signal* 


BELIMO DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 

SPRING RETURN 

TF, LF, NF, AF SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Belimo TF, LF, NF, and AF Series direct-coupled actuators 

provide control of dampers and valves for spring return 

applications. They come in two-position, tri-state, proportional, 

and new Multi-Function Technology ® (MFT) models. All include 

spring return to drive the damper or valve to a safe condition 

when power is lost. 

FEATURES 

• Spring return 18, 35, 60, 133 in-lb (2, 4, 7, 15 Nm) 

• Symmetrical, reversible rotation design 

• UL, CSA, and CE approved 

• ISO 9001 



Spring return Yes 

Rotation 95 degrees switch reversible 

Position indication 0- to 95-degree indicator 

Wiring 3' (0.91m), 18 AWG, plenum cable 



Feedback 

Run time (sec) 

Spring return 

Shaft length in (cm) 

Shaft dia in (cm) 

Weight lb (kg) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Length 

Width 

Height 

Height 

TF24 

6.3 (16.0) 

3.4 (8.6) 

3.0 (7.6) 

MODEL 

TF24 TF24SR TF24-3 LF24 LF24SR LF24-3 NF24 NF24SR AF24 AF24SR 

24 VAC/VDC 10%, 50/60 Hz, 120 VAC available 

5 VA 4 VA 4 VA 7 VA, 5W 5 VA, 2.5W 5 VA, 2.5W 8 VA, 5W 6 VA, 3W 10 VA, 5W 10 VA, 6W 

18 (2) 

35 (4) 60 (7) 133 (15) 

Two-pos 2-10 VDC 

4-20 mA 

with 500Ω 

Tri-state Two-pos 2-10 VDC 

4-20 mA 

with 500Ω 

Tri-state Two-pos 2-10 VDC 

4-20 mA 

with 500Ω 

Two-pos 2-10 VDC 

4-20 mA 

with 500Ω 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 2-10 VDC N/A N/A 2-10 VDC N/A 2-10 VDC 

75 95 95 40-75 150 150 75 150 150 150 


500 


BELIMO DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS 

SPRING RETURN 

TF, LF, NF, AF SERIES 

WIRING 

24 VAC/VDC 

(–) (+) 

1 2 3 

COM 

24 VAC/VDC* 

(–) (+) 

+ 

1 2 Wire Number 

Control 

Switch 

COM 

+ 

Parallel connection of several actuators is possible. 

Power consumption must be observed. 

*120 VAC models are wired similarly 

TF24, AF24, NF24, LF24 

Two-position 

Wire Number 

TF24SR, NF24SR, AF24SR, LF24SR 

2-10 VDC 

5 

Y1Y2U Signal Common 

2-10 VDC Signal 


Parallel connection of up to four motors is possible. 

Power consumption and polarity must be observed. 

24 VAC/VDC 

(–) (+) 

*A 500Ω resistor converts 

the 4-20 mA control signal 

to 2-10 VDC. (ZG-R01) 

24 VAC/VDC 

(–) (+) 



TF24 Spring return 18 in-lb (2 Nm), two-position 

TF120 Spring return 18 in-lb (2 Nm), 120 VAC two-position 

TF24SR Spring return 18 in-lb (2 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA proportional (ZG-R01-order separately) 

TF24-3 Spring return 18 in-lb (2 Nm), tri-state 

LF24 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position 

LF24SR Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA proportional (ZG-R01-order separately) 

LF120 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), 120 VAC two-position 

LF24-3 Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), tri-state 

NF24 Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position 

NF120 Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), 120 VAC two-position 

NF24SR Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), 2-10 VDC and 4-20 mA, proportional (ZG-R01-order separately) 

AF24 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position 

AF24SR Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), 2-10 VDC, 2-10V phasecut and 4-20 mA proportional (ZG-R01-order separately) 

AF120 Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), 120 VAC two-position 

Multi-Function Technology ® (MFT) models are also available throughout the Belimo line. 

Add -MFT to the base model number and specify the control signal inputs or Belimo P-code. 

Example: LM24-MFT-P30001. Call Trane for special requirements. 

1 2 

COM 

3 4 

+ + + 

Tri-state Contact or Triac Control 

Wire Number 

*For two-position control connect 2 and 3, switch 4 SPST 

L R 

For each direction of rotation left or right selection switch, 

arrows on actuator show rotation selected. 

TF24-3, LF24-3 

Tri-state 

+ 

* 

500 

COM Y1 

Y2U – 

+ 

1 2 3 5 Wire Number 

4 to 20 mA Signal 


Parallel connection of up to four motors is possible. 

Power consumption and polarity must be observed. 

TF24SR, NF24SR, AF24SR, LF24SR 

4-20 mA 

ZG-R01 4-20 mA resistor kit (500�) 


KH-AF Universal crank arm for shafts to 3/4" 

K4-1 1.05" shaft clamp, NF/AF 

ZS-150 Weather shield one-piece plastic, AF/NF/LF 

ZG-102 Twin actuator-mount bracket, NF/AF 

ZG-108 Mounting bracket, AF/NF 

ZG-AF Crank arm kit, AF/NF 

PR-48 5/16" push rod 48" long 

ZG-AF108 Mounting bracket and crank arm, AF/NF ZG-100 Universal mounting bracket, AF/NF 

ZG-LMSA Shaft adapter for 1/2" shafts, LM 

ZG-LF112 Floor bracket, LF 

KH-LF Crank arm, LF


HONEYWELL MODUTROL IV MOTORS 

M4000, M6000, M7000, M8000, M9000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Modutrol IV Motors replace all older generation 

Modutrol Motors for dampers and valves. Both drive and 

auxiliary shafts have equal torque ratings, allowing the 

auxiliary shaft to drive full torque loads. This provides a 

more flexible motor. For example, a spring return, normally 

closed motor will provide normally open operation 

simply by using the auxiliary shaft. The Modutrol IV 

Motor housing protects the motor from driving rain if the 

motor is mounted in the upright position. It may be 

MODELS 

NON-SPRING RETURN HIGH TORQUE SPRING RETURN MEDIUM TORQUE SPRING RETURN 

M6184 M7164 M7964 M9174 M4185 M7185 M7685 M9185 M9175 

M6194 M7284 M9164 M9184 M6285 M7285 M8185 M9186 

M6284 M9194 M6286 


Dead weight load on shaft 

Power or auxiliary end 200 lb (90.8 kg) max 

Max combined load 300 lb (136 kg) 

Ambient temp 

Max 150°F (66°C) @ 25% 

duty cycle 

Min -40°F (-40°C) 

mounted outdoors without a weather-proofing kit. 

Because of reduced power consumption, motor power 

needs can be satisfied with a 40 VA transformer 

FEATURES 

• Long life 

• NEMA 3 housing 

• Reduced power consumption 

Crankshaft 3/8" (0.95 cm) square, 

dual-ended shaft 

Approval UL listed, File #E4436, 

Guide #XAPX; 

CSA certified, General 

listed, File #LR1620, 

Guide #400-E 

501 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


502 


HONEYWELL MODUTROL IV MOTORS 

M4000, M6000, M7000, M8000, M9000 SERIES 

MODEL POWER 

SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

M6184A1015 

M6184A1023 

M6184F1014 

M6194B1011 

M6194E1006 

M4185A1001 

M4185B1009 

M8185A1002 

M8185D1006 

M9164A1021 

M9164C1001 

M9164C1068 

M9164D1009 

M9174B1043 

M9174B1027 

M9184D1013 

M9184F1000 

M9194E1000 

M7284A1004 

M7284A1012 

M7284C1000 

M7284C1018 

M7285A1003 

M7285A1011 

M7285C1009 

M7285C1017 

M7285Q1008† 

M7285Q1016† 

M9175D1006 

M9175D1014 

M9185A1018 

M9185A1026 

M9185C1006 

M9185E1019 

24 

120 

24 

24 

24 

120 

120 

24 

24 

120 

24 

120 

24 

120 

120 

24 

24 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

120 

24 

24 

24 

24 

24 

INPUT 

SIGNAL 

SPDT 

SPDT 

SPDT 

SPDT 

SPDT 


TIMING* 

(sec) 

30 

30 

30-60 

60 

120-240 

STROKE** 

(deg) 

90 

160 

90-160 

90 

90-160 

AUX 

SWITCHES 

TWO-POSITION REVERSING (FLOATING CONTROL) 

SPST 

SPST 

SPST 

SPST 

0 

0 

2 

1 

1 

TWO-POSITION SPRING RETURN 

60 

60 

60 

30-60 

160 

160 

160 

90-160 

0 

1 

0 

0 

NORMAL POSITION 

Mechanical Electrical 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

PROPORTIONAL REVERSING WITH NON-SPRING RETURN 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

60 

60 

30 

30-60 

60 

30 

30-60 

30-60 

120-240 

30 

60 

30 

60 

160 

160 

90 

90-160 

160 

90 

90-160 

90-160 

90-160 

90 

160 

90 

160 

PROPORTIONAL REVERSING WITH SPRING RETURN 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

4-20 mA 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

135Ω 

30 

60 

30 

60 

30 

60 

30-60 

30-60 

60 

30 

60 

30-60 

90 

160 

90 

160 

90 

160 

90-160 

90-160 

160 

90 

160 

90-160 

* Shorter timing refers to 90° stroke. 

** Use 90° stroke for dampers, 160° stroke for Honeywell valves. 

† Inputs have adjustable zero and span for split range applications. 

0 

2 

2 

0 

1 

0 

0 

2 

1 

0 

0 

2 

2 

0 

0 

2 

2 

2 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

1 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

NC 

TORQUE 

in-lb 

(Nm) 

Note: Not all Honeywell motor models are shown above. Consult Trane for a complete listing. 

150 (17) 

75 (8.5) 

150 (17) 

300 (34) 

300 (34) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

35 (4) 

75 (8.5) 

75 (8.5) 

150 (17) 

150 (17) 

300 (34) 

150 (17) 

150 (17) 

150 (17) 

150 (17) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

25 (3) 

25 (3) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7) 

60 (7)


JOHNSON CONTROLS ELECTRONIC MOTORS 

M100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The M100 Series universal motor actuators are interchangeable 

with previous Johnson Controls actuators 

and competitive actuators such as Honeywell and 

Invensys. Models are available with two-position/tri-state 

and proportional control. The M100 Series is available 

with a factory-installed electronic input board and a terminal 

board. These electronic boards are field changeable. 

This feature allows for quick and easy conversions 

to accept new controller output signals without having to 

replace the motor actuator. 

APPLICATION 

The M100 Series motor actuators are used to position 

dampers, valves, and related equipment in heating, ventilating, 

air conditioning, and industrial applications. 

FEATURES 

• Spring return 25, 50 in-lb (2.8, 5.6 Nm) 

• Non-spring return 35, 75, 150 in-lb (4, 8.5, 17 Nm) 

• Wide variety of controller input signals accepted 

through easy-to-change electronic circuit boards 

that are field replaceable for upgrading and/or 

repairs 

• Single-sized housing for all torques 

• Solid-state drive and travel limits 

• Die-cast aluminum housing with steel cover 

• Linkage connection to either end of the motor 



M110, M130 25 VA, 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 

M120, M140, M150 20 VA, 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 

Control signal input Two-position/tri-state, potentiometer 

(three-wire, 135� to 1000�), proportional 

0-24 VDC, 0-24 mA adjustable 

Cycle test 150,000 spring return 

200,000 non-spring return 

Ambient temp 

M110, M130 -35° to 125°F (-37.2° to 52°C) 

M120, M140, M150 -40° to 125°F (-40° to 52°C) 

Agency UL listed and CSA 

Housing NEMA 2 (IP52) die-cast natural 

aluminum, corrosion-resistant steel 

cover with dust gasket 

Dimensions 

Non-spring return 5.88"H x 5.63"W x 6.38"D 

(14.94 x 14.30 x 16.21 cm) 

Spring return 5.88"H x 5.63"W x 7.25"D 

(14.94 x 14.30 x 18.42 cm) 

M130 M150 

R81 

Torque Non-Spring Return Spring Return 

M110 — 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm) 

M120 35 in-lb (4 Nm) — 

M130 — 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm) 

M140 75 in-lb (8.5 Nm) — 

M150 150 in-lb (17 Nm) — 

Travel 160° adjustable (shipped @ 90° travel) 

Timing 38 sec @ 90°, 60 sec @ 160° 

M100 Auxiliary switch electrical ratings 

Motor ratings VAC 125 250 277 

AC full load amp 7.2 3.6 3.2 

AC locked rotor amp 43.2 21.6 19.2 

AC noninductive amp 11.0 8.3 7.2 

Pilot duty 50 VA, 24 VAC; 125 VA, 

120-300 VAC (Total connected load 

not to exceed 200 VA) 

503 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


SPDT Snap-Acting 

or Floating Controller 

504 

24 VAC 


JOHNSON CONTROLS ELECTRONIC MOTORS 

M100 SERIES 

WIRING 

CCW CW 

1 2 

3 

T1 T2 

M100A 

Motor 

Actuator 

Transformer 

Power 

Supply 

Typical wiring hookup showing an M100A 

two-position/tri-state motor actuator controlled 

by a SPDT snap-acting or floating control device 

Two-Position/Tri-state 

Dry Contact 

CODE 2 

A 

D 

G 

Potentiometer 

Controller 

1 

M100J 

Motor 

Actuator 

10 

9 

8 

X 

T1 

T2 

24 VAC 

Proportional Resistance 

135Ω to 1000Ω 

Power 

Supply 

Typical wiring hookup of a potentiometer controller 

wired to operate an M100J motor actuator 


VOLTAGE INPUT 

120 VAC 

240 VAC 

24 VAC 

Controller* 

Power 

Supply 

Transformer* 

(–) 

24 VAC 

T2 

T1 

500Ω Factory Installed 

Resistor Assembly** 

(+) 

10 

DC INPUT 

8 X 

Proportional Electronic 

VDC or mA 

M100G 

Motor 

Actuator 

Typical wiring hookup of a potentiometer 

controller wired to operate an M100G motor actuator 

* Controller must be powered by a separate transformer 

other than the transformer powering the motor 

actuator. 

**A 500Ω Resistor must be used when a DC milliampere 

controller is used. The resistor must be removed 

when a DC voltage controller is used. 


M110 Spring return 25 in-lb (2.8 Nm) 

M120 Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4.0 Nm) 

M130 Spring return 50 in-lb (5.6 Nm) 

M140 Non-spring return 75 in-lb (8.5 Nm) 

M150 Non-spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 

CODE 1 CONTROL INPUT 

A SPDT two-position or floating control input 

G Proportional action, 0-24 VDC/0-24 mA input, adjustable zero and span, clockwise 

and counter clockwise action; factory set at 4-20 mA, 500Ω impedance 

J Proportional action, 0-2 VDC, 0-24 VDC with fixed zero (6 VDC) and span (4 VDC), and 

three-wire 135Ω to 1000Ω potentiometer input, clockwise action on signal increase 

M Honeywell replacement board, proportional action, 135Ω to 1000Ω or 0.5-1.4 VDC input 

X Basic actuator (control input determined by adding R81 kits) 

M130 

CODE 3 

A 

B 

C 

SWITCH ACTION 

No auxiliary switch 

One SPDT auxiliary switch 

Two SPDT auxiliary switches 

J G A Example: M130-J-G-A Spring return 50 in-lb, VDC input, 

24 VAC power, no aux switches 


S91EJ-1 Auxiliary switch kit (2, SPDT) Y68 Cover-mounted transformer (call Trane) 

Y20DFC-2 Crank arm damper linkage set Y20 Valve/Damper linkages (call Trane) 

CVR83A 600R Rain cover kit (vertical mount only) BKT22A-602 Right angle mounting shelf 

R81BAA-1 Input card 135� to 1000� R81GAA-1 Input card volts and mA with span adjust


JOHNSON PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS 

D-3000, D-4000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Johnson Controls D-3000 Series Pneumatic 

Damper Actuators provide a wide range of torques to 

handle applications from VAV control dampers to inlet 

vanes. The D-3062 and D-3153 have models that are 

UL/ULC listed for smoke damper applications. 

The D-4000 Series actuators are constructed of a glassreinforced 

polymer with synthetic elastomer diaphragms. 

They include barb fittings for 5/32" or 1/4" O.D. poly tubing. 


Temp -20° to 150°F (-29° to 66°C) 

Air connection 1/4" poly tubing 

Max air 25 psig (172 kPa) 

Construction 

D-3000 Aluminum housing 

D-4000 Glass-reinforced polymer 

Diaphragm Synthetic elastomer 

MODEL 

D-3062-1 

D-3062-2 

D-3062-3 

D-4073-1 

D-4073-2 

D-4073-3 

D-4073-4 

D-4073-5 

D-4073-6 

D-3153-1 

D-3153-2 

D-3153-3 

D-3153-4 

D-3153-5 

D-3153-6 

D-3244-1 

D-3244-2 

D-3244-3 

D-3246-1 

D-3246-3 

NOMINAL 

SPRING 

RANGE 

psig 

3-7 

5-10 

8-13 

8-13 

8-13 

5-10 

8-13 

8-13 

5-10 

8-13 

8-13 

5-10 

8-13 

8-13 

5-10 

8-13 

8-13 

8-13 

8-13 

8-13 

kPa 

21-49 

35-70 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

35-70 

56-91 

56-91 

35-70 

56-91 

56-91 

35-70 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

56-91 

MAXIMUM ACTUATOR FORCE 

lbf 

85.8 

66 

46.2 

47 

47 

67 

47 

47 

67 

105 

105 

150 

105 

105 

105 

164 

328 

164 

164 

164 

Value at 20 psig 

(140 kPa) Supply 

Power Return 

N 

38.2 

294 

206 

209 

209 

298 

209 

209 

298 

467 

467 

667 

467 

467 

467 

729 

1458 

729 

729 

729 

lbf 

19.8 

33 

52.8 

54 

54 

34 

54 

54 

34 

120 

120 

75 

120 

120 

120 

187 

374 

187 

187 

187 

NOTES† 1 - Floor-mounted assembly included 

2 - Swivel-mounted assembly included 

3 - Universal-mounting bracket included 

4 - Auxiliary-mounting bracket included 

5 - D-3062-101 Mounting kit (Order separately) 


N 

80 

147 

235 

240 

240 

151 

240 

240 

151 

534 

534 

534 

534 

534 

534 

833 

1666 

833 

833 

833 

ESTIMATED 

TORQUE* 

@90° 

20 psig 

in-lb (Nm) 

20 (2.3) 

33 (3.7) 

46 (5.2) 

71 (8) 

71 (8) 

51 (5.8) 

71 (8) 

71 (8) 

51 (5.8) 

158 (17.9) 

158 (17.9) 

113 (12.8) 

158 (17.9) 

158 (17.9) 

158 (17.9) 

328 (37) 

656 (74.1) 

328 (37) 

492 (55.6) 

984 (55.6) 

MOUNTING 

NOTES† 

(see below) 

5 

5 

5 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

4 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

D-4073-1 

D-3062-3 with D-3062-101 

STROKE 

LENGTH 

in 

2 

2 

2 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

4 

4 

6 

6 

cm 

5.1 

5.1 

5.1 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

10.2 

10.2 

10.2 

15.2 

15.2 

EFFECTIVE 

DAMPER CONTROL 

Two-Pos. Prop. 

ft 

6.25 

6.25 

6.25 

11.7 

11.7 

11.7 

11.7 

11.7 

11.7 

25 

25 

25 

25 

25 

25 

50 

100 

50 

75 

75 

* Torque = crank arm length x force x 0.5 

(crank arm length = stroke length @ 90° rotation) 

2 2 

ft 

4 

4 

4 

6.75 

6.75 

6.75 

6.75 

6.75 

6.75 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

30 

60 

30 

45 

45 

Order the DS-3062-1 and DS-2153-1 for high temperature 

smoke damper operation. 

D-3153-4 

PILOT 

POSITIONER 

- 

- 

- 

Yes 

- 

- 

Yes 

- 

- 

Yes 

- 

- 

Yes 

- 

- 

Yes 

Yes (2 actuators) 

Yes 

- 

Yes (2 actuators) 

505 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


506 


INVENSYS PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS 

MK-3000, MK-7100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Invensys Proportional Pneumatic Damper 

Actuators provide control for 3-8, 5-10, and 8-13 psig 

(21-55, 34-69, and 55-90 kPa) control pressure ranges. 

The MK-3000 Series actuator is for small torque applications 

such as zone damper and VAV box applications. 

The MK-7100 Series actuator is for high torque 

applications such as air handler dampers. 


Construction 

Housing Die cast aluminum 

Diaphragm Beaded, molded neoprene 

Stroke 

MK-3000 3.5" (8.9 cm), adjusts 2" to 4" 

(5.1 to 10.2 cm) 

MK-7100 Nominal 4.5" (11.4 cm), adjusts 4" to 5" 

(10.2 to 12.7 cm) 

Start point Adjustable on most models ±1 psig 

Spring Retracts shaft on pressure loss 

Max air pressure 30 psig (207 kPa) 

Ambient temp -20° to 160°F(-29° to 71°C) 

Air connections 1/8" FNPT 

Mounting In any position 

Dimensions 

MK-3000 12.0"H x 5.87"W x 5.50"D 

(30.48 x 14.91 x 13.97 cm) 

MK-7100 17.63"H x 7.75"W x 7.63"D 

(44.78 x 19.69 x 19.38 cm) 

APPLICATION 

NOMINAL CONTROL DAMPER AREA 

Actuator Model 

MK-3101, MK-3111, MK-3121 

MK4-3121**, MK4-3821** 

MK-7101 

MK-7121* 

MK4-7121** 

PARALLEL BLADES ft 2 (m 2 ) OPPOSED BLADES ft 2 (m 2 ) 

Proportional 

11.6 (1.07) 

34.8 (3.23) 

37.5 (3.48) 

37.5 (3.48) 

112.5 (10.45) 

Two-Position 

34.8 (3.23) 

34.8 (3.23) 

112.5 (10.45) 

112.5 (10.45) 

112.5 (10.45) 

Proportional 

15 (1.39) 

45 (4.18) 

48.2 (4.48) 

48.2 (4.48) 

144.6 (10.65) 

Damper ratings are nominal and based on standard (not low leakage) dampers at 1 "W.C. static pressure and 2000 fpm (10 m/s) velocity. 

* MK-7121 requires 15 psig (103 kPa) to be available to actuator. **Requires 20 psig (140 kPa) be available to the actuator 

MODEL 

MK-3101 

MK-3111 

MK-3121 

MK4-3121* 

MK-7101 

MK-7121 

MK4-7121* 

NOMINAL 

OPERATING 

RANGE 

psig 

3-8 

5-10 

8-13 

8-13 

3-8 

8-13 

8-13 

kPa 

21-55 

34-69 

55-90 

55-90 

21-55 

55-90 

55-90 

RETURN STROKE 

Based on 

1.5 psig 

(10 kPa) 

Pressure 

to Actuator 

lb 

12 

28 

52 

52 

30 

130 

130 

N 

53 

125 

231 

231 

133 

578 

578 

MAXIMUM FORCE †† 

POWER STROKE 

15 psig 

15 psig 

20 psig 

(103 kPa) (103 kPa) (138 kPa) 

Supply 

Supply Supply Single 

Dual Pressure Single Pressure or Dual Pressure 

System 

System† System† 

lb 

44 

28 

4 

4 

110 

10 

10 

N 

196 

125 

18 

18 

489 

44.5 

44.5 

15 psig 

(103 kPa) 

Supply 

Dual Pressure 

System 

*Factory-installed positive positioner (AK-42309-500) start point adjustable 1 to 12 psig (7 to 83 kPa) with range adjustable 2 to 13 psig (14 to 90 kPa). 

**Nominal torque for actuators without positive positioner is based on 1.5 psig (10 kPa) pressure change at the actuator. 

†Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator. 

††Force and torque based on factory set stroke and starting pressure. 

lb 

56 

40 

16 

16 

140 

40 

40 

N 

249 

178 

71 

71 

623 

178 

178 

ACCESSORIES 


lb 

96 

80 

56 

56 

240 

140 

140 

MK-7100 

N 

427 

356 

249 

249 

1068 

623 

623 

in-lb 

21 

21 

7 

7 

67.5 

22.5 

22.5 

NOMINAL TORQUE** 

PROPORTIONAL CONTROL †† 

Nm 

2.37 

2.37 

0.79 

0.79 

7.62 

2.54 

2.54 

MK-3101 

AK-42309-500 Positive positioner and linkage 

AM-122 Linkage connector straight type 

AM-123 Damper clip 

PR-24 5/16" x 24" (0.79 x 50.80 cm) damper rod 

PR-48 5/16" x 48" (0.79 x 121.92 cm) damper rod 

BJ-809 Ball joint connector 

AM-161-3 Damper linkage kit 

AM-301 90° mounting bracket for pivot mounting 

AM-530 Crank arm for 1/2" (1.27 cm) dia damper shaft, 

holes for 3-1/2" and 4-1/2" stroke 

AM-533 Actuator shaft extension 

AM-542 Rod end connector for 5/16" (0.79 cm) rod 

AM-553 Actuator shaft extension 

TOOL-95-1 Pneumatic calibration tool kit 

15 psig 

(103 kPa) 

Supply 

Single Pressure 

System† 

in-lb 

21 

21 

21 

28 

67.5 

67.5 

90 

Nm 

2.37 

2.37 

2.37 

3.16 

7.62 

7.62 

10.17 

Two-Position 

45 (4.18) 

45 (4.18) 

144.6 (10.65) 

144.6 (10.65) 

144.6 (10.65) 

20 psig 

(103 kPa) 

Supply Single 

or Dual Pressure 

System† 

in-lb 

21 

21 

21 

91 

67.5 

67.5 

293 

Nm 

2.37 

2.37 

2.37 

10.28 

7.62 

7.62 

33.10


JOHNSON CONTROLS DAMPERS 

VD-1300 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Johnson Controls VD-1300 Series parallel/opposed 

blade HVAC control dampers are custom made to your 

size specifications. Damper frames are constructed of 

formed 13-gauge galvanized sheet metal mechanically 

joined with dual linkage concealed in the side channels to 

eliminate noise and friction. Compressible spring stainless-steel 

side seals and acetal or bronze bearings are 

also available. Dampers are available in Class I, II, and III 

leakage performance grades. 

FEATURES 

• Three-day construction standard 

• 24-hour fast track shipping available 

• Tested to over 100,000 cycles 

• Airfoil blade dampers available 

• Frames of galvanized sheet steel 

• Self-compensating, stainless-steel side seals 


• Blade rotation stops 

• Square blade pins for non-slip pivoting 

• Class I, II, and III leakage performance 


Frame 

Linkage 

Blade pins 

Bearings 

Drive shaft 


Leakage (see Table 1 above) 

Blade construction 

6" wide nominal 

Operating torque @ 

0.5" W.C. (100 fpm) 

1" W.C. (1000 fpm) 

3" W.C. (1500 fpm) 

13-gauge galvanized steel 

1/8" zinc-plated rolled steel 

3/8" square steel, zinc-plated 

Acetal (bronze optional) 

7.0"L x 0.5"D (17.78 x 1.27 cm) 

with holding clip 

VD-1310 

Class III 

Single 16-gauge 

galvanized steel 

3.25 in-lb 

4.25 in-lb 

7.5 in-lb 

Velocity/Pressure limits for specified performance 

Damper 24"W (60.96 cm) 4500 fpm @ 6" W.C. 

Damper 48"W (121.9 cm) 1500 fpm @ 3" W.C. 

TABLE 1. LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CLASSES cfm/ft 

Class 

1 4 8 12 

I 4 8 11 14 

II 10 20 28 35 

III* 40 80 112 140 

*Class III not recommended for fresh air intake locations 

2 

Static Pressure (" W.C.) 

Blade seals 

Side seals 

Ambient temp 

Hi temp option 

VD-1320 

Class II 

Double 22-gauge 

galvanized steel 

4.5 in-lb 

5.5 in-lb 

9.5 in-lb 

6000 fpm@ 8" W.C. 

2000 fpm @ 8" W.C. 

Santoprene (silicone option VD-1320) 

Self-adjusting stainless steel 

-40 to 200F (-40 to 93C) 

-40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) 

Requires bronze bearings and silicon seals 

VD-1330 

Class I 

1/16" airfoil 

extruded aluminum 

4.5 in-lb 

5.5 in-lb 

9.5 in-lb 

8000 fpm @ 10" W.C. 

4000 fpm @ 8" W.C. 

507 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


508 


JOHNSON CONTROLS DAMPERS 

VD-1300 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

Unit furnished approximately 1/4" (0.64 cm) undercut at 

factory for proper fit into duct. 

TABLE 2. DAMPER SECTION SIZES (1" increments) 

Single Section 

Width 8" to 48" (20.32 to 122 cm) 

Height 6" to 76" (15.24 to 193 cm) 

7" to 76" (15.24 to 193 cm) (VD-1330) 

Multi-Section 

Width 49" to 192" (124 to 488 cm) 

Height 6" to 228" (15.24 to 732 cm) 

7" to 228" (15.24 to 732 cm) (VD-1330) 

TABLE 3. STANDARD CONTROL DAMPERS 

Code Option Description 

E Exact whole inch size, no undercut 

F 1.5"L flange, entering side 

G 1.5"L flange, leaving side 

H 1.5"L flange, both sides 

J Field-installed jackshaft (must specify if 

needed, not automatically included with 

multi-section dampers) 

V PRODUCT FAMILY 

BLADE OPERATION O = Opposed 

DUAL LINKAGE P = Parallel 

BLADE TYPE A = Class I VD-1330 Airfoil design 

P = Class II VD-1320 Double Piece design 

V = Class III VD-1310 with Seals Single Piece design (not recommended for outside air) 

BEARING/SEAL TYPE E = Extended - Bronze/Santoprene 

H = High - Bronze/Silicone 

S = Standard - Acetal/Santoprene 

ACTUATOR N = None (Integral actuators available, special order, contact Kele) 

W W W WIDTH DIMENSIONS See Table 2 above for limitations (1" increments), use all 3 digits 

H H H HEIGHT DIMENSIONS See Table 2 above for limitations (1" increments), use all 3 digits 

OPTIONS (LIMIT TWO) See Table 3 above 

V O 

V S N W W W H H H Option Code Number 

in 

(cm) 

4 holes 0.19 (0.48) dia 

top and bottom channel 

3.1 

(7.9) 

Example: VOVSN-024-025 Opposed blade Class III damper 24" x 25", with standard bearings/seal. 

Note: The jackshaft components and dampers will be shipped as separate panels a maximum of 48"W and 76"H. 

The required jackshafts, coupling kits, and support bars must be field-assembled. 

Height 


Dimensions are from the outside edges of the damper frame. 

Width 

Air Flow 

Varies with 

damper height 

top and bottom 

3.1 

(7.9) 

2.8 

(7.2) 

3.1 

(7.9) 

Approximately 

6 (15.24) 

Holding Clip 

Drive 

Shaft 

included 

(DMPR-KC003) 

VD-1330 Class I Blade 

VD-1320 Class II Blade VD-1310 Class III Blade


JOHNSON CONTROLS SMOKE DAMPERS 

SD-1600 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Johnson Controls SD-1600 Series parallel/opposed 

blade smoke control dampers are custom made to your 

size specifications. Damper frames are constructed of 

formed 13-gauge galvanized sheet metal mechanically 

joined with a linkage concealed in the side channel. 

They also come with a factory-mounted electric or pneumatic 

actuator. Stainless steel compressible side seals 

and bronze high temperature bearings are standard. 

Dampers are available in Class I and II leakage performance 

per NFPA 90A. 

FEATURES 

• Electric or pneumatic actuators 

• Double-piece blade or airfoil blades available 

• 13-gauge frames of galvanized sheet steel 

• Three-day construction standard 

• Linkage housed in side channel of frame 

• UL-555S and CSA certified 

• Class I and II leakage performance 

• UL tested for 5000 electric and 100,000 pneumatic 

cycles 


Frame 

Dual linkage 

Blade pins 

Bearings 

Stroke time 

Actuators 

Leakage (see Table 1) 

Blade construction (6"W) 

Velocity (24"W) 

Velocity (48"W) 

Type 

E 

E 

P 

P 

Actuators 

S16 

S60 

DS3062-1 

DS3153 

13-gauge galvanized steel 

1/8" zinc-plated rolled steel 

3/8" square 

Bronze 

15 sec close, 20 sec open 

Electric or pneumatic, one per damper section 



16 (1.8) 

60 (6.8) 

85 (9.6) 

105 (12) 

SD-1620 

Class II 

Double 22-gauge galvanized steel 

6000 fpm @ 8" W.C. 

2000 fpm @ 4" W.C. 

Power source/control 

24 VAC or 120 VAC/70 VA 

24 VAC or 120 VAC/70 VA 

8-13 psig (55-90 kPa) 

8-13 psig (55-90 kPa) 

Blade seals 

Side seals 

Ambient temp 

Control 

Pneumatic 

Electric 

Agency listings 

P = Pneumatic E = Electric Note: A minimum of one actuator will be provided per damper section (no jack shafting). 


Call Trane for ordering information. 

TABLE 1. 

LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CLASSES cfm/ ft 2 

Class 

I 

II 

1 

4 

10 

Static Pressure ("W.C.) 

4 

8 

20 

SD-1630 

Class I 

1/16" airfoil extruded aluminum 

8000 fpm @ 10" W.C. 

4000 fpm @ 4" W.C. 

Damper size for single actuator 

2 5.5 ft , 28"W x 28"H (71 x 71 cm) 

2 16 ft , 48"W x 48"H (122 x 122 cm) 

28"W x 28"H (71 x 71 cm) 

48"W x 76"H (122 x 193 cm) 

8 

11 

28 

12 

14 

35 

Silicone 

Self-adjusting stainless steel 

-65 to 350F (-54 to 177C) 

Modulating or two-position 

Two-position 

UL-555S, file #R11172, CSA 

Temperature F (C) 

350 (177) 

350 (177) 

350 (177) 

350 (177) 

509 

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS


510 


RUSKIN DAMPERS 

RCD40, CD50 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Ruskin parallel/opposed blade HVAC control dampers are 

custom made to desired specifications. Damper frames are 

made of galvanized steel in a channel frame construction 

offering an equivalent 13-gauge metal strength. The RCD40 

Series has blades that are 6" wide and made of 16-gauge 

galvanized steel with synthetic bearings. The CD50 Series 

has aluminum blades with synthetic bearings 

RCD44 Basic control damper, approximately 4% leakage 

RCD45 Standard control damper, 1% leakage 

RCD46 Standard control damper, 0.5% leakage 

CD50 Aluminum frame and air foil damper, 

approximately 0.3% leakage 

CD50SF Aluminum air foil damper with steel frame 


Type Parallel or opposing blades 

Frame Equivalent 13-gauge galvanized 

(CD50 aluminum) 

Blades 6" galvanized steel for RCD 

6" aluminum for CD50 

Linkage Concealed in frame 

Blade pins 1/2" steel hex 


Bearings Synthetic 

Drive shaft 6.0"L x 0.5" dia (15.24 x 1.27 cm) 

Side seals Self-adjusting steel (RCD45, 46, CD50) 

Dimensions 

RCD40 5" x 5" (12.7 x 12.7 cm) min 

CD50 6" x 5" (15.24 x 12.7 cm) min 

max (see Individual Specifications below) 

5.0" (12.70 cm) thick 

RCD44 RCD45 RCD46 CD50SF/CD50 

Blades 16-gauge V-groove 16-gauge V-groove 16-gauge V-groove Aluminum air foil 

Jamb seals None Self-adjustable steel Self-adjustable steel Self-adjustable steel 

Blade seals None Foam PVC coated polyester Santoprene 

Leakage ≈4% 1% 0.5% ≈0.3% 

Ambient temp 

°F (°C) -40 to 240 -25 to 180 -25 to 180 -72 to 275 

(-40 to 116) (-32 to 83) (-32 to 83) (-58 to 135) 

Velocity in fpm 2000 @ 2.5" W.C. 2000@2.5" W.C. 2000 @ 2.5" W.C. 3000 @ 3.5" W.C. 

Damper size max Single 48 x 72 Single 48 x 72 Single 48 x 72 Single 60 x 72 

"W x "H (cm) (122 x 183), (122 x 183), (122 x 183), (152 x 183), 

multiple unlimited multiple unlimited multiple unlimited multiple unlimited 

Torque (in-lb/ft2) 2.5 5 7 7 

Options: 1 Flanges front or rear Flanges front or rear Flanges front or rear Flanges front or rear 

2 Thrust bearings Thrust bearings Thrust bearings Thrust bearings 


RCD-46 

Call Trane and indicate Model/Size/Type/Options for a custom quote. 

Sample: RCD46/48W x 48H/Parallel/Thrust bearings

CONTROL VALVES

PRODUCT 

See the NEW Kele KZ 

Series Zone Valve 

on page 511! 

SERVICES 

Our Production Shop 

assembles your valves and 

actuators! 



BALL VALVES 

B2, B3 Series — Belimo Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 

VB2, VB3 Series — Honeywell Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 

VG1000 Series — Johnson Controls Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 

BUTTERFLY VALVES 

KBV Series — Kele Stainless Steel Disc Butterfly Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 

GLOBE VALVES AND ACTUATORS 

Duradrive Series — Invensys Globe Valve Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 

ML Series — Honeywell Direct-Mount Valve Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 

NV Series — Belimo Direct-Mount Globe Valve Actuator, Non-Spring Return . .549 

NVF Series — Belimo Direct-Mount Globe Valve Actuator, Spring Return . . . . .547 

V-3000, MP-8000 Series — Johnson Controls Pneumatic Valve Actuators . . . .563 

VGF Series — Revolution Flanged Globe Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 

V5011, V5013 Series — Revolution Threaded Globe Valve Assemblies . . . . . .541 

VA-4233 Series — 

Johnson Controls Electric Valve Actuators - Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 

VA7000 Series — Johnson Controls Electric Direct-Mount Valve Actuators 

Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 

VB Series — Invensys Globe Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 

VG7000 Series — Johnson Controls Globe Valve/Actuator Assemblies . . . . . .559 

ZONE VALVES 

KVA-24-NO/NC — Kele Thermo-Electric Zone Valve Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 

KVC Series — Kele Electric Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 

KZ Series — Two-position Spring Return Zone Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 

S15, S60, A15 Series — MNG Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 

THERA Series — MNG Non-Electric Thermostatic Radiator Valve Actuators . .530 

V200, V300 Series —Spartan Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 

V5860 — Honeywell Modulating Zone Water Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 

VM Series — Erie Modulating Poptop Electric Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 

VT Series — Erie Two-Position Poptop Electric Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 

SOLENOID VALVES 

8210 SERIES — ASCO Red Hat Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 

8238 Series — ASCO S Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 

EVSI Series — Danfoss Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 

HIGH PERFORMANCE ROTARY VALVES 

V SERIES — Kele Max Cap Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 


DESCRIPTION 


KELE ZONE VALVES 

KZ SERIES 

Kele KZ Series Zone Valves are high quality, cost-competitive, 

two-position, spring return zone valves made for chilled water, 

hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications. The KZ 

Series zone valves feature, as standard, high temperature ratings 

and high close-off ratings. They are available in a full range 

of common sizes, connection types, and operating voltages. 

FEATURES 

• Competitively priced 

• High-quality, long-life design 

• High close-off pressures standard 

• Drop-in replacement for existing zone valves 

• Manual override lever 

• Front-mount, push-button actuator release 

• Anti-water hammer gear motion 

• Knockout for 1/2" conduit 

• Available assembled or separate valve/actuator 


PIPING 

A B Return 

A B Return 

A (NC) B (NO) 

AB 

Coil 

N.C. 

Actuator 

Two-Way Normally 

Closed Piping 


Supply 

Coil 

N.O. 

Actuator 

Two-Way Normally 

Open Piping 

Supply 

KZ Valve 

Body pattern Two- or three-way 

(mixing/diverting) 

Sizes 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 

Connections NPT, sweat (inverted flare, SAE 

flare, BSP optional) 

Max fluid pressure 300 psig (2067 kPa) 

Flow characteristic Quick opening 

Media Hot and chilled water, up to 50% 

glycol, 15 psig (103 kPa) steam 

Seat leakage Bubble tight 

Fluid temp limits 32° to 250°F (0° to 121°C) 

Construction 

Body Forged brass 


Seat Brass 

Paddle EPDM 

Closeoff psid (kPa) 

Cv = 1.0 75 (517) 

Cv = 2.5 50 (345) 

Cv = 3.5 30 (207) 

Cv = 5.0 25 (172) 

Cv = 7.5-8.0 20 (137) 

Coil 

N.C. 

Actuator 

Only 

KZ2-411-KZ1-21 KZ3-411 

Shown N.C. 

to the coil 

Note: Reverse Ports 

A & B for N.O. 

coil operation 

Three-Way Valve in 

Mixing Configuration 

Return 

Supply 

Coil 

N.C. 

Actuator 

Only 

A (NC) B (NO) 

AB 

Three-Way Valve in 

Diverting Configuration 

Shown N.C. 

to the coil 




Supply 

Return 

Actuator 

Power/Control 24 VAC or 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 

(208-230-277V optional) 

Power rating 7 VA 

Wiring connections 

24 VAC 18" (45.72 cm) pigtail leads, 

knockout for 1/2" conduit 

120-277 VAC 6" (15.2 cm) pigtail leads, knockout 

for 1/2" conduit 

Power stroke time 10 sec 

Spring return time 6 sec 

Valve compatibility Three-way valves require N.C. 

actuator 

Manual override N.C. actuators only 

End switch (optional) Closes when valve opens, 

5A @ 24-250 VAC, engaged with 


Construction Aluminum base, polycarbonate 

housing 

Max ambient temp 169°F (77°C), models without 

end switch 

104°F (40°C) models with end 

switch 


Approvals UL, ULC, CE, plenum rating 

511 

CONTROL VALVES


512 


KELE ZONE VALVES 

KZ SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3.4 (8.7) 

A 

B 

4 (10.2) 

C 

Two-way 

D 

Three-way 


KZ2 Two-way 

KZ3 Three-way (requires N.C. actuator) 

CONNECTION SIZE 

4 1/2" 

5 3/4" 

6 1" 

7 1-1/4" 

CONNECTION TYPE 

1 NPT 

3 Sweat 

CV RATING 

1 1.0 (1/2" only) 

2 2.5 (1/2", 3/4") 

3 3.5 (1/2", 3/4") 

5 5.0 (3/4" , 1") 

7 7.5-8.0 (3/4", 1", 1-1/4")* 

KZ2 5 1 2 

1.2 (3.0) 

2.4 (6.0) 

CONNECTION 

SIZE/TYPE A B C D E 

1/2" Sweat 1.3 (3.4) 2.6 (6.8) 0.9 (2.4) 1.3 (3.4) 3.5 (8.9) 

3/4" Sweat 1.4 (3.5) 2.75 (7.0) 0.9 (2.4) 1.5 (3.8) 3.5 (8.9) 

1" Sweat 1.7 (4.3) 3.4 (8.6) 0.9 (2.4) 1.6 (3.9) 3.7 (9.3) 

1 1/4" Sweat 1.8 (4.6) 3.6 (9.2) 0.9 (2.4) 1.7 (4.3) 3.7 (9.3) 

1/2" NPT 1.4 (3.6) 2.9 (7.2) 0.9 (2.4) 1.25 (3.2) 3.5 (8.9) 

3/4" NPT 1.6 (3.9) 3.7 (7.8) 0.9 (2.4) 1.25 (3.2) 3.7 (9.3) 

1" NPT 1.8 (4.6) 3.6 (9.2) 0.9 (2.4) 1.7 (4.3) 3.7 (9.3) 

Example: KZ2-512 Two-way, 3/4" NPT, Cv = 2.5 

Note: Above combinations are regularly stocked 

at Kele. Valves are also available with BSP, 

inverted flare, and SAE flare connections; 

consult Kele for pricing and availability. 

* 1-1/4" size only available with sweat connections. 

E 

WIRING 


VALVE ACTUATOR 

KZ1 2 2 

M 


KZ1 Two-position spring return 

FUNCTION 

1 N.C. with end switch 

2 N.C. without end switch 

3 N.O. with end switch 

4 N.O. without end switch 

VOLTAGE 

1 24 VAC 

2 120 VAC 

Thermostat 

(dry contact) 

(black) 

(black) 

(red) 

(red) 

AC 

Power 

Auxiliary Switch 

5A @ 24-250 VAC 

(applicable models) 

Example: KZ1-22 Normally closed, 

two-position, spring return, 

120 VAC 

Notes: Above combinations are regularly stocked 

at Kele. Actuators are also available in 208, 

230, 277 VAC, and in 24 VAC with terminals; 

consult Kele for pricing and availability. 

To order a valve/actuator assembly, append 

the valve number with the actuator number, 

separated by a dash. Example: KZ2-512-KZ1-22 

is a two-way, 3/4" NPT, Cv = 2.5 valve with a 

normally closed, two-position, spring return, 

120 VAC pre-assembled by Kele.


SPARTAN ZONE VALVES 

V200, V300 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Spartan V200 two-way and V300 three-way zone 

valve product line is a complete offering in zone valves 

with a wide variety of connection sizes and types, and a 

wide selection of actuators including electric, thermostatic, 

thermo-electric, and pneumatic. All the valve bodies 

are interchangeable with all the actuators for complete 

flexibility and easy selection. 

FEATURES 

• Valves are fully interchangeable with all actuators 

• Complete selection of NPT/Solder/Union fittings 

• Electric, thermostatic, thermo-electric and pneumatic 

actuators 

• Interchangeable cartridges for multiple Cvs 

• Full service from the top of the valve body 


VALVE BODIES 

Pipe sizes 1/2" to 1" 

(see Valve Selection Chart) 

Pipe connections NPT, solder, unions 


Media compatibility Hot or chilled water up to 50% 

glycol, 15 psig steam (not 1" valve) 

Cv range 

Construction 

0.15 to 5.5 


Body Low zinc bronze, alloy C84400 

Stem Burnished stainless steel 

Spring Stainless steel 

Seat Integral bronze 

Disc/plunger EPDM/brass 

Packing Double EPDM 

Packing life 1.5 million cycles; 3 million full stroke 

Leakage Zero-leakge soft seat 

Close-off rating See actuator specifications 

Pressure rating ANSI 250 (400 psi @ 150°F, 

250 psi @ 250°F) 

Temperature rating 

Stem travel 

250°F (120°C) max 

Two-way 5/32" (4.0 mm) 

Three-way 7/64" (2.8 mm) 

Valve action 

Flow pattern 

Spring return stem-up; stem-up-toopen 

(SUTO) and stem-up-to-close 

(SUTC) models 

Two-way Directional 

Three-way Diverting (or mixing if differential 

pressure � 5 psid) 

V241 w/MP5100 V245-34 

ME4840 OT-1100 

THERMOSTATIC ACTUATORS (OT-11, -21, -51) 

Power Liquid-filled bellows, self contained, 

modulating 

Action Temperature rise at sensor drives 

valve stem downward 

Application Hot water, low-pressure steam (use 

SUTO valve), chilled water (use 

SUTC valve) 

Connection Knurled mounting ring (M30 x 1.5) 

Sensor configurations Direct-mount, remote bulb, wallmount 

sensor/dial 

Close-off rating 30 psid max (all valves) 

THERMO-ELECTRIC ACTUATORS (ME-16, -17, -39) 

Operating voltage 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Power 

Ambient temperature 

2W holding, 5W running 

range 46° to 122°F (8°to 50°C) 

Stroke time < 5 min. 

Technology Sealed wax element with PTC 

(positive temperature coefficient) 

semiconductor. 

Action Normally-stem-up and normallystem-down 

models 

Wiring connections 40" (100 cm) leads 

Connection 

Control signal 

Knurled mounting ring (M30 x 1.5) 

ME-16, -17 Two-position; can also be pulsed 

ME-39 0-10 VDC modulating 

Approvals CE 


513 

CONTROL VALVES


514 




SPECIFICATIONS (continued) 

PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS (MP-51, -53) 

Size 4 sq. in. 

Spring range 3-6 psi and 7-11 psi models 

Max air pressure 60 psi 

Control Modulate or two-position 

Action Integral spring, return stem up 

Applications 

Construction 

Hot water, low-pressure steam (use 

SUTO valve), chilled water (use 

SUTC valve) 

Housing Zinc plated steel 

Diaphragm Neoprene 

Yoke Thermally isolated, glass-filled nylon 

composite 

Ambient temp range 41° to 122°F (5° to 50°C) 



TWO-POSITION ELECTRIC SR ACTUATORS (ME-44, -45) 

Operating voltage 

ME-4430, -4530 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

ME-4431, -4531 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Power 


8VA 

range 41° to 122°F (5° to 50°C) 

Stroke time 10 seconds max 

Applications Hot water, low-pressure steam 

(use SUTO valve), chilled water 

(use SUTC valve) 

Action Normally-stem-up and normallystem-down 

models 

Environmental rating IP20 (NEMA 1) 

Wiring connections 4" (10.2 cm) leads 


Approvals CE 


MODULATING ELECTRIC SR ACTUATORS (ME-46, -47, -48) 

Power supply 24 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz 

Power consumption 8 VA 


Proportional 

(ME-4840) 2-10 VDC or 10-2 VDC (jumper 

selectable), 4-20 mA with 500 �, 

1%, 1/2W resistor (field supplied) 

Floating (ME-4640) 0.1 to 60 seconds to drive in either 

direction, 30 steps end-to-end, triac 

or low energy/gold contacts 

PWM (ME-4740) 0.2 to 5 seconds, full stroke time 

5 seconds, 40 steps end-to-end 


Floating and PWM 2 K� or 12 mA RMS 

Proportional 200 K� 

Feedback output 1-5 VDC 

Feedback output 

impedance 100 K� 

Motor AC hysteresis brushless 


range 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Applications Hot water (200°F / 93°C max), 

chilled water (35°F / 2°C min) 

Action Fail stem up by valve spring 

Spring return time Approx. 25 seconds 


Wiring connections 32" plenum rated cable 

Approvals CE 



MODULATING ELECTRIC NSR ACTUATORS (ME-41, -42, -43) 

Power 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Power consumption 1 W 


Proportional 

(ME-4340) 2-10 VDC or 10-2 VDC (jumper 

selectable), 4-20 mA with 500 �, 

1%, 1/2W resistor (field supplied) 

Floating 

(ME-4140, -4142) 90 seconds full stroke, triac or low 

energy/gold contacts 

PWM (ME-4740) 0.2 to 5 seconds, full stroke time 

5 seconds 

Stroke time 

Proportional 

(ME-4340) 60 seconds 

Floating (ME-4140) 90 seconds (time-out feature) 

Floating (ME-4142) 120 seconds (no time-out) 

PWM (ME-4240) 


Floating and PWM 2 K� or 12 mA RMS 

Proportional 11 K� 

Feedback output 1-5 VDC 

Feedback output 

impedance 33 K� 

Motor AC synchronous reversible 


range 40°to 122°F (5°to 50°C) 

Applications Hot water, chilled water, low 

pressure steam 

Actuator force 32 lbf 

Action Fail last position 


Position indicator Top mount 

Wiring connections 30" plenum rated cable 

Approvals CE 

Life expectancy 1M strokes, 1.5M repositions 


Close-off rating 45 psid max (all valves)




DIMENSIONS - in (cm) 

MNPT 

Unions 

A 

A B C 

V222-12 4.3 (10.9) 2.4 (6.2) 1.1 (2.8) 

V222-34 5.2 (13.2) 2.4 (6.2) 1.1 (2.8) 

FNPT 

(V243) 

Solder 

(V245) 

C 

B 

A B C 

V243-12 2.3 (5.8) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) 

V243-34 2.7 (6.9) 2.2 (5.6) 1.1 (2.8) 

V243-10 3.9 (9.9) 2.8 (7.1) 1.8 (4.6) 

V245-12 2.2 (5.9) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) 

V245-34 2.3 (5.8) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) 

ELECTRIC ACTUATOR WIRING 

VAC 

Power 

COM 

H 

A 

Control 

Contact 

WHT 

GRN 

Two-position Spring Return Actuators 

(ME-4430, -4431, -4530, -4531) 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

COM 


H 

C 

B 

WHT 

RED 

BLK 

Floating Non-Spring Return Actuators 

(ME-4140, -4142) 

MNPT 

Unions 

A 

A B C 

V240-12 4.3 (10.9) 2.2 (5.7) 1.1 (2.8) 

V240-34 5.2 (13.2) 2.2 (5.7) 1.1 (2.8) 

MNPT 

Unions 

A B C D 

V320-12 4.3 3.2 1.1 2.1 

(10.8) (8.1) (2.8) (5.3) 

V320-34 5.2 3.7 1.1 2.6 

(13.2) (9.4) (2.8) (6.6) 

V345-10 6.2 4.6 1.5 3.1 

(15.8) (11.7) (4.0) (7.9) 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

COM 

H 


A 

1-5 VDC 

Feedback 

WHT 

BLK 

RED 

BRN 

GRN 

Floating Spring Return Actuator 

(ME-4640) 

C 

C 

D 

B 

B 

* Proportional: 2-10 VDC 

PWM: 0.02-5.0 seconds 

24VAC pulse 

** 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor 

if control signal to actuator 

is 4-20 mA 


FNPT C 

B 

A B C 

V241-12 3.3 (8.4) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) 

V241-34 3.8 (9.6) 2.2 (5.6) 1.1 (2.8) 

Solder* 

A 

A 

MNPT Union 

A B C D 

V325-12 3.0 2.6 1.1 1.5 

(7.7) (6.7) (2.8) (3.8) 

V325-34 2.2 2.2 1.1 1.1 

(5.7) (5.7) (2.8) (2.8) 

* V325-12 is the same valve body as V325-34 (3/4"); 

it has inserts for 1/2" solder. 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

COM 

H 

*Signal 

** 

Common 

1-5 VDC 

Feedback 

C 

D 

WHT 

BLK 

RED 

GRN 

* Proportional: 2-10 VDC 

PWM: 0.02-5.0 seconds 24 VAC pulse 

** 500Ω, 1/2W, 1% resistor if control signal to actuator is 4-20 mA 

PWM and Proportional Spring Return Actuators 

(ME-4740, -4840) 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

COM 

H 

*Signal 

Common 

** 

GRN 

B 

1 2 3 4 

WHT 

BLK 

RED 

Proportional and PWM Non-Spring Return Actuator 

(ME-4240, -4340) 

515 

CONTROL VALVES


516 




VALVE SELECTION CHART 

Flow Pattern 

Size/Connections 

1/2" FNPT 

Two-way Three-way 

3/4" FNPT 

1" FNPT 

V243 (SUTO) — 

1/2" solder 

3/4" solder 

V245 (SUTO) V325 

1/2" unions/MNPT 

3/4" unions/MNPT 

1" unions/MNPT 

1/2" FNPT x union/MNPT 

3/4" FNPT x union/MNPT 

V222 (SUTC) 

V240 (SUTO) 

V320 

V241 (SUTO) — 

Valve Model No. Cv Description 

V222-12-ER1.0 1.0 

V222-12-ER2.0 2.0 

1/2", 2W, SUTC, MNPT unions 

V222-12-ER3.0 3.0 

V222-34-ER1.0 1.0 

V222-34-ER2.0 2.0 

3/4", 2W, SUTC, MNPT unions 

V222-34-ER3.0 3.0 

V241-12-BC0.15 0.15 

V241-12-BC0.25 0.25 

V241-12-EP0.5 0.5 

V241-12-EP1.0 1 

V241-12-EP1.5 1.5 

1/2", 2W, SUTO, FNPT X MNPT union 

V241-12-EP2.0 2 

V241-12-EP2.5 2.5 

V241-12-EP3.0 3 

V241-12-EP3.5 3.5 

V241-34-EP1.0 1 

V241-34-EP1.5 1.5 

V241-34-EP2.0 2 

3/4", 2W, SUTO, FNPT X MNPT union 

V241-34-EP2.5 2.5 

V241-34-EP4.5 4.5 

V243-12-BC0.15 0.15 

V243-12-BC0.25 0.25 

V243-12-EP0.5 0.5 

V243-12-EP1.0 1 

V243-12-EP1.5 1.5 

1/2", 2W, SUTO, FNPT 

V243-12-EP2.0 2 

V243-12-EP2.5 2.5 

V243-12-EP3.0 3 

V243-12-EP3.5 3.5 

V243-34-EP1.0 1 

V243-34-EP1.5 1.5 

V243-34-EP2.0 2 

3/4", 2W, SUTO, FNPT 

V243-34-EP2.5 2.5 

V243-34-EP4.5 4.5 

V243-10-EB6.0 6 

V243-10-EB6.4 

V243-10-EB8.0 

6.4 

8 

1", 2W, SUTO, FNPT 

V243-10-EB9.0 9 

V245-12-BC0.15 0.15 

V245-12-BC0.25 

V245-12-EP0.5 

0.25 

0.5 

1/2", 2W, SUTO, solder 

V245-12-EP1.0 1 

V245-12-EP1.5 1.5 

V245-12-EP2.0 

V245-12-EP2.5 

2 

2.5 


V245-12-EP3.0 3 

V245-12-EP3.5 3.5 

BC0.15 Cart for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.15 

BC0.25 Cart for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.25 

EP0.5 Cart for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.5 







Fail Mode 

Control Fail-in-Place Spring Return 

ME-4430 (24V, fail up) 

Two-position electric — 

ME-4431 (115V, fail up) 

ME-4530 (24V, fail down) 

ME-4531 (115V, fail down) 

Floating electric 

ME-4140 (w/timeout) 

ME-4142 (w/timeout) 

ME-4640 (fail up) 

PWM electric ME-4240 ME-4740 (fail up) 

Proportional electric ME-4340 ME-4840 (fail up) 

Pneumatic — 

MP-5100 (3-6 psi, fail up) 

MP-5300 (8-13 psi, fail up) 

Two-position thermo-electric — 

ME-1601 (fail up) 

ME-1704 (fail down) 

Proportional thermo-electric — ME-3901 (fail down) 

Thermostatic 



EB6.0 Cart for 2W 1" SUTO; Cv = 6.0 




ED1.0 Cart for 3W; Cv = 1.0 



ACTUATOR SELECTION CHART 

OT-1100 (valve mt) 

OT-2100 (rem bulb) 

OT-5100 (wall mt) 

Valve Model No. Cv Description 

V245-34-EP1.0 1 

V245-34-EP1.5 1.5 

V245-34-EP2.0 

V245-34-EP2.5 

2 

2.5 


V245-34-EP3.0 3 

V245-34-EP3.5 3.5 

V320-12-ED1.0 1.0 

V320-12-ED2.0 2.0 

V320-12-ED3.0 3.0 

V320-12-ED3.5 3.5 

1/2", 3W, diverting valve, MNPT unions 

V320-34-ED1.0 1.0 

3/4", 3W, diverting valve, MNPT unions 

V320-34-ED2.0 2.0 

V320-34-ED3.0 3.0 

V320-34-ED3.5 3.5 

V345-10-ED5.5 5.5 1", 3W, diverting valve, MNPT unions 

V325-12-ED1.0 1.0 

V325-12-ED2.0 2.0 

1/2", 3W, diverting valve, solder 

V325-12-ED3.0 3.0 

(uses 3/4" 1/2" bushing) 

V325-12-ED3.5 3.5 

V325-34-ED1.0 1.0 

V325-34-ED2.0 

V325-34-ED3.0 

2.0 

3.0 

3/4", 3W, diverting valve, solder 

V325-34-ED3.5 3.5 

Actuator Model No. Description 

THERMO-ELECTRIC 

ME-1601 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem up 

ME-1704 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem down 

ME-3901 Proportional 0-10 VDC, SR, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem down 

ELECTRIC 

ME-4140 Floating, NSR, 24 VAC with timeout 

ME-4142 Floating, NSR, 24 VAC without timeout 

ME-4240 PWM 0.25-5 sec, NSR, 24 VAC 

ME-4340 Proportional 2-10 VDC, NSR, 24 VAC 

ME-4430 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, fail stem up 

ME-4431 Two-position SR, two-wire, 110 VAC, fail stem up 

ME-4530 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, fail stem down 

ME-4531 Two-position SR, two-wire, 110 VAC, fail stem down 

ME-4640 Floating, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up 

ME-4840 Proportional 2-10 VDC, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up 

ME-4740 PWM 0.25-5 sec, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up 

SELF-CONTAINED THERMOSTATIC 

OT-1100 Valve mount thermostatic top 40°-85°F (5°-30°C) 

OT-2100 2-1/2" capillary, remote bulb 40°-85°F (5°-30°C) 

OT-5100 6 -1/2" capillary, remote wall mount 40°-85°F (5°-30°C) 

OT-1200 Locking cover 

PNEUMATIC 

MP-5100 4 sq in actuator, modulating 3-6 psi spring, fail stem up 

MP-5300 4 sq in actuator, modulating 8-13 psi spring, fail stem up 


AV07 Cartridge tool, 3/4" and 1/2" hex 

AV-6112 1/2" union MNPT, for V320, 222 

AV-6134 3/4" union MNPT, for V320, 222 

AV-6312 1/2" union solder, for V320, 222 

AV-6334 3/4" union solder, for V320, 222 

—


KELE ELECTRIC ZONE VALVE 

KVC SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele KVC Series valve line includes two- and threeway, 

hot and chilled water control valves and fail-in-place 

or power-fail return electric actuators. The unique cartridge 

design enables the valve to be piped mixing or 

diverting for the three-way valve and either flow direction 

for the two-way valve. The actuator uses a unique twist-off 

mount for easy installation or servicing with two-position, 

floating, or proportional control signals. 

FEATURES 

• Three-way mixing and diverting 

• Two-way bidirectional flow 

• 1/2" to 1-1/4" NPT sizes 

• Linear flow characteristics 

• Easily replaceable seat cartridge 

• Twist-on low-power/long-life actuator 



• Fail-in-place or power-fail return 

• Selectable power fail return direction 


Valve 

Static pressure 300 psig (2069 kPa) 

Flow characteristics Linear 

Service Water, hot/chilled 

Close-off 60 psid (414 kPa) 

Fluid temp limits 34° to 203°F (1° to 95°C) 

Construction 

Body Bronze 


Seat Ryton® & Noryl® 

Note: Stem up on actuator removal 

Stem up to close on two-way valve 

CARTRIDGE BODY VALVE SIZE & CV 

MODEL NO. PATTERN 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 

VCZZ1100 3.2 4.7 6.6 7.1 

VCZZ1400 Two- 2.9 3.9 4.2 4.3 

VCZZ1500 Way 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 

VCZZ1600 1.3 1.5 1.5. 1.5 

VCZZ6100 Three-Way 3.8 6.6 8.7 8.7 

KVC 2100N66 valve with 

KVC 6936 actuator 

Actuator 

Power 24 VAC, 6 VA, 50/60 HZ 

Control signal Two-position, floating, or 2-10 VDC 

Stroke speed 6 sec two-position, 120 sec floating 

and proportional, 12 sec 

power-fail 

Position/Override White manual indicator lever 


noncondensing 

Mounting Twist lock with latch 

Connections 20 AWG, 39" (99 cm) cable 

Construction Noryl® & Ryton® plastic 

Agency listings UL and CSA listed, CE certified 

TABLE 1. KVC REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGES THREE-WAY VALVE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 

Note: 1000 Series cartridges fit all two-way bodies. 

6000 Series cartridges fit all three-way bodies. 

Cartridge tool included with each cartridge. 

Stem Up Stem Down 

A B 

A B 

AB 

AB 

Common Common 

Three-Way Mixing or Diverting 

517 

CONTROL VALVES


518 


KELE ELECTRIC ZONE VALVE 

KVC SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

24 VAC 

24 VAC 

3.6 

(9.0) 

Close 

Open 

Close 

Open 

A 

(brown) 

(black) 

(white) 

(gray) 

(orange) 

(blue) 

Power-Fail Close Port A 

(brown) 

(black) 

(white) 

(gray) 

(orange) 

Manual Control 

3.7 (9.4) 

(blue) 

Port 

KVC 6936 

Valve 

Actuator 

KVC 6936 

Valve 

Actuator 

Power-Fail Open Port A 

B 

D 

24 VAC 

2.7 

(6.8) 

2-10 VDC* 

Signal 

500Ω 

(brown) 

(white) 

(gray) 

(blue) 

(black) 

(orange) 

Power Fail Open Port A 

3.6 

(9.0) 

AB 

C 

39" 

Cable C 

Two-Way Assembly Three-Way Assembly 

KVC 7936 

Valve 

Actuator 

24 VAC 

(brown) 

(white) KVC 7936 

(gray) Valve 

500Ω (blue) 

Actuator 

2-10 VDC* (black) 

Signal (orange) 

*Use 500Ω resistor when signal is 4-20 mA 

Power Fail Close Port A 

Ext. Control 

24 VAC SPST 

Two-Position 

Ext. Control 

24 VAC SPDT 

Two-Position or 


KVCxxNxx 


Valve number from Table 2 above (select actuator below) 

twist-on mount actuator (one per valve required) shipped separately 

KVC8114 Two-position, three-wire SPST control, 6-sec timing actuator 

KVC2114 Two-position, three-wire SPDT control, 6-sec timing actuator 

KVC6934 Three-wire floating control, 120-sec timing actuator 

KVC6936 Three-wire floating control, 120-sec timing power-fail return actuator 

KVC7934 Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 120-sec timing actuator 

KVC7936 Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 120-sec timing power-fail return actuator 


VCZZxxx Replacement cartridge (see Table 1), including tool 

40007029-002 Cartridge tool only 

A 

Manual Control 

3.7 (9.4) 

Port 

B 

E 

2.7 

(6.8) 

39" 

Cable 

TABLE 2. SPECIFICATIONS & DIMENSIONS 

VALVE NUMBER SIZE PORT BODY Cv C in (cm) D in (cm) E in (cm) 

KVC2050N07 1/2" 2-way FNPT 0.7 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) — 

KVC2050N13 1/2" 2 way FNPT 1.3 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) — 

KVC2050N29 1/2" 2-way FNPT 2.9 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) — 

KVC2050N32 1/2" 2-way FNPT 3.2 3.87 (9.8) 4.37 (11.1) — 

KVC2075N47 3/4" 2-way FNPT 4.7 3.7 (9.4) 4.45 (11.3) — 

KVC2100N66 1" 2-way FNPT 6.6 3.7 (9.4) 4.45 (11.3) — 

KVC2125N71 1-1/4'' 2-way FNPT 7.1 4.3 (11.0) 4.6 (11.8) — 

KVC3050N37 1/2" 3-way FNPT 3.7 3.7 (9.4) — 5.34 (13.6) 

KVC3075N66 3/4" 3-way FNPT 6.6 3.7 (9.4) — 5.12 (13.0) 

KVC3100N87 1" 3-way FNPT 8.7 3.7 (9.4) — 5.35 (13.6) 

KVC3125N92 1-1/4'' 3-way FNPT 9.2 4.3 (11.0) — 5.6 (14.2) 

Port "A" Closed 

(brown) 

Open 

(black) 

(blue) 

Port "A" Closed 

(brown) 

Open 

(black) 

(blue) 

KVC 8114 

Valve 

Actuator 

KVC 6934 

KVC 2114 

Valve 

Actuator 

24 VAC 

2-10 VDC* 

Signal 

500Ω 

(brown) 

(black) 

KVC 7934 

Valve 

Actuator 

Proportional 

(blue) 

*Use 500Ω resistor when signal is 4-20 mA


ERIE TWO-POSITION POPTOP ELECTRIC VALVE 

VT SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Erie’s VT Series Two-Position PopTopTM Electric Valves offer 

a wide range of models to handle chilled water, hot water, 

and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications. PopTop valves 

feature removable actuators to aid in both installation and 

service. Valves are available in both normally open and normally 

closed configurations. 

FEATURES 

• Two- or three-way mixing and diverting configurations 

• Removable and replaceable actuator 

• Electric driven and spring return 

• Various Cv port sizes available 

• NPT, sweat, or inverted flare connections 

• 1/2" to 1" valves 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) VALVE BODY 

DIMENSIONS 

SIZE A B C D 

1/2" Sweat 1-5/16 (3.33) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-5/16 (8.41) 

3/4" Sweat 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-3/8 (8.57) 

1" Sweat 1-11/16 (4.29) 7/8 (2.22) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-5/8 (9.21) 

1/2" NPT 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-3/8 (8.57) 

3/4" NPT 1-11/16 (4.29) 7/8 (2.22) 1-7/16 (3.65) 3-5/8 (9.21) 

1" NPT 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-3/4 (4.45) 3-7/8 (9.84) 

Small inverted 

flare union 1-3/8 (3.49) 7/8 (2.22) 1-5/16 (3.33) 4-1/8 (10.48) 

ACTUATOR E F G H 


AG 2-3/8 (6.03) 3-11/16 (9.36) 2-3/8 (6.03) 1-1/4 (3.18) 

AH 2-5/8 (6.67) 3-7/8 (9.84) 2-3/8 (6.03) 1-1/4 (3.18) 

PopTop Valve 

Valve Two- or three-way 

Valve sizes 1/2", 3/4", 1" 

Operating pressure limits 300 psig (2067 kPa) 

Flow characteristic Quick opening 

Service Hot and chilled water,


520 


ERIE TWO-POSITION POPTOP ELECTRIC VALVE 

VT SERIES 

PIPING 

WIRING 

B 

Coil 

N.C. 

Actuator 

Two-Position 

Snap Acting 

Thermostat 

SPST 

V 

A Return 

B A 

Return 

T 

AC Power 

2 

2 

VALVE 


V Two-position PopTop electric valve 

TEMPERATURE 

T Water 

S Steam (must use high temperature actuator) 

CONFIGURATION 

2 Two-way 

3 Three-way 

CV SIZE 

2 1/2" 

3 3/4" 

4 1" 

CONNECTION 

1 Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 

2 NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 

4 Inverted flare - 3/4" only 

CV CAPACITY 

2-way 3-way Size 

1 1.0 1.5 1/2'' 

2 2.5 3.0 1/2'', 3/4'' 

3 3.5 4.0 1/2'', 3/4'' 

5 5.0 5.0 3/4'', 1'' 

7 7.5 7.5 3/4'' 

7 8.0 8.0 1'' 

Note: Valve and actuator 

shipped separately 

Heating or Cooling Valve 

1 

1 

Coil 

N.O. 

Actuator 

Example: VT2211 

*Inverted flare fittings not included 

with valve. They are field-supplied. 

Two-Position 

Snap Acting 

Thermostat 

SPDT 

B A 

C 

Supply 

Supply 

Supply 

Return 

Two-Way Normally Closed Piping Two-Way Normally Open Piping Three-Way Valve in Mixing Configuration Three-Way Valve in Diverting Configuration 

Coil 

N.C. 

Actuator 


680-243 

Changeover Thermostat 

Pipe-Mounted 

AC Power 

Heating and Cooling Valve 


A VT Series actuator 

CLOSEOFF 

G General operation 

H High performance 

VALVE OPERATION 

1 Normally closed* 

2 Normally open** 

TEMPERATURE 


TA155 Electronic two-position low/line voltage thermostat SPDT 

680-243-5 Changeover thermostat pipe mounted 

680-243-6 Changeover thermostat pipe mounted with conduit connection 

436-252 3/4" Flare-to-sweat fitting 

A 

G 

Shown N.C. 

to the coil 




1 

3 

4 

3 

Return 

ACTUATOR 

Normal 

Steam 

VOLTAGE 

A 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

D 208 VAC, 60 Hz 

T 277 VAC, 60 Hz 

U 230/220 VAC, 50 Hz 

LEADS 

02 18'' Leads 

OPTIONS 

A 

02 

B 

Coil 

C 

A 

0 

A 

N.C. 

Actuator 

0 

None 

End switch 

*Three-way valves use N.C. actuator only; reverse ports for N.O. 

**No manual override. 

Shown N.C. 

to the coil 




Example: AG13A020 

Supply


ERIE MODULATING POPTOP ELECTRIC VALVE 

VM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Erie’s VM Series Modulating PopTopTM Electric Valves 

offer a wide variety of Cv ranges and control signal 

options for hot and chilled water control. The PopTop 

valves have removable actuators with tri-state or proportional 

control and with either non-spring or spring return. 

Valves are available in both two- and three-way body patterns, 

1/2" through 1-1/4" sizes, and NPT or sweat pipe 

connections. An optional motor time out is available for 

controllers that do not automatically turn off their signal 

after the full stroke of the valve. 

FEATURES 

• Two- or three-way mixing configurations 

• Removable and replaceable actuator 

• Tri-state 24 VAC control 

• Proportional control (0-10 or 4-20 mA) 

• Various Cv port sizes available 

• NPT or sweat connections 


• Time out option (tri-state) 

• Non-spring or spring return 


PopTop Valve 

Valve Two- or three-way mixing 

Pipe size 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 


Flow characteristic Two-way equal percent, 

three-way linear 

Service Hot and chilled water, 


522 


ERIE MODULATING POPTOP ELECTRIC VALVE 

VM SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3.88 

(9.84) 

WIRING 

4.25 

(10.80) 

A A 

2.0 

(5.08) 

Floating Thermostat 


VM Modulating PopTop electric valve 

CONFIGURATION 

2 Two-way 

3 Three-way 

VALVE SIZE 

2 1/2" 

3 3/4" 

4 1" 

5 1-1/4" 

CONNECTION 

1 Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 

2 Threaded NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 

3 Threaded BSP - 1/2'', 3/4'', 1'' 

5 1/2'' SAE flare 

CV SIZE 

VM 

3.69 

(1.75) 

2 

4.50 

(11.43) 

B C 

2-Way 3-Way 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

AT Series 

Tri-State Valve 

2 

1.56 

(3.96) 

Spring Return 

2 

0.06 

(0.16) 

VALVE 

1 1.0 

2 2.0 

3 4.0 

7 8.0 

1 

1.19 

(3.02) 

1.56 

(3.96) 

CLOSE 

COM 

OPEN 

24 VAC 

Example: VM2221 

Required for spring 

return models 


1/2" 

1/2", 3/4" 

3/4", 1" 

1", 1-1/4" 

DIMENSIONS 

VALVE BODY SIZE A B C 

1/2" Sweat 1-5/16 (3.33) 15/16 (2.38) 1-5/16 (3.33) 

3/4" NPT 1-3/8 (3.49) 15/16 (2.38) 1-11/16 (3.33) 

1'' Sweat 1-11/16 (4.29) 15/16 (2.38) 1-11/16 (3.33) 

1-1/4" Sweat 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-13/16 (4.76) 

1/2'' NPT/BSP 1-2/8 (3.49) 15/16 (2.38) 1-5/16 (3.33) 

3/4" NPT/BSP 1-11/16 (4.29) 15/16 (2.38) 1-7/16 (3.65) 

1" NPT/BSP 1-7/8 (4.76) 1 (2.54) 1-11/16 (4.29) 

1/2" SAE Flare 4-9/16 (11.59) 5/16 (0.31) 2-1/4 (5.72) 

+ 

Modulating 

Signal 

- 

A 

4.25 

(10.80) 

3 .81 

(9.68) 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

A A 

2.0 

(5.08) 

AP Series 

Proportional Valve 


A VM Series actuator 

ACTUATOR 

0.19 

(0.48) 

2.25 

(5.72) 

3.06 

(7.77) 

B C 

2-Way 3-Way 

24V 

COM 

SIGNAL IN 

0.13 

(0.33) 

1.56 

(3.96) 

Non-Spring Return 

1.19 

(3.02) 

Signal Jumper J3 

CONTROL 

T Three-wire floating 

P Proportional, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

ACTION 

1 Normally closed spring return 

2 Normally open* spring return 

3 Non-spring return 

TEMPERATURE RATINGS 

3 General temperature only 

VOLTAGE 

A 24 VAC only 

LEADS 

00 No leads 

OPTIONS 

T Time-out for AT models 

0 No Options 

T 3 3 A 00 0 Example: AT33A000 

*Three-way valves are compatible only with N.C. actuators. 

For N.O. simply turn the valve around. 

BODY AND ACTUATOR REQUIREMENTS 

Spring Return Action Configurations 

Body Configuration 

Actuator Spring Return Mode 

V X 3 X X X 

A X 1 X X X X 

2 = Two-way 

1 = Normally Closed 

3 = Three-way 

2 = Normally Open 

If body configuration is 2, actuator return action can be 1 or 2. If actuator is 1, body configuration can be 2 or 3. 

If body configuration is 3, actuator return must be 1. 

If actuator return is 2, body configuration must be 2. 

0-10V 

0-5V 

5-10V 

4-20 mA 

1.63 

(4.14)

DESCRIPTION 


HONEYWELL MODULATING ZONE WATER VALVES 

V5860 SERIES 

The V5860 Series valve is designed specifically for use 

in small hot or chilled water applications. The V5860 

Series comes in two- and three-way configurations in 

1/2" and 3/4" FNPT. The wide selection of Cv’s offer precise 

equal percentage control, which is ideal for fan 

coils, baseboards, and small AHUs. The field-mounted, 

non-spring return screw-on actuators offer easy installation 

with modulated control using floating or proportional 

signals. 

FEATURES 

• Two- or three-way, 1/2" and 3/4" FNPT 

• Cv’s ranging from 0.19 to 4.9 

• Two-way equal percentage characteristics 

• Three-way linear characteristics 

• Floating or proportional control 

• Very quiet operation 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

B B 


A 

0.25 

(0.64) Stroke 

Zone Valve 

Valve styles Two- and three-way mixing 

Size 1/2"-3/4" FNPT standard, 

sweat also available 

Flow type Two-way, equal percentage; 

Three-way, linear 

Static pressure 230 psig (1586 kPa) 


Service Water (


524 


HONEYWELL MODULATING ZONE WATER VALVES 

V5860 SERIES 

VALVE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 

Install valve so that the actuator is 

mounted above the valve centerline. 

Install actuator by hand. 

Do not overtighten by using tools. 

With actuator removed 

stem is up 

Inlet Outlet 

MOUNTING WIRING 


VALVE (select actuator below) 

MODEL TWO-WAY SIZE Cv CLOSE OFF (psid) MODEL THREE-WAY SIZE Cv CLOSE OFF (psid) 

V5862A2005 1/2" 0.19 65 V5863A2004 1/2" 0.29 55 

V5862A2013 1/2" 0.29 65 V5863A2012 1/2" 0.47 55 

V5862A2021 1/2" 0.47 65 V5863A2020 1/2" 0.74 55 

V5862A2039 1/2" 0.74 65 V5863A2038 1/2" 1.20 22 

V5862A2047 1/2" 1.20 65 V5863A2046 1/2" 1.90 22 

V5862A2054 1/2" 1.90 65 V5863A1006 3/4" 2.90 26 

V5862A2062 3/4" 2.90 45 V5863A1014 3/4" 4.90 26 

V5862A2070 3/4" 4.90 45 

Closeoff pressure is based on M6410 and M7410 actuators below. 

ACTUATOR NON-SPRING RETURN (one per valve required) 

M6410A1029 Two-Position / Tri-State, 24 VAC Screw-On Mount Actuator 

M7410F1000 Proportional (0-10V / 2-10V / 4-20 mA with 500Ω Resistor), 24 VAC Screw-On Mount Actuator 

Note: Valves and actuators shipped separately 

24 VAC 

Port A 


SPDT 

Port B 

Two-Way Three-Way 

Closed (stem down) 

(white) 

Open (stem up) 

(blue) 

(red) 

M6410 

Valve 

Actuator 

0-10 VDC 

or 

2-10 VDC 

Signal 

24 VAC 

+ 

- 

500Ω * (blue) 

(red) 

M7410 

Valve 

Actuator 

Proportional 

(white) 

Left switch 

Right switch 

Stem down on a signal increase 

0-10 VDC signal 

Stem up on a signal increase 

2-10 VDC signal 

*4-20 mA signals with 500Ω resistor 

With actuator removed 

stem is up. B-AB open 

Port AB


HONEYWELL MNG ZONE VALVES 

S15, S60, A15 SERIES, MODEL 3W15US.5 

DESCRIPTION 

These series of high-performance and low-cost hot water, 

steam, and chilled water zone valves may be used with 

either the Kele thermo-electric or the MNG Thera Series 

non-electric actuator. The two-way valves feature a 15 

psid (103 kPa) closeoff pressure rating or a 60 psid (414 

kPa) close-off rating. The Model 3W15US.5 three-way 

valve has a closeoff pressure of 10 psid (69 kPa). All 

valves are suitable for low-pressure steam at 230°F and 

7 psig (48 kPa). 

FEATURES 

• Extremely sturdy construction, free of turbulence 

and flow noise emission 

• Special, soft-sealing EPDM disc used in millions of 

MNG valves with excellent results 

• Stainless steel stem sealed by a set of two O-rings 

• Complete body cartridge replaceable without 

drainage, using the special MNG service tool 

• Hot water, chilled water, 7 psig (48 kPa) steam 


Size 1/2" to 1" 

Type Two-way (1/2" three-way) 

Body Bronze 

Plug EPDM soft disk 

Seat Dual O-rings 

Override Manual operator cap 

Replaceable Body Cartridges 

#0009 Series 

Equipped with pressure-compensated 

sealing disc and can be exchanged 

without drainage by using the 

MNG service tool 


S15FPT1.0 S15FPT.5 

Application Hot water, chilled water, and 

7 psig (48 kPa) steam 

Connections FNPT, sweat, union with threaded or 

sweat tailpiece 

Media Water 36° to 277°F (2° to 130°C) 

Steam 230°F (110°C) / 7 psig (48 kPa) 

Pressure 230 psig (1586 kPa) 

MNG Service Tool Cartridge 

#0811 Series 

For replacement of 1/2" to 1" 

valve body cartridges without 

system drainage 

525 

CONTROL VALVES


526 


HONEYWELL MNG ZONE VALVES 

S15, S60, A15 SERIES, MODEL 3W15US.5 

DIMENSIONS 

Male Threaded Tailpiece 

H 

L2 

L1 

Female Pipe Thread 

S Series (S15U shown) 

Straight-through 

Two-way Valves 

STRAIGHT-THROUGH TWO-WAY VALVE 

Sweat Tailpieces 

L2 

Side View 

H 

NO 

Sweat Tailpieces 

NC 

L1 

Model 3W15US.5 

Three-way Diverting Valve 


C 

1.25 

(3.18) 

Top View 

Male Threaded Tailpiece 

H 

L2 

L1 

Female Pipe Thread 

A Series 

Vertical Angle Valve 

MODEL SIZE P MAX* Cv DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

BODY 

(in) psid (kPa) H L1 L2 TYPE 

S15S.5 1/2 15 (103) 1.9 3.5 (8.89) 2.63 (6.67) -- Sweat 

S15S.75 3/4 15 (103) 2.0 3.5 (8.89) 2.88 (7.30) -- 

S15U.5 1/2 15 (103) 1.9 3.81 (9.69) 2.63 (6.67) 3.75 (9.56) Threaded tailpiece 

S15U.75 3/4 15 (103) 3.0 3.81 (9.69) 2.88 (7.30) 4.19 (10.64) and union nut 

S15FPT.5 1/2 15 (103) 4.0 4.63 (11.75) 3.06 (7.78) -- Female 

S15FPT.75 3/4 15 (103) 6.4 4.63 (11.75) 3.31 (8.42) -- pipe thread 

S15FPT1.0 1 15 (103) 6.4 4.63 (11.75) 3.88 (9.84) -- 

S60FPT.5 1/2 60 (414) 4.0 4.63 (11.75) 3.06 (7.78) -- 

S60FPT.75 3/4 60 (414) 6.4 4.63 (11.75) 3.31 (8.42) -- 

S60FPT1.0 1 60 (414) 6.4 4.63 (11.75) 3.88 (9.84) -- 

*Values shown are for water service; P MAX for steam = 7 psid 

VERTICAL ANGLE VALVE 

A15U.5 1/2 15 (103) 2.6 3.63 (9.21) 1.1 (2.9) 2.3 (5.84) Threaded tailpiece 

A15U.75 3/4 15 (103) 2.6 3.63 (9.21) 1.13 (2.87) 2.6 (6.60) and union 

A15U1.0 1 15 (103) 8.1 4.5 (11.43) 1.6 (4.06) 2.9 (7.37) nut 

THREE-WAY DIVERTING VALVE 

3W15US.5 1/2 10 (70) 2.5 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 2.25 (5.72) Sweat tailpiece and 

union nut 


Replacement Body Cartridges Replacement MNG Service Tools 

#000915.010 Cartridge for 1/2" to 3/4" sweat and union valves #081101 Cartridge service tool for sweat and union 

#000901.020 Cartridge for 1/2", 3/4", and 1" FPT S15 valves valves 

#000905.020 Cartridge for 1/2", 3/4", and 1" FPT S60 valves #081102 Cartridge service tool for FPT valves


KELE THERMO-ELECTRIC ZONE VALVE ACTUATORS 

MODELS KVA-24-NO/NC 

DESCRIPTION 

Designed for use with MNG zone valves, the Kele 

Thermo-Electric Zone Valve Actuators are electric, 

two-position, spring return zone valve actuators. They utilize 

a gearless, thermo-electric, 24 VAC/VDC noiseless 

operator. Under continuous power, stroke start time is 

less than 10 seconds, and continuous travel from full 

open to closed is approximately three minutes. Made of 

corrosion-resistant components, the actuators have an 

outstanding product life. The Model KVA-24-NC is 

shipped in the normally closed position, and the KVA-24- 

NO is shipped in the normally open position. Valve position 

can by seen on the indicator located on the side of 

each actuator. 

FEATURES 

• Noiseless operation 

• Low power consumption 

• Position indicator 

• Low cost and compact size 

• Spring return 

• N.C. or N.O. operation 


Operating voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz ±20% 

Max current 3 VA (6 VA inrush) 

Operating current 125 mA (250 mA inrush) 

Full stroke time Approx. three min. (from cold start) 


Max differential 4.5-60 psig (31-44 kPa), 

pressure depending on valve 

Actuator stroke 0.18" (4.5 mm) 

Cover material Polycarbonate fiberglass rated to 

284°F (140°C), fire retardant and 

plastic 

Enclosure NEMA 3 (IP43) vertical 

Force 28 lbf (125N) 


in 

(cm) 

INSTALLATION 


KVA-24 installed on S15FPT.5 

DIMENSIONS 

24 VAC 

48.0 (21.92) 

To protect the actuators during new construction, valve bodies 

should be installed before the actuators are mounted. Do not 

mount the operator lower than horizontal unless a Model 371555 

shield is installed. The actuator should be firmly mounted and 

hand-tightened. To field modify from N.C. to N.O., remove the 

position indicator cover and red pointer. Then, remove and discard 

the black stem spacer. With a thin standard screwdriver, 

push firmly on the stem slot and twist counterclockwise 60 

degrees until the stem pops outward with the triple tabs in the 

three slots. Lastly, replace the position indicator and cover. To 

change from N.O. to N.C., the process is reversed. The black 

stem spacer is required and is provided in the accessory kit (sold 

separately). 


KVA-24-NC Kele thermo-electric zone valve actuator, 24V normally closed 

KVA-24-NO Kele thermo-electric zone valve actuator, 24V normally open 

For use with MNG zone valves 

brown 

blue 

1.75 

(4.45) 

KVA-24-NO 

Position 

Indicator 

ACCESSORIES 

371555 Inverted valve shield 

371477002 Replacement kit with N.C. insert, indication window, and tab indicator 

2.70 

(5.23) 

527 

CONTROL VALVES


DESCRIPTION 

528 


HONEYWELL MNG NON-ELECTRIC THERMOSTATIC RADIATOR VALVE ACTUATORS 

THERA SERIES 

The MNG Thera Series Non-Electric Thermostatic Radiator 

Valve Actuator, for use with any MNG zone valve, is a proportionally 

regulating device that functions without any external 

power supply. The liquid-filled sensing element continuously 

regulates the flow of hot water or steam by readjusting the spindle 

and clack automatically, thus proportionally regulating the 

valve. 

The regulating dial is provided with several numbers. Depending 

on the location of the installation, a constant room temperature 

of 68°F (20°C) is obtained when the dial is set on number 3. The 

setting range may be adjusted from 42° to 86°F (6° to 30°C). 

FEATURES 

• Liquid-filled sensing element with outstanding 

characteristics to comply with all strict requirements of 

DIN Standard no. 3841 

• Visual location of individual setting by memory clip 

• Limitation of the setting range possible 

• Used with all thermostatic MNG radiator valves 

• No power required 

• Low cost 

• Remote sensing up to 16' (4.9m) 

INSTALLATION 

305001 

209030 

Valve 

The position of the valve must be such that the self-contained thermostat will be mounted in a horizontal position; otherwise, a thermostat with 

remote sensor must be used. 

Thermostat 

1. Remove the protective cap or manual handwheel (on the dark gray ring) by turning it to the left. 

2. Place the Thera Series on its highest setting and keep the orientation point upwards. Fit the thermostat on the hexagonal head of the valve body. 

3. Fasten the tightening nut by hand, and tighten it. 

4. For thermostats with a remote sensing element, install the element at the end of the capillary tube in the freely circulating air beside or 

beneath the radiator. 


304506 (installed) 

208013 

WEL17A601R 


#305001 Liquid-filled self-contained operator 

#304505 2-1/2' (0.76m) liquid-filled remote sensor, includes operator 

#304506 6-1/2' (1.98m) liquid-filled remote sensor, includes operator 

#304507 16' (4.88m) liquid-filled remote sensor, includes operator 

#209030 6-1/2' (1.98m) liquid-filled remote sensor/dial 

#209031 16' (4.88m) liquid-filled remote sensor/dial 

#208013 6-1/2' (1.98m) remote bulb for immersion application, includes operator 

WEL17A601R Well for immersion bulb to #208013 

For use with any MNG valve listed in the Kele catalog


ASCO RED HAT SOLENOID VALVES 

8210 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ASCO 8210 Series Solenoid Valves are general service, 

pilot operated, two-way solenoid valves for liquid and 

air/inert gas applications. They are available in normally 

closed or normally open operation with coil voltages to meet 

any typical application. The 8210 Series come completely 

assembled with conduit connection and wire leads. 

FEATURES 

• Industry standard Red Hat II 

• Wide range of sizes and options 

• High flow rates, low pressure drop 

• Long service life 

• For hot or chilled water, air or inert gases 

• 1/2" NPT conduit connection standard 

• Lead wires standard 

• Not polarity sensitive 

APPLICATION 

The 8210 Series valves are general purpose and the standard 

models are suitable for most clean liquids (hot and 

chilled water, light oils), air and inert gas applications. 

They're ideal for boiler and cooling tower fill valves. There are 

also many options available for the 8210 Series such as 

explosionproof enclosures, manual operators, junction 

box/terminal block wiring connections, and different seal 

materials for more demanding media. 

Many solenoid valves are pilot-operated and require a differential 

pressure to open/close. Applications such as gravity 

drain for tanks or vacuum applications may not generate 

enough differential pressure across the valve for the valve to 

operate. In these applications, choose a direct-acting valve 

which is indicated in the ASCO catalog with a minimum differential 

pressure of zero. 

Other types of ASCO valves, also available through Trane, 

include valves for hot water/steam service, for cryogenic service, 

for intrinsicially safe applications, and pneumatic control 

systems. 


Coil 

Nominal ambient temp (standard) 

AC 32° to 125°F (0° to 52°C ) 

DC 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C ) 

Enclosures 

Standard Watertight (Nema IV), 18" leads 

Optional Explosionproof and watertight 

Voltages 24, 120, 240, 480 VAC / 60 Hz or 

110, 220 VAC / 50 Hz or 

6, 12, 24, 120, 240 VDC 

Approvals CSA certified, UL listed, as indicated 

in ASCO literature. Red Hat II 

meets applicable CE directives. 

WIRING 

RED 

RED 

GRN 

Control contact 

Power 

(coil voltage) 

Note: ASCO solenoid valves are not 

polarity sensitive. Grounding 

the green wire is strongly 

recommended. 

Valve body sizes 1/2" through 2" (standard) 

Operating pressure diff (model-specific) 

Max 125-150 psid (862-1034 kPa) typ. 

Min 5 psid (35 kPa) typ. 

Service Hot or chilled water, air or inert 

gases, light oils 

Max water temp 180°F (82°C) typical, varies for VAC 

coils and VDC coils 

Body material Brass standard, 304/316 stainless 

also available 

Seals and discs NBR or PTFE (standard) 

529 

CONTROL VALVES


530 


ASCO RED HAT SOLENOID VALVES 

8210 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS - INCHES (CM) 

1/2 NPT 

L 

NPT, 

BOTH ENDS 

W 

P 

H 


MODEL H L P W 

8210G2 3-13/32 (8.6) 2-3/4 (7.0) 2-27/32 (7.2) 2-5/16 (5.9) 

8210G9 3-5/8 (9.2) 2-13/16 (7.1) 3 (7.6) 2-5/16 (5.9) 

8210G4 5-5/8 (14.3) 3-3/4 (9.5) 4 (10.2) 2-15/16 (7.5) 

8210G8 5-5/8 (14.3) 3-21/32 (9.3) 4 (10.2) 3-3/8 (8.6) 

8210G22 6-1/8 (15.6) 4-3/8 (11.1) 4-5/32 (10.6) 3-3/4 (9.5) 

8210G100 7-5/16 (18.6) 5-1/16 (12.9) 4-9/16 (11.6) 4-11/16 (11.9) 

8210G34 4-11/32 (11.0) 2-3/4 (7.0) 3-25/32 (9.6) 2-9/32 (5.8) 

8210G35 4-9/16 (11.6) 2-13/16 (7.1) 3-15/16 (10.0) 2-9/32 (5.8) 

8210G14 6-17/32 (16.6) 3-21/32 (9.3) 4-29/32 (12.5) 3-3/8 (8.6) 

8210G18 6-17/32 (16.6) 3-21/32 (9.3) 4-29/32 (12.5) 3-3/8 (8.6) 

8210G32 7-1/32 (17.9) 4-3/8 (11.1) 5-1/16 (12.9) 3-3/4 (9.5) 

8210G103 8-7/32 (20.9) 5-1/16 (12.9) 5-15/32 (13.9) 4-11/16 (11.9) 

Note: These models are normally in stock at Trane; refer to ASCO 

catalog for complete information and non-stocked models. 

Model Description 

8210G2-24/60 1/2” NPT solenoid valve, NC, 24 VAC coil 




8210G4-24/60 1” NPT solenoid valve, NC, 24 VAC coil 


8210G8-24/60 1-1/4” NPT solenoid valve, NC, 24 VAC coil 






8210G34-24/60 1/2” NPT solenoid valve, NO, 24 VAC coil 




8210G14-24/60 1” NPT solenoid valve, NO, 24 VAC coil 


8210G18-24/60 1-1/4” NPT solenoid valve, NO, 24 VAC coil 






Note: Many other models, sizes, and configurations are available. All other ASCO products are available through Trane.


ASCO S SOLENOID VALVES 

8238 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ASCO 8238 Series solenoid valves are compact, general-service, 

pilot-operated, two-way solenoid valves for 

water, light oil, and air/inert gas applications. They are 

designed specifically for the competitive commercial market 

and are available in normally closed or normally open 

models with coil voltages to meet most typical applications. 

The 8238 Series valves come assembled with a 

DIN connector that has wiring terminals and a 1/2" NPT 

conduit connection. 

FEATURES 

• Wide range of valve sizes and operating voltages 

• For hot or chilled water, air, inert gases, light oil 

• DIN connector with 1/2" NPT conduit connection 

• NEMA 4 environmental rating 

• DC voltage coils available 

• Long service life 


COIL 

Nominal ambient temp 15°F to 140°F (-9°C to 60°C ) 

Enclosure Encapsulated clip-on coil with 

DIN spades, includes DIN 

connector with 1/2" NPT 

conduit connection and gasket 

for NEMA 4 rating 

Voltages 

Standard 24, 120 VAC / 60 Hz 

Optional 240 VAC / 60 Hz or 110, 

230 VAC / 50 Hz or 12, 24 VDC 

Wattage 

1/2"-1" valves 6W (AC or DC coils) 

1-1/4"-2" valves 9.2W (AC or DC coils) 

Approvals UR Canada/US, CE 

WPSC8238S40524 

VALVE BODY 

Sizes 1/2" through 2" (standard) 

Orifice Size (Cv) 

1/2" N.C. valve 9/16" (Cv = 4.45) 

1/2" N.O. valve 7/16" (Cv = 2.46) 

3/4" valves 11/16" (Cv = 5.85) 

1" valves 15/16" (Cv = 12.9) 

1-1/4" valves 1 1/4" (Cv = 17.5) 

1-1/2" valves 1 3/4" (Cv = 31.5) 

2" valves 1 3/4" (Cv = 39.7) 

Max pressure diff 

1/2" N.C. valve 230 psid (1586 kPa) 

1/2" N.O. valve 175 psid (1207 kPa) 

3/4" - 1" valves 175 psid (1207 kPa) 

1-1/4" - 2" valves 145 psid (1000 kPa) 

Min pressure diff 

1/2" - 1" valves 5 psid (34 kPa) 

1-1/4" - 2" valves 7 psid (48 kPa) 

Service Clean hot or chilled water, air 

or inert gases, light oils 

Max media temp 195°F (91°C) 

Body material Brass 

Seals and discs NBR 

Core, Tube, Plugnut Stainless steel 

Springs Stainless steel 

Shading coil Copper 

531 

CONTROL VALVES


532 


ASCO S SOLENOID VALVES 

8238 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS - in (cm) 

WIRING 

1 2 

B 

F 

G I 

Control 

Contact 

Voltage 

E 

H 

Flathead screwdriver 

Valve Model Number Description 

WPSC8238S40524 1/2" NPT, N.C., 24 VAC / 60 Hz coil 




WPSC8238S41024 1" NPT, N.C., 24 VAC / 60 Hz coil 


WPSC8238S41124 1-1/4" NPT, N.C., 24 VAC / 60 Hz coil 






Base Model No. B E F G H I 

WPSC8238S405 1.3 (3.4) 2.9 (7.3) 3.4 (8.7) 2.6 (6.6) 1.0 (2.5) 1.6 (4.0) 

WPSC8238S408 1.3 (3.4) 3.1 (8.0) 3.8 (9.6) 3.1 (7.9) 1.0 (2.5) 1.6 (4.0) 

WPSC8238S410 1.3 (3.4) 3.7 (9.3) 4.5 (11.4) 4.1 (10.5) 1.0 (2.5) 2.8 (7.1) 

WPSC8238S411 1.7 (4.3) 4.3 (10.9) 5.3 (13.5) 4.5 (11.3) 1.3 (3.2) 3.2 (8.1) 

WPSC8238S412 1.7 (4.3) 4.4 (11.2) 5.6 (14.2) 5.5 (14.0) 1.3 (3.2) 4.3 (11.0) 

WPSC8238S413 1.7 (4.3) 4.6 (11.7) 6.0 (15.3) 6.2 (15.7) 1.3 (3.2) 4.3 (11.0) 

WPSC8238S415 1.3 (3.4) 3.2 (8.0) 3.7 (9.3) 2.6 (6.6) 1.0 (2.5) 1.6 (4.0) 

WPSC8238S416 1.3 (3.4) 3.4 (8.6) 4.0 (10.3) 3.1 (7.9) 1.0 (2.5) 1.6 (4.0) 

WPSC8238S417 1.3 (3.4) 3.9 (10.0) 4.8 (12.1) 4.1 (10.5) 1.0 (2.5) 2.8 (7.1) 

WPSC8238S418 1.7 (4.3) 4.3 (10.9) 5.3 (13.5) 4.5 (11.3) 1.3 (3.2) 3.2 (8.1) 

WPSC8238S419 1.7 (4.3) 4.4 (11.2) 5.6 (14.2) 5.5 (14.0) 1.3 (3.2) 4.3 (11.0) 

WPSC8238S420 1.7 (4.3) 4.6 (11.7) 6.0 (15.3) 6.2 (15.7) 1.3 (3.2) 4.3 (11.0) 

1 

2 



Note: The coil can rotate to any desirable 

direction. 

Valve Model Number Description 

WPSC8238S41524 1/2" NPT, N.O., 24 VAC / 60 Hz coil 




WPSC8238S41724 1" NPT, N.O., 24 VAC / 60 Hz coil 


WPSC8238S41824 1-1/4" NPT, N.O., 24 VAC / 60 Hz coil 





WPSC8238S420120 2" NPT, N.O., 120 VAC / 60 Hz coil


DANFOSS SOLENOID VALVES 

EVSI SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Danfoss EVSI Series Solenoid Valves are two-way, twoposition 

valves for clean water or low pressure steam 

applications. They are available normally closed or normally 

open. EVSI Series valves are pilot-operated and 

designed for non-water hammer operation. They come 

completely assembled with coil and are UL recognized 

and CSA listed. The coils also include a gasketed conduit 

connector for NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating. 

FEATURES 

• Anti-water hammer design 

• 1/2" to 2" NPT connections 

• For hot or chilled water and low pressure steam 

• Fully encapsulated molded coils 

• 24, 120, or 240 VAC coil voltages 

• 1/2" threaded conduit connection 

• Screw terminals for wiring 

• NEMA 4 (IP56) environmental rating 

• Modular conduit connection for easy installation 

• Unique snap-on coil, no tools required 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

L 


H 

H1 

Valve 

Max pressure 

1/2", 3/4" 225 psig (1550 kPa) 

1" to 2" 180 psig (1240 kPa) 

Differential pressure 

Max 142 psid (980 kPa) 

Min 4.3 psid (30 kPa) 

Service Clean hot or chilled water, 

glycol, steam (�15 psig) 

Fluid temp limits -22° to 248°F (-30° to 120°C) 

Body material Brass 

Gasket material EPDM 

B 

EVSI-20-NC-24 

TYPE L 

in (cm) 

B 

in (cm) 

H1 in (cm) 

H* 

in (cm) 

Weight w/o coil 

lbs (kg) 

EVSI 15 3.25 (8.3) 2.1 (5.2) 0.6 (1.5) 3.7 (9.4) 1.8 (0.80) 

EVSI 18 3.5 (9.0) 2.2 (5.6) 0.7 (1.8) 3.25 (8.3) 1.4 (0.65) 

EVSI 20 3.7 (9.4) 2.25 (5.8) 0.7 (1.8) 3.9 (9.8) 2.2 (1.0) 

EVSI 22 3.5 (9.0) 2.5(6.4) 0.9 (2.3) 3.6 (9.2) 2.1 (0.95) 

EVSI 25 4.6 (11.6) 2.75 (7.0) 0.9 (2.2) 4.25 (10.8) 3.1 (1.4) 

EVSI 32 4.8 (12.2) 3.25 (8.2) 0.7 (2.7) 4.5 (11.5) 4.4 (2.0) 

EVSI 40 5.2 (13.2) 3.75 (9.5) 1.25 (3.2) 4.9 (12.4) 7.1 (3.2) 

EVSI 50 6.4 (16.2) 4.4 (11.3) 1.4 (3.7) 5.1 (13.0) 9.6 (4.3) 

*For normally open valves + 3/16" (0.5 cm). 

Coil 

Power 24, 120, or 240 VAC, 

50/60 Hz 14W 

Environmental rating NEMA 4 (IP65) with 

conduit connection 


Wiring connections Screw terminals 

Wire size 16-18 AWG 

Agency listings UL recognized component; 

CSA listed 

Life expectancy Min 800,000 cycles 


(5.7 x 4.6 x 6.1 cm) 

533 

CONTROL VALVES


534 


DANFOSS SOLENOID VALVES 

EVSI SERIES 

WIRING 

Flathead 

Screwdriver 

1 

1 

2 

2 


EVSI Solenoid valve 

SIZE (NPT) 

15 1/2", Cv = 4.6, opening time 0.04 sec, closing time .35 sec 

20 3/4", Cv = 9.3, opening time 0.04 sec, closing time 1.0 sec 

25 1", Cv = 12.3, opening time 0.30 sec, closing time 1.0 sec 

32 1-1/4", Cv = 21.0, opening time 1.0 sec, closing time 2.5 sec 

40 1-1/2", Cv = 28.0, opening time 1.5 sec, closing time 4.0 sec 

50 2", Cv = 46.7, opening time 5.0 sec, closing time 10.0 sec 

NORMAL MODE 

NC Normally closed 

NO Normally open 

COIL VOLTAGE 

24 

120 

240 

EVSI 15 NC 24 

Control 

Contact 



24 VAC, 60 Hz 

120 VAC, 60 Hz 

240 VAC, 60 Hz 

24,120, 

or 240 VAC 

Example: EVSI-15-NC-24 Solenoid valve with 1/2'' NPT, normally closed, and 24 VAC coil 


EVSI-MOM Solenoid valve manual override magnet 

Note: The coil can rotate to any desirable 

direction, and the conduit connector 

can be oriented up, down, or to 

either side.


HONEYWELL BALL VALVES 

VB2, VB3 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The VB2 and VB3 Series are Honeywell’s characterized 

flow, low-torque, two- and three-way ball valves. They are 

designed to provide C v ratings that closely match industry 

standard globe valves and have equal percentage flow 

characteristics. A single-style bracket maximizes simplicity 

and flexibility in mounting spring or non-spring return 

actuators. The valve bodies are 1/2" to 2" NPT sizes and 

use low-torque, low-cost actuators. 

FEATURES 

• Easy to select model numbers 

• Parabolic flow insert constructed into the ball 

• C v ratings similar to globe valves 

• Three-way body pattern similar to globe valves 

• Low-torque 

• Common mounting bracket 

• Removable manual override handle 

• Flexible bracket orientation 

• Plenum rated 

• Available with or without actuator 


Size 1/2" to 2" FNPT 

Max pressure rating 360 psig (2482 kPa) @ 

250°F (121°C) 

Medium compatibility Hot or chilled water, glycol 

up to 50% solution 

Medium temp range -22° to 250°F (-30° to 

121°C), not rated for steam 

Close-off pressure 

Two-way 1/2", 3/4" 130 psid 

Two-way 1" to 2" 100 psid 

Three-way 1/2" to 1" 50 psid 

Three-way 1-1/4" to 2" 40 psid 

Flow characteristic 

Two-way Equal percentage 

Three-way Port A to AB: equal percentage; 

Port B to AB: linear 

(mixing applications only) 

VB3ADBA 

VB2ABBX 

Materials 

Body Forged brass (ASTM B283) 

Flow optimizer NORYL 

Ball/stem Nickel plated brass 

(316 stainless steel two-way 

models available) 

Stem seals EPDM O-rings 

Ball seals Reinforced Teflon ® with 

EPDM O-rings 

Leakage ANSI Class IV (0.01% of 

C v ) 

Compatible actuators Any Honeywell 35 lb-in nonspring 

return, or 44 lb-in 

spring return DCA will operate 

all VB2 and VB3 valves 

up to 2" size. 

535 

CONTROL VALVES


536 


HONEYWELL BALL VALVES 

VB2, VB3 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

AB 

B 

A 

3-Way 

Flow Pattern 

(Mixing Only) 

F 

F 

E 

VB Ball Valve 

2 Two-way type 

3 Three-way type 

VB 2 A A 

B 

A 

C 

E D 

A 1/2" NPT 

B 3/4" NPT 

C 1" NPT 

D 1-1/4" NPT 

E 1-1/2" NPT 

F 2" NPT 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

B 

G 

A 

C 

Cv Designator 

See Table 1 for two-way valves 

See Table 2 for three-way valves 

D 

VALVE SIZE (in) 

1/2 

3/4 

1 

1-1/4 

1-1/2 

2 

VALVE SIZE (in) 

1/2 

3/4 

1 

1-1/4 

1-1/2 

2 

MODEL 

VB2A 

VB2B 

VB2C 

VB2D 

VB2E 

VB2F 

MODEL 

VB3A 

VB3B 

VB3C 

VB3D 

VB3E 

VB3F 


B Nickel-plated brass trim 

S Stainless steel trim (two-way only) 

A Non-spring return, floating actuator (ML6161B2024) 

B Non-spring return, modulating actuator (ML7161A2008) 

C Spring return, 24V, two-position actuator (S0524-2POS) 

D Spring return, modulating/floating actuator (S05010) 

X No actuator pre-assembled 

B C 

Example: VB-2-A-A-B-C Two-way ball valve, 

1/2" NPT, 0.38 Cv, nickel-plated brass trim 

with 50524-2POS actuator 

A 

2-3/8 

2-5/8 

2-3/8 

2-5/8 

2-3/4 

3-1/16 

4-1/4 

3 

3-3/16 

3-7/16 

3-11/16 

4 

4-7/16 

A 

2-5/8 

2-5/8 

2-3/4 

3 

4-1/4 

3 

3-3/16 

3-7/16 

3-11/16 

4 

4-7/16 

B 

3-7/16 

3-11/16 

3-7/16 

3-11/16 

3-11/16 

3-15/16 

4-7/16 

3-15/16 

4-7/16 

3-15/16 

5-3/16 

5-3/16 

5-3/4 

B 

3-1/8 

3-1/8 

3-1/8 

3-1/4 

3-1/2 

3-1/4 

3-1/2 

3-1/2 

4 

4 

4-5/16 

C 

6-3/8 

6-1/2 

6-7/16 

6-1/2 

6-9/16 

6-3/4 

7-3/8 

6-11/16 

6-13/16 

6-15/16 

7-1/16 

7-3/16 

7-7/16 

VB2 

Two-Way Valves 

TABLE 1. TWO-WAY CV VALUES 

DIMENSIONS (in) 

C 

6-1/2 

6-1/2 

6-9/16 

6-3/4 

7-3/8 

6-3/4 

6-13/16 

6-15/16 

7-1/16 

7-3/16 

7-7/16 

VB3 

Three-Way Valves 

D 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

D 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

DIMENSIONS (in) 

E 

4 

4 

CV Designator 

Pipe Size (in.) A B C D E F G 

1/2 A 0.38 0.68 1.3 2.6 4.7 8 11.7* 

3/4 B 4.3 10.1 14.7* 28.6* 

1 C 9.0 15.3 26.1 

1-1/4 D 14.9 36.5 

1-1/2 E 22.8 41.3 

2 F 41.7 71.1 

* Denotes full port valve (with no insert). Recommend using a 

two-position actuator. 

TABLE 2. THREE-WAY CV VALUES 

CV Designator 

Pipe Size (in.) A B C D 

1/2 A 1.0 2.4 4.3 8.0* 

3/4 B 2.4 3.8 12.6* 

1 C 8.6 10.0* 22.3* 30.8* 

1-1/4 D 12.7 19.4* 34.1* 

1-1/2 E 13.4 23.5 32.0* 

2 F 23.9 38.2 56.7* 

* Denotes full port valve (with no insert). Recommend using a 

two-position actuator. 

4 

4 

4 

4 

E 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

F 

8-1/8 

8-5/16 

8-1/8 

8-5/16 

8-5/16 

8-11/16 

8-7/8 

8-11/16 

9-1/16 

9-1/16 

8-7/8 

8-7/8 

10-1/2 

F 

9 

9 

9 

9-1/2 

10-1/2 

9-1/2 

9-15/16 

10-1/16 

10-13/16 

11 

11-3/4 

G 

2 

2 

2-1/16 

2-7/16 

3-1/8 

2-3/8 

2-5/8 

2-3/4 

3 

3-1/8 

3-5/8


JOHNSON CONTROLS BALL VALVES 

VG1000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The VG1000 Series consists of two- and three-way ball valves 

with a characterized insert for equal percentage flow control and 

Cv ratings in the range of traditional globe valves. They are available 

in connection sizes from 1/2" to 2" (C v ’s from 1.2 to 73.7). 

The VG1000 Series valves are used in combination with spring 

return (M9206, M9216) and non-spring return (M9106, M9109) 

direct-coupled actuators from Johnson Controls. The VG1000 

Series valves are designed to control chilled water, hot water, 

50% glycol, and 15 psig steam. 

FEATURES 

• Cost effective 

• Minimum 200,000 full-cycle life expectancy 

• Compatible with water, glycol, and low-pressure steam 

• Equal percentage flow characteristics 

• Minimum 500:1 rangeability 

• Assembled or ordered separately 

• Spring return or non-spring return actuators 

• Floating, proportional, or two-position control 

DIMENSIONS 

Valve 

Size 

Valve bodies Two- and three-way mixing or 

diverting 

Sizes 1/2" to 2" female NPT 

Flow characteristic Equal percentage 

Static pressure 580 psig (3996 kPa, PN40) 

Fluid temp 

Chrome-plated ball 23° to 203°F (-5° to 95°C) 

Stainless steel ball 23° to 250°F (-5° to 121°C) 

Ambient temp Actuator dependent, see 

“Actuators & Dampers” section 

Service Water (50% glycol), steam 15 psi 

Cycle life 200,000 leak-free cycles 

G 

Two-Way 

E 

B 

C 

Two-Way 

Non-Spring Return Spring Return 


Dimensions in (cm) 

A B C D E F G H J 

1/2" 6.30 (15.99) 0.66 (1.67) 2.52 (6.39) 7.84 (19.91) 7.20* (18.30) 4.20 (10.6) 3.25 (8.25) 7.25 (18.42) 1.25 (3.18) 

3/4" 6.30 (15.99) 0.66 (1.67) 2.80 (7.10) 7.84 (19.91) 7.20* (18.30) 4.20 (10.6) 3.25 (8.25) 7.25 (18.42) 1.41 (3.57) 

1" 6.38 (16.19) 0.75 (1.91) 3.41 (8.65) 7.84 (19.91) 7.28* (18.49) 4.20 (10.6) 3.25 (8.25) 7.25 (18.42) 1.70 (4.33) 

1-1/4" 6.81 (17.30) 1.03 (2.62) 3.94 (10.00) 7.84 (19.91) 7.69* (19.53) 4.20 (10.6) 3.25 (8.25) 7.25 (18.42) 1.97 (5.00) 

1-1/2" 6.97 (17.70) 1.14 (2.90) 4.33 (10.99) 7.84 (19.91) 7.88* (20.00) 4.20 (10.6) 3.25 (8.25) 7.25 (18.42) 2.17 (5.52) 

2" 7.17 (18.22) 1.47 (3.73) 4.84 (12.30) 7.84 (19.91) 8.03 (20.40) 3.94 (10.0) 4.57 (11.6) 9.81** (24.92) 2.42 (6.16) 

*Dimension “E” is reduced by 0.59" (1.5 cm) for M9206-Bxx-2S Series two-position actuators. 

**Dimension “H” is increased by 3" (7.6 cm) for M9216-BAx-2 Series 120 VAC two-position actuators. 

Actuator replacement clearance over dimension “A” is 3.50" (8.89 cm) for all non-spring return actuators. 

Actuator replacement clearance over dimension “E” is 4.50" (11.43 cm) for all spring return actuators. 

F 

A 

B C 

Two-Way Two-Way 

D 

J 

Three-Way 

C 

Three-Way 

B 

VG1241AF/ 

M9106-AGA-2 

H 

Top 

View 

A C 

B 

A C 

B 

Diverting 

Flow 

Mixing 

Flow 

With actuator fully CCW, 

port B = closed, Flow = A C 

With actuator fully CW, 

port A = closed, Flow = B C 

Three-Way 

Flow Pattern 

Max differential fully open 

Full port valve 150 psid (1378 kPa) 

Valve with control disc 50 psid (345 kPa) 

Body Forged brass 

Ball Chrome plated or stainless steel 

Stem (blow-out proof) Nickel plated or stainless steel 

Seats Graphite-reinforced PTFE with 

O-ring 

Stem packing seals EPDM double O-rings 

Leakage 0.01% per ANSI/FCI 70-2, 

Class 4 

Agency UL, CSA, CE 

537 

CONTROL VALVES


538 


JOHNSON CONTROLS BALL VALVES 

VG1000 SERIES 

TWO-WAY VALVES 


VG1241AD 

VG1241AE 

VG1241AF 

VG1241AG 

VG1241AL 

VG1241AN 

VG1241BG 

VG1241BL 

VG1241BN 

VG1241CL 

VG1241CN 

VG1241CP 

VG1241DN 

VG1241DP 

VG1241DR 

VG1241EP 

VG1241ER 

VG1241ES 

VG1241FR 

VG1241FS 

VG1241FT 

Two-way, 1/2" NPT, Cv=1.2, chrome ball 









Two-way, 1" NPT, Cv=7.4, chrome ball 



Two-way, 1 1/4" NPT, Cv=11.7, chrome ball 









THREE-WAY VALVES 


VG1841AD 

VG1841AE 

VG1841AF 

VG1841AG 

VG1841AL 

VG1841AN 

VG1841BG 

VG1841BL 

VG1841BN 

VG1841CL 

VG1841CN 

VG1841CP 

VG1841DN 

VG1841DP 

VG1841DR 

VG1841EP 

VG1841ER 

VG1841ES 

VG1841FR 

VG1841FS 

VG1841FT 

Three-way, 1/2" NPT, Cv=1.2/0.7, chrome ball 









Three-way, 1" NPT, Cv=7.4/4.7, chrome ball 



Three-way, 1 1/4" NPT, Cv=11.7/5.8, chrome ball 









Note: CV's for three-way valves are PORT A/PORT B. 

ACTUATORS 

SPRING RETURN 


M9206-AGA-2 Spring return, 53 in-lb, floating * 

M9206-BGA-2 Spring return, 53 in-lb, two-position, 24 VAC * 

M9206-GGA-2 Spring return, 53 in-lb, proportional * 

M9216-AGA-2 Spring return, 140 in-lb, floating ** 

M9216-BGA-2 Spring return, 140 in-lb, two-position, 24 VAC ** 

M9216-GGA-2 Spring return, 140 in-lb, proportional ** 

* for


BELIMO BALL VALVES 

B2, B3 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The B2 Series two-way ball valves and the B3 Series 

three-way ball valves are used for two-position, floating, 

or proportional control of HVAC hot or chilled water coils. 

The valves come assembled with direct-coupled Belimo 

electric actuators with spring return or non-spring return 

operation. They come in standard sizes from 1/2" through 

2" and Cv’s from 0.8 through 57. This valve displays a true 

equal percentage characteristic and can be sized by the 

same criteria used for any traditional globe or zone valve. 

FEATURES 

• Two- and three-way, 1/2" to 2" 

• Equal percentage characteristic (two-way) 

• Cv’s from 0.8 through 57 

• Assembled ready for installation 

• Spring return or non-spring return actuators 

• Floating, two-position, or proportional control 



Sizes 1/2" to 2" FNPT 

Flow type Two-way equal percentage, three-way linear 

Static pressure 600 psig/4137 kPa (1/2" to 1-1/4") 

400 psig/2758 kPa (1-1/2", 2") 

Fluid temp 0° to 212°F (-18° to 100°C) 

Service Water (


540 


BELIMO BALL VALVES 

B2, B3 SERIES 


VALVE SPECIFICATION NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN (N.O. / CCW) 

Port Valve # Cv Size Two-pos/ Proportional Two-pos Tri-state Proportional 

Tri-state 

Two-way B209B 0.8 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3-T TF24-SR 







Two-way B223 10.0 1" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Two-way B224 19.0 1" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Two-way* B225 30.0 1" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Two-way* B230 19.0 1-1/4" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Two-way B231 25.0 1-1/4" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Two-way* B240 37.0 1-1/2" NM24 NM24-SR AF24 AF24-3 AF24-SR 

Two-way B249 46.0 2" NM24 NM24-SR AF24 AF24-3 AF24-SR 

Two-way* B250 57.0 2" NM24 NM24-SR AF24 AF24-3 AF24-SR 

Three-way B309B 0.8 1/2" TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TF24 TF24-3-T TF24-SR 





Three-way B323 10.0 1" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Three-way* B325 30.0 1" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Three-way* B330 19.0 1-1/4" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Three-way B331 25.0 1-1/4" LR24-3 LR24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR 

Three-way* B340 37.0 1-1/2" NM24 NM24-SR AF24 AF24-3 AF24-SR 

Three-way B349 46.0 2" NM24 NM24-SR AF24 AF24-3 AF24-SR 

Three-way* B350 57.0 2" NM24 NM24-SR AF24 AF24-3 AF24-SR 

* No characterized disc; requires Cv adjustment for installation in pipe sizes larger than the valve. 

All valves are factory 

assembled. No field 

assembly required. 


B_ _ _ / Ball Valve with brackets and mounting (select from above) 

_ _ _ _ Compatible actuator (select from above) 

(other options for the actuator family are also available) 

Example: B209B / TR24-SR-T 1/2" Ball valve, Cv=0.8 with proportional non-spring return 

actuator 

Note: Standard ball valve construction is chrome-plated brass ball for 1/2" and 3/4" sizes (B suffix); stainless 

steel ball available as an option. On 1" sizes and larger, stainless ball is standard. 

Note: Multi-function Technology ® (MFT) model actuators are also available. Add -MFT to the base model 

number and specify the control signal configuration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT configuration 

(not required if to be field configured, or if the default configuration of 2-10 VDC is required). 

Example: AF24-MFT-P30001 An AF24-MFT configured at Trane for a floating point input, standard 

2-10 VDC feedback, and 150 second running time.


KELE REVOLUTION THREADED GLOBE VALVE ASSEMBLIES 


DESCRIPTION 

The V5011 Series is a two-way threaded globe valve 

used for control of water or steam. The V5013 Series is a 

three-way threaded globe valve used for control of water. 

The valves come assembled with direct-coupled electric 

actuators for spring return or non-spring return operation, 

or the valve, linkage, and actuator may be ordered separately 

for field assembly. 

FEATURES 

• Two- and three-way sizes from 1/2" to 2" 

• Two-way equal percentage characteristics 

• Three-way linear characteristics 

• Assembled with spring return or non-spring return 

actuators 


• ANSI 150 body class 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


A 

Valve bonnet* 

V501x Two-Way and Three-Way 


Sizes 1/2" to 2" FNPT 

Flow type Equal percentage two-way 

Linear three-way 

Water pressure 250 psig (1720 kPa) 

Water temp 36° to 248°F (2° to 120°C) 

Service Water (


542 


KELE REVOLUTION THREADED GLOBE VALVE ASSEMBLIES 


VALVE AND ACTUATOR SELECTION 

GLOBE VALVE NON-SPRING RETURN * SPRING RETURN* 

Body Size Cv Water and High- Floating Proportional Close- Two- Proportional Close- 

Type 15# Steam Pressure Two- off Position or Floating off 

Model Steam Model Position (psid) (psid) 

Two- 1/2" 0.73 V5011N1008 V5011N2006 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207 

Way 1/2" 1.16 V5011N1016 V5011N2014 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207 

NPT 1/2" 1.85 V5011N1024 V5011N2022 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207 

1/2" 2.9 V5011N1032 V5011N2030 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207 



1" 11.7 V5011N1065 V5011N2063 KA-70-2T KA-70-P 109 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 66 

1-1/4" 18.7 V5011N1073 V5011N2071 KA-70-2T KA-70-P 69 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 84 

1-1/2" 29.3 V5011N1081 V5011N2089 KA-175-2T KA-175-P 105 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 55 

2" 46.8 V5011N1099 V5011N2097 KA-175-2T KA-175-P 58 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 63 

Three- 1/2" 2.9 V5013N1030 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 230 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 207 

Way 1/2" 4.7 V5013N1048 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 143 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 184 

NPT 3/4" 7.3 V5013N1055 KA-35-2T KA-35-P 69 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 79 

1" 11.7 V5013N1063 KA-70-2T KA-70-P 109 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-M 66 

1-1/4" 18.7 V5013N1071 KA-70-2T KA-70-P 69 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 84 

1-1/2" 29.3 V5013N1089 KA-175-2T KA-175-P 105 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-M 55 

2" 46.8 V5013N1097 KA-175-2T KA-175-P 58 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 63 

*See KA and KAS Series direct-coupled actuator catalog pages for wiring and specs. 



VALVE SELECTION 

Vxxxxxxxxx / Select 1/2" to 2" valve model number (from list above) 

ACTUATOR SELECTION* 

KA_ _ _ _ KA actuator (from list above) 

Example: V5011N1008 / KA-35-2T 1/2" Two-way globe valve with Cv=0.73 with floating non-spring 

return actuator, factory assembled. 

* Specify normally open or normally closed when ordering an assembly 

with a KAS actuator. 

For field assembly, order the Model Q5020A1003 linkage, the valve, 

and the actuator as separate line items. 


Q5020A1003 Linkage for 1/2" to 2" valves 

SW2 Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-44/88/175 

201052B Auxiliary switch kit for KA-35 and KAS-70


KELE REVOLUTION FLANGED GLOBE VALVE ASSEMBLIES 

VGF SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The VGF Series is a family of two- and three-way flanged 

globe valves designed specifically for commercial HVAC 

systems. All models of the VGF Series have stainless 

steel trim suitable for chilled water/glycol, heating water, 

and steam up to 100 psig. 

The valves are available with linear or equal percentage 

flow characteristics. They have ASME/ANSI standard 

dimensions and pressure/temperature ratings, and there 

are models with pressure balanced trim for high close-off 

applications. 

The VGF Series come assembled with Kele Revolution 

direct-coupled electric actuators or direct-mount 

Honeywell actuators, or the valves and actuators can be 

ordered separately. 

FEATURES 

• Sizes 2-1/2” to 6” ANSI flanged 

• Stainless steel trim - all models 

• ASME/ANSI B16.3 pressure/temperature ratings 

• ANSI 125 flanges standard, ANSI 250 special order 

• Equal Percentage or Linear flow characteristics 

• Three-way mixing models and diverting models 

• Pressure balanced models for high close off 

• Available assembled with actuator, or separately 

• Spring or non-spring return assemblies 



Valve flow patterns 2-way stem down to close (DA), 

3-way mixing, 3-way diverting 

Sizes 2-1/2" to 6" flanged 

Flow characteristic 

2-way Equal percentage or linear 

3-way Equal percentage 

Service Water, glycol (


544 


KELE REVOLUTION FLANGED GLOBE VALVE ASSEMBLIES 

VGF SERIES 

TABLE 2. VGF SERIES FLANGED GLOBE VALVE AND ACTUATOR COMBINATIONS AND CLOSE-OFF RATINGS 

Body Type Size Cv Valve Model 1 Floating Proportional 

NON-SPRING RETURN (NSR) ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN (SR) ACTUATORS 

Close-off 

(psid) 

Two-Pos 

Proportional + 

Floating 

2-way 2-1/2" 63 VGF21 (E or L) S25 KA-301-2T KA-301-P 77 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 41 

E, =% 3" 100 VGF21 (E or L) S30 KA-301-2T KA-301-P 38 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 20 

L, linear 4" 160 VGF21 (E or L) S40 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 34 N/A N/A N/A 

5" 250 VGF21 (E or L) S50 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 14 N/A N/A N/A 

6" 400 VGF21 (E or L) S60 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 14 N/A N/A N/A 

3-way mixing 2 1/2" 63 VGF31EM25 KA-301-2T KA-301-P 97 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 52 

3" 100 VGF31EM30 KA-301-2T KA-301-P 65 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 35 

4" 160 VGF31EM40 ML6421B1040 ML7421B10 23 34 N/A N/A 



3-way diverting 2-1/2" 63 VGF31LD25 KA-301-2T KA-301-P 77 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 41 

3" 100 VGF31LD30 KA-301-2T KA-301-P 38 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-M 20 

4" 160 VGF31LD40 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 34 N/A N/A N/A 



2-way pressure 2-1/2" 63 VGF21 (E or L) P25 ML6421A1017 ML7421A1032 175 N/A N/A N/A 

balanced 3" 100 VGF21 (E or L) P30 ML6421A1017 ML7421A1032 175 N/A N/A N/A 

E, =% 4" 160 VGF21 (E or L) P40 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 175 N/A N/A N/A 

L, linear 5" 250 VGF21 (E or L) P50 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 175 N/A N/A N/A 

6" 400 VGF21 (E or L) P60 ML6421B1040 ML7421B1023 175 N/A N/A N/A 

1 E = equal percentage flow characteristic, L = linear flow characteristic 

DIMENSIONS 

1 

Dotted line 

represents 

ANSI 125 

valve body. 

C 

Two-way valves, Equal Percentage or Linear, Standard or Pressure Balanced 

VALVE ANSI CLASS 125 

SIZE 

(in) A B 

Dimensions, in (mm) 

C D E Y 

A 

2-1/2 10-7/8 (276) 4-3/8 (112) 7 (178) — 3-1/2 (89) 3/4 (20) 

3 11-1/2 (298) 6-3/8 (161) 7-1/2 (191) — 3-1/2 (89) 3/4 (20) 

4 13-7/8 (352) 5-7/8 (150) 9 (229) — 5-1/2 (133) 1-1/2 (38) 

5 15-1/2 (400) 6-3/16 (157) 10 (254) — 5-1/2 (133) 1-1/2 (38) 

6 17-1/2 (451) 6-3/16 (157) 11 (279) — 5-1/2 (133) 1-1/2 (38) 

1 

Stroke Y 



VGF_ _ _ _ _ _ / Select valve model (from table above) 

KA_ _ _ _ or ML_ _ _ _ _ Select actuator model (from list above) 

Example: VGF21ES25 / KAS-175-M is a two-way, 2-1/2" ANSI 125 Flanged, Cv=63, 

equal percentage valve assembled with an SR, Prop/Floating actuator. 

B 

D 

E 

Note: Valve assemblies with KA and KAS actuators use 

the Q5020B1001 Linkage. If ordering valve and 

actuator separately for field assembly, order the 

Q5020B1001 also. 

Note: Specify Normally Open or Normally Closed when 

ordering an assembly with KAS spring return 

actuator. 


Q5020B1001 Linkage for 2-1/2" and 3" valves actuated by KA-301 or KAS-175 actuators 

SW2 Auxiliary switch kit for KA-301 and KAS-175 actuators 

1 

Dotted line 

represents 

ANSI 125 

valve bonnet. 

Three-Way Valves, Mixing or Diverting 

C 

A 

Close-off 

(psid) 

VALVE ANSI CLASS 125 

SIZE Dimensions, in (mm) 

(in) A B C D E Y 

1 

Stroke Y 

2-1/2 10-7/8 (276) 3 (76) 7 (178) 3-1/2 (95) 4-3/16 (107) 3/4 (20) 

3 11-3/4 (298) 4 3/16 (107) 7-1/2 (191) 4-3/8 (111) 4-3/16 (107) 3/4 (20) 

4 13 7/8 (352) 5-1/2 (140) 9 (229) 5-1/8 (130) 6-11/16 (170) 1-1/2 (38) 

5 15-1/2 (400) 5-3/8 (137) 10 (254) 5-1/2 (146) 6-11/16 (170) 1-1/2 (38) 

6 17-1/2 (451) 5-11/16 (145) 11 (279) 6-5/8 (168) 6-11/16 (170) 1-1/2 (38) 

E 

B 

D 

3-Way Valve Flow Patterns 

A 

B 

AB 

MIXING 

Stem up = B AB 

Stem down = A AB 

A 

B 

AB 

DIVERTING 

Stem up = AB A 

Stem down = AB A


HONEYWELL DIRECT-MOUNT VALVE ACTUATORS 

ML SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The ML6421, ML6984, ML7421, and ML7984 models are 

direct-mount, electric, non-spring return actuators 

designed for use on Honeywell V5011N/13N and VGF 

Series valves. 

The ML6425 and ML7425 models are direct-mount, electric 

spring return actuators designed for use on Honeywell 

V5011N/13N and VGF Series valves. 

The actuators can be ordered assembled with a valve, or 

they may be easily installed in the field. 

DIRECT-MOUNT ACTUATOR SELECTION CHART / CLOSE-OFF RATINGS 


Voltage 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 

Ambient temp 

ML6984, ML7984 32° to 132°F (0° to 55°C) 

ML64xx, ML74xx 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C) 


ML7984 2-10V (20 k�), 4-20 mA (237�) 

ML7421, ML7425 2-10V (100 k�), 4-20 mA (500�) 

Valve mounting U bolt to valve bonnet thread or 

clip shaft to valve stem 

ML7425 ML7984 

Non-spring return (NSR) actuator Spring return (SR) actuator 

Size Two-way Valve Three-way Valve Floating Proportional Close-off (psid) Floating Proportional Close-off (psid) 

1/2" V5011N1008 - N1040 V5013N1030, N1048 ML6984 ML7984 273 ML6425 ML7425 230 

3/4" V5011N1057 V5013N1055 ML6984 ML7984 273 ML6425 ML7425 230 

1" V5011N1065 V5013N1063 ML6984 ML7984 193 ML6425 ML7425 163 

1-1/4" V5011N1073 V5013N1071 ML6984 ML7984 123 ML6425 ML7425 104 

1-1/2" V5011N1081 V5013N1089 ML6984 ML7984 79 ML6425 ML7425 67 

2" V5011N1099 V5013N1097 ML6984 ML7984 44 ML6425 ML7425 37 

2-1/2" VGF31EM25 ML6421A ML7421A 87 ML6425 ML7425 29 

3" VGF31EM30 ML6421A ML7421A 58 ML6425 ML7425 19 

2-1/2" VGF21ES25, LS25 VGF31LD25 ML6421A ML7421A 69 ML6425 ML7425 23 

3" VGF21ES30, LS30 VGF31LD30 ML6421A ML7421A 34 ML6425 ML7425 11 

4" VGF21ES40, LS40 VGF31LD40, EM40 ML6421B ML7421B 34 N/A N/A N/A 



2-1/2" VGF21EP25 ML6421A ML7421A 175 N/A N/A N/A 

3" VGF21EP30 ML6421A ML7421A 175 N/A N/A N/A 

4" VGF21EP40 ML6421B ML7421B 175 N/A N/A N/A 



Agency UL listed, CE 

Action Direct and reverse selectable 

Actuator height 

ML6425/7425 11-1/4" (284 cm) 

ML6984/7984 7" (179 cm) 

ML6421A/7421A 10-3/8" (264 cm) 

ML6421B/7421B 12-3/4" (326 cm) 

CAUTION: Install actuator on valve before energizing. 

Model Power Control Signal Force Spring Timing in NEMA rating 

(VA) lbf (kg) Return Seconds (IP) rating 

ML6984 6 Two-Position/Floating 160 (72.57) no 63 3R 

ML7984 6 2-10V, 4-20 mA, 135 160 (72.57) no 63 3R 

ML6421 11 Two-Position/Floating 405 (183.7) no 95 or 175 1 (IP54) 

ML7421 12 2-10V, 4-20 mA 405 (183.7) no 95 or 175 1 (IP54) 

ML6425 11 Two-Position/Floating 135 (61.23) yes 90 1 (IP54) 

ML7425 12 2-10V, 4-20 mA 135 (61.23) yes 90 1 (IP54) 

545 

CONTROL VALVES


546 


HONEYWELL DIRECT MOUNT VALVE ACTUATORS 

ML SERIES 

WIRING 

Floating 

Thermostat or DDC 

Current 

Signal 

Source 

– 

+ 

ML6984 

B Stem Down 

W Stem Up 

R 

T5 

T6 

ML6984 Floating Control 

3 ML7984A 

R 

W 

C 

T6 

T5 

ML7984A mA Proportional Control 

ML6421 

3 

2 

FUNCTION DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION 

4-20 mA Direct Acting 

1 

Master Actuator 

Slave Actuator 1 2 3 4 

On 

Off 

20-4 mA Reverse Acting 

Master Actuator 

On 

1 

Slave Actuator 1 2 3 4 

Off 

C 

Extend 

Retract 

T1 

1 

2 

ML7421 

24 VAC 


T1 

T2 

+ 

Floating 

Controller 

- 

+ 

2-10 VDC 

Signal 

24 VAC 

L1 

L2 

ML7421 mA Proportional Control 

24 VAC 

1 

24 VAC 

L1 

L2 

L1 

L2 

L1 

L2 

Signal Source 

135Ω 

DC 

Signal 

Source 

ML7984A 

1 Allow 0.5 amps maximum for each device. Actuators and controller can share the same transformer providing proper phasing is observed, except as noted. 

2 T5 ” and “W” terminal are connected internally. Device is compatible with the three-wire control system. 

3 Use configuration DIP switches to select device functions. See installation instructions. 

+ 

– 

W 

R 

B 

3 


Mechanical 

135Ω input 

ML7984A Resistance Control 

R 

W 

C 

3 

T6 

T5 

ML7984A 

2 

1 2 3 4 


2-10 VDC Direct Acting 

1 2 3 4 

On 

Off 

10-2 VDC Reverse Acting 

1 2 3 4 

On 

Off 

ML7984A VDC Proportional Control 

ML6425 

C 

H 

Extend 

Retract 


T1 

T2 

1 

2 

R 

W 

B 

C 

Floating 

Controller 


On 

Off 

ML7425 VDC Proportional Control 

T6 

2 

T5 

24 VAC 

L1 

L2 

1 

1 

24 VAC 

24 VAC 

3 ML7425 

Feedback F + Feedback signal 

Signal * 

L2 

L1 

Override Ext. 

Override Ret. 

Comm L2 

+ + 2-10 VDC 

- - Signal 24 VAC w3 D/R Action 

T2 

T1 

L1 

O1 

L2 10-2 2-10 

O2 

Extends Extends 

TS 

(Factory 

*Add a 500Ω resistor for 4-20mA Signals Setting) 


ML6984A4000 160 lbf floating input (floating) for 1/2" to 2" valve 

ML7984A4009 160 lbf proportional input (2-10V, 4-20 mA, 135�) for 1/2" to 2" valve 

ML6421A1017 405 lbf floating input (floating) for 2-1/2" to 3" valve 

ML6421B1040 405 lbf floating input (floating) for 4" to 6" valve 

ML7421A1032 405 lbf proportional input (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 2-1/2" to 3" valve 

ML7421B1023 405 lbf proportional input (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 4" to 6" valve 

ML7425B3012 135 lbf spring return stem up proportional (2-10v, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 3" valve 

ML6425B3013 135 lbf spring return stem up floating for 1/2" to 3" valve 

ML7425A3013 135 lbf spring return stem down proportional (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 3" valve 

ML6425A3022 135 lbf spring return stem down floating for 1/2" to 3" valve 


KOV-1, -2, -3 NEMA 3R fabric weather shields 

L1 

L2 

L1 

L2


BELIMO DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATOR, SPRING RETURN 

NVF SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Belimo NVF Series direct-mount globe valve actuators 

offer spring return control for many two- and threeway, 

1/2" through 2" threaded globe valves. The Belimo 

NVF Series is available with Belimo’s new MFT technology 

in on/off, floating, and proportional control signal 

types, and with LON communications. They are powered 

by 24 VAC/VDC. 

Using the UNV-001 linkage, the NVF Series actuators 

mount directly to Belimo’s G2 and G3 Series valves or 

Invensys’ VB7000 and VB9000 Series threaded globe 

valves. Other UNV Series linkages allow the NVF Series 

actuator to control Siemens, Johnson, Honeywell, and 

other manufacturers’ valves. 

FEATURES 

• Self-adjusting stroke 

• Automatic adjusting position indicators 

• Self-locking valve coupling 


• Fully configurable MFT models 

• Universal linkage kits 

• Models with LonTalk FTT-10 

APPLICATION 

The NVF24 Series has a force rating of 180 lbf. Close-off 

ratings are 250 psid (1/2" to 3/4" valves), 207 psid (1" 

valve), 130 psid (1-1/4" valve), 88 psid (1-1/2" valve), and 

47 psid (2" valve) for two- and three-way mixing valves. 

Closeoff is 250 psid for all sizes of three-way diverting 

valves. These ratings are for Belimo G2 and G3 Series 

and Invensys VB7000 and VB9000 Series valves. 

The -E (E=extended) model actuators are spring-return 

down for valve applications requiring that action. Models 

without the -E suffix spring return up. A separately 

ordered linkage kit must be purchased in order to install 

the actuator on a valve. 



Power consumption 5.5W 

Transformer sizing 10 VA (Class 2 power source) 

Electrical connection 3' 18-gauge plenum-rated cable, 1/2" 

conduit fitting 

Input signal 2-10 VDC default (MFT configurable) 

Input impedance 100 k� for 2-10 VDC, 500� for 

4-20 mA, 750� for PWM, 1500� for 

on/off or floating 

Feedback 2-10 VDC (MFT configurable) 

Force 180 lbf 

Stroke 3/4" max (20 mm) 

NVF24-MFT with 

UNV-001 on VB-7313 valve 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

8.75 

(22.2) 

7.05 (17.9) 

NVF24-MFT 

4.35 (11.0) 

UNV-001 Bracket shown 

Stroke time 150 sec (MFT configurable) 



Housing ratings NEMA 2 (IP 54) when vertical 

Housing material UL 94-5V (flammability) 

Noise rating 35 dB(a) max 

Listings UL 873 listed; CE; CSA 22.2 No. 24 

certified 

Quality standard ISO 9001 


547 

CONTROL VALVES


548 


BELIMO DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATOR, SPRING RETURN 

NVF SERIES 

WIRING 

Line 

Volts 


2-10 VDC 

Feedback Signal 

Line 

Volts 

2-10 VDC (–) 

Feedback Signal (+) 

1 

1 


1 

black (1) Common – 

red (2) Hot + 

white (3) Y1 Input 

white (5) 

U Output 2-10V 

Requires IN4004 or IN4007 diode 

NVF24-MFT, NVF24-MFT-E, 


1 

black (1) Common – 

red (2) Hot + 

white (3) Y Input 

white (5) U Output 

Control signal may be pulsed from either the 

Hot or Common 24 VAC line. 

Range Available: 20 ms to 50 sec 

Typical: 0.59 to 2.93 

0.02 to 5.00 

0.10 to 25.5 

Custom configurations available 


Pulse Width Modulation Control 

ACTUATORS 


NVF24-MFT 180 lbf, on/off/floating/proportional, spring return up 

NVF24-MFT-E 180 lbf, on/off/floating/proportional, spring return down 

NVF24-LON NVF24-MFT with LonTalk 

NVF24-LON-E NVF24-MFT-E with LonTalk 

Line 

Volts 


LINKAGES 


UNV-001 Linkage for Invensys VB-9000 (1/2" to 1-1/4"), VB-7000 (1/2" to 2"), Belimo G2/G3 (1/2" to 2") 

UNV-002 Linkage for Danfoss-Trata valves 1/2" to 2" 

UNV-003 Linkage for Siemens VF-599 valves 1/2" to 2" 

UNV-004 Linkage for Siemens VP-658 valves 1/2" to 1-1/4" 

UNV-005 Linkage for Siemens VP-591 valves 1/2" to 1" (2-way), 1/2" to 2" (3-way) 

UNV-006 Linkage for Honeywell V5011/V5013 valves 1/2" to 2", V33/V34 2-1/2" to 3" 

UNV-007 Linkage for Robertshaw V6600/6700 valves 1/2" to 2" 

UNV-008 Linkage for JCI V-3754, 3974, 4324, 5844 valves 3/4" to 2" 

UNV-009 Linkage for JCI VG-7000 valves 1/2" to 3/4" 

UNV-040 Linkage for JCI VG-7000, 1" to 2" 

UNV-035 Hi-temp linkage for Invensys VB-7000/9000 (Belimo G2/G3) 

Line 

Volts 

Line 

Volts 


2-10 VDC (–) 

Control Signal (+) 

2-10 VDC (–) 


NVF24-MFT , NVF24-MFT-E, 



4-20 mA (–) 


2-10 VDC (–) 


? 

500? 




Locate either switch 

A or B , not both. 


ZS-NV-10 Weather shield for NV/NVF 

KOV-2 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield 

A 

B 

black (1) Common 

red (2) + Hot 

white (3) Y1 Input, 2 to 10V 

white (5) U Output, 2 to 10V 

black (1) Common 

red (2) + Hot 

white (3) 

white (5) 

black (1) 

red (2) 

white (3) 

white (5) 

NVF24-MFT, NVF24-MFT-E* 

On/Off Control 

Y 1 Input, 2 to 10V 

U Output, 2 to 10V 

Common – 

Hot + 

Y1 Input 

(not used) 

Actuator Control Correct 

Open Closed Switch LED 

(Switch Selectable) (Switch Selectable) Location Indication 

OFF/ON 150 sec 30 sec Flashing 

Drive "open" 

Spring "closed" 

(MFT selectable) Spring Return A Red 

OFF/ON 

Drive "open" 

Drive "closed" 

150 sec 

(MFT selectable) 

150 sec 

(MFT selectable) B 

Steady 

Green 

* For on/off control of NVF...MFT actuators. The control function must be set for VDC. 

Note: Actuators and linkages may be ordered 

separately or assembled with a valve. 

Fully assembled Invensys valves with 

NVF actuators may be ordered using 

the following methodology: 

Example: VB-7313-0-4-03/NVF24-MFT. The 

UNV-001 linkage will be automatically 

used in the assembly. 

Contact Trane to discuss your specific needs.


BELIMO DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATOR, 


NV SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Belimo NV Series direct-mount globe valve actuators 

offer non-spring return control for many two- and threeway, 

1/2" through 2" threaded globe valves. The Belimo 

NV Series is available with Belimo’s new MFT technology 

in two-position/floating and proportional control signal 

types, and with LON communications. They are powered 

by 24 VAC/VDC. 

Using the UNV-001 linkage, the NV Series actuators 

mount directly to Belimo’s G2 and G3 Series valves or 

Invensys’ VB7000 and VB9000 Series threaded globe 

valves. Other UNV Series linkages allow the NV Series 

actuator to control Siemens, Johnson, Honeywell, and 

other manufacturers’ valves. 

FEATURES 

• Self-adjusting stroke 

• Automatic adjusting position indicators 

• Self-locking valve coupling 


• Fully configurable MFT models 

• Universal linkage kits 

• Models with LonTalk FTT-10 

APPLICATION 

The NV24 models have a force rating of 225 lbf. Close-off 

ratings are 250 psid (1/2" to 1" valves), 162 psid (1-1/4" 

valve), 110 psid (1-1/2" valve), and 58 psid (2" valve) for 

two- and three-way mixing valves. Close-off is 250 psid 

for all sizes of three-way diverting valves. These ratings 

are for Belimo G2 and G3 and Invensys VB7000 and 

VB9000 valves. 

A linkage kit must be ordered separately to install the 

actuator on a valve. See Ordering Information. 



Power consumption 5W 

Transformer sizing 7 VA (Class 2 power source) 

Electrical connection 3' (0.9m) 18-gauge plenum-rated 

cable, 1/2" conduit fitting 

Input signal Two-position/floating or 2-10 VDC 

default (MFT configurable) 

Input impedance 100 k� for 2-10 VDC, 500� for 

4-20 mA, 750� for PWM, 1500� for 

on/off or floating 

Feedback 2-10 VDC (MFT configurable) 

Force 225 lbf 

NV24-MFT with 

UNV-001 on VB-7313 valve 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

8.75 

(22.2) 

7.05 (17.9) 

NV24-MFT 

4.35 (11.0) 

UNV-001 Bracket shown 

Stroke 3/4" max (20 mm) 

Stroke time 150 sec (MFT configurable) 



Housing ratings NEMA 2 (IP54) when vertical 

Housing material UL 94-5V (flammability) 

Noise rating 35 dB(a) max 

Listings UL 873 listed; CE; CSA 22.2 No. 24 

certified 

Quality standard ISO 9001 


549 

CONTROL VALVES


550 


BELIMO DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATOR, 


NV SERIES 

WIRING 

Line 

Volts 


black (1) 

white (2) 

white (3) 

NV24-3 

On/Off/Floating Control 

Common – 

+ extending 

+ retracting 

= actuator plunger extending (down) 

= actuator plunger retracting (up) 

Line 

Volts 

2-10 VDC (–) 




Line 



Volts black (1) 

red (2) 

Common 

+ Hot 

Line 

Volts 

? 

2-10 VDC (–) 


2-10 VDC (–) 


white (3) 

white (5) 

Y1 Input, 2 to 10V 

U Output, 2 to 10V 

4-20 mA (–) 


2-10 VDC (–) 


500? 

NV24-MFT 


ACTUATORS 


NV24-3 225 lbf, on/off/floating, non-spring return 

NV24-MFT 225 lbf, proportional, non-spring return 

NV24-LON NV24-MFT with LonTalk 

LINKAGES 


UNV-001 Linkage for Invensys VB-9000 (1/2" to 1-1/4"), VB-7000 (1/2" to 2") 

UNV-002 Linkage for Danfoss-Trata valves 1/2" to 2" 

UNV-003 Linkage for Siemens VF-599 valves 1/2" to 2" 

UNV-004 Linkage for Siemens VP-658 valves 1/2" to 1-1/4" 

UNV-005 Linkage for Siemens VP-591 valves 1/2" to 1" (2-way), 1/2" to 2" (3-way) 

UNV-006 Linkage for Honeywell V5011/V5013 valves 1/2" to 2", V33/V34 2-1/2" to 3" 

UNV-007 Linkage for Robertshaw V6600/6700 valves 1/2" to 2" 

UNV-008 Linkage for JCI V-3754, 3974, 4324, 5844 valves 3/4" to 2" 

UNV-009 Linkage for JCI VG-7000 valves 1/2" to 3/4" 

UNV-040 Linkage for JCI VG-7000, 1" to 2" 

UNV-035 Hi-temp linkage for Invensys VB-7000/9000 (Belimo G2/G3) 


ZS-NV-10 Weather shield for NV/NVF 

KOV-2 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield 

1 

1 

black (1) 

red (2) 

white (3) 

white (5) 

Control signal may be pulsed from either the 

Hot or Common 24 VAC line . 

Range Available: 20 ms to 50 sec 

Typical: 

0.59 to 2.93 

0.02 to 5.00 

0.10 to 25.5 

Custom configurations 

available 

Common – 

Hot + 

Y Input 

U Output 

NV24-MFT 

Pulse Width Modulation Control 

black (1) 

red (2) 

white (3) 

white (5) 

NV24-MFT 


Common 

+ Hot 

Y 1 Input, 2-10V 

U Output, 2-10V 

Note: Actuators and linkages may be ordered 

separately or assembled with a valve. 

Fully assembled Invensys valves with 

NV actuators may be ordered using the 

following methodology: 

Example: VB-7231-0-4-03/NV24-MFT. The 

UNV-001 linkage will be automatically 

used in the assembly. 

Contact Trane to discuss your specific needs.


INVENSYS GLOBE VALVE ASSEMBLIES 

VB SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Invensys VB Series Globe Valves are available in 1/2" to 

2" threaded bronze body VB-7XXX Models, or in 2 1/2" to 

6" flanged cast iron body VB-8XXX Models. The flanged 

valves have a patented balanced plug design. The balanced 

plug design allows water or steam to flow through 

the valve plug, equalizing the pressure on the top and 

bottom of the plug which greatly reduces the force 

required to operate and close these larger size valves. 

The VB Series Valves are designed for control of chilled 

water, hot water, or steam in the HVAC industry and 

Invensys valves have a long history of high quality and 

reliability. They are available pre-assembled with electric 

or pneumatic actuators, or available without actuator for 

field assembly. 

FEATURES 

• Low-profile body 

• High quality, proven history of performance 

• Self-adjusting packing design 

• Wide temperature range (20° to 281°F) 

• Pneumatic or electric actuation choices 

• Available pre-assembled or separately 

• Two- and three-way body patterns 

• Mixing or diverting three-way body 

• Balanced plug design on flanged models 


Size range 1/2" to 2" NPT, 

2 1/2" to 6" Flanged 

Cv range 0.4 to 500 

Flow characteristics Two-way equal percentage, 

three-way modified linear 

Body 1/2" to 2" Bronze, 

2-1/2" to 6" Cast Iron 


Plug Bronze (stainless steel available 

in NPT models, contact Trane) 

Seat Bronze (stainless steel available 

in NPT models, contact Trane) 

Packing Spring-loaded TFE (NPT models), 

Spring-loaded TFE/EPDM 

(flanged models) 

VF8213-596-5-12 

(VB-8213-0-5-12 with MF61-7203) 

Press/temp ratings 

1/2" to 2" 400 psig @ 20° to 150°F water, 

decreased to 321 psig @ 281°F, 

ANSI 250 (B16.15-1985) 

2-1/2" to 6" 200 psig @ 20° to 150 °F water, 

decreased to 169 psig @ 281°F, 

ANSI 125 (B16.1-1993) 

Steam rating (max) 35 psig (241 kPa), 

281°F (138 °C) 

Leakage rating ANSI Class IV, 0.01% of Cv 

Rangeability 

1/2" to 2" Variable from 5:1 (smallest 1/2") 

to 75:1 (2") 

2-1/2" to 6" >100:1 

551 

CONTROL VALVES


552 



VB SERIES 

MODEL NUMBERS AND DIMENSIONS FOR VB-7000 AND VB-8000 SERIES VALVES WITHOUT ACTUATORS 

1/2" 

20 Threads 

1-1/4" 

16 Threads 

A 

Typical VB-7000 

Threaded Valve 

A 

E 

E 

Typical VB-8000 

Flanged Valve 

D 

C 

B 

D 

C 

B 

Part 

Number 

Valve 

Size 

Dimensions in inches (mm) 

A B C 

D 

(Stem Down) 

E a 

(Stroke) 

VB-7213-0-4-1 

VB-7213-0-4-2 

VB-7213-0-4-3 

VB-7213-0-4-4 

1/2" 3-1/16 (78) 

1-1/16 (27) 1-11/16 (43) 

VB-7213-0-4-5 

VB-7213-0-4-6 

3/4" 3-5/8 (92) 

3/4 (19) 7/16 (11) 

VB-7213-0-4-7 

VB-7213-0-4-8 

1" 

4-5/8 (118) 

1-1/8 (29) 

2-3/8 (60) 

VB-7213-0-4-9 1-1/4" 1-3/8 (35) 

VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 5-3/8 (137) 1-1/2 (38) 2-7/16 (57) 

VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 6-1/8 (156) 1-9/16 (40) 2-3/4 (70) 

VB-7223-0-4-1 

VB-7223-0-4-2 

VB-7223-0-4-3 

VB-7223-0-4-4 

1/2" 3-1/16 (78) 

1-1/4 (32) 1-11/16 (43) 

VB-7223-0-4-5 

VB-7223-0-4-6 

3/4" 3-5/8 (92) 

1-1/8 (29) 7/16 (11) 

VB-7223-0-4-7 

VB-7223-0-4-8 

1" 

4-5/8 (118) 1-3/4 (45) 

1-3/4 (45) 

VB-7223-0-4-9 1-1/4" 2 (51) 

VB-7223-0-4-10 1-1/2" 5-3/8 (137) 1-13/16 (46) 2-1/8 (54) 

VB-7223-0-4-11 2" 6-1/8 (156) 2-1/16 (53) 2-3/16 (56) 

Weight 

(lbs.) 

VB-7313-0-4-2 

VB-7313-0-4-4 

1/2" 3-1/16 (78) 1-3/8 (35) 

1-11/16 (43) 

2.0 

VB-7313-0-4-6 3/4" 3-5/8 (92) 1-11/16 (43) 3.0 

VB-7313-0-4-8 

VB-7313-0-4-9 

1" 

1-1/4" 

4-5/8 (118) 

1-9/16 (40) 

1-5/8 (41) 

1-3/4 (45) 

2 (51) 

3/4 (19) 7/16 (11) 5.0 

5.5 

VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 5-3/8 (137) 1-9/16 (40) 1-1/8 (29) 14 

VB-7313-0-4-11 2" 6-1/8 (156) 1-7/8 (53) 1-3/16 (30) 14 

VB-7323-0-4-4 

VB-7323-0-4-6 

1/2" 

3/4" 

3-1/16 (78) 1-3/8 (35) 

3-5/8 (92) 1-11/16 (43) 

1-11/16 (43) 

2.0 

2.5 

VB-7323-0-4-8 

VB-7323-0-4-9 

1" 

1-1/4" 

4-5/8 (118) 

1-9/16 (40) 

1-5/8 (41) 

1-3/4 (45) 

2 (51) 

3/4 (19) 7/16 (11) 

5.0 

5.5 

VB-7323-0-4-10 1-1/2" 5-3/8 (137) 1-9/16 (40) 1-1/8 (29) 14 

VB-7323-0-4-11 2" 6-1/8 (156) 1-7/8 (53) 1-3/16 (30) 14 

VB-8213-0-5-12 2-1/2" 8-9/16 (217) 4 (102) 4-1/8 (105) 46 

VB-8213-0-5-13 

VB-8213-0-5-14 

3" 

4" 

9-1/2 (241) 4-5/8 (117) 

11-1/2 (292) 5-1/2 (140) 

4-3/8 (111) 

5-1/16 (129) 3-1/4 (83) 

1 (25) 

58 

95 

VB-8213-0-5-15 5" 13 (330) 6-15/16 (176) 5-9/16 (141) 141 

VB-8213-0-5-16 6" 14 (356) 7-1/2 (190) 6-3/8 (162) 1-3/4 (45) 146 

VB-8223-0-5-12 2-1/2" 8-9/16 (217) 4 (102) 4-1/4 (108) 46 

VB-8223-0-5-13 

VB-8223-0-5-14 

3" 

4" 

9-1/2 (241) 4-1/4 (108) 

11-1/2 (292) 4-15/16 (125) 

4-7/8 (124) 

5-3/4 (146) 3-1/4 (83) 

1 (25) 

58 

95 

VB-8223-0-5-15 5" 13 (330) 5-7/16 (138) 6-3/4 (172) 141 

VB-8223-0-5-16 6" 14 (356) 6-1/4 (159) 7-1/2 (191) 1-3/4 (45) 146 

VB-8303-0-5-12 2-1/2" 8-9/16 (217) 5-7/16 (138) 4-3/16 (106) 55 

VB-8303-0-5-13 

VB-8303-0-5-14 

3" 

4" 

9-1/2 (241) 6-3/8 (162) 4-3/8 (111) 

11-1/2 (292) 8-7/16 (214) 5-1/16 (129) 3-1/4 (83) 

1 (25) 

68 

113 

VB-8303-0-5-15 5" 13 (330) 8-13/16 (224) 5-5/8 (143) 166 

VB-8303-0-5-16 6" 14 (356) 9-3/4 (248) 6-3/4 (171) 1-3/4 (45) 212 

a 

Stroke for rated flow. Add up to 1/16 inch (1.6mm) for disc seating and compression. 

2.0 

3.0 

5.5 

6.0 

13 

13 

2.0 

3.0 

5.5 

6.0 

13 

13



VB SERIES 

VALVE FLOW PATTERNS 

A B 

VB-7313 

Mixing Valve 

(Stem up = B-AB) 

A B 

A 

B 

A 

B 

VB-7323 

Diverting Valve 

(Stem up = B-AB) 

FLANGE DIMENSIONS 

A B 

Flow Flow 

Note: A label on the side 

of the valve provides port 

identification. 

AB 

Flow 

Stem Position Flow 

Up 

Down 

VB-8303 Piped as Mixing Valve 

C 

A 

B to AB 

A Port Closed 

A to AB 

B Port Closed 

Three-Way Flanged Valve Flow Patterns 

A B 

Flow Flow 

Note: A label on the side 

of the valve provides port 

identification. 

AB 

Flow 

Note: Two-way VB-7213 and VB-8213 valves are “stem up to open” (SUTO). 

VB-7223 and VB-8223 are “stem up to close” (SUTC). 

D 

B 

Flange Dimensions 

Flange Detail for American Standard 125 psi Cast Iron Pipe Flanges 

Nominal Pipe 

Size 

Flange 

Diameter 

A 

Flanges Drilling Bolting 

Flange 

Thickness 

B 

Diameter of 

Bolt Circle 

C 

Diameter of 

Bolt Holes 

D 

Stem Position Flow 

Up 

Down 

VB-8303 Piped as Diverting Valve 

E 

Number of 

Bolts 

Diameter of 

Bolts 

AB to B 

A Port Closed 

AB to A 

B Port Closed 

Length of 

Machine Bolts 

E 

2-1/2" 

3" 

7" 

7-1/2" 

11/16" 

3/4" 

5-1/2" 

6" 3/4" 

4 

5/8" 

2-1/2" 

4" 9" 

15/16" 7-1/2" 

5" 

6" 

10" 

11" 1" 

8-1/2" 

9-1/2" 

7/8" 

8 

3/4" 

3" 

3-1/4" 

553 

CONTROL VALVES


554 



VB SERIES 


TWO-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION 

Model Number Size Cv Pattern Fail Control Actuator Linkage Closeoff 

VF-7213-255-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

VF-7213-255-4-02 

VF-7213-255-4-03 

VF-7213-255-4-04 

1/2" NPT 

1/2" NPT 

1/2" NPT 

1.3 

2.2 

4.4 

MF-22303 

130 

VF-7213-255-4-05 

VF-7213-255-4-06 

3/4" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

5.5 

7.5 

None 

80 

VF-7213-301-4-07 

VF-7213-301-4-08 

VF-7213-301-4-09 

1"NPT 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

10 

14 

20 

2W N.S.R. Floating (24 VAC) 

MF-63103 

240 

150 

VF-7213-301-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 100 

VF-7213-301-4-11 2" NPT 40 50 

VF-8213-303-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VF-8213-303-5-13 

VF-8213-303-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MF-63123 AV-672 

125 

VF-8213-303-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VF-8213-516-5-16 6" Flg 370 MF41-6343 AV-609 

VS-7213-256-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

VS-7213-256-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 

VS-7213-256-4-03 

VS-7213-256-4-04 

VS-7213-256-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

2.2 

4.4 

5.5 

MS-22353 None 

130 

VS-7213-256-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 

VS-7213-256-4-07 

VS-7213-256-4-08 

VS-7213-506-4-09 

1" NPT 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

10 

14 

20 

2W N.S.R. 

Proportional 

(24 VAC, 4-20 mA) 

40 

100 

VS-7213-506-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MS41-6083 AV-603 

70 

VS-7213-506-4-11 2" NPT 40 40 

VS-8213-422-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VS-8213-422-5-13 

VS-8213-422-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MF-63123-411 AV-672 

125 

VS-8213-422-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VS-8213-516-5-16 6" Flg 370 MS41-6343 AV-609 

VA-7213-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

250 

VA-7213-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250 

VA-7213-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250 

VA-7213-804-4-04 

VA-7213-804-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

5.5 

MA51-7103-100 

250 

200 

VA-7213-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200 

VA-7213-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 150 

VA-7213-804-4-08 

VA-7213-593-4-09 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.O. 2-Pos (24 VAC) 

None 

150 

150 

VA-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MA51-7203 

100 

VA-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

VA-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VA-8213-596-5-13 

VA-8213-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MA61-7203 

125 

VA-8213-596-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VA-8213-556-5-16 6" Flg 370 MA41-7153 AV-609 

VA-7223-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

250 

VA-7223-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250 

VA-7223-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250 

VA-7223-804-4-04 

VA-7223-804-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

5.5 

MA51-7103-100 

250 

200 

VA-7223-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200 

VA-7223-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 90 

VA-7223-804-4-08 

VA-7223-593-4-09 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.C. 2-Pos (24 VAC) 

None 

90 

150 

VA-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MA51-7203 

100 

VA-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

VA-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VA-8223-596-5-13 

VA-8223-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MA61-7203 

125 

VA-8223-596-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VA-8223-556-5-16 6" Flg 370 MA41-7153 AV-609 

VF-7213-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

250 

VF-7213-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250 

VF-7213-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250 

VF-7213-804-4-04 

VF-7213-804-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

5.5 

MF51-7103-100 

250 

200 

VF-7213-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200 

VF-7213-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 150 

VF-7213-804-4-08 

VF-7213-593-4-09 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.O. Floating (24 VAC) 

None 

150 

150 

VF-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MF51-7203 

100 

VF-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

VF-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2 " Flg 56 

VF-8213-596-5-13 

VF-8213-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MF61-7203 

125 

VF-8213-596-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VF-8213-556-5-16 6" Flg 370 MF41-7153 AV-609



VB SERIES 


TWO-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (continued) 


VF-7223-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

250 

VF-7223-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250 

VF-7223-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250 

VF-7223-804-4-04 

VF-7223-804-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

5.5 

MF51-7103-100 

250 

200 

VF-7223-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200 

VF-7223-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 90 

VF-7223-804-4-08 

VF-7223-593-4-09 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.C. Floating (24 VAC) 

None 

90 

150 

VF-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MF51-7203 

100 

VF-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

VF-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VF-8223-596-5-13 

VF-8223-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MF61-7203 

125 

VF-8223-596-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VF-8223-556-5-16 6" Flg 370 MF41-7153 AV-609 

VS-7213-814-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

250 

VS-7213-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250 

VS-7213-814-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250 

VS-7213-814-4-04 

VS-7213-814-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

5.5 

MS51-7103-160 

250 

200 

VS-7213-814-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200 

VS-7213-814-4-07 1" NPT 10 150 

VS-7213-814-4-08 

VS-7213-593-4-09 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.O. 

Proportional 

(24 VAC, 4-20 mA) 

None 

150 

150 

VS-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MS51-7203 

100 

VS-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

VS-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VS-8213-596-5-13 

VS-8213-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MS61-7203 

125 

VS-8213-596-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VS-8213-556-5-16 6" Flg 370 MS41-7153 AV-609 

VS-7223-814-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

250 

VS-7223-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 250 

VS-7223-814-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 250 

VS-7223-814-4-04 

VS-7223-814-4-05 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

5.5 

MS51-7103-160 

250 

200 

VS-7223-814-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 200 

VS-7223-814-4-07 1" NPT 10 90 

VS-7223-814-4-08 

VS-7223-593-4-09 

1" NPT 

1-1/4" NPT 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.C. 

Proportional 

(24 VAC, 4-20 mA) 

None 

90 

150 

VS-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MS51-7203 

100 

VS-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

VS-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VS-8223-596-5-13 

VS-8223-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

85 

145 

MS61-7203 

125 

VS-8223-596-5-15 5" Flg 240 

VS-8223-556-5-16 6" Flg 370 MS41-7153 AV-609 

THREE-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (replace 7313 with 7323 for three-way diverting) 


VF-7313-255-4-02 

VF-7313-255-4-04 

1/2" NPT 

1/2" NPT 

1.3 

4.4 

MF-22303 

130 

VF-7313-255-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 80 

VF-7313-301-4-08 1" NPT 14 

3W mix 

None 

230 

VF-7313-301-4-09 

VF-7313-301-4-10 

VF-7313-301-4-11 

1-1/4" NPT 

1-1/2" NPT 

2" NPT 

20 

28 

40 

N.S.R. Floating (24 VAC) 

MF-63103 

140 

90 

50 

VF-8303-303-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 80 

VF-8303-303-5-13 

VF-8303-303-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

110 

190 

3W mix/div 

MF-63123 AV-672 

35 

VF-8303-303-5-15 5" Flg 290 

VF-8303-516-5-16 6" Flg 500 MF41-6343 AV-609 

VS-7313-256-4-02 

VS-7313-256-4-04 

VS-7313-256-4-06 

1/2" NPT 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

1.3 

4.4 

7.5 

MS-22353 None 

130 

80 

VS-7313-256-4-08 1" NPT 14 3W mix 

40 

VS-7313-506-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 

120 

VS-7313-506-4-10 

VS-7313-506-4-11 

1-1/2" NPT 

2" NPT 

28 

40 

N.S.R. 

Proportional 

(24 VAC, 4-20 mA) 

MS41-6083 AV-603 

75 

40 

VS-8303-422-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 80 

VS-8303-422-5-13 

VS-8303-422-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

110 

190 

3W mix/div 

MF-63123-411 AV-672 

35 

VS-8303-422-5-15 5" Flg 290 

VS-8303-516-5-16 6" Flg 500 MS41-6343 AV-609 

VA-7313-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 

250 

VA-7313-804-4-04 

VA-7313-804-4-06 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

7.5 

MA51-7103-100 

250 

200 

VA-7313-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 3W mix S.R. B-AB 2-Pos (24 VAC) 

None 

90 

VA-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 

150 

VA-7313-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MA51-7203 

100 

VA-7313-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 65 

555 

CONTROL VALVES


556 



VB SERIES 


THREE-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (continued) 


VA-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 80 

VA-8303-596-5-13 

VA-8303-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

110 

190 

3W mix/div S.R. B-AB 2-Pos (24 VAC) 

MA61-7203 None 

35 

VA-8303-596-5-15 5" Flg 290 

VA-8303-556-5-16 6" Flg 500 MA41-7153 AV-609 

VF-7313-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 

250 

VF-7313-804-4-04 

VF-7313-804-4-06 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

7.5 

MF51-7103-100 

250 

200 

VF-7313-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 3W mix 

90 

VF-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 

150 

VF-7313-593-4-10 

VF-7313-593-4-11 

1-1/2" NPT 

2" NPT 

28 

40 

S.R. B-AB Floating (24 VAC) 

MF51-7203 

None 

100 

65 

VF-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 80 

VF-8303-596-5-13 

VF-8303-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

110 

190 

3W mix/div 

MF61-7203 

35 

VF-8303-596-5-15 5" Flg 290 

VF-8303-556-5-16 6" Flg 500 MF41-7153 AV-609 

VS-7313-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 

250 

VS-7313-814-4-04 

VS-7313-814-4-06 

1/2" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

4.4 

7.5 

MS51-7103-160 

250 

200 

VS-7313-814-4-08 1" NPT 14 3W mix 

90 

VS-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 

150 

VS-7313-593-4-10 

VS-7313-593-4-11 

1-1/2" NPT 

2" NPT 

28 

40 

S.R. B-AB 

Proportional 

(24 VAC, 4-20 mA) 

MS51-7203 

None 

100 

65 

VS-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 80 

VS-8303-596-5-13 

VS-8303-596-5-14 

3" Flg 

4" Flg 

110 

190 

3W mix/div 

MS61-7203 

VS-8303-596-5-15 5" Flg 290 

VS-8303-556-5-16 6" Flg 500 MS41-7153 AV-609 

TWO-WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION 


VK4-7213-201-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

VK4-7213-201-4-02 1/2" NPT 

VK4-7213-201-4-03 1/2" NPT 

VK4-7213-201-4-04 1/2" NPT 

1.3 

2.2 

4.4 

3-7 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-2690+AK-42309-500 AV-7400 

220 

VK4-7213-201-4-05 

VK4-7213-201-4-06 

3/4" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

5.5 

7.5 

130 

VK4-7213-301-4-07 1" NPT 

VK4-7213-301-4-08 1" NPT 

VK4-7213-301-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 

10 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.O. 

3-6 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-4601+AK-42309-500 AV-401 

150 

90 

VK4-7213-611-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 

VK4-7213-611-4-11 2" NPT 

28 

40 

3-8 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-6601+AK-42309-500 AV-430 

250 

160 

VK4-8213-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VK4-8213-602-5-13 3" Flg 

VK4-8213-602-5-14 4" Flg 

VK4-8213-602-5-15 5" Flg 

85 

145 

240 

5-10 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-6811+AK-42309-500 

AV-497 125 

VK4-8213-652-5-16 6" Flg 500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500 

VK4-7223-203-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 

VK4-7223-203-4-02 1/2" NPT 

VK4-7223-203-4-03 1/2" NPT 

VK4-7223-203-4-04 1/2" NPT 

1.3 

2.2 

4.4 

8-13 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-2690+AK-42309-500 AV-7400 

130 

VK4-7223-203-4-05 

VK4-7223-203-4-06 

3/4" NPT 

3/4" NPT 

5.5 

7.5 

60 

VK4-7223-303-4-07 1" NPT 

VK4-7223-303-4-08 1" NPT 

VK4-7223-303-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 

10 

14 

20 

2W S.R. N.C. 

10-13 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-4621+AK-42309-500 AV-401 

60 

40 

VK4-7223-613-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 

VK4-7223-613-4-11 2" NPT 

28 

40 

8-13 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-6621+AK-42309-500 AV-430 

170 

90 

VK4-8223-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 56 

VK4-8223-602-5-13 3" Flg 

VK4-8223-602-5-14 4" Flg 

VK4-8223-602-5-15 5" Flg 

85 

145 

240 

5-10 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-6811+AK-42309-500 

AV-497 125 

VK4-8223-652-5-16 6" Flg 500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500 

THREE-WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION 


VK4-7313-303-4-02 1/2" NPT 

VK4-7313-303-4-04 1/2" NPT 

VK4-7313-303-4-06 3/4" NPT 

VK4-7313-303-4-08 1" NPT 

1.3 

4.4 

7.5 

14 3W mix 

10-13 psi spr. 

w/positioner 

MK-4621+AK-42309-500 AV-401 

200 

120 

60 

VK4-7313-303-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 40 

VK4-7313-612-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 

VK4-7313-612-4-11 2" NPT 

28 

40 

S.R. B-AB 

MK-6611+AK-42309-500 AV-430 

80 

50 

VK4-8303-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flg 

VK4-8303-602-5-13 3" Flg 

VK4-8303-602-5-14 4" Flg 

80 

110 

190 

3W mix/div 

5-10 psi spr. 

w/positioner MK-6811+AK-42309-500 

AV-497 35 

VK4-8303-602-5-15 5" Flg 290 

VK4-8303-652-5-16 6" Flg 500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500 

35


INVENSYS LINEAR GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS 

DURADRIVE SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Invensys DuraDrive Linear Globe Valve 

Actuators are designed to mount directly onto two- and 

three-way Invensys globe valves. They have integral linkage 

to provide linear travel and are available in a wide 

selection of spring- and non-spring return models. 

FEATURES 

• Direct-mount, integral linkage 

• Wide selection of control signal inputs 

• Rugged design, reliable performance 

• Spring- or non-spring return models 

SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION 

MS51-7203 

ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECS (Common models are shown below. Invensys has a comprehensive line, contact Trane for more information). 

Actuator Force/ 

Power Running DC 

Power 

Holding Stroke Timing, sec. 

Model Number Control Signal SR/NSR Code Torque Voltage 

(60 Hz) Amps (60 Hz) (in.) (spring) 

MF-22303 

MS-22353 

Floating 

Prop. 4-20 mA 

NSR 

255 

256 

45 lbf 24 VAC + 20%, -15% 

1.5 VA 

4.0 VA 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

0.563 

0.563 

126 

126 

MA51-7103-100 2-pos 

804 

5.3 VA, 4.1 W 0.15 1.2 W 0.625 44 (19) 

MF51-7103-100 Floating SR 804 105 lbf 24 VAC ± 20%, 20-30 VDC 6.9 VA, 4.7 W 0.16 2.1 W 0.625 60 (16) 

MS51-7103-160 Prop. 4-20 mA 814 6.6 VA, 4.2 W 0.14 1.5 W 0.625 60 (16) 

MF-63103 Floating 

301 

6 W — — up to 1.0 60, 120 

MF-63123/AV-672 Floating NSR 303 210 lbf 24 VAC + 10%, -15% 

6 W — — up to 1.0 60, 120 

MF-63123-411/AV-672 Prop. 4-20 mA 422 6 W — — up to 1.0 60, 120 

MA51-7203 2-pos 

593 

9.7 VA, 7.5 W 0.29 2.8 W 0.625


558 


INVENSYS LINEAR GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS 

DURADRIVE SERIES 

ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS 

in (cm) 

W D W D W 

D 

H H 

WIRING 

*Mx41/Mx51/Mx61 MF-631x3 


Black 24H 

Red 24G 

or 

+VDC 

+mA 

– 


or 22-30 VDC 

SPST Control Contact 


or 20-30 VDC 

Typical 

Floating 

Controller 


or 22-30 VDC 

Control Signal 

4 to 20 mA 


2 to 10 VDC 

Green 

White 

Brown 

Orange 

Blue 

Earth 

(+) VDC IN 

(+) mA DC IN 

(–) Common 

(+) VFB 


MS-22353 Wiring 

Blk 

Red 

Com 

Hot (+DC) 

Grn/Yel 

MS-22353 

MA51/MA61-7203-100 Wiring 

(–) 

(+) 

(–) 

(+) 

Black 

Red 

Blue 

Yellow/Black 

Common 

Hot (+DC) 

Extend 

Retract 

Green/Yellow 

MF51/MF61-7203 Wiring 

500Ω 

To Additional 

Actuators 

Gra Com 

Blk Com 

Red Hot (+DC) 

Yel/Blk 

Blu 

AI 

AO 

Grn/Yel 

MS51/MS61-7203 Wiring 

MA51-7203 

MA61-7203 

H 

MF51-7203 

MF61-7203 

MSX1-7203 

2-10 VDC 

L R 

Mx-223x3 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

MF22303 Series 


or 20-30 VDC 

(+)mA DC 

(–)mA DC 

Model Number H W D 

Mx51-7103 6-5/16 (160) 6-3/4 (172) 3-1/2 (89) 

Mx51-7203 7 (178) 11-1/8 (282) 2-1/2 (64) 

Mx61-7203 9-1/2 (241) 11-1/8 (282) 2-1/2 (64) 

MF631x3 6 (152) 5-5/8 (143) 3-5/8 (92) 

Mx223x3 3-5/16 (84) 5-9/16 (141) 3 (76) 

Mx41-6153/AV-605 5-1/4 (133) 8 (203) 5-7/16 (138) 

Mx41-7153/AV-609 11-5/8 (295) 4 (102) 6-1/8 (156) 

Mx41-6343/AV-609 13 (330) 4 (102) 6-1/8 (156) 

* Mx41 assemblies include separate AV-60x linkages. 

Dimension diagrams are generic and for illustration purposes only. 


or 20-30 VDC 

Typical 

Floating 

Controller 


2 to 10 VDC 

mA DC 


VDC 


Green 

Black 

White (Retract) 

Red (Extend) 

SPST Control Contact 

(–) 

(+) 


or 20-30 VDC 

2 

3 

H 

G 

(–) 

(+) 

(–) 

(+) 

MF63123-411 

MF-63123-411 Wiring 

MF22303 Wiring 

Blk 

Red 

Com 

Hot (+DC) 

MA51-7103-100 Wiring 

Black 

Red 

Blue 

Yellow/Black 

Common 

Hot (+DC) 

Retract 

Extend 

Violet 

MF51-7103-100 Wiring 

Blk Com 

Red Hot (+DC) 

Yel/Blk AI 

Violet AO 

MS51-7103-160 Wiring 

Typical 

Floating 

Controller 

SPDT Floating 

MA51-7103-100 

MF51-7103-100 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

MS51-7103-160 

T5 

T4 

B3 

W2 

R1 

24 VAC 

Transformer 

MF-63103 

MF63103 Wiring


JOHNSON CONTROLS GLOBE VALVE / ACTUATOR ASSEMBLIES 

VG7000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The VG7000 Series valves are designed for hot water, 

chilled water, or steam control in HVAC systems. The 

globe design exhibits excellent control with two-way equal 

percentage and three-way linear response. The valves 

come in two- or three-way NPT thread configurations. All 

the valves can be fitted with many different control actuators 

(both electric and pneumatic) and with a variety of 

control signals, spring ranges, and failsafe operation. 

FEATURES 

• 1/2" to 2", two- and three-way 

• Full flow selection with Cv’s from 0.73 to 46 

• Wide actuator selection, electric and pneumatic 

• Corrosion protection with brass and optional stainless 

steel trim 

• Equal percentage and linear characteristics 

• Longevity with over one million cycles tested 

• Serviceability with in-place valve repacking 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

(C) 

C 

Stem Up 

(Two-Way Valve) (NO) 

Three-Way Valve NC 

NO 

A 


Actuator 

Mounting Collar 

D 

B 

Cv range 0.73 to 46 

Flow type Two-way equal percentage; 

three-way linear 

Sizes 1/2" to 2" 

Pressure 365 psig (2517 kPa) brass trim; 

rating 308 psig (2124 kPa) stainless steel trim 

Body Bronze 1/2" to 2" 

Piping FNPT 1/2" to 2" 

VG7241CT VG7842CT 

VALVE SIZE 

in (DN)* 

A 

FACE TO FACE 

ALL VALVES 

DIMENSIONS 

B 

LOWER VALVE 

Two-Way Three-Way 

1/2 (DN15) 3 (7.6) 13/16 (2.1) 1-13/16(4.6) 

3/4 (DN20) 3-7/32 (8.1) 15/16 (2.4) 2-1/8 (5.4) 

1 (DN25) 4-1/8 (10.4) 1-5/32 (2.9) 2-9/19 (6.5) 

1-1/4 (DN32) 4-23/32 (11.9) 1-11/32 (3.4) 2-25/32 (7.0) 

1-1/2 (DN40) 5-1/8 (13.0) 2-5/32 (5.5) 3-3/8 (8.5) 

2 (DN50) 5-29/32 (15.0) 2-1/8 (5.3) 3-3/4 (9.5) 

D 

ACTUATOR COLLAR 

ALL VALVES 

1-3/4 (4.4) 

1-3/4 (4.4) 

2-11/16 (6.8) 

2-13/16 (7.1) 

3-7/16 (8.7) 

3-3/4 (9.5) 

* DN is the European designation for the body size in metric units “cm.” 


Plug Bronze (stainless steel available) 

Seat Bronze (stainless steel available) 

Packing Self adjusting EPR 

Media 35° to 281°F (brass trim) (2° to 138°C) 

35° to 338°F (stainless steel trim) 

(2° to 170°C) 

35 psig (241 kPa) steam 

559 

CONTROL VALVES


560 


JOHNSON CONTROLS GLOBE VALVE / ACTUATOR ASSEMBLIES 

VG7000 SERIES 



VG7 Globe valve NPT thread 

CODE Configuration code for brass trim (Order codes 243, 443, 844 for stainless steel trim respectively) 

241 Two-way N.O. (stem down = closed) 

441 Two-way N.C. (stem down = open) 

842 Three-way mixing 

VALVE FLOW CLOSEOFF FOR ELECTRIC ACTUATORS (psid) 

CODE SIZE (FNPT) Cv 715x 720x 423x 926x 

CT 1/2" 0.73 345 N/A 345 N/A 

ET 1/2" 1.8 345 N/A 345 N/A 

GT 1/2" 4.6 216 N/A 208 N/A 

LT 3/4" 7.3 138 N/A 132 N/A 

NT 1" 11.6 86 N/A 63 N/A 

PT 1-1/4" 18.5 52 N/A 38 111 

RT 1-1/2" 28.9 N/A 70 N/A 71 

ST 2" 46.2 N/A 45 N/A 46 

ASSEMBLY CODE VALVE SIZE AND PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR* 

3008B 1/2" - 1", 3-6 psig, V-3000-8011 (uses VG7000-10xx spring kit) 

3008D 1/2" - 1", 4-8 psig, V-3000-8011 (uses VG7000-10xx spring kit) 

3008E 1/2" - 1", 9-13 psig, V-3000-8011 (uses VG7000-10xx spring kit) 

821C 1/2" - 3/4", 3-7 psig, MP821C001 (SS trim only) 

821D 1/2" - 3/4", 4-8 psig, MP821D001 (SS trim only) 

821E 1/2" - 3/4", 9-13 psig, MP821E001 (SS trim only) 

822C 1" - 1-1/4", 3-7 psig, MP822C001 

822D 1" - 1-1/4", 4-8 psig, MP822D001 

822E 1" - 1-1/4", 9-13 psig, MP822E001 

823C 1-1/2" - 2", 3-7 psig, MP823C001 

823D 1-1/2" - 2", 4-8 psig, MP823D001 

823E 1-1/2" - 2", 9-13 psig, MP823E001 

P Pilot positioner installed for any of the above 

*See V-3000/MP8000 catalog page for specs and close off ratings 

ASSEMBLY CODE VALVE SIZE AND ELECTRIC NON-SPRING RETURN ** 

7150G 1/2" - 1.25" VA-7150-1001, floating 

7152G 1/2" - 1.25" VA-7152-1001, 0-10 VDC control 

7200G 1-1/2" - 2" VA-7200-1001, floating 

7202G 1-1/2" - 2" VA-7202-1001, 0-10 VDC / 0-20 mA control 

**See VA-7000 catalog page for wiring and specs 

ASSEMBLY CODE VALVE SIZE AND ELECTRIC SPRING RETURN *** 

423A 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-AGA-2, floating 

423B 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-BGA-2, two-position 

423G 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-GGA-2, 0-10 VDC Proportional 

926A 1-1/4" - 2" M9000-500+M9216-AGA-2, two-position or floating 

926H 1-1/4'' - 2'' M9000-500+M9216-HGA-2, 0-10 VDC Proportional 

***See VA-4233 catalog page and M9216 catalog page (in Actuators & Dampers 

section) for wiring and specs 

VG7241 CT 3008E P 

Example: VG7241CT/3008EP 1/2" Two-way N.O. 9-13 psig pneumatic valve with positioner.

DESCRIPTION 


JCI DIRECT-MOUNT ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS 

VA-7000, VA-4233 SERIES 

The VA-7000 Series are direct-mount non-spring return 

actuators for use with 1/2" to 2" JCI VG7000 valves in a 

wide range of HVAC applications. They are available for 

three-wire floating control or proportional control. The 

VA-4233 are direct-mount spring return actuators, available 

for two-position, floating, or proportional control. 

FEATURES 


• Simple installation and adjustment 

• No separate linkages 

• Economical yet powerful 


Voltage 

Power/Force 

24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC), 

50/60 Hz 

VA-7150 2.7 VA / 90 lbf (400 N) 

VA-7152 4.7 VA / 90 lbf (400 N) 

VA-7200 6.7 VA / 180 lbf (800 N) 

VA-7202 8.7 VA / 180 lbf (800 N) 

VA-4233 

Ambient rating 

12.0 VA / 61 lbf (271 N) 

VA-715X 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) 

VA-720X 23° to 131°F (-5° to 55°C) 


VA-4233 

Housing 

32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

VA-715X NEMA 1, IP 40, Plenum rated 

VA-720X, -4233 

Input signal 

NEMA 2, IP 42, Plenum rated 

VA-7150, 7200 Three-wire floating 

VA-4233-A Three-wire floating 

VA-7152, 7202 Proportional 0-10 VDC / 0-20 mA 

VA-4233-B Two position 

VA-4233-G Proportional 0-10 VDC / 4-20 mA 

VA-4233-AGA-2 VA-7200 

Impedance 

VA-7152, 7202 100 k� (voltage), 500 � (current) 

VA-4233 200 k� (voltage), 500 � (current) 

Action 

VA-715x, 720x Direct and reverse selectable 

VA-4233 

Stroke time 

Spring-return stem up (


562 


JCI DIRECT-MOUNT ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS, NON-SPRING RETURN 

VA-7000 SERIES 

WIRING 

20-30 VAC 

or 24 VDC 

Common 

COM 

DOWN 

UP 

1 

2 

3 

VA-7150 Tri-state 

VA-7200 Tri-state 

Floating 

Controller 

(white/brown) 

(brown) 

(yellow) 

(white) 

VA-4233-AGX 


Floating 

Controller 

VA-4233-AGX 

Stem Up 

Stem Down 

Power 

Common 

24 VAC 

Dry Contact 

20-30 VAC 

or 24 VDC 

Common 

PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SETUP COMPONENTS 

Zero 

Adjust 

Stroke 

Adjustment 

Input Signal 

Selection 

Volts 

mA 

1 2 3 4 

Setup 

LED 

Stroke 

Jumpers 

1 2 3 4 

8mm 

10mm 

13mm 

19mm 

Fail 

Position 

DOWN UP 

Starting 

Point 

Input Selection 

Jumper 

VA-7152 


DOWN 

0-10 

0-5 

5-10 

Span 

Value 

DA 

RA 

UP 

DA 

RA 

Action 

Selection 

Fail Safe 

Input Signal 

DOWN 

UP 

FB 

Setup 

LED 

VA-7202 


DA (direct acting) 

Signal increase extends stem - stem down on valve 

RA (reverse acting) 

Signal increase retracts stem - stem up on valve 

Long/short 

Selection 

Jumper 

Stroke 

Potentiometer 

Direct/Reverse 

Action Selection 

Jumper 

VA-4233-BGX 


AC 

COM 

COM 

IN 

1 

2 

3 

4 

VA-7152 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 

VA-7202 0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA 

(yellow) Stem Down 

(white) 

Common 

24 VAC 

20 VDC @ 25 mA 

0-10, 2-10, 6-9 VDC 

Proportional signal 

from controller 

(gray) 

(white/red) 

Output* 

Feedback 

0-10, 2-10, 6-9 VDC 

or 4-20 mA 

20-30 VAC 

or 24 VDC 

Common 

(red) 

(yellow) 

(white) 

Input 

Power 

Common 

* Available on GGX-2MP models only 

VA-4233-GGX 




VA-7150-1001 Tri-state control valve actuator, 

90 lbf 

VA-7152-1001 Proportional control valve actuator, 

90 lbf 

VA-7200-1001 Tri-state control valve actuator, 

180 lbf 

VA-7202-1001 Proportional control valve actuator, 

180 lbf 

VA-4233-AGA-2 Floating control 

VA-4233-AGC-2 Floating control with two auxiliary 

switches 

VA-4233-BGA-2 Two-position 

VA-4233-BGC-2 Two-position with two auxiliary 

switches 

VA-4233-GGA-2 Proportional 

VA-4233-GGA-2MP Proportional with 20 VDC output 

@ 25 mA 

VA-4233-GGC-2 Proportional with two auxiliary 

switches 

VA-4233-GGC-2MP Proportional with 20 VDC output 

and two auxiliary switches 


M9000-200 Commissioning tool 

VG7000-1016 Bonnet adapter for replacing M100, 

V-400, V-500, MP8000 Series on VG7000 

valves 

V-9999-BC1 Kit for 1/2" to 1-1/4" Invensys VB-7000, 

VB9000 Series valves 

KOV-1 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield


JOHNSON CONTROLS PNEUMATIC VALVE ACTUATORS 

V-3000, MP8000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Johnson Controls offers pneumatic valve assemblies that 

accurately regulate the flow of steam, hot water, or cold 

water through coils and heat exchangers of all types. 

These actuators have a molded, synthetic rubber 

diaphragm contained in a sturdy metal housing that protects 

against dirt and damage. The Johnson pneumatic 

valves can have optional Model V-9502 pilot positioners 

factory mounted for applications requiring very stable, 

accurate control. 

FEATURES 

• Low profile 

• 1/4" poly and 1/8" FNPT air connections 

• Fits all VG7000 valves from 1/2" to 2" 

• Metal die-cast aluminum construction 

• Replaceable synthetic rubber diaphragm 

• Full selection of spring ranges 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

(C) 

C 

Stem Up 

( Two-Way Valve) 

Three-Way Valve 

NO 

A 


(N.O.) 

N.C. 

Valve + Actuator 

C 

DIMENSIONS 

A B C C 

VALVE SIZE FACE TO FACE LOWER VALVE V-3000 MP8000 

ALL VALVES TWO-WAY THREE-WAY ALL VALVES ALL VALVES 

1/2 3 (7.62) 13/16 (0.81) 1-13/16 (4.60) 4.75 (12.07) N/A 

V-3000 Actuator 


Connections Barb for 1/4" or 1/8" poly tube 

1/8" NPT thread for brass fittings 

Housing Cast aluminum with enamel finish 

Diaphragm Synthetic rubber 

Mounting Set screw to VG-7000 valve 


Spring ranges 3-6 psig (21-41 kPa), 4-8 psig 

(28-55 kPa), 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa) 

Dimensions 3"H x 4.5"W (7.62 x 11.43 cm) 

w/ positioner 4.25"H x 6.5"W (10.80 x 16.51 cm) 

Max fluid temp 338°F (170°C) 100 psig (103 kPa) steam 

B 

V-3000 (installed) MP8000 

Note: See VG7000 Series catalog sheet for valve specifications. 

3/4 3-7/32 (8.18) 15/16 (0.94) 2-1/8 (5.40) 4.75 (12.07) N/A 

1 4-1/8 (10.48) 1-5/32 (2.94) 2-9/16 (6.51) 6 (15.24) 10.6 (26.92) 

1-1/4 4-23/32 (11.99) 1-11/32 (3.41) 2-25/32 (7.06) N/A 10.6 (26.92) 

1-1/2 5-1/8 (13.02) 2-5/32 (5.48) 3-3/8 (8.57) N/A 10.6 (26.92) 

2 5-29/32 (15.00) 2-1/8 (5.40) 3-3/4 (9.53) N/A 10.6 (26.92) 

MP8000 Actuator 


Connections Barb for 1/4" or 1/8" poly tube 

1/8" NPT thread for brass fittings 

Housing Steel with painted black finish 

Diaphragm EPDM (25 sq. in.) 

Mounting Threaded nut to VG7000 valve 


Spring ranges 3-6 psig (21-41 kPa), 4-8 psig 

(28-55 kPa), 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa) 

Dimensions 10.7"H x 8.7"W (27.18 x 22.10 cm) 

Max fluid temp 338°F (170°C) 100 psig (262 kPa) steam 

563 

CONTROL VALVES


564 


JOHNSON CONTROLS PNEUMATIC VALVE ACTUATORS 

V-3000, MP8000 SERIES 

VALVE CLOSE OFF TABLE VG SERIES VALVES (shown in N.O./N.C. configurations) 

VALVE SIZE 

(See VG7000 page) 

CLOSEOFF (psid) - N.O./N.C. 

for V-3000 actuator 

CLOSEOFF (psid) - N.O./N.C. 

for MP8000 actuator 

Valve 3-6 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 3-7 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 

Code Size Cv (VG-7000-1001) (VG-7000-1002) (VG-7000-1003) (MP821C001B) (MP821D001B) (MP821E001B) 

CT 1/2" 0.73 345/100 339/142 191/348 308/280 308/308 308/308 

ET 1/2" 1.8 345/100 339/142 191/348 308/280 308/308 308/308 

GT 1/2" 4.6 225/49 192/68 108/168 308/175 308/183 275/308 

LT 3/4" 7.3 144/29 122/41 69/100 308/81 304/109 175/252 

Valve 3-6 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 3-7 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 

Code Size Cv (VG-7000-1004) (VG-7000-1005) (VG-7000-1006) (MP822C001A) (MP822D001A) (MP822E001A) 

NT 1" 11.6 90/17 76/25 42/65 279/70 257/96 148/223 

PT 1-1/4" 18.5 55/10 47/14 26/37 170/40 157/55 90/128 

Valve 3-7 psid 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 

Code Size Cv (MP823C001A) (MP823D001A) (MP823E001A) 

RT 1-1/2" 28.9 109/25 100/34 58/79 

ST 2" 46.2 70/16 64/21 37/50 



V-3000-8011 Valve actuator (Select VG7000 spring kit below) 

VG7000-1001 Spring kit for V-3000 valve actuator 3-6 psig. Use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves 



VG7000-1004 Spring kit for V-3000 valve actuator 3-6 psig. Use with 1" valves 



MP821C001B Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1/2", 3/4" valves 

MP821D001B Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1/2", 3/4" valves 

MP821E001B Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1/2", 3/4" valves 

MP822C001A Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1 - 1 1/4" valves 

MP822D001A Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1 - 1 1/4" valves 

MP822E001A Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1 - 1 1/4" valves 

MP823C001A Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1 1/2 - 2" valves 

MP823D001A Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1 1/2 - 2" valves 

MP823E001A Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (includes linkage). Use with 1 1/2 - 2" valves 


V-9502-75 Pilot positioner for a V-3000 actuator. Order spring kit separately below. 

V-9502-6801 Spring kit for V-9502-75 (V-3000) 

V-9502-95 Pilot positioner for an MP8000 actuator with six springs 

MP8000-6002 V-9502-95 positioner mounting kit 

For use on 

stainless 

steel trim 

valves only


KELE MAX CAP HIGH PERFORMANCE ROTARY VALVES 

V SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Max Cap V Series High-Performance Rotary 

Valve is a unique, industrial grade valve with temperature, 

pressure, leakage, and close-off ratings that far exceed 

those of standard commercial grade control valves. 

The Max Cap V Series eliminates the challenge of assuring 

positive low-leakage close-off in higher pressure systems 

such as those with variable speed pumps. With carbon 

steel body and Standard ANSI 150 pressure-temperature 

ratings, the V Series can handle at least 200 psi differential 

(close-off) in hot or chilled water systems, and up 

to 200 psi saturated steam with any of the available actuators. 

The Max Cap V Series is available with standard Kele 

Revolution direct-coupled actuators, other brand directcoupled 

actuators, industrial grade electric actuators, or 

low pressure or high pressure pneumatic actuators which 

makes them compatible with virtually any building 

automation control system. 

FEATURES 

• > 200 psid close-off, all assemblies 

• Universal NPT/Wafer connections, 1” to 2” sizes 

• Flanged connections 3” to 6” sizes 

• Integral pressure recovery chamber 

• ANSI 150/300 ratings for carbon steel 

• Wide range of actuation choices 

• Modified equal percentage flow characteristic 

• ANSI Class VI leakage 

• ASME B16.10 face-to-face dimensions 

• 300:1 rangeability 

• 5 year warranty on valve body 

VALVE SPECIFICATIONS 

VALVE BODY 

Body material WCB grade carbon steel 

Rotary plug Stainless steel 

Shaft Stainless steel 

Seat Low friction graphite 

Packing Teflon V-ring 

WORKING PRESSURE 

ANSI Class 150 body 285 psi at -20° to 100°F, 

derated to 200 psi at 400°F 

ANSI Class 300 body 740 psi at -20° to 100°F, 

derated to 635 psi at 400°F 

BODY RATINGS 

V1, V15, V2 ANSI 150/300 dual rating 

V3, V4 ANSI 150 (ANSI 300 optional) 

V6 ANSI 150 

V15-2-KAS-44-M 

NPT/Wafer Body 

FLOW COEFFICIENTS (Cv ) FOR MAX CAP V-SERIES 

ROTARY VALVES 

Valve Model, 

Valve Rotation in Degrees 

Size 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90* 

V1, 1" .04 .5 3 5 8 12 17 29 31 

V15, 1.5" .07 3 7 12 21 29 40 68 73 

V2, 2" .09 4 10 21 34 43 65 85 96 

V3, 3" 1 12 29 49 68 117 157 215 270 

V4, 4" 4 22 46 86.1 130 195 279 421 529 

V6, 6" 5 33 79 148 230 330 440 575 850 

*90 degrees, full open, is valve Cv rating. 

MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (CLOSE-OFF) 

ANSI Class 150 body 285 psid at -20° to 100°F, 

derated to 200 psid at 400°F 

ANSI Class 300 body 300 psid at -20° to 400°F 

MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE 

ANSI Class 150 body 400° F 

ANSI Class 300 body 400° F 

V3-2-VSI-1005 

Flange Body 

VALVE MODELS 

V1, 1" NPT/wafer Cv = 31, 35 in-lb torque 

V15, 1-1/2" NPT/wafer Cv = 73, 60 in-lb torque 

V2, 2" NPT/wafer Cv = 96, 100 in-lb torque 

V3, 3" flanged Cv = 270, 140 in-lb torque 



565 

CONTROL VALVES


566 



V SERIES 

ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS 

REVOLUTION ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 

VALVE 

COMPATIBILITY 

KA-35-2T Non-spring, floating, 35 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90 seconds, NEMA 1 V1 

KA-35-P Non-spring, proportional, 35 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90 seconds, NEMA 1 V1 

KA-70-2T Non-spring, floating, 70 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90 seconds, NEMA 1 V15 

KA-70-P Non-spring, proportional, 70 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90 seconds, NEMA 1 V15 

KA-175-2T Non-spring, floating, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC, 95 seconds, NEMA 2 V2, V3 

KA-175-P Non-spring, proportional, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC, 95 seconds, NEMA 2 V2, V3 

KA-301-2T Non-spring, floating, 301 in-lb, 24 VAC, 95 seconds, NEMA 2 V4, V6 

KA-301-P Non-spring, proportional, 301 in-lb, 24 VAC, 95 seconds, NEMA 2 V4, V6 

KAS-44-2 Spring return, two-position, 44 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V1 

KAS-44-M Spring return, modulating (floating and proportional), 44 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V1 

KAS-88-2 Spring return, two-position, 88 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V15 

KAS-88-120 Spring return, two-position, 88 in-lb, 120 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V1, V15 

KAS-88-M Spring return, modulating (floating and proportional), 88 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V15 

KAS-175-2 Spring return, two-position, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V2, V3, V4 

KAS-175-120 Spring return, two-position, 175 in-lb,120 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V2, V3, V4 

KAS-175-M Spring return, modulating (floating and proportional), 175 in-lb, 24 VAC, 90/20 seconds, NEMA 2 V2, V3, V4 

NOTE: Other manufacturers' direct-coupled actuators also available with the Max Cap V Series valve. See Table 1. 

KOEI ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 

VSI-1005 Non-spring, two-position, 347 in-lb, 120 VAC, 25 seconds, NEMA 4 V1-V4 

VSI-BB1005 Battery-backup, two-position, 347 in-lb, 120 VAC, 25 seconds, NEMA 4 V1-V4 

VSI-1010S Non-spring, proportional (2-10 VDC), 868 in-lb, 120 VAC, 25 seconds, NEMA 4 V1-V6 

VSI-1010 Non-spring, two-position, 868 in-lb, 120 VAC, 25 seconds, NEMA 4 V6 

VSI-BB1020 Battery-backup, two-position, 1736 in-lb, 120 VAC, 25 seconds, NEMA 4 V6 

PNEUMATIC LOW PRESSURE ACTUATORS 

D-3153-5130 Spring return, 20-25 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 158 in-lb V1-V3 

D-3153-5120 Spring return, 20-25 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 158 in-lb V1-V3 

D-3244-5110 Spring return, 20-25 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 328 in-lb V4 

D-3244-5100 Spring return, 20-25 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 328 in-lb V4 

D-3246-5110 Spring return, 20-25 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 491 in-lb V6 

D-3246-5100 Spring return, 20-25 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 491 in-lb V6 

PNEUMATIC HIGH PRESSURE ACTUATORS 

DA60/SOL Non-spring double-acting, 80-115 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 531 in-lb V1-V4 

DA60/POS Non-spring double-acting, 80-115 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 531 in-lb V1-V4 

DA90/SOL Non-spring double-acting, 80-115 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 797 in-lb V6 

DA90/POS Non-spring double-acting, 80-115 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 797 in-lb V6 

SR60/SOL Spring return, 80-115 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 531 in-lb V1-V4 

SR60/POS Spring return, 80-115 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 531 in-lb V1-V4 

SR90/SOL Spring return, 80-115 psig supply, two-position, 24 VAC solenoid, 797 in-lb V6 

SR90/POS Spring return, 80-115 psig supply, proportional 3-15 psi, 797 in-lb V6



V SERIES 

TABLE 1. MAX CAP V SERIES VALVE / ACTUATOR COMBINATIONS 

Valve 

Model 

Actuator Vendor 

Floating/ 

2-pos 

Electric NEMA 4 (Industrial Grade) Pneumatic (High Pressure = 80-115 psi; Low Pressure = 20-25 psi) 

Non-fail safe Fail safe (battery) Non-spring-return Spring-return 

Valve 

Model 2-pos Proportional 2-pos Proportional 

Electric NEMA 1, 2 (Direct-Coupled Actuators) 

Non-spring return Spring return 

Proportional Floating Proportional 

High 

pressure 

2-pos 

High 

pressure 

proportional 

Low 

pressure 

2-pos 

2-pos 

24 VAC 

Low 

pressure 

proportional 

High 

pressure 

2-pos 

2-pos 

120 VAC 

V1 Kele KA-35-2T KA-35-P KAS-44-M KAS-44-M KAS-44-2 KAS-88-120 

Honeywell ML6161D2006 ML7161A2008 S05010 S05010 S0524-2POS S05120-2POS 

Belimo LM24 LM24-SR LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF120 

JCI M9104-AGA2 M9104-GGA2 M9206-AGA2 M9206-GGA2 M9206-BGA2 

Siemens GDE131.1P GDE161.1P GMA131.1U GMA161.1U GMA121.1P GMA221.1U 

Invensys MF40-6043 MS40-6043 MF40-7043 MF40-7043 MA40-7043 MA40-7040 


Honeywell ML6174D2009 ML7174A2001 S10010 S10010 S1024-2POS S10120-2POS 

Belimo NM24 NM24-SR NF24-3 NF24-SR NF24 NF120 

JCI M9108-AGA2 M9108-GGA2 M9206-AGA2 M9206-GGA2 M9206-BGA2 

Siemens GLB131.1P GLB161.1P GMA131.1U GMA161.1U GMA121.1P GMA221.1U 

Invensys MF40-6083 MS40-6083 MF40-7073 MS40-7073 MA40-7073 MA40-7070 


Honeywell N2024 N20010 S20010 S20010 S2024-2POS S20120-2POS 

Belimo AM24 AM24-SR AF24-3 AF24-SR AF24 AF120 

JCI M9116-AGA2 M9116-GGA2 M9216-AGA2 M9216-HGA2 M9216-BGA2 

Siemens GBB171.1P GBB161.1U GCA131.1U GCA161.1U GCA121.1P GCA221.1U 



Honeywell N2024 N20010 S20010 S20010 S2024-2POS S20120-2POS 

Belimo AM24 AM24-SR AF24-3 AF24-SR AF24 AF120 

JCI M9116-AGA2 M9116-GGA2 M9216-AGA2 M9216-HGA2 M9216-BGA2 

Siemens GBB171.1P GBB161.1U GCA131.1U GCA161.1U GCA121.1P GCA221.1U 


V4 Kele KA-301-2T KA-301-P KAS-175-M (2) KAS-175-M (2) KAS-175-2 (2) KAS-175-120 (2) 

Honeywell N3424 N34010 S20010 (2) S20010 (2) S2024-2POS (2) S20120-2POS (2) 

Belimo GM24 GM24-SR AF24-3 (2) AF24-SR (2) AF24 (2) AF120 (2) 

JCI M9132-AGA2 M9132-GGA2 M9216-AGA2 (2) M9216-HGA2 (2) M9216-BGA2 (2) 

Siemens GIB171.1P GIB161.1P GCA131.1U (2) GCA161.1U (2) GCA121.1P (2) GCA221.1U (2) 

Invensys MF40-6343 MS40-6343 MF40-7173 (2) MS40-7173 (2) MA40-7173 (2) MA40-7170 (2) 

V6 Kele KA-301-2T (2) KA-301-P (2) na na na na 

Honeywell N3424 (2) N34010 (2) 

Siemens GIB171.1P (2) GIB161.1P (2) 

Invensys MF40-6343 (2) MS40-6343 (2) 

High 

Pressure 

proportional 

V1 VSI-1005 VSI-1010/S VSI-BB1005 na DA60/SOL DA60/POS D-3153-5130 D-3153-5120 SR60/SOL SR60/POS 





V6 VSI-1010 VSI-1010/S VSI-BB1020 na DA90/SOL DA90/POS D-3246-5110 (2) D-3246-5100 (2) SR90/SOL SR90/POS 

567 

CONTROL VALVES


568 



V SERIES 

REVOLUTION (KA / KAS) ACTUATOR WIRING 

1 

2 

Relay Contact 

or Switch 

2 

3 

4 

2 

3 

4 

24 VAC 

KAS-175-2 


N 

L1 


N 

L 

24 VAC 

KA-301-2T 


KOEI (VSI) AND PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR WIRING / PIPING 

yellow 

green 

24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

KA-301-2T 


Line 

Voltage 

- IN + 

- OUT + 

110 VAC 2-10 VDC 4-20 mA 

VSI-1010/S 

2-10 VDC 

Solenoid 

Valve 

Line 

Voltage 

Line 

Voltage 

DA Pneumatic Actuator (two-position) 

with ASCO 8380 Solenoid Valve 

24 VAC Power Signal 

1 

2 

Relay Contact 

or Switch 

L1 

120 VAC N 

G 

Control Input 

VSI-BB1005, BB1020 

Two-Position Battery Backup 

1/4"FNPT 

Supply Air 

80-115 psig 

120 VAC 

KAS-175-120 


L1 

L2 

1 L 

2 N 

3 G 

4 COM 

5 Open 

6 Close 

DA 

Actuator 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 


KA-301-P 


24 VAC Power 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

C2 7 

INT 8 

C3 9 

NO 10 

NC 11 

24 VAC 

KA-35-2T, KA-35-VAV, KA-70-2T 

Two-Position/Tri-State 

24 VAC 

+ 

– 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 

24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

KAS-175-M 


N 

120 VAC Control 

L1 

Close to defeat 

failsafe on power 

outage 

Contact Out 

CAM Adusted 

Line 

Voltage 

Line 

Voltage 

VSI-1005, 1010 

Two-Position 

Signal 

Supply 

CW 

COM 

CCW 

Aux 

Cont. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

KA-301-P 


24 VDC Power 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

1 Power 

Open 

Close 

Open 

3-15 psig Signal 

1/4" FNPT 

Close 

HTR 

80-150 psig Supply Air 

1/4" FNPT 

SR Pneumatic Actuator (proportional) 

with VRC VP positioner 

80-115 psig with 3-15 psig Signal 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Internal 

Connection 

KA-35-P, KA-70-P 

2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA 

+ 

– 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


24 VAC 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


+ 

– 

KAS-175-M 


24 VDC 

Line 

Voltage 

* 500Ω, 1/2"W or greater resistor required 


T 1 

T 2 

- 

+ 

+ 

24 VAC 

Common 

4-20 mA 

2-10 VDC

J 



V SERIES 

VALVE DIMENSIONS - in (cm) 

J 

B 

B 

A 

Dimensions, 

inches 

V1 V15 V2 V3 V4 V6 

A 

5.00 

(12.7) 

6.50 

(16.5) 

7.00 

(17.8) 

8.00 

(20.3) 

9.00 

(22.9) 

10.5 

(26.7) 

B 

1.81 

(4.6) 

2.13 

(5.4) 

2.59 

(6.6) 

3.54 

(9.0) 

4.33 

(11.0) 

5.06 

(12.9) 

C 

3.19 

(8.1) 

4.37 

(11.1) 

4.44 

(11.3) 

4.46 

(11.3) 

4.67 

(11.9) 

5.44 

(13.8) 

D 

1.25 

(3.2) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

H 

.39 

(1.0) 

.39 

(1.0) 

.39 

(1.0) 

.55 

(1.4) 

.55 

(1.4) 

.55 

(1.4) 

BC 

2.75 

(7.0) 

2.75 

(7.0) 

2.75 

(7.0) 

4.01 

(10.2) 

4.01 

(10.2) 

4.01 

(10.2) 

J 

4.00 

(10.2) 

4.80 

(12.2) 

5.00 

(12.7) 

6.00 

(15.2) 

7.00 

(17.8) 

8.00 

(20.3) 

No. of bolts — — — 4-150 

8-300 

8 8 

Weight - 9.00 14.00 

lbs. (kg) (4.1) (6.19) 19.00 38.00 

(8.6) (17.00) 57.00 

(26.00) 91.00 

(41.3) 

A 

D 

D 

C 

C 

Bolt circle 

(BC) 

diameter 

V1, V15, V2 NPT/Wafer Body 

Bolt circle 

(BC) 

diameter 

K DIMENSIONS 

Actuator and Bracket 

KA-35-2T 6.8 (17.2) 

KA-35-P 6 (15.2) 

K = height from top 

of bonnet to top 

of actuator 

Valve Bonnet 

K DIMENSIONS inches (cm) 

KA-70-2T 6.8 (17.2) 

KA-70-P 6 (15.2) 

V1 V15 V2 V3 V4 V6 

KA-175-2T 6.9 (17.5) 6.9 (17.5) 

KA-175-P 6.9 (17.5) 6.9 (17.5) 

KA-301-2T 6.9 (17.5) 10.1 (25.6) 

KA-301-P 6.9 (17.5) 10.1 (25.6) 

KAS-44-2 5.9 (14.9) 

KAS-44-M 5.9 (14.9) 

KAS-88-2 5.9 (14.9) 

KAS-88-120 5.9 (14.9) 5.9 (14.9) 

KAS-88-M 5.9 (14.9) 

KAS-175-2 5.9 (14.9) 5.9 (14.9) 9.1 (23.1) 

KAS-175-120 5.9 (14.9) 5.9 (14.9) 9.1 (23.1) 

KAS-175-M 5.9 (14.9) 5.9 (14.9) 9.1 (23.1) 

VSI-1005 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 

VSI-BB1005 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 7.1 (18.0) 

VSI-1010 8.2 (20.8) 

VSI-1010/S 8.2 (20.8) 8.2 (20.8) 8.2 (20.8) 8.2 (20.8) 8.2 (20.8) 8.2 (20.8) 

VSI-BB1020 8.6 (21.8) 

D-3153-5130 13 (33.0) 13 (33.0) 13 (33.0) 13 (33.0) 

D-3153-5120 16 (40.6) 16 (40.6) 16 (40.6) 16 (40.6) 

D-3244-5110 18 (45.7) 

D-3244-5100 18 (45.7) 

D-3246-5110 21 (53.3) 

D-3246-5100 21 (53.3) 

DA60/SOL 4.8 (12.2) 4.8 (12.2) 4.8 (12.2) 4.8 (12.2) 4.8 (12.2) 

DA60/POS 9.8 (24.9) 9.8 (24.9) 9.8 (24.9) 9.8 (24.9) 9.8 (24.9) 

SR60/SOL 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 

SR60/POS 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) 

DA90/SOL 5.1 (12.9) 

DA90/POS 10.1 (25.6) 

SR90/SOL 5.8 (14.7) 

SR90/POS 5.8 (14.7) 

569 

CONTROL VALVES


570 



V SERIES 

V3 2 KAS-175-M 

*See Figure 1 below. 


MODEL SIZE DESCRIPTION 

V1 1" NPT/Wafer, Cv = 31 

V15 1.5" NPT/Wafer, Cv = 73 

V2 2" NPT/Wafer, Cv = 96 

V3 3" flanged, Cv = 270 



PORT CODE 

2 Two-way (one valve body) 

3 Three-way (two valve bodies and a tee, see Figure 1; available in V3, V4, V6 only) 

STANDARD ACTUATORS (see Table 1 for valid valve/actuator combinations and non-standard actuators) 

KA-35-2T 35 in-lb, non-spring return, tri-state (floating) control 

KA-35-P 35 in-lb, non-spring return, proportional control 







KAS-44-2 44 in-lb, spring return, two-position 24 VAC 

KAS-44-M 44 in-lb, spring return, modulating (floating + proportional.) control 







VSI-1005 347 in-lb, non-spring return, two-position 120 VAC 

VSI-BB1005 347 in-lb, battery backup, two-position 120 VAC 

VSI-1010 868 in-lb, non-spring return, two-position 120 VAC 

VSI-1010/S 868 in-lb, non-spring return, modulating, 120 VAC 

VSI-BB1020 1736 in-lb, battery backup, two-position 120 VAC 

D-3153-5130 158 in-lb, LP pneumatic, SR, two-position 24 VAC 

D-3153-5120 158 in-lb, LP pneumatic, SR, proportional 3-15 psi 





DA60/SOL 531 in-lb, HP pneumatic, DA/NSR, two-position 24 VAC 

DA60/POS 531 in-lb, HP pneumatic, DA/NSR, proportional 3-15 psi 

SR60/SOL 531 in-lb, HP pneumatic, SR, two-position 24 VAC 

SR60/POS 531 in-lb, HP pneumatic, SR, proportional 3-15 psi 

DA90/SOL 797 in-lb, HP Pneumatic, DA/NSR, two-position 24 VAC 

DA90/POS 797 in-lb, HP pneumatic, DA/NSR, proportional 3-15 psi 

SR90/SOL 797 in-lb, HP pneumatic, SR, two-position 24 VAC 

SR90/POS 797 in-lb, HP pneumatic, SR, proportional 3-15 psi 

NORMAL POSITION (Must select one for spring-return actuators, 2-way only) 

NO Normally open 

NC Normally closed 

OPTIONS (Consult Kele for special pricing) 

300 ANSI 300 rated flanged valve body (3" and 4" sizes only) 

WS Weather shield for NEMA 1, 2 direct-coupled actuators 

SW2 Dual SPDT aux. switch for KA-175, -300, KAS-44, -88, -175 actuators 

/ 

TABLE 1. THREE-WAY ARRANGEMENT (actuators will be mounted on top of the NC valve)* 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Valve A = NC, valve B = NO* 

Valve A = NC, valve C = NO* 

Valve B = NC, valve C = NO* 

Valve B = NC, valve A = NO* 

Valve C = NC, valve B = NO* 

Valve C = NC, valve A = NO* 

Note: The three-way arrangement code is 

not part of the model number and 

does not affect pricing but must be 

specified for all three-way valves. 

Also specify mixing or diverting. 

Example: V3-2 / KAS-175-M Two-way 3" V Series valve with electric spring-return 

modulating actuator 

FIGURE 1. THREE-WAY ARRANGEMENT – IMPORTANT: Also specify MIXING or DIVERTING 

A 

B 

Arrangement No. 1 

A 

C 


B 

C 


A 

B 


B 

C 


A 

C 

Arrangement No. 6


KELE STAINLESS STEEL DISC BUTTERFLY VALVES 

KBV SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele KBV Series Stainless Steel Disc Butterfly Valves 

are rated up to 200 psig (1379 kPa) and 275°F (135°C). They 

are available in full-lug designs for pipe sizes 2" through 24". 

The KBV Series features bubble-tight shutoff with an EPDM 

seat face. A ductile iron body and 316 stainless steel disc and 

shaft are standard. The valves come assembled, ready to install, 

with electric or pneumatic actuators. 

FEATURES 

• Typically ship within five days 

• 316 stainless steel disc and stem 

• NEMA 4X electric actuation 

• Bubble-tight closeoff/dead-end service 

• Electric, pneumatic, or manual operation 

• Full-lug valve bodies 

• Service up to 200 psig @ 275°F 

• Weather shields available for NEMA 1 actuators 

• High performance available 

• Assemblies include a 30% torque safety factor 

• One SPDT fully adjustable auxiliary switch in 

two-position 120 VAC actuators 

• Heater standard in 120 VAC actuators 


Valve Body 

Flow type Equal percentage 

Body Ductile iron 

Seat Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer 

(EPDM) bubble-tight shutoff, 

rated for dead-end service 

Shaft/Taper pin 316 stainless steel 

Disc 316 stainless steel 

Weather seal BUNA-N ® O-ring 

Bearings Teflon (PTFE) 

Static pressure 200 psig (1379 kPa) 2" to 12" 

150 psig (1034 kPa) 14" to 24" 

Media Water and glycol (not for steam service) 

Note: Specify when application is glycol; 

a full-cut disc will be used for tightest 

possible seal. 

Fluid temp 

Max 275°F (135°C) 2" to 16" 

225°F (107°C) 18" to 24" 

Min -30°F (-34°C) 

Min closeoff 100 psid (690 kPa) 

[Call Trane for higher closeoff requirements.] 

Mounting type Standard full-lug body ANSI 125/150 

flanges [Wafer style is available.] 

KBV-2-6-E2SO 

KBV-2-2-EMSC 

KBV-2-3-M 

Pneumatic Actuator 

Main air 

HP actuator code 80-115 psig (552-793 kPa) 

P actuator code 20-25 psig (138-172 kPa) 

Control signals 

Modulating 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) with positioner 

Two-position 24 VAC solenoid, 9 VA (12 VA inrush) 

Air connection 

HP actuator code 1/4" NPT supply, 1/8" NPT signal 

P actuator code 1/8'' NPT barbed fitting for 5/32'' or 

1/4'' OD polytubing 


Electric Actuator 

(SR - spring return) (NSR - non-spring return) 

Power 24 VAC ±20% (2" to 6" NSR, 2" to 4" SR), 

120 VAC (>8" NSR, >5" SR) 


Control signals Two-position or modulating (0-10V) 

Enclosure 

KA/KAS models 24 VAC NEMA 1 

VSI/RC models 120 VAC NEMA 4X 

Manual Operation (two-way valves only) 

2" to 6" Use 10-position lever operators 

KBV-2-8-HP2 

571 

CONTROL VALVES


572 



KBV SERIES 

ACTUATOR / VALVE COMBINATIONS (NSR-Non-Spring Return, SR-Spring Return) 

VALVE 

SIZE Two-position/Floating NSR 

2" KA-175-2T (or VSI-1005) 

2.5" KA-175-2T (or VSI-1005) 

3" KA-301-2T (or VSI-1005) 

4" KA-301-2T (or VSI-1005) 

5" KA-301-2T (or VSI-1010)* 

6" KA-301-2T (or VSI-1010)* 

8" VSI-1020 

10" VSI-1020 

12" VSI-1040 

14" VSI-1040 (-1060, 3W) 

16" VSI-1060(-1100, 3W) 

18" VSI-1100 

20" VSI-1150 

24" VSI-1200 

Act. Code E2 (or E2-KOEI) 

ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 

Modulating NSR 

KA-175-P (or VSI-1010/S) 

KA-175-P (or VSI-1010/S) 

KA-301-P (or VSI-1010/S) 

KA-301-P (or VSI-1010/S) 

*KA-301-P (or VSI-1010/S) 

*KA-301-P (or VSI-1010/S) 

VSI-1020/S 

VSI-1020/S 

VSI-1040/S 

VSI-1040/S (-1060/S, 3W) 

VSI-1060/S (-1100/S, 3W) 

VSI-1100/S 

VSI-1150/S 

VSI-1200/S 

EM (or EM-KOEI) 

Two-position SR 

KAS-175-2 (or VSI-BB1005) 

KAS-175-2 (or VSI-BB1005) 

KAS-175-2 (or VSI-BB1005)* 

KAS-175-2 (or VSI-BB1005)* 

VSI-BB-1020 

VSI-BB-1020 

VSI-BB-1020 

VSI-BB-1020 (-1100, 3W) 

VSI-BB-1100 

VSI-BB-1100 

VSI-BB-1100 

VSI-BB-1100 

VSI-BB-1100 (N/A, 3W) 

N/A 

E2SO/E2SC (or E2BB-KOEI) 

Modulating SR 

KAS-175-M 

KAS-175-M 

KAS-175-M* 

KAS-175-M* 

RC240SR** 

RC240SR** 

RC250SR** 

RC250SR** 

RC260SR** 

RC265SR** 

RC270SR** 

RC280SR** 

RC280SR (N/A, 3W)** 

N/A 

EMSO/EMSC 

*Tandem-mount dual actuators 

**Delivery of RC actuators is 8-10 weeks 

As an option, the VSI-1000 and VSI-BB1000 Series actuators can be ordered assembled on the smaller valves if required, in 

place of the KA and KAS actuators by adding -KOEI suffix to the model number. Contact Kele for details on this or other optional 

features such as 24 VAC or 24 VDC power and feedback signals. 

VALVE HIGH PRESSURE PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS (80-115 psig) 

SIZE Two-position NSR Modulating NSR Two-position SR Modulating SR 

2" DA60/SOL DA60/POS SR60/SOL SR60/POS 

2.5" DA60/SOL DA60/POS SR60/SOL SR60/POS 

3" DA60/SOL (DA90, 3W) DA60/POS (DA90, 3W) SR60/SOL (SR90, 3W) SR60/POS (SR90, 3W) 











Act. Code HP2 HPM HP2SO/HP2C HPMSO/HPMSC 

VALVE 

SIZE 

LOW PRESSURE PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS 

SPRING RETURN (20-25 psig) 

Two-position SR 

2" D-3153-5130 

2.5" D-3153-5130 

3" D-3153-5130 

4" D-3244-5110 

5" D-3246-5110 

6" D-3246-5110 (X2, 3W) 

8" D-3246-5110 (X2) 

10" D-3246-5110 (X2) (N/A, 3W) 

Act. Code P2SO/P2SC 

Modulating SR 

D-3153-5120 

D-3153-5120 

D-3153-5120 

D-3244-5100 

D-3246-5100 

D-3246-5100 (X2, 3W) 

D-3246-5100 (X2) 

D-3246-5100 (X2) (N/A, 3W) 

PMSO/PMSC



KBV SERIES 

VALVE DIMENSIONS 

VALVE FACE-TO-FACE DIMENSION 

PORT TYPE DIM. 2" 2.5" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 24" 

2-Way A 1.75" 1.87" 1.87" 2.12" 2.25" 2.25" 2.50" 2.75" 3.12" 3.12" 3.50" 4.25" 5.25" 6.12" 

3-Way B 4.50" 5.00" 5.50" 6.50" 7.50" 8.00" 9.00" 11.00" 12.00" 14.00" 15.00" 16.50" 18.00" 22.00" 

C 6.25" 6.88" 7.37" 8.63" 9.75" 10.25" 11.50" 13.75" 15.13" 17.13" 18.50" 20.75" 23.25" 28.12" 

Height w/o Act. D 6.38" 6.88" 7.13" 7.88" 8.38" 8.88" 10.25" 11.50" 13.25" 14.5" 15.75" 16.63" 18.88" 22.13" 

Weight 2-way lb/kg 7 (3.2) 8 (3.3) 14 (6.4) 26 (11.8) 28 (12.7) 31 (14.1) 49 (22.2) 72 (32.7) 105 (47.6) 155 (70.3) 195 (88.5) 230 (104.3) 396 (180) 610 (217) 

Weight 3-way lb/kg 34 (15.4) 51 (23.1) 68 (30.8) 117 (53.1) 136 (61.7) 157 (71.2) 253 (114.8) 414 (187.8) 595 (269.9) 745 (337.9) 940 (426.4) 1125 (510.3) 1677 (761) 2550(1157) 

Mounting lugs 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 16 20 20 

D 

A 

B C 

Two-Way Valve Bodies 

ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS 

C 

Three-Way Tee-Mounted Valve Bodies 

Electric Electric Control Torque (in-lb) Failsafe Timing Dimensions L x W x H Coupling 

Actuator Power Signal Nm = in-lb x .113 Operation (sec) (in) Height (in) Weight lb (kg) 

KA-(175/301) 24 VAC, 9 VA Two-position or 2-10V 175/301 No 95 8.8 x 3.6 x 3.9 3 3.2 (1.4) 

KAS-175 24 VAC, 16 VA Two-position or 0-10V 175 Yes 90 9.8 x 3.9 x 2.9 3 7.0 (3.2) 

VSI-1020 120 VAC, 1.25A Two-position 1736 No 25 10.4 x 6.2 x 5.5 3 17.0 (7.7) 

VSI-1040 120 VAC, 1.66A Two-position 3472 No 25 10.4 x 6.2 x 5.5 3 19.0 (8.6) 

VSI-1060 120 VAC, 1.62A Two-position 5208 No 25 15.0 x 9.5 x 6.7 6 44.0 (20) 

VSI-1100 120 VAC, 2.28A Two-position 8680 No 25 15.0 x 9.5 x 6.7 6 46.0 (21) 

VSI-1150 120 VAC, 2.33A Two-position 13,059 No 37 15.0 x 6.7 x 10.0 6 48.0 (22) 

VSI-1200 120 VAC, 2.40A Two-position 17,359 No 50 15.0 x 6.7 x 10.0 6 53.0 (24) 

VSI-1020S 120 VAC, 1.8A 4-20 mA or 1.5 VDC (200 kΩ) 1736 No 12 10.4 x 6.2 x 5.5 3 18.0 (8.1) 

VSI-1040S 120 VAC, 1.8A 4-20 mA or 1.5 VDC (200 kΩ) 3472 No 25 10.4 x 6.2 x 5.5 3 18.0 (8.1) 

VSI-1060S 120 VAC, 1.62A 4-20 mA or 1.5 VDC (200 kΩ) 5208 No 25 15.0 x 9.5 x 6.7 6 44.0 (20) 

VSI-1100S 120 VAC, 2.8A 4-20 mA or 1.5 VDC (200 kΩ) 8680 No 25 15.0 x 9.5 x 6.7 6 46.0 (21) 

VSI-1150S 120 VAC, 3.4A 4-20 mA or 1.5 VDC (200 kΩ) 13,059 No 37 15.0 x 6.7 x 10.0 6 48.0 (22) 

VSI-1200S 120 VAC, 4.0A 4-20 mA or 1.5 VDC (200 kΩ) 17,359 No 50 15.0 x 6.7 x 10.0 6 51.0 (23) 

VSI-BB1020 120 VAC, 2.0A Two-position 1736 Yes 25 10.4 x 6.2 x 5.5 3 20.0 (9) 

VSI-BB1100 120 VAC, 3.0A Two-position 8680 Yes 25 15.0 x 9.5 x 6.7 6 38.0 (17) 

RC240SR 120 VAC, 3.0A 0-10V (100 kΩ) 840 Yes 10 22.3 x 30.9 x 11.5 2 90.0 (40.8) 

RC250SR 120 VAC, 1.5 hp 0-10V (100 kΩ) 1240 Yes 15 22.3 x 26.5 x 13.4 3 102.0 (46.3) 




RC280SR 

Notes: 

120 VAC, 1.5 hp 0-10V (100 kΩ) 11066 Yes 100 40.0 x 26.5 x 18.0 6 235.0 (106.6) 

1. The KA and KAS Series actuators are Kele-brand direct-coupled actuators with NEMA 1 enclosures. They are used on smaller 

sized valves (


574 



KBV SERIES 

PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS 

, p ( ) ( ) 

Pneumatic Pneumatic Control Max Failsafe Timing Dimensions L x W x H Coupling 

Actuator Air Source (psig) Signal Torque (in-lb) Operation (sec) in (cm) Height in (cm) Weight lb (kg) 

DA60/SOL 80-115 24 VAC (6.3W) 531 No 15 7.8 x 2.6 x 2.8 (19.8 x 6.6 x 7.1) 2 (5.1) 3.3 (1.5) 





DA360/SOL 80-115 24 VAC (6.3W) 3186 No 15 13.8 x 4.4 x 4.7 (35 x 11.1 x 11.9) 4 (10.2) 15.4 (6.9) 





DA60/POS 80-115 3-15 psig positioner 531 No 15 7.8 x 2.6 x 7.8 (19.8 x 6.6 x 19.8) 2 (5.1) 7.3 (3.3) 





DA360/POS 80-115 3-15 psig positioner 3186 No 15 13.8 x 4.4 x 9.7 (35 x 11.1 x 24.6) 4 (10.2) 19.4 (8.8) 





SR60/SOL 80-115 24 VAC (6.3W) 531 Yes 15 12.6 x 3.2 x 3.4 (32 x 8.1 x 8.6) 2 (5.1) 7.7 (3.5) 

SR90/SOL 80-115 24 VAC (6.3W) 797 Yes 15 14.1 x 3.5 x 3.8 (35.8 x 8.8 x 9.6) 2 (5.1) 10.8 (4.9) 








SR60/POS 80-115 3-15 psig positioner 531 Yes 15 12.6 x 3.2 x 3.4 (32 x 8.1 x 8.6) 2 (5.1) 11.7 (5.3) 

SR90/POS 80-115 3-15 psig positioner 797 Yes 15 14.1 x 3.5 x 3.8 (35.8 x 8.8 x 9.6) 2 (5.1) 14.8 (6.7) 









D-3153-5130 20-25 24 VAC (6.3W) 158 Yes 15 16.0 x 8.0 x 10.0 (40.6 x 20.3 x 25.4) 3 (7.6) 14.0 (6.4) 

D-3244-5110 20-25 24 VAC (6.3W) 328 Yes 15 20.0 x 10 x 12.0 (50.8 x 25.4 x 30.4) 4 (10.2) 24.0 (10.9) 

D-3246-5110 20-25 24 VAC (6.3W) 491 Yes 15 24.0 x 12.0 x 14.0 (60.9 x 30.4 x 35.5) 5 (12.7) 35.0 (15.9) 

D-3153-5120 20-25 3-15 psig positioner 158 Yes 15 16.0 x 10.0 x 12.0 (40.6 x 25.4 x 30.4) 3 (7.6) 14.0 (6.4) 

D-3244-5100 20-25 3-15 psig positioner 328 Yes 15 20.0 x 12.0 x 14.0 (50.8 x 30.4 x 35.5) 4 (10.2) 24.0 (10.9) 

D-3246-5100 

Notes: 

20-25 3-15 psig positioner 491 Yes 15 24.0 x 14.0 x 16.0 (60.9 x 35.5 x 40.6) 5 (12.7) 35.0 (15.9) 

1. The DA Series actuators are high pressure, double acting, fail-in-place industrial-grade actuators. The /SOL models are actuated 

by a solenoid valve for two-position service and designated by HP2 in the actuator code. The /POS models are controlled 

by an integral positioner for modulating service and designated by HPM in the actuator code. 

2. The SR Series is similar to the DA Series except it consists of spring return actuators for failsafe operation. The /SOL models 

are actuated by a solenoid valve for two-position service and designated by HP2SO or HP2SC in the actuator code. The 

/POS models are controlled by an integral positioner for modulating service and designated by HPMSO or HPMSC in the actuator 

code. 

3. The D-3000 Series consists of low-pressure spring return actuators. Some models are actuated by a solenoid valve for twoposition 

service and designated by P2SO or P2SC in the actuator code. Other models are controlled by an integral positioner 

for modulating service and designated by PMSO or PMSC in the actuator code.



KBV SERIES 

WIRING / PIPING 

+ IN - 

L1 


N 

H N 

yellow 

yellow 

green 

- OUT + 

4-20 mA 110 VAC 4-20 mA 

L1 

120 VAC N 

Control Input G 

VSI-1000 

4-20 mA - 

1 L 

2 N 

3 G 

4 COM 

5 Open 

6 Close 

C2 7 

INT 8 

C3 9 

NO 10 

NC 11 

VSI-BB1020, BB1100 

Two-position 

Close to defeat 

failsafe on power 

outage 

Contact Out 

CAM Adusted 

DA Pneumatic Actuator (two-position) 

with ASCO 8380 

24 VAC Power Signal 

KA / KAS ACTUATOR WIRING 

1 

2 

Relay Contact 

or Switch 

2 

3 

4 

2 

3 

4 

24 VAC 

KAS-175-2 


24 VAC 

KA-301-2T 


24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

KA-301-2T 


Line 

Voltage 

1 

2 

Line 

Voltage 

Line 

Voltage 

Relay Contact 

or Switch 

1/4"FNPT 

Supply Air 

80-115 psig 

120 VAC 

KAS-175-120 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

N 

120 VAC Control 

L1 

0-10 VDC 

+ 

– 

5 

4 

Signal 

Common 

G 

3 GND 

120 VAC L1 

2 L1 

N 1 N 

24 VAC 

+ 

– 

RC200 Spring Return 

0-10V, 0-20 mA with 500Ω Resistor 

1/4" FNPT 


VSI-1000 

Two-position/Tri-state 

Signal 

Supply 

Aux 

Cont. 

3-15 psig Signal 

1/4" FNPT 

1 Power 

Open 

Close 

Open 

Close 

HTR 

80-150 psig Air 

SR Pneumatic Actuator (proportional) 

with VRC VP positioner 

80-115 psig with 3-15 psig Signal 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 

Line 

Voltage 

KA-301-P 


24 VAC Power 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

24 VAC 

Floating 

Controller 

KAS-175-M 


Line 

Voltage 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

+ 

– 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


+ 

– 

24 VDC 

KA-301-P 


24 VDC Power 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

24 VAC 

0/2-10 VDC or 

0/4-20 mA 


KAS-175-M 


Line 

Voltage 

* 500Ω, 1/2"W or greater resistor required 


575 

CONRTOL VALVES


576 



KBV SERIES 

MODEL 

KBV 


DESCRIPTION 

Kele butterfly valve with stainless steel disc 

PORT CODE 

2 Two-way valve 

3 Three-way valve (must specify three-way arrangement, see Figure 1 below) 

SIZE CODE VALVE SIZE (CV) @ 90 (TWO-POSITION) (CV) @ 60 (MODULATING) 

2 2" 115 44 

25 2.5" 196 75 

3 3" 302 116 

4 4" 600 230 

5 5" 1022 392 

6 6" 1579 605 

8 8" 3136 1202 

10 10" 5340 2047 

12 12" 8250 3162 

14 14" 11917 4568 

16 16" 16388 6282 

18 18" 21705 8320 

20 20" 27908 10698 

24 24" 43116 16528 

ACTUATOR CODE (Refer to Actuator/Valve Combinations) 

M Manual operation (two-way valves only) (2" to 6" lever, 6" to 24" gear op.) 

E2 Electric, two-position 

EM Electric, modulating 

E2SO Electric, two-position failsafe return N.O. 

E2SC Electric, two-position failsafe return N.C. 

EMSO Electric, modulating failsafe return N.O. 

EMSC Electric, modulating failsafe return N.C. 

HP2 High pressure pneumatic, two-position (24 VAC) 

HPM High pressure pneumatic, modulating (3-15 psig) 

HP2SO High pressure pneumatic, two-position (24 VAC), spring return N.O. 

HP2SC High pressure pneumatic, two-position (24 VAC), spring return N.C. 

HPMSO High pressure pneumatic, modulating (3-15 psig), spring return N.O. 

HPMSC High pressure pneumatic, modulating (3-15 psig), spring return N.C. 

P2SO Pneumatic, two-position (24 VAC), spring return N.O. 

P2SC Pneumatic, two-position (24 VAC), spring return N.C. 

PMSO Pneumatic, modulating (3-15 psig), spring return N.O. 

PMSC Pneumatic, modulating (3-15 psig), spring return N.C. 

TABLE 1. THREE-WAY ARRANGEMENT (actuators will be mounted on top of the NC valve)* 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Valve A = N.C., valve B = N.O.* 

Valve A = N.C., valve C = N.O.* 

Valve B = N.C., valve C = N.O.* 

Valve B = N.C., valve A = N.O.* 

Valve C = N.C., valve B = N.O.* 

Valve C = N.C., valve A = N.O.* 

Note: The three-way arrangement code is 

not part of the model number and 

does not affect pricing but must be 

specified for all three-way valves. For 

failsafe three-way assemblies, use 

“_ _ _sc” actuator code. 

KBV 2 3 EM 

Example: KBV-2-3-EM Two-way 3" Kele butterfly valve with electric 

*See Figure1 below. 

modulating actuator 

Note: Custom weather shields are available for assemblies that use KA and KAS Series actuators. Consult Trane for information. 

FIGURE 1. THREE-WAY ARRANGEMENT 

A 

B 


A 

C 


B 

C 


A 

B 


B 

C 


A 

C 

Arrangement No. 6

ENCLOSURES

PRODUCT 

Try the NEW Hoffman 

Concept Series 

Enclosures on page 578! 

SERVICES 

Did you know that Trane 

can supply UL Listed 

Panel Assemblies? 

SOLUTIONS 

Tell us your NEMA Type, 

Color, and Size. We'll 

find the enclosure for you! 

ENCLOSURES 


Enclosure Selection Chart — NEMA/IP Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 

ACCESSORIES 

Hoffman Enclosure Accessories — 

Locks, Latches, Ventilation, Heating, Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 

Window & Swing-Out Panel Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596 

ALUMINUM 

B Series — Small Miscellaneous Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 

Versa-Cab — Control Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 

FIBERGLASS 

RJ / N — NEMA 4X Fiberglass Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 

FLUSH COVERS 

FC/FCS Series — Flush-Mounted Screw Cover Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 

PERF PANELS 

Perf Panel — Control Component Mounting Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 

PLASTIC 

14121-000 — Polycarbonate Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 

PS Series — Non-Metallic Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 

STEEL 

Concept Series — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592 

HC Series — NEMA 1 Hinge Cover Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 

NEMA 1 Large — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 

NEMA 1 Medium — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 

NEMA 1 Small — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 

NEMA 12 — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 

NEMA 3R — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 

NEMA 4 — Hoffman Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 

NEMA 4X — Hoffman Stainless Steel Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 

RET Series — NEMA 1 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 

SC Series — NEMA 1 Screw Cover Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583

ENCLOSURES 

ENCLOSURE SELECTION CHART 

NEMA/IP RATINGS 

ENCLOSURE 

RATING 

Type 1 

Type 2 

Type 3 

Type 3R 

Type 3S 

Type 4 

Type 4X 

Type 6 

Type 12 

Type 13 

NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPES* 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

(NEMA Standard 250) and Electrical and Electronic 

Manufacturer Association of Canada (EEMAC) 

Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a 

degree of protection against contact with the enclosed 

equipment or locations where unusual service conditions do 

not exist 


degree of protection against limited amounts of falling water 

and dirt 

Enclosure intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a 

degree of protection against windblown dust, rain, and sleet; 

undamaged by the formation of ice 


degree of protection against falling rain and sleet; 


Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to 

provide a degree of protection against falling dirt, rain, sleet, 

snow, windblown dust, and in which the external 

mechanisms remain operable when ice laden 


provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and 

rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; undamaged 

by the formation of ice 


provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown 

dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; 


Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use where occasional 

submersion is encountered in limited depth; undamaged by 

the formation of ice 


degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping 

noncorrosive liquids 


degree of protection against dust, spraying of water, oil, and 

noncorrosive coolant 

This material is reproduced with permission from NEMA. The preceding 

descriptions, however, are not intended to be complete representations of 

NEMA standards for enclosures and not those of the EEMAC. 

* See page 789 for enclosure types for hazardous locations. 

577 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

578 

ENCLOSURES 

ENCLOSURE SELECTION CHART 

NEMA/IP RATINGS 

Example Rating FIRST NUMERAL 

SECOND NUMERAL 

If 1st IP 

number is 

2 

Protection 

against solid 

objects 

and the 2nd IP 

number is 

3 

Protection 

against liquids 

then the IP rating is 

IP 2 3 

Enclosure 

protection against 

penetration of solid 

objects greater 

than 12 mm and 

against spraying 

water 

IP Test 

IP 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

No protection 

Protection against solid 

objects over 50 mm (i.e., 

accidental touch by hands) 


objects over 12 mm (i.e., 

fingers) 


objects over 2.5 mm (i.e., 

tools and wires) 

Protections against solid 

objects over 1 mm 

Protection against dust 

(limited ingress, no harmful 

deposit) 

Total protection against 

dust 

CROSS-REFERENCE (approximate) NEMA, UL, CSA vs IEC Enclosure Type 

(cannot be used to convert IEC classifications to NEMA Type numbers) 

ENCLOSURE 

RATING 

Type 1 

Type 3 

Type 3R 

Type 3S 

Type 4 

Type 4X 

Type 6 

Type 12 

Type 13 

IP20 

IP22 IP55 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

Test 

No protection 

Protection against vertically 

falling drops of water (i.e., 

condensation) 

Protection against direct 

sprays of water up to 15° from 

vertical 

Protection against sprays up 

to 60° from vertical 

Protection against water 

sprayed from all directions 

(limited ingress permitted) 

Protection against low 

pressure jets of water from all 

directions (limited ingress 

permitted) 

Protection against strong jets 

of water 

Protection against the effects 

of immersion between 15 cm 

and 1m 

Protection against long 

periods of immersion under 

pressure 

IEC 60529 has no 

equivalents to NEMA 

enclosure Types 7, 8, 

9, 10, or 11. 

Indicates compliance 

Enclosure Type Rating vs IP Rating 

Electrical enclosures are rated by type (NEMA 250/UL 50) and/or (IEC 60529) based on the degree of protection provided. 

Type ratings and IP ratings have only the following in common: 

1. A degree of protection for persons from hazardous components inside the enclosure 

2. A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of solid foreign objects, including dust 

3. A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of water 

NEMA 250 and UL 50 type rating documentation defines additional requirements that type-rated enclosures must meet. These include the following: 

• Mechanical impact on enclosure walls 

• Gasket aging and oil resistance 

• Corrosion resistance 

• Door and cover requirements 

• Sheet metal gauge construction requirements 

Note: Electrical enclosures that carry an IP rating only have not been designed to the additional type-rating requirements; therefore, a type-rating 

cannot be assigned to an enclosure that has been only IP rated. Electrical enclosures manufactured by Hoffman are tested for both type 

rating and IP rating and carry both type and IP ratings. 

This material is reproduced with permission from Hoffman.

ENCLOSURES 

NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES 

RET SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The RET Series includes attractive, economical NEMA 

1 enclosures designed to house controls and instruments 

in areas that do not require oil- and dust-tight ratings. 

The RET Series enclosures are furnished with a 

perforated metal subpanel for easy mounting of components. 

No drilling or layout is needed. Simply set the 

control components on the panel and attach with #7 or 

#8 self-tapping screws in the pre-punched holes. The 

RET Series is also available in a UL-listed version. 

FEATURES 

• Low-cost NEMA 1 enclosure 

• Mounted with door hinged on left or right side 

• Removable door 

• Attractive powder-coated finish, standard brown 

enclosure with tan door 

• Optional colors available 

• Key lock, two keys, and attractive gray powdercoated 

perf panel furnished 

• Mounting of control components simplified with 

perf panel 

• Optional UL-listed enclosures available 

• UL listed, File #E155405, for RET UL-listed panels 

RET OPTIONAL COLOR CHART 

Dark Powder Orange Green Gray 

Blue Blue 

Optional colors are shown in approximate hue. 

DIMENSIONS 

1 

in 

(cm) 

2 

3 

Knockouts 

#10-32 Washers, 

Screws, 

and Standoffs 

7.0 

(17.78) 

1 

Perf 

Panel 

0.5 

(1.27) 

Standoff 


1 

0.64 

(1.63) 

RET-2018 

A D 

Knockouts are for 3/4" conduit, two knockouts on both sides, three knockouts top 

and bottom, four knockouts top and bottom on RET3826, RET3626UL, and RET4230. 

Perf Panel is 16-ga powder-coated steel. 

Standard color is brown enclosure with tan door. 

DIMENSIONS 

ENCLOSURE in (cm) ENCLOSURE PERF WEIGHT PERF PANEL 

MODEL A B C D MATERIAL PANEL lb (kg) H x W in (cm) 

RET2620† 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.75 (47) 17.75 (51) 16-ga steel Incl 36 (16.4) 23.5 x 17.5 (60 x 44) 



RET1812ULP† 18 (46) 12 (31) 10.75 (28) 9.75 (36) 16-ga steel Incl 16 (7.3) 15.5 x 9.0 (39 x 23) 




† -DB: Dark Blue, -PB: Powder Blue, -OR: Orange, -GN: Green, -GY: Gray (Note: No suffix - Brown/Tan) 

B 

3 

C 

Keylock 

2 

579 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

580 

ENCLOSURES 

CONTROL COMPONENT MOUNTING PANELS 

PERF PANEL 

DESCRIPTION 

Perf Panels easily mount control components in standard 

control enclosures and are normally stocked by 

Trane. Perf Panels are made from perforated 16-gauge 

steel and feature a gray powder-coated finish. 

Prepunched holes allow for mounting almost any device 

without drilling. Simply set the control components on 

the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping screws. 

RET enclosures come standard with Perf Panels. 

Hoffman small and medium NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R 

enclosures featured in the Trane catalog can be ordered 

with a perforated panel. See Ordering Information below 

to order custom sizes. 

ACTUAL SIZE 

Actual Size 

(sample) 

STANDARD PERFORATED PANELS 


MODEL 

CUSTOM PERFORATED PANELS 

DESCRIPTION 

FT-H x W (in) Flat perf panel for enclosure smaller than 16" x 12" (40.6 x 30.5 cm) 

FL-H x W (in) Flanged perf panel for enclosure 16" x 12" or larger (40.6 x 30.5 cm) 

Note: Order custom perforated panels by exact size. 

Example: FT-14.5 x 10.25 flat perf panel, 14.50" x 10.25" 

Note: Maximum flat panel 36" x 60" (91 x 152 cm) 

Maximum flanged panel 34" x 58" (86 x 147 cm) 

Perf# Size (in.) H x W Flat/Flanged Perf # Size (in.) H x W Flat/Flanged 

HP1010 8.25 x 8.25 Flat HP2424 21.00 x 22.50 Flanged 





HP128 10.25 x 6.25 Flat HP66 4.25 x 4.25 Flat 



HP1616 13.00 x 14.5 Flanged QP1212 11.00 x 11.00 Flat 

HP1620 13.00 x 18.5 Flanged RP1812 15.50 x 9.00 Flanged 






HP2420 21.00 x 18.50 Flanged

DESCRIPTION 

The FC/FCS Series Flush-Mounted Screw Cover 

Boxes are designed to mount within a wall to serve as 

flush-mounted junction boxes or switch boxes. With the 

addition of a field-installed perforated subpanel, they 

may also be used to house controls and instruments in 

areas that do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings. 

The FC Series is a gray powder-coated steel enclosure 

and cover, while the FCS Series is a gray powder-coated 

steel enclosure with a 304 stainless steel cover. 

Each series is available with a locking door. 

FEATURES 

ENCLOSURES 

FLUSH-MOUNTED SCREW COVER BOXES 

FC/FCS SERIES 

• 16-gauge steel construction NEMA 1 rated 

• Flat, removable covers fastened with plated 

steel screws 

• Mounting holes on back of enclosure 

• Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on 

all sides 

• Attractive, gray powder-coated box 

• Available with gray powder-coated or stainless 

steel cover 

• Available with optional door and perf panel 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 



0.28 (0.7) dia 

Knockouts on all sides. 

Patterns and sizes vary 

with enclosure size. 

FC Flush Cover Enclosure 

WEIGHT PERF PANEL D OPTION 

FCS Stainless Steel Flush Cover Enclosure 

FC & FCS FC-D & FCS-D DIMENSIONS DOOR DIMENSIONS 

BOX SIZE H x W x D in (cm) A x B in (cm) lb (kg) lb (kg) in (cm) H x W in (cm) 

664 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 8 x 8 (20 x 20) 4.00 (1.81) N/A 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) N/A 

666 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 8 x 8 (20 x 20) 4.80 (2.18) N/A 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) N/A 

886 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 10 x 10 (25 x 25) 6.90 (3.13) 7.50 (3.40) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 3.57 x 5.94 (10 x 15) 

1084 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 12 x 10 (30 x 25) 8.00 (3.63) 8.75 (3.97) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 5.57 x 5.94 (15 x 15) 

1284 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 14 x 10 (36 x 25) 9.00 (4.08) 9.70 (4.40) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 7.57 x 5.94 (19 x 15) 

12104 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 14 x 12 (36 x 30) 9.10 (4.13) 9.80 (4.45) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 7.57 x 7.94 (19 x 20) 

12124 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 14 x 14 (36 x 36) 9.95 (4.51) 10.45 (4.74) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 7.57 x 9.94 (19 x 25) 

16124 16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) 18 x 14 (46 x 36) 13.15 (5.96) 13.70 (6.21) 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 11.57 x 9.94 (29 x 25) 

18124 18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 41 x 10) 20 x 14 (51 x 36) 13.50 (6.12) 14.25 (6.46) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 13.57 x 9.94 (34 x 25) 

18126 18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 41 x 15) 

OPTIONS 

20 x 14 (51 x 36) 15.50 (7.03) 16.30 (7.39) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 13.57 x 9.94 (34 x 25) 

D Continuously hinged door with key lock (8" x 8" / 20 x 20 cm or larger) 

P Powder-coated perf panel (standoffs are field installed) 

FCS 1284 D P Example: FCS-1284-D-P Stainless steel flush-covered enclosure 

with locking door and perf panel 

B 

W 

0.5 

(1.27) 

FCS-D 

1.5 

(3.81) 

0.53 

(1.35) 

Typical 

A 

D 

H 

581 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

582 

ENCLOSURES 

NEMA 1 HINGE COVER BOXES 

HC SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

HC Series NEMA 1 Hinge Cover Boxes serve as surface-mounted 

junction boxes or switch boxes. With the 


can also house controls and instruments in areas that 

do not require oil- and dust-tight ratings. 

FEATURES 

• 16-gauge steel construction to meet NEMA 1 

• Removable doors with butt hinges 

• Door hinge on left or right side 


• Easy operation of flush latch with a screwdriver 

or coin 


all sides 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder finish inside and 

out over phosphatized surfaces 

• Available with optional perf panel 

• UL listed, File #E27525 

• CSA certified, File #LL42184 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4 Mounting 

Holes 

0.28 

(0.71) dia 

A - 1.06 (2.69) 

Opening 


B - 1.06 (2.69) 

Opening 

B 

Flush- 

Mounted 

Coin Latch 

C 

Knockouts on all sides. 

Patterns and sizes vary 

with enclosure size. 

ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT OPTIONAL PERF PANEL 

MODEL† A x B x C in (cm) lb (kg) DIMENSION SIZE in (cm) 

HC664 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 3.2 (1.5) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 

HC666 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 4.0 (1.8) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 

HC886 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 6.0 (2.7) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 

HC1084 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 7.0 (3.2) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 

HC1284 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 8.0 (3.6) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 

HC12104 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 8.0 (3.6) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 

HC12124 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 8.8 (4.0) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 

HC16124 16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) 12.0 (5.5) 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 

HC18124 18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 30 x 10) 12.0 (5.4) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 

HC18126 18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 30 x 15) 14.0 (6.4) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 

† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. (Standoffs are field installed, drilling required.) 

See Hoffman Enclosure Accessory page in the "Enclosure" section for locks, 

latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. Additional box sizes available. 

A

ENCLOSURES 

NEMA 1 SCREW COVER BOXES 

SC SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

SC Series NEMA 1 Screw Cover Boxes serve as surface-mounted 

junction boxes or switch boxes. With the 


can also house controls and instruments in areas that 

do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings. 

FEATURES 

• 16-gauge steel construction to meet NEMA 1 

• Flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel 

screws 

• Unique keyhole screw slots in cover for removal 

without extracting the screws 



all sides 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder finish inside and 


• Available with optional perf panel 



ENCLOSURE 

MODEL† 

SC664 

SC666 

SC886 

SC1084 

SC1284 

SC12104 

SC12124 

SC16124 

SC18124 

SC18126 

DIMENSIONS 

A x B x C in (cm) 

6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 

6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 

8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 

10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 

12 x 8 x 4 (40 x 20 x 10) 

12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 

12 x 12 x 4 (50 x 30 x 10) 

16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) 

18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 30 x 10) 

18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 30 x 15) 

DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 


WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

3.1 (1.4) 

4.0 (1.8) 

6.0 (2.7) 

6.1 (2.8) 

6.3 (2.9) 

7.3 (3.3) 

8.5 (3.8) 

12.0 (5.5) 

12.0 (5.5) 

14.0 (6.4) 

� �� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

OPTIONAL PERF PANEL 

DIMENSIONS SIZE in (cm) 

4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 

4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 

6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 

8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 

10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 

10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 

10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 

14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 

16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 

16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 

† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. (Standoffs are field installed, drilling required). 

See "Hoffman Enclosure Accessory" page in the "Enclosures" section for locks, 

latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. Additional box sizes available. 

� 

583 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

584 

ENCLOSURES 

HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS 

NEMA 1 SMALL 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 1 Small Enclosures house controls and 

instruments in areas that do not require oil- and dust-tight ratings. 

FEATURES 

• 16-gauge steel construction 



• Easy operation of flush latch with a screwdriver or coin 

• Weldnuts provided for mounting optional panels 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out 

over phosphorized surfaces 

• Optional steel panels with white finish 



DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Weldnut 

Panel 

(optional) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

C 

0.56 

(1.42) 

A 

A - 3.0 

(7.62) 

B 

B - 1.0 (2.54) 

1.81 

(4.60) 


0.28 (0.71) dia 

0.53 Flange Width 

(1.35) Typical 


DIMENSIONS BODY 

A x B x C in (cm) GAUGE 

A-6N64 

A-8N64 

A-8N84 

A-10N84 

A-10N104 

A-12N104 

A-12N124 

A-14N124 

A-8N86 

A-10N86 

A-10N106 

A-12N106 

A-12N126 

A-14N126 

A-16N126 

A-20N126 

A-12N128 

A-14N128 

WEIGHT 

ENCLOSURE 

SOLID PANEL* DIMENSIONS 

WEIGHT 

MODEL† 

lb (kg) MODEL 

in (cm) GAUGE lb (kg) 

6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 16 4.0 (1.8) A-6N6P 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 10) 14 0.5 (0.2) 

8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10) 16 5.0 (2.3) A-8N6P 6.25 x 4.25 (16 x 11) 14 0.75 (0.3) 

8 x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x 10) 16 6.0 (2.7) A-8N8P 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 14 1.0 (0.5) 

10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 16 6.5 (3.0) A-10N8P 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 14 1.0 (0.5) 

10 x 10 x 4 (25 x 25 x 10) 16 7.5 (3.4) A-10N10P 8.25 x 8.25 (21 x 21) 14 1.5 (0.7) 

12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 16 9.0 (4.1) A-12N10P 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 14 2.0 (0.9) 

12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 16 10.0 (4.6) A-12N12P 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 14 2.5 (1.1) 

14 x 12 x 4 (36 x 30 x 10) 16 11.0 (5.0) A-14N12P 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 14 3.0 (1.4) 

8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 16 6.0 (2.7) A-8N8P 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 14 1.0 (0.5) 

10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x 15) 16 8.0 (3.6) A-10N8P 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 14 1.0 (0.5) 

10 x 10 x 6 (25 x 25 x 15) 16 9.0 (4.1) A-10N10P 8.25 x 8.25 (21 x 21) 14 1.5 (0.7) 

12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15) 16 10.0 (4.6) A-12N10P 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 14 2.0 (0.9) 

12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 16 12.0 (5.5) A-12N12P 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 14 2.5 (1.1) 

14 x 12 x 6 (36 x 30 x 15) 16 13.0 (5.9) A-14N12P 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 14 3.0 (1.4) 

16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 16 14.0 (6.4) A-16N12P 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 14 3.5 (1.6) 

20 x 12 x 6 (51 x 35 x 15) 16 17.0 (7.8) A-20N12P 18.25 x 10.25 (46 x 36) 14 4.0 (1.8) 

12 x 12 x 8 (30 x 30 x 20) 16 14.0 (6.4) A-12N12P 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 14 2.5 (1.1) 

14 x 12 x 8 (36 x 30 x 20) 16 15.0 (6.8) A-14N12P 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 14 3.0 (1.4) 

† Add P to the end of the model number to order optional perf panel. 

See "Hoffman Enclosure Accessory" page in the "Enclosure" section for locks, latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. 

* Order panels separately 

RELATED PRODUCT Perf panel 

Available with 

Perf Panels†

ENCLOSURES 


NEMA 1 MEDIUM 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 1 Medium Enclosures house controls 

and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and 

dust-tight ratings. 

FEATURES 




or coin 

• Collar studs provided for mounting 

optional panels 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and 



• UL listed, File #EA27567 


DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� 

�� 

�� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� �� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 


�� 

�� 

ENCLOSURE 

MODEL† 

A-16N12ALP 

DIMENSIONS 

A x B x C in (cm) MOUNTING D x E in (cm) 

16 x 12 x 6.62 (41 x 31 x 17) 13.88 x 7 (35 x 18) 

BODY 

GAUGE 

16 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

15.0 (6.8) 

SOLID PANEL* 

MODEL 

A-16N12MP 

SIZE 

in (cm) 

13 x 10.5 (33 x 27) 

GAUGE 

14 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

3.0 (1.4) 

A-16N16ALP 16 x 16 x 6.62 (41 x 41 x 17) 13.88 x 11 (35 x 28) 16 22.5 (10.2) A-16N16MP 13 x 14.5 (33 x 37) 14 5.0 (2.3) 







A-30N24ALP 30 x 24 x 6.62 (76 x 61 x 17) 27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43) 14 49.5 (22.5) A-30N24MP 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 12 18.5 (8.4) 



A-16N12BLP 16 x 12 x 8.62 (41 x 31 x 22) 13.88 x 7 (35 x 18) 16 17.0 (7.7) A-16N12MP 13 x 10.5 (33 x 27) 14 6.0 (2.7) 





A-30N24BLP 30 x 24 x 8.62 (76 x 61 x 22) 27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43) 14 50.5 (22.9) A-30N24MP 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 12 18.5 (8.4) 




A-24N20CLP 24 x 20 x 10.62 (61 x 51 x 27) 21.88 x 15 (56 x 38) 16 36.0 (16.3) A-24N20MP 21 x 18.5 (81 x 47) 14 9.0 (4.1) 

A-24N24DLP 24 x 24 x 12.62 (61 x 61 x 27) 21.88 x 19 (56 x 48) 14 51.0 (23.1) A-24N24MP 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 12 15.0 (6.8) 

A-30N24DLP 30 x 24 x 12.62 (76 x 61 x 27) 27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43) 14 62.5 (28.4) A-30N24MP 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 12 18.5 (8.4) 

A-36N30DLP 36 x 30 x 12.62 (91 x 76 x 27) 33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58) 14 81.0 (36.7) A-36N30MP 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72) 12 29.0 (13.2) 

† Add P to the end of the part number to order optional perf panel. 

See the "Hoffman Enclosure Accessory" page in the "Enclosures" section for locks, latches, louvers, fans and heaters. 

* Order panels separately 

RELATED PRODUCT Perf panel 


Perf Panels† 

585 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

586 

ENCLOSURES 


NEMA 1 LARGE 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 1 Large Enclosures house controls 

and instruments in areas that do not require oil- and 

dust-tight ratings. 

FEATURES 

• 14-gauge steel construction 

• Continuous hinges 



or coin 

• Collar studs provided for mounting optional 

panels 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coated 

• Door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity 


• Optional locks and latches available 



DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3/8-16 

Collar Stud 

Panel 

(optional) 

0.91 

(2.31) 

C 

0.56 

(1.42) 

A 

A - 2.12 

(5.38) 

B 

B - 7.24 

(18.39) 


4 Mounting 

Holes (min) 

0.44 (1.12) dia 

Coin Latch 

2.40 (6.11) 



ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS BODY WEIGHT 

SOLID 

PANEL** DIMENSIONS GAUGE WEIGHT 

MODEL A x B x C in (cm) GAUGE lb (kg) MODEL in (cm) 

lb (kg) 

A-42N3009* 42 x 30 x 9.25 (107 x 76 x 24) 14 101 (45.9) A-42P30* 39 x 27 (99 x 69) 12 33 (15.0) 

A-42N3609* 42 x 36 x 9.25 (107 x 91 x 24) 14 122 (55.4) A-42P36* 39 x 33 (99 x 84) 12 39 (17.7) 

A-48N3609* 48 x 36 x 9.25 (122 x 91 x 24) 14 124 (56.3) A-48P36* 45 x 33 (114 x 84) 12 46 (20.9) 

A-42N3013* 42 x 30 x 13.25 (107 x 76 x 34) 14 112 (50.9) A-42P30* 39 x 27 (99 x 69) 12 33 (15.0) 

A-42N3613 42 x 36 x 13.25 (107 x 91 x 34) 14 132 (59.9) A-42P36 39 x 33 (99 x 84) 12 39 (17.7) 

A-48N3613 48 x 36 x 13.25 (122 x 91 x 34) 14 144 (65.4) A-48P36 45 x 33 (114 x 84) 12 46 (20.9) 

See the "Hoffman Enclosure Accessory" page in the "Enclosures" section for locks, latches, louvers, fans, and heaters. 

* Stocked at Kele. Other size enclosures and panels are special order and cannot be returned for credit. ** Order panels separately

ENCLOSURES 


NEMA 3R LIFT-OFF HINGED COVER 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 3R Lift-Off Hinged Cover Enclosures 

house controls and instruments and provide protection in 

outdoor installations against rain, sleet, and snow or 

indoors against dripping water. 

FEATURES 

• 16- or 14-gauge galvanized steel construction 

• Drip-shield top and seam-free sides, front and back 

• Galvanized steel lift-off hinges with stainless steel pins 

• Cover fastened securely with draw-pull catches 

• Provisions for padlocking on each draw-pull catch 

• Embossed mounting holes on back of enclosure 

• Gasketing along top of door 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and 

out over galvanized steel 


• Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available 

• UL listed, File #E27567; CSA certified, File 

#LL42184 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

D A 

1.06 

(2.70) 

1.06 

(2.70) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

16-gauge 

B 

Optional External 

Mounting Foot Kit 


0.28 (0.71) dia 



Knockout for 

Optional Panel 

Mounting Kit 

16- & 14gauge 

C 

D A 


1.13 

(2.90) 

1.13 

(2.90) 


Perf Panels††† 

13.0 

(33.0) 

14-gauge 

B 

Optional External 

Mounting Foot Kit 

0.28 (0.71) dia 




Knockout for 

Optional Panel 

Mounting Kit 

ENCLOSURE 

MODEL††† 

DIMENSIONS** 


MOUNTING BODY 

"D GAUGE 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

SOLID 

PANEL* 

MODEL 

DIMENSIONS 

in (cm) 

GAUGE WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

A-8R64HCLO 8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10) 9.12 (23) 16 5 (2.3) A-6P6† 4.88 x 4.88 (12 x 12) 14 0.5 (0.32) 

A-8R86HCLO 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 9.12 (23) 16 7 (3.2) A-8P6† 6.75 x 4.88 (17 x 12) 14 1 (0.5) 

A-10R86HCLO 10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x 15) 11.12 (28) 16 9 (4.1) A-8P8† 6.75 x 6.88 (17 x 17.5) 14 1 (0.5) 



A-16R126HCLO 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 17.12 (43) 16 15 (6.8) A-14P12† 12.75 x 10.88 (32 x 28) 14 3 (1.4) 

A-16R166HCLO 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 17.31 (44) 14 23 (10.8) A-16P16†† 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 12 5.5 (2.5) 

A-20R166HCLO 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 21.31 (54) 14 27 (12.2) A-20P16†† 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 12 7 (3.2) 


A-24R208HCLO 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 25.31 (64) 14 43 (19.5) A-24P20†† 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 12 11.5 (5.2) 



† Panel Mounting Kit A-PMK3RL016 is required. Order separately. ††† Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. 

†† Panel Mounting Kit A-PMK3RL014 is required. Order separately. 

(Includes panel mounting kit) 

* Order panels separately ** Enclosures with B=8 or less have one latch 


A-MFK3RL016 16-Gauge enclosure mounting foot kit 

A-MFK3RL014 14-Gauge enclosure mounting foot kit 

587 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 4 Enclosures are designed to house 

electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and 

components. These enclosures provide protection from 

windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hosedirected 

water. 

FEATURES 

• Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no 

holes or knockouts 

• Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal 

• Hasp and staple for padlocking 


• Data pocket included 


subpanels 

• Steel subpanels 



• CSA certified, File #LR42186 

588 

MODEL 

A-16H12ALP 

A-16H16ALP 

A-20H16ALP 

A-20H20ALP 

A-24H20ALP 

A-24H24ALP 

A-30H24ALP 

A-36H24ALP 

A-16H12BLP 

A-20H16BLP 

A-20H20BLP 

A-24H20BLP 

A-24H24BLP 

A-30H24BLP 

A-36H24BLP 

A-36H30BLP 

ENCLOSURES 


NEMA 4 

DIMENSIONS 


16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 

16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 

20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 

20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 

24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15) 

24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) 

30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15) 

36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15) 

16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20) 

20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 20) 

20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20) 

24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 

24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 28) 

30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 

36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 

36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 

Call Trane for sizes other 

than those listed. 

BODY 

GAUGE 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

14 

14 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

14 

14 

14 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

21.0 (9.5) 

23.0 (10.4) 

31.0 (14.1) 

30.0 (13.6) 

36.0 (16.3) 

46.0 (20.9) 

58.0 (26.3) 

63.0 (28.6) 

20.0 (9.1) 

30.0 (13.6) 

34.0 (15.4) 

38.0 (17.2) 

52.0 (23.6) 

61.0 (27.7) 

67.0 (30.4) 

86.0 (39.0) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Door Stiffener 

used on panels 

with "A" 

dimensions of A 

42" and larger 


ENCLOSURE* SOLID STEEL SUBPANEL** 

MODEL 

A-16P12 

A-16P16 

A-20P16 

A-20P20 

A-24P20 

A-24P24 

A-30P24 

A-36P24 

A-16P12 

A-20P16 

A-20P20 

A-24P20 

A-24P24 

A-30P24 

A-36P24 

A-36P30 

3.00 

(7.6) 

B-1.84 

(4.67) 

Data 

Pocket 

DIMENSIONS 

A x B in (cm) 

13 x 9 (33 x 23) 

13 x 13 (33 x 33) 

17 x 13 (43 x 33) 

17 x 17 (43 x 43) 

21 x 17 (53 x 43) 

21 x 21 (53 x 53) 

27 x 21 (69 x 53) 

33 x 21 (83 x 53) 

13 x 9 (33 x 23) 

17 x 13 (43 x 33) 

17 x 17 (43 x 43) 

21 x 17 (53 x 43) 

21 x 21 (53 x 53) 

27 x 21 (69 x 53) 

33 x 21 (83 x 53) 

33 x 27 (83 x 69) 

A-1.81 

(4.60) 

Mounting 

Holes 

3.38 

(8.58) 

Two Clamps 30" (76.20) 

or larger 

BODY 

GAUGE 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

Door 

Clamp 

Padlocking 

Hasp & 

Staple 

* Add a P after enclosure number to include a steel subpanel. Perf panels are not 

available for this product. 

** Order panels separately. 

B 

C 

C 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

3.7 (1.7) 

5.3 (2.4) 

7.0 (3.2) 

10.0 (4.5) 

11.3 (5.1) 

13.9 (6.3) 

18.0 (8.2) 

22.0 (10.0) 

3.7 (1.7) 

7.0 (3.2) 

10.0 (4.5) 

11.3 (5.1) 

13.9 (6.3) 

18.0 (8.2) 

22.0 (10.0) 

27.0 (12.2)

ENCLOSURES 

HOFFMAN STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES AND PANELS 

NEMA 4X 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures house 

electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and 

components. These enclosures provide protection from 

corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, 

and hose-directed water. 

FEATURES 

• 14-gauge 304 stainless 

• Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no 


• Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal 



• Data pocket included 


subpanels 

• Steel or stainless steel subpanels 




MODEL 

A-16H1206SSLP 

A-16H1606SSLP 

A-20H1606SSLP 

A-20H2006SSLP 

A-24H2006SSLP 

A-24H1608SSLP 

A-24H2008SSLP 

A-24H2408SSLP 

A-30H2408SSLP 

A-30H3008SSLP 

A-36H2408SSLP 

A-36H3008SSLP 

Call Trane for sizes other 

than those listed. 

DIMENSIONS 


16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 

16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 

20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 

20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 

24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15) 

24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 41 x 20) 

24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 

24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 

30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 

30 x 30 x 8 (76 x 76 x 20) 

36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 

36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 

BODY 

GAUGE 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

22.0 (10.0) 

25.0 (11.3) 

32.0 (14.5) 

33.4 (15.2) 

40.0 (18.1) 

36.0 (16.3) 

45.2 (20.5) 

51.4 (23.3) 

62.0 (28.1) 

72.0 (32.7) 

65.0 (29.5) 

88.0 (39.9) 

MODEL 

A-16P12SS6 

A-16P16SS6 

A-20P16SS6 

A-20P20SS6 

A-24P20SS6 

A-24P16SS6 

A-24P20SS6 

A-24P24SS6 

A-30P24SS6 

A-30P30SS6 

A-36P24SS6 

A-36P30SS6 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


DIMENSIONS 

A x B in (cm) 

13 x 9 (33 x 23) 

13 x 13 (33 x 33) 

17 x 13 (43 x 33) 

17 x 17 (43 x 43) 

21 x 17 (53 x 43) 

21 x 13 (53 x 33) 

21 x 17 (53 x 43) 

21 x 21 (53 x 53) 

27 x 21 (69 x 53) 

27 x 27 (69 x 69) 

33 x 21 (83 x 53) 

33 x 27 (83 x 69) 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

3.7 (1.7) 

5.3 (2.4) 

7.0 (3.2) 

10.0 (4.5) 

11.3 (5.1) 

9.0 (4.1) 

11.3 (5.1) 

13.9 (6.3) 

18.0 (8.2) 

24.0 (10.9) 

22.0 (10.0) 

27.0 (12.2) 

SUBPANEL** 

ENCLOSURE* SOLID STAINLESS STEEL 

SOLID STEEL 

MODEL 

A-16P12 

A-16P16 

A-20P16 

A-20P20 

A-24P20 

A-24P16 

A-24P20 

A-24P24 

A-30P24 

A-30P30 

A-36P24 

A-36P30 

DIMENSIONS 

A x B in (cm) 

13 x 9 (33 x 23) 

13 x 13 (33 x 33) 

17 x 13 (43 x 33) 

17 x 17 (43 x 43) 

21 x 17 (53 x 43) 

21 x 13 (53 x 33) 

21 x 17 (53 x 43) 

21 x 21 (53 x 53) 

27 x 21 (69 x 53) 

27 x 27 (69 x 69) 

33 x 21 (83 x 53) 

33 x 27 (83 x 69) 

* Add an S after enclosure number to include a stainless steel subpanel; add a P after enclosure number to include a 

steel subpanel. Perf panels are not available for this product. 

** Order panels separately. 

A 

3.00 

(7.6) 

Data Pocket 

B 

B - 1.84 

(4.67) 

A - 1.81 

(4.60) 

Two Clamps 30" (76.20) or larger 

Mounting 

Holes 

Door 

Clamp 

Padlocking 

Hasp & 

Staple 

C 

C 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

3.6 (1.6) 

5.3 (2.4) 

7.0 (3.2) 

10.0 (4.5) 

11.0 (5.0) 

8.7 (3.9) 

11.0 (5.0) 

13.0 (5.9) 

18.0 (8.2) 

22.0 (10.0) 

23.0 (10.4) 

27.0 (12.2) 

589 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

590 

ENCLOSURES 

NEMA 4X FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURES 

RJ, N SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

RJ and N Series NEMA 4X enclosures are constructed 

from compression-molded, fiberglass-reinforced polyester. 

These enclosures offer excellent impact resistance, 

thermal insulation, and corrosion resistance. 

Smooth-surfaced, lightweight, nonconductive, and 

flame-retardant, they can be easily drilled. The gray 

color is molded in. The RJ Series use captive stainless 

cover screws with fiberglass-encapsulated heads. The 

N Series has stainless steel latches. Both types use a 

stainless steel piano hinge. All are UL listed, File 

#E64358. 

DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 

MODEL INSIDE 

A x B x C 

RJ806HW 

RJ1008HW 

RJ1210HW 

RJ1412HW 

RJ1614HW 

RJ1816HW 

� 

� � 

� 

� � �� 

�� 

� 

� 

�� 

� 

� � � � 

RJ Series 

N Series 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� �� 

� 

� 

� � 

ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) COVER DIMENSIONS ALUMINUM PANEL* (OPTIONAL) 

MOUNTING 

E x F 

OVERALL 

H x W x D 

SURFACE AREA 

O x P in (cm) 

NO. OF 

SCREWS MODEL 

DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

H x W J 

7.73 x 5.74 x 5.95 (20 x 14.5 x 15) 8.88 x 4 (23 x 10) 9.62 x 7.46 x 6.22 (24 x 19 x 16) 7.25 x 5.28 (18 x 13) 4 BP86AL 6.88 x 4.88 (17 x 12) 5.49 

9.73 x 7.73 x 6.36 (25 x 20 x 16) 10.75 x 6 (27 x 15) 11.62 x 9.37 x 6.61 (30 x 24 x 17) 9.3 x 7.38 (24 x 18) 4 BP108AL 8.88 x 6.88 (23 x 17) 5.91 





ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) COVER DIMENSIONS STEEL PANEL* (OPTIONAL) 

MODEL INSIDE 

A x B x C 

MOUNTING 

E x F 

OVERALL 

H x W x D 

ENCLOSURE OPENING NO. OF 

M x N in (cm) LATCHES MODEL 


H x W J 

N20166HWT 19.7 x 16.04 x 7.24 (50 x 41 x 18) 21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 22.75 x 16.87 x 7.77 (58 x 43 x 20) 16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 2 BP2016CS 17 x 13 (43 x 3) 6.26 








*Order Optional Panels Separately 


RJ N

ENCLOSURES 


NEMA 12 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman NEMA 12 single-door, wall-mounted enclosures 

house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, 

and components. These enclosures provide protection 

from dust, dirt, oil, and water. 

FEATURES 

• 16-gauge steel bodies and 14-gauge doors on sizes 

through 24" x 24", larger sizes all 14 gauge 

• Seams continuously welded and ground smooth, no 


• External mounting feet 

• Quick and easy operation of door clamps 

• Door removable by pulling heavy gauge 

continuous-hinge pin 


• Oil-resistant gasket attached with adhesive and 

steel retaining strips 

• Collar studs for mounting optional panels 

• White inside with ANSI 61 gray outside finish over 

phosphatized surfaces 




DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.62 

(1.57) 

A 

0.62 

(1.57) 


F 

0.44 

(1.12) 

B - 1.84 

(4.67) 

Data 

Pocket 

1.25 

(3.18) 

B 

1.25 

(3.18) 

2.0 

(5.08) 

A - 1.81 

(4.60) 

Door Stiffener 


0.44 (1.1) dia 

3.38 

(8.59) 

Door Clamp 

Padlocking 

Hasp and 

Staple 

ENCLOSURE 

MODEL 


A x B x C 

F 

SOLID PANEL* 

MODEL 

DIMENSIONS 

in (cm) 

NUMBER OF 

CLAMPS 

STIFFENER 

DOOR BODY 

A-161206LP 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 1.25 (3.1) A-16P12 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 2 

0 0 

A-161606LP 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-16P16 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 2 

0 0 

A-201606LP 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-20P16 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 2 

0 0 

A-202006LP 20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-20P20 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 2 

0 0 

A-241606LP 24 x 16 x 6 (61 x 41 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-24P16 21 x 13 (53 x 33) 2 

0 0 

A-242006LP 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-24P20 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 2 

0 0 

A-242406LP 24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-24P24 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-302406LP 30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-30P24 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-362406LP 36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-36P24 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-363006LP 36 x 30 x 6 (91 x 76 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-36P30 33 x 27 (83 x 69) 2 

0 0 

A-161208LP 16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20) 1.25 (3.1) A-16P12 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 2 

0 0 

A-201608LP 20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-20P16 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 2 

0 0 

A-241608LP 24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 41 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-24P16 21 x 13 (53 x 33) 2 

0 0 

A-242008LP 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-24P20 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 2 

0 0 

A-242408LP 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-24P24 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-302408LP 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-30P24 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-362408LP 36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-36P24 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-363008LP 36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-36P30 33 x 27 (83 x 69) 2 

0 1 

A-422408LP 42 x 24 x 8 (107 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-42P24 39 x 21 (99 x 53) 2 

0 0 

A-423608LP 42 x 36 x 8 (107 x 91 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-42P36 39 x 33 (99 x 83) 2 

1 1 

A-483608LP 48 x 36 x 8 (122 x 91 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-48P36 45 x 33 (114 x 83) 3 

1 1 

A-603608LP 60 x 36 x 8 (152 x 76 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-60P36 

57 x 33 (145 x 83) 3 

1 1 

* Order panels separately. Contact Kele for additional NEMA 12 sizes. 

Please see the "Hoffman Enclosure Accessory" page in the "Enclosures" section for latch kits, lock kits, electric heaters, ventilation kits, and cooling fans. 

3.38 

(8.6) 

C 

591 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

592 

ENCLOSURES 


CONCEPT SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman Concept Series enclosures are attractive, singledoor 

wall-mounted enclosures designed to safely house electrical 

and pneumatic components. Manufactured from 14- or 

16-gauge steel, depending on size, seams are continuously 

welded and ground smooth, so there are no holes or knockouts. 

These enclosures provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, 

and water. Concept Series enclosures are rated NEMA 4, 12, 

and 13. 

FEATURES 

• Minimum width body flange for maximum door opening 

• Hidden hinges for clean aesthetic appearance 

• Door removable by pulling captive hinge pins 

• Seamless foam-in-place one-piece gasket for oil-tight 

and dust-tight seal 

• Furnished with all hardware for wall mounting and seals 

for the mounting holes 

• Panel-mounting studs for optional subpanel and accessories 

• Door bar on hinge side for wire management and 

ground 

• Provisions on door for thermoplastic data pocket 

• UL listed, File #E61977; CSA certified, File #LR42186 

• Rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13 

• ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out 

with white panels 

MODEL 

C-SD12126 

C-SD16126 

C-SD20166 

C-SD20206 

C-SD24206 

C-SD24246 

C-SD16128 

C-SD20168 

C-SD24208 

C-SD24248 

C-SD30248 

C-SD36248 

C-SD36308 

C-SD363010 

C-SD423610 

C-SD483610 

C-SD603610 

DIMENSIONS 


12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 

16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 

20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 

20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 

24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 20 x 15) 

24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) 

16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20) 

20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 30 x 20) 

24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 

24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 

30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 

36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 

36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 

36 x 30 x 10 (91 x 76 x 25) 

42 x 36 x 10 (107 x 91 x 25) 

48 x 36 x 10 (122 x 91 x 25) 

60 x 36 x 10 (152 x 91 x 25) 

Call Trane for sizes other than those listed. 

See the “Hoffman Enclosures Accessories” page for 

heaters and fans. 

BODY 

GAUGE 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

14 

14 

14 

14 

14 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

12.0 (5.4) 

16.0 (7.3) 

22.0 (10.0) 

26.0 (11.8) 

30.0 (13.6) 

36.9 (16.7) 

16.0 (7.3) 

24.3 (11.0) 

32.3 (14.7) 

39.7 (18.0) 

46.0 (20.9) 

55.0 (24.9) 

77.0 (34.9) 

99.0 (44.9) 

114.4 (51.9) 

126.0 (57.2) 

151.0 (68.5) 

DIMENSIONS 


ENCLOSURE SOLID STEEL PANEL* 

A 

in 

(cm) 

A - 1.70 

(4.32) 

Door Clear 

Space 

MODEL 

C-P1212 

C-P1612 

C-P2016 

C-P2020 

C-P2420 

C-P2424 

C-P1612 

C-P2016 

C-P2420 

C-P2424 

C-P3024 

C-P3624 

C-P3630 

C-P3630 

C-P4236 

C-P4836 

C-P6036 

1.72 

(4.37) 

C-SD16126 

B 

B - 1.64 (4.17) 

Body Opening 

DIMENSIONS 

A x B in (cm) 

10.2 x 10.2 (26 x 26) 

14.5 x 10.2 (37 x 26) 

18.2 x 14.5 (46 x 37) 

18.2 x 18.2 (46 x 46) 

22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46) 

22.2 x 22.2 (56 x 56) 

14.2 x 10.2 (36 x 26) 

18.2 x 14.2 (46 x 36) 

22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46) 

22.2 x 22.2 (56 x 56) 

28.2 x 22.2 (72 x 56) 

34.2 x 22.2 (87 x 56) 

34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72) 

34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72) 

40.2 x 34.2 (102 x 87) 

46.2 x 34.2 (117 x 87) 

58.2 x 34.2 (148 x 87) 


CWHK Keylock handle for Concept Series 

0.80 

(2.03) 

6.23 

(15.82) 

GAUGE 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

2.4 (1.1) 

3.4 (1.5) 

7.9 (3.6) 

10.0 (4.5) 

13.0 (5.9) 

13.0 (5.9) 

3.4 (1.5) 

7.9 (3.6) 

13.0 (5.9) 

13.0 (5.9) 

18.0 (8.2) 

23.6 (10.7) 

30.4 (13.8) 

30.4 (13.8) 

43.0 (19.5) 

50.0 (22.7) 

58.0 (26.3) 

* Order panels separately. 

+ Add P to the end of model number to include solid steel subpanel. 

C 

1.16 

(2.95) 

Collar 

Stud

ENCLOSURES 


BEIGE CONCEPT SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman Beige Concept Series enclosures are attractive, 

single-door wall-mounted enclosures designed to 

safely house electrical and pneumatic components. 

Manufactured from 14- or 16-gauge steel, depending on 

size, seams are continuously welded and ground 

smooth, so there are no holes or knock-outs. These 

enclosures provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, and 

water. Concept Series enclosures are rated NEMA 4, 

12, and 13. 

FEATURES 

• Minimum width body flange for maximum door 

opening 

• Hidden hinges for clean aesthetic appearance 

• Door removable by pulling captive hinge pins 

• Seamless foam-in-place one-piece gasket for oiltight 

and dust-tight seal 

• Furnished with all hardware for wall mounting and 

seals for the mounting holes 

• Panel-mounting studs for optional subpanel and 

accessories 

• Door bar on hinge side for wire management and 

ground 

• Provisions on door for thermoplastic data pocket 

• UL listed, File #E61977; CSA certified, File #LR42186 

• Rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13 

• RAL9001 beige polyester powder coating inside 

and out with white panels 

MODEL 

BEIGE 

C-SD12126-BG 

C-SD16126-BG 

C-SD20166-BG 

C-SD24206-BG 

C-SD30248-BG 

C-SD36308-BG 

ENCLOSURE 

DIMENSIONS 


12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 

16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 

20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 

24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 20 x 15) 

30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 

36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 

Call Trane for sizes other than those listed. 

Minimum order of five for special sizes. 

BODY 

GAUGE 

16 

16 

16 

16 

16 

14 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

12.0 (5.4) 

16.0 (7.3) 

22.0 (10.0) 

30.0 (13.6) 

46.0 (20.9) 

77.0 (34.9) 

DIMENSIONS 


A 

in 

(cm) 

A - 1.70 

(4.32) 

Door Clear 

Space 

1.72 

(4.37) 

MODEL 

C-P1212 

C-P1612 

C-P2016 

C-P2420 

C-P3024 

C-P3630 

C-SD12126-BG 

B 

B - 1.64 (4.17) 

Body Opening 

SOLID STEEL PANEL 

DIMENSIONS 

A x B in (cm) 

10.2 x 10.2 (26 x 26) 

14.5 x 10.2 (37 x 26) 

18.2 x 14.5 (46 x 37) 

22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46) 

28.2 x 22.2 (72 x 56) 

34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72) 

0.80 

(2.03) 

6.23 

(15.82) 

GAUGE 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

12 

See the “Hoffman Enclosures Accessories” page for heaters and fans. 


CWHK Keylock handle for Concept Series 

C 

1.16 

(2.95) 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

2.4 (1.1) 

3.4 (1.5) 

7.9 (3.6) 

13.0 (5.9) 

18.0 (8.2) 

30.4 (13.8) 

Collar 

Stud 

593 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

594 

ENCLOSURES 

CONTROL CABINET 

VERSA-CAB 

DESCRIPTION 

The Versa-Cab control cabinet is designed to make 

mounting electrical and pneumatic components easy. 

The front panel is aluminum bonded to plywood, which 

makes it simple to cut a large hole with just a saw. 

Large meters, gauges, indicators, and operator interface 

devices can be mounted simply. If a change is needed 

later, replacement panels can be ordered. 

FEATURES 

• Direct replacement for M8100 cabinets 

• Extruded aluminum alloy frame 

• Removable face and back panels 

• Panels consist of aluminum bonded to both sides 

of plywood core 

• Face panel has gray baked enamel finish 

• Piano hinge on the door 

• Cabinet can be mounted so door opens left or right 

• Includes key-lock latch 

• UL Listed Type 1, file #E218484 


Cabinet Cabinet Size Weight 

Model No. H x W x D Lbs. 

VC-1812 18” x 12” x 9.5” 17.0 

VC-2418 24” x 18” x 9.5” 25.0 

VC-2424 24” x 24” x 9.5” 30.0 

VC-3024 30” x 24” x 9.5” 35.0 

VC-3624 36” x 24” x 9.5” 40.0 

VC-4230 42” x 30” x 9.5” 53.0 

VC-4836 48” x 36” x 9.5” 72.0 

Replacement Weight 

Face Panels Dimensions Lbs. 

VC-1812-FP 16.5” x 10.5” 2.1 

VC-2418-FP 22.5” x 16.5” 4.2 

VC-2424-FP 22.5” x 22.5” 5.6 

VC-3024-FP 28.5” x 22.5” 7.0 

VC-3624-FP 34.5” x 22.5” 8.4 

VC-4230-FP 40.5” x 28.5” 12.2 

VC-4836-FP 46.5” x 34.5” 16.8 

Replacement Weight 

Back Panels Dimensions Lbs. 

VC-1812-BP 16.5” x 10.5” 2.1 

VC-2418-BP 22.5” x 16.5” 4.2 

VC-2424-BP 22.5” x 22.5” 5.6 

VC-3024-BP 28.5” x 22.5” 7.0 

VC-3624-BP 34.5” x 22.5” 8.4 

VC-4230-BP 40.5” x 28.5” 12.2 

VC-4836-BP 46.5” x 34.5” 16.8 

DIMENSIONS 

H 

W 

D

ENCLOSURES 

HOFFMAN ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES 

LOCKS, LATCHES, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING 

MODEL 

A-L12AR 

A-L7A 

A-L2A 

A-L2BR 

A-L2CR 

A-L2DR 

LOUVER KITS 

A-VK33 

A-VK43 

A-VK64 

A-VK84 

FILTERS 

A-FLT33 

A-FLT43 

A-FLT64 

A-FLT84 

DESCRIPTION 

Cylinder lock 

T-handle latch 

One-point latch kit 

Three-point latch kit for 16, 20, 

24 or 30"H enclosures 

Three-point latch kit for 36, 42, 

48"H enclosures 

Three-point latch kit for 60 or 

72"H enclosures 



3.88 x 4.50 (9.9 x 11.4) 

4.50 x 5.50 (11.4 x 14) 

5.62 x 7.50 (14 .2 x 19) 

5.81 x 9.50 (14.8 x 24.1) 


3.22 x 3.25 (8.2 x 8.3) 

3.84 x 4.25 (9.8 x 10.8) 

4.45 x 6.25 (11.3 x 15.9) 

4.64 x 8.25 (11.8 x 21) 

DECORATIVE VENT KIT (includes filter) 

X-PV32 11.81 x 7.88 x 1.03 

(30 x 20 x 2.6) 

ENCLOSURE 

NEMA 1 

NEMA 1 

NEMA 12 

NEMA 12 

NEMA 12 

NEMA 12 

CUT-OUT SIZE in (cm) 

2.62 x 3.00 (6.7 x 7.6) 

3.25 x 4.00 (8.3 x 10.2) 

4.38 x 6.00 (11.1 x 15.2) 

4.56 x 8.00 (11.6 x 20.3) 

USED WITH 

A-VK33 

A-VK43 

A-VK64 

A-VK84 

Louver Plate Kit 

A-VK33 

ELECTRIC HEATERS 

ENCLOSURE SURFACE AREA (Sq Ft) = 2[(LxW) + (LxD) + (WxD)]/144 

Mounting - 100/200 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 4" above 

Heater 4"W x 5"H x 4"D (10.16 cm x 12.7 cm x 10.2 cm) 

400/800 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 6" above 

Heater 4.25"W x 7"H x 4.38"D (10.8 cm x 17.8 cm x 11.1 cm) 

MODEL 

D-AH1001A 

D-AH2001A 

D-AH4001B 

D-AH8001B 

FAN # 

A-4AXFN 

A-6AXFN 

A-10AXFN 


WATTS 

100 

200 

400 

800 

VOLTAGE 

(VAC) 

120 

120 

120 

120 

Hz 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

AMPS 

0.9 

1.7 

3.3 

6.5 

WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

4 (1.8) 

4 (1.8) 

6 (2.7) 

6 (2.7) 

Desired Ambient Temperature Rise F 

10F 20F 30F 40F 50F 60F 

Maximum Enclosure Surface Area in sq ft 

30 15 10 5 – – 

50 25 15 14 12 8 

– 50 30 23 19 16 

– – – 50 35 28 

COOLING FANS (1 guard included, 2 recommended) 115 VAC 50/60 Hz 

CFM 

100 

240 

560 



SIZE in (cm) 

4.69 (11.92) 

6.72 (17.07) 

10.00 (25.4) 

SHAPE 

Square 

Round 

Round 

GUARD # 

A-GARD4 

A-GARD6 

A-GARD10 

A-L12AR 

BRACKET # 

A-BRKT4 

A-BRKT6 

A-BRKT10 

A-L7A 

Filters for 

Louver Plate Kit 

A-FLT33 

Electric Heater 

Cooling Fans 

A-4AXFN 

A-L2A 

Decorative 

Vent Kit 

X-PV32 

Fan Bracket 

A-BRKT4 

Additional 

Fan Guard 

A-GARD4 

595 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

596 

ENCLOSURES 

HOFFMAN ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES 

WINDOW AND SWING-OUT PANEL KITS 

DESCRIPTION 

Hoffman Fixed and Hinged Window Kits are designed 

for use with NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 12, and 13 enclosures. Each 

NEMA 1, 4, 12, and 13 kit comes with a clear 0.25" (0.64 

cm) acrylic window, all of the essential hardware, and 

easy-to-follow instructions. The NEMA 4X stainless steel 

Fixed Window Kits are designed for use with NEMA 4X 

enclosures, have a clear 0.25" (0.64 cm) polycarbonate 

window, and also include hardware and instructions. The 

Hinged Window Kits are 1.49"D (3.78 cm) and provide 

an available working space of 1.19" (3.02 cm) from the 

surface of the door to the inside of the window. 


MODEL 

A-PWK53NF* 

A-PWK95NF* 

A-PWK133NF 

A-PWK138NF* 

A-PWK175NF 

A-PWK1711NF* 

A-PWK2315NF* 

A-PWK2919NF* 

A-PWK3523NF 

DESCRIPTION 

KIT NUMBER 

A-10P10-NADFK 

A-12P10-NADFK 

A-14P12-NADFK 

A-16P12-NADFK 

A-16P16-NADFK 

A-20P16-NADFK 

A-20P20-NADFK 

A-24P20-NADFK 

WINDOW SIZE 

5.0 x 3.0 (13 x 8) 

9.0 x 5.0 (23 x 13) 

13.0 x 3.0 (33 x 8) 

13.0 x 8.0 (33 x 20) 

17.0 x 5.0 (43 x 13) 

17.0 x 11.0 (43 x 28) 

23.0 x 15.0 (58 x 38) 

29.0 x 19.0 (74 x 48) 

35.0 x 23.0 (89 x 58) 

FIXED WINDOW KIT DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

Hoffman Swing-Out Panel Kits are ideal for conserving 

space inside of an enclosure or for mounting gauges, 

digital displays, and any other device that needs to be 

visible yet protected from the environment. Ideal for use 

with window kits, each panel kit includes the subpanel, 

hardware, and easy-to-follow installation instructions. 

The Swing-Out Panel Kits are designed for use in all 

single door NEMA 4, 12, and 13 Hoffman enclosures 

larger than 12.0" x 12.0" (30.5 x 30.5 cm), all HCLO 

NEMA 3R Hoffman enclosures larger than 16.0" x 16.0" 

(40.6 x 40.6 cm) and all NEMA 1 Hoffman enclosures 

larger than 42.0" x 30.0" (106.7 x 76.20 cm). 

INCLUDED SUBPANEL 

A-10P10 

A-12P10 

A-14P12 

A-16P12 

A-16P16 

A-20P16 

A-20P20 

A-24P20 

FRAME SIZE 

7.5 x 5.5 (19 x 14) 

11.5 x 8.0 (29 x 20) 

15.5 x 5.5 (39 x 14) 

15.5 x 10.5 (39 x 27) 

19.5 x 8.0 (50 x 20) 

19.5 x 13.5 (50 x 34) 

25.5 x 17.5 (65 x 44) 

31.5 x 21.5 (80 x 54) 

37.5 x 25.5 (95 x 65) 

CUT-OUT SIZE 

6.69 x 4.69 (17 x 12) 

10.69 x 7.19 (27 x 18) 

14.69 x 4.69 (37 x 12) 

14.69 x 9.69 (37 x 25) 

18.69 x 7.19 (47 x 18) 

18.69 x 12.69 (47 x 32) 

24.69 x 16.69 (63 x 42) 

30.69 x 20.69 (78 x 53) 

36.69 x 24.69 (93 x 63) 

* Available in stainless steel. Add SS after part number. Example: A-PWK53NFSS 


KIT NUMBER 

A-24P24-NADFK 

A-30P24-NADFK 

A-36P24-NADFK 

A-36P30-NADFK 

A-42P24-NADFK 

A-42P36-NADFK 

A-48P36-NADFK 

A-NADFK 

MODEL 

A-PWK1212H 

A-PWK1612H 

A-PWK2016H 

A-PWK2020H 

A-PWK2420H 

A-PWK3024H 

INCLUDED SUBPANEL 

A-24P24 

A-30P24 

A-36P24 

A-36P30 

A-42P24 

A-42P36 

A-48P36 

Swing-out panel hardware 

HINGED WINDOW KIT DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

WINDOW SIZE 

10.28 x 10.28 (26 x 26) 

14.28 x 10.28 (36 x 26) 

18.28 x 14.28 (46 x 36) 

18.28 x 18.28 (46 x 43) 

22.28 x 18.28 (57 x 43) 

28.28 x 22.28 (57 x 57) 

FRAME SIZE 

12.0 x 12.0 (30 x 30) 

16.0 x 12.0 (41 x 30) 

20.0 x 16.0 (51 x 41) 

20.0 x 20.0 (51 x 51) 

24.0 x 20.0 (61 x 51) 

30.0 x 24.0 (76 x 61) 

CUT-OUT SIZE 

10.44 x 10.44 (27 x 27) 

14.44 x 10.44 (37 x 27) 

18.44 x 14.44 (47 x 37) 

18.44 x 18.44 (47 x 47) 

22.44 x 18.44 (57 x 47) 

28.44 x 22.44 (72 x 57) 

Note: All steel fixed window kits meet UL Type 4 and Type 12, CSA Type 12. All stainless 

steel fixed window kits meet UL/CSA Type 4, Type 4X, and Type 12. All hinged window 

kits maintain UL Type 12 integrity.

ENCLOSURES 

NON-METALLIC BOXES 

PS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The versatile PS Series Non-Metallic Boxes are constructed 

only of flame-resistant materials. Rated for protection 

mode IP66 (similar to NEMA 4X), these boxes 

give complete protection from dust, water jets, and even 

temporary flooding. Their attractive appearance makes 

them ideal for any location. Standard boxes from Trane 

have knockout side walls, gray bases, and gray covers. 

Optional fitting plates are available for easy mounting of 

control components inside the PS Series. 

FEATURES 

• Impact resistant, nonflammable materials 

• Dustproof and moistureproof, IP66 (NEMA 4X) 

• No drying, cracking, or deteriorating of integral 

seal 

• Knockouts on side walls 

• Corrosion and maintenance free 

DIMENSIONS 

B 

A C 


BOX MODEL * 


DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) 

PS1111-7 4.33 x 4.33 x 2.60 (11.0 x 11.0 x 6.6) 

PS1111-9 4.33 x 4.33 x 3.54 (11.0 x 11.0 x 9.0) 

PS1313-7 5.11 x 5.11 x 2.95 (13.0 x 13.0 x 7.5) 

PS1811-9 7.09 x 4.33 x 3.54 (18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0) 

PS1818-9 7.09 x 7.09 x 3.54 (18.0 x 18.0 x 9.0) 

PS2518-9 10.0 x 7.09 x 3.54 (25.4 x 18.0 x 9.0) 

Construction 

Base/Cover Polystyrene, impact-resistant, 

nonflammable 

Seal Polyurethane 

Base/Cover color Light gray 

Flammability rating UL94 V2, 1760°F (960°C) 

Temp rating 

Max/Min long term 158°F (70°C)/-40°F (-40°C) 

Knockouts 1/2" NPT (2.3 cm) 

3/4" NPT (2.9 cm) 

FITTING PLATE MODEL DIMENSIONS in (cm) FITS ENCLOSURES 

TK1111 3.54 x 3.54 (9.0 x 9.0) PS1111 

TK1313 4.33 x 4.33 (11.0 x 11.0) PS1313 

TK1811 5.91 x 3.54 (15.0 x 9.0) PS1811 

TK1818 5.91 x 5.91 (15.0 x 15.0) PS1818 

TK2518 8.66 x 5.91 (22.0 x 15.0) PS2518 

*Add T to end of model number to order smoke-tinted transparent cover. 

Fitting plates are plastic laminate 0.10" (0.25 cm) thick with hole patterns to match mounting provisions in enclosures. 

Screws are furnished. 

Call Trane for other box sizes and options of transparent covers, smooth sidewalls, and hinge kits. 


154-004 Metal mounting tabs 

PS1313-7 

PS1313-7-T 

597 

ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURES 

598 

ENCLOSURES 

MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES 

B SERIES, MODEL 14121-000 

DESCRIPTION 

B Series Small Enclosures are versatile boxes for 

relays, transducers, and other remotely mounted 

devices. The two-piece design allows easy access as 

the sections slip together and fasten with either a built-in 

snap lock or furnished sheet metal screws. 

FEATURES 

• Two-piece construction 

• Flanged sections to assure proper shielding 

• 1/2" knockouts top and bottom 

• Natural aluminum or galvanized steel finish 

DIMENSIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION 

ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) WEIGHT ACCESSORIES 

MODEL L W H lb (kg) INCLUDED 

B-5* 5 (12.7) 4 (10.16) 3 (7.62) 0.5 (0.2) none 

B-7* 7 (17.78) 5 (12.7) 3 (7.62) 0.75 (0.34) none 

B-12** 12 (30.48) 12 (30.48) 3 (7.62) 5.5 (2.5) none 

B-12-P 12 (30.48) 12 (30.48) 3 (7.62) 7 (3.2) QP1212 - 11" x 11" 

perf-panel 

* Natural aluminum finish ** Galvanized steel finish 

DESCRIPTION 

Model 14121-000 Enclosures are constructed of 

impact-resistant polycarbonate and feature a transparent, 

gasketed cover that keeps out dust and water. 

These enclosures are well suited for mounting transducers, 

displays, and other remote devices. 

FEATURES 

• NEMA 4X (IP67) 

• Base molded in glass-filled polycarbonate 

• Light gray color base 

• Temperature range -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C) 

• Cover molded in clear polycarbonate 

• Knockouts for 1/2" and 3/4" hubs 

• Mounting bosses provided 

DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� 

� 


ENCLOSURE 


14121-000 Polycarbonate enclosure 

with transparent cover, 

0.53 lb (0.24 kg) 

�

Direct 

CTRICAL TERMS 

hp x 746 

E x %eff 

kW x 1000 kW x 

E E x pf 

kVA x 1000 

E 

I x E I x E x pf I x Ex1 1000 1000 1000 

I x E I x E x 1.73 

1000 1000 

I x E x %eff I x E x %eff x pf I x E x 1.73 x %eff x pf 

746 746 746 

( 

(I) Unit of current or rate of flow of electricity 

Unit of electromotive force 

R) Unit of resistance 

Ohms Law: I = E 

R (DC or 100% pf) 

ff Motor efficiency Note: If unknown assume %eff x pf = 0.7 for 25 hp or le 

0.8 above 25 hp 

1,000,000 ohms 

Unit of apparent power 

xI(single-phase) 

3 (three-phase) 

s 

ower 

current leads or lags volta 

POWER SUPPLIES

PRODUCT 

The PS5R Series of 

Switching Power 

Supplies offers universal 

AC input! 

SERVICES 

Our Immediate 

Exchange program 

makes any return fast and 

easy! 

Direct 

CTRICAL TERMS 

hp x 746 

E x %eff 

kW x 1000 kW x 

E E x pf 

kVA x 1000 

E 

I x E I x E x pf I x Ex1 1000 1000 1000 

I x E I x E x 1.73 

1000 1000 

I x E x %eff I x E x %eff x pf I x E x 1.73 x %eff x pf 

746 746 746 

( 

(I) Unit of current or rate of flow of electricity 

Unit of electromotive force 

R) Unit of resistance 


R (DC or 100% pf) 

ff Motor efficiency Note: If unknown assume %eff x pf = 0.7 for 25 hp or le 


1,000,000 ohms 

Unit of apparent power 

xI(single-phase) 

3 (three-phase) 

s 

ower 

current leads or lags volta 

SOLUTIONS 

Refer to Power 

Equations in the 

Technical Reference 

Section for a helpful guide. 




DCP-1.5-W — DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 

DCP-250 — Enclosed DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 

DCP-524 — DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 

DCPA-1.2 — AC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 

PS5R Series — Switching Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 

PSM Series — Class 2 DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 

PW2 — Compact DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 

SLS Series — DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 

TRANSFORMERS 

33 Series — 120 VAC Secondary Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 

691 Series — Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 

691-U100 — Control Transformer Class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 

694 Series — Multi-tap Control Transformers with Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 

AT140A, AT150A, AT87A — Control Transformers Class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 

AT150F, AT175F — Control Transformers Class 2 with Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . .603 

E100E, E150E, E300E, E500E — Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 

T-PB Series — 24 VAC Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 

Y63, Y65, Y66 — Control Transformers Class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 

RIB TR Series — Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 



CONTROL TRANSFORMERS 

691 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 691 Series of stepdown voltage transformers are for 

use in temperature control systems. They provide nominal 

24 VAC control voltage from 120 VAC primary supply. 

These transformers are designed for NEMA 1 locations. 

They should be installed in compliance with all 

national and local electrical codes. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Hub or foot mounting 

• Fully enclosed with metal end bells 



Primary voltage 

Secondary voltage 

Frequency 

VA rating 

Mounting 

Conduit connection 

Wire leads 

Weight 

Approvals 

in 

(cm) 

D 

1/2" (1.3 cm) Male 

Conduit Threads 

MODEL 

691-K1A 

691-K2A 

691-K0A 

120 VAC 

24 VAC 

60 Hz 

40 VA 

Hub or foot 

1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads 

8" (20.3 cm) 

2.1 lb (0.95 kg) 

UL listed, 

Class 2 File #E99227 


C 

E 

A 

2.6 

(6.7) 

3.1 

(8.0) 

MODEL 

691-K1A 

120 VAC 

24 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

100 VA 

Hub or foot 


8" (20.3 cm) 

3.5 lb (1.6 kg) 

UL listed 

(not Class 2) 

File #E250952 

B 

Primary (120 VAC) 

Black (120V), White (N) 

Secondary (24 VAC) 

Red, Red 

DIMENSIONS 

B 

3.0 

(7.7) 

3.8 

(9.6) 

C 

3.2 

(8.2) 

4.1 

(10.3) 

691-K1A/691-K2A Transformers 

691-K2A 

120 VAC 

24 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

170 VA 

Hub or foot 


8" (20.3 cm) 

6.3 lb (2.9 kg) 

UL listed 

(not Class 2) 

File #E250952 

D 

2.5 

(6.4) 

3.3 

(8.3) 

A 

E 

2.2 

(5.7) 

2.4 

(6.1) 

691-K1A 


Primary Wires (120 VAC) 

Black (120 V), White (N) 

3.13 

(7.95) 

2.5 

(6.35) 


691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 

691-K1A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 100 VA 

691-K2A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 170 VA 

691-K2A 

3.0 

(7.62) 

1/2" (1.3 cm) Male 

Conduit Threads 

Secondary Wires (24 VAC) 

Brown (COM), Red (24 V) 

2.06 

(5.23) 

691-K0A Transformer 

691-K0A 

(Class 2) 

599 

POWER SUPPLIES



CLASS 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMER 

MODEL 691-U100 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 691-U100 is a UL listed, Class 2, 96 VA 

stepdown transformer designed to provide nominal 24 

VAC from a 120 VAC primary supply. The Model 691- 

U100 is ideal for heating/cooling control systems where 

a large capacity Class 2 control transformer is needed. 

FEATURES 

• UL listed, Class 2 

• Resettable secondary circuit breaker 

• Metal end bells 

• Dual threaded hubs 

• Foot or hub mounting 


Voltage 

Primary 120 VAC 

Secondary 24 VAC 

VA rating 96 VA 

Frequency 

Ambient temp 

50/60 Hz 

without derating 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C) 

Circuit breaker Manual reset, 4A trip 

Configuration Metal end bells with 

dual threaded hubs 

Conduit connection Two 1/2" male connectors 

Shipping weight 4.9 lb (2.2 kg) 

Approvals UL listed, Class 2 

600 


in 

(cm) 


8" (20.32) Primary Wires (120 VAC) 

Black (120V) / White (N) 

2.63 

(6.68) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

3.75 

(9.53) 


691-U100 Class 2 control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 96 VA 

3.2 

(8.13) 

Circuit Breaker 

3.13 

(7.95) 

3/8" x 3/16" Slots (4) 

(0.953) x (0.476) 

8" (20.32) Secondary Wires (24 VAC) 

Brown (COM) / Orange (24V)

DESCRIPTION 

The 694 Series of industrial-grade multi-tap stepdown voltage 

transformers with manual, resettable, current-limiting secondary 

circuit breakers is ideal for use in temperature control 

systems. These UL listed transformers provide 24 VAC control 

voltage from 120-480 VAC primary supply. The leads are color 

coded or clearly marked for ease of wiring. These foot-mounted 

transformers are designed for NEMA 1 locations and 

should be installed in compliance with all national and local 

electrical codes. 

FEATURES 

• Multi-tap primary from 120-480 VAC 

• Manual resettable secondary circuit breaker 

• Foot mounting 

• UL listed 


Voltage 

Primary 120, 208, 240, 480 VAC 



VA rating/manual breaker 

694-M1A 75 VA / 5A trip 

694-M2A 100 VA / 6A trip 

694-M3A 180 VA / 12A trip 

694-M4 300 VA / 16A trip 

Temp rise 144°F (80°C) 

Wire leads 10" (25.4 cm) 

Mounting Foot 

Shipping weight 

694-M1A 3.74 lb (1.7 kg) 

694-M2A 3.79 lb (1.72 kg) 

694-M3A 6.54 lb (2.97 kg) 

694-M4 15.0 lb (6.8 kg) 

Approvals UL listed 

WIRING 

694-M1A, M2A, M3A 

Black 

White 

Orange 

Brown 

Gray 

Primary 

Wiring* 


MULTI-TAP CONTROL TRANSFORMERS WITH BREAKER 

694 SERIES 

Circuit 

Breaker 

Red 

24 

VAC 

Red 

* Insulate the ends 

of unused primary 

leads. 

Secondary 

Wiring 

Common 

120 VAC 

208 VAC 

240 VAC 

480 VAC 

0 

120 

208 

240 

480 

Primary 

Wiring* 

694-M4 

Circuit 

Breaker 

24 

24 

VAC 

0 

* Insulate the ends 

of unused primary 

leads. 

Secondary 

Wiring 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

D 

Circuit Breaker 



694-M1A Control transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 75 VA 



694-M4 Control transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 300 VA 

C E 

DIMENSIONS 

MODEL A B C D E 

694-M1A 2.50 3.0 4.53 2.50 2.25 

(6.35) (7.62) (11.5) (6.35) (5.72) 

694-M2A 2.50 3.0 4.53 2.50 2.25 

(6.35) (7.62) (11.5) (6.35) (5.72) 

694-M3A 3.78 3.15 5.06 2.45 3.51 

(9.6) (8.0) (12.85) (6.22) (8.92) 

694-M4A 4.50 3.75 5.13 3.25 3.50 

(11.43) (9.53) (13.03) (8.26) (8.89) 

B 

A 

601 

POWER SUPPLIES



CLASS 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMERS 

MODELS AT140A, AT150A, AT87A 

DESCRIPTION 

These general-purpose transformers provide power to nominal 

24 VAC control circuits. They are typically used in 

heating/cooling control systems but can be used in any application 

that does not exceed the load ratings. All models are 

UL listed or recognized and meet NEC Class 2 “not wet” and 

Class 3 “wet” requirements. 

FEATURES 

• Meets NEC Class 2 “not wet” and Class 3 “wet” 

• Color-coded leads 

• Screw terminal secondary (AT140A, AT150A) 

• Models with multi-tap primary 


in 

(cm) 

0.19 

(0.48) 

602 

1.75 

(4.45) 

0.38 

(0.97) 

Primary* 

Wires 

2.38 

(6.05) 

1.75 

(4.45) 

Common** 

120 VAC 

208 VAC 

240 VAC 

(black) 

(white) 

(red) 

(orange) 

3.12 max 

(7.92) 

0.69 

(1.7) 

24 VAC 

Secondary 

Terminals 

2.25 

(5.72) 3.19 

(8.10) 

*Insulate the ends of the unused primary leads by taping or capping with a solderless connector. 

**Black is common with respect to the transformer windings only, not the external circuit. 


in 

(cm) 

0.19 

(0.48) 

Mounting 

Screw Hole (4) 


AT140A / AT150A 


Primary 

Wires 

2.38 

(6.05) 

1.56 

(3.95) 

1.94 

(4.93) 

(black/red) 

Models AT140A & AT150A Model AT87A 

(black) 

1.75 

(4.45) 

2.19 

(5.55) 


AT140A1018 Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 40 VA 

AT150A1007 Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 50 VA 

AT87A1155 Control transformer, 480 :24 VAC, 48 VA 

AT87A1189 Control transformer, 277 :24 VAC, 48 VA 

2.8 

(7.11) 

Secondary 

Wires 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

24 VAC 

Secondary 

Wires 

MODEL 

AT140A/AT150A AT87A 

Primary voltage 120/208/240 VAC 480 or 277 VAC 

Secondary voltage 24 VAC 24 VAC 

Frequency 60 Hz 50/60 Hz 

VA rating AT140A: 40 VA, AT150A: 50 VA 48 VA 

Mounting Foot, knockout, plate (included) Foot 

Wiring connections Primary: 9" (22.8 cm), colored leads; Secondary: screw terminals 12" (30.5 cm) colored leads 

Weight 2 lb (0.91 kg) 1.75 lb (0.79 kg) 

Approvals UL listed, File #E14881; CSA certified UL recognized component, File #E14881; 

CSA certified 

Class NEC Class 2 “not wet,” Class 3 “wet” NEC Class 2 “not wet,” Class 3 “wet” 

AT87A 

Primary 

Wires 

(black/red) 

(black)

DESCRIPTION 

Model AT150F and AT175F transformers provide power 

to nominal 24 VAC circuits in heating/cooling systems. 

Although the transformers are typically used in 

heating/cooling systems, they can be used in any application 

that does not exceed the load ratings. They include 

a manual reset button for resetting the circuit breaker. 

They also meet NEC Class 2 “not wet” and Class 3 “wet” 

requirements and are UL listed under UL1585. 

Transformers can be foot or hub mounted. 

FEATURES 

• Multi-tap primary connections 

• Color-coded lead wires 

• Manually resettable circuit breaker 

• Meets NEC Class 2 “not wet” and Class 3 “wet” 

transformer requirements 


WIRING 

Primary* 

Wires 


CLASS 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMERS WITH BREAKER 

MODELS AT150F, AT175F 

Voltage 

Primary 120/208/240 VAC or 

208/277/480 VAC 



VA rating 

AT150F 50 VA 

AT175F 75 VA 

Mounting Foot or hub 

Conduit connection 1/2" male NPT 

Lead wires 9" (22.8 cm), color coded 



CSA approved, File #LR95329-18 

Class NEC Class 2 “not wet,” 

Class 3 “wet” 

Common** 

(black) 

120V 

208V 

(white) 

(red) 

240V 

(orange) 

(yellow) 

(blue) 

24 VAC 

Secondary 

Wires 

Primary* 

Wires 

Common** 

208V (black) 

277V (red) 

480V 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.44 

(1.18) 

0.44 

(1.18) 

1/2" NPT 

(brown) 

(black/red) 

(yellow) 

120/208/240 VAC Models 208/277/480 VAC Models 


0.69 

(1.78) 

(blue) 

24 VAC 

Secondary 

Wires 


AT150F1022 Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 50 VA with breaker 




A 

C 

B 

Reset Button 

MODEL 

AT150F 

AT175F 

3.19 

(8.10) 

A 

DIMENSIONS 

B C 

1.75 (4.5) 1.75 (4.5) 3.63 (9.3) 

2.13 (5.4) 1.75 (4.5) 3.94 (10.2) 

2.19 

(5.56) 

*Insulate the ends of the 

unused primary leads by 

taping or capping with a 

solderless connector. 

**Black is common with respect 

to the transformer windings only, 

not the external circuit. 

603 

POWER SUPPLIES


DESCRIPTION 

604 


CLASS 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMERS 

MODELS Y63, Y65, Y66 

Model Y63, Y65, and Y66 Class 2 Control 

Transformers handle 24 VAC power requirements from 

40, 50, and 75 VA. These transformers are used on digital 

controllers, gas controls, ignition systems, motor 

actuators, staging controls, and other 24 VAC control 

systems. 

FEATURES 

• Color-coded leads 


• Fully enclosed 

• Meets UL1585, UL506, and C22.2 No.66 


Y63T22-0 

Y65T42-0 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

Y65G13-0 Isolation transformer, 24:24 VAC, 40 VA 

Y65T42-0 Control transformer 120/208/240: 24 VAC, 40 VA 



Y65G13-0 

Y63T22-0 Y65G13-0 (Isolation) Y65T42-0 Y66T12-0 

Primary voltage 120/208/240 VAC 24 VAC 120/208/240 VAC 120/208/240 VAC 

Secondary voltage 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 

VA rating 50 VA 40 VA 40 VA 75 VA 

Frequency 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 

Overload protection Circuit breaker Internal Internal Circuit breaker 

Primary lead wires 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 

Secondary lead wires 8" (20.3 cm) 30" (76.2 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 


-40° to 122°F 

(-40° to 50°C) 

-40° to 122°F 

(-40° to 50°C) 

-40° to 122°F 

(-40° to 50°C) 

-40° to 122°F 

(-40° to 50°C) 

Dimensions 

2.5" x 3.0" x 3.5" 

(6.4 x 7.6 x 8.9 cm) 

2.2" x 2.9" x 3.6" 

(5.6 x 7.4 x 9.1 cm) 

2.2" x 2.7" x 3.2" 

(5.6 x 6.9 x 8.1 cm) 

2.5" x 3.3" x 4.2" 

(6.4 x 8.4 x 10.7 cm) 

Mounting 4" x 4" Plate Foot, 2 hubs Hub, 4" x 4" plate Foot, hub 

Shipping weight 3.0 lb (1.4 kg) 2.0 lb (0.82 kg) 2.0 lb (0.82 kg) 3.0 lb (1.4 kg) 

Approvals 

WIRING 

Common 

24 VAC 

UL-recognized 

component, Class 2, 

File #E25482 

(white) 

(brown) 

Common 

(white/orange) (orange) 

24 VAC 

UL and ULC listed, 

Class 2, File #E25482 

UL-recognized 


File #E25482 

Common 

(white) 

120 VAC 

(black) 

208 VAC 

(red) 

240 VAC 

(yellow) 

Insulate the ends of unused primary leads. 

Y66T12-0 

Y65G13-0 Y65T42-0, Y63T22-0, Y66T12-0 

UL-recognized 


File #E25482 

Common 

(brown) 

24 VAC 

(orange)



MODELS E100E, E150E, E300E, E500E 

DESCRIPTION 

Models E100E, E150E, E300E, and E500E are premium performance, 

epoxy-encapsulated control transformers used in 

temperature control systems and industrial applications. These 

transformers are able to meet high inrush loads while providing 

outstanding voltage regulation, more efficient (cooler) 

operation, and simple installation and wiring. They are 

designed to provide 24 VAC control voltage from a 120/240 

VAC primary supply. 

FEATURES 

• Precise spacing between interleaved windings for 

maximized voltage regulation 

• Oversized copper windings to contribute to low temperature 

rise 

• Solid epoxy-encapsulation to dissipate heat efficiently 

and completely seal coil against moisture, dirt, and 

other airborne contaminants 

• Ten-year warranty 


Voltage 

Primary 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 


VA rating 100, 150, 300, or 500 VA 

Insulation class 221°F (105°C) 


Mounting Slotted feet 

Terminals Plated brass binder head screws 

Weight 

E100E 4.2 lb (1.9 kg) E150E 7.0 lb (3.2 kg) 

E300E 11.8 lb (5.4 kg) E500E 17.6 lb (7.99 kg) 


CSA certified, File #LR14328-22 

WIRING 

120 VAC 240 VAC 24 VAC 

H1 H3 H2 H4 H1 H3 H2 H4 X2 X1 

Primary Wiring 

in 

(cm) 

D 

Secondary Wiring 

DIMENSIONS 

DIMENSION 

D 

W 

H 


H1 H3 H2 H4 

X2 X1 

W 

E100E E150E E300E 

4.64 (11.8) 

3.38 (8.6) 

2.87 (7.31) 

4.48 (11.4) 

4.50 (11.4) 

3.82 (19.7) 

MODEL 

Recommended Fuses (max amps) 

E100E: FLM-5 

E150E: FLM-10 

E300E: FLM-20 

E500E: FLM-30 

Secondary fuse holders (FB2X) are 

included with all transformers. 

Use 13/32 x 1-1/2 cartridge fuse. 


E100E Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 100 VA 




5.09 (12.9) 

5.25 (13.3) 

4.45 (11.3) 

H 

E500E 

6.32 (16.1) 

5.25 (13.3) 

4.45 (11.3) 

605 

POWER SUPPLIES



120 VAC SECONDARY TRANSFORMERS 

33 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 33 Series is an industrial-grade control transformer 

with 120 VAC secondary voltage. These transformers 

are ideal for use in building automation and temperature 

control systems. 

FEATURES 

• Single hub or foot mounting 



• Low cost 


Voltage 

Primary 208, 277, 240, or 480 VAC 



VA rating 50 or 100 VA 

Mounting Hub or foot, NEMA 1 

Conduit connection 1/2" male threads 

Insulation class 221°F (105°C) 


Wire leads 8.0" (20.32 cm), labeled 

Weight 

50 VA 2.7 lb (1.2 kg) 

100 VA 4.0 lb (1.8 kg) 



WIRING 

606 

H1 208 or H2 

277V 

X2 120V X1 

Models -17, -82 

240V 

H1 H3 H2 H4 

H1 

480V 

H2 H3 H4 

X2 120V X1 

Model -PM 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.38 

(0.95) 

VA 

50 

100 


C 

A 

3.19 

(8.10) 

3.63 

(9.22) 

B 

3.0 

(7.62) 

3.38 

(8.59) 

DIMENSIONS 

C 

2.50 

(6.35) 

2.81 

(7.14) 


33-050-17 Control transformer, 208:120V, 50 VA 




33-050-PM Control transformer, 480/240:120V, 50 VA 

33-100-PM Control transformer, 480/240:120V, 100 VA 

B 

E 

D 

1.69 

(4.29) 

2.13 

(5.41) 

D A 

1/2" 

Conduit 

Hub 

E 

2.50 

(6.35) 

2.50 

(6.35)



RIB TR SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The RIB TR Series offers a complete line of control 

transformers for use in building automation and temperature 

control systems. The series includes transformer 

VA ratings from 20 VA up through 375 VA and primary 

voltages of 120, 208, 240, 277, and 480 VAC. Isolation 

transformers for 24 VAC circuits are also included. 

All RIB TR Series transformers are either UL listed or 

UL recognized, and some have an in-line secondary circuit 

breaker. 

FEATURES 

• Complete line of control transformers from 20 VA 

to 375 VA 

• Foot and hub mounting on most models 

• All models UL listed or recognized, most Class 2 

• Color-coded wire leads 

• Ambient temp 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C) 


MODEL 

TR20VA001 

TR20VA003 

TR20VA007 

TR40VA001 

TR40VA002 

TR40VA003 

TR50VA001 

TR50VA002 

TR50VA003 

TR50VA004 

TR50VA005 

TR50VA006 

TR50VA007 

TR50VA009 

TR75VA001 

TR75VA002 

TR75VA004 

TR75VA005 

TR85VA002 

TR100VA001 

TR100VA002 

TR100VA004 

TR150VA001 

TR175VA001 

TR175VA002 

TR240VA001 

TR375VA001 

WIRING 

VA 

RATING 

20 

20 

20 

40 

40 

40 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

50 

75 

75 

75 

75 

85 

96 

96 

96 

150 

175 

175 

240 

375 

PRIMARY:SECONDARY 

VOLTAGE (VAC) 

120:24 

24:24 

277:24 

120:24 

120:24 

24:24 

120:24 

120:24 

208/240:24 

120/240/277/480:24 

120:24 

277:24 

277:24 

120/208/240:24 

120:24 

120:24 

120/208/240/480:24 

120/208/240/480:24 

120:24 

120:24 

120:24 

120/240/277/480:24 

120:24 

208/240:24 

120:24 

120:24 

120:24 

Primary Wires 

480 VAC Gray 120 VAC White 

277 VAC Brown 24 VAC Black 

240 VAC Orange Common Black 

208 VAC Red 

FREQUENCY 

(Hz) 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

50/60 

CIRCUIT 

BREAKER 

No 

No 

No 

No 

No 

No 

No 

No 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

No 

No 

No 

MOUNTING 

H = Hub 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

2H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

Foot 

2H + Foot 

1H + Foot 

Foot 

TR75VA002 

TR40VA001 

Secondary Wires 

24 VAC Yellow 

24 VAC Yellow or Yellow/White 

APPROVALS 

Class 2 UL listed US/Canada, E197146 

UL listed US/Canada, E197147 

















UL listed US/Canada, E197147 




UL recognized US/Canada, E197147 





607 

POWER SUPPLIES




RIB TR SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

MODEL 

E 

TR20VA001 

TR20VA003 

TR20VA007 

TR40VA001 

TR40VA003 

TR50VA001 

TR50VA006 

TR85VA002 

MODEL 

E 

TR150VA001 

E 

608 

A 

2.13 (5.4) 

2.13 (5.4) 

2.13 (5.4) 

2.7 (6.9) 

2.7 (6.9) 

2.75 (7.0) 

2.79 (7.1) 

2.80 (7.1) 

D 

Mounting 

Hole 

D 

Mounting 

Hole 

Mounting 

Hole 

Mounting 

Hole 

Circuit 

Breaker 

DIMENSIONS 

A B C D 

3.5 (8.9) 3.75 (9.5) 3.25 (8.3) 3.23 (8.2) 

D 

0.5 

(1.27) 

MODEL 

A B 

DIMENSIONS 

C D 

TR240VA001 3.75 (9.5) 3.75 (9.5) 4.5 (11.4) 3.13 (8.0) 

E 

MODEL 

TR50VA005 

TR75VA001, 005 

TR100VA001 

D 

A 

3.5 (8.9) 

3.9 (9.9) 

4.0 (10.2) 

W 

A 

A 

A 

A 

W 

W 

E 

2.0 (5.1) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

W 0.5 

(1.27) 

E 

3.23 (8.2) 

Circuit 

Breaker 

W 

B 

B 

C 

C 

WEIGHT lb (kg) 

W 

9.5 (24.1) 4.92 (2.23) 

B 

C 


W 

9.5 (24.1) 9.12 (4.13) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

B 

DIMENSIONS 

C D E W 


2.52 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 9.0 (22.9) 2.6 (1.2) 

2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.4 (6.1) 9.5 (24.1) 3.66 (1.66) 

2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.55 (6.4) 9.5 (24.1) 4.06 (1.84) 

B 

C 


Mounting 

Hole 

Order by transformer model as listed under Specifications on the previous page. 

E 

D 

0.5 

(1.27) 

Circuit 

Breaker 

B 

DIMENSIONS 

C D E W 

WEIGHT lb (kg) MODEL 

A B 

DIMENSIONS 

C D E W 


1.90 (4.8) 2.6 (6.6) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.35 (0.61) TR50VA004 3.48 (8.8) 2.52 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (5.0) 9.5 (24.1) 3.04 (1.38) 

1.90 (4.8) 2.6 (6.6) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.39 (0.63) TR50VA009 3.48 (8.8) 2.52 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 1.95 (5.0) 9.5 (24.1) 3.04 (1.38) 

1.90 (4.8) 2.6 (6.6) 1.63 (4.1) 1.54 (3.9) 8.0 (20.3) 1.38 (0.63) TR75VA002 3.9 (9.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.4 (6.1) 9.5 (24.1) 3.70 (1.68) 

2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.02 (0.92) TR100VA002 4.0 (10.2) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 2.55 (6.5) 9.5 (24.1) 4.13 (1.87) 

2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.05 (0.93) TR100VA004 4.25 (10.8) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 1.97 (5.0) 2.75 (7.0) 9.5 (24.1) 4.60 (2.08) 

2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.14 (0.97) 

2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.16 (0.98) 

3.75 (9.5) 3.18 (8.1) 3.10 (7.9) 2.0 (5.1) 9.5 (24.1) 4.35 (1.97) 

D 

W 

E 0.5 W 

W 0.5 

Mounting 

Hole 

(1.27) 

(1.27) 

Mounting 

Hole 

A 

A 

W 

0.5 

(1.27) 

MODEL 

A B 

DIMENSIONS 

C D E W 


TR175VA001 3.8 (9.7) 3.8 (9.7) 3.2 (8.1) 3.1 (7.9) 3.0 (7.6) 9.5 (24.1) 7.05 (3.19) 

TR375VA001 4.33 (11.0) 3.75 (9.5) 4.5 (11.4) 3.15 (8.0) 3.83 (9.7) 7.0 (17.8) 11.44 (5.18) 

D 

C 

W 

W 

0.5 

0.5 

E 

(1.27) 

Mounting 

Hole 

(1.27) 

MODEL 

A B 

DIMENSIONS 

C D E W 


TR40VA002 2.7 (8.8) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.05 (0.93) 

TR50VA002 2.75 (7.0) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.93 (4.9) 8.0 (20.3) 2.18 (0.99) 

TR50VA003 2.75 (7.0) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.17 (0.98) 

TR50VA007 2.79 (7.1) 2.2 (5.6) 2.9 (7.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 8.0 (20.3) 2.17 (0.98) 

TR175VA002 3.9 (9.9) 3.75 (9.5) 3.18 (8.1) 3.1 (7.9) 3.0 (7.6) 9.5 (24.1) 7.10 (3.22) 

MODEL 

E 

TR75VA004 

Circuit 

Breaker 

D 

0.5 

(1.27) 

DIMENSIONS 

A B C D 

3.9 (9.9) 2.5 (6.4) 3.0 (7.6) 2.0 (5.1) 

A 

A 

W 

E 

2.4 (6.1) 

0.5 

(1.27) 

W 

9.5 (24.1) 

B 

B 

B 

B 

3.78 (1.71) 

C 

C 


C

DESCRIPTION 

The T-PB Series UL listed power source provides 24 VAC 

from a 115 VAC input. The T-PB Series contains an LED 

that illuminates when the 24 VAC output is operational. An 

on/off switch is provided in the 115 VAC input. This switch 

disconnects or connects both the hot and neutral of the 

input power. 

A convenience outlet is located on the front panel. This 

convenience outlet is not controlled by the on/off switch 

and is always hot. 

A circuit breaker is incorporated in the 24 VAC circuit, 

which must be manually reset if the rated 3.0A (Class 2) or 

4.0A (Class 1) is exceeded and the breaker operates. 

The T-PB Series is available in a metal enclosure for field 

applications or without the enclosure for panel mounting. 

FEATURES 

• Enclosed and panel-mounted models 

• On/Off switch 

• Convenience outlet 

• Circuit breaker 

• Enclosure with removable access panel to on/off 

switch, breaker, and outlet 



24 VAC POWER SOURCE 

T-PB SERIES 

Output 

Voltage 24 VAC 

Current 

T-PB202 4.0A, 96 VA (Class 1) 

T-PB303 3.0A, 72 VA (Class 2) 

Convenience outlet 115 VAC, 5.0A max 

Input power 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 6.0A max 

(1A normal operating max, 

5A convenience outlet) 

Temp - 13° to 140°F (-25° to 60°C) 

Terminals #12 to #22 AWG 

Dimensions 

Enclosed 6.12"H x 5.19"W x 4.12"D 

(15.5 x 13.2 x 10.5 cm) 

with 1/2" knock-outs 

Panel mount 4.75"H x 5.0"W x 3.75"D 

(12.1 x 12.7 x 9.5 cm) 


Approvals 

Enclosed UL listed, File #E160579 

Panel mount UL recognized component, 

File #E160579 

WIRING 

On/Off 

Switch 

Circuit 

Breaker 

Unswitched 

Convenience 

Outlet 

115 VAC 

60 Hz, 5A max 


24 VAC 

LED 

Indicator 

ON 

OFF 

ON 

CAUTION 

OUTLET 

ALWAYS 

HOT 

5A MAX 


T-PB202-1 24 VAC power source, 4A (Class 1) with enclosure 

T-PB202-0 24 VAC power source, 4A (Class 1) panel mount 

T-PB303-1 24 VAC power source, 3A (Class 2) with enclosure 

T-PB303-0 24 VAC power source, 3A (Class 2) panel mount 

Input Power 

115 VAC 60 Hz 

6.0 A max 

H N G Switched 

Output 

Power 

24 VAC 60 Hz 

115 VAC 60 Hz 

6.0 A 

24 VAC 

60 Hz 

609 

POWER SUPPLIES



AC/DC POWER SUPPLY 

MODEL DCPA-1.2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model DCPA-1.2 universal AC/DC Power Supply 

can deliver 30 VA of power. This compact, track-mounted 

supply accepts 120 VAC and delivers both 24 VAC 

and regulated 24 VDC power for control circuits. 

FEATURES 

• 24 VAC and 24 VDC output from the same power 

supply 

• LED indication of AC input and DC output status 

• Overload protection 

• Screw terminals with pressure plates 


• Adjustable DC output 


Input voltage 120 VAC ± 5%, 50/60 Hz 

Over-current 

protection 2.5A for combined outputs 

(GF-2.5) 

Output voltage 24 VAC 

24 VDC (regulated) 

Adjustable 1.3-27 VDC 

Output current Total combined current from 

both outputs not to exceed 

1.2A @ 24V 

WIRING 

DC Voltage Adjustment 

1. Apply 120 VAC to 120 VAC IN terminals. 

2. Adjust DC output adjust pot until the 

desired DC voltage is displayed with a 

voltmeter at the 24 VDC OUT terminals. 

Note: Adjusting the DC output voltage will 

reduce the output current rating. The 

output current rating will be reduced 

by the ratio of the output voltage 

divided by 24. 

Example: 6 VDC output will have a 

reduced output current of 300 mA. 

(6/24) x 1.2 = 300 mA 

610 


LED indication AC input, DC output 

Operating conditions 32° to 130°F (0° to 55°C) 


Mounting Snap-track (included) 

Dimensions 6.0"L x 3.25"W x 3.0"H 

(15.24 x 8.26 x 7.62 cm) 

Regulation 1.5% @ full rated current 

Temp stability 1% 

Weight 2.3 lb (1 kg) 

Fuse 2.5A (GF- 2.5) 

L 120 N G 24 H 24 + 

VAC IN VAC OUT VDC OUT 

120 VAC 

Input 

24 VAC* 

Output 

24 VDC* 

Output 


DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 

DCPA-1.2-C Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/Special DC output* 

*Specify output voltage when ordering (1.3-27 VDC) 

AC 

IN 

DC 

OUT 

*CAUTION: The AC and 

DC load circuits must be 

isolated from each other. 

Either may be grounded but 

not both. Failure to isolate 

can result in damage to unit. 

DC Output 

Adjust Pot


DC POWER SUPPLY 

MODEL DCP-1.5-W 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model DCP-1.5-W is a regulated 1.5A power supply 

that accepts 24 VAC at the input and provides 24 

VDC at the output. The Model DCP-1.5-W can be 

ordered with any output voltage from 1.5 to 27 VDC. 

Field voltage adjustments may also be made using only 

a screwdriver. The power supply is provided with a 

mounting track for easy field application. 

These low cost power supplies feature good regulation 

and have full overcurrent protection. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Regulated DC output 


• Screw terminals with pressure plates 

APPLICATION 

In general, the output current rating will be reduced 

by the ratio of the output voltage divided by the 

input voltage. For example, a 6 VDC supply powered 

by a 24 VAC transformer will have a reduced rated output 

current of 375 mA. (6/24) x 1.5 = 0.375 

To obtain the full rated output current at reduced output 

voltages, the standard power supply input voltage must 

be reduced. It is a good practice to maintain the same 

AC input voltage as the desired DC output voltage. 

A grounded DC minus terminal and a grounded secondary 

24 VAC input transformer will blow the unit’s 

fuse. If this is a problem, there are three possible solutions: 

Option 1: Remove the ground on the transformer secondary 

to float the voltage output, or use a 

separate ungrounded transformer. 

Option 2: Add a Model Y65G13-0 40 VA isolation transformer. 

This reduces the power supply capacity 

to 920 mA. 

Option 3: Remove diode D3 (marked on board). Jumper 

the VDC (-) terminal to the AC (G) terminal. 

The grounded side of the AC supply should be 

wired to the AC (G) terminal. This reduces the 

power supply capacity to 400 mA. 

in 

(cm) 

Snap-Track 

Mounting 

(included) 

Output 

Voltage 

Adjustment 



2.19 

(5.56) 

VOLT 

OUT 

ADJ 

+ – H G GF-3 

DCP-1.5-W VDC OUT VAC IN 

Fuse 

Regulated 

DC Voltage + 

Output - 

4.0 

(10.16) 

D3 

24 VAC IN 

FUSE 3A 

Line 

Voltage 

Transformer* 

* Input Transformer Required VA Rating @ 24 VAC = 43.2 x Desired DC Output Current 

For full 1.5A capacity, use a 75 VA transformer. 



DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 

DCP-1.5-W-C Power supply, 24 VAC IN to Special DC output* 

*Specify output voltage when ordering (1.5-27 VDC) 

Voltage 

Input 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Output 24 VDC (full wave rectified and 

regulated) adjustable 1.5-27 VDC 

Output current 1.5A (with 75 VA transformer) 

Regulation 1.5% at full rated current 

Temp stability 1% 

Over-current protection 3A fuse (GF-3) 





611 

POWER SUPPLIES



DC POWER SUPPLY 

MODEL DCP-524 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model DCP-524 is a dual isolated-output power 

supply. Powered by 24 VAC, it provides 5 VDC and 24 

VDC. The outputs are highly regulated, require no field 

adjustment, and are isolated from each other and the 

input voltage. The Model DCP-524 is used any time an 

isolated 5 VDC, 24 VDC, or combination is needed. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 


• Dual isolated DC outputs, 5 VDC and 24 VDC 

• Requires no field adjustment 


Input voltage 22-28 VAC @ 630 mA 


Outputs @ 5 VDC ±0.25V 

Output current 250 mA max 

Line regulation 0.3 mV/V 

Load regulation 50 mV, no load to full load 

Temp stability 50 mV 

Outputs @ 24 VDC ±0.1V 

Output current 80 mA max 


WIRING 

612 

5 VDC Output (isolated) 

24 VDC Output (isolated) 

5 VDC 

OUTPUT 

24 VDC 

OUTPUT 


Load regulation 100 mV, no load to full load 

Temp stability 240 mV 

Dimensions 4"W x 2.38"H x 2"D 

(10.2 x 6.0 x 5.0 cm) 





G H 

24 VAC 

INPUT 

24 VAC Input 

(may be grounded) 


DCP-524 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT


ENCLOSED DC POWER SUPPLY 

MODEL DCP-250 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model DCP-250 is a unique DC power supply that 

provides regulated 24 VDC power from a 120 VAC 

input. It is well suited for powering transmitters, transducers, 

actuators, and other equipment in building 

automation and temperature control systems. The 

Model DCP-250 can be ordered for hub mounting, surface 

mounting in a panel, or DIN-rail mounting. 

FEATURES 

• Flexible mounting for hub, panel/surface, DIN rail 



• Color-coded wiring 


• UL listed 


Voltage 

Input 110-125 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA 

Output 23.5-24.5 VDC (regulated) 

Max load 250 mA 

Mounting 1/2" hub, panel/surface, DIN rail 

Lead wires 20" (50.8 cm) 

Supply input 16 AWG 

Load 18 AWG 

Temp -22° to 104°F (-30° to 40°C) 



WIRING 

(black) 

(white) 

(white/red) 

(white/black) 

L 

N 

+ 

– 

120 VAC 

24 VDC 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1/2" Threaded Hub* 

(DCP-250-H only) 

Lead Wires 


(2) Mounting holes 

Power Supply 

ON LED 

2.25 

(5.71) 

4.0 

(10.16) 

1.75 

(4.45) 

Models DCP-250-P and DCP-250-D do not have 

the 1/2" hub. Wires exit through two holes in 

the top of the enclosure on these models. 


DCP-250-H DC power supply, hub mount 

DCP-250-P DC power supply, panel/surface mount 

DCP-250-D DC power supply, DIN rail mount 


DIN-3F, BAM-1000 DIN rail 

DCP-250-D DCP-250-H 

613 

POWER SUPPLIES



DC POWER SUPPLIES 

SLS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The SLS Series of DC Power Supplies from Sola/Hevi-Duty 

is used to transform various AC voltage inputs into a regulated 

DC output. Multiple mounting surfaces simplify installation by 

providing different mounting options. Units have built-in remote 

sensing capability for better load regulation. 

FEATURES 

• Screw terminal connections, no soldering 

• Multiple input voltages 

• Regulated 24 VDC output up to 7.2A 

• Remote sensing 


Input voltage 100, 120, 220, 230, 240 VAC, ±10%, 


Output voltage 24 VDC (12 VDC on SLS-12-017T) 

Adjustable ±5% of rated voltage 

Output current See Ordering Information below 

Terminations Screw terminals, input and output 

16-gauge wire max 


Line regulation ±0.05% for 10% line change 

Load regulation ±0.05% for 50% load change 

Ripple 3 mV p-p max 

Approvals UL, CUL recognized component, 


L 

120 VAC 

N 

614 

Fuse 

(not included) 

120V Input 

5 

1 

3 

2 

4 

L 

1 

240 VAC 

L 

2 

Fuse 

(not included) 

240V Input 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING AC INPUT WIRING OUTPUT 

Jumper Bars for 120 VAC 

(Factory Setting) 

Jumper Bar for 240 VAC 

5 

1 

3 

2 

4 


B 

A 

OUT- 

OUT- 

S- 

S+ 

OUT+ 

L 

O 

A 24 VDC 

D 

+ 

Factory-Installed Jumpers 

S- 

S+ 

OUT+ 

L 

O 

A 24 VDC 

D 

+ 

(allows power supply to maintain proper 

voltage at a remote location) 

With Remote Sensing 

Without Remote Sensing 

MODEL DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED FUSES (order separately) 

100-120V 220/230/240V 

SLS-12-017T Power supply, 12 VDC, 1.7 A FLM-1, 1A FLM-0.5, 0.5A 

SLS-24-012T Power supply, 24 VDC, 1.2 A FLM-1, 1A FLM-0.5, 0.5A 

SLS-24-024T Power supply, 24 VDC, 2.4 A FLM-1.5, 1.5A FLM-0.8 , 0.8A 

SLS-24-036T Power supply, 24 VDC, 3.6 A FLM-2, 2A FLM-1, 1A 

SLS-24-048T Power supply, 24 VDC, 4.8 A FLM-2.5, 2.5A FLM-1.25, 1.25A 

SLS-24-072T Power supply, 24 VDC, 7.2 A FLM-4, 4A FLM-2, 2A 


6M30 Series Fuse blocks 

FLM Series Fuses 

DIMENSIONS 

MODEL A B C WEIGHT lb (kg) 

SLS-12-017T 4.87 4.00 2.07 2.43 

SLS-24-012T (12.57) (10.16) (5.25) (1.10) 

SLS-24-024T 5.62 4.87 2.95 4.06 

(14.27) (12.37) (7.49) (1.84) 

SLS-24-036T 7.00 4.87 3.20 7.28 

(17.78) (12.37) (8.13) (3.30) 

SLS-24-048T 9.00 4.87 3.20 7.88 

(22.86) (12.37) (8.13) (3.57) 

SLS-24-072T 14.00 4.87 3.20 14.00 

(35.56) (12.37) (8.13) (6.35) 

C


SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES 

PS5R SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The PS5R Series of Switching Power Supplies is 

available with an output of 12 or 24 VDC and output 

power from 7.5-240W. The output is short-circuit protected 

and regulated. These switching power supplies, 

which minimize the heat generated in control panels, 

have a much higher efficiency than linear power supplies. 

They are small and completely enclosed, and they 

can be DIN rail or surface mounted. 

FEATURES 

• Universal AC input, 100-240 VAC or 110-340 VDC 

• Output power from 7.5-240W 

• Small size to save panel space 

• DIN rail/surface mount enclosure 

• Slim-line models to save valuable space 

• High efficiency operation for minimizing heat 

generation in control panels 

• Time-saving, spring-loaded screw terminals 


Input 

Voltage 100-240 VAC nominal, 

50/60 Hz, 110-340 VDC 

PS5R-E 100-120 VAC, 200-240 VAC 


Current (typical @100V) 

PS5R-A 0.17A 

PS5R-B 0.3A 

PS5R-C 0.68A 

PS5R-SC 0.9A 

PS5R-D 1.15A 

PS5R-SD 1.7A 

PS5R-Q 1.1A 

PS5R-E 2.5A 

PS5R-SE 2.3A 

PS5R-F 1.8A 

PS5R-G 4A 

Inrush current 50A max (cold start at 200V) 

Leakage current @ no load 0.75 mA 

Typical efficiency @ 24 VDC 

PS5R-A, -C 75% 

PS5R-B, -D 79% 

PS5R-SC, -SD 80% 

PS5R-Q, -F, -G 83% 

PS5R-E 85% 

PS5R-SE 82% 

Output 

Current rating @ 12 VDC 

PS5R-A 0.6A, 7.5W 

PS5R-B 1.2A, 15W 

PS5R-C 2.5A, 30W 

Current rating @ 24 VDC 

PS5R-A 0.3A, 7.5W 

PS5R-B 0.6A, 15W 

PS5R-C, -SC 1.3A, 30W 

PS5R-D 2.1A, 50W 

PS5R-SD 2.5A, 60W 

PS5R-Q 3.1A, 75W 

PS5R-E 4.2A, 100W 

PS5R-SE 3.75A, 90W 

PS5R-F 5A, 120W 

PS5R-G 10A, 240W 

PS5R-E24 PS5R-SC 

PS5R-A24 

PS5R-C24 

Voltage adjustment 

Regulation 

±10% 

Line 0.4% max 

Load 1.5% max 

Temp 0.05% max 

Ripple voltage 2% max peak to peak 

(including noise) 

Over-voltage protection 120% typical 

Over-current protection 

General 

105% auto-reset 



noncondensing 

Connections 

Dimensions 

Spring-loaded, finger-safe 

terminals with captive M3.5 screws 

PS5R-A 2.76"D x 1.77"W x 2.95"H 

(7.01 x 4.50 x 7.49 cm) 

PS5R-B 3.74"D x 1.77"W x 2.95"H 

(9.50 x 4.50 x 7.49 cm) 

PS5R-C, -D 3.74"D x 3.54"W x 2.95"H 

(9.50 x 8.99 x 7.49 cm) 

PS5R-SC, -SD 4.25"D x 1.42"W x 3.74"H 

(10.8 x 3.6 x 9.5 cm) 

PS5R-Q 5.51"D x 3.35"W x 4.72"H 

(14.0 x 8.5 x 12.0 cm) 

PS5R-E 3.74"D x 5.7"W x 2.95"H 

(9.50 x 14.5 x 7.49 cm) 

PS5R-SE 4.76"D x 1.81"W x 4.53"H 

(12.1 x 4.6 x 11.5 cm) 

PS5R-F 5.51"D x 4.53"W x 4.72"H 

(14.0 x 11.5 x 12.0 cm) 

PS5R-G 

Weight 

5.51"D x 7.87"W x 4.72"H 

(14.0 x 19.99 x 12.0 cm) 

PS5R-A 0.33 lb (0.15 kg) 

PS5R-B 0.37 lb (0.17 kg) 

PS5R-C 0.79 lb (0.36 kg) 

PS5R-SC 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) 

PS5R-D 0.86 lb (0.39 kg) 

PS5R-SD 0.63 lb (0.29 kg) 

PS5R-Q 1.7 lb (0.8 kg) 

PS5R-E 1.3 lb (0.59 kg) 

PS5R-SE 1.0 lb (0.44 kg) 

PS5R-F 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 

PS5R-G 4.4 lb (1.9 kg) 

Approvals UL and CUL listed, 

File #E177168; CE certified; 

PS5R-SC/SD/SE; UL1604 listed for 

Hazardous Locations; PS5R-SC/SD 

Class 2 rated 

615 

POWER SUPPLIES


12 _ or 24 VDC 

+ 

-V 

DC ON 

V. ADJ 

NC 

L N 

+V 

Ground 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

PS5R-A 


SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES 

PS5R SERIES 

WIRING 

616 

-V 

24 VDC 

_ + 

L 

N 

12 _ or 24 VDC 

+ 

-V 

DC ON 

V. ADJ 

NC 

L N 

+V 

Ground 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

Ground 

L 

V- 

_ 

N 

24 VDC 

V+ 

+ 

PS5R-B PS5R-SC, -SD, -SE 

PS5R-C, -D PS5R-Q 

+V 

Voltage Select 

-V 

24 VDC 

_ + 

L 

+V 

N 

DC ON 

V. ADJ 

NC 

12 _ or 24 VDC 

+ 

-V NC 

L 

N 

+V 

NC 

Ground 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

-V 

24 VDC 

_ + 

L 

N 

+V 

Ground 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

24 VDC + 

-V +V 

L N 

Ground 

100-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

100-120V 

Jumper 

200-240V 

Jumper 

Ground 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

Ground 

100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

110-340 VDC 

PS5R-E PS5R-F PS5R-G 



PS5R-A12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 7.5W (0.6A) 

PS5R-A24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 7.5W (0.3A) 

PS5R-B12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 15W (1.2A) 

PS5R-B24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 15W (0.6A) 

PS5R-C12 Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 30W (2.5A) 

PS5R-C24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 30W (1.3A) 

PS5R-SC24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 30W (1.3A), slim-line 

PS5R-D24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 50W (2.1A) 

PS5R-SD24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 60W (2.5A), slim-line 

PS5R-Q24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 75W (3.1A) 

PS5R-E24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 100W (4.2A) 

PS5R-SE24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 90W (3.75A), slim-line 

PS5R-F24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 120W (5A) 

PS5R-G24 Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 240W (10A) 

_


COMPACT DC POWER SUPPLY 

MODEL PW2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PW2 converts unregulated 115 VAC to regulated 

DC voltage output. This compact, easy-to-mount 

power supply may be used to power transmitters, transducers, 

controllers, relays, and other peripheral devices 

requiring 5, 12, or 24 VDC. 

FEATURES 


• Regulated power outputs of 5, 12, or 24 VDC 

• 115 VAC, 60 Hz input 

• Screw terminal connections 

• Easy-to-mount enclosure 


Voltage 

Input 115 VAC ±5%, 60 Hz 

Output 5 VDC ±0.2 VDC, 300 mA max; 

12 VDC ±0.5 VDC, 200 mA max; 

24 VDC ±1 VDC, 100 mA max 

Temp 32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

3.0 

(7.6) 

2.2 

(5.6) 

1.4 

(3.6) 

0.15 

(0.4) 

Humidity 95% max noncondensing 


Mounting Screw slots in base or side of 

enclosure 

Terminals 22-16 AWG 

WIRING 


Output Input 

+ - 115 VAC 

+ - 115 VAC, 60 Hz 

5, 12, or 24 VDC 


PW2-5 Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC, 5 VDC 



617 

POWER SUPPLIES



CLASS 2 DC POWER SUPPLIES 

PSM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The PSM Series of DC power supplies provides an isolated 

and regulated 24 VDC output from a voltage input 

of either 120 VAC or 24 VAC. The PSM Series is UL 

listed for use in Class 2 circuits. 

FEATURES 

• Isolated, regulated 24 VDC output 

• UL listed for Class 2 circuits 

• On/Off switch 


• Track mounted 


PSM24A24DAS 

Input voltage/current 24 VAC/950 mA max, 50/60 Hz 

Voltage output 24 VDC, adjustable 1.5-28 VDC 

Output current 300 mA @ 24 VDC; 125 mA @ 12 

VDC; 116 mA @ 10 VDC 

Ripple 0.0016%, 24 VDC @ 300 mA 

Load regulation 0.04% 

Line regulation 8 mV/V 

Temp -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C) 


(10.1 x 6.9 x 4.1 cm) 


Mounting MT212 track (provided) 

Approvals 

PSM19A24DAS 

Class 2 UL listed, ULC, 

File #E68805 


Voltage output 24 VDC, adjustable 1.5-28 VDC 

Output current 300 mA @ 24 VDC; 125 mA @ 12 

VDC; 116 mA @ 10 VDC 

Ripple 0.0016%, 24 VDC @ 300 mA 


WIRING 

618 

On/Off 

Switch 

Voltage Input 

24 or 120 VAC 



Temp -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C) 


(10.1 x 6.9 x 4.1 cm) 



Approvals 

PSMN40A24DS 

Class 2 UL listed, ULC, 

File #E68805 


Voltage output 24 VDC 

Output current 1A @ 24 VDC 

Ripple 0.0016%, 24 VDC @ 1A 


Line regulation 25 mV/V 

Temp -30° to 140°F (-34° to 60°C) 

Dimensions 5"H x 2.75"W x 2"D 

(12.7 x 6.9 x 5.1 cm) 



Approvals Class 2 UL listed, ULC, 

File #E68805 

24 VDC - Voltage Output Voltage Out Adjustment 


+ 

1.5-28 VDC 

+ 

- 

24 VDC 

PSM24A24DAS 

PSM19A24DAS 

On/Off 

Switch 

PSMN40A24DS 

Voltage Input 

120 VAC 


PSM24A24DAS Class 2 DC power supply, 24 VAC:24 VDC, 300 mA 

PSM19A24DAS Class 2 DC power supply, 120 VAC:24 VDC, 300 mA 

PSMN40A24DS Class 2 DC power supply, 120 VAC:24 VDC, 1A

RELAYS & CONTACTORS

PRODUCT 

Try the NEW CN Series 

Definite-Purpose 

Contactors on 

page 641! 

SERVICES 

Use In-Stock Relays in 

your custom-built panel. 

Order Today 



20307 — Special Voltage Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 

438USA, 438USA-INT — Delay on Make/Interval Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 

781,782,783,784 Series — Magnecraft General - Purpose Relays . . . . . . . . . . .627 

70-781D-1, 70-782D-1, 70-783D1, 70-734D-1 — Magnecraft Relay Sockets . . .629 

821TD10H, TDRSOPXP, TDRSRXP — Magnecraft Time Delay Relays . . . . . .655 

ALT — Alternating Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 

CN Series — Definite-Purpose Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 

G7L Series — Omron Power Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 

KE375, KE900 Series — Power Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 

LY, MK, G2R-S Series — Omron General-Purpose Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 

MR Series — Multi-Voltage Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 

PAM-1, PAM-4 — Multi-Voltage Relay Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 

PF, PTF, P2RF Series — Omron Relay Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 

PIL-2 — Motor Starter Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 

RH2LB — Magnetic Latching Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 

RH, RR Series — Idec General-Purpose Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 

RIB Pilot Series — Relay in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 

RIB Power Series — Relay in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 

RIB01BDC, RIB02BDC, RIB21CDC — Relay in a Box Dry Contact Series . . . .639 

RIBM Series — Modular Panel Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 

RIBT Pilot Series — Relay in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 

RIBT Power Series — Relay in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 

RSSDN — Solid-State Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 

RTE Series — Multi-function Electronic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 

SH, SR Series — Idec Relay Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 

W9ASA, W925 — Magnecraft Power Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 



IDEC GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS 

RH, RR SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

IDEC General-Purpose Relays are available in the RH 

Series Midget Relays and the RR Series Power 

Relays. The RH Series is compact to reduce space 

requirements and features a full 10A switching capacity. 

They are available in SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT 

contact configurations, driven by AC or DC coils, and 

they have blade-mount terminals. 

The RR Series has a 10A contact rating and is characterized 

by high reliability and long life. They are suited for 

use in industrial-grade equipment, control equipment, 

communications, and motor loads up to 1/4 horsepower. 

The RR Series relays are available in SPDT, DPDT, and 

3PDT configurations driven by AC or DC coils, and they 

have pin- or blade-mount terminals. 


RH SERIES 

RATED CURRENT (mA) ±15% @ 20°C 

RATED 

VOLTAGE 

60 Hz 50 Hz 

AC 

DC 

12 

24 

120 

240 

12 

24 

RR Series 

Rated 

Voltage 

12 

24 

AC 120 

240 

12 

DC 24 

SPDT 

75 

37 

7.5 

3.2 

SPDT 

64 

32 

DPDT 

100 

50 

11 

5.5 

3PDT 

140 

70 

14.2 

7.1 

DPDT 

75 

36.9 

4PDT 

165 

83 

16.5 

8.3 

SPDT 

86 

42 

8.6 

3.7 

DPDT 

118 

59.7 

12.9 

6.5 

3PDT 

120 

60 

3PDT 

165 

81 

16.4 

8.2 

4PDT 

125 

62 

Rated Current (mA) ±15% @ 20°C 

60 Hz 50 Hz 

210 

245 

105 

121 

20.5 

24 

10.5 

12.1 

120 

60 

4PDT 

196 

98 

19.5 

9.8 

INRUSH CURRENT 

(mA) 

SPDT 

120 

56 

12 

7 

SPDT 

– 

– 

DPDT 

170 

85 

16 

8 

DPDT 

– 

– 

3PDT 

260 

130 

26 

12 

3PDT 

– 

– 

4PDT 

310 

165 

33 

16 

4PDT 

– 

– 

INRUSH CURRENT 

(mA) 

365 

182 

35 

18 

– 

– 

Max continuous applied voltage 110% of rated voltage, 

AC/DC @ 20°C 

Min operating voltage 80% of rated voltage, AC/DC @ 20°C 

Drop-out voltage 

AC 30% or more of rated voltage 

DC 10% or more of rated voltage 

Contact material 

RH Silver cadmium oxide 

RR Silver 

Contact resistance 

RH 50 mΩ max (initial) 

RR 30 mΩ max (initial) 

FEATURES 

• General-purpose power and midget styles 


• Indicator light and/or check button available 

• Surface or DIN rail mount 

• UL recognized, CSA certified 

COIL RATINGS CONTACT RATINGS 

RH SERIES (UL ratings) 

RESISTIVE (A) INDUCTIVE (A) 

VOLTAGE 

cos = 0.3 

SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 

240 AC 10 10 – 7.5 7 7 * 5 

120 AC 10 10 10 10 7.5 – – 7.5 

30 DC 10 10 10 – 7 7 – – 

28 DC 10 10 10 10 7.5 – – 7.5 

* Note: 6.5 A / pole, 20 A Total 

RR SERIES (UL ratings) 

VOLTAGE RESITIVE (A) INDUCTIVE (A) 

cos = 0.3 

240 AC 10 

7 

120 AC 10 

7.5 

30 DC 10 

7 

MOTOR LOAD (hp) 

SPDT 

1/3 

1/6 

– 

– 

DPDT 

1/3 

1/6 

– 

– 

3PDT 

1/3 

1/6 

– 

– 

MOTOR LOAD (hp) 

1/3 

1/4 

– 

Operate time 25 ms max 

Release time 25 ms max 

Min load 

RH 24 VDC/30 mA, 5 VDC/100 mA 

RR 24 VDC/10 mA, 5 VDC/20 mA 



File #E67770, E59804; 

CSA certified, File #LR35144; 

CE certified (not RR blade style) 

619 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS



IDEC GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS 

RH, RR SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

620 

1.39 (3.56) or less 

2.19 (5.55) 

Bottom View 

0.02 (0.05) 

3 

2 

(-) 

1 

5 

9 

13 14 

(-) (+) 

RH1B 

4 5 

1 8 

RR2P 

RH1B 

1.07 (2.75) 

0.55 (1.39) 

1.418 (3.6) 

0.82 (2.1) 

1.07 (2.75) 

RH Series Midget Relays 

1.418 (3.6) 

1.07 (2.75) 

1.22 (3.1) 1.60 (4.1) 

RH2B RH3B RH4B 

0.2 (0.5) 

1.14 (2.9) 1.42 (3.6) 1.87 (4.8) or less 1.42 (3.64) 

RR2P 

RR3PA 

RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B 

RR Series Power Relays (PIN) 

6 

7 

(+) 

1 

5 

9 

4 

5 

3 9 

2 

(-) 

6 

4 

8 

12 

13 (-) (+) 14 

RH2B 

7 

8 

10 

1 11 (+) 

RR3PA 

5 

7 

A B 

(-) (+) 

RR1BA 


1 

5 

9 

13 (-) 

2 

6 

10 

RH3B 

2 

4 

8 

12 

(+) 14 

1 

4 

7 

A 

(-) 

1.07 (2.75) 

RR Series Power Relays (blade) 

1 

5 

9 

3 

6 

9 

B 

(+) 

RR2BA 


RH1B Midget relay, SPDT, blade (use SH1B-05 socket) 

RH2B Midget relay, DPDT, blade (use SH2B-05 socket) 

RH3B Midget relay, 3PDT, blade (use SH3B-05 socket) 

RH4B Midget relay, 4PDT, blade (use SH4B-05 socket) 

RR2P Power relay, DPDT, eight-pin (use SR2P-05 or SR2P-06 socket) 

RR3PA Power relay, 3PDT, 11-pin (use SR3P-06 socket) 

RR1BA Power relay, SPDT, blade (use SR3B-05 socket) 

RR2BA Power relay, DPDT, blade (use SR3B-05 socket) 

RR3B Power relay, 3PDT, blade (use SR3B-05 socket) 

U Standard relay, UL recognized 

UT Top-bracket mounting (RH Series only) 

UL Indicator light (RH1B-L not UL recognized) 

UC Check button (Not RH1B) 

ULC Indicator light and check button (not RH1B) 

AC AC coil 

DC DC coil 

12V 12V 

24V 24V 

120V 120V 

240V 240V 

RH3B UL AC 24V Example: RH3B-ULAC24V 3PDT midget blade 

relay with indicator light and 24 VAC coil 


SH, SR Series Relay sockets BAM-1000 or DIN-3F Mounting DIN rail 

13 (-) 

2 

6 

10 

RH4B 

3 

7 

11 

1 

4 

7 

A 

(-) 

(+) 14 

2 

5 

8 

4 

8 

12 

RR3B 

3 

6 

9 

B 

(+) 

1.42 

(3.64)


IDEC RELAY SOCKETS 

SH, SR SERIES 

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (SH, SR SERIES) 

Mounting DIN rail or surface mount 

Rated voltage 300V, SH1B 250V 

Rated current 10A, SR3B 15A (UL rating) 

Insulation resistance 100 M� min 

Dielectric strength 2000 VAC, 1 min. 

INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS / DIMENSIONS 

SH1B-05 for use with relay RH1B 

Socket type Blade 

HoId-down spring SY2S-02F1 

Hold-down clip SFA-101, SFA-202 




Hold-down spring SY4S-02F1 



SH3B-05 for use with relays RH3B, 

RH2LB (latching relay) 


Hold-down spring SH3B-05F1 





Hold-down spring SH4B-02F1 



Material grade UL94V-0 

Terminals M3.5 screws with captive wire clamp 

M3 screws on SH1B coil 

Wire size Up to two - #12 AWG 



File #LR35144; CE certified 

in 

(cm) 

2.62 

(6.7) 

0.10 

(0.25) 

2.62 

(6.7) 

0.10 

(0.25) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

2.62 

(6.7) 

0.10 

(0.25) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

2.62 

(6.7) 

0.10 

(.25) 

0.66 

(1.7) 

0.63 

(1.6) 

0.78 

(2.0) 

0.86 

(2.2) 

1.03 

(2.6) 

1.17 

(3.0) 

1.25 

(3.2) 

1.42 

(3.6) 

1.56 

(4.0) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

1.65 

(4.2) 

1.81 

(4.6) 

1.97 

(5.0) 

0.16 dia. 

(0.42) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

0.16 dia. 

(0.42) 

1.83 

(4.8) 

1.83 

(4.8) 

0.16 dia. 

1.83 

(0.42) 

(4.8) 

1.83 

(4.8) 

0.16 dia. 

(0.42) 

1.12 

(2.85) 

0.57 

(1.5) 

0.98 

(2.5) 

0.57 

(1.5) 

0.98 

(2.5) 

DIN 

Rail 

1.12 

(2.85) 

0.7 

(1.88) 

1.12 

(2.85) 

0.7 

(1.88) 

0.57 

(1.5) 

0.98 

(2.5) 

1.12 

(2.85) 

0.7 

(1.88) 

0.57 

(1.5) 

0.98 

(2.5) 

DIN 

Rail 

DIN 

Rail 

DIN 

Rail 

5 

1 

14 13 

9 

0.63 

(1.6) 

8 

4 


0.16 dia 

(0.42) 

5 

1 

14 13 

12 9 

8 

4 

1.03 

(2.6) 

6 5 

2 1 

14 13 

12 10 9 

1.42 

(3.6) 

8 7 

4 3 

14 13 

12 11 10 9 

1.81 

(4.6) 


0.16 dia 

(0.42) 

6 5 

2 1 


0.16 dia 

(0.42) 


0.16 dia 

(0.42) 

621 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS



IDEC RELAY SOCKETS 

SH, SR SERIES 

INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT.) 

SR2P-05 for use with relays RR2P, RTE-P1 (timer) 

Socket type 8-pin octal 

Hold-down spring SR2B-02F1 for RR2P 

Hold-down clip SFA-203 for RTE-P1 


SR2P-06 for use with relays RR2P, RTE-P1 (timer) 

Socket type 8-pin octal 

Hold-down spring SR2B-02F1 for RR2P 



SR3P-06 for use with relays RR3PA, RTE-P2 (timer) 

Socket type 11-pin 

Hold-down spring SR3B-02F1 for RR3PA 



SR3B-05 for use with relays RR1BA, 

RR2BA, RR3B, RTE-B (timer) 

Socket type 11-blade 

Hold-down spring SR3B-02F1 for RR 

Hold-down clip SFA-202 for RTE-B 


622 

2.34 

(6.0) 

0.12 

(0.25) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

2.96 

(7.6) 

2.03 

(5.2) 

0.12 

(0.25) 

2.34 

(6.0) 

0.04 

(0.25) 

1.404 

(3.6) 

2.3 

(5.9) 

1.3 

(3.3) 

1.46 

(3.7) 

1.67 

(4.3) 

1.40 

(3.6) 

1.14 

(2.9) 

1.56 

(4.0) 

1.3 

(3.3) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

1.28 

(3.3) 0.9 

(2.5) 

0.16 dia. 

(0.42) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

0.16 dia. 

(0.42) 

0.16 dia. 

2.18 

(0.42) 

(5.6) 

0.32 

(0.8) 

0.97 

0.16 dia. (2.5) 

(0.42) 

1.05 

(2.5) 

1.0 

(2.55) 

0.7 

(1.8) 

0.86 

(2.2) 

1.12 

(2.85) 

0.57 

(1.5) 

0.98 

(2.5) 


SH1B-05 Relay socket, SPDT blade type, DIN/Surface mount 

SH2B-05 Relay socket, DPDT blade type, DIN/Surface mount 

SH3B-05 Relay socket, 3PDT blade type, DIN/Surface mount 

SH4B-05 Relay socket, 4PDT blade type, DIN/Surface mount 

SR2P-05 Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/Surface mount 

SR2P-06 Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/Surface mount 

SR3P-06 Relay socket, 3PDT pin type, DIN/Surface mount 

SR3B-05 Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/Surface mount 

For touchsafe sockets, add -C to the end of the SH Series socket model numbers. 

Order hold down springs and clips separately by model number. 

0.078 

(0.2) 

1.25 

(2.85) 

0.64 

(1.7) 

0.78 

(2.0) 

1.12 

(2.85) 

1.0 

(2.55) 

0.7 

(1.8) 

0.86 

(2.2) 

DIN 

Rail 

DIN 

Rail 

DIN 

Rail 

DIN 

Rail 

6 

5 4 

6 

3 

7 

2 

8 

1 


0.16 dia. (0.42) 

8 7 6 5 

1.3 

(3.3) 

1.14 

(2.9) 

5 4 3 

7 8 1 2 


0.16 dia. (0.42) 

1.3 

(3.3) 

4 

9 10 11 1 2 3 


0.16 dia. (0.42) 

6 

3 

5 4 

2 1 

B A 

9 8 7 


RH/RR Series Idec relays BAM-1000 Aluminum DIN rail NBS Series Block spades 

RTE Series Idec timers DIN-3F Steel DIN rail 

in 

(cm) 

1.46 

(3.7) 


0.16 dia 

(0.42)

DESCRIPTION 

Omron General-Purpose Relays are available in the 

LY, MK, and G2R-S Series. The LY Series is available 

in SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT contact configurations 

driven by AC or DC coils. It has up to a 15A switching 

capacity and blade terminals for socket mounting. 

The MK Series is available in DPDT and 3PDT configurations 

driven by AC or DC coils and has up to a 10A 

switch rating. The MK Series has pin-type terminals for 

socket-mounting and comes standard with a mechanical 

indicator and push-to-test button. 

The G2R-S Series is available with SPDT or DPDT contacts 

rated up to 10A and driven by AC or DC coils. They 

are socket-mounted, and their small size saves space. 

They come with a mechanical indicator, optional LED, 

and lockable test button. 


LY SERIES 

Rated 

Voltage 

Rated Current (mA) 

60 Hz 50 Hz 

SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT3PDT 

4PDT SPDT 

AC 

24 

120 

46 

9.2 

46 

9.2 

67 

14.8 

80 

16.4 

54 

10.8 

54 

10.8 

80 

17.3 

93.6 

19 

180 

4430 

DC 24 36.9 58.6 69 36.9 58.6 69 650 

MK SERIES 

Rated 

Voltage 

24 

AC 

120 

DC 24 

G2R-S SERIES 

Rated 

Voltage 

24 

AC 

120 

DC 24 


OMRON GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS 

LY, MK, G2R-S SERIES 

COIL RATINGS 


60 Hz 

88 

18 

56 


60 Hz 

37.5 

7.5 

21.8 

Coil Resistance (Ω) 

DPDT 

180 

4430 

650 

3PDT 

100 

2450 

410 


68 

1578 

430 


253 

7,286 

1,100 

4PDT 

78 

2200 

350 

Min operating voltage 80% of rated voltage AC/DC 

Max continuous applied voltage 110% of rated voltage AC/DC 


AC 30% or more of the rated voltage 

DC 10% (LY), 15% (MK, G2R-S) or more of the 

rated voltage 


LY, G2R-S Silver cadmium oxide 

MK Silver 

Contact resistance 100 mΩ max 

Operating time 30 ms max 

Release time 25 ms max 

Min load 

LY, G2R-S 100 mA/5 VDC 

MK 10 mA/1 VDC 


File #E41643 (LY, G2R-S), #E41515 (MK); 

CSA certified, File #LR31928 (LY, G2R-S); 

#LR41408 (MK); CE certified 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• DIN rail or surface mount 

• UL recognized, CSA certified, CE certified 

LY SERIES 

Contact 

Form 

SPDT 

DPDT 

3PDT 

4PDT 

MK SERIES 

Contact 

Form 

DPDT 

3PDT 

CONTACT RATINGS 

UL Contact Ratings 

15A @ 240 VAC (inductive) 

15A @ 28 VDC (resistive) 

1/2 hp @ 120 VAC (motor) 

13A @ 120 VAC (resistive) 







UL Contact Rating 








G2R-S SERIES 

Contact 

Form 

UL Contact Rating 

SPDT 


10A @ 250 VAC (general purpose) 

DPDT 


5A @ 250 VAC (general purpose) 

623 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS



OMRON GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS 

LY, MK, G2R-S SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1 

3 

5 

7 

624 

2 

4 

6 

8 

1.42 

(3.60) 

WIRING (Bottom View) 

0.02 

(0.05) 

0.08 (0.20) dia 

0.20 

(0.50) 

0.25 

(0.64) 

0.85 

(2.15) 

1.36 

(3.45) max 

1.10 

(2.79) 

1.36 

(3.45) max 

1.24 

(3.14) 

0.03 

(0.08) 

2.07 

(5.25) max 


LY SERIES MK SERIES G2R-S SERIES 




LY LY Series 

MK MK Series 

G2R G2R Series 

1 SPDT contact configuration 

2 DPDT contact configuration 

1 SPDT contact configuration 


3 3PDT contact configuration 



P — 

S No options 


N LED indicator (optional) 

SNI LED indicator, test button 

I4 Push-to-test button (optional) (two- and four-pole 

— Two-pole 

AC24(S) 24 VAC 

only when combined with N option) 

5 Three-pole 

DC24(S) 24 VDC 

N LED indicator (optional) 

S Push-to-test button (standard) 

AC120(S) 120 VAC 

AC24 24 VAC 

AC24 24 VAC 

DC24 24 VDC 

DC24 24 VDC 

G2R 1 S AC24(S) 

AC120 120 VAC 

AC120 120 VAC 

Example: G2R1SAC24(S) SPDT relay with 24 VAC coil. 

LY 2 I4 N AC24 

Example: LY2I4NAC24 DPDT relay 

with push-to-test button, LED indicator, 

MK 3 P N 5 S 

Example: MK3PN5SAC24 3PDT 

AC24 

relay with LED indicator, push-to- 

and 24 VAC coil. 

test button, and 24 VAC coil. 

1.10 

(2.79) 

LY LY1/LY2 LY3 LY4 G2R-1, G2R-2 

1 

3 

5 

7 

2 

4 

6 

1 

4 

7 

2 

5 

8 

3 

6 

9 

1 

5 

9 

2 

6 

10 

MK2/MK3 

8 10 11 13 14 

3 

7 

11 

4 

8 

12 

3 

2 

4 

1 

1.63 

(4.14) 

5 

8 

6 

7 

1.4 

(3.5) 

5 

6 

7 

4 8 

3 

9 

2 

1 11 

10 

LY1 LY2 LY3 

LY4 MK2 MK3 G2R-1 


PF, PTF, P2RF Series Relay sockets 

BAM-1000 or DIN-3F Mounting DIN rail 

1.14 

(2.9) 

3 

4 

2 

1 5 

1.14 

(2.9) 

0.51 

(1.3) 

4 

3 

2 

5 

6 

7 

1 8 

G2R-2


OMRON RELAY SOCKETS 

PTF, PF, P2RF SERIES 



Rated voltage 250V 

Rated current PTF/P2RF-05 10A; 

PTF08 15A; P2RF-08 5A 

Dielectric strength 1500V 

Material Polyphenylene 


PTF08A-E for use with relay LY1, LY2 

HoId-down clip: PYC-A1 

Weight: 0.11 lb (0.05 kg) 

PTF11A for use with relay LY3 


Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 

PTF14A-E for use with relay LY4 


Weight: 0.17 lb (0.08 kg) 

PF083A-E for use with relay MK2 

HoId-down clip: PFC-A1 

Weight: 0.01 lb (0.004 kg) 

in 

(cm) 

2.05 

(5.2) 

0.16 

(0.4) 

Terminals M3.5 screws with captive 

wire clamps 

Wire size Up to 2 #12 AWG 




1.46 

(3.70) 

1.79 

(4.55) 

1.12 

(2.84) 

1.61 

(4.1) 

3.09 

(7.84) 

max 

3.09 

(7.84) 

max 

3.09 

(7.84) 

max 

0.28 

(0.7) 

1.18 

(2.99) 

1.18 

(2.99) 

1.18 

(2.99) 


0.17 dia (0.42) 

1.39 

(3.53) 

0.31 

(0.78) 

1.39 

(3.53) 

0.31 

(0.78) 

1.39 

(3.53) 

0.31 

(0.78) 

0.83 

(2.1) 

1.39 

(3.54) 

3 

6 

4 

8 

4 

2 

1 

3 

6 5 

8 7 

2 

5 

3 

7 

1 

4 

9 8 7 

11 

10 

2 

6 

1 

5 

12 11 10 9 

14 

13 

2 

3 4 

1 8 7 

5 

6 


0.18 (0.46) dia 

2.68 

(6.80) 

0.75 

(1.90) 


0.18 (0.46) dia 

2.68 

(6.80) 

1.08 

(2.74) 


0.18 (0.46) dia 

2.68 

(6.80) 

1.42 

(3.60) 


0.18 (0.45) dia 

1.3 

(3.3) 

625 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS



OMRON RELAY SOCKETS 

PTF, PF, P2RF SERIES 

INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) 

PF113A-E for use with relay MK3 

HoId-down clip: PFC-A1 

Weight: 0.11 lb (0.05 kg) 

P2RF-05-E for use with relay G2R-1 

Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 

P2RF-08-E for use with relay G2R-2 

Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 

626 

in 

(cm) 

0.16 

(0.4) 

2.05 

(5.2) 

0.16 

(0.4) 

3.37 

(8.6) 

max. 

0.20 

(0.5) 

3.37 

(8.6) 

max. 

0.61 

(1.5) max 

0.63 

(1.60) max 


PTF08A-E SPDT and DPDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY1 and LY2 relays) 

PTF11A 3PDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY3 relays) 

PTF14A-E 4PDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY4 relays) 

PF083A-E 2PDT pin relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (MK2 relays) 

PF113A-E 3PDT pin relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (MK3 relays) 

P2RF-05-E SPDT relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (G2R-1 relay) 

P2RF-08-E DPDT relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (G2R-2 relay) 

PYC-A1 Hold down clip (LY relays) 

PFC-A1 Hold down clip (MK relays) 

1.69 

(4.28) 

Five M3.5 

0.14 (0.36) 

dia. hole 

Eight M3.5 

0.14 (0.36) 

dia. hole 

0.28 

(0.7) 



BAM-1000 Aluminum DIN rail 

DIN-3F Steel DIN rail 

NBS Series Block spades 

1.22 

(3.1) 

2.40 

(6.1) max 

2.40 

(6.1) max 

2.48 

(6.3) max 

2.40 

(6.1) max 

1.39 

(3.54) 

1.40 

(3.6) 

1.40 

(3.6) 

2 

3 

1 

11 

10 

9 

4 

5 6 7 8 

4 

3 

5 

2 

1 

Terminal 

Arrangement 

6 

7 

5 

3 

2 

4 


0.18 (0.45) dia 

1.3 

(3.3) 

M3 or 

0.14 (0.36) 

dia. hole 

Mounting 

Holes 

8 M3 or 

1 

0.14 (0.36) 

dia. hole 

Terminal 

Arrangement 

Mounting 

Holes


MAGNECRAFT RELAYS 

781, 782, 783, 784 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Magnecraft 781, 782, 783, and 784 Series are 

SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT plug-in style relays available 

with common AC or DC coil voltages. They are 

equipped with a mechanical flag indicator to show relay 

status in the manual or powered condition. Full-featured 

versions of these relays also include a bi-polar LED to 

show coil “on” or “off” status, a push button that allows 

momentary manual operation without the need for coil 

power, and a removable lock-down door that can hold the 

push button and relay contacts in the operate position. 

FEATURES 

• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT configurations 

• Flag indicator 

• Optional LED and momentary/maintained push 

button 


• DIN rail/surface mount sockets 

• Mating sockets: 

781: 70-781D5-1 783: 70-783D-1 

782: 70-782D-1 784: 70-784D-1 

MODEL 781 782 783 784 

COIL 

Pull-in voltage AC (50/60 Hz) < 85% of nominal < 85% of nominal < 85% of nominal < 85% of nominal 

Pull-in voltage DC < 80% of nominal < 80% of nominal < 80% of nominal < 80% of nominal 

Dropout voltage AC/DC > 10% of nominal > 10% of nominal > 10% of nominal > 10% of nominal 

Maximum voltage 110% of nominal 110% of nominal 110% of nominal 110% of nominal 

Coil power AC (60 Hz) 0.9VA 1.2VA 1.5VA 1.5VA 

Coil power DC 0.7W 0.9W 1.7W 2.0W 

Duty Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous 

CONTACTS 

Contact material Silver alloy, gold flashed Silver alloy, gold flashed Silver alloy, gold flashed Silver alloy, gold flashed 

Contact rating 15A @ 277VAC 15A @ 120 VAC 15A @ 120 VAC 15A @ 120 VAC 

10A @ 240 VAC Gen. Purp. 12A @ 277 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC 

15A @ 28 VDC 12A @ 28 VDC 15A @ 28 VDC 15A @ 28 VDC 

0.5A @ 220VDC 0.5A @ 220 VDC 0.5A @ 220 VDC 0.5A @ 220 VDC 

1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 

1 hp @ 250 VAC 1 hp @ 250 VAC 3/4 hp @ 250 VAC 3/4 hp @ 250 VAC 

Minimum load 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH 

Coil to contacts 2500 V rms 2500 V rms 2500 V rms 2500 V rms 

Across open contacts 1500 V rms 1000 V rms 1000 V rms 1000 V rms 

Pole to pole 

GENERAL 

— 2500 Vrms 2500 Vrms 2500 Vrms Operate time 20 msec 25 msec 25 msec 20 msec 

Release time 20 msec 20 msec 20 msec 20 msec 

Electrical life @ rated load 100,000 operations 200,000 operations 150,000 operations 150,000 operations 

Mechanical life @ no load 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 

Operating position Any Any Any Any 

Operating temp -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C) -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C) -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C) -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C) 

Weight 0.064 lb (0.029 kg) 0.08 lb (0.036 kg) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 0.18 lb (0.08kg) 

Approvals UL-recognized component UL-recognized component UL-recognized component UL-recognized component 

File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified 

File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 

627 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


628 


MAGNECRAFT RELAYS 

781, 782, 783, 784 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in (cm) 

1.60 MAX (4.1) 

WIRING 

Bottom 

View 

1 

5 

9 

13 14 

781 

1.10 MAX 

(2.79) 

0.55 

(1.4) 

781 

1 (1) 

5 (3) 

9 (5) 



KIT Includes relay and mating socket. Leave blank to order the relay only. 

781XAXC SPDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-781D5-1 socket) 

782XBXC DPDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-782D-1 socket) 

783XCXC 3PDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-783D-1 socket) 

784XDXC 4PDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-784D-1 socket) 

12D 12 VDC coil (782XBXC only) 

24D 24 VDC coil 

24A 24 VAC coil 


240A 240 VAC coil (782XBXC only) 

KIT - 781XBXC - 24A 

Example: KIT-782XBXC-24A DPDT relay with 24 VAC 

coil and 70-782D-1 socket included. 


KIT Includes relay and mating socket. Leave blank to order the relay only. 

781XAXM4L SPDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-781D5-1 socket) 

782XBXM4L DPDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-782D-1 socket) 

783XCXM4L 3PDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-783D-1 socket) 

784XDXM4L 4PDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-784D-1 socket) 






- 782XBXM4L - 24A 

1.10 MAX 

(2.79) 

4 (2) 

8 (4) 

12 (6) 

13 (7) 14 (8) 

782 

0.83 MAX 

(2.10) 

1.10 MAX 

(2.79) 

1.21 

(3.08) 

1.10 MAX 

(2.79) 

Example: 782XBXM4L-24A DPDT relay with 24 VAC coil, LED, and push button 

(socket not included). 

1.60 MAX 

(4.06) 

782 783 784 

1 (1) 

5 (4) 

9 (7) 

2 (2) 

6 (5) 

10 (8) 

4(3) 

8 (6) 

12 (9) 

13 (10) 14 (11) 

783 

1 

5 

9 

2 

6 

10 

3 

7 

11 

4 

8 

12 

13 14 

784 

Numbers correspond to Magnecraft socket terminals. Numbers in parentheses correspond to other brand socket terminals.


MAGNECRAFT RELAY SOCKETS 

MODELS 70-781D-1, 70-782D-1, 70-783D-1, 70-784D-1 

DESCRIPTION 

These relay sockets are for use with the Magnecraft 781, 782, 

783 and 784 Series relays. These sockets have finger safe 

screw terminals and can be DIN rail or surface mounted. 


Voltage rating 300 V 

Current rating 15A 

Dielectric strength 2000 Vrms min. 

Screw terminals M3.5 zinc plated steel 

Wire size 20 – 12 AWG 


Flammability rating UL94V-0 


Weight 

70-781D5-1 0.07 lb (0.032 kg) 

70-782D-1 0.12 lb (0.055 kg) 

70-783D-1 0.14 lb (0.062 kg) 

70-784D-1 0.17 lb (0.077 kg) 

Approvals UL-recognized component, E70550 

CSA certified, File 40787 

CE: IEC 61810-1 


in 

(cm) 

3.12 

(7.92) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

1.160 MAX 

(2.946) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

0.791 

(2.01) 

0.669 

(1.70) 

5 

1 

14 13 

9 

2.68 

(6.807) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

Socket: 70-781D5-1 70-782D-1 70-783D-1 

70-784D-1 

Hold-down clip*: 16-1327 16-1349 16-1350 16-1351 


70-781D5-1 Relay socket, SPDT, use with 781 Series relays 

70-782D-1 Relay socket, DPDT, use with 782 Series relays 

12 

0.75 

(1.905) 

1.02 

(2.959) 

1.165 

(2.59) 

8 

4 

14 13 

9 

5 

1 

2.68 

(6.807) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

14 

12 

4 

0.200 

(0.51) 

1.33 

(3.378) 

1.50 MAX 

(3.81) 

8 6 

13 

10 9 

5 

2 1 

2.68 

(6.807) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

70-BSM 

1.8 

(4.57) 

1.42 

(3.606) 

1.968 

(4.998) 

8 7 6 

4 3 


14 

70-781D5-1 

70-783D-1 

5 

2 1 

13 

12 11 10 9 

*Order metal hold-down clips and accessory modules separately 

70-782D-1 

70-784D-1 

70-ASM 70-STM-1 Hold-down clip 

SOCKET ACCESSORY MODULES* 

Plugging an accessory module into the socket 

adds additional features to the relay. 

For use with 70-783D-1, 70-784D-1 

MOV suppressors 

70-ASMM-24 24 VAC/VDC 



Protection diodes 

70-ASMD-250 6-250 VDC 

Green LEDs 

70-ASMLG-24 24 VAC/VDC 

70-ASMLG-120/240 120/240 VAC/VDC 

Timing modules 

70-STM-1 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 

0.1 sec to 10 days, 

on delay, off delay, 

single shot, repeat cycle 

For use with 70-781D5-1, 70-782D-1 

MOV suppressors 

70-BSMM-24 24 VAC/VDC 



Protection diodes 

70-BSMD-250 6-250 VDC 

Green LEDs 

70-BSMLG-24 24 VAC/VDC 

70-BSMLG-120/240 120/240 VAC/VDC 


70-783D-1 Relay socket, 3PDT, use with 783 Series relays 

70-784D-1 Relay socket, 4PDT, use with 784 Series relays 

629 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


630 


SPECIAL VOLTAGE RELAYS 

20307 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 20307 Series plug-in style relays offer the flexibility of 

using typical 208 VAC or 277 VAC single-phase voltages for 

relay control. These relays are DPDT and plug into a standard 

three-pole general-purpose relay socket. 

FEATURES 

• 208 VAC and 277 VAC coils 


• UL recognized 

• Socket mounting 

• Heavy-duty construction 


Contacts 

Arrangement DPDT (2 Form C) 

Rating 13A, 1/3 hp @ 120 VAC 

13A, 1/2 hp @ 277 VAC 

3A, 3/4 hp @ 600 VAC 

10A @ 28 VDC 

Note: SR3B-05 socket is rated for 10A, 

300V max. 

ALTERNATING RELAY 

MODEL ALT 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model ALT Alternating Relay is commonly used to alternate 

between two loads to equalize run-time. When an external 

control switch opens, the Model ALT’s output contacts 

transfer from one state to the other. When an external control 

switch closes, the output contacts remain in their current state. 

The SW option offers an override toggle switch on top of the 

relay that allows manual override control of either load or automatic 

operation. 

FEATURES 

• Alternation between two loads to equalize run time 

• Two LEDs to indicate the energized load 

• Optional override switch 

• Debounce time delay 


Supply voltage 24 VAC or 115 VAC 

Supply current 20 mA 

Control switch voltage 24 VAC or 115 VAC 


ALT-24-S Alternating relay, 24 VAC 

ALT-24-S-SW Alternating relay, 24 VAC, override 

switch 

ALT-115-S Alternating relay, 115 VAC 

Coil voltage 

20307-86 208 VAC @ 60 Hz 

20307-87 277 VAC @ 60 Hz 

Power 2.2 VA 



(3.8 x 3.5 x 8.6 cm) 



20307-86 Relay, 208 VAC coil, DPDT 

20307-87 Relay, 277 VAC coil, DPDT 


SR3B-05 DIN rail/surface-mount relay socket 

WIRING 


N.C. 

N.O. 

C 

WIRING 

2 

1 

8 

7 

6 5 

3 

4 

Bottom View 

Initiating current 2 mA 

Contact rating SPDT, 480 VA @ 240 VAC 

Debounce time delay 0.5 sec 

1 

4 

7 

3 

6 

9 

A 

B 

(-) (+) 

Bottom View 


24 or 

115 VAC 

Control 

Switch 

20307 

SR3B-05 


ALT-115-S-SW Alternating relay, 115 VAC, override 

switch 

OT08 Octal relay socket for Model ALT


MAGNETIC LATCHING RELAYS 

RH2LB SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The RH2LB Series Magnetic Latching Relays operate 

by pulse input and maintain the current condition even 

during power failure. The relay coils are rated for continuous 

duty, and the DPDT relay contacts have excellent 

self-holding performance. A built-in operation indicator 

shows the set/reset condition. The RH2LB Series 

mounts in standard relay sockets that can be surface or 

DIN rail mounted. 


Contact configuration DPDT 

Contact material Silver, cadmium oxide 

Contact resistance 50 m� or less 

Min applicable load 5 VDC, 100 mA 

Max continuous 

applied voltage 110% of rated voltage 

Min set and reset voltage 80% of the rated voltage 

Set time 30 ms or less AC; 20 ms 

or less DC 

Reset time 30 ms or less AC; 20 ms 

or less DC 

Response frequency 1800 operations/hour 

Life expectancy Electrical 200,000 operations 

Mechanical 10,000,000 operations 

Operating temp -22° to 158° F (-30° to 70° C) 



(2.7 x 2.1 x 3.5 cm) 

Coil Ratings 

SET COIL RESET COIL 

Rated Current ±15% @ 20°C 

RATED 

Coil Resistance Rated Current ±15% @ 20°C Coil Resistance 

VOLTAGE 60 Hz (mA) 50 Hz (mA) ±10% @ 20°C (�) 60 Hz (mA) 50 Hz (mA) ±10% @ 20°C (�) 

24 VAC 50 51.2 

182 

17.1 17.1 

105 

120 VAC 10 10.3 

4670 

4.2 4.2 2680 

24 VDC 

83 

288 

37.5 

640 

Contact Ratings 

RESISTIVE (A) INDUCTIVE (A) MOTOR LOAD (hp) 

VOLTAGE UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA 

30 VDC 

120 VAC 

240 VAC 

10 

10 

7.5 

10 

10 

7.5 

_ 

7.5 

6.5 

7.5 

7.5 

5 

_ 

1/6 

1/3 



RH2LB-U Magnetic latching relay 

_ 

1/6 

1/3 

FEATURES 

WIRING 

1 4 

5 6 8 

(-) 9 10 12(+) 

13(-) Set (+)14 

Reset 

(contacts shown in 

unlatched position) 

Bottom View 

AC24V 24 VAC set and reset coils 

AC120V 120 VAC set and reset coils 

DC24V 24 VDC set and reset coils 

RH2LB-U AC24V Example: RH2LB-UAC24V Magnetic latching 

relay with 24 VAC set and reset coils 


SH3B-05 Relay socket 

BAM-1000 Aluminum DIN rail 

DIN-3F Steel DIN rail 

RH2LB 

SH3B-05 

• Magnetic latch maintains condition even during 

power failure 

• Built-in indicator shows set/reset condition 

• Coils operate by pulse input but can stand 

continuous duty 

• Surface or DIN rail mounting in a standard relay 

socket 

• DPDT contacts 

Notes: 

1. Set/reset coils should not be energized 

at the same time. 

2. Do not use relays in environments 

where magnetic particles are present 

in significant quantities or near 

external magnetic fields such as 

high current circuits. 

3. Avoid using in circuits where large 

power surges occur. 

4. Maintain minimum 0.234" (0.6 cm) 

clearance between relays. 

5. Observe polarity of DC coils. 

631 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


632 


MOTOR STARTER INTERFACE 

MODEL PIL-2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model PIL-2 is designed to provide momentary contact 

closures to control motor starters with momentary start/stop 

push buttons. The Model PIL-2 acts as a remote start/stop 

station using a single maintained contact from a controller, 

switch, or relay. 

FEATURES 

• LED indicators 

Pulse out: unlatch/latch 

Command in: off/on 

• 24 VAC/DC power 

• Selectable power-up state (PUP) 

• Snap-track mounting for easy installation 

OPERATION 

The Model PIL-2 is operated by a single maintained N.C. or 

N.O. contact from a switch, relay, or controller. Closing the 

input contact causes the N.O. latch output to close momentarily 

for 300 ms to start a motor. Opening the input contact causes 

the N.C. unlatch output to open momentarily for 300 ms to stop 

a motor. A power-up feature allows the selection of either an 

immediate pulse out (PUP position), based on the current state 

of the input contact, or a pulse out only when the input contact 

changes state. LEDs indicate input state and output latch or 

unlatch pulses. 

DIMENSIONS AND WIRING 

in 

(cm) 

Power-Up 

Jumper 

(shown in PUP 

position) 

+ 

24 VAC/DC 

– 

Command 

Contact 

PUP 

3 

(7.62) 

PULSE OUT 

UL L 

CMD IN 

OFF ON 

Power 

Power 

Command 

PIL-2 

PWR 

+ PWR 

– 

CMD 

IN 

UL L 

Unlatch 

(stop) 

L1 

2.25 

(5.72) 

Latch (start) 


Power supply 24 VAC/DC @ 50 mA 

Input SPST switch or relay 

Output One N.O. contact rated 120 VAC, 

5A; one N.C. contact rated 120 

VAC, 5A 

Output pulse time 300 ms [Contact Trane 

for special pulse time requirements, 

5 sec max] 


Local 

Stop 

(push button) 


PULSE OUT - UL ON only during unlatch (stop) pulse 

PULSE OUT - L ON only during latch (start) pulse 

CMD IN - OFF ON only when command contact is open 

CMD IN - ON ON only when command contact is closed 

Local Start (push button) 

Starter Coil 

M 

L2 

Starter Hold-In 

Contact 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

PIL-2 Motor starter interface, 300 ms pulse 

PIL-2-C Motor starter interface, special pulse (specify when ordering) 

PIL-2


RELAY IN A BOX 

RIB, RIBT PILOT SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Relay In A Box (RIB) Pilot Series controls most 

BAS, HVAC, low-horsepower motor and lighting applications. 

The relays come mounted and prewired in a housing, 

which saves the installer the time, trouble, and 

expense of buying separate components (relay, socket, 

mounting rail, and enclosure) and assembling them on 

the job or at the shop. 

The RIB Pilot Series has a protruding 1/2" or 3/4" NPT 

nipple from which all wires exit (except T Series). To 

install, remove a conduit knockout in the equipment, 

insert the wires and nipple through the hole, tighten the 

locknut, and connect the wires. 

RIB Pilot Series - 10A Relays 

The RIB Pilot Series has relay contacts rated for 10A 

and is used to control light electrical loads, drive power 

relays/contactors, or sense the voltage being fed to electrical 

loads. The RIB Pilot Series requires a low coil 

drive current and is provided with circuitry to allow powering 

the relay coil from a wide range of AC or DC voltages. 

RIBT Series - High/Low Voltage Separation 

The RIBT Series is designed to provide physically separate 

entrances for connections to the relay input coil and 

output contacts. Relay contact wires exit the housing 

through a 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple. The cover of the RIBT 

Series is removable, and the coil drive wires can enter 

the housing through one of two convenient openings with 

star bushings or 1/2" conduit. The coil drive wires are 

secured to screw terminals within a separate wiring compartment 

in the RIBT Series. Most of the RIBs in the 

Pilot Series are also available in the T Series. 

SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL 

Enclosure size 

A 1.7'' x 2.8'' x 1.5'' 

4.32 x 7.11 x 3.81 cm) 

B 4.0" x 4.0" x 1.8" 

(10.16 x 10.16 x 4.57 cm) 

G 2.3" x 3.2" x 1.8" 

(5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm) 



Life rating (all relays) 10 million cycles min 

mechanical 

Relay status LED, ON - relay activated 

Housing Plenum rated, NEMA 1, 

optional NEMA 4 

FEATURES 

RIBU1C 

• Convenient and economical to use 

• Relay status indicator via LED 

• Coil uses low current and accepts a wide range 

of AC and DC voltages 

• Closed/Open/Auto switch option available 

• Nipple- or screw-mountable 

• Compact, gray plastic enclosure 

• Color-coded wires for eliminating errors 

• UL listed for UL916 Energy Management 

and UL864 Fire 

• Made in the USA 

Coil pull-in/drop-out (nominal values) 

PULL-IN DROP-OUT 

COIL DRIVE DC AC DC AC 

10-30 VAC/DC 10 9 2.8 2.1 

24 VAC/DC 20 18 3.8 3 

120 VAC – 102 – 9 

208-277 VAC – 176 – 13 

Wire length 16'' (40.6 cm) 

Approvals UL listed, UL916 Energy Management 

UL 864 Fire, ULC listed, CSFM 

Weight Approx. 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 

RIBU1S 

633 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


634 



RIB, RIBT PILOT SERIES 

SPECIFICATIONS - PILOT SERIES 

MODEL TYPE 

RIBU1C* 

RIBU1C-N4† 

1-SPDT 

RIBU2C* 

RIBH1C* 

RIBH1C-N4† 

RIBH2C* 

RIBU1SC* 

RIBH1SC* 

RIBU1S* 

RIBU2SC 

RIBU2S2 

RIBU1SM 

RIBH1S* 

RIBH1SM 

RIB2401D* 

RIB2401D-N4† 

RIB2402D 

RIB2402D-N4† 

2-SPDT 

1-SPDT 

2-SPDT 

1-SPST-NO** 

1-SPST-NO** 

1-SPDT 

2-SPST-NO** 

1-SPST-NO** 

1-SPST-NO** 

1-SPST-NO** 

COIL 

DRIVE 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

10-30 VAC 

208-277 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

208-277 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

24 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50/60- Hz 

24 VAC/VDC 

208-277 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

SIZE/ 

HUB 

A-1/2 

G-3/4 

A-1/2 

G-3/4 

RIBL3C 3-SPST-NO 

10-30 VAC/VDC B-1/2 

RIBL4C 

3-SPST-NO 

1-SPDT 

50/60 Hz 

B-1/2 

SIB02S 

1-SPDT 

1-SPDT 

1-DPDT 

1-DPDT 

SPDT 

Manual 

Switch 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

10-30 VAC 

208-277 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

G-1/2 

OVR 

SW 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Yes-2 

G-1/2 

Yes 

G-1/2 

Yes 

G-3/4 

B-3/4 Yes-2 

Yes + 

G-1/2 Status 

Yes 

G-1/2 

Yes + 

Status 

G-1/2 

A-1/2 

A-1/2 

A-1/2 

Yes-2 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Yes 

RELAY 


10A resistive 120/240/277 VAC 




600W tungsten 120 VAC N.O. 


1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC 








1/3 hp for N.O. 120-240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120-240 VAC 



Status Contact 

on RIBU1SM & RIBH1SM: 

5A max @ 277 VAC 



1/2 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC 

1/3 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC 





10A resistive 120-277 VAC 


480 VA pilot duty 240-277 VAC 




1/3 hp for N.O. 120-240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120-240 VAC 



Switch ratings 

20A 277 VAC 


RELAY 

CONTACT WIRING 

Relay #1 

NC (blue) 

COM (yellow) 

NO (orange) 

Relay #2 (if present) 

NC (gray) 

COM (purple) 

NO (brown) 

Auto 

Manual 

N.C. - Closed 

Open 

N.O. - Closed 

Relay #1 

(orange) 

(orange) 

Relay #2 of RIBU2S2 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

(brown) 

(brown) 

Relay #2 of RIBU2SC 

NC (gray) 

COM (purple) 

NO (brown) 

STATUS = 2nd Pole of 

switch of RIBU1SM, RIBH1SM 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

(brown) 

(purple) 

(gray) 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(gray) 

(purple) 

(brown) 

(yellow) 

Common 

(blue) N.C. 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

Relay #1 

(black) 

(black) 

Relay #2 

(blue) 

(blue) 

Relay #3 

(yellow) 

(yellow) 


NC (gray) 

COM (purple) 

NO (brown) 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(orange) N.O. 

RELAY COIL 

DRIVE DATA 

Wiring 

Relay #1 

Common - White/Yellow wire 

10-30 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire 

120 VAC - White/Black wire 

208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire 


Common - White/Purple wire 

10-30 VAC/VDC - Gray/White wire 

120 VAC - White/Red wire 

208-277 VAC - White/Orange wire 

Input Current 

30 mA @ 10 VAC 

32 mA @ 12 VAC 

42 mA @ 24 VAC 

50 mA @ 30 VAC 

25 mA @ 120 VAC 

35 mA @ 208-277 VAC 

12 mA @ 10 VDC 

14 mA @ 12 VDC 

16 mA @ 24 VDC 

18 mA @ 30 VDC 

Wiring 


24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire 



Input Current 

29 mA @ 24 VAC 22 mA @ 24 VDC 

28 mA @ 120 VAC 

32 mA @ 208-277 VAC 

Wiring 

Common - White/Red wire 

Relay#1 - White/Black wire 

Relay#2 - White/Blue wire 

Relay#3 - White/Yellow wire 

Relay#4 - White/Brown wire 

(if present) 

Input Current 

30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 

32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 

42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 

50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC 

Order by model number 

* Models may be ordered in RIBT Series with high/low voltage separation. 

**Can be ordered normally closed by adding - NC after the model number. Contact Trane. 

† N4 has NEMA 4 housing 

NC 

COM 

NO 

NC 

COM 

NO 

No Relay 

Switch Only



RIB, RIBT POWER SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Relay In A Box (RIB) Power Series controls most 

BAS, HVAC, low-horsepower motor and lighting applications. 

The relays come mounted and prewired in a housing, 

which saves the installer the time, trouble, and 

expense of buying separate components (relay, socket, 

mounting rail, and enclosure) and assembling them on 

the job or at the shop. 

The RIB Power Series has a protruding 1/2" or 3/4" 

NPT nipple from which all wires exit (except T Series). 

To install, remove a conduit knockout in the equipment, 

insert the wires and nipple through the hole, tighten the 

locknut, and connect the wires. 

RIB Power Series - 20, 30A Relays 

The RIB Power Series has relay contacts rated for 20 

and 30A. They require modest coil drive current and are 

used for direct switching and control of heavy electrical 

circuits, such as large resistive, motor, and lighting 

loads. 

RIBT Series - High/Low Voltage Separation 

The RIBT Series is designed to provide physically separate 

entrances for connections to the relay input coil 

and output contacts. Relay contact wires exit the housing 

through a 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple. The cover of the 

RIBT Series is removable and, with star bushings or 

1/2" conduit, the coil drive wires can enter the housing 

through one of two convenient openings. The coil drive 

wires are secured to screw terminals within a separate 

wiring compartment in the RIBT. Most of the RIBs in the 

Power Series are also available in the T Series. 

SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL 

Enclosure size 

A 2.3'' x 3.2'' x 1.8'' 

(5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm) 

B 4" x 4" x 1.8" 

(10.16 x 10.16 x 4.57 cm) 

G 2.3" x 3.2" x 1.8" 

(5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm) 





Housing Plenum rated, NEMA1 

Frequency All relays rated for 50/60 Hz 

FEATURES 

RIB2401SB 



• Coil uses low current and accepts a wide range 

of AC and DC voltages 


• Nipple or screw mountable 

• Compact, gray plastic enclosure 

• Color-coded wires for eliminating errors 

• UL listed for UL916 Energy Management 

and UL864 Fire 

• Made in the USA 




24 VAC/DC 22 18 3.8 3 

120 VAC – 85 – 35 

208-277 VAC – 160 – 60 

480 VAC – 340 – 140 

RIB2401B 

Wire length 16'' (40.6 cm) 

Approvals UL listed, UL 916 Energy Management, 


Weight Approx. 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 

635 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


636 



RIB, RIBT POWER SERIES 

SPECIFICATIONS - POWER SERIES 

MODEL TYPE 

RIB2401B* 

RIB2402B* 

RIB2401SB* 

RIB2402SB* 

1-SPDT 

1-SPDT 

1-SPST-NO 

1-SPST-NO 

COIL 

DRIVE 

24 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

24 VAC/VDC 

208 - 277 VAC 

24 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

24 VAC/VDC 

208 - 277 VAC 

SIZE- 

HUB OVR 

SW 

G-1/2 – 

G-1/2 

G-1/2 

G-1/2 

RIB01P 1-DPDT 120 VAC B-1/2 – 

RIB02P 1-DPDT 208-277 VAC B-1/2 – 

RIB04P 1-DPDT 480 VAC B-1/2 – 

RIB24P* 1-DPDT 24 VAC/VDC G-1/2 – 

24 VAC/VDC 

RIB2401SBC* 1-SPDT 

G-1/2 

120 VAC 

Yes-2 

24 VAC/VDC 

RIB2402SBC* 1-SPDT 

G-1/2 Yes-2 

208 - 277 VAC 

RIB24S2* 

RIB01S2 

RIB02S2 

RIB04S2 

1-DPST-NO 

24 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

208-277 VAC 

480 VAC 

B-1/2 

RIB243P* 1-3PST-NO 24 VAC/VDC B-1/2 

RIB013P 1-3PST-NO 120 VAC B-1/2 

– 

Yes 

Yes 

RIB023P 1-3PST-NO 208-277 VAC B-1/2 – 

RIB043P 1-3PST-NO 480 VAC B-1/2 

Yes 

Double 

Pole 

RIB24P30 1-DPDT 24 VAC/VDC A-1/2 – 

– 

– 

– 

RELAY 



1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 277 VAC 

20A ballast N.O. 120/277 VAC 

10A ballast N.C. 120/277 VAC 





1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 277 VAC 







20A resistive 28 VDC, 15 VDC 


1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 240-277 VAC 

3 hp 480-600 VAC 



1,158 VA pilot duty 240 VAC 




1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 277 VAC 




770 VA Pilot Duty 120 VAC 



1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 240-277 VAC 

10A tungsten 120 VAC 



1,110 VA Pilot Duty 277 VAC 




1 hp 120 VAC, 1 PH 

2 hp 240-277 VAC, 1 PH 

3 hp 480-600 VAC 1 PH 

5 hp 240 VAC, 3 PH 

7.5 hp 480 VAC 3 PH 


1466 VA 240 VAC, 3 PH 

2112 VA 480 VAC, 3 PH 




1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 240-277 VAC 

3 hp 480-600 VAC 






(orange) 

(orange) 


RELAY 

CONTACT WIRING 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(orange) 

(orange) 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(gray) 

(purple) 

(brown) 

N.C. 

Common 

N.O. 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

For normally closed, add -NC after 

model number when ordering. 

Auto 

Manual 

N/C - Closed 

Open 

N/O - Closed 

N.C. 

Common 

N.O. 

N.C. 

Common 

N.O. 

Double Pole Switch 

Relay Pole #1 Relay Pole #2 

(blue) 

(blue) 

(yellow) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(orange) 

N.O. 

N.O. 

N.O. 

(yellow) 

Common 

(blue) 

N/C 

(orange) 

N/O 

(brown) 

(brown) 





(blue) 

(yellow) 

(orange) 

(gray) 

(purple) 

(brown) 

N.C. 

Common 

N.O. 

N.C. 

Common 

N.O. 

Order by model number 

* Models may be ordered in RIBT Series with high/low voltage separation. Contact Trane. 

RELAY COIL 

DRIVE DATA 

Wiring 





Input Current 

75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC 

42 mA @ 120 VAC 

62 ma @ 208/277 VAC 

Wiring 

120 VAC - White/Black wires 

208-277 VAC - White/Brown wires 

480 VAC - White/Green wires 

Input Current 

100 mA @ 120-480 VAC 

Wiring 

24 VAC White/Yellow wires 

Input Current 

125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC 

Wiring 





Input Current 

75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC 

42 mA @ 120 VAC 

Wiring 

24 VAC/VDC White/Yellow wires 

120 VAC White/Black wires 

208-277 VAC White/Brown wires 

480 VAC White/Green wires 

Input Current 

125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC 

75 mA @ 120 VAC 

95 mA @ 208-277 VAC 

95 mA @ 480 VAC 

Wiring 

24 VAC/VDC - White/Yellow wires 

120 VAC - White/Black wires 

208-277 VAC - White/Brown wires 

480 VAC - White/Green wires 

Input Current 

190 mA @ 24 VAC 140 mA @ 30 VDC 

140 mA @ 120 VAC 

170 mA @ 208-277 VAC 

120 mA @ 480 VAC 

Wiring 

24 VAC/VDC - White/Yellow wires 

Input Current 

125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC


MODULAR PANEL RELAYS 

RIB M SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

RIB M Series Modular Panel Relays allow the installer 

to mount a combination of relays in an attractive metal 

enclosure. Models are available to control most BAS, 

HVAC, low-horsepower motors, and lighting applications. 

The relay modules snap into a 4" (10.16 cm) wide plastic 

track. This system provides a convenient and cost-saving 

method of mixing and matching relays of different ratings 

to suit the requirements of the application. 

Connections to the modules are made by wiring to screw 

terminals. Input connections can be grouped on one side 

of the enclosure and output connections on the other to 

separate high voltage and low voltage wires. Plenty of 

room is provided within the enclosure for wire runs, and 

the housings can be stacked vertically or horizontally. 

The relay modules can be snap-track mounted inside the 

housing as pictured or mounted into an available space 

in other equipment. The track is available in 2" (5.08 cm) 

lengths for mounting one module or in 12" (30.5 cm) 

lengths for mounting several modules. 

RIBM Pilot Series - 10A, 15A Modular Relays 

The relays have contacts rated up to 15A and are used 

to control light electrical loads, drive power relays/contactors, 

or sense the voltage fed to electrical loads. The pilot 

modular relays require a low coil drive current and are 

provided with circuitry to allow powering the relay coil 

from a wide range of AC or DC voltages. 

RIBM Power Series - 30A Modular Relays 

These power modular relays have contacts rated up to 

30A. They require modest coil drive current and are used 

for direct switching and control of heavy electrical circuits 

such as large resistive, motor, or lighting loads. 


Dimensions 

C 1.25"L x 4"W x 1.75"H (3.18 x 10.16 x 4.45 cm) 

D 2"L x 4"W x 1.75"H (5.08 x 10.16 x 4.45 cm) 

F 2.45"L x 4"W x 1.75"H (6.22 x 10.16 x 4.45 cm) 

H 1.25''L x 2.75''W x 1.75''D (3.2 x 6.99 x 4.45 cm) 

I 1.7''L x 2.75''W x 1.75''D (4.32 x 6.99 x 4.45 cm) 

J 1.5''L x 4''W x 1.75''D (3.85 x 10.16 x 4.45 cm) 

K 2.5''L x 2.75''W x 1.75''D (6.35 x 6.99 x 4.45 cm) 

L 3.4''L x 2.75''W x 1.75''D (8.64 x 6.99 x 4.45 cm) 

MH1000 14.5"H x 7.7"W x 3.9"D (36.83 x 19.56 x 9.91 cm) 

MH3500 24.5"H x 10.25"W x 3.9"D 

(62.23 x 26.04 x 9.91 cm) 

MH3800 24.5"H x 12.5"W x 6.5"D 

(62.23 x 31.75 x 16.5 cm) 

FEATURES 


• Handy, track-mounted modules 

• Attractive, stackable metal enclosure 


• Coil uses low current and accepts wide 

range of AC & DC voltages 


• High density relay packaging 

• UL listed enclosure and relay modules 




10-30 VAC/DC 10 9 2.8 2.1 

24 VAC/DC 22 18 3.8 3 

120 VAC – 85 – 35 

208-277 VAC – 160 – 60 


Humidity range 5% to 95% noncondensing 



Approvals UL listed, UL 916 Energy Management, 


RIB M24ZN UL recognized component 

Relay frequency 50/60 Hz 

637 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


638 


MODULAR PANEL RELAYS 

RIB M SERIES 

SPECIFICATIONS - PILOT RELAY MODULES 

MODEL TYPE COIL DRIVE SIZE* OVR CONTACT RATINGS CONTACT WIRING 

RIBM24C 

RIBMN24C 

1-SPDT 

RIBM24S 

RIBMN24S 

1-SPST 

RIBMU1C 

RIBMU1SC 

RIBMNU1C 

1-SPDT 

RIBMU2C 2-SPDT 

RIBMH1C 

RIBMH1SC 

RIBMNH1C 

1-SPDT 

RIBMH2C 2-SPDT 

24 VAC/VDC 

50-60 Hz 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50-60 Hz 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

208-277 VAC 

50-60 Hz 

RIBMU1S 

RIBMNU1S 

RIBMU1SM 

RIBMNU1SM 

1-SPST-NO 

1-SPST-NO 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50-60 Hz 

RIBMH1S 

RIBMNH1S 

RIBMH1SM 

RIBMNH1SM 

1-SPST-NO 

1-SPST-NO 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

208-277 VAC 

50-60 Hz 

* See Specification on previous page for dimensions. 

DPST-NO 

DPST-NO 

C 

H 

C 

H 

C 

J 

I 

F 

C 

J 

I 

F 

C 

K 

D 

L 

C 

K 

D 

L 

– 

Yes 

– 

Yes-2 

– 

– 

– 

Yes-2 

– 

– 

Yes 

Yes + 

Status 

YES 

Yes+ 

Status 

SPECIFICATIONS - POWER RELAY MODULES 

RIBM2401B 

RIBM2401SBC 

1-SPDT 

RIBM2402B 

RIBM2402SBC 

RIBM2401SB 

RIBM2402SB 

RIBM24PL 

RIBM24ZL 

1-SPST-NO 

24 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

24 VAC/VDC 

208-277 VAC 

50/60 Hz 

24 VAC/VDC 

120 VAC 

24 VAC/VDC 

208-277 VAC 

24 VAC/VDC 

RIBM24ZN DPDT 24 VAC/VDC 

C 

F 

C 

F 

D 

F 

F 

– 

Yes-2 

– 

Yes-2 

Yes 

– 

– 

15A general use 125 VAC 

10A general use 250 VAC 


1/2 hp 125/250 VAC 


10A resistive 120/240/277 VAC 

15A resistive 150 VAC, 28 VDC 

15A inductive 150 VAC 





1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC 









1/3 hp for N.O. 120/240 VAC 

1/6 hp for N.C. 120/240 VAC 




1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 277 VAC 

20A ballast N.O. 120-277 VAC 

10A ballast N.C. 120-277 VAC 




20A resistive 300 VAC, 28 VDC 


1 hp 120 VAC 

2 hp 240-277 VAC 

3 hp 480-600 VAC 






24ZL&24ZN: 30A res.@ 300 VAC 

24C 24S 

COIL DRIVE DATA 

Wiring 

NC Closed 

24 VAC/VDC 

COM Open 

NO Auto * 

*Cut appropriate jumper to 

select N.C. or N.O. 

Relay Without Override Switch 

Current Input 

24 mA @ 20 VAC 13 mA @ 20 VDC 

28 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 

44 mA @ 35 VAC 25 mA @ 35 VDC 

Relay #1 Relay #2 

NC 

(if present) 

NC 

Wiring 

COM COM 

Relay #1 (and #2 if present) 

NO NO 

Relay With Override Switch 

either 

or 

208-277 VAC 

120 VAC 

10-30 VAC/VDC 

Auto 

Manual 

Common 

Common 

N.C. - Closed 

N.C. 

Open 

N.O. - Closed 

N.O. 

U1S & H1S 

Closed 

**For normally closed Open 

contacts, specify NC Auto 

after model number 

U1SM & H1SM 

Closed Closed 

Open Open 

Auto Auto 

Current Input 

30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 

32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 

42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 

50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC 

25 mA @ 120 VAC 

35 mA @ 208-277 VAC 


Order relay modules by model number as shown in Specifications above. 

Relay housing and track is ordered separately below. 

MH1000 Screw-cover housing MT4-2 Relay track, 2'' x 4'' (5.08 x 10.16 cm) 

MH3500 Hinge-cover housing MT4-12 Relay track, 12'' x 4'' (30.48 x 10.16 cm) 

MH3800 Hinge-cover housing MT212-2 Relay track, 2'' x 2.75'' (5.08 x 6.99 cm) 

MT212-12 Relay track, 12'' x 2.75'' (30.48 x 6.99 cm) 

** 

STATUS 50 VAC/DC max and 

0.25 A max 

Relay Without Override Switch 

NC 

COM 

NO 

Relay With Override Switch 

Auto 

Manual 

N.C. - Closed 

Open 

N.O. - Closed 

Closed 

Open 

Auto 

Position of yellow jumper 

selects NO vs NC 

NO 

NC 

COM 

NO 

Common 

N.C. 

N.O. 

Wiring 

either - 208-277 VAC 

or - 120 VAC 

24 VAC/VDC 

Common 

Current Input 

45 mA @ 18 VAC 30 mA @ 22 VDC 

75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC 

42 mA @ 120 VAC 42 mA @ 30 VDC 

62 mA @ 208-277 VAC 

Wiring 

24 VAC/VDC 

COMMON 

Current Input 

100 mA @ 20 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC 

125 mA @ 24 VAC 70 mA @ 30 VDC


RELAY IN A BOX DRY CONTACT INPUT SERIES 

MODELS RIB21CDC, RIB01BDC, RIB02BDC, RIB01SBDC, RIB02SBDC 

DESCRIPTION 

The Dry Contact Input RIB Series is controlled by Class 2 

circuits with a dry contact from a BAS controller, thermostat, 

switch, another relay, or a solid-state switch. The power to 

energize the RIB Series comes from the load being controlled 

or a local power source near the relay. The relay contacts are 

isolated from the input power and the dry contact input. 

FEATURES 

• Remote power input, dry contact control 


• UL listed 

• Optional override switch 


Power input 

RIB21CDC 120-277 VAC @ 50 mA 

RIB01BDC, 01SBDC 120 VAC @ 42 mA 

RIB02BDC, 02SBDC 208-277 VAC @ 62 mA 

Controlling contact SPST, 7 VDC, 1 µA min 

Temp -30° to 140°F (-34.4° to 60°C) 

Dimensions 

RIB21CDC 1.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.5"D 

(4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8 cm) 

RIB01, RIB02 2.3"H x 3.2"W x 1.8"D 

(5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm) 

Conduit hub 1/2" NPT 

Wire length 16" (40.6 cm) 

Housing NEMA 1, plenum, 

NEMA 4 optional with RIB21CDC 

WIRING 

RIB21CDC 

120-277 VAC 

Black 

Neutral or 

phase 

red 

POWER INPUT 

RIB01BDC 

120 VAC 

Black 

Neutral 

white 

RIB02BDC 

208-277 VAC 

Black 

Neutral or 

phase 

red 

RIB 

Dry Contact 

Input (Class 2) * 

(white/red) 

(white/blue) 

POWER INPUT 

RIB01SBDC RIB02SBDC 

120 VAC 

Black 

Neutral 

white 

208-277 VAC 

Black 

Neutral or 

phase 

red 

Dry Contact 

Input (Class 2) * 

(white/red) 

(white/blue) 

RIB 

Closed 

• 

• 

Open 

• 

*If more than one dry contact RIB is used in common, 

connect all white/blue wires together 


Auto 

• 

Contact 

Output 

(orange) 

N.O. 

(yellow) 

Common 

(blue) 

N.C. 

orange 

orange 

APPLICATION 

BAS Controller, 

Thermostat, or 

Other Dry Contact 

Switch 

Minimum rating 

7 VDC, 1µA 

RIB01SBDC 

Low-Voltage 

Class 2 Wiring 

Relay 

Contact 

Power 

Input 

RIB located at 

RTU or Load 

RIB21CDC 

Output contact type SPDT, Models with override 

switch are SPST-NO 


RIB21CDC 10A general use @ 250 VAC, 

10A resistive @ 30 VDC, 

1/2 hp 125-250 VAC, 

470 VA pilot duty 120-240 VAC 

RIB01, RIB02 20A resistive @ 277 VAC, 

1110 VA pilot duty @ 277 VAC, 

770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 

20A ballast 277 VAC N.O., 

10A ballast 277 VAC N.C., 

10A tungsten 120 VAC N.O., 

240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C., 

2 hp 277 VAC,1 hp 120 VAC 


RIB21CDC Dry contact input RIB, 120-277 VAC, SPDT, 10A 

RIB21CDC-N4 Dry contact input RIB, 120-277 VAC, SPDT, 10A, NEMA 4 housing 

RIB01BDC Dry contact input RIB, 120 VAC, SPDT, 20A 

RIB02BDC Dry contact input RIB, 208-277 VAC, SPDT, 20A 

RIB01SBDC Dry contact input RIB, 120 VAC, SPST-NO, 20A, override switch 

RIB02SBDC Dry contact input RIB, 208-277 VAC, SPST-NO, 20A, override switch 

Power 

208-480 VAC 

Starter 

RTU or 

Other Load 

639 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


640 


MULTI-VOLTAGE RELAY MODULES 

MODELS PAM-1, PAM-4 

DESCRIPTION 

Model PAM relays are small, encapsulated multi-voltage 

modules that provide 10A Form C contacts. 

These devices are ideal for applications where remote 

relays are required for control or status feedback. They 

are suitable for use with HVAC, temperature control, fire 

alarm, security, building automation, and lighting control 

systems. 

Model PAM relays may be mounted by using doublesided 

adhesive tape (provided) or, a self-drilling screw, 

or they may be loosely placed in a handibox. 

FEATURES 

• Multi-voltage input 


• Multiple mounting options 

• Wirenuts, mounting screw, and tape included 

• LED indication (PAM-1 only) 



PAM-1 24 VAC @ 31 mA, 24 VDC @ 15 mA, 

120 VAC @ 19 mA 

PAM-4 9-40 VDC @ 15 mA 

Contact rating SPDT, Form C, 10A @ 120 VAC, 

7A @ 24 VDC, 250 µA @ 5 VDC 

Wire leads 12" (30.5 cm), 18 AWG 


WIRING 

24 VAC/ 

DC 

120V 

(–) (white) 

(black) 

(+) (red) 

Relay Energized LED 

(blue) 

C 

(yellow) N.C. 10A 

Contacts 

(orange) N.O. 

Mounting Hole 



(3.81 x 2.54 x 2.2 cm) 

Weight 0.15 lb (6.80g) 

Mounting Pre-drilled mounting screw hole 

and self-tapping screw provided; 

double-sided tape also provided 

Approvals UL listed, CSFM, MEA 

9-40 VDC 

@ 15 mA 

(red) 

(+) 

(black) 

(-) 

PAM-1 

Mounting Hole 

PAM-1 PAM-4 


PAM-1 Multi-voltage relay module, 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC 

PAM-4 Multi-voltage relay Module, 9-40 VDC 

PAM-4 

(blue) 

C 

(yellow) 

N.C. 10A 

Contacts 

(orange) N.O.


MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS 

MR SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The MR Series Multi-Voltage Control Relays offer 

SPDT or DPDT contacts, which may be operated by 

multiple input control voltages. 

Each relay section contains a red LED, which indicates 

the relay coil is energized. Relay sections may be 

snapped apart from standard four- or eight-section 

assemblies and used independently. 

These relays are ideal for applications where local or 

remote contacts are required for control of electrical 

loads and general-purpose switching. They are suitable 

for use with HVAC, temperature control, fire alarm, 

security, building automation, and lighting control systems. 

FEATURES 

• Multi-voltage input, SPDT or DPDT control relays 

• LED indication when relay is energized 

• Snap-apart relay sections for standard four- or 

eight-section assemblies 

• Track, spacer, or enclosed mounting options 

SPECIFICATIONS* 

Relay sections (snap-apart) 

Voltage input 

Contact type 


Temp 

Indication 

Mounting 


Manual override 

Dimensions 


Approvals 

*Specifications are for each relay section. 

SERIES 

MR-100 MR-200 

MR-600 MR-800 

1 or 4 

1, 4, or 8 

24 VDC @ 15 mA 

24 VDC @ 30 mA 

24 VAC, 24 VDC 

24 VAC, 24 VDC 

24 VAC @ 30 mA 

24 VAC @ 39 mA 

@15 mA 

120 VAC @ 15 mA 

120 VAC @ 20 mA 

120 VAC @ 35 mA 

230 VAC @ 20 mA 

230 VAC @ 35 mA 

SPDT DPDT 

SPDT 

10A Res. @ 120 VAC 

10A @ 120 VAC 

10A @ 120 VAC 

7A Res. @ 230 VAC/28 VDC 

7A @ 24 VDC 

7A @ 30 VDC/277 VAC 

N.O.: 1/6 hp @ 120 VAC 

1/4 hp @ 120 VAC 

N.C.: 1/8 hp @ 120 VAC 

1/3 hp @ 230 VAC 

-60° to 185°F (-50° to 85°C) -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C) 

LED 

Track or enclosed 

18-gauge metal back, ABS-94VO plastic cover 

1/2" knockouts 

– 

3.25"H x 2.13"W x1.5"D (8.25 x 5.39 x 3.81 cm) 

5.13"H x 3.13"W x 2.5"D (13 .46 x 7.95 x 6.35 cm) or 

5.13"H x 9.5"W x 2.5"D (13.46 x 24.13 x 6.35 cm) 

UL recognized component 

Enclosed model UL listed 

MR-101/T 

MR-101/C 

Track Track or spacer 

– 

On/Auto/Off Switch 

MR-601/T MR-801/S 

MR-104/T 

• Dust-proof housing with LED viewing holes on 

enclosed models 

• Relays rated for 10,000,000 mechanical operations 

3.5"H x 2.13"W x 1.38"D (8.9 x 5.4 x 3.5 cm) 

– 

UL recognized component 

– 

641 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


642 


MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS 

MR SERIES 

WIRING 

Relay 

Energized 

Indicator 

Input 

Control 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

24 VAC 

120 VAC 

230 VAC 

MODEL 

MR-101/T 

MR-101/C 

MR-104/T 

MR-104/C 

MR-201/T 

MR-201/C 

MR-204/T 

MR-204/C 

MR-601/T 

MR-604/T 

MR-608/T 

MR-801/T 

MR-801/S 

MR-804/T 

MR-804/S 

MR-808/T 

MR-808/S 

SPDT Contacts 

10A @ 

120 VAC 

Ø 18/24 115 230 

(–) (+) 

A.C. A.C. 

N 

H 

NC C NO 

H 

MR-101, -104 

24 VDC 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

H 

Terminal strip connections 


COIL VOLTAGE SECTIONS MOUNTING SWITCH APPROVALS 

24 VAC 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Relay 

Energized 

Indicator 

120 VAC 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Input 

Control 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

24 VAC 

120 VAC 

230 VAC 

230 VAC 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

SPDT (10A) 

1 

1 

4 

4 

1 

4 

8 

1 

1 

4 

4 

8 

8 

DPDT Contacts 

10A @ 

120 VAC 

NC C NO NC C NO 

Ø 18/24 115 230 

(–) (+) 

A.C. A.C. 

N 

DPDT (10A) 

1 

1 

4 

4 

H 

H 

H 


Track 

(included) 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Spacers 

(included) 

X 

X 

X 

Relay 

Energized 

Indicator 

Supply 

24 VAC 

24 VDC 

24 VAC/DC 

Control 

Input 

Common 

Enclosure 

(included) 

X 

X 

X 

X 

SPDT Contacts 

10A @ 

120 VAC 

Manual 

Override 

On/Auto/Off 

X 

X 

X 

NC C NO 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

SUP CTL COM 

Note: Multisection relays MR-604 

and MR-608 have all supply 

and all common terminals 

factory jumpered together. 

MR-201, -204 MR-601, -604, -608 

UL 

Relay 

Energized 

Indicator 

Input 

Control 

Voltage 

24 VDC 

24 VAC 

120 VAC 

Recognized 

Listed 

Recognized 

Listed 

Recognized 

Listed 

Recognized 

Listed 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

Recognized 

MEA 

X 

X 

X 

X 

SPDT Contacts 

10A @ 

120 VAC 

(–) 

AC 

N 

NC C NO 

Ø 24 115 

(+) 

AC 

CSFM 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

H 


MR-801, -804, -808


OMRON POWER RELAYS 

G7L SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

G7L Series relays are heavy-duty power relays commonly 

used for controlling refrigeration, HVAC equipment, and lighting 

controls. High-power handling capability up to 30A, small 

size, and low cost make these relays well suited for motor control, 

heater loads, and lighting control. 

FEATURES 

• High power capability 


• Low cost 

• Push-to-test button 

Contact ratings G7L-1A G7L-2A 

Resistive 30A, 277 VAC 25A, 277 VAC 

General-purpose 25A, 277 VAC 25A, 277 VAC 

30A, 120 VAC 25A, 120 VAC 

Tungsten 1.5 kW, 120 VAC 1.3 kW, 120 VAC 

Horsepower 1.5 hp, 120 VAC 1 hp, 120 VAC 

3 hp, 277 VAC 2 hp, 277 VAC 

Coil voltage 24 VAC, 120 VAC 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC 

Coil power AC: 2.5 VA, DC: 2.0W 

Pull-in voltage 24V coil: 18V max 

120V coil: 75V 

Drop-out voltage 24V coil: 3.6V min 

120V coil: 18V 

Max coil voltage 24V coil: 26.4V 

120V coil: 132V 

Contact material Silver cadmium oxide 

Contact resistance 50 m� max 

Operate/Release time 30 ms max 

Dielectric strength 2000 VAC between contacts 

4000 VAC between coil and contacts 

Terminals 0.25'' x 0.031'' quick connects 

Mounting Top-mount cover with slotted tabs 

or DIN rail surface-mount socket 

with screw terminals 






in 

(cm) 

G7L-1A 

SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS 

0.12 

(0.3) 

0.43 

(1.1) 

WIRING 



G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB Power Relay, SPST-N.O. 

G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB Power Relay, DPST-N.O. 

VOLTAGE 

24VAC Coil voltage, 24 VAC 

24VDC Coil voltage, 24 VDC 

120VAC Coil voltage, 120 VAC 

P7LF-06 

2.69 

(6.85) max 

2.36(6.0) 

1.99 (5.05) max 

0.25 (0.64) max 

G7L-1A, -2A 

2 Mounting Holes 0.177 (0.45) dia 

or M4 tapped holes 

0 1 

4 6 

1.32 

(3.35) max 

0.031 

(0.08) 

0.177 

(0.45) 

G7L-1A, 2A 

Depth: 1.0 (2.54) 

2.36 ±.007 

(6.0 ±0.02) 2.2 (5.6) 

G7L-1A, -2A 

P7LF-06 

0.078 

(0.2) 

1.85 

(4.7) 

max 

0 1 

2 4 6 8 

G7L-1A-TUBJ G7L-2A-TUBJ 

G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB 24VDC Example: G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-24VDC Power relay, 

SPST-N.O., 24 VDC coil voltage 


NFD Series Female disconnect terminals 

P7LF-06 DIN rail/surface-mount socket 

G7L-2A 

2.1 

(5.3) 

643 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


644 


MAGNECRAFT POWER RELAYS 

W9AS AND W92S SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Magnecraft W9AS and W92S are heavy-duty power 

relays. High current handling capability, small size and low 

cost make these relays well suited for control of HVAC equipment 

including motors, heaters, refrigeration equipment and 

lighting control 

FEATURES 

• High current capability 


• Low cost 

• Surface or DIN rail mount 



W9AS1 30A@240VAC, 30A@28VDC, 1hp@125VAC, 

2hp@240VAC, 5A@240VAC tungsten, 

10A@277VAC ballast 

W9AS5 

N.O. 20A@240VAC, 30A@28VDC, 1hp@125VAC, 

2hp@240VAC, 5A@240VAC tungsten, 


N.C. 10A@240VAC, 10A@28VDC, 

1/4hp@125VAC, 1/2hp@240VAC, 


W92S 20A@120/277VAC, 20A@28VDC, 

1hp@120VAC, 3hp@240VAC, 10@120VAC 

tungsten 

Contact 

material Silver alloy 

Minimum load 100 mA @ 5 VDC 

Coil Voltage 24VAC, 120VAC (50/60 Hz), 24VDC 

DIMENSIONS/WIRING 

in 

(cm) 

A1 

B1 

1.08 

(2.74) 

B1 

A1 

A1 

1.713 

(4.35) 

1.980* 

(5.02) 

0.071RAD. (0.18) for #6 screw (2 places) 

1.10 

(2.79) 

* 2.56 (0.6) with 

16-9ADIN-1 

1.27 

(3.22) 

COM 

COIL COIL 

NC 

(W9AS5 only) 

NO 

COIL: 0.187 x 0.020 (0.48 x 0.051) 

Quick-Connect Terminal 

CONTACTS: 0.250 x 0.032 (0.64 x 0.081) 



W9AS1D52-24 Power relay, SPST-NO, 30A, 24 VDC coil 

W9AS1A52-24 Power relay, SPST-NO, 30A, 24 VAC coil 

W9AS1A52-120 Power relay, SPST-NO, 30A, 120 VAC coil 

W9AS5D52-24 Power relay, SPDT, 20A, 24 VDC coil 

W9AS5A52-24 Power relay, SPDT, 20A, 24 VAC coil 

W9AS5A52-120 Power relay, SPDT, 20A, 120 VAC coil 

16-9ADIN-1 DIN rail adapter for W9AS 


Coil Power 

AC(60 Hz) W9AS: 2.8VA, W92S: 4VA 

DC W9AS: 1W, W92S: 1.7W 

Pull-in voltage AC: �80% of nominal, DC: �75% of nominal 

Dropout voltage AC/DC: �10% of nominal 

Maximum voltage 120% of nominal 

Operate/release time 20 msec 

Duty Continuous 

Electrical life 

@ rated load 100,000 operations 

Mechanical life 

@ no load W9AS: 10,000,000 operations, 

W92S: 5,000,000 operations 

Mounting Surface or DIN rail (W9AS requires 

16-9ADIN-1 adapter) 


Weight W9AS: 0.073 lb (0.033kg), 

W92S: 0.19 lb (0.86kg) 

Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E43641 

W9AS W92S 

W92S 

1.00 

(2.54) 

1.36 

(3.45) 

2.35 

(5.97) 

0.090 RAD (0.22) for #8 screws 

2.7 

(6.85) 

1.17 

(2.97) 

1.63 

(4.14) 

W9AS 

1 

6 2 

8 4 

COIL & CONTACTS: 

0.250 x 0.032 (0.64 x 0.031) 



W92S7D22D-24 Power relay, DPST-NO, 30A, 24 VDC coil 

W92S7A22D-24 Power relay, DPST-NO, 30A, 24 VAC coil 

W92S7A22D-120 Power relay, DPST-NO, 30A, 120 VAC 

coil 

0


POWER RELAYS 

KE375, KE900 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The KE375 and KE900 Series of 30A relays are heavyduty 

power relays commonly used for energy management, 

refrigeration, and HVAC control applications. Highpower 

handling capability and small size make these 

power relays particularly suited for motor control, heater 

loads, and lighting control. The KE900 Series features 

an open-frame construction, and the KE375 Series is 

encased in a clear polycarbonate cover. 

FEATURES 


• High-power handling capability 

• One-, two-, and three-pole models 

• 24 VAC, 24 VDC, and 120 VAC coils 


Coil voltage 

Coil power 

Pull-in voltage 


Mounting 

Terminals 


Dielectric strength 

Operate/Release 

time 

Weight 

Approvals 

30A or 1-1/2 hp @ 120 or 240 VAC 

20A or 2 hp @ 600 VAC 

30A @ 28 VDC, resistive 

3600W @ 120 or 240V (ballast) 

KE900 KE375 

24 VAC/60 Hz, 120 VAC/60 Hz, or 24 VDC 

AC: 9.5 VA sealed 

DC: 2.0W 

AC: 85% or less of nominal 

DC: 75% or less of nominal 

AC: 4.6 VA 

DC: 2.6W 

30A @ 300 VAC, 80% PF 

15A @ 600 VAC, 80% PF 

30A @ 28 VDC 

1 hp @ 120 VAC 

2 hp @ 240 VAC / 277 VAC 

3 hp @ 480/600 VAC, 100,000 cycles 

20A @ 277/480 VAC ballast, 6000 cycles 

3/16" dia. mounting holes Top-mount cover with slotted tabs 

Screw terminals 

2200V RMS between contacts 

2200V RMS between other elements 

30 ms 

10 oz (283g) 

Silver cadmium oxide 

KE900D 

KE375 

0.25" x 0.032" quick connects 

2200V RMS between contacts 

3750V RMS between other elements 

15 ms 

3.5 oz (99g) 

KE900S 

UL/ULC listed, File #E37066 UL/ULC recognized component, File #E37066; 

CE certified 

645 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


646 


POWER RELAYS 

KE375, KE900 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

8-32 Screw 

(2) Contact Terminals 

1.88 

(4.76) 

.81 

(2.08) 

6-32 Screw 

(2) Coil Terminals 

WIRING 

2.50 

(6.35) 

2 Mounting Holes 0.19 (0.48) dia 

2.50 

(6.35) 

2.2 

(5.59) 

1.88 

(4.76) 

8-32 Screw 

(6) Contact Terminals 

1.66 

(4.22) 

3.32 

(8.43) 

6-32 Screw (2) Coil Terminals 

2 Holes 

0.19 (0.48) dia 

KE900S KE900D 

6 

5 

3 

NC 

NO 

C 

8 

6 

4 

NC 

NO 

C 

2 1 2 1 A B 

2.50 

(6.35) 

2.38 

(6.04) 

KE900S KE900D KE375T 



KE900S Power Relay, SPDT 

KE900D Power Relay, DPDT 

KE375T Power Relay, 3PDT 

COIL VOLTAGE 

24VAC 24 VAC 

24VDC 24 VDC 

120VAC 120 VAC 

7 

5 

3 

1.40 

(3.56) 


NBS Series Block spade terminals (for KE900 Series) 

NFD Series Female disconnect terminals (for KE375 Series) 

A 

1 

4 

7 

1 

4 

2 

5 

8 

3.16 

(8.03) 

2.75 

(6.99) 

2 

5 

3 

6 

9 

3 

6 

7 8 

9 

2.13 

(5.41) 

KE375T 

B 

NC 

NO 

C 

0.06 

(0.16) 

2.35 

(5.97) 

0.17 

(0.43)


DEFINITE-PURPOSE CONTACTORS 

CN SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The CN Series is an economical line of definite-purpose 

contactors designed to control electrical loads such as 

air conditioning, refrigeration compressors, motors, and 

resistance heaters. 

FEATURES 

• Two-, three-, and four-pole models 

• Contact ratings from 30-90 FLA 

• Optional auxiliary contacts 


MODEL POLES FULL-LOAD AMP (FLA) LOCKED-ROTOR AMP (LRA) RESISTIVE HP, SINGLE PHASE HP, THREE PHASE 

CN24A2D30 

CN01A2D30 

CN02A2D30 

CN24A2D40 

CN01A2D40 

CN24A3C30 

CN01A3C30 

CN24A3C40 

CN01A3C40 

CN02A3C40 

CN24A3B50 

CN01A3B50 

CN02A3B50 

CN24A3B60 

CN01A3B60 

CN02A3B60 

CN24A3B75 

CN01A3B75 

CN02A3B75 

CN24A3B90 

CN01A3B90 

CN02A3B90 

CN24A4A30 

CN01A4A30 

CN24A4A40 

CN01A4A40 

CN02A4A40 

COIL RATINGS 

MODEL COIL VOLTAGE 

(VAC) 

CN24A2D30, 40 

CN24A4A30, 40 

CN01A2D30, 40 

CN01A4A30, 40 

CN02A2D30 

CN02A4A40 

2 

2 

3 

3 

30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 150 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 

125 LRA @ 480 VAC 

100 LRA @ 600 VAC 

40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 

200 LRA @ 480 VAC 

160 LRA @ 600 VAC 

30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 

150 LRA @ 480 VAC 

120 LRA @ 600 VAC 

40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 

200 LRA @ 480 VAC 

160 LRA @ 600 VAC 

3 50 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 300 LRA @ 240 VAC 

250 LRA @ 480 VAC 

200 LRA @ 600 VAC 

3 60 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 360 LRA @ 240 VAC 

300 LRA @ 480 VAC 

240 LRA @ 600 VAC 

3 75 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 450 LRA @ 240 VAC 

375 LRA @ 480 VAC 

300 LRA @ 600 VAC 

3 90 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 540 LRA @ 240 VAC 

450 LRA @ 480 VAC 

360 LRA @ 600 VAC 

4 30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 

150 LRA @ 480 VAC 

120 LRA @ 600 VAC 

4 40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 

200 LRA @ 480 VAC 

160 LRA @ 600 VAC 

INRUSH @ 50 Hz 

(VA) 

SEALED @ 50 Hz 

(VA) 

Two Pole 

40A @ 240-600 VAC 2 hp @ 120 VAC 

3 hp @ 240 VAC 

50A @ 240-600 VAC 2 hp @ 120 VAC 

3 hp @ 240 VAC 

Three Pole Four Pole 

40A @ 240-600 VAC 2 hp @ 110/120 VAC 

5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

50A @ 240-600 VAC 3 hp @ 110/120 VAC 

7.5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

65A @ 240-600 VAC 3 hp @ 110/120 VAC 

7.5 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

10 hp @ 220-240 VAC 

75A @ 240-600 VAC 5 hp @ 110/120 VAC 

7.5 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

10 hp @ 220-240 VAC 

93A @ 240-600 VAC 5 hp @ 120 VAC 

120A @ 240-600 VAC 

10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

15 hp @ 240 VAC 

7.5 hp @ 120 VAC 

15 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

20 hp @ 240 VAC 

40A @ 240-600 VAC 2 hp @ 110/120 VAC 

5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

50A @ 240-600 VAC 3 hp @ 110/120 VAC 

7.5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

INRUSH @ 60 Hz 

(VA) 

SEALED @ 60 Hz 

(VA) 

PULL-IN 

(VAC) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

15 hp @ 480 VAC 

20 hp @ 600 VAC 

10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

20 hp @ 480 VAC 

25 hp @ 600 VAC 

15 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

15 hp @ 220-240 VAC 

25 hp @ 480/600 VAC 

25 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

25 hp @ 220-240 VAC 

30 hp @ 480/600 VAC 

20 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

25 hp @ 240 VAC 

40 hp @ 480/600 VAC 

25 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

30 hp @ 240 VAC 

50 hp @ 480/600 VAC 

10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

15 hp @ 480 VAC 

10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 

10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 

20 hp @ 480 VAC 

DROP-OUT RANGE 

(VAC) 

24 37 8 35 7 19 6-15 

120 37 8 35 7 93 20-70 

208/240 37 8 35 7 177 40-140 

CN24A3C30, 40 24 60 6 53 5 18 6-15 

CN01A3C30, 40 120 60 6 53 5 88 20-70 

CN02A3C40 208/240 60 6 53 5 177 40-140 

CN24A3B50, 60 24 140 20 132 14 18 6-15 

CN01A3B50, 60 120 140 20 132 14 93 20-70 

CN02A3B50, 60 208/240 140 20 132 14 177 40-135 

CN24A3B75, 90 24 285 42 240 27 18 6-15 

CN01A3B75, 90 120 285 42 240 27 88 20-70 

CN02A3B75, 90 208/240 285 42 240 27 177 40-110 

647 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


648 


DEFINITE-PURPOSE CONTACTORS 

CN SERIES 


Line/Load terminals Box lug and dual 0.25" quick connects 

Coil terminals Dual 0.25" quick connects 

Wire size 14-4 AWG 

Auxiliary contacts 10A, 1/3 hp @ 120/250 VAC 

CAUTION: As with all electrically held contactors and starters, the CN Series can emit a humming noise 

when the coil is energized. While this is not an issue in typical mechanical or utility rooms, sound baffling 

and vibration isolation should be considered if mounting near occupied spaces. Before energizing contactors, 

make sure any metal filings created during panel construction are removed. 


Temp -40° to 149°F (-40° to 65°C) 


Approvals UL recognized, CE certified 

CONTACT 

AMP RATING NUMBER COIL DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

MODEL Inductive Resistive OF VOLTAGE Optional 

Full Load POLES (VAC) Height Width Depth Aux. Switch 

CN24A2D30 30 40 2 24 3.3 (8.4) 2.1 (5.3) 2.6 (6.6) None 

CN01A2D30 30 40 2 120 3.3 (8.4) 2.1 (5.3) 2.6 (6.6) None 

CN02A2D30 30 40 2 208/240 3.3 (8.4) 2.1 (5.3) 2.6 (6.6) None 

CN24A2D40 40 50 2 24 3.3 (8.4) 2.1 (5.3) 2.6 (6.6) None 

CN01A2D40 40 50 2 120 3.3 (8.4) 2.1 (5.3) 2.6 (6.6) None 

CN24A3C30 30 40 3 24 3.4 (8.6) 2.97 (7.5) 3.0 (7.6) CN1C, CN2C 

CN01A3C30 30 40 3 120 3.4 (8.6) 2.97 (7.5) 3.0 (7.6) CN1C, CN2C 

CN24A3C40 40 50 3 24 3.4 (8.6) 2.97 (7.5) 3.0 (7.6) CN1C, CN2C 

CN01A3C40 40 50 3 120 3.4 (8.6) 2.97 (7.5) 3.0 (7.6) CN1C, CN2C 

CN02A3C40 40 50 3 208/240 3.4 (8.6) 2.97 (7.5) 3.0 (7.6) CN1C, CN2C 

CN24A3B50 50 65 3 24 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 3.6 (9.1) CN1B 

CN01A3B50 50 65 3 120 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 3.6 (9.1) CN1B 

CN02A3B50 50 65 3 208/240 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 3.6 (9.1) CN1B 

CN24A3B60 60 75 3 24 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 3.6 (9.1) CN1B 

CN01A3B60 60 75 3 120 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 3.6 (9.1) CN1B 

CN02A3B60 60 75 3 208/240 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 3.6 (9.1) CN1B 

CN24A3B75 75 93 3 24 5.0 (12.7) 4.2 (10.7) 4.1 (10.4) CN1B 

CN01A3B75 75 93 3 120 5.0 (12.7) 4.2 (10.7) 4.1 (10.4) CN1B 

CN02A3B75 75 93 3 208/240 5.0 (12.7) 4.2 (10.7) 4.1 (10.4) CN1B 

CN24A3B90 90 120 3 24 5.0 (12.7) 4.2 (10.7) 4.1 (10.4) CN1B 

CN01A3B90 90 120 3 120 5.0 (12.7) 4.2 (10.7) 4.1 (10.4) CN1B 

CN02A3B90 90 120 3 208/240 5.0 (12.7) 4.2 (10.7) 4.1 (10.4) CN1B 

CN24A4A30 30 40 4 24 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 2.63 (6.7) CN1A 

CN01A4A30 30 40 4 120 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 2.63 (6.7) CN1A 

CN24A4A40 40 50 4 24 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 2.63 (6.7) CN1A 

CN01A4A40 40 50 4 120 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 2.63 (6.7) CN1A 

CN02A4A40 40 50 4 208/240 3.75 (9.5) 3.1 (7.9) 2.63 (6.7) CN1A 


AUXILIARY CONTACT KITS 


CN1A Auxiliary contact, (1) SPDT CN1C Auxiliary contact, (1) SPDT 

CN1B Auxiliary contact, (1) SPDT CN2C Auxiliary contact, (2) SPDT


4-32 VDC 


SOLID-STATE RELAY 

MODEL RSSDN 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model RSSDN is a photo-isolated solid-state relay. 

The 4-32 VDC input voltage allows the relay to be used 

on analog or digital outputs. While solid-state relays provide 

reliable switching and long-life operation, careful 

application is required as excessive temperature, high 

inrush currents, or induced currents can affect solidstate 

relay operation. 

FEATURES 

• Photo isolation 

• 4000V optical isolation 

• Zero voltage turn-on 

• Built-in snubber 

• High surge capability 

• Dual SCR output 


Input 

Voltage range 4-32 VDC 

Impedance 1000� 

Pick-up voltage 4 VDC 


Dielectric strength 

1 VDC 

(input/output/base) 

Capacitance 

4000 RMS 

(input to output) 

Reverse voltage 

8 pF 

protection Yes (-32 VDC) 

Output 

Contact 1 Form A, SPST-N.O. 

Current* (continuous) 10A 25A 50A 75A 90A 

1-Cycle surge current 150A 300A 750A 1000A 1200A 

1-Second surge current 30A 

Minimum holding 

75A 150A 225A 300A 

current 50 mA 50 mA 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 

WIRING 

3 

4 

+ 

— 

RSSDN-10A 

1 

2 

LOAD 

or 

LOAD 

AC Line 

48-660 VAC 

Observe the polarity of input terminals. Failure to do so may cause 

damage to the solid-state relays. 

Voltage drop @ 

rated current 1.6V (max) 

Voltage range 48-660 VAC 

Over-voltage rating 1200 PIV 

Frequency range 47-80 Hz 

Off-state leakage 

@ rated voltage 20 mA (max) 

Turn-on time 1/2 cycle @ 60 Hz 

Turn-off time 1/2 cycle @ 60 Hz 

Zero voltage switching Yes 


(5.72 x 4.45 x 2.38 cm) 



*Relay must be mounted to heat sink for full current ratings. 

See Figure 1 below. 

RMS On-State Current (amps) 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

20 

10A, 25A 

10A 

25A Unit-Free Air 


RSSDN 

FIGURE 1. CURRENT DERATING CURVES 

Mounted on-Heatsink 

Heatsink 

30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 

Relay Base Temp (°C) 

RMS On-State Current (amps) 

100 

80 

65 

50 

20 

20 

90A 

50A, 75A, 90A 

75A Mounted on 

50A Heatsink 


50A Free Air 

Mounted on-Heatsink 

Heatsink 

30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 

Relay Base Temp (°C) 

649 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


650 


SOLID-STATE RELAY 

MODEL RSSDN 

INSTALLATION 

• Install solid-state relays in dry, well-ventilated areas away from excessive heat. 

• Use #6-32 screws, flat washers, and lock washers to secure mounting on heat sinks. 

• Vertical mounting is recommended to allow air to flow unimpeded. 

• A small-capacity load may not turn off due to the leakage current present after the solid-state relay has turned 

off. In this case, use a resistor in parallel with the load to shunt the leakage current. 

• When the input signal contains a ripple voltage, the lowest ripple amplitude should exceed the minimum pick-up 

voltage of 4V. 

Heat sinks are required to achieve the full output current rating. The recommended heat sink dimensions and materials 

are shown in the Table 1 below. 

TABLE 1. RECOMMENDED HEAT SINK DIMENSIONS / MATERIALS 

Output Rating Dimensions in (cm) Material 

10A 

25A 

50A 

75A 

90A 

12 x 12 x 1/8 (30.5 x 30.5 x 0.3) 

15 x 15 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 0.3) 

15 x 15 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 0.3) 

17 x 17 x 1/8 (43.2 x 43.2 x 0.3) 

17 x 17 x 1/8 (43.2 x 43.2 x 0.3) 

It is recommended to use a thermal compound between the base of the solid-state relay and the heat sink for heat 

dissipation. 

APPLICATION INFORMATION 

When using solid state relays for driving heaters where the load is 

switched on and off rapidly and continuously, severe thermal stress 

will result. In such cases, use an solid-state relay at no more than 

75% of the rating. 

RECOMMENDED HEATER LOADS 

SSR Rating @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC 

10A 

25A 

50A 

1 KW 

2 KW 

3 KW 

2 KW 

4 KW 

6 KW 

Solenoid Valves and Contactors 

Solid-state relays use high-noise immunity circuitry with a snubber 

to handle the electrical noise generated by inductive loads. 

RECOMMENDED LOADS 


10A 900W 1800W 

25A 2100W 4200W 

50A 3800W 7500W 

Aluminum (black anodized) 





Heater Loads Lamp Loads 



RSSDN-10A Solid-state relay, 10A continuous output current* 





RSS-CVR Finger-safe terminal cover 

Zero voltage switching is ideal for driving incandescent lamps since the 

cold fillament will not be subjected to a large inrush current. Using a zeroswitched 

solid-state relay will reduce inrush current and prolong lamp life. 

RECOMMENDED LAMP LOADS 


10A 1 KW 2 KW 

25A 2 KW 4 KW 

50A 3 KW 6 KW 

UL MOTOR LOAD RATINGS (hp) 

SSR Rating @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC @ 480 VAC 

10A 

1/2 3/4 3/4 

25A 

1/2 3/4 3/4 

50A 

3/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 

75A 

3/4 

5 5 

90A 

3/4 

5 5 

* With customer-supplied 

heat sinks. Back panels 

from the Enclosures 

section of this catalog may 

be used as heat sinks.


DELAY ON MAKE / INTERVAL TIMERS 

MODELS 438USA, 438USA-INT 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 438USA Universal Switch-Adjustable 

Time Capsule® is an all solid-state timer that provides 

delay-on-make (ON-Delay) control of a load device 

operating from 19 to 288 VAC/DC. The Model 438USA 

controls up to a 1A load, such as a relay or solenoid. 

The Model 438USA-INT Universal Switch-Adjustable 

Time Capsule® is an all solid-state timer that provides 

interval timing control of a load device operating from 24 

to 240 VAC. The Model 438USA-INT controls up to a 

1A load, such as a relay or solenoid. 

FEATURES 

• Encapsulated digital-timing circuitry 

• Switch-selectable delay 

• Low cost 

• Transient protected 

• 1A output rating 

OPERATION 

General 

Timing is set via a binary-coded DIP switch and is 

adjustable from 1-1024 seconds. With all switches 

closed, there is an internal, one-second delay; with all 

switches open, there is a 1024-second delay time. Prior 

to applying power to the timer, set the switches to the 

correct position for the desired time. 



438USA 19-288 VAC (50/60 Hz) or DC 

438USA-INT 24-240 VAC (50/60 Hz) 

Timing 

Mode 

438USA Delay on make (ON-Delay) 

438USA-INT Interval timer 

Range 1-1024 sec, 1-sec increments 

Adjustment 10-position DIP switch 

Tolerance ±10% of set point 

Variation ±15% worst case at any 

combination of operating voltage 

and temp 

Repeatability ±1% nominal 

Output rating 10 mA to 1A inductive; inrush 

current to 25A for 8 ms 

438USA 

438USA-INT 

438USA - Delay-on-Make (ON-Delay) 

When power is applied, the Model 438USA remains in 

the off state, allowing only leakage current to flow. Once 

the preset time period elapses, the unit switches on, 

allowing full current to flow and the load to energize. The 

load remains energized as long as power is applied. 

When power is removed, the unit resets and is ready for 

another timing period. 

438USA-INT - Interval 

When voltage is applied, the Model 438USA-INT turns 

on, permitting full load current to flow. At the end of the 

preset timing period, the unit turns off and permits only 

leakage current to flow through the load. To recycle, the 

operating voltage must be removed and reapplied. 

Output voltage drop 

On state 4V max 

Output leakage current 

Off state 

438USA 0.6 mA@ 24V, 1.8 mA @ 48V, 

5.4 mA@ 120V, 11.4 mA @ 240V 

438USA-INT 1 mA max @ 240V 

Recycle time 

438USA 50 ms after timing cycle, 200 ms 

during a timing cycle 

438USA-INT 100 ms 

Transient protection 6000V for 8.3 ms 


Operating humidity 95% noncondensing 

Weight 3.2 oz (91 g) 

Approvals 

438USA UL recognized component, 

File #E47858; 

CSA certified, File #LR31931-3 

651 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


652 


DELAY ON MAKE / INTERVAL TIMERS 

MODELS 438USA, 438USA-INT 


in 

(cm) 

19-288 VAC/DC 

Input 

Terminals 

0.25 Spade 

0.90 

(2.29) 

0.27 

(.69) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

0.36 

(0.91) 

TIME SETTINGS 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

LOAD 

2.25 

(5.71) 


0.16 (0.41) dia 

2.65 

(6.73) 

438USA 

1.7 

(4.31) 

0.76 

(1.93) 

When a switch is opened, the switch value is added to the 

total delay time. 

Switch #1 = 1 sec Switch #6 = 32 sec 





FIGURE 1. TIMING 

Power 

Load 

Time 

Delay 

438USA 

Power 

Load 

To Delay 540-second interval To Delay 60-second interval 

Timing 

Interval 

438USA-INT 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 

OPEN 


4 #20 AWG wire (2 for operating 

voltage and 2 for load circuit) 

24 - 240 VAC 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

512 

16 

8 

2 

1 

539 

+1* 

540 sec 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 


438USA Universal switch-adjustable time capsule, delay on make (on-delay) timer 

438USA-INT Universal switch-adjustable time capsule, interval timer 

0.90 

(2.29) 

0.20 

(0.51) 

(white) 

(black) 

2.25 

4 Mounting Holes (5.72) 

0.16 (0.3962) dia 

2.65 

(6.731) 

LOAD* 

(yellow) (white) 

438USA-INT 

1.7 

(4.32) 

0.76 

(1.93) 

*Do not apply voltage to load wires. 

The load is powered from the input 

voltage. 

OPEN 

32 

16 

8 

2 

1 

59 

+1* 

60 sec 

*Always add one second for internal delay.


MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC TIMERS 

RTE SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The RTE Series Multifunction Electronic Timers are 

socket-mounted adjustable time delay relays available in 

two function groups. The timer functions and time ranges 

are easily selected by setting external switches. The 

knob on the front of the timer is used to set the precise 

delay period within the selected time range. 

Timer Functions 

Group 1 - ON-Delay (Delay on Make) 

- Interval 

Group 2 - OFF-Delay (Delay on Break) 

- Single shot 

FEATURES 

• Selectable timing functions and time ranges 

• Time delay settings from 0.1 second to 600 hours 

• Two Form C delayed output contacts 

• Space-saving package 

• High repeat accuracy of ±0.2% 

• On and timing out LED indicators 

• Standard 8-pin, 11-pin, or 11-blade relay socket 

• UL recognized component, CSA certified, 

CE certified 


Time delay settings 0.1 sec to 600 hours 

Contact configuration 2 Form C, DPDT (delay outputs) 

Contact load rating 10A resist.@ 240 VAC, 30 VDC 

7A induct. @ 240 VAC, 30 VDC 

1/6 hp @ 120 VAC 

1/3 hp @ 240 VAC 

Input voltage 100-240 VAC (50/60 Hz) 

24 VAC/DC 



Repeat accuracy ±0.2%, ±20 ms 

Voltage accuracy ±0.2%, ±20 ms 

Temp error ±0.5%, ±20 ms 

Setting error ±10% max 

Reset time 0.1 sec max 

Insulation resistance 100 M� min (500 VDC) 

Dielectric strength 2000 VAC, 1 min. (except 

between contacts of same pole) 


AC 6.6 VA @120 VAC, 

3.5 VA @ 24 VAC 

DC 1.7W 

Mechanical life 50,000,000 operations 

Electrical life 500,000 operations 

Weight 3.2 oz (89 g) 



File #LR83814 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.57 

(4.0) 

WIRING 

1.40 

(3.6) 

8/11 Pin: A = 3.06 (7.79) 

11 Blade: A = 2.95 (7.49) 

Delay Delay 

4 5 

3 

6 

2 

7 

1 8 

Power 

(AC or DC) 

Control 

Signal Switch 

Delay 5 

6 

7 Delay 

4 

8 

3 

9 

2 10 

1 11 

A 

RTE 

SR2P-06 

Delay 1 2 3 Delay 

4 5 6 

7 8 9 

A 

B 

Power 

(AC or DC) 

Delay on Make / Interval 

Power 

(AC or DC) 

Bottom View 

Delay 1 

Control 

Signal Switch 

2 3 Delay 

4 5 6 

7 8 9 

A B 

Power 

(AC or DC) 

Do not apply voltage Do not apply voltage 

to terminals 5 and 6. To terminals 2 and 5. 

Delay on Break / Single Shot 

653 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


654 


MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC TIMERS 

RTE SERIES 

OPERATION 

Power 

Input 

On 

Load Time Delay 

When power is applied to the input terminals, the time 

delay period begins. At the end of the time delay period, 

the output contacts transfer. Reset occurs when power 

is removed and reapplied. 

Power 

Input 

Load 

On 

On 

Time Delay 

On 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Power 

Input 

Control 

Signal 

Load 

Power 

Input 

Control 

Signal 

Load 

On 

On 

On Off 

Time Delay 

On Off 

Power must be applied at all times to the input terminals. On 

closure of a normally open control signal switch, the output 

contacts transfer and remain in this position. When the control 

signal switch is reopened, the time delay period begins. At the 

end of the time delay period, the output contacts transfer back 

to original position. Reset occurs with closure of the control 

signal switch. 

ON-Delay (Delay on Make) OFF-Delay (Delay on Break) 

When power is applied to the input terminals, the output 

contacts instantly transfer and the time delay period 

begins. At the end of the time delay period, the output 

contacts de-energize. Reset occurs when power is removed 

and reapplied. 

On Off 

Time Delay 

On Off 

Power must be applied at all times to the input terminals. On 

momentary or maintained closure of a normally open control 

signal switch, the output contacts transfer and the time delay 

period begins. At the end of the delay period, output contacts 

transfer back to the original position. The timer is then ready 

for the next timing cycle. 

Interval Single Shot (One-Shot) 



RTE Multifunction electronic timer 

P Pin 

B Blade 

1 Function group - interval or on-delay (eight-pin or 11-blade) 

2 Function group - single shot or off-delay (11-pin or 11-blade) 

AF20 Input voltage - 100-240 VAC 

AD24 Input voltage - 24 VAC/VDC 

RTE P 1 AD24 Example: RTE-P1-AD24 multifunction electronic timer, interval or on-delay, 24 VAC/VDC 


SR2P-06 8-Pin DIN rail/surface mount socket 

SR3P-06 11-Pin DIN rail/surface mount socket 

SR3B-05 11-Blade DIN rail/surface mount socket 

SFA-202 Hold-down spring 

BAM-1000 Aluminum DIN mounting rail 

DIN-3F Steel DIN mounting rail 

Off 

Off


MAGNECRAFT TIME-DELAY RELAYS 

MODELS 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP 

DESCRIPTION 

The Magnecraft 821TD10H, TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP are 

adjustable time delay relays available with various timing functions. 

The 821TD10H is a DIN rail mounted product offering 

multiple timing functions, multiple timing scales, and universal 

voltage input. The TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP are dual function, 

low cost time delay relays used with DIN/surface mount 

sockets. 

Timing Functions 

821TD10H On-delay, Interval, Off-delay, One-shot, 

Repeat cycle, Pulse, On & Off-delay, 

Memory latch 

TDRSOXP On-delay, Interval 

TDRSRXP Off-delay, Retriggerable One-shot 

FEATURES 

• Adjustable timing ranges from 0.1 second to 10 days 

• Selectable timing functions 

• Indication LEDs show power, timing (821TD10H), and 

relay energized 

• The compact Model 821TD10H DIN rail mounts without a 

socket 

• Models TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP DIN rail or surface 

mount with industry standard sockets 


821TD10H TDRSOXP / TDRSRXP 

TIMING 

Functions On-delay, Interval, TDRSOXP: 

Off-delay, One-shot, On-delay, Interval 

Repeat cycle, Pulse, TDRSRXP: 

On & Off-delay, Off-delay, Retriggerable 

Memory latch One-shot 

Time range 0.1 sec to 10 days 0.1 sec to 10 hours 

Time adjustment Potentiometer Removable knob 

Setting error ±5% ±10% 

Timing repeatability 0.002% 0.01% 

Reset time 150 msec max 150 msec max 

Input pulse time 

INPUT 

50 msec min 50 msec min 

Voltage 12 to 240 VAC/DC 24 or 120 VAC/DC 

Voltage tolerance -15%, +10% -20%, +10% 

Power consumption 3 VA, 1.7 W max 5 VA, 2.5 W max 

Transient protection Yes Yes 

Reverse polarity Protected Non-polarity sensitive 

Input indication 

OUTPUT 

Green LED Green LED 

Contact rating 15A @ 240VAC 12A @ 240VAC 

(resistive) 15A @ 24VDC 12A @ 24VDC 

Minimum load 500 mW 500 mW 

Contact material Silver-nickel Silver alloy 

Output indication Red LED, 

Blinks = timing, 

On = energized 

Red LED 

821TD10H 

TDRSOXP 

TDRSRXP 

821TD10H TDRSOXP / TDRSRXP 

MISCELLANEOUS 

Operating temp -4° to 131°F -4° to 131°F 

(-20° to 55°C) (-20° to 55°C) 

Life expectancy (number of operations) 

Electrical @ full load 70,000 100,000 

Mechanical @ no load 10,000,000 10,000,000 

Maximum wire size 14 AWG 20-12 AWG w/ socket 


Dimensions, H x W x D 3.5" x 0.69" x 2.55" 1.73" x 1.42" x 2.8" 

(9 x 1.8 x 6.5 cm) (4.5 x 3.6 x 7.1 cm) 

Mounting DIN rail DIN rail/surface 

mount socket 

Approvals UL Listed UL recognized, 

CE File E43641 

MOUNTING SOCKET 

Model Not applicable TDRSOXP: 

70-464-1 8-Pin 

TDRSRXP: 

70-465-1 11-Pin 

Electrical rating Not applicable 15A @ 300 VAC 

Dimensions, H x W x D Not applicable TDRSOXP w/socket: 

2.02" x 1.6" x 0.83" 

(5.1 x 4.1 x 2.1 cm) 

TDRSRXP w/socket: 

2.05" x 2.32" x 0.97" 

(5.2 x 5.0 x 2.5 cm) 

Weight Not applicable 0.09 lb (0.04 kg) 

Approvals Not applicable UL recognized, 

File E70550, CE 

655 

RELAYS & CONTACTORS


WIRING 

S 

P 

R 

656 

t 


MAGNECRAFT TIME-DELAY RELAYS 

MODELS 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP 

OPERATION 

4 

1 

5 

3 6 

2 7 

8 

24 or 120V 

Power 

(AC or DC) 

Non-polarity Sensitive 

TDRSOXP 

On-Delay 

821 Function: A 

TDRSOXP: SW1 OFF 

R 

P 

OFF-Delay S break 

821 Function: F 

TDRSRXP: SW1 OFF 

Green 

Input 

LED 

Red 

Relay 

LED 

Fine Adjust Knob 

On 

Output 

t 

3 

2 

1 

4 567 89 

10 

I Function 

II Time 

III Time 

IV Time 

off on 

Digital Switches 

TDRSOXP 

TDRSRXP 

P 

R 

t 

Interval 

821 Function: B 

TDRSOXP: SW1 ON 

External 

Control 

5 

6 

7 

4 8 

3 9 

2 10 

1 11 

24 or 120V 

Power 

(AC or DC) 

Non-polarity Sensitive 

TDRSRXP 

12-240V Power (AC or DC) 

CONTROL 

SWITCH 

Switch + – 

P 

R 

t t 

t t 

Repeat Cycle: OFF First 

821 Function: C 

Green Input 

LED 

Time Scale 

Select 

Function 

Select 

P 

R 

t t 

t 

Repeat Cycle: ON First 

821 Function: D 

S 

t 

* 

S 

t 

S 

t t 

R 

R 

R 

t t 

P 

P 

P 

One-Shot - S make 

Interval - S break 

On & Off Delay 

821 Function: G 

821 Function: H 

S make/break 

TDRSRXP: SW1 ON* 

821 Function: I 

P - Power R - Relay Output S - Control Switch t - Time Delay 

*Retriggerable: time delay period restarts any time the control switch is opened and closed. 

Time Range Digital Switch Position 

II III IV 

0.1sec-1sec OFF OFF OFF 

1sec-10sec OFF OFF ON 

10sec-100sec OFF ON OFF 

0.1min-1min OFF ON ON 

1min-10min ON OFF OFF 

10min-100min ON OFF ON 

0.1hr-1hr ON ON OFF 

1hr-10hr ON ON ON 

TDRSOXP/TDRSRXP 

Time Range Selection 


A1 S A2 

+ – 

15 16 18 

A1 S A2 

+ – 

15 16 18 

COM NC NO 

Red Timing/ 

Output LED 

Time 

Adjust 

Multiplier 

Control switch ignored 

functions A ” to “E” 

Control switch required 

functions “F” to “J” 

821TD10H 

P 

R 

S 

Pulse Pulse 

t 

t 

Pulse (0.5 sec) 

821 Function: E 

R 

P 

Memory Latch - S make 

821 Function: J 

Time Scale 

Selection 

1 sec 

10 sec 

1 min 

10 min 

1 hr 

10 hr 

1 day 

10 day 

Always ON 

Always OFF 


821TD10H-UNI Time delay relay, multifunction, 12-240VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 days 

TDRSOXP-24 Time delay relay, on-delay/interval, 24VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours 

TDRSOXP-120 Time delay relay, on-delay/interval, 120VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours 

TDRSRXP-24 Time delay relay, off-delay/single-shot, 24VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours 

TDRSRXP-120 Time delay relay, off-delay/single-shot, 120VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours 

70-464-1 Relay socket, eight-pin, use with TDRSOXP time delay relay 

70-465-1 Relay socket, 11-pin, use with TDRSRXP time delay relay 

Time Adjust 

Multiplier 

0.1 

0.2 

0.3 

0.4 

0.5 

0.6 

0.7 

0.8 

0.9 

1.0

PANEL & INSTALLATION

PRODUCTS 

The NEW CBL Series 

Communication & 

Control Cable is ideal 

for building communication 

and panel wiring. 

See page 648! 

SERVICES 

Contract Trane Parts 

Center for more info on 

our Full-Service Panel 

Shop! 

SOLUTIONS 

We’ve got In-Stock 

Inventory for all your 

panel parts and pieces! 

PANEL & INSTALLATION MATERIALS 


FITTINGS 

B Series — Pneumatic Barb Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 

C Series — Pneumatic Compression Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 

M Series — Pneumatic Malleable Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 

694R-3710 Series — Pneumatic Air Supply Restrictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 

S Series — Pneumatic Solder Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695 

FUSES 

FLM/FLQ/KLK/GF/251/K235 — Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 

LABELS 

Labels — Engraved Phenolic Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 

LIGHTS / SWITCHES 

23F/21F/41F — Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 

ABW/AOW Series — Push-Button Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 

APW Series — Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679 

A Series — Miniature Lights & Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680 

ASW Series — Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 

L4000 —Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 

TWS Series — Tower Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 

C500 Series — Maunal Time Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 

RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY 

PDK/PRK — Pre-Assembled Panel Power Disconnects & Receptacles . . . . . . .671 

TERMINAL BLOCKS 

100 Series — Double Row Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 

6H38 — 3/8" Sectional Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 

6M30 Series — Class M Base-Mount Fuse Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 

6W30 — Sectional Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 

BKA/1 — Panel-Mount Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 

M4/6SNT, M4/8SF, M10/16SFL — DIN Rail Fuse Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 

M4/6, M6/8 — DIN Rail Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 

SAK4, SAK6 — Din Rail Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 

TS Series — Double Row Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 

STROBES / HORNS 

104ST, 89STR, 869STR, 868STR, 868, 869 — Strobe & Horn Combination . . .674 

QL Series — Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 

RAD — 1 Remote Alarm Indication Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 

SC Series — Alarm Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 

ST120 — Emergency Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 

STB/STB-H — Strobe Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 

WPS Series — Plate Mount Emergency Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677 

WIRE DUCT 

ABB Series — Wiring Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 

T1 Series — Wiring Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 

P/DN — Wiring Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 

WIRING / TUBING 

CAT Series/J Hooks, 4BRT — Cable Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 

HW-76B, CBL Series — Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 

DIN-3F/BAM-1000 — DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 

T-100 Series/T-141 — Pneumatic Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 

Wiring Accessories — Wire Terminals,Nuts,Ties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685 



DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS 

MODELS M4/6, M6/8 

DESCRIPTION 

Models M4/6 and M6/8 DIN Rail Terminal Blocks offer a 

modular design for flexibility in layout and reduced installation 

time. Unique marker holders provide optional top- or sidemount 

marking capability. The Model M4/6 offers maximum 

circuit density while the Model M6/8 offers the convenience of 

larger screws for conventional screwdriver installation. 

FEATURES 

• Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp 

• Universal DIN rail mounting 

• Reduced installation time 

• Block removable without displacing 

adjacent blocks 

• Various marking options 


Rated voltage 600 VAC/VDC 

Rated current 30A UL, 25A CSA 

Rated wire size 22-10 AWG 


File #E60645, E72667; 

CSA certified 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.75 

(4.45) 

1.89 

(4.80) 

0.24 

(0.61) 

M4/6, M6/8 M4/6 M6/8 

2.57 

(6.55) 

M4/6D2 

2.34 

(5.95) 

0.315 

(0.8) 



SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS 

M4/6 DIN rail terminal block, gray 

M4/6-BK DIN rail terminal block, black 

M4/6-BL DIN rail terminal block, blue 

M4/6-GR DIN rail terminal block, green 

M4/6-RD DIN rail terminal block, red 

M4/6-OR DIN rail terminal block, orange 

M4/6-YW DIN rail terminal block, yellow 

M4/6P Grounding block, green and yellow 

SINGLE 8 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS (use M4/6 accessories) 

M6/8 8 mm DIN rail terminal block, gray 

M6/8P 8 mm grounding block, green and yellow 

ACCESSORIES 

DIN-3F 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4"L(1m) 

BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4"L(1m) 

BAM2 End stop (two required), gray 

FEM6 End section (one required), gray 

SCF6 Circuit separator, gray 

BJS6 Jumper bar for M4/6, 20 poles per bar 

BJS6-2 Jumper bar for M4/6, two poles per bar 

BJS6-3 Jumper bar for M4/6, three poles per bar 

BJS6-4 Jumper bar for M4/6, four poles per bar 

BJS6-5 Jumper bar for M4/6, five poles per bar 

BJS6-10 Jumper bar for M4/6, 10 poles per bar 

BJS8 Jumper bar for M6/8, 20 poles per bar 

EV6 Jumper bar hardware (screw and post, pkg.20) 

DOUBLE STACK 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS 

M4/6D2 Double stack terminal block, gray 

FEM6D Double stack end section, gray 

BAMH Double stack end stop, gray 

SCF6D Double stack circuit separator, gray 

BEIGE SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS 

M4/6-BG DIN rail terminal block, beige 

FEM6-BG End section, beige 

BAM2-BG End stop, beige 

SCF6-BG Circuit separator, beige 

MARKERS 

RC610B Blank strips 

RC610/1-10 10 strips of 1-10 

RC610/1-50 Two strips of 1-50 

RC610/1-100 One strip of 1-100 

RC610/X01-X00 One strip of 100 numbers (fill in range, i.e., 201-300) 

RC610-G Ground marker strip 

RC610-L Line marker strip 

RC610-N Neutral marker strip 

RC610-CUSTOM Custom markers printed at Kele 

RTM7 Top mount, blank, 19.7" (50 cm) 

657 

PANEL & INSTALLATION MATERIALS



DIN RAIL SWITCH AND FUSE HOLDERS 

MODELS M4/6SNBT, M4/8SF, M10/16SFL 

DESCRIPTION 

Models M4/8SF, M4/8SFL, and M10/16SFL fuse holders provide 

a safe method for protecting or isolating a circuit. Once 

installed the fuse is enclosed and prohibits the installer from 

coming in contact with a live circuit. The fuse can be disengaged 

by pulling up on the fuseholder. Optional blown fuse 

indicators are available. Model M4/6SNBT is a non-fusible 

disconnect switch that provides a safe method for isolating a 

circuit. 

FEATURES 



• Unique disconnect design 



Rated current 

M10/16 16A 

M4/6, M4/8 10A 

Rated wire size 

M10/16 24-8 AWG 

M4/6 22-10 AWG 

M4/8 22-12 AWG 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

658 

2.68 

(6.82) 

* With holder closed 

2.32* 

(5.89) 

0.63 

(1.60) 

2.23 

(56.5) 

Len (lamp) 

Fuse 

Fuse size 

M10/16SFL 0.25" x 1.25" (0.63 x 3.17 cm) 

(GF Series) 

M4/8 0.197" x 0.787" (0.5 x 2.0 cm) 

(K235 Series) 


File #E60645, E72667; 

CSA certified 

Closed 

1.9* 

(48.5) 

M10/16SFL M4/8SF, SFL 

M4/6SNBT1 

0.315 

(0.8) 


M4/8SF M4/6SNBT 

1.75 

(4.45) 


SWITCH 

M4/6SNBT 6 mm blade switch block (with test sockets), gray/orange handle 

M4/8 FUSEHOLDER 

M4/8SF 8 mm fuseholder (K235 fuse not included) 

M4/8SFL 8 mm fuseholder with neon lamp (K235 fuse not included) 

FEM8S 8 mm fuseholder end section 

K235-(amp) Fast-acting fuses for 8 mm fuseholder (10A fuse max) 

M10/16SFL FUSEHOLDER 

M10/16SFL 16 mm fuseholder (GF fuse not included) 

LEN Fuse indicator lamp (110-220 VAC only) 

GF-(amp) Fast-acting fuse 


M4/6 DIN rail terminal block 6 mm 

DIN-3F 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 

BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 

BAM End stop 

Note: Fuses are available in 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15 amp sizes 

M10/16SFL 

Closed 

2.05 

(5.2) 

0.24 

(0.6)


DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS (STANDARD BEIGE) 

MODELS SAK4, SAK6 

DESCRIPTION 

Models SAK4 and SAK6 DIN Rail Terminal Blocks offer a 

modular design for flexibility in layout and reduced installation 

time. The standard color is beige for the terminal blocks and 

accessories, but other color terminal blocks are available. The 

Model SAK4 offers maximum circuit density while the Model 

SAK6 offers the convenience of larger screws for conventional 

screwdriver installation. Double stacks and fuseholders are 

available. The markers are side mount with horizontal printing. 

FEATURES 



• Reduced installation time 

• Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

in 

(cm) 

in 

(cm) 

1.654 

(4.2) 

SAK4 


1.969 

(5.0) 

DK4EN 

2.283 

(5.8) 

ASK1 

1.87 

(4.75) 

0.256 

(0.65) 

SAK4 SAK6 

2.244 

(5.7) 

1.339 

(3.4) 

0.315 

(0.8) 

0.236 

(0.6) 


Rated current 30A UL, 36A CSA 



File #E60693; CSA certified 

0.315 

(0.8) 


MODEL DESCRIPTION STANDARD 

SINGLE BEIGE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK PACKAGE* 

SAK4 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, beige 100 

EK4 6 mm grounding block, green and yellow 100 

AP-SAK End section, beige (one required) 100 

EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50 

TW Circuit separator, beige 20 

FUSEHOLDERS 

ASK1 Fuseholder beige (K235 style fuse not included) 100 

ASK1-LD Fuseholder beige with 120 VAC/VDC indicator 25 

(K235 style fuse not included) 

AP-ASK1 Fuseholder end section, beige (one required) 20 

SINGLE BEIGE 8 mm TERMINAL BLOCK 

SAK6 8 mm DIN rail terminal block, beige 100 

EK6 8 mm grounding block, green and yellow 100 

AP-SAK End section, beige (one required) 100 



DOUBLE STACK BEIGE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK 

DK4 6 mm double stack terminal block, beige 100 

AP-DK End section, beige (one required) 20 



SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK IN COLORS 

SAK4-BL 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, blue 100 

SAK4-RD 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, red 100 

SAK4-YW 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, yellow 100 

SAK4-OR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, orange 100 

SAK4-GR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, green 100 

SAK4-GY 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, gray 100 

SAK4-BK 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, black 100 

SAK4-BR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, brown 100 

ACCESSORIES 

DIN-3F 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 40 

BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 40 

Q10-6 6 mm 10 pole jumper bar with screws and spacers 20 

Q10-8 8 mm 10 pole jumper bar with screws and spacers 20 

DEKH-1/50 Horizontal numbers (one strip of 1-50) 10 

DEKH-x/xx Horizontal numbers (one strip of 50 numbers, 10 

fill in range, i.e. 51-100) 

DEKH-LNG Horizontal markers labeled L1, L2, L3, N, G 10 

DEK-B Blank markers 10 

* May be ordered by piece 

659 



660 


3/8" SECTIONAL TERMINAL BLOCKS 

MODEL 6H38 

DESCRIPTION 

Model 6H38 3/8" Sectional Terminal Blocks are individually 

molded blocks that can be assembled to produce 

a terminal strip for the required number of circuits. 

The larger size of these 3/8" blocks makes wiring 

terminations easier for both small and large wire 

gauges. The Model 6H38 is channel-mounted and can 

be used in conjunction with the Model 6W30 sectional 

fuse holder. 

FEATURES 

• Sectional design for layout flexibility 

• Channel mounting 

• 32 circuits per foot 

• Kant Kut wiring connectors 



Rated current 30A 

Wire range 22-10 AWG 

Base material White nylon, 221°F (105°C) 

Connections Tin-plated copper 

Circuits per foot 32 


File #E62806; 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.56 

(3.96) 

1.5 

(3.81) 


1.25 

(3.17) 

1.18 

(3.00) 

MPC 

Channel 

6H38-E-C 6H38-TSKK-C 

0.375 

(0.94) 

A - 0.823 + (0.375 x poles) 

B - 0.458 + (0.375 x poles) 


6H38-TSKK-C 3/8" sectional terminal block, channel mount 

6H38-E-C 3/8" end section, channel mount (one required) 

MC Mounting clamps (two required) 

MPC-3 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 3' (0.91m) 


J-38 Individual jumpers for 3/8" (0.95 cm) blocks 

MS-P Vinyl marking strip, 1/2" x 24" (1.27 x 60.96 cm) 

Example: For a row of 50 terminal blocks, order the following: 

50 6H38-TSKK-C, 1 6H38-E-C, 2 MC, 1 MS-P, 1 MPC-3 

B 

A 

MC 

0.21 x 0.34 

(0.53 x 0.86)


SECTIONAL FUSE HOLDERS 

MODEL 6W30 

DESCRIPTION 

Model 6W30 Sectional Fuse Holders are used with 

Model 6H38 Marathon sectional terminal blocks and 

may be mounted on the same mounting channel. Each 

row of fuse holders requires an end section. If the fuse 

holders are to be mounted alone, two mounting clamps 

are required in addition to the end section and mounting 

channel. 

FEATURES 

• Sectional design for layout flexibility 

• Channel mounting 

• Built-in fuse puller 

• Compatible with 6H38 sectional terminal blocks 

SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS 



Base material White nylon, 221°F (105°C) 

Flammability rating 94V-0 


Clip material Copper alloy, tin plated 


File #E35113; 


Fuse size 0.41" dia x 1.5"L 

(1.03 x 3.81 cm) 

(FLM/FLQ Series) 

in 

(cm) 

0.21 

(0.53) 

1.70 

(4.32) 

0.34 

(0.86) 


Sectional Dimensions 

L = 0.88 + (0.68 x N) 

C = 0.48 + (0.68 x N) 

N = Number of poles 

2.00 

(5.08) 

0.49 

(1.24) 

0.68 

(1.73) 

2.03 

(5.16) 

1.95 

(4.95) 

L 

C 

2.80 

(7.11) 

2.00 

(5.08) 


6W30A1-C Sectional fuse holder, channel mount 

6WE-C Fuse holder end section, channel mount 

MC Mounting clamp 



FLM/FLQ Fuse 

1.70 

(4.32) 

1.00 

(2.54) 

2.00 

(5.08) 

661 



662 


PANEL-MOUNT TERMINAL BLOCKS 

MODEL BKA/1 

DESCRIPTION 

Model BKA/1 Panel-Mount Terminal Blocks are compact 

and modular. They are used for applications where 

space saving, direct mount, multiple terminal assemblies 

are required. These modular blocks can be used to 

replace barrier strips. 

Because of the compact size, these terminals are 

appropriate for use in small enclosures, equipment 

housings, or confined locations where space is a constraint. 

Model BKA/1 terminal blocks are individual, single-pole 

components that snap together to any required number 

of poles. This design also permits modules to be added 

or subtracted to meet changing electrical requirements. 

Mounting sections snap on to the ends of the terminal 

assembly or between terminal blocks to provide additional 

mounting points where required. 

FEATURES 

• Extremely compact 


• 50 terminations per foot 

• Screw-cage clamp 

• Modular design 

• Surface mounted 





Circuits per foot 50 

Housing material Polyamide 6.6 

Housing color Beige 


File #E95701; 


DIMENSIONS 

�� 

�� 


�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

�� 


BKA/1 Single terminal block module, 0.236" (0.60 cm) 

EH2 Mounting section (2 required, min) 

AQU75S 75-pole jumper strip 

SB6/10 Blank marker strip for 10 blocks 

�� 

��


DOUBLE ROW TERMINAL BLOCKS 

100 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

100 Series Double Row Terminal Blocks are 

designed for electrical and electronic termination of 

wire, with or without the use of a terminal connector, 

for low voltage and amperage requirements. These 

double row terminal blocks provide an insulation barrier 

between circuits to prevent short circuits in factory 

or field wiring applications. 

FEATURES 

• Closed-back design 

• Insulation barrier between poles 

• Multiple pole arrangements 







Construction Thermoplastic base, plated 

brass terminals with Sems 

pressure saddle screws 

Spacing 3/8" centers 


File #E47811; 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

#6-32 X 1/4 

Screw 


0.3 

(0.78) 

A 

B 

0.38 

(0.96) 


0.165 dia 

(0.41) 

0.31 

(0.79) 

0.48 

(1.22) 

�� 

�� 


105SP Double row terminal blocks, 5 poles 







JSPS 10-pole jumper strip 

� �� 

�� 

�� 

�� 

0.88 

(2.24) 

�� 

�� 

0.28 

(0.71) 

663 



664 


DOUBLE ROW TERMINAL STRIPS 

TS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

TS Series Double Row Terminal Strips are a costeffective 

alternative to barrier strips or other types of terminal 

blocks. They are easy to use; simply strip the wire 

and insert and tighten the terminal screw. The tubular 

screw terminal strips feature a dead front design that 

prevents shocks and shorts. The polyamide nylon strips 

can be readily field-cut to the desired number of poles 

using only a utility or pocket knife. 

FEATURES 

• Tubular screw clamp connection with wire 

protector 

• Opaque white polyamide 6.6 housing 

• Panel mounting or free floating 

• Recessed metal parts for finger protection 

• Easily cut to the required number of poles 



TS1.5 TS6 


Rated current 15A 40A 

Rated wire size 22-14 AWG 18-8 AWG 

Housing material Polyamide 6.6 

Connections Tubular screw clamp 

with wire protector 

Recommended 

tightening torque 

6.6 in-lb (0.75 Nm) 

Pole spacing 0.32" (0.8 cm) 0.47" (1.2 cm) 

38 terminals/ft 25 terminals/ft 


File #E103245; 


DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

C 

MODEL 

TS1.5/2WP 

TS1.5/3WP 

TS1.5/4WP 

TS1.5/10WP 

TS1.5/12WP 

TS6/12WP 


A 

B 

L 

L W H A B C 

0.53 (1.35) 

0.85 (2.16) 

1.16 (2.95) 

3.04 (7.72) 

3.66 (9.30) 

5.51 (13.99) 


TS1.5/2WP Double row terminal strip, two poles 

TS1.5/3WP Double row terminal strip, three poles 

TS1.5/4WP Double row terminal strip, four poles 

TS1.5/10WP Double row terminal strip, 10 poles 

TS1.5/12WP Double row terminal strip, 12 poles 

TS6/12WP Heavy-duty double row terminal strip, 12 poles 

MPB6 Marking plate, blank (for use with TS6/12WP) 

0.72 

(1.82) 

0.91 

(2.32) 

0.54 

(1.37) 

0.70 

(1.77) 

W 

0.32 

(0.8) 

0.47 

(1.19) 

H 

Ø0.11 

(0.28) 

Ø0.17 

(0.42) 

0.32 

(0.81) 

0.47 

(1.19)


CLASS M BASE-MOUNT FUSE HOLDERS 

6M30 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

6M30 Series Class M Base-Mount Fuse Holders can 

be used for various applications, including control panels, 

lighting, heating, air conditioning, refrigeration 

equipment, and transformer protection. 




Base material High impact thermoplastic, 

257°F (125°C) 

Flammability rating 94V-0 

Clip material Copper alloy, tin plated 

Approvals UL recognized component, File #E35113; 


Connections Quick connects and Sems pressure plate 


Fuse size 0.41" dia (1.03 cm), 1.5"L (3.81 cm) 

(FLM/FLQ Series) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.375 

(0.95) 

1.56 

(3.96) 

0.24 

(0.61) 

0.85 

(2.16) 

1 Pole 

0.42 

(1.06) 

1.60 

(4.06) 

0.75 

(1.91) 

0.42 

(1.06) 

2.35 

(5.97) 

1.50 

(3.81) 

2 Poles 3 Poles 

0.75 

(1.91) 


0.172 x 0.218 Slots 

(0.44 x 0.55) 

0.50 

(1.27) 

1.290 

(3.28) 

3.13 

(7.95) 


6M30A1SPQ Fuse holder, one pole 

6M30A2SPQ Fuse holder, two poles 

6M30A3SPQ Fuse holder, three poles 

CCM630 Fuse holder cover 

KLK-PAK Fuse holder, three poles with three KLK-3 3A fuses 


FLM/FLQ 250/500V fuses 

KLK-3 600V 3A fuses 

665 



666 


FUSES 

FLM, FLQ, KLK, GF, K235, 251 SERIES, HRK 

DESCRIPTION 

FLM and FLQ Series Midget Fuses are slow-acting fuses used 

with 6M30 Series, 6W30 Series, and FB2X Series fuse holders. 

APPLICATION 

• Inductive loads, power supplies, control transformers, 

and control circuits with high inrush currents 


AMP 250V 500V 

RATING MODEL MODEL 

0.5 FLM-0.5 FLQ-0.5 

0.8 FLM-0.8 FLQ-0.8 

1.0 FLM-1 FLQ-1 

1.25 FLM-1.25 FLQ-1.25 

1.5 FLM-1.5 FLQ-1.5 

2.0 FLM-2 FLQ-2 

2.5 FLM-2.5 FLQ-2.5 

3.0 FLM-3 FLQ-3 

4.0 FLM-4 FLQ-4 

5.0 FLM-5 FLQ-5 

7.0 FLM-7 FLQ-7 

10.0 FLM-10 FLQ-10 

15.0 FLM-15 (125 VAC) FLQ-15 

20.0 FLM-20 (32 VAC) FLQ-20 

30.0 FLM-30 (32 VAC) FLQ-30 

AMP RATING 600V MODEL 

3.0A KLK-3 

DESCRIPTION 

GF and K235 Series Glass Fuses are available in slow-blow 

and fast-acting models. 

APPLICATION 

• GF Series for use with Model M10/16SFL fuse holder, 

FB-1 fuse block, and HRK 

• K235 Series for use with M4/8 fuse holder and HRK 


(Order QTY 1 = standard package of 5) Ex. 5 GF-5 = 25 fuses 

AMP RATING VOLTAGE FAST-ACTING FUSE SLOW-BLOW FUSE 

0.5 250 GF-0.5 

GF-0.5S K235-0.5 

1 250 GF-1 

GF-1S 

K235-1 

1.5 250 GF-1.5 

GF-1.5S K235-1.5 

2 250 GF-2 

GF-2S 

K235-2 

2.5 250 GF-2.5 

GF-2.5S K235-2.5 

3 250 GF-3 

GF-3S 

K235-3 

5 

32 

GF-5 

GF-5S K235-5 (125V) 

7 

32 

GF-7 

GF-7S K235-7 (125V) 

10 32 

GF-10 

GF-10S* K235-10 (125V) 

15 32 

GF-15* 

GF-15S* 

HRK In-Line Fuseholder, 32V, 15A, For 1/4" fuses 7/8"-1-1/4" 

* Ceramic tube fuse 

DESCRIPTION 

251 Series PICO Fuses are fast-acting fuses. 

APPLICATION 

• Printed circuit board fuses 


(Sold in packs of 10) (Order QTY 1 = PKG of 10) 

AMP 125V 

RATING MODEL 

1/8 #251.125 

1/2 #251.500 

1 #251001 

2 #251002 

FAST-ACTING 

DESCRIPTION 

The KLK-3 Series fuses are fast-acting fuses. 

APPLICATION 

• Watt meters, watt transducers, and control circuits 

without high inrush currents 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

FLM/FLQ/KLK Series 

1.47 

(3.74) 

1.50 

(3.81) 

GF, K235 Series 

GF = 1.25 (3.17) 

K235 = 0.787 (2.0) 

0.28 

(0.70) 

LF 1A 

Epoxy Coating 

251 Series 

0.41 

(1.03) 

HRK 

1.47 

(3.74) 

GF = 0.25 (0.63) 

K235 = 0.197 (0.5) 

0.095 

(0.238) dia

WIRING DUCT 

T1 SERIES 


DESCRIPTION 

T1 Series Wiring Duct allows for the simplification and 

acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire 

retention, identification of equipment and circuits, and 

wire separation. 

FEATURES 

• Self-extinguishing rigid PVC duct 

• Equipped with cover 

• Attractive white or gray finish 

• UL recognized component, CSA certified 

• Accessories available to minimize panel planning 

and construction time 

INSTALLATION 


MODEL DESCRIPTION Carton Qty** 

T1-1015* Wire duct, 1"W x 1.5"H x 6.56'L (2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover 18 

T1-1030* Wire duct, 1"W x 3"H x 6.56'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 24 

T1-1515* Wire duct, 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.56'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover 20 

T1-1530* Wire duct, 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.56'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 16 

T1-2222* Wire duct, 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.56'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover 12 

T1-2230* Wire duct, 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.56'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 12 

T1-3030* Wire duct, 3"W x 3"H x 6.56'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 

* Add -W for white wire duct or -G for gray wire duct. 

12 

ACCESSORIES Carton Qty** 

CL-2230 Wire retainer, 2.25"W x 3"H (5.72 x 7.62 cm), for T1-2230W wire duct 20 

ZP1 Component mounting insert 100 

ZP2 Wire tie attachment 50 

DM1 Identification tag 50 

SEP-15 Circuit separator, 1.5"H x 6.56'L (3.81 cm x 2m), use with duct 1.5"H (3.8 cm) 32 

SEP-30 Circuit separator, 3"H x 6.56'L (7.62 cm x 2m), use with duct 3"H (7.62 cm) 12 

DINBLOK3 DIN rail mounting block 1 

** Ordered per piece 

667 



668 


WIRING AIDS AND DIN RAIL 

P, DN SERIES, MODELS DIN-3F, BAM-1000 

DESCRIPTION 

The P Series Spiralite is a universal spiral wrapping great for fast and economical 

grouping of wire bundles. 

FEATURES 

• Polyethylene construction 

• Flexible connection between panel and door 

• Strong, yet simple to install and remove 


MODEL FOR WIRE FT (m) 

BUNDLES in (cm) (per carton*) 

P2 1/4 to 1 (0.64 to 2.54) 80 (24) 

P3 3/8 to 2 (0.95 to 5.08) 80 (24) 

P4 1/2 to 3 (1.27 to 7.62) 65 (20) 

* Available in carton quantities only – Order Qty 1 = 1 Carton 

DESCRIPTION 

DN Series Dinosaur Duct is flexible wiring duct for easy addition or removal of wiring. 

FEATURES 

• Adhesive back for applications 

where mounting holes cannot be 

drilled 


MODEL NOMINAL SIZE LENGTH PIECES 

Gray White "W x "H (cm) in (cm) (per carton)* 

DN10AG DN10AW 1/2 x 1/2 (1.27 x 1.27) 19.5 (49.5) 42 

DN20AG DN20AW 3/4 x 3/4 (1.91 x 1.91) 19.5 (49.5) 64 

DN30AG DN30AW 1 x 1 (2.54 x 2.54) 19.5 (49.5) 36 

DN40AG DN40AW 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 (3.81 x 3.81) 19.5 (49.5) 20 

FEATURES 

DIN-3F 

• One-meter length (39.4") 

• Perforated 

• Low profile 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.38 

(3.51) 


BAM-1000 

• One-meter length (39.4") 

• Perforated 

• Easily cut to length 

1.38 

(3.51) 

0.30 

(0.75) 

1.06 

1.23 

(2.69) 

(3.12) 

DIN-3F BAM-1000 

• Accommodates cables in restricted 

spaces 

• Easily cut to desired length using 

scissors or knife 

DESCRIPTION 

Model DIN-3F is great for mounting relays and terminal blocks. It is made from 

steel, treated with galvanic zinc plating. BAM-1000 Transducer Mounting Rail is 

made of extruded aluminum. 

in 

(cm) 

0.39 

(0.99) 

MODEL DESCRIPTION CARTON QTY* 

DIN-3F DIN rail, steel 40 

BAM-1000 DIN rail, aluminum 40 

DINCLIC-FM4 Mounting clips, 4 mm screw size 40 

* Ordered per piece 

BAM-1000 

with DINCLIC-FM4 

Mounting Clips 

DIN-3F 

P Series 

DN Series 

* Ordered per piece

WIRING DUCT 

ABB SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ABB Series Wiring Duct allows for the simplification 

and acceleration of panel-building operations such as 

wire retention, identification of equipment and circuits, 

and wire separation. 

FEATURES 


• UL94VO resistant to abnormal heat and fire up to 

960°F 

• Equipped with cover 

• Attractive white or gray finish 

• Accessories available to minimize panel planning 

and construction time 

• UL File #E125800, IEC 695-2-1 Standard 


MODEL DESCRIPTION Carton Qty* 

Gray duct 

ABB-5043 1"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover 24 

ABB-5083 1"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 14 

ABB-5045 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover 15 

ABB-5085 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 18 

ABB-5067 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover 16 

ABB-5087 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 12 

ABB-5089 3"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 8 

White duct 

ABB-1SL5043A00 1"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover 24 

ABB-1SL5083A00 1"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 14 

ABB-1SL5045A00 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover 15 

ABB-1SL5085A00 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 18 

ABB-1SL5067A00 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover 16 

ABB-1SL5087A00 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 12 

ABB-1SL5089A00 3"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover 8 

ACCESSORIES 

MODEL DESCRIPTION Carton Qty* 

ABB-05240 Plastic label for slot mounting 100 

ABB-5302 Gray cover for 1"W wire duct 30 

ABB-5304 Gray cover for 1.5"W wire duct 20 

ABB-5306 Gray cover for 2.25"W wire duct 12 

ABB-5308 Gray cover for 3"W wire duct 8 

ABB-1SL5302A00 White cover for 1"W wire duct 30 

ABB-1SL5304A00 White cover for 1.5"W wire duct 20 

ABB-1SL5306A00 White cover for 2.25"W wire duct 12 

ABB-1SL5308A00 

* Ordered per piece 

White cover for 3"W wire duct 8 

669 



670 


COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE 

HW-76B, CBL SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The HW-76B and CBL Series offer a general selection 

of cables that can be used for building communication 

and panel wiring. These cables offer a selection that 

covers most applications so that cable can be shipped 

with other Trane products. This provides the convenience 

of quick delivery and the ability to add to a standard 

Trane order. Other sizes and colors may be 

ordered but will not be available from Trane stock. 

FEATURES 

• Plenum and non-plenum communication cables 

• Standard hookup wire with smaller OD makes it 

easy to form 

• Thermostat wire for connecting to any thermostat 

WIRING 


MODEL NUMBER OF NUMBER OF AWG SIZE PLENUM SHIELDING STANDARD* 

NUMBER COLOR CONDUCTORS PAIRS (STRANDING) RATING PACKAGE ft (m) 

HOOK-UP WIRE 

NON-UL UL LISTED 

HW-76B-BK HW-76B-UL-BK Black 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-WT HW-76B-UL-WT White 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-R HW-76B-UL-R Red 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-Y HW-76B-UL-Y Yellow 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-GN HW-76B-UL-GN Green 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-BL HW-76B-UL-BL Blue 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-BN HW-76B-UL-BN Brown 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-PU HW-76B-UL-PU Purple 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

HW-76B-OR HW-76B-UL-OR Orange 1 None 16 (26x30) None None 500 (152) 

TWISTED PAIR 

CBL-TP182SN 2 1 18 (7x26) Non-plenum Shielded 1000 (305) 



CBL-TP182SP 2 1 18 (7x26) Plenum Shielded 1000 (305) 



THERMOSTAT WIRE 

CBL-TW188UN 8 None 18 (Solid) Non-plenum Unshielded 250 (76) 

CBL-TW188UP 8 None 18 (Solid) Plenum Unshielded 250 (76) 

CAT5E ETHERNET 

CBL-ETH248UN 8 4 24 (Solid) Non-plenum Unshielded 1000 (305) 

CBL-ETH248UP 8 4 24 (Solid) Plenum Unshielded 1000 (305) 

LONWORKS 

CBL-LON222UN 2 1 22 (7/30) Non-plenum Unshielded 1000 (305) 

CBL-LON222UP 2 1 22 (7/30) Plenum Unshielded 1000 (305) 

CBL-LON162UP 2 1 16 (19/29) Plenum Unshielded 1000 (305) 

* Sold in standard package quantities only – Order Quantity 1 = Standard Package 

HW-76B CBL-TW 

CBL-TP 

CBL-LON 

CBL-ETH


PANEL RECEPTACLE AND DISCONNECT SWITCH ASSEMBLIES 

MODELS PDK, PRK, 51012218 

DESCRIPTION 

These Panel Receptacle and Disconnect Switch 

Assemblies combine convenience and function. 

Models PRK-S, PRK-FS, and PRK-FLS provide constant 

power to the receptacle along with the ability to 

power down the rest of the panel with the toggle switch. 

Models PRK-FS and PRK-FLS include a fuse holder for 

circuit protection (fuse sold separately). Models PDK 

and PRK are standard single-gang configuration, and 

Models PRK-FLS, PRK-FS, and PRK-S are doublegang 

configuration. The 51012218 offers DIN rail 

mounting and convenient push-on wiring. 

FEATURES 

• Prewired 

• Convenient 


• Always hot receptacle 

• Panel disconnect switch 

• Pilot light option to indicate closed switch 

CAUTION: Receptacle is always hot. 


Power 120 VAC 

Rating 

Receptacles 20A @ 120 VAC 

Switch 20A @ 120 VAC 

Light 25 mA @ 120 VAC 

Fuse 250V 

0.5-15A (ordered separately) 

Wire 12 AWG (UL) MTW 600V 

Dimensions 

PRK, PDK, 51012218 

2.75"W x 4.75"H 

(6.99 x 12.07 cm) 

PRK-S, PRK-FS, PRK-FLS 

4.50"W x 4.50"H 

(11.43 x 11.43 cm) 

51012218 

WIRING 



PDK Panel disconnect switch assembly 

PDK-L Panel disconnect switch assembly with green light 

PRK Panel receptacle assembly 

PRK-S Panel switch and receptacle assembly 

PRK-FS Panel switch and receptacle assembly with fuse holder 

PRK-FLS Panel switch and receptacle assembly with fuse holder and green light 

51012218 DIN mount duplex receptacle with power input terminal block 


GF Series Fuses (fuses ordered separately) 

S 

F 

L 

PRK-S PRK 

PRK-FS PDK 

PRK-FLS 

L N (IN) 

L N (OUT) 

G 

G 

PDK-L 

671 

PANEL &


ALARM HORN 

SC SERIES 


DESCRIPTION 

SC Series Alarm Horns provide an audible tone when an 

electric signal is applied. They can be used in applications 

when an audible alarm is needed to indicate that immediate 

attention is required. 



SC628 6-28 VDC 

SC628A 6-28 VAC/VDC 

SC110 30-120 VAC/VDC 

Tone Continuous 

Mounting Panel, cutout 1.13" (2.87 cm) 

Loudness Medium, 68-80 dB 

Operating current 

SC628 3-18 mA 

SC628A 6-23 mA 

SC110 6-21 mA 

Approvals UL recognized component, File #S1290 

CIRCUIT BREAKER 

QL SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

QL Series Circuit Breakers provide excellent protection 

against overloads and short circuits for electrical circuits and 

small-sized electrical equipment. 

FEATURES 

• Holds 100% rated current independent of ambient 

temperature 

• Resets immediately after tripping 

• Mounts to DIN rail 


Rated voltage 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Rated current 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 20A 

Rated interruption 

capacity 10,000A 

Protection method Hydraulic magnetic technology 

Poles Single pole 

672 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Panel Cutout 

1.13" (2.87) 


MODEL 

SC628 

DESCRIPTION 

Alarm horn, 24 VDC 

SC628A Alarm horn, 24 VAC/VDC 

SC110 Alarm horn, 120 VAC 


1.88 

(4.76) 

Time delay 150% rated current, 8-90 sec; 

200% rated current 4-28 sec 


(9.7 x 1.3 x 6.8 cm) 


Approvals UL 489 listed, CSA, CE, VDE 


QL-(AMPERAGE) Circuit breaker (1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, or 20A) 

1.69 

(4.29)

TOWER LIGHTS 

TWS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The TWS Series Tower Light complete indication system 

enables the stacking of up to five signaling devices. 

Each device has its own set of contacts. Starting with a 

bottom module, up to five devices can be added in any 

combination – continuous and flashing incandescent 

lights, continuous and flashing LED lights, and Xenon 

strobes. Each stack can be capped with a horn. Each 

light comes in a variety of colors, and all lamps are 

replaceable. Several wall- and pedestal-mounting configurations 




Supply voltage 12-24 VAC/VDC, 24-240 VAC 

Power 

Light module 5W 12-120 VAC/VDC (7W 240 VAC) 

Horn module 12V-2.7 mA, 24V-6 mA, 110V-4 mA, 

240V-8.5 mA 


Strobe 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C) 

Flash rates 

Incandescent LED 110 fpm ±20 fpm 

Strobe 65 fpm ±10 fpm (24 VAC/VDC) 

90 fpm ±20 fpm (110/240 VAC) 

Stack with 

TWS-BS 


STEP ONE: Order one bottom module and cap and the appropriate mounting base for each stack. 


TWS-BC Bottom module and cap (required for each stack) 

TWS-BS Base with gasket 

TWS-BP1 Single wall-mount base 

TWS-BP2 Double wall-mount base 

TWS-KIT Base and stem extension 

Example: One TWS-BC and one TWS-KIT 

STEP TWO: Order appropriate modules as required (up to five per stack, one horn per stack). 

CONTINUOUS FLASHING CONTINUOUS FLASHING 

INCANDESCENT INCANDESCENT LED LED STROBE HORN 

Blue TWS-F1* TWS-L1* TWS-FL1* TWS-LL1* TWS-X1* TWS-A* 

Amber TWS-F2* TWS-L2* TWS-FL2* TWS-LL2* TWS-X2* 

Red TWS-F3* TWS-L3* TWS-FL3* TWS-LL3* TWS-X3* 

Green TWS-F4* TWS-L4* TWS-FL4* TWS-LL4* TWS-X4* 

Yellow TWS-F5* TWS-L5* TWS-FL5* TWS-LL5* TWS-X5* 

Clear TWS-F6* TWS-L6* TWS-X6* 

*Select the voltage range of the module: G - 24 VAC, N - 24 VDC, A - 110 VAC 

Stack with 

TWS-BP1 

Two stacks with 

TWS-BP2 

Ratings IP66 

Horns IP20 upward mount 

IP24 downward mount 

Approvals CE, UL listed 

Dimensions 

Base 2.68"H x 2.95" dia (6.8 x 7.5 cm) 

Light 2.72"H x 2.95" dia (6.9 x 7.5 cm) 

Horn 3.11"H x 2.95" dia (7.9 x 7.5 cm) 

Horn loudness Medium, 76-86 dB 

Mounting Wall, two holes; surface, four holes; 

2.13" (5.4 cm) centers 


TWS-BA15D-G, N, A* Replacement lamps 

TWS-LRX2J Replacement strobe (requires solder connection) 

TWS-LED(1-5) -G, N, A* LED replacement lamps 

*Select the voltage range of the module: G-24 VAC, N-24 VDC, A-110 VAC 

Stack with 

TWS-KIT 

673 




STROBE AND HORN COMBINATION 

MODELS 104ST, 89STR, 869STR, 869, 868STR, 868 

DESCRIPTION 

These signal strobes and lights from Edwards ® offer the traditional 

wall-mount strobes in a variety of colors and voltages. 

Model 104ST is a 120 VAC panel-mount strobe. Model 

89STR mounts on a single-gang box and is used as a single, 

indoor, flush-mount strobe. Model 869STR is an indoor, flushmount 

horn and strobe combination. Model 869 is an indoor, 

flush-mount horn only. Model 868STR is an outdoor, surfacemount 

horn and strobe combination. Model 868 is an outdoor, 

surface-mount horn. All of the Edwards ® horns and strobes on 

this page are available in amber, blue, clear, green, and red 

and in 24 VAC/VDC (except Model 104ST) and 120 VAC. 

FEATURES 

• Indoor and outdoor applications 

• Amber, blue, clear, green, and red colors 

• 24 VAC, 24 VDC, and 120 VAC 

• Surface and panel mount 


104ST 

Supply voltage 120 VAC 

Current 120 mA 

Peak candela 300,000 cd 

Strobe tube life 3000 hrs 

Mounting Double-threaded nipple or 1/2" 

conduit mounting 

Rating NEMA 4X 

Approvals UL listed, CSA, CE 

868, 869, 89STR, 868STR, 869STR 

Supply voltage 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC 

-20% to +10% of nominal voltage 

Current 

Horn/Strobe 24 VDC, 22 mA/390 mA 

24 VAC, 72 mA/390 mA 

120 VAC, 24 mA/87 mA 

Average candela 

Clear 150 cd 

Amber 90 cd 

Green 70 cd 

674 



104ST* Panel-mount strobe 

89STR Indoor flush-mount strobe 

869STR Indoor flush-mount electronic horn/strobe 

868STR Outdoor surface-mount electronic horn/strobe 

869 Indoor flush- or panel-mount electronic horn 

868 Outdoor surface-mount electronic horn 

COLOR 

A Amber 

B Blue 

C Clear 

G Green 

R Red 

OUTPUT 

AQ 24 VAC/VDC 

N5 120 VAC 

868STR B AQ Example: 868STR-B-AQ Outdoor surfacemount 

electronic horn with blue 

* Available in 120 VAC only strobe and 24 VAC/VDC 

869 869STR 

868STR 104ST 

Red 21 cd 

Blue 20 cd 

Strobe tube life 1000 hrs 

Operating humidity 

868, 868STR 95% RH @ 86°F (30°C) 

869, 89STR, 869STR 85% RH @ 86°F (30°C) 


868, 868STR -31° to 150°F (-35° to 66°C) 

869, 89STR, 869STR 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) 

Horn decibel level 90 dba @ 10' 

Mounting 

869 4" sq x 1-1/2" electrical box with 

1-1/2" extension ring 

868 Weatherproof surface box supplied 

– no NEMA rating 

Dimensions 

104ST 3-7/8"H x 3-1/4"W (9.8 x 8.3 cm) 

(1/2" conduit) 

89STR 5"H x 3-3/8"W (12.7 x 8.6 cm) 

869STR, 868STR, 

869, 868 5-1/2"H x 5-1/2"W (14 x 14 cm) 

WIRING 

868 STR/869 STR 

Horn/Strobe 

Light Signal 

– 

– 

+ 

+


METAL PLATE MANUAL TIME SWITCHES 

C500 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Tork C500 Series is mechanically spring wound, requiring no electricity to 

operate. The extended shaft metal plate makes the C500 Series ideal for panel 

installation. The models with the “Hold” feature allow switch contacts to remain 

closed for constant ON of the load. 

FEATURES 

• Fits 1-1/2" wall box or deeper 

• Extended shaft requires 3/8" hole 

• Wire strip gauge on back of unit 

• Metal faceplate included 

• Contacts open at end of timed cycle 


Contact ratings SPST 50/60 Hz 

20A inductive/resistive @ 125 VAC 

10A inductive/resistive @ 277 VAC 

7A Tungsten 125 VAC 

1 HP 125 VAC, 2 HP 250 VAC 

WALL-MOUNTED STROBES 

MODELS STB, STB-H 

DESCRIPTION 

Models STB and STB-H Wall-Mounted Strobes provide a bright, eye-catching 

warning light for any alarm application. The Model STB-H features a distinct 

audible signal. 

FEATURES 

• Wall mounted with 4" (10.16 cm) 

square or double-gang box 

• Integral alarm horn (91 dB) 

• 24 VDC powered 

• 15/75 candela strobe intensity 

• Meets requirements of ADA4.28.3 



NO HOLD 

C515M 0-15 min., opens on timeout, no hold 



C502H 0-2 hours, opens on timeout, no hold 




Power 20-31 VDC (24 VDC nominal) 

Strobe frequency 1 Hz 

Strobe intensity 15 (off-center) candela 

75 (on-center) candela 

Rated current 

Strobe 190 mA max 

Horn 37 mA max 


• UL listed 

• Xenon strobe for constant flash rate 

• Strobe and horn powered separately, 

if desired 

• Jumper-selectable, continuous or 

temporal tone 


Humidity 0 to 90% non-condensing 


HOLD 

C515MH 0-30 min., opens on timeout, with hold 

C530MH 0-60 min., opens on timeout, with hold 

C560MH 0-2 hours, opens on timeout, with hold 

C506HH 0-6 hours, opens on timeout, with hold 

C512HH 0-12 hours, opens on timeout, with hold 

STB 

STB-H 

Horn intensity 104 dB max 

Connections Terminal blocks 


Approvals UL listed 


(11.43 x 11.58 x 5.72 cm) 



STB Wall-mounted strobe STB-H Wall-mounted strobe with horn 

675 



676 


EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS 

ST120 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ST120 Series Emergency Operator Stations offer highly 

visible methods to shut down equipment and/or initiate alarms 

during emergency conditions. Contacts are rated 600V @ 10A 

AC and 2.5A DC. 

ST120SL-CS 

PUSH-PULL OPERATION 

ST120SN1BP2-SD 



ST120SL Complete push-pull emergency operator station (contacts not included) 

- Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled Pull to Reset” NEMA 4X and 12 nonmetallic surface mount box 

F Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled “Pull to Reset” NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal flush mount box 

FN1 Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled “Pull to Reset” NEMA 1 all-metal flush mount box 

N1 Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled “Pull to Reset” NEMA 1 all-metal surface mount box 

LEGENDS 

BS EMERGENCY - BOILER SHUT-DOWN 

CS EMERGENCY - CHILLER STOP 

FAN EMERGENCY - EXHAUST FAN 

HS EMERGENCY - HVAC SHUT-DOWN 

PO EMERGENCY - POWER OFF 

RPG EMERGENCY - REFRIGERANT PURGE 

SD EMERGENCY - SHUT DOWN 

SO EMERGENCY - SHUT OFF 

ST EMERGENCY - STOP 

VS EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP 

VSTART EMERGENCY - VENTILATION START 

BREAK-GLASS OPERATION 


ST120 Complete break-glass emergency operator station (contacts not included) 

FN1 NEMA 1 all-metal flush mount box 

FN4 NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal flush mount box 

SN1 NEMA 1 all-metal surface mount box 

SN3R NEMA 3R rainproof all-metal surface mount box 

SN4 NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal surface mount box 

- Red “Break Glass to Release Button” model 

BP1 Red “Break Glass - Push Button” model, momentary operator 

BP2 Red “Break Glass - Push Button” model, maintained operator 

P1 “Break Glass - Operate Switch” two-position selector switch, maintained both positions, short lever 

P3 “Break Glass - Operate Switch” three-position selector switch, maintained all positions, short lever 

LEGENDS - See above 

ST120SLN1-CS 

with PILCLHCOV1 

Note: Many 

types of 

enclosures, 

operators, 

and legends 


Contact Trane 

for special 

emergency 

stations. 


PILNCCB N.C. stackable contact block 

PILNOCB N.O. stackable contact block 

Note: Six contact blocks maximum (2 rows of 3) 

may be used on each operator station. 

PILCLHCOV1 

PILCLHCOV5 

PILSTDGLS 

Clear hinged cover for push-pull model 

Clear hinged cover for break-glass model 

Extra glasses (two) for break-glass model

PLATE-MOUNTED EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS 

WPS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The WPS Series wall-plate emergency 

operator stations allow the mounting of 

an alarm initiation on a single-gang wall 

box or by using a standard handy box. 

These come with brushed stainless 

steel plates for flush mounting and are 

rated NEMA 1 indoor. Many options 

are available for the WPS Series in 

addition to models on our catalog page. 


FEATURES 

• Mounted on brushed stainless 

steel wall plate 

• Order contacts separately for 

wiring flexibility 

• Special configurations are available 

• Special labeling is available 

• Single-gang wall or handy box 

mounting 

• Contacts rated 600V at 10A AC 

and 2.5A DC 


WPS Wall plate, box mounted emergency operator station (order contacts separately) 

BUTTON STYLE 

MO Red momentary 40 mm mushroom 

MP Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled "Pull to Reset" 

TW Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-turn to reset) labeled "Turn to Reset" 

KR Red maintained key release 40 mm mushroom with two keys, key required to reset only 

RP1 Red "Raise Lid - Push Button" padlockable solid lid over momentary flush round push button 

RP2 Red "Raise Lid - Push Button" padlockable solid lid over maintained flush round push button 

CP1 Red "Raise Lid - Push Button" padlockable clear lid over momentary flush round push button 

CP2 Red "Raise Lid - Push Button" padlockable clear lid over maintained flush round push button 

LEGENDS 

CS EMERGENCY - CHILLER STOP 

PO EMERGENCY - POWER OFF 

BS EMERGENCY - BOILER SHUT-DOWN 

HS EMERGENCY - HVAC SHUT-DOWN 

VS EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP 

ST EMERGENCY - STOP 

SD EMERGENCY - SHUT-DOWN 

VSTART EMERGENCY - VENTILATION START 

SO EMERGENCY - SHUT-OFF 

WPS MP VSTART 


Example: WPS-MP-VSTART Wall plate emergency operator station, 

red maintained push-pull button labeled "Ventilation Start" 



PILNCCB N.C. stackable contact block 

PILNOCB N.O. stackable contact block 

Note: Three contact blocks can be used for a depth of 1 5/8". 

Three more can be added for a deph of 2-5/8". 

REMOTE ALARM INDICATION STATION 

MODEL RAD-1 

FEATURES 

• Red alarm LED 

• Alarm horn, continuous-tone or pulsed 

• Alarm horn silence switch 

• Adjustable alarm delay time 

• Adjustable alarm repeat time 

• Relay operates with the alarm horn option 



RAD-1 Remote alarm indication station 

Note: See test and indication section for detailed information. 

WPS-TW-ST 

WPS-KR-SO 

WPS-MP-PO 

WPS-RP1-ST 

677 



PILOT LIGHTS 

L4000 SERIES 

678 


DESCRIPTION 

L4000 Series replaceable incandescent pilot lights with 

associated colored lenses can be mounted to control 

panels to provide instantaneous status indication of 

mechanical equipment such as fans, pumps, compressors, 

or control circuits. 

FEATURES 

• Low cost 

• Noncorrosive black polyester body 

• Nickel-plated brass terminals for positive contact 

• Sturdy polycarbonate lenses 

• Simple installation with nylon hex nut 

• Replaceable incandescent lamps 


Body Black polyester 

Lens Polycarbonate, threaded 

Bezel Polished stainless steel 

Terminals Nickel plated brass 

Mounting 11/16" (1.75 cm) dia hole, supplied with 

polyester hex nut 

Approvals UL recognized component, File #E20325; 

CSA recognized, File #LR13346 

Lamps 12PSB5 24PSB5 120PSB5 28PSB5 

Voltage 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC120 VAC/VDC 28 VAC/VDC 

Amps 0.17 0.073 0.025 0.04 

Avg. life* 12,000 hrs 10,000 hrs 5,000 hrs 5,000 hrs 

* Average life ratings are based on shock-free, vibration-free, transient-free 

continuous operation. Incandescent lamps should not be 

connected across inductive loads, such as a relay coil or solenoid 

without a varistor or transzorb to prevent voltage transients form damaging 

the filament. 

SOCKET 


L4017 Lamp socket 

11/16" dia threaded 

ROUND LENSES 

L4018 Round lens, red 

L4019 Round lens, clear 

L4020 Round lens, amber 

L4021 Round lens, white 

L4022 Round lens, green 

L4023 Round lens, blue 

L4024 Round lens, yellow 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.53 

(1.35) 


SSG1-11/16 

with 

L4017/L4018 


Flat Lens 

0.25 to 0.34 

(0.64 to 0.86) 

thick Panel 

(when hex. nut 

is reversed 

as shown) 

Dome Lens 

0.53 

(1.35) 

LAMPS 


12PSB5 Lamp, 12 VAC/VDC 




5SBF200-OCW-028B LED, 24/28 VAC/VDC 

5SBF200-OCW-120A LED, 120 VAC 

FLAT LENSES 

L4025 Flat lens, red 

L4026 Flat lens, clear 

L4027 Flat lens, amber 

L4028 Flat lens, white 

L4029 Flat lens, green 

L4030 Flat lens, blue 

L4031 Flat lens, yellow 

SSG1-11/16 Wall plate box mount 11/16'' hole 

0.09 

(0.23) 

0.84 

(2.13) 

0.38 

(0.97) 

0.81 

(2.06) 

0.63 

(1.60) 

0 to 0.25 

(0 to 0.64) 

Panel 

Thickness 

0.81 (2.06) 

Across Flats 

11/16-27 

Threads 

0.187 (0.48) 

Terminals

PILOT LIGHTS 

APW SERIES 


DESCRIPTION 

APW Series replaceable incandescent and LED pilot 

lights can be mounted on control panels to provide 

immediate visual status of mechanical equipment such 

as fans, pumps, compressors, or control circuits. 

FEATURES 

• Rugged, oil-tight construction 

• Bezel-threaded lock ring for easy panel installation 

• Incandescent or LED lamps 


• Excellent visibility 

• Multiple voltage input ranges 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.11 

(2.85) 

A 

PILOT LIGHTS A B 

Dome 0.98 (2.49) Ø 0.94 (2.36) 

Flush 0.62 (1.57) Ø 0.94 (2.36) 

B 

Panel 

Cutout 

0.86 

(2.18) 

SSG1-67 


APW199D-R-24 


APW299D-G-24 

APW299D-G-24 

mounted in 

E-1PBG 

Construction 

Lens Acrylic 

Base Nylon 

Bezel Chrome-plated die-cast zinc 

Terminals #6-40 (M3.5) screws 

Mounting 0.86" (2.2 cm) hole 

Panel thickness Panel thickness adjustment ring 

0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm) 

Lamps T3-1/4 miniature bayonet base 

LED 6 VDC, 52 mA Incandescent 6.3V, 1W 

12 VAC/VDC, 26 mA 12V, 1W 

24 VAC/VDC, 13 mA 24V, 1W 

120 VAC, 8 mA 3000 hrs avg life 

1,000,000 hrs avg life 

Protection rating NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 



PILOT LIGHTS 

INCANDESCENT 

LED 

MODEL STYLE 

MODEL STYLE 

APW299 - † - †† Dome 

APW299D - † - †† Dome 

APW199 - † - †† Round flush 

APW199D - † - †† Round flush 

† Lens Color Code: R-Red, G-Green, A-Amber, S-Blue, W-White † Lens Color Code: R-Red, G-Green, A-Amber, S-Blue, W-White, 

†† Lamp Voltage Code: 6-6 VAC/VDC, 12-12 VAC/VDC, 

Y-Yellow 

24-24 VAC/VDC 

†† Lamp Voltage Code: 6-6 VDC, 12-12 VAC/VDC, 24-24 VAC/VDC, 

120-120 VAC 

INCANDESCENT 

REPLACEMENT LAMPS 

LED 

MODEL VOLTAGE MODEL VOLTAGE COLOR 

IS-6 6.3V LSTD-6† 6 VDC G - Green 

IS-12 12V LSTD-1† 12 VAC/VDC R - Red A - Amber 

IS-24 24V LSTD-2† 24 VAC/VDC W - White, Y - Yellow, 

LSTD-H2† 120 VAC S - Blue 


E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure E-3PBG* Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure 

E-2PBG* Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure E-4PBG* Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure 

SSG1-67 Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole 

*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement. 

679 




PILOT LIGHTS AND MINIATURE SWITCHES 

A SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

A Series Pilot Lights and illuminated push buttons are low-cost, 

lighted operator devices. 

FEATURES 

• Attractive housing with bright LED indication 

• Smaller 5/8'' (1.59 cm) cutout required 

• Long-lasting LED lamps, 24 VAC/VDC ±5% 

• One Amp contacts, 24/120V 

• Oil-tight (IP65 when mounted in enclosure) 

• SPDT switches 

• Momentary or maintained switches 

• Illuminated push buttons ideal for push-to-test applications 

DESCRIPTION 

A Series Selector Switches and non-illuminated push buttons 

are low-cost operator devices. 

FEATURES 

• Smaller 5/8'' (1.59 cm) cutout required 

• Oil-tight (IP65 when mounted in enclosure) 

• One-amp contacts, 24/120V 

• SPDT switches 

• Momentary and maintained push buttons 

• Maintained two- and three-position selector switch 

680 


NON-ILLUMINATED PUSH BUTTONS 


AB6M Round non-illuminated push button 

M Momentary operation 

A Maintained operation 

1P SPDT contacts 

2P DPDT contacts 

BUTTON COLOR B (black), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow) 

AB6M M 1P B 

Example: AB6M-M1P-B Round non-illuminated push button, 

momentary, SPDT contacts, black button 

ILLUMINATED PUSH BUTTONS 


AL6M Round illuminated push button, 24 VAC/VDC 

M Momentary operation 

A Maintained operation 

14P SPDT contacts 

24P DPDT contacts 

BUTTON COLOR A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow) 

AL6M M 14P A 

Example: AL6M-M14P-A Round illuminated push button, 

momentary, SPDT contacts, amber lens 

PILOT LIGHTS 

AL6M-P4P Round pilot light, 24 VAC/VDC 

LENS COLOR A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow) 

AL6M-P4P A 

Example: AL6MP4P-A Round pilot light, amber lens 

SELECTOR SWITCHES 

AS6M Round selector switch 

2Y2P Two-position, maintained operation 

3Y2P Three-position, maintained operation 

2KT2PA Two-position keylock, removeable any position 

AS6M 2Y2P 

Example: AL6M-2Y2P Two-position round selector switch, maintained operation 

SSG1-5/8 

AB6M-M1P 


SSG1-5/8 Wall plate box mount 5/8" hole 

AS6M-2Y2P 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

WIRING 

0.32 

(0.81) 

NC 

NO 

COM 

AS6M-3Y2P 

0.11 

(0.28) 

(+) (-) 

Lamp Lamp 

Illuminated Push Buttons 

and Pilot Lights 

0.87 

(2.2) 

1.18 

(3.00) 

AL6M-M14P-S 

NC 

NO 

COM 

0.35 

(0.89) 

(DPDT for three-position 

switch only) 

Non-Illuminated Push Buttons 

and Selector Switches


TOGGLE SWITCHES 

23F, 21F, 41F SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

23F, 21F, and 41F Series Toggle Switches are generalpurpose 

toggle switches for pilot duty control of electric 

equipment such as fans, pumps, and compressors or control 

of electric control circuits. 

FEATURES 

• Non-corrosive, phenolic and metal housing 

• Durable, slow make/slow break, contact 

mechanism 

• Simple installation requires single hole 

• Conveniently installed with one hexagon locknut 

and one knurled facenut (furnished) 

• Compression spring provides positive contact 

pressure in closed position 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

SWITCH A 

Single Pole 

Double Pole 

Three Pole 

Four Pole 

Mounting Hole 

0.5" (1.27) diameter 

0.687 (1.74) 

0.687 (1.74) 

0.687 (1.74) 

0.687 (1.74) 

B 

0.465 (1.18) 

0.465 (1.18) 

0.465 (1.18) 

0.465 (1.18) 

H 

W 

A 

D 

W 

B 

H 

Typical Switch 

0.67 (1.70) 

0.778 (1.98) 

0.803 (2.04) 

1.218 (3.09) 

1.134 (2.88) 

1.308 (3.32) 

1.308 (3.32) 

1.44 (3.65) 

D 

0.634 (1.61) 

0.75 (1.91) 

1.088 (2.76) 

1.34 (3.41) 

SSG1-1/2 


41F563 


Contacts rated 10A @ 250 VAC 

15A @ 125 VAC 

3/4, 120-240 VAC 

Housing Phenolic, metal 

Metal parts Bright nickel-plated brass 

Mounting Single hole type, 0.5" dia (1.27 cm) 

Terminals Screw 


File #E7560; 



23F341 Toggle switch SPST on-off 21F905 Toggle switch 3PST on-off 

23F345 Toggle switch SPDT on-on 21F911 Toggle switch 3PDT on-on 

23F343 Toggle switch SPDT on-off-on 21F908 Toggle switch 3PDT on-off-on 

23F347 Toggle switch DPST on-off 41F562 Toggle switch 4PST on-off 

23F357 Toggle switch DPDT on-on 41F564 Toggle switch 4PDT on-on 

23F349 Toggle switch DPDT on-off-on 41F563 Toggle switch 4PDT on-off-on 

LEGEND PLATES 


SYZE-074 On/Off plate 

SYZE-075 Summer/Winter plate 

SYZE-212 On/Off/Auto plate 

SYZE-255 Summer/Off/Winter plate 


SSG1 - 1/2 Wall plate box mount 1/2" hole 

SYZE-074 

23F341 

681 




GENERAL-PURPOSE SELECTOR SWITCHES 

ASW SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ASW Series General-Purpose Selector Switches are 

for pilot duty control of electrical equipment such as 

fans, pumps, compressors, or control circuits. 

FEATURES 


• Snap-fit blocks with N.O. and N.C. contacts 

• Self-cleaning silver contacts 

• Durable nylon operator base 

• Optional key or lever styles available 


Contact rating 10A, 600 VAC/VDC 

5 mA, 3 VAC/VDC min 

Contact resistance 50 mΩ max (initial value) 

Rated insulation 

voltage 600V 

Mechanical life 500,000 min operations 

Electrical life 500,000 min operations 


Contact material Silver 


Panel thickness Panel thickness adjustment ring, 

0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm) 




682 

Contact 

Configuration 

Contact # 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

1.5 

(3.81) 


2 Blocks 

1.92 

(4.84) 

4 Blocks 

2.7 

(6.86) 

Knob Style Selector Switch 

Knob Style 

0.98 

(2.5) 

0.94 

(2.39) 

TWO-POSITION MAINTAINED 

SELECTOR SWITCHES 

THREE-POSITION MAINTAINED ADDITIONAL CONTACT BLOCKS 

Contact 

Configuration 

ACSNO-244-YB-C2008 

CAM SWITCHES 

4-position, contact made each position only, 45° (1.2", 3.05 cm mounting hole) 

ACSNO-354-YB-C3016 5-position, contact made each position only, 45° (1.2", 3.05 cm mounting hole) 

Contact # 

SSG1-67 

ASW320 

mounted in 

E-1PBG 

Model 

Operator 

Position 

L R 

Model 

Operator 

Position 

L C R 

HW-C10 Normally open 

contact 

ASW210 

1 N.O. 

ASW2K10 (Key) 

1 O X 

ASW320 

2 N.O. 

ASW3K20 (Key) 

1 

2 

X 

O 

O 

O 

O 

X 

HW-C01 Normally close 

contact 

ASW201-116 1 N.C. 1 

1 N.O. 1 

ASW211 

1 N.C. 2 

ASW2K11 (Key) 

X 

X 

O 

O 

O 

X 

2 N.O. 1 

ASW321-255 

1 N.C. 

2 

3 

1 

2 N.O. 2 

ASW322 

2 N.C. 3 

ASW3K22 (Key) 4 

X 

O 

O 

X 

O 

O 

X 

O 

X 

O 

O 

O 

X 

X 

O 

O 

X 

O 

X 

X 

O 

TW-D Dummy block 

(needed when 

only one HW-C10 

or HW-C01 is used) 

NWAL-212 Legend Plate- 

Off-On 

NWAL-317 Legend Plate- 

Hand-Off-Auto 

Note: Key is removeable in any position. 

X = Contacts closed O = Contacts open 

X X = Contacts remain closed when switch is moved between these two positions. 

Panel 

Cutout 

0.14 

(0.35)* 

0.878 

(2.23) 

* Required for legend plates 

or anti-rotation ring 

Call Trane for selector switches with key or lever operators, other contact arrangements, and other legend plates. 


E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure 

E-2PBG* Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure 

E-3PBG* Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure 

E-4PBG* Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure 



ACSNO-354-YB- 

C3016


PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES 

ABW, AOW SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

ABW and AOW Series Push-Button Switches are for 

manual control of fans, pumps, compressors, or control 

circuits. 

FEATURES 

• Flush, extended, or mushroom style available 

• Snap-fit blocks with N.O. and N.C. contacts 

• Self-cleaning silver contacts 



Contact rating 10A, 600 VAC/VDC 

5 mA, 3 VAC/VDC min 

Contact resistance 50m max (initial value) 

Insulation resistance 100m min between 

live and dead parts 

Contact material Silver 

Mechanical life 500,000 min operations 

Electrical life 500,000 min operations 



Panel thickness Panel thickness adjustment 

ring, 0.04" to 0.24" 

(0.10 to 0.61 cm) 




in 

(cm) 

SSG1-67 

DIMENSIONS 

0.78 

(2.00) 


Extended 

2 Blocks: 

1.89 

(4.85) 

4 Blocks: 

2.67 

(6.85) 


ABW Momentary action push-button switch 

AOW Maintained action push-button switch 

1 Flush (includes colored buttons of red, green, and black) 

2 Extended (specify color below, red standard) 

4 Mushroom (specify color below, red standard) 

# of N.O. contacts, maximum of 2 

# of N.C. contacts, maximum of 2 

Button color for extended and mushroom models 

B = Black, G = Green, R = Red 

ABW 1 0 1 Example: ABW101 Momentary flush push button with 

one N.C. contact 

AOW411R 

mounted in 

E-1PBG 

Mushroom 

Panel Thickness 

0.04 to 0.24 

(0.10 to 0.60) 

A 

B 

Flush 

Panel 

Cutout 

0.86 

(2.20) 

PUSHBUTTONS A B 

Flush 0.507 (1.30) Ø 0.936 (2.40) 

Extended 0.741 (1.90) Ø 0.936 (2.40) 


HW-C10 Normally open contact E-2PBG* Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button 

HW-C01 Normally closed contact enclosure 

TW-D Dummy block (needed when only 1 E-3PBG* Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button 

HW-C10 or HW-C01 is used) enclosure 

NWAR-27 Emergency stop label 2.75" (6.99 cm) round E-4PBG* Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button 

E-1PBG One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure enclosure 



683 




CABLE HANGERS 

CAT SERIES “J” HOOKS, MODEL 4BRT BRIDLE RINGS 

DESCRIPTION 

The CAT Series "J" Hooks and Model 4BRT Bridle 

Rings make a cumbersome job easy. Each hook or ring 

can be attached using a beam clamp. 

FEATURES 

• Assorted sizes 

• Easy mounting 

• Hammer-on clips 

• Clamp-type clips 

684 

CAT12 


MODEL DESCRIPTION STANDARD PKG* 

CAT12 CableCat 3/4" loop, supports 16 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable 50 

CAT21 CableCat 1-5/16" loop, supports 50 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable 80 

CAT32 CableCat 2" loop, supports 80 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable 60 

CAT64 CableCat 4" loop, supports 300 four-pair UTP or two-strand fiber optic cable 25 

CAT21-4Z34 CableCat CAT21 with 4Z34 multifunction drop-wire clip 60 

CAT32-4Z34 CableCat CAT32 with 4Z34 multifunction drop-wire clip 40 

4Z34 

4BRT20 

4BRT32 

4BRT64 

CableCat multifunction drop-wire clip 

1/4"-20 threaded 1-1/4" (3.2 cm) bridle ring 

1/4"-20 threaded 2" (5.1 cm) bridle ring 

1/4"-20 threaded 4" (10.2 cm) bridle ring } 

100 

100 

100 

50 

BC Beam clamp up through 1/2" flanges, accepts 1/4" threaded rod 100 

BC200 Beam clamp up through 5/8" flanges, accepts 1/4" threaded rod 50 

2FMP28 Multipurpose hammer-on clip, accepts 1/4" threaded rod 100 

* Sold in package qtys only – Order qty 1 = 1 package 

used with either a BC, 

BC200, or 2FMP28 

ENGRAVED PHENOLIC LABELS 

LABELS 

DESCRIPTION 

Our standard label is a black phenolic label with engraved 

white lettering. These attractive labels come in several sizes 

and are shipped with heavy-duty double-sided tape for extra 

holding power. Use the guidelines below to order. All letters 

will be upper case unless otherwise requested. 

BC 


2FMP28 BC200 

4BRT20 

SIZES NUMBER # OF CHARACTERS LETTER BACKGROUND 

in (cm) LINES* PER LINE SIZE in (mm) 

1/2 x 1 (1.3 x 2.5) 1 6 1/8 (3.2) Black background with white letters 

1/2 x 1 (1.3 x 2.5) 1 4 3/16 (4.8) White background with black letters 

3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 2 10 1/8 (3.2) Red background with white letters 

3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 2 7 3/16 (4.8) White background with red letters 

3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 1 7 3/16 (4.8) Blue background with white letters 

3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 1 5 1/4 (6.4) White background with blue letters 

3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 2 16 3/16 (4.8) 

3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 1 16 3/16 (4.8) 

3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 1 12 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 2 8 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 1 8 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 1 5 3/8 (9.5) 

1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 2 12 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 12 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 8 3/8 (9.5) 

1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 3 12 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 2 17 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 1 17 1/4 (6.4) 

1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 1 11 3/8 (9.5) 

1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 3 17 1/4 (6.4) 

* Each line of text must be indicated by a separate set of quotation marks. 

OPTIONS 

Chain hole 

Chain hole with chain 

2 Screw holes 

Toggle switch hole 

Push button/selector 

switch/pilot light hole 

Other sized labels 

CAT21 

Example: Order a 1" x 2" label, 1/4" lettering, black background with white lettering, 2 screw holes, "BEST" "SERVICE" 

4Z34


MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS 

COMPRESSION TERMINALS AND SPLICES 

DESCRIPTION 

These miscellaneous electrical products are used for connecting, 

securing, and terminating all types of electrical wiring 

applications. Each terminal is an assembly of a bare terminal 

fitted with a funneled copper gripping sleeve and a tightly fitted 

insulation sleeve made of nylon. 

FEATURES 

• Premium-grade, nylon-insulated terminals 

• Excellent quality, reliability, and performance 

• Low cost 

RINGS (Pkg. 100) 

Wire Stud Width Color Nylon-Insulated 

Size in (cm) Model 

22-18 # 8-0.178" 0.268 (0.68) Red NR2218-8N 

16-14 # 8-0.178" 0.260 (0.66) Blue NR1614-8N 

14-12 # 8-0.178" 0.315 (0.80) Yellow NR1412-8N 

BLOCK SPADES (Pkg. 100) 

Wire Stud Width Color Nylon-Insulated 

Size in (cm) Model 

22-18 # 4-0.119" 0.228 (0.58) Red NBS2218-4 

22-18 # 8-0.178" 0.276 (0.70) Red NBS2218-8N 

16-14 # 4-0.119" 0.232 (0.59) Blue NBS1614-4 

14-12 # 8-0.178" 0.315 (0.80) Yellow NBS1412-8 

FEMALE DISCONNECTS (Pkg. 100) 

Wire Mating Tab Color Nylon-Insulated 

Size "Thick x "Width (cm) Model 

22-18 0.020 x 0.110 (0.05 x 0.28) Red NFD2218-110 

22-18 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) Red NFD2218-187 

22-18 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) Red NFD2218-250 

16-14 0.020 x 0.110 (0.05 x 0.28) Blue NFD1614-110 

16-14 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) Blue NFD1614-187 

16-14 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Blue NFD1614-250 

14-12 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Yellow NFD1412-250 

12-10 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Yellow NFD1210-250 

PIGGYBACK DISCONNECTS (Pkg. 50) 

Wire Mating Tab Color Nylon-Insulated 

Size "Thick x "Width (cm) Model 

22-18 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Red NPBFD2218-250 

16-14 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Blue NPBFD1614-250 

12-10 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Yellow NPBFD1210-250 

FULLY INSULATED FEMALE DISCONNECTS (Pkg. 50) 

Wire "Thick x "Width Color Nylon-Insulated 

Size (cm) Model 

22-18 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.49) Red FIFD2218-187 

22-18 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Red FIFD2218-250 

16-14 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) Blue FIFD1614-187 

16-14 0.032 x 0.250 (0.08 x 0.64) Blue FIFD1614-250 

Splice Ring Piggyback 

Disconnect 

Ring 

Block Spade 

Female Disconnect 

Piggyback Disconnect 

Fully Insulated Female Disconnect 

BUTT SPLICES (Pkg. 100) 

Butt Splice 


Sold in Package Quantities Only Order Quantity 1 = 1 Package 

Female 

Disconnect 

Wire Color Nylon-Insulated 

Size Model 

22-18 Red NBS-2218 

16-14 Blue NBS-1614 

12-10 Yellow NBS-1210 

685 



686 


MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS 

WIRE NUTS, TIES, ACCESSORIES 

WALL-NUT PUSHWIRE CONNECTORS 

Wire Size 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

12-16 str, 12-18 sol 

14-10 str, 14-10 sol 

Wall-nut Carrier DIN/Surface Mtd. 

# of Conductors 

2 

4 

6 

8 

2 

4 

6 

8 

3 

Color 

Yellow 

Orange 

Violet 

Dark Gray 

Green 

Green 

Green 

Green 

Red 

Orange 

MOISTURE-RESISTANT BUTT SPLICES (Pkg. 100) 

Wire Two- or Three-Wire 

Size Model 

19-26 UR 

WATERPROOF WIRE NUTS (Pkg. 25) 

Wire Size Color Volts Model 

22-14 Blue/Orange 600 62125 

WIRE NUTS (Pkg. 100) 

Wire Size I.D. Color Volts Model 

22-14 0.188 Blue 300 WN72B 

22-14 0.203 Orange 600 WN73O 

18-12 0.235 Yellow 600 WN74Y 

18-10 0.328 Red 600 WN76R 

14-8 0.453 Gray 600 WN78G 

CABLE TIES (Pkg. 100) 

"Length (cm) "Width (cm) Type Model 

4.0 (10.16) 0.10 (0.25) Miniature T400N 

7.0 (17.78) 0.19 (0.48) Standard T744N 

7.5 (19.05) 0.19 (0.48) Plenum T744PR 

14.0 (35.56) 0.19 (0.48) Standard T1447N 

14.0 (35.56) 0.19 (0.48) Plenum T1447PR 

MOUNTING TIES (Pkg. 50) 

"Length (cm) "Width (cm) Stud Model 

6.5 (16.51) 0.14 (0.36) # 8-0.178" MT650-8N 

8.0 (20.32) 0.19 (0.48) # 10-0.198" MT800-10N 

IDENTIFICATION TIES (Write-On/Pkg. 50) 

"Length (cm) "Width (cm) Model 

4.0 (10.16) 0.10 (0.25) IT400 

7.5 (19.05) 0.19 (0.48) IT750 

MOUNTING PLATFORMS (Pkg. 50) w/ adhesive backing 

"W x "L (cm) "Thick (cm) Type Model 

0.75 x 0.75 (1.91 x 1.91) 3/16 (0.48) 4-Way Miniature ABMM-4A 

1.1 x 1.1 (2.79 x 2.79) 5/16 (0.79) 4-Way Standard ABM-4A 

HEAVY-DUTY CABLE CLAMPS (Pkg. 25) 

Model 

773-162 

773-164 

773-166 

773-168 

773-112 

773-114 

773-116 

773-118 

773-173 

773-332 

Pkg Qty 

100 

100 

50 

50 

100 

100 

50 

50 

50 

50 

CLAMP-STYLE WIRE NUT 

Mounting 

Platform 

Clamp-style 

Wire Size # of Conductors Color Model Pkg Qty 

Wire Nut 

28-12 str or sol 3 Gray/Orange 222-413 50 

28-12 str or sol 5 Gray/Orange 222-415 50 

I.D. "Width (cm) "Thick (cm) Hole"Dia (cm) Nylon Model 

5/8 1/2 (1.27) 0.060 (0.15) 0.203 (0.52) CC-0.625N 

3/4 1/2 (1.27) 0.060 (0.15) 0.203 (0.52) CC-0.75N 

7/8 1/2 (1.27) 0.060 (0.15) 0.203 (0.52) CC-0.875N 

1 1/2 (1.27) 0.060 (0.15) 0.203 (0.52) CC-1N 

1-1/4 1/2 (1.27) 0.060 (0.15) 0.203 (0.52) CC-1.25N 

1-1/2 1/2 (1.27) 0.060 (0.15) 0.203 (0.52) CC-1.5N 

Wall Nut 

Tie Wraps 

Moisture-Resistant Butt Splice 

Waterproof Wire Nut 

Wall Nut Carrier 

Cable Tie 

Mounting Tie 

Identification Tie 

Wall Nut 

Carrier 

Wire Nut 

Mounting Platform Heavy-Duty Cable Clamp 


Sold in Package Quantities Only 

Order Quantity 1 = 1 Package 

• 

Wall Nut 

Clamp Style 

Wire Nut


PNEUMATIC TUBING 

T-100 SERIES, MODEL T-141 

DESCRIPTION 

T-100 Series Pneumatic Tubing is a superior quality, 

flame-retardant, stress-crack resistant, exclusively compounded 

polyethylene tubing that provides long-term, 

reliable performance. This tubing is suitable for installation 

in air ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for 

environmental air. 

The Model T-141 is made of extremely flexible, clear 

blue polyurethane. It is not FR rated and is used only for 

inside panels. It is kink resistant, has an excellent memory, 

and features high compression strength and outstanding 

abrasive resistance. 

FEATURES (T100 Series) 

• Flexible and lightweight 

• Flame retardant 

• High stress-crack resistance 

• Easy to handle and install 

• Resistant to ultraviolet breakdown 

• Meets or exceeds every requirement for flameretardant 

polyethylene tubing set by the pneumatic 

controls industry 

• Numbering system for multitube identification 

• Available with colored stripes 

DIMENSIONS – T100 SERIES 

NOMINAL WEIGHT STD. COIL 

Size OD ID Wall /COIL LENGTH ft (m) 

5/32" OD 0.156" 0.096" 0.030" 3.0# 500 (152) 

1/4" OD 0.250" 0.170" 0.040" 3.3# 250 (76.2) 

3/8" OD 0.375" 0.250" 0.062" 7.6# 250 (76.2) 

1/2" OD 0.500" 0.375" 0.062" 10.6# 250 (76.2) 

5/32" Twintube 0.156" ea 0.096" ea 0.030" ea 6.0# 500 (152) 

1/4" Twintube 0.250" ea 0.170" ea 0.040" ea 14.3# 500 (152) 


ASTM Test Typical Value 

Melt index D-1238 0.6 ± 0.1 dg/min 

Density D-792 1.1± 0.005 g/cc 

Tensile strength 

ultimate (20 in/min.) D-638 >2000 psig (13,790 kPa) 

Elongation 

ultimate (20 in/min.) D-638 600% 

Shore A hardness D-1700 97 ±3 

Shore D hardness D-1700 45 ±3 

Water absorption D-576 5 max 

Bending modulus D-747 3000 psig ±5000 

Color Black or striped 

Burst pressure D-1599 5/32" >500 psig 

(3,448 kPa) 

1/4" >500 psig (3,448 kPa) 

3/8" >500 psig (3,448 kPa) 

1/2" >350 psig (2,413 kPa) 

T-100 

T-141 

DIMENSIONS – T-141 

NOMINAL WEIGHT STD COIL 

Size OD ID Wall /COIL LENGTH 

1/4" 0.250" 0.159" 0.045" 7.15# 250' 

Polyurethane (76.2m) 

APPROXIMATE INSTANTANEOUS BURST PRESSURE psig (kPa) 

75°F 100°F 125°F 150°F Vacuum Rating 

(24°C) (38°C) (52°C) (66°C) "Hg @ 75° 

320 250 180 160 28 

(2206) (1724) (1241) (1103) (193) 

ASTM Test Typical Value 

Stress-crack 

resistance D-1693 V 200 hrs 

Flammability UL 94 V-2 

Polyethylene 

UL 910 Classified 

(NFPA 90A) 

classification D-1248 Type I, Class B 

or C, Category 4 

Flame propagation 

Smoke density 

UL 1820 0.5 

Peak optical density UL 1820 0.5 

Max optical density UL 1820 0.15 

687 




PNEUMATIC TUBING 

T-100 SERIES, MODEL T-141 

PERFORMANCE CHART – POLYETHYLENE TUBING 

688 

Burst Pressure (psig/kPa) 

600 

(4137) 

500 

(3448) 

400 

(2758) 

300 

(2069) 

200 

(1379) 

100 

(690) 

INSTANTANEOUS BURST PRESSURE VS TEMPERATURE 

1/2" OD x 0.062" 

75° 

(24°) 

100° 

(38°) 

1/4" OD x 0.040" 

3/8" OD x 0.062" 

125° 

(52°) 

Temperature °F (°C) 

150° 

(66°) 

175° 

(79°) 

CAUTION: The above chart indicates short term burst pressures (not long term operating pressures) as 

indicated in laboratory testing. No representations of operating burst pressures are expressed or implied. 


MODEL DESCRIPTION STANDARD COIL LENGTH ft (m) 

ORDER QTY 1 = 1 COIL 

T-100 5/32" OD black 500 (152) 

T-100-2 5/32" OD twintube black 500 (152) 

T-101 1/4" OD black 250 (76.2) 

T-101-2 1/4" OD twintube black 250 (76.2) 

T-110 3/8" OD black 250 (76.2) 

T-130 1/2" OD black 250 (76.2) 

T-101-B 1/4" OD black with blue stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-101-G 1/4" OD black with green stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-101-O 1/4" OD black with orange stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-101-R 1/4" OD black with red stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-101-V 1/4" OD black with violet stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-101-W 1/4" OD black with white stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-101-Y 1/4" OD black with yellow stripe 250 (76.2) 

T-141 1/4" OD clear blue polyurethane 250 (76.2)


PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY BARB FITTINGS 

B SERIES 

SOLDER ADAPTERS 

Model Cross Reference Description (in) Std. Pack 

Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell 

B-121 - - - - 3/16 ID 1/4 OD 100 

to 5/32 B 

B-122 - - - 1610B 3/16 ID 1/4 OD 100 

to 1/4 B 

B-123 21-375 F-100-12 141-425 1586B 1/4 ID to 1/4 B 100 

MALE ADAPTERS 



B-130 - - - - 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 100 

B-131-10 21-784 F-100-21 141-249 - 1/4 or 5/32 100 

x 1/8 MPT 

B-132 20-885 F-100-11 141-202 1590BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 100 

B-133 21-005 F-100-35 141-354 1591BT 3/8 x 1/8 MPT 100 

B-134 - - 141-209 1592BT 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 50 

FEMALE ADAPTERS 



B-135 20-925 - 141-211 1594B 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 100 

COMPRESSION ADAPTERS 



B-136 20-892 - - - 3/16 x 1/4 Comp 100 

B-137 20-893 F -200-33 141-233 1635B 1/4 x 1/4 Comp 50 

BULKHEAD BARBS 



B-138 20-894 - - 1619B 1/4 B x 1/4 Comp 25 

B-139 21-377 - - - 3/8 B x 3/8 Comp 25 

B-142 20-874 - - - 1/4 B x 1/4 B 50 

COUPLINGS 



B-260 20-875 F-300-31 141-247 1628B 5/32 x 5/32 50 

B-261 21-064 F-300-30 141-246 1606B 1/4 x 5/32 50 

B-262 - - - - 1/4 x 3/16 Solder 100 

B-262-1 21-611 - - - 1/4 x 3/16 B 100 

B-263 20-886 F-300-26 141-201 1607B 1/4 x 1/4 50 

B-264 20-887 F-300-27 141-216 1608B 3/8 x 3/8 50 

B-265 20-890 F-300-21 141-217 1610B 3/8 x 1/4 50 

B-266 20-891 F-300-19 141-219 1611B 1/2 x 3/8 25 

B-267 20-888 F-300-36 141-218 1617B 1/2 x 1/2 25 

MALE BRANCH TEES 

Model Cross Reference Description Std. Pack 

Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top 

B-371 20-897 F-700-79 141-220 1600 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 25 

B-372 20-905 F-700-63 - 1609BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/4 100 

FEMALE BRANCH TEE 

Model Cross Reference Description Std. Pack 

Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top 

B-373 20-904 F-700-76 141-227 1614B 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 100 

B-373-1 --- --- --- --- 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT Drop Ear 10 

Solder Adapter 

Male Adapter 

Female Adapter 

Compression 

Adapter 

Bulkhead Barb 

Coupling 

Male Branch Tees 

Female Branch Tees 

689 




PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY BARB FITTINGS 

B SERIES, R-3710, F-1000 SERIES 

BARB TEES 

Model Cross Reference Description Std. 

Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top Pack 

B-374 20-876 F-700-83 141-245 1637B 5/32 x 5/32 x 5/32 100 

B-375 21-785 F-700-84 - 1630B 1/4 x 1/4 x 5/32 100 

B-376 20-898 F-700-73 141-203 1612B 1/4 x1/4 x1/4 100 

B-377 20-899 F-700-74 141-214 1615B 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 100 

B-378 20-900 F-700-75 141-204 1613B 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 100 

B-379 20-901 F-700-67 141-223 1616B 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 50 

B-380 20-902 F-700-66 141-222 1618B 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 50 

B-381 20-903 F-700-65 141-221 1620B 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 50 

GAUGE TEE 



B-387 20-906 F-700-62 141-213 1604BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 50 

x 1/8 FPT 

BARB PLUGS 



F-1000-323 - - - - 5/32 and 1/4 Plug 100 

B-391 20-910 - 141-237 1640 1/4 Plug 50 

B-392 21-378 F-1000-241 141-238 - 3/8 Plug 50 

B-393 21-379 - - - 1/2 Plug 100 

BARB TO MPT 90° ELL 



B-570 - - 141-242 - 5/32 x 1/8 MPT 100 

B-571 20-895 F-500-41 141-200 1595BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 100 

BARB TO FPT 90° ELL 



B-572 20-896 F-500-42 141-208 1589B 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 100 

BARB 90° ELL 



B-569 - - - - 3/16 x 1/4 10 

B-573 20-908 F-500-39 141-230 1642 1/4 x 1/4 100 

B-574 20-909 F-500-38 141-231 1598B 3/8 x 3/8 100 

B-575 - F-500-37 141-232 1599B 1/2 x 1/2 50 

INLINE RESTRICTORS 

Model Number Description 

R-3710-2007 Orifice 0.007", 1/4" x 1/4" barbs, aqua-colored thermoplastic 

R-3710-2005 Orifice 0.005", 1/4" x 1/4" barbs, red-colored thermoplastic 

R-3710-2010 Adjustable restrictor, 5/32" x 5/32", brass 

690 


Sold in package quantities only. 

Order quantity 1 = 1 package. 

Barb Tee 

Gauge Tee 

Barb Plug 

Barb to MPT 90° Ell 

Barb to FPT 90° Ell 

Barb 90° Ell 

Inline Restrictors


PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY COMPRESSION FITTINGS 

C SERIES 

COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO MPT 



C-132 - F-200-2 044-126 1433T 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 50 

C-133 20-930 F-200-3 044-128 1435T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 50 

C-134 20-931 F-1000-36 044-129 1436T 1/4 x 1/4 MPT 50 

C-135 20-933 F-200-4 044-135 1442T 3/8 x 1/8 MPT 25 

C-136 20-934 F-200-5 044-137 1443T 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 25 

C-137 20-935 F-200-6 044-138 1444T 3/8 x 3/8 MPT 25 

C-138 - F-200-7 - 1446T 1/2 x 1/4 MPT 10 

C-139 - F-200-8 - 1447T 1/2 x 3/8 MPT 25 

C-140 - F-200-9 - 1448T 1/2 x 1/2 MPT 25 

COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO FPT 



C-146 20-942 - - 1459 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 25 

C-147 20-943 - - 1460 1/4 x 1/4 FPT 10 

C-149 - - - 1465 3/8 x 1/4 FPT 10 

COMPRESSION LINE VALVES 



C-151 20-914 F-1000-93 - 2135 1/4 10 

C-152 20-919 F-1000-94 - 2136 3/8 10 

COMPRESSION UNIONS 



C-231 - F-800-1 - 1420 3/16 x 3/16 25 

C-232 - F-800-2 - - 1/4 x 3/16 10 

C-233 20-939 F-800-3 - 1421 1/4 x 1/4 50 

C-234 20-941 F-800-4 - 1428 3/8 x 1/4 10 

C-235 20-940 F-800-5 - 1423 3/8 x 3/8 50 

C-236 - F-800-6 - 1429 1/2 x 3/8 10 

C-237 - F-800-7 - 1424 1/2 x 1/2 25 

COMPRESSION TEES 



C-331 - F-700-8 - 1528 3/16 x 3/16 x 3/16 10 

C-333 20-949 F-700-9 - 1529 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 25 

C-335 20-951 F-700-10 - 1538 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 10 

C-336 20-950 F-700-11 - 1531 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 25 

C-337 - - - 1540 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 10 

C-338 - F-700-12 - 1539 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 10 

Compression 

Adapter to MPT 

Compression 

Adapter to FPT 

Compression 

Line Valve 

Compression 

Union 

Compression 

Tee 

691 





C SERIES 

COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO MPT 



C-361 20-956 F-700-4 - 1551T 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 10 

C-362 20-952 - - 1542T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/4 10 

ANGLE GAUGE TEE 



C-369 20-958 - - 1557T 1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT x 1/4 10 

GAUGE TEE 



C-370 20-955 - - 1559T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT 10 

BRANCH FEMALE TEE 



C-372 20-957 F-700-7 - 1564T 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 10 

BULKHEAD FITTINGS 


Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell (in) Pack 

C-375 - F-800-8 - - 1/4 x 1/4 10 

C-376 - - - - 3/8 x 3/8 10 

COMPRESSION PLUG 



C-378 21-381 F-1000-14 - 1568 1/4 50 

PLASTIC FERRULES 



C-381 20-961 F-1000-9 - 1571 1/4 200 

C-382 20-962 F-1000-10 - 1572 3/8 100 

C-383 - F-1000-11 - 1573 1/2 100 

692 

Tees with MPT 

Angle Gauge Tee 

Gauge Tee 

Branch Female Tee 

Bulkhead Fitting 

Compression Plug 

Plastic Ferrule



C SERIES 

PLASTIC TUBING INSERTS 



C-384 20-966 F-1000-198 - 1575 1/4 200 

C-385 20-967 F-1000-184 - 1576 3/8 200 

C-386 - F-1000-8 - 1577 1/2 100 

COMPRESSION 90° ELLS 



C-521 - F-800-3 - 1479 1/4 x 1/4 10 

C-522 - F-800-4 - - 3/8 x 1/4 25 

C-523 - F-800-5 - 1481 3/8 x 3/8 10 

C-524 - F-800-7 - 1482 1/2 x 1/2 10 

COMPRESSION 90° ELL TO MPT 



C-532 - F-500-2 - 1488T 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 100 

C-535 20-945 F-500-3 - 1490T 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 50 

C-536 20-946 - - 1491T 1/4 X 1/4 MPT 50 

C-538 20-947 F-500-5 - 1497T 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 25 

C-539 - F-500-6 - 1498T 3/8 x 3/8 MPT 25 

COMPRESSION 90° ELL TO FPT 



C-552 20-948 - - 1511 1/4 x1/8 FPT 25 




Plastic Tubing 

Insert 

Compression 

90° Ell 

Compression 

90° Ell to MPT 

Compression 

90° Ell to FPT 

693 




MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS 

M SERIES, F-1000 SERIES 

PIPE PLUGS 



M-101 20-983 F-1000-25 - 1818 1/8 MPT 100 

M-102 20-984 F-1000-26 - - 1/4 MPT 100 

TUBE CLAMP 

Model Description Std. Pack 

M-104 5/32" Plastic 100 

Clamp 

TUBE INSERT SPRING 


M-105 9"L Spring 100 

RUBBER SEALING CAPS 



M-106 - F-1000-3 - - 3/16 100 

M-107 20-911 F-1000-4 - 1801 1/4 100 

PIPE BUSHINGS 



M-111 20-974 F-1000-15 - 1692T 1/4 MPT x 1/8 FPT 25 

M-112 20-979 F-1000-16 - 1693T 3/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT 25 

M-113 20-975 F-1000-17 - 1694T 3/8 MPT x 1/4 FPT 25 

PIPE TEES 



M-117 20-985 F-700-38 - 1665 1/4 FPT 25 

M-118 20-986 F-700-39 - 1666 3/8 FPT 25 

M-119 - F-700-40 - 1667 1/2 FPT 10 

PIPE 90° ELLS 



M-123 20-987 F-500-27 - 1650 1/8 FPT 10 

M-124 - F-500-28 - 1651 1/4 FPT 10 

M-125 - F-500-29 - 1652 3/8 FPT 10 

694 

Clamp for 5/32" plastic tubing - required when 

replacing tubes on room thermostat or pilot 

tube on receiver-controllers 

9"L insert spring for use with 5/32" plastic 

tubing to prevent tube from kinking when bent 

Pipe Plug 

Tube Clamp 

Insert Spring 

Rubber Cap 

Pipe Bushing 

Pipe Tee 

Pipe 90° Ell


MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS 

M SERIES, F-1000 SERIES 

90 DROP EAR ELBOW 


M-127 1/8" FPT 25 

GLOBE VALVES 



M-131 - F-1000-97 - 2028 3/8 FPT 10 

M-132 20-973 F-1000-98 - 2030 1/2 FPT 10 

SHUT OFF COCKS 



M-135 - F-1000-218 - - 1/8 FPT 10 

M-136 - F-1000-219 - 2108 1/4 FPT 10 

HEX NIPPLES 



M-141 20-990 - - 1739T 1/8 MPT 25 

M-142 20-992 - - 1751T 1/4 MPT 50 

M-143 - - - 1762T 3/8 MPT 25 

GANG STRAPS AND CLIPS 


M-633 Copper-plated 100 

six-gang strap 

M-648 Capillary 1 

mounting clip 

1/8" max 

CC-1G Non-metallic 1 

capillary clip 

3/8" max 

SNAP-IN BUSHINGS 


F-1000-331 Nylon bushing, 1/2" EMT 50 

F-1000-332 Nylon bushing, 3/4" EMT 50 

F-1000-347 Nylon bushing, 1/2" knockout 50 

CCT1820 Nylon bushing, 1/2" EMT and 1/2" knockout 10 

2157 Nylon bushing, 3/4" knockout 10 

PIPE CLAMPS - Copper Plated 

Model Description (in) Std. Pack 

M-622 1/4 single 100 

M-623 3/8 single 100 

M-628 1/4-1/4 dual 100 




CC-1G 

Drop Ear Elbow 

Globe Valve 

Shut Off 

Hex Nipples 

M-648 

M-633 

Snap-In Bushing 

695 



696 


PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY SOLDER FITTINGS 

S SERIES 

SOLDER ADAPTERS TO MALE PIPE THREAD 



S-104 - F-100-3 - 1104 3/8 OD x 1/4 MPT 25 

S-109 - F-100-7 - 1109 1/2 OD x 1/2 MPT 100 

SOLDER ADAPTERS TO FEMALE PIPE THREAD 



S-129 - - - - 1/2 OD x 3/8 FPT 100 

SOLDER CAPS 



S-141 - - - 1161 1/4 50 

S-142 - - - 1162 3/8 50 

S-143 - - - 1163 1/2 50 

SOLDER COUPLINGS 



S-202 - F-300-1 - 1002 3/16 x 3/16 100 

S-204 - - - 1023 1/4 x 3/16 100 

S-205 - F-300-2 - 1003 1/4 x 1/4 100 

S-206 - F-300-4 - 1025 3/8 x 1/4 50 

S-207 - F-300-3 - 1005 3/8 x 3/8 100 

S-208 - F-300-7 - 1029 3/8 x 1/2 50 

S-209 - F-300-5 - 1006 1/2 x 1/2 100 

SOLDER TEES 



S-302 - F-700-17 - 1251 3/16 x 3/16 x 3/16 50 

S-304 - F-700-19 - 1265 1/4 x 1/4 x 3/16 50 

S-306 - F-700-18 - 1252 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 50 

S-308 - F-700-24 - 1270 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 50 

S-310 - F-700-20 - 1254 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 50 

S-312 - F-700-27 - 1275 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 50 

S-314 - F-700-28 - 1276 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 50 

S-316 - F-700-25 - 1255 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 25 

SOLDER CROSS TEES 



S-404 - F-400-1 - 1300 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 x 1/4 25 

SOLDER 90° ELBOWS 



S-502 - F-500-19 - 1172 1/4 x 1/4 50 

S-504 - F-500-20 - 1174 3/8 x 3/8 50 

S-506 - F-500-22 - 1175 1/2 x 1/2 50 

SOLDER 45° ELBOWS 



S-515 - - - 1202 3/8 x 3/8 50 

S-516 - - - 1203 1/2 x1/2 50 


Sold in package quantities only. Order quantity 1 = 1 package. 

Solder 

Adapter to MPT 

Solder 

Adapter to FPT 

Solder Cap 

Solder Coupling 

Solder Tee 

Solder Cross Tee 

Solder 90° Elbow 

Solder 45° Elbow

NETWORK & WIRELESS

PRODUCTS 

Discover the Possibilities of 

the Kele Frontier 

Wireless I/O System! 

SOLUTIONS 

We provide solutions for 

the Wireless Future of 

building automation. 



WIRELESS DEVICES 

RDI-2 — Wireless Dual Digital Input Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 

RDO-2 — Wireless Receiver with Two Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711 

RI-4 — Four Universal Inputs Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709 

RI-4-K4 — Four Point Wireless Transmitter/Receiver Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717 

RO-4 — Four Universal Outputs Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 

RPT-K — RF Programming Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 

RR — RF Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715 

RST-K — Wireless RF Survey Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 

RT-R — Room Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 

RT-R-K — Room Transmitter/Receiver Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717 

RT-S — Wireless Remote Probe Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 

RT-U — Duct, Immersion, and OSA Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703 

RT-U-K — Duct, Immersion, OSA Transmitter/Receiver Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717 

RUT-G — Frontier Network Interface Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 

NETWORK DEVICES 

LON, BACNET, MODBUS, N2 — Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 



KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS I/O INTRODUCTION 

Wire installation cost is one of the biggest unknowns facing HVAC installations. In some cases, wiring is nearly impossible 

or completely cost prohibitive. The solution to these problems is a wireless radio frequency (RF) connection. 

In years past, however, RF was a very expensive choice for monitoring points, and an FCC license was required to 

use an RF system. Luckily, times have changed! 

In the 1980s, the FCC opened special frequencies for shared use by the industrial, scientific, and medical fields. 

The special frequencies, collectively called ISM band, do not require an FCC license to operate. The ISM band is dispersed 

over three major frequency groups (915 MHz, 2.45 GHz, and 5.7 GHz) and is limited to a form of modulation 

known as spread-spectrum. Spread-spectrum transmitters are much more immune to noise and interference than 

narrow-band transmitters, and they offer a very secure means of communicating. The US military was one of the first 

to take advantage of spread-spectrum technology and was the catalyst for the cost reductions, which are reflected in 

Kele’s RF product offering. 

Kele searched for a complete wireless system that would meet the challenges of the HVAC industry and found none. 

To address the needs of our industry, we decided to develop our own system. The resulting solution is the Kele 

Frontier Wireless I/O system. 

Frontier System Introduction 

The main application of the Frontier system is to replace hard-wired points from the field to the automation panel. The 

system is designed to replace the wire of any analog signal (0-10V, 2-10V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA) or any digital contact 

signal (SPDT). There are also specific transmitters for room, duct, immersion, and OSA applications. The system is 

ideal for remote, hard-to-wire locations such as marble lobbies, outdoor fountains or gates, historical buildings, 

asbestos ceilings, and museums. It is also ideal for replacing that OSA sensor located on the wrong side of the 

building. 

RF Theory 

The special modulation technique known as spread-spectrum was invented during WWII and was further developed 

for use by the military in the 1960s. The major advantages to the military was spread spectrum’s immunity to noise, 

low power signature, and message security. Because of its high noise rejection, spread spectrum can operate at much 

lower transmission levels for the same effective range, making it even less likely to be intercepted at distant locations. 

There are two common types of spread-spectrum modulation: frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) and direct 

sequence spread spectrum (DSSS). The simpler type is FHSS. As shown in Figure 1, FHSS transmits the signal at 

many specific narrow bands at relatively high power at each frequency spike. As shown in Figure 2, DSSS modulates 

the signal using a specific known code, called the pseudorandom number (PN), to spread the signal over many frequencies. 

Then, the signal is sent at low power and reassembled at the receiver using the PN as the key to demodulate 

the message. The beauty of DSSS is that any noise in the atmosphere that does not match the PN code is filtered 

at the receiver. 

FIGURE 1. DIRECT-SEQUENCE & FREQUENCY 

HOPPING COMPARISON 

Frequency 

Hopping 

Wave 

Direct 

Sequence 

Background 

Noise 

Bandwidth (902-928) 

Frequency 

RF 

Power 

FIGURE 2. DIRECT-SEQUENCE SPREAD-SPECTRUM SIGNALS 

Data 

Carrier 

PN Sequence 

Generator 

Modulator 

Sequence 

Amplifier 

Spreader 

Relative 

Power 

Density 

Narrow 

Band 

Signal 

Frequency 

fs 

Narrow band signal at 

output of modulator 

before spreading. 

Relative 

Power 

Density 

DSSS 

Signal 

RF Interference 

Wide 

BP Filter 

Relative 

Power 

Density 

Narrow 

Band 

Signal 

fs 

fs 

Frequency Frequency 

Spectrum has wider band and 

lower power density after 

spreading with PN sequence. 

(PN Rate >> Data Rate) 

PN Sequence 

Generator 

Spectrum 

Despread 

Local 

Carrier 

"Spread" 

RF Interference 

Original narrowband, signal is 

restored if local PN sequence is 

the same. 

Phase 

Demod 

697 

Data 

NETWORK & WIRELESS I/O

NETWORK & WIRELESS I/O 

The Kele Frontier uses DSSS. The main reasons are low power, signal security, and tolerance of mulipath interference 

as the signal bounces through a building. Other advantages, such as data rate, signal acquisition, and multiradio configurations, 

also make DSSS an attractive choice. The range and noise immunity are also ideal for HVAC system 

design. Table 1 examines the advantages of both types of spread spectrum. 

TABLE 1. SPREAD-SPECTRUM COMPARISON 

FHSS DSSS Benefits of DSSS 

Wattage Low Very low Battery longevity 

Power consumption Medium Low Battery longevity 

Noise immunity Very high w/ fast hopping High Signal integrity 

Signal security High Very high Privacy 

Data rate Medium High Faster communication 

Signal acquisition Slow Fast Response time 

Design sophistication Medium High Hardware cost 

Multipath interference High, must retransmit Low, PN filters phase shift Signal integrity and speed 

Transmitter range Far (high power) Medium (low power) Low system-to-system interference 

Multiradio systems Few Many System size 

FHSS/DSSS tolerance Can be affected Seldom is affected Shared airway interference 

Given an equal level of hardware and software sophistication, the comparisons above are valid; however, with added 

expense, the designer can improve specific aspects of performance. 

CAUTION: All RF reception rates vary due to site conditions, the number of transmitters, and transmit times. Kele Frontier reception 

rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This variance precludes the use of RF products in time-critical control loop applications. RF products 

should be considered only for monitoring and overriding non-critical applications. RF systems are prohibited in life-safety applications, 

hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. (See Figure 3 for Frontier-estimated reception rates.) 

Transmitter Interval Time 

(in seconds) 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0.5 

1 

10 20 30 40 

Number of Transmitters 

99% 

Throughput 

95% 

Throughput 

Not 

Recommended 

Performance Calculation 

# of transmitters x 0.6 = minimum time interval in seconds 

Interval times are available as follows: 

0.5s, 1s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 5m, 10m, 15m, 30m 

698 



FIGURE 3. FRONTIER ESTIMATED RECEPTION RATE FIGURE 4. FRONTIER ESTIMATED BATTERY LIFE 

50 

Transmission Rate (in seconds) 

70 

65 

60 

55 

50 

45 

40 

35 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

0 

2.75 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.75 1.5 1.25 1.0 .75 .5 .25 

Battery Life* (in years) 

Always replace battery after two 

years as a precaution against leakage 

Replace after 2 years 

*Must use Duracell DL123A 

battery to achieve life 

expectancy



Kele Frontier System Overview 

TOOLS DESCRIPTION POWER USE 

RST-K Survey Tool Battery Survey jobsite, verify reception 

RPT Field Program Tool Battery Program, monitor, or override transmitters 

TRANSMITTER POINT / TYPE 

RI-4 4 Input Points 24 VAC/VDC 4 / Universal (DI, mA, VDC) 

RT-R-1 Executive Room Temp Battery (2 year) 1 / Temp 40° to 90°F (60 sec intervals) 

RT-R-3 Executive Room Temp Battery (2 year) 1 / Temp 0° to 100°F (60 sec intervals) 

RT-U-0 Duct/Well/OSA Temp Battery (2 year) 1 / Temp -20° to 110°F (60 sec intervals) 

RT-U-3 Duct/Well/OSA Temp Battery (2 year) 1 / Temp 0° to 100°F (60 sec intervals) 



RT-S (1, 3-5) Remote Temp Sensor Battery (2 year) 1 / Temp Sensor (60 sec intervals) 

RECEIVER 

RO-4 4 Output Points 24 VAC/VDC 4 / Universal (SPDT, mA, VDC) 

RDO-2 

TRANSCEIVER 

2 Output Points 24 VAC/VDC 2 SPDT with failsafe backup 

RR-(1-16) Repeater with Anti-feedback 24 VAC/VDC Repeats any signal (up to 16 per system) 

Frontier Address Structure 

The Frontier system is an open loop RF system, as opposed to a polling communication system. Each Frontier transmitter 

sends a signal at different interval times, every 30 seconds for universal transmitters and every 60 seconds for 

sensor transmitters. Frontier receivers are programmed to listen only to specific transmitters and to output the resulting 

digital contact or proportional analog signal. Because the transmission time is so short, only 16 milliseconds, collisions 

are rare. This short transmission time gives the Frontier a reception rate of 95% to 99.9% for each transmission. 

These transmission interval times can be adjusted at the time of order or in the field with an RPT programming 

tool. (See Figure 3 for estimated reception rate and Figure 4 for estimated battery life.) 

To prevent cross talk between individual systems, Kele assigns each Frontier system a facility code. If needed, the 

contractor can change the facility code. In addition to a system facility code, each Frontier transmitter is assigned a 

four-digit transmitter ID address. There are well over 1000 addresses available for programming each transmitter; 

however, tests have determined that 50 transmitters is the limit for good reception rates at the standard 30-second 

interval time. Longer intervals promote better reception rates, allowing more transmitters per system. (See Figure 3 

for estimated reception rate.) 

Each Frontier receiver identifies the transmitter facility code and ID address and then responds to the point information 

contained in the signal. The receiver duplicates the point data information from the transmitters and adjusts the 

outputs accordingly. 

If range or building structure prevents good RF communication, Frontier RR repeaters are available. Each RR is 

assigned a facility code and repeater ID address. This allows the RR to respond to transmitters only within the system 

facility code and prevents transmission feedback from congesting the airwaves. The easy-to-use RST-K field survey 

tool is ideal for surveying a jobsite and showing if an RR repeater is needed. A survey is highly recommended to 

ensure system performance. 

Planning Wireless Applications 

A. Determine the point locations that may benefit from using wireless technology. 

B. Be sure that the sequence of operation is appropriate for this form of connection. (See Caution.) 

C. Use RF survey tool RST-K to determine communication confidence on existing facilities. Map results. 

D. Determine the position of any necessary RR repeaters. Map results. 

E. If the installation is new, use 200' (61m) as the maximum distance from transmitters to receivers. 

Map results. Position RR repeaters accordingly, every 200', and map results. Add in two 

repeaters to ensure good communication. 

F. Call Trane for specific application assistance or system architecture. 

699 



700 



FIGURE 5. FRONTIER SAMPLE SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM FIGURE 6. FRONTIER ESTIMATED RANGE 

RI-4 

Input 1 

Input 2 

Input 3 

Input 4 

Transmitter 

Universal 

RT-U 

Input 10 

Battery 

Duct/Immersion 

Temp Transmitter 

RO-4 

RT-R 

Input 

5 

Battery 

Room Temp Transmitter 

RO-4 

Output Pt. 11 

Receiver 

Output Pt. 1 

Output Pt. 5 

Output Pt. 9 

Output Pt. 11 

Receiver 

RR 

Repeater 

Output Pt. 3 

Output Pt. 7 

Output Pt. 10 

RDO-2 

Receiver 

RI-4 

Input 6 

Input 7 

Input 8 

Input 9 

Transmitter 

Universal 

Output Pt. 1 

Output Pt. 2 

RT-U 

Input 

11 

Battery 

OSA Temp Transmitter 

Range Estimation Rules of Thumb* 

• 0' to 200' (0-61m) Will work in most instances without a repeater (check w/ RST-K) 

• 200' to 500' (61-152m) May require a repeater 

• 500' to 2700' (152-823m)If placed in line of sight, will work in most instances 

If not placed in line of sight, one or more repeaters will be 

required 

• >2700' (>823m) Will require one or more repeaters 

• 1 floor up/down Will work in most instances without a repeater and within 100' 

• 2 floors up/down May require a repeater within 100' 

• 2-3 floors up/down May require a repeater 

• >3 floors Will require one or more repeaters 

If there are more than 10 transmitters in a system, then a repeater may be needed to 

improve reception rates from the distant transmitters. 

*All results are subject to actual field conditions. The chart and rules of thumb are for 

reference only. Actual results will vary. Use an RST-K survey tool to verify actual onsite 

range. 

R Receiver 

T Transmitter 

Frontier Application Guideline Summary 

Reception The standard communication reception rate for the Frontier system is 95% to 99.9%. 

Facility Code • Each system must have one facility code. 

• Systems with different facility codes cannot talk to one another but can interfere with one 

another if both systems are within range. The distance will vary from location to location, but 

generally the range is 200' to 500' (61-152m) between systems. 

Transmitter Address • There are 9999 transmitter ID addresses; however, the number of IDs in a system varies 

based on the interval time. Using standard interval times, the number of actual transmitters is 50 

per facility. 

• Two transmitters cannot have the same transmitter ID address. This would cause confusion at 

the receiver and a tug-of-war would ensue, toggling the output between the two signals. 

Interval Time The standard interval times are 30 seconds for universal transmitters and 60 seconds for battery-operated 

transmitters. The default interval for the standard system limits the transmitters to 50. 

The interval times are adjustable from 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes. (See Figure 3.) 

Range The range varies due to building construction and the number of transmitters in a system. 

In general, 200' to 500' is attainable in most construction without a repeater. Parking lots to building 

tops (line-of-sight systems) can have ranges of 2700' (823m). The RST-K survey tool was 

developed to help identify the range limitations in particular applications. RR repeaters are used 

to extend the range. 

Receiver • A receiver such as an RO-4 can have only one facility code and can receive signals from four different 

transmitters. It then outputs the signals using the appropriate output type, either analog or digital. 

• Multiple receivers can receive a single transmitter signal. This is helpful when a point such as 

OSA temperature is used at multiple locations. 

Battery The battery longevity is subject to the transmit interval times for each transmitter. The standard 

interval time is 60 seconds, allowing for two years of battery life. (See Figure 4.) 

Each battery-operated transmitter has a low-battery indication, which is transmitted to the 

receiver listening to it. The RO-4 receiver has an optional relay board (LBI option), which will 

energize the LBI contact if any of the four transmitters it listens to has a low battery. 

Repeater Repeaters are limited to 16 per system. The anti-feedback feature prevents repeated signals 

from being received and repeated again and again by the same repeater. This prevents the 

flooding of the airwaves with unneeded signals. 

Communication The Frontier system is an open loop RF system. This means that each transmitter sends a signal 

at different interval times without confirmation. The receivers are programmed to listen to specific 

transmitters then output the resulting digital contact or proportional analog signal. 

2700' 

Line-of-Sight Zone 

500' 

T 

R 

R 

R 

Survey Required Zone 

No Worry Zone


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL RT-R 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RT-R battery-operated radio 

frequency (RF) transmitter senses room temperature. 

Each sensor is individually configured with a unique 

address so that individual room information can be identified. 

The sensor/transmitter will transmit every 60 seconds 

and operate two years using an easily-replaceable 

lithium battery. The transmitter operates at 923 MHz at 

50 mW for an open-air effective range of 2700' (823m). 

There is no RF tuning, no external RF antenna, and no 

specific radio experience required to install or use the 

system. The RF signal uses proven spread-spectrum 

technology and requires no FCC license. 

OPERATION/APPLICATION 

Each Model RT-R transmitter has a unique address 

with which it is identified. The temperature signal is 

transmitted to a receiver such as a Model RO-4, which 

duplicates the temperature on one of its four analog outputs. 

A typical Frontier System is programmed with up 

to 50 addresses per facility at 30 second intervals, and 

each system maintains trouble-free communication 

without interference from other 900 MHz sources. Actual 

transmission distance will vary, depending on building 

structure, and should be verified with a Model RST-K 

survey tool. 

FEATURES 

• Eliminates wiring 

• Attractive enclosure design 

• Two-year battery 

• No FCC license requirements 

• 60-second updates standard 

• Spread-spectrum technology 

• ±0.5°F accuracy 

• No external antenna requirements 

CAUTION: All RF reception rates vary due to site conditions, the number of transmitters, and transmit times. Kele Frontier 

reception rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This fact precludes the use of RF products in time-critical control loop applications. 

RF products should be considered only for monitoring and overriding noncritical applications. RF systems are prohibited in lifesafety 

applications, hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. (See Performance Graph for 

estimated reception rates.) 


Transmitter 

Supply power Lithium battery, two-year life, 3V 

@60 sec (see Battery Life Chart) 

Inputs Built in thermistor 

Accuracy ±0.5 °F 

Transmitted range [1] 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

[3] 0° to 100°F (17.7° to 37.8°C) 



Housing Plastic, NEMA 1 


(11.4 x 7.0 x 3.0 cm) 


Radio 

Frequency 923.58 MHz 

Transmitter power 50 mW 

Transmitter interval 0.5 sec to 30 min. 

Transmission time 16.6 msec 

(factory set to 60 sec) 

Modulation Direct sequence, spread spectrum 

Data rate 19.2 Kbps 

Antenna Built into circuit board 

Approvals FCC CFR part 15.247 

A/D Resolution 12-bit converter 

Address Structure 

Facility address code Unique for each system 

Transmitter address 50 addresses per system 

@ 30 sec intervals 

Point ID Always 1 

701 



702 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL RT-R 

PERFORMANCE GRAPH BATTERY LIFE CHART WIRING (none) 


(in seconds) 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0.5 

RT-R 

Factory 

Setting 

1 

99% 

Throughput 

95% 

Throughput 

Not 

Recommended 

10 20 30 40 50 



# of transmitters x 0.6 = min time interval 

INSTALLATION / SETUP 

Installation 

Each unit should be mounted approximately 4' to 5' (1.2 to 

1.5m) off the floor, and positioned on the wall. Install the battery 

to start transmission, and install the cover with a 1/16" Allen key 

(KT-1). 

Setup 

Using a Frontier Model RPT-K programming tool, program the 

facilty address code and transmitter address. This may have 

been done at the factory. This address information is stored in 

nonvolatile memory but may be changed with a Model RPT-K. 

Record the data in a master address book for the project. Crosscheck 

the new address with other modules to prevent address 

duplication and cross talk between transmitters. Point ID at the 

Model RO-4 receiver is always point 1 in the Model RT-U transmitter. 

70 

65 

60 

55 

50 

45 

40 

35 


30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

0 

2.75 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.75 1.5 1.25 1.0 .75 .5 .25 




years as a precaution against leakage. battery to achieve life 



RT-R RF room temperature transmitter 

RANGE CODE* 

1 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

3 0° to 100°F (-17.7° to 37.8°C) 

RT-R 

3 

Example: RT-R-3 RF room temperature transmitter 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 


2.75 

(7.0) 

Front View 


DL123A Duracell 3V lithium battery RST-K RF survey tool kit 

BE123A 24 / 3.3V battery eliminator RO-4 RF universal output receiver 

1.20 

(3.05) 

Side View 

PROGRAM TAG SAMPLE** 

Facility Code 101 

Transmitter 1 

*Calibrated at Kele before shipping and not rangeable 

**Programmed by Kele before shipping or may be programmed by the customer with a Model RPT-K 

programming tool 

Notes: 1. Each transmitter has its own unique address, which must be programmed before the system will work. 

2. The facility address code is assigned by Kele and programmed at Kele to prevent multiple system cross talk. 

3. The customer selects the transmitter address at the time of order for Kele to program before shipping, or it 

may be selected in the field with a Model RPT-K programming tool. 

Antenna 

Transmitter 

Program Header 

+ 

Sensor 

Battery 

Holder 

Forced 

Transmission 

Button 

4.50 

(11.43)


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS DUCT / IMMERSION / OSA 

TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL RT-U 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RT-U is a battery-operated 

radio frequency (RF) transmitter for duct, immersion, or 

OSA temperature. Each sensor is individually configured 

with a unique address so that individual point information 

can be identified. The sensor/transmitter will transmit 

every 60 seconds and operate two years using an 

easily-replaceable lithium battery. The transmitter operates 

at 923 MHz at 50 mW for an open-air effective 

range of 2700' (823m). There is no RF tuning, no external 

RF antenna, and no specific radio experience 

required to install or use the system. The RF signal uses 

proven spread-spectrum technology and requires no 

FCC license. 


Each Model RT-U transmitter has a unique address with 

which it is identified. The temperature signal is transmitted 

to a receiver such as a Model RO-4, which duplicates 

the temperature on one of its four analog outputs. 

A typical Frontier system is programmed with up to 50 

addresses per facility at 30-second intervals and maintains 

trouble-free communication without interference 

from other 900 MHz sources. Actual transmission distance 

will vary, depending on building structure, and 

should be verified with a Model RST-K survey tool. 


Transmitter 


@ 60 sec (see Battery Life Chart) 

Inputs Built-in thermistor 

Accuracy ±0.5°F 

Temp range [0] -20° to 110°F (-28.8° to 43.3°C) 

[1] 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

[3] 0° to 100°F (-17.7° to 37.8°C) 

[4] 30° to 150°F (-1.1° to 65.6°C) 

[5] 100° to 220°F (37.8° to 104.4°C) 



Housing Plastic, NEMA 3R 

Dimensions 2.5"H x 2.5"W x2.3"D 

(6.4 x 6.4 x 5.8 cm) 


FEATURES 


• Easy-mount enclosure design 

• Two-year battery @ 60-second intervals 


• 200' to 500' (61 to 152m) in-building range 

• 2700' (823m) open-air range 






reception rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This variance precludes the use of RF products in time-critical control loop applications. 

RF products should be considered only for monitoring and overriding noncritical applications. RF systems are prohibited 

in life-safety applications, hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. (See Performance 

Graph for estimated reception rates.) 

Radio 




Transmission time 16.6 msec (factory set to 60 sec) 


Data rate 19.2 KBPS 



A/D resolution 12-bit converter 






703 



704 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS DUCT / IMMERSION / OSA 


MODEL RT-U 



(in seconds) 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0.5 

RT-U 

Factory 

Setting 

1 

10 20 30 40 50 


3 



RT-U RF temperature transmitter for duct, immersion, or OSA 

RANGE CODE* 

0 -20° to 110°F (-28.9° to 43.3°C) 

1 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

3 0° to 100°F (-17.7° to 37.8°C) 

4 30° to 150°F (-1.1° to 65.6°C) 

5 100° to 220°F (36.8° to 104.4°C) 

RT-U 

99% 

Throughput 

95% 

Throughput 

Not 

Recommended 



70 

65 

60 

55 

50 

45 

40 

35 


30 

25 

20 

Forced 

15 

Transmission 

10 

Button 

5 

0 

2.75 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.75 1.5 1.25 1.0 .75 .5 .25 




years as a precaution against leakage battery to achieve life 

expectancy 

SETUP INSTALLATION / MOUNTING 

Using a Kele Frontier Model RPT-K programming tool, 

program the facilty address code and transmitter address. 

This may have been done at the factory. This address information 

is stored in nonvolatile memory but may be 

changed with an RPT-K. Record the data in a master 

address book for the project. Cross check the new address 

with other modules to prevent address duplication and 

cross talk between transmitters. Point ID at the Model RO-4 

receiver is always point 1 for the Model RT-U transmitter. 


Example: RT-U-3 RF duct temperature transmitter (0° to 100°F) 

*Calibrated at Kele before shipping and not rangeable 

** Programmed by Kele before shipping or may be programmed by the contractor with a 

Model RPT-K programming tool 

Programming Header 



Transmitter 1 



3. The contractor selects the transmitter address at the time of order for Kele to program before shipping, or it 



DL123A Duracell 3V lithium battery RST-K RF survey tool kit 

OSAB OSA bracket WEL-B Brass thermowell 

BE123A 24 / 3.3V battery eliminator WEL-S Stainless steel thermowell 

+ 

Transmitter 

Sensor 

Battery Holder 

Each unit should be mounted with two screw tabs on 

a duct or on the outside wall with a special bracket so 

that the vent hole is facing down. Other orientations 

are possible but may affect the moisture integrity of 

the enclosure. Install the battery inside the enclosure 

to start transmission. Unit should not be located inside 

a metal enclosure or duct.


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS REMOTE SENSOR 

MODEL RT-S 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RT-S is a battery-operated 

radio frequency (RF) transmitter for remote probe temperature. 

Each sensor/transmitter is individually configured 

with a unique address so that individual point information 

can be identified. The sensor/transmitter will 

transmit every 60 seconds and operate for two years 

using an easily replaceable lithium battery. The transmitter 

operates at 923 MHz at 50 mW for an open-air effective 

range of 2700' (823m). There is no RF tuning, no 

external RF antenna, and no specific radio experience 



FCC license. 


Each Model RT-S transmitter has a unique address with 

which it is identified. The temperature signal is transmitted 

to a receiver such as a Model RO-4, which duplicates 

the temperature on one of its four analog outputs. 

A typical Frontier System is programmed with up to 50 

addresses per facility at 30 second intervals and maintains 

trouble-free communication without interference 

from other 900 MHz sources. Actual transmission distance 

will vary, depending on building structure, and 

should be verified with a Model RST-K survey tool. 


Transmitter 


@ 60 sec (see Battery Life Chart) 

Probe Stainless steel, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) 

Sensor Thermistor, 8' cable 

Accuracy ±0.5°F 

Temp range [0] -20° to 110°F (-28.8° to 43.3°C) 

[1] 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

[3] 0° to 100°F (17.7° to 37.8°C) 

[4] 30° to 150°F (-1.1° to 65.6°C) 

[5] 100° to 220°F (37.8° to 104.4°C) 



Housing Plastic, NEMA 3R 


(6.4 x 6.4 x 5.8 cm) 


FEATURES 


• Easy-mount enclosure design 

• Two-year battery @ 60-second intervals 








• Remote stainless steel probe, 8' cable 




in life-safety applications, hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. (See Performance 

Graph for estimated reception rates.) 

RT-S 

Radio 




Transmission time 16.6 msec (factory set to 60 sec) 











705 



706 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS REMOTE SENSOR 

MODEL RT-S 



(in seconds) 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0.5 

RT-U 

Factory 

Setting 

1 

10 20 30 40 50 


3 

70 

65 

60 

55 

50 

45 

40 

35 


30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

0 

2.75 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.75 1.5 1.25 1.0 .75 .5 .25 





expectancy 



RT-S RF temperature transmitter for remote probe mounting 

RANGE CODE* 

0 -20° to 110°F (-28.9° to 43.3°C) 

1 40° to 90°F (4.4° to 32.2°C) 

3 0° to 100°F (17.7° to 37.8°C) 

4 30° to 150°F (-1.1° to 65.6°C) 

5 100° to 220°F (36.8° to 104.4°C) 

RT-S 

99% 

Throughput 

95% 

Throughput 

Not 

Recommended 




Example: RT-S-3 RF probe temperature transmitter 

Forced 

Transmission 

Button 

SETUP INSTALLATION / MOUNTING 

Using a Kele Frontier Model RPT-K programming tool, 

program the facilty address code and transmitter address. 

This may have been done at the factory. This address information 

is stored in nonvolatile memory but may be changed 

with an RPT-K. Record the data in a master address book 

for the project. Cross-check the new address with other 

modules to prevent address duplication and cross talk 

between transmitters. Point ID at the Model RO-4 receiver is 

always point 1 for the Model RT-S transmitter. 



Transmitter 1 

* Calibrated at Kele before shipping and not rangeable 

** Programmed by Kele before shipping or may be programmed by the contractor with a Model RPT-K programming tool 



3. The contractor selects the transmitter address at the time of order for Kele to program before shipping, or it may be selected in the field 

with a Model RPT-K programming tool. 


DL123A Duracell 3V lithium battery RO-4 RF universal output receiver 

WEL-B Brass thermowell WEL-S Stainless steel thermowell 

RPT-K RF survey tool kit BE123A 24 / 3.3V battery eliminator 

Programming Header 

+ 

Transmitter 

Sensor 

Battery Holder 

Each unit should be mounted with two screw tabs on 

a duct or on the outside wall. Other orientations are 

possible but may affect the moisture integrity of the 

enclosure. Install the battery inside the enclosure to 

start transmission. The transmitter should not be 

located inside a metal enclosure or duct.

KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS DUAL DIGITAL INPUT TRANSMITTER 

MODEL RDI-2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RDI-2 battery-operated 

radio frequency (RF) transmitter senses two separate 

digital inputs (DIs). Each transmitter is individually configured 

with a unique address so that individual digital 

inputs can be identified. The transmitter will transmit 

every 60 seconds and operate two years using an easily-replaceable 

lithium battery. The transmitter operates 

at 923 MHz at 50 mW for an open-air effective range of 

2700' (823m). There is no RF tuning, no external RF 

antenna, and no specific radio experience required to 

install or use the system. The RF signal uses proven 

spread-spectrum technology and requires no FCC 

license. 


Each Model RDI-2 transmitter has a unique address 

with which it is identified. The signal is transmitted to a 

receiver such as a Model RO-4 or RDO-2, which duplicates 

the digital inputs as individual relay contact closures. 

Each system maintains trouble-free communication 

without interference from other 900 MHz sources. 

Actual transmission will vary, depending on building 


survey tool. 

FEATURES 



Transmitter 


@60 sec (see Battery Life Chart) 

Inputs Dual digital input termination 



Housing Plastic, NEMA 1 


(10.2 x 5.1 x 2.5 cm) 


Radio 




• Dual digital inputs (DIs) 


• Attractive enclosure design 

• Two-year battery 






reception rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This fact precludes the use of RF products in time-critical control loop applications. 

RF products should be considered only for monitoring and overriding noncritical applications. RF systems are prohibited in lifesafety 

applications, hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. (See Performance Graph for 

estimated reception rates.) 

RDI-2 




Data rate 19.2 Kbps 



A/D Resolution 12-bit converter 





Point ID Always 1 for DI-1 

Always 2 for DI-2 

707 



708 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS DUAL DIGITAL INPUT TRANSMITTER 

MODEL RDI-2 



(in seconds) 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0.5 

RT-R 

Factory 

Setting 

1 

99% 

Throughput 

95% 

Throughput 

Not 

Recommended 

10 20 30 40 50 




INSTALLATION / SETUP 

Installation 

Each unit should be mounted off the floor, and positioned for 

free air transmission. Install the battery to start transmission, 

and install the cover with a 1/16" Allen key (KT-1). Do not install 

in a metal box. 

Setup 

Using a Frontier Model RPT-K programming tool, program the 

facilty address code and transmitter address. This may have 

been done at the factory. This address information is stored in 

nonvolatile memory but may be changed with a Model RPT-K. 

Record the data in a master address book for the project. Crosscheck 

the new address with other modules to prevent address 

duplication and cross talk between transmitters. [Point ID at the 

Model RO-4 or RDO-2 receiver is always point 1 or 2 for the 

Model RDI-2 transmitter. 

70 

65 

60 

55 

50 

45 

40 

35 


30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

0 

2.75 2.5 2.25 2.0 1.75 1.5 1.25 1.0 .75 .5 .25 







RDI-2 RF digital input (2-DI) transmitter 

RDI-2 

Example: RDI-2 Battery-operated dual 

digital input transmitter 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

4.50 

(11.43) 


2.75 

(7.0) 

Antenna 

Front View 

PROGRAM TAG SAMPLE* 


Transmitter 1 

*Programmed by Kele before shipping or may be programmed by the customer with a Model RPT-K 

programming tool 



3. The customer selects the transmitter address at the time of order for Kele to program before shipping, or it 



DL123A Duracell 3V lithium battery RDO-2 Dual relay output receiver 

BE123A 24 / 3.3V battery eliminator RST-K RF survey tool kit 

Transmitter 

1 2 

Program Header 

Battery 

Holder 

+ 

IN1 

Pt. 1 

COM 

IN2 

Pt. 2 

COM 

RDI-2 

- - - Internal 

1.20 

(3.05) 

Maintain 

Contacts 

Side View 

SPST 

SPST 

Forced 

Transmission 

Button 

4.50 

(11.43)


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS TRANSMITTER WITH 

FOUR UNIVERSAL INPUTS 

MODEL RI-4 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RI-4 Radio Frequency 

(RF) Transmitter with Four Universal Inputs communicates 

point information to a Model RO-4 receiver. 

Each of the four input points may be configured for status 

contact, analog 0-20 mA, or 0-10 VDC input signals. 

The transmitter is tuned to 923 MHz and 50 mW for an 

open-air effective range of 2700' (823m). There is no RF 

tuning, no external RF antenna, and no specific radio 

experience required to install or use the system. The RF 

signal uses proven spread-spectrum technology and 

requires no FCC license. 

APPLICATION 

Each transmitter has a unique address with which it is 

identified. A simple transfer of information is duplicated 

from the transmitter to the receiver, which is programmed 

to read the proper address and point. There 

are over 50 system addresses within each RF system. 

Actual transmission distance will vary, depending on 

building structure, and should be verified with a Model 

RST-K survey tool. 

Input 

Input 

Input 

Input 


RI-4 RO-4 

Transmitter Receiver 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Universal Input 

Supply power 24 VAC/VDC ±10% @ 100 mA 

Inputs (4) Selectable digital or analog 

Digital Dry contact 

Analog 0-20 mA, 0-10 VDC 

Impedance 250� (mA), 20 k� (VDC) 




Connection Terminal screws 

Housing NEMA 4, plenum rated 



(12.9 x 12.9 x 7.5 cm) 

Aux power out 20 VDC @ 100 mA for 

loop power 

FEATURES 


• Four universal input points 





• 923 MHz RF carrier 


• 50 addresses per system 

CAUTION: All RF reception rates vary due to site conditions, the number of transmitters, and transmit times. Kele Frontier reception 

rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This variance precludes the use of RF products in time-critical control loop applications. RF products 

should be considered only for monitoring and overriding noncritical applications. RF systems are prohibited in life-safety applications, 

hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. (See Performance Graph for estimated reception rates.) 

Radio 



Transmission interval 0.5 sec to 30 min. 




Modulation Direct sequence, 

spread spectrum 







Point ID 1 through 4 

709 



710 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS TRANSMITTER WITH 

FOUR UNIVERSAL INPUTS 

MODEL RI-4 

PERFORMANCE GRAPH WIRING 


(in seconds) 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0.5 

RI-4 

Factory 

Setting 

1 

10 20 30 40 


99% 

Throughput 

95% 

Throughput 

Not 

Recommended 

50 



MOUNTING 


RI-4 RF transmitter with four universal input points 

PROGRAM INSTRUCTIONS 

XXXXX Facility address code (selected by Kele)* 

XXXX Transmitter address (selected by customer)* 

1x-2x-3x-4x Transmitter hardware setup (selected by customer)** 

Please specify how to set up hardware jumper for 

points 1, 2, 3, and 4. 

Sample: 1D Point 1 (digital) 

2D Point 2 (digital) 

3V Point 3 (0-10V) 

4C Point 4 (0-20 mA) 

RI-4 

00101 0001 

1D-2D-3V-4C 

Digital Contact 

0-10 VDC 

Transmitter 

4-20 mA 

Two-Wire Transmitter 

0-20 mA 

Four-Wire Transmitter 

External 

Power Customer- 

Supplied 

Transformer 

24 VAC/DC 

IN 1 

IN 2 

IN 3 

IN 4 

20 VDC OUT 

4 3 2 1 

mA 0-20 mA 

V/D 0-10 V / Contact 

PROGRAM TAG SAMPLE 

Facility Code = 101 Transmitter = 1 

1 2 3 4 

D D V C T = 1 

Example: RI-4-00101-0001-1D,2D,3V,4C RF universal input transmitter programmed for facility 

code 101 and transmitter address 0001. Hardware is set up with points 1 and 2 as digital, 

3as 0-10V, and 4 as 0-20 mA. 

*Transmitter is programmed at the factory before shipping but may be changed by the customer with a Model RPT-K programming tool. 

(If this is a replacement or extension to an existing system, indicate the facility address code and transmitter address on the order.) 

**Hardware is set up at factory before shipping but may be changed in the field. 

Notes: 1. Each transmitter has its own facility and transmitter addresses that must be programmed before the system will work. 

2. The facility address codes are assigned by Kele to prevent multiple system cross talk. 

3. The customer selects the transmitter address code at the time of order or in the field with a Model RPT-K programing tool. 

4. Interval time is factory set to 30 seconds. (For shorter or longer interval time, consult the Performance Graph above and contact Kele.) 


RPT-K RF programming tool RST-K RF survey tool kit 

ASG Signal generator mA/VDC RR RF repeater 

RO-4 RF universal output receiver 

+ 

+ 

+ 

24 VAC 

N L1 

COM 

COM 

COM 

DIG 1 

DIG 2 

DIG 3 

DIG 4 

RI-4 

ANA 1 

ANA 2 

ANA 3 

ANA 4 

Notes: 1. All points are universal analog or digital per the wiring and setup. 

2. Wiring and setup above shows point 1 as digital, point 2 as analog (0-10 VDC), 

point 3 as analog (0-20 mA), and point 4 as analog (0-20 mA). 


Select 

Digital/Analog 

Type 

The RI-4 should be mounted vertically. If mounted outside or in a damp environment, conduit or wire entry should be 

sealed watertight. Drill two 1/8" weep holes into the bottom of the enclosure at opposite ends to prevent internal 

condensation. The unit should never be mounted inside a metal enclosure. 

Signal 

Select


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS RECEIVER WITH TWO DIGITAL OUTPUTS 

MODEL RDO-2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RDO-2 Wireless Receiver with Two 

Digital Outputs duplicates point information received from a 

remote transmitter. The two output points are configured for 

SPDT contact and can be individually controlled from a single 

Frontier Model RI-4 transmitter. There is no tuning, no external 

antenna, and no specific radio experience required to install or 

use the Frontier wireless system. The radio frequency signal 

uses proven spread-spectrum technology, requires no FCC 

license, and has a line-of-sight range of 2700' (823m). 

APPLICATION 

Each wireless receiver picks up signals from a single wireless 

transmitter and duplicates the digital point data. A jumper selectable 

time period may be set to transfer the contacts to “relay 

de-energized” if a signal is not received within the allotted time. 

A jumper may also be set to override each relay on or off. A 

jumper selectable anti-cycle timer (two minutes) may be set to 

prevent short cycling of equipment. Actual transmission distance 

will vary, depending on building structure, and should be 

verified with a Frontier Model RST-K survey tool. 

Input 

Input 

Input 

Input 

DI-1 

DI-2 

DI-3 

DI-4 


RI-4 RDO-2 


Output 

1 

Output 

2 

Digital Output 


Outputs (2) SPDT 6A @ 24-120 VAC 



Connection Crimp terminal spades, 

14-18 AWG (included) 

Housing NEMA 4 (IP66) plenum rated 



(11 x 11 x 8.9 cm) 

Default mode Both relays default to their 

normal condition (de-energized) 

Default time Time after last transmission 

30 sec, 1 min., 5 min., 10 min., 

15 min., 30 min., 60 min., or 

last command 

Anti-cycle 2 min. fixed or none 

FEATURES 

• Eliminates point wiring 

• Two digital points SPDT 

• Individual relay override jumper 




• 923 MHz radio frequency spread spectrum 


• Default mode anti-cycle protection (two minutes or 

none) 

• Time-selectable default mode 




in life-safety applications, hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and radios are prohibited. 

Radio 


Receiver sensitivity -110 dBm 

Modulation Direct sequence, spread 

spectrum 



Approvals 


FCC CFR part 15.247 


Transmitter addresses 50 per system @ 30 sec 

intervals 

Number of receivers Unlimited 

Two points/transmitter May receive any two points 

from a single transmitter 

711 



712 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS RECEIVER WITH TWO DIGITAL OUTPUTS 

MODEL RDO-2 

WIRING/JUMPER SETTING 

Jumper Setup 

R1 - Jumper to transmitter point A1, A2, A3, or A4 

R2 - Jumper to transmitter point A1, A2, A3, or A4 

S-Cycle - Install for no short cycle protection during signal timeout condition. 

Timeout - Install for no signal timeout; both relays de-energize at timeout. 

1/2" NPT Knockout 

Factory Settings: R1-A1, R2-A2, 

S-Cycle-Off (enabled), 

Last command 

MOUNTING 

Note: Before any wireless unit is placed, a survey of the site should be conducted with a Model RST-K. 

It is recommended that a Model RPT-K wireless programming tool be purchased for commissioning the Kele RF system. 

JP2: S-Cycle 

Jumper On: No short cycle protection 

Jumper Off: 2-minute short cycle protection 

(only during a signal timeout condition) { Flash on during signal reception 

Power On 

Relay1 energized 

Relay 2 energized 

On during default 

Relay Point Control 

and Override 

ON A1 A2 A3 A4 

Example Shown: 

R1 JP3 R1 = Energized (override) 

R2 = A2 

R2 JP4 No Jumper = Relay Disabled 

(override) 

ON A1 A2 A3 A4 

R# = Relay, 

A# = DI point on transmitter 

Each jumper A (1-4) may only be used once 


RDO-2 Wireless receiver with two SPDT output contacts 

PROGRAM INSTRUCTIONS (per module)* 

XXXXX Facility address code 

XXXX 

JUMPER 

NAME 

R1 

R2 

S-CYCLE 

TIMEOUT 

Indicates which transmitter the receiver listens to 

SELECTION OPTIONS 

(may be field adjusted) 

A1, A2, A3, or A4** (select one) 

A1, A2, A3, or A4** (select one) 

On (disable), Off (enable 2 min. anti-cycle) 

30 sec, 1 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 

30 min., 60 min., last command (select one) 

RELAY CTRL FREQ. S-CYCLE 

TIME OUT 

JP5: No Signal Time Out 

30 SEC 1 MIN 5 MIN 10 MIN 

15 MIN 30 MIN 60 MIN LAST CMD 

Spade Connection 

XXXXX = Facility address code selected by Kele 

XXXX = Transmitter ID selected by customer 

A# is the point on the transmitter XXXX 

} R# is the relay number 

*Programmed by Kele before shipping. 

**Each jumper A (1-4) may only be used once. 

Example: RDO-2 Wireless two-relay output receiver 

0001 Transmitter ID 


R1-A1 Relay 1 follows digital input point 1 in transmitter 0001 Facility Code = 101 Transmitter 

R2-A4 Relay 2 follows digital input point 4 in transmitter 0001 R1 = A1 R2 = A4 1 

S-CYCLE-OFF Anti-cycle enabled 

TIMEOUT-15 min. Default both relays to normal condition (de-energized) after 15 minutes of signal loss 



RI-4 RF universal input transmitter RR RF repeater 

154004 Stainless steel mounting tabs 

POWER 

RELAY 1 

RELAY 2 

RECEIVE/ 

DEFAULT 


+ 

24 VAC/DC 

PROGRAM 

_ 

NO1 COM1 NC1 NO2 COM2 NC2 

The RDO-2 should be mounted vertically. If mounted outside or in a damp environment, conduit or wire entry should 

be sealed watertight. Drill two 1/8" weep holes into the bottom of the enclosure at opposite ends to prevent internal 

condensation. The unit should never be mounted inside a metal enclosure.


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS RECEIVER WITH 

FOUR UNIVERSAL OUTPUTS 

MODEL RO-4 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RO-4 Radio Frequency 

(RF) Receiver with Four Universal Outputs duplicates 

point information received from up to four different transmitters. 

Each of the output points may be individually 

configured for an SPDT contact output or an analog output 

of 0-20 mA or 0-10 VDC. There is no RF tuning, no 

external RF antenna, and no specific radio experience 


proven spread-spectrum technology, requires no FCC 

license, and has an open-air range of 2700' (823m). 

APPLICATION 

Each receiver picks up signals from up to four different 

transmitter addresses and duplicates the point data from 

those transmitters. There are over 50 transmitter 

addresses within each RF system with which the receiver 

can identify. Actual transmission distance will vary, 

depending on building structure, and should be verified 

with a Model RST-K survey tool. 

Input 

Input 

Input 

Input 






RI-4 RO-4 

RT-R 

RT-U 

Transmitters Receiver 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Universal Output 


Outputs (4) Selectable digital or analog 

Digital SPDT 10A @ 120 VAC 

Analog 0-20 mA, 0-10 VDC 

Sensor 4-20 mA, 2-10 VDC 

Impedance 10 k� V 

D/A resolution 12-bit converter 

LBI option SPST low battery indicator 







(10.9 x 17.8 x 8.9 cm) 

FEATURES 


• Four universal output points 







• 50 addresses per system 

• Low battery indication option 

Radio 







Approvals 


FCC CFR part 15.247 


Transmitter addresses 50 per system @ 30 sec 

intervals 

Number of receivers Unlimited 

Four points May receive from any transmitter 

and point within the 

facility address code 

713 



714 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS RECEIVER WITH 

FOUR UNIVERSAL OUTPUTS 

MODEL RO-4 

WIRING 

Notes: 1. Any Output 1 through 4 may be set up for analog or digital. 

2. If the output is set to analog, then signal (-) is connected 

to power COM. 

3. If the output is set to digital, then the middle terminal is 

isolated as a SPDT contact. 

MOUNTING 

INSTALLATION / HARDWARE SETUP 

1. Each unit should be mounted flat to the wall in any orientation 

using through-hole screws in at least two corners. 

2. Each output point needs to have individual application jumpers. 

OUTPUT & ANL U/S M/V 

POINT TYPE APPLICATION ANALOG JUMPER JUMPER 

Digital Contact SPDT Removed U V 

Analog Universal 0-20 mA* Installed U C 

Analog Universal 0-10 VDC* Installed U V 

Analog RF Sensor 4-20 mA** Installed S C 

Analog RF Sensor 2-10 VDC** Installed 

*Range equal to transmitter input 

**Range equal to RF sensor used 

S V 

3. The low battery indicator (LBI) is a factory-installed option, which will 

energize if a battery-powered transmitter monitored by the RO-4 is low 

and needs replacement. 

It is recommended that a Model RPT-K RF programming tool 

be purchased for commissioning the Kele RF system. 


RO-4 

RF receiver with four universal output points 

RO-4-LBI RF receiver with four universal output points and a low-battery Indicator 

PROGRAM INSTRUCTIONS (selected by customer)* 

XXXXX Facility address code 

RO-4 PT. TYPE XMTR # XMTR INPUT PT. 

OUTPUT TT NNNN Y 

1 

2 

3 

4 

*Programmed by 

Kele before shipping 

SPDT 

Low Battery 

Indication 

0-20 mA 

Signal 

0-10 VDC 

Signal 

Customer- 

Supplied 

Transformer 

2-10 VDC 

RF Sensor 

Signal 

SPDT 

Control 

ANL 

OUTPUT 3 

ANL 

OUTPUT 1 

Note: Each of the outputs shown here is set up and wired 

as an example of the three output possibilities. 


Facility Code = 101 Transmitter/Point 

1 

4/1 

2 

4/4 

3 

5/1 

4 

6/1 

DO UV SV SC 

XXXXX = Facility address code 

Y = Transmitter input point number 1, 2, 3, or 4 

NNNN = Transmitter address (4 digits) 

TT = RO-4 setup for each output 

DO = SPDT SV = RF sensor 2-10 VDC 

UV = 0-10 VDC SC = RF sensor 4-20 mA 

UC = 0-20 mA 

Example: RO-4-LBI RF universal output receiver with a low battery indicator, programming as indicated below: 

101 Facility Code 

1-DO-0004-1 Point 1 is an SPDT output duplicating transmitter 4 point 1 

2-UV-0004-4 Point 2 is a 0-10 VDC output duplicating transmitter 4 point 4 

3-SV-0005-1 Point 3 is duplicating sensor transmitter 5 with a 2-10 VDC output 

4-SC-0006-1 Point 4 is duplicating sensor transmitter 6 with a 4-20 mA output 



ASG Signal generator mA/VDC RR RF repeater 

RI-4-K4 RF point modem kit (RI-4, RO-4) 

N 

L1 


+ 

+ 

+ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

OUTPUT 4 

A+ 

A- 

A+ 

A- 

ANL 

POWER 

COM 

H 

OUTPUT 2 

A+ 

A- 

A+ 

A- 

ANL 

ANL 

ANL 

24 VAC/DC 

POWER 

ANL 

ANL 

RO-4 

LBI option Module 

S4 

S3 

S2 

S1 

Jumper 

Installed 

for 

C4 Universal 

Analog 

V4 

U4 

Jumper 

Installed 

for 

C3 Universal 

V3 Analog 

Jumper 

Installed 

for 

C2 Sensor 

Analog 

V2 

C1 

V1 

U3 

U2 

Jumper 

Installed 

for 

Digital 

Output 

The RO-4 should be mounted vertically. If mounted outside or in a damp environment, conduit or wire entry should 

be sealed watertight. Drill two 1/8" weep holes into the bottom of the enclosure at opposite ends to prevent internal 


U1


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS REPEATER TRANSCEIVER 

MODEL RR 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RR Repeater 

Transceiver increases the range of the Frontier RF 

system. The Model RR receives any 923 MHz transmitter 

signal and retransmits the signal at 100 mW. 

There is no RF tuning, no external RF antenna, and 

no specific radio experience required to install or use 

the system. The RF signal uses proven spread-spectrum 

technology to ensure communication. No FCC 

license is required. 

APPLICATION 

If the system distance or building structure prevents 

good communication between Kele Frontier modules, 

a Model RR repeater will be needed to boost the signal 

between those points. The anti-feedback feature 

ensures that the repeater will retransmit any signal 

with the correct facility address code that it has not 

repeated before. The Model RR maintains troublefree 

communication without interference from other 

900 MHz sources and prevents retransmission cascading. 

Actual transmission distance will vary, 

depending on building structure, and should be verified 

with a Model RST-K survey tool. 

CAUTION: All RF reception rates vary due to site conditions, 

the number of transmitters, and transmit times. Kele 

Frontier reception rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This 

variance precludes the use of RF products in time-critical 

control loop applications. RF products should be considered 

only for monitoring and overriding noncritical applications. 

RF systems are prohibited in life safety applications, 

hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and 

radios are prohibited. 


Repeater 







(13 x 13 x 7.5 cm) 


Repeaters 

(per system) 16, without redundancy 

FEATURES 


• Repeats signal @ 100 mW 







• Anti-feedback 

• Repeats all signals within the facility code 

Input 

Input 

Input 

Input 

RR 

RI-4 

Transmitter 

RR 

Repeater 

RO-4 

Receiver 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Radio 










Facility address Unique for each system 

code 

Repeat address Repeats any signal with 

correct facility address code 

that has not been repeated 

before. 

715 



716 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS REPEATER TRANSCEIVER 

MODEL RR 

WIRING 

SETUP 

L1 

N 

Customer-Provided 

Transformer 

24 VAC 

H 

COM 

RR 

24 VAC/VDC 

Use a Kele Frontier RPT-K programming tool to program the RR repeater for the correct facility address code. (This 

may have been done at the factory.) The facility address code is stored in nonvolatile memory but may be changed 

with an RPT-K programming tool. (A Model RST-K survey tool is very useful in determining the need for and placement 

of an RR repeater. The red RST-K LED indicates out-of-range, and the green LED indicates in-range.) Place 

the RR at least 10' (3.05m) inside the range of the predetermined in-range RST-K location. 

MOUNTING 


RR RF repeater transceiver 


OPERATION 

The RR repeater receives a signal from any 

transmitter with the same facility address 

code. The repeater then checks the signal to 

determine if it has repeated the signal before. 

If it has not been repeated, the signal is 

tagged and retransmitted. While transmitting, 

the receiver does not receive any new signals. 

Up to 16 repeaters may be present in a 

system. If the receiver receives a signal that 

contains the repeater’s own address tag, it 

will not repeat the signal. 

The RR should be mounted vertically. If mounted outside or in a damp environment, conduit or wire entry should be 

sealed watertight. Drill two 1/8" weep holes into the bottom of the enclosure at opposite ends to prevent internal 


PROGRAM TAG SAMPLE* 


Repeater No. 1 

* Programmed by Kele before shipping or may be programmed 

by the contractor with a Model RPT-K programming tool 

Notes: 1. Each RR repeater is addressed with a facility address code and must be programmed 

before the system will work. 

2. To prevent multiple system cross talk, facility address codes are assigned by Kele and 

programmed at Kele before shipping. 

3. The customer can change the facility address code in the field with a Model RPT-K 

programming tool. 



154-004 Stainless steel mounting tabs


KELE FRONTIER PREPROGRAMMED WIRELESS POINT KITS 

RI-4-K4, RT-R-K, RT-U-K 

DESCRIPTION 

Kele Frontier Preprogrammed Radio Frequency 

(RF) Point Kits are specially packaged for easy installation 

and use. All kits are assembled from standard products 

that are preprogrammed and ready to install. The 

RI-4-K4 Series kits have four universal inputs that communicate 

to four universal outputs. The RT-R Series kits 

are battery-operated, room temperature transmitters that 

communicate to a universal output point receiver. The 

RT-U Series kits are duct, immersion, or OSA temperature 

transmitters that communicate to a universal output 

point receiver. 

OPERATION / APPLICATION 

Each transmitter has a unique address with which it is 

identified. A simple transfer of information is duplicated 

from the transmitter to the receiver, which is programmed 

to read the proper address and point. Actual 

transmission distance will vary, depending on building 


survey tool. 

FEATURES 


• Two-year battery in RT-R and RT-U transmitters 

• 24 VAC/VDC for RO-4 receivers and RI-4 transmitters 




• Four universal output points 




Kit Model Point Type Components 

RI-4-K4 4 Universal Points 1 RI-4, 1 RO-4 

RT-R1-K1 1 Room Temp 1 RT-R1, 

1 RO-4-LBI 

RT-R1-K4 4 Room Temp 4 RT-R1, 

1 RO-4-LBI 

RT-U3-K1 1 Duct/Immersion Temp 1 RT-U3, 

1 RO-4-LBI 

RT-U3-K4 4 Duct/Immersion Temp 4 RT-U3, 

1 RO-4-LBI 

RT-U0-K1 1 OSA Temp 1 RT-U0, 

1 RO-4-LBI, OSAB 

Kit Components (see component catalog pages for 

individual specifications) 

RT-U3 

RI-4 

RT-R1 

RO-4 

RT-U-0 

with OSAB 

CAUTION: All RF reception rates vary due to site conditions, 

the number of transmitters, and transmit times. Kele 

Frontier reception rates vary from 95% to 99.9%. This 

variance precludes the use of RF products in time-critical 

control loop applications. RF products should be considered 

only for monitoring and overriding noncritical applications. 

RF systems are prohibited in life safety applications, 

hospitals, or any other location in which cell phones and 

radios are prohibited. 

Radio 







Address Structure Preprogrammed 



@ 30 sec intervals RI-4 


RT-U, RT-R 

717 



718 


KELE FRONTIER PREPROGRAMMED WIRELESS POINT KITS 

RI-4-K4, RT-R-K, RT-U-K 

APPLICATION DIAGRAM 

Input 

Input 

Input 

Input 

1 

RT-R1 

Transmitter 

2-Year Battery 

RI-4 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Transmitter 

24 VAC/DC 

RO-4 

1 

Receiver 

24 VAC/DC 

1 Room Temperature 

RT-R1-K1 

RO-4 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Receiver 

24 VAC/DC 

Output 

4 Universal Inputs/Outputs 

RI-4-K4 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 

RT-U0 

OSAB Transmitter 

2 Year Battery 

RT-R1 

Transmitter 


4 Room Temperatures 

RT-R1-K4 

MODEL 


DESCRIPTION 

RI-4-K4 One RI-4, one RO-4 preprogrammed point 1 to 1, 2 to 2, 3 to 3, 4 to 4 

RT-R1-K1 One RT-R1, one RO-4-LBI preprogrammed point 1 to 1 

RT-R1-K4 Four RT-R1, one RO-4-LBI preprogrammed point 1 to 1, 2 to 2, 3 to 3, 4 to 4 

RT-U3-K1 One RT-U3, one RO-4-LBI preprogrammed point 1 to 1 

RT-U3-K4 Four RT-U3, one RO-4-LBI preprogrammed point 1 to 1, 2 to 2, 3 to 3, 4 to 4 

RT-U0-K1 One RT-U0, one RO-4-LBI preprogrammed point 1 to 1 with an OSAB 

Note: RI-4 and RO-4 will require the hardware jumpers to be set up by customer. 


RR RF repeater WEL-B Brass thermowell 

RST-K RF survey tool kit WEL-S Stainless steel thermowell 

RPT-K RF program tool (required to change programs) OSAB OSA bracket 

RO-4 

1 Outside Air Temperature 

RT-U0-K1 

1 

Receiver 

24 VAC/DC 

RO-4 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Receiver 

24 VAC/DC 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

1 Duct/Immersion Temperature 

RT-U3-K1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

1 

RT-U3 

Transmitter 

2 Year Battery 

RT-U3 

Transmitter 


RO-4 

1 

Receiver 

24 VAC/DC 

RO-4 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Receiver 

24 VAC/DC 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

Output 

4 Duct/Immersion Temperatures 

RT-U3-K4


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS FIELD SURVEY TOOL 

MODEL RST-K 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RST-K Radio Frequency 

(RF) Field Survey Tool is used for jobsite evaluation of 

a Kele radio frequency system. The LED display shows 

either Go or No-Go to indicate whether the RF signal is 

at a sufficient level to communicate. The Model RST-K 

is ideal for surveying a jobsite and showing if a Model 

RR repeater is needed to establish an RF link between 

transmitters and receivers. The transmitter and receiver 

are battery powered for ease of setup and survey 

work. There is no RF tuning, no external RF antenna, 

and no specific radio experience required for surveying 

a jobsite. The RF signal uses proven spread-spectrum 

technology and requires no FCC license. 

APPLICATION 

The Model RST-K is composed of an RST-T transmitter 

and an RST-R receiver. To determine the effectiveness 

of the RF signal, set up the RST-T transmitter in 

the most likely place for a BAS input point or a repeater 

location. Take the RST-R receiver and walk the jobsite. 

If a good signal is present, a green LED will illuminate 

on the RST-R. If out of range, a red LED will illuminate. 

A yellow LED indicates low battery. 

Out of 

Range 

Red 

LED 

RST-R 

R G Y 

Receiver 


RST-T 

G Y 

Transmitter 

In Range 

Green 

LED 

Survey Tool 

Power 9V battery 

Indication LED 





FEATURES 

RST-K 






• Simple LED indication 

• Battery powered 

• Low battery indication 

Radio 








(9.4 x 11.9 x 3.6 cm) 

719 



720 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS FIELD SURVEY TOOL 

MODEL RST-K 

SURVEY PROCEDURE 

1. Measure the RF signal, and make a drawing to 

show the good signal area. 

2. If there is a questionable signal area, reposition the 

RST-T transmitter location to a previously indicated 

good signal area. This new RST-T location then 

becomes the location of a Model RR repeater for 

the system. Continue to test the remaining areas of 

reception. 

3. When all reception areas are covered, record the 

results on the drawing to ensure that no areas were 

missed. This will show how many Model RR 

repeaters are required for the system. 

4. Each RST works on a separate facility test 

address and will not interfere with any existing 

system operation. 

RST OPERATION 

Red Out of Range 

Green Good Signal 

Yellow Low Battery 

Push to 

Operate 


POWER AND CONTROLS 

RST-R 

R G Y O 

9V 

Replace battery 

if yellow LED is 

illuminated 

RST-T 

G Y 

9V 

Yellow Low Battery 

On/Off Switch 

Green Transmitting 

Battery 

Compartment 

(under cover) 

1. Set up the RST-T transmitter in the most likely spot for a BAS input point or a Model RR repeater. Turn the unit 

on. The green LED indicates the power is on and is transmitting once every second. If the yellow LED is on, then 

there is a low battery. Replace the battery. 

2. Walk the jobsite with the RST-R receiver. Press the operate button and hold for three seconds until the red LED 

turns on. When the RF signal is present, the green LED illuminates. If the LED turns back to red, then the RF signal 

is out of range or not present. 

3. Release the RST-R operate button to conserve battery power until the fringe of good reception is reached. Then, 

hold the operate button at the fringe area to determine where the signal is permanently lost. 

Note: If the RST-R red LED stays on permanently, the signal is weak and out of range. If the green LED is on, the 

signal is strong and in range. It is normal for the red LED to blink on/off during a survey, as weak reception areas 

are encountered. 

4. Walk back until a good signal is reached, and reposition the RST-T 10' (3.05m) inside the good reception range. 

This could be a possible location for a repeater. Continue the site survey. 


RST-K RF survey tool kit (includes RST-T, RST-R, and batteries) 

RST-T RF transmitter test tool (includes battery) 

RST-R RF receiver test tool (includes battery) 

ACCESSORIES 

U9VL-FP Ultralife lithium 9V battery


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS PROGRAMMING TOOL 

MODEL RPT-K 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RPT-K Radio Frequency 

(RF) Programming Tool addresses, adjusts, and monitors 

the Kele wireless system. It is comprised of a Model 

RPT-T transceiver and a Palm OS ® handheld personal 

digital assistant (PDA). The PDA is used as the keyboard 

and display of the RPT-K. (Your personal PDA will 

not work.) The transmitter is tuned to the 923 MHz band 

and has a sensitivity of -110 dBm. There is no tuning, no 

external antenna, and no specific radio experience 



FCC license. 

APPLICATION 

The Model RPT-K is made to program wireless transmitter 

and receiver addresses, as well as to monitor and 

override specific control addresses. Each Model RPT-K 

captures specific addresses and point information for 

display and transmission of control signals to specific 

control points. The Model RPT-K also monitors the signal 

of a Model RST-T survey tool transmitter. This function 

helps determine the signal reception level and the 

need for and placement of a Model RR repeater. 

FEATURES 

• Programs transmitters and receivers 

• Surveys signal integrity 

• Overrides and monitors field points 

• Monitors low battery indicator 





Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) 

Supply power Battery, two-AAA 

Connection Nine-pin D-plug 

Hard-line comm RS232 

PDA I/O device Palm OS ® operating system 

IR connection 10' (3m), line-of-site 





(10.2 x 5.1 x 2.5 cm) 


Frontier software Preloaded 

Display (PDA) 

RPT-T 

Transceiver 

RPT-K 

(PDA and RPT-T) 

RPT-K 

FIGURE 1. RPT-K SAMPLE SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM 

Program Cable 

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 

Kele 

RF 

Device 

RST-T 

Survey Tool 

Transmitter 

Transceiver 









(12.0 x 9.3 x 3.8 cm) 

Power Two 9V lithium batteries 

RF 

Survey Signal 

Monitor and 






) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 

721 



722 


KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS PROGRAMMING TOOL 

MODEL RPT-K 

DIMENSIONS CABLE HOOKUP 

in 

(cm) 

CBL-R 

CBL-T 

9V Battery Access 

Cover Below 

PDA 

1 meter 

8.5 

(21.6) 

7.0 

(17.8) 

1. Measures and surveys communication integrity 

2. Programs transmitter module address codes 

3. Programs receiver point-control address codes 

4. Displays module and point information 

5. Transmits control signals to specific receivers 

and point addresses to test both analog and 

digital points 

Note: It is recommended that an RPT-K be purchased 

for commissioning the Frontier system. 

Prog 

Rec 

Prog 

Trans 

On 

Mon 

LBI 

Prog 

Off 

3.3 

(8.4) 

2.0 

(5.1) 

Program 

Transmitter 

USE AND FUNCTION INSTALLATION / MOUNTING 


Prog 

Trans 

Transceiver 

RPT-K 

(PDA and RPT-T) 

The handheld unit is battery operated with two 9V 

batteries. A nine-pin D-plug is used to interface with 

a PDA for module setup. Two program cables are 

used to connect and program transmitters and 

receivers. The software is included and is menuselected 

for each function. 


RST-K RF survey tool kit RR RF repeater 

PDA 

Override 

and Monitor 

Prog 

Rec 

Program 

Receiver 


RPT-K RF program transceiver test tool kit (RPT-T and PDA) 

RPT-T RF transceiver with program cables 

m105 PDA with software and communication cable 

ACCESSORIES 

U9VL-FP Ultralite lithium 9V battery for the RPT-T 

Mon 

CBL-T 

Transmitter 

Program 

Cable 

(RT-R, RT-U, RDI 

RI-4, RR) 

CBL-R 

Receiver 

Program 

Cable 

(RO-4, RDO-2)


KELE FRONTIER NETWORK INTERFACE GATEWAY 

MODEL RUT-G 

DESCRIPTION 

The Kele Frontier Model RUT-G receives and transmits 

direct sequence spread-spectrum radio frequency 

(RF) signals to Kele Frontier wireless I/O modules and 

translates those signals into standard network protocol 

communication. The network protocols currently available 

are for LON with standard SNVTs and a simple 

RS232 language for direct computer interface. There is 

no tuning, no external antenna, and no specific radio 

experience required to install and use the wireless system. 

The radio frequency signal uses proven spreadspectrum 

technology, requires no FCC license, and has 

a line-of-sight range of 2700' (823m). 

FEATURES 

• Standard network communication LON-RS232 


• No FCC license required 


• Direct sequence spread-spectrum technology 

• No external antenna required 

SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM 

Inputs 

Inputs 

Inputs 

Inputs 

Wireless Inputs 

RT-R 

Room 

Temp. 

RT-U 

Universal 

Temp. 

RI-4 





OPERATION 

BAS Interface 

K 

E 

Y 

1 

RUT-G 

Gateway 

K 

E 

Y 

2 

K 

E 

Y 

3 

Wireless Outputs 

RO-4 

RDO-2 

Outputs 

Outputs 

Outputs 

Outputs 

Outputs 

Outputs 

Optional third communication 

Optional second communication 

Communication I/O 

RUT-G (closed) 

RUT-G (open) 

APPLICATION 

The Model RUT-G is used for direct interface with a 

BAS computer through selected interface protocols. The 

BAS will be able to communicate wirelessly to all 

Frontier points within the same facility code. This product 

is ideal for central monitoring and control of multiple 

points spread out in a hard-to-wire facility or application. 

All Frontier transmitters send input signals at specific intervals (typically 30 or 60 seconds) and are received by the 

Model RUT-G directly or through Frontier Model RR repeaters. They are then translated into the protocol desired, 

depending on the plug-in key card selected. If the BAS computer sends an output signal, the Model RUT-G translates 

the request and transmits the output signal to a Frontier receiver for analog adjust or on/off control. 

723 



724 



MODEL RUT-G 


Power 24 VAC/VDC, 1.5A 


Ambient RH 5% to 95% noncondensing 

Connections Terminal strip 

Housing NEMA 4 (IP66) 



(19 x 29 x 14 cm) 

Docking ports Three protocol sockets per gateway 

RJ45 HTML Ethernet information site 

(access with browser) 

DIP settings 

LED indicators 

RUT-G channel select (A-factory) 

Reset HTML IP & Passwords 

PWR Green 

RF-TX/RX Red/Green 

BusComm Red/Green 

Status Yellow (off-normal) 

Service Yellow 

Frontier Radio Address Structure 


Transmitter address 150 max per system* 

Number of receivers Unlimited (depending on the number 

of transmitter addresses) 

*Includes transmitters assigned to RUT-G assuming one 

point per transmitter, 150 points maximum. 

PERFORMANCE 

Protocol Interface Key Modules 

LON-KEY LonTalk communication 

CPU Neuron 3150 

Communication type FTT-10, 78 KBPS 

Connection Two-wire non-polar terminals 

Point mix 120 points maximum 

LON-KEY-1 40 NVI-TX only 

LON-KEY-2 40 NVO-RX only 

LON-KEY-3 20 NVI/NVO-TX/RX 

232-KEY RS232 communication 

Baud rate 4800, 9600, or 19,200 

Communication type Serial 

Connection 5 terminals 

Point mix 

Radio 

Limited by transmitter time 

50 points maximum per key 


Channels Four available (A, B, C, D) 



Transmit interval 30 or 60 sec typical 

Adjustable settings From 1 sec to 30 min. 

Modulation Direct sequence spread spectrum 


Analog resolution 12 bits (0-4095 counts) 

Antenna Internal 


LON 

In general, all LON SNVTs are supported, except structured and enumerated types. There are a few special HVAC 

structured and enumerated SNVTs that are supported and are shown in the Typical Point List on the following page. 

Forty NVO/NVIs per protocol key are supported with "changeable" SNVTs and scaling. This makes binding to existing 

LON devices easy without special SNVT conversion. 

RS 232 

All Frontier points are represented with a transmitter module address ID and point number (1-4)(four points per 

transmitter I.D.). The number of total points is limited by the transmitter interval time calculation shown below. 

TRANSMITTER INTERVAL TIME CALCULATIONS 

• Number of Transmitters/1.66 = Minimum Interval Time 

• Interval Time x 1.66 = Maximum Number of 

Transmitters 

Note: Interval time is in seconds. 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 

BATTERY LIFE CALCULATION 

• Interval Time/30 = Battery Life in Years 

(for models RT-R, RT-U) 

Note: Interval time is in seconds. 

The RUT-G follows all the Frontier application rules. Each protocol key handles a different number of Frontier transmitters/receivers 

depending on the protocol key selected. The RUT-G point limit is dependent on the interval time 

and the I/O mix. The Frontier interval time calculation dictates the number of transmitters per Frontier system. A 

channel shift can be programmed to achieve another group of transmitters with a second RUT-G gateway. An unlimited 

number of receivers can be incorporated, depending on the transmitter I/O mix.



MODEL RUT-G 

TYPICAL SAMPLE POINT LIST 

RS232 GATEWAY LON GATEWAY TYPICAL APPLICATION POINT TYPE 

Address/Point/Type Standard Network Variable Type AI AO DI DO LON UNITS 

Full List >90 SNVTs NVO NVI NVO NVI 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_defr_state (122) † Defrost control/monitor X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_evapstate (118) † Evaporator control/monitor X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_hvac_emerg (103) † HVAC system emergency X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_hvac_mode (108) † on/off, off/auto, on/auto, etc. X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_motor_state (155) † Motor on/off or status X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_occupancy (109) † Occupied/Unoccupied X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_override (97) † 

Start/Stop, enable/disable, etc. X X on/off 

aaaa/x/D SNVT_switch (95) †† Any digital on/off X X on/off 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_amp_f (48) Measurement or control X X amperes 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_btu_f (67) Energy measurement X X BTU 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_count_inc_f (52) Counting of cars, people, etc. X X count 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_elec_kwh (13) Electrical consumption X X KWH 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_flow_p (161) Fluid measurement X X liters/sec 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_lev_percent (81) Moisture RH measurement X X % of full 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_power_f (57) Electrical power X X Watts 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_ppm_ (29) Gas concentration X X ppm 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_press_p (113) Gas, water pressure X X Pascals 

aaaa/x/A SNVT_temp_p (105) Temperature measurement X X °C 

aaaa = module 

address, any 

four digits 

x = points 1,2,3 or 4 

A = analog type 

D = digital type 

(4 pts. per module) 

† Special Enumerated SNVTs 

†† Special Structured SNVT 

POINT TYPE AI AO DI DO 

Typical Frontier Field RT-R RO-4 RI-4 RO-4 

Hardware RT-U RDO-2 

RT-S 

RI-4 

LON Gateway Terminology 

NVO - indicates a field variable parameter or point (AI or DI) going out to the LON network 

NVI - indicates a field variable parameter or point (AO or DO) coming in from the LON network 

Frontier_GW.XIF - file provided on a disk with each LON-Key for set up and point mapping 

POINT SET-UP CONFIGURATION 

LON point mapping and SNVT selection are done through a Frontier LNS plug-in. Each Frontier transmitter address 

and point number is mapped to one of 40 NVOs or NVIs per protocol key and selectable SNVTs. An XIF file and 

LNS plug in is included with each LON key. 

RS232 communication is direct to the RUT-G buffer and follows the Kele open protocol for interpretation directly by 

your BAS computer. Documentation is provided for your programmer to write the interface between your BAS computer 

and the RUT-G using the Kele open protocol. Point mapping is through the RJ45 and HTML pages. 

725 



726 



MODEL RUT-G 


Install the RUT-G vertically. A pre-drilled 7/8'' conduit hole is for wire entering from the bottom. Be sure to seal all 

entries if NEMA rating is to be maintained. If installed outdoors, drill four 1/8" weep holes in the bottom at opposite 

ends. The enclosure or PC board should not be enclosed in a metal box so that maximum RF propagation and 

reception is maintained. 

WIRING 

INDICATORS 

LED Red 

LED Green 

LED Yellow 

Push Button 

R 

G 

Y 

UP 

DSSS 

Radio 

R RF-TX 

G RF-RX 

Protocol 

Socket-1 

Protocol 

Socket-2 

Protocol 

Socket-3 

ON OFF 

Frontier 

Gateway 

Interface 

CPU 

CPU-TX R 

CPU-RX G 

Y 

R 

G 

Y 

Y 

R 

G 

Y 

Y 

R 

G 

Y 

G 

POWER 

1=ON 

12345678 

0 SW1 

RJ45 

Service 1 

Service 1 

Key 1 TX 

Key 1 RX 

Status 1 

Service 2 

Service 2 

Key 2 TX 

Key 2 RX 

Status 2 

Service 3 

Service 3 

Key 3 TX 

Key 3 RX 

Status 3 

24 VAC/DC 

CPU 

Interface 

Ref 

Ref 

Ref 

Com 


RF CHANNEL SELECTION 

Tx Rx IP 

CHNL S1 S2 S3 S4 S5-S7 S8** 

A 

B 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

Not 

On 

then 

C 1 0 1 0 Off 

D 1 1 1 1 Used 

Customer supplied (straight or crossover cable) 

Local Ethernet 

HTML Display 

Net A 

Net B 

Tx 

Data 

Rx 

Ref 

RTS 

If used 

CTS 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

Example 

LON to BAS Network 

Example 

RS485 to BAS 

Network 

24 VAC/DC 

Example 

RS232 

to BAS Network 

* Network wiring is dependent on key selection 

** Toggle SW8 on then off to force HTML default settings 


RUT-G Radio motherboard with communication CPU with 3 key docking ports* (3 per RUT-G) 

232-KEY-1* RS232 with open Frontier protocol 

LON-KEY-1* NVI, 40 transmit output points (AO or DO points) 

LON-KEY-2* NVO, 40 receive input points (AI or DI points) 

LON-KEY-3* Mixed NVO/NVI, 20 transmit and 20 receive points (AI, AO, DI, or DO points) 

Note: Each gateway requires a protocol key module (three max per RUT-G). 

*Order keys separately. 


RPT-K Kele Frontier programming tool RUT-LP CD with Frontier LNS plug in, 

RSK-K Kele Frontier survey tool installation manual (pdf), 

ANY KELE FRONTIER WIRELESS MODULE Frontier LON support files



FOR LON, N2, BACNET, AND MODBUS 

The Kele PT-NTx is a PowerTrak communication module. The PT-NTx reads up 

to 23 different power parameters and formats it into the LON, N2, or Modbus 

protocol. 

Details are in the Power Monitoring section of this catalog. 

The Data Industrial 340 BTU meter has versions with LON or N2 protocol communication. 

The BTU value is formatted into LON or N2 protocol and transmitted. 

Details are in the Flow section of this catalog. 

The Vaisala GML20 is a Carbon Dioxide communication module. The GML20 

communication module inserts into a standard Vaisala GM CO2 sensor/transmitter 

and formats the information into the LON protocol. 

Details are in the Specialty Sensors section of this catalog. 

The Bacharach HGM300 refrigerant monitor comes with an RS232 or an optional 

LON or N2 communication option. The HGM300 monitors up to 24 different 

refrigerants and formats it into LON or N2 protocol. 


The Vulcain VA301C refrigerant gas controller comes with an optional 

VA301BDCM module for BACnet connection. The gas level is determined and 

translated into the Modbus or BACnet protocol. The GMTxxx with NET option 

may also be connected to the VA301C for multi-sensor area coverage with 

Modbus communication. 


The Triatek L3500 lighting controller, L28 mini lighting controller, and the retrofit 

L-KIT come standard with an RS485, Johnson/Metasys N2 interface. The addition 

of a Triatek E-LINK module allows for added protocols such as BACnet and 

Modbus communications. 

Details are in the Lighting Controls section of this catalog. 

727 



728 



FOR LON, N2, BACNET, AND MODBUS 

The Triatek TI4500NET telephone lighting circuit control comes standard with an 

RS485, Johnson Metasys N2 interface. The addition of a Triatek E-LINK module 

allows for added protocols such as BACnet and MODBUS communications. 

Details are in the Lighting Controls section of this catalog. 

The Viconics KTEC is a non-programmable or programmable thermostat with 

BACnet, LON, and N2 versions. There is no visible logo on the thermostat and it 

comes in 1H/1C through 3H/2C conventional or heat pump applications 

Details are in the HVAC Controls section of this catalog. 

The Belimo AF, AM, and GM series damper motors come in LON communication 

versions. They receive LON protocol direction over the FTT-10A network and 

position the damper or valve accordingly. 

Details are in the Actuators & Dampers section of this catalog. 

The Belimo NV and NVF series valve actuator motors come in LON communication 

versions. They receive LON protocol direction over the FTT-10A network and 

position the valve accordingly. 

Details are in the Control Valves section of this catalog. 

The Functional Devices RIBTW series is a LON, 20amp SPDT relay in a box. 

They receive LON protocol direction over the FTT-10A network and position the 

relay accordingly and provide position feedback. 

Details are in the Relays & Contactors section of this catalog. 

The RUT-G can be used to represent any LON device by using changeable 

SNVTs. Any type of I/O point can connected wirelessly to the RUT-G using a universal 

RI-4 or RO-4 module and be represented as a LON point using the LON- 

KEY-x and the FTT-10A network wiring. 

Details are in previous pages of this section of the catalog. 

AM Series 

AF Series 

GM Series

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

PRODUCTS 

See the NEW 

Explosionproof Horns 

& Strobes on page 765! 

SERVICES 

We can assemble 

Explosion-proof 

Custom Panels for your 

application. 

NEW SOLUTIONS 

See Explosionproof 

Controls on page 789 

for an explanation of 

applying products. 



Application Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729 

ENCLOSURES & ACCESSORIES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

5530M, 878EX, 879EX, 105, 106EXMST — Explosionproof Horns and Strobes765 

CXJ Series— Explosionproof Custom Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766 

EJB and GUBB Series — Explosionproof Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763 

GRT, EYM, PLG50 — Explosionproof Conduit Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767 

AC1/AC1A / ACK6F / F01 / F01A — Conduit Sealing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . .768 

HL600 — Explosionproof Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742 

FLOW & LEVEL MONITORING FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

200-IS Series — Intrinsically Safe Water Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .754 

ELP Echo Touch — Intrinsically Safe Ultrasonic Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .751 

L4 — Explosionproof Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753 

V4-2-U — Explosionproof Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753 

INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

MTL7000 and MTL5000 Series — Intrinsic Safety Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .769 

PRESSURE SENSORS & SWITCHES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

1950G Series — Explosionproof Low Differential Pressure Switches . . . . . . . .738 

H3B Series — Explosionproof Differential Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737 

IXldp — Intrinsically Safe Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 

K1 Series — Intrinsically Safe Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741 

SPECIALTY SENSORS FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

140T — Intrinsically Safe Vibration Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .749 

HL600 — Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734 

550-X — Explosionproof Vibration Transmitter/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .747 

GMT Series — Explosionproof Toxic/Combustible Gas Transmitters . . . . . . . . .745 

ISPR2 Series Plant Rat — Intrinsically Safe Gas Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 

TEMPERATURE & MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

30-3003D — Explosionproof Duct Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .761 

A19AUC — Explosionproof Bulb Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757 

MA6, MP6 Series — 

Explosionproof Gear Train Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760 

EPETD8S, T6051B1006 — Explosionproof Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .758 

HZLIM Series — Explosionproof High/Low Limit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755 

ZS-260 — Explosionproof Direct Coupled Actuator Enclosures for Dampers . . .759 

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSORS FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 

TT881 — Explosionproof Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733 

HT880 —Explosionproof Humidity / Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735 

ST-X� Series — Explosionproof Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 

TT211 — Intrinsically Safe RTD Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731 



APPLICATION GUIDE 

The Application Guide below is a quick reference guide to applying automation system interface devices in hazardous 

locations. Additional information on explosionproof and intrinsically safe systems can be found in the Technical Reference 

section. The Application Guide covers the most common applications based upon customers' 

requests and is not intended to be all-inclusive. If the application desired is not listed, please contact Trane for assistance. 

APPLICATION 

Space Temperature Sensor 

Duct Temperature Sensor 

Immersion Temperature 

Sensor 

Space Humidity Sensor 

Duct Humidity Sensor 

Space or Duct Humidistat 

Duct High and Low 

Temperature Limit Controller 

Wall Thermostat 

Pressure or Differential 

Pressure Transmitter 

Pressure or Differential 

Pressure Switch 

Liquid Flow Transmitter 

Liquid Flow Switch 

Liquid Level Transmitter 

Liquid Level Switch 

Toxic/Combustible 

Gas Sensors 

Duct Smoke Detector 

Vibration Monitor or Switch 

Damper/Valve Actuators 

Relays, Contactors, and other 

Electronic Controls 

Custom Enclosures, 

Strobes, Horns 

TT211 transmitter, MTL7206 barrier and 

any ST-S81 or S91 RTD sensor 


any ST-D81, D91, U81, or U91 RTD sensor 


any ST-W81, ST-W91, U81 or U91 RTD sensor 

HT880 humidity transmitter 

with probe 


with probe 

HC-101, HC-201, or W43 humidistat (note 1 below) with 

MTL5011B isolators as needed 

A11 or A70 limit controller (note 1 below) with 


TC-110X, T26, or other simple dry contact thermostat 

(note 1 below) with MTL5011B isolators as needed 

IXLdp or K1 transmitter with MTL7206 barrier 

RH-3, P74, 1910, P10, or other simple dry contact switch 

(note 1 below) with MTL5011B isolators as needed 

200-IS Series IS flow sensors, UFT-1, and MTL7265ac 

barrier 

FS1-6 or F61 Series flow switch (note 1 below) with 


ELP ultrasonic IS transmitter with MTL7206 barrier 

F7, L8, or other simple dry contact switch (note 1 below) 

with MTL5011B isolators as needed 

Plant Rat with MTL7206 barrier 

N/A 

140T IS transmitter with MTL7206 barrier 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

INTRINSICALLY SAFE 

SOLUTION 

ST-X◊ wall-mount RTD or 

thermistor sensor 

TT881 RTD transmitter 

with probe 

TT881 RTD transmitter 

with probe and well 


with probe 


with probe 

N/A 

HZLIM Series field-assembled 

limit controls or A19AUC-2 

EPET or T6051B thermostat 

N/A 

H3B or 1950G differential pressure 

switches 

N/A 

V4 vane-operated flow switch 

N/A 

L4 float switch 

EXPLOSIONPROOF 

SOLUTION 

GMT gas monitor/transmitter with 

explosionproof housing option 

30-3003D duct smoke detector 

550-X transmitter/switch 

ZS-200, ZS-250, AM-401 actuator 

enclosures 

EJB and GUBB series of explosionproof 

enclosures (note 2 below) 

CXJ, 5530M, 878EX, 105, 106EXP 

Notes: 

1. Dry contacts, thermistors, RTDs, and other devices conforming to the definition of "simple apparatus" require that the sensing 

circuit limit the applied voltage and current to 1.2V and 100 mA maximum. Power dissipation and stored energy in the 

hazardous area must be limited to 25 mW and 20 mJ. Switches, thermistors, and RTDs used to sense ambient conditions may 

generally be given a temperature rating of T6 (185°F/85°C), but they must always be checked against the ignition temperature 

of the hazardous atmosphere. 

2. EJB and GUBB enclosures are available in a wide range of sizes and configurations. If the project calls for something other 

than the standard products shown in this catalog, contact Trane for availability of custom configurations. 

729 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



EXPLOSIONPROOF ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR 

MODEL ST-X� 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model ST-X� Explosionproof Room Temperature 

Sensor provides accurate space temperature sensing in 

a compact, unobtrusive housing suitable for wall mounting. 

The all-aluminum NEMA 7/NEMA 9 enclosure minimizes 

time lag and allows installation in most atmospheres 

containing flammable gases or dusts (Groups C, 

D, E, F, G). 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; 

Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G 

• NEMA 7CD, 9EFG 

• RTD or thermistor styles available 

• E-Z mount (1/2" NPT conduit entries top and bottom) 

• Compact, unobtrusive package 



Material Copper-free aluminum enclosure 


Model Sensor Type Accuracy 

ST-X3, 21, 22, 24, 27, 42 Thermistor ±0.36°F (0.2°C) 

ST-X81 and 85 Platinum thin film RTD ±0.48°F (0.27°C) @ 32°F (0°C) 

ST-X91 Platinum thin film RTD ±0.91°F (0.46°C) @ 32°F (0°C) 

730 


(14.3 x 16.2 x 11.4 cm) 

Leads #24 AWG, 8'L (2.4m) 

WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classified as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen and others). 

Where temperature sensing in these areas is required, an intrinsically safe system using the Model TT211 transmitter 

is recommended. 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from sensor to maintain explosionproof rating. 



ST-X3 10,000� thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type III material (gray leads) 

ST-X21 2252� thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (green leads) 

ST-X22 3000� thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (blue leads) 

ST-X24 10,000� thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (yellow leads) 

ST-X27 100,000� thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type II material (gray leads) 

ST-X42 20,000� thermistor @ 77°F (25°C), Type IV material (green leads) 

ST-X81 100� RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.0385 �/�/°C (yellow leads) 

ST-X85 1000� RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.0385 �/�/°C (blue leads) 

ST-X91 1000� RTD @ 32°F (0°C), 0.0375 �/�/°C (green leads) 

TM 

A Kele Company


INTRINSICALLY SAFE RTD TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT211 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model TT211 Intrinsically Safe RTD Transmitter 

takes a standard RTD input and provides an accurate 4- 

20 mA output over any of three factory calibrated temperature 

ranges. When coupled with a Model MTL7206 

safety barrier and appropriate cabling, both the Model 

TT211 and the RTD are suitable for use in hazardous 

locations without the use of explosionproof enclosures. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D with 

intrinsic safety barrier 

• Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2 areas 

without barrier 

• Accuracy ±0.1% of span 


• Epoxy potted for moisture resistance 

• Zero and span adjustable to ±5% of span 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 


Sensor input Platinum RTD, 

100� (0.00385 �/�/°C) 

or 1000� (0.00375 �/�/°C) 

Configuration Two-wire, loop powered 


Linearity (accuracy) ±0.1% of span 



575� @ 20 VDC 

325� @ 15 VDC 

0.5 

(1.27) 

0.15 (0.38) I.D. 

through 

1.5 

(3.81) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

1.0 

(2.54) 

0.68 

(1.71) 

1.09 

(2.71) 

Mounting: Use #6 screw 

through or #8 thread forming screw 


0.08 

(0.20) 



Temp effect ±0.007% of span per °F 

(± 0.013% per °C) 

Intrinsically safe FM approved Class I, Div 1, 

Groups A, B, C, D 

Entity parameters Vmax 35V 

I max 150 mA 

Ci 0 µF 

Li 0 mH 

FM 

APPROVED 

731 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



INTRINSICALLY SAFE RTD TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT211 

CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous 

locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. When the 

Model TT211 transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance 

between the two must be limited to 0.12 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent 

to 2200'/823m maximum Belden ® #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/FT). 

WIRING 

732 

RTD 

4 

3 

2 

1 

TT211 

Maximum Cable 

C = 0.12 �F 

L = 4.0 mH 

Hazardous 

Area 

Safe Area 

4-20 mA 

MTL7206 

IS Barrier 

4 1 

5 2 

3 




TT211 Intrinsically-safe RTD transmitter 

PD For 100Ω platinum RTD, TCR=0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C 

PW For 1000Ω platinum RTD, TCR=0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C 

RANGE 

1EN -20° to 140°F (-28.9° to 60°C) 

1S 0° to 100°F (-17.8° to 37.8°C) 

1BN 30° to 240°F (-1.1° to 115.6°C) 

20-35 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

Note: Contact Kele for additional 

ranges and RTD types. 

TT211 PW 1EN Example: TT211-PW-1EN Transmitter with range of -20° to 140°F (-28.9° to 60°C) 

for 1000Ω platinum RTD (TCR=0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C) 


MTL7206 Intrinsic safety barrier for two-wire 4-20 mA transmitters 

ST-A91 1000� platinum RTD all-purpose temperature probe 

ST-W91 1000� platinum RTD immersion temperature probe 

ST-D91 1000� platinum RTD duct temperature probe 

ST-S91 1000� platinum RTD space temperature sensor 

ST-A81 100� platinum RTD all-purpose temperature probe 

ST-W81 100� platinum RTD immersion temperature probe 

ST-D81 100� platinum RTD duct temperature probe 

ST-S81 100� Platinum RTD space temperature sensor


EXPLOSIONPROOF PLATINUM RTD TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT881 

DESCRIPTION 

Minco’s Model TT881 Explosionproof Platinum RTD 

Transmitter is designed for temperature measurement 

in applications calling for a rugged industrial housing. 

This RTD transmitter may be ordered for 100� and 

1000� 385 platinum RTD or 1000� 375 platinum RTD. 

The NEMA 4X housing is approved as explosionproof 

when combined with Minco’s FM-approved housing and 

integral probe. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D 

• Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G 

• NEMA 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG 

• Field rangeable 

• Accepts 100� or 1000� RTDs 

• High RFI/EMI immunity 

• NIST certificate available 

• 4-20 mA loop powered 

• Substitute for discontinued HCT-881 Hy-Cal transmitters 


TT881 

Calibrated accuracy ±0.01% of span 

Rangeability 

Zero -58° to 122°F (-50° to 50°C) 

Span 45° to 1080°F (25° to 600°C) 

Zero/Span adjust Noninteractive 

Output 4-20 mA, two-wire standard 

Input voltage effect 0.001% of span/volt max (negligible) 

for 10-45 VDC 

Transmitter linearity ±0.2% of span for any range 

from -58° to 1022°F (-50° to 550°C) 

Temp coefficient ±0.002% of span/°C 

Housing NEMA 4X, FM approved, explosionproof 

Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; 

Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G 

Terminations Terminal screws 


Mounting 

Immersion Includes an integral sensor mounted 

via 1/2" NPT threads with 1/4" probe 

Wall/Pipe Pipe/Wall mounting hardware available 

for surface installations with 

accessory AC103168 


Max load (Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02A, 

i.e., (24-10 VDC) / 0.02 = 700� 

Operating environment -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) 

noncondensing 

TT881-A with Probe 

SENSOR 



PD 100�, 385 platinum, three-wire sensor 

0.00385 �/�/°C 

PF 1000�, 385 platinum, two-wire sensor 

0.00385 �/�/°C 

PW 1000�, 375 platinum, two-wire sensor 

0.00375 �/�/°C 

Ice point 

resistance, R O 

100� ±0.1�, ±0.12% 

1000� ±1�, ±0.12% 

FM 

APPROVED 

Stability Better than 0.25°C per year 

Insulation resistance Sheath: 500°F (260°C), 100 M� @ 

50 VDC min 

Probe material Stainless steel body 

Explosionproof Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; 


NEMA 4X with thermowell; without 

thermowell, explosionproof 

indoor only 

Factory Mutual, File #3012833 

Pressure 2750 psig (18,961 kPa) max 

@ 500°F 

Standard length 5.5"L (13.97 cm), 0.25" (0.64 cm) 

probe, 1/2" NPT mounting 

733 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



EXPLOSIONPROOF PLATINUM RTD TRANSMITTER 

MODEL TT881 


in 

(cm) 

734 

3.7 

(9.4) 

Zero and Span 

Adjustments under 

cover 

4.25 

(10.80) 

TT881 

1.5 

(3.81) 

5.5 

(13.97) 

Wall Mount 

(AC103168 Option) 


+ – 



* PD 100Ω 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 


* PW 1000Ω 0.00375 Ω/Ω/°C platinum curve, 6" leads 

LLL Length LLL in .1" increments 055 = 5.5", 120 = 12.0", 000 for “W” without sensors 

E Duct mount, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 8.0" 

* P Immersion, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 5.5" for 6" well insertion 

W Wall mount, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 2.0" or 000 for no probe 


EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20°/140°F) or (-29°/60°C) 

* S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0°/100°F) or (-18°/38°C) 




-- Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog 

SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -40°/-10°F 

1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter 

* 2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0°C with NIST 


TT881 PW 055 P 1 S 2 

*Normally stocked item 

Example: TT881PW055P1S2 Transmitter with 5.5" immersion probe, 

1000Ω 375 curve platinum RTD, ranged for 0°/100°F, with 

NIST matched @ 0°C 

Power Supply 

10 to 45 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose. If work must be performed with 

an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible 

gas detector such as the Model 101 personal combustible gas monitor. 

CAUTION: Conduit seals MUST be installed within code-required distance from the enclosure to maintain explosionproof rating. For 

Group B and C atmospheres, seals must be installed within 2" (5 cm) of the enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements. 


AC103168 Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit EYM-50 1/2" Sealing fitting for rigid conduit 

WB-6 Brass insertion well for 5.5" (13.97 cm) probes ACK6F4 Sealing kit with fiber and cement 

WS-6 Stainless steel insertion well for 5.5" (13.97 cm) probes 101 Personal combustible gas monitor 

GFF-50 1/2" FNPT duct mounting flange 

RTD


EXPLOSIONPROOF/INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY AND 


HT880 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model HT880 Explosionproof/Intrinsically Safe 

Humidity Transmitter is designed for rugged industrial 

use. Approved by FM for hazardous locations, this system 

provides safe, reliable, and accurate humidity and 

optional temperature measurement. The capacitive film 

sensor is ideal for low and high humidity measurement 

with 4-20 mA outputs. The HT880 comes with a stainless 

steel sintered filter and an optional NIST traceable certificate. 

The HT885 has a digital display. 


Supply voltage (SV) 16.5 to 28 VDC 

Entity parameters Vmax 28V, Imax 100 mA, 

Ci-0 µF, Li-0 mH 

Output current limit 3.8 to 22 mA 

Output signal 4-20 mA = 0-100% RH 

Opt. 4-20 mA = temp range 

Sensor type RH Thin film capacitive element 

Opt. temperature 1000� platinum RTD, 385 curve 

Accuracy ±2.5% RH from 10 to 80% RH 

Includes Hysteresis, linearity, repeatability, 

and all temperature and 

voltage effects 

Response time 50 seconds in slow-moving air 

Sensor range 0 to 100% RH 

Load impedance @24 VDC, FI= 725�, 

FX = 375� 

Intrinsically safe (FI) R = (SV - 9.5V)/0.02A 

Explosionproof (FX) R = (SV - 16.5V)/0.02A 

Display (HT885) 3.5 digit LCD display, %RH 

and optional °F or °C 

HT880 

with 

AC103168 

bracket 

HT885 

Adjustments Non-interacting zero/span 

Sensor filter 60 micron stainless steel 

sintered filter 

Enclosure Metal with screw on cover 

Mounting AC103168 bracket 

Ambient 0 to 100% non-condensing 

Transmitter (HT880) -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C) 

Transmitter (HT885) -4° to 176°F (-20° to 80°C) 

Sensor probe -40° to 302°F (-40° to 150°C) 

Agency approvals FM; 

Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups A-D; 

Class II, Div 1, 2, Groups E-G; 

Class III, Div 1, 2; 

Class I, Zone 0, Aex [ia] IIC T4 


Wiring Terminals, 22-14 AWG 

Mech. connection 1/2 FNPT conduit 

Weight 

HT880 2.8 lb (1.3 kg) 

HT885 4.5 lb (2.02 kg) 


locations. Provide wiring and grounding in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. When the 

Model HT-880 is combined with the MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance must be limited 

to 0.12 µF, and inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden ® 

#8760 18/2 shielded cable 0.18 µH/FT, 44 pF/FT). 

FM 

APPROVED 

735 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


736 


EXPLOSIONPROOF/INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY AND 


HT880 SERIES 

WIRING 

Temperature sensor 

connection 

Hazardous area Safe area 

4-20 mA loop 

Temperature 

4-20 mA loop 

Humidity 

Humidity sensor 

connection 

Associated 

apparatus #2 

Associated 

apparatus #1 

Controller 

and/or 

Indicator 

RL 

RL 

Controller 

and/or 

Indicator 

Control room 

– DC 

+ Supply 

WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose. If 

work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must 

be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector such as the Model 101 personal 

combustible gas monitor. 

CAUTION: Conduit seals MUST be installed within code-required distance from the enclosure to maintain 

explosionproof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be within 2" (5 cm) of the 

enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements. 

Line 

Power 


DIMENSIONS 

4.15 ref 


HT880 Industrial-grade, ±2.5% RH, 4-20 mA transmitter 

HT885D Industrial-grade, ±2.5% RH, 4-20 mA transmitter with LCD display 

CALIBRATION 

N25 NIST three-point ±2.5% calibration certificate 

S25 Standard ±2.5% calibration 

TEMPERATURE OPTIONS 

NT No temperature transmitter 

EN -20° to 140°F (-28° to 60°C) 

S 0° to 100°F (-18° to 38°C) 

SX Special calibration range 

PROBE LENGTH 

06 6" inch probe length 

12 12" inch probe length 

AGENCY APPROVAL 

FX FM approved, explosionproof 

FI FM approved, instrinsically safe 

N Industrial-grade humidity transmitter 


AC103168 Pipe wall mounting bracket 

EYM-50 1/2" sealing fitting for rigid conduit 

ACK6F4 Sealing kit with fiber and cement 

101 Personal combustible monitor 

GFF-50 1/2" FNPT duct mounting flange 

4.45 ref Insertion depth 

Probe 

1/2 NPT OR G1/2 

process thread 

Connection head 

Model CH106 

Conduit 

thread 

HT880 

Sintered 

cap


EXPLOSIONPROOF DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 

H3B SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The H3B Series Explosionproof Differential Pressure 

Switch monitors differential pressure of noncorrosive gases or 

liquids in a hazardous environment. The H3B Series has a concealed 

field-adjustable set point within its NEMA 4X enclosure. 

The enclosure has an aluminum housing and brass base with 

explosionproof ratings for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D 

and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. The SPDT contacts are 

wired to terminal blocks, and pressure connections are through 

1/8" FNPT ports. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D 


• Ranges from 0.025" W.C. to 200 psid (6.2 Pa to 1379 kPa) 

• Adjustable set point within range 

• SPDT 5A contacts 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Cover Set 

Screw 

3/4 NPT 

Conduit 

Connection 

5.38 

(13.67) 

Set Point 

(under cover) 


4 

(10.16) 

Cover 

1.75 

3 (4.45) 

(7.62) 

1/8 NPT 

Low Pressure 

Connection 

1/8 NPT High 

Pressure 

Connection 

Ambient 32° to 220°F (0 to 104°C) 

Burst pressure 1500 psig (10,342 kPa) 

Electrical SPDT terminals, 5A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC 

Conduit opening 3/4" FNPT 

Pressure 1/8" FNPT 

connections 

Diaphragm Nitrile 

WIRING 

N.O. 

C. 

N.C. 

GND 

3 

2 

1 


WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classified 

as Group A (acetylene). 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within coderequired 

distance from DP switch to maintain explosionproof 

rating. 

Closes on differential pressure rise 

Opens on differential pressure rise 

Classifications Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; 


Agency UL listed, CSA 


Ranges 4 ranges (see Ordering Information) 

Set point Concealed and adjustable within range 

MODEL SET POINT RANGE 

H3B-1SL 10-180" W. C. (2.48-44.78 kPa) 

H3B-2SL 0.5-15 psid (3.44-103 kPa) 

H3B-3SL 5-70 psid (34.4-482 kPa) 

H3B-4SL 10-200 psid (68.9-1379 kPa) 


EYM-75 3/4" Sealing fitting for rigid conduit 

ACK6F Sealing kit with fiber and cement 

737 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



EXPLOSIONPROOF AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 

1950G SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 1950G Series Explosionproof Air Differential 

Pressure Switch monitors differential air pressure in a 

hazardous environment. The 1950G Series has an external 

screw-type set point adjustment and a NEMA 7 and 

9 rated enclosure. The enclosure is anodized cast aluminum 

with explosionproof rating for Class I, Division 1, 

Groups A, B, C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, 

G. The optional Model A-602 pressure probe kit allows 

the 1950G Series to monitor filter pressure drop. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; 


• Ranges from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4 to 4981 Pa) 

• Adjustable set point within range 

• SPDT 10A contacts 


Ambient 0° to 140°F (-18° to 60°C) 

Burst pressure 10 psig (69 kPa) 

Power supply 40 mA max @ 120 VAC 

Switch SPDT, 10A @ 240 VAC/28 VDC 

Connections 1/8" NPT 


in 

(cm) 

1/2" NPT 

Electrical 

Conduit 

Connection 

1/8" NPT High 

Pressure Port 

738 

0.26" dia (0.66) 

Mounting Holes (2) 

Range Adjustment 

Screw 

1.68 

(4.27) 

5.43 

4.87 (13.79) 

(12.37) 

1/8" NPT Low 

Pressure Port 

Vent Drain 

Plug 

3.5 

(8.89) 

1.43 

(3.63) 

0.38 

(0.95) 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required 

distance from DP switch to maintain explosionproof rating. 

Diaphragm Buna-N 

Classifications Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D 


Agency UL listed, FM, CSA 


C. 

N.O. 

N.C. 

+ 

– 

Closes on high differential pressure 

Opens on high differential pressure 

120 VAC 


OPERATING RANGE 

APPROXIMATE DEADBAND "W.C. (Pa) 

MODEL "W.C. Pa At Min Setpoint At Max Setpoint 

1950G-00 

0.07-0.15 17.4-37.3 

0.04 (10) 

0.06 (14.9) 

1950G-0 

0.15-0.5 37.3-124.5 

0.06 (14.9) 

0.11 (27.4) 

1950G-1 

0.4-1.6 99.6-398.5 

0.11 (27.4) 

0.29 (72.2) 

1950G-5 

1.4-5.5 348.7-1370 

0.4 (99.6) 

0.9 (224) 

1950G-10 

3.0-11.0 747.2-2740 

0.9 (224) 

1.8 (448) 

1950G-20 

4.0-20 

996-4981 

1.2 (299) 

3.0 (747) 


EYM-50 1/2" sealing fitting for rigid conduit 

ACK-6F Sealing kit with fiber and cement 

A-602 Dual probe duct pressure sampling kit 

FM 

APPROVED


INTRINSICALLY SAFE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL IXLdp 

DESCRIPTION 

The Ashcroft Model IXLdp (XFM option) is an intrinsically safe, 

industrial- quality, differential pressure transmitter for use on air 

and other noncorrosive gases. The Model IXLdp is available 

with accuracies of 0.25% and 0.50% in ranges of 0.1 "W.C. to 

200 "W.C. in uni-directional or bi-directional pressure ranges. 

FEATURES 

• 100 psig static line pressure 

• 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy down to 0.05 "W.C. 

• Uni-directional or bi-directional ranges 

• 300 Series cast stainless steel body 

• NEMA 4X 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

Access Cover 

(terminal block) 

2.7 

(6.9) 

0.2 Type 

(2) Places 

Mounting Foot 


Accuracy 0.25% or 0.50% 

Signal 4-20 mA @ 1000� max 

impedance 

Ranges See Ordering Information on next 

page 

Proof pressure 15 psid 

Burst differential 

pressure 50 psis 

Max static pressure 100 psis 

Medium Clean, dry, noncorrosive gas 


Voltage 20-35 VDC 


INSTALLATION 

Mounting Foot 

4.3 

(10.9) 

Span Pot 

Zero Pot 

Location 

Mounting 

Foot 

Ø0.2 (0.5) 

1.4 (3.6) 

0.7 (1.8) 

1/2 NPSM Thread Type 

(both sides for conduit piping) 

5.0 (12.7) 

2.7 

(6.9) 

4.6 

(11.7) 

Access Cover 

(zero and span pots) 

3.0 

(7.6) 

1/4 NPT 

Pressure 

Fittings 

High Low 

0.7 (1.8) 

1.4 

(3.6) 

3.0 

(7.6) 

FM 

APPROVED 

Intrinsically safe 

entity parameters Class I, II, III, Div 1 & 2, Groups 

A-G, Vmax = 36V, Imax=250 mA, 

Ci=12 nF, Li=0 

Nonincendive Class I, Div 2, Groups A-D, 

suitable for Class II, Div 2, 

Groups F and G, Class III 

Max supply voltage 36V 

Max supply current 250 mA 

Agency FM 



Process connections Two 1/4"NPT female 

Electrical connections Two 1/2" conduit connections 

female 

The transducer should be used with clean, dry air or other dry noncorrosive gases. The unit should be mounted with #8 or #10 

screws using the three mounting feet provided. The transducer can be mounted in any orientation with virtually no effect on calibration. 

Any minor zero pressure offsets that are encountered can be adjusted using the zero-adjust potentiometer. The high- and 

low-pressure connection ports are plugged to avoid debris entering the unit. The plugs should be left in place until the tubing and 

fittings are connected. The two 1/4" NPT pressure connections should be sealed to the transducer housing using Teflon® tape. Do 

not use dope-type sealant. 

0.8 

(2.0) 

2.5 

(6.4) 

739 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



INTRINSICALLY SAFE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

MODEL IXLdp 

CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. 

Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. When the Model IXLdp transmitter 

is combined with the Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited 

to 0.12 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden ® #8760 

18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/FT). 

WIRING 

740 

Earth 

Ground 

Hazardous Area Safe Area 

MTL7206 

IS Barrier 

4 1 

4-20 mA 5 

2 

6 

3 


20-35 VDC 



IX Differential pressure transmitter 

ACCURACY 

3 0.25% accuracy 

5 0.5% accuracy 

PRESSURE CONNECTION 

FO2 1/4" NPT female pressure connection 

OUTPUT SIGNAL 

42 4-20 mA output signal 

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 

ST Screw terminals 


Differential or Gauge Compound 

P1IW 0.10" W.C. (24.9 Pa) P05IWL ±0.05" W.C. (12.4 Pa) 



1IW 1.00" W.C. (249.1 Pa) P25IWL ±0.25" W.C. (62.24 Pa) 

2IW 2.00" W.C. (498.2 Pa) P5IWL ±0.50" W.C. (124.6 Pa) 

2P5IW 2.50" W.C. (622.4 Pa) 1IWL ±1.00" W.C. (249.1 Pa) 

3IW 3.00" W.C. (747.3 Pa) 2IWL ±2.00" W.C. (498.2 Pa) 

5IW 5.00" W.C. (1245.5 Pa) 2P5IWL ±2.50" W.C. (622.4 Pa) 





50IW 50.00" W.C. (12.4 kPa) 20IWL ±20.00" W.C. (4979.3 Pa) 

100IW 100.00" W.C. (24.9 kPa) 25IWL ±25.00" W.C. (6224.1 Pa) 

150IW 150.00" W.C. (37.3 kPa) 50IWL ±50.00" W.C. (12.4 kPa) 

200IW 200.00" W.C. (49.8 kPa) 100IWL ±100.00" W.C. (24.9 kPa) 

OPTIONS 

XFM Factory mutual approval (required for intrinsically safe) 

X41 5:1 Turndown 

IX 3 FO2 42 ST 5IW XFM X41 Example: IX-3-FO2-42-ST-5IW-XFM IS differential pressure 

transducer, 0.25% accuracy, 4-20 mA output, 

5 "W.C. range 


MTL7206 Intrinsic safety barrier 

A-602 Dual-probe duct pressure sample kit 

4-20 mA 

Signal


INTRINSICALLY SAFE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 

K1 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The K1 Series of thin film pressure transmitters is exceptionally 

stable and virtually unaffected by shock, vibration, or orientation. 

Performance is directly traceable to NIST standards, and a 

calibration certificate is available for each unit upon request. 

These intrinsically safe (IS) transmitters are ideal for monitoring 

pressures in explosive atmospheres. 

FEATURES 


Class II, Division 1, Group G; Class III 

• Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D 

• 0.5% accuracy, all ranges 

• 4-20 mA, loop powered 

• Ranges from 100-3000 psig (690-20,685 kPa) 




Thermal effects ±0.03% FS/°F zero and span 



Overpressure 

Proof 150% 

Burst 300% 

Temp Noncorrosive gases or liquids 




CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of 

an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous 

locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in 

accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. When a 

K1 Series transmitter is combined with the Model 

MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance 

between the two must be limited to 0.12 µF. Total cable 

inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 

2700'/823m maximum Belden ® #8760 18/2 shielded 

twisted pair cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/FT). 

Case material 304 stainless steel 

Connection 1/8" NPT male 316 stainless steel 

Diaphragm 17-4 PH stainless steel 

Zero/Span Field adjustable ±10% 


Dimensions 4"L x 5/8" dia (10.2 x 1.6 cm) 

Classifications IS Class I, Div 1, Groups C, D; 

Class II, Div 1, Group G; Class III 

Agency UL listed, Factory Mutual 

Safety parameters V max =30V, I max =250 mA, L i =0, 

C i =0.1 µF 

WIRING 

B- 

K1 

R+ 


Hazardous 

Area 

MTL7206 

Safe Area 

IS Barrier 

4 1 

5 2 

3 


MODEL DESCRIPTION RANGE psig (kPa) 

K15M0142F2-100-XFM 4-20 mA IS pressure transmitter 0-100 (690) 




K15M0142F2-3000-XFM 4-20 mA IS pressure transmitter 0-3000 (20,685) 

Additional ranges available. Contact Trane for availability. 



PT Steam pigtail syphon 

20-35 VDC 

+ - 

+ 

- 

FM 

APPROVED 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

741 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


742 


HAZARDOUS LOCATION CONTROL STATIONS 

HL600 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The HL600 Series hazardous location control stations 

allow alarm and control interface in a hazardous environment. 

The standard unit enclosure is rated NEMA 7/9 in a 

diecast aluminum enclosure. Contacts are included. A 1/2" 

- 14 NPT threaded opening is on the bottom. There are 11 

standard legends, but special legends can be provided. 

FEATURES 

• NEMA 7/9 diecast aluminum enclosure surface 

mount 

• Rated Class I Groups B, C, D; Class II Groups E, F, G 

• Contacts included 

• Momentary contacts available on special order 

• Twelve standard legends, specials available 

• Mechanically interlocked maintained contacts 

• UL Listed 

CONTACT ELECTRICAL RATINGS 

AC - NEMA TYPE B600 DC - NEMA TYPE P600 

Inductive 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor Inductive and Resistive 

Make Break Continuous Make, Break, and Make and Continuous 

Volts Amps VA Amps VA Carrying Amps Continuous Carrying Amps Volts Break Amps Carrying Amps 

120 30.5 3600 3.75 360 5 5 120 1.1 5 

240 15.0 3600 1.5 360 5 5 240 .55 5 

480 7.5 3600 .75 360 5 5 600 .2 5 

600 6.0 3600 .6 360 5 5 



HL600 Hazardous location control station - surface mount - buttons labeled “On” and “Off” 

STOP EMERGENCY - STOP 

POWER EMERGENCY - POWER OFF 

SHUTDOWN EMERGENCY - SHUTDOWN 

FUEL FUEL SHUT-OFF 

FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP CONTROL 

GAS GAS SHUT-OFF 

BOILER BOILER SHUTDOWN 

HVAC HVAC SHUTDOWN 

VENT VENTILATION STOP 

VENTSTART VENTILATION START 

REFRIG REFRIGERATION STOP 

CHILLER CHILLER STOP 

SL SPECIFIC LEGEND - SPECIFY 

– Maintained mechanically interlocked contacts (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.) 

MO Momentary contacts (2 N.O.) 

EX Extended head on red button 

RS Green button labeled “RESET”, red button labeled “STOP” 

CI Custom inscriptions on one or both buttons (specify) 

HL600 – CHILLER – EX 

MODEL HL600 

HL600-FUEL-CI HL600-BOILER-EX 

Example: HL600-CHILLER-EX Hazardous location control 

station labeled “CHILLER STOP” with extended 

head on “Off” button.


INTRINSICALLY SAFE GAS SENSOR 

ISPR2 SERIES PLANT RAT 

DESCRIPTION 

The ISPR2 Series Plant Rat Intrinsically Safe Gas 

Sensor is a microprocessor-based system for continuous 

effective monitoring of toxic gases. Each Plant Rat 

is a two-wire, 4-20 mA device with output in proportion 

to the level of gas present. An LCD display in the attractive 

case gives a visual indication of the gas level in the 

atmosphere. The highly accurate and very stable electrochemical 

sensors provide reliability at a reasonable 

cost. Coupled with the Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety 

barrier, the Plant Rat may be safely used in hazardous 

atmospheres. 

FEATURES 



• Attractive compact case design 

• LCD indication 


• Two-wire hookup 

• Gases detected: Carbon Monoxide, Nitrogen 

Dioxide (diesel exhaust), Hydrogen, Chlorine, 

Ammonia, Hydrogen Sulfide, Oxygen, Sulfur 

Dioxide 


locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. 

When a Plant Rat transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable 

capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12µF. Total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH 

(equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden ® #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/FT). 



Accuracy See Range Chart (next page) 

Drift Span


744 


INTRINSICALLY SAFE GAS SENSOR 

ISPR2 SERIES PLANT RAT 

WIRING 

RANGE CHART 

RET 

+24 

Plant Rat 

IS Sensor 

Hazardous 

Area 

Safe Area 

4-20 mA 

MTL7206 

IS Barrier 

4 1 

5 2 

3 



20-35 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

DETECTION DETECTABLE 

GAS RANGE ACCURACY 

Carbon monoxide 0-200 ppm ±1 ppm 

Nitrogen dioxide 0-10 ppm ±0.1 ppm 

Hydrogen 0-800 ppm ±1 ppm 

Chlorine 0-10 ppm ±0.1 ppm 

Ammonia 0-100 ppm ±0.5 ppm 

Hydrogen sulfide 0-50 ppm ±0.25 ppm 

Oxygen 0% to 25% ±0.1% 

Sulfur dioxide 0-10 ppm ±0.5 ppm 

MODEL GAS DETECTED RANGE 

ISPR2-DM5 Carbon monoxide 0-200 ppm 

ISPR2-DD1 Nitrogen dioxide 0-10 ppm 

ISPR2-DY3 Hydrogen 0-800 ppm 

ISPR2-DC2 Chlorine 0-10 ppm 

ISPR2-DA2 Ammonia 0-100 ppm 

ISPR2-DH2 Hydrogen sulfide 0-50 ppm 

ISPR2-DX1 Oxygen 0% to 25% 

ISPR2-DS4 Sulfur dioxide 0-10 ppm 


MTL7206 Intrinsic safety barrier for 4-20 mA transmitters


EXPLOSIONPROOF GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER 

GMT SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The GMT Series Explosionproof Gas Monitor/ 

Transmitter is a microprocessor-based system for continuous 

effective monitoring of toxic and combustible 

gases. The GMT Series provides a factory-calibrated 

DPDT alarm relay and a 4-20 mA output in proportion to 

the level of gas present. An LCD display in the attractive 

case gives a visual indication of the gas level in the 

atmosphere. The highly accurate and very stable S1 

Series sensors include catalytic gas sensors for many 

flammable gases and vapor concentrations, electrochemical 

cells for toxic gases, and diffusion fuel cells for 

oxygen sensing. 

FEATURES 

• Attractive, compact case design 

• LCD indication 

• 4-20 mA and DPDT relay output 

• Detection of wide variety of gases 

• Magnetic operation-calibrate without opening 

the enclosure 

• Optional network controller for applications 

with multiple monitors 

• Explosionproof housing 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups B,C, D 

• Optional remote sensing 

• Optional Modbus communications 

• Duct mount available 


Power requirements 17-27 VAC, 18-38 VDC, 

380 mA @ 24 VDC 

Analog output 4-20 mA, 1000� max 

loop-powered, 400� max 

self-powered 

Alarm contacts DPDT pilot duty, 

5A @ 30 VDC or 250 VAC 

Concentration display 1/2" LCD 


Sensing technology Electrochemical for toxic 

gases; catalytic combustion 

for combustible gases; 

diffusion fuel cell for oxygen 

Explosionproof 

GMT 

• Gases detected 

Carbon monoxide 

Nitrogen dioxide (diesel exhaust) 

Hydrogen 

Chlorine 

Combustibles 

Hydrogen sulfide 

Oxygen 

Sulfur dioxide 

Approvals Certified to UL and CSA 

standards; Class I, Div 1, 

Groups B, C, D 


(19 x 16 x 11.5 cm) 


Operating temp -40° to 100°F (-40° to 38°C) toxic 

-40° to 112°F (-40° to 50°C) 

combustible 

745 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


746 


EXPLOSIONPROOF GAS MONITOR/TRANSMITTER 

GMT SERIES 

DETECTION AND SETPOINT LEVELS 

ORDER GAS DETECTION ACCURACY ALARM 

CODE DETECTED RANGE RELAY* SET POINT 

CO Carbon monoxide 0-250 ppm 3% 35 ppm 

NO2 Nitrogen dioxide 0-10 ppm 3% 1 ppm 

H2 Hydrogen 0-2.5% 3% 1% 

CL2 Chlorine 0-15 ppm 3% 1 ppm 

COMB** Combustibles 0-100% LEL 3% 25% LEL** 

H2S Hydrogen sulfide 0-50 ppm 3% 10 ppm 

O2 Oxygen 0-25% 3% 19.5% 

SO2 Sulfur dioxide 0-10 ppm 3% 2 ppm 

* These are factory standard relay settings. For other setpoint 

levels, please specify at time of order. 

** Specify combustible gas to be monitored. Standard gases include 

methane, propane, butane, gasoline, alcohols, acetylene, and 

ethylene. Please call Trane for other applications. (LEL = Lower 

Explosive Limit) 


distance from transmitter to maintain explosionproof 

rating. 

WIRING 


GMT Gas monitor/transmitter, 4-20 mA output and DPDT relay 

XXX GAS ORDER CODE (selected from chart above) 

S1 Electrochemical sensor * 

EXP Explosionproof housing 

(–) (+) 

4-20 mA 

NO 

COM 

NC 

NC 

COM 

NO 

GMT 

GMT CL2 S1 EXP Example: GMT-CL2-S1-EXP Gas monitor/transmitter with 4-20 mA 

output and DPDT alarm relay for 0-15 ppm chlorine 

Relay 

Relay DPDT 

Dry Contacts 

5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC 



Relay 

VAC 

VAC 

Note: Contact Kele for Modbus or Vulbus communication, remote sensing, 

or duct mounting. 

+ 

24 VDC 4-20 mA 

+ – – 

IN 

For loop powered 

24 VAC/VDC Power, No Polarity 

(dedicated power source required) 

* S1 oxygen sensor includes 

diffusion fuel cells; S1 

combustible sensor is a 

catalytic combustion type



MODEL 550-X 

DESCRIPTION 

The Balmac Model 550-X Vibration Transmitter/ 

Switch provides low-cost, reliable vibration protection for 

rotating machinery operating within the range of 120- 

60,000 rpm. The switch's vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular 

to the unit’s base, responds to the velocity 

(in/sec) signal and effects automatic shutdown or alarm 

when preset limits are exceeded. The unit may be mounted 

with the sensitive axis in any plane (horizontal, vertical, 

or axial), even in an inverted position. Two limit set 

points are provided. One is set for the maximum allowable 

vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage 

of that setting and trips the alarm relay when 

that percentage is reached. A built-in, adjustable time 

delay prevents triggering due to transient vibrations. The 

switch can be wired for automatic reset when vibration 

falls below set point or for latch and remote reset. The 

unit has a 4-20 mA output that may be used with a panel 

meter or data logger, permitting analysis of vibration 

trends. Once the switch has been installed and the limits 

set, it requires no attention. The Model 550-X is enclosed 

in an explosionproof housing suitable for Class I, Division 

1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. 

FEATURES 


• Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output 






Limits (2) 

Limit #1 (alarm) Set as a percent of Limit #2 

(shutdown) 

Limit #2 (shutdown) Set at a velocity level in in/sec 

Velocity range 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) 

Frequency range 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm) 

Time delay 1-30 sec 

Limit output SPDT relay 

5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @28 VDC 

Analog output 4-20 mA DC, 500� max load 

resistance 

Setting accuracy ±5% 

Vibration-sensitive Perpendicular to the base, 

axis omnidirectional mounting 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

6.75 

(17.15) 

0.38 

(0.95) 2 Mounting Holes 

5/16" dia 

0.38 (0.95) 

6 

(15.24) 

4.06 

(10.32) 

4.19 

(10.64) 

550-X 

550-X 

Remote reset Circuit closure between latch and 

common will reset both outputs 

Input power 115 VAC 50/60 Hz 

Enclosure UL, CSA, FM approved for Class 

I, Div 1, Groups C, D; Class II, 

Div 1, Groups E, F, G; NEMA 7CD, 

9EFG 


Terminals Accepts #12 AWG wire 

Temp limits -30° to 165°F (-34° to 74°C) 


(12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm) 

FM 

APPROVED 

747 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


748 



MODEL 550-X 

WIRING 

The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole on the 

side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to physical damage 

should be adequately protected. When installing electrical conduit, 

a short length (12"/30 cm) of flexible conduit must be used 

between the vibration switch and an associated junction box. 

This construction will provide some vibration isolation in the 

conduit line. Conduit and fittings should conform to the environment 

of the vibration switch location. Weather-resistant or 

rain-tight fittings should be used to protect the switch wiring 

from a humid or corrosive atmosphere. Make all connections in 

accordance with national and local codes. 

Note: Model EYM-75 conduit seal is required within 18" (45 cm) 

of the enclosure to maintain explosionproof rating. 

OPERATION 

The Model 550-X is a self-contained, vibration protection limit 

switch. It guards against destructive levels of vibration by tripping 

a relay that has a user-adjustable limit set point in terms 

of vibration velocity (in/sec). This relay output is connected to 

an alarm or control system to provide a warning or shutdown. 

It mounts at the monitoring point and is enclosed in a watertight, 

heavy-cast aluminum housing. Terminals are provided 

for remote or manual reset. A 4-20 mA output for recording or 

metering can connect to a remote readout panel meter or 

BAS controller. 

CAUTION: Ensure that the switch is rigidly 

attached to the monitoring point for the proper 

sensing of the vibration. 

Reset (N.O.) 


4-20 mA 

Signal 

Jumper for 

Non-Latching 

Operation Form C Contacts 

to Alarm and 

Shutdown Circuits 

115 VAC 50/60 Hz 

TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS 

VS 

VS 

Centrifugal Compressor 

VS 

VS 

VS 

VS 

VS 

4-20mA 

Mute 

Latch 

Common 

C 

N/C 

N/O 

C 

N/C 

N/O 

L2 

L1 

VS 

VS 

Reciprocating 

Compressor 

Y-Type Compressor Vertical Pump 

VS 

Limit #1 

Alarm 

Limit #2 

Shutdown 

Engine Gear Compressor Cooling Tower Fan 


550-X Vibration transmitter/switch with 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) range, two limits, 

and NEMA 7CD, 9EFG enclosure 

VS


INTRINSICALLY SAFE VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 140T 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 140T Intrinsically Safe Vibration 

Transmitter is low-cost, yet highly accurate and rugged. 

It is ideal for use with all machines, even those which previously 

may have been considered uneconomical to 

monitor. The Model 140T easily mounts by use of a standard 

1/4-20 stud. It is a two-wire, loop-powered transmitter 

that can feed the vibration level of operating machinery 

to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control 

computer. Solid-state accelerometer and circuit design 

provide a 4-20 mA signal proportional to vibration velocity. 

Intrinsically safe, it can be used safely in hazardous 

environments when coupled with a Model MTL7206 

intrinsic safety barrier. 

FEATURES 




• Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, 

C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G 


APPLICATION 

Vibration monitoring can help alert the maintenance 

staff to the destructive effects of vibration on 

mechanical system equipment such as: 

• Air handler fans 

• Cooling tower fans 

• Pumps 

• Compressors 


Vibration range Output 4-20 mA, proportional 

to vibration level 

140T-1 0-1 in/sec (25.4 mm/sec) 

140T-2 0-2 in/sec (50.8 mm/sec) 

Frequency range 7-1300 Hz ±3% 

(420-78,000 rpm) 

Supply voltage (Vs) 20-35 VDC, unregulated; 

black=negative, red=positive, 

with reverse voltage protection 

Max load 

resistance RL = 50� (Vs-12) 

600� @ 24 VDC 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.38 (0.95) 

1.75 

(4.44) 

1.31 dia 

(3.33) 

1" NPT 

1.13 

(2.86) 

Mounting Connection 

1/4-20 0.38D (0.95) 

Isolation 500V, circuit-to-case 

Conduit connection 1" MNPT 

Temp range -4° to 185°F 

(-20° to 85°C) 

Environment rating NEMA 4, weatherproof 

Case Cadmium-plated steel 

Mounting 1/4''-20 stud 


Entity parameters V max = 28 VDC, I max = 110 mA 

C i = 0.04µF, L i = 0.0mH 

749 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


750 


INTRINSICALLY SAFE VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 

MODEL 140T 

INSTALLATION 

The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal definition or where 

there is a good transfer of the machine's (fan’s, pump’s, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary from machine to machine. The 

location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the 

site with the aid of a vibration meter. 

WIRING 

Wiring subject to physical damage should be 

adequately protected. When installing electrical 

conduit, it is recommended that a short 

length (12"/30 cm) of flexible conduit be used 

between the transmitter and an associated 

junction box. This construction will provide 

some vibration isolation in the conduit line. 

Conduit and fittings should conform to the 

environment of the transmitter location. 

Weather-resistant or rain-tight fittings should 

be used to protect the transmitter wiring from a 

humid or corrosive atmosphere. Make all connections 

in accordance with national and local 

codes. 

140T 

Max Cable 

C=0.08 µF 

L= 4.0 mH 

Hazardous 

Area 

4-20 mA 

MTL7206 

IS Barrier 

1 


20-35 VDC 

Power 

+ - 

Intrinsically Safe Wiring 


Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. When the Model 140T 

transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two 

must be limited to 0.08 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 1800'/548m maximum 

Belden ® #8760 18/2 twisted pair cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/F). 

CAUTION: You must ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper “sensing” 

of the vibration. 



140T-1 Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-1 in/sec (25.4 mm/sec) 

140T-2 Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-2 in/sec (50.8 mm/sec) 


Safe 

Area 

Note: Each application should be evaluated on an individual basis. 

Consult equipment manufacturers for specific details concerning safe 

vibration levels. 

6 

5 

4 

2 

3 

+ 

- 

4-20 mA 

Signal


INTRINSICALLY SAFE ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 

MODEL ELP ECHO TOUCH 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model ELP Echo Touch is an industrial-grade, ultrasonic 

liquid level transmitter with automatic temperature 

compensation. Liquid conductivity, clarity, foam, or suspended 

solids do not affect the highly accurate 4-20 mA 

output since no contact is made with the material being 

measured. The intrinsically safe design and NEMA 4X 

(IP65) housing allow use in nearly all atmospheres containing 

hazardous gases, dusts, or fibers when coupled 

with Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier. 

FEATURES 


Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; 

Class III, Division 1 

• Continuous level measurement with 4-20 mA 

output 

• Narrow (8°) beam for use in tight locations 

• Simple push button calibration 

• Automatic temperature compensation 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

6.3 (16.00) 

4.9 (12.45) 

3.6 (9.14) 

1.3 

(3.30) 

2.8 

(7.11) 

2" NPT 

• NEMA 4X (IP65) housing 

• Suitable for a wide variety of liquids 

• Not affected by foam, dirty liquids, etc. 

• 0.5' to 18' range (0.15 to 5.5m) 


Range 0.5' to 18' (0.15 to 5.5m) 

Accuracy 0.25% of span 

Resolution 0.125" (0.3 cm) 

Pulse rate Two per second 


Signal output 4-20 mA 

Max loop resistance 600� @ 24 VDC 


Temp compensation Automatic over entire range 

Pressure rating 30 psig (207 kPa) @ 77°F (25°C), 

derated 0.93 psig per °F 

(11.6 kPa per °C) above 77°F 

(25°C) 


Mounting threads 2" NPT 

Conduit connection 1/2" NPT 

Intrinsically safe CSA approved Class I, Div 1, 

Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, 

Div 1, Groups E, F, G; 

Class III, Div 1 

Entity parameters Vmax = 32V 

Imax = 130 mA 

C i = 0 µF 

L i = 0 mH 

Weight 

ELP 2.0 lb (0.9 kg) 

ELP-B 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 

751 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


752 


INTRINSICALLY SAFE ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 

MODEL ELP ECHO TOUCH 

WIRING 

MOUNTING 

D 

R 

B Option 

Side Mount 

Bracket* 

+ - 

ELP 

Level Probe 

Max Cable 

C = 0.12�F 

L = 4.0mH 

Hazardous 

Area 

Safe Area 

4-20 mA 

5 

6 

MTL7206 

IS Barrier 

4 1 

The ELP can be mounted through any 

threaded (2" NPT) opening in a tank top 

or with the optional side-mount bracket. 

Care should be taken to locate the ELP far 

enough from tank walls to avoid interference 

with the beam. Avoid locations 

near motors or other sources of vibration. 

* For depth (D) greater than 5' (1.5m), the 

side-mount bracket must be extended 

away from the tank wall according to 

Table 1. Side-mount bracket provides 

4.5" (11.4 cm) clearance from the wall only. 

2 

3 


20-35 VDC 

+ - 

+ 

- 

4-20 mA 

Signal 


Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. When the Model ELP transmitter 

is combined with the Model MTL7206 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited 

to 0.12 µF, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden ® 

#8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/F). 



ELP Intrinsically-safe ultrasonic level transmitter 

ELP-B Intrinsically-safe ultrasonic level transmitter with side-mount bracket 


MTL7206 Intrinsic safety barrier for two-wire, 4-20 mA transmitters 

TABLE 1. BEAM RADIUS 

DEPTH RADIUS 

feet meters inches cm 

1 0.3 1.2 3.1 

2 0.61 2.1 5.2 

3 0.91 2.9 7.3 

4 1.22 3.7 9.5 

5 1.5 4.6 11.6 

6 1.8 5.4 13.7 

7 2.1 6.2 15.9 

8 2.4 7.1 18.0 

9 2.7 7.9 20.1 

10 3.0 8.8 22.3 

11 3.4 9.6 24.4 

12 3.7 10.4 26.5 

13 4.0 11.3 28.7 

14 4.3 12.1 30.8 

15 4.6 13.0 32.9 

16 4.9 13.8 35.1 

17 5.2 14.6 37.2 

18 5.5 15.5 39.3


EXPLOSIONPROOF FLOAT SWITCH 

MODEL L4 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model L4 Explosionproof Float Switch is a heavy-duty 

explosionproof switch for the most critical applications. 

FEATURES 

• Explosionproof construction 

• Stainless steel float 


• Good for specific gravities 0.7 and up 

• CE, CSA, and UL listed; FM approved 

• 1-1/2" NPT mounting 



WARNING: Model L4 and V4 are not listed for use in areas classified as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen and others). 

For these atmospheres, an intrinsically safe system using standard dry-contact switch, intrinsic safety barriers, and voltage-limiting 

circuitry is recommended. 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from switch to maintain explosionproof rating. 

EXPLOSIONPROOF FLOW SWITCH 

MODEL V4-2-U 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model V4-2-U Explosionproof Flow Switch is a dependable 

solution for protecting against low flow conditions in 

pipelines for liquids, gases, and flowing solids. 

FEATURES 

• Explosionproof construction 

• Stainless steel vanes 

• Accommodates pipe sizes 1-1/2" and up 


• CE, CSA, and UL listed; FM approved 

• 1-1/2" NPT mounting 




Temp limit 275°F (135°C) 


Electrical rating SPDT, 10A @ 125/250 VAC 

Installation Within 5° of vertical 



L4 Explosionproof float switch 

V4-2-U Explosionproof flow switch 



Operating pressure 100 psig (690 kPA) 

Electrical rating 10A@125/250 VAC 


Dimensions 19 5/32"L (48.7 cm) 


Approvals UL listed, CSA, CE, FM 

Dimensions 13-1/2" (34.3 cm) overall length 

6-3/4" (17.1 cm) top of cover to 

bottom of threads 


Approvals UL listed, CSA, CE, FM 


FM 

APPROVED 

FM 

APPROVED 



753 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


754 


INTRINSICALLY SAFE WATER FLOW SENSOR 

200-IS SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The 200-IS Series Intrinsically Safe Water Flow Sensor is 

designed to monitor water flow velocity in a hazardous environment. 

The 200-IS Series sensor uses a standard 4-20 mA 

transmitter proportional to water flow in pipes from 1/2" to 36" 

(1.27 to 91.44 cm). The sensor is a glass-reinforced nylon 

impeller with an intrinsically safe rating for Class I, Division 1, 

Groups A, B, C, D. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D 

• 400 psig (3102 kPa) @ 221°F (105°C) 

• Uses standard 4-20 mA transmitters 

• Pipe sizes from 1/2" to 36" (1.27 to 91.44 cm) 

• Polarity reversal protection 


Accuracy ±1% of full scale 

Flow range 0.5-30 ft/sec (9.1-549 m/min) 

Max pressure See Ordering Information 

Max temp 221°F (105°C) 

Wetted parts Standard units 


Bearing Pennlon (UHMWPE) 


Housing Ryton glass reinforced PPS 

Entity V max = 15 V, I max = 150mA 

Parameters C i = 0.033µF, L i = 0.91nH 

WIRING 

Hazardous 

Area 

Safe Area 

MTL7265ac 

(red) 4 

Intrinsic 

1 

(black) 

Shield 

5 

6 

Safety 

Barrier 

2 

3 

200-IS Series 

20-35 VDC 

+ - 


Output Pulse Divider 

Selection Jumper 

(10 or 100) 

100 

XDCR 

Sig in 

10 

UFT-1-A 

Classification Intrinsically safe Class I, 

Div 1, Groups A, B, C, D 

Agency FM, CSA 

Weight See Ordering Information 

Electrical 20' (6.10m) of two-wire #20 AWG in 

PVC jacket 

Transmitter UFT-1-A (required for operation) 

Voltage 24 VDC @ 60 mA 

Signal 4-20 mA @ 750� max impedance 

Zero/Span Factory calibrated 

Connections Terminals 

PWR 

Pulse 

Out 

Pulse 

Out + 

Pulse 

Out - 

mA Signal 

Out 

XDCR 

Signal In 

24 VDC 

Power 

Common 

228B-IS-2 


+ 

– 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

250B-IS-1 

CAUTION: Intrinsic safety 

barrier is required when 

applied in hazardous locations. 

For the system shown 

left, maximum cable capacitance 

is 0.67 µF, and maximum 

cable inductance is 0.3 

mH (equal to 447' (136m) 

Belden ® #8760 18/2 shielded 

cable 0.18µH/FT, 44pF/F). 

MODEL SIZE CONNECTIONS TYPE MAX PRESSURE WEIGHT 

psig (kPa) lb (kg) 

250B-IS-(0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.25,1.5) 1/2" to 1-1/2" Size NPT Inline 400 (2758) 7.0 (3.2) 

228B-IS-2 2" 2" NPT Inline 200 (1379) 7.4 (3.4) 

220B-IS 2-1/2" & up 2" Saddle Insertion 400 (2758) 4.1 (1.9) 


MTL-7265ac Intrinsic safety barrier 

UFT-1-A Universal flow transmitter (see UFT catalog page for display options if required) 

220B-IS 

FM 

APPROVED


EXPLOSIONPROOF HIGH AND LOW LIMIT CONTROLS 

HZLIM SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The HZLIM Series Explosionproof High and Low Limit 

Controls are field-assembled combinations of industry 

standard controls, heavy-duty explosionproof enclosures, 

and seals for use in atmospheres that may contain hazardous 

gases or dusts (Groups B, C, D, E, F). 

The HZLIM-LO-A includes the ultra reliable Model A11A-1 

manual reset low limit control, a GUBB-22A explosionproof 

enclosure, two EYM-75 conduit seals, and an ACK6F 

fiber/cement kit. 

The HZLIM-LO-B is identical to the HZLIM-LO-A, but it 

includes the equally reliable A11B-1 automatic reset low 

limit control instead of the A11A-1. 

The HZLIM-HI is also identical to the HZLIM-LO-A, but it 

includes the time-proven A70KA-1 manual reset high limit 

control in place of the A11A-1. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D; 


• NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG 

• Long-life, snap-acting contacts 

• Easy set point adjust 

• Freeze protection for hazardous locations 

• Code required AHU high limit protection for 

hazardous locations 


distance from junction box to maintain explosionproof 

rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit 

seals must be installed within 2" (5.08 cm) of the 

enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements. 

WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before 

opening the cover of this device for any purpose, 

including resetting a manual reset controller or adjusting 

a set point. If work must be performed with an energized 

circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the 

enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically 

safe combustible gas detector such as the Model 101 

personal combustible gas monitor. Failure to follow 

these procedures can result in injury or death. 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

10 

(25.40) 


Wiring 

3.13 

(7.95) 

3.13 

(7.95) 

10.25 

(26.04) 

Capillary 

3/4" Rigid Conduit 

EYM75 Seal 

Sealing Cement 

Fiber Dam 

Wiring 

EYM75 Seal 

Controller 

Capillary 

Sealing Cement 

Fiber Dam 

GUBB-22A 

Enclosure 

Refer to the A70 and A11 Series in the Miscellaneous 

Controls section for complete specifications, capillary, 

installation, and wiring information. 

755 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


756 


EXPLOSIONPROOF HIGH AND LOW LIMIT CONTROLS 

HZLIM SERIES 


Install the GUBB-22A enclosure in its intended location. 

Install the two EYM75 conduit seals in the two tapped holes of the GUBB-22A enclosure, making sure to engage a minimum of 

five full threads. Also be sure that the plugs on the conduit seals are both facing up and to the front (cement will be poured into 

them later). The male nipple, supplied with fittings, can be easily removed and replaced in the opposite side for proper orientation. 

Unpack the A11 or A70 controller, and fully uncoil the capillary tubing. 

Place plastic bushings in both openings inside the enclosure and also in the bottom of the lower conduit seal. 

Gently feed the end of the capillary (or capillary and bulb) through the bottom opening and conduit seal from inside the GUBB- 

22A enclosure, taking care not to nick or kink the capillary. Once the end is out, slowly feed the rest of the capillary fully through 

to the outside of the conduit seal. Use an assistant, if needed, to make sure that the inner and outer plastic bushings stay in place 

to protect the capillary from damage. Once this is accomplished, mount the A11 or A70 controller to the panel inside the enclosure. 

Install the capillary (or capillary and bulb) on the equipment according to the included instructions. Install rigid conduit and wiring 

as required by code from the upper conduit seal, engaging a minimum of five full threads at each joint. Only individual insulated 

conductors may pass through the conduit seal. If jacketed cable is used, the jacket must be stripped back beyond the seal or else 

a listed cable seal must be applied within the enclosure. 

Remove the plugs from the two conduit seals. Make sure that the wires and capillary are centered in the seals. Then install fiber 

dams and sealing compound in each according to the included instructions (minimum 0.75"/2 cm cement depth), and replace the 

plugs. Adjust the set point on the controller, install the cover for the GUBB-22A enclosure, and tighten securely. 



HZLIM-LO-A Kit with one A11A-1 manual reset low limit control, 

one GUBB-22A enclosure, two EYM75 conduit seals, 

three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit 

Weight: 25.7 lb (11.7 kg) 

HZLIM-LO-B Kit with one A11B-1 automatic reset low limit control, 



Weight: 25.7 lb (11.7 kg) 

HZLIM-HI Kit with one A70KA-1 manual reset high limit control, 



Weight: 26.9 lb (12.2 kg) 


Model 101 Personal combustible gas monitor 

EYM75 Additional 3/4" conduit seals 

ACK6F Additional sealing kit with fiber and cement


EXPLOSIONPROOF BULB THERMOSTAT 

MODEL A19AUC-2 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model A19AUC-2 is an ideal solution for air or fluid temperature 

control in potentially hazardous areas. Its 6' (1.83m) 

capillary and bulb make mounting convenient, and its external 

set point adjustment knob provides easy operation without having 

to verify that the atmosphere is safe. An optional thermowell 

makes immersion applications a snap. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Division 1, Group D 


• NEMA 7D, 9EFG 

• Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling systems 

• 6' (1.83m) capillary for flexible bulb placement 

• Immersion well available 

• 20° to 80°F range 

• Duct bulb holders available 


Switch SPDT 

Non-inductive amps 22.0A @ 277 VAC max 

Motor FLA 16.0A @ 120 VAC 

9.2A @ 208 VAC 

8.0A @ 240 VAC 

Motor LRA 96.0A @ 120 VAC 

55.2A @ 208 VAC 

48.0A @ 240 VAC 

Pilot duty 125 VA @ 24-600 VAC 

Range 20° to 80°F (-7° to 27°C) 

Differential 3.5°F (1.9°C) 

Bulb 0.38" x 4.97" (0.95 x 12.6 cm) 

Capillary 6' (1.83m) 



(15.9 x 7.6 x 10.8 cm) 

Approvals UL listed explosionproof 

Class I, Division 1, Group D; 

Class II, Division 1, Groups E, 

F, G 

WIRING 


C 

NC 

NO 

1 

3 

2 

A19AUC 

C - NC Open on temp rise 

C - NO Close on temp rise 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within 

code-required distance from thermostat to maintain 

explosionproof rating. 



A19AUC-2 Remote bulb thermostat 

WEL14A-603R Thermowell for A19AUC-2 

TE-6001-1 Duct bulb holder 

Each explosionproof box has mounting ears for surface applications 

and includes 3/4" FNPT tapped conduit entry on the 

top side. 

757 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


758 


EXPLOSIONPROOF THERMOSTATS 

MODEL EPETD8S, T6051B1006 

DESCRIPTION 

The EPET and T6051B Series Explosionproof Thermostats 

are two-position room thermostats designed for on/off control 

with set points from 50° to 90°F (10° to 32°C) (EPET) and 50° 

to 80°F (10° to 27°C) (T6051B). These snap-acting switch-type 

devices are suitable for line- or low-voltage applications and 

have SPDT contacts for heating and/or cooling control. 

FEATURES 




• Line or low voltage control of heating and/or 

cooling systems 


Model Voltage Differential Contacts Weight Dimensions Set Point 

lb (kg) in (cm) Range 

EPETD8S 24-277 VAC Htg 2 °F (1.1°C) SPDT 5.3 (2.4) 5.6H x 6.4W x 4.5D 50° to 90°F 

22A Htg & Clg Clg 4 °F (2.2°C) (14.3 x 16.2 x 11.4) (10° to 32°C) 

T6051B1006 24-120 VAC Htg 1 °F (0.6°C) SPDT 5.3 (2.4) 5.6H x 6.4W x 4.75D 50° to 80°F 

10A Htg, 7A Clg Clg 1 °F (0.6°C) (14.3 x 16.2 x 12.1) (10° to 27°C) 

240 VAC 

6A Htg, 4A Clg 

Approvals UL listed, CSA 

Explosionproof Class I, Div 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Div1, Groups E, F, G 

WIRING 

NC 

NO 

C 

EPET/T6051B 

C - NC Open on temp rise 

C - NO Close on temp rise 



distance from thermostat to maintain explosionproof 

rating. 


EPETD8S Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat 

T6051B1006 Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat 




EPETD8S T6051B1006 


Surface-mount explosionproof box using the mounting ears 

for surface applications. Each includes two 3/4" tapped conduit 

entries (top and bottom).


EXPLOSIONPROOF DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE 

(FOR DAMPERS) 

MODEL ZS-260 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model ZS-260 Explosionproof Direct Coupled 

Actuator Enclosure is designed for Belimo Models AM, 

GM, AF, LF, and NF direct-mount actuators installed in a 

hazardous environment. The Model ZS-260 has NEMA 7 

and NEMA 9 construction for field-mounted actuators 

with a drive shaft in front or rear, depending on application. 

The enclosure is a cast aluminum housing with 

explosionproof ratings for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, 

D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. They are for 

use with any damper with appropriate linkage. 

FEATURES 



• Full range of approved actuators 


Conduit openings Two, 3/4" FNPT 

Enclosure Cast aluminum, bolted cover 

Drive shaft SS, 1/2" dia (1.27 cm), 1.5"L (3.8 cm) 

Dimensions 15.75"H x 8.25'W x 9.5"D 

(40.0 x 20.9 x 24.1 cm) 

Classifications Class I, Div 1, Groups C, D; 


Construction NEMA 7CD, NEMA 9EFG 

Agency approval UL listed, CSA 


Compatible 

actuators AM, GM, AF, LF, NF (see actuator 

specification for torque and 

control details) 

WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classified as Group A (acetylene) or Group B 

(hydrogen). 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from enclosure to maintain 

explosionproof rating. 



ZS-260 Damper actuator enclosure with front or rear drive shaft 

(Specify front or rear when ordering. Order linkage and actuator separately) 


ZG-109 10-ga galvanized right angle mounting plate, 10" x 13" x 6" (25.4 x 33 x 15.2 cm) 

ZG-110 10-ga galvanized stand off bracket mounting plate, 12" x 13" x 4" (30.5 x 33 x 10.1 cm) 

KH-8 3.5" (8.9 cm) Crank arm for 3/4" diameter shaft 

KG-8 5/16" Ball joint 

PR-48 5/16" dia, 48"L (1.22 m) push rod 

759 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


760 


EXPLOSIONPROOF GEAR TRAIN ACTUATORS 

MA6, MP6 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The MA6 and MP6 Series Explosionproof Actuators 

are designed for installation in a hazardous environment. 

Each of the MA6 and MP6 actuators are factory assembled 

to order. The enclosure is a cast aluminum housing 

and bolted cover with explosionproof ratings for Class I, 

Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups 

E, F, G. They are for use with any damper with appropriate 

linkage and with Invensys globe valve sizes 1/2" 

through 6", two- or three-way. 

FEATURES 



• Full range of approved actuators 

• Approved for valves or dampers 


Conduit openings Two, 3/4" FNPT 

Assembly Factory only 

Enclosure Cast aluminum, bolted cover 

Weight 20 lb (9 kg) 

Classifications Class I, Div 1, Groups C, D 


Agency UL listed, CSA 


WARNING:This device is not listed for use in areas classified as 

Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen). 

CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required 

distance from enclosure to maintain explosionproof rating. 


(22.5 x 21.6 x 24.3 cm) 

Drive shaft 1/2" dia (1.27 cm), 0.93"L (2.38 cm) 

Available actuators* 

MA6-418, MP6-361, MP6-367, 

MP6-371, MP6-381, MP6-465, 

MP6-475, MP6-485 

* See actuator specifications for torque and control 

details. Add appropriate linkage for valve applications. 

All Invensys actuators in explosionproof enclosures are custom factory assembled to order. 

Call Trane with damper and/or valve requirements, and a quote will be provided. 

Example: 1/2" N.C. heating valve 120V, 60 Hz, Cv 4.4, screwed NPT 

Parts required (factory assembled): MP6-465 actuator, VB-7213-0-4-4 valve, AV-391 linkage, 

NYBA-37 valve stem extension, NYBA-61 valve Z bracket 


NYBA-37 Valve stem extension (added part required for all valve assemblies) 

NYBA-61 Valve Z bracket (added part required for all valve assemblies) 

AM-116 Splined crank arm for 1/2" (1.27 cm) shaft (damper linkage required) 

AM-132 Ball joint connector (damper linkage required) 

PR-48 48" (121.92 cm) push rod (damper linkage required)


EXPLOSIONPROOF DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR 

MODEL 30-3003D 

DESCRIPTION 

The Model 30-3003D Explosionproof Duct Smoke 

Detector provides early detection of smoke and products 

of combustion in air moving through HVAC ducts. An 

intake tube (ordered separately) accomplishes air sampling. 

A return tube, duct enclosure, junction box, and 

instruction manual are included with the base unit. 

FEATURES 

• Class I, Div 2, Groups C, D; 

Class II, Div 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III 


• Trouble-free photoelectric detector 

• 24 VDC operation 

• Three contacts: N.O. (alarm), N.C. (supervisory), 

SPDT (auxiliary) 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

6.12 (15.54) 

19.0 

(48.26) 

9.38 

(23.85) 

11.62 (29.51) 

1" NPT Connection 

Alarm Indicator 


0.31 (0.79) dia 

761 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


762 


EXPLOSIONPROOF DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR 

MODEL 30-3003D 


Power 20-28 VDC @ 10 mA standby, 

50 mA alarm 

Contacts Alarm SPST (N.O.) supervisory 

SPST (N.C.), auxiliary SPDT, 

1.0A @ 30 VDC, 0.5A @ 120 VAC 

Air velocity 600-4000 fpm (3-20 mps) 

Approval CSA 

Detector enclosure NEMA 4X fiberglass 

Detector and 

junction box NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 


Sampling tube 3/4" galvanized EMT in 1', 3', 

6', or 10'L (0.3, 0.9, 1.8 or 3m), 

cut to fit in the field 


Return tube 3/4" (1.9 cm) galvanized EMT, 

12"L (30.5 cm), included 


distance from junction box to maintain explosionproof 

rating. 

MOUNTING 

Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template. 

Detector must be mounted at least six duct widths from the fan or 

other sources of turbulence. 

The intake sampling tube has holes drilled the entire length of 

the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct. The 

holes must be facing into the air flow. 

1. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length. 

2. Firmly insert the stopper (packaged in the installation kit) 

in the end of the intake sampling tube. 

3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector. 

WIRING 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

TB-2 

1 + 

2 – 

3 

4 

5 

TB-3 

Entire Width 

of Duct 

Stopper 

Intake 

Tube 

Top of Detector 


30-3003D Explosionproof duct smoke detector, photoelectric 

ST-1 1' (0.3m) duct sampling tube 



ST-10 10' (3m) duct sampling tube 


EYM-100 1" sealing fitting for rigid conduit 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

24 VDC Power Supply 

C 

NO 

NC 

Ground 

Normally Closed 

Supervisory 

Contacts 

Normally Open 

Alarm Contacts 

Auxiliary 

SPDT Contacts 

(yellow) 

(yellow) 

(violet) 

(violet) 

(black) 

(red) 

Note: Circuit shown in the normal standby energized mode. 

Air Flow 

Factory Wiring 

to Detector 

Wiring Terminal 

Box 

Exhaust 

Tube


EXPLOSIONPROOF ENCLOSURES 

EJB, GUBB SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The EJB and GUBB Series consist of cast-aluminum 

instrument housings and junction boxes for explosionproof 

and dust-ignition proof applications. They are suitable 

for Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D; 

Class II, Divisions1 and 2, Groups E, F, G; and Class III. 

They are furnished with mounting feet, a cover, and two 

3/4" drilled and tapped conduit openings. EJB Series 

enclosures include cover hinges. Optional mounting 

panels are 0.13" thick (0.33 cm) aluminum and are 

ordered separately. An optional aluminum/glass cover 

is available for GUBB Series enclosures and is also 

ordered separately. 

EJB JUNCTION BOX DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

LUG INSIDE NOMINAL 

ENCLOSURE BOLT DIMENSIONS MOUNTING PANEL 

MODEL A B SIZE C E F H T1 T2 L x W x D PANEL MODEL L x W 

EJB464 7.38 5.38 1/2 8.19 10.19 6.56 3.00 0.56 0.56 6 x 4 x 4 MP46 3 x 5 

(18.7) (13.7) (1.3) (20.8) (25.9) (16.7) (7.6) (1.4) (1.4) (15 x 10 x 10) (8 x 13) 

EJB886 10.31 4.50 3/8 12.38 12.38 8.25 3.56 0.69 0.69 8 x 8 x 6 MP88 7 x 7 

(26.2) (11.4) (1.0) (31.4) (31.4) (21.0) (9.0) (1.8) (1.8) (20 x 20 x 15) (18 x 18) 

EJB12126 15.50 5.50 5/8 17.00 16.94 9.00 3.75 0.81 0.81 12 x 12 x 6 MP1212 10 x 10 

(39.4) (14.0) (1.6) (43.2) (43.0) (22.7) (9.5) (2.1) (2.1) (30 x 30 x 15) (25 x 25) 

EJB18126 15.69 11.50 5/8 17.13 23.06 10.19 4.00 0.94 1.13 18 x 12 x 6 MP1812 17 x 11 

(39.9) (29.2) (1.6) (43.5) (58.6) (25.9) (10.16) (2.4) (2.9) (46 x 30 x 15) (43 x 28) 

EJB24188 21.69 17.25 5/8 23.13 29.06 12.19 5.13 0.94 1.13 24 x 18 x 8 MP2418 22 x 16 

(55.1) (43.8) (1.6) (58.8) (73.8) (31.0) (13.0) (2.4) (2.9) (61 x 46 x 20) (56 x 41) 

Lug Bolt 

Size 

B 

Length 

E 

C 

A 

T2 

T1 

H 

Depth 

F 

Note: All models above include a 3/4" drilled and tapped (five thread 

minimum) conduit opening in the top and bottom walls. 

GUBB Series 

with optional 

glass cover 

T2 

Width 

EJB Series 

GUBB Series 

TABLE 1. CLASS I, GROUPS B, C 

SEALING REQUIREMENTS 

Seals 

BOX CLASS GROUP REQUIRED* 

EJB I B,C Yes 

EJB I D No 

* Sealing fitting must be installed 

within 2" (5 cm) of each conduit entrance. 

763 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


764 


EXPLOSIONPROOF ENCLOSURES 

EJB, GUBB SERIES 

GUBB JUNCTION BOX DIMENSIONS in (cm) 

MODEL A B C D E F G H J K L M N U 

GUBB-11A 6.50 7.00 5.50 5.94 5.38 6.00 7.75 0.50 6.38 3.69 4.88 4.63 6.25 8.75 

(16.5) (17.8) (14.0) (15.1) (13.7) (15.2) (19.7) (1.3) (16.2) (9.4) (12.4) (11.8) (15.9) (22.2) 

GUBB-22A 8.00 10.00 7.13 9.00 7.19 9.00 9.25 0.50 6.56 3.50 4.63 4.63 8.00 10.25 

(20.3) (25.4) (18.1) (22.9) (18.3) (22.9) (23.5) (1.3) (16.7) (8.9) (11.8) (11.8) (20.3) (26.0) 

GUBB-33A 12.00 12.00 10.75 10.75 9.88 10.00 13.13 0.63 7.88 3.94 5.25 5.38 11.00 14.38 

(30.5) (30.5) (27.3) (27.3) (25.1) (25.4) (33.4) (1.6) (20.0) (10.0) (13.3) (13.7) (27.9) (36.5) 

MOUNTING L x W ALUMINUM COVER 

PANEL MODEL WITH GLASS WINDOW 

GUBBMP11A 4.5 x 4.5 GUBMK-1 

(11.4 x 11.4) 

GUBBMP22A 6.5 x 6.5 GUBMK-2 

(16.5 x 16.5) 

GUBBMP33A 9 x 9 GUBMK-3 

(22.9 x 22.9) 

SHIPPING WEIGHTS 

U 

A 

D F 

C 

G 

MODEL NUMBER OF LUGS 

GUBB-11A 2 lugs 



Note: All models include a 3/4" drilled and tapped (five-thread min) 

conduit opening in the top and bottom walls. 

MODEL WEIGHT lb (kg) MODEL WEIGHT lb (kg) MODEL WEIGHT lb (kg) 

EJB464 13 (5.9) MP46 0.3 (0.14) GUBB-11A 11 (5.0) 

EJB886 28 (13) MP88 1.0 (0.45) GUBB-22A 18 (8.2) 

EJB12126 59 (27) MP1212 2.0 (0.9) GUBB-33A 37 (17) 

EJB18126 100 (45) MP1812 3.7 (1.7) GUBMK-1 3.0 (1.4) 

EJB24188 228 (103) MP2418 7.0 (3.2) GUBMK-2 4.2 (1.9) 

GUBMK-3 13 (5.9) 

GUBBMP11A 0.15 (0.07) 

GUBBMP22A 0.17 (0.08) 

GUBBMP33A 0.20 (0.09) 

B 

H 


Order by model number. 

Mounting panels ordered separately. 

The following models are built to order: EJB12126, EJB18126, EJB241818 

Please allow four to six weeks for delivery. 

N 

E 

TABLE 2. CLASS I GROUP B AND C 

SEALING REQUIREMENTS 

SEALS 

BOX CLASS GROUP REQUIRED* 

GUBB I B,C Yes 

GUBB I D No 

* Sealing fitting must be installed within 2" of 

each conduit entrance. 

L 

J 

K 

M

EXPLOSIONPROOF HORNS AND STROBES 

MODELS 5530M, 878EX, 879EX, 105, 116EXMST 

DIVISION 2 HORN 

MODEL 5530M 

FEATURES 

• 27-tone capability, DIP switch selectable 

• Output to 110 dB at 10 feet 

• NEMA 3R 

• Speaker lockable in any horizontal position 

• Flange mounting with 1/2" conduit opening 

• Horn activated by contact closure or voltage signal 

• Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, 

Division 2, Groups F, G; Class III 

DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 HORNS 

MODELS 878EX, 879EX 

FEATURES 

• Heavy-duty, high-decibel vibrating horn 

• Corrosion-resistant epoxy finish 

• NEMA 4X 

• Wall-mounting with side brackets 

• Power connection wires embedded in sealing compound 

• Tapped for 3/4" conduit 

• 97 dB at 10 feet 

• 120 VAC (878EX-N5), 24 VDC (879EX-G1) 

• UL listed for Class 1, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D; 

Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E, F; Class III 

locations 

• UL listed for outdoor locations 

DIVISION 2 STROBE 

MODEL 105 


FEATURES 

• NEMA 4X enclosure with brass hardware 

• 300,000 peak candlepower 3 Joule strobe 

• Mounting bases available for 3/4" NPT conduit, surface 

mount, or wall mount 

• 3000-hour lamp rating 

• Amber, blue, and red lens available 

• 120 VAC 

• UL listed Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, 

Division 2, Groups F, G; Class III location, UL listed 

1638, 1604, Marine UL595 (Category UXUB), Marine UL 

1598A, UL 1971 

DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 STROBE 

MODEL 116EXMST 

FEATURES 

• High-impact glass dome 

• 65 flashes per minute 

• 800,000 peak candlepower 

• 3000-hour lamp rating 

• NEMA 3R and 4X rated 

• UL listed 1638, 1203, Marine 1598A; CUL listed C22.2 

No. 205; Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class I, 

Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, 

Groups E, F, G; Class II, Division 2, Group G; Class 

III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Division 2, 

Group G 



5530M-24N5 Division 2 horn 120 VAC, 24 VDC activation 

5530M-120N5 Division 2 horn 120 VAC, 120 VAC activation 



878EX-N5 Divisions 1 and 2 horn 120 VAC 

879EX-G1 Divisions 1 and 2 horn 24 VDC 



105STR-N5 Division 2 strobe, red lens 120 VAC 

105STA-N5 Division 2 strobe, amber lens 120 VAC 

105STB-N5 Division 2 strobe, blue lens 120 VAC 

105PM Pipe-mount base 

105BX Surface-mount box 

105BM Wall-mount bracket (requires 105BX) 

91B-ST Replacement lamp 



116EXMSTR-N5 Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, red lens 120 VAC 

116EXMSTA-N5 Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, amber lens 120 VAC 

116EXMSTB-N5 Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, blue lens 120 VAC 

116-GRD Optional dome guard 

92-ST Replacement strobe tube 

116EX-P Pendent mount 

116EX-B Wall bracket mount (requires 116EX-C) 

116EX-C Ceiling mount 

116EX-S Stanchion mount 

765 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



EXPLOSIONPROOF CUSTOM CONTROL STATIONS 

CXJ SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

CXJ Series Explosionproof Custom Control Stations can 

be built to customer specifications with door-mounted push 

buttons, pilot lights, selector switches, or potentiometers. Any 

combination of devices can be assembled in one of 75 sizes of 

aluminum enclosures. 

FEATURES 

• Copper-free aluminum enclosures 

• Integral cast mounting feet 

CUSTOM PUSH-BUTTON STATIONS 

Push-button stations are for applications requiring only 

operator interface and/or pilot light indication. Stations 

are available in one-hole to nine-hole arrangements. 

Operators can be purchased separately. 

CUSTOM CONTROL STATIONS 

Control stations are used to house control components 

and have the ability to add operators on the cover. The 

enclosures are available in 75 shapes and sizes that fit 

any application. 

WINDOW ENCLOSURES 

Window enclosures are available with round, square, or 

rectangular windows. This provides convenient viewing of 

gauges, meters, or control device displays. 

CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

Circuit breakers provide overload and short-circuit protection 

on feeder or branch circuits, as well as lighting, heating, 

and motor circuits. The enclosure includes an external 

breaker operator handle that can be padlocked in on or off 

position. The circuit breaker can be used as a general service 

disconnect. 

766 


Call Trane to order. 

• Enclosures suitable for drilling and tapping 

• Factory-installed operators in the cover 

• Controls installed and wired per specifications 

• Windows available 

• NEMA 3, 7, and 9 (4X optional) 

• UL and CSA available 

• Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B,C, D; Class II, 

Division 1 and 2, Groups E,F, G; Class III 

• Separate operator devices available


EXPLOSIONPROOF CONDUIT ACCESSORIES 

GRT, EYM, PLG50 SERIES 

CONDUIT OUTLET BOX 

GRT SERIES (3 conduit entries) 

These explosionproof, dust-ignition proof, cast-aluminum 

conduit outlet boxes are used with threaded metal conduit 

and are furnished with a cover and internal ground screw. 

They are suitable for Class I, Groups B, C, D; Class II, 

Groups E, F, G; and Class III. In Class I, Group B, atmospheres, 

all conduit runs must have a sealing fitting field 

installed adjacent to the enclosure. 


MODEL CONDUIT COVER CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT 

SIZE OPENING lb (kg) 

GRT50-A 1/2" 3.38" Cast Aluminum 1.4 (0.6) 

GRT75-A 3/4" 3.38" Cast Aluminum 1.4 (0.6) 

CONDUIT SEALING FITTING 

EYM SERIES 

These explosionproof, dust-ignition proof, malleable iron 

conduit sealing fittings are used with threaded metal conduit 

in horizontal or vertical applications. Fittings have 

female connections with one removable male nipple. They 

are suitable for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups 

E, F, G; and Class III. 

CLOSE-UP PLUGS 

PLG50 SERIES 


MODEL SIZE TURNING KWIKO® CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT 

RADIUS CEMENT lb (kg) 

REQUIRED 

EYM-50 1/2" 1.06" 1 oz Malleable Iron 0.8 (0.4) 

EYM-75 3/4" 1.19" 2 oz Malleable Iron 1.0 (0.5) 

EYM-100 1" 1.38" 4 oz Malleable Iron 1.7 (0.8) 

These explosionproof, dust-ignition proof, steel close-up 

plugs are used with threaded metal conduit. They are suitable 

for Class I, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; 

and Class III. 


MODEL SIZE CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT 

lb (kg) 

PLG50R 1/2" Steel, Recessed Head 0.1 (0.05) 

PLG75R 3/4" Steel, Recessed Head 0.1 (0.05) 

PLG100R 1" Steel, Recessed Head 0.2 (0.1) 

767 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


768 


EXPLOSIONPROOF CONDUIT ACCESSORIES 

MODELS AC1A, ACK6F, F01, AC1, F01A 

KWIKO ® SEALING CEMENT 

MODEL AC1A 

When mixed with water, according to label directions, Kwiko 

Sealing Cement forms a pourable cement for conduit sealing 

fittings. 


MODEL QUANTITY VOLUME WHEN SET WEIGHT 

AC1A 16 oz (453.6g) 23 cu in (377.0 cu cm) 1.3 lb (0.6 kg) 

KWIKO ® TWINPAK SEALING CEMENT 

MODEL ACK6F 

Each plastic pouch in the Kwiko Twinpak contains premeasured 

Kwiko cement and premeasured water (in an inner bag). 

Squeeze the pouch to break the inner water bag, knead the 

mixture thoroughly and pour. The Kwiko TwinPak includes an 

adequate amount of fiber filler packed separately. 



ACK6F Cement: 30 oz * 25 cu in 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) 

(850g) (410 cu cm) 

Fiber: 5 oz (142g) 

* Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 

FIBER FILLER 

MODEL F01 

Fiber Filler is used to prevent cement from leaking while in its 

fluid state. 


MODEL QUANTITY WEIGHT 

F01 1 oz (28.4g) 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) 

KWIKO ® SEALING CEMENT AND FIBER FILLER KITS 

MODEL AC1F01A 

The Model AC1F01A combines Model AC1A cement and 

Models F01 filler in a handy kit. 



AC1F01A Cement: 16 oz 23 cu in 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) 

(453.6g) (377.0 cu cm) 

Fiber: 1 oz (28.4g) 

Cement / Water Pouch 

Fiber Filler


INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS 

MTL7000, MTL5000 SERIES 

DESCRIPTION 

The MTL7000 and MTL5000 Series of ultra-slim intrinsic safety 

barriers is the worldwide standard in protection and accuracy 

for intrinsically safe sensing and controlling devices in hazardous 

locations. The electronic design limits the amount of 

electrical energy that can be transmitted into the hazardous 

area to a level below the ignition energy of even the worst-case 

explosive mixture of fuel and air. This level of protection remains 

intact even in the event of two simultaneous faults, thus providing 

the highest possible safety rating for this type of system. All 

MTL7000 and MTL5000 Series barriers are FM approved for 

use in intrinsically safe systems under the entity concept and 

can be applied with the widest possible array of intrinsically 

safe devices. 

Designed for ease of installation, these barriers provide a positive 

intrinsic safety ground through the DIN rail. They also 

include extra grounding terminals for shields and grounded 

conductors. Isolating spacers are available for applications in 

which the intrinsic safety ground must be separate from the 

mounting panel's earth ground (ANSI / ISA RP-12.6 specifies 

grounding requirements). 

FEATURES 

• FM, CSA entity approval Class I, II, and III, Division 1, 

Groups A-G 

• BASEEFA approval EEx ia, Group IIC 

• DIN rail mounting with integral intrinsic safety ground 

• Compact size, only 0.27" width (7 mm) 

• Extra ground terminal on each side for shields or 

grounded commons 

DIMENSIONS 

in 

(cm) 

0.27±0.01 

(0.7±0.03) 

Hazardous Area 

Terminals 

3.98 

(10.13) 

6 

5 

APPLICATION 

According to the entity concept, barriers must be selected to 

limit the available hazardous area voltage (V) and current (I) to 

levels below the rating of the intrinsically safe device (V max , 

I max ). Also, the combined capacitance (C) and inductance (L) 

of the intrinsically safe device and cabling must be less than the 

maximum ratings for the barrier (L a , C a ). 

The great majority of applications can be satisfied with one of 

the six key barrier types in stock. Other types are available to 

suit most every application. Contact Trane for assistance. Refer 

to the Hazardous Location Application Guide in the Technical 

Reference section for more detailed barrier selection procedures. 

4 1 

3.89 

(9.88) 

2 

3 

4.02 

(10.21) 

0.75 cm 

Rail 

Safe Area 

Terminals 

FM 

APPROVED 

769 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS


770 




SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS 

Entity Safety Parameters End to End 

Application Model V I � C(max) L(max) Max Resistance 

(mA) (�F) (mH) Voltage (�) 

4-20 mA MTL7206 28 93 300 0.12 4.0 35 N/A* 

Two-wire transmitter 

DI 200 Series MTL7265ac 15 150 100 0.7 1.4 13 131 

flow sensors 

Controller output MTL7028+ 28 93 300 0.12 4.0 27 332 

4-20 mA 

Dry contact/Dry contact MTL5011B 10.5 14 800 2.4 165 35 N/A *** 

Dry contact/Discrete MTL7207+ 28 93 300 0.12 4.0 35 348+1.2V** 

Digital output MTL7208+ 28 93 300 0.12 4.0 35 348+1.2V** 

* The MTL7206 is an active barrier; the 4-20 mA (+) terminals are isolated, while the 4-20 mA (-) terminals are common. 

** The MTL7207+ and MTL7208+ include a diode (forward voltage drop shown) in series with the barrier resistance. 

*** The MTL5011B is isolated end to end. 

ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 

MTL7206 (for loop-powered 4-20 mA transmitters) 

Supply 

Voltage 20-35 VDC 

Current 45 mA typical @ 20 mA with 24 VDC 

supply 

60 mA max @ 20 mA with 20 VDC supply 

Transmitter voltage 16 VDC min @ 20 mA with 250� load 

11 VDC min @ 20 mA with 500� load 

Safe area load 500� max 

Accuracy ±2 µA over 4-20 mA range 

Full range 0-23.6 mA 

Max safe 

area voltage 250 VAC/VDC 

Approvals FM/CSA Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A-G 

BASEEFA EEx ia IIC 


MTL5011B (dry contact to dry contact isolator) 

Supply voltage 20-35 VDC, 40 mA max 

Contacts 2A @250 VAC, 40 VDC 

Max safe 

area voltage 250 VAC/DC 

Approvals FM/UL Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A-G 



MTL7265ac (for DI 200 Series flow sensors and other general AC 

and DC systems) 

Working voltage 12.0 VDC @ 10 µA leakage current 

Max safe 

area voltage 250 VAC/VDC 

Approvals FM/CSA Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A-G 



MTL 7028+ (for 4-20 mA outputs to the hazardous area) 

Working voltage 26.0 VDC @ 10 µA leakage current 

Max safe 


Approvals FM/CSA Class I, I, III, Div 1, Groups A-G 



MTL 7207+ (dry contact to discrete voltage) 


Supply current 1.5 mA plus load current, actively 

limited to 50 mA total 

to protect safety fusing (50 mA) 

Output current (Iout ) Up to 35 mA 

Max safe 





MTL 7208+ (for switched digital outputs) 


Supply current 1.5 mA plus load current, actively 

limited to 50 mA total 

to protect safety fusing (50 mA) 

Output current (Iout ) Up to 35 mA 

Max safe 





WARNING: Check compatibility of the electrical safety parameters of the field equipment with those of the 

barriers to make sure that the combination is safe. If an intrinsically safe device does not have entity 

approval, it must be paired with a barrier specifically listed in its intrinsic safety drawing (control drawing).




WIRING 


I/P 

680� 

22k� 

Resistors only 

required for 

line fault 

detection 

4-20 mA 

Signal to 

Controlled 

Device or 

Display 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 


Shield 

MTL5011B 

Safe Area 

6 

5 

4 1 

MTL7028+ 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

Dry Contact to Dry Contact 

Digital Input 

2 

3 


4-20 mA Output to Hazardous Area 

LED, 

Alarm, 

Solenoid, 

etc. 


Two-Wire 

Transmitter 

Output SPDT 

Vs- 

Vs+ 

20-35 VDC 

4-20 mA 

Signal 

from 

Controller 


Iout 

4 1 

4-20 mA 5 

2 

6 

3 

Safe Area 

5 

6 

MTL7206 

4 1 

MTL7208+ 


2 

3 

Digital Output to Hazardous Area 

20-35 VDC 

4-20 mA Input from Hazardous Area 


4-20 mA 

Signal 

Digital Output 

10-35 VDC 

771 

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS



772 





Digital 

Input 


RED 

BLK 

DI 200 Series 

Flow Sensors 

Iout 

Shield 

Safe Area 

5 

6 

Safe Area 

4 1 

4 1 

5 

2 

6 

3 

MTL7265ac 

DI 200 Series Flow Sensors 



Shield 

SIG 

COM 

UFT-1 


MTL7206 Active barrier for 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 

MTL7265ac Passive barrier for DI 200 Series flow sensors and other 

General-Purpose 12 VAC or VDC devices 

MTL7028+ Passive barrier for 4-20 mA outputs to hazardous area devices 

MTL7207+ Active barrier for digital (dry contact) inputs, discrete voltage 

MTL7208+ Active barrier for switched digital outputs 

MTL5011B Isolator for digital (dry contact) inputs, SPDT 

ISP7000 Insulating spacers to isolate DIN rail ground 

ETL7000 Terminal for separately grounding DIN rail 

BRI7000 Individual barrier Identifiers for BIL7000 labels 

BIL7000 Labels for use with BRI7000 identifiers, 120 each 

2 

3 

10 to 35 VDC 

Sense 


MTL7207+ 

Digital Input from Hazardous Area 

(to discrete voltage) 


DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m)

Cable Seal 

Required 

Jacketed 

Cable 

Conduit Seal 

Hot gases cooled by 

long expansion path 

through threads 

Explosion 

Inside Box 

Sealing Compound 

Fibrous Packing 

Ground Flange 

Joint provides long, 

narrow path to cool 

escaping gases 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE

PRODUCTS 

We’ve got Diagrams, 

Tips, Applications and 

more! 



Precon Thermistor Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .773 

Facts about thermistors 

Sensor Resistance Charts - Precon Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .775 

Thermistor temperature/resistance tables 

Sensor Resistance Charts - RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .774 

RTD temperature/resistance tables 

Power Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .776 

Formulas for amps, hp, kW, kVA, common electrical terms, motor application formulas, 

single and polyphase circuits 

Current Transformer Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778 

Flow chart for selection of current transformers 

Pressure Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779 

Pressure conversion factors, air flow, head pressure, definitions 

Controlling Duct Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .780 

Static pressure control of VAV systems 

Measuring Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .782 

Using a pitot tube to measure air flow in a duct 

Demand Based Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784 

Utilizing carbon dioxide measurement to control ventilation 

Liquid Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785 

Determining liquid level by using a differential pressure transmitter 

NEMA Enclosure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .787 

Description of NEMA ratings for enclosures 

Control Voltage Transformer Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788 

Step-by-step selection of control transformers 

Powering Multiple Devices from a Common Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789 

Precautions to take to avoid component damage 

Understanding Current Sinking, Current Sourcing, and Ground Loops . . .791 

Explanations to aid design and troubleshooting 

Steam Valve Sizing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793 

Pressure drops, flow coefficients, and valve sizing 

Useful Steam Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793 

Formulas and data for steam 

Steam Valve Capacity Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794 

Steam capacity in pounds per hour 

Providing Steam Isolation & Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795 

Steam isolation and temperature protection for pressure transmitters 

Hazardous Atmospheres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .796 

Monitoring the atmosphere in hazardous locations 

Explosionproof Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .797 

Selecting and applying explosionproof controls in hazardous locations 

Intrinsically Safe Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .799 

Selecting and applying intrinsically safe controls in hazardous locations 

Selecting Intrinsic Safety Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .801 

Selecting intrinsic safety barriers for hazardous locations


PRECON THERMISTOR QUALITY 

History 

In 1945 Bell Labs refined the process of making stable and reproducible thermistors. The telephone company then 

started to use this technology in large quantities. Precon started producing thermistors in 1967 and has satisfied customers 

for over 36 years. Like Bell Labs, Precon controlled the complete manufacturing process in order to manufacture 

a superior product. Other manufacturers purchase prefabricated glass bead thermistors, which are usually procured 

from the lowest bidder. 

Manufacturing Process 

Precon starts with the highest quality chemical ingredients. The best raw materials 

ensure the best precision and stability. The mixture is pre-aged to render the 

precise thermistor curve required. This ensures repeatability and long term stability, 

specified at 0.24°F for 5 years. The leads are then attached, and the sensor 

is trimmed and chemically cleaned. This step ensures interchangeability of 

±0.36°F and eliminates impurities for long life. At this point, each sensor is tested 

before encapsulation. This produces a 100% product yield and ensures almost no 

failures. Precon’s exclusive encapsulation, in a heat-conductive housing, makes 

the sensor complete. It protects the sensor from moisture and physical damage and provides a heat dissipation constant 

of 1.5 mW/°F. Each sensor is then inserted into the appropriate mounting hardware for the HVAC application. 

This includes wall, duct, immersion, OSA, pipe, freezer, concealed, or custom housing. Each mounting design was 

specifically developed to make mounting easy and durable for HVAC use. 

Comparisons 

Manufacturing quality is obvious when comparing a Precon sensor side by side with a typical HVAC counterpart. It’s 

easy to pick out the sensor that lasts! Heat dissipation is critical to good temperature measurement. As seen in the 

graph below, Precon sensors dissipate heat at three times the rate of glass bead-type sensors, so be sure to ask if 

the thermistor you buy is based on a glass bare bead sensor. 

The most common BAS thermistor voltage is 2-3 VDC. At the 

2V level, the Precon sensor is within 0.3°F of its zero-power 

point, while the competition is within 0.75 to 1.5°F. Since power 

(heat) is proportional to the applied voltage squared, the error 

value grows rapidly as monitoring voltage increases. When this 

error is added to the basic accuracy of the thermistor, errors 

begin to accumulate and become unacceptably large. Large 

errors cause energy waste and significant comfort problems if 

not corrected. Precon sensors take the risk out of temperature 

sensing by reducing the errors added by the BAS. 

Benefits 

All Precon sensors are equipped with a five-year warranty. The 

process above is the best in the world and Precon backs it up. 

Mean time between sensor failure is over 117 years. This number is even more amazing considering it includes all 

failures of any kind, including customer damage or misapplication. The fact is, Precon thermistors grow more stable 

with time. 

The biggest benefit is to your customer - no warranty call backs. Long sensor life is typically far beyond the building 

life. Each warranty call back due to sensor failure costs not only a minimum of one hour of down time for your service 

technician but also uncalculable damage to your reputation and perceived competence with your customer. 

Precon sensors are the most cost-effective when looking at the big picture of installation - system performance, no 

call backs, and company reputation. Sensors are often the smallest cost on any project. Why short change your customer? 

Use a Precon sensor. 

Error In °F 

9.00 

8.00 

7.00 

6.00 

5.00 

4.00 

3.00 

2.00 

PRECON 

Encapsulated 

10K Thermistor Error Due to 

Self-Heating Effect @ 75°F 

1.00 

0.00 

1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 

Applied Voltage From BAS Input 

Bare Bead 

Competition 

Brand Y 

Self-Heating 

Error @ 

0.28 mW/°F 

Brand X 

Self-Heating 

Error @ 

0.56 mW/°F 

PreCon 

Self-Heating 

Error @ 

1.50 mW/°F 

773 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



SENSOR RESISTANCE CHART – RTD SENSORS 

FAHRENHEIT 

Element Type 78 Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 

Code Base 2000Ω 100Ω 1000Ω 1000Ω 

Resistance Nickel Iron Platinum Platinum Platinum 

@ 70°F @ 32°F @ 32°F @ 32°F 

TCR 0.00527 0.00385 0.00385 0.00375 

°F Ohms Ohms Ohms Ohms 

-40 84.259 842.590 846.576 

-30 1543.240 86.457 864.570 868.013 

-20 1585.015 88.651 886.510 889.407 

-10 1627.739 90.842 908.420 910.759 

0 1671.379 93.029 930.290 932.069 

10 1715.904 95.211 952.110 953.340 

20 1761.280 97.390 973.900 974.572 

30 1807.475 99.565 995.650 995.766 

40 1854.460 101.736 1017.360 1016.922 

50 1902.217 103.904 1039.040 1038.042 

60 1950.736 106.067 1060.670 1059.124 

70 2000.005 108.227 1082.270 1080.169 

80 2050.015 110.383 1103.830 1101.177 

90 2100.754 112.536 1125.360 1122.148 

100 2152.212 114.684 1146.840 1143.081 

110 2204.378 116.829 1168.290 1163.978 

120 2257.242 118.971 1189.710 1184.837 

130 2310.792 121.109 1211.090 1205.659 

140 2365.019 123.243 1232.430 1226.445 

150 2419.911 125.373 1253.730 1247.192 

160 2475.458 127.500 1275.000 1267.903 

170 2531.649 129.623 1296.230 1288.577 

180 2588.474 131.742 1317.420 1309.213 

190 2645.921 133.858 1338.580 1329.812 

200 2703.980 135.970 1359.700 1350.374 

210 2762.641 138.079 1380.790 1370.899 

220 2821.892 140.184 1401.840 1391.387 

230 2881.724 142.285 1422.850 1411.838 

240 2942.125 144.383 1443.830 1432.251 

250 146.477 1464.770 1452.628 

260 148.567 1485.670 1472.967 

270 150.654 1506.540 1493.269 

280 152.738 1527.380 1513.534 

290 154.817 1548.170 1533.762 

300 156.894 1568.940 1553.952 

774 

RTD SENSOR RESISTANCE 

CENTIGRADE 

Element Type 78 Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 

Code Base 2000Ω 100Ω 1000Ω 1000Ω 

Resistance Nickel Iron Platinum Platinum Platinum 

@ 21°C @ 0°C @ 0°C @ 0°C 

TCR 0.00527 0.00385 0.00385 0.00375 

°C Ohms Ohms Ohms Ohms 

-40 84.259 842.590 846.576 

-30 88.213 882.130 885.132 

-20 1653.810 92.160 921.600 923.550 

-10 1735.310 96.083 960.830 961.837 

0 1816.810 100.000 1000.000 1000.000 

10 1903.450 103.904 1039.040 1038.042 

20 1990.090 107.795 1077.950 1075.963 

30 2081.540 111.675 1116.750 1113.764 

40 2172.990 115.543 1155.450 1151.445 

50 2269.000 119.399 1193.990 1189.005 

60 2365.010 123.243 1232.430 1226.445 

70 2465.335 127.075 1270.750 1263.764 

80 2565.660 130.895 1308.950 1300.963 

90 2670.050 134.703 1347.030 1338.042 

100 2774.440 138.500 1385.000 1375.000 

110 2882.640 142.285 1422.850 1411.838 

120 2990.840 146.060 1460.600 1448.560 

130 3102.605 149.820 1498.200 1485.153 

140 3214.370 153.580 1535.800 1521.630 

150 3329.455 157.308 1573.080 1557.986 

160 3444.540 161.040 1610.400 1594.222 

170 3562.690 164.750 1647.500 1630.338 

180 3680.840 168.460 1684.600 1666.333 

190 3801.805 172.146 1721.460 1702.208 

200 3922.770 175.840 1758.400 1737.963 

210 179.496 1794.960 1773.597 

220 183.170 1831.700 1809.111 

230 186.800 1868.000 1844.504 

240 190.450 1904.500 1879.780 

250 194.058 1940.580 1914.930 

260 197.690 1976.900 1949.962


SENSOR RESISTANCE CHART – PRECON THERMISTORS 

The Precon sensor has a dissipation constant in still air at 25°C of 2.7 mW/°C. The heat dissipation constant is an 

expression in milliwatts of the power required to raise the temperature of a thermistor 1°C above the ambient. 

PRECON THERMISTOR SENSOR RESISTANCE 

PRECON TYPE II PRECON TYPE III PRECON TYPE IV 

Model 21 Model 22 Model 24 Model 27 Model 3 Model 42 

2252Ω @ 77°F 3000Ω @ 77°F 10,000Ω @ 77°F 100,000Ω @ 77°F 10,000Ω @ 77°F 20,000Ω @ 77°F 

±0.36°F from ±0.36°F from ±0.36°F from ±0.36°F @ 77°F ±0.36°F from ±0.36°F from 

32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F ±1.3°F from 32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F 32° to 158°F 

Temp°F Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance 

-35 63.08K 84.09K 280.1K 2801K 203.6K 672.1K 

-30 52.72K 70.27K 234.1K 2341K 173.6K 557.2K 

-25 44.20K 58.92K 196.3K 1963K 148.3K 463.4K 

-20 37.19K 49.56K 165.1K 1651K 127.1K 386.7K 

-15 31.38K 41.83K 139.3K 1393K 109.2K 323.7K 

-10 26.57K 35.41K 118.0K 1180K 94.07K 271.9K 

-5 22.57K 30.07K 100.2K 1002K 81.23K 228.0K 

0 19.22K 25.61K 85.35K 853.5K 70.32K 192.6K 

5 16.42K 21.88K 72.91K 729.1K 61.02K 163.1K 

10 14.07K 18.74K 62.48K 624.8K 53.07K 138.7K 

15 12.08K 16.10K 53.64K 536.4K 46.27K 118.3K 

20 10.41K 13.87K 46.23K 462.3K 40.42K 101.0K 

25 8988 11.98K 39.91K 399.1K 35.39K 86.60K 

30 7782 10.37K 34.56K 345.6K 31.06K 74.40K 

35 6755 8999 30.00K 300.0K 27.31K 64.10K 

40 5877 7830 26.10K 261.0K 24.06K 55.30K 

45 5126 6830 22.76K 227.6K 21.24K 47.89K 

50 4482 5971 19.90K 199.0K 18.79K 41.40K 

55 3927 5231 17.44K 174.4K 16.65K 36.10K 

60 3448 4594 15.31K 153.1K 14.78K 31.44K 

65 3035 4043 13.48K 134.8K 13.15K 27.46K 

70 2676 3565 11.88K 118.8K 11.72K 24.02K 

75 2365 3150 10.50K 105.0K 10.46K 21.06K 

80 2094 2789 9298 92.98K 9354 18.50K 

85 1858 2475 8250 82.50K 8378 16.29K 

90 1651 2200 7331 73.31K 7516 14.37K 

95 1471 1959 6532 65.32K 6754 12.69K 

100 1312 1748 5826 58.26K 6078 11.24K 

105 1173 1562 5209 52.09K 5479 9.97K 

110 1050 1399 4663 46.63K 4947 8.86K 

115 941.8 1254 4182 41.82K 4472 7.88K 

120 846.0 1127 3757 37.57K 4049 7.03K 

125 761.3 1014 3381 33.81K 3671 6.27K 

130 686.1 913.9 3047 30.47K 3333 5.61K 

135 619.4 825.0 2750 27.50K 3031 5.03K 

140 559.9 745.9 2486 24.86K 2759 4.51K 

145 507.0 675.4 2251 22.51K 2515 4.06K 

150 459.7 612.4 2041 20.41K 2296 3.65K 

155 417.5 556.2 1854 18.54K 2098 3.29K 

160 379.6 505.8 1686 16.86K 1920 2.97K 

165 345.7 460.7 1535 15.35K 1759 2.69K 

170 315.2 420.1 1400 14.00K 1614 2.43K 

175 287.8 383.7 1278 12.78K 1482 2.20K 

180 263.1 350.8 1168 11.68K 1362 2.00K 

185 240.9 321.2 1070 10.70K 1254 1.82K 

190 220.8 294.5 980.5 9805 1156 1.65K 

195 202.6 270.3 899.6 8996 1066 1.51K 

200 186.2 248.4 826.8 8268 984.0 1.38K 

205 171.3 228.5 760.7 7607 909.8 1.26K 

210 157.8 210.5 700.7 7007 841.9 1.15K 

215 145.5 194.1 646.1 6461 779.8 1.05K 

220 134.3 179.2 596.4 5964 723.0 967.5 

225 124.2 165.6 551.5 5515 671.0 888.4 

230 114.9 153.2 510.2 5102 623.3 818.4 

235 106.4 141.9 472.5 4725 579.5 753.0 

240 98.7 131.5 438.3 4383 539.4 693.6 

775 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



POWER EQUATIONS 

FORMULAS TO DETERMINE AMPERES, hp, kW, and kVA 

To Find Direct Current Alternating Current 

Single-Phase Three-Phase 

Amperes (I) when hp x 746 hp x 746 hp x 746 

horsepower is known E x %eff E x %eff x pf 1.73 x E x %eff x pf 

Amperes (I) when kW x 1000 kW x 1000 kW x 1000 

kilowatts is known E E x pf 1.73 x E x pf 

Amperes (I) when kVA x 1000 kVA x 1000 

kVA is known E 1.73 x E 

Kilowatts (kW) I x E I x E x pf I x E x 1.73 x pf 

1000 1000 1000 

kVA I x E I x E x 1.73 

1000 1000 

Horsepower (output) I x E x %eff I x E x %eff x pf I x E x 1.73 x %eff x pf 

746 746 746 

COMMON ELECTRICAL TERMS 

Ampere (I) Unit of current or rate of flow of electricity 

Volt (E) Unit of electromotive force 

Ohm (R) Unit of resistance 


R (DC or 100% pf) 

%eff Motor efficiency Note: If unknown assume %eff x pf = 0.7 for 25 hp or less 


Megohm 1,000,000 ohms 

Volt amperes (VA) Unit of apparent power 

E x I (single-phase) 

E x I x 1.73 (three-phase) 

Kilovolt amperes (kVA) 1000 volt - amperes 

Power factor (pf) Ratio of true to apparent power 

W or kW 

= COSØ (Ø = angle current leads or lags voltage) 

VA kVA 

Watt hour (Wh) Unit of electrical work 

One watt for one hour 

3.413 Btu 

Kilowatt hour (kWh) 1000 watt hours 

Horsepower (hp) Measure of time rate of doing work 

Equivalent of raising 33,000 pounds 1 foot in 1 minute 

746 watts 

MOTOR APPLICATION FORMULAS 

Torque (lb-ft) = hp x 5250 

rpm 

Shaft stress = hp x 321,000 

(pounds per square inch) rpm x shaft dia 3 

776 

( ) 

For pumps 

Horsepower = gpm x head in feet x specific gravity* (*Water - 1.00, Ethylene glycol - 1.125) 

3960 x mechanical efficiency of pump 

Speed 

Synchronous rpm = Hertz x 120 

Poles 

Percent slip = synchronous rpm - full load rpm x 100 

synchronous rpm


POWER EQUATIONS 

SINGLE-PHASE VOLTAGE DROP 

SINGLE-PHASE (VAC) 

POLYPHASE (VAC) 

C 

A 

N 

A 

A 

N 

C 

120(240)(480) 

Two-Wire 

B 

= amps x (length of circuit in ft) x 2* x (ohms per 1000 ft) 

1000 

= I x L x 2* x R *Change to 1.73 for three-phase 

1000 

Wire Size AWG ohms/1000 ft (@ 77°F) 

(Stranded) 

22 16.46 

20 10.35 

18 6.512 

16 4.095 

14 2.576 

12 1.620 

120(240)(480) 

120(240)(480) 

120(240)(480) 

Three-Phase Three-Wire 

B 

Line 

Ground 

120(277) 

120(277) 

120(277) 

208(480) 

Three-Phase Four-Wire Wye 

C 

A 

N 

B 

208(480) 

A 

N 

208(480) 

Line 

Ground 

Line 

B 

120(240) 

120(240) 

Three-Wire 

208(416) 

120(240) 

120(240) 

240(480) 

240(480) 

Three-Phase Four-Wire Delta 

240(480) 

777 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



CURRENT TRANSFORMER SELECTION GUIDE 

SOLID CORE 

(5A Secondary) 


RL or AL 

SFT 

SHT 

778 

*Non-stock items 

MEASURE LARGEST DIAMETER 

OF CONDUCTOR OR BUS 

Use 

Model 

2 

5 

7 

8 

Call Kele 

Note: 

Round 

Square with base* 

Square without base* 

If diameter is 

less than in (cm) 

0.50 (1.3) 

1.00 (2.5) 

2.00 (5.1) 

2.75 (7.0) 

over 2.75 (77.0) 

DETERMINE MONITORING POINT 

IN SYSTEM 

Can conductor be disconnected to slide into a 

solid core (one-piece) CT? 

YES NO 

DETERMINE CT STYLE 

Use 

Model 

5A 

Secondary 

500, 501, 600, 601 

SPLIT CORE 

500, 501, 600, 601, 603, 603D, SCT 

1A 

Secondary 

603, 603D, 600 

601, 500 

MEASURE LARGEST DIAMETER OF CONDUCTOR OR BUS 



600 1.5 x 5 (3.8 x 12.7) 

601 4 x 4 (10.2 x 10.2) 

500 3.5 x 6.5 (8.9 x 16.5) 

501 3.5 x 11 (8.9 x 28.0) 

Note: Bus bar may 

fit diagonally 

Use 

Model 

603 

603D 

600 

500 

601 

DETERMINE CT RATING 







1.25 x 1.25 

(3.2 x 3.2) 

2 x 2 

(5.1 x 5.1) 

DETERMINE MAXIMUM AMPS BY 

1. Size of upstream breaker, 

2. Size of upstream fuse, or 

3. Maximum current conductor can carry 

(Refer to National Electrical Code Tables: 310-16 through 310-19) 

Use 80% of the above value in selecting the CT ratio primary amps. 

4. Analysis of last 12 months demand billing can be used to determine maximum 

kW ( consider possible load growth) 

SELECT THE RATIO 

CT ratio = maximum primary amps followed by the secondary amps 

Example: 500:5 = 500 maximum primary amps and 5 secondary amps 

Select the ratio code from the catalog page of the selected style (round up if between two sizes). 

TO USE MORE READILY AVAILABLE CT's 

0.5 x 1.5 (1.3 x 3.8) 

1.5 x 1.5 (3.8 x 3.8) 

1.5 x 5 (3.8 x 12.7) 

3.5 x 6.5 (8.9 x 16.5) 

4 x 4 (10.2 x 10.2) 

0.333V 

Secondary 

SCT Series 

Use 

Model 

SCT-1250 

SCT-2000 



NOTE: Except for SCT Series, the above dimensions are approximately 0.5" less than the CT hole size for ease of installation. 

CT sizing can be changed by looping the monitored conductor through multiple 

times. Example: A 200:5 CT with conductor doubled becomes a 100:5 or 

with conductor through 4 times becomes a 50:5 (limited to #8 wire or smaller) 

The burden in VA is the allowable load on the secondary of the CT. This consists of the sum total of the wiring 

and all connected devices. For a long secondary cable runs or to make burden calculations, contact Trane.


PRESSURE EQUATIONS 

PRESSURE CONVERSION FACTORS 

psig = in of H 2 0 x 0.0361 in of H 2 0 = psig x 27.71 

psig = ft of H 2 0 x 0.4335 ft of H 2 0 = psig x 2.31 

psig = mm of H 2 0 x 0.0014 mm of H 2 0 = psig x 703.1 

psig = cm of H 2 0 x 0.0142 cm of H 2 0 = psig x 70.31 

psig = in of Hg x 0.4912 in of Hg = psig x 2.036 

psig = mm of Hg x 0.0193 mm of Hg = psig x 57.71 

psig = cm of Hg x 0.193 cm of Hg = psig x 5.771 

psig = kg/cm 2 x 14.22 kg/cm 2 = psig x 0.0703 

psig = bar x 14.50 bar = psig x 0.0689 

psig = mbar x 0.0145 mbar = psig x 68.95 

psig = Pa x 1.45 x 10 -4 Pa = psig x 6895 

psig = kPa x 0.1450 kPa = psig x 6.895 

psig = atm x 14.696 atm = psig x 0.068 

psia = psig + 14.696 (sea level) 

AIR PRESSURE / FLOW FORMULAS 

V = 4004 Pv Where: V = Velocity (fpm) 

Pv * = V 2 

( 4004 ) 

Pv Pt Ps = 

= 

= 

Velocity pressure ("W.C.) 

Total pressure ("W.C.) 

Static pressure ("W.C.) 

P v = P t - P s *P v may be determined by a Pitot Tube. 

Scim = SCFM*1728 

HEAD PRESSURE FORMULAS 

Head (feet) = psig x 2.31 psig = feet head x specific gravity 

specific gravity 2.31 

PRESSURE DEFINITIONS 

Absolute pressure The sum of gauge pressure and atmospheric pressure 

Atmospheric pressure The pressure existing at the surface of the earth caused by the weight of a 

column of air above the point of measurement; varies with altitude and 

weather conditions, but 14.696 psia is generally accepted except in high 

altitude locations 

Gauge pressure A pressure reading above atmospheric pressure; most instruments read 

gauge pressure 

Pitot tube A tube that is inserted in a duct to measure both total pressure and static 

pressure and has separate connections so each pressure may be sensed 

Pressure transmitter A device that converts a pressure input into an electrical signal 

Snubber A device used to dampen pulsations to pressure instruments 

Static pressure The outward push of a fluid against the walls of a container 

Total pressure The sum of static pressure and velocity pressure 

Velocity pressure The pressure exerted by the velocity of a fluid; generally obtained by 

measuring total pressure and static pressure and subtracting the static 

pressure from total pressure 

779 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



CONTROLLING DUCT PRESSURE 

The Model UCM-420A is one of the most versatile products 

sold by Trane. Although this product is capable of performing 

many control functions, it was primarily designed as a set point 

controller. Since the introduction of the UCM-420A, responses 

from customers indicate that pressure control is a popular 

application for this product. 

This article will discuss a typical application - controlling static 

pressure in a duct by varying fan speed with a variable frequency 

drive (VFD). This system could also be used to control 

the pressure with inlet vanes, discharge dampers, bypass 

dampers, etc. The same principles involved in this application 

could be used in other control applications, such as controlling 

water pressure with variable speed pumping, VAV zone control, 

or humidifier control. A Model PCM pressure controller 

may be used to sense duct pressure and provide an analog 

Proportional plus Integral (PI) control signal to control this 

pressure. However, in this article we utilized a Model T30-030 

pressure transmitter and a UCM-420A set point controller so 

the relationship between the system components would be 

more clearly defined. 

A VAV Application 

Figure 1 shows a simple variable air volume (VAV) system. As 

the spaces served by the VAV terminals are satisfied, the 

zone dampers will modulate closed and, without a pressure 

control system, the static pressure in the duct will rise. For this 

example, assume that a static pressure of 2" W.C. is required. 

To monitor the static pressure in the duct, we will use a T30- 

030 differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0-3" W.C. 

The 4-20 mA signal from this device will be fed into a UCM- 

420A set point controller, which in turn will control the speed of 

the fan by sending a 4-20 mA control signal to the fan's VFD. 

The manual potentiometer on the UCM-420A will be used to 

set the static pressure at the desired level. See the wiring dia- 

FIGURE 1. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM 

780 

AC Power 

IN 

VFD 

4-20 mA 

PI 

Control 

Signal 

UCM-420A 

Return 

Air 

Supply 

Air 

T30-030 

24 VDC 

Static 

Pressure 

Tubing 

gram in Figure 2 on next page for system wiring. This wiring 

diagram shows a Model DT13 signal isolator. The DT13 will 

not be needed unless the VFD requires an isolated control signal. 

Programming the UCM-420A 

All programming of the UCM-420A is done by DIP switches 

and jumpers. A list of the functions programmed by DIP 

switches, as well as those programmed by jumpers, is shown 

in Table 1. The proper settings for this example are also 

shown. 

TABLE 1. PROGRAMMED FUNCTIONS 

DIP Switch Functions 

Remote set point Disable 

enable/disable 

Local Set Point Enable 


Direct-/Reverse-acting Reverse acting 

Integral reset rate As required 

Throttling range As required 

Single unit PWM Disable 


Multiplex PWM Disable 


Multiplex unit address Off 

PWM time base Off 

Jumper Functions 

Remote set point signal None 

Local set point signal Three-wire 

potentiometer 

Input signal 4-20 mA 

VAV Terminal 

VAV Terminal 

VAV Terminal


CONTROLLING DUCT PRESSURE 

In this example, we are using the set point potentiometer on 

the UCM-420A to adjust the pressure, so the local set point 

should be enabled and the remote set point disabled. As the 

pressure in the duct increases, the control signal from the 

UCM-420A must decrease to slow down the fan speed, 

assuming the VFD is direct acting (speed increases with an 

increase in control signal); therefore, reverse acting control 

should be selected for the UCM-420A. The integral reset rate 

and throttling range required will vary from system to system 

and must be determined in the field. 

Since pulse-width modulation is not to be used in this example, 

all PWM functions are disabled. The jumpers will be set 

for three-wire potentiometer local set point and 4-20 mA 

input from the pressure transducer. The instructions furnished 

with the UCM-420A will explain in detail how to set the DIP 

switches and jumpers to accomplish the above setting. 

The input to the UCM-420A from the static pressure transducer 

has a range of 0-3" W.C. Therefore, when there is no pressure 

in the duct, the input will be 4 mA; when the static pressure 

in the duct is 3" W.C., the input will be 20 mA. The set 

point potentiometer scale on the UCM-420A is labeled 0- 

100%. In our example, we require 2" W.C. in the duct, so the 

set point potentiometer should be set for 2/3 x 100 = 67%. 

Tuning the System 

As stated earlier, the throttling range and integral reset must 

be fine-tuned in the field and cannot be calculated. The throttling 

range is defined as the amount of signal change at the 

input required to cause the output to go through its entire 

range (4-20 mA). For example, a 50% throttling range means 

FIGURE 2. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM WIRING 


MUX 

B3 B4 B5 ADDR 

TIME 

B6 B7 B8 BASE 

PROP 

A6 A7 A8 T.R. 

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2.65 0 0 0 10% 

0 0 1 2 0 0 1 5.2 0 0 1 20% 

0 1 0 3 0 1 0 12.85 0 1 0 35% 

0 1 1 4 0 1 1 25.6 0 1 1 50% 

1 0 0 5 1 X X .59-2.93 1 0 0 65% 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

6 

7 

RESET 

A4 A5 PER MIN 

1 

1 

0 

1 

1 

0 

80% 

90% 

1 1 1 8 0 0 OFF 1 1 1 100% 

"1" MEANS 


0 1 

1 0 

1 1 

0.5 

1 

2 

"0" MEANS 



A3 REVERSE ACTING DIRECT ACTING 





UCM-420A 


SET POINT SET POINT 

A 

B 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

STATUS 

PWM 

INPUT 

PWM 

INPUT 

REM SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT + 

LOC SPT 

INPUT 

LOC SPT 

POT – 

INPUT 

INPUT 

24 PWR 

COMMON 

MA SIG 

OUTPUT 

that for every 1 mA change in the input, there will be a 2 mA 

change in the output. To properly adjust the throttling range, 

first-disable the integral reset and set the throttling range at 

100%. Then, reduce the throttling range in increments until the 

controller begins to hunt. When the controller begins to hunt, 

the throttling range is too narrow, so widen it one step. The 

integral reset rate may now be adjusted. The integral reset 

corrects the output of the UCM-420A to compensate for the 

offset inherent in proportional-only controllers. The integral 

reset ramps the output in the direction that forces the input signal 

to exactly match the set point. The number of times per 

minute this offset is overcome by the output signal is the integral 

reset rate. The quicker the system responds, the higher 

(more resets per minute) the reset rate may be set. 

A Good Solution 

This control system will provide very smooth, precise static 

pressure control in the discharge duct. It will also save energy 

since the fan will use only as much horsepower as required to 

maintain the set point pressure. In this example, the pressure 

is adjusted with the set point potentiometer on the UCM-420A. 

This pressure could also be controlled by a remote potentiometer 

or an analog or pulse width signal from a BAS controller. 

Another application would be controlling multiple zones (such 

as VAV boxes) from one BAS controller output by using the 

multiplex PWM mode. In this application, a Precon Type 3 

thermistor could be used as the temperature input to each 

UCM-420A, and the BAS controller could send eight different 

set point signals to the zones. Multiple UCM-420As could 

receive the same set point signal. 

Hi 

Lo 

T30-030 

Transmitter 

+ 

– 

Connect to duct 

Open to the atmosphere 

* Required only if the VFD used 

requires an isolated control signal 

MODEL DT13 

Signal Isolator* 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

SIG IN 

SIG IN 

SIG OUT 

SIG OUT 

AC PWR 

AC PWR 

Power 

Supply 

24 VDC 

+ – 

Isolated Control 

Signal to VFD 

781 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



MEASURING AIR FLOW 

Building Automation Systems (BAS) are often required to 

measure the actual air flow in air handling systems. Although 

there are many ways to measure air flow, the two most commonly 

used with a BAS are the hot wire anemometer and various 

devices that measure the velocity pressure of the air. 

Once the velocity pressure is known, the BAS is then able to 

calculate air flow. Each method has advantages as well as disadvantages. 

Hot Wire Anemometers 

The primary advantage of the hot wire anemometer is that it 

can provide an analog output that is proportional to flow, and 

no square root calculation is required to measure air flow. The 

disadvantages of the hot wire anemometer are that it measures 

only one point in the cross section of the duct, and it 

may require periodic recalibration (see Model AVS-200 in the 

Flow Section). 

Differential Pressure Devices 

Pitot tubes and averaging tubes are among the flow measuring 

devices that measure velocity pressure. The pitot tube may 

be used with a differential pressure transmitter to determine air 

flow at a relatively low cost; however, the BAS controller must 

be able to calculate the square root of the velocity pressure. 

Also, the pitot tube measures the velocity at only one point in 

the duct. 

FIGURE 1. MEASURING AIR FLOW WITH A PITOT TUBE 

Airflow Calculations with a Pitot Tube 

Figure 1 shows a typical pitot tube. In this diagram, Ps is the 

static pressure exerted in all directions, such as the pressure 

inside a balloon. This is sensed by the radial holes in the pitot 

tube. Pv is the velocity pressure caused by the momentum of 

the air moving in the duct. Pt is the total pressure and is the 

sum of the static pressure and velocity pressure (P t =Ps+Pv). 

The opening in the tip of the pitot tube measures total pressure. 

Since only velocity pressure is required to calculate air 

782 

AIR 

FLOW 

Low Pressure Port 

High Pressure Port 

Differential 

Pressure 

Transmitter 

Controller 

Input 

P 

P 

T 

V P + ( ) S 


Connection 

P S 

P S 

24 VDC 

Power Supply 

Pitot 

Tube 

Total 

Pressure 

Connection 

flow, the total pressure is piped to the high pressure port of a 

differential pressure transmitter, and the static pressure is 

piped to the low pressure port of the transmitter. The differential 

pressure that is then measured is the velocity pressure 

(P v =P t -P s ). Once the velocity pressure is known, velocity may 

be calculated by the following formula: 

Velocity (fpm) = 1096 P v 

D 

where P v = velocity pressure in "W.C. 

D = air density in lb/ft 3 

Air density is normally assumed to be 0.075 lb/ft 3 , based on 

70°F dry air at 29.9" Hg barometric pressure. If corrections 

must be made for barometric pressure or air temperature, the 

air density may be calculated by the following formula: 

Air Density = 1.325 x P B 

T 

where PB = barometric pressure in "Hg 

T = absolute temperature (°F + 460) 

If air density is assumed to be standard (0.075 lb/ft 3 ), the output 

of the differential pressure transmitter may be used to calculate 

air velocity by the following formula: 

Air Velocity (fpm) = (C f ) x M o - 4 

where C f = flow coefficient from Figure 2 

M o = pressure transmitter mA output 

For accurate results, a differential pressure transmitter should 

be selected that corresponds as closely as possible to the 

velocity pressure to be measured (see Figure 2). 

Once the air velocity is known, air flow in cfm is simply the 

duct inside area multiplied by air velocity. 

Air Flow (cfm) = V x A 

where V = average duct velocity (ft/min) 

A = duct cross sectional area (ft 2 ) 

Notice that V is average duct velocity. When using a pitot tube, 

velocity can be measured at only one point in the duct. In a 

straight duct run, the velocity will be greatest in the center of 

the duct and lowest near the duct wall where the effects of friction 

slow air flow. The size and the shape of the duct determine 

how much the center velocity will deviate from the average 

velocity. To obtain an approximate average duct velocity 

when a pitot tube is installed in the center of a straight duct, 

reduce the center velocity by 10%. This will yield results that 

should be accurate to within ±5%.


MEASURING AIR FLOW 

Averaging Differential Pressure Devices 

To take some of the guesswork out of determining average 

duct velocity, an averaging tube may be used. An averaging 

tube operates basically the same way as a pitot tube to determine 

average duct velocity pressure, except instead of measuring 

one point within the duct, the averaging tube measures 

multiple points to determine a true average velocity. As an 

added benefit, some averaging tubes are designed so that the 

differential pressure measured is two to three times the actual 

velocity pressure. This amplification is accomplished by the 

shape and design of the tube and results in greater resolution 

and the ability to measure lower air velocities. 

SSS Series 

160 Series 

Air Velocity Pressure Measurement Devices 

AMP Series 

Device Placement in the Duct 

When measuring air flow with either a pitot tube or an averaging 

tube, best results will be obtained when the flow measuring 

device is located at least 7.5 duct diameters downstream and 

1.5 diameters upstream from any disturbance (elbows, 

obstructions, etc.). Also, for best results, straightening vanes 

may be used 1.5 to 5 diameters upstream of the flow measuring 

device. 

FIGURE 2. FLOW COEFFICIENTS FOR DIFFERENTIAL 

PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

(for use with pitot tubes only) 

Differential 

Pressure Maximum Flow 

Transmitter Air Velocity Coefficient 

Range 

"W.C. 

(fpm) (Cf ) 

0.1 1265 316 

0.2 1790 448 

0.3 2190 549 

0.5 2830 708 

1.0 4000 1000 

2.0 5660 1420 

3.0 6930 1733 

5.0 8950 2240 

In Summary 

• Only the average duct velocity and duct cross-section area 

must be known to determine air flow. 

• By piping the total pressure to the high pressure port and 

the static pressure to the low pressure port of a differential 

pressure transmitter, the velocity pressure will be measured. 

• When the duct center velocity is measured with a pitot 

tube, the average velocity will be approximately 90% of the 

measured velocity. 

• By using an averaging tube, the average duct velocity may 

be measured directly. The averaging tube may also amplify 

pressure for greater resolution and higher accuracy at low 

flow rates. Flow coefficients for use with averaging tubes 

will be provided by the manufacturer. 

• Always install air flow measurement devices at least 7.5 

duct diameters downstream and 1.5 diameters upstream of 

anything in the duct that could cause turbulence. 

QUICK TIPS 

(for use with pitot tubes only) 

By applying the two simple facts below, air velocity 

may be quickly estimated in the field. 

Fact 1. 4000 fpm velocity = 1" velocity pressure 

Fact 2. Velocity pressure varies as the flow squared or 

P2 = V 2 

2 or V2 = P2 P () 

1 V1 V2 P2 Example: 

If a velocity pressure is known, the velocity may be 

calculated by using 4000 fpm and 1" differential as 

V 1 and P 1 . Assume the velocity pressure is 0.25". 

What is the air velocity? 

V 2 = P 2 or V 2 = 0.25 

V 1 P 1 4000 1 

or V 2 = 2000 fpm 

If a velocity is known, velocity pressure may be 

calculated in a similar manner. Assume velocity is 

1000 fpm, what is velocity pressure? 

( ) 

( ) 

P2 = V 2 

2 or P2 = 1000 2 

P1 V1 1 4000 

or P2 = 0.0625" W.C. 

783 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



DEMAND-BASED VENTILATION 

Why Ventilate? 

When a building is occupied, there are two primary sources of 

air contaminants. The building materials and furnishings emit 

water vapor and other gases, and the people inside do too. Of 

these, the people component is by far the most significant in a 

typical office building, school, theater, or other similar commercial 

establishment. The non-people component may be heavier 

in industrial occupancies or places where volatile materials 

are stored. In either case, the air contaminant level must be 

controlled by introducing fresh air at an appropriate rate. 

Codes 

When an engineer selects the amount of outdoor air to be provided 

to a space, he/she must comply with the governing 

mechanical codes. Nearly all of these refer to ASHRAE 

Standard 62-1989, which specifies minimum ventilation rates 

for the most common types of occupancy on a cfm per person 

basis. These are the occupancy types mentioned above, in 

which the people component of contamination far outweighs 

the other sources. Consider a school classroom with 30 desks 

plus a teacher. ASHRAE 62 calls for 15 cfm of outdoor air per 

person, so the air handling system must be capable of supplying 

a minimum of 465 cfm of outdoor air. Depending on the 

type of construction and exposure, this outdoor air can amount 

to as much as half of the heating and cooling load! 

Variable Occupancy-Variable Ventilation 

Now consider that the classroom in question only has 15 students 

enrolled for a school year. Through a full heating season 

and a partial cooling season, an unnecessary 225 cfm of outdoor 

air will be introduced if the damper controls are only 

designed for economizer with a minimum position. With typical 

Memphis weather and utility rates*, that is almost $300 lost for 

just one classroom in one year. In most other areas, the loss 

will be even higher. 

Demand-based ventilation is the answer to this problem. 

When people exhale, they tend to raise the level of carbon 

dioxide (CO 2 ) in the space. When the code-required amount 

of outdoor air is being supplied, the indoor level of CO 2 tends 

784 

to stabilize at about 700 ppm above the outdoor air CO 2 level. 

Thus, if the outdoor air supply is modulated to maintain a consistent 

CO 2 level of 700 ppm above ambient, the coderequired 

level of ventilation per person is being supplied based 

on the number of people actually present. ASHRAE has confirmed 

that this technique is valid with a formal interpretation to 

Standard 62-1989. Note that a CO 2 transmitter is needed. 

Volatile Organic Compound-only (VOC) sensors do not give a 

specific enough response to be used in this application. 

Trane now offers an IAQ sensor that combines CO 2 and VOC 

technologies, which can also be used for demand-based ventilation 

control. The VOC component adds to the response of 

the CO 2 sensor to help control non-occupant sources. 

In most locations, the outdoor air CO 2 level is very constant at 

350 to 450 ppm. In this case, control can be achieved with 

return air or wall-mounted sensors. A control point of about 

1000 ppm indoors will give the required ventilation rate with an 

adequate safety margin. In large cities with heavy traffic, or 

next to large parking structures, outdoor CO 2 levels can vary. 

In this case, both indoor and outdoor levels should be sensed, 

and the control point should be around 700 ppm differential 

between the two. In the school example above, this type of 

control would automatically reduce the outdoor airflow from 

465 to 240 cfm since the 15 missing people will not be contributing 

to the CO 2 level in the room. 

Products 

Trane has a broad range of CO 2 level transmitters from 

Honeywell, Telaire, Texas Instruments, MSA, Vaisala, and 

Kele. Call Trane for the products that minimize ventilation 

expenses without compromising indoor air quality or code 

compliance. 

* Average rates $0.065/kWh, $0.50/ccf


LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT 

The Bubbler System 

One of the most difficult applications frequently encountered in 

the building automation industry involves measuring the level 

of liquid in a tank. The Bubbler System is one solution for continuously 

measuring liquid level. This system involves forcing a 

stream of compressed air through a tube that is inserted into a 

tank. The pressure required to force the air out of the tube is 

equal to the pressure created by the liquid above the end of 

the tube. By measuring this pressure, the level in the tank may 

be determined. 

Using a Pressure Transmitter 

A simpler method of measuring liquid level is to install a pressure 

transmitter level with the bottom of the tank or at the lowest 

level that must be monitored. If the specific gravity of the 

liquid in the tank is known, then the liquid level may be easily 

calculated. The Model 360C differential pressure transmitter is 

excellent for this application. 

Model 360C 

When used on a vented (non-pressurized) tank, the high pressure 

port is piped to the liquid at the bottom of the tank, and 

the low pressure port is vented to the atmosphere. The 360C 

then measures the pressure created by the liquid (see Figure 

1). This method may also be used to measure liquid level in a 

pressurized tank by piping the low pressure port to the top of 

the tank above the liquid. The 360C will then measure the difference 

in pressure created by the liquid in the tank (see 

Figure 2). 

Now that we know the pressure created by the liquid in the 

tank, how can we convert this to liquid level? Due to gravity, a 

column of water at 70°F, 2.31' high creates a pressure of 1 

psig. Therefore, if the liquid in the tank is water, multiplying the 

pressure indicated by the 360C by 2.31 will provide the level of 

water in the tank in feet. As shown in Table 1, the value of 

2.31 ft/psig is relatively accurate for the temperature of water 

in most HVAC processes. If the temperature of water being 

monitored is known, the value for ft/psig corresponding to the 

water temperature in Table may be used in place of 2.31. 

FIGURE 1. VENTED TANK 

360C-P030D 

Low pressure 

port open to 

atmosphere 

For example, assume the tank in Figure 1 contains 100°F 

water. The 360C-P030D has a range of 0-3 psig (4 mA output 

at zero pressure and 20 mA at 3 psig). If the output from the 

360C is 17.8 mA, what is the water level? 

FIGURE 2. PRESSURIZED TANK 

360C 

TABLE 1. CONVERSION FACTOR VS TEMPERATURE 

Temperature ft/psig 

°F for water 

32 2.307 

40 2.307 

60 2.309 

80 2.314 

100 2.323 

120 2.333 

140 2.346 

160 2.361 

180 2.377 

200 2.396 

210 2.406 

L 

L 

785 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT 

Level (ft) = 

Where: 

One of the features of the 360C that makes it ideal for liquid 

level applications is the wide variety of ranges available. 

Assume you want to monitor a water level of 0-60" in a vented 

tank. To select the correct range for the 360C, simply convert 

the 60" W.C. to psig. 

786 

(mA out - 4) x R x ft/psig 

16 

mA out = mA output of the 360C 

R = Range of the 360C in psig 

ft/psig = Feet of water per psig at a 

specific temperature 

(from Figure 2) 

Level = 

(17.8 - 4) x 3 x 2.323 

= 6 ft 

16 

What if the liquid being monitored is not water? Simply 

modify the formula to account for the specific gravity of 

the liquid being monitored. 

Level (ft) = 

(mA out - 4) x R x 2.31 

16 x specific gravity of liquid 

60" W.C. = 5' W.C. 

5ft = 2.16 psig 

2.31 ft/psig 

The 360C is available in 16 standard ranges from 10" W.C. to 

300 psig. The best selection for an application measuring 0-2.16 

psig is the 360C-P030D with a standard range of 0-3 psig. 

Assume a cooling tower with a 3' deep sump is mounted on a 

roof, and a 360C used to monitor the level is in an equipment 

room on the top floor (see Figure 3). 

FIGURE 3. COOLING TOWER SUMP 

360C 

3' 

10' 

The pressure at the 360C when the sump is full is 

3 ft + 10 ft = 5.6 psig 

2.31 

Of this 5.6 psig, the pressure caused by the water in the cooling 

tower sump is 3 ft = 1.3 psig 

2.31 

The remaining 4.3 psig is created by the water in the tube 

between the 360C and the bottom of the sump. 

A 360C-P060D (0-6 psig range) would be the proper transmitter. 

When using pressure transmitters for liquid level measurement, 

the following precautions should be taken: 

1. Verify that the pressure transmitter is compatible with the 

liquid being monitored. 

2. Protect the pressure transmitter from freezing and overtemperature. 

3. To protect the pressure transmitter from rust, scale, sand, 

etc., do not connect the sensing tube to the low point of 

the sump. Either connect into the side of the tank, or 

insert the sensing tube into the bottom of the tank so the 

tip of the tube is slightly above the bottom of the sump. 

4. When used on pressurized systems, be sure that the 

system pressure plus the liquid pressure does not exceed 

the static pressure rating of the differential pressure 

transmitter.


NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPES 

ENCLOSURE 

RATING 

Type 1 

Type 2 

Type 3 

Type 3R 

Type 3S 

Type 4 

Type 4X 

Type 6 

Type 12 

Type 13 

NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPES* 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

(NEMA Standard 250) and Electrical and Electronic 

Manufacturer Association of Canada (EEMAC) 


degree of protection against contact with the enclosed 

equipment or locations where unusual service conditions do 

not exist 


degree of protection against limited amounts of falling water 

and dirt 


degree of protection against windblown dust, rain, and sleet; 



degree of protection against falling rain and sleet; 



provide a degree of protection against falling dirt, rain, sleet, 

snow, windblown dust, and in which the external 

mechanisms remain operable when ice laden 


provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and 

rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; undamaged 

by the formation of ice 


provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown 

dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; 


Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use where occasional 

submersion is encountered in limited depth; undamaged by 

the formation of ice 


degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping 

noncorrosive liquids 


degree of protection against dust, spraying of water, oil, and 

noncorrosive coolant 

This material is reproduced with permission from NEMA. The preceding 

descriptions, however, are not intended to be complete representations of 

NEMA standards for enclosures, nor those of the EEMAC. 

* See page 797 for enclosure types for hazardous locations. 

787 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SELECTION GUIDE 

788 

To make the proper transformer selection, the load must be completely analyzed. Every electrically 

energized component in the control circuit must be considered. Electromagnetic control devices have two 

current requirements. The first current requirement is called inrush volt-amperes (VA) and is the current 

required to energize the coil of the device. Inrush VA typically lasts anywhere from 5-20 ms and can be as 

much as 10 to 20 times the normal sealed VA. Sealed VA is the normal current required to maintain the 

energized coil in steady state for a period of time. 

STEP 1 

Determine the total sealed (steady state) VA load of the control circuit. Add the continuous VA requirements of the 

maximum number of components that will be energized at any given time. Include both electromagnetic (coils, 

solenoids, etc.) and non-electromagnetic components (pilot lights, timers, etc.). Sealed VA data is available from 

the component manufacturers. If only current is known, simply multiply current by voltage to get VA. 

STEP 2 

Determine the total inrush VA load of the control circuit. Add together the inrush VA ratings of the electromagnetic 

components (coils, solenoids, etc.) that will be energized simultaneously. Inrush VA data is usually available from the 

component manufacturers. Also, add the normal VA requirements of non-electromagnetic components (pilot lights, 

timers, etc.) that will be energized at the same time. 

STEP 3 

Refer to the Regulation Data Chart below. If the supply circuit (primary) voltage is reasonably stable and fluctuates no 

more than ±5%, refer to the 90% Secondary Voltage column. If it fluctuates as much as ±10%, refer to the 95% Secondary 

Voltage column. NEMA standards require all electromagnetic devices to operate successfully at 85% of rated voltage. 

The 90% Secondary Voltage column is most commonly used for transformer selection. 

STEP 4 

In the selected column of the Regulation Data Chart, locate the inrush VA closest to, 

but not less than, the inrush VA of the control circuit. Read to the far left side of the 

chart to determine the continuous nominal VA nameplate rating of the transformer 

needed. The secondary voltage delivered under inrush conditions will be a minimum 

of 85%, 90%, or 95% of rated secondary voltage, depending on the column selected 

from the Regulation Data Chart. The total sealed VA of the control circuit must not 

exceed the nominal VA rating of the transformer selected. 

Continuous 

Nominal VA 

REGULATION DATA CHART 

Inrush VA @ 20% PF 

(Name Plate Rating) 95% Sec. Voltage 90% Sec. Voltage 85% Sec. Voltage 

50 

75 

100 

150 

250 

300 

350 

500 

750 

1000 

1500 

2000 

3000 

5000 

200 

350 

400 

800 

1500 

2000 

3200 

4200 

8000 

13000 

15000 

20000 

39000 

75000 

240 

470 

575 

950 

2200 

2800 

3700 

5800 

11000 

18000 

24000 

32000 

60000 

120000 

280 

580 

770 

1250 

2750 

3900 

4900 

8000 

15000 

23000 

31000 

41000 

77000 

150000 

Qty 

3 

2 

3 

2 

Selection Example (Steps 1-4) 

Determine the size transformer required to 

power the following list of components, 

assuming stable line voltage. 

Components Manufacturer’s Data 

Description Sealed VA Inrush VA 

Size 1 Contactors 63 555 

Size 3 Contactors 86 1156 

Relays 

33 126 

Indicating Lamps 14 14 

TOTALS 196 1851 

Using the chart, we find the inrush 

VA of 1851 will require a 250 VA transformer, 

even though the sealed VA is only 196. 

STEP 5 

Determine the proper transformer model number from the Kele catalog. Make sure your selection 

meets the following conditions: 1. Has the proper primary and secondary voltage 

2. Exceeds the inrush VA demands 

3. Has a nameplate VA that exceeds the sealed VA requirements


POWERING MULTIPLE DEVICES FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER 

After properly sizing a control transformer for your application, 

there is an additional step in the selection process that should 

be considered. Even though the necessary steps have been 

taken to select a properly sized transformer to power multiple 

24 VAC devices (such as BAS controllers, transducers, actuators 

and power supplies) there is a potential, but not so obvious, 

problem that can exist. If not foreseen and corrected, this 

problem can cause blown fuses and/or physical damage to 

devices when the system is energized. 

Many electronic HVAC controllers and interface devices are 

designed to take AC power on their input terminal strips. 

However, because the electronic components on these 

devices require DC power, the AC power at the terminal strip 

is converted to DC by use of an internal (on board) power supply 

circuit (rectifier/filter/regulator). Two common types of 

power supply circuits used are called a “Full-wave bridge rectifier” 

and a “Half-wave rectifier.” The problem with powering 

multiple devices from one AC power source stems from some 

devices using the Half-wave circuit and some using the Fullwave 

circuit. 

To better understand why mixing Half- and Full-wave rectifiers 

on a common AC power source can be a problem, it is important 

to understand the difference between these two power 

supply circuits. 

FIGURE 1. HALF-WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT 

Transformer 

Current Flow 

Control Module 

No Transformer 

Current Flow 

+ 

24 

VAC 

H 

Power 

+ 

Reg Control 

Electronics 

+ 


Input or Output 

+ 

24 

VAC 

H 

Power 

– 

G 

Positive Half-Cycle 

– 

– 

G 

The Half-wave rectifier is shown in Figure 1. Note that one side 

of the AC power input is connected directly to the negative 

side of the DC output. On the transformer’s positive half-cycle, 

the diode conducts. This allows the transformer current to 

charge the filter capacitor, as well as supply load current. On 

the transformer’s negative half-cycle, the diode turns off. The 

stored charge in the filter capacitor supplies load current until 

the next positive half-cycle. The Half-wave rectifier only uses 

transformer current every other half-cycle. It is not very efficient, 

but it is inexpensive and does a good job for low current 

power supplies. 

The Full-wave bridge rectifier is shown in Figure 2. Note that 

neither side of the AC power input is connected directly to the 

negative side of the DC output. On the transformer’s positive 

half-cycle, diodes D1 and D3 conduct. This allows the transformer 

current to charge up the filter capacitor, as well as supply 

load current. On the transformers negative half-cycle, 

diodes D2 and D4 conduct, supplying transformer current to 

the filter capacitor and load. The Full-wave rectifier utilizes the 

transformer current on both positive and negative half-waves. 

It is more efficient, and that is why it is often used in highercurrent 

power supplies. 

So what is the problem with using a common AC transformer 

to power a device that has a 

Full-wave rectifier and a 

+ 

Stored 

Charge 

Negative Half-Cycle 


Reg Control 

Electronics 

Note: AC “G” and Control signal “-” are the same electrical connection. 

FIGURE 2. FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT 

Transformer 

Current Flow 


+ H 

24 

VAC 

- G 

D4D1 

D3D2 

+ 

Reg Control 

Electronics 

Positive Half-Cycle 

+ 



– 

+ 



Transformer 

Current Flow 


+ H 

24 

VAC 

- G 

D4 D1 

D3D2 

Reg 

+ 

Control 

Electronics 

+ 



Negative Half-Cycle 

Note: AC “G” and Control signal “-” are not the same electrical connection. 

– 

– 

second device that has a 

Half-wave rectifier? 

Consider Figure 3 which 

shows just such a set-up. 

The control signal “-” terminals 

on both modules are 

either directly connected 

together (as shown) or indirectly 

connected by a common 

ground. Looking carefully, 

you can see that the 

minus output of the Fullwave 

rectifier is connected 

directly back to one of its 

AC inputs via the “pass 

thru” common connection 

inside the Half-wave device. 

This connection actually 

places diode D4 in the 

bridge directly across the 

AC transformer winding. 

Every time the AC voltage 

goes to the polarity that 

789 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



POWERING MULTIPLE DEVICES FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER 

turns on the diode, the diode shorts out the transformer. In 

other words, the diode shorts the transformer 50% of the time. 

There are several symptoms that can occur from this situation: 

1) A fuse blows every time the commons of the devices are 

connected together. 

2) The diode shorting the transformer fails open. 

3) The diode shorting the transformer fails shorted and the 

transformer may burn up. 

4) The circuit board foil traces connecting to the diode melt 

open or are blown off the board. 

Now that the problem has been pinpointed, some general 

guidelines can be given for connecting multiple AC powered 

devices together. 

1) It is okay to connect multiple devices to the same AC 

transformer and share signal commons if: (a) every device 

uses a Half-wave rectifier; and (b) the same AC lead on 

every device is used for a common. 

2) It is okay to connect the signal common of a device that 

uses a Full-wave rectifier to other signal commons if the 

Full-wave rectifier device has a dedicated isolated AC 

power transformer connected only to the device’s power 

screws and nowhere else. 

FIGURE 3. FULL-WAVE AND HALF-WAVE IN PARALLEL 

Power 

3) It is okay to connect the signal common of a device that 

uses a Full-wave rectifier to other signal commons if the 

device contains its own internal AC isolation transformer. 

4) It is okay to power a Half-wave rectifier device and a Fullwave 

rectifier device from the same AC transformer if the 

signal commons are absolutely, positively isolated from 

each other. 

5) If it is absolutely necessary to power a Half-wave device 

and a Full-wave device from the same AC source, and 

their DC control signals have to interact, a signal isolator 

such as the DT13 will be necessary. 

These guidelines all require that the type of input power circuit 

(Full- or Half-wave) be known. Since most devices do not 

come with detailed schematic diagrams, this may be difficult to 

790 

H 

G 

Full-Wave Bridge 

Module 

D4 D1 

D3 D2 

Control 

Electronics 

+ 

Control 

Sig 

– 

H 

24 

VAC G 

+ 

Control 

Sig 

– 

Half-Wave Module 

Control 

Electronics 

"Pass Thru" Common Connection 

Path that ties bridge output 

minus back to its own AC input 

determine. Following are a few ideas that may help: 

1) If a 24 VAC powered device has three wiring terminals, 

(power “+”, signal “+” and a shared common for power “-” 

and signal “-”), then a Half-wave rectifier is being used. 

2) If a 24 VAC powered device has four wiring terminals, 

(power “+”, power “-”, signal “+”, signal “–”), first check the 

product’s data sheet for any clues. Look for any notes that 

might indicate that the power “–” and the signal “–” 

terminals are electrically the same and hence, a Half-wave 

device. 

3) If no indication is given on the product’s data sheet, try 

using an ohmmeter to check the resistance between the 

signal “–” terminal and both of the power terminals. A 

reading of a couple of ohms or less between the signal 

“–” and either power terminal would indicate a common 

connection between these terminals and a Half-wave 

circuit. 

4) If no common connection can be found, the device is 

probably a Full-wave rectifier. However, some devices 

incorporate a built-in isolation transformer that isolates both 

power terminals from both signal terminals. The differential 

pressure model T40 is an example. This type of device 

can be used with either Full- or Half-wave devices. 

5) Finally, the manufacturer or supplier of the 

device should be able to provide the required 

information. Some manufacturers may require 

that only their products be connected to a common 

transformer. Others may even require that 

H 

each of their devices have its own dedicated 

Power 

G 

and isolated transformer. 

In summary, many devices (BAS controllers, 

transducers, actuators and power supplies) 

used for the control of HVAC systems can be 

externally powered from 24 VAC. Because the 

electronic components of these devices require 

direct current, the AC power is internally converted to DC. 

When powering multiple devices from a common 24 VAC 

source, problems can arise due to different techniques that are 

used to convert the AC to DC. In other words, it is not as simple 

as plugging various appliances into an AC outlet in your 

house. Whenever you have different devices from different 

manufacturers, be careful to separate those devices that utilize 

a Full-wave rectifier from those using a Half-wave rectifier. 

When any doubt exists, provide a separate transformer. The 

small expense of an additional transformer or two will more 

than make up for all of the time and money spent on troubleshooting.


UNDERSTANDING CURRENT SINKING, CURRENT SOURCING, AND 

GROUND LOOPS 

You've just purchased some current to pneumatic transducers 

and are ready to try them. Each transducer has 

been carefully installed according to the manufacturer's 

recommendations and wired to its own 4-20 mA analog 

output. All of the transducers are being powered by a 

common 24 VDC power supply. Feeling confident with 

the installation, you decide it is time to test their operation. 

Individual commands are issued to each unit 

through the building automation system (BAS) but none 

of the I/P transducers appear to function properly. A 

command issued to one unit mysteriously causes all of 

the other units to react (or perhaps none of the units 

work at all). After mumbling a few choice words, the 

installation and all the wiring are verified to be correct. 

The system is trying to deliver a 4-20 mA signal to a 

device that is designed to accept a 4-20 mA signal. So 

what is the problem? Are all of the transducers defective? 

While this is possible, it is very unlikely. Instead, 

the problem could be directly related to the fact that all 

4-20 mA analog outputs are not created equal. 

Different BAS controllers utilize different electronic techniques 

for generating a 4-20 mA current output. With 

one method, the analog output typically has its "I+" terminal 

connected to the "+" side of an internal current 

loop power supply whose "-" side is connected to 

"ground". The output has its sensing and regulating 

electronics between the "I-" terminal and "ground" (See 

Figure A). The "I+" terminals are electronically identical. 

Because the "I-" terminals carry the different current values 

for each output loop, they must be isolated from 

each other. They cannot be connected together nor can 

they be connected to a common or "ground". 

Connecting a 4-20 mA load from "I+" to 

"ground" puts the controller's internal current 

loop power supply directly across the 

load (See Figure B). The controller's regulating 

electronics are completely bypassed, 

which will usually cause the controller's 

output fuse to blow, the load to go to full 

output and remain there or the load to be 

physically damaged. A computer using this 

type of 4-20 mA signal is commonly 

referred to as a "current sinking controller." 

Another method used to generate a 4-20 

mA signal puts the sensing and regulating 

electronics between the internal loop power 

supply and the analog output "I+" terminal. 

The "I-" terminal is connected to circuit 

"ground" 

Current Sinking 

Controller 

+ 

Internal 

Power 

Supply 

- 

(See Figure C). With this method, the "I+" terminals 

carry the different current values for each loop and, 

therefore, must be isolated from each other. Since all of 

the output "I-" terminals are electrically the same, they 

can be connected together. They may or may not be 

connected to "ground" depending on the manufacturer's 

specifications. A controller using this method to generate 

a 4-20 mA signal is commonly called "current sourcing." 

FIGURE A. CURRENT SINKING CONTROLLER 

(typical for each output) 

mA 

Sense and 

Regulate 

+ 

Internal 

Power 

Supply 

– 

I+ 

I- 

I+ 

I- 

Reg 

+ 

V 

– Sense 

FIGURE B. DRIVING A GROUNDED LOAD WITH A CURRENT 

SINKING CONTROLLER 

Driving a grounded load will cause 

unregulated current to bypass the 

controller's electronics 

Grounded 

Load 

791 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



UNDERSTANDING CURRENT SINKING, CURRENT SOURCING, AND 

GROUND LOOPS 

Looking back now at the problem discussed previously, all of 

the I/P transducers are being powered from a common power 

supply. After a little research you determine that your controller 

is current sinking and upon further examination of the 

I/P transducer, its power input "-" terminal is found to be common 

with its signal input "-" terminal. Since all of the I/P power 

input "-" terminals are connected to one common power supply, 

this effectively ties all of the controller analog output "I-" 

terminals together. (A no-no for current sinking controllers.) 

FIGURE C. CURRENT SOURCING CONTROLLER 

(typical for each output) 

One way to solve this problem is to provide a separate isolated 

(not grounded) power supply for each transducer. This can 

be costly and, if panel space is at a premium, not very practical. 

It may also be necessary to isolate the case of a metal 

transducer from ground for proper operation. Another way to 

solve this problem is to configure the computer's analog outputs 

for voltage output. Doing so will typically allow the controller 

to drive grounded loads as well as multiple loads powered 

from a single power supply. Transducers that are 

designed to accept a voltage or that are field selectable for 

current or voltage should, of course, be used (UCP-422-V, 

UCP-522, UCP-622). A third solution is to utilize two-wire 

transducers that are loop-powered and require no external 

power supply (UCP-422, UCP-242). 

Another problem often encountered when interfacing a computer's 

analog output to external equipment is the corruption of 

the control signal due to "ground loop" currents. Our instinct 

would lead us to believe that all "ground" points are at the 

same potential. In reality, however, there is no such thing as 

an absolute "ground." Ground potentials at different locations 

are not equal because current flow in the ground conductors 

causes small voltage potentials to develop from one ground 

point to another. Connecting a wire between "grounds" creates 

a loop causing "ground loop" currents to flow through the wire. 

This causes voltage drops in the ground wire due to wire resis- 

792 

+ 

Internal 

Power 

Supply 

- 

+ 

V 

- 

Sense 

Reg 

I+ 

I- 

tance (See Figure D). Also, since the impedance of the loop is 

rather low, a few volts potential difference can produce several 

amps of current, possibly damaging electrical components. 

Even worse, electrical storms could momentarily cause very 

large potential differences that would make an extremely large 

current flow possible. Under these circumstances, the current 

flow can be high enough to burn cables or destroy electrical 

interfaces. 

One simple way to solve this problem is to isolate or float the 

"com" connection from ground at either end. However, the 

equipment often has its "com" terminal internally grounded, 

making it impractical to float. When this is the case, a signal 

isolator such as the Model DT13 should be used. The DT13 

accepts a current or voltage input and produces a linearlytransferred 

current or voltage output. The input and output are 

electrically isolated making the DT13 useful for eliminating 

ground loops, reducing noise pickup, allowing conversion of 

the signal type (from current input to voltage output and vice 

versa) and scaling between the input and output. The DT13 

could also be used to solve the problem discussed earlier by 

allowing current sinking controllers to control grounded loads. 

The Model DT13 contains an internal power supply which provides 

regulated and isolated power to each half of the board. 

Input conditioning circuitry scales and filters the DC input and 

drives a precision isolator, which carries the signal across the 

isolation barrier. The output side of the isolator drives a circuit 

that reconverts the signal into a duplicate of the input, which 

can then be scaled as necessary for the application. 

FIGURE D. GROUND LOOP CURRENTS 


COM 

Voltage Drop in "COM" wire 

due to loop currents 

+ – 

– 

+ 

Ground loop current 

V 

Potential difference 

in two "grounds" 

COM


STEAM VALVE SIZING INFORMATION 

RECOMMENDED PRESSURE DROPS FOR STEAM Cv (FLOW COEFFICIENT) DETERMINATION 

Refer to specific valve data for maximum allowable pressure 

drops and closeoff ratings. 

Two Position Zone Valves and Direct Radiator Valves 

Use a minimum of 10% of inlet pressure (psig). 

Proportional Control Valves 

Low pressure (15 psig or less): �P of 80% of gauge inlet 

pressure. 

When Cv required is between two valve sizes and closer to 

the smaller valve size, resize for Cv using 42% of the 

absolute inlet pressure as pressure drop. Use the valve that 

is larger than the calculated Cv. 

For steam pressures greater than 15 psig: 42% of the 

absolute inlet pressure. 

When Cv required is between two valve sizes, select the 

larger size. 

Note: Do not size steam valves on higher system pressures 

using a pressure drop greater than 42% of the 

absolute inlet pressure. 

USEFUL STEAM INFORMATION 

1 Boiler hp = 34.5 lb/hr 

EDR 

(equivalent direct radiation) = 240 Btu/hr per FT 2 

1 Therm = 100,000 Btu 

To convert Btu/hr to lb/hr of steam, divide Btu/hr by the 

latent heat of vaporization (h fg ) at the corresponding 

steam pressure. 

Example: 

100,000 Btu/hr = 105 lb/hr of 5 psig steam 

(( 

100,000 Btu/hr = 105 lb/hr 

954 

The Steam Valve Capacity Table on the following page is 

based on the following formula: 

QK 

Cv = 

3√∆P x P2 

Where: Cv = Coefficient of flow 

Q = lb per hour of steam 

∆P = Differential pressure in psig (pressure drop) 

P 2 = Outlet pressure in psia (absolute) 

psig + 14.7 = psia (absolute) 

K = 1 + (0.0007 x ˚F super-heat) 

Other forms of the formula are: 

Q = 

∆P = 

Note: K normally is 1 (K = 1 for saturated steam). 

3Cv √∆P x P2 

K 

Note: K normally is 1. 

2 

( ) x 

QK 1 

3 Cv ∆P2 

Note: K normally is 1. 

2 

( ) x 

See next page for Steam Valve Capacity Table 

P 2 = 

QK 

3 Cv 

1 

Note: K normally is 1 (K = 1 for saturated steam). 

∆P TECHNICAL REFERENCE 

These formulas can be used to calculate one of the quantities if the 

others are known. 

STEAM DATA 

psig Temperature (°F) Latent Heat (hfg) 

0 

212 

970 

5 

237 

954 

15 

250 

945 

50 

298 

912 

100 

338 

880 

793



STEAM VALVE CAPACITY TABLE 

794 

Inlet 

Pressure 2# 5# 10# 15# 20# 25# 40# 50# 100# 

psig 

2.2 

5.4 

7.1 

9.8 

13.6 

18 

19.6 

22 

27 

33 

41 

49 

57 

60 

82 

95 

136 

195 

218 

245 

305 

354 

409 

463 

545 

627 

790 

926 

1090 

1281 

1499 

1907 

2316 

2398 

0.4 

0.99 

1.3 

1.8 

2.5 

3.3 

3.6 

4.0 

5 

6 

7.5 

9.0 

10.5 

11 

15 

17.4 

25 

35.8 

40 

45 

56 

65 

75 

85 

100 

115 

145 

170 

200 

235 

275 

350 

425 

440 

0.2* 1.6 0.5* 4 1* 8 1.5* 12 2* 14 2.5* 16 4* 23 5* 27 10* 48 

68 

168 

221 

306 

424 

560 

611 

679 

848 

1018 

1273 

1528 

1782 

1867 

2546 

2954 

4244 

6077 

6790 

7639 

9506 

11034 

12731 

14429 

16975 

19521 

24613 

28857 

33950 

39891 

46681 

59412 

72143 

74689 

38.8 

96.1 

126.2 

174.7 

242 

320 

349 

388 

485 

582 

728 

874 

1019 

1068 

1456 

1689 

2427 

3475 

3883 

4368 

5436 

6310 

7280 

8251 

9707 

11163 

14075 

16502 

19414 

22812 

26695 

33975 

41256 

42712 

38.3 

94.8 

124.4 

172.3 

239 

316 

345 

383 

479 

574 

718 

861 

1005 

1053 

1436 

1665 

2393 

3427 

3829 

4307 

5360 

6221 

7179 

8136 

9571 

11007 

13878 

16271 

19143 

22493 

26321 

33500 

40678 

42114 

20.7 

51.3 

67.4 

93.3 

130 

171 

187 

207 

259 

311 

389 

466 

544 

570 

777 

902 

1296 

1856 

2073 

2332 

2903 

3369 

3887 

4406 

5183 

5961 

7516 

8811 

10366 

12180 

14254 

18141 

22028 

22806 

32.4 

80.2 

104.3 

145.8 

203 

267 

292 

324 

405 

486 

608 

729 

851 

891 

1215 

1409 

2025 

2900 

3240 

3645 

4536 

5265 

6075 

6885 

8101 

9316 

11746 

13771 

16201 

19036 

22277 

28352 

34427 

35642 

17.1 

42.3 

55.5 

76.9 

107 

141 

154 

171 

214 

256 

320 

385 

449 

470 

641 

743 

1068 

1529 

1709 

1923 

2392 

2777 

3204 

3631 

4272 

4913 

6195 

7263 

8544 

10040 

11749 

14953 

18157 

18798 

23.4 

57.8 

75.9 

105.2 

146 

193 

210 

234 

292 

351 

438 

526 

613 

643 

876 

1016 

1460 

2091 

2337 

2629 

3271 

3797 

4381 

4966 

5842 

6718 

8471 

9931 

11684 

13729 

16065 

20447 

24828 

25704 

11.6 

28.6 

37.6 

52.1 

72 

95 

104 

116 

145 

174 

217 

260 

304 

318 

434 

503 

723 

1036 

1157 

1302 

1620 

1881 

2170 

2459 

2893 

3327 

4195 

4918 

5786 

6799 

7956 

10126 

12296 

12730 

20.4 

50.6 

66.4 

91.9 

128 

169 

184 

204 

255 

306 

383 

460 

536 

562 

766 

889 

1277 

1828 

2043 

2298 

2860 

3320 

3830 

4341 

5107 

5873 

7405 

8682 

10214 

12002 

14044 

17875 

21705 

22471 

9.7 

24 

31.5 

43.7 

61 

80 

87 

97 

121 

146 

182 

218 

255 

267 

304 

422 

607 

867 

970 

1092 

1359 

1577 

1820 

2062 

2426 

2790 

3518 

4124 

4852 

5701 

6672 

8491 

10311 

10675 

17.5 

43.3 

56.8 

78.7 

109 

144 

157 

175 

219 

262 

328 

393 

459 

481 

656 

761 

1093 

1565 

1749 

1967 

2448 

2842 

3279 

3716 

4372 

5028 

6340 

7433 

8744 

10275 

12024 

15303 

18582 

19238 

7.8 

19.3 

25.4 

35.1 

49 

64 

70 

78 

98 

117 

146 

176 

205 

215 

293 

340 

488 

699 

780 

878 

1093 

1268 

1463 

1658 

1951 

2244 

2829 

3317 

3902 

4585 

5366 

6829 

8292 

8585 

13.9 

34.3 

45.1 

62.4 

87 

114 

125 

139 

173 

208 

260 

312 

364 

381 

520 

603 

867 

1241 

1387 

1560 

1942 

2254 

2601 

2947 

3468 

3988 

5028 

5895 

6935 

8149 

9536 

12136 

14737 

15257 

5.9 

14.5 

19 

26.3 

37 

48 

53 

58 

73 

88 

110 

131 

153 

161 

219 

254 

365 

523 

584 

657 

818 

949 

1095 

1241 

1460 

1680 

2118 

2483 

2921 

3432 

4016 

5112 

6207 

6426 

9.5 

23.5 

31 

43 

59 

79 

86 

95 

119 

143 

178 

214 

250 

262 

357 

414 

594 

851 

951 

1070 

1331 

1545 

1783 

2021 

2377 

2734 

3447 

4042 

4755 

5587 

6538 

8321 

10104 

10461 

3.7 

9.2 

12.1 

18.7 

23 

31 

34 

37 

47 

56 

70 

84 

98 

102 

139 

162 

232 

333 

372 

418 

521 

604 

697 

790 

930 

1069 

1348 

1580 

1859 

2184 

2556 

3253 

3950 

4090 

5.9 

14.6 

19.2 

27 

37 

49 

53 

59 

74 

89 

111 

133 

155 

162 

221 

257 

369 

528 

590 

664 

826 

958 

1106 

1253 

1475 

1696 

2138 

2507 

2949 

3465 

4055 

5161 

6267 

6488 

STEAM CAPACITY IN POUNDS PER HOUR 

(based on saturated steam) 

Cv ∆P 

*For two-position control


PROVIDING STEAM ISOLATION & TEMPERATURE PROTECTION 

Steam Isolation 

All pressure transducers installed on steam lines should be 

isolated from the steam to protect them from damage. A 

steam pigtail syphon, such as the Model PT, may be used for 

this purpose. 

Temperature Protection 

Frequently, it is necessary to measure the pressure of fluids 

at temperatures either above or below the operating range of 

available transducers. The expense of a special transducer 

can often be avoided if the pressure transducer is isolated 

from the pressure source by a short length of pipe or tubing. 

The curves on Figure 1 show how to limit the temperature at 

the transducer to a range of 0° to 200°F (-17.8° to 93.3°C ) for 

fluid temperatures between -400° and 1700°F (-204.4°C to 

926°C). Figure 1 shows the various tubing lengths, sizes, and 

materials that can be used. 

The curves shown on the chart are based on the 

following assumptions: 

1. The pressure vessel is insulated to limit 

radiant heat transfer to the transducer. Thus, 

the major source of thermal input is via the 

connecting tube. 

2. The pressure medium has a coefficient of 

thermal conductivity less than 

0.4 Btu/hr/ft 2 /ft/°F (6 cal/hr/cm 2 /cm/°C). 

This figure encompasses a wide range 

of liquids and gases. 

3. The ambient temperature around the 

transducer is100°F (37.8°C) 

4. The heat transfer rate (convection) from 

the tubing to still air is 1.44 Btu/ft 2 /hr °F 

(1 cal/cm 2 /hr°C). 

From Data Instruments “Reference” 

T 

O 

= Temperature of Pressure Source (˚F) 

Model PT 

Deviation from these conditions will require some slight 

adjustments in the length of tubing selected, or if there is any 

doubt, a Model TM99A handheld thermometer on the transducer 

will readily verify proper operating conditions. 

Note that a 6" (15.2 cm) length of 1/4" (0.64 cm) stainless 

steel tubing will effectively protect a transducer from a 1000°F 

(537.8°C) pressure source. Thus, pressure transducers capable 

of operating at 200°F (93.3°C) can measure the pressure 

of fluids having much higher temperatures. 

FIGURE 1. TUBING LENGTH TO ISOLATE TRANSDUCER FROM TEMPERATURE SOURCE 

2000 

1800 

T 

A 

= 100˚F Maximum Transducer Temperature 200˚F 

Minimum Transducer Temperature 0˚F 

1600 

1400 

1200 

1000 

800 

600 

400 

200 

0 

-200 

-400 

303SS 0.125 OD X 0.07 ID 

(0.318 CM OD X 0.18 CM ID) 

303SS 0.25 OD X 0.18 ID 

(0.635 CM OD X 0.457 CM ID 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

L = Length of Tubing (inches) 

303SS 0.25 OD X 0.18 ID 

(0.635 CM OD X 0.457 CM ID 

BRASS 0.25 OD X 0.18 ID 

(0.635 CM OD X 0.457 CM ID) 

795 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES 

Automation dealers are continuing to gain business that was 

once reserved only for specialty and industrial contractors. It’s 

a trend that is accelerating very rapidly, and the fastest growth 

is in the areas of hazardous locations and the monitoring of 

toxic and combustible gases. Trane is committed to providing 

the products and technical support needed to assist our customers 

in these important areas. By way of introduction, this 

article covers the basics of a hazardous atmosphere and the 

equipment used to monitor combustible gases. See additional 

articles in Technical Reference for information relating to principles 

and application of intrinsically safe systems, explosionproof 

systems, and other available means of dealing with electrical 

equipment in hazardous atmospheres. 

What Is "Hazardous?" 

The widely known Fire Triangle illustration (Figure 1) shows 

the three components required to support combustion. All 

three must be present, and the methods we use to prevent 

explosions are designed to eliminate one of the three legs of 

the triangle. What the triangle doesn’t show, though, is that 

fuel and oxygen must be mixed in the proper proportion in 

order to burn. If the fuel is methane (CH 4) , the major component 

of natural gas, the concentration in air must be between 

5% and 15% or else the mixture will not ignite. Those of us old 

enough to have worked with finicky carburetors on gasoline 

engines are familiar with this principle. If the mixture was too 

lean (not enough fuel) or too rich (too much fuel), the engine 

would not start. The same applies to ignition of any combustible 

gas in air. 

Get the Mixture Right 

The lowest concentration of a gas in air that will ignite is its 

lower explosive limit (LEL), and the highest concentration that 

will ignite is its upper explosive limit (UEL). These values are 

also sometimes referred to as the lower and upper flammabili- 

FIGURE 1. FIRE TRIANGLE 

796 

ty limits (LFL, UFL). Limits for some common fuels are shown 

in Table 1 below. If a system is designed to keep the fuel concentration 

below the LEL, the fuel leg is effectively removed 

from the fire triangle. Under certain conditions (in an oil field, 

for example), it is easier to maintain the concentration above 

the UEL. In this case, the oxygen leg is eliminated. In either 

case, combustion cannot happen. 

Silent Sentries 

It is often advisable to monitor the concentration of fuel in air in 

order to take action or sound an alarm if it is moving toward an 

explosive level. The GMT Series combustible gas monitors 

are ideal for this purpose. The GMT-COMB-S1 provides a 4- 

20 mA signal over the range of 0% to 100% of the LEL, and it 

has an alarm relay set to energize at 25% of the LEL (an 

industry standard alarm point). The sensor responds to a very 

wide range of combustible gases, and the outputs (analog and 

relay) are factory-calibrated for the gas specified at the time of 

order. For example, if the gas is methane (5% LEL), the GMT- 

COMB-S1 (CH 4 ) will output 4 mA at 0% methane and 20 mA 

at 5% methane. The alarm relay will energize at 1.25% 

methane. With this device, the alarm relay or an automation 

system responding to the analog signal can cause electricity 

(source of ignition) to be shut off in an area if the gas concentration 

is rising toward the explosive level (LEL). If the GMT 

itself must remain energized, an explosionproof enclosure is 

available to prevent it from becoming the source of ignition 

itself. 

The system described here is based on removing the fuel leg 

from the fire triangle, then having an automatic means of 

removing the ignition source leg if the fuel begins to return. 

This is the first of many ways we will discuss to work safely 

with electricity in hazardous locations. 

TABLE 1. FLAMMABILITY LIMITS 

Fuel 

Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) Upper Explosive Limit (UEL) 

(Percent by volume in air) (Percent by volume in air) 

Methane 

5.0 

15.0 

Butane 

1.6 

8.4 

Propane 

2.1 

9.6 

Ethanol 

3.3 

19.0 

Gasoline (100 Octane) 

1.4 

7.8 

Isopropyl alcohol 

2.0 

12.7 

Ethyl ether 

1.9 

36.0 

Xylene 

0.9 

7.0 

Toluene 

1.0 

7.1 

Hydrogen 

4.0 

75.0 

Acetylene 

2.5 

85.0 

Note: Multiply percentages by 10,000 to convert to parts per million (ppm)


EXPLOSIONPROOF CONTROLS 

Recap 

In hazardous locations there are three elements that must be 

present in order to produce an explosion (see the Hazardous 

Atmospheres article in Technical Reference for more information). 

The three legs of the fire triangle (fuel, oxygen, and an 

ignition source) are required to support combustion. In addition, 

the volume ratio of fuel to air must be within the fuel’s 

explosive limits, and the ignition source must release sufficient 

energy to ignite the mixture. Removing any of these three elements 

will eliminate the explosion hazard. 

Explosionproof Defined 

Perhaps the most common and familiar way to eliminate ignition 

sources from a hazardous location is through the use of 

explosionproof construction. An enclosure that is rated explosionproof 

(NEMA 7, 8, 9, or 10) for a particular hazard group 

(see Figure 1) is strong enough to withstand the pressure of a 

worst-case explosion inside itself. Additionally, it is designed to 

vent the resulting hot gases in such a way that they are cooled 

below the ignition temperature of a worst-case explosive mixture 

outside the box. 

FIGURE 1. FLANGED AND THREADED OPENINGS 

Cable Seal 

Required 

Jacketed 

Cable 

Conduit Seal 

Explosion 

Inside Box 

Sealing Compound 

Fibrous Packing 

Hot gases cooled by 

long expansion path 

through threads 

Ground Flange 

Joint provides long, 

narrow path to cool 

escaping gases 

How It Works 

To contain the pressures of an explosion, these enclosures 

are made from heavy cast steel or cast aluminum. To cool 

escaping gases, flanged enclosures have extra-wide flanges 

that are ground to a smooth finish and tight tolerance, thus 

yielding a very thin, long path to the outside as shown in 

Figure 1. Enclosures with threaded covers (and threaded connections 

to either type of enclosure) produce the same effect 

by virtue of the long, narrow path through the threads. As the 

hot gases from an internal explosion pass through these long, 

narrow channels, they give up heat to the metal and their pressure 

is reduced. These two effects team up to lower the tem- 

perature of the gases to a safe level before they can come in 

contact with the atmosphere surrounding the enclosure. 

TABLE 1. CLASS, DIVISION, AND GROUP 

NEMA Classifications - Marked with Rated Class, Division, and Group 

NEMA 7 Class 1 (Gases) Indoor Hazardous Locations, Air-Break 

NEMA 8 Class 1 (Gases) Indoor/Outdoor Hazardous Locations, Oil-Immersed 

NEMA 9 Class 2 (Dusts) Indoor Hazardous Locations 

NEMA 10 Meets U.S. Bureau of Mines Safety Requirements 

Summary of NEC Classes and Group Examples 

Group Class 1 (Gases) Class 2 (Dusts) 

A Acetylene 

B Hydrogen, Ethylene Oxide, Propylene Oxide 

C Ether, Hydrogen Sulfide, Hydrazine, Nitroethane 

D Methane, Acetone, Benzene, Gasoline, Naphtha 

E Metallic Dusts (all metals) 

F Carbonaceous Dusts 

(coal, asphalt, etc..) 

G Nonconductive Dusts 

(grain, drugs, pesticides, 

plastics, dyes, etc..) 

Summary of NEC Divisions 

Division 1 Hazard always or frequently present, or may be present during normal operation, 

or high probability of hazard existing at the same time as electrical malfunction 

Division 2 Hazard normally not present, or highly unlikely to be present at the same time 

as electrical malfunction, or area adjacent to Division 1. 

With flanged enclosures, it is very important to torque the 

cover bolts evenly and as close as possible to the recommended 

value. Also, the flange surfaces must not be 

scratched or marred in any way. Improper torque or damaged 

surfaces can allow hot gases to escape and ignite an explosive 

mixture outside the enclosure. Threaded connections or 

covers must engage at least five full threads to maintain the 

integrity of the system. 

One additional step is needed to control the spread of hot 

gases. Conduits entering the enclosure must be sealed within 

the code-required distance (usually 18'') of the box to prevent 

the buildup of pressure within the raceway system or the leakage 

of combustion products into the room. If a jacketed cable 

passes through a conduit seal, the jacket should be removed 

within the seal so that the sealing compound can completely 

surround each insulated conductor. An alternative is to seal 

the cable at the end of the jacket as shown in the illustration. 

Classification 

So where can these types of enclosures be used? As usual in 

our industry, there are no easy answers! Each explosionproof 

enclosure will be listed or labeled for use in a particular environment 

as defined in the National Electrical Code (NEC) or 

IEC Standards. In turn, the hazardous area itself must be classified 

according to the same standards. The enclosure must 

have a listing that meets or exceeds the classification of the 

area in which it is to be used. In the NEC, considerations are 

797 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



EXPLOSIONPROOF CONTROLS 

Class, Division, and Group as shown in Table 1. IEC standards 

use different code letters from the NEC but generally 

follow the same logic. 

For gases, which comprise the majority of our industry’s hazards, 

explosionproof enclosures are readily available for Class 

1, Division 1, Groups C and D. Enclosures rated for Group B 

(hydrogen) can also be found but generally only in small sizes 

since it is so easily ignitable and has high explosive energy. 

Almost nothing is offered for Group A (acetylene) environments 

because of its easy ignition and tremendous explosive 

energy. 

Using explosionproof enclosures removes the ignition leg 

from the fire triangle in a potentially hazardous location. 

Although it is costly and requires care to maintain the system’s 

integrity, it is an effective method for working with electricity 

in combustible atmospheres. The Intrinsically Safe 

Controls article in Technical Reference section outlines an 

alternative method of applying controls to hazardous locations. 

798 

30-3003D 

Smoke Detector 

EPET 

Thermostat 

HZLIM 

Temperature Controller 

1950G 

Differential Pressure Switch 

GUBB, EJB 

Control Enclosures


INTRINSICALLY SAFE CONTROLS 

Recap 

One answer for applying controls in hazardous locations is the 

use of explosionproof construction to prevent a source of ignition 

from coming in contact with a room full of fuel and air. 

Strong enclosures with threaded or flanged covers can confine 

explosive forces within themselves and cool the escaping 

gases enough to prevent ignition of the surrounding atmosphere. 

Wouldn’t it be even better to prevent any explosion at 

all? 

FIGURE 1. EFFECT OF CONCENTRATION ON IGNITION 

ENERGY 

Ignition of Energy (mJ) 

1.0 

0.1 

Propane - Air, 1 ATM 

Hydrogen - Air, 1ATM 

0.01 

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 

Volume Concentration (%) 

What IS Means 

Intrinsically safe systems are designed to do just that. 

Remember that even if the ideally explosive mixture of fuel 

and air exists, an ignition source of sufficient energy and duration 

is required to light it up. Intrinsically safe design limits the 

available release of energy in the hazardous area to a level 

well below the minimum ignition energy of the worst-case gas 

mixture. It also maintains this limiting function in the event of 

two simultaneous worst-case faults. Since this type of protection 

is very fail-safe and requires no enclosure maintenance, 

most engineers (and property insurance carriers) consider it to 

be even safer than explosionproof construction. Surprisingly, it 

is usually less expensive to boot! 

FIGURE 2. SIMPLE ZENER DIODE BARRIER 

Safe 

Area 

50 mA Fuse 220Ω 120Ω 

Fused Zener Barrier 

30V 

Zener 

Diode 

How does it work? First of all, let’s consider a room filled with 

hydrogen and air in exactly the best proportion for ignition, 

about 30% hydrogen by volume (see Figure 1). This mixture 

takes an instantaneous release of about 20 mJ in order to start 

burning, or else its temperature must be raised above the 

autoignition temperature of hydrogen (932˚F/500˚C). For electrical 

devices we wish to place in this room, the amount of 

stored energy and the rate at which it can be released under 

worst-case conditions must be kept below these critical levels, 

and the surface temperature (see Table 2 for ratings) must be 

kept below the autoignition temperature. If these conditions 

are met to the satisfaction of UL, FM, CSA, BASEEFA, etc., 

then the device may be listed and labeled as intrinsically safe. 

This means that with a properly applied safety barrier, cabling, 

and ground, it cannot start a fire even under the worst-case 

conditions. There is one subset of such intrinsically safe 

devices that can be used without a listing or label, although a 

barrier, proper cabling, and ground are still required. These 

are designated “simple apparatus” and are a group of things 

that obviously neither produce nor store any energy, such as 

RTDs, thermistors, switches, and a few others. They may be 

used as if they do have a label, as long as the operating limitations 

shown in Table 1 are strictly adhered to. 

Barriers 

So, if we have an RTD and an intrinsically safe temperature 

transmitter in a hazardous location, can we wire them up to 

our controller and power supply in the safe area and turn them 

on? Not yet! Three more steps are needed first. While the 

devices in the hazardous area cannot ignite the gas mixture 

on their own, the controller and power supply in the safe area 

may each be capable of transmitting enough energy through 

the wires into the hazardous area to do the job anyway! An 

intrinsic safety barrier will prevent this and is required for every 

intrinsically safe device, except listed self-contained batterypowered 

units. Barriers range from simple to sophisticated, but 

they all use fail-safe components to limit the voltage and current 

that can be passed through them even in the event of 

28V 

Zener 

Diode 

Hazardous 

Area 

799 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



INTRINSICALLY SAFE CONTROLS 

worst-case wiring errors. For example, suppose someone in 

the safe area accidentally hooks 240 VAC up to our temperature 

transmitter signal lines, and one of the lines is frayed 

enough at the transmitter to cause an arc at that voltage. 

Without an intrinsic safety barrier, there may not be enough 

evidence left to figure out what happened. However, a barrier 

rated for the atmosphere, cabling, and its field device will save 

the day even under these circumstances. Figure 2 illustrates a 

simple zener diode barrier circuit. A high voltage at the safe 

side terminals will cause the zener diode to draw a high current 

and blow the input fuse. The series resistors limit the current 

to the hazardous side. Barriers are also rated for how 

much capacitance and inductance are allowed on the hazardous 

side. 

TABLE 1. OPERATING LIMITS FOR A SIMPLE 

APPARATUS (RTD’S, THERMISTORS, 

SWITCHES, ETC.) 

800 

Applied Voltage 1.2 VAC or VDC 

Current Through 100 mA 

Power Dissipation 25 mW 

Stored Energy 20 µJoule 

Temperature class: Simple apparatus with surface area 

between 20 mm 2 and 10 cm 2 are classified as T4 275°F 

(135°C) when the matched output power of the barrier 

is less than 1.3W into a 104°F (40°C) ambient. 

Switches and other contacts that dissipate no power 

may be classified T6 185°F (85°C). 

TABLE 2. INTRINSIC SAFETY TEMPERATURE 

CLASSIFICATION 

T1 842°F (450°C) 

T2 572°F (300°C) 

T3 392°F (200°C) 

T4 275°F (135°C) 

T5 212°F (100°C) 

T6 185°F (85°C) 

Cable Requirements 

This leads us into the cabling between the hazardous area 

device and its barrier. If the cable is very long and has a high 

capacitance, it could possibly store enough energy to cause 

an ignition in the event of a wiring fault. It must be checked 

against the rating of the barrier. If the field device, the transmitter 

in our example, has a high capacitance, the combined 

capacitance of the cable and device must be less than the 

barrier rating. Cable and device inductance are treated in the 

same manner. 

IS Grounding 

The final factor to consider is grounding. What good is all this 

built-in electronic safety if a nearby lightning strike raises the 

ground potential a couple of thousand volts above the potential 

of the cable shield in our hazardous area? The resulting 

arc from the shield to ground can be every bit as effective as a 

butane lighter in touching off an explosion, so we needn’t 

have bothered with using intrinsically safe products. An intrinsic 

safety ground, bonded to the earth ground, is the last 

essential link that makes the system work. Normally provided 

at the barrier location, it keeps the cable shields at or near the 

same potential as the earth, even as that value moves around 

during storms. 

FIGURE 3. SPECIAL INTRINSIC SAFETY GROUNDING 

RTD 

(Simple Apparatus) 


Intrinsically 

Safe Temperature 

Transmitter 

Seal to Prevent 

Passage of 

Hazardous Gases 

Shield 

Intrinsic 

Safety 

Barrier 

Intrinsic 

Safety 

Ground 

Shield 

4-20 mA 

Loop to 

Controller 

Once it is all together, as shown in Figure 3, the benefits of an 

intrinsically safe system are many. There is no need to power 

systems down and “safe” the atmosphere for maintenance. 

Calibrate, adjust, even swap out bad parts with the system 

turned on and the atmosphere at its worst. A properly 

designed system cannot release enough energy to do any 

damage.


SELECTING INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS 

Here is a closer look at assembling the right combination of 

parts to produce a properly coordinated intrinsically safe (IS) 

system. 

Hazardous Area Equipment 

Selection of an IS device or simple apparatus to be used in a 

hazardous area is fairly easy. For explosion protection, ensure 

that the device rating is equal to or better than the classification 

of the hazardous area (Class, Division, Group, and 

Temperature Classification under the NEC or Category, Zone, 

Group, and Temperature Classification under the IEC). Then, 

as with any device, also make sure that its construction is suitable 

for any corrosive or other adverse environmental conditions 

that may be present. 

Safety Parameters 

Selecting an appropriate intrinsic safety barrier is often even 

simpler, since a conscientious supplier of IS solutions, such as 

Trane, will usually include a barrier recommendation and 

wiring diagram with the product in question. In the absence of 

such a recommendation, it is not an insurmountable chore to 

select an appropriate barrier under the Entity Concept 

described in ISA Technical Report TR-12.2-1995. Under this 

concept, the IS device to be applied in a hazardous location is 

labeled by its manufacturer with the maximum voltage (V max ) 

and current (I max ) that can be applied to it without degrading 

its level of safety. The IS device is also labeled with the 

amount of internal capacitance (C i ) and inductance (L i ) that it 

adds to the circuit. 

Barrier Parameters 

Each intrinsic safety barrier is listed with the maximum voltage 

(V oc ) and current (I sc ) that can be passed through to the hazardous 

side terminals under fault conditions, and the maximum 

capacitance (C a ) and inductance (L a ) that can be connected 

safely to the hazardous side terminals. Finally, the 

cable capacitance (C cable ) and inductance (L cable ) can usually 

be gleaned from the cable manufacturer’s literature or technical 

support line. Or, if the exact cable parameters cannot be 

located, the default values recommended in ANSI/ISA-RP12.6 

can be used (C cable = 60 pF/ft or 197 pF/m and L cable = 0.20 

µH/ft or 0.67 µH/m). 

Matching Them Up 

For simple loops (i. e., two-wire IS devices that can function 

with one wire grounded), matching up a barrier with an IS 

device is as simple as making sure the following relationships 

are true: 

V max must be greater than or equal to V oc 

I max must be greater than or equal to I sc 

C i + C cable must be less than or equal to C a 

L i + L cable must be less than or equal to L a 

Note that this is for a simple system as described above and 

that each ungrounded conductor in the hazardous area 

requires either a separate barrier or a multichannel barrier 

designed for its purpose. More complex systems need more 

complex analysis to make sure that no more than V max can 

be developed between any two conductors and that no more 

than I max can be driven through any terminal in the IS device. 

Usually, the manufacturer or supplier of an IS device requiring 

more than one ungrounded conductor can provide a barrier 

recommendation that meets these criteria. Fortunately, most 

applications in the building automation industry can be handled 

with a simple loop. If grounding one side of a current loop 

is a problem, a signal isolator such as the Model DT-13 can 

be applied in the safe area as a solution. 

Example 

For an example, consider a need to monitor a ventilator’s 

vibration level in a battery room. The project electrical engineer 

has classified the area as Class 1, Division 1, Group B, 

and the hazardous material in question is hydrogen. Special 

corrosion protection is not required, and the cable run from the 

transmitter to its barrier will be about 200' (61m). Hydrogen’s 

autoignition temperature is 968°F (520°C), so the vibration 

transmitter need only have a temperature classification of T1 

(842°F or 450°C) or lower. The Model 140T is a good choice. 

It is rated IS for Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, 

and its temperature classification is T6 (less than 185°F or 

85°C). Its entity parameters are shown in the diagram. The 

Model MTL7206 barrier was chosen since it is designed for 

loop-powered 4-20 mA devices, and its V oc and I sc parameters 

are less than or equal to the V max and I max parameters of the 

140T. In addition, its C a and L a ratings leave plenty of allowable 

cable capacitance and inductance for the length of our 

run. Refer to Figure 1 on the following page for the cable calculations 

related to our example. 

The shorter of these two results is the limiting distance, so our 

cable run from the MTL7206 barrier to the 140T vibration 

transmitter must not exceed 1,333' (406m). The estimated 200' 

(61m) run in our example is well within this limit. All that 

remains is to ensure proper grounding and installation according 

to NEC Article 504. As with all such systems, an IS drawing 

that shows all relevant entity parameters must accompany 

the installation (see Figure 2). 

With a little care and a little math, selection of IS barriers for 

simple loops can be straightforward. It’s even easier when the 

selection is already made for you — look for the Hazardous 

Locations section in the Trane Catalog for engineered intrinsically 

safe solutions to your automation interface needs! 

801 

TECHNICAL REFERENCE



SELECTING INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS 

FIGURE 1. CABLE LIMIT CALCULATION 

These calculations assume default values of 60 pF and 0.20 µH per foot of cable (197 

pF and 0.67 µH per meter). Lower values are available and may be obtained from cable 

manufacturers. 

Capacitive cable length limit = (C a – C i ) / (Cable capacitance per unit length) 

= (0.12 µF – 0.04 µF) / (60 pf/ft or 197 pf/m) 

= 1,333' (406m) 

Inductive cable length limit = (L a – L i ) / (Cable inductance per foot) 

= (4.0 mH – 0.0 mH) / (0.20 µH/ft) 

= 20,000' (6,100m) 

FIGURE 2. INTRINSIC SAFETY CONTROL DRAWING 

Hazardous (Classified) Location 

Class 1, Division 1, Group B 

140T Vibration Transmitter 

Entity Parameters 

V max 28V 

I max 110 mA 

C i 0.04 µF 

L i 0 mH 

Notes: 

802 

1 

2 

3 

4 

– 

+ 

4-20 mA 

2 

4 

5 

Non-Hazardous Location 

MTL7206 Intrinsic Safety Barrier 

Entity (Safety) Parameters 

V oc 28V 

I sc 93 mA 

C a 

L a 

0.12 µF 

4.0 mH 4 

1 

2 

3 

I.S. Ground 3 

1 

Power Supply 

24-35 

VDC 

The MTL7206 must not be connected to any device that uses or generates in excess of 250V rms or DC 

unless it has been determined that the voltage has been adequately isolated from the barrier. 

The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code®, NFPA 70, Article 504, and 

ANSI/ISA-RP12.6. 

The MTL7206 must be connected to a suitable ground electrode per NFPA 70, Article 504. The resistance of 

the ground path must be less than 1Ω. 

Total interconnecting cable capacitance must be limited to 0.08 µF and inductance limited to 4.0 mH. 

+ 

– 

+ 

– 

4-20 mA 

Signal

Building Automation Controls Catalog 2006 - Trane

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?